Grammar of the Greek language, for the use of high schools and colleges

~ Go be OPO SCF ate, te
vee oeers Steesashaee Si $
he . ‘
> . se stae?
ptoresttensrurr:s
e

ewe ty be 4 * . a ee Fen ne ee recs oom Fath epee REN SES Mace ie eee oe
nisSeSogegs oer) 3 a qatar scsessaceasi Ne Nea ac Sa Nate Neca be ts Se Spegese eat
pore ietasier teat : ; SE eset) ; : :
; See = Biot ET: Bussoumameees
nite esciepeiectirca tees recersresees Stan greesescsai et
i enroeserene. tee.

rere ts
me, on
ecou sare tenerers ict aah

tetera notch : : : sepastreeets ee

> “4 4
rahe eshte rei ryote rar eet,
. o beeie en en oe! Cakemetnr? S55 +334
; aeapstec tres aes
ot et itera .
ft Ot SS
3

+ 4; +e
Sores Se
ean

eels,

Seer ee

tere.
aie,
es
At
ore

= =
poe eS ! oe
ad *

erie SS case :
~~ : crete ate es : . :

5 : : —
. mo

Patera cererete e+,

nore
:

ri S
Kener ue
oe ee no
oe ve

« if
5H

SS

4

*
}
tsi!

~~

at
-
*

= ~
er ee,
+ a
peetarees

tle
4
aie}
+
.

Besse
eres
rae er,

“
«
MU

hie
’
‘
o
i
ast
revi
th
tyler +
ta
Cpe
this

‘
is
U

~
<<
ee
Son

*
rete as

+
} t
tieteiat
Fil
Meat
slat
, Une
paptaty)
se
etn
ty
eh
+)
ft
‘
4 .
ys)
4q¢

ase 7?-
eee oS

sty
the a
+
watee
a A
FH
det iteta! £5

J
%
_
et
4 uh
ate
hi
‘
4

LS

SOc;
et 9 07s

e- .
’ eS ed
| Sess sehen

-
te + a
TS ae he

SEs
va

¢ eee .

—o . - or
PONIES OP EER ee ah oa CETTE hee ee eM ns me EE

Digit ah

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation

https://archive.org/details/grammarofgreekla0Okhrich

ra

cy
ey

=
air
ee
; e
+
oo
5 : hie ae
' Us Fue Cty co 4
- ha’ ¥ oe ee on a 7 je
a ‘i a m4 ad di 4
Lor eaey TOT AD hy ce ene as 7 ; rate oF
CS ra . Pe 1: J or ta i$ =. a co ay
| i Lee : P : ’ _ 1 i
i ‘Esai bent ge JES pen) Yara a
A ‘ y: ee APR, | msl Sis es
- ; ‘ ‘ e & fits ae ear ,
* £. i‘ * v4, *
At oo) RAL
‘ : : ‘“ te Pe
_ ie - J
' ‘ = caper
i _
nf a 7 =
~ 2 sa
‘ 7 ob -
y. : 7 5 .
: oe
> ‘ : 2 ‘=
1- a
i
a
a 4 f
a F
i) i :
7 _ :
‘ : s
ah PR
co i
» ee . Tee
7 a
a ite he
' j a
3 o —
. +!
~ - ,
a .
‘
4 e a
a 2
— i \ nan ®
4
; nD
7 Pas x vm : 7
oc ; ar
: r
-t
‘
ex
4
s

a

ak tee be NC
i + = 7
}
"
i
;

'

pf SOV ES re ed pe!

7

- oes
-
‘i y a f S
‘a 7 1] yy
~ig A
A :
; er
Py a)
sh
Pie a
- : ah
vy sien ’ x

7

a
Toga

~

D. Appleton & Co.’s Educational Publications,

Dr. Arnolid’s Classical Series.

IL
FIRST LATIN BOOK: re-modelled, re-written, and adapted to the
Ollendorff Method of Instruction. By Atsert Harkness, One vol. @mo. T5cts,
Several improvements have been introduced by Mr. H., and an effort made to sim-
pif =~ render more clear the elementary portions of the work of Dr. Arnold. Itisa
capital book.

m1.
A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK AND PRACTICAL GRAM-
am Revised and carefully corrected, by J. A. Spencer, A. M. One yol. 12mo.
cts.

A most admirable volume, based on the true principles of learning a language, viz,
those of imitation and repetition. The pupil is put to work at once at Exercises in
Latin, involving the elementary principles of the language; words are supplied; the
mode of putting them together is told the pupil; and by imitating and repeating, all the
time adding to his stock of words and ideas, the docile boy has the Latin elements in-

delibly impressed upon his memory, and rooted in his understanding.

mi.
LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION: a Practical Introduction to Latin
Prose Composition. Revised and corrected by J. A. Spzncer, A.M. 12mo. $1.
Very exact, copious, and scientific; Latin synonymes are carefully illustrated, differ-
ences of idiom noted, cautions as to niceties pointed out, and every help afforded to-
wards attaining a pure and flowing Latin style._

IV.

CORNELIUS NEPOS; with Practical Questions and Answers, and an

Imitative Exercise on each Chapter. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Prof.

Jounson, Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the City of New-
York. 12mo. A new, enlarged edition, with Lexicon, Index, &c.

Very excellent, especially on account of the Exercises formed on the model of the

text, by which the pupil becomes more thoroughly acquainted with the author and the

language in general. A good vocabulary is attached.

: v.

FIRST GREEK BOOK, on the Plan of the First Latin Book. Revised
and corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. 12mo. 75 cts,

A new and very admirable volume prepared by Prof. Spencer from the work of Dr,
Arnold. It is equally good with the First Latin Book, and carries out the same princi-
ples to their legitimate results.

vi.

GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION: a Practical Introduction to Greek
Prose Composition. Revised and corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One vol.
12mo. 75 cts. —

Exact, clear, direct, and copious. It is intended for use at a rather early stage, viz.,
dir ge following the First Greek Book, or simultaneously with the Greek Reading
600

vi.
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. Part Ii. A Practical Introducticn
to Greek Prose Composition Part II. (The Particles.)
1n this volume the Particles are treated in full, and the student carried as far for
ward as 3s possible in the art of composition in Greek.

VII,
GREEK READING BOOK, for the Use of Schools; containing the sub-
stance’ of the Pracucal Introduction to Greek Construing, and a Treatise on the
Greek Partitles; and also a Copious Selection from Greek Authors, with English
ry — Critical and Explanatory, and a Lexicon, by J. A. Spencer, A,M. 12mo.

A capital volume, having admirable Introductory Exercises on the Forms and
Idioms of the Language ; a choice collection of (of length) from standard au-
thors; notes, clear, and precise; and a copious con at the end. It is fully equal te
any one of thie series,

32

aa

D. Appleton & Co.’s Educational Publications.

PROF. ASHEL C. KENDRICK.

Greek Ollendorff ;

Being a Progressive Exhibition of the Principles of the Greek Grammar,
Designed for beginners in Greek, and as a Book of Exercises for Acad-
emies and Colleges. 12mo. $1.

“ Among the many elementary books published for the use of schools, we have not
met with one that has pleased us as much as Professor Kendrick’s Greek Ollendorff,
It seems exactly fitted for the purpose intended, viz., by instilling into the minds of the
young the more simple elementary principles of the language, thus to prepare them for
a more extensive and familiar acquaintance with the ancient Greek classics. Its sime
plicity is perfectly delightful. The unfamiliar character of the letters, and the long
course of study required to give a boy even a very imperfect knowledge of the Grame
mar, have deterred many a beginner from prosecuting the study of Greek, who, with
the attractive volume before us, would have taken hold of it at once, and mastered all
its difficulties. This is not only the best possible book to be put into the hands of boys,
but it seems to us, that any person more advanced in years, and wishing to acquire
some knowledge of Greek, even without a teacher, may, by the aid of this volume, ac-
complish his object.

“The sounds of the letters and diphthongs, and the use of the breathings and accents,
are so briefly, yet so familiarly explained, that, althongh the author recommends that this
portion of the work should be deferred by the younger pupils to a second, ora third pe-
Trusal, yet such a recommendation seems to us to be hardly necessary.

“ A knowledge of the Greek Grammar has poe been considered as an indispen-
sable qualification of the pupil before he begins to read Greek. The doing away with
the necessity of this at the beginning, is very encouraging to the learner, while at the
same time it gives the author an opportunity to introduce gradually, and almost imper-
ceptibly, sufficient grammar to illustrate the examples as they occur; and then, by re-
peating these examples with variations almost innumerable, the principle is indelibly
impressed upon the mind.

n the older Greek books intended for schools, the examples given have been faulty,
from their involving too many principles at the beginning. The mind of the pupil can-
not comprehend so many things at once; he gets confused, and becomes, after a while,
discouraged. Whereas, in the Greek Ollendorff of Professor Kendrick, every principle
of the Grammar is introduced by degrees, and only when it is wanted for application.
It teaches rules by examples, rather than examples by rules.

“ Another advantage of this volume over the older school books of the kind, is the
examples of double translation, introduced at the very beginning, and made a part cf
the regular daily exercise.

“The book is well printed in good type, and on god paper, for which the Appletons
deserve due credit.

“ We conclude by recommending this work to the favorable attention of teachers—
N. Y. Recorder.

PROF. JAMES R. BOISE.

Exercises i Greek Prose Composition.

Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon’s Anabasis. One volume
12mo. Price 75 cents.

*,* For the convenience of the learner, an English-Greek Vocabulary, a Catalogue
of soe tecewelar Verbs, and an Index to the principal Grammatical Notes, have
appended.

< “A school-book of the highest order, containing a carefully arranged series of exer-
cises derived from the first book of Xenophon’s Anabasis (which is appended entire),
an English and Greek Vocabulary, and a list of the hye modifications of irregular
verbs. We regard it as one peculiar excellence of this book, that it ea
both the diligent scholar and the painstaking teacher; in other hands it would be
not only useless, but wnusable. We like it also, because, instead of aiming to give the
pupil practice in a variety of styles, it places before him but a single model of Greek
composition, and that the very author who combinesin the greatest degree purity of lan-

ountvong idiom, with a simplicity that both invites and rewards imitation.”-—Christian

iter.

“33

GT te RS eee he
a]

GRAMMAR

OF

THE GREEK LANGUAGE.

FOR THE USE OF
HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES.

BY

DR. RAPHABL® KUHNER,

CONRECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOVER,

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN

BY

B. B. EDWARDS,

LATE PROFESSOR IN THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, AND

S. H. TAYLOR,

PRINCIPAL OF PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER.

NEW YORK:
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.
1863.

te

ee My Nese ect ANDOVER: souN D. PLAGG,

Be
ce

743

Kas

E P
PREFACE. Main

Rarnaen Kusner, the author of the following Grammar,
was born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he
studied at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city.
Among his classical teachers were Déring, Rost and Wiiste-
mann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University
of Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and
Ottfried Miller. While there, he prepared an essay on
the philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a
prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum
at Hanover. ‘The principal works from the pen of Dr.
Kihner are the following:

1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax,
mit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. “ Attempt towards a
new Arrangement of the Greek Syntax,” ete.

2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 ;
ed. altera 1835; ed. tertia 1846.

3. Sammtliche Anomalien des griechischen Verbs in Attisch.
Dialecte, 1831. “ Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc.

4. Ausfihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2

Theilen, 1834, 1835. “Copious Grammar of the Greek
Language, in two Parts.” The second Part of this
grammar, containing the Syntax, translated by W. E.
Jelf, of the University of Oxford, was published in
1842; the first Part in 1845. A second edition of
Jelfs translation of this work was published in 1851. -
This work is, however, only in part a translation, Mr,

a®

7 eae. OL a ae ee eT OP meng Foye ee
EA ee 2 ’ J

Vi PREFACE.

Jelf being the author of the remarks on the Cases, the
particle dv, the compound verbs, ete.

5. Schulgrammatik der griechischen Sprache, 1836; zweite
durchaus verbesserte u. vermehrte Auflage, 1843;
dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage 1851.
“ School Grammar of the Greek Language, third
edition, improved and enlarged.” ‘The present vol-
ume is a translation of this Grammar, from the

_ sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author.

6. Elementargrammatik der griechischen Sprache, neunte
Auflage 1850. “Elementary Grammar of the Greek —
Language, containing a series of Greek and Eng-
lish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab-
ularies.” This Grammar, translated by Mr. 8. H.
Taylor, one of the translators of the present volume,
has passed through eleven editions in this country.

7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841.

8. Elementargrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, siebent
Auflage, 1850. “ Elementary Grammar of the Latin
Language with Exercises.” This Grammar, trans-
lated by Prof. Champlin, of Waterville College, has
passed through several editions in this country.

9. Lateinische _Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen
und deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage,
1849.

10. Schulgrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehr
verbesserte Auflage, 1850. “School Grammar of
the Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved.”

Dr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca
the first part of his edition of Xenophon’s Anabasis.

From the above statements, it will be seen that Dr.
Kihner has enjoyed the most favorable opportunities for
preparing the work, a translation of which is now pre-
sented to the public. The names of his early instructors
are among the most honored in classical philology. For

PREFACE. vil

nearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the
principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili-
ties for testing in practice the principles which he has
adopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur-
sued the study of the classical authors with the greatest
diligence, in connection with the productions which his
learned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ-
ent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his
wofks might be expected to combine the advantages of
sound, scientific principles with a skilful adaptation to prac-
tical use. The “School Grammar of the Greek Lan-
guage,” being his latest publication, contains the results of
his most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be
well, perhaps, briefly to indicate.

First, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate
knowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan-
guage. ‘The author adopts substantially the views which
are maintained by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and
which are fully unfolded in the German grammars of
Becker. According to these views, the forms and changes
of language are the result of established laws, and not of
accident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language
may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification.
The multitude of details may be embraced under a few
comprehensive principles, and the whole may have some-
what of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic
system. Dr. Kiihner’s grammar is not a collection of de-
tached observations, or of rules which have no connection,
except a numerical one. It is a natural classification of
the essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi-
tion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly
practical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in
his closet, but by an experienced instructor in his school.

Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory
arrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an

Vili PREFACE.

examination of the table of contents. To those, indeed,
who are familiar only with the common distribution of
subjects in our Greek grammars, the arrangement of Dr.
Kihner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated.
A slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which
the Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he
has followed the true and logical method. Abundant
proofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the
exhibition of compound sentences. The particles “are
treated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com-
ponent and indissoluble part of discourse.

Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor-
rectness of every principle advanced, especially in the Syn-
tax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics.
If, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or
if a degree of obscurity rests upon the enunciation of it,
its meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the
illustration. ‘The paradigms contain much more complete
exemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to
be found in the grammars in common use in this coun-
try. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kihner
has chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection.
He can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the
entire conjugation.

Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the
language, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men-
tioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning
a paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the
pupil first resolves the verb into its elements, and then
rearranges these elementary parts into a complete form.
In this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery
of this most difficult portion of the subject.

Fifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated.
The closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien-
tious accuracy, which characterize the forms, or the first

PREFACE. 1x

portions of the Syntax. No part can be justly charged
with deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view
of the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular
Verbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the
Use and Position of the Article, on the Middle and Passive
Verbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the
Modes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use
of the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe-
cimens of careful observation and nice analysis.

The Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the
translators, the grammar of Kihner containing nothing on
that subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of
sources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel-
lent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans-
lated by Profs. Beck and Felton, is now accessible.

Much pains have been taken in verifying the almost in-
numerable references to classical authors. The very few
exceptions are those cases ‘where the author made use of
an edition of a classic not accessible to the translators. In
this verification, the following editions of prose authors
were used: Kiihner’s edition of the Memorabilia; Weiske’s
and Tauchnitz’s editions of the other works of Xenophon;
Schafer’s and Tauchnitz’s editions of Herodotus; Becker’s
and 'T'auchnitz’s editions of Thucydides ; Dobson’s edition
of the Oratores Attici; and Stallbaum’s Plato. There are
slight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in differ-
ent editions, particularly in the tragedians.

The present edition has been prepared from the third
German edition, in which the author had made many im-
portant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having
availed himself of the corrections or remarks of his learned
friends and his reviewers. This the translators have en-
deavored to put into such a form as would best meet the
wants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely

x PREFACE.

at a translation ; it has been their object to state in as clear
and concise a manner as possible the principles contained
in the original, without reference to the particular form in
which the statements were there made. ‘The translators
have also added principles and illustrations of their own,
where it seemed desirable.

The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed
in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and
Remarks are the same as in the former edition. The
changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not
been thought necessary to indicate them.

The labor of preparing the first edition of this work was
shared equally by the translators; so, also, in the second
edition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the
progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards’s
health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in
connection with it, for the purpose of. seeking a milder
climate. After a few months’ residence in one of the South-
ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth,
deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of
friends to whom his character presented so many attractive
qualities. His loss will be extensively felt also in the cause
of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher-
ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he
contributed with great zeal and success the rich stores <a
his elegant and varied learning.

The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P.
S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to
whom special acknowledgments are due for these services,
as well as for many valuable suggestions.

Anpover, Juty 15, 1882.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

ETYMOLOGY.
SECTION I.—SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE.

Cuarpter I.— Letrrers anp SounpDSs OF THE LANGUAGE.

PT ro err ree § 1; Prolongation, Shortening. In-
Sounds of the Letters........ 2a terchange and Variation,... § 16
History of the Alphabet...... 2b | Influence of a Vowel or Con-
Organs of Speech ........... 3| sonant on another vowel.. 16
MOOR hs G0 dif welds en's <osht a 4 | Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 16
CAOEMED vacccidns 10 ddsinvn 5 | Euphonic Prothesis ......... ° 16
Breathings 64005000 6s ewcis ee 6 | Changes of the Consonants... 17—25
Changes of Letters ........-. 7 | DEES « :0.0:0)0 die-w nce, 9 baie. oem eee 17
Changes of the Vowels....... S16 || Liquids: 6 od dogs censk sacnces 18
: a eer Pires ey Poe 8 | Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and
Contraction of Vowels..... i Rie Mates. isi ks can gh neaaiea 19
Te aera Pen te eee 10, 11 | Sibilant « with Mut. and Liq... 20
BYMizeGis <.20.6 20's cases ceases 12 | Change ofseparated Consonants 21
BEUSION «5 oo ccc det eesces 13, 14 | Metathesis of Liquids....... ; 22
N Paragogic (epeanvorindy) 5 : Doubling of Consonants...... 23

ofrw(s) ; €& and é«; ov and od« 15 | Strengthening and Addition of
Stren hening and Weakening Consonants’. ...2...ccceee 24

SEV OWOIS oo s50 hap ahices 16 | Expulsion and "Omission of

ONSONANES .... es ccesecees 25 ©
Cuapr. I.— SYLiaBies.

Natureand DivisionofSyllables 26 I. Grave chee os theacute 31
Quantity of Syllables........ 27 TI. Crasis ...esecesess vies 31
Quantity of the Penult....... 28 III. Elision ............ vee 31
OEE REO Pee 29 IV. Anastrophe .......... 31
Change and Removal of the V. Atonies or Proclitics... 32

Accent by Inflection, Compo- VI. Enclitics..... eee ee ses GOOD

sition and Contraction .... 30 | Division of Syllables ..... ass 36
Change and Removal of the Ac- Punctuation Marks—Diastole. 37

cent in connected Discourse 31—35

SECT. Il. —GRAMMATICAL FORMS.
Division of the Parts of Speech.—Inflection.
Cuart. .— Tue SussTantive.

Different kinds of Substantives... First Declension . ....++++++s- 42
Gender of Substantives ......... 40 I. Feminines......... Terry”...
Number, Case and Declension .,. 41 II. Masculines ......- Sov eoeehee

se

xl CONTENTS.
Quantity and Accentuation. § 45

Second Declension ......... 46
Contraction of the second Dec. 47
Attic second Declension.. 48
Accentuation ............ . 49
Remarks on Gender ....... 50

Third Declension............ 5l
Remarks on the Case-endings 52, 53
PAGICTOS .isyins-n' d5 0.0 0.05.05 54—63
RMMBUCLY. 6.0 nik v vise 5 o'g.s Sin's's 64
Accentuation ...... Bantiwes 65

ae OR eae eae meen

Geter wticvwd scene 66

Anomalous Nouns......... 67, 68

Defective Nouns........... 69
Interchange of Forms in the

Declensions .......... 70—72

I. Redundant Nouns..... 70

Il. Heteroclites .......... 71

III. Metaplasts........... 72
Indeclinable and Defective

INORNE ;. ca vey mecha ce 73

Cuapt. Il.— THe ApJEcTIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

Nature, Gender and Declension 74
Accentuation: . 66.6 .8.05 8 75
Summary of the Adjective and

Part. Endings............. 76—80

I. Adjectives and Partici-
ples of three Endings.. 76, 77
II. Adjectives of two Endings 78, 79
IIL. Adjectives ofone Ending 80

Comparison of Adjectives sais aa ee |
A. ~TEpOS, -Tépa, -TEpov; -TaTOS,
“TAT, ~TATOV wreceeccesece 82
B. -lwv, -ov, -wv, -ov; -ieTos, -7,
“Wir wececsesssenscecsoseses
Anomalous forms of Comparison. 84
Comparison of Adverbs......... 85

Cuarr. II].— Tar Pronoun.

Nature and Divisionof Pronouns 86
I. Personal Pronouns...... 87-90

II. Demonstrative Pronouns 91
Ill. Relative Pronouns..... ‘ 92

IV. Indefinite and Interrogative
Pronouns,......... ns |
Correlative Pronouns ........... 94
Lengthening of the Pronoun..... 95

Cuarpt. IV.— Tue Noseiaxs.

Nature and Division of Numerals 96
Numeral Signs.........

Principal classes of Numerals.... 98
Remarks on the Numerals...

eee 99

Cuapt. V.— Tue ADVERB.
Nature and Division of Adverbs 100 | Formation of Adverbs ......... 101

Cuapt. VI.—

Nature and Division of the Verb 102

MMMGROG, 3's 0s 0 cco n Sia eaintg gure 102
Ee ep ibis emerge as 103
MM ay dg omatigh >< cs onc awoe te 104
Infinitive and Participle........ 105
Persous and Numbers.......... 106
Conjugation of Verbs in -w..... . 107
Stem, Augment, Reduplication
and Characteristic........... 108
Inflection-endings...... oa naus 109
a. Tense-characteristic and
Tense-endings .......... 110
b. Personal-endings and Mode-
WOWENB 20/5. chs Sina 111—114

Full Paradigm of a Regular Verb 115

Remarks on the Inflection-endings 116

Remarks on the Formation of the
Attic Future...... farses seve BEG

Tue VERB.

Accentuation of the Verb ...... 118
Further view of Aug. and Redup. 119

(a) Syllabic Augment........ 120
(b) Temporal Augment.. 121, 122
Reduplication............ SG kee
Attic Reduplication.......... +3124

Aug.and Redup.in Compounds 125-6
dashes of the Tenses of Verbs

BN ef na ae eet eels 4 127—167
Division of Verbs in - according
to the Characteristic......... 127
Derivation of Tenses .......... 128
I. Formation of the Tenses of
Pate VErbe sos 5 tiec a> s 129
a. With a short Characteristic-
WORWE sibs nag bee ee 0 180

b. With ain Aor. Pass. and Perf,
Mid. or Pass..5...csce0.%- 18

CONTENTS.

Paradigms of Pure Verbs §132—137
A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs.. 132
(a) Without o in the Mid. or

PR

ever eee ee eee ee ee ee

132

133
B. Contract Pure Verbs... 134—136
Remarks on contract verbs... 137
Il. Formation of the Tenses of
Impure Verbs. ........++05 1
Strengthening of the Stem
Variation of the Stem-vowel.... 140
Remarks on the Secondary Tenses 141
A. Formation of the Tenses of
Mute Verbs.........- - 142—144
Remarks on the Characteristic 143
Paradigms of Mute Verbs 145—148
B. Formation of the Tenses of

BAGO: V Erbe vo. gs vee cee 149
PMERGIEUNE co sinters ce wee 150—153
Peculiarities in the Formation of
Single: Verbs .......¢00s0% 154
ByGe ik Hier hds Vee ete es 155
GUMETOUN SE bin cas ce bs 8 ee dbnwe 156
Verbs in -w with Stem of the Pres.
strengthened... 5. cee. ses es 157
I. Verbs with v inserted..... 158
II. Verbs with the syllable ve 159
IIL. Verbs with ay or awv...... 160
IV. Verbs in -oxw, -ioxw...... 161
V. Merbs in Bows fe. oes 162

VI. Verbs with Reduplication.
VIL. Verbs whose Pure Stem-
vowel ais strengthened by ¢

VIII. Verbs which assume e....
Verbs which assume an « in form-
ing the Tenses © 0:6 62 sr. ne.
Verbs whose Tenses are formed
from different Roots .........
Conjugation of Verbs in -u....
Division of Verbs in -w........

one

Characteristic-vowel and Strength-
ening of the Stem of the Pres. § 170

Mode-vowels owe cece ecwces 171
Personal-endings .............. 172
Formation of the Tenses... 173, 174
PRRGUMUNGY Oa iie ws ere tioe' eas a3 175
Remarks on the Paradigms... . 176

Summary of Verbs in -u:.. 172—190
1. Verbs in -u: which annex the
Personal-endings immediate-

ly to the Stem-vowel....... 177
(a) Verbs in -a........00. ose 377
Ds cd Sata tcw ive doin acte s. 178
Deponente s,s, 25 i s)sciclens 179
(bb) ‘Verde 1-05 65.0 s,5.0pi0ig sees 180
(c) Verbs in -1: Elu:. —Eiul... 181
II. Verbs in -u: which annex vyu

or vu to the Stem-vowel .. 182
Formation of the Tenses ....... 182
Summary of this class of Verbs 183
—188

A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a
OVE os vied tds - 183—186
(aR Me Seat Foti, --. 183
CD) ib ntisis aca Recigee See es 184
Ob DR eh idisis ate krdind okie keys 185
(AN i-o5cac cited Tak 186

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a
Consonant........ 187, 188
(a): in a Mute... 0c. scadee 187
(b) in a Liquid............ 188

Inflection of xejucae and jua 189,190
Verbs in -w analogous in Forma-
tion to those in -u:.. 191—196
I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid-

QB SEAR 191, 192
II. Perf. and Plup. Act... 193, 194
Oida and foura..........-. 195

III. Present and Imperfect.... 196
Summary of Deponent Passives. 197
Summary of Active Verbs with a

Mid. Fut..... % cies oN Malm vip cals 198

Cuart. VII.— Prepositions, ConsJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS 199

PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS.

A. ORTHOGRAPHY.
Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200

Interchange of the Vowels...... 201
Interchange of the Consonants 202-204
Change of the Vowels...... 205-207

Contraction, Diaeresis.......... 205
Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Par-
agogic, Hiatus...............
Lengthening and Shortening of
the Vowels.— irre hateaty Pe
COPS occ veresec Reston cs cee DOF
B

206

Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207

Changes of Consonants ........ 208
nase * ev veneeusecs ex succes 200
. Diacectic Forms.

Declensions.......+.-...:- 210—214
Homeric Suffix gi or giv...... 210
First Declension...........- Slt
Second Declension ........++ 212
Third Declension.........- . 213
Anomalous and _ Defective

Words. Metaplasts ....... 214

XIV CONTENTS.
The Adjective oT 8 eo: §215 | Formation of the Tenses... § 223
Commgrmon se sas 2s Pee 216 Conjugation in-wi........ 224
PVE 29. yo’ « A 3 das eT es 217 Equi and Elu.... 2... 225, 226
GINOES on ioe es Sr EES, 218 Verbs in -w with a Sec. Aor. an-
Dherwere sks ES. ey 219-230 alogous to Verbs in-w ... . 227
Augment and Reduplication . . 219 Verbs in -» with a Perf. and
Personal-endings and Mode- Plup. Act. like Verbs in -u: 228
REN Bg as eke be ea wns 220 Verbs in -w with a Pres. and
Epic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 Impf. Act. like Verbs in -u: 229
Contraction and Resolution in List of Dialectic Verbs ..... 230
IN MEM Fst Gel ats fetes bs 222
SECT. IIl.—FORMATION OF WORDS.
Radical Words, Stems,Derivatives 231 III. Adjectives ....... 234
A. Derivation ........ 232-235 LV:-Adverbs!.) 6. oN. 235
DPV OROB AT ie 520 232 B. ‘Compounds... we 236
Il. Substantives ...... 233 Formation of Compounds 237
SYNTAX.

SECT. 1.—SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.

Cuarpt. I.— Parts or a SimpLte SENTENCE.

Nature of a Sentence. — Subject Classes of Verbs .......... 248
and. Predicate. ......-%.: 238 A. Active fOr: 5: < 6 <0!'s.0°3 6 9 249
Comparison. pear and Ob- TS; OIE Soke! Maree «+ 250
BOCs sn, eels o : Lit aa. es 239 OC, PRABIRO jsh< sac S86 ode wa Se 251
URMTOOMEONRE: »* 5s. a Teteld 8 ete 220%. 240 Remarks on Deponents..... 252
Exceptions to the general rules of Tenses and Modes ......... 253
DAGVOGINONG 6-5 dae An ioe 2) 241 A. Particular View of the Tenses 254

Agreement when there are several (a) Principal tenses: Pres.,
MIU ere eR Sais! oe aly 242 Pett Fsti pn shin ole 255

Remarks on Peculiarities in use of (b) Hist. Tetase: Aor., Impf.,
PRMMNNINE ASS 5 5s AG Shotts Bees oe 243 Plap: 3s sxe ae 256

PRM TRIO, cs sara s 6% nce 5s 244 Tenses of the Subord. Modes 257
Position of the Article ..... 245 B. Particular View of the Modes 258
Use of the Article with Pronouns Use of the Subj.,Opt.and Imp. 259

and Numerals......... 246 The Modes with @v....*. 260
The Article as a Demon. and Position and Repetition of & 251
Rel. Pronoun..... aie %e we BAe
Cuapt. Il.— Arrrisutive ConsTRucrtION.

Ellipsis of the Substantive ... . 263 (b) Attributive igi a» +» 265

(a) Attributive Adjective... . 264 (c) Apposition . eit sn oo OO
Cuapr. III.— Oxnsectrve Construction.

Bee MOOS 5h e se se se 8 0-0 268 (c) Gen. denoting mutual re-
Nominative and Vocative ... 269 lationey. id). ".28 a jess 275
(1) Genitive: ). 00. 6... 270| (2) Accusative ......+.. 276
A. Local Relation ........ 271 A. Local Relation ..... : 277
B. Causal Relation ....... 272| 3B. Causal Relation ....... 278

(a) Active Genitive...... 273 (a) Acc. denoting effect . . . 278
(b) Causal Genitive...... 274 (b) Acc.of the Object on which

the action is performed . 279

CONTENTS.

Two Accusatives ......
Remarks on the Acc. with the
BF OOe es csi g Met sees ts 281
SRD EPMANO « is inva Aiwa ata" 6s 282
A. Local Dative ........ 283
B. Dative as a personal Object 284
C. Dative of the thing..... 285

II. Construction of Prepositions . 286

xV

(1) 9; ayes with the Gen.
$287, 288
. 289

(5) With the Gen., Dat. and
MI Nat's ae dnl a. 3 295-299

Remarks on peculiarities of the
Prepositions ....... 300

Cuarr. IV.— Tue Pronoun as Sussect, PrepicatE, ATTRIBUTE AND

OBJECT.

IL. Personal Pronouns....... 302 | Prospective and Retrospective
Il. Remaining Pronouns. ..... 303 Use of the Pronoun....... 304
Cuarr. V.— Tue INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE USED AS AN ATTRIBUTE

AND OBJECT.

A. The Infinitive .......... 305 Remarks on the Inter-

(I) Inf. as an Object without change of the Part. and
CG ACCOM oe cook, Ses 306 Phe IO. AS ie 3ll

Nom., Gen., Dat. and Acc. (II) Part. used to express Ad-

with the Inf. ....... 307 verbial Subordinate Re-
(II) Inf. with the Article . .. ..308 IRONS Aas se Ca ack 312

B. The’ Participle... . ... ....5.. 309 Special Peculiarities in the
(1) The Part. as the Comple- Participial Construction 313

ment of the Verb... . 310

Cuapt. VI.— Tue ApVERBIAL OBJECTIVE.

A. Ah, dfra, Shv, F9der, steps

C. Emphatic Suffixes, yé, wép, rol a
D, Negative Particles..........

SECT. I.—SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.

Cuapt. VII. A.

Different Forms of Coordinate
Sentences

I. Copulative Codrdinate Sen-
tences

II. Adversative Coérdinate Sen-
tences

eee eee weer eee

— CodRDINATION.

Il. pes sale Coordinate Sen-

" tences ay ae
Remarks on Asyndeton........

Cuapt. VII. B.— SusorpinarTIon.

Principal and Subordinate Sen-
tences
Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses
in Subordinate Sentences 3278
Use of Modes in Subordinate
Clauses . 827d
I. Substantive Clauses ......... 328
A. Introduced by 8r: or és, that 329
B. Introduced by iva, so that, etc. 330
IL. Adjective Clauses 331

"eee wee eee eee

Agreement of the Rel. Pron... 332
Modes in Adjective Clauses .. 333
Connection of several Adjective
CHAE Sipe ewer ane e as 334
Interchange of the Subordinate
Clause with the Adj. Clause 334
III. Adverbial Clauses........- 335
A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336
B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 337
C. Causal Ady. Clauses . 338-340

xvl CONTENTS.
I. Denoting Ground or D. Adverbial Clauses denoting
6 Ties aes § 338 Manner and Quantity 342, 343
II. Denoting Condition 339, 340 I. Comparative Ady.Clauses
UI. Denoting Consequence denoting Manner....... 342
Or BOE. 6.0 56. Feces 841 II. Comparative Ady.Clauses

denoting Quantity ...... 343

Cuarpr. [IX.—INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.

I. Interrogatives ............ 344 | Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma,
II. Oblique Discourse......... 345 Contraction, Pleonasm ...... 346
Ill. Special Peculiarities in the Anacoluthon. «<< i-c6sdew cms cn 347
Construction of Words and Sen-
SESE Pana > epee 346, 347
Cuapt. X.— Positron OF WORDS .........0005 348
Appendix A—Versification Page 574 | Index of Subjects........ Page 589
Appendix B. Abbreviations Greek Index 2)... wesc eas 602
RAW ULI in 0's hee Lee's s 587 | Index for the Forms of Verbs 614
ABBREVIATIONS.

Aesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th.— Ar. Aristophanes. —
Dem. Demosthenes, Ol. Olynth., Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph.
Aphobus. — Eur. Euripides, M. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, O. Orestes, H. F.

ercules Furens, Hipp. Hippolytus.— Her. Herodotus. — Isae. Isaeus. — Lys. Ly-
sias. — Pl. Plato. Cr. Crito, L. Leges, Th. Theages, Men. Meno, Soph. Sophista,
Crat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebus, Rp. Respublica.— Soph. Sopho-
cles, O. C. Oedipus Coloneus, O. R. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes,
Aj. Ajax, El. Electra. — X. Xenophon, C. Commentarit, An. Anabasis, H. Hellen-
ica, S. Symposium, R. Ath. Respublica Atheniens., R. L. Respubl. Lacedaem., O.
Oeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, R. Equ. R. Equestris.

oh Ne a ee

GREEK GRAMMAR.

DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE.

1. Tue Greek language was divided into many different
dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the
fBolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The olic prevailed in
Beotia, Thessaly, and in the AX®olian colonies in Asia
Minor; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the
Dorian colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily; the
Tonic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor; the Attic, in
Attica.

2. The A®olic and Doric dialects are characterized by
harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic,
which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The
Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two
former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and
pleasant forms of the Ionic with the strong and full-toned
forms of the Doric.

3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the
Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Homer
and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied
with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance
with the true principles of art, to select, from all the
dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of
their poetry; and to employ —since the regular laws of
versification had much influence in forming the language

2

14 GREEK DIALECTS.

—a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epic,
or Homeric. ‘This had a great effect on the language of
all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the
later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born
484 8. c., and of Hippocrates, b. 460 s. c.

4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with cer-
tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Later
Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 3. c.; the
tragic poets; A%schylus, who died 456 3B. .c.; Sophocles,
b. 497 3. c., d. 405 8. c.; Euripides, b. 480 s. c.; and the
more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 B. c. ;
by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 8. c., and An-
docides, b. 467 3. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato,
b. 430 B, c.; Xenophon, b. 447 3. c.; and the orator Iso-
crates, b. B. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De-
mosthenes, b. 385 3s. c., and other orators, the later comic
writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who
sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier
writers.

5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed
by Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be
the common written language. As it extended, not only
over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of
Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the
introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then
received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language,
9 Kown, Or ‘EXAnviKy Sudrextos. It was used, e. g. by Apol-
lodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch.

ETYMOLOGY.

SECTION I.

CHAPTER I.

Letters and Sounds of the Language.

§1. Alphabet.
The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four letters.

Form.

é \ \
DEM eOBSYMYVOON SEA RHYONEANWA

CGEREGSC AAT ASCMwW VE KFS VYSH® YR DWE

Sounp.

@
—
2)
=}
oq

BO ee Ss

ectanmemoRK 5
mM
5
=

Alpha
Beta
Gamma
Delta
Epsilon
Zeta
Eta
Théta
lota
Kappa
Lambda
Mu
Nu
Xi
Omikron
Pi
Rho
Sigma
Tau
Upsilon
Phi
Chi
Psi
Oméga.

a ee ee eee

16 SOUNDS OF PARTICULAR LETTERS. [§ 2.

Remark 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the form s, e. g. cewpéds, in
most editions of the classics. This small s is also used in the middle of com-
pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such
a@ usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. mpospépas or
mporpeow, dusyevhs or duoryerhs.

Rem. 2. When o and r come together, both letters may be expressed by one
character, s, Sti, or Stigma.

Rem. 3. Besides their use as alphabetic characters, ¢« and v were originally
used as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper (§ 6), for which
in the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (§ 25) ;
hence, as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, @ pAdv
and @ WAdy, i. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive
their name from their relative size.

Rem. 4. The principle on which most of the letters of the Greek alphabet
are named, is entirely different from that adopted in this country and among
the European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound
it represents, as a, b, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize
them. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was derived,
the name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their
letters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which
was the alphabetic character to be represented. For example, the Pheenicians
and Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which
means an ox: now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or
element to be represented. The second letter was Beth (Greek Beta), a house,
the first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel
(Greek Gamma), acamel. This mode®f naming letters, undoubtedly originated
from the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from
which they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus
Aleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc.

§2a. Sounds of particular Letters.

The sound of the letters is indicated by the Roman characters opposite to
them. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in
addition : —

Remark. The sounds given to the following letters are those more usually
adopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England; but the usage is not
entirely uniform.

A has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same
syllable, e. g. xaA-xdés; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single
consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is ¢ ors, e.g.
dvacrdcews, otpatiérns; also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a
syllable not final, e. g. wey-d-An, otpa-rés; it has the sound of a in father, when
it is followed by a single p, in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word;
but a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in fate, e. g. Bdp-Ba-pos, yap,

ayasd, Th.

§ 2b.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. 17

y, before y, «, x, and &, has the sound of ng in angle, or nasal n in ancele, e. g.
tyros, ang-z2los; Kdayyh, clangor ; "Ayxlons, Anchises (Angchises) ; ovyxdmrn,
syncope; Adpuyt, larynx. yy before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in
get; also before consonants, except y, Kk, x, & ©. g. ylyas.

e has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the
same syllable, e. g. uéy-as, wet-d; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a
word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. ye, Sé-w, Bacta-
é-ws.

m has the sound of ¢ in me, e. g. wovh.

& has the sound of th in thick, e. g. Sdvaros.

thas the sound of 7 in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a
syllable by itself, e. g. éamt-o1, Sri, wed-f-ov; the sound of % in pin, when it is
followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. mpiv, xtv-duvos.

« always has the hard sound of k, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g.
Kitucla, Cilicia ; Kéxpoy, Cecrops ; Kuxépwr, Cicero.

&, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of z, e. g. tévos; else-
where, the sound of 2, e. g. diatdw, mpatis, &vat.

o has the sound of short o in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the
same syllable, e. g. Ady-os, xd-pos ; the sound of long o in go, when it ends a
word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 76, tard, So-ds, Tok-d-r7s.

o has the sharp sound of sin son; except it stands before u, in the middle
of a word, or at the end of a word after 7 or w, where it has the sound of z,
€. g. oKnvh, vouopa, vis, KdAws; before 1 it does not have the sound of sh, as in
Latin, but retains its simple sound, e. g. “Acla =A-si-a, not A-shi-a.

7 followed by « has its simple sound, never the sound of sh, as in Latin, e. g.
Tadaria = Galati-a, not Galashi-a; Kprrfas =Kriti-as, not Krishi-as ; Aiybrriot.

v has the sound of wu in tulip, e. g. réxn ; but before p the sound of u in pure,
e. g. wip, yépupa.

x has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. taxds.

w has the sound of long o in note, e. g. &yw.

§ 2b. Brief history of the Alphabet,

1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac-
cording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus,
a Pheenician. The Pheenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew,
consisted of 22 letters, the names of which are, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Daleth,
He, Vau, Zain, Heth, Teth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samech, Oin, Pe,
Tsade, Koph, Resch, Schin, Thau. Vau, the 6th letter of the Phcenician
alphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only
as the numeral sign for 6. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Phe-
nician alphabet, was also rejected, because its sound so nearly resembled that
of Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain
and Tsade were modifications of the same sound; Tsade, like the Greek Zeta,

2*

18 ORGANS OF SPEECH. [§ 3.

represents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6th
letter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an
alphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 19 letters of
the Pheenician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters.
These are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Grecks
themselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., v, p, x, ¥, #. This
seems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet,
though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre-
sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., a, B, y, 5, €, 4, K, A,
By Vy 0, Ty Py Oy Ty Vz

2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form.
The old Attic alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as
a breathing, and the place of » and w was supplied by e and o, and that of »
and ¢ by = and X3&, e. g. AIOEP (aiSjp), EXOPON (éxSpav), S3YXAI (Wvxai),
X=ZYN (évv). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the
Persian war, by Simonides, who added £, ¥, and 0, and changed the breathing
H, to the long vowel. The Jonians first adopted the present full alphabet
of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full
alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions in the archonship of Euclides,
B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic
inscriptions. ;

3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces
between the words, e. gz. METAAETOTTONEINEXEIPIZ0603, i. e. werd 5¢ Tov-
Tov «ime Xeiploopos. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till
very late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char-
acter, 104s. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that
time.. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century.

4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from
right to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how-
ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes
were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate-
ly. This was called Bovorpopnddéy, because it resembled the turning about of
oxen in ploughing. Solon’s laws were written in this way. But in the time of
Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right.

§3. Organs of Speech.

1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating
words, are the palate, the throat, the tongue, and the lips.

2. The sounds which are emitted almost without any action
of the throat, tongue, and lips, and which proceed in the freest
manner from the breast, are called Vowels; the rest, Conso-
nants.

|
|

§ 4.] VOWELS.

$4. Vowels.

1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, 4, v, which may be
long or short, e« and o, which are always short, 7 and
which are always long. The character (~) over one of the
vowels a, 1, v, shows that the vowel is short; (~) that it is
long; (~) that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, a, a.

Remark 1. a, s, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote
the principal sounds; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their
sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of « is
intermediate between a and :, the sound of o is intermediate between a and uv;

n is produced by lengthening ¢ or a, w by lengthening o. The relation of these
vowels may be illustrated by the following diagram : —

2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but
one sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong.

_ When both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called

proper; when only one, improper.
3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the
vowels a, ¢, 0, v, n, a, With the vowels « and v, thus: —

a+: =a, pronounced like az in aisle, e. g. até,

at+tv=av, - “ auinlaud, “ vais,

e+ti=a, a “ etin sleight, “ devéds, -

i z r 2% 4 i + “ euin feudal,“ trrevoa, nitov,

o+i: =a, * “ ot in oil, * Kowds,

o+v=ov, 3 “ ouin sound, “ ovdpayds,

v+i=u, . “ whi in whine,“ vids,

w + v = wy, (only Ionic,) “ “ ouin sound, “ wirds; also the im-
proper diphthongs, 4, pn, @ (i.e.a+i4n-+14,@+1); “ aioxpd, xépg, TH, TE.

Rem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphthongs gq, n, @ is the same as that of
the simple vowels 4, 7, w, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the : a
slight sound after the other vowel.

Rem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of ¢, 7, @, is placed in a
line with the vowels, but is not pronounced, e. g. TAI KAAQI=T@ Kad@, TE

| “Ain, but gp.

20 VOWELS. [$ 4.

Rem. 4. The Jota subscript, which in the most flourishing period of the
Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and
was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it
belonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth century.

Rem. 5. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded the
diphthongs: a is expressed by the diphthong ae, e by 7 and é, o: by oe, ov by u;
v was generally expressed by y, e. g.

aidpos, Phaedrus; Evpos, Eurus ; ©péxes, Thraces ;
TAatcos, Glaucus ; Bowwrtla, Boeotia ; ©pnjooa, Thressa ;
NeiAos, Nilus ; Motca, Musa; Tparywdds, tragoedus ;
Avxeiov, Lycéum ; EiAciSua, Lithyia; Kipos, Cyrus.

In words adopted later, the Romans expressed » by 6, as gdh, ode.

Rem. 6. When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are to
be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placed
over the second vowel (1, uv), e. g. aiddi, for aidvt, vis, &imvos. If the acute
accent is on the : or v, it is placed between the points; if the circumflex, over
them, as aidns, xAcid1, mpails.

Rem. 7. The pronunciation given under § 2a, as well as that given to the
diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The
original pronunciation of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the common cus-
tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of
their own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth
century, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun-
ciation defended by Reuchlin' in the same century, corresponds nearly with
the modern Greek.

For the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol-
lowing explanation of the Reuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar
of Sophocles: “A is pronounced like a in father, far. B, y, 5, like 6, g hard,
d; in later times, like Romaic f, y, 5. Before x, y, x, ¢, y had the sound of
ngin hang. e¢, like Romaic e¢, or Italiane. ¢,like z, but stronger. 7, like French
é,as in féte. 9%, like th in thin, ether, saith. 1, like 7 in machine. x, like k.
A, M, like 1, m, respectively. v, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro-
nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. é, in the Attic
dialect, like ts; in the other dialects, like xs. In later times, the sound xs pre-
vailed. o, like Romaic 0, or Italian o. 7a, like p. p, like r. At the begin-
ning of a word it was rolled; when it was doubled, only the second one was
rolled. It was rolled, also, after 3, ¢, x. o, like s in soft, past. Before y, it
was, in later times, sounded like ¢, and even changed into ¢ in writing; as
Zutpva, for Surpva, in an inscription. 1, like ¢ in tell, strong. v, like French wu.
¢, like f; but stronger. x, like Romaic x, German ch, or Spanish j (x). y, in
the Attic dialect, like ¢s; in the other dialects, like ws. In later times, the
sound zs prevailed. w, like o in note, nearly. When a consonant was doubled
in writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. During the most flourishing
period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard.

§ 6.] CONSONANTS. 21

§ 5. Consonants.

1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the dif-
ferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into —

Palatals, y « x,
Linguals, tS vA pa,
Labials, 8B mw ¢ p.

Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of
speech, are called cognate consonants; thus , x, x are cognate consonants.

2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater
or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma-
tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes.

(a) The Breathings form a kind of transition from the
vowels to the consonants. There are three breath-
ings: the lingual c; the Spiritus Asper (‘), correspond-
ing to our’ (§ 6); and the labial # (Digamma); on
the last, see the remarks upon the Dialects.

(b) The Liquids, \ y »v p, are so called, because they easily
coalesce with the other consonants.

Rem. 2. The Breathings and Liquids are also included under the common
name of semivowels, forming a kind of transition to the full vowels.

During the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age,
_ the diphthongs a, «:, ov, had each the power of a single vowel. a, like ai in
aisle; in later times, like n, or French é; during the latter part of the brazen
age, like «. av, like ow in our, house; in later times, like av, af. «, like e¢ in
Sreight, nearly ; in later times, like 1, During the silver and brazen ages, e was
often prefixed to « long, merely to mark its quantity; as xpelyw, retoal, Temujoa.
And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short « was represented by
_ €t; as EiclSwpos, Eivoxpdrns, yuuvareiapxfoas. ev, like eh-oo rapidly pro-

| nounced; in later times, like ev, ef o:, like ot in o7l, nearly. ov, like oh-oo
_ rapidly pronounced; in later times, like oo in moon, or like French ow, Italian u.

When the Beeotians used ov for v, they pronounced it long or short, according .
as the original v was long or short ; thus, in o¥8wp, cody, it was short, like oo in
_ book ; in otAn, aoovAla, long, like 00 in moon. wt, like wi in twist; i, like whi in

whip; in later times, like v. As to the diphthongs g, p, , dv, nu, wu, they
_ differed from ai, et, o1, av, ev, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel.

| Ih later times, ¢, 7, ¢ were pronounced like a, 7, w, respectively.” — Tr.

22 BREATHINGS. [$ 6.

(c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the
organs of speech; they are, By SS «a7 ¢ x.
3. The Mutes are divided,

(a) According to the organ-of speech used in pronouncing
them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three

Labials ;
(b) According to their names, into three Kappa, three
Tau, and three Pi-mutes; .

(c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth,
three medial, and three rough Mutes.

Rem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold
point of view, e. g. y may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac-
cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its
name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu-
late it than a rough mute.

SMOOTH. MEDIAL. ROUGH.
Palatals kK y x Kappa-mutes
Linguals T ) + Tau-mutes
Labials wT B @ ,| Pi-mutes

Rem. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the
organs, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, x, 7, 7, are coordinate.

4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath-
ing o, three double consonants originate, —

y from 70 Bo oo, as thw (mo), xdAUp (Bo), KaTHAup (po),

& from xo yo xo, as Kdpak (Ko), AéEw (yo), dvvt (xc),

¢ is not, like y and , to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con-
sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft z.
Only in the adverbs in ¢e, is ¢ to be considered as composed of 0%, e. g.
’AStvaCe instead of ’AShvasde; also, Bi¢ny (close), for Bicdny (from Buvéw,
to stop, Perf. BéBvopa). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition
of sounds, as when the Aolic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of
a word, od instead of ¢, e. g. weAlodera for weAlCerat.

§6. Breathings.
1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth or
a rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is indi-

§ 7, 8.] HIATUS. 23

cated by the mark (’); the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the
mark (‘). The rough breathing answers to the English
and Latin h, e. g. isropla, historia, history. 'The smooth
breathing is connected with every vowel which has not the
rough; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia-
tion, e. g. Addy, Apollo.

Remark 1. With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel,
€. g. olos, evSvs, airika. But when the improper diphthongs, ¢, n, », are capital
letters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs
are regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. “A:Sns (&5ns) ; “Hu, “Qu

Ds $).
Rem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing. The
rough breathing was at first denoted by Eor H. But when H came to be used
as a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years B.c., divided it into
two characters F and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing, the
latter of the smooth. Later, these became (") and (”*), and at last (‘) and (’).

Rem. 3. The liquid p at the beginning of words has the rough breathing,
e. g. dB30s. When two p’s come together, the first has the smooth breathing,
the last the rough, e. g. Mvgsos, Pyrrhus; but some editors omit both breath-
ings, e. g. TlUppos.

Rem. 4. At the beginning of a word, v always has the rough breathing,
except in the Xolic dialect.

CHANGES OF LETTERS.

§7. General Remark.

_ Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of
changes. These changes result from the tendency of the
- language to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and

from the difference of dialects. The last will be considered
in treating of the Dialects.

I. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS.

§8. Hiatus. 6

_ The concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla-
bles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation,

24 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [§ 9.

called Hiatus. This is avoided by Contraction, Crasis,
Synizesis, and Elision.

__ Remark 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the
Hiatus of two vowels in two successive words ;*among the prose-writers, the
orators sought most carefully to avoid it.

Rem. 2. In the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in the
interrogative ri; what? e.g. 7{ otv ; rl eimes ; among the comic poets, its use is
mostly confined to rf, S71, wepl, &, e.g. Ste és, Sti odxL, wep) duwy, also in odde
(unde) eis (Ev), ne unus quidem, to distinguish it from ovdédels, nullus. In addition
to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the
Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited
to special cases; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g.
@, val, &va (up!), 1S, as Ti, 1 wor maudv, Suph. Ph. 832; arr ava, ef édpd-
vwy, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic dialect, see § 200.

§9. A. Contraction of Vowels.

Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the
same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise
either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels,
in accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical
principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic,
the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow-
ing contractions occur : —

I. Euphonie Contractions.

(aja +a = 4 as‘ oéAaa = cera
e +e = € “ place = pide (Comp. No. IL.)
ote = “ wdptu = woptt
o +o = ov “ ydos = vods
(b)a +e : “ rivae = thud
a-+y7 i = “ ridnre = Tare
abe =e phpat = ripe
a-+o io “ ridomevy = TILGuev
ato i ey “ rydwmey = Tiu@mev
afte “ ryders = TYLGS
a+n ‘ me “ rmdns = Tugs
ato = “ rydot = TIGL
a -+ ov = 0 “ riyndov = TILe@
(c)e +4 = 7 “ elyed = telxn (Comp. No. IL)
e +4 = 4 “ yoea = Oa
e+: = e€ “ relxet = Telxet

e +o = ov “ girdouey = pidrovmer
w(v) “ giréw = gira, doréy = doTE
« +a =? “ pirrea = TénTn

§ 9.] GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS, 25

eta =e AS: pirdeis = pireis
e+n wy “ pireys = pidgs
e+o = ol “ pirdois = idrois
€ + ov = ov “ piréov = girod
(d)n +6 = “ pAherou = iAjooa
nte = . “ Ophicca = Opicca
nte =p “ Tiphes = Tipps
(e)« +a) og “ aébprias = mdpris
tbe f ais “ mdpries = méptis
(f)o +a =w “ aidéa = aid@ (Comp. No. IL.)
o+e = ov “ plosoe = puloSov
o+7 = “ mioddénre = wicd@re
ot+: ==. Ot “ aiddt = aidot
ote (ve) =a (e) “ moddoa = w0dd, rAdy = TAG
ota == gs “ @mAdat = ardat
ote “ puoddet = yxuoSo? (Comp. Rem. 2.)
o+n =o piodén = miodor
o +o “ ptoddotus = puoSoiue
o + ov = ov “ pioddover = micSotor
(g)u +a “ ixstas = ixdis
v oe € = 0 “ ixsves = ixdds
vu+yn “ Beucvinrar = Seuvdra (rarely)
(h)wa ta =o “ fipwa = fipw (only in Acc. of some Sub. of
w+. = “" Adioros = AGorTos. [8d Dee.

Remark 1. The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol-
lowing principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and form a diphthong, e. g.
telxei = telxe1, aiddi = aidoz. (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long
vowel or diphthong, e. g. tyudowey = Tysduer, aidda = aid@. (3) A short vowel
is absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it; e. g.

= Piréw = PiAG, Hirdov = Hidod, bAfhetou = bAtjooa,. (4) The short vowels, a, 1,

v, absorb the following vowel and become long; e. g. rluae = tua, ixSvas =
ixSds. (5) A short vowel coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac-
cording to the preceding principles ; whex the second vowel is «, it is subseribed
with a, , w, but if it is any other yewel it is dropped; e. g. tyudys = Tuas,
Tidowu = Tyger = Tydov = Tye, TUMTEU = TITTY. aes =.

U. Gremmatical Contractions.

_ (a) « + ¢€ = 7, particularly in the third Dec., e. g. rprhpee = rpihpn, yévec
= yon. |
(b) « +a =€ in the second Dec., e. g. dorda = dra, xptoca = xpuca
(P1.), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, e. g. MepixAd-ea =
TlepuxAda, KAé-ea = KAea, tyi-€a = dyad; in the Acc. Pl.
Fem. of Adjectives in -eos, -€a, -eov, e. g. xpucé-as = xpucas ;
finally, in the Fem. of Adjectives in -eos, -éa, -eov, wher
these endings are preceded by a vowel or p, e. g. épé-eos,
e-da, €-cov = épeos, ped, epeoidv, apyipeos, a, cov = os,
a, ovy.

3

26 sy DRORASIBL Ss [§ 10,

«-+a=y7 in the Fem. Sing. of adjectives in -eos, not preceded by a
vowel or p; &. g. xpucéa = xpuvo7, xputdas = xpvojs.

e + a= ea in Accusatives Pl. in eas of third Dec., e. g. capé-as = ca-

eis; SO wéAeis, WhxeIs, eyxéAets, from méAcas, etc.
(c)o + a=4 in Adjectives in dos, én, dov, e.g. GrAd-a = Gmra.

o + 7 = 7 in Adjectives in dos, dn, dor, e. g. amAd-n = GrAj.

o + a= ovin Accusative Pl. of Bods; so also pefCoas = pelfovs, and
the like.

Rem. 2. The contraction of oe into ov is found only in the Inf. Act. of
verbs in dw, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf. originally ended in
ev, not in ew (consequently, not picddev = piodody, but picddey = puodody),
and in adjectives in deis, e.g. "Orders = ’Omods, in which the root ends in oevr,
and consequently the : does not belong to the root. On the accentuation of
contract forms, see $ 30.

Rem. 8. The Tragic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account
of the measure, yet only in the lyric and anapestic passages, not written in the
pure Attic dialect, e.g. naréw, Aesch. Ag. 147; rpouéwy, Prom. 542; veliceos,
Sept. 936; éreo, Soph. OC. 182; edpéi, Trach. 114.

Rem. 4. Sometimes the grammatical importance of the ending, or the form
of the nominative, prevents the usual contraction, especially if the ending
would thereby become doubtful. ‘

§10.°B. Crasis.

1. Crasis (xpaots) is the coalescence of the final and
initial vowels of two successive words into one long sylla-
ble, e. g. Td dvowa==Tovvopa, TO Eros = TOUTS.

Remark 1. The mark of Crasis is the same as that of the Spiritus
Lenis (’), and is named Coronis, It is placed over the vowel or diphthong
formed by Crasis, but is omitted when the-word begins with a vowel or diph-
thong so formed, because it would then coincide with the Spiritus Lenis, e. g.

Te ayadd = Tayadd; & ty = Gy; & tySpwre = bySpwre. On the accentuation,
- see § 31, II; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the
Spiritus Asper, as 7d wp = Sovdwp, see 4 below, end § 17, Rem. 3.

2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the first
of which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a)
with the article, e. g. 6 dvjp= drip, Tod dvdpds = révdpds ; — (b)
frequently with xai and the interjection 6, e. g. Kat dperi = xdpery,
& dvIpwre = dvIpwre, ca) dyaté = dyaté, o avag = avat ; — (c) some-
what often in éyé with of3a and ofpas e. g. éyeda, éyouou; —
(d) less often with the neuter relative 6 and 4, as 6 eyo, & eyo =
obye, ayo; with rod, wévrot, ovrou, particularly in connection

— er "4

a
§11.] MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27

with dv, dpa, e.g. rav (seldom in prose), perrév; répa and ovrdpa
(poetic); but seldom with mpd, e. g. rpovpyou for mpd épyov; fre-
quently in composition with the augment é, as mpovdwxa.

3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly
a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first; on
this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is
used only when the c belongs to the last of the two vowels,
€. g. kat dra = Kara, eyo oda = éyoda; on the contrary, Kai ére-
Ta =kareira ; at dyatal = ayatai, TO dxAw = TdXAYQ.

4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the
vowels of the article — even ov and w»—are combined with the
following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the
aspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 dvnp = avyp, ot avdpes
= Gydpes, rd dAndés = TaANIEs, Ta GANa = TaAXa, Tod dvdpds = ravdpds,
TO dydpit = raydpi; also, tod airod = rabrod, 76 aitG = rair@.

Rem. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in a, 0, ov, w, @, o, at, among
the Attic poets, combine with the first vowel of €repos (Doric &repos), and
form long a; when the second word has the aspirate, as here, the preceding
smooth mute must be changed into the cognate rough; see also § 17, Rem. 3.
e. g.i—

Ta eTepa = SkTepa 6 €repos = Grepos Tov érépov = Sarépou
7 évTépw = Sarépw of €repor = Erepor ai €repar = G&repat

5. In Crasis, at of the particle xai coalesces with the follow-

ing vowel, the a being sometimes retained and sometimes

* . “~ al A
absorbed, e. g. kat éxetvos = Kdkelvos, kal av = Kav, Kat év = Kay, Kal
b 3 >]

OAT a.
ee eee
’

eyo = Kays [kal ei = kei, xal eis = xeis, poetic], Kal 7AIov = KnAJov
[kat od = Kod, Kal edvdaipwv = Kevoaipwr, poetic].

§11. Summary of the most common instances of
Crasis.

(a) The following cases conform to the rules of contraction
given in § 9:—
ata=—da; a-te=a; a-+o~a; o + o0=o0v;
ote =ov; oft =o; nt+e=7; o@+a=w.
(b) The following instances belong to Crasis only : —
o +v =ov as: 7d S5wp = Sovdwp (§ 17, Rem. 3.)

ota=a “* 7d airs = radtd

ota=¢q ~ atriov = rériov

28 --«- SYNIZESIS. — ELISION. [§§ 12, 13.

+o = @ as: 6 olvos = Svos

o

o +n = “ 7d juérepoy = Shuérepoy (§ 17, Rem. 3.)

ote =w “ 16 dug = Tdpg

@+o=w “ Te dpdarud = THPSAAUS

aota=a “ pévro ty = pevriy

a +e =ov “ gol éorw = codoty, por eddicer = podddxer (both poetic.)
ovu-e =ov “ rod torw = rotor .

ov-+-o =ov “ od évéuaros = Tobvduaros

ov--uv =ov “ od iaros = Sovdaros (§ 17, Rem. 3.)

n+n =n “ TH iméepg = Shugpa (§ 17, Rem. 3.)

ota=—gG “ yw olda = éypda

otn = “Tod HmeTépov = Shuerépov, poetic. (§ 17, Rem. 3.)

TOU ovpavod = Tovpayvod
kal eira = KGa

ov + ov = ov
ate =—@

,

(c) Here belong the examples given under § 10, 4 and 5.

§12. C. Synizeszis.

1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two
vowels into one syllable, e. g. when py) od is pronounced as
a monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets, but
may have been used in the common colloquial language.

Remark. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the
ordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing,
e. g. PAG from gPirew, Todpavod from rod obpavod; but in Synizesis, it is made
only in the pronunciation, both vowels or diphthongs being written out in full.

2. In the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively
between two words, viz., with é7e/, 7, 4, uj, followed by «, ov, a,
ol, €. g. éret ov, } ovde’s (dissyllable), wy ob (monosyllable), pi
dAXo, éy® od (dissyllable), and éyw ciws S. Ph. 577; also, in a
few single words and forms, e. g. Jeot (= Jot, monosyllable),
édpaxa (= dpaxa, trissyllable), dvewypévos (= dvwypévos, four sylla-
bles), particularly in the Ionic-Attic Genitive -ews, as Oyncéws
(dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see § 206.

§ 13. D. Elision.

1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before
the initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also in
compounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted.

§ 14.] USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29

Remark 1. The mark of Elision is the same as that of the Spiritus Lenis,
and is called apostrophe, as rodr’ éorw, yévorr’ ty. °

Rem. 2. Elision differs from Crasis in that the former elides the vowel,
while the latter lengthens it, e. g. &AA’ &ye (Elision), ra &AAa = TGAAa (Crasis).
This distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a
long vowel or diphthong, e. g. 7d airé = rabrd.

2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the
following cases, where it often occurs : —

(a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except wep and mpd; also péxpr
and &xpi, used as prepositions, but rarely in évexa, e. g. di oikov, én’ ofkov, but
mepl olkoy, mpd ofkov. Elision is regular in composition, except with epi, mpd,
and sometimes dul, e. g. dveASeiv, but repiopgy ;

(b) In conjunctions and adverbs, aAAd, &pa, dpa, Gua, elta, reira, pddar,
pddcora, réxa, and in many other adverbs ending in a before &y; also in the
following adverbs and conjunctions, ta, yé, Té, 5¢, ovdé, undé, ore, Sre (not
rt), wor€é (with the compounds, as ofmore), tére, ert, odKEeTL, MNKEeTL; @. B. GAN
airés, dp ody, udduor’ ty;

(c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, €, aS TadTa, Tora, YAAa, Tlva; wéTEpa
more rare ; TovTo, abd, éué, o€, od (never in 7d, rd) ; also in nouns and adjectives
of the second:and third declensions, ending in a, as guaprhuara, etc. ; oie
ete.; epya, e. g. TadT’ abrd, mdvt’ ayadd, xpnuar’ cis pepe;

(d) In pnyl, ofda, oloSa, and generally in verbal forms in jt, ot, 4,"d, €, 0, e. g.
ph yd, off tvdpa, edéyer’ ky, erimrort’ ty, yévoir’ &v; of the forms which
admit the vy Paragogic (§ 15), in prose, only éorf often suffers elision ;

(e) In certain familiar phrases, as vj Af &pn.

Rem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in the orators, particularly
Isocrates, much more seldom in the historians.

Rem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is changed into the correspond-
ing rough, as wdv9’ bea.

Rem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence,
in words closely connected, as vh Af pn, the comma is omitted, for in such cases,

without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words in quick succession. On
accent in Elision, see § 31, IIL

§ 14. Use of Elision in the Poets.

1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended
than in prose; yet the following points are to be noted: A word ending in v is
never elided; nor a, 1, o in a monosyllable; hence the article rd, and the pro-
nouns 7} and r/, are not elided; and epi in no case, —at least among the Attic
poets,—nor ér1, wéxpt, &xpt, nor substantive adverbs of place ending in &
(8S: excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in ere,

2. The Elision of the: in the Dat. of the third Dec., particularly in the
Sing., is very rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many.

_8. The verbal endings, wat, rar, oSa:, which are short in respect to the
3*

30 N Paracoaiec. | [§ 15.

accent, are rarely elided in the Attic poets; the Datives uof and cof are never
elided.

4, In the verbal forms which may take the vy Paragogic kadaAsoieriedrl: the
poets use Elision or the v, according to the necessities of the verse.

5. Sometimes in Attic poetry, a weak and grammatically unimportant sylla-
ble is excluded by a preceding long vowel; this is specially the case with the
augment ¢, e.g. Tax?’ répevoay, Soph. OC. 1602, ézel *Sdxpvoa, Phil. 360. This
omission of the vowel is called aphaeresis (apafpeois). It can also occur after
a punctuation-mark, e. g. ppdow * reid) kw * mt rovrors.

§ 15. N Paragogic acer sor). Boh sett —"Eé and
éx.— Od(k).

1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels
in two successive words is by appending a y, (v éeAxvorixdy, OF
Paragogic,) to certain final syllables, viz. : —

(a) to the Dat. Pl. in o, to the adverbs répvor, tavréracr, and
all adverbs of place in o, as méow Acka; 7 TAaraudow
WyEpovia. ; :

(8) to the third Pers. Sing. and Pl. in ov, as rirrovow épé,
ridnow ev TH Tparélyn; SO also with éori;

(y) to the third Pers. Sing. in « e. g. erurrey éyé;

(8) to the numeral ¢ixoo., though even before vowels the v
is often omitted, e. g. eikoow dvdpes and eixoor avdpes;

(<«) to the Demonstrative ¢ (§ 95, e) but rarely, and then
always after o, €. g. otrociv, éxewooiv, Tovrovaty, otTwow ;

(Z) to-the Epic particles, vi and xé, and to the Epic suffix ¢u;
hence also to véc¢u.

Remark. The poets place the vy Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make
a short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end
of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation-
marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun-
ciation.

2. The adverb otrws always retains its full form before a
vowel, but drops the final s before a consonant, e. g. ovrws éroin-
ev, but otrw roid; still, orws may stand even before consonants,
when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. ovrws ye, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9.

3. So the Prep. éé retains its full form before vowels and at
the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes é&k, e. g.
€& cipyvys, but éx ris «ipyvns; so also in composition, e. g. éfeAav-

— ee eee ee

II ee, —

§16.] STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. 31

vew, but éxredetv. It also has its full form when it stands after
the word it governs, and is then accented, cipyjrys €€.

4. So ov« has its full form before a vowel, e. g. otx aicypds;
before a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes ody, e. g.
ovx 75vs; but before a consonant, od, e. g. od Kadds ; S80 also pinkére
(instead of py év) after the analogy of ovxére.

Rem. 2. When od stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, and is
to be pronounced with emphasis, the form of with the acute accent is used
even before a vowel; in this case there must be an actual break in the discourse,
as when o# stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, without
connection with what follows, as Tlés yap of; *Ap’ ody wra. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37;
or when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No; it is found
especially in antithetical sentences, e. g. TayaSd, ra 5¢ kana of: "Edy 5é wTA.
Xen. C. 1. 2,42; AlSous eis roy woraydy epplarrovy, ekixvodyro 5é ob, o¥re EBAaT-
tov ovdéva, An. 4. 8,3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is closely
connected with the preceding, then it is written odk, e. g. ob«, GAAX KTA. Xen.
C. 2. 6, 11. and 13 ; 4. 6, 2; obd«, ef or Hy era. Hell. 1. 7, 19.

§ 16. Strengthening, Weakening, Prolongation, Shortening, Inter-
change, and Variation of Vowels. — Influence of a Vowel or
a Consonant on another Vowel. — Syncope. — Omission of a
Vowel. — Euphonic Prothesis.

The changes, which further take place in vowels, are: —

1. Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a
stronger (see § 4, Rem.1). There are different degrees of strength. in the
vowels; the weakest is «. The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the
third Dec. in os, Gen. -eos; the pure stem of these words ends in es; in the
Nom., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the
stronger o (in Latin into w), e.g. yévos, genus, Gen. yéveos (instead of yéveo-os),
genér-is. In yévu and ddpu (Gen. ydvat-os, Sépar-os), a, the final vowel of the
stem, is changed into the stronger v.

2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels; this is the opposite of the
change just described ; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in -is, -i,
-ts, -b; in these, the stronger stem-vowels : and v are changed into the weaker e,
e.g. wédts, TéAcws; THXUS, THXEwS; olvam, owdreos; oT, toreos. So with
adjectives in -ts, -¥, e. g. yAukts, yAunt, Gen. -eos.

3. Prolongation of vowels; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or
diphthong, viz. a into 7 or a; «into Tor «; vinto dor ev; € into yore; ointow
or ov. ‘This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from
grammatical reasons, or from both together; in the poets often on account of the
metre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language.
One instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present
tense in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. xpivw, mrbvw, AfIw, palyw, Aclrw, pebya,

32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. [§ 16.

instead of xplvw, wrive,, Sw, pivw, Altw, pyw.—The reason of the prolon-
gation is very often found in the omission of a y with a Tau-mute, more rarely
of a meré y, or in the omission of a after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g.
é50vs instead of é3dyrs, didods instead of diddyrs, BovAebwy instead of Bovrcd-
ovts; péAas instead of wéAavs; Zonda instead of %opadrca, HyyerAa instead of
Hryyerou, EpSepa instead of %pSepoa; phrwp instead of fhrops, womhy instead
of romévs, datuwy instead of daluovs, aidés instead of aiddcs, dAnShs instead of
GAndséos.

4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialects, § 207.

5. Interchange of vowels; this consists in softening a long vowel into a
short one, and as a compensation, in lengthening the short vowel immediately
following. Thus, in the Ionic and Attic dialects, ew instead of do, e. g. TAcws,
-wy, instead of YAdos, -ov, Aeés instead of Adds, veds instead of vads, MevéAcws
instead of MevéAdos ; further, in the Attic dialect, BaciAéws, BaciAéa instead of
the Ionic BaciAjjos, -ja; so also, wéAews, whxews, Attic, instead of méAws,
mhxvos ; € is weaker than z and v, see No. 2.

6. Variation, i.e. the change of the radical vowel ¢« into o and a, for the
formation of the tenses (§ 140) and derivatives (§ 231, 6); when e in the
Present is lengthened from the radical 1, it becomes o in the second Perf., but
when from the radical e, it becomes 0; e. g. tpépw, Térpopa, erpiny; Aclrw
(root Aur), AdAorta; PIelpw (root PSep), ZpSopa, epSiipny; PAeyw, PAdE; TpEXw,
Tpoxds; Tpépw, Tpoph, Tpopeds, Tpapepds. Comp. Germ. stehle, gestohlen, stahl,
English, ring, rang, rung. The 7 is changed into a, e. g. aphyw, apwyh.

Remark 1. Whether the a is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a
euphonic change of ¢, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, partic-
ularly p and A, sometimes even mw and vy, may be doubted. Comp. érpamor,
erpapny, eotpdpny, eBpdxny, eddpny, épSdpny, eorddany, eramov, @xtavoy with
eveyny, ereicor.

7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant.
Here belong two special cases :—

(a) The Attic writers change the Ionic 7 into « after the vowels e and: and
the diphthongs ending with 1, sometimes even after other vowels, and
after the Liquid p, e. g. idéa (Ion. id€n), copla, xpela, juepa, apyupa,
enliva, emépava ; ;

(b) The union-yowel ein verbs in w, is changed into o before the terminations
beginning with w and y, e. g. BovAetouer, BovActovra, ¢Bovredouer, éBov-
AevoyTo.

8. Syncope (cvyxorh), i.e. the omission of ¢ in the middle of a word between

a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between rr; the same, also,
occurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec., e. g. arpds
instead of warépos; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g.
yiyvoum instead of yryévoua, inrw instead of mmérw, wluyw instead of miméve ;
and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. 7ypéunv from éyelpw ;
Syncope rarely occurs after o, e. g. Zoxov, éomduny, @orat, instead of erexor,
ecenduny, toerau. A striking example of Syncope is found in #ASoy instead
of #AvSov, from "EAETOQ. Comp. § 155.

ee

§ 17.] | MUTES. 33

9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, § 207.

10. One of the vowels a, ¢, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of
euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, ¢. g. derepowh and oreporh, dorapls
and oragls, éxSés and xdés, éxeivos and Keivos, éSéAw and SéAw, dxpuders and
kpdos, ddtpouce and Svpoua, dxéArAw and KEAAw, etc.

Rem. 2. From these euphonic letters care must be taken to distinguish
1) a when it stands for amd, e. g. d-ptvew, to avert, or when used instead of
vy, e.g. dutvooew, to tear up, or instead of the @ or & copulative with the
meaning of gua, from which also a intensive has been formed; (2) «, when it
is used instead of é or év, e. g. éyelpew, to wake up, épet-yew, eructare, épédeuw,
irritare ; (3) o with the meaning of dod, e. g. dulxAn.

II. CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS.

§17. a. Mutes.

1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a great degree,
from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds.
This assimilation is either a mere resemblance in sounds, as
when AéXey-raris changed into A€Aexras the smooth 7 chang-
ing the medial y into the smooth «; or it is a complete identity
in sounds, as when. ov-pirrw is changed into cvppirrw.—
Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound,
and seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim-
ilar, e. g. we-piAnka. for de-firnxa, Larpo for Sado.

2. A Pi-mute (z 8 ¢) or a Kappa-mute (x y x) before a Tau-
mute (r 6+) must be coordinate with the Tau-mute, i. e. only
a smooth Mute (zx) can stand before the smooth 7; only a
medial (8 y) before the medial 6; only an aspirate (¢ x) before
the aspirate 3; consequently, rr and xr; 8d and yd; ¢9 and
x9, e. g.

B before r into was: (from rpiBw) rérpiB-ras = rérpimrat
op “ 7 “mw & ( & xypdpw) yéypap-ra = yéypamras
wy Se a Se as Sy. 6) dee) Aérey-Tat = AdAekTat
x “ tr “we ( “ Bpéxw) BéBpex-rar = BeBpexras
er *§ § © BS ( “© Kiwrw) nbr-da = Kvpda

o “ &§ * BX ( “ ypdpw) ypdp-Sny = ypdBdnv
ce © § & yw & ( & aAdaw) wAEeK-Sny = rAdyonv
x “© & Ky & ( * Bpexw) Bpex-Bnv = Bpeydny
r § & * @* ( * wméeurw) Creur-Sny = eréupdsny
BO“ “Si See: ( : SarplBo) érplB-Sny = érplpSny
ce “§ & “xy ( © aréew) erréx-Snv = ewréxSnv
Y “ Ss * x “ ( “ Adyw) erey- y Sake erex ony.

34 MUTES. : [§ 17

Remark 1. The preposition é« remains unchanged, probably by virtue of an
original movable o, thus éks, e. g. éxdodvai, éxdeivat, etc., not eySovvar, exdeivat.

3. The smooth Mutes (z « 7) before a rough breathing, are
changed into the cognate aspirates (¢ x +), not only in inflec-
tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough
breathing being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ;
but the medials (8 y 8) are thus changed only in the inflection
of the verb; elsewhere there is no change, hence : —

ar of = ad ob, emhpepos (from él, jucpa) = epnepos

érvpalvw (from éml, dpatyw) = epvodalyw, TéruT-& = Tétvpa

ovk bolws = odx dolws, Sexhuepos (from déxa, Hucpa) = dexhuepos

dy Akw = avSérAxw = from dvrl, €Axw), but oddels (not odSels, from odd and <s)

elAoy-& = efAoxa, but Ady Erdpay (not AéxX’ Erépay)

TéTpip-a = Térpipa, but TpiP’ ofrws (not Tpip’ obrws).

Rem. 2. The negative ox (od) thus becomes odx, e. g. obx Adds; yet this
change does not occur before the aspirate p, e. g. od pirrw. In some com-
pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to
Tonic usage, e. g. darndrns (east wind, from amd and Atos), AevKummos (one who
rides a white horse, from Aeveds and trmos), Kpdrummos, etc.

Rem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes
place also in Crasis (§§ 10 and 11), e. g. Ta &repa = Skrepa, Td iudriov = Soiud-
Tov, Kal erepos = x&TEpos, Kal boa boris, brws = xGou, xaoTIS, xéTws. Yet
this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes rr or xr precede the rough
breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. EpSfwepos instead
of éxrhpepos (from. érrd, juépa), vix9’ Any instead of vix7’ BAnv. Attic prose
uses also the full forms, e. g. vinta dAnp.

Rem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding
smooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. ppofuiov, formed by Crasis from mpoolusoy
(from mpé and oluos) ; réSpurmoy (from tdérpa and trros), Spdoow from tapdoow ;
80 poddos from mpé and ddés.

4. On the contrary, a rough Mute cannot stand before the
same rough Mute, but is changed into the corresponding smooth,
e. g. Sard, Baxxos, tirdy, “Artis; not Saddd, Bayxos, tidy,
"ASSis: on the same principle, when p is doubled, the first
Aspirate disappears, e. g. Ivppos, not Ivppos.

5. A Tau-mute (784) before another Tau-mute is changed
into o (comp, claustrum from ne ; but it disappears before
« (in Pert. and Plup. Act.), e.

érelo-Snv (from mit becomes éreladny
mews-réos ( “ aelsw) “ mesoréos
hpeld-Snv ( “ épeldw) “ hpelodnv
mwérew-ka ( “ weldw) ements

sri eet on

§ 18] LIQUIDS. 35

6. The 7, which in the Attic dialect very often becomes g, is
frequently changed into ¢ by the influence of a following 4 e. g.
mAovows (instead of rAovris, from wXodros), “Apatovoros (instead
of "ApaSovvr-wos), Muxjows (from MiAynros), *Ayepovictos (instead
of *Ayepdvr-wos), ovcia (instead of dvr-ia), yepovola (instead of
yepovr-ia), evatows (from évavrés). The « sometimes changes
by assimilation the other Tau-mutes, and the Palatals, into o;
thus in the forms of the Comparative in -cowv and -fwv, where
there is a double change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to ¢
by means of the « and then the assimilation of the ¢ to a, e. g.
Bpadis (Bpadiov, Bpaciwv), Bpdoocwy, poet., maxts (raxiwv, Tac-
fwv), tagowv, poet., péyas, weiCwv (instead of peyiwy), taxvs,
Jadoowyv (instead of ray-iwv).

§ 18. b. Liquids.

1. The Liquid’y is sometimes changed into a. This takes
place, e. g. in the Acc. Sing. third Dec. of substantives, whose
stem ends with a consonant, e. g. képag, képax-a (not Kkdpak-iy),
Aaprds, Aaprad-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes -
place in the third Pers. Pl. Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass. of
mute and liquid verbs, which properly should end in -vrat and
-vro (as in pure verbs, e. g. BeBovdAev-vrau, éBeBovdev-vro), e. g.
retpipirat, ererpipiro, wemexGrat, TeTdXGTaL, oxevddarat, Kexwploarat,
épIdpira. (instead of rérpiBvrat, erérpyBvro, etc., from rpiB-o,
THEK-w, TATT-w, TKEval-w, xwpil-w, PIeip-w): See § 116, 15.

2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g.

ovy-Aoyl(w becomes avaroyl(w ovy-neTtpia becomes ovpuetpla
év-eveo “duper ou-pimtm “ — oupplrrw.

‘Remark. Comp. illino, immineo, instead of inlino, inmineo. Assimilation
takes place in SAA vm, instead of tAvyms.—’Ev before p is not assimilated, e. g,
évpirTw ; yet é{pvSuos is more frequent than éypuSmos; on the contrary, évAax-
xevw stands instead of éAAakkedw.

3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into B, e. g

paAlrrew (from mérz) becomes BAirrew
padoxw ( “ poreiv) “ BAdéoKw
uporés ( “ ydpos, mors) “« _ Bporés.

36 _ MUTES AND LIQUIDS. [§ 19.

§19.c. Mutes and Liquids.— Liquids and Mutes.
1. A Pi-mute (7 B ) before p is changed into p,

a Kappa-mute (kyx) “ mp af she
aTau-mute (7rd3) “ gp . ig, 6, et
(a) Pi-mute: TérpiB-pat (from tp{Bw) becomes rérpimpat
AéAerTr-waL ( “ Aetrw) “i AéAcimpan
yeypah-mat ( “ ypdpw) “ye ypappece
(8) Kappa-mute: mémAex-pat ( “ wAréxw) “ wérheypou
Aérey-pat ( “* Aéyw) - remains AéAeyuat
BéBpex-pat ( “ Bpéexw) beeomes BéBpeypat
(vy) Tau-mute: #vur-yau ( “ dvirw) 3 vvopat
éphpetd-pat ( “ épetdw) = éphpero mat
méemels-pat ( “ eto) se TEMELO LCL
KeKdutd-pou ( “ sopttw) “ Kekoulo pat,

Remark 1. In some words, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed
before pw, e.g. akuh, wétwos, Aaxpuds, Kevdudy, etc. In some words, even x
stands before w, instead of the original x or ¥, e. g. iwxuds from idkw, rroxpds
from 7Aékw. The preposition éx, in composition, is not changed, e. g. éxuar-
Sdvw.

2. The medial f before v is changed into p, e. g.

oeB-vds (from céBoua) becomes ceuyds
épeB-vés ( “ &peBos) “ €peuvds.
3. N before a Pi-mute (7 6 ¢ w) is changed into p,

N before a Kappa-mute («x y x €) is changed into y,
N before a Tau-mute (7 6 3) is not changed, e. g.

év-reipla becomes éewreipla wvy-KaAéw becomes ovyKarée
éy-BddrAw eupddrArw cur-yiyvocka =“ a uryryvyvdoKkw
&y-ppwy f Euppwv ovy-xpovos “ abyxpovos
ey-pixos =“ Eupoxos ouv-téw ee ovytéw ;

but cuyreivw, cvvdéw, ovvSéw. Comp. imbuo, imprimo.

Rem. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. dvrep, Tévye, not Syrep, etc.

Rem. 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mute, as well as before pw,
was, without doubt, pronounced like w, and before a Kappa-mute, like y; and
so it is found in ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMMATEPAKAITHMMHTEPA,
TOFXPHMATISMON (i.e. roy warépa Kal Thy wntépa, Toy xpnuariopdy). So also
A and o are used instead of y before A and o¢, ¢. g. EAAHMNOI, ’ESSAMOI
(i. e. €v Afhure, év Sduw).

. 2
é
F
"

es

3 ~ Ge aw sels Cee
. Po ‘|
4 *

§ 20.] THE SIBILANT 0 WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 37

§20. d. Use of the Sibilant o, with Mutes and
Liquids.
i. A Pi-mute (x B $) with o is changed into y,
a Kappa-mute («x y x) with o is changed into &,
a Tau-mute (76) disappears before o, e. g.

(a) Pi-mute: Aclrow (from Aelrw) becomes Achbw
tplBow ( “ plBw) “ tphyo

7 ypdpow “ ypdpw) = ypdipes
(8) Kappa-mute: mAékow “ wréxw) “ wadwo
Aéyowu « réyo) “ AEw

(y) Tau-mute: dayirow “ dvirw) “ éyiow
épeldow “ épeldw) “ épelow
welSow « qrelSw) “ welow
earldaw “ él) “ éAmtow.

Remark 1. Comp. duzi, rezi, cozi; from duco, rego, coguo. The Prep. é«
before o is an exception, e. g. éxad(w, not étéaw. — In mobs, Gen. 7od-ds, and
in the Perf. active Part. in -és, Gen. -ér-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the
preceding vowel is lengthened.

(
(
(
Bpéxow = =( “ Bpéxw) “ Bpéteo
(
(
(
(

2. N disappears before o; but when rv is joined with a Tau-
mute, both disappear before o, but the short vowel before o, is
lengthened : ¢ into «, o into ov, &, %, ¥ into a, i, ¥, Comp. Rem. 3,
e. g.

tupsévt-o1. becomes tupSeior Agoyt-ot becomes Aéovat

* orévd-cw * onrelow cAuwa-ot “ €Auion
Toayt-ot 43 Tovact Sexvivr-oc “ decxvior
Sdaluov-cr “ Saiuope Revopavt-o1 “ Revopacr.

Rem. 2. Exceptions: "Ey, e. g. évorelpw; may- before « with another conso-
nant, e. g. mdvoxoros, in some words is assimilated; e. g. rdaaopos is used as
well as rdvoogos, etc. (in mdAw the usage varies); also in some inflective and
derivative forms in -oa and -o1s from verbs in -afyw, e.g. mépayoa (from
galyw), réravois (from memralyw), and in the substantives, 7 €Amws, earth-worm, 4
melpivs, wagon-basket, 4 Tipuvs, v is retained before ¢.—In composition, the v in
avy is changed into o before o followed by a vowel, e. g. cvccd(w (from ody and

_ oé{w); but before o followed by a consonant, or before ¢, it disappears, e. g. odv-

ornua becomes obernua, cvy-Cuyla becomes cv(uyla. — In xapleot, vr is dropped ;

_ on the contrary, in rdAds, wéAds (Gen. -dvos), xrels, eis (Gen. -évds), eis, and in
_ the third Pers. Pl. of the principal tenses (see § 103), e. g. BovAedovor (instead

of Bovdredtover), the omission of the simple v is compensated by lengthening

+ the vowel. e

3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, o is omitted
Ae

38 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [$21

after the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen-
ing the stem-vowel, e. g.

yyed-a becomes #ryyeiAa éveu-oa becomes @vema
epay-oa s epnva eprep-oa epreipa.

Rem. 8. Sigma is likewise omitted before w in the future of Liquid verbs, ¢
being inserted before o for the sake of an easier pronunciation, and ew being con-
tracted into @, e. g. ayyeA-é-ow, GyyeA@. So too in the Nom. of the third Dec.
the final Sigma is omitted, when v or p precedes, and the short vowel is
lengthened, e. g. eixéy instead of ecixdy-s, mwomhy instead of momér-s, phrwp
instead of pjrop-s, aidnp instead of aidSép-s.—T and o are omitted in the Nom.
of substantives and participles in -wy, Gen. -ovr-os ; but, as a compensation, o is
lengthened into , e: g. Aéoyr-s becomes Aéwy, BovAevoyt-s becomes BovActwr.

- Rem. 4. In €vvims (instead of €o-vuut, ves-tio) the o is assimilated to the
following v, and in ciuf (instead of éo-ui) o is omitted, but ¢ is lengthened
into e. .

§21.e. Change of separated Consonants.

1. Sometimes a consonant affects another consonant, though
they do not immediately follow one another, but are separated
by a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one » changes
another A into p, e. g. Kepadapyia (instead of kepadradyia from
dAyey), yAwooapyia (instead of yAwooadyia), dpyadéos (instead of
dAyadéos from dAyeiv) ; the suffix wy becomes wp7, when a X pre-
cedes, e. g. Jadrwp7.

2. In the reduplication of verbs whose stem begins with a
rough mute, instead of repeating this mute, which would be

the regular formation, the first rough mute is changed into the

corresponding smooth, thus : —

ge-pianna (from piAéw) is changed into mepiAnka.

xexina ( “ xéw) eos KexuKa
Sé-StKa ( “ Sta) «“ 6c réSuKa -
Si-Syut (stem @E) S rldnmt.

Likewise in the verbs, Stew; to sacrifice, and TiSéva (stem @E), to place, & of
the root is changed into 7, in the passive forms which begin with 3:—

erv-Syv, Tv-Shoouat, eré-Snv, Te-Shoouat, instead of é9v-Snv, éd¢-Syv.
So also, for the sake of euphony, the p is not reduplicated, and instead of it
éf6 is used, e. g. épfdnxa.
3. In words whose stem begins with 7 and ends with an
Aspirate mute, the aspiration is transferred to the preceding

.
2
SO a

Ne ee eT

§ 22, 23.] METATHESIS OF THE LIQUIDS. 39

i smooth +, when the Aspirate before the formative syllable be-

ginning with o, 7, and p, must, according to the laws of euphony
(§§ 17, 2; 19, 1; 20, 1), be changed into a smooth consonant;

_ by this transposition, r is changed into the Aspirate 3. Sucha
_ change is called the Metathesis of the aspration.

Thus, tpép-w (rérpopa Perf.) is changed into (Spér-cw) Spépa, Spew-rhp, (Spéx-
Ha) Speupa;

raph, TA®-w, tapiva: (second Aor. Pass.), into Sdpjw, Sda-rw, (TéIa7-
poo) TéQauuar (but third Pers. Pl. rerdpara, e. g. Her. 6, 103, with one
of the better MSS. is to be read instead of reSdparat) ;

Tpipos, TPTS-w into Sptw, Spim-rw (TéIpuT-mar), TESpypman ;

~ rpéx-w into (Spéx-coua) Spetouas ;— tprx-ds into Spl, Spikly ;

Taxvs, in the comp&rative, becomes Sdoowv. For the same reason, the
future €{w, from %xw, to have, is the proper form, the aspiration of
the x being transferred to the smooth breathing and making it
rough.

Remark 1. Tevéw from redxw, and rpdiw from rpdxw, remain unchanged.

Rem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, tpé~w, TASD
(Sdrrw), TPYSN (Spixrw), begin with 3, the aspiration of the two final conso-
nants @8, changes 7, the initial consonant of the stem, into 8, e. g.

Cdpeh-Snv, Iped-Thvat, Spep-Ihoecsat,
Cddp-Snv, Sapdels, Sap-Shooua, Teddp-Sat.

Rem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both sylla-
bles should begin with 3, namely, Sy, not the first, but the last aspirate mute

is changed into the corresponding smooth ; thus S771, e: g. BovAeddntt.

Pee we —

§ 22. Metathesis of the Liquids.

The Liquids, and also the Lingual + when z precedes, often
change place with a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony.
The vowel then usually becomes long. This lengthening of
the vowel distinguishes Metathesis from Syncope (the latter
being the mere omission of e), e. g. deren (from the root pey,
comp. mens), IvjoKw (rom Jav-civ), rérpyxa (from rep-civ),
| sie (from Bad-etv), rrjcopa (from wéropa).

§ 23. Doubling of Consonants.

1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of
yeuphony, e. g. Badippoos from Badi and péw; &peov instead of

- %eov; in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence

ae

40 STRENGTHENING AND ADDITION OF CONSONANTS. [§ 24

of like or similar sounds, in the inflection and derivation, e. g.
év-vomos (from év and vdpos), éA-Acirw (instead of évA.), ovp-axos
(instead of civp.), AéAcys-war (instead of A€Aeurp.), Anp-pa (in-
stead of Aja), Kop-wa (instead of Kémpa), tTac-cw OY TaT-Tw
(instead of rdy-cw), joowv or Arrov (instead of 7jKx-iwy), paAdov
(instead of pdA-vov), dAXAos (instead of Aros, alius).

2. In the Common language, only the Liquids, A, p, v, p, the
Sibilant o, and the Mute 7, can be doubled : yet m and « are
also doubled in single words; e. g. irmos, a horse ; Kéxxos, a berry.
The. Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is
softened in the pronunciation (§ 2). Two Aspirates are not
doubled (§ 17,4). — :

3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. <jpeov,
and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g.
a&ppnxros, Badvppoos; but e-pworos (from ed and povvupe).

Remark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the o, yet
much less frequently than Homer, e. g. réccov, Soph. Aj. 185; dAéooas, 390;

éoctan, 294; wéoon, Ant. 1223; Looera:, ZEsch. Pers. 122; so also i in the Dat.
Pl. of the third Dec. eat.

§ 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants.

1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addition
of a corresponding consonant, namely :—

(a) The Labials (8 x») by 7, e.g. BAdm-r-w (instead of BAdB-w), Tém-T-w —

(instead of riém-w), pla-r-w (instead of fip-w) ; sometimes also by o, which

assimilates the preceding Labial (thus oo, Attic rr), e.g. réoow (root j
wer), Att. rértw, Fut. wépw, the poetic dovoua, Fut. dou; in ig

(instead of dépw), p and o are changed into y ;
(b) The Palatals (y « x) are strengthened by o, which assimilates the pre-

ceding Palatal (thus oo, Att.77), or, though more seldom, the Palatal —

unites with the o and is changed into ¢ e. g. tdo-o-w, Att. td7-1-w

(instead of rdy-w), ppla-c-w, Att. pplr-r-w (instead of pplk-w), Bho-o-w,
Att. Bhr-r-w (instead of Bhx-w); kpd@w (instead of xpdyw), rpi¢w (instead
of rpfyw); a Kappa-mute with o is seldom changed into é, e.g. atté@ —
(aug-eo), drdtw, dddéw and ddd(w; the strengthening 7 is found only in —

méxT@ and tikTw.

(c) The Linguals (87 &) are strengthened by o, which with the preceding ©

Lingual is changed into ¢ e.g. ppd(w (instead of ppddw), or, though

more seldom, o assimilates the preceding ‘l'au-mute, e. g. Alccoua and —

Alrouo, épéoorw, epéTTw (instead of épérw), kopdoow (instead of kopddw).
2. The unpleasant concurrence of up‘and vp in the middle of some words,
occasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by inserting 6 between mp

ae ag

U ge ee

ee -

‘

§ 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 4\

and 5 between yp, thus, in uernu-B-pla (formed from peonuepla, neonupla), yau-
B-pds (from yap-e-pds, yaupds), av-5-pds.(from avépos, aypds).

3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetry, so as to make
a syllable long by position, e. g. rdumavoy (from rém-r-w), orpduBos (from otpé-
pw); SduBos (rdpos); KopiuBn (xopuph); SpduBos (tpépew); duph (ciweiv) ;
viugon (nubere) ; d8piuos and SuBpimos, vdvumos and vdévuuvos. In the present
tense of many verbs, this strengthening y is found, e. g. ruvSdvoua, Sryydve,
AauBSdvw instead of riSouat, Siyw, Adfw. On the change of v, see § 19,3. On
the y Paragogic, see § 15, 1.

4. & also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with y, e. g.
pedi and cuad.t, wixpds and ouixpds; a strengthening gis also inserted before u
and 7 in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and befgre & in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. reréAc-
o-uat, TeTéA€-0-Tal, ereA€-c-Sny (§ 131); also in the derivation and composition
of words, o is frequently inserted for the sake of euphony, e. g. wet-o-uds, mav-
o-dveuos, moryo-o-réKos, etc.; instead of o, & also is inserted before yw, e. g.
nunn-S-uds, dpxn-S-uds, oxap-3-uds from ocxalpw, rop-S-uds from melpw.

§25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants.

1. In inflection, « is very often omitted between two vowels, e.g. rérrp,
érimrov, TUmroco instead of timre-c-at or TUTTn-ca, éTiTTE-c-0, TUTTOI-C-0 ;
yéve-os, yevé-wy instead of yéve-c-os, yevé-c-wy (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um),
At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yévos,
tile (=tinow), tACEw. (= wAEK-ow), but after the Liquids, in inflection, as
well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. #yyerAa {instead
of HyyeA-o-a), &yyeA@ (instead of d&yyeA-é-o-w, ayyedA-é-w), Pht wp (instead
of jyrop-s). Comp. § 20, Rem. 3.

2. The Digamma softened into the vowel v ({§ 200) is omitted: (a) in the
middle of the word between two vowels, e. g. adv (dv), ovum, dis (&Fis), ovis,
aidy (aiFéy), aevum, véos (véFos), novus, cxaids (oxalés), scaevus, Bods (Bol Ss),
bovis ; Séw, wAéw, mvéw, éAdw instead of SéFw, etc.; (b) at the beginning of
the word before vowels and p, e. g. oivos (Fotvos), vinum, gap (Féap), ver, ts
(Fis) vis, ofkos (Fotkos), vicus, ideiy (Fideiv), videre, éodjs (Feodhs), vestis,
phryvupe (F pfryvvur), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v)
is retained in connection with a preceding a, e, 0, with which it then coalesces
and forms a diphthong: (a) at the end of a word, e. g. Bod (instead of BdF’),
Baird, etc.; (8) before a consonant, e. g. Bods (BdF’s, bovs, bds), vats (vdF’s),
navis, Body, Boval, BactAeds, BaciAcdot, Sevoouat, wrAcvcouat, tvedoouc, édavvw.
But when an « or v precedes it, then it disappears before a consonant, but
lengthens the « or v, e. g. xis (instead of xiF’s), cis (instead of otF’s) ixSis

{instead of ixSdF’s), Acc. xiv, ctv, ixSvv; but it disappears also, in this case,

in the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. Ai-ds, xi-ds, av-ds, ixSv-os (instead
of AiF-ds, xiF’-és, ctF-ds, ix3bF-os.

4*

42 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. [$ 26.

8. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants,
only in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a
Zaigud, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a termination beginning with o&
is appended to the consonant of the root, the ¢ is dropped: —

AcAclr-cdwv (from Acir-w) becomes AcrcipSwv (§ 17, 2.)
Acdey oda ( “ Aéey-w) * AergXKSar (§ 17, 2.)
éordéd-cda ( “ arédAdA-w) “ éordASan.

Remark. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and ay and yr before o, andao
after a Liquid, see § 20. On wéweupot, toprywat, etc. instead of réreuppat,
eopryyuct, see § 144, R. 2. In composition, vy is often omitted, e g. Musenrd-
vos, AToAA6-dwpos, instead of MuSoyxr., “AmoAAdvd.

4, Somme words may drop their final consonant, either to avoid an accumula-
tion of cOusonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming long by position.
In addition) to the words mentioned under § 15, namely, ov« (ov), e& (ex), obrws
(o#rw), which usually retain their final consonant before a vowel to prevent
Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong,

(a) adverbs of place in Sev, e. g. tpdcdev, Imiodev, reper, etc., which never
drop. the v before a consonant, in prose, but very often in Epic poetry,
more seldom in the Attic poets ;

(b) wéx prs and &xpzis, which, however, in the best classical writers, drop
their ¢, not only before consonants, but commonly even before vowels,
e. g. expt Avataydpov, Pl. Hipp. Maj. 281, ¢; wéxpe evradda, Id. Symp-
210, e; wéxpe Stov, X. C. 4. 7, 2; wéxps epuSpas Sardrrns, Id. Cy. 8.
6, 20; t

(c) the adverbs arpéuas, Zuras, peonyis, aytixpts, tvews, &pyws, which in
poetry may drop their s, but never in prose; in the Ionic dialect, numeral
adverbs in -dts also frequently drop the o before consonants, e. g.
moAAdk. Her. 2, 2.

5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, y, o (¥,
t, i.e. mo, xo) and p. The two words, obx, not, and éx, out of, form only an
apparent exception, since, as Proclitics (§ 32), they incline to the following
word, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony occasions
either the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them into one of the
three Liquids just named; hence, c@ua (Gen. oduar-os), instead of c&uar,
yada (Gen. ydAaxt-os), instead of ydAanr, Aéwv (Gen. Agovr-os), instead of
Aéovt, €BovrAcvoy instead of éBotAevovt;—7épas (Gen. répar-os), instead of
tépar, képas (Gen. xépat-os), instead of xépar, wéAr (Gen. médrr-os), instead
of wert. -

ee a

ee TS See ee ee ee a ee

dere

§§ 26, 27.| NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 43

CHAPTER I.

Syllables.

$26. Nature and Division of Syllables.

1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with
one or more consonants, is called a syllable.

2. A word consists of one or more syllables. _When a word
_ consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the
stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation.
The stem-syllables express the essential idea of the word, the
syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea.
Thus, e. g. in yé-ypad-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ;
the two others, syllables of inflection: in zpay-pa, the first is
the stem-syliable ; the last, the syllable of derivation.

§27. Quantity of Syllables.

_ 1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its

_ vowel is short or long. |

_ 2, Every syllable is long which contains a diphthong, or a

_ simple long vowel, or two ‘vowels contracted into one, e. g.

| Bovreio ; Fpws; “axwy (from déxwv), Borpis (from Bérpvas).

3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position,

_ when two or three consonants, or a double consonant (¢ € y),

follow the short vowel, e. g. oré\Aw, ripavres, Képag (Kédpixos)

_ tpazela.

Remark 1. The pronunciation! of a syllable long by nature, and of one

_ long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced Jong, but the

latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by position, its pronun-

| ciation must be protracted. Hence a distinction is made in pronouncing such
words as mpdtTw, mpakis, mpaiyya (a), and rdrrw, rdkis, Tdyya (a).

__ Rem. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio

| debilis), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of
the Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more

' The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of
_ the German gymnasia, and in some of the schools in England and Scotland,
_ but not to any extent in this country.— Tr.

44 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [§ 28,

ease, @. 2. &rékvos, UarérAos, *tixuh, BoTpus, didpaxuos, yet in two cases the posi-
tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel: —

a) in compounds, e. g. Exvéuw ;

b) when one of the Medials (8 y 5) stands before one of the three Liquids
(A my), e.g. BiBAos, evoduos, wéwAeyucu; in tragic trimeter, SA also lengthen
the preceding short vowel.

It is obvious that _a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and
Liquid, e. g. whvirpov.

4. A syllable, which contains one of the three doubtful
vowels (a, «, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long
and short, but must be either long or short.

$28. Quantity of the Penult.

In order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three
doubtful vowels, a, 4 and v, in the penult of words of three or
more syllables, must be determined. The following are the
principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity
of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the
Forms : —

The penult is long,

1. In substantives in -dwy (Gen. -aovos or -awvos), in substantives of two or
more syllables in -iwy (Gen. -1ovos; but -iwy, Gen. -iwvos), and in forms of the
comparative in -iwy, -iov (Gen. -tovos), e. g. dmawy, -ovos, 6, 7, companion, Toget-
ddwy, -wvos; Klwy, -oves, 7, pillar,: Bpaxtwy, -ovos, 6, arm, "Audiwy, -ovos; but
Acuxarlwy, -wvos; KadAtwy, xdAAiov, more beautiful.

Exceptions. The two Oxytones, 4 hidy (i), shore, and generally 7 xidv, snow.

In Homer, the comparatives in -fwy, oy, are always short, where the versifica-
tion admits.

2. In oxytoned proper names in -dyds, and in the compounds in -éyés (from
&yw, to lead, and &yvupt, to break), -Gywp and -Kpavos, e. g.’Acdvds, Aoxaryds,
captain; vavaryss, naufraégus ; Bidiywp, dixpavos, having two horns. ;

3. In adjectives in -éns (Fem. -ais) derived from verbs: in -dw, in proper
names in -ér7s, in substantives in -irns (Fem. -7ris), and in those in -irns of the
first Dec. (Fem. -éris), and in proper names in -frn, e.g. 4xpays, untouched
Eipparns, Midpidarns, wodirns, -ov, citizen (Fem. mod@ris) ; mpeoBurns, -ov, old
man ; "Agpodirn, “Auitpitn.

Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in -arns: TaAdrns, Aadptirns, Saputirns,
all in -B&érns and -@aérns, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. Zwnpa-
Ts ;—(b) xpirhs, judge, from the short root xpi, «rit qs, builder, and Surns,
one who sacrifices.

4,.In Proparoxytones in -iAos, -tAoyv, -ivos, -ivoy, in words in -ivy, -iva,
-Ov7, -ova, in those in -bvos, when o does not precede the ending ; in Pro-

/

$28.) QUANTITY OF THE PENULY. 46
*

: _Proparoxytones in -dpa, and in adjectives in -dpos with a preceding long
"syllable, e. g.

4e-

* ‘O Spiros, multitude; — Swrivn, gift ; 6 xivdovos, danger ;

a: médirov, shoe ; Atyiva, vépipa, bridge ;

4 4 Kduivos, oven ; aicxivn, shame: — iaxipds, strong ;

| védivoy, parsley ; tpuiva, defence ; (but dxvpds and éxiipds), firm.

|
| Remark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -ivos
| and -dpa, namely, 6 xadjivds, rein; 6 épivds, wild fig-tree; and % KodAvpa, coarse

Exceptions. Eidartyn, feast, and compounds in -yivos (from yivh, woman),
e. g. dvopdvivos, and kopiyn, club.

5. In substantives in -0tos, whose antepenult is long, and in compound
adjectives in -Saxpitos and -rpitos (from daxpiw, rpiw), and. also in sub-
stantives in -dpa, -b-y7, and -bywy, and in adverbs in -0dé6y, e. g.

6 words, wailing ; urpiros, indestructible ; droaoyh, ululatus ;
&ddxpiros, without tears; Wpipua, -dros, seat ; ddAodrdyayv, ululatus ,

Borpvddy, in clusters.
Exception. Mappapiryh, splendor.
6. In dissyllabic Oxytones in -[Aés, -iuds, -ivés, -ids, DAds, duds,
-bvés, and in Paroxytones in -i un, -dv7, &. g.
Wiads, bare ; pivds, skin; 6 piuds, pale ; tivds, common ;
6 xiads, fodder; 6° ids, dart; 6 Sduds, mind ; Avun, injury ;
5 Aiuds, hunger; 6 xvAds, juice ; SO, &I0uos, etc.; bv, excuse.
Exceptions. Bids (6), bow ; mAtvds (6), washing-trough.
7. In dissyllables in -é0s, -ivdés (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -:a, which
begin with two consonants, e. g.
6 vads, temple ; pavds, brilliant ; aorta, pebble ; paid, door-post.
Rem. 2. The following may be added to dissyllables in -:a: xaaid, shed;

ayia, trouble; xovia, dust ; and to those in -dos, the variable fAaos, and the proper
names in -Gos, e. g. "Audidpados ; Oivdudos is an exception.

Exceptions. Téds or rads (6), peacock; oxud (i), shadow,

ee er

RP gl ae

‘ 8. The following single words should also be noted :—

y I 4.

‘ “Axparos, unmixed ; veavis, young girl ; Tiadpa, turban;
&viipds, troublesome ; 6radés, attendant ; dAdpos, clear ;

avsddns, self-sufficient; olvamt, mustard ; 5 prdvapos, tattle.

Also the proper names, “Audots, “Avaamos, “Ap&ros, Anudparos, @cavd, ldowr,
_ Tiplaaros, Sdpams (Serapis), Srdupados, bdpodros.

|

OY
| "AxpiBhs, exact; _ évirh, rebuke ; mapSevontrns, gallant.
4 %Siuos, strong ; pisos, day-laborer ;

{we

7d rdpixos, pickled fish; 5 4 xediddv, swallow ;

46 <-. - VAOCENTS. | [§ 29.

Also the proper names, *Ayxtons, Ipdvixos, Evpimos, Kdixos (7),”"Ovipis, Botoipts.
The following dissyllables should be noted for the sake of the compounds:
Tih, honor ; vixn, victory ; por, tribe ; “iAn, forest ; dina little ; pixpds, small ;
e. g. &tiwos.

Ill. o,
*Auduwr, blameless ; éptxw, to hold back ; Ad@ipor, booty ;
&aovAoy, asylum ; 6 idvés, den; q Tdmipos, papyrus ;
adTh (0), war-cry-; iyvin, the ham; mlripoy, bran.

Also the proper names, “Aides, "Apxvras, Bidivds, Ardvicos, KauBions, Kép-
kipa, Kwkirds. And the dissyllables, pix, soul; 5 ripds, cheese; 6 mipds, wheat ;
6 xpiods, gold; rAdwn, grief; Wixpéds, cold.

§ 29. Accents.

1. The written accent designates the tone-syllable, according
to the original Greek pronunciation. The accented syllable
was pronounced with a particular stress as well as elevation of
voice. The same is true of the modern Greek. In English,
too, while the stress of the accented syllable is more particu-
larly prominent, there is often also an accompanying elevation
of the voice, but not so much as in the modern Greek.

2. In the pronunciation of Greek prose, the accent and quan-
tity were both regarded; thus, in avJpwros, while the accentual
stress was laid on the a, the proper quantity of the penult o was
preserved. Compare analogous English words, as st&n7%sing,
outpdtirimg, in which both the accent on the antepenult and the
length of the penult are observed.

3. How the Greeks observed both the accent and quantity in -

poetry, cannot now be determined. But as it was generally
sung or recited in the style of chanting, the accent was probably
disregarded, as is constantly done in singing at present.
4. The Greek has the following marks for the tone or accent
(mposwdiar) : —
(a) The acute (~) to denote the sharp or clear tone, e. g.
déyos ;
(b) The circumflex (+) to denote the protracted or winding
tone, e.g. cana. This accent consists in uniting the rising
and falling tone in pronouncing a long syllable, since, e. g.
the word céyua was probably pronounced as odopa ;
(c) The grave (-) to denote the falang or heavy tone.

Ee a a

2 “
ee ee eT

Remarx 1. The mark of the falling tone Wat De
wos, Adyds, but kvSpwros, Adyos. ; Was ied only to
distinguish certain words, e? g. tls, some one, and tis, who? and, as will be seen
in § 31, I, instead of the acute on the final syllable of words in connected
discourse.

Rem. 2. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs; at the
beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand
after the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. drat, ares, dy etrns,
edpos, afua. But in capital letters, in connection with the diphthongs g, pn, ,
the accent and the breathing stand upon the first vowel, e. g.“A:ns. On the
diaeresis, see § 4, Rem. 6.

Rem. 3. The grave accent differed from the acute as the weaker from the
stronger accent in détriméntal, or in the Latin féneratdérum, the penultimate accent
in both words being much stronger than the preceding one. The circumflex
accent denoted a tone like the circumflex inflection in English.

Rem. 4. In the United States and Great Britain, Greek is not generally
pronounced by the accents, no regard being had to these so far as the pronun-
ciation is concerned. In a few institutions, however, the pronunciation is
regulated by the accent; but where this is the case, the grave and circumflex
accents are pronounced in the same manner as the acute. No difference is
therefore made in the pronunciation of tiwh and riwh, nor between youu and
yvéuots. In these and all similar cases, the Greeks must have made distinc-
tions.

5. The accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla-
bles of a word; it was not any natural difficulty but merely
Greek usage which prevented the accent from being placed
further back than the antepenult.

6. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether
this is long or short, e. g. xadds, dvIpdzrov, réAquos; but upon the
antepenult, only when the last syllable is short, and is also not
long by position, e. g. évIpwros, but dvIpdrrov.

7.. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two sylla-
bles, and the syllable on which it stands must always be long
by nature, e. g. rov, cna; but it stands upon the penult only
when the ultimate is short, or long only by position, e. g. retyos,

xpipe, mpagis, addrag, Gen. -tixos, kaAadpoy, xarpduy, Anuavaé.

Rem. 5. Also in substantives in -it and -i¢ (Gen. -ixos, -dxos), 1 and v long
by nature, are considered as short in respect to accentuation, e. g. poivit,
-ikos, Kijpvt, Gen. -iKos.

8. If, therefore, the antepenult is accented, it can have only
the acute; but if the penult is accented, and is long by nature,

48 . “ACCENTS. [$ 29.

it must have the. circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g.
Téixos, mparre, but the acute, when the ultimate! is long, e. g.
tetxous, mparrw ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g.
tatrw, tatre. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex
stands, e. g. rarnp, rarpév; nominatives accented on the ulti-
mate usually have the acute, e. g. immevs worapol, Inp.

Rem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -a: and -o1, and in the adverbs, rpdérara
and éxraAa, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g.
TpdmeCat, TUMTETAL, YAGTCa, &yIpwrot, xapo. The optative endings, -o. and
“al, @. 2. TYyLhoa, €xAclrot, Aclror, and the adverb o%xo1, domi, at home, are long;
on the contrary, ofxot, houses, from ofkos.
Rem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, w is considered as short
in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o,
e. g. Mevédews, dvdryewy ; — méAews, TéAcwy —3; Trews, &ynpws, Gen. trew, dynpw;
but if adjectives like fAews are declined according to the third Dec., they are
accented regularly, e. g. piAoyéAws, pidoyéAwTos ; so-also in the Dat. Sing. and
PL, as well as in the, Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. &ynpws,
ayhpwe, ayhpes, d&yhpev. :
Rem. 8. In the words, e%e«, O that, vatxi, certainly, the penult has the acute,
apparently contrary to the rule; but these must be treated as separate words,
The accentuation of the words efre, ore, &smep, Hris, Tovsde, etc., is to be
explained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (§ 33).
Rem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect to
accent,words have the following names :—
(a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rerupas, ands, Sip ;
(b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute, e. g. térrw ;
(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. g. dvSpwmos, Tum-
Téuevos, tvSpwrot, TuRTOmeEvot ;

(d) Perispoména, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. kax@s ;

(e) Properispoména, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. mpayya, pi-
Aovoa ;

(f ) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. mpdyyara, mpaypya.

1 Hence the accent often enables us to determine the quantity of syllables,
e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of mgchrpia, waShrpia, we infer that the
ultimate is short, otherwise the accent could not stand further back than the
penult, No. 6, above;—from the circumflex on otros and mpatis, that those
syllables are long by nature, 7;—-from the circumflex on jotpa and oveipa,

at the ultimate is short,7;—from the acute on xfpa, dpa, and “Hpa, that
the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must be circumfiexed,
8;—from the acute on ¢f/aros and 7ouctAos, that the penult of these words is
short, otherwise they must have been circumflexed,8.—TR.

§ 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 49

§30. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflec-
tion, Composition, and Contraction.

1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan:
tity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, there
is generally a change or removal of the accent.

(a) By lengthening the final syllable,

(a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. roAepos,
TOAEMOV 5

(8) a Properispomenon, a Paroxytone, e. g. rétxos, Teixous ;

(vy) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. eds, Jeod. Yet this
change is limited to particular cases. See § 49, 7, a.

(b) By shortening the final syllable,

(a) a dissyllabic Paroxytone with a penult long by nature
becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. devyw, pedye, mparre
(but rarre) ;

(8) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long
or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. BovAedw, Bov-
Aeve.

(c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent
is commonly removed towards the beginning of* the word, e. g.
devyw, efevyov; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com-
monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 60s ctvodos, eds
PAdSeEos, Tysn ATipmos, pedye dadogevye. But when syllables
are appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the
end of the word, e. g. timra, turrépeta, TuPInoopeda.

Remark 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and
_ the exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below, under the
_ accentuation of the several parts of speech.

2. The following principles apply in contraction :— .

(1) When neither of the two syllables to be contracted is
accented, the contracted syllable also is unaccented; and the
syllable which had the accent previous to contraction, still
" retains it, e.g. pitee = didrex (but Pidder = pire’), yévei = yevee (but
yevéwy = yevov).

~

Sy

5

50 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [§ 31.

(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is
accented, the contracted syllable also is accented,
(a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or penult,
it takes the accent which the general rules require, e. g.

&yardoma: = &yam@uat pircduevos = pidoduevos
éoradros = éoraros dpsdovor = dpSodor
tAhecoa = vAjooa TiadyTwY = TILdYTwY ;

(b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the
acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had
the acute; the circumflex, when the first of the syllables
was accented, e. g. éoraws = Eords, xdi = HXOt.

Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below, under
the contract Declensions and Conjugations.

CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED
DISCOURSE.

§31. I. Grave instead of the Acute.—II. Crasis.—
IlL Elision.—IV. Anastrophe.

I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of
the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each
other the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. Ei py
pyrpun mepixadAns “HepiBoa, pv. But the acute must stand before
every punctuation-mark by which an actual division is made
in the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. ‘O peév
Kipos érépace Tov morapov, ot 8 rodeusoe darépvyov.

Exceptions. The interrogatives ris, rl, quis? who? quid? what?. always
remain oxytoned.

Remark 1. When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other
words, i.e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. ei 7d wh
Ayers —7d Gvhp wvopa..

II. Words united by Crasis (§ 10), have only the accent of
the second word, that being the more important, e. g. tdyadJoy
from 76 éyadév. When the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy-
tone with a short final syllable, the accent, according to § 30, 2,
(2) (a),.is changed into the circumflex, e. g. 76 éros = rovros,
7a GAAa, = TGAXa, 7d epyov = Totpyov; Ta rAa = JdrAa, éyd oipar=
ey@u.an.

§ 32.] . ATONICS OR PROCLITICS. 61

III. When an unaccented vowel is elided (§ 13), the accent
of the word is not changed, e. g. rotr’ éorw. But if the elided
vowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon the preceding
syllable, as an acute; yet, when the elided word is a preposi-
tion or one of the particles, dAAd, 0od4€ pydé (and the poetic
no¢, W€), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the
accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g.

WOAAG Erasoy = wéAA’ Exradov mapa guod = map’ euod
Sewd epwrds = bel” epwrds ard éavTrod = ad’ Eavtod
on eyo = pny eye GAAG Cyd = GAN dyad
aicxpd trctas = aloxp frctas ovde yh == 008 dyad
érra hoay = én’ joa h dt bs = #2 Bs.

IV. Anastrophe. Whena preposition follows the word which
it should precede, the tone of the preposition naturally inclines
back to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the
ultimate to the penult; this drawing back of the accent is
called Anastrophe (dvacrpod7), e. g.

padxns ert but ém) udxns veav iro _—— butt ard vedy
"deny «dra kata “ISdenv KadGy wépt =“ aeph KaAGr.

Rem.2. The prepositions, éugl, dvr, avd, did, and the poetic smal, trefp,
dial, rapal, do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands between an
adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found
only when the substantive stands first, e. g. ZdvSq@ %m Swherti (but Sivhevts ém
EdvSw). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases.— In poetry,
mepl is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very
often, and even when the Gen. and epi are separated by other words. See
§ 300, (c.)

Rem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used
instead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. ava instead of avdoSyti; pera, wdpa,
em, bro, wépi, x, instead of the indicative present of ¢fva:, compounded with
these prepositions, e. g. éya mdépa instead of mdpemus, mépe instead of replerri;
also, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed after it, which
is often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. dAévas &ro mdyras éralpovs. But the
accent of dé is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as amd Saddo-
ons oixeiy, ard cxorod, am édmidos, and the like; in such cases it is properly on
the ultimate.

§ 32. V. Atonics ar Proclitics.

Atonics or Proclitics, are certain monosyllables which, in
connected discourse, are so closely united to the following

52 ENCLITICS. [§ 33.

word, that they coalesce with it, and lose their accent. They
are :—

(a) the forms of the article, 6, 7, ot, ai;

(b) the prepositions, év, «is (és), é« (€€), ws, ad; but if é is
after the word which it governs, and at the end of averse,
or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g.
kaxov é€, Il. €& 472; in prose, é€ does not stand after its
case.

(c) the conjunctions, as (as); ¢; but if és follows the word
which it should precede, it has the accent; this position,
however, is found only among the poets, e. g. Kaxol ds,
for ds Kakoi;

(d) od (ovx, odx), not; but at the end of a sentence and with
the meaning No, it has the accent, od (otc). Comp.
§ 15, Rem. 2.

§33. VL Enclitics.

Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases,
to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw
it back upon the preceding word, e. g. didos tis, woAcuds Tis.
They are :—

(a) the verbs eiul, to be, and pnul, to say, in the Pres. Indic., except the second
Pers. Sing., ef, thou art, and ors, thou sayest ;

(b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia-
lect :—

LP. 8. vod | IL. P.S. ood | IM. P.S. ob Dual. cpwiy Pl. opto: (v)
pot gol of :
Bé oé é, viv;

(c) the indefinite pronouns, tls, 72, through all the cases and numbers,
together with the abridged forms rod and 7@, and the indefinite adverbs mds,
, 6, 7h, rob, Todt, moSéy, rol, moré; but the corresponding interrogative pro-
nouns are always accented, e. g. ris, ri, mds, etc. ;

(d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, ré, rol, yé, viv, mép (and in
the Epic, xé, xév, vd, Sd), and the inseparable particle dé, § 34, Rem. 3.

Remark. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming
with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. etre, otre, ujre, dste,
dstrep, Sstis, etc.

’ Ng Si a Pi . we a i a —
Pg a Oe ee ON Pe ee ee eS ee ae el

$5

§ 34.) INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 53

934, Inclination of the Accent.

1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the
accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence
(§ 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g.

Shp tis for Shp rls kadds éorw for Kadds éorly
kal twes “ kal rwés motapos ye “ morauds yé
Kadds te “ Kadds Té motomot trwes “ motapol Tivés.

2. A Perispomenon unites with the following enclitic without
further change of the accent, e. g.

gas 7: _— for pas ri piri tis for pire? tls
gas cotw “ ds éotiv KaAov Twos “ Kadod TwWds.

Remark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded
as an Oxytone. For as as éorw, for example, are considered as one word in
respect to accent, and as the circumflex cannot go further back than the penult
(§ 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. - Long syllables
in enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent; hence olyrwow, dyti-
vey, are viewed as separate words, e. g. kaAav Twwr.

3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic
enclitic without further change of the accent; but there is no
inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g.

plros pov for pidros pod ~— but. pfidos early, plan actly
BAAos tws “ tAdAos més “ AAs word, HAAwY TWGyY.

Rem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a
Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on
the fourth syllable, e.g. pfrorgaciv, which is contrary to the usage of the
language.

4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the
following enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla-
ble; this syllable forms the tone-syllable for the following
enclitic, as avIpw-rds Tis, €. g.

tvSpwrds tis for &vSpwmros ths caud tt for capa 7h
tvSpwrol twes “ tvSpwmror tives coud éorw “ cepa éorly.

Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in ~ or y, does not admit the incli-
nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. adrat twds, adrat early, polvit early, ehput
éotly, Aaiday éortty.

5*

is >_>? | si,

54 ENCLITICS ACCENTED. [§ 36.

Rem. 3. The local suffix Se (¢e), which expresses the relation fo a place,
whither, coalesces with substantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g.

“Oruumdvde — Spntrdvde ovpavdvde Tlus@de (from Tvae)
tpeBdsde "EAevotvdde Méyapdd— Sduovde.

So ’Adhvate (i. e. "AShvasde), TAarmate (MAataal), xauace (xauds Acc.) The
suffix 5¢ when appended to the Demon. pronoun draws the accent of this pro-
noun to the syllable before de. In the oblique cases, these strengthened
pronouns are accented according to the rules for Oxytones, § 45, 7 (a), e. g.

Téc0s —Tocdsde, Toodde, ToT@de, Toohvde, TOTade,
Toius — ToLWsde, TnAlkos — TnAiKdsde, Toit — Toaide,

eva — evedde.

5. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back
its accent on the preceding, e. g. ei rép tis o€ ot pyat Tore.

§35. Enclitics. accented.

Some enclitics, whose signification allows them to be in a measure indepen-
dent, are accented in the following cases : —

1. ’Eori (v) is accented on the penult, when it stands in connection with an
Inf. for @eor: (v), and after the particles Gar’, ei, odk, uh, ds, Kal, wév, O71, Tod,
and the pronoun 7ov7’, and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. ideiv orw 4
(licet videre), ei ori, od« @orw, Tod Zorw, Zor: Seds, etc.; the other forms of
eiul which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate,
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. cia) Seol.

2. The forms of nut which are capable of inclination, retain the accent,
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep-
arated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. ony éyd. —"Eotw
aynp ayadds, pyut.

3.. The enclitic Pers. pronouns, god, col, vé, of, opior (v), retain their accent:

(a) when an accented Prep. precedes, e. g. mapa cod, meta o¢, mpds col. But

the enclitic forms of the first Pers. pronoun-are not used with accented
prepositions, but, instead of them, the longer and regularly accented

forms, e. g.
map éuod not mapd pov mpos éuol not mpds wot
kar éué =“ «KaTd me mept éuod “ amepl mov.

Remark 1. There are, however, a few instances of enclitics of the first Pers.
pronoun standing with accented prepositions, e. g. mpdés we. Pl. Symp. 218, c.

Rem. 2. When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an inclination
of the accent, e. g. éml ce # oly vor, X. An. 7.7, 82 (against you, rather than with
you).— The enclitic forms are used with the unaccented prepositions, e. g. &&
pov, &y pot, &s oe, és we, &e gov, 2v cot. But when the emphasis is on the pro-
noun, there is no inclination, and instead of mod, mol, wé, —ewod, euol, eué, are
used, e. g. év euol, GAN’ od ev aol.

,

§ 36.] DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 55
’

(b) The enclitic pronouns generally retain their accent when they are em-
phatic, as in antitheses, e. g. éué Kat o€; ue } oé; hence the forms 08, of,
€, are accented only when they are used as reflexive pronouns.
4. The pronoun 7s is accented when it stands at the beginning of a sentence,
e. g. Twts Adyouow.

5. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the enclitic
rests disappears by Elision, e. g. cadds & éorly, but Kadrds 5€ éorw— morro &
eiotv, but woAAo) d¢ eiow.

§36. Division of Syllables.

PRELIMINARY Remarks. The division of syllables, according to our mode
of pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent. The
term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference to our

‘pronunciation of the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek words.

The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in
polysyllables, when the penult is short. ‘The accent on the penult or antepenult
is called the primary accent. — If two syllables precede the primary accent, there
is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word.

The following rules exhibit the more general method of dividing syllables,
except where the pronunciation is regulated by the Greek accent : —’

1. A single consonant between .the vowels of the penult and ultimate is
joined to the latter, e. g. &yw, ma-pd, ud-Aa, f-va, i-rds, t-xép, WéAE-yos, oTpdrev-
ba, Xade-mds, Aoxa~yds, droAa-Bady. ‘

Exception. In dissyllables,a single consonant following ¢ or o is joined to
the first syllable, e. g. Ady-os, TéA-os, mep-l, 87-1, woA-b, Ex-w, TTSA-08.

2. The double consonants £ and y are joined to the vowel preceding them;
e. g. Tdk-w, Shp-os, wpak-ts, dvtirak-duevos. But ¢ is joined to the vowel following

_ it, except when it stands after ¢ or o, or after an accented vowel in the ante-

penult,—in which case it is joined with these vowels; e. g. voul-(w, vout-Ce,
aprd-(w; but rpdre¢-a, b¢-os, voulC-ouer, apra¢-omer.

3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and
t having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after « and o having
the accent, is joined to these vowels; e. g. &y-aSds, mor-auds, Ba-o1A-€a, 5-10A-
aBdéy, 6-3ér-epos, TI3-omey, &-mop-la, ed-dix-la, émi-riv-la; for a single consonant
after a long vowel, etc., see 4.

Exception. A single consonant preceded by a, and followed by two vowels,
the tirst of which is ¢ or t, is joined to the vowel after it; e.g. orpa-rid, dvaord-
sews, oTpa-Tidrns (not orpat-id, etc.).

4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or v, is joined to the
vowel following; e. g. arorn-AdSt, eph-wepos, piAd-repos, &xodrov-Sla, axob-care,
pi-plas, &Si-ula, pi-yovtes, pi~youer.

Exception. A single consonant following long «¢ or: in the antepenult, and
haying the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding; e. g. dmroxpiy-aro, éon-

pdv-auer.

56 DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH, ETc. [§§ 37, 38.

5. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, are
separated; e. g. woA-Ad, io-rdva, TEd-vyKka, Sap-paréws, KAVTOTEX-vNS.

Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel ;
e. g. érl-tpwoor. :

6. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last
two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel; if not, the last
only; e. g. &y-Spwros, dv-dpla, but érépp-Snv.

_ 7. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part

ends with a consonant; but if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a

short syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word; e. g. éx-Balva,

guvek-povnois, mpdd-eo1s, avdB-aow, but sro-phryns, not srop-hryns; sO mapa-
alyw.

§37. Punctuation-marks—Diasté6le.

1. The colon and semicolon are indicated by the same mark, a point above
the line, e. g. Ed fctas- mdytes yap dpordynoay. The interrogation-mark is
our semicolon, e. g. Tis ratra érolnoev ; who did this? The period, comma, and
mark of exclamation have the same characters as in English; the mark of
exclamation is rarely used. .

2. The Diastéle (or Hypodiastéle), which has the same character as the
comma, is used to distinguish certain compound words from others of like
sound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. 8, 71, whatever, and 871, that, since ; 8, Te,
whatever, and re, when. More recently, such words are generally separated in
writing merely, e. g. 8 71, 8 Te.

SECTION II.

ETYMOLOGY, OR GRAMMATICAL FORMS.

$38. Division of the Parts of Speech.—Inflection.

1. Etymology relates to the form and meaning of the Parts
of Speech. ’

2. The Parts of Speech are :—

(1) Substantives, which denote anything which exists, any
object (person or thing); as man, rose, house, virtue ;

(2) Adjectives, which denote a property or quality; as great,
small, red, beautiful, hateful ;

§ 38.] DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH.—INFLECTION. 967

(3) Pronouns, which denote the relation of the object spoken
of to the speaker (§ 86); as J, thou, he, this, that, mine, thine,
his ;

(4) Numerals, which denote the number or quantity of an
object; as one, two, three, many, few ;

(5) Verbs, which denote an action or state; as to bloom, to
wake, to sleep, to love, to censure ;

(6) Adverbs, which denote the way and manner in which an
action takes place, or the relations of place, time, manner, qual-
ity, and number; as here, yesterday, beautifully (= in a beautiful
manner), perhaps, often, rarely ; |

(7) Prepositions, which denote the relation of space, time,
etc. of an object to an action or thing; as (to stand) before the
house, after sunset, before sleep ;

(8) Conjunctions, which connect words and sentences, or
determine the relation between sentences; as and, but, because.

3. Words are either essential words, i. e. such as express a
notion, or idea, viz. the substantive, adjective, verb, and the
adverbs derived from them; or formal words, i. e. such as
express merely the relations of the idea to the speaker or some
one else, viz. the pronoun, numeral, preposition, conjunction, the
adverbs derived from them, and the verb eiva, to be, when it is
used as a copula, with an adjective or substantive for its predi-
cate; as 6 dvIpwros Ivyntés Eater.

Remark. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain
organic sounds. called interjections ; as alas! oh! ah! They express neither
an idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to be considered as proper
words. — Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives
and substantives, are included under the common name of Particles.

4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word in
order to indicate its different relations. The inflection of the
substantive, adjective, pronoun, and numeral, is termed Declen-
sion; the inflection of the verb, Conjugation. The other parts
of speech do not admit inflection.

KX Lew. /2 70,

58 DIFFERENT KINDS AND GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. [§§ 39, 40,

CHAPTER I.
The Substantive.

§39. Different kinds of Substantives.

1. When a substantive (§ 38) indicates an object, which has
an actual, independent existence, itis termed a Concrete substan-
tive, e. g. man, woman, hon, earth, flower, host; but when the
substantive indicates an action or quality, which is only conceived
of as being something actual or independent, it is called an
Abstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom.

2. The Concretes are,

(a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or
things, and not a class; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens ;

(b) Appellatives, when they denote an entire class or an
individual of a class; as mortal, tree, man, woman, flower.

RemarK. Appellatives are called material nouns, when they indicate the
simple material, e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; collective nouns, when
they designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind,

cavalry, fleet ; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a
bushel, a pound.

§40. Gender of Substantives.

Substantives have three genders, as in Latin; the gender is
determined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and
partly by their endings. The last mode will be more fully
treated under the several declensions. The following general
rules determine the gender of substantives by their mean-
ing :— |

1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most
rivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 Bacwreds, the king ; ot “EAAnves, 6
Tapydwov (January, nearly); 6 "AAgews, the Alpheus ; 6 cipos, the
southeast wind. |

Remark 1. Exceptions: Diminutives in -ov, which are not proper names
these are conceived of as things and are neuter); e. g. 7d meipdmioy, the lad
(bt proper names of females in*oy-aré feminine, e. g. 7 Aedytiov); also 7d

pdrodoy, a slave, mancipium; Ta madd, a favorite; and some rivers, eé. g.
% %rvi, and also some according to the ending, e. g. 4 Ahan.

2. The names of females are feminine, e. g. 7 pwyrnp, mother.

a De?

§ 40.] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59

*

3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclindble
words, and every word used as a mere symbol, are neuter, e. g.
7d Adp Pda, 7d tirrew, the striking ; 75 paHrnp, the word mother.

Rem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their
endings; hence (a) masculine, ‘EAixdy, -dvos, etc.; those in -os, Gen. -ov, e. g.
Tapvacds ; in -ws, -w, e. g.”Adws (6”Eput, derived fron the name of a person,
is particularly to be observed) ; (b) feminine, those in -n (a), Gen. -ns, e. g.
Alryn, “In, Ofrn; those in -is and -vs, e. g. “AAmis, Gen. -ews, “AAmets, -ewr,
KdpauBis, -:d0s, “Opus, -vos (masculine in Lat.), Mdpyns, -ndos ; (c) neuter, those
in -ov, e. g. Adcasoy, TIhauov.

Rem. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely
by the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem-
inine appellatives yi, xépa, vijoos (i. e. véovra xadpa), wéAus to be supplied with
them; (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. ) Képwdos [drs], 7 “Pddos
[vijicos], Afjdos [vfjcos| (except 6’OvxnoTds, 5 ‘Qpwmds, 6 Aiyiards, 6 Kdvwros ;
usually 6 ’Opxouevds, 6 “AAlapros; but generally 7 MvAos and 4 ’Emtdavpos) ; and
the following names of countries: 7 Afyutros, j Xeppdvnaos, 7” Hmeipos, 7 TleAo-

-mdvynoos ; (b) names of cities in -wy, e. g. 7) BaBuAdy, -dvos, 7 Aakedaluwy, -ovos,

h ’AvSndav, -dvos, ) Xadrnnddv, -dvos, Kapxnddy, -dvos (except 6 Oivedy and 6
Bpavpdév, -dvos, usually 6 Mapaddy, -Gvos; but commonly 7 SiKxvdv, -dvos) ; (Cc)
h TpoChy, -jvos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings.
Hence,

(a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ov (except those named above), are
masculine, e. g. 6 Béeropos, *IoSuds, Mdvros, ‘EAAhstovtos, AiytaAds ; all plural
names of cities in -o1, Gen. -wy, e. g. dfAumo; names of cities in -ods, Gen.
-obvtos, e. g. 6 “Tots (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine,
e. e: Sidods; "Auadois, Kepacots, ‘Pauvoits, Sid0ds, and Tpamre(ots, are feminine
only) ; those in -as, Gen. -ayros, e. g. 6 Tdpas; those in -evs, Gen. -ews, &. g.
6 Savoreds ; finally, 6 Mdons, Gen. -nT0s;

(b) All names of countries of the first Dec. and those of the third, which
have feminine endings, are feminine (see § 66, II), e. g. 7 “EAevals, -ivos, 7
Sarauls, -ivos, etc. ;

(c) All in -ov, Gen. -ov; plurals in -a, Gen. -wv, and those in -os, Gen. -ous,
are neuter, e. g. Td “IAtoy, Ta Actxtpa, Td “Apyos, Gen. -ous.

4. The names of persons which have only one form for the
Mase. and Fem. are of common gender, e. g. 6 7 Jeds, god and
goddess ; 6 7) wats, boy and girl.

Rem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to
indicate the natural gender, e.g. 6 BactAeds, king; 7 Baolrea, queen. See For-
mation of Words. :

Rem. 5. Substantives (mostly names of animals) which have but one gram-
matical gender, either Masc. or Fem., to denote both genders, are called
Epicenes (érixowa), e. g. 7 &Admnét, the fox, whether the male or female fox; 7
ipxros, the bear; % xdundos, the camel; 6 wis, the mouse; 4 xeAdév, the swallow ;
7 ots, the sheep ; 4 Bots (collectively), af Bdes, cattle; 5 trmos, horse (indefinitely),
but in Pl., ai frmo:; but when the natural gender is to be distinguished, appny,
male, or Sidus, female, is added, e. g. Aayds 5 Sijdvs, the female hare; &rawnt h
&ppny, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, or
by another adjective, e. g. 6 &prros, the male bear. Some masculine names of
animals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e. g. 6 Aéwy, a lion: 4
Adaya, a lioness. See Rem. 4.— Here belong, in the sécond place, the Mase.
names of persons in the Pl., which include the Fem,, e. g. of yoveis, the parents
oi waides, liberi, the children (sons and daughters). ;

60 NUMBER CASE, AND DECLENSION. First DEC. [$f 41, 42.

$41. Number, Case, and Declension.

1. The Greek has three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one
person or thing; the Plural more than one; and the Dual, two.

Remark 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the
Attic dialect ; it does not occur in the AXolic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek.

2. The Greek has five Cases,! Nominative, Genitive, Dative,
Accusative, and Vocative.

L, Le

, 18; 64. The Nom. and Voc., as they represent an object as independent of
any other, are called independent cases (casus recti); the others, as they rep-
resent an object as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent
cases (casus obliqut). ,

Rem. 3. Neuter substantives and adjectives have the same form in the Nom.,
Ace., and Voe. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings; one for
the Nom., Acc., and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat.

3. There are in the Greek three different ways of inflecting
substantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and- Third
Declensions. :

Rem. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions,
viz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and
clearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked.
Words of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to
the weak. In the third Dec. the case-endings uniformly appear pure; in the
first and second this is less so, because in these declensions the stems end in a
vowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel.
The inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and Fem., is as

follows :—
Singular. Plural. Dual.
Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak.
Nom.| s I—II s ; es t € €
Gen. | os s 0 wy ov ow w
Dat. | i oi(v) is ow w
Ace. | vy anda v as as € €

§ 42. First Declension.

The first declension has four endings, a and y feminine; as
and ys masculine.

1 See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 268, seq.

§ 43.] NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. 61

Endings
Singular. Plural. Dual.
Nom &é a@ or 7 ds or ns au a
Gen. ns as nS - ov @v aw
Dat. n ¥ n a n aus ay
Ace dy @ nv av nv as a
Voc. & @ ”. a nN, Ge at a

Remark 1. It will be seen from the above terminations, that the plural as
well as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singu-

Rem. 2. The original ending of the Dat. Pl. was a:o:(v), as in the second
Dee. orci(v), e.g. Slkaot, Traior, kaumaior, Jeoior, gumpotor, &yatoic.. This
form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least
to that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even the Ionic form -ya (v)
is sometimes used by the Attic poets.

§43. Nouns of the Feminine Gender.

1. (a) The Nom. ends in @ or & which remains in all the
Cases, if it is preceded by p,«, or « (@ pure), e. g. xwpa, land;
idéa, form; codia, wisdom ; xpeia, utility ; evo, benevolence ; here
also belong the contracts in @ (see No. 2), e. g. wva; some sub-
stantives in 4, e. g. ddaha, war-cry, and some proper names, e. g.
*Avdpoueda, Anda, T'éAa, Purounda, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Acc. -av. |

Remark 1. The following words whose stem ends in p, take the endinz 7
instead of a: xépn, maiden; ndppn, cheek ; d€épn, neck; a&dpn, water-gruel ; and
some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g.’E@dpn; the n then
remains through all the cases of the Sing.—If any other vowel than «or 1,
precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing. have 7, e. g. dxon, uh, oxevh,
(wh; except méa, grass; xpdéa, color; ordéa, porch; yta, field; outa, gourd ;
kapta, walnut-tree ; édda, olive-tree ; ddwd, threshing-floor ; Navowda, all Gen. -as.

(b) The Nom. ends in 4, which remains only in the Acc. and

Voc.; but in the Gen. and Dat., it is changed into y, if the a is
preceded by A, AA, o, oo (77), & & wv.

Rem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when y precedes, e. g. Zxidva (so es-
pecially in words in -ava); but 7 is often found, as is always the case in the
suffix otvn, e. g. edppootvn, also Solyn, mpiuyn and xptyva, welvn and meiva.
Alara is the only word ending in a preceded by a single 7.

(c) In other cases, the Nom. ends in y, which remains
throughout the singular.
6

62 NOUNS OF THE MASCULINE GENDER. [§ 44.

2. If ais preceded by « or a, -éa is contracted in most words
into 7, and -da into @ in all the Cases (comp. Boffas, § 44, 3).
The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases.

Rem. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninflected forms
end in a, e. g. yvéun from the uninflected yvduea (comp. cvéa), veavias from
the uninflected veavia, woAfrns from woAlrea; the second, the o declension, as
its uninflected forms end in 9, e. g. Adyos, uninflected form Adyo; the third, the
consonant declension, as its uninflected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels
t and v, which originated from consonants. |

Paradigms.

a) » through all the cases.\b) & through all the cases, ¢) & Gen. ns.
Opinion. Fig-tree.| Shadow. Land. | Hammer. Lioness.
S.N. | 4 9 yrdun ove-(éa)9| onr-ad xapa. opipa A€éaiva,
G. | ris yvouns cvk-jjs oKl-as xepas opupas Aealyns
D. | 7H yréun ovK-f oK-g XOpe TPupa Acatvy
A. | thy youny ovK-jy oKt- xdpay opipay réavay
Vi.) = yvdun ovK-F oK-d xapa opipi Aé€awe
PLN. | ai youu ov-at oxi-al XG@pat opipar . Adouvau
G. | rv yvouay ovK-dy okl-@y Xwpav opupav Acawev
D. | rats yvdpats cuK-ais oKt-ats xdpats opipas Aecalvas
A. | ras yvouas ovr-as oKi-as xepas opipas Aeatvas
Vi. | yeu ovK-at oKi-al XGpat opipat Aé€avat
Dual. | 7a yrdpa couK-a oKI-d, xapa opupa Aealva
Ta yvopmal ovK-ay oKI-aly Xepaw cpipay Acalvay.

Remark 1. On the form of the article 7é instead of rd, see § 241, Rem. 10.
On the declension of the article 7, see § 91. The & standing before the singu-
lar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation.

Rem. 2. On the contraction of -ea into -y, see § 9, II. (a); in the plural and
dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into a.
Comp. § 9, II. (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. wrda, pve
(mina), G. pydas, pvas, D. prdg, wg, A. pyday, piv; Pl. N. pvai, ete. -

§44. Il. Nouns of the Masculine Gender.

1. The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in -ov; nouns in -as
retain the ain the Dat., Acc., and Voc., and those in -ys retain
the 7 in the Acc. and Dat. Sing.

2. The Voc. of substantives in -y7s ends in &:—

(1) All in -rys, e. g. rogdrns, Voc. tofdra, rpodyrns, Voc. mpopn-
7a; (2) all in -7s composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g.
yewpérpys, Voc. yewpérpa, puporwAys, a salve-seller, Voc. pvpo-

A
a

ai ee

§ 44.] MASCULINE NOUNS.—FIRST DECLENSION. 63

moAd; (3) national names in -ys, e. g. Mépons, a Persian, Voe.
Ilépca.— All other nouns in -ys have the Voc. in y, e. g. Mépans,
Perses (the name of a man),- Voce. Iépon.

3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns (§ 43, 2), ap-
ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -éas, e. g. “Epyjs, Boppas.
In Bopéas, the «a is contracted into a, and not into », since p
precedes, § 43,1 (a). The doubling of the p in Bofpas is merely
accidental.

Remark 1. Contrary to § 43, I, compounds of metpéw (to measure), as
‘yewuérpns, end in -ns instead of -as; on the contrary, several proper names, etc.,
as TleAor{das and yevvddas, a noble, end in -as instead of -ns.

Rem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -dés have the Doric Gen. in 4, namely,
matpadolas, untpadolas, patricide, matricide; épviXoShpas, fowler; also several
proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g.“fAas, Gen.
“TAG, Xxdras, -d, AvviBas, -4, SvAAas, -d; (the pure Greek, and also several
of the celebrated Doric names, e. g.’Apxtras, Aewvldas, TMavoavias (also the
Beeotian ’Erauewévdas), commonly have ov;) finally, contracts in Gs, e. g.

Boppas, Gen. Poppa.
Paradigms.

Citizen. Mercury. Youth. Fowler.
Sing. N. mwoAirns ‘Epu (éas) 7s — veavias dpuidodhpas
G. moAlrov ‘Epuov veaviou dpridodnpa
D. woAltn "Epen veavlg dpvidodhps
A. mwoAltny ‘Epunv veavlay dpuisodhpay
¥. WOAtTG. ‘Epunj veavid dpvisodhpa
Plur. N. jwoAtrat ‘Epuat veavias dpvidodiipas
G. jwoATO@y ‘Eppav VEavi@y dpvisodnpay
D. mwoAiTats ‘Epuais veavlais dpvidodhpas
A. moAlras "Eppais veavlas dpuisodhpas
V. TOAtT at “Epuat veavlat dpvisodipat
Dual. woAlra. ‘Eppa veavla dpuidodnpa.
mwoAlratv ‘Epmaty veaviat épyviwodtpa

Rem. 3. The Ionic Genitive-ending -ew of Masc. nouns in -ys (§ 211), is
retained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. @dAew from
@adrjjs, Thpew from Thpns.— The contract Boppas is also found in the Attic
_ writers in the uncontracted form; thus, Bopéas, X. An. 5. 7, 7. Pl. Phaedr. 229,

__b. Bopéov, Th. 3, 23. Bopéay, 3, 4.

Rem. 4. The ending ys occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the first Dee.
belong: (a) proper names in -f8ns and -ddns, e. g. Oovxidldns, Arpeldns (from
"Atpe and (8ns), M:Atiddys, as well as gentile nouns, e. g. Srapridrys; (b) nouns
in -rys derived from verbs, e. g. rovhrns from moréw; (c) compounds consisting
of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of the
first Dec., e. g. raidSorptBys, BiBAtomdaAns, dp yedticns.

64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION.—First prc. [§ 44.

$45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First
Declension. .

a. Quantity.
1, The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -ns [§ 43,
1 (b)]; but long in those which have the Gen, in -as, e. g. rreAda, ond, coola,
maidela, xpela, xpotd, wba, jmepa, Anda, &AaAa, etc.; the same is true of the Fem.
ending of adjectives in os, e. g. éAcudépa, Sicala.

Exceptions.

The following classes of words have a short in the Nom. :—

(a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -avd, e. g. ‘Iorlata,
TIAdraua.

(b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -e:a, e. g. danse, Mfdea, Baclrca,
queen, yAuketa, except abstracts from verbs.in -edw, e. g. Baoircla, king-
dom ; SovAcia, servitude (from BaciAcdw, SovrActw) ;

({c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rpta, e.g. PaArpia, a female
musician, words in -v7é, e. g. puta, Tervpvia, the numeral wld, and, finally,
some poetic words ;

(d) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -o1%, e. g. efvoin, tvora;

(e) words in -p% whose penult is long by a diphthong (except av), by, 6, or
by pf, e. g. weipa, udxoupa; yépipa, opipa; Tldppd. ‘Eralpa, madalorpa,
Ai®pa, alSpa, kodAAvpa, are exceptions.

2. The Voc. ending ais always short in nouns in -ns; but always long in
nouns in -ds, e. g. woAtré from moAlrns, veavla from veavias. The quantity of
Fem. nouns in -& and -a, is the same in the Voc. as in the Nom.

8. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Movca from Modca.

4. The Acc. ending ay is like the Nom., e. g. Modcdy, xépay from Modcd,
xopa.

5. The ending as is always long, e. g. Tas tpawé(as from tpdme(a, 6 veavlas,
tovs veavias, THs olklas, Tas oixlas.

b. Accentuation.

6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws
of accentuation permit (§ 30).

Exceptions.

(a) The Voc. déo7ora from Seordrns, lord ;

(b) The Gen. Pl. of the first Dec. always has the final syllable wy circum-
flexed, which is caused by the contractiun of the old ending dwy, e. g.
Acaivay from A€ava, veandv from veavias. — But the substantives, yphe-
wns, creditor ; &pin, anchovy ; érnota, monsoons ; and xAotvns, wild-boar,
are exceptions ; in the Gen. Pl. they remain Paroxytones, thus xpforwyr,
apbwr, ernolwy (but aver, xpnoraéy from a&puhs, unapt; xpnords, useful).

§ 46.] SECOND DECLENSION, 65

Remark. On the accentuation of Adjectives, see § 75.

7 The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the final

syllable, thus : —

(a) Oxytones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of the three num-
bers, e. g. (Nom. tiuh) Timiis, 7, -@v, -aiv, -ais; this holds, also, in the
second Dec.; ¢. g. Seds, -od, -@ -dv, -oiv;

(b) Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the Cases, except
the Gen. Pl., which is always circumflexed on the last syllable; but
Paroxytones with a long penult become Properispomena, if the last syl-
lable is short, as in the Nom. Pl., and in the Voc. Sing. in a of Mase.
nouns in -ns (§ 44), e.g. youn, youu, but yrwuady; wodlrns, woAira,
moAtrat, but roArr@y; on the contrary, dfn, dfea, but dicav ;

(c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g.
Moicd, Movens ;

(d) Proparoxytones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g.
Adawa, Aealyns.

§ 46. Second Decicnsion.

The Second Declension has two endings, os and ov; nouns
in -os are mostly masculine, but often feminine (§ 50) ; those
in -ov are neuter; except Fem. diminutive proper names in -or,
e. g. 7 TAvxépuor (§ 40).

Endings.
Singular. Plural. Dual.
Nom. os ov on & w
Gen. ov wv ow
Dat. @ ous ow
Ace. ov ous é w
Voe. os and e ov. ou Gd. @.

Remark 1. The Gen. and Dat. endings of the different genders are the
same in all numbers; neuters have the Nom., Acc., and Voc. alike in al]
numbers, and in the plural they end in a,

Rem. 2. On the form of the Dat. Pl. oot (v), see § 42, Rem. 2.

6*

66 SECOND DECLENSION. [§ 47.
Paradigms,
Word. Island. God. Messenger. Fig.
S.N.| 6 Ady-os 7% vijoos 6(h)Seds 46 Byyedos 7) ovKoy
G. | tod Ady-ov Tis vhoov = TOU _Seov ayyédou ~—s TOU abou
D.| 7G Ady-~ = TH OVhow T IO byyeAw TS ovKy
A. | toy Ady-ov = Thy Viicov ~—s Tov Hedy &yyedov 7) cvKor-
V.| & Ady-e & vijee & dseds dryer @ ovdKoy
PLN. | of Ady-o1 8 ai = voor of = Seol ~ beyyeAot 7% ovKa
G. | tay Ady-wy = TV ViTwY = T@Y Sey ayyéAwy = Tav obKwY
D. | rots Ady-o1s ~=Tais vhoois §=—s Tots Seois dyyéAos ~=—s Tots oUKOLS
A. | tobsAdy-ovs Tas viscous Tovds Xeods ayyéAovs. Th DKA
V.| & Ady-oc & vijro & seol tyyeAot & cvKa
D. Td Ady-w TAX Vhow TH Yee ayyérw TH ovKw
Tow Ady-ow §=6Taivvicow —Tolv Seow ayyéAow — Tow TvKOLY.

Rem. 3. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in e, though often in -os,
e. g. & pire, and & gidos; always & Seds in classic Greek.

§47. Contraction of the Second Declension.

1. A small number of substantives, with o or « before the
case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect (§ 9).

Paradigms.

Navigation. Circumnavigation. Bone.

S.N.| 6 mAdos mAois 6 mepitAoos meplrAovs 7d daréov baTodv
G. mAdov mov - mepitddou treplarAov éaréov daTov
D. wAdw TAD mepitrAdw mepltrA@ éoTéw boTe
A. wAdov mAody mepttAooy teplarAouy dotéov dbaTovy
y.. jwAde = AOD mwepitAoe WeplmAou doréovy. doaTody

P.N. mwAdot mAo?t mepimAoot meplarAot doTéa = dara
G. TAdwY TAGY TepitAdwy mwepltAwy doTéwy boTay
D. mAdois mots mepimAdos meplrAas doréos derois
A. mwAdous ‘TAovs mepimAdous meplrAous éoTéa = barra
V. wAdot mAot mweptrAoot mepirAat doréa bore

D. TAdM = TAD mepitAdw meplrrw dctéw = bare

mwAdow WAoiv mepitAdow areplrAow éoréow - dato

Only the following nouns besides the above are contracted in this manner: 6
vos, vous, the mind ; 6 pdos, pots, a stream; 6 Spods, noise ; 5 xvods, down; 6 Gder-
gidods, a nephew; 6 Svyarpidots, grandson ; 6 dveiadods, son of a sister’s child.

Remark. Uncontracted forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect
though seldom in substantives, e. g. vd@, Plato, Prot, 344, a; much oftener in
adjectives, particnlariy neuttrs in -oa, as Td avoa, érepdrAoa. On the contrac.
tion of ea a! the Ph see 4 9, TT. (5),

ie
~

- $6 48, 49.] THE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 67

$48. The Attic Second Declension.

Several substantives and adjectives have the endings ws
_ Mase. and Fem.) and wv (Neut.), instead of os and ov; they
retain the » through all the Cases instead of the common
vowels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe
under » where the regular form has or o; thus, ov and «a
become w; os, ov, and ovs become wos, wy, and ws; ot, ow, and ow
_ become g, ws, and wy;—w, », and wy remain unchanged. The
- Voc. is the same as the Nom

Paradigms.

People. Table. Hare. Hall.
Sing. N. 6 Ae-és } KdA-ws 6 Aay-ds 7d dydye-wy
G. Ae-o KdA-w Aary-@ dvdrye-w
D. Ae-@ KdA-@ Aay-@ avarye-w
A. Ae-by KdA-wy Aary-év dvadye-wy
Ve Ae-ds KdA-ws Aay-és av eye-wy
Plar. N. Ae @ KdA-@ Aay-g ay dye-w
G. Ae-@y KdA-wv Aay-av av erye-wy
D. Ae-gs KdA-wS Aay-@s dyaerye-ws
A. Ae-ds KdA-ws Aay-s avaye-w
V. Ae-g KdrA-p Aay-¢ avarye-w
4D. N. A. V. Ae-d KdA-w Aay-@ avaeye-w
} G.and D. Ae-Gv KdA-@v Aay-@v aveye-cv.
:

Remark 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fem. gender often reject. the v
in the Acc. Sing., namely, 6 Aayds, the hare; (Acc. tov Aaydéy and Aayé), and
~ commonly 7 €ws, the dawn ; ) Gdws, a threshing-floor ; 7 Kéws, KGs, 6”ASws, 7
' Téws, and the adjectives &ynpws, not old ; éwlrdews, full; trépxpews, guilty.

' Rem.2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of this class
has another form, e. g. Aeds and Aads, veds and vads, MevéAews and MevéAdos,
_ the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -ews; though, in the
best Attic writers, the non-Attic forms also may be found. On the interchange
of the long vowel in this Declension, see § 16, 5.

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quan-
tity of the final syllable permits; the Voc. &«eAge from adeAgds, brother, is
an exception.
i 2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. (§ 45, 7 ); in the
Gen. PL, however, only oxytones, e.g. Seds, are perispomena ; the rest are pro
| paroxytones. See the Paradigms.

%
E.
i,
§49. Accentuation of Second Declension.
.
.

'

68 REMARKS ON THE GENDER OF THE ENDING os. |§ 50,

3. The following exceptions to the rules given for the accentuation of con
tracts in § 30, 2, should be observed: (a) the Dual in of words in -oos, -eos,
-eov, has the acute instead of the circumflex, ¢. g. rAdw = 1A 6, doTéw = b076,
instead of 1A@, 6076 ;—(b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which
retain the accent even on the penult, when it would regularly stand as a cir-
cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. repirAd-ov = weptarov (instead of
wepimAov), from meplrAoos = weplrdous; Tlepidd-ov = MerpfSovu (instead of
Hetpidovd), from TMeipisoos = TMeipisous; also adjectives, e. g. edvd-ov = et vov (not
evvov), from e¥voos = etvous; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult ;
thus, meplrAo, not répimdor; Kaxdvor, not Kdkovor;—(c) 7d Kdveov, basket, takes
the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms; hence kdveov = kavoty
(instead of «dvovy) ;— (d) words‘in -deés = dods denoting kindred, have the cir-
cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. ddeAgideds = ddeAqidois,
nephew (instead of &deAqidods). It may be stated as the rule, that all simple
substantives and adjectives in -eos and -oos take the circumflex on the contracted
syllable, hence xavoty, ddeApidods, xpucods (from xptoe-os).

4. In the Attic Dec., Proparoxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe-
nult through all the cases and numbers. See § 29, Rem. 7.. Oxytones in -ds
retain the acute accent in the Gen. Sing., contrary to § 45,7 (a), e.g. Aed. 2
here absorbs o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen. (e. g. Adyo-o = Adyov), which
accounts for this unusual accentuation, thus Aed instead of Aed-o.

§50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending os.

Substantives in -os are regularly Masc.; yet many are Fem. In addition to
the names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general rule
in § 40,-the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general
classes :—

(a) Substantives which denote certain products of trees and plants, e. g.
% Unidos, acorn; % BddAdvos, acorn; % Biooos, fine linen; Soxds, a beam; F
paBdos, a staff; % BiBdAos, bark of the papyrus; % WlaSos, rush mat ;

(b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 7 AlSos, a stone; 4 AlSos, partic-
ularly a precious stone; 4 Wijpos, a small stone; 4 Wdupos, sand ; 4 orodds, ashes ;
h wlaros, red earth; 7 xptoraddos, crystal (6 kpbaraddos, ice) ; » Bdotvos, a touch-
stone; % HAeKTpos, electrum; h opdparydos, a smaragdus ; 7 Bados, a clod; hyipos, —
gypsum ; 4 béAos, glass; % tiravos, chalk; % tpyidos, clay; 4 wAlvSos, brick;
ta Boros, soot ; 7 Kémpos, ordure; 4 %apaAdros, bitumen ;

(c) Such as denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. 4 ndpSomos, kneading-trough ; 7 «Bo-
rds and 4 xnAds, a box; h copds, a coffin; 4 Anvéds, a wine-press; 7 AHKisos, an —
oil-flask ; } xduivos, an oven; % pwpiapyds, a chest ; 7 wbedos, tub;

(d) Such as express the idea of a way, e. g.% 656s, a road; 7 apatirds (se.
656s), a carriage-road ; 4 tplBos and 4 &rpaaos, a foot-path ; m tdppos, a ditch ;

(e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence —
appear as feminine-nouns, because the substantives with which they properly
agree are feminine. There are also many others, e.g. avAeos (sc. Svpa),

$f 61, 52.] THIRD DECLENSION. . 69

house-door ; 4 #reipos (sc. yh), the mainland ; 4 tvtdpos (sc. yi), thirsty land, desert ,
_ § véos (sc. xépa), a fallow field ; i vijvos (from veiy, se. yi), an island; % didAeK-
ros (sc. pwvh), a dialect ; } otyxaAnros (sc. Bova), senate; 7 BdpBrros (sc. Atpa),
lyre ; 4 diduerpos (sc. ypayuh), diameter; 4 (more seldom 6) &karos (sc. vais),
boat; 4 Sdaos (sc. oixla), round building, ete. ;
_ (f) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be
noted, e. g. i vdcos, sickness ; i yvddos, jaw-bone ; 7} dpdcos, dew; 7 whpwos,
_ twine ;
. (g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, e. g.
6 trros, horse; 4 trmos, mare, also cavalry; 5 AékiSos, pea-soup; * A€KiSos, the
_ yolk: of an egg.

Remark. On the diminutives in -oy, see § 40, Rem. 1.

§51. Third Declension.
The third Declension has the following Case-endings : —

Singular. Plural. Dual.
Nom. s Neut.— €S; Neut. & €
Gen. os @yv ow
Dat. i ; at (v) ow
Acc. yand & Neut. — ads ; — &@ €
Voce. mostly as the Nom.; Neut. — €S; — & €

REMARKS ON THE CASE-ENDINGS.

§ 62. A. Nominative.

1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in sg,
e. g. 6 kdpag (instead of xdpax-s), 7) AaiAay (instead of AaiAaz-s).
Still, the laws of euphony do not always allow the s to be an-
/nexed to the stem; it is either rejected entirely, or, as a com-
pensation, the short vowel of the stem is lengthened (§ 16, 3).
‘But when the stem allows s to be annexed, the usual euphonic
'(§ 20) changes take place in the final consonant of the stem.

_ 2. In this way all Masc. and Fem. nouns may be divided into

Three classes : —
_ (a) The first class includes words, which in the Nom. assume
‘the gender-sign s, e. g.

[pac [> §=— PA eB-s Hardy (§ 20, 1) { prcB-ds
1 Koper 215 Kédpax-s Kdpak (§ 20, 1) x; | Képax-os
| = Aaurrad S|9 Aaumdd-s Aaumds (§ 20,1) > | Aaurdd-os —
84 yeyavr £36 = yiyivr-s ylyas (§ 20,2) 4 ylyavr-os
@ rea £146 dedrAdiv-s 5eagis (§ 20, 2) & pty ah
Bol’ (Bod, bov) , | 5 7 BOF-s (bbv-s) Bois, bds (§ 25, 2) Bo-ds
Ai (56 ATF-s Ais (§ 25, 2) | Ai-ds

70 THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 53.

(b) The second class includes words, which in the Nom.
reject the gender-sign s, but, as a compensation, lengthen the
short final vowel of the stem, « into 7, 0 into w (§$ 16, 3, and
20, Rem. 3), e. g.

Tomey .. (6 mwomny _. { momév-os
E J Acovr a J 6 (A€wyr) Aéwy g AéovT-os
+= | fntop S | 6 patwp cs | patop-os
*® | aidos A H aides (aiddc-os) aidd-os ;

(c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have
the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the Senden ee ign
s, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g.

.. { Snp ae Shp (instead of Sfp-s) .. [ Snp-ds

& |} aiwy gj] 6 aioy ( “ “ aiwy-s) gi } aiay-os

o jpos 5) 6 fipws ( “ “ fpwo-s) 5 | (ipwo-os) Fpw-os
dauapT Ala dduap( “ 5s Miike s, dduapr) dduapt-os.

3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom.; still, euphony
does not permit a word to end int (§ 25,5). Hence, in this
case, the 7 is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. Aéwv, Gen.
Néovros), or is changed into the corresponding o (§ 25, 5), e. g.

.. { wemepi «. [7d wérepi .. { memépt-os or €-os
E oeAas a | 7d céras si | (céAac-os) wéAa-os
a | Tena S To (cGuar) coua t | Tépar-os ©

TEpAT Td (tépar) Tépas Tépar-os.

Remark. The stem mip is lengthened in the Nom., Panay to the rule:
7d mip, Gen. trip-ds.

§ 53. B. The remaining Cases.

eae

1. The remaining Cases (with a few exceptions, which will ©
be specially treated), are formed by appending the endings to ~

the stem, e. g.
Stem xopax Nom. xépat Gen. xépak-os Pl. Nom. képak-es.

2. In forming the Dat. Pl. by appending the syllable ox: to
stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take place as
have already been noticed in regard to the Nom. of similar
words [§ 52, 2 (a)], e. g.

prcB-ol = gael Képax-o1 = Kdpagte Aaumdd-o1 = Aaurdot
ylyavt-o1 = ylyaor d8dvt-o1 = ddov01 BoF-ct = Bouvet.

The following points also are to be noted: —

3. (a) The Acc. Sing. has the form in -v with masculines and

§ 53.] ‘THIRD DECLENSION. 71

feminines in -ts, -vs, -avs, and -ovs, whose stems end in -1, -v, -av,
and -ov; e. g.
Stem rod: Nom. wéAis Acc. réAw, Stem Borpy Nom. Bérpus Acc. Bérpuy
. val’ vav vaF’s vats vdF vy vaivy, Bol’ Bov BéF’s Bods BédFy Boiv.
But the Acc. has the form in -a,! when the stem ends in a con-
sonant, e. g. drcB, prey, pACBa — kopak, Kdpag, Képax-a.— Aap7rad,
Aapmds, Aaprdad-a.

(b) Yet barytoned substantives in -ts and -vs, of two or more
syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose have only
the form in y, e. g.

Stem ép:d Nom. gps Acc. %pw (poet. @p:d-a; in the dramatists Ziv)
opvus bps dpyww (poet. 3pvid-a)
Kopus képus képuy (poet. cdpud-a)
Xapir xdpis xdpw (poet. xdpit-a).

In prose there are but few exceptions, e. g. TépySa, X. H. 3.1, 15, and else-
where (instead of Tépyw) from 4 T'épyis; xdpira (instead of dpi), ib. 3. 5, 16;
in constant use tplroda, tripod. (X. An. 7.3, 27, rawl8a is to be read instead
of tdmida.) The goddess xdpis has xdpita in the Acc.; still, in Luc. Deor. d.
15, 1 and 2, rhy xdpw.

Remark 1. Oxytones of one or more syllables have only the regular form
in -a, e. g. (30d) mots, Acc. 165-0; (édmid) eamls, Acc. érmld-a; (xAauvd) xAa-
pts, Ace. xAauvd-a. The monosyllable xAefs, Gen. KAed-és, contrary to the
rule, usually has the Acc. «Activ, instead of KAci6-a.

4. The Voc. is like the stem, e. g. dafuwv, Gen. daiuov-os, Voc.
Saiyov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to
appear. Hence the following points should be noted: —

(1) The Voce. is like the stem in the following cases: —

(a) When the final vowels of the stem, e and o, in the Nom.
are lengthened into 7 and w, the short stem-vowel reappears in
the Voc., e. g.

Saluwy Gen. daluov-os Voc. Sazuoy

"yépwv "yéporT-os yépor (instead of yépovr)
payrnp bent ép-os Bijrep

Swxpdrns Swxpdre-os (instead of ec-os) Sdéxpares.

It is probable that the Acc. Sing. in the third declension as well as in the
first and second, originally ended in vy; but where the stem ended in a conso-
nant, the vy could not be appended without a union-vowel; a was used for this
purpose; hence, e. g. xépaxay; the termination vy was at length omitted. The
Acc, ending a, may therefore strictly be regarded as a union-vowel.

72 THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 53.

Exceptions: Oxytoned substantives (not adjectives) retain the lengthened
vowel, e. g.

mounv, Gen. romév-os, Voc. romny (not rome),
except the three oxytones: warhp, avhp, and dahp, which, in the Voc., take
again the short stem-vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus: wdrep,
tivep, daep. According to this analogy, even ‘Hpaxa(éq)js (stem ‘HpdxAees) is
shortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into “HpaxaAes.

(b) Adjectives in -as, Gen. -dvos, and also adjectives (not
participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -yr, have in the
Voe. a form like the neuter (or the stem); was and its com-
pounds are exceptions,’ e. g.

péaAds, Gen. dy-os Neut. and Voc. wéarcy
xaples, €VT-0S '- xaplev (instead of xaplevr, § 52, 3).

So substantives in -ds, Gen. -avros, have the Voc. in -ay (instead ”

of -avr), § 52, 3, e. g.

ylyas Gen. ayt-os Voce. ylyay (instead of ylyayr)
Kdaxas ayT-os KdAxav
Alas ayT-os Aléy.

Rem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the 7 reject also the y, but as
a compensation lengthen the short a, e. g. “ArAds, Gen. -ayr-os, Voc. “AtAG,
MoAvdduas, Voc. MoAvddua.

(c) Substantives in -ts, -vs, -avs, -evs, and -ovs, whose stems
end in -t, -v, -av, -ev, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the
s of the Nom. being rejected, e. g.

udvtis Voc. udvti; mpéoBus Voc. mpéoBu; pds Voc. ni; ods Voc. od; Als Voc.
Ai; ypads Voc. ypad; Baoiret’s Voc. Baotred; Bods Voc. Bod.

- The word rats, Gen. aaid-ds, has wat in the Voc., since, by rejecting the gender- —

sign s, the stem would end in 3 (zaid), a letter which cannot end a word, and
must be dropped.

Rem. 3. Substantives in -1s, -vs, -ovs, whose stems end in a consonant, have
the Voc. like the Nom., e. g. & 3puis, kdpus, mods. Still, some substantives in
-is, Gen. -wos, have the Voce. like the stem, e. g. @ Sealy (also SeAgis), from
‘SeAgis, Gen. -ivos.

(d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, which in the
Nom have their stem pure, e. g. Ip, aidv, etc.; but “AwoAA ov
(Gen. -wvos), Tocedav (-Gvos) and owrnp (-fjpos) are exceptions,
the Vocatives being &”AzoAAov, Idc«dov, cGrep, with the accent
drawn. back.

§ 54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73

(2) The Voce. is not like the stem, but like the Nom., in most
words whose stems end in one of the consonants which cannot
euphonically stand as the final letter (§ 25, 5), because after
_ dropping the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de-

termined from the Voc. what the true stem was; e. g. from
| adpé, Gen. capx-ds, the Voc. would be odp (instead of odpx) ; from
6 dis, Gen. dwr-ds, Voc. dd (instead of pwr); from viv, Gen.
vd-ds, Voc. vi (instead of vip); from ody, Gen. d-ds, Voc. &
(instead of ar); from zovs, Gen. rod-ds, Voc. zd.

Rem. 4. The Voc. of &vat, king, in the Common language, is like the Nom.
& tvat, or by Crasis vat; but in the solemn language of prayer: & &va@ (in
Hom. and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. O. C. 1485: Zed &va, ol pwra), or dva
(instead of &vaxr, according to § 25, 5).

3. Substantives in -é and -ds, whose stems end in -os, have
the Voc. neither like the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to
all analogy, in -ot, e. g.

Stem jxos N. axed G. hxéd-os (instead of 7xd60-0s) V. Hxot (instead of hxdo1, HX4-2)
aiSos aiddés aidd-os( “ “ aiddc-os) aidot( “ “ aiddo-t aidd-i)

Rem. 5. The Voc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. 6 réarrwy, rerv-
dds, tivas, tipwr, Sexvis. “Apxwy, Voc. &pxov, when a substantive, is an
exception.

A. WorDs, WHICH IN THE GEN. HAVE A CONSONANT BEFORE THE ENDING
¢ -os, i. €@. WORDS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A CONSONANT.

§ 54. I. The Nom. adds o to the stem

| (a) The stem ends in A; thus: 6% GAs, Gen, dA-ds, Dat. Pl.
| dd-ci(v). See Rem. 1.

| (bd) The stem ends ina Pi or Kappa-mute —8, z, $; y, yy
Dx, px (7 odp§, capx-ds), and xy. See § 52, 2 (a).

_ (c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute—§4, 7, xr, 3, v3}. See
$ 52,2 (a). On the Acc. see § 53, 3 (b).

_ The stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in r and xr (yadaxr),
| but, according to § 25,5, reject the + and xr; thus: o@ua instead of cduar, and
" ydAa instead of ydAaxr ; or, according to § 52, 3, they change the r into «; on
the omission of the 7 before a: in the Dat. Pl. see § 20, 1.

(d) The stem ends invorvr. See § 52, 2 (a).
;

74 THIRD DECLENSION. | [$ 54.

4, Storm. 7, Torch. 7, Helmet.7d, Body. %, Nose. 6, Tooth.
Sing. N. | Aaiaay Aaumds Képus Tama pis ddovs
G. | AalAda-os Aaumdd-os kdpud-os céuat-os fpiv-ds dddyr-os
D, | AaiAdar-: = Aqurdd- = kdpud-t = ohat-+ ~— piv Od0vr-t
A. | AalAda-a Aaumdi-2 Kdpuv TOpua piyv-a — d8dvr-a
V.. | Aira Aaumds Képus Toma piv dd0vs
Plur. N. | AafAda-es Aaumrdd-es xKdpud-es chuat-a fiv-es dddvr-es
G. | AqAdr-wy Aaumdd-wy tack Twudt-wy piv-ay d3dvT-wv
D. | AalAdi(v) Aaumd-or(v) Kdpu-oi(v) cépa-or(v) pi-ol(v) 450d-01(v)
A. | AatAdw-as Aaumdd-as Kdpud-as ocduat-a piv-as dddvt-as
V. | AatAdm-es Aaurdd-es Kdpud-es oduat-a piv-es dddvr-es
D.N.A.V.| Aafadar-e Aaumdd-« Kédpvd-- ocduat-e fpiv-e 6dd6vT-€
G.and D.| AwAdr-ow Aaumdd-ow Koptd-ow cwudr-ow fpiv-oiy dddvr-ow.

So: 6 xdpat, -dxos, raven; 5 Adpvyt, -vyyos, throat; 5, 4 Bpvis, -iSos, bird; 6
tivat, -axros, king; 7 €Amws, -wdos, tape-worm ; 6 dedrpts, -ivos, dolphin ; 6 yiryas,
-avTos, giant, etc.

Remark 1. The stem of nouns in -) and -§ commonly ends in the smooth
aw and x; the stem of those in ~yé ends in -yy, except 6, 7 Advyt, Gen. Avy-ds,
lynx (but 7 Avyt, Gen. Avyy-és, hiccough). Instead of pdpuyyos from 4 pdpvyt,
throat, the poets, according to the necessities of the verse, use ¢dpvyos also. On
H Splé, tpixds, hair, see § 21, 3.

Rem. 2. The word 7 Gas, Gen. ad-ds, signifying sea, and in the Fem. gender,
is only poetic, and the Sing. 6 GAs, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic;
elsewhere, only of des, salt, occurs (Pl. Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e).

Rem. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -nfs, Gen. -nidos- = fs,
Hdos, &. g. Taps, cheek, rappoos.

Rem. 4. The stem of 7d ods, ear, is ar, thus: Gen. &-rés, Dat. art, Pl. dra,
drwy, wol(y). The word rd répas, according to the rule of the ancient gram-
marians, usually admits contraction in the plural, among the Attic writers,
after the + is dropped: répa, rep@y (but X. C. 1.4, 15. Pl. Phil. 14, e. Hipp.
300, e. répara) ;—-7d -yépas, reward of honor; 7d yijpas, old age; 7d xpéas, flesh,
and 7d xépas, horn, reject 7 in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat. Pl.) ;
yet «épas, besides these forms, has the regular form with +; Thucyd. uses the
contracted forms ; the uncontracted xépara occurs only in 5, 71. Képws is uni-
formly employed in the phrase ém) xépws, in column. When the a, contracted
from aa, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision,
not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -as, -aos, -os, -eos, e. g.
onxéné, (fr. cxéras) instead of oxéra, xré': (fr. xAgos) instead of KAéa.

§ 55.] THIRD DECLENSION. 75
Sing. N. | 7d 7épas, wonder. 7d Képas, horn. 7d xpéas, flesh.
G. es képat-os and képws = (xpéa-os) xpéws
D. Tépar-t képar-: and Képa (xpéa-t) kpéa
Plur. N. répat-a and répa Képar-a and Képa (xpéa-a) xpéa
G. Tepdt-wy and repay kepat-wy and KepGv —(ped-wy) kpeG@y
D. Tépa-oi(v) Képa-or(v) Kpéa-ou(v)
Dual. Tépar-e képat-e and Képa (xpéa-e) xpéa
TEpaT-ow kepdt-ow and xepgv (kped-owv) kpegy.

Rem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts in -de:s, Gen. -devros = ois,
ovvros, e. g. 6 rAaxods, cake, Gen. rAaxodyros; also in -hes, Gen. -hevtos = -fjs,
~qwros, &. g. Tyas, honorable, tipiyros.

Rem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the vowel in xrefs, efs, uéAds, and
TdAas, see § 20, Rem. 2.

§ 55. Il. The Nom. rejects s, but lengthens the short
final vowel of the stem € or 0 into n or w (§ 16, 3).

1. The stem ends in -y, -vr, and -p. For the omission of y,
and vr, before ot, see § 20, 2, and for the omission of 7, in the
Nom. of stems ending in v7, e. g. A€wv, see § 25, 5.

2. The following substantives in -yp: 6 zarnp, father; 4 pa-
mp, mother; % Ivydrnp, daughter; 7 yarrnp, belly; % Anparnp,
Demeter (Ceres), and 6 dvjp, man, differ from those in the above
paradigms only in rejecting ein the Gen. and Dat. Sing. and
Dat. PL. (§ 16, 8), and in inserting an din the Dat. Pl. before
the ending ot, to soften the pronunciation.

The word dvfp (stem dyvép), rejects e in all Cases and Numbers, except the
Voce. Sing., but inserts a 3 (§ 24, 2), thus: Gen. avdpdés, Dat. avdpl, Acc. tvdpa,
Voc. tvep, Pl. tvdpes, avdpav, aviptios(v), &vSpas, etc.

6, Shepherd. 6, Lion. 6, Orator. 6, Father. 7, Daughter.
Sing. N. | wommjv Aéwy phtwp marhp Suydrnp
-G. | womév-os Adovt-os _— phyrop-os marp-bs Suyarpds
D. | romév-c Aéovr-t phrop-t marp-t | Svyarpl
A. | woimév-a Agovt-a phrop-a mar ép-a Svyarépa
V.4 mowhy Aéov pirop mwareEp Sbyarep
Plur. N. | womév-es = Ao T-es penapees mar ép-es Suyatépes
G. | womnév-wy - Acdyt-wy pnrdép-wy Tarép-wy Suyatépwv
D. | womé-or(v) A€ovor(v) phrop-oi(v) marp-a-or(v) Svyarpéor(v)
A. | womév-as — A€ovt-as — phrop-as marép-as Suyarépas
V.| womév-es A€ovt-es — phtop-es mwarép-es Suyarépes
Dual motmev-€ A€ovT-e birrop-e mat ép-€ Suyarépe
Tomév-ow Aecdvt-ow pytdp-ow War ép-o1w Suyarépow.

76 THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 56.

RemarK 1. The substantive 7 xefp, hand, belongs to nouns of class No. 2,
and differs from them only in not lengthening the e of the stem (xep) into 9,
but into e, e.g. xelp instead of xéps; it is irregular in retaining the e in
inflection, thus: xelp, xe«pds, etc., except in the Dat. Pl. and the Gen. and Dat.
Dual xepot(v), xepow. Yet in poetry, the short as well as the long form is used
in all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. xetpds and xepds,
xepow and xepotv, xepot and xelpect.

Rem. 2. The following nouns in -wy, Gen. -ovos, reject the v in particular
Cases, and suffer contraction: 4 eixéy, image, eixdvos, eixdnt, cixdva, eixdvas, etc.,
together with the Ionic and poetic forms: Gen. eixois, Acc. eixé, Acc. Pl. eixods
(the irregular accent is to be noted in eixé and eixots); 4 anddav, nightingale,
Gen. anddvos and a&ndods, Dat. andot; 7% xeAsddy, swallow, Gen. xeArddvos, Dat.
xeAtdor. :

Rem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. 6,4 ’APH’N, lamb; the
Nom. of this is supplied by 6 4 duvds, Gen. apyds, Dat. dpvi, Acc. apva, Pl.
Nom. &pves, Gen. dpvav, Dat. dpriior(v), Acc. &pvas; farther, the word 6 aorhp,
-€pos, star, though not syncopated like warfp, etc. belongs to this class on account
of the assumed « in the Dat. Pl. dorpioi(v). In substantives belonging to
class No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing. (and in the word dy%p, also
that of the Gen. Pl. and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last
syllable, and that of the Dat. Pl. to the penult, e.g. rarpds, warpl, avdpar,
narpici(v). The word Anufrnp has a varying accent, viz. Afuntpos, Aqun-
tpt, Voc. Ahunrep (but Acc. Anunrépa). So also Svyarep Voc. of Suydrnp.
On the Voe. of zarhp and avfp, see § 53, 4 (1) (a). In poetry, according to the
necessities of the verse, are found Svyarpes, Svyatpav, Ahuntpa, and also, on
the contrary, watépos, Suvyarépos, untépt.

§ 56. IIL The Stem of the Nom. 1s pure.

The s is omitted without changing the final vowel of the
stem. The stem ends in y, vz, p, and (only in Sddyap, wife) in
pt. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. without
change. On the omission of 7 in stems ending in vr and pr, see
§ 25, 5; and on the omission of yv, vr, before ou, see $ 20, 2.

6, Paean. 6, Age. 6, Xenophon. 6, Wild beast. 7d, Nectar.
Sing. N. | moudy aicy Eevopav Snp véextap
G. | matdv-os aiav-os Hevopavt-as Snp-ds vexTap-os
D. | waay- aidy-t Revopavr-t Snp-t vexTap-t
A, | mativ-a aidy-a, Eevopavt-a Sip-a véxTap
V. | maa aidy Revopav Shp véxTap
Plur. N. | watayv-es ai@v-es Eevopa@yt-es Sijp-es véKTap a
G. | watdy-wv aidv-wy Hevopdvt-wy XInp-av veKTdp-wy
D. | mata-or(v) aid-oi(v) Bevopa-oi(v) Snp-al(v) vexrapot(y)
A. | waidv-as ai@v-as * Eevopa@yt-as XAp-as veKTap-a
V. | matav-es aidv-es Bevopayt-es Sijp-es veKTap-a
Dual. matay-€ ai@v-e Eevopart-e Sijp-e véxTap-€
Trotdy-ow aidv-ow Hevopwyt-ov Snp-oiv VEeKTap-ow.
a nee

§ 57.] THIRD DECLENSION. 77

Remark 1. The three words in -wy, Gen. -wvos: "AwéAAwy, Movedav, 4
dw, threshing-floor, drop v in the Acc. Sing., and suffer contraction; thus,
(AmdAAwva, “ArdéAAwa) *AmrdAAw, TMooeid, GAw (On Aw, comp. § 48, Rem. 1, on
kuke@, § 213,11). Also the Acc. yAhxw, from q yAnxwv or BAnXwy, penny-
royal, Gen. -wvos, is found in Aristophanes.

Rem. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p (ap, op, wp, vp),
e. g. Td véKrap, Hrop, éAwp, wip (Gen. wipds). The word 7d Zap, spring, may
also be contracted, e. g. 4p, Gen. Fpos.

B. Worps WHICH HAVE A VOWEL BEFORE THE ENDING -os IN THE GEN.

§ 57. I. Words in -ets, -ads, -ods.

1. The stem of substantives in -evs, -ats, -ods, ends in v (from
the Digamma Ff); sis the gender-sign. On the omission of v
between vowels, see § 25, 2.

2. Substantives in -e’s have -éa in the Acc. Sing., and -éas in
the Acc. PL, from éfa, éfas; the omission of the F lengthens
the aandas. These nouns have the Attic form in the Gen.
Sing., viz. -€ws instead of -éos, and in the Dat. Sing. and Nom.
Pl. admit contraction, which is not usual in the Acc. Pl. When
a vowel precedes the ending -evs, as, e. g. yoevs, EtBoevs, the end-
Ings -éws, -€wv, -éd, -€as are also contracted into -ds, -dv, -G, -as.
Nouns in -ais and -ots are contracted only in the Acc. Pl., which
is then like the Nom. PL, as in all contracts of Dec. III.

a

6, King. 6, A measure. 6, 7, Ox. 4, Old woman.

Sing. N. | BaotAeds xoevs! Bots, bos for bovs -ypais

G. | BaotAé-ws xo( ew) as Bo-ds, boy-is ypa-os

D. | Baotrc? xoer Bo-t, bov-i ypa-t

A. | Baoiwré-& xo( €a)a Body ypaiy

V. | Bactred xoed Bod pai
Plur. N. | Baoircis Xoets Bé-es "ypa-es

G. | BaoAé-wy x0( éw) av Bo-éy, bd-tm "ypa-a@v

D. | BaoiAcdor(v) xoevai(v) Bovol(v) ypavol(y)

A. | Baoiré-as (and e?s) xo(éa)as Bois ypaus

V. | BaotAcis oes Bé-es "ypa-es
Dual. Baciré-e - xo€e Bé-e "ypii-e

BaotA€-owv xocow Bo-otv "ypa-orv.

Remark 1. Among the Attic poets, the Gen. Sing. of nouns in -eds some-
times ends in -éos instead of -éws; thus Onoéos, dpioréos, and the Acc. Sing,
not only in the Attic, but in all the poets, sometimes ends in -4, instead of -éa,
e. g. iepi, tuvyypad7. The Nom. and Voc. Pl. in the older Attic writers,

1 Commonly written xdéos, contract xois.

7*

78 ' THIRD DECLENSION. [$§ 58, 59.

especially in Thucydides, end also in -js (formed from the Ionic -jes), e. g.
BaoiAjjs, ixrfs, TAatajs instead of MAarae?ts. The uncontracted Nom. Oncées
occurs in Pl. Theaet. 169, 6. The Acc. ending -e?s instead of -éas is very
common in Xen., e. g. robs fmmeis, C. 3. 5, 19. robs yoveis, 2.2, 14. ypaeis,
oxuteis, XaAkeis, 3. 7, 6. Tovs BactArets, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom
among the other Attic prose writers. The Acc. vie?s is regular in all the Attic
writers.

Rem. 2. The following are declined like xoeds: Mepaeds, Gen. Mepaids,
Acc. Meipaia, 6 ayueds, altar before the door, Gen. é&yuids, Acc. &yuia, Acc. Pl.
ayuias, and several proper names, e. g. "Eperpi@s, Sreipids, Mndia, EvBods,
EvBoa, EiBods, MAaraiis, Awpias; yet the uncontracted forms are often found
in proper names, e. g. @eoméwy, Ocomeas, Sreipiéa, TAatatewy, "Eperpiewy,
Awpiéwy, Meparéwy (in Thu. X.,.Pl, Dem.). The uncontracted forms are
regular in GAseds, fisherman, Grtéws, GALEa, GALEaS,

Rem. 3. The Nom. Pl. of Bots and ypais are always uncontracted in good
Attic writers: Bées, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Acc. only the contract forms
pads and vais occur; the Acc. Pl. Bods is the common form ; Béas occurs only
very seldom.

Rem. 4. Only 6 xots, a measure, a mound, and % fovs, vinegar-tree, are de-
clined like Bods; but in the Pl. both without contraction ; only 7 vais (vals,
nayis), is declined like ypais ; still, this noun is quite irregular; see § 68.

§58. Il Words in -ns, -es (Gen. -e0s); -ws (Gen.
-wos), -ws and -w (Gen. -o00s); -as (Gen. -aos), -os
(Gen. -eos).

The stem of words of this class ends ins. On the omission
of o, see § 25,1. In the Dat.. Pl, aco is omitted.

§59. (1) Words in -ns and -es.

1. The endings -ys and -es belong only to adjectives (the
ending -ys is Masc. and Fem., the ending -es neuter), and to
proper names, terminating like adjectives, in -ddvys, -pevys,
~yevys, -Kpdrns, -ndys, -reidns, -oSévys, -TeAys, -KydNS, -dvIys, -EpKys,
~Bapys, -épys (-npys), -apkys, -veixns, -Adparys, -odKns, -Tvxys, and
(xAéyns) kAjs. The neuter exhibits the pure stem (§ 52, 3); but
in the Masc. and Fem., e, the short final vowel of the stem, is
lengthened into 7 [§ 52, 2 (b)].

2. The words of this class, after dropping o, suffer contraction
in all the Cases, except the Nom. and Voce. Sing. and Dat. PL;
and nouns in -xAéys, which are already contracted in the Nom.
Sing. (into xdjs), suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing.

§ 59.] THIRD DECLENSION. 79

. Singular. Plural.
N.| cays, clear. capes (capé-es) cadets (capé-a) capi
G. | (capé-os)* capois (capé-wy) caper
D.| (cape-i) cape? capé-or(v)
A. | (capé-a) capn capés cera capers (capé-a) capi
V.| capés | capes capée-es) cadeis (capé-a) capi
Dual N. A. V. | cadé-e caph
G. and D. | capé-ow. caoiv.
Singular. Plural. Dual.
G. | 4 Tprhpns, trireme. (Tpthpe-es) Tprhpes Tpihpe-e
N.| (tpeijpe-os) tpihpous (tpinpé-wv) Tprhpwy Tpinpé-oww Tprhpow
D.| (rpenpe-t) — rprhpe Tprhpe-ou(v)
A.| (7pihpe-a) — Tprnpn (tpihpe-as) Tprhpers
V.| = tptijpes (Tpihpe-es) Tpinpers
Singular.

N. | Sexpdrys (TlepixAéns) TlepixaAjs

G. | Swxpé&rovs (TlepuxA€e-os) TlepixAéous

D. | Swxpdre (TleptxAée-i) (TlepixAéer) TepixAe?

A. | Swxpdrn (TlepixAée-c) TlepixAéa (Poet. also MepixAy)

V. | Séxpares (TlepticAces) TleptxAets.

Remark 1. On the contraction in the Dual of ee into y (not into e), and in
the Acc. Pl. of -eas into -ets, see § 9, II. When a vowel precedes the endings
-ns, -€s, then -ea in proper names in -xAjs is always contracted into -a, and
commonly also in adjectives (§ 9, IL), e. g. Mepimade-a = Mepuxrda; axdrchs,
without fame, dxr€ea = area, Syrhs, healthy; tyéa = tyra, evdehs, poor, evden =
évdea, dmreppuns, supernatural, breppvéa = treppva (Acc. Sing. Masc., and Nom.,
Acce., and Voc. Pl. neuter); but sometimes the contraction into - occurs, e. g.
byih, Sipu7, agua, abropv7, X. R. Equ. 7,11 (in all the MSS.). The Acc. PL
Masc. and Fem. has -es, e. g. iyiets, adropueis.

Rem. 2. Proper names in -xpdrns, -cdévns, ~yévns, -pdvns, etc., also “Apns
(Voe.”Apes), form the Ace. Sing. both according to the first and third Dec.,
and are hence called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declensions), e. g. Swxpdrn
and Swxpdrny, according to Dec. I., ’AAkauévn and -uévny, ’Avricdévn and
-7dévny,”Apn and -ny, etc.; Plato commonly uses the form in -y, Xenophon that
in -nv, other writers both, without distinction; in words in -vns, the form in -vyy
is preferred to that in -vy. (The Gen. of ”Apns in good prose is “Apews [often in
Plato], yet in the poets “Apeos is also used according to the necessities of the
verse.) But in words in -«Ajs, the Acc. in -«Ajyv is first used in later writers.
The Pl. is declined according to Dec. I, e. g.’Apsoropdvat, rots Aewkpdtas, Tovs
‘Apirropdvas, Tos Anuoodévas ; still, ‘HpaxAées occurs in Pl. Theaet. 169, 6.

_ Rem. 3. The Gen. Pl. of tprfpns occurs, also, in the uncontracted form, viz.
tpinpéwy; but in all the other Cases it-is uniformly contracted; the Dual
also in words of this class occurs in an uncontracted form in Attic writers,
e. g. tvyyévec, and the Tragedians use the uncontracted forms of proper names

1 capé-os from capéc-os, the o of the stem being dropped; and so in the
other Cases, except the Nom. and Voc.

80 THIRD DECLENSION. [§§ 60, 61.

in -cAéns = KAjjs, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. ‘Hpaxdéns, Dat.
-kaéet, Voc. -kaees. The contract Acc. in -xAq is rare. The Voc. &“Hpaxaes,
as an exclamation, belongs to the later prose.

Rem. 4. The irregular accent of the Gen. Pl. and Dual is to be noted, viz.
Tpthpwy (instead of tpinpav from tpinpéwy), rprhpow (X. H. 1. 5, 19. 5. 4,56). In
addition to this word, adjectives in -y9ns and the word aidrdpxns, have the like
accent, €. g. cuvnSéwv = ouvhSwy, abtaprewy = abtdprwy.

§ 60. (2) Words in -os, Gen. -wos, and in -ws and -o,
Gen. -oos.
(a) -ws, Gen. -wos.
Thus, e. g. 6) Ics, jackal, Gen. Juéds, etc. Polysyllables have

the Ace. Sing. and Pl. either contracted or uncontracted, e. g.
6 Hpws, hero, Tov ypwa and jpw, Tovs jpwas and jpws.

(b) -ws and -w, Gen. -oos.

Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The
stem ends in-os. The short final vowel, according to $ 52, 2
(b), is lengthened into w. The ending -ws, however, is retained
in the Attic and Common language only in the substantive
aides (stem aidos), and in poetry in Hes, morning (in Eurip.);
but in all other words, it has been changed into a smoother
form, so that the Nom. ends in -o, e. g. nye (stem Hyxos). On
the Voe. in o@, see § 53,4 (3). The Dual and Pl. are formed
like the ending -os of Dec. IL; thus, aidoé, 7yoé, ete.

Sing. N. | 4 aiSdés (stem aidos), shame. 4 Axa (stem 4xos), echo.
G. | (aidd-os) aidods (nxd-0s) Hxovs
D.| (aidéd-z) aidot (ax6-t) Axot
A. | (aidd-a) aida (7xd-a) AX®@
V.| (aidd-i) aidor. (ax6-2) AX.

§61. (3) Words in -as, Gen. -aos, and in-os, Gen. -eos.
(a) -as, Gen. -aos.

Only the Neuters 76 céAas, light, and 76 dézas, goblet, belong to
this class: Gen. oéAa-os, Dat. céAa-i, and céA-a; Pl. céAa-a and
aé\-a, Gen. aedAd-wv, Dat. céd\a-or(v) ; Dual céda-¢, ceAcd-ow.

Remark 1. On the poetic shortening of the contract a, see § 54, Rem. 4.

In the following four Neuters in -as, the a in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, is
changed, according to Ionic usage, into the weaker e, viz.

§ 62.] THIRD DECLENSION. 81

Bpéras (poet.), image, Gen. Bpéreos, Pl. Bpérea and Bpérn, Bperéwy

k@as (poet.), place, Pl. in Homer, xdéea, ndeor(v).

oddas (poet.), ground, Gen. ovdeos, Dat. ofde¢ and ode (Hom.)

xvépas (poet. and prose), darkness, Gen. xvépaos Epic, cvépous Attic, cvépat

Epic, xvépq Attic.
(b) -os, Gen. -eos.

All substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom.,

e, the stem-vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o (§ 16, 1).

Sg. N. A. |7d yévos (instead of yéves), genus. 7d «Aéos (instead of Kées), glory.
G. | ( yéve-os) yévous (KA€e-os) kAéous
D.| (yéve-z) vyevet (xAée-i) Kréet
Plur. N.| (yéve-a) yen (KAée-a) KAGG.
G.| yevé-wy and = yevav (KAé-wv) kAe@v
D.} yéve-or(v) KAée-ot(v)
Dual. (yéve-e) yen (KA€e-€) KAEeN
(yevé-owv) "yevorv (kAe€-owv) kAcotv,

Rem. 2. On the contraction of ee into y (instead of «), and of ea into a
(instead of »), when a vowel precedes, see § 9, IJ. On the poetic shortening
of the contracted a in nAdéa, see § 54, Rem. 4.

Rem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. Pl. is not unusual, e. g. épéwy,
Beddwr, kepdéwv, and almost without exception avSdwy; in PI. Polit. 260, a., the
uncontracted Dual in ee occurs: tottw TH yévee. In the lyric portions of the
Attic tragedians, rdSea, &xea, etc. occur.

III. Worps IN -ts, -vs, -t, -v.
§ 62. (1) Words in -is, -is.

The substantives in -is, -is originally ended in -iFs, -vFs.
See § 25, 2.

Sing. N.| 6 xis, corn-worm. # ods, sow. 6 ixSis, fish.
G. Ki-ds oi-ds ixSv-os
Dz. Ki-t av-t ixsv-i
A. Ki cov ixdiv
V. Ki od ixsd
Plur. N. xl-es ov-es ixdi-es
G. ki-@y ov-@y ixSi-wv
D. xi-ol(v) gi-oi(v) ixsv-ou(v)
A. kl-as ov-as, Attic. cds ixd-as, Attic ixSis
Vv. kt-es ow-es ixdv-es
Dual. ki-e ov-e ( ixSw-e) ixsd
Ki-otv ob-oww ixSd-ow.

Remark. The contracted Nom. Pl. af &pxvs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9; 6, 2;
10. 2, 19.

82 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 63.

§ 63. (2) Words in -is, -t, -ts, -%.

The stem of these substantives ends intorv. The stem-
vowels s and v remain only in the Acc. and Voc. Sing.; in the
other Cases they are changed into « (§ 16,2). In the Gen.
Sing. and Pl., masculine and feminine substantives take the
Attic form in -ws and -wy, in which the w has no influence on
the accent (comp. § 29, Rem. 7). In the Dat. Sing. and in the
Nom. and Ace. Pl., contraction occurs.

Sing*N. | 4 wéAis, city. 6 wiixis, cubit. 7d clvari, mustard. 7d dor, city.
G. | adéAc-ws WHXE-wWS oImdTe-os dore-os
D.| ware THXEL owderet tore
A.| wéAw wHXUY olvam toru
‘V.! wdAt 7hXv olvamt dou
Plur. N.| adaAets TAXES rivarn torn =”
G.| wéAc-wy THX E-wY owamé-wy aor é-wy
D.! wéaAe-or(v) mhxe-ou(v) owdere-or(v) tore-oi(v)
A.| awéares WHXELS owdrn torn
V.| wéAes THXELS owdrn torn
Dual. mworeE-€ WHXE-€ owdare-€ tore-e
moA€-ow mNX€-Ow owameé-ow dor é-ov.

Remark 1. Here belong all substantives in -és, -ys, most in -o1s and many
others, e. g. 4 «dvs, dust; 6 uavtis, prophet ; m ddis, serpent; 4 mloris, faith;
vBpis, abuse; 6 wéAexvs, axe; 6 mpéaBus, old man; 7d wémepi, pepper; 7d Tvyyd-
Bap, cinnabar ; 7d wav (poet.), herd (without contraction). Adjectives in -is,
-eia, -¥ are declined in the Masc. and Neut. like rqxvs and &orv, except that the
Gen. Mase. takes the regular forms -éos, -éwy (not -ews, -ewr), e. g. HdUs, HdEos.

Rem. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the
Gen. in -eos, from substantives in -is, occurs, e. g. méAcos.

Rem. 3. In X. An. 4.7, 16, the contracted Gen. mnxév is found. Instead
of the Dual form in -ee, one in -7 is also used; likewise a form in -e (instead
of -ee), is quoted by the ancient grammarians from Aeschines. — The Acc. Pl.
of nouns in -vs sometimes occurs uncontracted in the Attic poets, e. g. rhxeas.

Rem. 4. Neuters in -: and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing. very seldom, e. g.
%orews, Eur. Bacch. 838 (831). Or. 761 (751).

Rem. 5. Adjectives in -is, -i, e. g. Ypis, pi, skilful, and some substantives
in -is, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection: t-os, tt, t-es, etc.,
or both forms together, e. g. ) uijivis, anger (also phvidos, etc.), 6 4 ols, sheep; 7d
meémept (Gen. -épios and -eos), pepper; 6 % wéptis, calf; 6 4 méo1s, spouse (Gen.
néowos, but Dat. always mdcet); 4 tpdms, keel (also rpdmidos, etc.); 4 Tupars,
tower (Gen. Trupoios,X. An. 7. 8, 12. ripow, ib. 13, but Plural Tupoes, TUPTETt,
etc.) ; 4 pdyadis (Gen. -10s, Dat. uayddt, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names,
e. g. Svévveois, “Ips (Gen. -ws, etc.), X. An. 1. 2,12; 6.2, 1 (5. 10, 1), finally
one noun in -is, # &yxeAvs, but only in the Sing.

“7

eo NS
+

$§ 64, 65.] THIRD DECLENSION. 83
Sing. N. | 4, 4 wépris, calf, h &yxedvs, eel. 6, 7 ois, sheep,
G. wépri-os éyx€Au-os oids
D. mépri-t and wéptt eyxeav-i oil
A: mwépry eyxeAuy oly
V. wéptt &yxeAv ols
Plur. N. wépti-es and mépris ey x€Aets oles
G. mwopti-wy eyxeA€-wy oidy
D. Hereel v) eyxeAe-or(v) oicl(v)
A. mopri-as and méptis = éyxéAets olas and ols
ys wlecees and wépris ey xéAets oles
Dual. | wépri-e eyxeAE-E ole
moptt-ow eyxerdé-ow oloty

Rem. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of ois : div, dies, dtwy, dias, and dis.

-

§ 64. Quantity of the Third Declension.

1. The inflection-endings -a, -1, -v, and -as, are short.

Exception: The ain the Acc. Sing. and Pl, of substantives in -eds is long,
e. g. Tov lepéa, Tobs iepéas from 6 fepeds, priest.

2. Words, whose Nom. ends in -af, -ié, -vt, -a), -w), -vy), -is, and -vs, have the
penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according as the
vowel of the above endings is long or short by nature ; a, «, v, are long in all
Genitives in -avos, -wvos, -uvos, e. g. 6 Sepak, breastplate, -axos ; 6 pip, reed, pimds ;
h aris, ray, -ivos, but 4 Barak, clod, -ixos, 4 éAmts, hope, -fd0s. See fuller
explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. § 291.

§ 65. Accentuation of the Third Declension.

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws
of accentuation (§ 30) permit, e. g. 7d mpayua, deed, rpdyparos (but mpayudrwr),
Td dvoua, name, dvouaros (but évoudtwr), 6 4 xedddv, swallow, xerrdbvos, Zevo-
Gv, -@vTos, -GyTes, -évtwy. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the
Paradigms.

2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the
final syllable; the long syllable wy and ow haying the cireumflex; the others,
the acute, e. g. 6 why, unvds, unvl, pnvoiy, unary, unot(r).

Exceptions:

(a) The following ten substantives are Paroxytones in the Gen. Pl. and Gen.
and Dat. Dual: 4 dds, torch; 5 duds, slave; 56 4 Sés, jackal ; rd) KPAX, poet.
(Gen. xpardés), head; 7d ods (Gen. ards), ear; 5 4 mats, child; 6 chs, moth; 5%
Tpés, Trojan, Trojan woman; 4 ods (Gen. pwdds), a burning; 7d pas (Gen.
pwrés), light; e. g. Sddwv, Sddov, Sdwv, xpdrwy, Srv, brow, waldwv, waldouw,
céwy, Tpdwy, pydwv, détwy (on the contrary, ray Suway from ai duwal, Tay
Tpwav from af Tpwal, trav pwrav from 6 és, man; trav Swav from 7 Swh,
injury).

84 THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 65.

(b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final syllable, are
either Properispomena. or Paroxytones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers,
as in the other Cases, e. g.7d Zap (Epic #p), spring; «jp (Epic from réap), heart ;
6 Ads (from Adas), stone; 5 rpdév (from mpndr), hill, e. g. jpos (rarer Zapos), Fpr
(rarer apt), K7jpos, Kijpt, AGos, Att, Adwy, mp@vos, Tart.

Remark. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal
rule (No. 2): oréap = ori, tallow; ardéaros = ornrds, ppéap, well, ppéaros and
gpntds, Pl. ppnrav, pat, OpHt, Opihixos = Opaxds, and Opnxds, ols, oids, oil,
olay, oici(y). zs

(c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun rfs; quis? retain the
accent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable; but the pronoun was and
6 Tidy is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing.; in the other Cases either a
Paroxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable,
e. g. pis, puvTos, dv, dvTos, byt, byTwy, oda1(yv), dvToW, tls, Tlyos, Tin, etc.; Tas,
mayrdés, waytl, mavTwy, wavTow, waot(y), 6 Tidy, Mavds, rots Maot(v).

8. The following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like
monosyllabic substantives :— |

(a) Ayu, wife (yuvands, yuvairl, yuvoukoiv, yuvardy, yuvoutl(y) ; but yuvai-
ka, ‘yuvaikes, etc.); 6 xvwy, dog (kuvds, xuvt, kuvoiy, kvvayv, kvol(v); but
Kiva, Kbves, etc.) ;

(b) Syncopated substantives in -np, on which see § 55, 2;

(c) Compounds of cfs, unus, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovdeis, ovdevds,
ovdert ; but ovdévwy, ovdéo1(v), SO undels, undevds, etc. ;

'(d) The Attic poetic forms, dopds, Sopt, from dépu.

4. For the accentuation of substantives in -is, -vs, Gen. -ews, see § 63; of
those in -é (§ 60), the irregular accentuation of the Acc. Sing. of jxda = Axd
(instead of #x@), should be noted.

5. (a) In the Voc. of syncopated substantives (§ 55, 2) in -np, the accent,
contrary to the principal rule, is drawn back as far as possible, e. g. é mdrep,
Svyarep, Afuntep, &vep; so also (a) in the following substantives; *AwéAAwy .
(wvos), Moce:dav (@vos), cwrhp (pos), "Audlwy (lovos), Sahp (pos); thus, @
“AmroAAov, Idoeidov, crep, “Audioy, Sep ;—(b) in compound substantives in
-wy, Gen. -ovos, in adjectives in -wy, Gen. -ovos, whether simple or compound ;
also in comparatives in -iwy, -wy (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the
neuter gender), e. g. "Aydueuvoy from ’Ayauduywy, "Apiordéyerroy from *Apioro-
vyelrwy (but Iacov, Madatuoy, S:Ajuov, etc. as simple); é and 7d evdamor, & and
7d éhéenuoy, ® and 7d xdAAuov; (the following are exceptions: @ Aaxedaiuoy from
Aakedaluwy, compounds in -dpwr, e. g. & Avxdppoy from Aveddpar, EVSdppoy from
Evsd¢pwr, & and 7d dalpporfrom datppwy ;) —(c) in the compound Paroxytones in
-ns, mentioned in § 59, e. g. Séxpares, Anudcdeves; & and 7d abdades from addSa-
dys, Pidandes from Pirarhans (but aranSés from adandjs as a simple), a¥rapxes,
kaxdnves. — (Adjectives and substantives in -w7s, -wdns, -wAns, -wpns, -npns, are
exceptions, e.g. edddns, edddes, Gupadns dupes, TavedAns TavGdes, vedpns vewpes,
Liphpns Eppes, H Tprhpns Tprjpes, Avépns @ Aiapes.

(b) The Voc. of nouns in -aus, -evs, -ovs, -w, and -ws is Perispomenon, e. g.
pad, Barired, Bod, Sampor, aidor.

ean ae ee ed

6 eet ea ee

$ 66.] THIRD DECLENSION. 85

$66. Gender of the Third Declension.

The natural gender—the masculine and feminine —is distinguished in the
third Declension, not by a special form, but partly by the signification, partly
by the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in
determining the gender :—

I. Masculines: (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized
by the Genitive) end in -ay, Gen. -dy-os; -wy, Gen. -ovr-os and -wyt-os ; -iv,
Gen. -dv-os (only 6 pooaty, tower); -ers, Gen. -ev-os (only 6 Krels, comb) ; -as,
Gen. -ayr-os; -ous, Gen. -ovt-os, -ouvt-os, -od-os (6 mods); -wp, Gen. -op-os; -evs,
Gen. -ews ; -ns, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs; -ws, Gen. -w-os ;

(B) the following with exceptions :—

(a) in -nv, Gen. -nvos; but 6 4 xhv, goose; —in -yv, Gen. -ev-os ; but 6 7 adqr,

gland, and 4 piv, diaphragm ;

(b) in -wy, Gen. -wy-os; but 4 &Awv, threshing-floor ; ) BAhXwv or yAhxer,

penny-royal ; percdéy (poet.), care; 7) uhkwv, poppy; m mAaraydéyv, rattle
(but 6 A. petal of the poppy) ; ) Tphpwvr, pigeon; 7 adiAdy (poet., but prose
6), ravine; % 6 nédwyr bell ;

(c) in np, Gen. -np-os ; but 4 «hp, fate (on account of % «hp, goddess of fate) ;
5 % paorhp, hammer ; (those in -np contracted from -eap, are neuter: 7d
kip (poet.), Gen. xfjpos, heart; Td gap, Gen. hpos, spring ;)— in -yp, Gen.
-pos; but 7 yaorhp, yarrpds, belly ; —in -np, Gen. -ep-os; but 6% aidip,
ether ; 5% &hp, air;

(d) in -ep, Gen. -erp-os; but 4 xefp, hand (regularly, 6 dvrtxeip, the thumb) ;

(e) in -wp, Gen. -wp-os ; but 7d €Awp (poet.), booty ; 7d wéAwp (poet.), monster ;

(f) in -ovs, Gen. -o-os, see § 57, Rem. 4;

(g) in -ws, Gen. -wr-os; but 7d pas, light;

(h) in -¥, Gen. -rros, -Bos.

Il. Feminines: (A) all nouns in -ds, Gen. -dd-os; -ers, Gen. -e:d-os (only 7
kAels, key); -avs, Gen. -a-os; -ws, Gen. -wd-os; -vys, Gen. -vvS-os; -ns, Gen.
-nt-os; -ts, Gen. -rr-os (only xdpis); -vs, Gen. -vd-os and -vd-os; -é and -ds,
Gen. -6-os ;

(B) the following nouns with exceptions : —

(a) in -ts, Gen. -t-os; but 6 xdAts, pure wine; b-pdAnis, a part of a ship; 6
&pris, carpenter's tool; 6 xis, corn-worm; 6 yAdus, a kind of fish; 6 xis
(Epic), lion, and 6 % ols, sheep ; —in -ts, Gen. -ews, but 5 dpxis, testicle (4
bpxis, a kind of olive); 6 dqus, serpent; 6 (later also H) fxs, viper; 6 (later
h) xépts, bug ; of and ai xbpBes, law-tables ; — in -is, Gen. -13-0s; but 6 pSdis,
-t5os, a kind of cake; % 6 thypis, Gen. -tos and -idos, tiger ; —in -is, Gen.
-w-os ; but 6 pms, bird ; —in -is, Gen. -iv-os; but 5 deAgls, dolphin; 4
ixris, weasel ; 6 4 Sts,-heap ; 6 treAuls, marsh-mud ;

(b) in -vs, Gen. -v-os; but 6 Bédrpus, cluster; 5 Spivus, footstool ; 6 ixSvs, fish;
6 pis, mouse ; 5 véxus, corpse; 6 ordxus, ear of corn; 5 oxdddus, mode of
tonsure ; 6 tipus, the night-mare ; 5 xdvbdus,a Median garment ; 6 4 is or ods,

8

86 | THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 67.

swine ; 6 weddvopus, tun-fish; 4 (later also 6) &yxeAus, eel ; 6 xpeuvs, a sea-
Jish ; —in -vs, Gen. -ews ; but 6 wéAexus, axe; 6 wixus, cubit ;

(c) in -wy, Gen. -ov-os; but 6 &xuwv, anvil; 6 mplwy, saw; 6 navdy, rule; 6
ttwv, axle; 5 celawv, earthen-vessel ; 5 émoclwv, flag; 6 % Kiwv, pillar; 6
KAadév and axpéuwr, bough; 6 Awydv, guf; 6 wrayer, doll ; 6 wupyndar,
ant’s nest ; 6 H &Aextpuay, cock and hen.

Remark 1. Nouns in -¢ are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those
in -at (Gen. -dxos), which are masculine ; most of those in -f are feminine; the
larger part of those in - are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. 4 KaAad-
pow, -omos, shepherd’s crook ; 4: AaiAa), tempest; 7% dp (vox), dmds, voice ; 7H (rarely
6) dw, ards, face; 4 pry, PrAcBéds, vein ; | xXEpvup, holy-water ; 4 KaTHAup, -tpos,
upper story, etc.

III. Neuters: (A) all in -a, Gen. -ar-os; -n, Gen. -nt-os (only 7d Kdpn) ; -t,
Gen. -it-os (only 7d wéAr with its compounds) ; -vp, Gen. -vp-os (only 7d zip, Gen.
mup-ds, fire); -ap, Gen. -ar-os or -np, Gen. -nt-os; -op, Gen. -op-os ; -as, Gen. -ar-os ;
-os, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs; -1, Gen. -eos ; -v, Gen. -v-os, and -eos, and -ar-os, § 68, 1 ; —

(B) the following with exceptions: (a) -ap, Gen. -ap-os; but 6 dp, star-
ding; (b) -as, Gen. -a-os; but 6 Ads, stone ; (c) -wp, Gen. -ar-os (except 6 ) axde,
ixap, €orwp, HA€KTwp, § 68, 15).

Rem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition: 7 dals, Gen.
dait-ds, feast ; Td orats or orals, oratds, dough; rd obs, Gen. wT-ds, ear.

$67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declension.

All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and
analogies above given, are included under the irregular substan-
tives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the third
Dec. may be divided into three classes : —

(a) The first class includes those substantives whose Nom. cannot be derived,
according to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. 7 yuvh, wife, Gen.
yuvaix-ds.

(b) The second class includes those substantives, which, with one Nom.
form, have in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation; both of these,
however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the
Nom., e. g. 6 4 dps, Gen. -idos, bird, Pl. dpudes and vpveis, as if from spus,
Gen. -ews. These substantives are called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declen-
sions or irregularly declined).

(c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit,
in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be
derived from the Nom. form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom.
form, e. g. Sepdrwyr, -ovros, servant, Acc. Sepdmovra and poet. Sépama, as if from
Sépay. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan-
tives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case,
is called the Theme.

an pate

$68.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD DEC. 87

§68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion.
1. T'dvv (70, knee), and Sdpv (rd, spear), see § 54 (c).

In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yotvara and ‘yodva, yotvaci, occur ;
also in the Attic poets, the Gen. dopés, Dat. Sopi, and even dépe:, and
Pl. 3ép7n instead of ddpara, are formed from Sépv; and in the phrase, dopi
éAciv, to take a prisoner of war, this Dat. form is retained even by the Attic
prose writers.

2. Tuvy (9, woman), Gen. yvvaix-ds (as if from yivag), Dat.
yovaix-i, Acc. yuvaix-a, Voc. yivar; Pl. yuvaikes, yuvatxdv, yovarki (v),
yvvaixas; on the accentuation, see § 65, 3 (a).

3. Adpv, see yovr, No. 1.

4. Zevs, Gen. Aws, Dat. Ad, Acc. Ada (as if from Ais), Voce.
Zed.

Poet. corresponding forms are Znvés, Znvl, Zijva.

5. @cpadzwv (6, servant), -ovros. In Eurip. Acc. Jépamra, Pl.
Sépares, § 67 (c).

6. Kdpa (70, head), an Epic and poetic word, Gen. xpar-ds,
Dat. xparé and xdpg, Acc. 7d xdpa, Td Kpara (Tov Kpara, § 214);
Acc. Pl. rots xparas, § 67 (c).

7. Kreis (4, key), Gen. xr«d-ds, Dat. cred-i, Acc. wr<iv (§ 53,
Rem. 1), later xAeida; Pl. Nom. and Acc. xAcis, and xkAcides,
kAcidas, § 67 (b).

Old Attic, xArjs, KAndéds, KAndl, KApsa.

8. Kiwyv (6, 9, dag), Gen. xvv-ds, Dat. xuvi, Acc. xiva, Voc. xiov ;
Pl. Kives, KuvOv, Kvoi, Kivas.

9. Aiwa (70, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the
phrases, drciparJar dim’ eAaiw, xpioar and xpicacIat Aim’ eat, and
s, also in the Attic prose, dArcipeo Jat, xpico Jar Aiwa; Aira is thus
an abridged Dat. instead .of Aiai, Aira, from 7d Aura, Gen. -aos,
but €Aatov must be considered as an adjective from éAda, olive,
so that Aira éAavov means olive-oil.

10. Mdprvus (6, witness), Gen. pdprupos, Dat. pdpropi, Acc.
pdprupa, and in Simonides pdpruv; Dat. Pl. pdpriox (v).

11. Nats (%, ship), Gen. veds, Dat. vyi, Acc. vatv, Voc. want-
ing; Dual, Gen. and Dat. veoty (Nom. and Acc. wanting); Pl.
vies, veov, vavoi (v), vads. Comp. ypads, § 57.

In Attic poets and later prose also, vnds, val, vija, etc.

88 . DEFECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. [§ 69.

12. "Opis (6, }, bird), Gen. dpvid-os, etc. The Pl. has a col-
lateral form declined like dds, except the Dat.: dpvides and
dpveis, dpvidwov and épvewy, dpvicr, dpvitas, dpvers, and dpvis, § 67 (Db).
So *Avdxapots, “Avaxdpowdos, and *Avaxdpceus.

In the Attic writers, the : is sometimés short, dpvis, dpvivy, Aristoph. Av. 16.
270, 335 (but dpvis, dpviv, 70, 103, 73).

13. Ilvvé (%, place of meeting), Gen. muxv-ds, Dat. ru«vi, Acc.
TUKVO..

14, Sys (6, moth), Gen. ce-ds; Pl. cées, Gen. céwy, etc. ; in the
later writers, Gen. o7rds.

15. Sxwp (7d, dirt), Gen. oxards, etc., and $30p p (ro, water),
Gen. véaros, etc. 'To both of these belong: —

16. Ppéap (70, a well), and oréap (70, tallow), Gen. -éaros and
-ytés (a long in Attic, short in Epic).

17, BIdis, PIois (6, art of cooking), Gen. dJo-ds and (from
piots) Poid-os; Pl. dIdeas and PJoides.

18. Xods (6, a measure), xods, xot, Xovv, xdEs, XoBV, Xoval, xdas
like Bots (§ 57); also Gen. xod@s, Ace. xoa, Acc. Pl. yoas, as if
from xoev’s. The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ;
xovs, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like Bois.
The form xoev’s is Ionic, Dat. xoet.

19. Xpos (6, skin), xpwr-ds, xpwri, xpora. Collateral forms in
the Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, are, Gen. xpo-ds, xpoi, xpda,
like aiddés. The Dat. yp6 is found in certain phrases with &,
e. g. v xp@ keipeoSar, Xen. Hell. 1. 7, 8. Evpet ev xp@, wt shaves close
to the skin, 1t comes home, Soph. Aj. 786.

§69. Defective Nouns of the Third Declension.

Some nouns of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and
are, consequently, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan-
tives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g.

Xpéws (7d, debt), Ionic-Attic form for the Nom., Gen., and Acc.; also 7d
xpéos, Gen. xpéous, Pl. ra xpéa, Gen. xpeav; the Dat. and Dual are wanting ;
évap and trap (only as Nom. and Acc.), in dreaming and waking ; dpedos (only
as Nom. and in the construction of the Acc. with the Inf.), advantage; uddn
only in the phrase id udans, under the arm.

§§ 70, 71.] REDUNDANT NOUNS.—HETEROCLITES. 89

REMARKS ON THE DECLENSIONS.
§70. L Redundant Nouns.

Nouns are called Redundant, which have two modes of
inflection in all or in most of the Cases: —

A. They belong to the same declension,

(a) of the same gender, e. g.

6 Aews and Adds, people; 6 veds and vads, temple; 6 Aayds and Aayds, hare ;
5 xddAws, rope, Pl. also ndéAor; 7 GAws, threshing-floor, Pl. also af GAo.; 4 Topyé
and Topydyv.

(b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g.

6 v@ros and 7d v@rov, back (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the
only proper form, still rby v@rov Xen. R. Equ. 3, 3); 6 vyds and 7d (uydy, yoke.
— In the PI. the neuter form of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently
used, e. g. 6 otros, T& oira; of Secuol, and more commonly T& decud; 6 cradpuds,
a station, balance, of eraSpot and ra cradtpud, stations, and ra oraSyd, sometimes
also balances ; of (uvyol does not probably occur.

B. To different declensions, and commonly of different gen-
ders (heterogeneous), e. g.

5 p&dyyos and 4 pSoyyn, voice; 5 x@pos and 7 xépa, space; % BxSm and 6
’xS0s, rising ground ; 4 Siva and 7d Silos, thirst ; 4 vdawrn (the older form). and 7d
vamos, valley, etc. It should be observed farther, that the word 6 xpéaBus, elder,
has only Acc. mpéoBuy, Voc. mpéoBu; these three forms are almost entirely
poetic (xpeoBirepos and mpecBvraros formed from this, are in frequent use) ;
in the Common Language, 6 rpeoBirns, -ov, elder; in the meaning of messenger,
envoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing. 6 mpeoBeuvrhs, -od ; but in the
Pl. of and rods mpéoBes, mpéoBewy, mpéoBeor; also, Td Sdxpvoy and +d Sdxpu,
tear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat.
Pl. Sdipvor is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75; Dem. c. Onet.
I. § 32).

§71. IL Heteroclites.

Heteroclites [§ 67 (b)] have two modes of formation ; they
are either of the third Dec., which have been already presented
together (§ 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif-
ferent declensions are, e. g. as follows: —

A. Of the First and Third Declension.

Several substantives in -ys are inflected, either in whole or in

part, according to the first and third declensions : —

(a) Some in -ys, Gen. -ov and -yros, through all the Cases according to both
8*

90 THIRD DEC.— METAPLASTS. [§ 72.

declensions: 6 wixns, mushroom, Gen. uteov and pixntos, and some proper
names, e.g. Xdpys. The name @aadjjs, in the old Attic, has the Ionic Gen.
form @dAew, Dat. @aap, Acc. @adrjy; in the later writers, @aAod and @dAyros,
@dAnr: and @dAnta. Observe that the accent is drawn back on @dAew.

(b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Rem. 2, have 7 as well as ny in the
Acc. Sing. only.

B. Of the Second and Third Declensions.

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions: several
substantives in -os, as masculine, are inflected according to the
second Dec., but as neuter, Rccoreing to the third Dec., e. g.
and 76 OXS; chariot, rod é6xov and dxovs, Tov Sxov and 7d dxos; 6
and 76 OKOTOS, darkness.

(b) Of the contract second and third declensions : —

ei

apdxoos (7, watering-pot), Att. xpéxous, Gen. mpdxov, etc., Dat. Pl. mpéxover
(like Bods, Bovaty).
Oidirovs, Gen. Oidfrodos and (poet.) Oid{rov, Dat. Oidimrod:, Acc. Oidiroda and
. OiSimrovv, Voc. Oidimov.

(c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : —

In the Acc. Sing., 6 yéAws, laughter, yéAwtos, yéAwtit, Acc. yéAwra and
yéAwy, and the three following: mdrpws, patruus, whrpws, avunculus, and
Mivws, which, in the Gen. and Acc. Sing., are inflected according to the third
Dec. and the Attic second Dec.; in the other Cases, according to the third
Dec.

mdrpws, Gen. rdérpw and mdtpwos, Dat. rdtpat, Acc. mdrpwy and matpwa;
Mivws, Gen. Mivw and Mivwos, Dat. Miva:, Acc. Mivw (§ 48, Rem. 1), Mivwy
and Mivwa.

§ 72. Ill. Metaplasts.

Metaplasts [§ 67 (c)] like Heteroclites, have two modes of
formation; they are either of the third declension, which have
been already presented together (68), or of two different declen-
sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows :—

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions :—

A évipoy (7d, tree), Gen. dévdpov, etc.; but in the Dat. Pl. among the Attic
writers, 5évdpec: (from the stem tb AENAPOS) and dévdpois ; the first form is
regarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms
7@ dévdpe and 7& dévdpn, which occur in the Attic poets, and in later prose
writers.

Ko.vwyds (4, partaker), Gen. xowwvod, etc.; Xenophon uses the forms ot
kowaves and Tovds kowavas (from KOINQN).

i i i el ee ee

¢ 73.] INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91

Kplvov (rd, lily) Gen. xplvov, ete., with the secondary form in the Dat. Pl.
xplveo in Aristoph. from the Pl. xpfvea (in Herod.). Comp. dévdpor.

Aas (6, stone), Gen. Ados and in Soph. O. C, 196. Adov.

‘O Bverpos [and poetic 7d bv erpov], dream, Gen. dvelpov and dvelparos.

Tip (1d, fire), rupés. But Pl, 7a wupd, watch-fires, according to the second
Dec.
‘tds (6, son), Gen. viod, etc. Together with this formation, there is another
according to the third Dec., much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from
the theme “TIETS, Gen. vigos, Dat. vie? (Acc. vida is rejected); Pl. vies, Gen.
vidwy, Dat. vigor, Acc. (viéas), Attic viets (§ 57, Rem. 1); Dual, viée, Gen.
vigow.

(b) Of the Attic second and third declensions : —

The three substantives, 4 &Aws, threshing-floor ; 5 tabs, peacock; and 6 tudés,
whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic
second declension, another according to the third declension, in -wvos, etc., e. g.
Tupa@va.

Remark. The words 7 &Aws and 6 rads are generally declined accord-
ing to the Attic second Dec., Acc. Sing. GAwy, tady; still, the y is commonly
rejected from &Aws in the Acc., § 48, Rem.1. But the forms dawvos, ddwves,
Grwor(v), Tad, Taa@ves, Ta@ow, etc., are used on account of their greater

perspicuity.

§73. Indeclinable and Defective Nouns.

1. Substantives which do not vary the termination, but retain in all the Cases
the form of the Nom., are called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, as
5 ’ABpadu, tod "ABpadu, and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable
nouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially :—

(a) The names of the letters, e. g. 7d, Tod, TE, BAGa ;

(b) Most of the cardinal numbers, e. g.5éxa avdpar ;

(c) Td, rod, 7G, xpedy, necessity, destiny, and Séus with éorly and elvya, and

several foreign words, e. g. 7d, Tod, TE wdoxa;

(d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. 7d, rod, TG ypdpew.

2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the Pl. Such
words may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, either
in the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 aidhp, ether; of érnota,
the Etesian wind ; ai ASiva, Athens ; ra’OAbpmia, the Olympic games. Comp.
further, Syntax, § 243.

3. It has been already noted, § 69, that some substantives are found only in
single Cases (Defectiva casu).

92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [§§ 74, 75.

CHAPTER IL.
The Adjective and Participle.

§74. Gender and Declension of the Adjective
and Partictiple.

1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive,
have three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with
the gender of their substantive. But all adjectives have
not separate forms for the three genders; many have but
two endings, one for the Masc. and Fem., the other for the
Neuter, e.g. 6 cappov avip, 7) coppav yury, TO cHPpov
téxvov. Several, indeed, have but one ending, commonly
used only for the Masec.and Fem. See § 80, e. g. 6 duyas
avip, ) puyas yuvy.

2. In Adjectives and Participles of three endings, the
Masc. and Neuter belong to the same declension (second or
third), and the Neuter is like the Masc. in the Gen. and
Dat.; the Fem. is always of the first Dec.

Remark 1. Hence, in an Adjective in -os of three endings, the Mase. is
declined like Adyos (§ 46), the Fem. like Sten or ond (§ 44), and the Neut.
like otrov (46).

Rem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few
points from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may
be remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the
Voce. of the third Dec. like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5.

§75. Accentuation of Adjectives and Participles.

The accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that
of Substantives, with a few exceptions, which are now to be
noted : —

1. The Fem. is accented on the same syllable as the Mase. through all the
Cases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. adds, Kadrh, KaAddy ;
KodHos, Kovpn, Kodpoy; xaples, xapleaoa, xapley; méAas, méeAauva, eda ; TEpHY,
Tépewa, Téepev; Bapis, Bapeia, Bapb; Bovretous, Bovdcioaca, Bovdcioay: TiwWels,
Tien, TUEY.

§75.] ACCENTUATION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 93

Remark 1. In adjectives in -os, -n, -ov, or -os, -d, -ov, the Fem., on account
of the length of the final syllable (n, 4), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc.
is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, ¢. g. dv8pémiwos, avSpwrlyn, av3pd-
mivov; ededdepos, edevdépa, erevSepov; Kodpos, Kovpn, Kovpoy; arovdaios, orov-
dala, erovdaioy; but, when the final syllable in the declension is short, it again
takes the accentuation of the Masc., i. e. it becomes again a Proparoxytone, or
a Properispomenon, e. g. dvdpémwa, cdcdSepat, xodpat, omovdaia, like avSpém-
vot, CAeddepa, Kodpot, omovdaior. Hence the difference between ‘Pdéd:ai, AdKiat
einen as adjectives, and ‘Podfia:, Avxfas, as substantives, according to

45, 6.

2. Participles accent the same syllable in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc.,
when the nature of the syllable permits, e. g.

madevwy, matdevor TiLhow, TiULATOV
Pirav, ptrovv ure, Aumwoy.

Rem. 2. Yet Adjectives sometimes deviate from this rule, see § 65, 5.

_ 3. Contracts in -ois, -7, -odv, from -eos, -éa, -eov, dos, -dn, or da, -dov (except
the Nom. and Acc. Dual Masc. and Neuter, which are Oxytones, § 49, 3), are
Perispomena through all the Cases and Numbers, though the uncontracted
forms of those in -eos are Proparoxytones, e. g. dpybpeos = apyupois, dpytpeov
= dpyvpody. On contracted compounds in -oos, -oov, e. g. etvous, edvouy, see
§ 49, 3.

4. Barytone feminines of adjectives and participles, whose Masc. is of the
third declension, are Perispomena [§ 45, 6 (b)] in the Gen. PL, but all the
other Cases retain the accent of the Masc., e. g.

Bapis, -cia, -0 Gen. Pl. Bapéwy, Baperav.

xaptes, -leroa, -lev “ xapievtwy, Xaprecoay

péAas, wéAauva, wera me MeAdvwy, meAaLV@YV

Tas, Tara, Way = TdvTw@V, TAT@V

Tupsels, -cioa, -ér « Tuprxévtwy, TUPFErgay

ripas, Tipaoa, Thay & Tuldytwv, Tupacay; but,
avSpémwos, -lyn, -wvov * &vdpwmrlywy, as Masc., F., and N.
edcddepos, -€pa, -epov “s éAevdsépwr, as Masc., F., and N.
Tumréuevos, -évn, -evov = TumrTopévwy, as Masc., F., and N.

Rem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable was, and of monosyllabic
participles in the Gen. and Dat., see § 65, 2 (c).

Rem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives,

the following things are to be noted: —

(a) Those in -os, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjective,
follow the general rule [§ 30, 1, (c)], and are Proparoxytones, e. g. @iAd-
texvos (from réxvoy), méykaxos (from xdxos). But if the last part is
formed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g.
Yuxoroumds, pedorods, Sevwxds, S5nyds ; but those with a short penult,
are commonly Paroxytones, if they have an active sense, but if a passive,
Proparoxytones, e. g.

AtSoBdAros, one casting stones ; AtSdBodros, cast down by stones ;
Entpoxrdvos, matricide ; kntpéxrovos, slain by a mother ;
Snpotpdpos, nourishing wild beasts; snpdrpopos, nourished by wild beasts.

Words compounded with prepositions, a privative and intensive, ed and

94 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [f 76.

dus, and Get, &yav, api, apr, epi, Tut, (a, av, and qoAv, are always Pro-
paroxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a
,_ short penult. .
(b) Verbal adjectives in -réds remain Oxytones, even in compounds, if they
have rie) endings, but are Proparoxytones, if they have but two. See
§ 78, I. (c).
(c) All compounds in -rA7E, -pat, -rpdt, -opdt, are Oxytones.

SuMMARY OF THE ADJECTIVE AND PARTICIPLE ENDINGS.

§76. lL Adjectives and Participles of three

Endings.
I. -os, -», -ov: Nom. ayadds, aryash, dyaddy, good,
; Gen. ayasod, ayasis, Gryasov
Nom. byd5o0s, éyd6n, bySoor, eighth,
Gen. Pl. dyidwr, byddwr, byddwy. (§ 75, 4.)

Nom. +ypapduevos, ypapouevn, ‘ypadduevoy
Gen. Pl. ypapouévwy, ypahouévwy, ypapouevwv

‘os, -d, -ov: Nom. dixatos, dicala, Slaov, just,
Gen. dixalov, dixalas, dixatouv
Gen. Pl. d:xalwv, dixalwy, Sixalwy
Nom. exSpes, éxdpa, éxSpédv, hostile,
Gen. exSpev, exapas, EXD pov
Nom. &Spdos, &dpda, &dpdov, full,
Gen. aSpdou, adpdas, &Spdou
Gen. Pl. adpdwr, &dpdwv, &Spdwv.

Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Fem. ends in a, when pre-
ceded by: or p, § 43,1. Still, adjectives in -oos have -da in the Fem., when p
precedes o, otherwise, -én, e. g. aSpdéa, yet dy5én. On the accentuation of
adjectives in -os, -y (a), -ov, see § 75.

Adjectives in -eos, -éa, -eov, which denote the material, e. g. xpiceos,
golden ; apydpeos, silver; xepdueos, earthen; and multiplicative adjectives in
-d0s, -6n, -d0v, &. g. amddos, single; durAdos, double, are contracted. On the
accentuation of those in -eos, -éa, -eov, see § 75, 3, and on the contraction of
those in -éa into -a, -dn into -%, and -da into -a, see § 9, IL.

xpUo-eos, Xpuo-ea, xpvo-eov
Xpus-ous, Xpuo-7, Xpuo-ovv
€pé-eos, épe-€a, épé-eov
épe-ous, épe-a, épe-ovv
apytp-eos, _— dipyup-&a, dipytp-eov
a&ipyup-ovs, apyup-a, &pryup-ovv
dimA-dos, durA-dn, - durA-dov
diwA-ovs, diwd-H, diA-ovr.

Remark 1. Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prose, not unfre-
quently in the Tragedians, e. g. xpioea, Xen. Ag. 5,5; yet dSpdos, -d4, -d oy,
crowded, is rarely found contracted ; dix pdos, -64, -do0yv, two-pronged, is com-
monly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., dicpods, diucpodv, but in the Fem. the
uncontracted form is usual, 7 d:xpda; 8ydoos is always uncontracted.

Il. -és, -e7, -¥: Nom. —-yAuxds, yAuceia, yAuKd, sweet,
Gen. yAukéos, yAukelas, yAuKéos
Gen. Pl. gAunéwy, yAvxciayv, yAveéwy (§ 75, 4.)

a

es,

5 - i
§76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES Vdlebs ENDINGS. 95
Cc) 7

The declension of the Mase. is like rixus, tho ith the common. ewvishios
in -éos, -éwv; the declension of the Neut. is like &erv, XS U tsected in

the Pl. (-éa). The only deviations from the regular a are, ijpiovs,
jyuloea, hur, half; Shadvs, Shae, Sav, female ; mpéxBus, old (used only in the
Masc.), and some poetic forms. Aus is sometimes used as feminine in Homer
and iv the Tragedians.

Rem. 2. The adjective #uc:ovs, in the Attic writers, has both the contracted
and uncontracted forms in the Acc. Pl., jnuloes and jyutoeas; also the Neut.
juloea is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the contracted form
julon. Sometimes the Ionic Fem. form -éa occurs, e. g. mAaréa, X. R. Equ. 1,
14. (in all MSS.) juloeas, Pl. Menon. 83, c. in the best MSS.

Ill. -is, -toa, -bv: Nom. dexvis, Sexvioa, Seuxviv, showing,
Gen. decxvivros, dexvions, dexviyros
Gen. Pl. deiKxvivtwy, dexvucdy, Seuxvivrwy (§ 75, 4.)
Nom. gus, pica, piv, produced,
Gen. givtos, pions, pivros |§ 65, 2 (c).]
Gen. Pl. dtvtwy, puody, pivrwr.

So the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -w:. For the de-
clension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d).

IV. -ers, -eooa,-ev: Nom. xaples, xapleroa, xaplev, lovely,

Gen. xapleyvros, xapiéoons, xaplevros
Gen. Pl. xapievtwy, xapiecoaGy, xapievTwr.

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), the only difference
being that the Dat. Pl. ends in -eo1, not -e1ot, e. g. xapleor.— The Mase. and
Neut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Fem. a Proparoxytone; yet the
ancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of xapfeis should be accented on
the antepenult, hence xdpiev.

Rem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -je:s, -heowa, -Hev, and -ders, -dea-
oa, -éev, admit contraction, e. g.

Nom. tiph-eis, Tywh-eooa, Tij-ev, honored,
TIMHS, THTTA, TYLHY

Gen. Tipivros, tiuhoons, TyhvTos

Nom. pedrrd-eis, wedrtd-eooa, medrtd-ev, honeyed,
MeALTOUS, MEALTOVTOA, mEeALTODY

Gen. pedrodyTos, peAtrovoons, MeAtTobrTOS.

V. -els, -eToa, -év: Nom. AcipSels, AcipSeioa, Acipdéy, relictus,
Gen. AeipSévros, AcipSelons, AeupSevros
Gen. PL. AadSérvrwr, Acipdeicav, AaupSévtwy
Nom. Tidels, TIDEioa, TISEY, placing,
Gen. TisévTos, TIWElons, TEVTOS.

For the declension of the Mase. and Neut., see § 54 (d), and also in the Dat.
PL. ¢. g. rupdeiot. So likewise the first and second Aor. Pass. Participle, and
the Pres. and second Aor. Active Part. of riSnus and tu, e. g. iels, letra, iv,
els, cioa, Ev, Sels, Sioa, Sev.

VI. -Gs, -atvd,-iv: Nom. péAds, wédawa, pérdar, black,
Gen. méAGvos, weAalyns, méAdvos
Gen. Pl. peddvwy, wedaway, peddvwr.

In the same manner only tdAas, tdAcuwva, réddy, unhappy, the feminine Voc.
of which has also rdAay. For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54
(d), with Rem. 6.

96 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [§ 76.
VI. -Gs, -ioa, -iv: Nom. mwas, naca, ray, all, every,
Gen. mavTés, TaonS, TWavTOS

Gen. Pl. wdvrwv, wacav, rdyTov.

In the same manner only the compounds of was, e. g. dwas (Gxaca, dav),
ciunas, mpdmas, etc.; these compounds have a short a in the Neut., in dac-
tylic and anapestic verse. See § 54 (d), for the declension of the Mase. and

eut., and § 65, 2 (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen.
and Dat. Pl. and Dual.

VIII. -ds, -dod, -iv: Nom. = Aehipdis, Achpaod, Actpay, having left,
Gen. AchPavros, Acupdons, AelayTos
Gen. Pl. Aewdvrwy, Acupaoay, AenpdvTwr.

So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part. of
Yornust: tords, -Goa, -dv; ords, -ioa, -dv. For the declension, see § 54 (d).

IX. -nv, -erva, -ev: Nom. Tépny, Téepewa, Tépev (poetic), smooth,
en. Tépevos, Tepelyns, Tépevos
Gen. Pl. repévwy, tepewayv, Tepevwr.

No other adjective is thus declined. For the declension, see § 55, 1. —

X. -obs, -odca, -dv: Nom. didovs, Sid0vca, Siddv, giving,
Gen. dddvros, ddodons, d:ddvros
Gen. Pl. d:d6yrwv, didovcGv, SddvTwv.

Thus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (Sods, Sodca, dév, Gen.
ddvros, Sovons, Gen. Pl. Fem. dovedyv) of verbs in -wys

XI. -éy, -otoa, -dv: Nom. éxdy, éExovoa, éxdy, willing,
Gen. éxdvros, éxotvons, ExdvTos
Gen. Pl. éxdvtwy, éxovcady, éxdvTwr.

Thus only the compound déxwy, commonly ukwy, txovoa, dxov. For the
declension, see § 54 (d).

XII. -wy, -ovcd, -ov: Nom. Aclrwv, Aclrove'a, Actrov, leaving,
Gen. Aelrovros, Aeitobons, AelwrovTos
Gen. Pl. Aeurévrwy, Actrovady, AerrdyTwy.

So also the Pres., Fut., and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a
different accentuation: -éy, -odca, -dv, e. g. Aimady, -odca, -dv. For the declen-

sion, see § 54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract
verbs in -dw, -€w, and -da, e. g.

Nom. timay, -Goa, -dv Nom. iA@y, -otca, -ovv
Gen. tuavTos, -dons, -@vros Gen. Pl. pidobytwr, -ovedr, -obyTwr.
Gen. Pl. trindytwv, -woay, -dvtwv. Nom. picdav, -ovoa, -odv

Gen. Pl. picSobvtwy, -ovear, -obvTwr.

The Fut. Act. Part. of Liquid verbs is declined like g:AGv, pirotca, pidodr,

Gen. pidodyros, etc., &. g. omEpay, -otca, -ody (formed from o7epéwy, etc.), from
otrelpw, to sow.

XU. -ds -via -ds: Nom. — rerupds, rerupvia, rerupds, having struck,
Gen. TeTupdtos, TeTupulas, TeTUPsTOS
Gen. Pl. retupdérwv, tetupuidy, TeTupstar.

On the form éords, -éoa, éords and -éds, etc., see below, § 193, Rem. 2 and 3.

97

§ 77.] ADJECTIVES. — PARADIGMS.

XIV. The adjectives, wéyas, wey dan, méya, great, rorAbs, TOAAR,
moAv, much, are irregular in the Nom., Acc., and Voc. of the Mase. and Neut.
Sing.; the other parts are regular; but even roAA¢év instead of woAdy or road,
occurs in the Attic poets; Aesch. S. 824, uses the Voc. wéyadre; mpGos,
wpacta, tpaoy, soft, is also irregular; it has, throughout the Fem., in the
PIL. and Dual Neut., as also in the Gen. Pl. Masce., and sometimes, also, in the
other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like mpaiis, -eia, -¥ (comp. yAutis, -eia, -v),
which occurs in the Dialects. See the Paradigm.

§77. Paradigms.

S.N. layad-ds ayad-h = &ryaS-dv, good|piAr-os parla plat-ov, lovely
G. |@yad-00 ayaS-js ayad-od piAt-ov piat-as guaAl-ou
D. |ayaS-@ ayad- OC ayad-@ prl-@ piat-a pirl-w
A. |ayad-dy Gyad-qy — bryad-dy pirt-ov giarl-ay — lator
V. |dyad-€ = dyad-h = dryad-ov pirr-e pial-& plat ov
P.N. |ayaS-of adyad-al ayad-d pirs-or lara lara
G. |ayad-Gv aGyaS-av ayd3-av pirl-wv prlt-wv piaAl-wy
D. \ayaS-ots GryaS-ais dyad-ots piAl-ors gpirlt-as iAt-ors
A. |ayaS-obs dyad-ds Gryad-d guAl-ous puart-as otra
V. |ayaS-of ayad-al = aryad-d plrr-ou pirat placa
Dual.jaya3-6 9 ayad-& Ss hyad-& pirl-w pial-a pirt-w
Gyad-oy ayadt-aily ayad-otv. paAt-ow pirl-ayv pial-ow.
S.N. |yAukds yAvxeia = yAukd, sweet |mpaos Tpaeta mpaov, soft
G. \yAuké-os ‘yAukelas yAuké-os mpdou wpaelas mpdov
D. yAuee? —s-yAuxelg ss -yAuke? mpdw Tpaela mpaw
A. yAvkbv ~—-yAvketay —-yAukd ™paov Tpactav mpaov
V.lyAuvKb —s-yAukeia~—s-yAukd mpaos(e) m@paeta mpaoyv
P.N. “yAuxeis yAuKeia =" yAukéa Tpaol, Wpaeis TWpactart wpada
G. yAukéwy, yAukeiav “yAuKéwy Tp aewy TpPaer@v Tpaéwvy
D. yAunéoi(y) yAukelais yAukéoi(v) \mpdos, mpadot mpaclais mpaéoe
A. yAukeis. yAukelas = -yAukéa mpdous, tpacis mpaclas mpaéa
‘V. yAuKeis =-yAuketa = "yAuKéa mpaot, pacts mpactat wpaéa
Dual. -yAuveée —-yAunela ~—-yAukée mpd wrpacla mpda
yAukéow ‘yAukelaiy yAuKéow mpdow mw paclary mpdow.
S.N.|xapters xapleroa xaplev Aeipdeis AeipSeioa AcipSév
G. |xaplevtos xapiéoons xaplevros Acipsevtos AcipSelons AetpSévros
D. |xaptevts xapieoon xaplevtt AcipIevTe AatpSelon AcipSévts
A. |yaplevta xaplecoay xaplev AcipdévTa AcipIeioay Aapsev
V.\xaplev yaplecoa xaplev AcipSels AcipSeioa AcipSev
P.N. |xaplevres xapleooa xaplevra AcipSévres AcipSeiom AcipSévta
G. |xaptévrwy xapiecoGy xapiévtwy = |Aetp SEvTwy AcipSeivav AcipSevTwy
D. |xapleot(v) xapiéooais xapleoi(v) |AetpSe7or(v) ActpSeloas AccpSetor(v)
A. |\xaplevtas xapiéooas xaplevra AcipSévras AcipIelods AcipSévta
V. |xaplevres xapleooa xapleyra AcipSévres AcipIcioa AcpIévta,
Dual.'xaplevte xapieooa xaplevre AeipSévre AeiPSelod Acipdévre
Xapiévrow xapiécoaw xapiévrow. \AepSévrow AcipIeloay AaipSévTow.

ee Oe eee,

‘lo oe oan

98 ADJECTIVES. — PARADIGMS. [$ 77.
xptoeos § xpvoda = xpveeov, golden|amAdus Gard amddov, single
Xpvtovs §xpuc7 Xpuoody amdots amr} &rAoby
xpucéov xpucéas ypuoéou amAdov amAdns &mrAdov
Xpvoov §=—xpvons §=—S xpucod &mrAod amas amdod
xpucém = xpuoéa Xpuaew amrAd@ arrdn amrAdw
Xpucg xpuch Xpvoe anrAg ard amrArAg
Xpvoeov xXpuvcéay xpiccov amAdoy amddny amAdov
Xpvcody §=xpvojy Xpucody amrhody = aA amAoty
doubtful xpuoéa xpiceov doubtful amAdy Gmddov

xpuo} Xpvoody andj arAoby
xpioer xpiocca xptoed amAdot amrAdat amAda
xpvcot = Xpvoat Xpuca ardor &mhat ama
xXpvodav xpvocwy xpvcéwy amridov amrddwy amddwv
Xpvcav = xpvcdy = xpuoay aTrha@y omA@v am @v
Xpuoéois § xpuvceais xpucéors amrddos amddais amAdots
xpuoois xpucais xpuaois amhots . amAais amAots
Xpucéous xpucdads xpioed awAdous amddas amrda
Xpucois xpuvoas Xpvoe amhovs amas oma
xpiceot §=xptoea «= pdt amAdot = Garr Ada arrda
Xpysot §=—_ xpuoat Xpuoa carrot amrat amAa
Xpytéw = pura Xpucew amrdow amrrda amrAdw
Xpuce Xpuca Xpuc@ aTA@ anna aTAG
Xpuccow xpvocuy xpvoéow anAdow amdrdayv damddow
Xpucoiy § xXpvoaiy xpuvooww amo amdraiv ardot
Gpytpeos apyupéa apytpeoy, silver | Terupws Tetupvia Terudds, having
Gpyupods dpyupa dp-yupody TeTupdtos retupulas Teropdros (struck.
> : > ; goes ny Tetupott TeTupula terupdti
Gpyupéov apyupéas apyupéou na
Leyopes Aeyupas rae we TeTupoTa TeTUpviay TeTupds
apyupéw apyupéa aipyupew TetupéTes TeTUpviat TeTupdTa
apyupe = &pryupa apyupe TeTupdtay TeTUpuiay TeTUpdstwY
oy 2 , gs tetupdat Tetupviais tetupdct
apylpeov apyupéay aprytpeov
dpyupody. apyupav —_&pyupodv TeTupoTas TeTupulas TeTuddta
Gpyipee apyupéa apydpeov tetupéte terupvia Tetupdte
aipyupa aip-yupooy Tetupérow TeTupuia Terupdtow
ToAUVS TOAAN moAt,much |[uéyas peydAn heya, great
TOAAOD ~=—s- TOAA TS TOAAOD MeydAov peydAns jmeydAou
TOAAG TOMAR TOAAG Meyda» peydAn Meydaw
ToAvY wWOAAnY TOAD Méeyav peydAnv pmévya
ToAd TOAAN TOAD béya peydAn = wey
modrot * roAAat ToAAd beydAot = peydAa peydda
TOAAGY = WOAA@Y ToAAGY MeydAwy peydAwy peydrAwy
mWoAAots. WorAais WoAdois beydAos §peydAas jeydAos
modAovs wordAds —§ ToAAG meydAous peydras peydada
moAAoL = —- FoAA at TOAAG MeydAo = =preydAat «= ery
MeydAw = peydAa = puerydAw
MeydAow peydrAaw peyddolw

§ 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 99
méAas méAawa = réAav, black was TEC, way, all
péAdvos pedalyns uéAdvos maytés wdons mayrds
wea =—ueAalyp = eA maytl mdon mayrl
péAava = geAcuvay = eA mdyTa macay may
péAay péeAawa = gléA mas waca way
péAaves éAaivat = weAava mayTes Waoat mwayTa
meAdvwy perAavavy jeddvoy mdyTay macay mdyT wv
péAagt MeAalyais §=péAaot waoe mdous wat
MéAavas = edalvas «= eA ava mdyras = - ™doas mwdyTo.
péeAaves péAavar pédAava mdyTes = WAOOL mdyT a
méAave = ueAaiva peeve mwayTe race mayre
meAdvow edalvaw . peAdvouw. mdvtow = mdoaw adyTouw.
oras oraoa oray, standing | Améy Aurodoa ~—- Ardy, leaving
ordytos otdons oTdyTos Aurévros drrotons Aewdyros
ordvtt = oTdon ordytt Auréyvtt == Arwoton = AebyTt
oTdyTa = o Ta ay ordy Auvévta = Atmovoay = Auwdv
ords oraoe ordy Auréy Auwotca = Aerdy
ordytes oTaoa ordyTa Aurévres Avwotcat = Aud vTA
ordyTwy ocracay oTdyTwy Auréyvtwy- ArwroveGy AuwdyTwv
oraci(v) ordoms o7aoi(v) Avrodot(y) Avrotoas Auxrodar(v)
ordytas oTdods ordyra Aurédvras Armoboas Aréyta
ordyTes aTaoat ordytTa Aumévres Arwotoa Arwévta
ordyte oTdod oTdyTe Aurdvte dAroboa Arwdyte
otdyroy oTdoav ordyrow. Ainéyvrow Arrotcav dAuwdyrow.
pavav gavoic& avody, about to| (evywis Cevyvica (evry, joining,
gavotyros pavotens avodytos [show] Cevyrtvres Cevyvions (evyvivros
gavotvtt davotcn ayvovrtt (evyvivtt Cevyvion (evyviyts
gavotvta pavotcdy gavodyTa (evyvivta Cevyvicay Cevyviv
pavay gavotoa havody Cevyris (evyvioa = Cevyviv
gpavoivres pavovcat pavodvra Cevyvivres Cevyviom CevyvivTa
pavobyTwy gavovsdy pavotytwy (evyvivrwy (evyyvucay Cevyvivrwy
pavotc: pavotcas pavodor Cevyviot §Cevyvioas Cevyvior
gavotvras davotcas havoiyras Cevyvivras Cevyviocas Cevyvivta
gavodytes havovca pavodyTa Cevyvivtes Cevyvioa Cevyvivra
gavotvre davoica havodvre (evyvivte Cevyviod Cevyrivte
gavobyroy pavotoaw payvobyrow. Cevyvivtow Cevyviocaw Cevyviyrow.

Remark. All participles in -es are declined like AewpSels (see § 76, V.); all
participles in -vs, like denvis (see § 76, IIL); all participles in -as, like ords (see
§ 76, VIII.); the Pres, Fut. and second Aor. Part. Active, like Ardy (§ 76,
XII); the Fut. Act. Part. of Liquid verbs, like owepay (§ 76, XII.)

§78. Il Adjectives of two Endings.

Adjectives in -os of two endings are declined like éya9és,
except that they have no separate form for the feminine, the
same form being used for the masculine and feminine.

100 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. [§ 78.

I. -os, -ov; 6 4 &Aoyos, Td KAoyor, irrational.

To this class belong,

(a) A few simple adjectives without particular derivative endings, e. g. 6 4
BdpBapos, not Greek; AdBpos, vehement ; jjuepos, gentle ; Aoldopos, calumniating ;
TiXacds, mild; xépoos, unfruitful; hovxos, silent; ddmavos, extravagant; Ewdos,
ee te ae

(b) Most simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -sos and -eos, and
“10s, e.g. 6) TwThpios, saving ; 6 H BactAeos, regal; 6 h yvdpimuos, recognizable ;

-(c) All compounds, e: g. 6 7 &Aoyos, Td %Aovor, irrational; 6 h apyds (instead
of depyds), inactive (but dpyds, ~f, -dv, bright) ; 6% mdyKados, very fair (but Kadrds,
-h, “b) ; 6 » mdAAeukos, very white (but Aeuxds, -h, -dv) ; Yedmvevoros, -ov, divinely
“inspired (but mvevords, -h, -dv); adjectives compounded with adjectives in.

abe, which then become Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 7 evddrrixos, not pure Attic,
but (Arrixds, -4, -dv) 6 4 proomépoixos (but Meporkds, -h, -dv).

Exceptions are adjectives derived from compound verbs with the deriva-
tive-endings -«és, which remain Oxytones; those in -r éos, which remain
Paroxytones, e. g. émidentixds, ~h, -dv, from émidelxvvur; those in -rés vary.
between two and three endings, e. g. avexrés, -h, -dv (from avéxw), and avexrds,
-dv, see Lobeck, ad 8. Aj. 1296. Paralipp. p. 482, sq. Poppo ad Th. 2, 41, 4.
But when compounds in -rés, -rh, -rdv, are again compounded, they have but
two endings, and are Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 7 &xatacKevacros.

Remark 1. Comparatives and Superlatives have three endings, even when
the Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. dmropére-
pos # Aus, Thu. 5, 110. duseuBoadraros 7 Adxpis, Id. 3, 110.

Il. -ovs, -ovv; 6 % edvous, Td ebvouv, benevolent.

Adjectives with these endings are,

(a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vods and mAovs, and
hence in the Masc. and Fem. are declined like these, but in the Neuter like
éarodv (§ 47), yet the Neuter Pl. in -oa does not admit contraction, consequently
7T% evvoa. On the accentuation, see § 49, 3.

Rem. 2. -Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the Pl., e. g. xaxo-
véous X. Cy. 8. 2,1. xpuuvdous X. Ag. 11, 5. Sdsvoor X. H. 2. 1, 2.

(b) Such as are compounded with the substantive zoids, e. g. 6 % moAdrous,
7 woAvrovy, and are inflected like it, but in the Acc. Sing., even as Oidimrous
|§ 71, B. (b)], are partly of the contract second Dec. and partly of the third,
e. g. Gen. moAvrodos and roAvmov; Acc. roAdroda and roAv’rouy, etc.

Rem. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. &rovs, Bpaddmrous, dtrous,
avirrémovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec.

TIL. -ws, -wv; 5 7 tAews, 7d TAewy, compassionate.
Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec. (§ 48).

Rem. 4. The Acc. commonly ends in -wy, but in a number of compound
words, it ends in -w ({ 48, Rem. 1), e.g. d&idxpew, avdmAew, &ynpw (in respect to
the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7), éwtrAew, trépxpew.

Rem. 5. There are three endings to the simpie adjective: —

TiAdws, wAda, wAgwy, full, Gen. mrAEw, TAEaS, TAEW, Pl. wAkw, TAKA, TAA; the
compounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 4 avdmAews, Td avdrrewr, Pl. of af
exmaew (immeis ExmrAew X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. ZemArAew Tpdwe(ar X. Hier. 1, 18), 7a EemAew
X. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Nom. Pl. waéw, of the simple adjective
is not seldom used for the Masc. and Fem., or they have (yet more seldom)

§ 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 101

three endings, e. g. dvdrAews, dvamdda (Pl. Phaedon 83, d.), dvdwAewy. Eur.
Alc. 730, has wAdov, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like-
wise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. 7d &urAcov, Soph., oftener in the
Pl., e. g. Euwaco Pl. Rp. 6. 505, c. and very frequently in the Neuter, e. g.
temdea X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. weplirAea 6.2, 33. Also from fAews, Plato Phaedon
95, a. has fAea as Neut. Pl.

Rem. 6. ‘O 4 o@s, Td o@y, salvus, is formed from the old word SAO by
contraction. In addition to the Nom. o@s, ca@y, this word forms only the Ace.
Sing. ody, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Acc. cov. The form o&

from oda), occurs as Fem. Sing. in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. Pl. in
lat. Critias, 111, c. in the best MSS. The Pl. consists of forms from o@s of
the second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened c@os, namely : —

Pl. N. of ai ods (from odes), and of e@o1, af cGa, N. oGa, rarely o@.
A. robs tas o@s (from oéas), and tobs aéous, N. oGa, rarely oG.

The Singular forms of g@os are very rare in the Attic writers, e. g. c@os, X.
An. 3. 1, 32.

Rem. 7. The compounds of cépas and yéAws are partly like the Attic
second Dec., partly like the third Dec., e. g. 64 xpuodxepws, 7d xpuodKepwr,
Gen. xpvodxepw and xpucoKépwros ; 6 7 piddyeAws, Td piddyedwy, Gen. pirdyeAw
and giAoyéAwtos ; Bovrepws, Gen. Botkepw and Boveépwros, so ebxepws. The
adjective dusépws follows the third Dec. only, e. g. dusépwros, etc. Forms like
the Common second Dee. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec., e. g.
dixepoy, vhxepot, &xepa. On the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7.

IV. -wv; -ov; N. 6% cddpwv, 7d cHppor, prudent,
G. rod Tijs Tod cdppovos (according to § 55, 1).

Rem. 8. From 6 7 rlwy, fat, comes also the Fem. form rfeipa, even in prose
writers; so also rpégpacca from 6 4 mpdéppwy, occurs in the poets.

Rem. 9. Here belong, also, the Comparatives in -wy, -ov, -iwy, -iov; but in
respect to the declension of these it is to be noted, that, after the rejection of
y, they are contracted in the Acc. Sing., and in the Nom., Acc., and Voce. PI.
See the Paradigms, § 79. In the Attic writers, the uncontracted forms in -ova,
-oves, -ovas, frequently occur, e..g. mel(ova, éAdtrova, KadAlova, éAdrroves,
kaxtoves, welCoves, BeAtioves, mAcloves, Hrrovas, BeAtiovas, éAdtrrovas, X. Cy. 5. 2,
36. 7. 5, 83. 2. 1, 23. 2.1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 6. 5, 52. Cy.7.5,70. On the accen-
tuation, see § 65, 5.

V. -ns, -es; N. 6% GAnShs, 7d GAndés, true,
G. Tod Tis Tod GAnSéos, GAnSods (§ 59).

On the contraction of -éa into -@ (instead of -4), where a vowel precedes, see
§ 59, Rem. 1.

Rem. 10. Compounds in -érns (from @ros, Gen. érous), are either of two
endings, e. g. wopelay xiAseT7}, Pl. Rp. 10. 615, a. wepidde@ TH xtAtere?, Phaed. 249,
a., or they take a particular Fem. form, namely, -éris, Gen. -éridos, e. g-
éxrérns, F. éwréris ; tpiaxovroiKidwy orovday, Th. 1, 87.

Rem. 11. Simple adjectives in -ys are Oxytones, except wAfpns, Apes,
full. On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see § 65, 5, and on
the accentuation of the Gen. Pl. § 59, Rem, 4.

VI. -ny, -ev; N. & H &pbny, 7d Bpbev
G. Tod Tijs Tod &ppevos (§ 55,1). No other word like this.

VIL. -wp, -op; N. 6 4 amdrwp, 7d &rarop, fatherless, :
G. rod rijs Too &mdropos (§ 55, 1). In like manner only
, auhtwop, unto.
9*

102 PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. [§ 79.

VIII. -is, -1; (a) N. 6 7 pis, 7d Wp, knowing,
. G. Tod Tijs Tod iSpios (§ 63, Rem. 5).

In like manner, only vijotis, temperate, and rpéqis, nourished. In addition to
the form in -1os, these adjectives have another in -:d0s, but more rare, and only
poetic, e. g. pda, pides.

(b) N. 6 4 ebxapis, 7d e¥xapt, agreeable,
G. Tod Tis Tod edxdpiTos.

Here belong the compounds of xdpis, mdrpis, Amis, ppdvtts, which are
declined like the simples, e. g. eveAmis, eveAm, Gen. ebéAmidos; pirdrarpis, Gen.
iAomdrpidos ; the Acc. ends according to § 53, 3, in -w, e. g. eveAmy, edxap ;
but compounds of wéAis, when they refer to persons, are inflected in the Attic
dialect in -id0s, e. g. piAdmodis, Gen. -i5os, yet in the Acc., giAdroAw and -1da;
still; as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected like mdéaAis, e. g. kaAAlrods,
dixaidmoAus, etc., Gen. cadAurdArews, etc.

IX. -vs, -v; (a) N. 6 4 &daxpus, 7d &daxpu, tearless. 7

So compounds of ddxpv; yet these inflect only the Acc. Sing. like the third
Dec., ¢. g. &Saxpuy, Neut. &daxpv. The other Cases are supplied by d&ddxpiros,
-ov, Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec.

(b) N. 6 4 Stanxus, 7d Slay xv, two ells long,
G. Tov Ths Tov dimhxeos.

Here belong the compounds of wjxus; the declension is like yAuxdts, yAuKd
(§§ 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter Pl. in -ea is contracted into -y, like
torn, e. g. durhxn.

X -ovs, -ov; N. 6 4 povddous, 7d povddoy, one-toothed,
. TOU THs TOU movddoyTos.

So the remaining compounds of éd0ts. For the Dec., see § 54 (d).

§79. Paradigms,

S.N. évdotos évdotov dtarous Starovy
G. évddtou évddtou dirodos
D. evddiw evddiw dimodu
A. evdokoy evdotov diroda and Starovy BSirovy
Wy, evdote évSotov dimou Stroy
, ae évdotor évdota dtmodes diroda
G. evidtwy — evidiwv dimddwv
D. evddtous evddtous dfmroct
A. évidtous évdotous Slrodas diroda
Ws evdokor evdota diodes diroda
Dual. evddkw evddkw diode
, évddtouw évddtou. dimddou-

§79.] PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 103
S.N. | e¥rA(o-os)ovs —_ ed A(0-0v) our fAews tAcwy
G. etrAou YAew
D. etrA@ frcw
A. erhouy frcwy
¥. doubtful fAews TAcwy
P.N.| etrAo erA0a fAe@ tAew
G. etrAwy Trewy
D. edrAals . fAews
A. | edmAovus etrA0a fAews tAew
V. | edtAm etrd0a frew fAew
Dual. erAw fAcw
edrAow. fAcwr.
S.N. | etdaluwv ebdamoy | éxdiwv exSiov | melCwv pei(oy
G. evdaluovos éxSfovos pelCovos
D. evdaluovt exdion pelCom
A. | eddaluova ebdamov | exSlova-lw ExSiov | pelCova wel(w peiCov
V. edauov exS1ov petCov
P.N. | eddaluoves cidaluova | éxStloves éxStova | melCoves pel Cova
exdlous éxdlw pelCous belCw
G. eddaiudywv exSidvev perCovev
D. eddaluoor(v) exStoot(v) pelCoor(y)
A. | evdaluovas eddaluova | éxStovas éxStova | pelCovas pelCova
éxStous exdiw pelCous pel Cw
V.| evdaluoves eddaluova | like the Nominative. | like the Nominative.
Dual. evdaluove exstove pelCove
evdaiudvow. ex didvou. peCovow.
S. N. s aAndés iyths byes
3 Gh GAnS(€¢-os)ods tyt(é-os ods
D. &And( €-i) ef byt €-i)e7
A.| Gans(é-a)i dAnvés byt (é-a)a? iyiés
V. aandvsés byes
P.N.| aGand(ées)ets &And(é-a) 7 byi(é-es ets byt (é-a) a?
G. &AnS(€-wr dv ! byt( €é-wy) dv
D. dAnséor(v) bytéou(v)
A.| GAn3(é-as)ezs &ANS( é-a) 7 byt(é-as) ets byt (é-a)a
WA like the Nominative. like the Nominative.
Dual. &And(é-€)7 La yt,
&AnS( €-owv) ory. byt( €-o1w Jory.
S.N.{ efxapis ebxapt amdtwp umarop
G. ebxdpitos drdropos
D. edxdpitt dmdrope
A.| edxdpira and edxdpw ebxapt amdropa &imarop
V. edxapt &marop
P.N.| ebdxdprres evxdpira amdropes amrdropa
G. edvxapltwy amar dépwy
D. edxdpict amdropat
A.| ebxdprtas edxdpira amdropas amrdropa
V.| ebxdpires edxdpita dmrdropes axdtopa
Dual. edxdpire amdrope
evxaplroy amar dpowy.

) but curndsé-wy = cuvidwr, § 59, Rem. 4.

2 § 59, Rem. 1.

104 ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. [§ 80.

§80. IT] Adjectives of one Ending.

Adjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neu-
ter, partly because their meaning is of such a nature that they
generally occur in connection with persons, and partly because
their formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry,
however, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in
which the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fem., i. e
in the Gen. and Dat., even in connection with neuter substan-
tives, e. g. pavedow Avoonpacw, Eur. Or. 264. év révyte copart, Ia
El. 375. They very seldom take a separate form for the Neut.,
€. g. exydus, érydvda e9vea, Her. 8,73; a derivative adjective is :
commonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted. |

Endings.
I. -as, Gen. -ov; 6 povias, Gen. portov, single (Paroxytone).
IL. -as, Gen. -avros: 6 7 dxduas, Gen. -avros, unwearied (Paroxytone).
Ill. -ds, Gen. -dd0s: 6 h puyds, Gen. puydios, fugitive (Oxytone).

IV. -ap, Gen. -apos: only udxap, though the Fem. form pdaipa is sometimes
- found.

V. -ns, Gen. -ov: 6 éSedovrhs, Gen. éSeAovrod, voluntary.

Some of these adjectives take, in connection with Fem. substantives, a sepa-
rate Fem. form in -1s (Gen. -:50s), e. g. evérns, Fem. ev@ms, fair-looking. ‘They
are Paroxytones, except éSeAovThs, ExovThs, and bBpiorhs.

VI. -ns, Gen. -ntos: 6 7 dpyhs, Gen. apyiros, white.

So all compounds in -Sv4s, -duhs, -BAhs, -wAHs, and -xuhjs, and some simple

adjectives, e. g. yuurhs, naked; xepvis, needy; wévns, poor ; mAdyns, wandering,
etc. :

VIL. -hv, Gen. -fvos: 6 4 arrhy, Gen. awrivos, unfeathered. In like manner
no other.

VIII. -és, Gen. -G7 0s: 6 h dyvds, Gen. &yvdros, unknown.

So all compounds in -fpdés, -yvds, and -xpés, and also dards, firm.

IX. -ts, Gen. -150s: 5 7 dvdAnis, Gen. avdAnidos, powerless.

These adjectives after the omission of a feminine substantive to which they
belong, are, like those in -ds, -ddos, e. g. 7 ‘EAAds (sc. yq), used as substantives,
e. g. 1 marpis (sc. yj), fatherland.

X. -ts, Gen. -bd50s: 6 4 vénaus, Gen. vehrvdos, one lately come.

In like manner only a few other compounds.

§81.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 105

XI. -t, Gen. -yos, -kos, -xos: ‘ y) cent Gen. ~tiryos, rapacious.
6 “ -ikos.
6% hw e txos, one- hoofed.
XII. +), Gen, -ros: 6 4 alvin), Gen. -rros, high.

XIII. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. umas, childless ; waxpé-
xep, long-handed; abréxep, done with one’s own hand; paxpalwy, long-lived ;
uaxpavxny, lon -necked ; Acbkaoms, having a white shield. The declension of such
adjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. uaxpavxevos. On the compounds
of zovs, however, comp. § 78, II. (b).

§81. Comparison of Adjectives.

1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to
an object in different degrees : —

(a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher
degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative,
e. g. Plato was MORE LEARNED than Xenophon.

(b) When the quality in the highest degree belongs to an
object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was
the MOST LEARNED Of the disciples of Socrates.

’ (c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple
meaning without aay comparison, is called the Positive,
e. g. Plato was LEARNED. |

2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com-
parison; the participle does not admit: it, except in a few
rare cases, where the parneaple has the meaning bz an
adjective, e. g. éppwpévos, -éaTepos, -EoTatos.

3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the
Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the
most common, is -tepos, -répd, -repov, for the Compara-
tive, and -ratos, -Tadtn, -tatov, for the Superlative; the
second is -(é') wv, -(<) ov, or -wy, -ov, for the Comparative,
and -() Tos, -(¢)o77, -(c) oro», for the Superlative. The
tis the union-vowel.

4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem
of the adjective by the connecting syllables 0 (@), as, us, es;
hence the general rule Jn most adjectives, the usual end-
ings are appended to the stem by means of the connecting
syllable.

106 ADJECTIVES. —— FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [§ 82.

Remark. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative,
the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix paadoy (magis) and wdAora (maxime) to
the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake
of euphony, have no Comparative form.

§82. A. First Form of Comparison.

Comparative, -repos, -répa, -Tepov;
Superlative, -raros, -rdrn, -TaTor.

These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective ;
the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second
Dec., and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec.

I. Adjectives in -os, -n (-@), -ov.

_ (a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to
the stem by means of the union-vowel o or w; the union-vowel
is o,. when a syllable long by nature or by position (§ 27, 3), pre-
cedes, but w, when a short syllable precedes, —w being then
used to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables,

e. g.

Kov¢-os, light, Com. koud-6-repos, Sup. Koup-6-raros, -n, -ov,
icxip-ds, strong, “ ioxip-d-repos, “ iexip-d-raros,
Aert-ds, thin, “ Aewr-d-repos, “ ewt-d-TaTos,
apodp-ds, vehement, “ gpodp-d-repos, “ cpodp-6-raros,
mixp-ds, bitter, “ mixp-6-Tepos, “ mixp-6-raros,

cop-bs, wise, “ gop-b-Tepos, “ Gop-é-TaTOS,
éxiip-ds, firm, “ — éxip-é-Tepos, “ éxip-6-TaTos,

&i-os, worthy, “ &gi-w-Tepos, “ Ggi-é-TaTos.

Remark 1. A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi-
tion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such
syllable as short, e. g. ebrexvéraros from e¥rexvos, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.),
duswotuatepa, Id. Ph. 1367.

(b) Contracts in -eos = -ovs and -oos = -ovs are contracted also
it the forms of Comparison ; the first contract « and w the union-
vowel into w; the last assume the union-syllable es and contract
in with the preceding o, e. g. |

moppup-eos == mwopup-ovs GrA-dos = GrA-ods
moppup-edTepos = Topdup-d-Tepos &mdo-€o-TEpos = Gmh-ovs-TEpos
mToppup-edTatos = moppup-é-TaTos &mdo-€o-TATOS = amwA-olo-TaToS.

Here belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ovy, e. g. eBy-oos =
etv-ovs, Neut. eiv-oov = etv-ovvy, Com. edvo-éo-repos = edy-ots-repos, Sup. ebvo-
éo-ratros = ebv-oba-Taros.

§ 82.} ADJECTIVES. — FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107

Rem. 2. Adjectives in-oos take also the uncontracted forms of the Compara-
tive and Superlative in -odrepos, -odraros, e. g. ebtvodrepor, X. R. Equ. 1, 10.
edxpodrepos, X. O. 10, 11.

(c) The following adjectives in -atos: yepatds, old; waar
és, ancient; wepatos, on the other side; cxoXatos, at leisure,
assume -repos and -raros without a union-vowel, e. g.

ryepai-ds, Com. -yepal-repos, Sup. yepal-raros,
Warai-Os, “ wadal-repos, “ madal-raros.

Rem. 3. TWadatds and cxoAatos have also the usual forms of Compari-
S01; madadtepos, eXoAadTepos, SO also yepaidtepos, Antiph. 4, p. 125, 6.

(d) The following pogo oy in -os: €vdtos, calm; novxos,
quiet; iSvos, peculiar; ioos, equal; péaos, middle; dptpros,
early; dros, late; trapatAnotos, similar; and rpdios, in the
morning, assume the union-syllable a, the Comparative and
Superlative thus becoming like the preceding words in -aws,
e. g.

féo-os, Com. peo-al-repos, Sup. ueo-al-raros,
%Bi-os, “ idt-al-repos, “ j6t-al-taros.

Rem. 4. Sometimes also: the common form is found, e. g. jovxeérepos,
hovxetatos; piA@tepos, piAdraros are the usual forms in the Attic writers.
Here belong also the adverbial forms mpwiatrepoy, rpwialrera, from mpdéios ; thus
in Plato; likewise mpwirepoy and mpwitara; thus always, as it seems, in Thu.
(Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4,1. mpwtrepoy according to the best
MSS. (on the contrary mpwiaftara, Cy. 8. 8,9). The adjective ¢faos has
three forms: @:Adérepos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3.11, 18.), and piAdratos,
gtAaltepos seldom in prose (e. g. Xen. An. 1. 9, 29, though one good Ms. has
pirdrepov), and p:Aalraros seldom in prose (e.g. Xen. H. 7.3, 8.), platrepos
poetic, and ¢{Araros very frequent ; the Comparative is usually expressed by
paddov plaos. In addition to these three forms, also the Superlative piaiwrtos
(as in Homer, the Comparative g:Alwyv) is found in Attic poetry.

Rem. 5. The two adjectives, uéoos, middle, and véos, young, have a special
Superlative form, pécaros, véatos; but this is in use only when a series
of objects is to be made prominent, uécaros denoting the very middle of the
series, and véaros the last or most remote, whereas peoalrares expresses the
idea of the middle in general, and veéraros retains the primary signification
of the adjective, young, new. In prose, véaros is used only in reference to the
tones of music (véatos pSdyyos); and then the Feminine is coparansed; viTN,
the lowest line or string. .

(ec) Two adjectives in -os: épfpwpévos, strong, and dxpatos,
unmixed, append the union-syllable «s to the stem, e. g- éppwper-

APP ee

108 ADJECTIVES. — FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [S 82.

éo-repos, éppwpev-eo-Taros, axpat-éo-Tepos, axpat-éo-taros. So also
aidotos has aido.-éo-raros in the superlative.

Rem. 6. Further, the adjectives, &pSovos, rich; crovdatos, zealous; and
topuevos, glad, sometimes take the above form, as apSovéorepos, -éoratos,
together with the common form, -érepos, -#Taros. From topevos is formed
aopeverepos, and the adverbial neuter, douevalrara and décpev-éo-rara,— Several
other adjectives also have this formation, yet for the most part only in poetry,
e. g. et(wpos, unmixed (of wine); Hdumos, sweet; éwlredos, flat (émimedéorepos,
X. H. 7. 4,13), and all contracts in -ovs; comp. (b). The forms in -écrepos,
-érratos, belong properly to adjectives in -ns and -wy.

(f) The following adjectives in -os: AdXos, talkative; povo-
payos, eating alone; dpoddyos, dainty; and rrwxés, poor,
drop os, and append the syllable ws, e. g. AdA-os, Com. AaAd-ic-
repos, Sup. AaA-io-raros; wrwxds has also Sup. rrwxdraros.

«Rem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -ys, Gen. -ov. :

IL Adjectives in -ys, Gen. -ov, and evdis, -é, Gen. -éos, drop
-ns, and append the syllable -ts, e. g. cAerr-ns (Gen. -ov), thievish,
Com. xAerr-io-repos, Sup. krerr-io-raros; wevd-ic-repos, Wevd-ic-
TATOS.

Exceptions. ‘“fBpurrhs, -od, insolent, has b8piorérepos, X. An. 5. 8, 8, dBpiord-
tatos, X. An. 5. 8, 22. C.1. 2,12. From axparfs (Gen. -éos) is the Com. axpa-
tlorepos, to distinguish it from axparéoratos, No. (e).

IIL. Adjectives of the third. Declension. ‘The Comparison-
endings are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either
directly or by inserting the syllable -es (also -ts).

(1) Those in -vs, -eZa, -v, —-ns, -es (Gen. -eos = -ovs), —-as,
-av, and the word pakap, happy, append the endings of Com-
parison directly to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter
form, e. g.

yAuxis, Neut. -6 — yAuxdt-repos yAuKb-TaTos
GAndhs, Neut. -és — GAndéo-repos aGAnds€o-TaTos
péAas, Neut. -avy — weAdy-repos beAdy-TaTos
Tdhas, Neut. -av — raddy-repos TAAGY-TATOS
pdxap, — paxdp-Tepos Maidp-TaTos.

Rem. 8. The adjectives 730s, raxds, and roAvs are compared in -lwy and
ewv. See § 83, I.
(2) Adjectives in -wy, -ov (Gen. -ovos), assume -es, e. g.
evdaiuwy, Neut. edSamoy, happy.
Com. evdatmov-o-repos, Sup. evdamoy-éo-raros.

§83.] ADJECTIVES.——SECOND FORM OF COMPARISON. 109

(3) Adjectives in - sometimes assume -e s, sometimes -ts,
e. g.
apnait, Gen. &pha-os, growing old, Gprat, Gen. dpway-os, rapax,
Com. a&@nAix-éo-repos, Com. apray-lo-repos,
Sup. apnax-éo-ratos, Sup. apray-fo-raros.

(4) Adjectives in -es, -ev, whose stem ends in v7, append the
Comparison-endings directly to the stem, the last 7 being
changed into o, and the preceding v being then dropped (§ 20, 2).

xaptes, -lev, Gen. xaplevt-os, pleasant.
Com. xapleo-repos, Sup. xaplec-raros.

(5) The compounds of xdpis assume o, e. g.

éxixapis, Gen. émixdpit-os, pleasant.
Com. émxapit-d-Tepos, Sup. émixapit d-taTos.

’"Axaplorepos in Homer, comes from &xapit-repos ; comp. No. (4).

§83. B. Second Form of Comparison.

Comparative. -iwv, Neut. -iov, or -wyv, Neut. -or.
Superlative, -.cros, -(oTY, -LoToV.

Remark 1. On-the quantity of: in -fwy, -iov, see § 28,1; on the declension,
§ 78, Rem. 9; and on the accent, § 65, 5 (a).

This form of Comparison includes,

I. Some adjectives in -vs, which drop -vs and append -iwy,
etc.; this usually applies only to 7dvs, sweet, and raxvs, swift
(the other form of these adjectives in -vrepos, -vraros, is some-
times used, but not by Attic writers). Taxvs has in the
Comparative JIdocwvy (Att. Jdrrwv), Neut. Jaooov (arrov).
Comp. §§ 21, 3, and 17,6. Taxtov is found only among the
later writers. Thus,

-ts, Com. 48-fwv, Neut. 43-iov, Sup. %3-ros, -n, -ov.
tax-is, “ Sdoowy, Att. Sdrrwy, Neut. Saocov, Att. Sarrov, Sup. tdxioros

Rem. 2. The other adjectives in -ts, as BaSds, deep; Bapus, heavy; Bpa-
dbs, slow; Bpaxvs, short; yAuKis, sweet; dads, thick; edpds, wide; tus,
sharp; mpéaBvus, old; kts, swift, have the form in -drepos, -braros (§ 82,
III.) ; in Attic poetry, however, single examples of these adjectives are found
with the other form, e. g. Bpdxuorros, mpéofioros, &kirros.

II. The following adjectives in -pos: aicxpds, base ; ext pds,
hostile ; xv8pé6s, honorable; and oixrpés, wretched (but always

10

110 ADJECTIVES. ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. [§ 84.

oixtpérepos in the Comparative),—the ending -pos here also
being dropped, e. g. aicxpds, Com. aicy-iwy, Neut. aicy-iov, Sup.
atox-irros.

Rem. 3. Ofkriros, xvdiwy, xddirros, are poetic. Besides this form, in -iwy,
etc., which is preferred by the Attic writers, the above adjectives have also,
though seldom, the other form in -érepos, -draros, e. g. éxdpéraros ; but always,
in prose, oixrpdratos.

§84. Anomalous Forms of Comparison.

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
1. &yadds, good, épelvoy, Neut. &uewov epioros
—~ BeAtloy BéAtiotros
(BéArepos, Poet.) (BéAratos, Poet.)
kpeloowv, Att. npelrrwy Kpdrioros
Adey A@gorTos
(p€prepos, Poet.) (pépraros, pépio'ros, Poet.)
2. xaxés, bad, Kakloy KdKioros
xelpwor xelpioros
jjoowv, Att. irrwv Adv. Hora
3. nadds, beautiful, KadAlov KdAALOTOS
4. dryewds, painful, a&dAryewdrepos dA-yewdsrat os
&Aylov &Ayioros
5. paxpéds, long, baxpoTepos _ paKpédraros
(nacowv, Poet.) MhKioros
6. yuxpds, small, MuxpdoTepos MuxpoTatos
eAdcowy, Att.é€Adrrwy édAdxurTos
7. dAlyos, few, pelwy 6Alyiorros
8. wéyas, great, pel Coy Méeylorros
9. odds, much, relwy, OY TAgwY TAELTTOS
10. pgd:os, easy, pdov pgorros
11. rérwr, ripe, meTralT Epos wemwalTaTos
12. rlwy, fat, mdr Epos wiTATOS.

Remark 1. The Superlative &pioros (from ”Apys, the god of war), and the
Comp. éuelvwy, have particularly the idea of bravery, boldness; Bedttwy, like the
Latin melior, signifies better, in a moral sense, though by no means confined to
that ; Agwy is mostly used in such phrases as A@dy er, it is better, and Agoros
mostly in the Voc. é Agore. The poetic Superlative ¢épioros is found in
Plato, in the exclamation & pore! O most worthy! The irregular forms of
puxpds, Viz. CAdoowy, éAdx.oTos, express both the idea of smallness and fewness
(dAfyos); but pelwy generally expresses the idea of fewness, seldom that of
smallness; the regular forms of suxpds, viz. pixpérepos, -dtaros, always retain
their original idea of smallness, and also éAlyo'ros that of fewness, though dAtyos
often signifies small.

§ 84.] ADJECTIVES. — ANOMALOUS FORMS OF CoMPARISON. 111

Rem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparative mAclwy,
mAéwy, should be particularly noted. The neuter wAdov is more frequent than
mAciov, especially when it is used adverbially ; wAgovos and mAclovos, radov
and mAclovi, Acc. rAéw, wAgova, and mAclw, are used indiscriminately; Pl. Nom.
and Acc., usually mAefous, also wAcloves and mAclovas (but not wAdovs) ; wAclw
is much more frequent than rAéw; mAcidvwy and wAcloot are more frequent than
mwAcévevy and wAéoot, Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing. waciy
(formed from mAeioy), but limited to such phrases as wAciv } wdpiot, should be
mentioned as a special Atticism.

Several adjectives, which express the idea of an order or
series, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms,
because, on account of their signification, they cannot be used
absolutely, but only in comparison. An adverb of place is

usually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g.

_— mpé), mpdrepos (prior), rpa@ros (primus), first.

tivw), d&vérepos (superior), avéraros (supremus).

“ tarép), bréprepos (superior), higher, brépraros, Poet. traros (supremus).

iné 2), borepos (posterior), later, jrraros (postremus), last.

“ é), &%xaros (extremus), outermost.

mAnotoy, prope), (wAnotos, Homeric), wAnowirepos, or mAnovéorepos
(proprior), nearer, rAncialraros, -€oraros (proximus), nearest.

( “ «pdéow), far, mporérepos, farther, xpocdétaros, farthest.

*«
-

Rem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which are
also derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. Apéua,
quietly, jpeuéarepos, hpeuéotaros; mpotpyov, useful, mpodvpyiatrepos, more useful,
mpovpyialtaros.

Rem. 4. Comparatives and Superlatives are also formed from substantives.
Here two cases are to be distinguished: (a) when the substantive, both in form
and signification, is the Positive from which the Comparative and Superlative
may be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be considered as an adjective,
e. g. dodAos, slave, SovAdrepos, more slavish; —(b) when the substantive, in
respect to the signification, is not really the Positive, but only in respect to the
form can be considered as the basis of the Comparative and Superlative, the
proper Positive form having been lost, (comp. xpdrioros from the Epic xparis,
éréyxioros from the Epic éAeyxfs.) Numerous examples of the last kind may
be found in poetry, particularly in Epic. See § 216, Rem. 2.

Rem. 5. For the sake of greater emphasis, the Comparative and Superla-
tive are sometimes compared, e. g. foxaros (Superl.), éoxardérepos, éoxaréra-
Tos; 80 mpérioros from mp@ros. This is frequent in the Comic writers, seldom
in Homer and the Tragedians, still more seldom in prose.

112 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.

§85. Comparison of Adverbs.

i, Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have
commonly no independent adverbial ending; the Comparative
is expressed by the Acc. Sing. neuter of the Comparative
adjective, and the Superlative by the Acc. Pl. neuter of the
Superlative, e. g.

copes (from codds) Com. copérepov Sup. copétara
Tapas (.“ caphs) Tapa epov capeotara
xapevrws ( “ xaples) Xapieorepov Xapiérrara
eddaimdvws ( “ eddatuwr) evdatmoveaTepoy evdaimoverrara
aicxpas ( “ aioxpds) aloxiov alo xuore
nd€ws ( “ dds) Hdtov jodie

TAX EWS ( “ raxds) Saocov, -TTov TAXIOTO.

ReMark 1. The Singular of the Comparative is used, because only two
objects are compared, and it is affirmed that one of these is better, etc. than
the other; but the Plural of the Superlative, because the object compared is
the best, etc. of many others.

Rem. 2. But sometimes these adverbs also retain in the Comparative the
adverbial ending of the Positive -ws, e. g. xaAemwrépws, GAnderrépws, woxSnpo-
Tépws, KaAALdvws, especially wer(dvws, etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used
in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry.

2. All original adverbs in -o, e. g. dvw, kdtw, ew, ecw, etc.,
retain the ending -w regularly in the Comparative, and almost
uniformly in the Superlative, e. g.

tivw, above, Com. avwrépw Sup. dvwrdrw
kdrw, below, Katt épw KaTwTare,

In like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending
-w in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g.

&yxod, near, Com. ayxorépw Sup. &yxordrw
mépa, ultra, TeparTepw Sup. wanting
Tndod, far, TNAoTEpw TNAOTATYW
éxds, far, éxaorépw éxaoTdtw
éyybs, near, eyyutépw eyyuTdrw and
eyybrepov eyybrata

tyyora (rarely).

i} 86, 87.] THE PRONOUNS éyd, ot, ob. 113
CHAPTER IIL.

The Pronoun.

§86. Nature and Division of Pronouns.

1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea
of an object, but only the relation of an object to the
speaker ; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker
himself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed
(the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the
third person), e. g. J (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar)
it (the book).

2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes:

(1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog-
ative, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di-
_ vided, according to their signification and form, into (a)
F pabatantine; (b) Adguclive, and (c) Adverbial Pronouns,
e. g. €y@ TavTa érroinca; (a) I, thou, he, she, it; (b) my, thy,
_ his; ; (c) here, there, thus.

I PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
A. Substantive Personal Pronouns.

§87. The simple éyo, ego, cv, tu, ob, sut.

Singular.

ob, thou wantin

) ‘god (cou), of thee | ob (06), of himself, ete.
Dat. | nol (uot), euol, to me ool (ese to thee | of (of), to himself, etc.

Ace. | wé (ue), eué, me o€ (ce), thee € € (é), himself, etc.

Dual.
N.A. | vd, we both, us both ope, you both Thue, Acc. (Poet.), them both
G.D. wie, 6 us ‘both, to us | op@yv, of you both, — pagent of them both,

Nom. eyd, jj
Gen. | “od (uov), euod, of me

bot. to you both to them both
Plural.

opeis, Neut. cpéa (Poet.), open)
opav, of them [they
oplar(v) (opror[y] ), to them

opas, Neut. cpéa (open), them.

Gen. Tar, of us buay, of you (dv)
Dat. hiv, to us buiv, to you (v)
Acc. | jas, us bucs, you (v)

10*

Nom. husis, we ducts, ye (vd)

114 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS éuavrot, ceavrod, éavrod. [§
Remark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthes

without any mark of accent. Comp. §§ 33 (b), and 35,3. On the accentuation

and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see § 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative

is here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is
always like the Nominative.

Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing. of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer,
often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms éuéSev, oéSev, Sev; these

forms always retain their accent, except when €Sev is not used as a reflexive

(suc), but as a pronoun of the third person (ejus). Comp. § 35, 3 (b).

Rem. 3. The Acc. Sing. and Pl. of of has in Attic poetry also the form

vly (mv) signifying him, her, it, Pl. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of ©

avrovs and ards. See the Dialects, § 217.

i

Rem. 4. The oblique Cases of jyets and duets, when not emphatic, some-—
times undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol-—

lowing manner: fuov tuwv, fuiv buiv, or Fly bulv; still; this inclination
cannot take place if a Paroxytone precedes.

of the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Acc. Pl. by the poets (also by the

The shorter form of the pronoun

Attic writers), e.g. Dat. opt (or opty) instead of opioi(y), to them, Ace. opé -

instead of opas, them. Both forms, opi and civ, though seldom, are used by
the poets as the Dat. Sing.; the form o¢é, on the contrary, is used much more
frequently as the Acc. Sing. instead of airdy, -hy, -d, also as reflexive instead
of éavrdy.

§88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, éuavrot, ceavrod,
EQuTOV.

Singular.

G. | guavrod, -js, of
myself

D. | euavrg, -7, to
myself

A. | éuavrdy, -hy,
myself

G. | jay abrév, of
ourselves

D. | quiy abrots, -ais,
to ourselves

A.| judas aos, -ds,
ourselves

OEavTOU, -Hs, OY
gavTod, “iis, of thyself
TewvT@, fh, OF

gavT@, fi, to thyself
ceavrdy, ~hv, Or

oavrdv, -hv, thyself
Plural.
buav aitay, of your-
selves

buiy avtots, -ais, to
yourselves

buas avTovs, -ds,
yourselves

éavrod, ~jjs, 0
adrod, “iis, of "himself of patent
éavT@, “fi, 0 [itsel,
adr, -f, to "himself: to herself, to
éautdv, -hv, -d, or tsel

[2
airdv, -hv, -d, himself, Pe

€avToy OY adTe@y, or

opav aiTav, of themselves

éavTots ais, or abrots -ats, or

opiow avrots -ais, to themselves

éavrots, -ds, -d, or abrovs, -ds,
-d, or

opas ab’tovs, -ds, opéa abd,
themselves.

§ 89-91.] RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 115

§89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns.

To express reciprocal relation, the Greek has a special pro-
nominal form, which is made by the coalescence of dAAo dAdwv,
dXot GAXots, GAAot GAAOvs, into one word. From the nature of
the relation, this word can have no Singular. *

Plural Gen. &AAHAwY, Of one another Dual aaAAfAow, -av, -ow
Dat. GAANAOLS, -ats, -o1s GAAHAOW, -aw, -ow
Acc. GAAHAOUS, -as, -% _ WAA@, -G, -w.

§ 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns.

__ Personal pronouns, having the form of adjectives, are called
_ Possessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are
formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : —

éuds, -h, -dv, meus, -a, -um, from éuod; juérepos, -Tépa, -Tepor, noster, -tra, -trum,
from judy ;

ods, -h, -dv, tuus, -a, -um, from ood; duérepos, -répa, -repov, vester, -tra, -trum,
from dua ;

opérepos, -répa, -Tepoy, suus, -a, -um, from opay (used in speaking of many ;
when single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the
Gen. éavrod, -jjs). The Epic form, és, 4, dv, suus, -a,-wm, also occurs in
the Tragedians, though seldom.

§ 91. Il DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

Singular.
the hic haec hoc ipse ipsa ipsum
Nom.|}6 4 76 | obros airy TOUTO avurés aur ‘urd
Gen. | rod ris Tov | tobrov tattns rovbrov avToD § avTis avTov
Dat. |7r¢@ tH TE | TobTe TabtTn TotTw aitgG ath aire
_ fAce. | rév rhv 76 | TodTov §=Tabrny TodTO abrév avTiy avr
| Plural.
| fNom.joi af rd | obra abta radra | adrot abral aird
| | Gen. | ray raév ray | TobTwy Tobtwy TobTwr auTavy avTavy avTaey
| Dat. | rots tats rots | rovros tabtas tovTos | adtois abrais abrois
- fAce. | robs tds rd | todrovs ratras Tadra avrovs avrds avTd
. Dual.
N.A.| 7rd (rd) rd | rotrw (tabra) rodbtw até «= ath = ab
.D.\ roiv taiv totv | robrow tabtaw Tovrow avroiv avTaiv avroiy.

1. The pronoun oéros is composed of the article 6, 4, 7d, and the pronoun
ards; where the article has 0, w, or o:, they combine with the first syllable
of airés and make ov; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the

‘

116 - RELATIVE PRONOUN. [§ ve.

first syllable of adtdés. Hence the first syllable of ofros ends in ov where the
article has 0, w, or o1; elsewhere in av. The same rule holds when airdés is
compounded with an adjective pronoun, e. g. tocodros (from técos and aités).
Examples: 6 adrdés = otros, } aith = abrn, 1d ad’td= TodT0; Tod abrod =
TovTov, THS al’Ths = TavTys, etc.;.so Téc0s av’Tés = ToToDTOS, TdTn a’Th = ToC
atrn, Técov a’td = TocodTO, Técov avTOD = Togodrou, etc.
2. Like 6, 4, 7é is declined, 83¢, #5e, Td5e, TODdE, THsde, Pl. ofde, alde, rdde;
Like otros are declined, tocotros, tocab’tn, TocovTo(v), tantus, -a, -um, Towd-
Tos, TotavTN, ToLodTO(v), talis, -e, THALKodTOS, THALKAUTN, THALKOUTO(Y), s0.gr a
so old; it is to be noted, that the neuter Sing., besides the form in o h
also the common form in ov;
Like airés is declined, éxeivos, éxelyn, éxeivo, he, she, it, %AAos, BAAN, Bane,
alius, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing. here also ending in o.

Remark 1. The neuter form in o seems to have rejected a 5, as may b
inferred from the Latin, is, ea, 7d, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud.—On the Dual
forms, rd, Taiv, Tatra, rabraw, see § 241, Rem. 10 (b).— Instead of éxeivos, the
Tonic xeivos is also used in Attic poetry; this word occurs somewhat frequentl
in Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong; hence Aphaeresis
(§ 14, 5) must be assumed here, as } ’Kelyws, Pl. Rp. 2. 370, a.

Singular. Plural.
Nom. | Tocodros TooavTn TocovTo(v) | TocovTo: TocavTa: TocavTa
Gen. TocoUTOU TooavTns TOC OUTOU TocoUTwY ToOTO’TwWY TOTO’TwY
Dat. ToTOUTH TooavTy TocoUT@ TocovTols ToTalTais TogovToS
Acc. TocovToy tocaltny Togovro(v) | tocovTovs Tocab’Tas TocavTa
Dual.
N. A. | rocoirw TooavTa ToOTOvTH
G.D. | togotrov Tocaitaw Tocovrow.

Rem. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 10) with airdés and forms
one word, viz. airdés (instead of 6 abrds, idem), abrh, Tadd, usually rad-
7 év (instead of 7d abrd), Tabrod, but ris airis, Tad’TG@, TavTH (to distinguish
it from tadrn, this), but roy abtdv, Thy adrhy, abrol, abral, Tadd (instead of
7% a’rd, to distinguish it from Tatra, haec), but trav abtay, Tots abrois, etc.

§ 92. ITT. Retative PROoNOvN.

Singular. Plural. Dual.
Nom. és i é of al & & & &
Gen. ob ns 00 oy ov ov oiv aiv ov
Dat. @ " @ ois als ots oiv aiv oly
Ace. év iy é ous as & é &.

INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 117

§93. IV. InpEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

The Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns are denoted
yy the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and
»osition, the Indefinite being enclitic (§ 33) and placed after
some word or words, the Interrogative being always accented
and placed before.

| Remark 1. When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question,
the relative § is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case

of 8stis), is not inflected, e. g. droios, drécos, dxdrepos, etc.
| Sing. N. | rls, some one N. 7}, some thing ris; quis? tf; quid?
. G. | rivés, or Tod tlvos, Or TOU
D. | rut, or 7G : Tivt, OF TO
A. | rwd N. 7 tlyva Tt
Plur. N.| twés N. trwd and arta tlves tla
G. | twév tlywy
D.| riol(y) tlot(v)
A. | twds N. trwd and &rra | tivas tlya
Dual N. A. | rwé tlve
G. and D. | two tlyvow.

bstis, whoever Fris 8 tt olrwes alrives Grwa, or &rra
obtiwos, or Srov Fstivos évtwey (rarely drwy)

grim, or rm tut oistiat(v) (rarely 8roioi[v]) aistict(v) ofstio1(»)
byTwa fvrwa tt} olstwas &stivas Tia, OY GTA

Dual N. A. Srwe, Grwe, G. D. ofvrivow, aivrwow.

Rem. 2. The form &rra not enclitic (Ion. toca) is often used instead of rd
in connection with adjectives, e. g. dewa trra, uixpa &rra, or placed first, e. g.
Fv yap 8h Ura toidde, Pl. Phaedon. 60, e. On the accent of & ayTivwy, olytiwow,,
_ alyrivow, see § 34, Rem. 1. The shorter forms, 8rov, drw, etc. are used by the
dramatists almost always; Srov, rw are also used by the orators; but drwy,
brooi(v) are yery rare in prose. The negative compounds of as, Viz. obtis,
ori, whris, uhtt, no one, nothing, inflect the simple zis merely, e. g. oftuvos,

_obrives, etc. These forms are poetic; instead of them, prose writers use oddefs,
e xndels ; only ofr: and hr: are used in prose with the adverbial meaning, in no
. not at all, and in the phrase, ofr: ye 5 (ufre ye 54), let alone then, much

Sing. N. 6 4 7b Beiva, some one, some thing Plur. of deives
G. TOU Tis Tov Seivos Tay Selvwv
D. TE TH TH Set wanting
A. roy thy Td dea Tous Seivas.

Rem. 3. Aciva is also used indeclinably, though seldom, e. g. rod 7 Tov
|

118 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. [§ 94

q

§ 94. Correlative Pronouns.

Under Correlative Pronouns are included all those which
express a mutual relation (correlation) to each other, so that if
one implies a question, the other with a corresponding form
contains the answer. |

1. This mutual relation is either a general or a definite one. The general
correlation is expressed by tis; rl; who? what? ws, 7i, some one, some thing;
de, obros, he, this; éxeivos, that one; ovdels, no one; &s, who, which, ete. Here
the forms of the correlatives do not correspond with each other, except in the
case of zis, For example, if a question is asked by tfs, the answer may be b
tis, 85, obros, etc.

2. The definite correlation has four different forms, viz. the Interrogative,
Indefinite, Demonstrative, and Relative. This fourfold correlation belongs both
to adjective and adverbial pronouns. All the four forms come from the same
root, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly by a differ-
ent initial; the Interrogative begin with , the Indefinite have the same form,
though with a different accent, the Demonstrative begin ,with 7, and the
Relative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect interrogatives, as shown above, |
§ 93, Rem. 1, place the relative 6 before the initial 7.

8. Correlative adjective pronouns express relations of quantity and quality;
correlative adverbial pronouns, the relations of place, time, and manner, or
condition.

(a) Adjective Correlatives.

Relat. and De-

Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative.
pend. Interrog.

mécos, -n, -ov;| moods, -h, -dv, |Técos, -n, -ov, so great, so| 800s, -n, -ov and

how great? how} of a certain| much, tantus émdcos, -n, -Ov,
much? quan-| - size, or number, |roadaSe, roohde, roodvde| as great, as
tus 4 aliquantus TogovToS, -avTn, -ovTo(v)| much, quantus

motos, -G. -ov;| maids, -d, -dv, of |Totos, -G, -ov, of such a | olos, -d, -ovy and
of what kind?| acertainkind | kind, talis émoios. -G, -OV,
qualis? Tosde, Tordde, Todvde of what kind,}

Towvros, -avTn, -odro(y) | . qualis

analkos, -n, -ov ; TnAlkos, -n, -ov, so great, so\nAlkos, -n, -ov and}
how great? how wanting rnaikdsde, -Hde, -dvde [old|éanAixos, -n, -ov,
old? TNALKOUTOS, -avTN, -ovTO(v)| as great, as old.

Remark 1. The simple forms técos and rotos are seldom used in Atti¢
prose ; técos and rotos are found in the phrase, rozos } roios, Pl. Phaedr. 271,
d, and elsewhere; récos nat récos (Pl. ib.); é« récov (so long time since), Pl.

Leg. 642, at end; réow with a Comparative, corresponding to the relative bore,
e.g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. ‘

LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUN.

(b) Adverbial Correlatives.

119

Interrogative. Indefinite. | Demonstrative. | Relative. infec:
mod; where? mov, somewhere,| wanting (hic, |ob, — where,|drov, where.
ubi? alicubi ibi) ubi ubi
bSev ; whence? | rodév, from some | wanting (hinc, |8Sev, whence, drdSev,
unde ? place, alicunde | inde) unde |whence,unde
ot; whither? | mol, tosome place,| wanting (eo) of, whither,|8ro.,whither,
quo? aliquo quo quo
aére; when? | word, some time, | tére, then, tum |8re, when,|drdre,
} quando? aliquando quum w
quando
| wnrlka ; quo | wanting THVI- hoc = |jvtxa, when.|érnvixa,
temporis punc- Kd5e ipso quo ipso} when, quo
to? quota ho- THVI- tem- tempore | ipso tem-
ra? kavra J pore pore
| was; how? mas, some how obTw(s) Bde, so jas, how dws, how
‘|; whither? | rh, to some place,| rps hither, \j, — where, |i. where,
how ? thither, in some way| tabTy i or here | whither whither.

Rem. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hic, ibi), wanting in
Common language, are supplied by évradSa, évadde, and the idea of hence,
(hine, inde), by évSév5e, évreddev; %vSa and @ey in the old and poetic
age haye both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a
tive sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. @Sa piv — @ySa 4€, hic, illic,
fySev «al évSev, hinc, illinc, and when the signification of place is changed to
» that of time, e. g. Sa Aéye:, then he says, 2vSev, thereupon. The forms tds, thus,
th, hither, here, are poetic; &s (instead of ofrws), is also for the most part
; poetic ; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e.g. xa) és, vel
| sic, 008° (und) Ss, ne sic quidem, and in comparisons, és — és, ut —sic, Pl. Rp.
_ 7. 580, d. Prot. 326, d.; also és ody, so then, Th. 3, 37.

§ 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun.

Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving
| culpa turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word.
) They are the following :—

_ (a) The enclitic yé is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second
) person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with
thers, e. g. Zywye, I for my pes The pronoun éyé then draws back its accent
n the Nom. and Dat. e. g. éywe, euotye, Euorye, euéye, ovye. As yé can be
joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not
orm one word with the pronoun, e. g. oirds ye.

(b) The particles 54 (most commonly dfmore), and ody, are appended to
slatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to 800s, in
jorder to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything
abraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, e. g. dstisd4, dstisdhmore, dstis-
oToUv, dsTisovy, HTISOdY, Stwodv, whoever it be, I know not who, nescio quis, qui-
aunque (Gen. odtivosody or drovody, jstivosody, Dat. drunody or drwodvr, etc.);—.

ogosdh, drocosody, écosd#rore, quantuscunque ;— danArcosodr, y weer great,
p old soever ; so also &smepoty [comp. (d)].

ees ee
x

120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [§ 96.

(c) The suffix d¢ is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of
strengthening their demonstrative relation, e, g. 85¢, #5e, réde; Todsde; toods-
Se; tnAudsde, from totes, réc0s, TnAlxos, Which change their accent after Se is
appended ({ 34, Rem. 3). .

(d) The enclitic rép is appended to all relatives, in order to strengthen the
reference to a demonstrative, and thus.to connect the relative more closely with
its antecedent ; hence it denotes, even who, which, the very man, who, ete. ¢. g.
Ssmep, imep, Sep (Gen. obmep, etc.) ; Scosmep, vidsmep (Gen. dcourep, ofourep, ete.) ;
8Surep, SSevTep. :

(e) The inseparable demonstrative ¢, is appended to demonstratives and some
few adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. It takes the
acute accent (which yet, according to § 31, I., is changed into the grave in con-
nected discourse) and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding it, and
also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : — '

obroat, this here (hicce, celui-ci), airyt, rovri,

Gen. rovroti, ravrnot, Dat. rovr@gt, tavriit, Pl. obroit, abrait, ravtt;

68%, dt, rodt from Se; wd¢ from ade; odrwot from obtws;

éevrevsevt from évreddev; évdadt from évddde; vuvt from viv; devpl from dedpo.

CHAPTER IV.
The Numerals.

§ 96. Nature and Division of Numerals.

1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity.
They are divided into the following classes, according to their
signification : — :

(a) Cardinals, which express a definite number -absolutely,
and answer the question, how many? e.g. one, two, three. The
first four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (é:axdov0r)
to 10,000 (uv%pro1) and their compounds, are declined; but all the
others are indeclinable. 'The thousands are expressed by
adverbial Numerals, e. g. tpusxiAvor, 3000.

(b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question,
which one in the series? All have the three endings of adjec-
tives, -os, -y, -ov, except devrepos, which has -os, -d, -ov. All up
to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -ros and have the accent as near
as possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upward
they end in -ords.

Remark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by
the Neut. Sing. or Pl., with or without the article, but sometimes also with the
adverbial ending -ws, e. g. mpatov, Td mparoy, TpaTa, TA MPGTa, TPOTws.

§ 96.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121

(c) Numeral adverbs, which express how often, or how many
times anything has happened, and which answer the question,
how many times? 'They are formed, except the first three, from
the ordimals with the ending -dkis, e. g. mevrdkts, five times
(§ 98).

(d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which
a whole is composed, and answer the question, how many fold?
All are compounded of zAois, and are adjectives of three end-
ings, -ods, -7, -odv (§§ 76, I, and 77).

&mdouvs, -7, -obv, single; SimAovs (2), rprwAods (3), Terpamdovs (4), wevratAods
(5), EfamAods (6), Ewramdods (7), dxTamwAods (8), evvamdAods (9), SexamAods (10),
éxatovtamAovs (100), xtAramaAovs (1000), uvpiamAovs (10,000).

Rem. 2. The adverbial Multiples in answer to the question, how many
Sold? or into how many ee ? are formed from the Cardinals with the ending
-x& or -x7 and -xdas, e. g. wévTaxG, TevTAaXT, TWevTAXas.

(e) Proportionals, which denote a proportion, and answer the
question, how many times more? All are compounded with the
endings -7Adaovos, -ia, -cov (more seldom -rAaciwy, -ov, e. g. Exarov-
tataciwv, -ov) :—

dimAdotos, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), rpemAdotos
(3), rerpawAdows (4), wevramAdows (5), éfawAdows (6), éwramAdotos (7), dxTa-
mAdowos (8), évvawadoios (9), SexawAdotos (10), éxaroytamAdotos (100), xtAL0-
mwAdatos (1000), uvpromAdoos (10,000).

(f) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea
of number. Except the first, all are formed from the Cardinals
with the ending -ds, Gen. -ados: —

H povds (from pédvos, only), more seldom % évds, unity ; Suds, duality; tpids (3).
tetpas (4), mevtds or meumtds (5), éfds (6), EBdouds (7), dydods (8), evveds (9),
Sexds (10), eixds (20), rpidxds (30), terrapaxovrds (40), wevrnxovtds (50), éxa-
tovrds (100), xsAuds (1000), pupids (10,000), S00 uupiddes (20,000).

Rem. 3. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is still another
class, which does not, like those, express a definite number, but either an
indefinite number or an indefinite quantity, e. g. @101, some; mdyres, all ; mod-
Aol, many (§ 77); dAbyo, few; bdrtyor, dAtya, a little; obdels, no one; ovdér,
nothing, ete.

2. Numerals, like pronouns, are divided, according to thei
signification and form, into Substantive, Adjective, and Adyer-
bial Numerals, e. g. tpeis 7AIov; 6 tpiros avip; Tpis.

11

—— Se ee ae
a

122 | NUMERALS. [$§ 97, 98.

§97. Numeral Signs.

1. The Numeral Signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to
which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, Bad, or the Digamma F, or
Sri, s; the last character is taken from the figure s, which is a mutilated form
of the Digamma, but which has only an accidental resemblance to the abbre-
viation of o (s) and 7 (§ 1, Rem. 2); — Korma, 5, as the sign for 90; — Zauni,
2, as the sign for 900.

2. The first eight letters, i.e. from a to 8 with the Bad or X17, denote the
units; the following eight, i. e. from : to x with the Kéa7a, the tens; the last
eight, i. e. from p to w with the Saum?, the hundreds.

3. Up to 999, the letters as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral
signs, only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but
the letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, a’ = 1, a=
1000, ¢ = 10, 4 = 10,000, ,<Wup’ = 5742, awyp’ = 1842, p’ = 100, p=
100,000.

§ 98. Principal Classes of Numerals.

Cardinals. Ordinals.

lad eis, pla, & ™p@ros, -n, -ov, primus, -a, -um

2p isto devTepos, -d, -ov

3 pels, tela tplros, -n, -ov

48 rérrapes, -a, or Téowapes, -a TéTapTOS, -n, -ov

5é «révte TEUMTOS, -N, -OV

6° & €xTos, -n, -ov

70° énrd €Bdouos, -n, -ov

87! oxra byS5o0s, -n, -ov

9S évwéa Zvaros, -n, -ov
10’ d€ka déxaTos, -n, -ov
ll ia’ &vdexa évdéxaros, -n, -ov
12.8’ dédexa SwdéxaTos, -n, -ov
13 / pets (tpla) Kad Séxa! tplros, -n, -ov Ka déxaros, -n- -ov®
14:8’ rérrapes(a) kat déxa? TérapTos, -n, -ov Kat Séxatos, -n, -ov
15 ue’ wevrexaldexa mwéumnros, -n, -ov Kat S€karos, -7, -ov
16us’ éxxaldexa éxros, -n, -ov Kal Séxaros, -n, -ov
17 i’) éwraxatdexa €Bdouos, -n, -ov Kad Séxaros, -n, -ov
18 wy = éxtwKaldexa Bydo0s, -n, -ov Kal Séxaros, -n, -ov

- 1918 évveaxatdexa evaros, -n, -ov Kal d€xaros, -n, -ov

20 x = efxoor(v) eixoords, ~h, -dv

1 The rare Attic form rpiskalSexa is indeclinable.
? The non-Attic form treocapaxatdexa is indeclinable.
3 The forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable to tpiskadéxatos,

TeTTapaKgid€eKargs, TevTEKadeKaTos, etc.

i Biba

§ 98.] NUMERALS,
Cardinals. Ordinals.
21 xa’ elxoow eis, ula, & eixoords, -}, -bv, mp@Tos, -n, -ov
30 A’ TpidKovra Tpiaxoords, ~h, -dv
40 ws rerrapaxovta TetTapaKoords, -h, -dv
50 / -wevrhKovTa mevtnkooTds, -h, -dv
60 & = ékhxovta étaxoords, -h, -dv
70 o «= EBdouxxovra EBdounkoords, -h, -dv
80 2 = bydonKovTa bydonkoards, -h, -dv
90 5 évevhxovra évernxootés, -h, -dv
100 ps Exardy éxatootés, -h, -dv
200 o diaxdor0t, -at, -a diaxoctogrds, -h, -dv
300 7 = rpiaxdoiot, -at, -o Tpiakoowords, ~h, -ov
400 vs rerpaxdotot, -at, -a Tetpaxocorrds, -h, -dv
500 ¢ = revriixdoiot, -at, -o mevtaxocwords, ~h, -dv
600 x éfaixdoiol, -a, -a étaxocoords, -h, -dv
700 Y érraxdotot, -at, -a érraxoctooTds, -h, -ov
800 w dxTaxdoto, -at, -a oxTakootogTds, -h, -ov
900 BD’ evvaxdcroi, -at, -o évvaxoc.oords, ~h, -d¥
1000 a xlAtot, -at, -a XiAwords, -h, -dv
2000 8B disxiAsot, -at, -a SisxtAsorrds, -h, -dv
3000 yy TpisxtAsot, -at, -a | TpisxiAwoords, -h, -dv
4000 5 rerpéxisxlArot, -at, -a TeTpakisxiAtooTés, -h, -dv
5000 .¢ mevrdxisxlArot, -at, -o mevrakisxiAioords, -n, -dv
4 6000 js ékdixisxfAsot, -a, -o étaxisxiAwords, -%, -dv
y 7000 .¢ émraxisxlArot, -at, -a éwraxisxiAioorés, -h, -dv
; 8000 m dxTdxisxXtAtol, -at, - éxTaxisxiAtoords, ~h, -dv
9000 S évvdinisx{Arot, -at, -a évvaxisxiAvoords, ~h, -dv
10,000 4 = dptoi, -at, -a puptoorés, -h, -dv
20,000 x Sisudpror, -at, -o disuupioords, -h, -dv
100,000 p Sexaxisudpiot, -at, -a dexaxisuupioords, -h, -dv
1,000,000 1p éxarovraxtsuvpiot, -at, -a éxatovraxisuupioords, -h, -dv
2,000,000 kp 3 (aKISMUPLOL, -al, -& Siaxoctaxisuvpioords, -h, -dv.
; Numeral Adverbs.
1 Gat, once 13 rpiskadexdxts 50 wevrnkovtdxis
—- 2 Sls, twice 14 rerrap Sexdxis 60 éfnxovrdxis
8 als 15 wevrexaidexdeis 70 éBdounkoytdxis
4 rerpdts 16 éxxaderdxss 80 dySonkoyrdxis
J 5 wevrdxis 17 éwrakaidexdnis 90 éveynrovraxts
6 étdKis 18 dxTwKaderdnis 100 éxarovrdxis
7 éwrdxis 19 évveaxaiSexdxts 200 diaxocideis
8 dxrdxis 20 eixooduis 300 rpiaxoordts
9 évvednis, évduts 21 eixoodxis &mat 1000 xtArdis
10 dexdecs 22 elxoodxts Sls 2000 SisxArdets
1l évdexdxis 30 tptaxoyrdxis 10,000 yupideis
12 dwdexdits 40 rerrapaxoyrdxis 20,000 dismupidets.

a ee ee
e 7

124- REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. [§ 99.

§99. Remarks.

1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, 14, etc., used by later writers, are
Sexarpeis, Neut. dexarpla, dexarérrapes, -a, dexamévre, etc.

2. Mudpiot, 10,000, when Paroxytone (uvplor), signifies txnumerable.

3. In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger,
and then always with xa, or it follows the larger, usually with xa, sometimes
without it. The first order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. five
and twenty ; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-five, e. g.

25: wévre xa) efxoor(v), or eYxoor kal wévTe,
345: wévre kat Tertapdxovta Kat Tpiaxdo1oL, OF Tplak. TETT. Kal 7.

The same holds of the Ordinals, e. g.
mwéumros Kat eixoords, Or eixoords Kat méuTTos.

4. The tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the form of
subtraction, by means of the participle of de7v, to want, which agrees with the
larger number, e. g.

49: wevthkovra évds Séovra érn', undequinquaginta anni,
48: mwevrhkovra dvoww déovra @rn, duodequinquaginta anni,

39: vijes pias S€ovom TeTTapdKxovta, undequadraginta naves.

So with the Ordinals, e. g.

49: évds déwv mevrnoatds avnp, undequinquagesimus vir.

5. Fractions are usually expressed by pépos or woipa. These words, as
denominators of the fraction, are put in the Gen., depending on the numeral
which denotes the numerator. If they are expressed as denominators, they are
understood with the numeral denoting the numerator; if they are expressed
as numerators, they are understood with the numeral denoting the denominator,
e.g. 2 is ray mévre pepay Td dd0 [uepn], or Tay révTe [uepav] Td Bb0 uépn, two
parts of the five; § is ray éxt® powpay ai wévre [notpa], or Tay dxTw [powpor] af
dbo potpar. But one half is expressed by compounds with ju, e. g. 7udapendy,
half a daric; so in the Pl. rpla, wévre jyudapeuxd, a daric and a half, two darics
and a half.— Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with uépioy or pépos,
@. g. TpiTnudpiov or tpiroy uépos =}, wéumToy pepos = 4; a Mixed number is
also expressed by 71 preceded by a numeral, e. g. révre jurdapernd = 2} darics,
also by éml prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. émlrpiroy = 1}, émtreumrroy = 14.

6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with ody are equivalent to the Latin
distributives, e. g. cdvivo (bini), two. together, two at a time, each two, ovytpes
(terni), cd¥urevre (quini), etc.

' Fifty years, wanting one.

§ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. 126

7. Declension of the first four Numerals :—

Nom. | és pla ey bdo

Gen. | évds Mads évds dvoiy (very seldom dveiy)

Dat. | & pag évl dvoiy (Sucilv] Ionic and Th. 8, 101.)
Ace. | &va play éy dv0

Nom. | tpets Neut. rpia | Térrapes, or récoapes Neut. rérrapa
Gen. | Tpiay TETTA POV

Dat. | tpiol(v) Térrapot(v)

Ace. | pets Neut. rpla | rérrapas Neut. rérrapa

Remark. Like cfs are also declined ovdefs and pndels, no one; like efs too
they have the irregular accent, e. g. oddels, ovdeula, oddév, Gen. oddevds, ovdde-
muds, Dat. ovderl, ovdeuG, etc.; but in the Pl. oddéves (undéves), -evwr, -éor(v),
-évas. Comp. further, § 65, 3 (c). The form dw, instead of dt0, seems to be
foreign to the Attic dialect. Avo is often used as indeclinable in all the Cases.
“Auge, both, is declined like to, Gen. and Dat. du@oty, Acc. &upa,

CHAPTER V.

The Adverb.

§ 100. Nature and division of the Adverb.

Adverbs (§§ 38 and 314) are indeclinable words, denoting
the relations of place, time, manner, modality, intensity, and
repetition. ‘They are formed either from essential words
(§ 38, 3), viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participles, or from
formal words, viz. Pronouns and Numerals, or they are
primitive words, e. g. ov, 47, Kal, jv, }, av, etc.

(a) Adverbs of place, e. g. obpayddev, coelitus, rayrax7, ubivis;

(b) Adverbs of time, e. g. vixrwp, noctu, viv, nunc;

(c) Adverbs of manner, e. g. karA@s, ofr w(s) ;

(d) Adverbs of modality, which, e.g. val and od(x), express an affirmation and
negation, or @. g. why, Tol, 4, i why, 5h, tows, mob, kv, mdévtws, etc. which
express certainty, definiteness, uncertainty, conditionality ;

(e) Adverbs of intensity and frequency, e. g. udda, mdvu, Tort, Saov, etc. pls,

three times; ab%is, again; moAdd«ts, often.

11*

126 FORMATION OF ADVERBS. [$ 101.

§ 101. Formation of Adverbs.

1. Most Adverbs are formed from adjectives by the ending
-ws. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the adjective ;
hence, as the stem of adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the
Gen., and as adjectives in the Gen. Pl. are accented like
adverbs, the following rule for the formation of adverbs from
adjectives may be given: —

Change -wv, the ending of the adjectwe in the Gen. Pl., into -us,
é. g.

pla-os, lovely, Gen. Pl. pia-wy Ady. pfa-ws
Kad-ds, fair, “ KaA-@y KaA-@s
xalpi-os, timely, “ Kaupl-wy ; koupl-ws
&mA(d-os)ods, simple, “ awA(6-wv) av amA(d-ws)@s
ey(o-os)ous, benevolent, “ (ebvd-wv) etvwy (edvd-ws) etyws
was, all, rayrés, “ mdyt-wy mwdvrT-ws
caéppwy, prudent, “ gwppdr-wy owppdy-ws
xaples, pleasant, “ Xaprevr-wy XapievT-ws
Taxbs, swift, “ raxé-wy TAXE-wWS
péyas, great, peydA-wv peydA-ws
&Anahs, true, “ GAnd(é-wv) av GANS é-ws) as

ouvhsns, accustomed, & (curndsé-wv) cuvhSov (cvvndé-ws) cuvidws.

Remark 1. On the accent of compounds in -73ws, and of the compound
abtdpkws, see § 59, Rem. 4, also on the accent of efyws, instead of edvas, § 49,
3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see § 85.

2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -ws, there are

many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat., or Acc.

(a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -ys and -ov,

e. g. é&Hs, eetns, Im order; eEamivns, suddenly ; ov, alicubi; od,
ubi? dzov, ot, ubi; avrod, ibi; otdapnov, nowhere.

(b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative! ending, occurs

in the following adverbs,

(a) In adverbs with the ending -i, e. g. Apt, in the morning, comp. Hp, spring,
dwpt, unseasonably ; Exnts (Dor. éxari), aéenrt, éExovtl, dexovtt; in adverbs
of manner in -et and -7, from adjectives in -as and -ys, and almost exclu-
sively in adverbs compounded of a privative and was or aitds, e. g.

mavopuel and mavoput. On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar,
Part I, § 363 (8).

1 The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where.

2°

RE eenrebeeereniereess >.

§ 102.] CLASSES OF THE VERB. 127

(8) In local adverbs in -o?, commonly derived from substantives of the sec-
ond Dee., e. g. “IoSmot from “IoSuds, MuSot from Mu8d, Meyapot (rd
Méyapa), Tleipatot, Kixvyvot from 4 Kixuvva), of, trot, quo, whither, otkor,
domi, from oixes.

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -o7, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite
where, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither,
yet sometimes the indefinite where.

(y) In local adverbs in -a. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g.
xaual, humi, mdda. To this form corresponds the Pl. locative form
-noi(v), or where « precedes, -da.iv, derived from substantives of the first
Dec.; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but
was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, O487-
ot(v) from @7Ba, ASfvnot(v) from ’ASivat, TAaraaor(y) from MAaraat ;
Mepyacijot(yv) from Mepyach, "Odruumtaas(y) from ’OAvutia.

(5) In adverbs in -y and -a, e. g. BAAN, érepn, meh, on foot ; Kpupn, AdSpa,
eixh, temere; ovdau7y, Snuoola, publice; xowh, in common; idia, privatim ;
Kouuid7, diligenter ; also wh, dan, rdyTn, 7, TH, THOSE, TavTn, etc.; 7 and a com-
monly have an Jota subscript.

(c) The Acc. ending occurs in the following forms,

(a) In the endings -ny and -ay, e.g. mpdény; paxpdy, far; wépay and mépny,
trans (but wépa, ultra), etc.; so also of substantives, e. g. Sinyy, instar ;
axpuhv (acme), scarcely ; Bwpedy, gratis.

(8) In the ending -oy, e. g. Snpdv, diu; ohuepov, hodie ; atpiov, to-morrow.

(y) In the endings -dov, -inv, -Sa (adverbs of manner), e. g. adrocxeddy,
cominus ; xavddv, immorpoxddny, &mrooradd.

(5) In some substantive forms in the Acc. of the third Dec., e. g. xdpw, for
the sake of ; mpoixa, gratuitously.

CHAPTER VL
The Verb.

NaTURE AND DIVISION OF THE VERB.
§ 102. Classes of the Verb.

1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af-
firmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms,
the boy sleeps, God is loved.

2. Verbs are divided into the following classes : —

(1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub-
ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. ypada, to write ;
Sado, to bloom (comp. § 248) ;

(2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action
that the subject performs on itself, the subject being,

128 VERBS. — TENSES. [§ 103.

therefore, both agent and object, e. g. sas age Z,
advise myself, I deliberate ;

(8) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sub-
ject receives from another object, e. g. Tumroyat vd
tivos, 1 am smitten by some one. —

3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are
called Deponent. ‘They have either a reflexive or intransi-
tive meaning. ‘They are divided into Middle Deponents,
which have a middle form for their Aorist and Future, e. g.
xvapifouat, gratificor, Aor. éyapicdunv, Fut. yapwidpa; and
into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for
their Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut.,
e. g. epSupéouar, mecum reputo, Aor. éveSupAynv, mecum
reputavi, Fut. éySvpjcouat, mecum reputabo. Comp. § 197.

§ 103. The Tenses.

1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb.
The Greek has the following 'Tenses: —
I. (1) Present, Bovretw, I advise,
(2) Perfect, BeBovrevxa, I have advised ;
II. (3) Imperfect, é8ovrevor, I was advising,

(4). Pluperfect, éBeBovrcixew, I had advised,
(5) Aorist, éBovrevea, I advised (indefinite) ;

IIL. (6) Future, Bovretow, I shall or will advise,

(7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid-
dle form), BeBovrActcopat, I shall have advised my- -
self, or I shall have been advised.

2. All the Tenses may be divided into,
a. Principal tenses: Present, Perfect, and Future;
b. Historical tenses: Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist.

Remark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf. Act., two for
the simple Fut. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid. Aorist; these
two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses; i. e. the
first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Perfect a secondary tense, ete.
Still, only a very few verbs have both forms; most verbs construct the above
tenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb has all the

§§ 104, 105.] VERBS. — MODES. —PARTICIPIALS. 129

tenses. Pure verbs (§ 108, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary
tenses. Mute and liquid verbs (§ 108,5) may form both the primary and
secondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Fut. Perf., which
is found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom
found in verbs which have the temporal augment (§ 121), e. g. aipéw, to take,
nphoroua, Pl. Prot. 338, ¢., &rydw, to dishonor, hriwécoua, Dem. 19, 284.

$104. The Modes.

The Modes denote the manner in which the action of
the verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a
condition, or a command, etc. (comp. § 258, seq.) The
Greek has the following Modes : —

I. The Indicative, which makes a direct affirmation, e. g.
the rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom.

II. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely
conceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the _his-
torical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. ypddous with
scriberem.

Remark. See § 257, 2 (a), (b), and Rem. 1, for the manner in which the
Aorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Future may have an
Optative.

Ill. The Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g.
Botneve, advise.

§105. Participials (Infinitive and Participle).

Besides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, as
they partake both of the nature of the verb and also of
the nature of the substantive and adjective, are called
Participials : —

(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial,
e. g. JéAw Bovrcvery, I wish to advise, and To Bovreverp,
the advising.

(b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g.
BovXevwr avyp, a counsellor.

Remark. These two participials may be called verbum infinitum ; te re-
maining forms of the verb, verbum jinitum.

130 VERBS. — STEM, AUGMENT, AND REDUPLICATION. |§§ 106-108.

§ 106. The Persons and Numbers. ~

The personal forms of the verb show whether the sub-
ject of the verb be the speaker himself (J, we, first person) ;
or a person or thing addressed (thou, you, second person) ; or
a person or thing spoken of (he, she, it, third person). ‘They
also show the relation of number: Singular, Dual, and
Plural (comp. § 41, 1), e. g. Bovreda, J, the speaker, advise ;
Bovnevers, thou, the person addressed, advisest ; Bovrever, he,
she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; Bovdeverov,
ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; Bovdevover, they, the
persons spoken of, advise.

Remark 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or personal
forms of the Greck verb, determines the person and number without the subject
being expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so
as to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed.

Rem. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the

Act., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the
form of the first Pers. Pl.

§ 107. Conjugation.

Conjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons,
Numbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has
two forms of conjugation, that in -w, which includes much
the larger number of verbs, e. g. Bovded-w, and the older,
original conjugation in -w, e. g. torn-ju, to station.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -@

§ 108. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication.— Char-
acteristic.

1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the
ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by
which the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted.
The stem is found in most verbs in -@ by cutting off the ending
of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. Bovdct-w, Aéy-w, tpiB-w.

#§ 109, 110.] vERBS.—INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. 131

2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings
to the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. BovAed’-w,
Bovdget-ow, Bovded-~couat, or are prefixed to the stem, and are
then called Augment and Reduplication, e. g. é-BovAevov, I was
advising ; Be-BovidAevxa, I have advised. For a change in the stem
of many verbs, e. g. tpéz-w, ré-Tpod-a, é-rpda-nv, see § 140.

3. The Augment is ¢€ prefixed to the stem of verbs which

‘begin with a consonant, e. g. é-BovAevoa, I advised; but in
verbs which begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the
first stem-vowel, a and « into y (and in some cases into «),t and
v into t and v, and o intow. The Augment implies past time,
and hence belongs to all the historical tenses (Imperfect,
Aorist, and Pluperfect) ; but it is confined to the Indicative.

4. Reduplication consists in repeating the first stem-conso-
nant with e«, when the stem begins with a consonant; but when
the stem begins with a vowel, the Reduplication is the same as
the augment, e. g. Be-BovAeuxa, I have advised ; ‘ixérevxa, I have
supplicated, from ‘ixerev-w. The Reduplication denotes the com-
pletion of the action, and hence belongs to the Perfect, Pluper-
fect, and Future Perfect. For a fuller view of the Augment
and Reduplication, see § 119, sq.

5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -w is cut off,
is called ‘the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic,
because, according to this, verbs in -w are divided into different
classes; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or
a liquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid verbs, e. g.
Bovrei-w, tysd-w (pure verbs), tpiB-w (mute), daiv-w (liquid).

§ 109. Inflectton-endings.

In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation
of tense, mode, and person, there are three different elements:
the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal-
ending, e. g. BovAe’-c-o-par.

$110. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings.

1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands
next after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark

=" @ | sy
eS ’

‘
-

:
132 VERBS.— PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-vowELs. [$ 111. i

of the tense. In pure verbs, x is the tense-characteristic of the
Perf. and Plup. Ind. Act., e. g.
Be-BodbAcv-K-a é-Be-BovAev-k-euy ;
the characteristic of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid., and
the Fut. Perf: is o, e. g.
BovaAed-o-w Bovaet-c-ouat Be-Bovred-o-opat
é-BotvAev-0-a €-BovAcu-o-duny 5
the characteristic of the first Aor. Pass. is $; the first Fut.
Pass. has, besides the tense-characteristic o, the ending of the
first Aor. Pass. -9y, thus,
é-Bovaed-S-nv BovaAev-S}-o-omat.
The primary tenses only (§ 103, Rem.) have a tense-charac-
teristic.

2. The tense-characteristic, together with the ending follow-
ing, is called the tense-ending. ‘Thus, e. g.in the form Bov-
Xevow, o is the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable
ow is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb,
together with the tense-characteristic and the augment or
reduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in éBov-
Aevo-a, EBovdevo is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act.

§ 111. (b) Personal-endings and Mode-vowels.

The personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and
takes a different form according to the different persons and
numbers; the mode-vowel connects the tense-stem and the
personal-ending, and takes a different form according to the
different modes, e. g.

1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. BovdAed-o-wat Subj. BovAed-w-uat
ois < “ Fut. “ Bovdred-o-e-rat Opt. BovAed-c-o1-ro
1 “ Pl © Pres. “ Bovdrev-d-ueda Subj. BovAcv-d-yedsa
me 5 1s ss “ & BovaAed-e-o8e “ BovAed-n-7e
1 “ Sing. “ ALT. “ @Bovrev-c-d-unv BovAed-o-w-wat
Oe Pad = ec & & eBovAed-c-a-T0 Opt. Bovrcd-c-ai-ro.

Remark. In the above forms, Bovaev is the verb-stem, and Bovaev, Bovdeve,
and éfovAevo are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Fut., and first Aor.
Mid.; the endings -uu, -ra, etc. are the personal-endings, and the vowels o,
@, €, Ol, 9 a, at, are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels ¢ and o of the Indic.
are lengthened into y and » in the Subj.

§§ 112, 113.] MopE-vVoWELS. — PERSONAL-ENDINGS.

133
§112. Summary of the Mode-vowels.
Indicative. Subj. | Opt.[Impr.} Inf. | Part.
Pres. and Fut. ;lmpf., A. Il. A. and
Person. Active. M. and Prs.and F.M. Act. Mid.
S. 1. w o wo | w ot - €l, € | w, 0
2. €l € n n ot €
3. €L € n n ot €
D.1. - o - w ot -
2. € € n n ot €
3. € € n n ot €
ee 0 0 w @ ot ~
2. € € n nN o €
3. 0 0 @ w oL €
Indicative. Optative. Impr. Infinitive.
rn me ee
Person. | Pipf. | a.r.m. [+ UAsand] 4.0 [a.t. A.andM.|A.T. A. and M.
Ss. 1. € a & au - a
2. €t & a a 0 a
3. €L & © a a
D.1. = a. - es < Participle.
25 ¥ - . a . A.J. A. and M,
3. et a a a a and Pe A:
i ot - €t a & at -
2. €t G & at a a
3. (ex) € a a au a

§ 113. Personal-endings of Verbs in -w.

I. Active Form.

Il. Middle Form.

A. Ind. and Subj. B. Ind. and Opt.} A. Ind.and Subj.|B. Ind. and Opt.
the Princ. tenses. the Hist. tenses. the Princ. tenses. | the Hist. tenses.

Sing. 1. v, Opt. ms pat bay

2.1 ¢ s Tat v0, 0

3.) - - Tal TO
Dual 1. | - - pedov Mesxvov

2. | Tov Tov oxov oxov

3. | Tov THY axov conv
Plur. 1. | wey bev peda peda

2. | Te TE ove ove

3. | (yrt) ov) V, Cav vTat(aTat) yvto (aro)

C. Imperative.

C. Imperative.

Sing. 2. 3. Tw
Dual 2. | ror 3. Tev
Plur. 2. | re 3. Twoav

Sing. 2. (co) o 3. cd
Dual 2. c3ev 3. cer
Plur. 2.¢3e 3. cSecayv, cdwv

D. Infinitive.

LD. Infinitive.

« Aer ke

vy Pres., Fut., and Aor. II.
vat Perf. Act. and Aor. IL. and II. Pass.

ova

E. Participle.

E. Participle.

whose stem ends in -or.

Stem vr, with exception of the Perf.,

Mevos, MEVN, MEVOY 5

pévos, pévn, wévov, Perf.

12

134 PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [§ 114.

Remark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are
so closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are
united together, e. g. BovAeto-ns, instead of BovAedo-y-1s, BovAcd-n, instead of
BovAev-e-a: (a and ¢ coalescing and ¢ being subscribed).

§ 114. Difference between the Personal-endings in
the Principal and the Historical Tenses.

1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important.
The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Fut.) form the second and third Pers.
Dual with the same ending -ov, e. g. BovAed-e-roy BovAct-e-rov; Bovdet-e-cSov
BovaAed-e-cSov ; the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -ov,
but the third in -yy, e. g.

eBovAed-e-r ov €Bovdrev-é-7 HY, éBovaet-e-0 Sov eBovaev-é-c Fy.

2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. Pl. Act. in -c:(v), from -yrz,
-vo1, and the Mid. in -yra:; the Historical tenses in the Active, in -v, and Mid.,
in -yTo, &. g.

BovAed-o-vat = Bovaded-ovor(v) éBovdrev-o-v
BovaAed-o-v T at éBovaet-o-v T 0.

Remark. In Bovaevovo: the vy is dropped, and as a compensation the o pre-
ceding it is lengthened ; so also in the Fut. Act. Comp. 116, 5.

3. The Principal tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -yat, -oa, -ra:; the Histori-
cal in -unv, -v0, -To, e. g.

BovaAed-o-nat éBovAeu-6-uny
Bovaed-e-c at = Bovaed-y, éBovAev-e-c 0 = €BovAed-ov
Bovacdb-e-7 at éBovAev-e-7 0.

4. The Personal-endings of the Subj. in the Principal tenses are like those
of the Ind. in the same tenses; the Opt. are like those of the Ind. of the His-
torical tenses ;

2 and 3 Du. Ind. Pr. Bovaeve-r ov Subj. BovAedn-t ov
Bovaete-o Sov “ BovAetn-o Sov
3Pl “ “ Bovaedtov-o1(v) “ Bovaredw-ot(v)
Bovaeto-yt at “% Bovarcbw-y T at
1 Sing.“ “ Bovredto-nwar “ BovActw-wat
2 % “ Bovaed-n “ BovAet-n
Page tae “ BovaAede-T at “ BovAetn-T at

2and3 Du. “ Impf.éBovrcde-rov, -é-rnv Opt. Bovaedtoi-roy, -ol-rnv
éBovrcte-o Sov, --odyv “ Bovdcdtot-oSoy, -ol-cSnv

3Pl “ “ éBodrAcvo-v “ BovAevot-ev
éBovacvo-y T 0 “ BovAevoi-v To
1 Sing.“ “ é€Bovaevd-uny “ Bovaevol-uny
2 “ “ (éBovrcte-co) éBovrel-ov “ (Bovdcdor-c0) Bovdedot-o
3 “% & & @Bovredte-ro “ BovaAedat-r o.

ae

§115.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -w. 135

§115. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -o.
PRELIMINARY REMARKS.

1. Since pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses ({ 103, Rem.) these
tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid
verb (rplB-w, Aclr-w, stem AIT], paly-w, SAN), so as to exhibit a full Conju-
gation.

2. In learning the table, we are to note,

(1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending,
(b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f)
Augment, or Reduplication.

(2) The spaced forms, e. g. BovAet-er ov, Bovaet-ntov, third Pers. Du. Ind.
and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical
tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses.

(3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are
distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g.
BovAedow, 1. Sing. Ind. Fut. Act. or 1. Sing. Subj. I. Aor. Act.; BotAsvoa,
2. Sing. Imp. I. Aor. Mid., BovAedom, 3. Sing. Opt. I. Aor. Act., Bovarcioa,
Inf. I. Aor. Act.

(4) The accentuation (§ 118) should be learned with the form. The follow-
ing general rule will suffice for beginners: The accent of the verb is as far from
the end asthe final syllable will permit. Those forms, whose accentuation
deviates from this rule, are indicated by a dagger (f).

(5) When the Paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first
resolve the forms either of BovAedw, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. e.
Personal-ending, Mode-vowel, etc.; observing this order, viz. BovAedow is, (1)
first Pers., (2) Sing., (3) Ind., (4) Fut., (5) Act., (6) from BovAedw, to advise ;
then he may arrange the elementary parts of the form, and in the following
order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment, or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic,
(4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Per
sonal ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g.
What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself, using the
Aor. of the Pres., BovAed-w, to advise? Answer: The Verb-stem is BovaAev-,
Augment, é, thus ¢Bovaev; the Tense-characteristic of the first Aor. Mid. is o,
thus Tense-stem is é-BovAev-c ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor: Ind. Mid. is a;
thus, ¢-BovAev-c-a; the Personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing. of an Historical
tense of the Mid. is ro; thus, é-BovAed-c-a-ro.

Remark. By making himself familiar with the above elements, the pupil
can construct from the root any form of the verb he may wish.

136 PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -o. [§ 115.
fd
Tenses. 23 : Sie aR
“ylres ubjunctive
4 a Indicative. of the Principal tenses.
S. 1. | BovAet-w,* I advise, Bovaed-w,* I may advise,
etetass 2. | BovaAed-ers, thou advisest, Bovaed-ys
. 3. | Bovred-et, he, she, it advises, |BovAeb-1*
Manian: D. 2. Bovacv-erov, ye two advise, Bovded-nrov
shed’ 3. Bovrct-e 7 07, they two advise, Bovacv-n T ov"
Hovxey- - pe. BovaAev-ouer, we advise, BovaAev-wmuev
2. | BovaAed-ere,* you advise, BovaAed-nre
3. | Bovaed-ovai(v), they advise, Bovaed-wor(v)
8. 1. -psaregsceltg was advising,
2. | €-BovaAev-es, thou wast advising,
Umperfect, 3. | €-BovAcv-e(v), he, she, it was aa.
Tense- | D-2- é-Bovded-erov, ye two were adv.
3p a 3. | €-Bovdev-ér ny, they two were adv.
E fecnne- P. 1. | &-BovAcd-ouer, we were advising,
2. | é-Bovaed-ere, you were advising,
3. | é-BovAev-ov,* they were advising,
S. 1. | Be-Bovaev-x-a, [have advised, |Be-Bovded-n-w, 1 may havea.
2. | Be-BovAeu-x-as, thou hast adv’d, |\Be-Bovded-K-ns
Perfect I, 3. | Be-BobAcv-n-e(v),* he, she, it has a.|Be-BovAeb-n-n
D. 2. | Be-BovaAed-k-arov, ye two have a. |Be-BovAeb-K-nTov
Tense- 3. | Be-BovAcd-x-at ov, they two have|Be-BovAed-x-nT ov
stem : advised,
Be-BovAev-x | P. 1. | Be-Bovred-K-apuev, we have adv’d,| Be-Bovded-K-wmev
2. | Be-Bovaed-x-are, you have adv'd, | Be-BovAed-K-nre
3. | Be-Bovaed-n-aia1(v), they have a.|Be-Bovret-x-wor(v)
S. 1. ] @-Be-Bovaed-x-erv, L had advised,
Pluper- 2. | &-Be-Bovaed-x-ets, thou hadst adv.
fect I. 3. | é-Be-Bovred-k-et, he, she, it had ad.
| D. 2. | é-Be-Bovred-k-errov, ye two had
aie: advised, .
seem * 3. é-Be-Bovdev-K-€ tr nyv,they two had
2-Be- advised,
Babace-v- P. 1. | é-Be-BovAed-K-ewev, we had adv.
2. | é-Be-Bovaed-n-erre, you had adv.
3. | é-Be-BovAed k-eo av, they had a.
Perf. I. mé-ony-a,' 1 appear, me-phy-w, [ may appear,
Plpf. IT. é-re-phv-ew,” I appeared,
S. 1. | @Bodvaev-o-a, I advised (indef.), |BovAed-c-w,* I may advise,
i etet 2. | 2-BovAev-c-as, thou advisedst, {|BovAed-o-ns
x 3. | é-BovAev-o-e(v), he, she, it adv'd, |BovAet-o-n *
Ponce: |: 2. | €-Bovaet-c-ator, ye two advised, Bovdeb-o-nTov
athena: 3. | é-Bovdeu-o-d 7 nv, they two adv'd,|BovAev-o-n T ov
2: Bovaev-c- P. 1. | 2-Bovacd-o-aper, we advised, BovAct-o-wuev
2. | é-Bovret-c-are, you advised, BovAet-o-nTe
3. | é-BovAev-c-av, they advised, Bovaed-o-wo(v)
: S. 1. | Zacr-ov, I left, Alt-w, etc., like the Subj.
pag i 2. aoneng sie deck like Impf.| Pres.
nd.
Future, |S. 1. | Bovared-o-w,* I shall advise,
BovAev-o- like the Indic. Pres.

1 The inflection of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is like that of the Ist Perf.

§115.] PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -w. 137
MopeEs. Participials.
¥ *
in oer zs moet Imperative. Infin. Particip.
‘Bovaed-wy
BovaAev-e, advise, Bovact- |BovaAet-ovea
Bovaev-érw, let himad.| ew, |Bovded-ovt
Bovaet-erov, yetwoad.| to |G.Bovaed-ovros
BovAev-érwy, let them| advise, | Bovdrev-otens,

both advise,
Bovaev-ere,* do ye ad.

advising,

BovAev-érwoay, usually BovAeu-dytwy,* let them a.

Bovaed-ouu, I might advise,
BovaAcv-ots
BovAcd-or
BovAev-orrov
BovAev-olr ny
BovAev-ormey
BovaAew-ore
BovaAev-otev
Be-BovAeu-x-ést
[Be-BotaAcu-x-e,*] etc., | Be-Bov- |Be-BovAcu--viat
like the Imp. Pres.| Aev- | Be-BovAeu-x-dst
yet only a few Per- | x-évat,t | G. -«-dros, --
fects, and such as to have vias, having
have the meaning | advised, vised,
of the Pres., form
an Imperative.
Be-Bovdret-x-on, I mig. have a.
Be-BovaAevx-o1s
Be-BovaAed-K-ot
Be-BovAed-K-orroy
Be-BovAev-x-olt ny
Be-Bovdcd-x-o1mev
Be-BovAed-x-o1re
Be-Bovded-K-o1ev
mé-pny-<, appear, mwe-pn-. |we-pny-est
me-phv-out, I might appear, vé-vat,t
Bovaed-c-aiut, I might advise, BovAet-o-as
BovaAed-o-ais, OF -€1as BobrAev-o-ov, advise, Bov- |BovAed-o-doa
BovAet-o-at,* or -ere(v) Bovaev-o-dtw Aed- | BovAcd-o-avt
BovAeb-o-auTov BovAcd-o-arov o-a,*F Genitive :
BovaAev-o-alt ny BovAev-o-dtwy to |BovAev-o-avTos
BovaAev-o-aimev advise, |RovAeu-o-dons,
BovAed-o-arTe BovaAed-c-are having advised,
BovAed-o-arev, OF -erav Bovaev-o-dtwoay, usually -cdyTwr*
Alzr-ouu, etc., like the Opt. |Afa-e, ete., like the { aAr- |Arr-dv,o00a, drt
Impf. Imp. Pres. civ, t |G. dvros, obons,
Bovaed-a-onu, I would advise, BovAev- | BovAct-o-wv,
| like the Opt. Impf. a-ew, etc. like Pr. Pt.

? The inflection of the 2d Pluperf. is like that of the 1st Pluperf., both in the Ind. and Opt.

12*

138 PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -o. [§ 116.
E THE
ee FEE Subjunctive
a a Indicative. of the Poineipal tenses.
S. 1. | Bovaev-onast, I deliberate, or am | Bovaet-w wat, I may de-
2. | BovAed-n * [advised, Bovaev-n * [iberate,
Present, 3. | Bovarcd-er at BovaAed-n7 at
D. 1. | BovAev-duedsov BovAeu-éuedov
Tense- |+ 2.] BovaAcdi-ecSov BovaAed-nosov
stem: 3. | Bovrel-eo Sov Bovred nadsov
BovAev- | P.1.] BovaAcu-dueda BovAeu-épeda
2. | Bovaed-eade * BovaAed-nose
3. | BovAed-ovrat BovaAet-wyt at
S. 1. ] é-Bovaeuv-dunyv, L was deliber-
2. | é-BovAed-ov [ating,
Imperfect, 3. | é-BovAed-eT 0
D.1. } é-BovaAev-duedsor
Tense- 2. | é-BovAed-erSov
stem: 3. | é-BovAev-éo S nv
é-BovAev- | P. 1. | é-BovAev-dueda
2. | é-BovaAed-eade
3. | é-BovAed-ov To
S. 1. ] Be-BovaAcv-uar, [have deliberated,| Be-BovAcu-pe €vOS, ¢ &, I may
2. | Be-BovAev-c at Be- Bovdcu-pévos iis have
Perfect, 3. | Be-BovAcu-T at Be-Bovadev-névos 9 | delib-
D..1. | Be-BovAed-wedsov [erated,
Tense- 2. | Be-BovAev-cSov Be-BovAev-pévw Frov
stem : 3. | Be-BovAev-c Sov Be-BovAev-névw Hrov
Be-Bovaev- | P. 1. | Be-Bovaed-ueda Be-BovAev-néevor Guev
2. | Be-BovAeuv-cd_e * Be-BovAeu-pévor Fre
3. | Be-BovAev-y Tat Be-Bovaev-névar dor
S. 1. | €-Be-Bovaed-u nv, I had git
2. | é-Be-BovaAev-co ated,
Pluper fect, es 3. é-Be-Bobdeu-r 0
; 1. | é-Be-BovAev-pedsov
— ° 2. | é-Be-BovAev-odov
7 /
é-Be- 3. ¢-Be-Bovdev-o ony
Bovkew: P. 1. | é-Be-Bovaed-peda
2. | é-Be-BovAeu-cde
3. | é-Be-BovAeu-y to
S. 1. | €-Bovdcv-o-d unyv, I deliberated, | BovAet-o-w wat, I may de-
2. | é-Bovred-o-w [(indefinite) | BovAed-o-n * [Uiberate,
Aorist I, 3. | &-Boured-o-aT 0 Bovact-o-n 7 at
D.1. é-BovAeu-o-duedov BovAev-o-@pedov
Tense- 2. é-BovaAet-c-acSov BovaAed-o-noSov
stem: 3. } é-BovAeu-o-do anv BovaAed-o-n ovov
é-Bovdev-o- | P. 1. | e-Bovreu-c-dueda BovAev-o-aueda
2.1 é-BotvAcd-o-acde BovAed-o-nove
3. | é-Bovaet-oc-avto BovaAet-o-wy Tat
, -Aun-dunv, L remained, like Ind. | Afm-wya:, [ may remain
Aorist IT. |S. 1. Sivek tka Brew, Subj.
ovaet-o-ouat, I shall deliberate,
Future, | 8.1. [ere pee tn dlie.
e-BovAev-o-oua, J shall have de-
Fut. Perf, | 8.1. Z liberated, dike Pros: Indie

eT Nes

POT carta

$115.) PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -w. 139
MopeEs. Participials.
Optative : sas
tic Subj of eek aes Imperative. Infin. Particip.
BovaAed- | BovAeu-duevos
Bovaev-ov, deliberate, egSat, | BovAev-onern
Bovaeu-éodw to deliber- | BovAev-duevor,
ate, deliberating,
Bovaed-eaSov
BovaAev-éoSwy *
BovaAev-eode *
Bovdev-éodwoay, usually BovAev-éodwy *
BovAev-ol pny, I might
BovAet-o10 [deliberate,
BovaAet-orr o
BovAev-oiwesoy
Bovaded-oic Sov
BovAev-oloSny
BovaAev-oiueda
BovaAed-o.oSe
BovAet-otvto
Be-Bovaci- | BeBovAcu-pévost
Be-BovrAev-co, deliberate, | o&a:,t to | BeBovdev-nuévn
Be-BovaAedi-c3w have delib- | BeBovAcu-pé-
erated, vov,} having
Be-BobAev-cSov deliberated,
Be-BovaAcd-cdwy * .
Be-BotbrAcv-ade *
Be-Bovded-cSwoay, usually Be-Bovred-cSwyv *
Be-BovaAev-uévos elny, I
Be-BovAev-névos efns{mi't
Be-BovaAev-pévos etn |de-
[diberate,
Be-BovAeu-uévw efntov
Be-BovAeu-névw eifrny
Be-BovAeu-pévor etnuev
Be-BovAevu-névor einre
Be-BovaAev-névor etnoay
Bovaev-o-al uny, I might BovaAev- | BovAev-o-duevos
BovAev-o-a1o [deliberate,| BobAev-o-a1,* deliberate, | o-ac-Sat, | BovAev-c-ayevn
BovaAev-o-atTo BovaAev-c-do8w to deliber- | BovAev-o-duevov
BovAevu-c-aluesov ate, having deliber-
BovAet-c-aicSov Bovaed-o-acSov ated,
Bovaev-o-alaoSnv BovAev-c-doSwv *
BovaAev-o-alueda
BovaAed-c-aicSe Bovaed-o-acde
BovAet-o-aty To Bovaev-c-doSwoay, usually BovAev-c-doSwv *
Aur-olunv, LT might remain,| Arrov,} -éodw, like Pres.| Auw-éoSat | Auw-duevos, -o-
like Opt. Impf. Imp. | Bévn, -duevov
Bovadev-o-oluny,l m. have BovaAed- | BovdAev-c-due-
deliberated likeOpt.Imp. o-€odat VOS, -Ny ~OV
Be-BovAev-o-oluny, I sh’d Be-BovaAev- | Be-BovAcu-o-6-
\deliberate, like Opt. Imp. o-eoaa MEVOS, -N, -OV.

140 VERBS.—REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [§ 116.

8 oe THE
Tenses. Ae Subj ;
3 ; : ubjunctive
E A Indicative. of the Poincipal tenses.
S. 1. | €-Bovaed-8-nv, I was advised. | BovAev-3-@, I might have
Docaet 2. | é-BovaAed-3-ns Bovaev-3-7s [been advised.
* 3. | €-BovAev-d-7 Bovaev-3-7
T D. oe é-BovAcv-9-nTov BovAevu-a-7 Tov
Rent 3. | é-BovAev-9-47 ny BovAev-9-7 T ov
Y oie P. 1. | é-BovaAed-3-nyuev BovaAev-3-@mev
(RRNA CUS 2. | é-BovAed-d-nTe BovaAeu-3-7Te*
3. | é-BovaAcd-S8-n o av BovaAev-3-@ 0 t(v)
S. 1. | BovAev-S4-c-ouat, I shall be adv.
Future I. 2. | BovAev-S4-o-n, etc., like the
Ind. Pres. Mid. ;
S. 1. | @-rp{p-nv, [was rubbed, TpiB-@, [may have been rub’d,
Aorist IT. 2. | é-rpip-ns, etc., like the first | rp:8-7s, etc., like the first
Aor. Ind. Pass. Aor. Subj. Pass.
S. 1. [ rp8-4-c-oua, L shall be rubbed,
Fut. I. 2. | tpiB-h-o-n, etc., like the first
Fut. Ind. Pass.
Verbal Adjectives: BovaAeu-rds, -h, -dv, advised,

$116. Remarks on the Inflection-endings.

1. The personal-endings of verbs in -w are apocopated forms, as may be
¥ shown from the older conjugation in -~:, and in part from the dialects (§ 220,
1); thus, -w: in the first Pers. Sing. Ind. and Subj. Act. and -7: in the third
Pers. have disappeared, e. g. Bovaet-w instead of BovAed-o-ut or BovdAcd-wut,
Bovacd-e instead of Bovded-e-r: (by the dropping of -ms in BovAed-o-ut, the o is
lengthened into w, and by the dropping of -1: in BovAed-e-r1, € is lengthened
into et); in the first Pers. Sing. first Aor. Ind. Act., y has disappeared, e. g.
€BovaAevoa instead of éBotAcvoay; in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Act., except
the first Aor., -S: has disappeared, e. g. BotAeu-e instead of BovAcd-e-31; but the
first Aor. Imp. Act. has a different ending -oy, e. g. BodAev-c-or.
2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -¢ Sa in the Common lan-
guage in the following forms only: —

otoSa, nosti, from the Perf. of3a; 7dercSa and 7dno8a, Plpf. of ofda;
Zpnoda, Impf. from pyyl, to say; Aoda, Impf. from eiul, tobe; Ferodsa,
Impf. from eft, to go.

3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first
and second Aor. Pass.; the first Pers. Pl. is used for this purpose. Comp.
§ 106, Rem. 2.

4. The original form of the first Pers. Pl. Act. is -wes (not -uev). Comp.
the Dialects, § 220, 6, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. ypdd-o-wes, scrib-i-mus. ~

5. The original form of the third Pers. Pl. Act. of the Principal tenses was

¥ afl Lal Horns 4 8,

a

§ 116.] VERBS. — REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 141

SIVE.
MopeEs. Participials.
Optative : a
i.e. Subj. De tag haa Imperative. Infin. Participle.
|Bovaeu-S-elny, I might be BovAev- | BovaAeu-S-elst
BovAev-a-elns [advised, |BovAed-S-nr1, be thouad-| 8-fjva:, | BovAev-8-cioat
BovAeu-S-eln BovaAev-3-4Tw [vised, | to be ad-| Bovrev-3-évt
BovaAev-S-elntov ~ |BovaAed-9-nT ov vised, Genitive :
BovaAev-8-erhT ny BovaAeu-8-hTwv BovaAev-3-évros
BovaAev-S-elnuev and -ezjuey Bovaevu-8-elons,
BouXev-9-elnre and -eire | BovAet-3-nTre * being advised,
BovaAeu-S-eTev BovaAeu-S-ATwoa
Bovaev-Sn-o-olunv, I should BovAev- | BovAev-Sn-o-6-
be advised, etc., like the -7€-| wevos, -n, -ov
Impf. Opt. Mid. ovat
tpiB-elny, I might be rubbed, TpiB- | tpB-els,t ete.,
TpiB-elns, etc., like the first|rp{B-nS, -prw, etc., like} jjvat like first Aor.
Aor. Opt. Pass. the first Aor. Imp. Pass. Part. Pass.
TpiB-n-o-olunv, I should be TpiBH- | TpiB-n-o-duevos,
rubbed, etc., like the first geoSa | -n, -ov
Fut. Opt. Pass.
BovaAevu-réos, -Téa, -réov, to be advised.

-vtt; when r was changed into o, vy was dropped ({ 20, 2), e. g. BovAetovr: =
BovAetovot = Bovaevove:. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre-
ceding the v, see § 20, Rem. 2.

6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the
form in -ew, a form in -y, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -ea,
e. g. €BeBovAevx-n instead of -x-ew. The mode-vowel e in the third Pers. Pl.
is commonly shortened into e¢, e. g. ¢BeBovdev-x-e-cay instead of éBeBovAcd-x-
€l-oav.

7. The first Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -u in verbs in -w, e. g.
maidev-o1-"t, madevo-ai-ut; but the ending -ny in the first and second Aor. Pass.,
according to the analogy of verbs in -w:. This 7 remains through all the per-
sons and numbers, though it is often dropped in the Dual and PL, especially
in the third Pers. Pl. and then, efnuev = ciuev, elnre = cite, elnoay = elev, e. g.
madevselnuey and maidevdseiuer, pynoseinre and -Seire, pavelnoay X. H. 6.5,
25., mpoxpielnoay Ibid. 34., meupSeinoay Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently)
~Seiev (-€tev).

8. The Attic Optative endings -nr, -ys, -n, ete., and the third Pers. Pl. -ev
(rarer -noay) which appropriately belong to verbs in -w:, are used with verbs in
-w, in the following cases : —

(a) Most commonly in the Imperf. Opt. of contract verbs, e. g. rydny,

prolny, pioSoiny ;

(b) In all Futures in -, e. g. pavolny Soph. Aj. 313., époln Xen. Cy. 3.1,

14, from the Fut. gave, épa;
(c) Somewhat often in the second Plup., e. g. éxmepevyolny S. O. R. 840.,
mpoeAnarvaolns X. Cy. 2. 4, 17., mewoiSoln Ar. Acharn. 940;

142 VERBS.— REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [f 116,

(d) In the second Aor. exolny uniformly (écxov from Zw) ; still, not ‘gen-

erally in compounds, e. g. mapdoxowt.

9. The forms of the first Aor. Opt. Act. in -eras, -ere(v), -evav, instead of
-ais, -at, -aiv, have passed from the Molic Opt. in -era, -eras, etc., into com-
mon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fre-
quently than the regular forms, e. g. BovAevo-eras, -ere(v), -erav.

Remark. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends,
among the Attic writers, in -yv instead of -oy, e. g. eiwérny Pl. Symp. 189, ¢.,
érednunodrny Euthyd. 273, e., Horny 294, e., éreyérny L. 705, d., dxoipuigode
tnv Ib. 753, a. On the Dialects, see § 220, 9.

10. The Middle endings -ca: and -co, when immediately preceded by a
mode-vowel, drop ¢ (§ 25,1), and then coalesce, except in the Opt., with the
mode-vowel, e. g.

Bovdev-e-crat BovAet-e-at = Bovadedb-n
Bovaed-n-oan BovaAcd-n-at = Bovded-n
BovaAedt-o1-co : BovaAev-ol-0

éBovAet-e-o'0 éBovAed’-e-0 = éBovaed-ov
éBovAcva-a-o'0 é€Bovacio-a-0 = éBovaeta-w.

11. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Fut. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers
use a subordinate ending in -e:, together with the ending -y, e. g. BovAed-y and
-et, Bovreto-n and -e1, BeBovdedo-y and -et, BovAevdho-n and -e1, TpiBhon, and -et,
mow and -e?, Aj and -et. This form in -e passed from the Attic conversational
language, into the written language ; hence it is the regular form in the Come-
dies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the tragedians. Also Thucydides
and Xenophon use it; other writers, as Plato and the orators, employ both
forms ; yet three verbs always take the form -e, namely,

BovAopmat BovrAa (but Subj. BodAn)
ofouat otee (but Subj. ofp)
Blowout Fut. dpe.

12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. Pl. Imperative Act. and
Pass. -érwoay, -dtwoav, -cXwoay, the abbreviated forms -dyrwy, -dytwy,
-cSwyv, are used; and since they are employed very frequently by Attic
writers, they are called Attic forms. These abbreviated Imperatives of the
Active Voice are like the Gen. Pl. of the Participle of each tense respectively,
except the Perfect; and the Middle form -cSwy is like the third Pers. Dual,
e. g.

Pres. Act. Bovdevérwoay and Bovaevéytwy

Perf. “ meroSérwooy “ memroddytwy (Gen. Part. reroiddtwv)

Aor. I. “ -Bovaevodtwoay “ BovAevodyTwr

Pres. Mid. BovrevécSwoay “ Bovrevécdwv

Aor. “ oxeldoSwou “ aoxebdodwr.
The Aor. Pass. ending -éy7wy or -}rwy, abridged from -ftwoay, is found in
Pl. Legg. 856, d. reupSévrwy, and Ib. 737, e. diaveundqrwy (according to several
MSS.).

“ ——

§ 117.] VERBS. — ATTIC FUTURE. 143

13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. Act., a
periphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part. and the Subj. or Opt. of elvai (to be), &,
env, is very frequent, e. g. wemaidevxas &, educaverim ; wemasSevkads ein, educa-
vissem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a
simple completed action ; comp. Pl. Hipp. M. 302, a. ei kexunnds rt, } TeTpw-
mévos, }) wetAnypévos, } HAN Stiody wewmovSws Exarépos jay en, ov Kal dugd-
repo ad TovTo wemévSotuev; examples of the simple forms are, are:Afpn, Pl.
Rp. 614, a., eiAf@wow Polit. 269, ¢., eumemrdxo: X. An. 5. 7, 26., eatadrcAolrorev
X. H. 3. 2, 8. daroxexwphwo ib. 5, 23., danperhxo ib. 5. 2, 3., wemorheor Th. 8,
108., ésBeBAjxoey ib. 2, 48.— The Imp. Perf. does not often occur in the Act.,
e. g. yéywve, Eur. Or. 1220.

14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. append the personal-endings to the
tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and
Opt. (with few exceptions, which will be further treated below, § 154, 9),
but must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and
elvat, e. g. memaidevpévos &, efny, educatus sim, essem.

15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. of pure verbs ends in
~VTat, -vTO, &. g. BeBovAcvyTa, éBeBovAcvyto; but in mute and liquid verbs, this
formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person
periphrastically, by means of the Perf. Part. and cict(v), sunt, joav, erant ; the
older and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -éra,
-iro (instead of -yvra, -vro); the a of these endings is aspirated after the
Kappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi-
mute into the correspondjng rough (comp. § 144); but this a is not aspirated
after the Tau-mutes; thus,

tplB-w, to rub, Perf. ré-rpiys-uar 3 P.rerpipairar (for rérpiByra) Plp. érerpiparo

mAéK-w, to twine, mé-wAey-mar “ wemrexarau ( “ wérAeKyTat) émewA€XaTO
TdtT-w, to arrange, ré-rary-mar =“ retdxdta (“ rérayvra) érerdx aro

xwpl(-w, to separate, ke-xaépio-yor “ Kexwpldara( “ Kexdpidyra) exexwpldaro
oS¢elp-w, to destroy, &-pSap-uar “ epSdpdrar (“ EpSapyTas) epddparo.

16. The two Aorists Pass. follow the analogy of verbs in -u:, and hence are
not treated here.

§117. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic
Future.

1. When one of the short vowels a, e, i, in the Fut. Act. and Mid. of verbs
in -w, -couat, from stems of two or more syllables, precedes «, certain verbs,
after dropping o, take the circumflexed ending -@, -odua:; because it was fre-
quently used by the Attic writers instead of the regular form, this is called
the Attic Future, e. g. éddw (usually édadyw), to drive, éad-o-w, Fut. Att. éad, -Gs,
~G, ~ATOv, -Guev, -Gre, -Bo1(v) ; TeAéw, to finish, rer€-o-w, Fut. Att. reAG, -cis, -€7,
~<itov, -otpmev, -eire, -odoi(v); TeAé-c-omou (TeA¢ouat), TEAOD UAL, -€7, ~€?TaL, etC.;
koul(w, to carry, Fut. xopt-o-w, Fut. Att. xouid, -sets, -1e7, -setrov, -1odmev, -1€7TE,

144 -- VERBS. — ACCENTUATION. [§. 118. _

todoi(v); KousoDuat, -te?, -retTat, -to¥medov, etc. This Fut. is inflected like the
forms of contract verbs.

2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Ind., Inf., and Part.; never in
the Opt., thus, TeAd, TeAciv, TeAGY ; but TeAgoouw. The verbs which have this
form are the following: (a) éAdw (éAatyw), to drive; TerXéw, to finish; karéw,
to call; and, though seldom, &A é, to grind ;— (b) all verbs in -i¢w (character.
5);— (c) a few verbs in -4¢w, very generally BiBd¢w;—(d) of verbs in -us, all
in -dvvops and also dugprévvips, to clothe (dudia, -re?s, etc.). A few exceptions
to this Fut. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. éadow X. Cy. 1. 4, 20., €Ad-
govras X. An. 7. 7, 55., reAécovow Cy. 8. 6, 3., Kadéoets 2. 3, 22., vouloovor 3.
1, 27. (according to the best MSS.) Wndicecde, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. § 51.

§ 118. Accentuation of the Verb.

1. Primary Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word
towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g.
BotAeve, Bovdctouat, Botrdevooyv, madcoy, tipoy, but Bovdedes, BovAever. On
the ending -a, see § 29, R. 6.

2. This law holds good in compounds, e. g. pépe mpdsHepe, hedye Expevye,
Aciwe Grdéderme; also in words in the Subj., when they are not contracted, e. g.
KaTrdoxw, Kardoxns, KaTdoxwpev, eriomw, éexlomns (but dvaB@, &mocTd, 51ada,
Trapade, avaBauer, etc., on account of the contraction, dvaBdw, dvaBdwper, etc.).
Still, this rule has the following exceptions: (a) the accent cannot go back
beyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had
the accent, e. g. drd5os (ad the preceding word being accented on the ultimate),
oupmpdes, erloxes, érides (not &mrodos, ciumpoes, Emiaxes, emides) ; (b) the accent
cannot go back of the first two words of the compound, as in the examples
just quoted, and also cuvéxdos, mapévdes (not obvexdos, but like éxdos; not
mdpevSes, but like ZvSes); (c) the accent cannot go back of an existing augment
(this holds of the Impf., Aor., and Plup. as well as of the Perf.), e. g. mposetxov
like e?xov, mapéoxoy like @oyxor, éiyov like jyov, etjv like Hv (not mpdsecxor,
awdpecxov, enyov, ténv); so also mposhxor like jxov, adaetpyov like elpyov, but
Imp. &reipye, also adixrat, apicro, like feta, ixro.

Exceptions to the Primary Law.

3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms : —

(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut.
Sing. Part. of the same tense as acute, e. g. Aureiv (from Auréewv), Arar, -dy;
and in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, eié,
eAd€, cdpé, AaBE, and id€ (but in composition, deme, dmdAaBe, Uredde, elside).

(b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, e. g. Aafod, Sod (from

Tisnmt).

Remark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor.
Act. draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law, e. g.
%Bare, ease, Exdos, Exdore, awddos, dwddore, wer ddos, weradore (yet not &rodos,

Se al

§ 118.] VERBS. — ACCENTUA ry On” 145 |
mérados, see No. 2), but éxBarciv, éxBarwy, exAurety, ete
Imp. Sing. second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -w, the circumflex remains on the
ultimate im compounds also, ¢. g. éxBadrod, aducod, exAurod, emikadod, aperod,
éveveyxov ; so in verbs in -w, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla-
bie preposition, ¢. g. mpodev, évSod, apod; yet the accent is drawn back, when
the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. dardé5ov, KardSov,
&ré30v; but in the Dual and Pl. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all
cases drawn back, e. g. éxBdAcode, awordBerSe, mpddocde, MSeoSe, tipecde,
KaTdseode.

(ec) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -s (Gen. -ros), con-
sequently in all active Participles of verbs in -«, as well as in those of the first
and second Perf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass. of all verbs, e. g. BeSov-
Aevids (Gen. -dros), wepnvds (Gen. -éTos), BovdevSels (Gen. -&vros), tumels (Gen.
-éytos), iords (Gen. -dytos), Tidels (Gen. -évros), didotds (Gen. -dvros), deumvds
(Gen. -tdyros), dtacrds, éxdels, mpodobs, Gen. diarrdyros, éxSévtos, mpoddyTos.

Rem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep-
tion, e. g. madedoas, Gen. raidetoayTos.

(ad) In the Sing. of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass. as circumflex, é. g.
BovAcevda, TpiB& (@ being contracted from -éw).

4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : —

(a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor.
Mid.; also in all infinitives in -va, hence in all active infinitives according to
the formation in -w, as well as in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass. and
of the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. rerdpdSat, BeBovAcdodsa,
TETILATIA, WepPirjjovat, pmemoS@oda;— pvadta, Bovdcidoat, Tysjoa, pirjoat,
puoSa@oa ;— AuméoSa, exSéoSat, diadédoSa ;—iordva, rwsévai, Siddvat, Secvivat,
oTHvat, exoThvat, Seivar, exdetvat, Sovvat, wetadodvar; — BovdAevdivat, TprBHvat ;
— BeBovacuxévat, AcAouTrévat.

(b) In the Participle Perf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. BeBovAeupévos, -uévn, -mévor,
TETULNMEVOS, WepiAnmévos.

(c) As circumflex in the Dual and Plu. of the first and second Aor. Subj.
Pass., e. g. BovAevdapev.

Rem. 3. The three corresponding forms of the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp.
first Aor. Mid., and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist
of three or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished
from one another by the accent, in the following manner : —

Inf. Ist Aor. A. BovAedoa, Imp. 1st Aor. M. BotvAcevom, Opt. 1st Aor. A. BovrAeioat,
Tojeat, molnoat, TOO at.

But when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf.
first Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt., first Aor. Act., e. g.
guadta; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. pvAagat.

13 a

146 VERBS. —SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [$$ 119, 120.

§119. Further view of the Augment and Redu-
plication.

1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication
(§ 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly.

2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the
Impf., Plup., and Aor.) take the augment, but retain it only in
the Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal.

§ 120. (a) Syllabic Augment.

1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem
begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing «! to the
stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the
Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and
hence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. Bov-
Aedw, Impf. é-BovAcvov, Aor. é-BovAcvoa, Plup. é-PBe-BovAcdixew.

2. If the stem begins with p, this letter is doubled when the
augment is prefixed (§ 23, 3), e. g. pirre, to throw, Impf. éppurrov,
Aor. eppupa, Perf. gipupa. Plup. éApidev.

Remark 1. The three verbs BotAopat, to will; Sbvapat, to be able; and
BéAAw, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic writers take 7, instead of e,
for the augment; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier
Attic writers, e. g. @BovafSnyv and jBovahSny; edvvduny and jdvvduny, dur}Snv
and jduypSny (but always éduvdoSnv) ; fuecdAdov and Fueddrov. The Aorist is
very seldom juéAAnoa (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26).

Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment e is often omitted in the
Pluperfect; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel; in sim-
ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. dvaBeBhrer, X. An.
5, 2, 15; waradeSpaunnecov, X. H.5. 3,1; wararércemro, X. Cy. 4. 1,9; Kara-
memtone, Th. 4, 90; af cuvSina yeyevnvto, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the
best MSS.); but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted

’ According to analogy, we may suppose that ¢ is prefixed to all verbs in the
augmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the
verb begins with a consonant, e appears as an additional syllable, e. g. &-mpar-
toy, but if with a vowel, e is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it
is not already long, e. g. &yw, Impf. gayov = jryov; eS€Aw, Impf. eéSerov = Hde-
Aov; dxéAAw, Impf. édxeArov = WkedAdov. If the word begins with a long vowel,
it absorbs ¢, e. g. 7AdoKw, Impf. ehAagKoy = HAackov; wdsi(w, Impf. eédsifov =
&3:Cov. When the verb begins with e, the augment ¢ is sometimes contracted
with this into e, e. g. efxov, instead of jyxov.

a 4 okt a he

TR

§§ 121, 122.] VERBS. — TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 147

only in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here not often; in the dramatic
portions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers (phoets
ayyeAucal); also at the beginning and middle of the trimeter, and likewise at the
beginning of a sentence, and even in these cases but seldom. The Impf.
xpiv, which, together with éx py, is used in prose, is an exception.

$121. (b) Temporal Augment.

The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins
with a vowel; it consists in lengthening the first +‘«m-vowel.
This is called the temporal augment because it increases the
time, e

a becomes 7, e. g. “Gryw Impf. Fyov Perf. #xa Plup. gxew

€ .- n, “ éamlvw * HAmiCoy “ Hdmuca RARE

i “ tl, “ ‘“ixeredm “ ‘ixérevoy “ ‘Tkéreuxa “ ‘ixeredxen
o * wo, “ dmtréw “ @pulraovy = =— “ulna buiAhnew
YY v, “ ‘WBplcw “ “OBpifov “ “OBpixa * “CBplxew
a n, “ aipéw “« fpovy “ fipnka * aphwew

av nu, * avrAew “ qvAouy “ mdAnKa “ nvAhKew
on w, “ omrTi@a “ @xtiCov “ @KTiKa “ @xtixey.

Remark. Verbs which begin with y, 1, 0, w, ov, and e, do not admit the
auginent, e.g. #77 Tdomas, to be overcome, Impf. Arrdéuny, Perf. trrnwa, Plup.
atthuny ; indw, to press, Aor. *irwoa; ‘ttvdw, to lull to sleep, Aor."imvwoa;
aperéw, to benefit, Impf. dpérAcov; ob Tad Cw, to wound, Impf. otraov; e%xw,
to yield, Impf. cixoy, Aor. eita; <ixd(w, to liken, is an exception, which among
the Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented, e. g. elxa(ov, etxaca, elkacuat,
seldom jrafoy (e. g. Th. 6, 92. #xa€ov, in the best MSS.), fraca, mracpat.
Also those verbs whose stem. begins with ev, are usually without an augment,
e. g. etxouat, to supplicate, edxdunv, more rarely nixduny, but Perf. niyyor (not
edyuat); edpioxw, to find, in good prose, always omits the augment.

§ 122. Remarks on the Augment.

1. Verbs beginning with & followed by a vowel, have a instead of 7, e. g.
*Gitw, (poet.), to perceive, Impf.”aiov; but those beginning with &, av, and o: fol-
iowed by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g.’an5iCopuar, to have an un-
pleasant scisation, Impf. andiCounv; advatye, to dry, Impf. avawoy; olakl Cw, to
steer, Impf. vidkiCov; also avaAloxw, to destroy, though no vowel follows 4, has
Gyardwod, tvGAwka, as well as ayvfAwoa, avijAwka. But the poetic deldw (prose
a5w), to sing, and adicow (Att. drow), to rush, take the augment, e.g. HedSov (prose
ndov), Rita (Att. pia); oYouat, to believe, dduny, etc. does not L septs here, since
the o following os, is not a part of the stem.

RT Ta, ah Oe Cee ene
4 eee bal 4 biel 2) ex

148 VERBS. — REDUPLICATION. [§ 123.

2. Some verbs also 9 pacing with o and followed by a consonant, do not
take the augment, ¢. g. oikoupéw, to guurd the house, Aor. oixotpnrw; oivife, to
smell of sca ase stage oiv dw, to intoxicate, Perf. Mid. or Pass. civenévos
and gyvwpuévos; oiatpdw, to make furious, Aor. ofotpyca.

3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have et instead of 9 for the
augment, viz. €dw, to permit, Impf. efwy, Aor. eaca; ES! Cw, to accustom (to
which belongs also efwSa, to be accustomed, from the Epic @&w); efoa, poetic
Aor. (stem ‘EA), to place (in prose only, Part. Aor. Mid. érduevos and eicduevos,
establishing, founding); €Atoow, to wind; EAxke@, to draw; Aor. eiAxioa (stem
‘EAKY) ; efAov, to take, Aor. (stem ‘EA) of aipéw; Eropuas, to follow; épyd-
Comat, to work; Epa, Ep ¢w, to creep, to go; Exridw, to entertain; €xw, to
have (on the Epic efuaz, see § 230).

4. The six following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal,
augment :—

&yvipmt, to break, Aor. Zata, ete. (§ 187, 1).

aAtoKopas, capior, Perf. édAwka and ijAwKa, captus sum (§ 161, 1).

a&vddyw, to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. édvdavoy, Perf. ada, Aor. eédor

(5 230.)
ovpéw, mingere, éodpovy, éovpnxa.
®S€w, to push, dour, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. SiwSodvTo,
Th. 2, 84; éwodnoay, X. H. 4. 3,125; Her, V1. Charm. 155, ¢.).
@véopat, to buy, Impf. éwvoduny (evotuny, Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. § 4; ee-
voovto, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 833; avrwveiro, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. éwvnad-
env (see however § 179, 6.), Perf. éovnua.

5. The verb éoptd¢w, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second
syllable, Impf. édpra¢ov. The same is true of the following forms of the
Plup. II.:—

EIKQ, second Perf. Zona, I am like, Plup. af KEL.

ZATouat, to hope, second Perf. Zoama, J hope, Plup. édaAmerv. i p

oet.

EPTO, to do, second Perf. Zopya, Plup. édpyetv.

6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the
same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the e of
the augment :—

dpdw, to see, Impf. édpwy, Perf. Edpaxa, Edpayat.

&volyw, to open, Impf. avéwyov, Aor. avéwta (Inf. avottat), etc.

&AtoKkopwat, to be taken, Aor. éddAwv (Inf. dA@vat, &), and fAwr.

§ 123. Reduplication.

1. Reduplication (§ 108, 4) is the repeating the first conso-
nant of the stem with «. This implies a completed action, and
hence is prefixed to the Perf.,! e. g. Aé-Av«a, to the Fut. Perf,

1 Strictly, we may say that the first letter of all verbs is repeated in the
Perf., whether the verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso-

ee

Lap

TE eR) OOF) Be . BAe OS ee ATT Le 8 Bs

were Oe ep
——_—_——
" 3

§ 123.] VERBS. — R DUPLICATION. 149

e€. g. Ke-koopyoopna (from xoopéw), and to the Plup., which, as an
historical tense, takes also the augment before the reduplica-
tion, e. g. é-S<-BovAevxew. This remains in all the modes, as
well as in the Inf. and Part.

2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem
begins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid; but
verbs beginning with p, yv, yA, BA,! take only the simple aug-
ment, except Bdrdrrw BéBrada, Bracdypéew BeBrAacdypyxa, and
Bracravw BeBrAdornKxa and é€BrdoryKa, e. g.

Ado, to loose, Perf. Aé-Avka Plup. é-Ac-Adcew
Stbw, to sacrifice, “ @é-SuKa (§ 21, 2.) “ ére-SbKew
outevw, to plant, “ qe-putevaa (§ 21,2.) “ é-sre-puTedcew
xopedw, to dance, “ we-xdpevea (§ 21,2.) “ é-ne-xopetnew
ypdpw, to write, “ yé-ypapa “ e-rye-ypdpew
KAlyw, to bend down, “ Ké-KALKO “ é-Ke-KAlKew
Kplvw, to judge, “ «é-Kpika “ é-Ke-wepleew

mvéw, to breathe, “ gwé-rvevKa “ é-we-mvevcew
SAdw, to bruise, “ ré-SAana (§ 21, 2.) “ é-re-DAdKew
pirre, to throw, “ ep pipa (§ 23, 3.) _ © epbipew
-vwpl(w,tomakeknown, “ é-yvaepica “ é-yvopixew
Branetw, tobe slothful, “ éBAdkevka “ 2-BAakednew
yAtow, to carve, “ &yAupa “ é-yadboew.

3. Besides the verbs just mentioned beginning with p, yv, BA,
yA, the reduplication is not used, when the stem begins with a
double consonant or with two single consonants, which are not
« mute and liquid, or with three consonants, e. g.

(nAdw, to emulate, Perf. é-Chawka Plup. é-(nadrew
tevdw, to entertain, “ @-téywka “ é-tevdnew
WddArw, to sing, & EbarKa “ edAKew
atelpw, to sow, “ &omapra “ éomdprey
KtiCw, to build, “ &eTua “ é-Kntlkew
aricow, to fold, “ érrvxa “ é-mrbxew
otparnyéw, tobeageneral, “ é-orpariyynka “ éorparnyhkew

nant is repeated, e is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verb begins
with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is
short, and thus form a long vowel; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs
the other, e. g.

tyw, Perf. properly taxa = jxa

éyelpw, “ se ééyepka = fyryepra

oikéew, dolknka = kena.
Sometimes when the verb bovis with e, the double e, instead of coalescing
into -n, is contracted into -er, c. g. édw, Perf. efaxa, instead of axa.

1 Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of the diffi-
culty of repeating them.
13*

“ “

Ms

150 VERBS.— ATTIC REDUPLICATION.

[i 124.

Remark l. The two verbs wiuvjasxw (stem MNA), toremind, and rt do-
pat, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are not a
mute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, né-uyquat, eé-nT ype, e-pe-py hun,
é-«e-ntThunv. The regular form é«rnua, is Ionic, but it is found also in Aesch.
Prom. 792, and in Plato with Ké-crnpo; likewise in Th. 2, 62. mposexrtyuéva
(as according to the MSS. it must probably be read, though elsewhere. Th
always uses xéxrnuat). Perfects formed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem-
ing exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. dédunna, wéwrauat, ete. (§§ 22,
and 16, 8.)

4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this
liquid, but take « for the augment: —
Perf. efanga

AauBdvw, to take, Plup. eiahoew

Aayxdve, to obtain, “ efAnxa “ eiAhxew
A€yw, TuAAEye@, to collect, “ guvelhoxa, guvetAcyuat “ ouverdAdxew
‘PEN, to say, “ elpnea “ eiphrey

pelpouat, to obtain, “ elwaprat (with rough breathing), it is fated.

Rem. 2. The regular reduplication is sometimes found in the Attic poets,
e@. g. AeAHpweda, EvAAcAcyuEvos, also in Xen. émsAeAeymevor occurs, Cy. 3. 3, 41
(Altorf, dmreiAcypévar). wad évAeAdyQa, H. 1. 6, 16.— Arad éyomas, to converse,
has Perf. 3:efAeymat, though the simple Aéyw, in the sense of to say, always
takes the regular reduplication, AéAcyuat, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting).

§ 124. Attec Reduplication.

1. Several verbs, beginning with a, «, or o, repeat, in the Perf.
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of
the stem. This is called the Attic Reduplication. The Plup.
then very rarely takes an additional augment; e.g. dswpwpuxro,
X. An. 7. 8,145; so qK-nKoew, but sometimes dx«nKdew. |

2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have this reduplica-
tion, are the following : —

(a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature :—~

&Aéw, -@, to grind,

(&A-hAeKa) GA-hrAco mat
(GA-nAékew) aA-nrAéouny
épdw, -@, to plough,
(&p-hpora) &p-hpomat
(dp-npdkew) &p-npdunv

"OMOQ, bpvupt, to swear,

bu-dpoKa Ou-dmoo mat
dp-wudKey bp-wpdo pny

euéw, -@, to vomit,

éu-hucka CU-Her eat

éu-nuceew = €uu-nuéounv
éAdw (éAatyw), to drive,

eA-hAaka eA-hAawar

éA-nAdke —€A-HAd NY

*OAEQ, GAAvm, to destroy,
dA-dacka _——- Perf, IT. 8A-waa (7OAQ)
oA-waéeew Pliip. I. eA-daew

Ly
Wt am

antl

|

$125.) AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151

edéyxw, to convince, épirre, to dig,
(@A-hAeyxa) €A-hAeyyeat dp-dpuxa . dp-dpvypat and Spuyya
(€r-nréyxewv) eA-nreyunv bp-wptxew dp-wpiyuny aud wpiyunp.

Further: €Afoow, to wind, (ér-jatxa), eA-fArypa (the rough breathing be-
ing rejected), and in good usage among later writers, etArypat; b Cw ('OAN),
to smell, $3-wda; pép@ (ENEKQ), to carry, év-hvoxa, év-hveypa; eo Sto (’EAQ), |
to eat, €6-480Kxa, €d-75eop01; &yw, to lead, Perf. usually jx a; wyhoxa (instead
of &y-fryoxa, so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the
Atticists as not Attic, though in Lysias; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. always jy.

(b) Those which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel
long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication
(except épefdw) : —

dAcipw, to anoint, &xotw, to hear,

GA-hrupa. GA-hAtumat aK-hKoa FKovo pou
&A-nArlpey GA-nAtuuny ne-nKdecy hKovouny

*EAETO@Q, Epxouat, to come, épeliw, to prop,
eA-havda ep-hpetka €p-hpeto wat
€A-narvsety ép-npelkery ép-npelouny

— éyelpw, to collect,, eyelpw, to wake,
dy-hyepea = ery-hryepua (ey-fryepea) «Cy -hyepmae
ay-nyépeev = y-nyépuny (ey-nyépeev) ey-nyépunev.

So from éyelpw comes the second Perf. éypfyopa (on account of euphony
instead of éy-ryopa), [ wake, second Plup. Act. éypnydpew, I awoke.

Remark 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found
in good Attic prose.

Rem. 2. The verb &yw, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and
épw, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication; here, however, the
reduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and
the vowel of the stem remains pure :—

ty, to lead, Aor. II. Hy-wyov, Inf. ayayeiv, Aor. IT. Mid. ayayduny ;

€pw, to carry (stem ’EFK), Aor. II. fv-eyxov, Inf. év-eyneiv, Aor. I. iv-eyra,

Inf. év-éyxat, Aor. Pass. qy-éxSqv, Inf. év-exdivat,

§ 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound
Words.

1. First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the
augment and reduplication between the preposition-and the
verb; the final vowel of prepositions, except epi and zpd, is
elided [§ 13,2, (a)]; xpé frequently combines with the augment
by means of Crasis (} 10), and becomes zpotd; é« before the
syllabic augment is changed to é ({ 15,3); and & and owy

152 z VERBS. — REMARKS. | | _[$ 126.

resume their v which had been assimilated (§ 18, 2), or changed
(§ 19, 3), or dropped (20, 2), e. g.

dro-BddAw, to throw from, Im. dm-€Baddov Pf. dro-BéBAnna Pip. &m-eBeBahwew
mepi-BaddAw, to throw around, mepi-€BaddAov _—_-ept-BEBAHKa mept-eBeBATKew

-€BadAov arp0-BéEBA ‘ :
mpo-BdAdAw, to throw before, sigtbbeg sen po-BeBanka. mpo-eBeBAhKey

mpovBadAov tpo-BéBAnka mpouBeBAhkew
éx-BddAAw, to throw out, éf-€BadAov éx-BéBAnka é&-eBeBAhKew
ava-A€éyw, to collect together, avyv-éAeyov ouy-elhoxa, ouv-eiAdxew
oup-platw, to throw together, oavv-éppirroy _—ouv-eppida ovy-epplpew
éy-ylyvopat, to be in, év-eyvyvouny — éy-ryé-yova. éy-ervyeryovew
éu-BddrAw, to throw in, éy-€Baddov éu-BéBAnta ey-eBeBAhew
ou-oKevd tw, to pack up, ovv-eckevaloy avv-ecxevaka ovv-erKevdKely,

2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with dvs, take the aug-
ment and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem
of the simple verb begins with a consonant or with 7 or w; (b)
but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins
with a vowel, except 7 or w, e. g.

dus-Tuxéw, to be unfortunate, é-Sus-rixouy Se-dus-rbxnka é-de-Bus-rux hie

Sus-wréw, to make ashamed, é-8us-brovy Be-Sus-danna _—é-Be-dus-wrhrew
dus-apeoréw, to be displeased, dus-npérrov’ dus-npéarnxa Bus-npeorhety.

Remark 1. Verbs compounded with ed may take the augment and redupli-
cation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them at the
beginning, and evepyeréw usually in the middle, e. g.

ev-ruxéw, to be fortunate, Impf. ni-réxeov, but commonly ed-rdxeov

ed-wxéoua, to feast well, “ ed-wyedunv

ed-epyeTéw, to do good, “ eb-npyéreov, but commonly ed-epyéreov, Perf.

ebd-npyérnka, but commonly ed-epyérnra.

3. Third Rule. - All other compounds take the augment and
reduplication at the beginning, e. g.

pudoroyéw, to relate. euusord-yeor pe-mudorAdynia
oixo5ouéw, to build, @kod0Meov @Koddunka.
Thus rappnoid¢oua (from mappnota, and this from may and fiers), to speak
openly, Aor. é-rapsnoioduny, Perf. we-rapinotacua.

Rem. 2. ‘OSoroéw has the Perf. édomemorjoSu, X. An. 5. 3,1. Lyeurg. c.
Leocr. § 139, has. immoretpépyner.

$126. Remarks.

1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment
in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi-
tion : —

§ 126.] VERBS. — REMARKS. 153

duméxopuat, to clothe one’s self, Impf. }urexduny,' or durerx. Aor. jumerxdunv?
dvéxouat, to endure (not avéxw), “ hverxdunv “ Aveoxdunv
dudiyvoew, to be uncertain, “ hubeyvdoury and judryydour

dvopSdw, to raise up, jvépsou Perf. qvépSona “ qwepsoca
évoxAéw, to molest, “ hvdxrow “ hvaexAnka “ qvexanca
mapowew, to riot, érapgvouy “ memapgynna “ érapgynoa.

-

2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not
compounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words,
viz. ;

diarrdw (from Slarta, food), (a) to feed, (b) to be a judge, Impf. édujrwy and
dufrav, Aor. éintnoa and dujtnoa; Perf. dedujrnxa ; Impf. Mid. diprdunv

diaxovew, to serve (from didKovos, servant), Impf. édinxdvouy and dinxdvour,
Perf. Sdinkdvnka

fite ate (from AM#IZBHTH®2), to dispute, Impf. juperBhrovy and judu-
Batovy.

3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several verbs compounded with prepositions,
take the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same
signification as the simple verbs, e. g.

dupvyvoew (voéw), to be uncertain, Impf. hupryvdour, or hupeyvdouy (No. 1)

audievyupu, to clothe, Aor. jugleca, Perf. qupleruat

érigrapo, to know, Impf. qmerduny

apinus, to dismiss, “ ddlovy and Adiovy, or Adiev [Sica
KadiCw, to set, * — éxdSiCov (old Att. also caSi€ov), Pf. rexd-
kadéCouat, to sit, * éxadeCSunv and cadve¢. (without Aug.)
Kadnuat, to sit, “ éxadhunv and caShunv

kaxevdw, to sleep, “ éxdSevdov, seldom kadnidor.

4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not
formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva-
tion from a word already compounded, e. g.

évavTiodpuat, to oppose one’s self to (from évayrios) Impf. jvavtiobuny
oc

dyTidiucéw, to defend at law ( Gytldixos) “ hytidixovy and jyredixouy
avTtBoréw, to it upon ( “ dyriBorn) “ AytiBddour

éumopdw, to gain by traffic ( “ @umoph) “ Aumdpwy

éumredéw, to establish ( “ Suredos) “ iyumédour.

5. Many verbs, however, which apparently are formed only by derivation, are
treated, even by the best classical writers, as if they were compounded of a
simple verb and a preposition. Thus, rapavouéw, mapnydéuovv and mapevdpuour,
mapnvéunoa, Perf. rapaveydunka, although it is not from mapdé and dvouéw or
vouew, which two ferba are not in use, but from the compound mapdyvouos ; so
further, éyxelpw (from ’ETXEIPOS), to take in hand, Impf. évexelpouy ; és dv-
éw (from "EMIOYMOS), to desire, Impf. éreSdpouv; evSuuéopat, Aor. éveduuh-
Syv, Perf. évreSiunua; catnyopéw (from Kathyopos), to accuse, Impf. carnys-

ouv, Perf. xarnydpnxa; mpoSupodpa:r (from mpdSupos), to desire earnestly,
Tmpf. mpovsvpovpny and mpoSvuovunv; so eyrwpid ew, mpopntede, éevedpedverv,
exkranoidcew, dromrevew, emirndedvery, eudarvilew, ovvepyeiv, etc.

1 So Pl. Phaed. 87, 6, according to most and the best MSS.
® Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristoph. Thesm. 165.

154 VERBS IN -w.——DERIVATION OF TENSES. [§§ 127, 128.

FoRMATION OF THE TENSES OF VERBS IN ~w.

§ 127. Division of Verbs in -w according to the
Characteristic.

Verbs in -@ are divided into two principal classes, accord-
ing to the difference of the characteristic (§ 108, 5) :—
I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel; these are
again divided into two classes : —
A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel,
except a, €, 0, €. g. Taidev-w, to educate; dv-a, to loose ;
B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is a, €, or 0, e. g.
Tiyud-o, to honor; iré-w, to love; picSd-w, to let out
for hire. : |
IJ. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant;
these are again divided into two classes :—
A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine
mutes, e. g. Neizr-a, to leave ; éK-a, to twine; Teid-o,
to persuade ; 7
B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four
liquids, A, p, v, p, e.g. ayyéAA-w, to announce ; véu-o,
to divide ; patv-w, to show; 3elp-w, to destroy.
Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act.,
all verbs are divided into :—
(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not
accented, e. g. Av-w, mAék-w, etc.;

(t) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers.; these
are consequently contract verbs, e. g. Tim, PiA@, MiTHa.

§ 128. Derivation of Tenses.

All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men-
tioned above ({ 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have
a distinct tense-characteristic (§ 110); this is always wanting in the Pres.
and Impf., the mode-vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the
Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e.g.
TomtT-w (pure stem TYIT), auapt-dyw (pure stem ‘AMAPT); the Secondary tenses
never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without
the tense-characteristic ; yet, in certain cases (§ 140), they admit a change of

§{129.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 155

the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a common stem,
‘may be distinguished from each other and classed by themselves.. Tenses,
included in such a class, may be said to be derived. from one another. The
principal classes are the three following : —

I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These are the i’res. and

Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass., e. g.

(pure stem TYTM) tém-t-w 7TUN-T-OMcL
é-ruT-T-ov é-run-t-dunv.
II. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary

tenses, e. g.

(a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. (wé-pad-xa) wé-ppara, é-me-ppd.-
KEW;

(b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac-
teristic; from the Perf. Mid. or Pass. the Fut. Perf. is formed by
rejecting -wa: and annexing -coua, e.g. ré-Tuu-wcu (instead of térum-
pat), ere-rdppny, Térvpoun (instead of rerdroouat). The Perf. has
a short vowel, but the Fut. Act. and Mid. a long vowel, e. g. Atw,
Adtixa, ACATua, Adow, Adrouct, Béw, Fédnna, Fdeuc, Show, Shooua ;
so the Fut. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. AcAVoomat, Sedhoopnan ;

(c) First Fut. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. rive Tiomet

é-ruva €-Tupauny ;
(d) First Aor. and first Fut. Pass., e.g. é-rip-Snv Tup-I}comat.
III. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character-
istic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem-vowel. These
are the Secondary tenses, e. g.

(a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. ¢. g. ré-ritw-a, @-re-riin-ey ;

(b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. &AdS-ov, é-AdS-dunv from Aay-
Sdyw (pure stem AAO) ;

(c) The second Aor. and second Fut. Pass., e. g. é-ria-ny, tia-hoopa.

§ 129. I. FoRMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS.

1. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the
tense-endings are commonly appended to the unchanged char-
acteristic of the verb, e. g. BovAed’-cw, BeBovdev-xa. Pure verbs
commonly form no Secondary tenses, but only the Primary
tenses; the Perf. with x (xa), the Fut. and Aor. with o and 43
(cw, oa, Inv, Sjoro-po1). Pure verbs, however, are subject to the
following regular change in the stem :—

2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf,, is
lengthened in the other tenses, viz.

i into 7, ¢. g. unviw, to be angry, unvi-ow, é-phvioa, etc.

i “ 0, “ KwAd-w (v commonly long), fo hinder. nwad-ow, Ke-K@rdpat, ete.

eo & (2S. EGES:

156 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT vowEL. [5 130

c into 7, &. g. pidé-w (PiAG), to love, pirh-ow, we-plAn-Ka, etc.
o “ w, “ piodd-w (uicSe), to let out for hire, moSd-ow, pe-uloSw-Ka, ete.
& “ 9, © riypd-w (Tyna), to honor, tTywh-ow, Te-Thun-Ka, ete.
Remark 1. & is lengthened into a, when e, s, or p precedes it [comp. § 43
1, (a)], e. g.
eu-w, to permit, éd-ow, elaoa, clara, elauat, eiddnv; éoridi-w, to entertain, éorid-
ow; Pwpti-w, to steal, pwpd-cw; but éyyud-w, to give as a pledge, éyyu-haw ; Botw,
to call out, Bohrowat, éBonoa (like dy5sn).
The two following imitate those in -edw, -idw, -pdw, viz.
&A0%-«, to strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. ddod-ow ; but usually drochow;
&kpou&-opuat, to hear, Fut. dxpodooua, Aor. jxpododuny (like &Spda).

Rem. 2. The verbs x pda, to give an oracle; xpdopas, to use; and tritpda,
to bore, though p precedes, lengthen & into 7, e. g. xphooua, Tphow.

§ 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs with
a short Characteristic-vowel.

The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule (§ 129, 2) re-
tain the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming all the
tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a
o in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. and first Aor. Pass., and in the
tenses derived from these, and also in the verbal adjectives;
such verbs are designated by : Pass. with o.

(a) -to.

Xpitw, to sting, Fut. xptow, Aor. éxpioa, Inf. xpfea. Pass. with o; (but xptw,
to anoint, Fut. xpiow, Aor. &xpioa, Inf. xpiom, Aor. Mid. éxpioduny; Perf.
Mid. or Pass. xéxpi-c-ya, kexpio8a; Aor. Pass. éxpi-o-Snv; verbal adj.
xpiords).

REMARK 1. éatw, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here ({ 230).
The poetie atw is found only in the Pres. and Impf. (“aiov, § 122, 1).

(b) -to.
1. "Aviw (also old Att. dvirw) to complete, Fut. aviow; Aor. Hvioa. Pass.
with o.
&ptw (also old Att. dpirw), to draw water. Fut. pc Aor. Hee Pass.
with o.

u¥w(d), to close, e.g. the eyes, Fut. pow, Aor. Zuioa; but Perf. ueuina, to be
closed, to be silent.
ariiw(d), to spit, Fut. rriow; Aor. @rrica. Pass. with o (érré-c-Sny), verbal
adj. mru-o-rds.
2. The following dissyllables in -Jw lengthen the short characteristic-vowel
in the Fut and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Fut. Peri. Mid., and 8¢w also in the
Perf. and Plup. Act.; but they resume the short vewel in the Perf. and Plup.

Se h\ et

§130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. i187

Act. (except déw), Mid. or Pass., in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in verbal
adjectives : —

dd, to wrap up, Fut. Siow Aor. @iea Perf. 5éd0na Sédip-a1 Aor Pass. ed09nv
Se, to sacrifice, “ Siow “ Bion “ TeAdixatrediva “ “ érvSnv
Aba, to loose, & dow “ Brtoa “ AéAtxardrAtua “ “ rAd.

Rem. 2. The doubtful vowel v is commonly used as long in the Pres. and

Impf. by the Attic poets; but in prose it must be considered as short; hence to
be accented ude, wrve, Ave, etc., and not ude, wre, Ade, etc.

(c) -dw.
TeAdw, to laugh, Fut. yeddooun (seldom yeAdow); Aor. éyéAdou. Pass.
with o,

é€Adw (usually éAadivw), to drive, Fut. éddow (Att. €ad), etc. See § 158, 3.

SA da, to bruise, SAdow, etc. Pass. with o (ré9Aa-o-ua, éSAd-o-Syv).

Ade, to break, krAdow, etc. Pass. with o (xékAa-o-pot, exAd-o-Sny).

Xadrda, to loosen, xaduow, etc. Pass. with o (éxadd-o-Snv).

Saudw (usually daud(w), domo, Aor. éddudioa. Pass. with o.

mepdw, to transport, to sell, Fut. repiow; Aor. érépica; Perf. remépixa (but
mwepdw, to pass over, Intrans., Fut. mepdow; Aor. érépaoa). These seven
verbs have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel a.

ondw, to draw, oricw, etc. Pass. with o (éord-o-Snr).

«xd, to loose, to open, extiow, etc.

(d) -éw.
1. Aidéopas, to reverence. See § 166, 1.

&xéouat, to heal, axécouat, hxecdunv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. #xe-o-uar; Aor. Pass.
AKé-o-Syv.

&A €w, to grind, to beat, &r¢-o-w, Att., yet seldom &A@; Aor. #Aeoa; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. dAhAcopat (§§ 117, 2, and 124, 2).

&pKkéw, to suffice, etc. Pass. with o.

éuéw, to vomit, Fut. éuéow, etc.; Perf. Act. éujwexa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éufueo-
pat (§ 124, 2).

¢é, to boil (usually intrans., and (évvum, usually trans.). Pass. with o.

téw, to scrape. Pass with o.—reAéw, to accomplish. Pass. with o (§ 117, 2).

7 péw, to tremble, -eow, etc.; verbal adj. tpe-o-rés. — xéw, to pour. See § 154,
Rem. 1. ,

2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: —

aiyéw (in Attic prose émavéw), to praise, Fut. aivéow; Aor. jveca; Perf. jvexa;

Aor. Pass. jvéSnv; Fut. Pass. aivedShooua; verb. adj. aiverés, -réos; but
Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7jynuat.

aipéw, to choose, Aor. Pass. ripéSnv ; also riphiny; alphow, fipnka, ipnua.

yauéw, to marry, Fut. yaua; Aor. éynua; Perf. yeydunna; Aor. Pass. éyauhdnv
(I was taken to wife).

Séw, to bind, Show, %noa, ednoduny; but Sédexa, SéSeuar, €5€Sqv; Fut. Perf.
ded5fjoouc is commonly used for SeS4coua (the latter is used by Dem. and
later writers).

14

158 § VERBS.—AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH a. [§ 131.

Kadréw, to call, Fut. caréow, Att. radd (§ 117, 2); Aor. exddeox; Perf. Act.
KéxAnna; Perf. Mid. or Pass. réxAnua, Lam called; Fut. Pert. xexahooua,
I shall be called; Aor. Pass. éxaAhSnv; Fut. Pass. cAndjoowa:; Fut. Mid.
kadoduat; Aor. Mid. éxarerdunr.

x02 €w, to desire, rodécouat, Lys. 8, 18, Pl. Phaed. 97, a.; érdSeca, Isoc. 4, 122.19,
17; elsewhere, modhow, emédnza; Perf. Act. meméoyna; mwemddnuct; Aor.
Pass. érodéoSny.

movéw, laboro, Fut. movhow, etc. (to work); movéow (to le in pain); Perf. rend-
vnxa in both senses; Mid. and Pass. always have 1, e. g. émovnoduny and
érovidnv, Perf. remdynyat.

(€) -ow.

*"Apdw, to plough, Fut. apdow, Aor. fpooa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. d&phpowat (§ 124,
2); Aor. Pass. qpdédnv.

§ 131. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and
the Perf., Pluperf. Mid. or Pass. with oa.

1. Pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic-vowel in
forming the tenses, in the Aor. and Fut. Pass. and in the Perf.
and Plup. Mid. or Pass. (also in the verb. adj.), unite the tense-
endings Inv, was, ete. to the tense-forms by inserting o (§ 130),

e. g.

TEAE-W é-TeA€-0-Syv TE-TENE-T-MLAL
TEAE-O-IHT OMA €-Te-TEAE-O-UNV.

2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have
a long characteristic-vowel in the stem, or lengthen the short
characteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tenses, have the
same formation, viz.

&Kkovw, to hear, Aor. Pass. jrov-o-Snv, Fut. Pass. axov-o-Shoopa, Perf. Mid.
or Pass. #xov-o-wat, Plup. jrov-o-uny; évatw, to kindle; reXedw, to command ;
the Deponent d:amapaxeActouat, to arouse; Kvalw, Kvhw, to scratch (Kéxvat-o-pat,
Kéxvn-o-wat, exval--Snv, exvh-o-Synv) ; KvAtw, to roll; Xedw, to stone (éAcv-o-Snv,
Perf. seems to be wanting) ; Ed, to scrape; watw, to strike; taralw, to wrestle
(éradal-o-Snv); tA Ew, to sail; rpiw, to saw; mratw, to strike against, to stum-
ble; fatw (poetic), to destroy; velw, to shake; tw, to rain, Aor. Pass. §-0-Snv,
I was rained upon, Perf. Pass. §-c-wa (épu-oc-névos, X. Ven. 9, 5), "Fut. trou
(instead of 5-c-Sh-c-oua); ppéw, to send (only in compounds, e. g. eicd.,
éxg., to lead in), Fut. pphow, etc., Mid. pphooum, Aor. Pass. épph-o-Snv; x da, to
heap up (xéxw-o-wat, éxd-o-Snv) ; xpdw, to give an oracle (xéxpn-o-pa, exph-o-
Any, § 129, Rem. 2); x pla, to anoint [§ 130, (a)]; Pada, to touch (&pav-o-pa,
Hippocr.).

§131.] verns.—aoRIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE wiTH o 169

3 The following vary between the regular formation and
that with o:— |

yet, to cause to taste, Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf. Mid. or Pass. yéyevpou (Eurip.);
but Aor. Pass. probably éyed-c-Snv. Comp. yedua, but yev-o-réov.

Spdw, to do, Fut. dpdow, etc.; Perf. dédpaxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. d¢5péuar and
5¢5pa-o-wat (Th.); Aor. Pass. é3pdoSnv (Th.). Verbal adjective dpa-o-7és,

dpa-o-Téos.

Spave, to break in pieces, Perf. Mid. or Pass. réSpav-o-wa (Plat. réSpavpar) ;
Aor. Pass. éSpav-c-Snv. Verbal adjective Spav-o-rés.

kAalw, Att. cAdw, to weep, Perf. Mid. or Pass. céxAavpot and KéxAav-o-pau.

kAelo, to shut, Perf. Mid. or Pass. cékAeuae commonly, «éxAct-o-wax Aristoph.;
kéxAnuat Tragedians, Thu., sometimes Pl., rarely Xen.; Aor. Pass. éxAcl-
a-Snv, Attic éerrf-o-Snv (Th.); Fut. Pass. cre-o-Shoopa. Verbal adjective
KAet-o-Tés, KAz-o-T 6s.

xoAotvw, to maim, Perf. Mid. or Pass. cexddovyat and KkexdAov-c-uo; Aor.
Pass. éxoAot-o-Snv and éxordotany.

xpote, to strike upon, Perf. Mid. or Pass. xéxpovyas and (seldom) kéxpov-o-yat
(X. H. 7. 4, 26); Aor. Pass. éxpot-o-Sny.

véw, to heap up, Fut. vhow, etc.; Perf. Mid. or Pass. vévnua (vévn-v-pat doubt-
ful) ; but Aor. Pass. évf-o-Snv (Arrian). Verbal adjective vyrés.

véw (collateral form vfSw), to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass. vévn-o-pat; but Aor.
Pass. évfSyv. Verbal adjective vnrds.

YVdw, to rub, Perf. Mid. or Pass. nua and &@y-o-wu ; Aor. Pass. éyfony and
évh-o-Sny (instead of which the Attic writers use @yyuat, eytyxSnv from

Vhxe) |
4. The following verbs assume o in the Aor. Pass., but not
in the Perf. :—

pupyhoxes (MNA-Q), to remind, Pf. uéurnua, I remember, A. P. eurf-o-Snv

avéw, to blow, wérviuot (poet.) envéu-o-Snv
_ xXpdouat (xp@uar), utor, KEXPNMaL exph-o-Snv
matw, !o cause to cease, to finish, Memaupas errav-o-Snv

and ératany, ravShooua Ion. and Th. Verbal adjective rav-c-réos.

5. The following verbs, though they retain the short charac-
teristic-vowel in the Perf. and Aor. Pass., do not assume o:—

Siw, Sbw, Atdw [§ 130 (b), 2], €Adw [§ 130 (c)], aivéw, afpéw, S€w [§ 130 (d), 2],
apdw [§ 130 (e)], xéw [§ 154, Rem. 1], cede, to excite (§ 230).

.
1:
160 UNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. [$f 132-134

PARADIGMS OF PURE VERBS.

A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs.
§ 132. (a) without o in the Mid. and Pass.

Kwavw, to hinder. ACTIVE.
Pres. |kwAv-w Perf. Jresderins Fut. [kwAv-ow Aor. |é-KéAv-oa {
MIDDLE.

yen €-KwAd-od-

Pres. |kwAv-ouct} Perf. |ke-ndard-uor | Fut. ae

K@AD-TomaL

PASSIVE.

Aor. |é-«wAd-Syv | Fut KWAD Shooma.

§ 133. (b) with o in the Mid. and Pass. (§ 181).

Imperative.

Perf. 8.1. | «e-néAev-o-nau Infinitive.
Mid. 2. | Ke-xéAev-cm Ke-KeA€U-70 KE-KEAEU-o AL
or 3. | Ke-KéAev-o-THUL Ke-KeAeU-7w oe
Pass. 1. | Ke-xeAev’-o-pedov ards fo"
Ind. D. 2. | ne-néAev-cdov ke-KéA€v-o SOV i i i 8. te
3. | Ke-KéAev-c ov Ke-KEACU-C WY Subjunctive.
P. 1. | Ke-reAed-o-peda Ke-keAev-o-Mevos @
2. | Ke-KéAev-ode Ke-KéA€v-0E
3. | Ke-KeAev-o-pévot eial(v) |Ke-KeAev-cdwoay OY Ke-KeAeU-cdwy|
Plupf. 3
Mid P ae S. 1. | é-ne-neAred-o-uny D. é-ne-nerev-o-nedov P. é-Ke-Keded-o-pmeda
Pins 2. | é-ne-néAcv-co = “*_—s e-ke-KeAeu-w Sov =“ é-ee-KeAev-7SE
iat: 3. | é-e-KéAeu-o-To “ é-Ke-ieAcd-odnv “ -Ke-KeAev-o-uevol oay
Opt. .| Ke-KeAev-o-wévos etny
Aorist Pass. é-ceAev-o-Syv Future Pass. xeAev-o-Shoouat.

B. Contract Pure Verbs.
§ 134. Preliminary Remarks.

1. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either a, €, or o (§ 127); these
are contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made
according to the rules stated above (§ 9, I.), belongs only to the Pres. and
Impf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristic-
vowel followed. by another vowel. The Paragogic y in the third Pers. Sing.
‘Impf. Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense-formation, see §§
129-131.

§ 134.] PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 161

2. The contract forms of verbs in -éw in the Indicative and Subjunciive are
the same; contracts in -éw have the same form for the second and third Pers.
Sing. in the Indic. Opt. and Subj. viz. -ots, -o7.

3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -dw, which, in our editions of the
classics, is more commonly written with an Iota Subscript, is without that lette
in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -aev, e. g. Tyuav, NOt Tar. v7,

4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina-
tion of the uncontracted form is. the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the
syllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g.
Tiu(d-w)O = Tindw, TiInd, TyW(d-ev)av = Tiywdew, Tysay; but if more than one
syllable follows the parenthesis, the syllable, or syllables, after the last hyphen
is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted
word embracipg all the letters of the form except the yowel after the paren-
thesis ; the contract, all without the parenthesis.

14*

271.

162

PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT

VERBS.

[§ 135,

§ 135. Paradigms of

“Infin.

Ti(d-€)a-re
Ty(a-€)d-Twoav, OF
Ti(a-d)d-yTwy

Tiyu( d-eLy ay

pia(é- €)<i-re
piar(e-€)el-rwoay or
pr(e-6)ob-yrwy

joa d-e)od-re
pias o-€)ot-Twray
or pua(o-d ob-vrey

ACTIVE: x
a |e oo , :
“S28 245 Present
“= = ot
A uy 5 | Characteristic a. Characteristic «. | Characteristic o,
ea ae Bi Tiu(d-w)@, to honor, |piA(é-w)@, to love, |uiod(d-w)@, to let,
2. Tyu(d-ers )@s pia( é-exs ets mir d(d-ers ots
3. | Tyu(d-er)a pia(é-er) ez Mtod(d-er)o@
Indica- any. ~ L eV? =
: 2. | Tyu(d-e)a-roy pir( é-€) €f-Tov pads (d-€ )od-Toy
tive, 3. | Tye (d-e)a-rov pia(¢-€)et-Tov stad d-€)od-Tov
P. 1. | Tyu(d-0)d-nev pia(é-0)od-mev bios d-0)od-wer
2. | Tie(d-e)a-re piar(é-e)ei-7€ pioS(d-€ )od-re
3. | Tyu(d-ov)d-o1( v) piA(€-ov)od-o1(v) | wiaS(d-ov) od-o1(v)
eo: THY dew) pir(ێ-w)@ pigs d-w)@
2, | Til d-ns)as 3 pial é-ns )fis stod(d-ns)ots
3. | Tya(d- n)a © |piar(én)i pias d-n ot
Sub- | D.1. 5
june- 2. | TyA(d-9)a-Tov rt | peal é-n )i-rov pied (d-n)@-Tov
tive, 3. | Tyu(d-n)a-Toy & | piA( €-n)ij-rov Migd(d-n )@-Tov
P.1. | Tiyu(d-w)d-wer = | piA(é-w)@-pev bias (d-w)@-pev
2. | Tiu(d-n)a-Te 2 pil én) f-Te pion(d-n )@-Te
3. | Ty(d-w)@-o1(v) | HA é-w)@-o1(v) pio s(d-w)a-o1( 7)
S. 2. | tThu(a- e)a plr(e-e)et pulod(o-e)ov
3. | Tiyla-é é)d-re pir(€-€é)el-Tw sod (0-€ )ob-Tw
I D. 2. | Tiu(d-e)a-rov pir é-€) €f-Tov pio d(d- “€)ov-rov
ih eae 3. | Tye{a-é)d-Tey ir(€-€ )ef-Twy picd(o-€)ov-Twy
tive, |p 9
3.

pialé é-ew)ety

pucd(d-ery oor

Ti( d-wy)@y
Ti d-ov)@-oo,

pirlé ew JOY
pir(é aye Se

piod(d-wy ay

Partici saa d6-0v)o0d-oa
artici- reach ; rd 7m
le Ti( d-ov )@y piA(é-ov ody pod 6-ov ody
Ree Ty( d-0)@-vTos piAr( é-0)o0-vros bad d-0)0d-vros
Ti(a-ov)d-ons piA(e-ob)ov-ons ptad(0-ov)ov-ons.
Imperfect.
érlu(a-ov wy eptar(e-ov)ovy éuicd(o-ov our
ériu(a-es)as epta(e-es)ets éulod(o-es)ous
eriu(a-e)a epla(e-e)ex eulad(o-e)ov
oe eriu(d-€)a-roy epir(é- e)eh-roy €utod(d-€)od-rov
? ériul a-€)d-T yy edtA(e- -€)et- -THY eutos(o-€)ov-rny
eri d-o)@-mey epir(é-000-wev €uiaS( 6-0) o0-uev
ett d-6)a-r2 epir(é-e 'e?-Te euigd(d-<)od-r<
érfula-ov)wy €pta(c-ov Jovy eulaS(o-ov our -

$135.|

Contract Verbs.

PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS,

163

MIDDLE.

Present.

Characteristic. a.

Characteristic «.

Characteristic o.

| rin( d-o)@-mau
| rae(d-n )e
Tiu(d-e)a-rae
Tipe(a-6)b-wedov
Tiu( d-e)a-odov
Tiu(d-e)a-oSov
Tiyt(a-d)d-weda
Til d-€)a-ode
Tie(d-o)@-vrat
Til d-w)@-war
rip(d-n)a
rip(d-n)e-rat
wat a-)@-werdov
Tiu(d-n )\e-cxor
Til (d-m )a-oSov
: rail an’ )d-peva
| ryal d-n)a-ove

Til d-wo )@-vTo q

wes

“DAIQUIIPU, OY} ONLY

a 1y(d-0u)@

Ti(a-€)d-os@

ri(d-€)@-o20y

Tip{a-€)d-oSev

risel d-e)G-o8e

riula-€)d-cSwosy, or
Ti a-€ d- a ywy

Til d-< )a-oSu

PiA(é-0)00-mau
pir(é-n)7

paA( é-€ )et-Tat
@tA( €-d)ov-usdov
@1A( &-€) €f-o Sov
girl é-«)et-adoy
oA €-6 ob-ueda
ia(é-e)et-oSe
gur(€-0 ot vras

| geod d-a}ut-pran

puicd(d-9)ot-par
poa(d-n jot
puae(d-E}on-ron
pioS( 0-6 jo%-neSov
MiGa 6-<)ot-owoy
pus 6-< }ot-eSov
oD 0-8 }o%-nede
pura s( d-2 ot-oxre

iA( €-@) @- wat
pial €-n ii
piA( €-y) Fra
| PiA(€-6)d-peSov
Al €-4) j-o You
| MIA é-9) 7-030”
giaA(e-d )b-ucdu
pia é-7 )3,-o Fe
irl é-@ j@-vTa
giA( é-ov)od
pir(e-€)<i-cSe@
P1A( €-€)€t-oSov
pia(e-€)ef-o Sev
pial é-€ )et-oSe
g1A(e-€)el-cS@ray, oF
gir e-€ )el-odwy

| pr d( d-eo )eo-pacut
i , c
: .Oarl 0-7 jot
| piod(d-n )@-Tae

|

+ gead( 4-7 }o-oSor
| moe d- 4) \a-erSov

| wigS(6-ou)ou
| sige 0-€ )ov-T3@
| bios d-€ jov-cdov

pid 6-@ )eo-vTet

juad(o- 5 d-pedoy

“pe. Ja

tie O(4-q'e-0de

pAGili D2 j=

wid o-€)o'-cdev

pian 6-€)ot-o8e

pues o-€)ot-cdwoeay, or
pugs o-€)ov-cdev

PiA(€-€)et-odau

fuga (d-€ )ot-odeu

Tin a-d)cb-pevos
‘| ty(a-o)w-wery
Tu(a-d)cd-pevoy

pA(€-d )ot-pevos
@1A(€-0) ov-uern
gid(€-d )ov-pevoy

sig®(o-d)od-pwevos
suo 0-0) ov-wéevn
pioad(o-d )ot-pevor

Tip a-0 )oo-wevors @ta(e-0)ov-mévou | io 0-0)ov-névou
Ttit(a-o)w-mevns pial e-o)ou-pévns pugs (o-0)ou-méervns.
Imperfect.
' ériu(a-d)o-nny egra(€-d )ov-unv eusod(o-d )ov-uny
| érig(d-ov)@ €quA( €-ov) ov €uiod(d-ov)ov
| eriu(d-e)a-ro epiA( é-€)€i-T0 éutos(d-€ )od-70
| ériu(a-d)d-medov ZptA(€-d)ob-uedov éuios(o-d )od-nedov
eri d-€ )G-o2ov epiA( é-¢)€t-oSov euiad(d-€)od-cSov
| érimla-€)d-oSny eper(e-€)el-odny eu (0-€)ot-cSnv
| éripla-d)b-weda epir(e-d )od-peda éuto3(0-d)ob-weda
_ eru(d-e)a-ode , €pia( €é-€)ei-ode euicd(d-€ )od-aSe

| ety d-o}@-yTo

| éguaA(€-0 )ov-vTo

éuiad(d-0)00-vTo

164 PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. [§ 136.
g62 38 Imperfect.
ese |28: 3
a & «&| Characteristic a. Characteristic e. | Characteristic o.
S. 1. tue(d-o1)B-pu piA( €-01)ot-us puo(d-o1)o7-we
2. | Tyu(d-ous) ps PpiA( €-o1s ) ots bios (d-o1s ots
3. | Tiyu(d-o1)@ piA( é-o1) or uta (6-01) 08
Opta- D.1. : spate
vt ah 2. | tTiyu(d-01)d-rov ptA(€-o1) 07%-Tov puod(d-01)o7-rov
? 3. | Tye a-ol)o-rnv pA(e-ol )ol-rny fos o-ol )ol-rnv
P. 1. | Tiy(d-01)d-wev pA( é-01) of-mev tod (6-01) o7-mev
2. | Tiyu(d-o1)G-re pia( ێ-01) 0%-Te futod( 6-01) o7-Te
3. | rTiu(d-o1)G-ev 1A ( é-o1)oi-ev fo 6-01) ot-ev
S. 1. | Ti(a-ol)d-nv pta(e-ol )ol-nv putoes(o-ol)ol-ny
2. | Ty(a-vl )o-ns PiA(€-of )ol-ns pad o-ol)ol-ns
‘Matic 3. | Tyu(a-ol)g-n @iA(€-of )ol-n ted(o-ol )ol-n
Opta- 2. | Tya(a-ol)d-nTov pir(e-ol)of-nroy | uiod(o-ol )ol-nrov
tive 3. | Tye(a-o1)@-ATyny pir(e-or)oi-hnryny | tod 0-01) o1-HT HY
7 1 PL 1. | rip(a-of)o-nuev pir(e-ol )ol-nuevy | sod (o-ol)ol-nuev
2. | Tiu(a-ol)@-nre piA(e-ol )ol-nre tod 0-ol )ol-nre
3. | Tyu(d-o1) d-ev prr(é-01)of-ev Mlod( 6-01) o7-ev
Perf. | retina meplranka peplodwxa
TEepopaKa
Indica- | Plup.| érerijew erepiAnnely CMEMITIOKELY
tive, emepwpaxev Se LS ae
Fut. | tynhew pwpdcw | Piryjow biadoow
Aor. | ériunoa — epawpaca | eplanca éulodwoa
F. Pf.
PAS

Aorist, | ériphdnv epwpadny | epirghdnv | EmiodadSny |

Verbal adjectives: tiwn-réos, Téa, -Téov, pwpa-rTéos, -Téa, -Téov,
§ 136. With short Vowel
ACTIVE.

Tenses. Characteristic a. Characteristic «. | Characteristic o.
Present, om(d-w)@, to draw, TeA(€-w)@, to com- | &p(d-w)&, to plough,
Imperfect, éom(a-ov wy éréA(e-ov)our|plete,| Hp(o-ov our
Perfect. tonana TeTéeAEKA &p-hpoxa
Pluperfect, | éomdxew eTETEACKELY dip-npdketv
Future, | ontiow TEA@ apdow
Aorist, | fondoa eréAeoe hpora

PAS
Aorist, | €omd-o-Snv | éreAé-o-Snv =| hpddnv Kf

Verbal adjectives: oma-o-réos, -réa, -Téov,

— le RAIS OD

§ 136.] PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 165
Imperfect.

Characteristic a. Characteristic e. | Characteristic o.
Tiu( a-ol)g-uny pra(e-ot )ol-uny pto®(o-ol)ol-uny
Ttu(d-01)@-0 piA(é-01)o7-0 ptod( 6-01) 07-0
Ttu(d-ot )o-To PtA( €-04) 0%-T0 utara 6-01) 07-70
Tn( a-ol )o}-medov pir(€-of )ol-wedov pod 0-of )ol-weSov
Tu d-or)p-cXov piA( €-01)0¢-o Sov purd( 6-01) o7-cS0v
Ty4{ a-ot)w-odny pir(e-ol )ol-odny pas (o-of) of-cSnv
Tin{ a-ol) @-weva piaA(€-ol )ol-weda pics o-ol)of-peda
TyL( d-01)G-7deE pra ( ێ-01) 07-09 ptod(d-01)0i-oSe
Tiu{ d-o1)@-vTo ptA( €-01)oi-vT0 pos d-01) of-vTo

| rerlunua meplAnuat peulodwuat

| wepapauat

| éreTimhunv erepiAhunv eMemorounv
erepwpaunv he

(Tiwhsonae pwpaoousn | prrhooud Micdaoouat
eriuenoduny epwpacduny | épirnoduny eutoSwodunv
TETUTTOMAL TEPWPATOMAL| TEPIAHTOMaL Memo ooouat

SIVE.

| Future, [ rinthooua pwpidiooua | pirnSfhooua | - moSwShooua

piAn-Téos, -Téa, -Téov, wigdw-Téos, -Téa, -Téov.

in forming the Tenses.

MIDDLE.

Characteristic a. Characteristic e. Characteristic o.
on(d-0)@-yat TeA( €-0)00-uae &p( 6-0) o0-wat
eom(a-d)a-unv éreA(e-d)ov-uny np( 0-6 )ov-uny
goma-o-pat TETEAE-T-pat &p-hpomat
éomd-o-unv éretTeA€-o-uny &p-npdunv
orioouc TEeAOUMat pécoua
eomacdunv ereAcodunv hporduny

SIVE.
| Future, | oma-c-Shoowat | Teare-c-Shoowar | apoShooua

Tede-o-T Eos, -éa., -ov, &po-Téos, -éa, -€ov.

166 REMARKS ON THE CONS. OF CONTRACT VERBS. [§ 137.

‘Remark. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. Pass with o, see §§ 130,
131; on the omission of the o in éphpoua, Apddnv, see § 131, 5; and on the Attic

Reduplication in &p-fpoum, see § 124,2. The further inflection of foma-c-wat,
€omd-o-unv, reTéAc-o-pat, érerer€-o-uny, is like that of kexéAev-c-pa, § 133. On
the Attic Fut., reAdow = 7 AS, -e7s, ete., TeATOMAL = TEAODMaL, TEAR [eZ],

ete., see § 117.

$137. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract
Verbs.

i. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in the cases mentioned under
§ 9, Rem. 3; but, verbs in -éw with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. wAéw, to sail; mvéw,
to blow, Séw, to run, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -e
(from -ee: or -ee), €. 2.
Act. Pr. Ind. rAéw, mAcis, wAc?, mA dome, wAcire, TA€oveL(y),.
Subj. rA€w, tAEns, TAEn, TAEwpev, TAENTE, TAEwWOL(r),
Imp. wae?. Inf. rActv. Part. rA€wr.
Impf. Ind. @rAcoyv, éraeis, Act, ewmA omer, ewAcire, EtAc Ov.
Opt. wAdotus, TA€ots, ete.
Mid. Pr. Ind. rAéomai, tAEn, wAciTaL, MAES MED OV, TAEicSor, etc.
Inf. wActoSa. Part. rAeduevos. Impf. érrAeduny.

2. The verb d¢a, to bind, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu-
larly in compounds, e. g. 7d Sot, Tod Sotvtos, Siadotua, karédovv. But dei%, it
is necessary, and déouat, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -éw, with a
monosyllabic stem, e. g.7d Séov, Séouat, SeioSat; uncontracted forms of Séoua
occur, instead of those contracted into -e1, ¢. g. déera, Seca, éd€ero, Xen.,
and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g.
@raAcev, X. H. 6. 2, 27; wader, Th. 4, 28; ocvvéxeev, Pl. Rp. 379, e.

3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g.

(a) -ae, -aet, -an, are contracted into -n and -y, instead of into-a and -g, e. g.

¢(d-w) &, to live, Gis, -Gi, -Gitov, -Cire, Inf. Civ, Imp. ¢4, Impf. wy, -ns,
-n, ~iTov, ~hrnv, -Te;—wewv(d-w) &, to hunger, Inf. rewiy, etc. ;— d1a-
(d-w)@, to thirst, dufjs, ete. Inf. dupjv;—nv(d-)@, to scratch, Inf. xviv ;
—ap(d-o) &, to smear, Inf. oujv;— yp (d-w) &, to rub, Inf. biv;— xp (d-0)
&-wat, to use, xph, xpitat, xpicXu; so dmoxpapmar, to have enough,
amoxpicia;—amadxpn (abridged from amroxph), it suffices, Inf. aroxpiv,
Impf. améxpn ;— x p (d- w) &, to give an oracle, to prophesy, xpiis, xpi, Xpiiv-
(b) -oo and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -w, instead of into -ov, and
-én into -¢, instead of into -o7, e. g. pry(é-w) @, to freeze, Inf. pryav

(Aristoph., but fryodv, X. Cy. 5.1, 11), Part. G. pryvros (Aristoph., but.

pryotvtwy, X. H. 4.5, 4), and fryéoa (Simon. de mulier. 26), Subj. pre
(Pl. Gorg. 517, d.), es prygn (Hippocr.).
Remark 1. The Ionic verb {ipdé.w, to sweat, corresponds in respect to con-
traction with piydw, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: spas,
Bpenv, paca, iSpavres.

- tad aerial anitiame :

§ 138.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF IMPURE VERBS. 167

4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of the
Opt. in -nv (§ 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person,
of verbs in -éw and -dw, the form in -ofny is far more in use than the common
form, and_in verbs in -dw it is used almost exclusively; but in the Dual and
Pl. the common form is more in use. The third Pers. Pl. has always the
shorter form, except that Aeschin., 2, § 108, Bekk., uses doxolncar.

5. The verb Ao da, to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac-
tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act.and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., which
have -e or -o in the ending, e. g. ZAov instead of fAove, €Aoduey instead of eAod-
onev, Mid. Aoduce (Ader, Aristoph. Nub. 835. according to MSS.), Actra, ete.,
Imp. Aoi, Inf. AodcSa, Impf. eroduny, edrov, éAdciro, etc., as if from the stem
AOEQ ; still, uncontracted forms are found, e. g. Aovoua, éAovovro (Xen.).

Rem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, see § 30, 2.

Il. FoRMATION OF THE TENSES OF IMPURE VERBS.
§ 138. General Remarks.

Pure and Impure Stem.—Theme.

1. Impure verbs (§ 127, II.) undergo a variety of changes m
the stem. In the first place, the stem of the verb is strength-
ened : —

(a) Hither by an additional consonant, e. g. rdm-r-w, stem TYTI; xpd¢-w, stem
KPAT; ¢pd{w, stem PAA; and even by inserting an entire syllable, e. g.
Guapt-dy-w, stem ‘AMAPT ;

(b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. pedy-w, stem TT; AHd-w, stem
AA®@; Thx-w, stem TAK ; :

(c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses ;
this change may be called a Variation (§ 16, 6), e. g. KAéwt-w, e-dAda-ny,
Ké-KAog-a ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung.

2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from
the strengthened stem; the first is called the pure stem, the
last, the impure. The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the
impure stem; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and
‘specially the-second Aor., contain the pure stem; the remaining
tenses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g.

Pres. tén-1-w, to strike, Aor. IL. Pass. €-riiaw-ny Fut. Act. tipo (rim-cw)

“ Aela-w, to leave, * Act. @-Aia- ov & -& Nelipw (Acix-ow)
© opdew, tokill, Passe-ogdy-w “ “ opdtw (apdy-ou)
“ galy-w, to show, * “ @-pdv-ny “ Mid. pav-oducu

“ Selp-w, to destroy, “ “ €-pSap-nv “ Act. pSep-@.

168 IMPURE VERBS.— STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [$ 139.

3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres.
tense in use, another Present is assumed; this assumed Pres.

may be termed the Theme (J¢ua), and is printed in capitals, 7

to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use; thus, e. g. devyw
is the Pres. in use, ®YTOQ is the assumed Pres., or the Theme,
designed merely to form the second Aor., &-@vy-ov.

§ 139. Strengthening of the Stem.

1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso-
nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g.

tintw (tum), to strike, Aor. II. Pass. é-ria-ny
rdtrw (ray), to arrange, me “ 8-rby-ny
Kpd(w (Kpary), to cry, . Act. €-npay-ov.

2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and
Impf.; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g.

Pres. rémrw Impf. @rumrov Aor. II. Pass. érimny Fut. rip (tdrow).

Remark 1. The characteristic of the pure ster, e. g. r in TYTI-O is called
the pure characteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. rr in rémr-w, the impure
characteristic.

3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length-
ening the short stem-vowel in the Pres. and Impf.; this short
yowel reappears in the second Aor., and in liquid verbs, in the
Fut. Thus, ,

& is changed into 7 in mute verbs, e.g. (€-AGS-ov) AfS@
& $ a in liquid verbs, “ (pav-@) gpalyw
€ * et in liquid verbs, “ (pSep-6) HdSelpw
t ¥ €. in mute verbs, : “ (€-Alm-ov) Acirw
t $ iin mute and liquid verbs, ~ “ (é-rptB-nv) tpiBw
i Me + in mute and liquid verbs, “ (€-hpiy-nyv) dpiyw
7] o- ev in mute verbs, ' “ (€-piy-ov) dedyo.

Rem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and
Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor.; likewise the Pres. Subj. and
Impf. from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. éxpaov exparyov, npd Coun
xpdyouu, Kpdtw Kpdyw, xpdte kpdye;— %rermov Edimov, Aelwoyu Alwoywn, Aclrw
Alirw, Actre Alire.

—

} 140.] VERBS. — CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. 169

$140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel.

1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel [§ 138, 1 (c)],
occurs only in the Secondary tenses, with the exception of a
few first Perfects.

2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem,
and with eas a stem-vowel, take the variable & in the second
Aor., e. g.

Tpeén-w, to turn, Aor. If. Act. @-rpam-ov
KAén-t-w, to steal, “ Pass. é-xkA&a-ny
tpép-w, to nourish, . “ é-Tpig-nv
oTpép-w, to turn, * “ é-oTpig-ny
Bpéx-w, to wet, . “ €-Bpuix-ny
d€p-w, to flay, i “ €-3%p-nyv
oTéAA-w, to send, % “ é-oTGA-nv
omelp-w, to sow, % “ é-owdp-ny
odelp-w, to destroy, fs “ é-pS&p-ny
Téuv-w, to cut, ri Act. @-ra&p-ov.

The second Aor. éréyoy (from téuvw, to cut), is very rare in Attic prose (Th. 1.
81. rduwuev) ; regular érewov; the second Aor. é8péxny (from Bpéxw, to wet), is
poetic and late; common form éBpéxSnv. The first Aor. Pass. érpépSny (from
tpéxw), eIpeprny (fr. tpépw), éorpépSny (fr. crpépw), belong more to poetry than
prose; éxAépdny (fr. eAéwrw) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 (repels). Adpw, omelpw,
and S¢lpw, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not oceur in polysyl-
lables, e. g. Hyyedov, TryyéAnv, Sperov, iryepdunv.

Remark 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second
Aor. Act., e. g. @rperoy (Impf.), érpamoy (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class
(2, above), whose second Aor. Act. is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur
in the second Aor. Pass., because that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf.,
see § 141, Rem., e. g. BA éwa, to see, Impf. @-BAen-ov, second Aor. Pass. é-BAér-
nv (first Aor. Pass. is wanting); Aéyw, to collect (in compounds), second Aor.
Pass. xare-Aéy-ny, svvédeynv (more seldom Aor. I. cuveAéxSny, eteAdySnv; with
the meaning fo say, always éAéxSnv); so also Aéa-w, to peal, é-Aén-ny (first

_ Aor. Pass. wanting); tAéx-@, to braid, usually é-mAd«-ny, but also é-rAék-nv

Plat. (first Aor. Pass. érAéxSnv, Aesch. Eum. 259); préy-«, to burn, é-préy-nv
(more seldom épaéxSnv); Péyw, to censure, éapéy-ny, first. Aor. Pass. wanting.
Rem. 2. The verb rA477T a, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the 7
in the second Aor. and second Fut. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the
variable &; thus, é-rAfy-nv, tAnyhooun, eke-wAdy-nv, KaTe-wAdy-nv, éex-rrAa&yh-
count; ohrw, to make rotten, and thw, to melt (trans.), also have the variable a;
hence Perf. céonra, J am rotten, second Aor. Pass. éodarny, second Fut. Pass.
carhoouc; Fut. rhtw, Aor. érnta; second Perf. rérnxa, Iam melted ; second Aor.
Pass. éré«ny; also first Aor. tee, hee, Pl. Tim. 61. b., Eur. Supp. 1033.

170 VERBS.— CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. __ [f§ 140.

3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with ¢ fora
stem-vowel, take the variable &, not only in the second Aor., but
also in the first Perf. Act.,in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the
first Aor. Pass., e. g.

arédAw, to send, Fut. ored-@ Pf. &orad-ka *@oradr-ua Aor. é-orda-Snv

PSelpw, to destroy, Fut. pSep-@ Pf. &-pSap-na %pSap-war.

The first Aor. Pass. éordASny is poetic; the first Aor. Pass. of dépw, omelpw,

gxelpw is not in use; but instead of it the second Aor. Pass., thus, éddpny,
eomdpynv, épSdpnv. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g.

Hyyedna, HyyAarsnv from ayyéAAw, a&yhryepuat, iryépdynv from ayelpw. Comp.
No. 1.

4. Mute verbs, which have « in the final stem-syllable of the
Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf.; but those which
have «, take ov; liquid-verbs, which have « or « in this syllable,
take o, e. g.

déprouat (poet.), to see, S€dopKa dépw, to flay, 5éopa

tpépw, to nourish, rérpopa eyelpw, to wake, éyphryopa, I awoke,

Aelaw, to leave, AéAouwa, omelpw, to sow, oropa

melSw, to persuade, rérowa, I trust, pSeipw, to destroy, €pSopa poetic, (eprapka,

prose).

Rem. 3. Here are classed the following anomalous second Perfs.; @w
(Epic), efwSa instead of ciSa, to be wont, ciwéva, ciwdds, Plup. ciddew;—
*EIAQ, video, ofda, J know ;—’EIKQ, Zona, to be like, to appear, Plup. égxew ;—
ZAmw (poet.), to cause to hope, oma, I hope, Plup. ééamew, I hoped ; —’EPYTN, to
do, Zopya, Plup. éépyew ;— phy-vui, to break, %ppwya, I am broken (but on oft,
see Rem. 2). | ;

5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf. also,
contrary to the rule in No. 1.
KAérrw, to steal, first Perf. xéxAopa, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. céxAcuua (very

rare and only poet. céxAappar).
Aéyw, to collect, first Perf. cvvelAoxa, éfefAoxa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass.

ouvelAeymat.
méurw, to send, first Perf. rérouga; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. réreupau.

tpémw, to turn, first Perf. rétpopa (like the second Perf. of tpépw, to nourish),
and rérpaa; still, this last form is rare; the more usual form is rérpooa,
The variable a in the Perf. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is probably
here used only to distinguish it from rérpopa, Perf. of rpépu.

6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and
with « for a stem-vowel, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the
‘ wariable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass.; still, the a is not found in
the first Aor. Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs, e. g.

9 poPin

.§ 141.] VERBS. — REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 171

orpépw, to turn, Pf. Mid. or Pass. orpapupmat, but first Aor. Pass. éorpépSyy

Tpéerw, to turn, 2 “ rétpaumat, Ms _ erpépdny

Tpépw, to nourish, 4 “ réspaumat, a og edpepany.
On KAérrw, see No. 5.

§141. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses.

1. The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting the
tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings (-ov,
-duny, -nv, ~hoopat, -a, and -ew) immediately to the pure characteristic of the
verb, e. g. @Aim-oy, second Aor., but é-aldeu-o-a, first Aor.; partly, in being
formed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which
prefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. Actrw, &Aim-ov, petyw &-piry-ov; and
partly, in taking the variable vowel, e. g. orpépw é-orpig-nv tT pad-hooua,
but é-orpép-Syy (§ 140, 2).

2. The second Perf. either lengthens the short stem-vowel i into i, & into »,
and, when it stands after other vowels or p, into a, e. g.

Kpd(w, to cry out, second Aor. @-xpiy-ov second Perf. «é-xpay-a
gplocw, to shudder, stem: ®PIK (7) < mé-qppik-a
SdAAw, to bloom, Fut. SaA-6 4 Té-SNA-a 3

SO, répnva, A€ANSa from SAN-w, AAO-w; or it retains the long vowel or diph-
thong of the Pres., e. g. répevya from petyw (but second Aor. Act. épi-yor),
Térnka, céonma from rhxw, ofmw (but second Aor. Pass. éraxny, éodmrny, see
§ 140, Rem. 2); a short vowel occurs only in the cases referred to in § 124, and
§ 140, 4.

Remark. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. could not be distinguished
from the Impf., or at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no
second Aor. Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., since this ‘last form
has a different ending from the Impf., and could not be mistaken for it, e. g.

ypiw Impf. éypaoy A. I. Eypaipas A. IL Act. want. A. IT. P. éypignyv (A. I. P. does

not occur in classical writers).

kAlvw “ &xrwov “ feria NG ag A. IL. P. éxatyny (A. I. P. éxAl-
Sny in Aristoph).
vixo “ alixov “ Abita “* & “ epoxny, Plat. (ey

Aristoph. Nub. 152 [with the variation Yvxefoy] and often in the later eiiiers:
A. I. évéxdny, Plat.).

3. The following points, also, are to be noted: (a) There is no verb which,
together with the second Aorist, forms the three first Aorists; (b) There is no
verb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the
second Aor. Pass.; but all verbs, which form the second Aor: have either the
second Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass. only. A single
exception, in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen in the verb tpéra,
to turn, which has three first Aorists together with three second Aorists: @rpérov
(Ion.), érpdadunv, erpiany, érpeva (the common form in Attic), érpeddunry
(transitive, e. g. rpépacSa: eis puyhy, to put to flight), érpépSny (used more by the

172 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. — [$ 142.

poets, see § 140, 2); but in compounds, e. g. émtpepSijiva:, Antiph. 4. 126, 4.
127, 5).

There are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second
Aor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly
in the poet. dialect, e. g. ériroy Eur., and érimny; %Atroy and erlarny ; erciposny,
and very seldom éArréuny.

4, It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms; where this is the case, the two
forms are used under certain conditions, namely : —

(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e.
the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The
same is true of the two forms of the Perf., where they are constructed from the
same verb. See § 249, 2.

(b) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ-

ent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some

verbs, both forms occur even in prose, e€. g. arnAAdxSnv, and usually arnrrwynv,
BdragpSijva and BA&Biva, both for ex.in Thuc. Several verbs in poetry have a
second Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. crefvw,
to kill, Aor. prose, rewa, poet. &ravoy and ray

(c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms
of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this
way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under
the verbs ridnu: and dfdeu.

A. FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MuUTE-VERBS.

§ 142. Classes of Mute Verbs.

Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three
classes, according to their characteristic; in each of these
classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and
Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac-
teristic (§ 189, Rem. 1) :—

1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (8, 7, ¢ pure

characteristic; m7 ([§ 24, 1] impure characteristic),
e. g.
(a) Pure characteristic: wéum-, to send; tpiB-o, to
rub; ypad-a, to write ;
(b) Impure characteristic: tvrr-o, to strike (pure char-
acteristic 7, pure stem TYII); Brdrt-o, to injure
(8, BAAB) ; pirt-w, to hurl (>, ‘PI®).
2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute («, 7, x

NE ee RCO ee
¥ fT ee i ;

iio

§ 143.] MUTE VERBS. — REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173

pure characteristic; oo or Attic rr [§ 24, 1] impure
characteristic), e. g.

(a) Pure characteristic: wAéx-o, to weave; ay-a, to
lead; tevy-w, to prepare ;

(b) Impure characteristic: dpicc-w, Att. dpitt-w, to
shudder (pure characteristic «, pure stem @PIK) ;
taca-w, Att. rart-w, to arrange (y, TAT); Byco-a,
Att. Bnrr-o, to cough (yx, BHX).

3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (7, 6, 9,
pure characteristic; ¢ [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic),

e. g.
(a) Pure characteristic: dvit-w, to complete ; aé-w, to
sing ; meiS-a, to persuade ; .

(b) Impure characteristic: ¢paf-a, to say (pure charac-

teristic 8, pure stem PAA).

§ 1438. Remarks on the. Characteristic.

1. The following mute verbs in -rrw and -cow (-rTw) form the Secondary
tenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : —

m: KAémt-w, to steal; kéwt-w, to cut; témwt-w, to strike (second Aor. Passive
é-xAam-ny, etc.).

B: BAdmwr-w, to injure, and xpbwr-w, to conceal (second Aor. Pass. é-BA&B-yv
and éBAd@Sny, é-xpvB-nv and éxpipSny).

: Bdwr-w, to tinge; Sdwr-w, to bury; Spiwr-w, to break; pdwr-w, to sew to-
gether; plrr-w, to cast; oxdrt-w, to dig (second Aor. Pass. é-Bagd-nyv,
é-Tdgp-ny, €-TpUg-ny, €p-pug-ny, ép-pio-ny and eppipsmy, é-cKxio-

nv).

Kk: ploow, to shudder (second Perf. ré-g pix-a).

y: GAAdcow, to change (second Aor. Pass. XA G-+y-fvat, first Aor. Pass.
ddrAAaxS vat, poetic), udoow, to knead (wiy- iva). optoow, to dig (6piy-jva
and dpuxSijva), tAhoow, to strike (é-wAhy-nv, ee-wAuy-nYv), mpdoow, Att.
mparrw, todo (ré-rpay-a), cpa (w (Attic mostly epdrrw). to kill (é-c pay -
nv, rarely, and never in Attic prose, éogdxSnv), Tdoow, to arrange (raryels,
Eur., elsewhere érdxSnv), ppdoow, to hedge round (éppay-nv and eppdxSnv).

2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic « by 7, like verbs with the
impure characteristic rr : —

mwéxt-w (commonly exréw, also welkw), to shear, to comb, Fut. rétw, etc. ;
still, xefpew is commonly used for réxrew with the meaning éo shear, and
xrevicew and falvew with the meaning to comb ;

tixt-w (formed from ti-réx-w), to beget, Fut. réfoua, second Aor. Act.
Zrexov, second Perf. téroxa.

‘8. The following verbs in -cow, -rtw have a Tau-mute, not a Kappa-
mute, for the pure characteristic: apudrrw (non-Attic apuddw), to fit, Fut.
-60w;—BAlr1w, to take honey, Fut. -lcw;—Bpdoow (non-Attic Bpd(w), to
shake ; —épéoaw, to row, Fut. -€0w;—adoow, to scatter, Fut. -dow ;—wrAdo-
ow, to form, Fut. -dow;—a7laoow, to = Fut. -low ; — and Poet, indo, to

15

Pa, =

174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [f 144,

whip, Fut. -dow; kvdéoaw, to sleep, Fut. -d0w; Actdoow, to look, Fut. Acbow;
Atooopar (poetic, especially Hom., also Altopat), to pray, Aor. éAicduny,
eritéunv; viccouat, velaocopat, to go, Fut. velooum; roptoow, to equip
(Epic Perf. xe-« 6 pv d-pa).

Here are classed derivatives in -#@TTw: AtwdT Te, tohunger; dveipdTTa,
to dream ; bwvé77w, to be sleepy.

4. The following verbs in -oow vary between the two formations: vdoow,
to press together, Fut. vdiw, etc.; Perf. Mid. or Pass. vévaouor; verbal Adj. vaords ;
—agpicaw (Poet.), to draw, Fut. -dgw, Aor. Hpica, Apioduny.

5. Of verbs in-¢w, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly 4,
there are only a few primitives, e.g. €€ouasr, Poet., nadéCoua, prose, I seat
myself, 1¢w, commonly kadifw, to seat; oxi¢w, to separate; xé¢w, alvum
dejicere; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -d¢@ and most in
-ifw, e. g. édi fw, cixd(w, etc.

6. Verbs in -¢w, whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y,
are mostly Onomatopoetics, i.e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense;
the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e.g. aid€w, to groan, Fut.
aidiw; &AaAAd Cw, to shout (abddtacda, to speak, Aor. wanting in Her.) ; ypi(w,
to grunt; xot€w, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. roltw ; npdce, to
scream, Aor. éxpairyoy ; Kp Cw, to caw, to croak; paart (aw, to whip; 63d4¢a, to
scratch ; oiué¢w, to lament, Fut. oiudtoua; 6A 0Ab Cw, to cry out, to shout ; puo-
ta{w, to drag about; ord€w and crard (a, to trickle; crevd wu, to sigh;
ornptw, to make firm; ort(w, to mark, to prick; ovptw, to whistle (Fut.
ovplioua, etc.; cvpiow, etc., later, and not Attic); o¢d¢w (Attic mostly opdr-
tw), to kill; opt (a, to throb; tpt ¢w, to chirp (rérpiya, Ion. and poet.) ; pAvCa,
to bubble, and the Poet. Bd¢w, to prate, Fut. Batw, third Pers. Perf. Mid. or
Pass. BéBaxrar; Bpt (w, to slumber (Bpita); Sat¢w, to divide, to kill; éXert Cow,
to whirl, to tumble; évapt€w, spolio; p é¢@, to do (Zopya).

7. The following verbs in -¢w vary between the two modes of formation:
Baordw, to lift up, to support, Fut. -dow, etc., Aor. éBarrdxSnv ;—Sdi0 7d Cw,
to doubt, dicrdow, from which the verbal Subst. d:orayuds and Steréois ;—vvo-
7a (w, to nod, to sleep, Fut. -dow, Aor. évictaca, in the later writers vvordtw,
etc., e.g. Plut. Brut. 36;—mai¢w, to jest, Fut. matoduce and maltoua, Aor.
Att. Zraa (in later writers @raita, wémarya), Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. mémacucn
(in later writers réraryyo, éralxSnv); verbal Adj. raoréos ; —apad Cw, to rob,
Att. aprdcoua, iipwica, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language aprdtw and
-dow, etc., second Aor. Pass. yprdynv) ; — md ¢w, to moan, has Il. 5, 20. éwéuvtay,
but in Hippocr. Zuveev.

8. The following verbs in -¢w have yy for a pure characteristic: kA d¢, to
sound, to cry, Perf. né-kaayy-a, Fut. nadytw, Aor. tAayta;— mad Cw (poet.) to
cause to wander, Fut. madytw, etc. Aor. Pass. émadyx8qv;— carn Cw, to blow a
trumpet, Fut. -tykw, etc. (later also -fow, etc.)

§ 144, Formation of the Tenses.

Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and
Mid. with the tense-characteristic ¢, and the first Perf. and
first Plup. Act. with the aspirated! endings -a and -eiv, when
the characteristic is a Pi or Kappa-mute; but with the

1 The Perf. Act. of all verbs properly ends in xa, but where x is preceded by
a Pi or Kappa-mute, that mute combines with « and is changed into the cor-
responding rough. On the contrary, a Tau-mute before x is dropped, e. g.
TérumKa = Térvpa; wémparyka = Twémpaxa, but wémreika instead of mwémreSKa.

" $144,] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. 175

endings -xa, -xew, when the characteristic is a Tau-mute;
though the Tau-mute is omitted before « (§ 17, 5).

Remark 1. For the change of a Tau-mute into o, before u in the Perf. Mid.
or Pass. see § 19, 1; for the change of a Tau-mute into o before 7, see § 17, 5,
but this o is omitted before o of the personal-endings, e. g. wére:ouat, -oTat,
méppacuct, -orat; but second Pers. wérei-cut, wéppa-ou instead of wéreio-cat,
méppac-cat. The vowels a, :, v are short in verbs which have a Tau-mute as a
characteristic before endings with the tense-characteristic o and x (-xa, -Kew),
e. g. paw, ppicw, tppica, wéppixa; wAdcow, to form, mrdow; voul(w, to think,
évéuica; Kat(w, to wash, kAvow, etc.; in like manner, short vowels remain short,
e. g. Spudla, Tpuora.

Rem. 2. On the changes which the mutes undergo by the addition of the
endings beginning with o, 3, u, or r, and before the aspirated endings -a, -eiv,
see §§ 17, 2 and 3.19, 1. 20,1; on the lengthening of -e into -e before o of
verbs in -évdw or -évSw, e. g. orévd-w, Fut. (orévd-cw) omeiow, Aor. toreioa,
Perf. Mid. or Pass. Zomeioua, see § 20,2; on the omission of o in endings
beginning with o8, e. g. kexptpSar instead of kexpdWSa: (xexpipoda), wewAEX-
Sa: instead of wewAdtSa:, see § 25,3; on the endings of the third Pers. Pl.
Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., -é7a: and -&7 0 instead of -yra:, -yro, see §§ 18,
1 and 116, 15; on the variable vowel in the Secondary tenses, and in some first
Perfects and Perfects Mid. or Pass., see § 140; on the Att. Fut. of verbs in
-d(w, and -i(w, e. g. BiBd(w, Fut. BiBiiow, BiBG, -Gs, -G, -GTov, -Guer, etc., roul(e,
Fut. xoulow, couse, -re7s, etc., see § 117.

Rem. 3. When » precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of the
verb, e. g. in réum-w, the wu is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. before endings
beginning with uw; thus, réur-w, to send, wé-rep-uou (instead of wé-reur-pat, mé-
meup-pat), méremar, méreumta, etc., Inf. wewéupSa:, Part. wemeupevos; so
kdumr-w, to bend down, xé-kay-wat (instead of xé-Kaym-pa, Ké-Kayp-yat). Also
when two gammas would stand before u, one vy is omitted, e. g. opiyy-w, to tie,
é-opry-uu (instead of &@opryy-mat), eopryta, Zoprynra, etec., Inf. éoplyxsat,
Part. éogrypévos ; so ekeAdyxw, to convince, éerhAeypas (instead of ékeAhAeyxmat,
ekeAtryyuat), ekeAnaAeyta, etc. Both the uw and y are here dropped to prevent
the concurrence of three consonants.

176

PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS.

(§ 145,"

PARADIGMS OF MuTE VERBS.

§ 145. A. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi-mute.
(B, 7; $.)
(a) Pure Characteristic, B, 7, @ (Fut. -yo).
tptBw, to rub. —

no omevos.

ACTIVE.
Pres. | Ind. rpi8-w Subj. rpiB-w Imp. rp78-e Inf. rpiB-ew Part, rpiB-wv
Impf. | Ind. @-rpiB-ov Opt. wplbetius che on Liceit
Perf. | Ind. (re-rpiB-&) ré-rpip-a Subj. re-rpip-w Imp. not used, Inf. re-
Tpip-évat Part. re-rpip-ds ;
Plup. | Ind. (¢-re-rpif-civ) &-re-rptp-ew Opt. re-rptp-ou
Fut. Ind. (rpiB-cw) tpipw Opt. rplpoyu Inf. tpivew Part. rphbov
Aor. I. | Ind. @rpuja Subj. tpiw Opt. rphbaja: Imp. rpioy Inf. rpiba
Part. rptvas.
MIDDLE.
Pres. | Ind. rpif-oua: Subj. tpiB-wua Imp. tpiB-ov Inf. zpip-eoda Part.
TpiB-duevos
Impf. | Ind. é-rpif-éuny Opt. rpip-oluny
Perf. | Ind. | (7é-rpiB-ua) Imperative. Infinitive.
S. 1. | ré-rpiu-pau (ré-rpiB-co) (re-rptB-Sa)
2. | ré-rpryat Té-Tpiyo TE-Tpip-Tat
3. | Té-Tpim-rat te-Tplp-Sw
D. 1. | re-rplu-pedov Participle.
2. | Té-Tpi-Soy TE-Tpip-Yov TE-TPli-MEVOS, ~N, -OV
3. | ré-Tpip-Sov Te-Tplb-Sav
P. 1. | re-rptu-peda Subjunctive.
2. | Té-Tpip-de TE-Tpip-TE TE-TPl[l-EVOS
3. | re-rpiu-wévar eiot(v) | Te-Tpip-Swoav
or Te-Tplp-arat or Te-Tplg-Swv
Plup. | 8. 1. | ére-rpiu-uny D. é-re-rpiu-medov P. é-re-rplu-weda
Ind. 2. | é-ré-rpuyo é-ré Tpip-Sov e-ré-Tpip-Se
3. | €-Té-Tpit-To é-Te-Tplp-9nv TE-Tplu-evot Hoa
Opt. TE-Tpi-mevos einv [or é-re-rplp-diro
Fut. Ind. tphvoua Opt. rpubotuny Inf. rphpecSa: Part. tpapduevos
Aor. I. | Ind. &rpubduny Subj. tpivwna: Opt. tprpatuny Imp. tpiva' Inf.
Tphpacda: Part. tpupdwevos
F. Pf. | Ind. re-rphboua Opt. re-rpupotuny Inf. re-tphpeodoa Part. re-rpupd-
Mevos.
PASSIVE. .
Aor. I. | Ind. (é-rpiB-Snv) érplp-Snv Subj. rpip-3G Opt. rpip-Selnv Inf.
Tpip-Sivac Imp. tplp-Sntt Part. rpip-Sels, (instead of I. Aor.
Pass., commonly LI. Aor. Pass.)
Fut. I. | Ind. tp.d-Shooua Opt. rpip-Snoolunv Inf. tpip-ShoecSa: Part. tpid-
Sno duevos
A. Ti. | Ind. é-rpip-nv Subj. rptB-& Opt. tpiB-elny Imp. rprB-ns Inf. rpip-
fivat Part. rpip-els :
FIL | Ind. tpiB-foona: Opt. tpiB-nootuny Inf. rpiB-joecSa Part. rpip-

Verbal adjective: (rpiB-rés) rpim-rds, ~h, -dv, Tpim-Téos, -éa, -Eov.

§§ 146, 147.] PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 177

§ 146. (b) Impure Characteristic, rr in Pres. and Impf. (Fut. -)o).

xémrrw, to cut.

ACTIVE. MIDDLE. | PASSIVE.
Pres. KOWT-w KOTT-oMat
Perf. I. | (xé-xom-&) xé-xop-a ké-kou-wat, like ré-rpiuae
Perf. II. xé-xor-a, (Hom.) 2

A. I. &dp-Snv

Fut. . (Kdr-cw) Koyo KoWouat F. I. xop-3joopau
Aor. I. &Koya é-copduny | A. II. é-da-nv
Fat. Pf. Ke-Kdouae F. IL. Kom-joropa

Verbal adjective : xom-rds, ~h, -dv, xow-réos, -Téa, -réov.

Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass.
ndum-t-w, to bend down (xéxau-wat for xéaup-uat, § 144, Rem. 3).

Ind. S. 1. | nékappau Imperative. Infinitive.

2. | Kéxapuypas a Kexduprat
3. | Kéxaymrrat Kekduparw “ir

D. 1. | nexdupedov pe Farticiple.
2. | xéxauppdov Kékaupsov i rien apie er be 4
3. | Kéxaupdov _ kexduprwy Subjunctive.

P. 1. | Kexduueda Kexaupevos @
2. | xékappde Kéxaupre
3. | -Kexaupévor cicl(v) | Kexdup&woay, or Kexduprov]

Verbal adjective: xaumméds, -h, -dv, kaurréos, -réa, -réov.

§ 147. B. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Kappa-
mute (y, K, x).

(a) Pure Characteristic, y, «, x. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and
Impf., oo, Att. rr, rarer ¢

TAEK-w, to weave. Fut. -Ee. tioow, Att. Tartw, to arrange.
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. WAEK-w wAEK-OMeL Tdoo-w Tdoo-omat
Perf. (mé-mA€K-&) (wé-wAeK-ar) (ré.1a7y-a)
Wé-TAEX-G mé-mwArey-pat Té-rax-a | Té-Tarywat
Fut. | (wAéx-ow) rAdE@ mrAcoua | (rdy-0w) Tako Tdkopat
Pr. me-mA€Eouat Te-Tdtouat
PASSIVE.
Aor.I.| (é-2Aék-Snv) é-wA€x-Snv (€-rdy-Snv) é-tdx-Snv
Fat. I. TAEX-Ihoopat TAX-Ihoroua
A. IL. é-rwAdK-ny and é-mAdk-nv e-rdy-nv
F. IL TAak-hoouat * Tay-hoowct
Verbal adjective: wAexrds, -4, -dv; mAex-réos, -réa, -réov ; tTaxTds, TaxTéos.

178 PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS.
Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass.
Tucow, to arrange, and optyyw (§ 144, Rem. 3), to bind.
Ind. 8. 1. | rérayycu Eopvypat Imperative.
2. | rérata erpuyéau rérato éopuyto
3. | réraxTat Exprynrat TéTAXIw eopliyxsw
D. 1. | rerdypedov éoplypexov
2. | réraxdov erpryxsov TéTaxsov eopryxsov ~
3. | réraxSov éxpryxvov TETAXIOYV eoplyxswv
P. 1. | rerdypedsa éeoplypedsa
2. | réraxse éopryxde TérTaxve eopryxde
3. | reraypéva ciol(v),| éoprypéva ciol(v) | rerdxSwoar,| éoplyxSwoay,
or TeTdxaTou or TeTdxSwyr | or éopiyxdov
Inf. rerdxSat éoplyxSa Part. retaypévos éeapiypévos.

Remark. The student will observe particularly the changes which take
place in the inflection of the Perf. Pass. of these verbs: rérpiu-uas (instead of
TérpiB-uat), 8 before x being changed into uw; rérpubau (instead of rérpim-caz),
x and o forming ~; rérpir-ra, the characteristic w remaining unchanged ;
rérpip-Sov (instead of rérpir-Sov), the characteristic x being changed into ¢, to
be of the same order as the & following (§ 17, 2); so others similar. In like
manner, rérayyat: Térata (instead of réray-ca), y and o forming {; réraxrau
(instead of rérayra:), y being changed into x, to be of the same order as the
7 following ; réraxSov (instead of téraySov), y being changed to correspond

with 8.

=

§ 148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau-

(a) Pure Characteristic, 5, 7, 3.

mute (8,7, +).

(b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and Impf,
G rarer oo. — Fut. ow.

ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres. Wevd-w, Wevd-ouct, ppdc-w. ppd¢-oua,
to deceive. to lie. to say, to think,
Impf. é-evd-oy é-Wevd-dunv 2-ppal-ov é-ppat-duny
Perf. (é-evd-Ka) (&-Wevd-you (wé-ppad-na) | (wé-ppad-pat)
é-peu-Ka éPevo-wat mwé-ppa-Ka mé-ppac-mat
Plup. é-ed-Kew é-Veto-pny é-me-ppa-Kely | é-1re-ppdo-unv
Fut. (Wevd-ow) (pev5-copat) (ppd5-ow) (ppd5-copat)
Webo-w Peb-comat ppa-ow opd-comat
Aor. I. é-Pev-oa é-Pev-odunv e-ppi-oa é-ppa-odunv
F. Pf. é-Pet-comat me-ppd-couat
PASSIVE.
Aor. I. | (é-edtd-Snv) e-ebto-Anv (é-ppdd-Snv) é-ppdo-Snv
Fut. L Wevo-Shoouat ppac-Shoopat
Verbal Adj.: (Pevd-réos) Pevo-réos, -réa, -réov ; ppao-réos, -réa, -Téov.

§149.] FoRMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 179

Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass.
Ind. 8. 1. | Abevo-pau Imperative. Infinitive.
2. | Hhev-oa epev-oo e-Pedo-Sau
D “ toe i at Participle
Vk pevo-edov ” eh RAS
2. Sjev-cS0v efpev-oSov | epeuo-nevos, -m, -oy
P Redorast dfet-oihen | Subjunctive
ode VEVT-LE 2
2, | Bev-ode tev-oSe epevo-pevos &,
3. | ebevo-pévor elol(v) | efed-cSwoar, or eed-cSwr]

REMARK. dé(w, to save, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. céow-ya from céw
(Attic), and céowopuat, but Aor. éowSny, verbal Adj. cworéos.

§ 149. FoRMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQuID VERBS.

1. Liquid verbs (§ 127, II. B.) form the Fut. Act. and
Mid. and the first Aor. Act. and Mid. without the tense-
characteristic o (§ 20, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense-
characteristic x, e. g.

opdddw (stem S6AA), Fut. cpar-d, first Aor. @opnd-a, Perf. &-opar-xa.

Remark 1. The endings of the Fut. in liquid verbs, namely, -@, -odua, are
formed by contraction from -éow, -écoua: after the rejection of o (§ 20,3). The
inflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -éw in the
Pres. Act. and Mid.: piA-@, piA-otpar (§ 135); o is omitted in the Fut. of liquid
verbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of that letter with
the preceding liquid. The Fut. Perf. is wanting in liquid-verbs.

2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception
of a few whose stem-vowel is ¢, is strengthened, either by
doubling the characteristic A, or by inserting the liquid v
after the characteristic; also, by lengthening the short stem-
vowel, as in all verbs in -év@, -vvw, -vpw, or by changing it
into a diphthong (§ 16, 3), e. g. cpad-r-w, Téu-v-w, Kpiv-o,
dpiv-o, Ktelv-o, paiv-w (stems YSAA, TEM, KPIN(i),
"AMTN(i), KTEN, GAN); but pév-o, véu-w with a pure
stem.

3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from
the pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened
in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. ofarr-@
(Y@AA), Fut. opar-&, second Aor. Pass. é-cdddr-ny, first
Perf. Act. é-cpad-xa, first Aor. Act. &ognd-a. The second
Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely at all in

180 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. [§ 149.

prose; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass. is more in use
than the first Aor.; the first Aor. is wholly wanting in many
verbs. |

4, In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the
ground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case
of mute verbs, from the second Aor., but from the Fut., ©
since only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act. —
and Mid. |

5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as
the stem-vowel of the Fut. is @, e, ¢, or v before the ending -.
In the first Aor. Act. and Mid. @ is lengthened into y, e into
et, t into 7, v into v (§ 16, 3). Thus: —

I. Class with & in the Future.

Pres. Fut. Aor.
opdrr-w, to deceive, THEA-O . é-opna-a
xduy-w, to labor, K&pm-oDmaL wanting
texpalp-w, to point out, TEKLGP-@ é-7 éxunp-a
galy-w, to show, pav-d &-pnv-a.

II. Class with e in the Future.
pév-w, to remain, pev-@ 2-weww-a
GyyéAA-w, to announce, ayyeaA-@ ty yeir-a
Téuy-w, to cut, TEUL-@ wanting
véu-w, to divide, Veu-@ -vetp-a
xtelv-w, to kill, KTEV-@ é-nTEWw-a
inelp-w, to desire, iwep-@ Ywerp-a
Ill. Class with t inthe Future.
TlAd-w, to pluck, TiA-@ . é-TiA-a
Kplv-w, to separate, Kpiv-@ é-Kpiv-a.
IV. Class with ¢ in the Future.
avp-w, to draw, cip-@ . &ovp-a
dpidv-w, to defend, & miv-@ Huiv-a.

Rem. 2. The following verbs in -awvw of the first class take @ in the Aor.
instead of 7, namely, icxvalyw, to make emaciated (toxvava, irxvava) ; Kepdalvw,
to gain (€xépdava, Kepdavar) ; KotAatvw, to hollow out (éxolrava, koiAavan) ; Aevealyeo,
to whiten; dpyatyw, to enrage; memalvw, to ripen; also all verbs in -paive, e. g.
nepalvw, Fut. repav@, Aor. érépava, Inf. repavas (except Tetpaive, to bore, érérpy-
va, TeTphvat), and all in -1alyw, e. g. matvw, to make fat, émiava, midvar (except
-pralve, to stain, urjva, rarely widvar).— The verbs onualyw, to give a signal, and
Kaxalpw, to purify, have both onujya (which is usual among the Attic writers),
kKaxhpa, and onuavat, Kadapa. Also aipw, to raise, and &dAopat, to leap, are
formed with a: dpat, éAacSa, but in the Ind. the a is changed into y on account
of the augment, e. g. jjpa, jAduny (second Aor. jAduny is not used in the Ind.
and very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on a, § 16, 7 (a).

§149.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID vERBS. . 181

6. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v
(according to § 19, 3), must end in ~yxa, e. g. weulay-xa,
Plut. (from pvaivw instead of pe-piav-xa), répayxa, Dinarch.
(from daivw), mapwfvyxa, Polyb. (from wapofive, to excite).
But the form in -y«a is found only among later writers. The
best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the
v, &. g. Kéxpixa, Kéxdixa from Kpive, Krivw (so also Kexépdaxa,
among later writers, also xexépdayxa, but Kxexépdnxa, Dem.
56, 30. from xepdaivw) ; or also, as in xreivw, by using the
form of the second Perf., e. g. améxrova, in the sense of the
first Perf. (écrayxa, éxtaxa, from the time of Maenander),
or, as in the case of verbs in -évw, by not forming any Perf,,
as, e. g. in pévo, by forming it from a new theme, as pepé-
vnxa from MENEND.

7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v
drop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but
also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. and in the first
Aor. Pass, :—
kpivw, to separate, Kékpixa xéxpiuae éxptdny

xatvw, to bend down, nékrAika KékAtwour exartSny (the 2d Aor. éxAivnr is rare),
tAtvw, to wash, (wérAtna) mémAvpuas érAVSnv (Hippoc.)

Rem. 3. Telvw, to stretch, and xrelvw, to kill, form the above-mentioned tenses
from new themes, viz. TAN, KTANQ, KTAQ, thus: —

TérdKa Térdéuon erasny

%icrixa (and &erayka) Exrdpar extdiSny (eerdvSnv among the later writers) ;
yet the forms of «refyw here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers use
%xrova as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of raya: and éxrddny, sub-
stitute réSvnxa and aréSavoy in passive phrases with imé and the Gen., or
avyipnuce and avypésny, without a preposition.

Rasa! 4. Kplyw, cAtvw, radvw, and xrelyw, among the poets, often retain v in
the first Aor. Pass. according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. ékAlvdny,
érAivany; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet carexAlvSy is found in
X. Hell. 4. 1, 30, in all the copies.

8. On the formation of the Perf. Mid., the following
points should be noted: —

Verbs in -alvw and éivw, usually drop the vy before the endings beginning with
#, and insert o to strengthen the syllable, e. g. paly-w wépa-o-par Te-pd-o-peda;
ipalvw bpacuar; wepalyw weudparuau (Luc.); onpalyw ceohpacwat; wepalvw wemé-
pacua; palyw eppacuar; waxtvw wemdxvopa; Hdvvw HSvopar; Aewruvw AeAe-
Toya; dtive Stvopa; Sndtvw reSXhavoepa: (Luc.); malyw rerlaowas; Tpaxbvw

16 :

182 PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. [$ 150.

rerpaxvowo (Luc.); Avualvouat AcAvuacuévor eiol(v); pualyw peulaoua; but
some verbs of this kind assimilate the vy to the following yp, e. g. Enpalv-w,
ethpay-wat instead of é&fpay-uat (also é&hpacuat), mapotive, mapdtuumar, aicxby-w
Hoxvppa (Homer); a very few verbs drop vy among the later writers, without
substituting a strengthening «; the vowel, however, is made long, e. g. rpaxtv-«,
to make rough, re-rpdxi-yar also rerpdxvopo and terpdxvuuat. It is evident that
in the personal-endings, except those beginning with uw, the v remains, e. g.
mépac-ua, Tépay-cat, mé-paytat, ekhpap-wat, -avoat, -ayTal, oXvumat, -vvoat,
~vyTat, -Uu-wedov (see paly-w and gnpalyw, § 151); still, it is to be noted that the
form of the second Pers. Sing., in -yoa:, is rare; instead of it the Part. with
ef is used, e. g. wepacuévos el, etc.

Rem. 5. On the omission of o in endings beginning with o%, see § 25, 3;
on the variable a, in the first Perf. Act. and Mid. and in the first Aor. Pass., and
also in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and the
stem-vowel e, see § 140, 3; on the Perf. of dyefpw, and éyelpw with Att. Redup.,
see § 124, 2 (b). ;

9. In the second Perf. (which, however, belongs only to
a few verbs) the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is
lengthened, as in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with e
in the Fut., which take the variable o (§ 140, 4), e. g. gaiv-a,
first Aor. é-nv-a, second Perf. é-dnv-a; but o7eip-o, Fut.
omep-@, second Perf. é-c7rop-a.

Rem. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. ¢BdAor,
eBarsuny, exavoy, érrdpoy (doubtful in prose) from BdAAw, kalyw, wralpw, Krel-
yw; Aorists are also formed from some irregular verbs ; a few verbs, also, have

a second Aor. Pass., e. g. those with monosyllabic stems, as dépw, éddpny, pael-
pw, oTEAAAW, halyw, palyw, KAlvw, etc.

§ 150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs.

ayyéAAw, to announce.

ACTIVE.
Pres. ayyéAAw Perf. I. Hyyed-ca Perf. II. @-pSop-a, perdidi, from pSelp-w
Fut. Ind. | S. 1. | ayyea-a Opt. d&yyeAotut or ayyeAolny
2. | &yyer-els ryyeAots dyyerolns
3. | &yyeA-et aryyedot © Geyyeroln
D. 2. | deyyeA-e?rov dryyeAotrov © &yyerotnrov
3. | &yyeA-etrov _— beyryedolrny © dyryeAornrny
P. 1. | dyyeA-otpev aryyeAotwev GeyyeAolnuev
2. | aryyeA-eire ayyeAorTe “ Gyyerolnre
3. | &yyeA-odor(v) ayyeAotev GryyeAoiey
“Inf. dyyeacty Part. ayyeAGv, -odoa, -ody
Aor. I, iryyerr-a, aryyetrAw, ayyelAamt, Byyeidov, ayyeiAa, ayyelAas
Aor. II. | Ind. #yyed-ov Subj. ayyéAw Opt. dyyéAoms Imp. &yyere
(rare) Inf. @yyerciv Part. dyyerdy, -otoa, -dv.

PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS.

183

MIDDLE.
Perf. Ind. | S. 1. ; HyyeA-wae Imperative. Infinitive.
2. | Hyyed-oa iyryyer-o0 AyyeaA-Sat
3. | HryyeA-rat Hyyer-so Participle.
D. 1. | aryyéA-Medov AY YeA-Mevos
2. | HyyeA-Sov iyyyed-Sov Subjunctive.
3. | HyyeA-Dov nyyeA-sev Ayyedr-pévos &
P. 1. | ayyéA-peda
2. | Hyyed-de iyryyer-de
3. | iryyea-mévor elol(v) | iryyéASwoar, or fryyéA-dav]
Plup. Ind. | jyyéa-uny, -00, -To, -weSor, -Sov, -Inv, -meda, Be, HyyeAuevar Foav
Fut. Ind. | S. 1. | &yyeA-odmar Opt. a&yyedr-oluny Infinitive.
2. | &yyeA-f, or -e? dryyeA-070 ayyer-eto dat
3. | ayyea-etrat ay yeA-00To Participle.
D. 1. | dyyeA-odpedov dryyeA-oluedov | dyyeA-obmevos
2. | &yyeA-eioSov dyyeA-oto Sov
3. | dyyeA-etodov ayyed-oladny
P. 1. | dyyedA-otpeda ayyer-olueda
2. | ayyeA-ciode ayyer-otose
3. | GyyeA-obvTaL &yyeA-otvTo
Aor I. | Ind. jyyetA-duny, ete.
Aor. Il. | Ind. iyyyea-dunv Subj. ayyéA-wuar = Opt. ayyed-olunvy Imp.
(rare) ayyed-od = Inf. dyyeA-€oSa Part. ayyear-duevos.
Verbal adjective : ayyeA-réos, -réa, -réov.

§ 151. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the
stem-vowel of the Future.

(a) with & in the Future: opdaAdw, fallo; palyw, to show, Mid.
to appear.

ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. | MIDDLE.

Pres. opdrArA-w opddrAA-omat galy-w galy-omat
Perf. I. | &@ogar-xa é-opar-mat (wé-pary-Ka) mé-pac-pat
Perf. I. mé-pny-a, I appear,
Fut. THGA-G, eis, et} gTparoduat pav-@ | piv-ovuat !
Aor. I. | &opna-a wanting &-pnv-a e-pnv-dunv*

1 I shall appear, &rog., I shall affirm. * Prose amweo., it was affirmed by me.
: PASSIVE.
Aor. I. | @opda-Sny (poet.) é-pdv-Snv, I appeared,
Fat. I. | opadr-Shooua (poet.) pav-Shoo ore
Aor. II. | é-opéaa-ny é-piy-nv, Tapers

Fat. IL. | opta-joopat

Verbal adjective: oad-réos, -réa, -réov, pav-réos.

pav-hooua, [ will appear.

184

PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS.

[§§ 152, 153.

Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. of
gpaly-w, to show; Enpatv-w, to dry, and 7 efy-w (§ 149, Rem. 3), to stretch.

Ind. §. I. { ré-ao-wat e-Enpap-mat TE-TO- Mat
2. | wé-pav-oa é€-Ejjpav-oat Té-TG-oat
3. | wé-pav-ra é-Efpay-Tat Té-TE-TaAL
D. 1. | we-pdo-peSov é-Enpdu-medov Te-Td-WEsov
2. | wé-pay-Sov €-E/pay-Sov Té-Ta-TSOV
3. | wé-pay-Sov é-ijjpay-Sov TE-TA-TSOV
P. 1. | we-pdo-peda é-Enpdu-meda TE-TU-MEda,
2. | wé-par-de é-Etjpay-se Té-Ta-o9€
3. | we-pac-pévot eioi(v) é-Enpay-wevat elal(v) | ré-ra-vrau
Imp. 8. 2. |(7é-pav-co) (é-Ehpav-co) Té TU-00
3. | we-pdy-Sw é-Enpdv-Sw TET TSW
D. 2. | répay-Sov é-Ehpay-Sov Té-Ta-TX0V
3. | we-pdy-Sov é-inpdy-Swv TE-Th-TR WV
P. 2. | wé-pav-Se é-ihpay-Se Té-TA-ONE
3. | we-pdv-Swoay, OF é-Enpdy-Swoay, Or Te-Td-TNwWOAY, OF
Te-pdy-Swy é-Enpdy-Swv TE-TE-ORWV
Inf. mwe-pdy-Sat é-Enpdy-Sat TE-Td-ONAL
Part Te-pao-wéevos é-Enpap-pwévos T€-TG-LEVOS

§ 152. (b) with e in the Future: ‘veip-w (Ion. and Poet.), to
desire, and otréAdao, to send.

ACTIVE.

ACTIVE. | MIDDLE. MIDDLE.
Pres. iuelp-w inelp-omas oTEAA-w oT éAA-OMaut
Perf. I. | quep-ra Yuep-mau €-oTaA-Ka é-0TaA-pat
Fut. imep-@ iwep-odmat OTEA-@ OTEA-OUMAL
Aor. I. | {ueip-a | iwerp-dunv €-oT€lA-a é-oretA-dunv

PASSIVE.

Aor. I. | iuép-Snv é-oTdA-Onv A. IL. é-oraa-ny
Fut. I. | iuep-Shoopct OTAA-Ihor omar F.IL orda-hooua

Verbal Adj. ivep-rés, -h,
Remarx. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. is like #yyeA-uat.

-dv, iwep-Téos, -Téa, -Téov, GTAA-TOS, TTAA-TéOS.

§.153.(c) With ? and # in the Future.
(a) tlAA-w, to pluck; cipw, to draw; pordjdty-w, to defile.

Pres.
Perf.

Fut.

Aor. I.
Ana P.
LP:

TIAA-w

TiAA-opeut
TE-TIA-KO. o
Té-TIA-pad o

TIA-@ TIA-oDmat
@-Tid-a €-TiA-dunv

é-rlA-Snv

TIA-I} Toma

Aor. II. and Fut. II. P. é-ciip-nv, ctp-hoopat

oup-w
oUp-omat
€-oup-Ka
é-cup-wat
cip-@ cip-ovpat
é-cip-a é-cip-dunv
é-op-Snv
cup-Ihcouat

MoAUy-w

MoAvv-omat
(me-pdavy-Ka)
pe-pdAvo-pat

MoAty-@ pmoAty-ovuau
é-udrdv-a é-moAdy-duny
é-worvy-Sny

MoAuY-Ahoomat

REMARK 1.

Verbal Adj. riA-rés, T1A-ré0s, cup-rds, ovp-Téos, woAvy-Tds, MoAvY-Téos.

The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. of 7é-riA-wai, o€-cvp-
pat, is like #yyeA-wat, and that of we-udavo-uat like wé-pac-nat, that of Foxup-
pat (from aicxvv-w, to shame), like é-thpap-you.

§ 154.] PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 186

_(B) Katv-w, to bend down ; mriv-w, to wash, with v dropped (§ 149, 7).

ACTIVE. MIDDLE. | ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
‘| Pres. KAly-@ kAly-omat wrbv-w TADY-omat
Perf. | xé«Ai-ra Ké-KAI-pat wé-wAb-Ka mé-wAU-wat
Fut. KAly-@ KAiv-ovjmat wriv-@ wriv-oUmaL
Aor. I. | &«Aiv-a é-KAiv-dunv é-rAdv-a é-mAdy-dunv
PASSIVE.

Aor. I. | &«alsnv Fut. I. wa-Sqoowa | €-TAD-Sqv —- TAD-Shoouat
Aor. IL. | é«aty-nv Fut. IL. xAiv-hoouas

Verbal Adj. KAu-rés, -h, -dv, KAt-réos, -Téa, -Téoy, wAu-Tds, TAU-Téos.

Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. xé-«Ai-war and’ ré-rAi-
pas is like ré-rd-uar, and corresponds with that of pure verbs.

§154. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of
single Verbs, both Pure and Impure.

1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle
form, e. g, dxovw, I hear, Fut. dxovcoua, I shall hear, Aor. jxovea,
Iheard. See § 198.

2. The following verbs in -afw or -aw and -éw, whose stem
ended originally in -av! and -e (aF, «F), resume the v in the
Aorist and Future (§ 25, 2) :—

kalw (old Attic caw seldom, and without contraction), to burn, Fut. katow; Aor.
éxavoa; Perf. xéxavea; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xéxavyor; Aor. Pass. éxaddnv;
Fut. Pass. cavdhoowa; verbal Adj. kavoréos, kavords, kavtés; but second
Aor. Act. éxény, I burned, Intrans., in the Ion. and later writers.

KAalw («Adw seldom, and without contraction), to weep, kAatooun or KAavooduat
(No. 3), «Aateow late ; first Aor. Act. Aavoa, etc.; Perf. Pass. céeAavpat;
Aor. Pass. éxAatoSny late. See § 166, 18. .

Séw, to run, Fut. Sevoouat or Seveodua (No. 3), Sevow late; the other tenses
are wanting. See rpéxw, § 167, 5.

véw, to swim, Fut. vebooua or vevoodua (No.3); Aor. fvevoa; Perf. vévevxa.

mréw, to sail, Fut. rredoouat, usually rAevootucu (No. 3); Aor. @rAevoa; Perf.
méwAcuka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rémAevoua; Aor. Pass. éraedadqv; verbal
Adj. mAevoréos.

‘The vin the Fut. of these verbs is occasioned by the reappearance of the
Digamma (F’) softened into the vowel v. The Digamma would regularly
stand in the Pres. before the personal-ending , but is omitted where it comes
between two vowels; it appears, however, in the Fut., as it there stands before
the consonant . This is analogous to the disappearance, in the Pres., of some
aspirate, perhaps h (comp. veho), in the Latin verbs fluo, struo, and the reap-
pearance of the same in the Perf. before s, with which it combines and forms z.

16*

186 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [§ 154.)

mvéw, to blow, Fut. mvebooua or mvevoodua (No. 3); Aor. érvevoa; Perf.)
némvevka; late Fut. rvedow, and Aor. Pass. érvedodyv.
péw, to flow, Fut. petcoua; Aor. %pevoa; both forms extremely rare in the |
Attic, which uses instead of them pujooua, éppiny (§ 192, 7), and so also”
the Perf. é65vnxa.

Remark 1. The verb xéw (xéFw, xevw), to pour out, differs from the pre- —
ceding verbs: Fut. xéw; Fut. Mid. xéoua (see No. 4); Aor. %xea, Subj. xéw,
Inf. xéa:, Imp. xéov, xedrw, etc; Aor. Mid. éxeduny (see No. 7); Perf. Act.
xéxixa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. TANG Aor. Pass. éxvnv; Fut. Perf. xudjcomat H
(§ 223, R. 2). The forms with ev belong only to the Epic; Fut. xedw; Aor. ;
exeva. ;

3. The circumflexed Fut. in -odua: which properly belongs to
liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric writers with other verbs
also, whose Future would regularly be in -ow or -copar, e. g.
Tv, -€is, -€i, -oper, -€ire, -odvTaL; TUWoduat, etc.; this is called the
Doric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet
only in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut.
Act.: —

gevy-w, to flee, Fut. pevtodua and pevéoucs
mal¢(-w, to sport, “ motodua “ mattouc
x€¢-w, alvum exonerare, “« XEvoUpat

mlrr-w, to fall, “ mecodpa (TIETQ)

muvedvoum, to inquire, mevoovuat, usually revoouat,
and also in those mentioned under No. 2: kAaiw, rAdw, mvéw, véw,
séw.

4, Future without the tense-characteristic. The Fut. of the
following verbs, being without the Fut. characteristic o, and
having the inflection of the Present, takes entirely the form of
a Present, viz. :—

%-«, Epic, usually éoStw, to eat, Fut, %-oua; rly-w (MQ), to drink, Fut. af-

opat; xéw, to pour out, Fut. xéw, xeis, xe7, etc.; Fut. Mid. xéoua (see Rem. 1).

5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs
in -odpoar Without o:—
pax-ouat, to fight, Fut. wax-oduc (formed from the Ion. pax-éoopat).
e(ouct (“EAQ), to sit, Fut. (-oduc) raded-odua.
6. The Fut. Perf. of the following verbs has an Act. form:—
SvicKe, to die, Perf. +éS3vnxa, Iam dead, Fut. Perf. reSvitw or -toucn, I shall

be dead ;
torn, to station, Pcif. tryna, I stand, Fut. Perf. éorhtw or -toua, I shall

§ 155.] VERBS. — SYNCOPE. 187

stand. ‘Eorhtw and redvftw are old Attic; éorftoucn and redvftoua are
only in the Attic, X. Cy. 6. 2, 17.

7. The three following verbs, ta not liquid, form the
first Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., without
the tense-characteristic a: —

eimeiy (second Aor.), to say, first Aor. eln-a; pépw ("ETKQ), to bear, first Aor.
iiveyx-a (second Aor. jveyxov) ; xéw, Exea (see Rem. 1).

Rem. 2. In the second Aor. recoy, from MET-w (rlrr-w), to fall, the o is
not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the r having here been
changed into o (Dor. érerov). The first Aor. éreca, is late; in Eurip. Alc. 471
and Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed.

8. The following pure and impure verbs form the Perf. Subj.
and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass. without the aid of the auxiliary
eiut; the impure verbs by assuming an « as their characteristic
in forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : —

nt d-onat, I obtain, Perf. néernucu, I possess, Subj. rext@ua, -f, -jra; Plup.
éxexthuny, I possessed, Opt. nextyuny, KextTijo, KexTHT0 OY KexTPuny, -Go,
-@TO0.

inyhaoKw (MNAQ), to remind, Perf. uduynuct, I remember, Subj. peuvGpat, -7,
Ara; Plup. eueuvhuny, Opt. neurriuny, -fo, -fiTo or weuvgeuny, -Go, -@ro, and
in X. An. 1. 7, 5. wéuvoio (in all the MSS.).

BddAa, to throw (BAA), Perf. BéBAnua, second Pers. Pl. Perf. Subj. d:aBe-
BaAjjose, Andoc. p. 22. § 24.

Karéo, to name, Perf. eéeAnua, Tam named; Plup. éxexAtjuny, Opt. cexarjunr,
“fo, -fiTo.

Rem. 3. é«retujodxov may be found in Pl. Rp. 564, c; at present, however,
the right reading is éxretuhoecdor, according to most MSS.

§ 155. Syncope.

1. A few verbs, in some forms, suffer Syncope (§ 16, 8).
E. g. the following words in prose :—

mérouat, to fly, Aor. éxréuny, mréoda:, Fut. rrfooua (€ syncopated).

eyelpw, to wake, second Aor. irypéuny (also the Inf. %ypeoSa with the accent
of the Pres.), I awoke (iryépSnv, I was awake), (e or « syncopated.)

épxouat, to go, second Aor. #ASov, Inf. éASeiv, etc., from "EAET@Q (v synco-
pated), (§ 167, 2.)

oluat, to suppose, instead of ofouat, dunv instead of @dunv.

188 | | VERBS. — METATHESIS. {§ 156.

2. This Syncope occurs most ieeaenaly after the redu-
plication ; thus, e. g.

a. In the Present:
ylyvoua, to become, instead of yi-yévoum, stem TENN.
pluyw, to remain, Poet., instead of pi-névo.
mintw, to fall, instead of m-mrérw, stem TIETO.
mmpdoxw from mepdw.

b. In the Perfect:
merdvvigt, to spread out, wémréua; mérrwxa (from METQ), to fall.

§ 156. Metathesis.

1. Metathesis (§ 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses
of several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first
Aor. Pass., and first Fut. Pass. (seldom in the second Aor.
Act.), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an
easier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake
of making a syllable long by position.

2. In the Common language, the following verbs are
subject to Metathesis :—

BddAAw, to throw, Fut. Bar@ (BarddAhow, Aristoph. Vesp. 222); Aor. €8aAov;
Aor. Mid. éBaéasunv; BAA: Perf. BéBAnka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. B€BAn-
peat; Aor. Pass. €BAASnv; Fut. Pass. BAndjooua; Fut. Perf. BeBajooua.

Saudw, usually daud(w, to tame, Fut. dapiiow; Aor. edduaca; AMA:, Perf. 5€5-
BIKA; Perf. Mid. or Pass. $€3unuar; Aor. Pass. €5undny, eddunv.

déuw, to build (mostly Poet. and Ion.); Aor. Act. %eiua; Aor. Mid. éeimdunv;
AME: Perf. 5é€3unka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 5€5unpat.

SvnjoKe, to die, Aor. dréSavov; Perf. réSvynka.

Spéonw, to leap, Aor. ZSopov.

Kadéw, to call (Poet. rixAhon, like Svhoxw), Fut. nar@; Perf. xéxaAnka

kdpuve, laboro, Aor. geapov; Perf. réx una.

TKEAAwW, oKeAéw, to make dry, second Aor. @cxAnyv; Perf. €oxAnna; Fut.
TKAnTOMAL

Téuvw, to cut; Aor. @reuov; Perf. rét una.

rahoopwat, Iwill bear; Aor.@rAnv; Perf. rérAnxa, from the stem TAAA.

Remark. When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel trans-

posed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel; (a) In inflection: —
kepd-vvupt (Poet. xepd-w), to mingle ; Fut. ceptiow ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. « éxpa-
pot instead of xe-xpéa-uar; Aor. Pass. éxpadny.

wimpdane, to sell (instead of mimepdoxw, mumpedoxw), from mepdw (hence Fut.

$$ 157, 1581 VERBS IN’-@ WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 189

-

mepiow) : Perf. wémpana, wémpaua.; Aor. Pass. érpadnv; Fut. Perf.
mem pdgouat

oropé-vviuu, to strow; secondary form ¢rpévvime (instead of orpedvyums) ;
Fut.orpéaw; Aor. tctpwoa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. €or pwuas; Aor.
Pass. oT podnv.

meAd(w, appropinquo, to bring to, weAdSw, TAGS w; Aor. Pass. éweAdodny;
Poet. Att. €mA&Snv; second Aor. Att. €rAdunv; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
Att. réwAGuat

(b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb Sparra, to disturb (formed

from rapdrtw, tpadrtw), an Attic form of tapdoow; Aor. &Spata.

§157. Verbs in -w with the Stem of the Present
strengthened.

1. It has already been seen (§f 138-140), that the stem of
many verbs is strengthened in the Present; but this strength-
ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the
modes of strengthening already mentioned, by r (zr, xr), (oo,
é), and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are others, which

- will now be specified.

Remark. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the
tenses in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M.,
signify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive (§ 102,3). The mus, placed
in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con-
jugation in -ys, to be treated below. See § 191.

§158. I. Verbs,whose Pure Stemis strengthened in the
Pres.and Impf. by inserting v before the ending.

PRELIMINARY REMARK. Balyw lengthens the stem-vowel a into a; éAatvw,
a into av; ddvw and ive, t and { into 6 and i.

1. Batva, to go (BA-), Fut. Byoowor; Perf. BéBnxa (§ 194, 2);
second Aor. €Byv (u,§ 191); the Pass. oceurs in compounds,
e. g. dvaBaivopa, dvaBéBino, tapaBeBipa, dveBadnv, tapeBadyv
[§§ 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, Bards, Baréos.

Remark. First Aor. Act. %8yoa, and Fut. Show, are transitive, J brought,
will bring, and belong only to the poetic, Ionic, and later writers.

2. dvve, to go in, to go under, to put on. The unstrengthened
verb dvw (xarediw) has in the Pres., in the Fut dow and first
Aor. Act. édica, a transitive signification, to wrap up, to immerse,

190 VERBS IN -w WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [} 158.

to simmk; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, daodédvcey;) Aor.
Pass. €09nv; Fut. Pass. dvdjoouae [§ 130 (b),2]. But the Mid.
- Sopa, S8tpar, Sicopa, dtoduyy, signifies to wrap up one’s self, to ©
go into, or under, to clothe one’s self; likewise the Perf. Sé30xa_ :
and the Aor. édvy (mw, § 191), have an intransitive signification, — :
like dvoua. Verbal adjectives, dtrds, duréos.

3. ehatve, to drive (secondary form édG, -ds, etc. poetic, yet —
also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. dréAa, Imp.) ; Fut. édacw (in later writers, ©
though also X. An. 7. 7, 55. €Adcovras), commonly Att. €A, -ds,
-g, Inf. édav (§ 117); Aor. jAdoa; Perf. é\ydixa; Mid. to drive —
Srom me, Aor. jAacdynv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eAnAdpar; Inf. édy-
AdoIoa [§ 124, 2 (a)]; Aor. Pass. 7AaInv [& in the tense-forma-
tion, § 130 (c); without o, § 131, 5].— Verbal adjectives, éAards,
eAaréos (X. Hipparch. 2, 7).

4. Sivw and Siw (poet.), to rage, Fut. Siow, ete.; second Aor. Part. Sduevos
(us), raging.

5. wivw, to drink, Fut. iowa (§ 154, 4), among the later
writers zutdpa, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. wuetoJe; second Aor.
értov, Inf. ety, Part. auiv, Imp. wid (§ 191), poet., and seldom
prose wie; ILO- Perf. rémwxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. wéroya; Aor.
Pass. érdJynv, Fut. Pass. rodjoopo [$$ 130 (ce), and 131, 5].
Verbal adjectives, words, zoréos.

6. tive, to pay, to expiate, Fut. tiow; Aor. érioa; Perf. Act.
rérixa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rérucpa, Aor. Pass. érioSnv (§ 131).
Mid. rivopa, to get pay from, to avenge, to punish, ticopa, éricd-
pyv. Verbal Adj. rueréov. In the Pres. and Impf. the penult is
long in Epic, short in Attic; in the other tenses, it is long in all
the poets.

led
A

Tiw, to honor, ricw, @rioa, tTériwat, Poet.

7. dIave, to anticipate, Fut. dIjcopou, more rarely PIacw, e. g.
X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. é69aea, and (in prose more
seldom) second Aor. ébIyv (us, § 191); Perf ép3axa. In Pres,
and Impf. a in Epic, & in Attic.

8. pSivw (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. Pl. Phaedr. 246, c.
Symp 211, a. ), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. pStow and Aor. &pSioa, trans.

to consume. —Intrans., Fut. pSicoua; Perf. €pSiva, &pSwra; Plup. and second
Aor. é¢Siunv, Subj. oSlwya, Opt. pStunv, pSiro, Imp. Pdicdw, Inf. pSicdsat,

oe ”

§ 159.] VERBS IN -@ WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 191

Part. @Siuevos, e. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. rots pSmévors, the dead (mu, § 192). Verbal
adjective, psirds.

Here belong also three sect whose pure stem ends with a consonant: —

9. daxvw, to bite, Aor. &dxov; Fut. dygouar (late dyéw); Perf.
Aor. dé3nxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dédyyyar; Aor. Mid. eygédunv
(Hippoc.); Aor. Pass. éd7yInv; Fut. Pass. dyxIjcopa. —

10. xdpvw, to labor, to be weary, Aor. &ipov; Fut. xapodpar;
Perf. xéxuyxa (§ 156, 2).

11. réuvw, to cut, Fut. reuo; Aor. ereuov (eraémov, § 140, 2);
Perf. rérynxa (§ 156, 2); Mid. to cut for one’s self (something) ;
Aor. Mid. éreyouyv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rérynpor (Subj. réruno-
Jov, § 154, Rem. 3); Aor. Pass. érynInv; Fut. Perf. rerunoopa.
Verbal Adj. tunrds, tynréos.

§ 159. IL Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in
the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable ve
before the ending.

1. Bi-véw, to stop up, Fut. Biow; Aor. Bioa; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
BéBvopar; Aor. Mid. ¢Bicdyyv; Aor. Pass. €BvoInv (§ 131).

Pres. Biw, not used by the Attic writers. .

2. ix-véouat (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5,
40. Pl. Phaedr. 276, d., the compound being generally used
instead of it), ddixvéopas, to come, Fut. adigouor; Aor. adixouny,
adixéota; Perf. ddtypar, adiyIa; Plup. ddiypyy, adixro. Verb.
Adj. ixrés.

3. Kvv-éw, to kiss, Fut. cnvow: Aor. &ioa [§ 130 (b)]. But zpos-
Kuvéw, to worship, Fut. mposxujow; Aor. mposexivyoa (also poetic
aposéxvaa, Inf. rposkicat).

4. trwx-véopat (iriox-opat Ion.), strengthened form of iméxopat,
| properly, to hold one’s se yf under, to prognse, Aor. iisbaiis ines Imp.
trécxov; but Fut. trocxyjcopar; Perf. tréoynua.* So, SpA XO
"pat OF dyréxopan, to clothe (from 4 dyaréxer, to surround ), Impf. ayarei-

x, Fut. dudéw, Aor. ipariaxov, dpriurxev, Fut. dudéfouor; Aor.
hprurxopny and jyrerxdunv (§ 126, 1).

192 , . VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§ 160.

§ 160. IIL. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in

the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable av,7

more rarely atv, before the ending.

a. dy or atv is inserted without any change. 4

PRELIMINARY Remarx. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a
threefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second”

Aor. from the pure stem, the Fut. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a

pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into 7; hence

the Fut. and Perf. are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -éw.— The a in
the ending -dyw is also short in Epic (except in the three verbs, ixdvw, pSdve,
and «xdvw); but long in ixdyw in Attic.

2 J

1. aicd-av-opat (seldom aicJouat), to percewe, Aor. jo-duny,

aictécIa.; Perf. yoInua; Fut. aio Inoouor; verb. Adj. aioSnrés.

2. duapravw, to miss, Aor. jnuaprov (late jydprynca); Fut. dpap-
Tropa. (dépapryow, only in Alexandrine Greek); Perf. judprnxa;
Perf. Pass. jjdprnar; Aor. Pass. japrydnv (X. An. 5. 9, 21.
Vect. 4, 37). Verb. Adj. duaprnréov.

3. amexJavopa, to be hated, Aor. drnydJouny (poet. nydouyy) ;
Inf. dréyJeoFac with irregular accent; Fut. drexIjocopo; Perf.
arnxInpat, I am hated.

4. avgavw (and avfw), to increase, Fut. aiéjow; Aor. niéyoa;
Perf. 7véyxa; Mid. and Pass. to thrive, Perf. yvémpar; Fut. aigy-
copa and adéyIjoouar; Aor. béiSnv.

5. Bracravew, to sprout, Aor. €BAacrov (later éBAdornoa); Fut.
Braorjow; Perf. €Brdorynxa and BeBAdornka (§ 123, 2).

6. dapJavw, commonly in composition, xarad., to sleep, Aor.
kar édapJov (xatradapJévra, Aristoph. Plut. 300); Fut. caradsapdyco-
sid Perf. xaradedapJyxa.

7. iavw and xadkilavw, secondary form of ie, nadie. . See
§ 166, 16.

8, kAayyave, used of dogs, a secondary fain of Krdlw, to cry
out, Fut. cra-yéw (kexAdygoua, Aristoph. Vesp. 930); Aor. éAayéa,
&Aayov, Eur. Iph. T. 1062; Perf. xéxAoyya (old form KxéxAnya).

9. oidavw, oidaivw (also oidaw, oidéw), to swell, Fut. oidjow; Perf.
wonKa.

10. ddAuSavw (ddicIaivw used by later writers), to slip, Aor.
odoJov; Fut. dduIjow; Perf. ddAtcInxa (first Aor. odAiodynca
later).

§ 160.] VERBS IN -w WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 193

11. édappaivopat, to smell, Aor. dodpdpnv; Fut. dodpjcopac.
Pres. dcppaoda: was a rare Attic form; Aor. arppnoduny and dcppavdiva
late.

12. dddoxavw (rare Inf. d¢Acw, Part. dpdAwv), to be Hable to a
| fine, to incur punishment (the double strengthening wx and ay
is to be noted); Aor. dpAov (ddAyoa, Lys. 13, 65. and by later
writers); Fut. é¢djow; Perf. dpdAnxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
opAnpat.

b. dv is appended to the pure stem, and vis inserted before
the Characteristic-consonant.

PRELIMINARY RemarxK. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem
is changed into a long one, in inflection. The v is subject to the usual changes
before the Pi and Kappa-mutes (§ 19, 3).

13. épvyyavw (instead of épu-v-yavw), ructo, Aor. yptyov, Fut.
épevfopar.

14. Jvyydve, to touch, Aor. éFiyov; Fut. Figopar.

15. Aayxavw, to obtain by lot, Aor. Aaxov; Fut. Angouar; Perf.
eiAnxa (rarely AéAoyxa from AETX-, comp. rérovta, rately, rév-
Sos); Perf. Mid. or Pass. <iAyypar (§ 123,4); Aor. Pass. edgy Inv.
Verbal Adj. Anxréos.

16. AapBave, to take, Aor. AaBov, Imp. AdBe and Attic APE
[§ 118, 3 (a)]; Fut. Ajpopuo; Perf. «iAnda; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
eiAnupae (§ 123, 4), (AeAnwor Aesch. Ag. 876); Aor. Mid. AaBopuny ;
Aor. Pass. jbInv ; Fut. Pass. AnpIjoopo. Verbal Adj. Aywrds,
Anrréos.

17. AavIavw (poet. and also X. O. 7, 31, also AynIw), to be con-
cealed, Aor. &aIov (I. Aor. Anca late in simple words); Fut.
Ajow; Perf. AAnIa, I am concealed; Mid. rAavFdvoyou (Ton. and
poet. also AyjJouor), in prose éruA. (seldom érA.), to forget, Fut.
Ajorouar; Perf. AeAnopar (§ 131); Aor. AaSounv; Fut. Perf. rAq-
coua, Kur. Ale. 1981.

18. Aysrave, rare secondary form of Aeira.

19. pavIdvw, to learn, Aor. guaitov; Fut. padnooua; Perf.
peuadnxa.— The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are
formed from the stem MA®E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj.
padyrés, padyréos.

20. ruvSavoua, to inquire, to perceive, Aor. éritounv; Perf. wé-

17

ah Bt Pe wii, bs be or REO. si
“ * . ora Sa ae

194 VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§ 161.

mopoat, rervoa, etc. (§ 131); Fut. revcoua (very rarely zevood-
pot, §154, 3). Verb. Adj. revords, revoréos.

21. rvyxavw, to happen, Aor. érixov; Fut. revgouor (TEYX-) ;
Perf. rer’xnxa (TYXE- according to No.a). The transitive of
this verb is the poetic revyw, paro.

22. dvyyavw, secondary form of ¢devya, to flee, Fut. pevéouat
and -gotpa (§ 154, 3) ; Agr. épiyov; Perf. wépevya. Verb. Adj.
evktos, -Té0s.

23. xavdave, to hold, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. €xddov ;
Perf. with a Pres. signification xéyavda; Fut. xeirouar (stem
XENA-, comp. éraJov, weiropat).

§161. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in
the Pres. and Impf. by annexing the two conso-
nants, ox or the syllable wrx.

Sx is annexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and scx, when it is a
consonant; xu-icxw and xpn-loxouwa: are exceptions. Most verbs, whose pure
stem ends with a consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of
pure verbs, in -dw, -€w, and -dw, e.g. ebp-loxw, Fut. ebph-ow from “EYPE-; auBalo-
kw, Fut. éuBAd-ow from *AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and Impf.,
take a reduplication also, which consists in repeating the first consonant of the
stem with ., and may be called the improper reduplication. Most of these verbs
correspond to the Latin Inchoatives in sco: yyvdoKw, HBdoxw, ynpdoKw.

1. dd-iox-opar, to be taken, to be conquered, with this meaning, is
used as the Pass. of aipéw, Impf. 7AuoKdunv; CAAO-) Fut. dAdcopar;
second Aor. #Awy, Att. édAwy and jAwy (ut, § 192, 9), Twas taken ;
Perf. jAwxa, and Att. éaAwxa and 7Awxa, [have been taken ( Aug.,
§ 122,4 and 6). The Active is supplied by aipeiy, signifying, to
take captive, to conquer. Verb. Adj. dAwrés. Xen. uses both
éGdwv and #Awy, An. 4, 4. 21.; Thu. only éaAwy and éaAwxa: Plato
also only éaAwxa.

2. éuBdicxw (seldom dyBAdw), to miscarry (AMBAO-), Fut.
GpBrOow; Aor. jpBdrwoa; Perf. nuBrwxa; Perf. Pass. jp Bropar;
Aor. Pass. 7 BrAdInv. |

3. dvaBuscxopa, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor.
éveBwwodpnv, I recalled to hfe ; but second Aor. dveBiwv (ju, § 192,
10), I lived again.

4. dvadioxw (also avaAdw), to spend, to consume, Impf. éviduoKov
(évédovy without Aug.); Fut. dévaddow; Aor. évjAwoa and dva-

§ 161.] VERBS IN -© WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195

Awoa, karnvddwoa ; Perf. évjAwxa and dvaAwxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
GyvjAopa. and dvddwpor; Aor. dvadoIyv, avyradSnv; Fut. Pass.
dvalwIjooua. Thu. and the Tragedians preferred the unaug-
mented forms; Plato and the orators, the augmented.

5. dpéoxw, to please, Fut. dpéow; Aor. jpeoa [§ 130 (d)]; (Perf.
apypexa in Sext. Emp.;) ~Mid. with Accusative, to appease, to
satisfy, Fut. épéroua, Aesch. Suppl. 654; Perf. Mid. or Pass. jpeo-
pot; Aor. Pass. npéoInv, Soph. Ant. 500. Verbal Adj. dpeords.

6. BiBpdckw, to eat (Fut. Att. doua from éoSiw, second Aor.
epiyov), Perf. BéBpwxa; Part. BeBpws (§ 194); Perf. Mid. or Pass.
BéBpwpa (Aor. Pass. €Bpddnv, and Fut. Pass. BpwSjoopo non-
Attic; instead, the forms of éoJiw are used).

7. yeywvioxw (mostly Poet.), to call, to make known, Fut. yeywvhow; Aor.
éyeyévnoa; Perf. yéywva, with a Present signification ;—further, yeywvelra,
Xen., yeywveiv, Poet., seldom prose, e. g. Pl. Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim.
TETQNEQ.

8. ynpdoxw (or yypdw), senesco, to grow old, Fut. ynpdécopa (sel-
dom yypaow Plato); Aor. éyjpaca (in Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans.
to cause to grow old), Inf. ynpaca (instead of it yypava, from an
old second Aor. éyypav, was preferred by the Attics, yu, § 192, 1);
Perf. yeynpaxa, I am old.

9. ytryvdokw (yivéoxw), cognosco, to know (T'NO-), Fut. yvoco-
por; second Aor. éyvwy (ut, § 191); Perf. éyvoxa; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. éyvwopor (§ 131); Aor. Pass. éyvdodnv; Fut. Pass. ywoody-
copa. Verbal Adj. ywwords (old form yrurds), yrworéos.

10. ddpdoxw, to run away (only in compounds, e. g. dzod., &é.,
dua8.), Fut. Spacouar; Perf. dédpaxa; second Aor. épav (yu, § 192,
1).

11. eipioxw, to find, second Aor. etpov; Imp. eipé [§ 118, 3
(a)]; CEYPE-) Fut. eipjow; Perf. etpyxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
evpynyar; Aor. Pass. ebpéSny [$ 130 (d)]; Fut. Pass. etipydjoopa;
Mid. to obtain, Aor. cipépnv (Aug. § 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj.
etperds, eupyréos.

12. #Bdoxw, pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. 7Byow; Aor.
nByoa; Perf. 7Bynxa (7Bdw, to be young, but dmBdw, to become
young again).

13. Ivjoxw, commonly drodvjcKw, to ‘die (Metathesis, § 156,
2), (@AN-) Aor. dwéSavov (Poet. oavov; Javav, of Javovres, the

196 VERBS IN -w WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§ 161.

dead, %S0 in prose); Fut. drodavotya: (Poet. Javodua); Perf.
réSvynxa, (not daoréIvyxa) both im prose and. poetry, rédvive
(§ 194), ete, Inf. reIvdvar; Fut. Perf. reIvigo (§ 154, 6), and
among later writers reJvifoua, I shall be dead. Verbal Adj.
Svynrds, mortal.

14. Jpwoxw (§ 156, 2), to spring, to leap, Aor. @Sopov;. Fut.
Jopoduo; Perf. réIopa.

15. iAdoxopat, to propitiate, Fut. ouiste Aor. I. itdoduny; Aor.
Pass. ithdodnv.

16. pedvoxw, to intovicate, Fut. peSiow; Aor. euédioa. But
pedi, to be intoxicated (only Pres. and Impf.), borrows its tenses
from the Passive, e. g. guedioSnv (§ 131).

17. pypvicke, to renund (MNA-), Fut. pvyow; Aor. guvnoa;. Mid.
to remind one’s self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. péuvnpar,
menvint, I remember, I am mindful (Redup. § 123, Rem. 1),
Subj. pepvGpo, -7, -jrav (§ 154, 8), Imp. peuvyoo; Plup. éueuvy-
pv, Tremembered, Opt. peuvyjyny, ~7o, -7ro, OY pepveunv, -Go, -Gro
(§ 154, 8); Fut. Perf. pepvjoopm, I shall be mindful (among the
Tragedians also, I will mention); Aor. euvnaInv, I remembered
(Guvnodunv Poet.); Fut. prgoIjoopa, I shall remember (éropvij-
cowat, Th. 1, 137).

18. récxw (formed from réJoxw, by transferring the aspiration
of 3 to x), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. éréSov;
(IIEN®-) Fut. reicouo; Perf. rérovda. Verbal Adj. zadyrds.

19. wiriokw, to give to drink, Fut. miow; Aor. erica.

20. wimpdoke, to sell, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the
Common language expressed by édmoddécopua:, daredéunv); Perf.
wérpaxa (§ 156, Rem.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rémpaau (Inf. rempac-
Ja, often instead of the Aor.); Aor. érpadyv; Fut. Perf. rempa-
copa in the sense of the simple Fut. zpaSjooua, which is rare
and not Attic. Verbal Adj. zpards, zparéos.

21. orepicxw (seldom orepéw, droorépouvvras, Isoc. 12, 243,
according to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of, Fut. orepyow; Aor.
éorépnoa; Perf. éorépyxa; Mid. and Pass. orepicxopat, orepodpat,
privor; but orépoya, [am deprived, Fut. crepnoopo, rarer orepy-
Snoopat (droorepeio te, Andoc. Myst. 149); Perf: éorépnuar; Aor.
eorepnIynv. The simple occurs most frequently in the middle
form; in the Act., the compound dzocrepicxw is more frequent.

§§ 162, 163.] VERBS IN -w WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 197

22. ritpwokw, to wound, Fut. trpdow; Aor. éerpwoa; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. rérpwpo, Inf. rerpdcda, Part. rerpwyévos; Aor. érpaHdqv;
Fut. tpwdyjoopa and tpdcopa. Verbal Adj. rpwrds.

23. ddokw, to say, to think (Ind. and Imp. very rare), Impf.
épackov; Fut. dyow; Aor. épnoa.— (Pass. épdoxero, S. Ph. 114).

24. xdoKxw, to gape (XAN-, among the later writers xaivw), Aor.
éxavov; Fut. xavoduar; Perf. xéynva, to stand open.

Remark. In 8:ddeKw, doc-eo, the x belonging to the stem is strengthened
by o prefixed; hence the « remains in forming the tenses, Fut. d:ddtw; Aor. édf-
data; Perf. dedid5axa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dedtdaypar; Aor. Pass. ed:ddxSnv.

Verb. Adj. d:5anrds, -réos, The same usage is found in the Epic and poetic
verbs, GAShoKw, Grdvonw, Adokw. See § 230.

§ 162. V. Verbs which have a Secondary Form in -Io.

Several verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary forms in -Sa, e. g.
parcyésew, poetic (instead of pAéyery), to burn; hyepéSovtat and hepé-
Sovrat, Epic, instead of dyelpovra: and defpoyra:, Here belong also the end-
ings -aSov and -dSouu of the Impf., and -dS«v of the Pres. Inf., which are used
even in Attic prose, e. g. dAétw, to ward off; tragic Inf. dAndSew (stem "AAK);
&udvw, to ward off, auvvdSew, Impf. judvadov;— didkw, to pursue, diwKddey,
Impf. ediéxatov, also prose ;— exw, to yield, Impf. exatov, eixdSouu ;-— pyw,
to shut up, Impf. and Aor. etpyadov;— tx, to have, oxéSew (in Homer cxedSéew
as Aor.).

§163. VI. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in
the Pres.and Impf. by prefizing a Reduplication.
The reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the root with

the vowel:. In the Epic and poetic dialects, there are also verbs, which take

the Attic reduplication, i. e. they repeat the first two letters of the root; see —

&xaxl(w, araploxw, apaploxw, § 230.

1. PiBdo, to make go, to convey, Fut. Att. PiBa, -ds, -¢ (still
also BiBdow, X. An. 4, 8, 8. 5. 2,10). Verbal Adj. BiBacréos.

2. ylyvouat (yivoyac) instead of yeyévopa (§ 155, 2), to become,
to be, (TEN-) Aor. éyevouny (late Attic éyanIyv); Fut. yerqoopor
(PL Parm. 141, e. yevjoeras, fiet, and moreover yevedjoerat, efficie-
tur); Perf. yeyénpa, I have become, factus sum, exstiti, and yéyova
with a present signification, I am, implying I am by birth; éyevs-
pv and yéyova are also used as preterites of eiui, to be.

3. mimrw (instead of wurérw, § 155, 2), to fall, Imp. zirre;
(IIET-) Fut. wecodmar (§ 154, 3); Aor. éreoov (very seldom first

17*

198 VERBS IN -w WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$§ 164, 166.

Aor. ereoa), § 154, Rem. 2; Perf. rérrwxa with irregular variable
vowel (Part. rerrus, werr@ros, Poet § 194, 5).

4. ritpdw, to bore, Fut. tpyow; Aor. erpyoa. More usual the
secondary form rerpaivw, Fut. rerpav; Aor. érérpnva (§ 149, Rem.
2); Perf. rérpyxa, térpyyar. Verbal Adj. tpyrds.

Several verbs of class IV ({ 161) belong here, as yryvéoxnw, and several verbs
in -m, as Sidwut.

§164. VII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem-vowel a is
strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. byt.

Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic: dyaloua, to be in-
dignant ; dalw, to divide and burn ; paloua, to rage; vatw, to dwell. See § 230.

§ 165. VIII Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes ¢« in the
Pres. and Impf.

1. yapéw, to marry (of the man), Perf. yeydynxa; but Fut.
yapo; Aor. enya, yoyo (eéydunoa first in Menander, then in
Lucian. ; yapjoeus with the better reading yaynoeies in X. Cy.
8. 4, 20). Mid. yapotwa: (with the Dat.), to marry (of the
woman, nubo), Fut. yanotwar; Aor. eynudunv; Perf. yeyéunpat.
Pass. in matrimonium ducor, Aor. éyayjInv, etc. [§ 130 (d), 2].

2. ynIéw, Poet., usually Perf. yéynIa (also prose), to pn,
Fut. ynSijow.

3. Soxéw, to seem, videor, to think, Fut. ddéw (Soxjow poet.) ;
Aor. éofa (é5éxnoa Poet.); Aor. Pass. xaradoxJeis, Antiph. 2. 116,
2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. dedoypar (deddxnyar, Ionic and Eurip.),
visus sum.

4. nruméw (Poet.), to resound, Fut. -how, etc.; second Aor. érvmoy (Epic and
§. O. C. 1450) ; first Aor. éxrémnaa (ib. 1606).

5. papripéw, to bear witness, Fut. paptupyjow, etc. But papripo-
pat, Dep. Mid. to call as witnesses.

6. évpéw, to shear, to shave, Mid. Evpouar; Aor. éfvpdynv; but
Perf. é&vpyuat.

7. déo, to push, Impf. @éIov; Fut. dow and dijo; Moe
éwoa, doar; Perf. éwxa late, Plut.; Fut. Mid. @copar; Aor. éwod-
pnv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éwouar; Aor. Pass. édoInv; Fut. Pass.
dodInoopo. (Aug. § 122,4). Verbal Adj. aorés, -réos.

§ 166.] VERBS IN -® WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 199

§ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and
Impf., but which assume an ¢« in forming the
tenses.

This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -éw, partly from
necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is ¢, ~; partly for the
sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction
of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is ox, x3; and partly from mere
choice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose characteristic is 3, 7, ¢, A,
P> T, Ky X, a, at, €, or. The ¢ is changed into in inflection. Exceptions:
adouct, &xSoua, and udxoua [§ 130 (d)].

1. aldoua, to feel shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf. old poetic, in the Common
language aidéoua), Impf. aidéduny without Aug.; Fut. aidécoua and -foouc
(eradecShooua, Eur. Iph. A. 889); Perf. #deouévos, Dem. Aristocr. 646, 1;
Aor. #Secduny (with Acc.), as a law-term in Attic prose, signifying to pardon a
suppliant; but also in poetry, signifying to be ashamed of, to fear; but in this
sense 75¢03nv is commonly used.

2. dd€éw, to ward off, Act. seldom in prose, X. Cy. 4. 3. 2, dréé-
ev; Fut. ddeEjow (Aor. 7AéEnoa, Hom.) ; Mid. to ward off from
one’s self, Fut. adeEjoopa (ddXéouor as Fut. of "AAEK- is rare,
e. g. S. Or. 171. 539. X. An. 7. 7,3); Aor. #rckdwny (jreEgod uy,
Hom. and X. An. 1. 3, 6. in all the best MSS.) (Inf. second
Aor. dAxéJew, used by the Trag., § 162.)

3. av&éw, to increase; see avfava, § 160, 4.

4. dyJoua to be vexed, Fut. axtéooua, and in prose usually
dxIeoIjoowa (both with the same signification); Aor. #xIérSqv
(§ 131).

5. Book, to feed, Fut. Boviabesi- Aor. ¢Bdcxnoa; Mid. intrans.
to feed, to eat. Verbal Adj. Bords, Booxnréos.

6. BovAopat, to wish (second Pers. BovAa, § 116, 11), Fut. Bov-
Ajocouar; Perf. BeBovAnuar; Aor. €BovryInv and HBovdnInv (Aug.,
§ 120, Rem, 1).

7. dé, to want, to need, usually Impers. det, it ts wanting, it is
necessary (§ 137, 2), Subj. déy, Part. d€ov, Inf. detv; Impf. ee, Opt.
dex; Fut. denoe; Aor. eéénoe(v) ; Perf. dedénxe(v) ; Mid. ddopa, to
“ie Fut. dejoouar; Aor. é&enInv; Perf. dedéquac.

8. éJélw and Jw, to will, Impf. HIcAov and éedov; Fut.
éJecyow and edjow; Aor. weer ? and é3€Anoa; Perf. only
qJeAnKa.

200 VERBS IN -@ WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. ~— [§ 166.

9. cid, <iAXAw, DAAw, also cidA€w, to press, to shut up, Fut. <idjow;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. <ciAnpor; Aor. Pass. eiAnSyv.

10. &Axw, to draw, Fut. Aw (which is preferred to the other
form éAxiow from “EAKYQ); Aor. €iAkvoa (§ 122, 3), EAxvoo
(more common than <iAga); Perf. eiAkixa; Mid. to draw to one’s
self, Xxicopat, citxvodunv ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf. Mid.
or Pass. only <iAkioSnv, AkvoSjoopat, eiAkvopat.

11. "EIPOMAI, Aor. jpdunv, I quired, épéoIor, gowpar, Epoiwny,
€pov, epouevos; Fut. épjoouat. The other tenses are supplied by
épwrav; but the Aor. jpewryoa is rejected.

12. eho, to go forth, Fut. éppjow; Aor. nppyoa; Perf. nppnxa.

13. evdw, commonly xaJevdu, to sleep, Fut. xatevdjow; Aor. rare
and late; Perf. wanting (Aug., §} 121, Rem. and 126, 3). _ Verb.
Adj. xaSevdyréov.

14. &w, to have, to hold, ‘rapt. wed (§ 122, 3); Aor. Ete
(instead of é-cexov), Inf. oxetv, Imp. oxés, tapdoyxes according to
verbs in ps (in composition also oyxé, as Kardoyxe, rapdoxe), Subj.
CXO, -7s, Tapdoxw, Tapdoxys, etc., Opt. cxoinv (jm, § 192, Rem.),
but in compounds zapdoxoyn, etc., Part. cyov; Fut. é and
oxjow; Perf. éoynxa; Aor. Mid. éoxdunv, Subj. cxdpor, Opt. cxoi-
pay, Imp. cxod, tapdoyxou, Inf. cyéoIou, rapacyxéoIat, Part. oxdpevos ;
Fut. éfoua and oyjocopar; Perf. Mid. or Pass. érynuar; Aor. Pass.
éoxed nv [Sct used in good ane? Verbal Adj. éxrés, and oftener
poetic oxerds, -réos.

15. ebea, to cook, Fut. évjow (Fut. Mid. Edrhoropos, Plat. Rp. 372,
c.); Aor. noo; Aor. Pass. 7yyInv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. jypat.
Verbal Adj. éfdds, or &fyrés, &yréos.

16. tw (Plat. Symp. 196, 6), commonly xaJi~w, to seat, to sit,
Impf. éxadifov, old Attic xaSigov; Fut. cad (117, 2); Aor.
éxadioa, old Attic xaSioa (§ 126, 3); (Perf. xexdSixa;) Mid. I seat
myself, Fut. xaIitjoopor; Aor. éxadicapnv, I seated for myself, I
caused to sit. But xaSélopo, I seat myself, I sit, Impf. éxadeouny ;
Fut. xadedodpar.

17. Kd, to make anxious (Act. ouly Epic), Fut. xndjow; Perf.
Kexnda, I am anxious; Mid. xpdopa, to be anxious, in prose only
Pres. and Impf.; in Aesch. 8. 138, is found oe Aor. Mid.
KNOET AL.

18. kAalw, to weep (xAaw seldom, and without contraction),

ee

ee

Sa ee

eo! eee

§ 166.] VERBS IN -© WITH ST

Fut. wcravoopa (xAavoodpa, § 154, 2, $) 7 ares (in
Dem.) xAaujow, or KAajow; Aor. éxAavoa; éexAavodyyy, S. Trach.
153; Perf. xékAavpau, and later xékAavopar (§ 131, 3). Comp.
§ 154, 2. Fut: Perf. xexAavcera, Aristoph. Nub. 1440. Verbal
Adj. xXaverds and KAavtds, KNavoréos.

19. payoua, to fight, Fut. pres, § 154, 5 (Epic and late
prose paxjoopat) ; Aor. éuaxerdunv; Perf. peydynpar; Aor. Pass.
énaxérSny late. Verbal Adj. paxeréos and payyréos.

20. péAAw, to intend, to be about to do, hence to delay, Impf.
ewedXov and jyeddrov; Fut. weAAjow; Aor. éuéAAnoa; Pass. pédAdAco-
Sa, to be put off, delayed. (Aug.,§ 120, Rem. 1.)° Verbal Adj.
peAnréov.

21. pérex pot, curae mihi est, it concerns me, I lay it to heart
(rarely personal pédw), Fut. pedrroe; Aor. euednoe(v); Perf.
pepérnke(v); Mid. péeAouar, commonly éripéAropar (and éryseAodpau,
but Inf. probably éxyeAcoJac); Fut. éryseAjooyor (sometimes
eripeAnIjoouat); Perf. éryseueAnuar; Aor. érewedAndnv. Verbal
Adj. éryeAnréov.

The compounds, e. g. werapérct, Sine, are used as impersonals only; sel-
dom petauéroua, to repent (Thuc.), Aor. wereneAhdny (late); meundrds, caring
Sor.

22. pio, to suck, Fut. prfjoo, ete.

23. dlw, to smell, i. e. to emit an odor, Fut. éfyow; Aor. dlyoa
(Perf. 68w5a with the meaning of the Pres. in Homer and the
later writers, § 124, 2).

24. olowat and ola, to think, second Pers. ote (§ 116, 11);
Impf. ddpnv and @unv; Fut. oinoopar; Aor. onInv, oindjva; Perf.
wanting. (Aug., §122,1.) Verbal Adj. oinréos.

The abbreviated forms, ofwa:, @uny, are used in prose as a mere paren-
thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed in an
ironical sense; ofoua:, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a

governing verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed even 7, the
best Attic writers.

25. otyopa, Iam gone, have gone (with sense of Perf:), abi,
Impf. Oxopeny (sense of Aor., also Plup.), [went away, had gone,

Fut. oixjcopar; Perf. oyna, commonly as a compound, e. g
mapwxnpat, X..An. 2.4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet.

io ey ley A BY Sass. ie ve Tal | “

202 VERBS IN -o WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§ 166.

otxoxa (so originate, ofya, olk-wxa, oly-wxa, comp. the Epic éxwxa
from éxw, § 230). ; ;

26. ddeiAw, to owe, debeo, I ought, must, Fut. ddeiAjow; Aor.
ddeiinoa; Perf. apeiAnxa; second Aor. ddeXor, -es, -e(v) (first and
second Pers. Pl. not used), in forms expressing a wish, utinam.

27. maiw, to strike, Fut. raicw (Att. secondary form ratyow in
Aristoph.) ; Aor. érawa; Perf. réraiuxa (the simple late); Aor.
Mid. éraucdpnv; Pass. with o (§ 131, 2); yet instead of zeraic-
pac and éraicdny, érdyynv and rérdyywar Were commonly used.
Verbal Adj. rawréos.

28. wépdw, usually répdopo, emittere flatum, Aor. érapdov; Fut.
mapoynoopnat; Perf. wéropda (§ 140, 4).

29. aéropo, to fly, Fut. (zerjoowm, Aristoph.) commonly zr7-
cover; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, érrd-
pny, wréeodar (rarer érraunv; exrnv, wd, Trainv, wrhval, Tras, poet.
and in the later writers (§ 192, 2); Perf. werérnor (Aristoph.).
— Syncope (§ 155, 1).

30. oxé\Aw (or oxedéw), to dry, Aor. éoxAnv (§ 192, 4), and Perf.
éoxAnxa, and Fut. oxAjcopuat, intrans. to dry up, to wither. — Met-
athesis, § 156, 2.

31. rirre, to strike, Fut. Attic rurtjow (tivo, Homer) ; (Aor.
L. érimryoa late; erva, Hom.; Aor. II. évzov, Eur. Ion. 779; for
the Aor. of this word, the Attics use émdrafa, &raica;) (Perf.
rervrrnxa, Pollux); Fut. Mid. rumrjcopa, Aristoph. Nub. 1382.
Pass. blows will be inflicted; Perf. rérvppa, Aesch. (rerixrnpas
late); Aor. Pass. érimnv (érurry Inv late). Verbal Adj. rumryréos.

32. xaipw, to rejoice, Fut. xaipnow (xaprjropat late); Aor. éxépyv
(m1, § 192, 8); Perf. xeydpyxa (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have
rejoiced, and Kexdpynya (poet.), Lam glad. Verbal Adj. xaprés.

Remark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -dyw (§ 160),
and imoxvéoua, of those in § 159.
Rem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed (§ 149, 6); still,
they form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly, e. g.
pevw, to remain, Fut. weva; Aor. fuewa; Perf. wenévnna. Verbal Adj.
peverés, meveTéos.
véuw, to divide, Fut. veu@; Aor. @vema; Perf. vevéunna; Aor. Pass. éve-
wASnv.— Mid. vévoua, Fut. vewodua; Aor. évemduny; Perf. Mid. of
Pass. vevéunuat. Verbal Adj. veunréos.

7

a cel

ee a Tie hal array tee Os

§ 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FROM DIFFERENT ROOTS. 203

§ 167. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different
Roots, and which are classed together only in
respect to Signification.

1. aipéw, to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Impf. qypow; Fut.
aipjnow; Perf. ypnxa; Aor. (from “EA) «doy, éAeiv; Aor. Pass.
npenv; Fut. Pass. aipeSyoouar [§ 130 (d)]. — Mid. to choose, Aor.
ciAounv; Fut. aipjoouor; Perf. Mid. or Pass. npnuo; Fut. Perf.
ypnoopa, Pl. Prot. 338, b. Verbal Adj. aiperds, -réos.

2. €pxopat, to go, to come (only the Indic. of the Pres. in use in
Attic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed
from es (§ 181); thus, épyopar, tw, ih, evar, iov), Impf. Apydpny,
commonly yew and ja, Opt. tow; Fut. du, I shall go (néw, I shall
come); — (EAEY@-) Perf. &AydrdIa [§ 124, 2 (b)]; Fut. Aevoouat
almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys. p.
165, § 11; Aor. 7AIov, AJw, AFoyu, ASE [§ 118, 3 (a)], Adee,
éeXSov. Verbal Adj. pereAcvoréov.

*Epxouat has in common the signification of to come and to go; the idea of
coming commonly belongs to the form from éASeiy, and the idea of going to that
of eu. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and
only the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification.

3. éaIiw, to eat, Impf. jnoDov ; (Bu, Ep.) Fut. Soyo, (§ 154, 4);
Perf. éyjd0xa; Aor. épayov, dayeiv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. edndeopas,
(§ 124), 2; Aor. Pass. 75é0Syv. Verbal Adj. éecrds, eéecréos.

4. dpdw, to see, Impf. éwpwv; Perf. édpaxa (Poet. also édpaxa,
Aug., § 122, 6); Aor. (from IA-) tov, dw, oyu, é, § 118, 3 (a),
idciv, idév. (On the second Perf. otda, I know, see § 195.) Fut.
(from *OT1) soya (2. Pers. de, § 116, 11).— Mid. or Pass. opa-
pat; Perf. Mid. or Pass. édpapya, or dppar, dpa, etc.; Inf. dptar;
Aor. Mid. «iddpnyv, idéoFar, dod (and with the meaning ecce, idov),
as a simple only Poet.; Aor. Pass. ofdyv, débFjvar; Fut. dpdjo-
opat. Verbal Adj. épards and érrds, drréos.

5. tpéxa, to run, (APEM-) Fut. dpapodpar; Aor. Spayov; Perf.
Sepduynxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. érdedpdpynuor (X. O. 15. 1). Verb.
- Adj. Ipexréov.

SpéEouat, ESpeta, rare and poet.—Second Perf. only Epic dédpoua (APEMQ).

6. hépw (only Pres. and Impf.), to bear, (OI-) Fut. otow (Aor.
Imp. oive, oicérw, bring, in Aristoph., see § 230, under ¢épw) ; —

204 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -pu . [§ 168

(CETKQ, or “ENETKQ) Aor. II. qveyxov (rarer Aor. I. jveyxa), -es,
~e(v), -opev, -ere, -ov (and -apmev, -are, -av), (§ 124, Rem. 2), Opt.
évéyxoyut, etc. (rarer -ayu, etc.), Inf. éveyxety, Part. eveyxay (rarer
évéyxas), Imp. éveyxe, -érw, etc. (and -drw, etc.) ; — ("ENEK-) Perf.
evnvoxa (§ 124, 2); Mid. to carry off; carry away, win, Fut. oico-
uot; Perf. Mid. or Pass. évjveypau (~yEat, ~yKrat, or evyvexrar); Aor.
Mid. jveyxépny, eveykat, -aota, -dpevos; Pass. (a) to be borne,
carried, (b) to bear one’s self, to hasten; Aor. Pass. jvéx3nv; Fut.
évexInoopat (rarer oiaSjcowat). Verb. Adj. oicrds, oioréos (Poet.
pepros). |

7. pypi (§ 178), to say, Impf. épyv with the meaning of the
Aor. also ¢dvac and dds (§ 178, Rem. 2);— (‘EII-) Aor. etroy,
€imw, elroy, eiré [§ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are
rarely or never used, compound zpéeure), eireiv, eirwv (first Aor.
eiva, not very frequent in Attic writers, more frequent éizas,
very frequent «izare, rarely <izav, Imp. elroy rarely, very frequent
eiratw, <izarov, eirarwv, and always «izare; all other forms want-
ing in the Att.). From the Epic Pres. eipw, come Fut. épo, Perf.
eipnxa, Perf. Mid. or Pass. eipyywot (§ 123, 4);— (PE-) Aor. Pass.
eppnrnv (eppéInv appears not to be Attic), pyIjvar, fynteis; Fut.
Pass. pytjoopat and eipyoouar.— Mid. only in compounds, Fut.
Girepovpot, and first Aor. dmeitacSa, to deny, to be wearied out, to
give up, like areretv. Verbal Adj. fnrds, pyréos. -

Instead of the Pres. @nul, other words are sometimes used, particularly in
composition. Compare amayopetw, I forbid, aretrov, I forbade; dyvriréyw, I
contradict, ayretrov, I contradicted, the compounds of eimety in the Aor. being

more frequent than amrnydpevoa and ayrércta. So, dyopebw twa nanos, I speak
ill of one, but ayretroy Kakas.

§ 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -pu.

1. Verbs in -z, the number of which is small, differ from
those in -w, principally in taking different personal-endings
in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act.
and Mid.; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind.
of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining

1 The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sing. Indic., when
the next word begins with a consonant; also in the persons of the Imp. which
have a; hence éveyxe, but éveyxdrw.

§ 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -t. 205

tenses is like that of verbs in -w, with a few exceptions. In
omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those
in -dw, -éw, and -o.

2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -s with a mono-
syllabic stem, take a reduplication (§ 163); this consists in
repeating the first consonant of the stem with 4, when the
stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid;
but, when the stem begins with o7, 77, or with an aspirated
vowel, « with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem.
These verbs are the following : —

STA torn-yt TIPA i-u-mpn-pe

XPA xi-xpn-me AE (8f-dy-ut) didéacr(v)
BA (Bi-Bn-m1) BiBds - OE th-Sy-mt

TITA (-rra-wot ‘E tn-m

TIAA ti-u-3An-ut AC Bi-dw-ut.

* Remark. Most verbs in -u: do not follow this conjugation throughout in
the three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs,
Tlonut, to put; tornut, to place; Sidwpt, to give, and tut, to send, have this
conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the
conjugation in -w, together with several forms of the inflection in -us. See
§ 172, Rem. 8

§ 169. Division of Verbs in -pue.

Verbs in -ys are divided into two principal classes :—
1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel.
The stem of verbs of this class ends : —

(a) in a, e. g. Lorn-pt, to place, Stem STA-
(b) “ “« rl-Sy-m, to put, “ @E-
(c) “ “ Bi-Bw-u, to give, « AO-
(d) “4 & Pus, to 9, “7.
(e) “o, “ etul, instead of écpl, to be, “ °ES-.

2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -yy OF -vi,
and then append to this syllable the RERORP RENAE The
stem of verbs of this class ends :—

A. In one of the four vowels, a, ¢, 4, 0, and assumes -vyt

(a) in a, e. g. oxedd-vvi-ut, to scatter, Stem SKEAA-
(b) “«, “ Kopé-vyi-ut, to satisfy, “ KOPE-
(c) “ 4, only ti-vvi-us, to atone, wie S

(d) “ 0, &. g. orpd-vvi-ut, to spread out, “ STPoO-.

18

ee ae Te OL tse ne ee £
Bi ey acl veteran a a ts nS

206 VERBS IN -ml.—STEM OF THE PRES. STRENGTHENED. [§ 170.

B. In a consonant, and assumes -vv.
(a) in a mute, e. g. deix-vi-m, to show, Stem AEIK-
(b) “ liquid, “ du-vi-m, to swear, ' * °OM-.
Remarx 1. When a diphthong precedes the final consonant of the stem,
that consonant is omitted before the -yv, except it be a Kappa-mute, e. ¢.
at-vipor Stem AIP (comp. aip-w, &p-vijua)

dal-vipu “ AAIT (comp. dais, darr-ds)
kal-viuat =“ KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. néxad-nat, néracpat) t
xref-vout “ KTEIN from KTEN (Fut. xrev-&) ; but

| delx-vigs, elpy-viut, Cevy-vipt, ofy-vigu.

Rem. 2. Verbs of the second class, — those in -iu:,—form only the Pres.
and Impf. like verbs in «:, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms
are in -du:, the others in -¥w; in the Sing. Impf. the forms in -jw are predomi-
nant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf. Opt., these are the regular forms.
The verb ofé-vvi-1, from the stem SBE-, is the only verb of this class which
forms the second Aor., namely, @¢8nv; several verbs in -w, form their second
Aor. according to the analogy of these verbs, e. g. dtw, 2dr.

§ 170. Characteristic-vowel and Strengthening of
the Stem of the Present.

1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic-vowel
of the stem, 4, «, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf, and
second Aor. Act. :—

& and ¢ into y, and o into w.

Still, in verbs in -e and -o this lengthening extends only to the
Ind. Sing. of these three tenses; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual
and Pl. Ind. also, and likewise to the entire Imp. and the
second Aor. Inf. Act. In the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs in
-e and -o, eis lengthened into «, and o into ov, e. g. Set-vat, dod-
vot. Butin the same tenses of the Mid., the short character-
istic-vowel remains throughout.

2. Verbs in -ipt, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence
annex -vvv, retain the short characteristic-vowel, except those
whose stem ends in -o, e. g. orpé-vvyys (STPO-); but verbs
whose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -v, are
strengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem-
vowel, namely,

a becomes 7, as in why-vigs, second Aor. Pass. émiry-ny

a « at, “ at-viver instead of &pviua, stem AP, *AIP
€ «et, “ Selx-vigi, stem AEK, hence Ion. geta

v ev, “ Cevy-viws, second.Aor. Pass. é(iy-nv.

§§ 171, 172.] VERBS IN -pt. —PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207

§ 171. Mode-vowels.

1. The Ind. Pres., Impf., and second Aor. do not take the
mode-vowel (§ 168, 1), and hence the personal-endings are
annexed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g.

{-o7Ta- pe é-rl-Se-yey €-50-pev
i-ord-peda é-T1-SE-pweda €-56-weda.

2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels w and 7, as in verbs in -w;
but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel and
form one syllable; this coalescence differs from the contraction
of verbs in -o, as follows :—
dy and dy coalesce into 4 and 7 (not, as in contracts in -dw, into @ and @), dp
coalesces into ¢ (not, as in contracts in -dw, into or), e. g.

i-otd-w = f-ord i-ord-ns = t-orijs t-ord-n-rat = t-or7-Tat
otd-w = oT@ oTd-ns = ois

Ti-Sé-w = TID Ti-Jé-NS = TrIHsS Ti-DE-w-wat = TI@-pat
5:-56-w = 51-56 5:-5d-ns = b1-dgs 51-5 6-n = 6-56.

Remark 1. This form of the Subj. of tornus and ridnu is like the Subj.
of the two Aorists Pass. of all verbs, e. g. rupda, -ijs, -f, etc., TuT-@, -Ts, 7,
from tér-rw, oTa-3G, -fs, -7, from fornu.

Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -du: is like that of verbs in -ta, e. g. denxviw,
-ins, ete.

3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel 4
which is annexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms
a diphthong, e. g.

Impf. Opt. A. -ora-t-nvy = Eoral-ny Aor. II. A. oral-ny Impf. M. t-oral-unz
Ti-Se-t-nv = Ti-Sel-nv Sel-nv T1-Sel-unv
1-50-1-nv = 51-5ol-nv dol-nv 5:-Sol-unv.

Rem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -e (rfSnut) is like the Aorists Opt. Pass. of
all verbs, e. g. ora-Sel-nv, Tup-Sel-nv, Tuw-el-nv.

Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -iu:, like the Subj. Pres., follows the
form in -w, e. g. Seuvtouut. The few exceptions will be considered below.

°
§ 172. Personal-endings.

1. The following are the personal endings for the Act. :—
(a) For the Indicative Present,
Sing. I. “fet torn-pe
2. -s (properly -ox) torn-s
3. -ot(v) (properly -r:) t-orn-o1(v)

208 VERBS IN -l.— PERSONAL-ENDINGS.

Dual 2. ~TOV t-ord-Tov
3. -TOV t-ord-rToy
Plur. 1. -wev (properly -wes) ~ tord-yev
5D. ~TE t-ord-re
3. | [-voi(v)] (properly -yr:) = [tora-vri t-ora-or(v)].

The ending of the third Pers. Pl.-yo1(v) is changed into -aox(v), and then ~
is contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dia~
lect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -a, thus :—

from ‘f-ora-vo. is formed = E-oraor (i-ord-aor)
a Ti-Se-vot e Ti-SeEtot Att. - Tedé-dot
$ df-do-vor d:-dove1 “ Bt-86-dor
# delx-vu-vor $ Serk-viot “ Betx-vb-aot.

Remark 1. The uncontracted form in -ééo1, -dao1, -vdao1, is the only one
used in Attic prose, though it also occurs in the Ionic dialect; the contracted
form in -eiet, -odc1, -do1, is the usual form in the Ionic writers, very seldom in
the Attic poets. But from nu: (stem ‘E), to send, this Attic form ido. (con-
tracted from i-¢-ao1) always occurs.

(b) The personal-endings of the Subj. Pres. and second
Aor. do not differ from those of verbs in -w.

(c) The following are used for the Impf and second Aor.
Ind. : —

Sing. 1. Vv Impf. t-orn- é-rl-Sn-v
a. -s t-orn-s é-rl-Sn-s
3. ~ t-orn é-rl-37

Dual 2. Tov A. II. @orn-rov @-Se-Toy
3: -T nV &orTh-THv é-3é-T Hv

Plur. 1. -wev (properly -nes) &-oTn-pey &-Se-pev
2. “TE é-o7rn-Te @-Se-Te
3. -ouy e-o7n-cay é-Se-cay.

Rem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass. of all verbs is like the second
Aor. Zorny, ©. g. eritm-ny, é-ord-Sny, -ns, -n, -NTov, -hTHv, -nMEV, -NTE, -noa.

(d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor.
(except the first Pers. Sing.) differ from those of the Opt. of
the historical tenses of verbs in -w, only in being preceded by
n; comp. the endings of Bovdcdoyu, Bovrevoayu, etc. with those
“i oral-nv, f-oral-nv Sel-nv ti-Bel-nv Sol-nv S1-dol-ny.

Rem. 3. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt., the -y is commonly rejected in the
Attic dialect, and the ending of the third Pers. Pl. -noay is almost always
shortened into -ey, e. g.

Tidel-nuev —= TIdETWEY ioral-nre = ioraire
TiWel-noay = Tideiev bid0l-noay = didoiev.

§ 172.] VERBS IN -t,.—— PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 209

The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. raSevSelnuev =
maidevd-eiuev (wholly like ruefnv).—On the contrary, in the second Aor. Opt.
Act. of fornut, ridnut, diSeur, the abbreviated forms are very rare, except the
third Pers. Pl., which is commonly abridged.

Rem. 4. The forms d:d¢nv and d¢ny also occur.
(e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are: —

Sing. 2. | -& (t-ora-9:) (rl-Se-8:) (81-80-31)
3. Tw i-ord-Tw Ti-3ێ-Tw b1-56-1Tw
Dual 2. -Tov {-0Ta-Tov wl-Se-Tov 3{-80-rov
3. ~TwY i-ord-Twv Ti-Sé-Twy 5:-56-Twy
Plural 2. -TE t-ora-Te tl-Se-re d{-d0-Te
3. “TWO UW i-ord-rwcay T1-9€-TwCaV d-56-Twcay
or i-ordytwy | TLSEVTwOV 51-ddvTwyv.

Rem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. rejects the ending -S:, and, as a
compensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 7, € into
et, o into ov, & into d,

t-cra-S: becomes torn rt-Se-31 becomes ri-Ser
5f-50-S: + df-dou Selx-vi-Si delxvi.

The ending -% is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, e. g. pd&
from nul, tod: from eiul, 1: from efuz, and some others; it also occurs in cer-
tain Perfects of verbs in -w, e. g. rédvadi.

In the second Aor. of riSnut, inut, and dlSwu, the ending & is softened into
s; thus, Sé-3: becomes Sés, €-S1 = Es, 50-31 = 56s; but in the second Aor. of
tornut, the ending -S: is retained; thus, or7-S:; also in the two Aorists Pass.
of all verbs, e: g. Tdrn-S1, wadedSyri (instead of raidevSy-S1, § 21, Rem. 3). In
compounds of or7S: and Ajxs:, the ending -7%: is often abbreviated into 4, in
the poet. dialect, e. g. rapdora, ardora, mpdéBa, xaTdBa.

(f) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -vas.
This is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic-vowel ;
but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being
lengthened into y, € into «, o into ov, § 170, 1); thus,

Pres. i-ord-var Ti-Sé-vat 1-36-vau Seik-vi-vae
Second Aor. or7j-vat Set-va dov-va.

Rem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like orjjvai, e. g. Tumj-vat,
BovAevdj-vat. ,;

(g) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor: participle are
-vts, -vToa, -vr, Which are joined to the characteristic-vowel
according to the common rules; thus,

i-ord-yvrs = Lords, f-otaca, t-oriv ords, oTaca, ori
TI-Sé-vTs = ti-Sels, -ctva, -v Sels, Seioa, Sv
—br-d6-vTs §== be-Bodbs, -odea, -dv dods, -ovca, -dv

deix-vb-yTs = deix-vis, -doa, -iv.

18*

210 _ VERBS IN pl.— FORMATION OF THE TENSES.‘ [$ 173.

Rem. 7. The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like the
Part. tidels, or Sels, e. g. TumT-els, -eioa, -év, BovAevd-els.

2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs
in -®, except that uniformly, in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and)
almost always in the Impf. Ind. and in the Imp., the personal-/_
endings retain their full form, -ca. and -co. Still, the following
points are to be noted: — ——

(a) The second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -a (as fornut, Sdvayct), is only -aoa
in Attic prose; the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, only
in the poetic dialect, e. g. émlorg from érloraua: in Aesch., ddvn (from the Ionic
ending -ea) instead of dvvg, in Soph. and Eurip.—In the second Pers. Imp.~
and in the Impf., 7a 7 seems to be only poetic; but, ériore, Arictw, dive,
Hdvvw, are the regular forms in good prose, and the uncontracted forms
scarcely occur except in the poets and later writers.

(b) In verbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. are poetic and rare, and
in the Indic. Impf. not at all in use; thus, Impf. éviSeoo, Imp. tiSeco (riSov) ; in
the second Aor., both of verbs in -e and -o, the contract are the regular forms,
e. g. Indic. @ov, Imp. Sov; ov, S00. In verbs in -o also, the uncontracted
forms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf. and Imp.: édi5000, di50a0.

(c) The contracted forms are uniformly employed throughout the Subj.; in
the Opt., as in verbs in -w, the o is always omitted, yet the form remains
uncontracted.

Rem. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of riSnut, is ériSnv, 2 Pers. ériSeis, 3. ériSe
(from TIOEQ), ériSes and é7iSe being more frequent than ériSys, ériSn; on
tut, see § 180; the Sing. Impf. Act. of dieu: is always édfSouyv (fr. AIAOQ),
edidous, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read édiS0us instead of edidws, according to
the best MSS.) In verbs in -du, the forms in -#jw are usual throughout the Pres.
and Impf., especially in third Pers. Pl. Indic. Act., e. g. deumviover(v), and
the only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., e. g. deucvdw, duviw, cvppry-
viw, together with delxvupi, Suyvut, cvpulyrvus. — In Attic poetry, there are also
contracted forms of tiSnua and fu in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres.
Ind. Act., e. g. Tidets, iets, Tide?, ic?.— But the Middle admits the formation in
-bw only in the Subj. and Opt. ;

FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
§173. I. Furst Class of Verbs in -m.

1. In forming the tenses of the Act., the short characteristic-
vowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. Mid.,
namely, a into y, e into 7; also in the Perf. Act. of ridnus and
int, € is lengthened into «, and o into w; but in the remaining
tenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac-
teristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and
Plup. Mid. and Pass. of riIyp. and tu, where the « of the
Perf. Act. (réSexa, réIeno1, cixa, eiyor) is retained.

2, The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of ridnps, ty, and dw, has
« for the characteristic of the tense, not «; thus, |

é-37-K-a, Fj-K-Gy @-5a-K-a.

§174.] VERBS IN -ft.— FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 211

The forms of the first Aor. Act. €yxa, jjxa, and éwxa, however,
are usual only in the Ind., and generally only in the Sing.; in
the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms
of the second Aor.; in the other modes and the participials,
the forms of the second Aor. were always used.

Examples of the first Aor. in the Pl. Ind. are: @3fmawev, X. C. 4. 2) 15.
edénauev, X. An. 3. 2, 5.0.9, 9.10. eéxare, Antiph. 138,77. kay, X. Cy.
4. 6,12. %yxay, H. 2.38, 20. apixav, Cy. 4. 5, 14.

Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of ridnus, tyus, and
diswps, are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ;
Hxapnv from inu occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary,
the forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of tiInps, tym, and dbupu
(Inv, jv, Bwv), are not in use.

3. The verb itornu forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like
verbs in -w, with the tense-characteristic o, e. g. €-oTy-o-a, €-oTn-
o-aunv. The second Aor. Mid. éordyyy is not used. Some
other verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. érrdpny,
erpidnv.

Remark 1. The second Aor. and the second Fut. Pass. are wanting in these
verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in fornu:, the Fut. Perf. of which is éorhtw
and éorhioua, § 154, 6. 5

Rem. 2. On the meaning of the verb fornu:, the following things are to be
noted: the Pres., Impf., Fut., and first Aor. Act. have a Trans. meaning, to

lace; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Perf. and Plup., Act. and the Fut.
erf., have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, fo place one’s self, to stand, namely,
éorny, I placed myself, or I stood; €ornxa (with present signification), J have
pr myself, I stand, sto; érrhxeww, stabam; éorhtw, érrhtouat, stabo (aperrhtw,
shall withdraw). ‘The Mid. denotes either to place for one’s self; to erect, to stand,

consistere, or to place one’s self; Pass. to be placed. “Eornka and éorhxew usually
take the place also of the forms éoraua: and éorduny, which occur but rarely.

§174. Il. Second Class of Verbs in -pu.

There is no difficulty in forming the tenses of verbs of the
second class (§ 169, 2). All the tenses are formed from the
stem, after rejecting the ending -vvims, or -vips. Verbs in -o,
which in the Pres. have lengthened the o into o, retain the w
through all the tenses, e. g. otpw-vvi-m, fo-vwvi-ps, pad-vvi-pu, Fut.
arTpa-ow, etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form-
ing some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel,
e. g. ou-vi-pt, Aor. du-o-ca, from "OMOQ. The second Aor. and
the second Fut. Pass. occur only in a few verbs, e. g. evy-vi-pt.
See § 182.

212

PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -pl.

(6.17

$175. Paradigms of B

ACTIVE.
, Bo
nla 8
EB 3 FE Z =TA- to place. | @E- to put. AO- to give. | AEIK- to show.
Ria |a &
S. 1. | Lorn-pe 7l-Sn-m 5l-Bw-yu Selx-vi-us |
2. | t-orn-s Tl-37-s df-dw-s delk-vi-s
; 3. | orn-or(v) tl-3n-o1(r) 51-5w-o1(v) delx-vi-o1(v)
$/D.1.
3 2. | t-ord-rov wt-Se-Tov 5{-50-rTov Selx-vi-Toyv
S 3. | Lord-rov Tl-Se-Tov 5{-d0-rTov Seln-vi-roy
RS P. 1. | tord-pev Tl-Se-mev df-50-wev deln-vi-wev
2. | -ord-re Tl-Se-TeE 8f-50-Te delx-vi-re
3. | t-ora-ou(v) Ti-9€-Go1(v) 5:-54-dou(v) derk-vv-aou(v)
(from iord-dor)| and ti-Setor(v)| and d1-d0v01(v)|and dSein-vior(v)
S.1. | iera TIO 51-30 deik-vi-w
2. | i-orf-s TLSH-s 51-5g-s derk-vi-ns
3 3. | i-or7n Ti-9H b-5g etc.
3 | D.1.
3 8 2. | -ori-rov Tl-S7}-TOV 51-56-Tov
$ ‘> 3. | i-ori-Tov Ti-I7j-TOV 51-50-Tov
Q |A|P.1. | tord-pev TI-S@-LEV | 81-30-wev
2. | -or7-Te TI-7-TE 5:-5@-Te
3. | i-or@-o1(v) T1-9@-o1(v) 51-50-01(v)
S. 2. | Lorn? Ti-Set? d5{-5ov ” delk-vi?
: (from fordéSx)| (from ri%_Sx)| (from 8/d08:) | (from delxviau)
2 3. | -ord-Tw TI-DE-TW 51-56-Tw deK-vU-Tw
3 | D.2. | Lora-roy rl-Se-Tov d{-50-Tov Selx-vi-roy
S 3. | -ord-Twy Ti-SE-TWY 51-56-Twy Seux-vd-Twev
& P. 2.| tord-re Ti-Se-TE di-5o-Te delx-vi-Te
3. | -ord-Twoay Ti-Sé-TwOa 81-50-Twoay derk-v-Twoay
and f-ordyrwy| and ti-Sévtwy | and d1:-d6vT@v |and dex-vivrwy
Infin. | i-ord-vou Ti-SE-vau 51-5d-var Seuk-vi-vau
Part i-ords, doa, dy | Ti-Sels, civa, év| 5-Sods, odoa, dv} Seix-vis, doa, vy
G. dytos G. &vros G. dvros G. bvros
S. 1. | Lorn-v é-rl-Snv é-di-Souy® é-Selk-voy
2. | Lorn-s é-ri-Sers ® é-5{-Sous? -delx-vis
S 8. | Lorn é-ri-Ser® é-31-dov § é-Selx-vd
81D. 1 >.
iS 2. | t-ord-rov é-rl-Se-Tov e-5{-50-rov é-Belx-vi-Tov
Ss 3. | i-ord-rnv é-T1-9é-T nV é-81-56-7 nv e-deik-vi-T nv
S| P.1. | toré-pev é-Tl-Se-pev é-51-50-pev é-Selx-vi-wev
3 2, | t-ord-re é-rl-Se-Te é-5i-50-Te é-Selx-vi-Te
2 3. | tord-cav é-7Tl-Se-cay é-51-50-cay é-Selk-vi-cay
= S. 1. | i-orat-ny T1-Sel-nv 31-Sol-nv Seun-vd-o1e
cS 2. | i-oral-ns Ti-Sel-ns 51-5ol-ns deuk-vv-o1s
' 3. | i-oral-n Ti-Sel-n 51-5ol-n ete.
2 | D.1.
8 2. | i-orai-roy 4 Ti-Sel-Tov 4 51-507-rov 4
¢ 8. | i-oral-rny Ti-Sel-THv d:-dol-rnv
P.1. | torat-yey Tl-JEl- MEV 51-d07-wev
2. | i-orai-re TL-JE-TE d1-d0t-re
3. | i-orai-ev T1-El-Ev 5:-S07t-ev
1 And dexvi-w, -e1s, etc., especially Seuxviover(y). Also Impf. édeflkvioy, -tes,
-te(v), and the Part.usually dexvi-wy, -oboa, -ov (§ 172, Rem. 8). *§ 172. Rem,

a

§ 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -t. 213

Verbs in -pe.

MIDDLE.

STA- to place. OE- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show.
t-ord-yae Tl-Se-pat 5f-50-mat Selk-vi-wat
Lord-oa Tl-Se-cat 3l-50-ca Selk-vi-oat
t-ord-ras wl-Se-TaL 5t-5o-rat Seln-vi-T 0
i-ord-peSov Tt-Sé-edov 51-5d-wedov Seuk-vb-wedov
t-ora-cSov Tl-Se-oS0v 5{-50-cSov delx-vu-cSov
t-ora-cSov 7l-Se-cSov 5f-50-0Sov delx-vu-oFov
i-ord-weda Ti-2ێ-nEeda 5:-56-neda dern-vi-weda
t-ora-cde ri-Je-0de df-50-0Se delx-vu-ade
t-ora-vra Tl-Se-vTas 3l-50-vrat Seln-vu-vrat
i-or@-uau® Ti-I@- aut 31-3G-wat Beik-vd-wmat
i-ori TSH i-3¢ Beux-vb-n
i-or7-Ta Ti-I7H-TaHA 51-58-70 etc.
i-ord-neSov Ti-Sh-MEedov 51-5d-wedov
i-orj-odov Ti-I7}-TL0v 5:-5@-c2ov
l-orij-osov Ti-7-TI0v 81-3-0S0v
i-oré-peda Tt-Ib-pedra 5:-56-peda
i-ori-ose TI-I7-TVE 5:-80-03€
i-oT@-vTau Tt-Y@-VTaL 5:-8@-vrau
t-ord-oo and ti-Se-co and df-d0-00 and delx-vi-co

torw v{-Sov di-Sou
i-ord-03w Ti-Sé-oSwW 51-56-03 deik-vb-odw
t-ora-oSov tl-Se-cSov. 3(-50-a30v delx-vu-cSov
i-ord-oS@v Ti-Sé-CSWY 51-56-03 wy detx-vb-cSwv
1 ota-oSe tl-Se-oe 5t-50-0e deln-vu-cSe
i-ord-oSwoay and | ti-3¢é-cSwoay and | §:-56-c3woay and | dex-vb-cdwoay

it-ord-oSwv Tt-3€-CSwv 51-5d-cSwv and dex-vi-cSwv
t-ora-cSa Ti-Se-cSat df-50-cSan delx-vu-cSa
i-crd-uevos, n, ov | Ti-Sé-wevos, n, ov | d-d6-nevos, n, ov | deix-v-wevos, 7,

ov

i-ord-unv é-7i-Sé-unv €-5:-5d-unv é-Seik-vi-unv
t-oré-co and {-oTw! é-rl-Se-co é-51-50-c0 é-Seix-vi-co
t-ord-ro é-rl-Se-To é-5/-50-T0 é-Selk-vi-ro
i-ord-ueSov é-ri-S€é-wedov é-51-56-uedov é-5eik-v-weSov
t-ora-cSov é-rl-Se-cSov é-5{-50-cS0v é-Selx-vu-cSov
i-ord-cSnv é t-3¢-oSnv é-3:-5d-cSnv é-deik-vb-c nv
i-ord-weda é-ri-Sé-Eda é-51-54-ueda é-derk-vi-weda
tora-ode é-rl-Se-ode é-5[-50-03e é-5elk-vu-0Se
t-ora-vTo é-rl-Se-vTo é-5{-50-vTo é-delx-vu-vto
i-oral-uny ® Tt-Sol-unv? 5:-Sol-uny 7 Sex-vi-otuny
t-orai-o Ti-01-0 31-507-0 dexx-v-o10,
i-orai-ro Tl-S01-TO 5t-50t-r0 etc.
i-oral-yedov Tt-Sol-wesov :-5ol-wedov
i-orai-oSov Tt-Sul-oX0v 5:-50t-adov
i-oral-ocdny T-Sol-oSnv 5:-S0l-cSnv
i-oral-weda Ti-dol-neda 5:-5ol-weda
i-orai-cde Tt-Sor-TIE 5:-50t-oSe
f-orai-vTo Ti-S00-vTO 5:-5ot-vTo

5. %§172,Rem.8. 4§172,Rem.3. 5 On the irreg. accent of éricrayat

etc., see § 176, 1. ® On the accent in ériorao, etc. see § 176, 1. 7§176,2

214 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN ~it. ($175.
ACTIVE.
: Eg
Sle) Sak ;
z ae %| STA- to place. | @E- to put. AO- to give. | AEIK- to show.
a|sia A
8.1. | &orn-v, I stood,| (€Sn-v) ) A. I.) (%-3a-v).) A. I.
2. | &orn-s (&-S-s) > used] (2-dw-s) > used
ss 3. | &orn (€-9y) ) for it} (&dw) ) forit
8 | D.1.
3 2.| &orn-rov &-Se-Tov é-50-rov wanting.
‘ 3.| or h-thy €-9é-T Hv €-56-Tnv
S| P.l.| @orn-wev é-Se-nev €-50-yiev
2.| @orn-Te é-Se-Te @-50-Te
3.) &or n-cay 2-S€-cay @-50-cay
S. 1. | oro! ao! 5a '
2. | ors Sh-s 56-s
g\po|e7 3 36
§ 2. | or7n-Tov h-Tov d@-rTov
> 3. | or7j-Tov Oj-Tov d@-Tov
H|P.1. | ord-pev SO-wev 3@-pev
2. | ori-Te Oh-Te da-Te
3. | rd-o1(v) %6-o1(y) 8a-01(v)
z S. 1. | orat-nv Sel-nv (Sot-nv
2. | oral-ns Sel-ns dol-ns
N " 3. | oral-n Sel-n dol-n
2 | D.1.
3 2. | oral-nrov? Sel-nrov 2 dol-nrov?
> 3. | oral-hrnv Se-Arnv doi-Arnv
P.1. | orat-nwev Sel-nuev dol-nwev
2. | orat-nre Sel-nre dol-nre
3. | orai-ev Sel-ev doi-ev
5. 2.4 or 9-93 és (SEI) 4 | Bos (5dSx) * 4
S 3. | oTh-Tw Sé-Tw d6-Tw
‘S| D.2. | or 9-rov Sé-Toy 56-Tov
5 3. | orh-twy Sé-Twv 56-Twy
= P. 2. | orH-Te S€-Te 56-Te
SS 3. | or h-Twocay Sé-Twcay and | 36-rwoay and d
and ordvtwy| Sévtwv ddyvTwv
Infin. | ori-vat Sei-vau 5ov-vat
Part oTds, Goa, ty | Sels, cloa, &v | Sods, ovoa, dy
"| Gen. ordvros| Gen. Sévros _| Gen. dévros
Future. oTh-ow Sh-ow 5é-ow Seltw
Aorist I. é-ornoa, I | @-Sy-Ka &-Swo-Ka e-Seita
[ placed,|Instead of these forms, the 2d Aor. is
used in the Dual, Pl. Ind. and in the
other Modes and Participials, § 178, 2.
Perfect. é-orn-Ka,° sto, | Té-Det-Ka 5€é-5w-Ka d€-Serxa
Pluperfect. | é-orh-rew and | é-re-Set-xew | é-5e-5d-new | e-Se-Selxew
Ta €i-oTh-Kew
Fut. Perf. \é-crhtwold Att.) wanting. wanting. wanting.
. PAS
Aor. I. | é-oru-Snv | é-ré-Snv® | €-66-9ny | €-Selx-Snv |
1 The compounds, e. g. dmrocr&, éxS@, dada, have the same accentuation as
the simples, e. g. aroorGo1, exSjrov, Siadapev. * See § 172,Rem.3. *%In
composition, mapdornd, mapdora; amdorns, arora, § 172, Rem. 5. 4*In
composition, mrepides, vSses; dd5os, Exdos; mepidere, Exdore, § 118, Rem. 1.
5See § 176,3. °% éréSnv and reShoopa: instead of éSéSyv and SeSfoouas,

neneeecgndt tesa

§ 21,2. 7 Also in composition, évSaua -#, -frat, etc., dmoteuar, -f, -ir
etc., exd@uat, -@, -@T al, etc., amrodéuat, -@, -OTQL, ete.

* See § 176, 2.

§ 176.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -. 216
MIDDLE.
STA-t place, | @E- to put. AO- to give. AEIK- to show.
(é-ord-uny does | ¢-S€-unv e-56-unv
not occur, but | &Sov (from &&eao)}| &5ouv (from goo)
é-wrd-unv é-Se-70 €-50-To
é-rpid-unv) é-Sé-wedov é-56-pedov
&-Se-cdov é-50-cSov wanting.
é-3¢-cSnv e-56-0Snv
é-S€é-neda é-56-neda
é-Se-cSe é-50-08e
é-Se-vTo é-50-vTo
(or@-vat does not | Sa-uar? 5@-war?
occur, but mplw- | 37 3g
Mat, Ny, -NTa@t, | S7-TaL 8a-TaL
etc.) Sd-pedov 5é-“edov
Sh-7sov 36-cN0v
S7-oc20v 36-o30v
Sé-neda 5d-peda,
ai-ove 3a-a5¢€
I@-vTaL 5@-vTat
(orai-uny does not} Sol-uny® dol-uny ®
occur, but mpial-| Sot-o 507-0
ny, -ato -aiTo,| Sot-ro Soi-ro
etc.) Sol-wedor Sol-uedov
Sot-cXov dot-oov
Sol-cdnv dol-cSnv
Sol-pedsa dol-weda
Sor-cXE dot-ade
or-vTo doi-yTo
(ord-o, or o7@ | Sov (from Séa0)* | S00 (from dda0) ®
does not occur, | Sé-03@ 36-03
but mpla-co, or | S¢-cSov 56-cdov
mplw) Sé-cSev 56-cSwv
a¢-ode 56-0de
&é-cSwoay and 36-cSwoay and
_ §é-odov 56-03wv
(ord-cda) mplac. | S$é-cSa 56-cSat
(ord-uevos) mpla- | Sé-nevos, -n, -ov | 36-pevos, -n, -ov
bevos
oTh-comat Sh-comat 3d-comat delEouat
é-orn-odunv (é-97-xd-unv) ( €-3e-xd-unv) é-dertduny
Instead of these forms, the second Aor, Mid. is
used by the Attic writers, § 173, 2.
€-oTG-uo,173, R. 2.) ré-Set-wat 5é-50-uat dé-Sery-uat
é-ord-unv, § 173, | é-re-Sel-unv é-de-56-unv é-5e-dely-unv
Rem. 2.
é-orhtouat,' wanting. wanting. wanting.
SIVE.
| Fut. L. | ora-Stooua | te-Shoopa® | S0-Shooun | derx-Shoomot

a,
9In

composition, xatdSou, émdéSov; mepidou, arddov; nardSeode, repldocde; MSec-

Se, tpd5ocSe; but évSod, eisSod; mpodod, évdod, § 118, Rem. 1.

§ 173, Rem. 2.

1°§ 154, 6, and

216 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -pu. ~ [$$ 176, 177.

§176. Remarks on the Paradigms.

1, The verbs Sbvayau, tobe able; érloramat, to know, and xpéuaua, to hang, —
have a different accentuation from teraua, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., ~
namely, Subj. ddvwua, émiorwpat, -y, -nTat, -no®ov, -nove, -wvTa; Opt. duvalunv, —
emoraluny, -at0, -aiTo, -atodov, -aove, -aivTo; so also dvatuny, -ato, -aito (§ 177, —
4), and émpiduny (§ 179, 6).

2. The forms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -a, viz. riSolunv, —
Solunv, were preferred to those in -e, viz. riSeluny, -€70, -etro, etc., Deiuny, -€t0, —
-eiro, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples; thus, évSoluny —
(€vSelunv), évSoio (évSeio), etc.; so also in compounds of doluny, e. g. diadolunv, —
Siadoi0, etc.

3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup.: @ord-rov, @-o7rd-pev,
&-ord-re, €-ord-o1(v), see § 193.

4. Verbs in -du, as has been seen, form the Subj. and Opt. like verbs in -iw.
Still, there are some examples where these modes follow the analogy of verbs
in -wt: Sos uh Stack eddvviras (instead of -bnta), Pl. Phaedon. 77, b. wixorrd
Te kal weyviro (from -w&ro, instead of -dorro), Ibid. 118, a.

5. In the later writers, e. &: Polybius, a Perf.and Plup. are found with the
Trans. meaning, I have placed, namely, éota&xa, éctTuixery

SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -m.

1. Verbs in -u: which annex the Personal-endings immediately
to the Stem-vowel.

§177. (a) Verbs in -a (i-oryn-pt; 3TA-):

1. xi-xpy-pu, to lend, to bestow (XPA-), Inf. xiypava, Fut. ypjoo,
Aor. éxpynoa. Mid. to borrow, Fut. xpyjoouo. (Aor. expnodpyy in
this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem
belong :—

2. xph, it is necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. xpf, Inf. xphvat,

Part. (rd) xpedv (usually only Nom. and Acc.); Impf. éxpiv, or xpiv (with
irregular accent), Opt. xpeln (from XPE-); Fut. xpjoru in Soph. (but not

xpnoet).
Inf. xpiv, &roxpiv, in Eurip., by contraction from xpdew.

3. awéxpn, it suffices, sufficit; the following also are formed regularly from
XPAQ:: aroxpaoi(v), Inf. aroxpiv; Part. aroxpas, -Goa, -Gv ; Impf. dréxpn; Fut.
amoxphoe; Aor. améxpnoe(v), etc. Mid. aroxpauat, to abuse, abutor, or consumo,
Inf. aroxpioSat, is inflected like xpdoua, § 129, Rem. 2.

A. évivnpe (with Attic reduplication instead of évévyur), to ben-

efit, CONA-) Inf. évwava; Impf. Act. wanting, éfédow being
used for it; Fut. 6vjow; Aor. dvyca, Inf. évipcoe (for it dvyvat, like
orjvat, in Pl. Rp. 600, d.). Mid. évivapa, to get benefit, be bene-
fitted, Fut. évicopo; Aor. avypny (avapny later, but also in Eur.
dvacde), -noo, -nro, etc., Imp. dvyco, Part. éviyevos (Hom.), Opt.
évaipny, -avo, -aito (§ 176, 1), Inf. dvaoSar; Aor. Pass. dvydqv rarer

§ 178.] SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -u. 217

instead of dvjynv. The remaining forms are supplied by
apeXeiv.

5. wi-p-mAn-pu, to fill, IIAA-) Inf. mymrdavac; Impf. ériyardnv;
Fut. mdjow; Perf. rérdyxa; Aor. édnoa; Mid. to fill for one’s
self, wiprdopa, Inf. riuwhacSar; Impf. éryrddpyv; Aor. érAnod-
pyv; Fut. tAjoowo; Perf. Mid. or Pass. wétAnopo; Aor. Pass.
éxAjodnv (§ 131); Fut. Pass. rAyodjoouat (§ 131); second Aor.
ézAnpnv, Poet. Verb. Adj. zAnoréos.

The x in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted
in composition, when yu precedes the reduplication, e. g. éurlaAaua, but éveriu-

wAduny. Contrary to this rule, howeyer, forms with and without » are both
used by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse.

6. riuarpypus, to burn, Trans., in all respects like wipaAnus: mpy-
ow, expyoa, TéerpyKa, Téempnopa, expyaodnv, TpyTIjoropat, TEeMPHT OPAL.

7. TAH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting (instead of
them tropuévw, dvéxouar); Aor. erdnv, (rAG,) TAainy, TARIL, TAGS
(rAaca); Fut. rAjoopar; Perf. rérAnxa. Verbal Adj. rAyrés. (In
Attic prose this verb is rare.)

8. py-pi, to say (stem @A-), has the following formation :—

§ 178. |
Present. ACTIVE. Imperfect.
Indi- 8S. 1. | nut! Indi- | 8.1. | pny
cative 2. | ois cative 2. | pms, usually épnoSa
3. | onot(v) 3. | ton [(§ 116, 2).
D. 2. | parov D. 2. | parov
3. | pardy 3. | épairny
P.1. | pavey P. 1. | bauer
2.|paré 2. | Spare

§ 3. | paci(v) 3. | épacay

Subj. | a, ons, On, diTov, Pauev, | Opt. gatnv, palns, paln, palnrov

o7Te, paor(v) and ¢airov, gahrny and

Imp. | Pal, or P&S: (obupas:), piirw, galrny, galnuey and ¢ai-

girov, pitayv, pate, patw- bev, palnre and aire, paiev

a pb et and gdytwv Fut. | oho

nt. vou Aor. | é

Part. (ods, paca, pdv Hite

G. pdvros, pdons)
MIDDLE.

Perf. Imp. reg@doSw (Pl. Tim. 72, d.), let it be said. Impf. Ind. épavyro, Lys.
Fragm. 3. [X. Cy. 6. 1, 21, is a false reading]; Inf. @doSa:, Aesch. Pers.
687, in chorus. Part. dduevos (rare), affirming.

Verbal adjective, ards, paréos. :

1In composition: dvrignu, obupnu, avripnor(v), cbupnor(y), ete., but dyre-
ghs (accent on ultimate), cuupfjs, and Subj. dvtipa, avripfs, etc.

19

th iain»

218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -p. [§ 179.

Remark 1. In the second person 7s, both the accentuation and the Iota
subscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the
Pres. Ind. (except gis), see § 33, a.

Rem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm,
(aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Fut. tow, and Aor. épnoa, have only the
last signification. The Part. dds is not used in Attic prose; still, y Pl. Ale. 2,

139, c. pdyres.

Rem. 3. With gypl the verb jul, inquam, may be compared, which, like
inquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said; the imperfect
jv, # is used in the phrases jv & éyd, said I, 4 ® 8s, said he, to describe a con-
versation.

$179. The following Deponents also belong here.

1. dyapa, to wonder, Impf. ipydynv; Aor. pydodny (jyacdpyy,
Epic and Dem. 18, 204); Fut. dyécoua. Verbal Adj. dyacrds.

2. Svivapa, to be able, second Pers. divacat [dvvy from the Ion.
Sivear, tragic and later, § 172, 2, (a)], Subj. dvvwpar ($ 176, 1), Imp.
Stvaco, Inf. SivacIar, Part. Suvdpevos; Impf. vvéuny and jovvdépmy,
second Pers. édivw (not édvvaco, § 172, 2), Opt. dvvaiuny, divaio
(§ 176, 1); Fut. durpoopar; Aor. urn Inv, ndvv_Inv and eédvvdcInv
(not #dvvdoInv), the last Jon. and in Xen. (Aug., § 120, Rem.
1); Perf. dedivnuar. Verbal Adj. duverds, able and possible.

3. ériorapat (like torapar), to know, (properly, to stand upon
something, to be distinguished from édicraya), second Pers.
éxicraca (ériora seldom and only Poet.), Subj. éricrwyae (|| 176,
1), Imp. ézicrw [seldom and only in the poets and later writers,
éxiotaco, § 172, 2 (b)]; Impf. Arwrdyny, iriorw [seldom and
only in the poets and later writers, 7ricraco, § 172, 2 (b)], Opt.
eruoraipny, eriorato (§ 176, 1); Fut. éruerncopar; Aor. qrierySyy.
(Aug., § 126, 3.) Verbal Adj. éroryrds.

4. apa, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. only poetic, in prose
épdw is used instead of it); Aor. npdodnv, I loved; Fut. épacdy-
copa, I shall love. [Pass. épdyo (from épdw), I shall be loved.]
Verbal Adj. épacrds.

5. xpeuapa, to hang, be suspended, pendeo, Subj. xpéumpor
(§ 176, 1), Part. xpeudmevos; Impf. éxpendyny, Opt. xpewaiuny, -axo,
-airo (§ 176, 1), (Arist. Vesp. 298, xpéuowte, comp. pdpvapat,
§ 230, and pepvolunv, § 154, 8); Aor, éxpendodnv; Fut, Pass

§ 180.) VERBS IN -pu 219

cpepacIjoopat, I shall be hung; Fut. Mid. xpepjooua, pendebo,
I shall hang.

6. mpiacIa, to buy, éxpidnv, second Pers. érpiw (an Aor. Mid.,
and found only in this tense, which the Attic writers employ
instead of the ‘Aor. of dvéopat, viz. éwvnodpnv, Which is not used
by them, § 122, 4), Subj. zpfopa: (§ 176, 1); Opt. mpuafuqy, -ato,
-aito (§ 176, 1); Imp. zpiw; Part. rpidpevos.

§ 180. (b) Verbs in -e (ri-Sy-pt, OE-).

“I-y-yu (stem ‘E-), to send. Many forms of this verb are found
only in composition.

ACTIVE.

Pres. Ind. tyut, ns, tyor(v) ; terov; fewer, tere, itor(v) [ietor(v)];

Subj. ia, ifs, if; irov; iduer, ire, idoi(v); apd, apis, adh,
etc.

Imp. fet, iérw, etc. — Inf. igvas. — Part. iels, ieioa, iév.

Impf. | Ind. fovy (from ‘IEQ), aplouy (rarer Hplovy, rare few, rpotew, Apley),
feis, tet, &plec (rarer Hple:); terov, iérny; tener, tere, leoay,
adlecay (rarer nplecay).

Opt. fefny (second Pers. Pl. aplorre, Plat.; third Pers. Pl. apioer,
X. H. 6. 4, 3).

Perf. eika.—Plup eixew.— Fut. fow. — Aor. I. fixa (§ 173, 2).

Aor. II. | Ind. Sing. is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 173, 2); Dual efrov, a@e?rov,
‘elrnv; Plur. eiuev, wadeiuer, cite, dveire, Eoay, commonly
celoay, apeioay.

Subj. , js, 4¢@, apis, ete.

Opt. efny, elns, ein; elrov, adetroy, eirnv; ciuev, apeiuer, efre, apei-
Te, elev, deiev.

Imp. és, Ses, €rw; Erov, &perov, Erwy; Ere, iere, Erwoay and evrwr.

Inf. a, apeivat. — P. eis, cioa, apeioan, ev, apév, Gen. évros, efons,

VTOS.

Remark 1. On the Aug. of dpinus, see § 126, 3.

Rem. 2. The form of the Impf. fy is very doubtful, and the forms %s, %
are very rare. The form few has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf. of efu:,
to go; it is Att. and Ion., a secondary form of four.

220 VERBS IN -pt. [§ 181.
, MIDDLE.
Pres. Ind. teuot, feoat, tera, etc. — Subj. idua, apidua, if, aif, ete.
Imp. feo, or fov.— Inf. feoSar. — Part. i€uevos, -n, -ov.
Impf. i€unv, teoo, etc. — Opt. ieluny, Att. ioluny, ioto, aduoio, ete.
Aor. II. | Ind. efunv Subj. dua, apepraut, ts 40%; Ara, apyra
cigo, adeico Opt. mpootuny, -010, -oiTo, -oluedsa, -oioe,

eiro, apeiro

-oivyTo (mpociro, mpoeiose, mpocivTo
elueda, etc.

are rarer forms)

ob (apod, mpood), second Pers. Pl.
Eade (Aperde, mpdeave), éodw, etc.).
éodai.— Part. guevos, -7, -ov.

Imp.
Inf.

Perf. eluat, weSeiuar; Inf. efoda, uedetoSa.—Plup. efunv, eloo, adeioo, etc.
— Fut. fioowa:. — Aor. I. pxdunv (rare, § 173, 2).

PASSIVE.
A. I. ef3ny, P. ESijva, etc. — Fut. EShoouat. — Verb. Adj. érds, eros (&peros).

Rem. 3. Besides the two verbs riSyu: and tm, only the following dialectic
verbs belong here, viz., "AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though dibetio'(y), from the
last is found in X.); BiCquat and AIH-MI.

§181. (c) Verbs im -t, only ets (1), to go.

PRELIMINARY Remark. The verbs eZui, to go, and eiml, to be, are pre-
sented together (though the last, on account of its stem "ES, does not belong
here), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of the two
verbs in their formation.

PRESENT.
Ind. S. 1. | eiul, to be Subj. & Ind.1.| Zu, to go Subj. tw
2. | ef iis 2. | ef ins
3. | éori(v) 7 3. | elor(v) %
D. 2. | éordy Tov D, 2. | trov YnTov
3. | éordy FiTov 3.| trov Yntov
P.1. | éouév dpmev P. 1. | tuev Ywwev
2. | éoré qre 2. | tre inte
3. | eiot(v) éo1(v) 3. | taou(v) Ywou(v)
Imp. &. 2. | tos: Inf. elvan Imp. | 791, mpdsidt | Inf. iévar
éorw (seld. apdset)
D. 2 | éc7rov Part. dv, oda, 3. | trw Part. idy, iod-
toTrwv by D. 2. | trov, mpdsirov| oa, idy
P. 2. | gore G. bvros, otons 3. | Trev Gen. idvros,
8. | Zorwoay (mapdv, mapov-| P. 2. | tre, mpdsire iovons.
(rare €orwy;| oa, mapdy, 3. | trwoay, or (mapiay, mapi-
bvrwv, Plat.| G. wapdvros) idvrwy (trwy | ovca, ae,
Legg. 879, b.) Aesch. E.32.)} G. mapidvros).

ee a

SSS Sern

$ 181.] VERBS IN -pl. 221

IMPERFECT.
__ Ind. Opt. Ind. Opt.
S. 1. | 4, I was env S. 1. | few or ja, I went | tom or
iotny
2. | AoSa (§ 116, 2)) es 2. | jes and fFewda | tors
3. | qv (from je-v) | €% 3. | Hes. Yor
D.2. | forov (Frov) | efnrov D. 2. | Heerov, us’ly 7Tov | foro
3. | horny (Hrnv) | eifrny 3. | nelrny, “ Arnv| iolrny
P. 1. | homer elnuev (seldom efuev)| P. 1. | femer, “ ger | Tomer
2. | Hire (fore) etnre (seld. poet. ere) 2.| Here, “ gre | tore
3. | hoa efnoay and elev 3. | feoav (joav poet.)| touey
Fut. rou, I shall be, on, or @re, Zara, etc. — Opt. évoluny. — Inf. éreoSau.

— Part. éoduevos.— Verbal Adj. éoréov, ovverréov.

Mippte Form: Pres. teuat, tera: or %, tera, etc., Imp. teoo, Inf. teoSat,
Part. iguevos; the Impf. i€unv, teoo, etc., signifying to hasten, ought
probably to be written with the rough breathing, which is strongly
confirmed by the manuscripts, and to be referred to fu. — Verbal Adj.
irés, iréov, rarer irnréoy.

Remark 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of «iu, to be (except the second
Pers. «f), see § 33 (a). In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back
as the general rules of accentuation permit, e. g. mdpequs, a Hg mdpeori(y), ete.
Imp. wdpio&t, EdvicS1; but rapiv on account of the temporal augment, wapéorat
on account of the omission of ¢ (wapéoera), wapeiva: like infinitives with the
ending -va, rapa, -js, -f, etc., mape?re, wapeiev, on account of the contraction;
the accentuation of the Part. in compound words should be particularly noted,
e. g. wapéy, wapotoa, mapdv, Gen. mapdytos (so also mapidy, Gen. mapidvros).

Rem. 2. The compounds of ef, to go, follow the same rules as those of
eiul, to be; hence several forms of these two verbs are the same in compounds,
e. g. mdpeyu, dpe, and mdpeor(v) (the last being third Pers. Sing. of eZu: and
third Pers. Pl. of eiut); but Inf. wapsévar, Part. mapidy.

Rem. 3. The form eTey, esto, be it so! good! shortened from efn and strength-
ened by av, must be distinguished from the shortened form elev instead of
etnoay of the third Pers. Pl. Opt. Impf.— A secondary form, yet critically to be
rejected, of the third Pers. Imp. #rw instead of érrw, is found once in Pl. Rp.
361, c., with the varying reading ?erw.— The form of the first Pers. Impf. is
often #, among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato; the form funy is
rare (Lys. 7, 34, X. Cy. 6.1, 9).— The form of the second Pers. Impf. js is
found frequently in the later writers, and rarely in lyric passages of the Attic
poets.— The Dual forms with o are preferred to those without 0; on the con-
trary, #re is preferred to jere (Aristoph.).

Rem. 4. The form of the third Pers. Sing. Impf. #ew instead of fe, from
elut, sometimes occurs, even before consonants, Ar. Plut. 696. rposyew (in
Senarius) ; Pl. Crit. p. 114, d. (in the best MSS.) ; few, Pl. Crit. 117, e. (in the
best MSS.); mporjew, Pl. Tim. 43, 6; dvifew, ib. 60, c; d&arfew, ib. 76, b.

Rem. 5. The Ind. Pres. of «Zu, to go, has regularly in the Attic prose-
writers the meaning of the Fut. Z shall or will go or come; hence the Pres. is

supplied by %pxoua (§ 167, 2); the Inf. and Part. have likewise a Pres. and
Fut. meaning.

19*

222

VERBS IN -pul.

[§ 182.

II. Verbs in -zi which annex the Syllable vvi or vi to the
‘Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings.

§ 182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem
ends with a, «, 0, or with a Consonant.

A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, e, or o.

Voice.| Tenses.) a. Stem in a. b. Stem in e. c. Stem in o (w).
Act. | Pres. oKedd-vvi-u | Kopé-vyd-us} orpé-vvi-y }
Impf. é-oxedd-vvi-y } é-Kopé-vyi-y | é-orpé-vvi-y }
Perf. é-oK €d0-Ka ke-Kdpe-Ka é-oTpw-Ka
Plup. é-oKedd-Kewy é-Ke-Kope-Kew e-oTpw-KEW
Fut. oKeda-ow kopé-ow, oTpo-ow
Att. oxeda&, -ds, -@ | Att. Kopa, -e%s, -e7
Aor. e-oneda-oa é-Kope-o7a. e-oTpw-ou
Mid. | Pres. oKedd-vyi-wat kopé-vyi-mat oT pPO-vvi-pas
Impf. é-oKeda-vyi-uny é-Kope-vy-unv e-o Tpw-vvi-uny
Pert. é-oxéda-o-p.0t - Ke-Kébpe-o- at e-oT pw-pat
Plup. é-onedd-o-unv é-Ke-Kopé-o-unv e-oTpo-unv
Fat. Kopé--omat
Aor. €-Kope-o-dunv
BPE E Ké-Kopé-o-oan
Pass. | Aor. | é-oxedd-o-Snv é-Kopé-o-Syv é-oTpo-Syv
Fut. oKeda-o-Shoouat Kope-o-Shoouat | oTpw-Shorouat
Verbal Adj. oxeda-o-Tds kope-o-Tds oTpw-rds
oxeda-o-Téos Kope-o-T€0s OT pw-TE0s.
‘And ockeda-vviw, eonedd-vyvov — kope-vviw, é-kopé-vyvov —orpw-vviw,
| oT pe-vvvoy (v always short).

B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant.

Pres. bA-Ad-mu,' perdo, | BA-Av-wat, pereod, | Su-vi-y * Sp-vi-bat
Impf. wr-Ao-v ! @A-AU-peny dp-vo-v* ao-vi-pqy
Perf. I. | 6A-dAe-xa (?OAEQ), perdidi, Ou-@mo-Ka, Ou-bo-mat
§ 124, 2. (OMoQ)
Perf. II. | 8A-wA-a, perii, § 124, 2. i
Plup. I. | 6A-wAé-cew, perdideram, ou-oud-Kew bu-wud-unv
Plup. II. | 6A-éA-ev, perieram,
Fut. OA-@, -€is, -€7 6A-ovpat, -€r bu-odmat, -€F ;
Aor. I. | &Ae-ca A. IL. oa-dpny | &uo-ca amo-oduny
A. I. P. wd-o-Syv (et auddnv)
F. 1. P. du0-0-Sjooua.
1 And OAAU-w, &AdAv-ov — duvi-w, &uyv-oy (always 3).

ReMARK. “OAAdu comes by assimilation from éA-vius (§ 18, Rem.). For an
example of a stem-ending with a mute, see Sefxviy: above, under the para-
digms (§ 175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass. of Suvips is d6uwpoouévos. The
remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup, commonly omit the « among the Attic

writers, €. g. dudporat, 6udporTo,

ee

CE DI

§ 183.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -pt. 223

SuMMARY OF THE VERBS BELONGING HERE.

The Stem ends,
A. In a Vowel and assumes -vvi.

§ 183. (a) Verbs whose Stem ends in a.

1. xepd-vvi-~s (poetic secondary form xipyde, xipvnys; Epic and
poet. xepdw), to miz, Fut. xepaow, Att. xepd; Aor. éxépica; Perf.
Kéxpaxa; Mid. to mix for one’s self, Aor. éxepacdpnv; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. xéxpapar (xexepacpa, Anacr. 29,13; Inf. xexepao-Ioa, Luc.
Dial. Meretr. 4, 4); Aor. Pass. éxpadnv, Att. also éxepdoSyv
(Metathesis, § 156, Rem.).

2. kpepa-vvi-yt, to hang, Fut. xpeudow, Att. xpewd; Aor. éxpepa-
oa; Mid. or Pass. xpepdvvipa, to hang one’s self, or be hung (but
Kpenapar, to hang, § 179, 5); (Perf. Mid. or Pass. xexpésapar in
later writers ;) Fut. Pass. xpenaodjooua; Aor. éxpeudodynv, I was
hung, or I hung.

3. werd-vvi-pt, to spread out, to open, Fut. weracw, Att. werd;
Aor. érérioa (Perf. Act. reréraxa, Diod.); Perf. Mid. or Pass.
wérraipat (§ 155, 2) (weréracpat, non-Attic and Luc.); Aor. Pass.
éretac Inv.

4. oxedd-vwvi-pu, to scatter, Fut. oxedacw, Att. oxedd; Aor. éoxé-
deca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éoxédacpar; Aor. Pass. éoxeddodyv.

§ 184. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in e.

Pre_iminary Remark. The verbs vim, ocBévvims, and also Gévvimt
(§ 186), do not properly belong here, since their stem originally ended in @, ‘EX-
(comp. ves-tire), SBES- (comp. &rBeo-ros), ZAS- (comp. (wo-rhp, (Go-rpor, (da-
Ts, (wo-rds) ; but by the omission of the «, they become analogous to verbs in
-e and -o.

1. €-vvi-pu, to clothe, in prose dudrévvipu, Impf. dudrévvey with-
out Aug.; Fut. dudréow, Att. dudid; Aor. hydiera; Perf. Act.
wanting; Perf. Mid. or Pass. judicopat, judicrat, Hudieora, ete.,
Inf. jydiéo dor; Fut. Mid. dudréropar. (Aug. §§ 126, 3. and 230.)
The vowel of the Prep. is not elided in the Common language,
hence also émégacIa, X. Cy. 6. 4, 6.

2. Cé-vwi-w, to boil, Trans., Fut. féow; Aor. eoa; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. eeopor; Aor. Pass. éLéoIyv. — (Léw, on the contrary, is
usually intransitive).

224 SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN pt. [§§ 185-187. —

3. Kopé-vvi-t, to satiate, Fut. xopéow, Att. Kop; Aor. éxdpeca;
Aor. Mid. éxopacdynv; Perf. Mid. or Pass. xexépeopoar; Aor. Pass.
exopeoS nv.

4. oBé-vvi-ps, to extinguish, Fut. cBéow; first Aor. éoBeoa, I
extinguished; second Aor. éoByv, I ceased to burn; Perf. é>Byxa,
I have ceased to burn. — Mid. cBévvipa, to cease to burn, intrans.
Fut. oBycopor; Perf. Mid. or Pass. éoBecpar; Aor. Pass. éoBéo-
Inv; Fut. Pass. cBeoIjoopa. No other verb in -vyms has a
second Aor. Act. (§ 191, 2).

5. oropé-vvi-p, to spread out (shortened form ordpvipt, Poet.
and X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. oropéow, Att. cropd; Aor. éordpeca ;
Mid. to spread out for one’s self. The other tenses are formed
from orpévvipe; éotpwodpyv; eoTpwpa, eoTpdIynv, otpwrds (non-
Att. €ordépecpat, éoropér Inv, and éoropydnv). See § 182.

§ 185. (c) Verbs whose Stem ends in t.

ti-vvi-ut (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. rl-vvi-ua, to get pay, to punish, to avenge,
secondary Epic form of tiyw and tivouer.—In Attic poetry. the Mid. is often
found, and with one y, trivia.

§ 186. (d) Verbs in 0, with the o lengthened into o.

1. £6-vvi-pm, to gird, Fut. oow; Perf. &wxa, Paus.; Aor. @woa;
Mid. to gird one’s self, Aor. Mid. elwodynv; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
eLwopat (§ 131).

2. pw-vvv-pt, to strengthen, Fut. poow; Aor. Gpwoa; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. éjpwyor, Imp. éppwoo, vale, farewell, Inf. éppaoou; Aor.
Pass. éppooFyv (§ 131); Fut. Pass. poo djoopeat.

3. orpa-vvi-pt (§ 182), to spread out, Fut. orpdow; Aor. éorpw-
ga, etc. See oropewi-p (§ 184, 5).

4. xpw-vvi-pu, to color, Fut. xpoow; Aor. éxypwoa; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. xéxpwopar; Aor. Pass. éxpiadny.

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a Consonant and assumes -po.
§187. (a) In a Mute.

1. dy-vi-ps, to break, Fut. dw; Aor. éefa, Inf. afar (Part. Lys.
100, 5. xaredgavres with the Aug.}; second Perf. ééya, I am
‘broken; Mid. to break for one’s self, Aor. éagdynv; Aor. Pass.
éaynv (Aug., § 122, 4).

Se ae

§ 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -pt, 225

2. deix-vi- ps, see § 175.

3. eipy-vi-pe (or eipyw), to shut m, Fut. eipéw; Aor. eipga, Inf.
elpéat, Part. épgas (Pl. Polit. 285, b.), weprépgavres (Th. 5, 11),
évvépgavros (Pl. Rp. 5. 461, b), Subj. xaSeipEys (with the variation
xatépéys), Pl. Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass. eipydnv; Perf. edpyyau.
(But cipyw, cipgw, elpfa, cipy- Inv, to shut out, etc.)

4. levy-vi-ju, to join together, Fut. fevém; Aor. evéa; Mid. to
join to or for one’s self, Fut. fevéouar; Aor. eLevgdéunv; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. eLeuypar; Aor. Pass. éevxSyy, and more frequently
elvynv.

5. ply-vi-p, to mix (uioyw, secondary form), Fut. pig; Aor.
euiga, pigor; Perf. peutxa (Polyb.); Perf. Mid. or Pass, péurypa,
peutxtor; Aor. Pass. éuixdnv, and éuiynv; Fut. Pass. px dyocopat;
Fut. Perf. pepigouar.

6. oty-vi-y4, usually as a compound: (The Attic use of the
form ofyviys is not certain) dvotyips, diotyi~. (but instead,
dvotyw, duéyw, are more frequently used in the Pres. and dvéwyov
always in the Impf.), to open, Fut. dévoifw; Aor. dvéwfa, dvotfar (in
X. Hell. jvoryor, jvorga, signifying to put to sea, to weigh anchor) ;
first Perf. dvéyxa, I have opened; second Perf. dvéwya, I stand
open, instead of which Att. dvémypat; Impf. Mid. évewydunv; Aor.
Pass. dvewdy-Syv, dvorxSjva. (Aug. § 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. dvotxréos.

7. dpopy-vi-p1, to wipe off, Fut. éudpéw; Aor. dpopga; Mid. to
wipe off from one’s self; Fut. ducopgouor; Aor. dpopédynv; Aor.
Pass. épudpydyv.

8. mypy-vi-p, to fix, fasten, freeze, Fut. rygw; Aor. eryga; first
Perf. wérnxa, Ihave fastened; second Perf. réryya, I stand fast,
am frozen; Mid. myyvipa, I stick fast; Perf. rérpypat, I stand
Jast; Aor. Pass. éraynv (more seldom éryyInv); second Fut.
Pass. rayjrouat. Verbal Adj. rpxrds.

9. pry-vi-ps, to rend, Fut. pygw; Aor. epynéa; second Perf.
epwya, I am rent (§ 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. éppngdunv; Aor.
Pass. éppaynv (€ppyyInv rare); second Fut. payjoopa.

10. ppdy-vi-ye (commonly dpdcow, Pparrw, § 143, 1), to break,
Impf. éppdyiv (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. ¢pdgw; Aor.
éppaga; Perf. Mid. or Pass. réppayyar; Aor. Pass. éppaxSyv
(édpaynv first used among the later writers),

226 VERBS. — ketot AND Fjat. [§§ 188, 189,

§ 188. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends ina Liquid.

1. &p-vi-uar (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of atpo-
pat, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, a reward,
spoils, etc. Impf. jpviuny. The remaining forms come from aYpoua.

2. xrei-vv-y1, commonly written xrivviju in the MSS., to put to
death, Att. prose secondary form of xreivw, is used in the Pres.
and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-.
The v of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong (§ 169,
Rem. 1).

3. dA-hv-pe (instead of oA-vv-u), to destroy. See § 182, B. In
prose, only in compounds.

4. Opu-vi-m, to swear. See § 182, B.

5. dp-vd-pt (poet.), zo rouse (§ 230).

6. ordp-vi-p, to spread out. See oropévvipu, § 184, 5.

§189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf..xetpat
and pat.

Previminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. KeTpat and Fuas, -

are so essentially different, in their formation, from _ other verbs in -yu, that
they require to be treated by themselves.

a. Ketpas to lve.

Ketyar, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I he down;
then Pass. I have been laid down, I am lying down (e. g. dvaxe-
po, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, ciyxera, it has been agreed
upon, compositum est, constat, but cvvréderor ixd twos, it has
been agreed by some one); this verb is a Perf. without reduplica-
tion, from the stem KEI- (contracted from KEE-).

Perf. Ind. retuat, netoo, Keira, Kelueda, Kelode, KeivTat;
Subj. céwua, cén, xénrat, etc.
Imp. xeioo, xelodw, etc. ;— Inf. xetoSat;— Part. xeluevos.

Impf. Ind. éxetuny, eivo, @xerro, third Pers. Pl. ewwro.
Opt. reoluny, xéo10, Kéorro, etc.
Fut. Keloomat.

Compounds éydnema, kardKepmat, KardKeroa, etc.;— Inf. cararetodan ; ee
KardKeio, eykewo.

§§ 190, 191.] veRBS IN -w WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -pu. 227

§ 190. b. “Hpac, to sit.

1, “Ha, properly, I have seated myself, I have been seated,
hence, J st (Jon. and poetic, also used of inanimate objects,
instead of ipiya, I have been fixed, established); this verb is
a Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. eica, to set, to establish. The stem
is “HA- (comp. jo-rat instead of 75-ra, according to § 17, 5, and
the Lat. sed-eo). .

Remark 1. The active Aorist-forms of ¢foa are dialectic (4 230) and poet.,
but the Mid. signifying to erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, elodunv;
Part. eioduevos (Th. 3, 58, évoduevos); Imp. goa, éooa (%pecou); Fut. poetic
Erouat, Exrouct (epéorouat). The defective forms of this verb are supplied by
idpiw.

Perf. Ind. jua, oa, hora, jueda, hose, Fvrat;
Imp. fico, odw, etc.; — Inf. foSa: ;— Part. huevos.
Plup. hunv, Heo, hore, hueda, jose, Fvro.

2. In prose, the compound xéIyya is commonly used instead
of the simple. The inflection of the compound differs ftom the
simple in never taking o in the third Pers. Sing., and in the
Plup., only when it has the temporal Augment :—

Perf. Kddnpat, Kadnoa, KddnT at, etc.;— Subj. caS@uat, nadH, Kadi-
Tat, etc.;—Imp. xdSnoo, etc.;—Inf. xadjosta;— Part. cadh-
pevos. :

Plup. exadhuny and KaShunr, éxddnvo and KaSijoo, éxdSnro and
Kadioro, etc.;— Opt. cadtoluny, xddoio, kddotro, etc.

Rem. 2. The Opt. forms: xaSzuny, -fo, -fro, etc. are doubtful. — The
defective forms of ja are supplied by €CecSa, or eodar (prose nadéCecdsat,
Kadiersat).

VERBS IN -w, WHICH FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF VERBS IN -ut, IN FORMING
THE sECOND Aor. Act. AND Mip., THE Pres. AnD Perr. Act.

§ 191. IL Second Aor. Act. and Mid.

1. Several verbs with the characteristic a, ¢ o, v, form a
second Aor. Act. and (though rarely) a second Aor. Mid., ac-
cording to the analogy of verbs in -y, — this tense being without
the mode-vowel, and appending the personal-endings to the
stem. But all the remaining forms of these verbs are like
verbs in -w.

2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the
modes and participials, is like that of the second Aor. Act. of

228

VERBS IN -© WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -pt,

[$ 191.

verbs in -. “The characteristic-vowel, with some exceptions,
is lengthened, as in éorny, viz. & and e¢ into », o into o, t and ¥

into = and @.

This lengthened vowel remains, as in éo07n,

throughout the Ind., Imp.,and Inf. The third Pers. Pl. in -yooyv
(Char. a) and -tcay shortens the vowel, when the poets use the
abridged form in -v, instead of -cayv, e. g. Biv, civ.
Opt., and Part., with some exceptions, which will be noticed in
the following tables,.are like verbs in -p, e. g. Baiyy (orainy),
oBeinv (Seinv), yvoiny (Soin), yvovs (Sovs). The Imp., like orp,
in the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending -J:, and the stem-
vowel remains long through all the persons; in compounds of
Baive, Bnd: is also shortened into Ba, e. g. xaraBa, zpdBa, «isBa,
euBa, ériBa instead of xaraBynX, etc.

The Subj.,

Modes a. Characteris. a| b. Characteris. e | c. Characteris. o d. Character. i
and BA-Q, Balyw, | SBE-Q, cBévyym,| TNO-O, yeyvdo- dv-w,
Persons to go. to extinguish. kw, to know. to wrap up.
Ind. 8. 1. | @-By-v, I went, | oBnv, I ceased to| éyvwv, Iknew, | edvv, I went in
2. | &-Bn-s éaBns [burn,| eyvws edus [or under,
3. | &-Bn zaBn eyve 250
D. 2. | &-By-rov éaBnrov eyvwrov eirov
3. | é-Bh-rnv éeoBarny eyvarny edbrny
P. 1. | &-Bn-nev éoBnuev eyvwpmev eddmev
2. | &By-Te éaBnre eyvwre Zd0re
3. | &-Bn-cay éoBnoay eyvwoay Zdioay
(Poet. @Bav) (Poet. 2yvwr) (Poet. giv)
Subj. S.| 66, Bis, Bi! | oa, fs, F yr@, yv@s, yve' | d0e, ns, n'
D. | Birov oBirov yv@rov dénrov
P. | Bauer, Fre, oBeuer, FTE, yvGpev, @TE, ddwmer,
aoily oo1(v) ao(v) nre, woi(v)
Opt. 8.1. | Batyy oBelnv yvotny ?
2. | Balns oBelns yvolns
3. | Baln oBeln yvoin
D. 2. | Batnrov et atrov| «Belnroy et troy | yvolnrov et otrov
3. | Buhrnv et aitny| oBehrnv et elrny| yvothrny et oltny
P.1. Balnuev et aiuev| oBelnucy et eiucr| yvotnuey et otuer
2. | Balnre et aire | oBelnre et cire | yvolnre et oire
3.| Batev (seldom| oBeiev qt, fois
Bainoay ywolnoay
Imp. S. Bas, jo = BIAS, ATw* yas, dtw* 5091, dew ®
D. 1.) Birov, Arov oBiroyv, Arey yaerov, Twv ddTov, UTwy
P. 2. | Bie oBijTe yvare dite
3. | Bhrwoay and oBhrwoay and | yrérwoay and | dirwoayr et
Bayroy oBevtwy yvovT av dtvtTwy
Inf. Bijva oBijvat yvevat ddvat
Part. Bas, Goa, dv oBels, cioa, &v | yvovs, odoa, dv | dus, toa, ty
G. Bayros G. oBévros G. yvdvtos G. ddvrTos.
1 Compounds, e. g. dvaBa, avaBijs, etc.; arog ha; diayva; dvaddw.
? Aeschyl. Suppl. 230 (215) ovyyvgn; but in the Mid. form ovyyvoiro.
3 Compounds, e. g. avd Bnd. avdBynte ; Amdo By; Sidyywdt; avddvs.

—_—

:

$$ 192, 193.] VERBS IN -w LIKE VERBS IN -put. 229

Remark. The Opt. form diy (instead of dulnv) is not found in the Attic
dialect, but in the Epic (4 227).

$192. Summary of Verbs with a second Aor. like
Verbs in -pe.

>.

Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form :—

1. ddpdonw, to run away (§ 161,10), Aor. (APA-) pay, -as, -d, -duer, -are,
-aoay (piv Poet.), Subj. dpa, Spas, dp, Sparor, Spauev, Spare, SpHor(v), Opt.
Spalnv, Imp. dpadi, -drw, Inf. dpava:, Part. dpas, -aoa, -dv, Gen. dpdyros.

2. wérouat, to fly (§ 166, 29), Aor. (IITA-) &rrny, Inf. rrijva:, Part. wrds; Aor.
Mid. éxrduny, rrdoda.

3. xplacSa, see § 179, 6.

4. oxédAw or oxedéw, to dry, second Aor. (SKAA-) écxAny, to wither, Intrans.,
Inf. cxAjva, Opt. cxaatny.

5. @3d-vw, to come before, to anticipate (§ 158, 7), Aor. 2pSnvr, oSiva, pSas,
$30, pralny.

6. xalw, to burn, Trans. (§ 154, 2), Aor. (KAE-) éxdny, I burned, Intrans.; but
first Aor. Zcavoa, Trans.

7. péw, to flow (§ 154, 2), Aor. (‘PYE-) eppinv, I flowed.

8. xalpw, to rejoice (§ 166, 32), Aor. (XAPE-) éxapnv.

9. adrloxopat, to be taken, Aor. (‘AAO-) fjAwy and édAwy (§ 161, 1), aA@var,
GAD, -Gs, -G, etc., GAolny, adobs (always ad, except in the Ind.).

10. Bidw, to live, Aor. éBiwy, Subj. Bid, -Gs, -G, etc., Opt. Bigny (not Biolny,
as olny, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf. Brofnr), Inf. Bidvor, Part. Bods
[odca, ody]; but the cases of Biots are supplied by the first Aor. Part. Bidcas.
Thus: aveBiwy, I returned to life, from avaBidoxouat (§ 161,3). The Pres. and
Impf. of Bidw are but little used by the Attic writers; for these tenses, they em-
ploy ¢@ ; besides these tenses, only the Fut. (joe was in good use among Attic
writers ; the remaining tenses were borrowed from fidw; thus, Pres. (@; Impf.
Ewy (§ 1387, 3); Fut. Bidcoua, more rarely (how; Aor. éBlwr (X. O. 4, 18, has
also éBiwoev); Perf. BeBiwxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. BeBiwra:, Part. BeBiwuévos.

11. vw (i ord), to produce, second Aor. épiv, Intrans., to be produced, be born, be
naturally, pivat, pis, Subj. pdw (Opt. wanting in the Attic dialect); but the first
Aor. @pica, Trans. I produced; Fut. giow, Trans. I will produce. The Perf.
mépixa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid.
dtoum ; Fut. picoua.

Remark. Here also belong the forms oxés and cxolnyv of the second

Aor. érxov from éxw, to have (§ 166, 14), and w73¢ of the second Aor. ériov
from wivw, to drink (§ 158, 5).

$193. IL Perfect and Pluperfect.

The Attic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per-
fects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-Q, to
20

TS IP Pe a ae ere aoe

230 VERBS IN -w LIKE VERBS IN =p. [§ 193.

fear, 8é-8-a, then rejecting the mode-vowel, in the Dual and Pl.
Ind. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent in the Inf., e. g. d€-d:-
pev instead of de-di-a-vev. In this way, these forms of the Perf.
and Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf. of
verbs in -ps, e. g. i-ora-vev. The stem-vowel remains short, e. g.
Sédiuev, rérAdmev, rerAava; but in the third Pers. Pl. Perf., the —
mode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. de-di-aor; with verbs in -do,
however, a is contracted with the stem-vowel, e. g. re-rAd-dow =
Te-TAG-ot.

Remark 1. Except the forms of AIN and fornu, all the Perfects of this
kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing.
déd:a is not Attic.

Rem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only
wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -& in the second Pers. Sing., it is
wholly analogous to the forms in-u:. So the Inf. Both append their termi-
nations to the short stem-vowel; Sed:éva: is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and
the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is a, are formed like verbs in -ju, since
the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination,
and the Opt. Plup. ends in -afny, e. g. éord-w, éo7@, -fs, etc., TeTAalny. The
Part. of verbs in -dw contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -dés and -és,
e. g. éorabs = éotés, éEvta-ds = éotds and éords, and also have a peculiar
feminine form in -éoa, e. g. écraoa; all the Cases retain the w, e. g. €ora@ros,
égtéons, etc. ;

Rem. 3. The form resolved by ¢ is retained in some participles, in the Ionic
dialect, e. g. éoreds, standing firm; so from. réSvnka, TeSvews (never Tedvas)
together with reSvnxds, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms,
remains in all the Cases, e. g.

éoteds, éote@oa, éoreds, Gen. éoreadtos, -dons.
Tesveds, TESveaou, TEesveds, Gen. TeSveGTos, -do7ns.

BeBnxa and rérAnxa never have this form of the participle.

Perfect. Pluperfect. Perfect. Pluper fect.
Ind. S. 1. | d€-di-a ededtev ‘E-STA-A
2. | dé-5i-as édedters :
3. | 5é-di-e(v) | ededter
D. 2. | d€-d3i-rov éd€diTov €-oTG-TOv éordrov
3. | 5€-5i-roy ededirqv é-oTd-Tov éorarny
P. 1. | 5é-di-pev edediuev é-oTd-wev eordmey
2. | d€-di-re eddie €-oTG-TE éorate
3. | de-dt-dor(v) | edédicay (edediecav) | é-o7a-o1(r) éorioay
Imp. 5é-di-S1, SediTw, etc. é-o7Td-a1, etc., 3 Pers. Pl.
Subj. de-di-w, -ns, -n, ete. éotaitwoay and -dyrwy
Inf. de-di-evan ێ-oTd-vat
Part. de-di-ds, -via, -ds, Gen. -dros é-ordés, -Goa, -bs (-ds 2)
Gen. -@rTos, -éans
Subj. Pf. | éo7a, fis, -7, ete.
Opt. Plup. | éoralny, Dual éoralnrov and -atrov, Pl. éoralnuey and -aiuer,
etc., third Pers. Pl. éoratev.

§§ 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERF. LIKE VERBS IN pu, 231

Rem. 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. ded:efn, Pl. Phaedr. 251, a. is re-
stored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. of fornu:, in this form never
takes the strengthened augment e«.— The Imp. Perf. ord, etc., and the Opt.
Plup. éoralny, etc., are poetic only. But the Inf. éordva: is in constant use ;
yet éornxéva is very seldom; also the Part. érrds, -doa, is far more frequent
than éornxds, -via; the neuter éornxds, on the contrary, is more frequent than
éords. Instead of the Ind. Sing. Perf., Plup., and Part. of 5éd5ia, the forms
of dé30:xca are more frequent; besides the Indic. Perf. and Plup., particularly
in the Sing., the Inf. and Part. were used.

§194. Summary of Verbs with a Perfect like Verbs
am -pe.

Besides the two verbs above, the following have this form of the Perfect: —

1. ylyvoua, to become, TETAA (stem IA): Perf. (Sing. yéyova, -as, -e), yeya-
pev, yéyare, yéydaor(v), Inf. yeyduey (Epic), Part. yeyés, yeyaoa, yeyés, Gen.
*yeyaros.

2. Balyw, to go, Perf. Bé8nxa, BEBAA: Pl. BéBauer, -are, -Gor(v); third Pers,
Pl. Subj. éufeSaor(v) (Pl. Phaedr. 225, e), Inf. BeBiiva:, Part. BeBds (X. Hell.
7.2, 3), BeBvia (BeBGoa, Pl. Phaedr. 254, b), BeBds, Gen. BeB@ros ; Plup. éBe-
Bier, -ire, -icay. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia-
lectic (§ 230). :

3. Svfoxw, to die, réSvnxa, TEONAA: PI. réSviver, réSvate, TeSvaor(v), Imp.
résvidi, Part. redvnnds, Tedvykvia, TedvnKds, OF TedveEds, TESvedoa (Lys. and
Dem.), tedveds, Inf. reSviivas (Aesch. reSvaven from redvadvat) ; Plup. éréSva-
cay, Opt. redvalny.

4. TAAQ, to bear, Perf. rérAnka, TETAAA: Dual rérAdrov, Pl. rérAdper,
Térhare, TeTAGo(y), Imp. TETAGH, -Utw, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. retrdvat, but
Part. rerAnnds ; Plup. érérAduer, érérAdre, érérAdoay, Dual érérAdrov, érerAd-
tnv, Opt. rerAalny.

5. Here belong the two participles of,

BiBpéoxw (§ 161, 6), fo eat, Perf. BéBpwxa, poetic BeBpds, Gen. -dros.
mimrw (§ 163, 3), to fall, rérrwxa, Att. Poet. rerrés (comp. § 230).

Remarx. There are also found, in imitation of Homer, «éxpayyev and
the Imp. «éxpax1, from the Perf. «éxpaya (from xpd¢w, to cry out); also the
Imp. wéreiod:, from wéroida, to trust (from mefSw, to persuade), is found in
Aesch. Eum. 602. See § 230. The Perfects ofa and Zo:xa require a distinct
consideration.

§ 195. O?8a and éouxa.

1. O73a, Perf. from "EIAQ (second Aor. ¢dov, I saw, Inf. iseiv, videre),
properly I have seen, hence I know; for the syllable of, see § 140, 4; for the
change of 8 into @ in Yoror, etc., see § 17,5; for the change of 8 into cin
Yopuey, see § 19,1. Its inflection is as follows: —

232 Oida AND oxa. [$ 196.
PERFECT.

Ind. 8. 1. | ofda Subj. ei3@ Imp.
2. | oloda! eidps tod Inf.
3. | olde(v) eidn Yorw eidévat

D. 2. 3. | terov, torov eidqTov, -Arov torov, toTwy
P. 1. | Youev eid@uev Part.
2. | tore eidnTe tore eldés, -via, -ds
3. | toraou(v) eidaot(v) torwoay
PLUPERFECT.

Ind. S$. 1. dew ® Dual Pl. 75emer (Poet. fouev)

2. | #des and -eroda' Hdertov, Poet. forov pdeure ( “ gore)

a

3. | 7dex(v) noeirny, fotny decay ( “ gov)

Opt. Sing. eideinv, -ns, -n; Dual cidetnrov, -Arnv; Pl. eidefnuery (seldom eide?-
pev), eidelnre, eidetey (seldom eleinoar).
Fut. etrouat (Ion. eidhow, though Isocr. cvvedjoes), I shall know or
experience ; sometimes also eiddvat, cida, eidelnv, have the same
meaning. — Verbal Adj. ioréov.

Stvoida, compounded of olda, J am conscious, Inf. cvvedéva, Imp. cbviosi,
Subj. cvve:da, etc.

1 § 116, 2, ofdas scarcely occurs in Attic.

2 First person 75n, second 7dnoSa, third 75n, are considered as Attic
forms ; yet 7dev, peacda (also ‘pdes), noe, are found in the best Attic wri-
ters. Ovaper, odare, ofdacr(v), instead of Youer, etc., are rarely found in
the Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2.4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. Pl. Ale. 141,
e. Eur. Suppl. 1047. X.O. 20,14. ofdas occurs in X. C. 4. 6, 6. The
shortening of the ec into e in the ‘Dual and Pl. of the Opt. ABepev, is poetic
and rare. S. O. T. 1232.

Remark. The Perfect, J have known, is expressed by @yywxa, and the Aorist,
I knew, by @yvev.

2. “Eo.ixa, Lam like, I seem, Perf. of "EIKQ (of this the Impf. elke, is used in
Homer), poetic ¢7xa instead of Zoixa, eixévar instead of éowéva, and (instead
of éofxaot) the anomalous Att. third Pers. Pl. ettao1, even in prose (Plat.), Part.
éorxés, in the Attic writers only in the sense of like; Att.eixdés and eixévat
(instead of éoixds, éowxévar) commonly in the dramatists, only in the sense of
probable, likely, right; hence especially in the neuter eixds, as as eixds, as is
natural ; Plup. égxew (§ 122, 5), Fut. ew (Ar.).

Here belongs the abridged form @o:yp ev, among the Tragedians, instead of
éolxauev; comp. touevy. The poetic Mid. forms #ita (Eur. Ale. 1065), second
Pers. Sing. Perf., and #ixro, third Pers. Sing. Plup., are constructed according
to the same analogy.

§ 196. III. Present and Imperfect.

There are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic dialect,
which, according to the analogy of verbs in -w, take the personal-endings
without the mode-vowel. See § 230, under dviw, taviw, épiw, cebw, tow, pépw;
oluas (§ 166, 24), of the Common language, belongs here.

ie Tee

§ 197.] DEPONENT PASSIVES. 233

§197. Summary of the Deponent Passives
(§ 102, 2, 3).

“Avaya, to wonder, Sivapuat, to be able, Kpéuapat, to hang,

aidéouat, to reverence, dusaperréouat, to be dissat- AowSopéouat, to revile,
éAdouat, to wander, isfied, palvouat, to be mad,
&uAAdouat, to contend, évaytidouat, to resist, perauéAouat, to regret,
&yridoucs (Poet.) adversor, évSuuéouat, to lay to heart, uuodrroua, to loathe,
&movoéopat, to be distracted, évvo€ouat, to consider, veuerdouc: (Poet.), to be

&ropéouat, to be perplexed, ériérouas and -éoua, to justly indignant,

&pioroxparéoua, tohavean take care, ofouas, to suppose,
aristocracy, émivoéouat, to reflect upon, ddrryapxéopat, to have an
apvéouar, to refuse ériaraua, to know, oligarchy,
&xSoua, to be displeased, papa ( Poet.), to love, meipdouat, to try,
BovAoua, to wish, evSupéouat, to be happy, mpodvuuéouat, to desire,
Bpvxdoua, to roar, . evAaBéouat, to be cautious, mpovoéouat, to foresee,
déoum, to want, “ ebvouéouai, bonis legibus eéBouat, to reverence (Aor.
déprouas (Poet.), to see, utor, érépany, Pl. Phaedr.
Snuoxparéoua, to have a ebropéouat, to be opulent, 254, b).
democracy, Hdoucs, to rejoice, pirotiéoua, to be ambi-
Siardéyouat, to converse, Sépouas (Poet.). to become — tious,
diavodouas, to think, hot, brotoréouat, to conjecture.

Remark 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass. form,
e. g. abAlCouat, to lodge; rAoiSopéoucn, to revile; dpéyoua, to strive after; mpayya-
revouat, to carry on business (Pass. rarer); piAoppovéouat, to treat kindly. Also

several of the above verbs belong here, yet they more seldom have a middle

Aorist, e. g. &yaua:, Aor. Mid. in Dem. aiddéoua, see § 166, 1, ausAAdouat, Aor.
Mid. in later writers, épyéoua: in Herod. Aesch. and in later writers, diaddéyouat
in non-Attic writers, érwoéowa in later writers, Aodopéouc:, Aor. Mid. in Isae.
6, 59, weipdoum often in Thu., rpovogoua, Eur. Hipp. 683. Paus. 4. 20, 1. piAo-
Tiuéouat in Isoc. and Aristid.— Several of the above list of verbs have a mid-

_ dle as well as a Passive form in the Fut.: aidéowa, § 166, 1, &xSouat, § 166, 4.

diadéyouat, to converse with, Siaddtouar and rarer diadrexShooua, diavoéouat, to
think, ériyséropat, § 166, 21. rpoSupéouat, to desire, rpoSuphorouc and rarer mpoSv-
pnSfooun. Both hdoua, to rejoice, and the poetic gpayua, to love, have a passive
form for their Fut.: jodjooua, épacdhooua, § 179, 4.

Rem. 2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only
in the Pres. and Impf.

Rem. 3. Among the Deponent Passives, are very many Active verbs, which

in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a Passive form

for their Aorist; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. poBéw,
terreo, to terrify; ¢oBnXijvat and poBhjcecsa, timere, to fear. Here belong all
Le in -alvery and -dvecy, derived from parcpeee tis and adjectives, almost
all in -odv, and most in -i¢ery, ¢. g. edppatvew, to gladden, edppavdivat, ebppa-
veiodar, and edppavdhoecda, to be joyful, to be happy; wenalvew, to make i

_ ~weravSijvat, wewaveioda:, maturescere, to ripen; aicxvvew, to shame, aicxuvSijvat,

aicxuveiodat (rarer aicxuvShorecSat), to feel shame; edartody, to make less, édar-
Twriva, ¢Ad\attécecsxai, to be inferior, to be conquered ; xodody, to make angry,
XorwFijva, XoAdoeaSai, succensere, to be angry; padakl(ew, to make in a
podaxioS jive (rarer podraxloasSa:), waraxteiadat, to make one’s self effemi to

20*

* “ ate ee | eo 1, 5 ee ee Sen ee are it

o
my
¥

234 ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE.

[§ 198.
be effenunate ; dpylCew, to make angry, dpyoSivat, dpyeioSat, and dpyisShoecSat, :
succensere, to be angry; there are very many others also, of which only those
most in use will be mentioned here : — -

“Ayew (from dvdyew, come, avaxSiva and avayayécSa, signifying to be carried —
to sea, in mare provehi, but Fut. avateoSa), &yelpew, ayvivai, dSpot ew, aicxivey,
auiay, alpew, aAdrrew (dAAayhoouat, often also dAAdEcaSat), apudCew, aoxorery,
avtdvew, apavifew;— BddAdAcw ;—daxavav, Siarrav ;— eSicew, emelyew (Hrelx-
anv), Eoriay, ebwxeiv ;— Array (F. ArrnSjooud and rarer yrrqcopat) ; — idpvew;
— ively, KAlvew, komay, Koulew (Komodjvat, to travel, but KoulcagSa, sibe recu-
perare, to recover for one’s self), xpivety, xvdAlvdew;—Adyew, Aclrew, Advew,
Auteiy ;—pedtone, pryvival, pyuvhoxew ;—dpéyew (dpexSjvar, and rarer
opétacSat), dpuav, dxetv ; —meidew (Fut. refcoua, : will obey, but mecodhoopat, I
will be persuaded), rnyviva, wravav, wAEKEW, TAHTTEW, TorrTevew (also moArTed-
gaoda), oyevey ; — pyyviva, pwvvivar; — ole, ohrey (cariva, camhoecSa), —
oxedavvival, onay, oreipay, owelpew, oTEAAEW (TTAATVaAL, TTAAhTET Sal), oTpepew
(orpapijva, orpapjorerdat), opddAdew (ohadrvat, cparjoeoda, seldom cpareio-
Sat), cHCew (cwd7vat, to save one’s self, but cdcacSa, to save fig one’s self, sibi
servare) ;— Taparrev, Téprety, Tpémey (Tparjva, toturn one’s self, to turn, rpévac-
Sat, to put to flight), rpépew;—oatvew (darviiva, pavhoecSa and gayeioSat, to
appear, but pavdijvat, to be shown), pavtd ew (pavtacdhoeadsa:), pepew (evexd7-
vat, oloeodar and évexdhoeoda, rarer oicShoouat), preipew (Prapivat, pSaphoec-
Sat [PSepetada:, Ion. and poet.|, poBety (PoBhjoecda: ald doBynShoedar) ; — Wev-
dew (Yevodfvat, Pevodhoouat, to deceive one’s self, be deceived, but pedoeoSau, Wev-
casa, to lie) ;— xewv.

§198. Summary of the Active Verbs most in use with
a Middle Future, § 154, 1.

eiut, to be,

éraivéw, to praise,
éadiw, to eat,
Savudlw, to wonder,
Séw, to run,

Snpdw, Snpedw, to hunt,
Styydve, to touch,
avhore, to die,
Spécrw, to leap,
kduye, to labor,
kAalw, to weep,
KAérTw, to steal,

“Aidw (dw), to sing,
a&xovw, to hear,
a&AaAd(w, to shout,
cpaprdvw, to miss,
amavTdw, to meet,
&roraiew, to enjoy,
apd w, to seize,
BadiCw, to go,
Baivw, to go,
Bidw, to live,
BaAérw, to see,
Bodw, to cry out,

Suvumt, to swear,

dpdw, to see,

ovpéw, urinam redere,

mat(w, to sport,

mwdoxw, to suffer

anddw, to leap, —

mivw, to drink,

ninrw, to fall,

tAێw, to sail,

mvéw, to blow (but ovp-
wTvEevow),

mviyw, to strangle,

yerdw, to laugh,
ynpdorw, to grow old,
yryvéonw, to know
ddxvw, to bite,
dapSdvw, to sleep,
deioa, to fear,
diaitdw, to live,
didpdonw, to run away,
didkw, to pursue,

eyxwuid lw, to praise,

xwudiw, to revel,
Aayxdvw, to obtain,
AauBdvw, to take,

Ayuda, to lick,

pavesdvw, to learn,
véw, to swim,
vebw, to nod,

oida, to know,
oiudw, to lament,
bAcav a, to howl,

mosxéw, to desire,
mposkuvéw, to reverence,
péw, to flow,

popéw, to gulp down,
ovydw, to be silent,
otwrdw, to be silent,
oxaémtw, to mock,
arovdd(w, to be zealous,

cupirrw, to whistle, etc.,

tiktw, to produce,

PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 235
Twrd(w, to rail at, - xdoKxw, to gape,
gedtyw, to flee, x¢¢@, to ease one’s self,

prdvw, to come before, xwpéw, to contain.

CHAPTER VIL

§ 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions.

Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral,
Adverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of
speech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of
these nothing need be said; hence these parts of speech are

_ treated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary.

L. €u./2t¢ %

“4

Pe ke

He

.

2

4

PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS.

PARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT.

A. ORTHOGRAPHY.

§ 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F.

1. The Greek language had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper (‘)
and the Lingual Breathing o, a Labial Breathing,’ the sound of which corre-
sponds nearly to the Eng. f, or the Latin v. In accordance with its form (F’),
which is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double
Gamma); and as the Zolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes,
it is called the Zolic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely,
between e and ¢, and is named Bad. Comp. §§ 20, 1 and 25, 2.

2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases
changed, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial £, e. g. Bia, vis, Fis
(later Ys); in other instances, it was softened into the vowel v, and, after other
vowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs av, ev, nu, ov, wy, e. g.
vais (vals), navis, xevw (xéFw) ZHol., Bots (BdF's), bdvs, bds, Gen. bovis; in

~ others still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning
_ of a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and
_ before p is not indicated, e. g. Fis, vis, ts; 0F is, ovis, dis; eiAdw, volvo; Fpddor,

pédor, etc.; it was also changed, in the beginning of some words, into a sharp
breathing, which is denoted by the Spiritus Asper, e.g. €owepos, vesperus; Evvupt,
vestio.

3. In the Homeric poems, no character denoting the breathing F any longer
exists; but it is very clear that, in the time of Homer, many words were
sounded with the Digamma, e. g. &yvuui, avat, avdoow, avddvw, Zap, ver, the

*“ The Vau, or Digamma, an important agent in early Greek orthography,
less, however, a principal than a subsidiary letter, einai much of its previous
character of vowel-consonant, or, in the technical language of the Oriental
schools, of quiescible letter. It was chiefly used as a liquid guttural, or aspirate,
somewhat akin to our English wh, to impart emphasis to the initial vowel of
words, and possessed the power, with certain limitations, of creating metrical po-
sition. But these vague and indefinite properties, were not such as to entitle it to
a regular or habitual place in the written texts of the popular Epic poems. It
was retained by the Boeotian states in monumental inscriptions till the 145
gs angers ure’s Hist. of the Language and Literature of Greece, vol. i, p. 85;
ill, p- 94.

238 DIALECTS. [s 201.

forms of *EIAQ, video; oa, exoor, viginti ; eiua, vestis; eimeiv (comp. vocare).
ExnAos, Evvuut, vestio; éds and Ss, suus ; 00, sui; of, sibi ; Eomepos, vesperus ; olkos.
vicus ; olvos, vinum, etc.; this is obvious from the following facts: (a) words the
have the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. pd Sev (= mpd Fédev) ;— (b) hence:
also a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a digammated word, canne
be elided, e. g. Alwev d¢ € (= 5 Fe), amd €o (= amd Féo);—(c) the paragogic .
(§ 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. daté of (= daté ~
Fo) ;— (d) od instead of ov« or obx, is found before the Digamma, e. g. eel
of éSév ort Xepelwy (= of Fedév);—(e) in compounds, neither Elision
nor Crasis occurs, ¢. g. diaermeuey (= diaFeurguer), dayhs (= &Fayhs);—(f) a
digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, ©
e. g. yap éSev (where the p and the Digamma belonging to éSev make a long
by position) ; — (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the
Digamma, e. g. edAAct Te oTlABwv kat eluact (= nat Feluaor), Il. y, 392.

§ 201. Interchange of Vowels.

PRELIMINARY RemarxK. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow-
els, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are
uniformly limited to certain words and forms.

1. The three vowels, ¢, 0, &, called (§ 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels (tpépa,
Tétpopa, érpdpnv) undergo various changes in the dialects : —

ais used instead ‘of « (Ion.), e. g. rpdarw, rduvw, wéyaSos instead of rpéra,
Téuvw, méyedos; so also Doric rpdpw, oxiapds, “Apraus instead of tpépw,
oxtepds, “Aprewis ; and in several particles, e. g. 8a, Téka, méxa instead of
bre, tTéTe, Wore.

e instead of a in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. réocepes,
Zponv, tedAos, BépeSpor (Ion.) instead of réccapes, four, tponv,a male, badros,

lass, BdpaSpoy, gulf; also in many verbs in -dw, e. g. porréw, dpéw (Ion.),

instead of porrdw, dpdw.

e instead of o (Doric), e. g. EBdeuqxovra instead of EBdounKoyra.

a instead of o (Ion.), in appwSeiy instead of dppwdeir.

2. The following cases are to be noted in addition: —

The long a is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par-
ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians,
€. g. Gucpa, Kamos, Gdds, Aaudrnp. The older and the later Ionic have softened
this grave dinto 7. The Attic uses both the Doric a and the softened 7, (§ 16,
7). Comp. Dor. éuépa, Ion. fuépa, Att. fuépa (with the Ion. 7 and Doric a); Ion.
godin, Dor. and Att. copia; Ion. Sépnt, Dor. and Att. Sépat.— So, also, in
the diphthong av, among the Ionic writers a is changed into y: vnis, ypnis,
instead of vais, ypais; likewise in the diphthong a in the Dat. Pl. of the first
Dec., ns and yor (Ion.) instead of as and aot.— Still, in certain words, the
Dorians retain the 7, as the Ionians do the a,

m instead of « (Holic and Doric), e. g. caujov, rijvos, dtija, so the Infinitive,
&. g. AaB, Kadrjyv, instead of onuetov, keivos, dkeia, AaBeiv, Kadreiv.

at instead of e (Doric), e. g. pSafpw instead of Pdelpw.

§§ 202, 203.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239

, vw often instead of o (Zolic), e. g. cupds, Svuua instead of copds, tvoua; so in
Homer &yvpis instead of a&yopd; and in the Common language, eddvupos, ravh-
mpupis, ete.

* q@ instead of ov before a Liquid and ¢, and at the end of a word in the termi-
‘ations of the second Dec., and in the stem of several words ;— o: instead of
» before the breathing ¢ in the third Pers. Pl. o:oi(v) instead of ovor(y), and in
‘the participle ending -o.wa instead of -ovca, and in Moica and ’ApéSowa instead
of Mota, and "ApéSovea; the above use of w instead of ov is Dor., yet not in
Pindar; the use of o: instead of ov is Aolic and Pindaric, e. g.

TG épdBw instead of rod éphBov, dy (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of ody,
daAos instead of SodAos, dpayds instead of odpavds, Bas instead of Bods ;—rbr-
rowr(v) instead of rérrovei(v), térrowa instead of timrovea, piréoior(v) instead
of pirotow, %xowa instead of %xovea.

|
|
| Some other instances will be considered below, in treating of the Declensions
and Conjugations.

§ 202. Interchange of Consonants.

| The change of consonants in the different dialects is according to the two
following laws :—
Codrdinate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 4) interchange with each other; and cog-
nate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 1) interchange with each other.

§ 203. L Interchange of coérdinate Consonants.

A. Tue Mutss: (a) The smooth Mutes rand «. The interrogative and
indefinite pronouns, és, rére, roios, drotos, etc., are in Ion. x@s, kére, ete.

« instead of +: wére, word, Bre, tTére, dade, KAAOTE, are in Dor. wéxa, woKd,
Ska, Téa, drdéna (Poet. dréxxa), 4AAoKa; SO 8a (shortened from dxaxa) instead
of ray. On the contrary, 7 instead of «: rivos Dor. instead of keivos, éxeivos.

m instead of + (A£Zol. and Dor.), e. g. réume instead of wévret

(b) The Medials 8 and y, e. g. BAhxwyv (Att.), penny-royal, is in Ion. yAnxor,
Barépapor, eye-lash, is yAépapov.

ES d instead of y (Dor.), e. g. 5a instead of yj; hence Anuhrnp instead of
_- Fnutrnp.
% 5 instead of B (Dor.), d5eAdés instead of dBeAds.

(c) The Aspirates 3 and 9, e. g. Sip, beast, SAay, SAlBew, obSap, udder, are
in Dor. ofp, paay, prlBeww, odpap (uber); php and alBew also in Homer.

‘ x instead of 3: Ya is in Dor. tyua, and sprSos, etc. (from dps) is Ipyixos,
etc.

B. Tue Liqurips: (a) The Liquids interchange with one another: y instead
of A before & and 7, often in the Dor. dialect, e. g. FvSov, Bévricros (Dor.)
instead of HASoy, BéATioros; also (Ion. and Att. ) tAeiuwr, pulmo, instead of
mvetpov, Alrpoy instead of virpoy.

p is rarely used instead of A, e. g. xp{Bavos, oven, Att., instead of «AlBavos.

240 DIALECTS. [§ 204.

(b) The Liquid p and the breathing o in the later and often in the middle
Attic: p) instead of the Ion. and old Attic po, e. g. ¥prny and &pinv, a male ;
Képon and xéphn, back; but pp remains where the augment is used, and in com-
position.

§ 204. Il. Interchange of cognate Consonants.

(a) The Palatals y and x, e. g. kvapeds, fuller, is preferred by the Att. writers’
to the other form, yvades.

« and x in déxoua (Ion.) instead of d¢éxouat

'(b) The Linguals $ and 7, e. g. adris (Ion. and Epic) instead of aéSis, again. .

Remakx. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to —
the other, occurs, e. g. xu@v (Ion.) instead of xirév, evSaidra, hic, évSedrev, hinc,
(Ion.), instead of évraiSa, évrevSev; xiSpn (lon.) instead of xdérpa, pot.

o and 7, e. g. More:dav, érerov, elxati, Tv, Té (Dor.) instead of Mowe:dav, ere-
gov, etkoot, ov, cé. The Attic forms tedrdAov, beet ; rnAla, sieve (from of Sw),
tupBy (from cvpw), turba; rhuepov, to-day, and rijres, this year (the two last only
in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers ofmepoy, ofjres),
are in the Ion. and Common language cedraAov, onAla, obpBn.

oc andr. Instead of ca, employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old
Attic and in most other dialects, —the new and often also the middle Attic
in most words uses 77, e. g. Tdoow, yAéoou; but Att. rdr7w, yA@rra. (But
when oo results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic
forms prevail, not only in the older Attic writers, but are also found in other
authors, some words always having oo, e. g. mdoow, to scatter; wrhoow, to
crouch; Btooos, a deep; mriccw, to husk; wricow, to fold; Bpdoow, to shake ;
aréoow, to cower; épécow (épértw is rejected), etc.

o and y in the Dor. verb-ending -yes, e. g. rurroues (instead of the common
form téimrouer, see § 220, 6); also aiés Dor. instead of aiév.

o5 instead of ¢ (AZol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g.
peAloderat, uéodwy instead of weaAlCerat, néCwy or pel(wy, not at the beginning of
words, nor if & precedes, or o follows, e. g. poxSiCovri, émipSd(oica. .

Cand 77, cvpirrew, apudrrew (Att.) instead of ovpifew, apud fey.

Here belong : —

t and o and oo, e.g. tiv (Epic and old Attic) instead of ctv; digés and rpités
(Ion.) instead of d:006s, tpicods ; KAdE Dor. instead of xAats (KAeis); even in the
Fut. and Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs use é instead
of o, see § 223, 5.

(c) The Labials @ and 7, —the first Att., the last Ion., —e. g. degpdparyos Att.,
aondparyos Ion. So /ol. and Dor. z, instead of ¢, e. g. dunt (ZZol.) instead of
dupt; hence in the Common language, éumréxeuw, etc.

pand 1, e. g. wedd (Aol. and Dor.) instead of perd.

(d) The double consonants ¢ and y, and the two single consonants of which
they are formed, though transposed, in the Jol. dialect, e. g. cxevos, omdrus
instead of tévos, Warts, yet only at the beginning of a word. So op andy,
e. g. wé Dor. instead of ooé. ;

$ 205.) CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. 241

CHANGE OF THE VOWELS.

§ 205. Contraction.— Diaeresis.

1. In the Dialects, the following contractions, which differ from those men-
tioned in § 9, are to be noted: €o and cov, sometimes also oo and oe are con-
tracted into ev in Dor. and Ion. —not, as commonly, into ov; so ao, aov, and
oov (Ion.) are contracted into ev —not, as usual, into w and ov, e. g. giAcd from
pirdov = prod; mAcdves from wAdoves ; wAnpedvres from mAnpdovres = wAnpody-
ves; éSixalev from édixaloe = dati eipdrevy from eipéraoy = eipdtwy ; ye-
Actoa from yeAdovoa = yeAGoa; dixaedor from Sixaootor = Sixaovor. But
commonly the Dorians contracted oe into w (instead of ov), e. g. rupdevta =
tupayra instead of tupodyra, prydy instead of pryodv.

2. Ao, aov, and aw are contracted in the Doric dialect into @ (instead of w),
namely, in verbs in -dw, in genitives in -ao and -dwy, in substantives in -dwy,
Gen. -dovos, and in proper names in -Aaos, e. g. pucavtes, xaddot, yeAay from
gvodovres, xardovot, yeAdwy;— Tay Kopay from tdwy kopdwv = tay Kopov;—
Tloce:dav, -avos, Att. Moreidav, -Gvos ;— Mevéras, ’ApxeataAds, Gen. -a, Dat. -g.

3. Ae and ae: are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into q and y
instead of a and q, in verbs, e. g. épolrn, porrijs instead of epoira, porra@s. See
§ 222, IIT. (1).

4. The Attic dialect is the opposite of the other dialects, particularly of the
later Ionic; since, while the other dialects often avoid contraction, and the later
Ionic commonly, the Attic almost always admits it. The tendency of the later
Ionic towards uncontracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the long
sounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their simple ele-
ments, €. g. @iAdeat instead of g:AG, which had been contracted from Ag.
Epic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncontracted forms,

_ according to the necessity of the verse, e. g. aéxwy and &kwr.

5. On the contrary, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that while
_ it delights to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where
__ the Attic dialect does not, e. g. fpds (i), ipeds, ipedcacda Ion., instead of fepés,
ete. and especially the contraction of o7 into w, particularly in the verbs Boay
and voeiy, e. g. (Bwoa, wou (ayvdéocacney Hom. from d&yvoéw), évvévwxa instead

of éBénca, évdnoa, évverdnna; so dydéxovra in Homer, instead of dydohxorra.
| 6. The opposite of contraction is Diaeresis (d:alpeois), the separation of a
_ diphthong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the Aol. dialect.

The use of it in Homer, also, is not rare; most frequently, in such words as

separate the two yowels by means of the Digamma, namely, ai in dis; ai in

diruh, breath (from &Fnut); avoraados, dirty; et in etoxw, to make like, tro,
ticrov, éixrny ; ed very often in the adverb éd (= ed, well), e. g. ed Kplvas, evert-
| wevos; when y, y, p, or o follows év in compounds then they are doubled, e. g.
) eipuucrtys, eivynros, edppoos, eicceAuos; of in Vis (8Fis, ovis), dtouas (comp. opi-
nor), diords, Giga, di~ay (from ofyvupt).
!

21.

242 _ DIALECTS. [§ 206.

§ 206. Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N waged ae
Hiatus.

1. In particular instances the Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in
§§ 10 and 11; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc., the o of
the Article coalesces with a and forms », and with a: and forms @, e. g. 7d dyaA-
ua = TéyaAua; SO THANSEs, TWITS, Grip, Gvdpes, SvSpwior, gaddor, from rd &dAy-
Sés, 7d adrd, 6 avhp, of &vBpes, of AvSpwroi, of airdrAor. In Herodot. occur, &pioros,
words, SdAot, with the smooth instead of the rough breathing (from 6 &pioros,
6 avtés, of BAAot) ; Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in &pioros, wirds,
TaAAa, oduds (instead of 6 euds), ro¥vexa, obvexa (instead of ob mene) Kaye is
doubtful.

2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are: t&éA-yeos, r&vtpw instead of tod &Ayeos,
7 &ytpe; soa and e = w,m and e= 9, e. g. 6 ZAahos = SAagos, 6 && = Ht, Kar
éx = khk, kal cime = Kye, Kal édy or Hv = xv, which last is also Ion.

3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the Mase. and Neut. of
the Art. and in érepos, e. g. obrepos, Tovrepor.

4. The use of Synizesis (§ 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: —

(a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of
vowels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one

syllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : ea, €@, eat, eas; €0,
€0l, €0U; €w, eo; e. g. oThSea, Hucas, Seol, xpvoéois, TeSveH@re; much rarer

in ae, ta, sal, nN, iM, 40, @. Ss: dedAcvwr, méAlas, TOALOS 5 00. only in
bydoov; vor only in daxptoior; nt in Syloto, Sylwy, Snloies, Hea;

(b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels: 1% 7 & —

7 €l, 1 OV, 7 Ot; EL OV; w a, w ov; the first word is cither #, 4, 54, wh, and
érel, or a word with the inflection-endings, 7, w, e. g. }, ob, 5) apvetdraros,
By GAAaL, ciAamlyn He yduos, doBéoTy ovd- vidy.

5. Elision (§§ 13 and 14) is found very often in Homer, particularly as fol-

lows : —

(a) The ais elided in the Pl. Neut. and the Acc. Sing. of the third Dec.,
rarely in the Aor. ending -oa, e. g. %Aew eué Od. w, 200; commonly in
the particle &pa;

(b) The ¢ in éyé, pé, oé, etc.; in the Voc. of the second Dec., in the Dual of
the third Dec., in endings of the verb, and in particles, e. g. d¢, ré, rére,
ete, (but never in i8é).

(c) The: in the Dat. Pl. of the third Dec.; much rarer in the Dat. Sing,,
and only when jt could not be mistaken for the Acc., e. g. xaipe 8& 7G
Be *Odveeds, Il. x, 277; in %upt, Hus, and ogi; in adverbs of place in
-o1, except those deriyed from substantives; in e¥coo1; finally, in all end-
ings of the verb;

(d) The o in az, rd (but never in mpé), in d40, in the Nent, of pronouns
(except 74), and in all endings of the verb ;

§ 207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 243

(e) The a in endings of the verb wat, rat, Sat (cae only in fo’ ddrynmerdwy,
Il. 0, 245, and a in the Nom. of the first Dec. in dg? d3dva, Il. A, 272) ;

(f) The os in or, to me, and in the particle, ros.

6. The v paragogic (§ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. maot
feta.

7. The Hiatus (§ 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : —

(a) In long vowels or t diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, e. g.
éyriS€| @ *Odv| oft; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel or
diphthong is icilaaud short, ¢. g. ofxot €| cay;

(b) When the vowel does not admit Elision, or but rarely, e. g. wad) Buvver ;

(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. aA’ ava, ef
peuovds ‘ye ;

(d) In the Fem. Caesura (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) after
the first short syllable of the third foot ;—as this caesura here divides the
line into two parts, it is opposed to the close connection which would
arise from eliding the final vowel, e. g.

Kew) | 5 rpupd | Acta || Gu” | Eowero | xetpt wa | xeln, Il. y, 376.
Trav of | 8 eyé | voyro || €| vt peyd | poor ye | véSAzn, Il. 6, 270;
(e) In the metrical Diaeresis,' after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g.
eyxei | ldouerjos dyavod AevaAldao, Il. pw, 117.
méuvar er *Atpeldn ‘Ayaucuvovt | obAov ”Overpor, Il. B, 6. Comp. ¢, 422;
(f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. dévdpé be abst
@z) Sometimes in proper names ;
(h) Words, which have the digamma occasion no Hiatus (§ 203, 3), e. g.

ov | 5¢ obs | watdas %| acxey (= od3¢ Fods).

§ 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Vowels.

1. The following vowels are lengthened : —

A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into at; this occurs in alerds, aiel, dyat-
ovat, instead of deréds, etc.; so also mapal (also xara:Batal), in the tragedians
dial, and analogous to these, drat, instead of wapd, did, dad.

& into 7 in Homer, in jepédovras, iryepéSovrai, Fveuders in the Arsis, conse-
quently on account of the metre.

& into a before o ( Aol.) in the Acc. Pl. of the first Dec.; also in péAas and
Tdédaus instead of wéAds, TdAds, Tats instead of rads, kaAais instead of Kadds; in
Pindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., e. g. réats, -coa instead of -as, -doa; but
always was.

Av into wi (Ion.) in rpadua, Sadun and its derivatives: tpdipa, Séiua,
Swipd(@; and in pronouns compounded with airds into wu, e, g. EwuTod, rewv-
Tov, ¢uewurdy instead of éavrod, etc.; so also twird instead of raitd.

E into « in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. elvexa
(also in Attic prose), xewds, (eivos, orewds, eipwrdw. Homer lengthens ¢ into

* Metrical Diaeresis, is where a word and a foot end together,

244 DIALECTS. [§ 207.

e: according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in Ionic
prose have e, e. g. ev, drelp, meipas, end, ppetara (from ppéap, a well) ; also before
vowels in adjectives in -cos, e. g. xpvoeios ; in substantives and pronouns, e. g.
ometos, gueto; in verbs in -éw, e. g. TeAclw, mvelw, also in efws instead of ws,
until; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. eiAfAouvda, eior-
kviat, Seldia, SeidéxaTa.

E into 7 (Hom. and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -eds, e. g. BaciAeds,
Gen. -jos, etc.; further (also Ion.), in adjectives in -e1os, e. g. BaotAnios, royal;
likewise in single words, e. g. «Ants, xAnidos (Ion.), etc., instead of «Acts, and
in very many substantives in a of Dec. I, e. g. dAnSnty instead of GAfSera.

H sometimes into a (@ol.), e. g. Svatoxw instead of SvfrKw.

O into o: (Ion. and Hom.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. woln, mownets,
xXporh, porn, etc.; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. Seoto instead
of Seov, and in dolvos, xoporruTln, Sdoimdpiov, &yxolvnoi(y), and Hyvolnae(y).

O is changed into ov (Ion. and Hom.) before a Liq. or Sigma, still only in a
certain number of words; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into a, e. g.

xépos on. xodpos Dor. x@pos pdvos _— Ton. podyos
bvoua “ otvounn =“ Svowa “Oarvuros “ OvAumtos;

also in the oblique cases of Sépv and yévv.— But substantives, which have the
variable vowel o, cannot be thus lengthened, e. g. révos from mévouat, déuos from
déuw.

O into w in Homer, on account of the verse, in A:dyucos, kntées, Tpwxdw,
motdoua (and also tpoxdw, mordouat).

Y into ov often (Dor.), e. g. Sovydrnp instead of Suvydrnp. In Homer, in
elAhAovsa.

2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary,
namely, a into aa, @ into az; 7 into en, en, nn; w into ow, wo, ww; particularly
in the inflection of verbs, e. g. dpdas instead of dp%s, kphnvoy instead of xphvov,
dpdw instead of dpa, Shabbat instead of yeAavres, 7Bdwoa instead of 7Baca;
also péws instead of as, light (from dos), and proper names in -$éy, e. g.
Anuopowy.

3. Another mode of lengthening a vowel in the Epic dialect is by resolving
an original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into a vowel, e. g. e®enAos and Exnados
(Féxndos), odpos instead of Spos, bound ; obdos instead of bAos, H€éAsos instead of
Hjauos ; Zioos instead of feos ; eiAloow instead of éAfoow (comp. volvo), nds instead
of éws. In the Ionic, and sometimes in the Epic dialect, the w (contracted
from ao and aw), is resolved by e, e. g. (ixérw) ixérew instead of ixérao, wuAdwy
instead of mvAdwy.

4. The following vowels are shortened : —

At into & before a vowel, often in the Jol. dialect, e. g. dpxitios, "AAnuos,
instead of d&pxatos, "AAkatos ; in Homer, in érdpos, éruipn, érdpiCeodat.

E: into € before liquids (Ion. and in Hom.), in the forms xepés, xepl, from
xelp, hand, so also Att. xepoiv, xepot; also (Ion. and Dor.) before a vowel, in
Proparoxytones in -eos, and in Properispomena in -eia; in — only ina
few Fem. adjectives in -vs, e. g. SORES

ae

~S SR.

7% , en eee Pee tr? °

7s

Se SO = TE? PE OT

=.

§207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245

émirhdeos, -én, -eov Ion. instead of -ewos axéa instead of dxeia from dxbs
TéAEos, -én, -€oY s os -ecos Baden 5 BaS<ia “ Baddis
evpén from edpts — “ ¢ -ia dace “ dBaceia “ dacds;

so also in Hom. ‘Epuég instead of ‘Epuelg; also e in Ion. is shortened into e¢,
when two consonants follow which make the vowel long by position, e. g.
darddetis instead of darddeigis, uéCwv instead of pel(wy, xpérowy instead of xpele-
owv ; finally (Doric) in forms of the verb, e. g. deldes instead of defders.

Remark 1. In the ol. dialect, « before a liquid is very often shortened
into e, and the Liq. is doubled, e. g. crévyw, oréppw, @redAd, instead of «relvw,
onelpw, @retAy.

H is changed into ¢ in Hom. in dpyét1, apyéra, from apyhs, -fros, shining, and
in the Subj. ending -ere instead of -nre; also -ouev instead of -wpmer, e. g. eWSere,
Swpitouer. :

Ox into o often in the Dor. and Z£ol. dialects, e. g. rod instead of word.

Ov into o in Hom. in the compounds of mods, e. g. &eAAdwos, dprimos ; often
in Theocritus in the Acc. Pl. of the second Dec., e. g. ras Ad«os instead of robs
At«ouvs; also ABol. BéAAa instead of BovAh; so too in Hom. Bédrera, Boros
from BotAouc.

5. On the Ionic-Attic interchange of the vowels, see § 16, 5. ;

6. The use of Syncope (§ 16, 8) is frequent in Homer, particularly in forms
of the verb, as will be seen below; he also has rfrre instead of rimore, yAaxto-
gdyos instead of yadaxropdyos.

7. Apoeope (droxorh) is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word
beginning with a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric poets,
sometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic prose
writers. It occurs with the prepositions, e. g. avd, card, mapd, rarely with dad
and dé, and with the (Epic) conjunction ga. ‘The accent is then thrown
back; &v before B, 7, %, mw, is changed into &m (§ 19, 3), e.g. du Bopoto,
GpBalvew, &u wédAaryos, bu pdvoy, duuévw; the + in xdr is always assimilated
to the following consonant, except that the corresponding smooth mute stands
before a rough mute (§ 17, 4), e. g. nad divauw, Kaw pddrapa, Kak Kepad7s, Kay
yévu; examples of ad and b7é are, drméuper, bBBdAAev (Hom.); examples
from Attic prose, éuBdrnys, &uBords, X. Cy. 4, 5, 46. 7.5, 12, gumwris.

Rem. 2. In the concurrence of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, and

the final consonant of the preposition is rejected, e. g. kékTave, kdoxede, auyd-
oet, instead of Kdxcrave, Kdooxede, Gupydoet.

8. Prothesis (§ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in d&oreporh (orepomh), éséAw (SéAw),
éxeivos (xeivos), éptouat (Svouc); Homer also often resolves the F into the vowel
«, namely, é¢pon, Zedva, éelxoor, Zioos, Zevmov, €€ASomuat, eepuevos.

9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre, Homer inserts e, e. g. adeAgeds,
xeveds, instead of adeAdds, xevds; so also in the Gen. Pl. Fem. abréwy, mpwréwr.
To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound
words an 7 in place of the short vowel, e. g. ravnAeyéos, emhBodos, érneravds,
dAvynteAéw, eAadnBdros, instead of rayvaA., éwiB., emier., GAvyom., eAapoBdros.

21* :

246 DIALECTS. — [§ 208.

An + is inserted in Homer after o: in éuolids instead of Suoos, and in the Dual
-ouv instead of -ouv. :

10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts e before a long vowel: (a) in
some genitives of substantives and Fem. pronouns before w, and in odtos, To-
odros, and airés before long inflection-endings, e. g. avdpéwy, xnvéwv, exewéor,
TovTéwy, avtéwy, abtéw; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g.
ioréaot, Svvéwuat, Suvéwvtar; (c) some verbs in -w have forms as if from -éw,
e.g. BdAAw oupBarrAcduevos, brepBadrrA€e ; Tre Cw meCeduevos (also in Hom.
méCevy instead of émé(eov) ; also eee, évelxec, Space, from &pw, évéxw, SpAov;
finally, the three following forms of the Perf. in -ee instead of -e: oixdéxee,
érdémec, edd¢€€.

§ 208. Change of Consonants.

1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding
smooth mute, e. g. an’ of, érhuepos, ov éclws, ete. ?

2. In the Hom., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a 5 or & remains before mu in certain
words and phrases (contrary to § 19,1), e.g. 63uh instead of dcuh, Buer, dpxnd-
pds, erém&pev, kexopvduevos; also in the Hom. dialect, the y remains before o
(contrary to § 20, 2) in dvords, dvoxedéew, mavovdin instead of macovdip;
finally x before « (§ 19, Rem. 1) in dxaxpmévos, acute.

8. The Metathesis (§ 22) of p often occurs in Hom. and in other poets, e. g.
Kpadin instead of kapdla, heart, xdprepos and xpdrepos, strong, kdptioros, Bdpdiwros
(from Bpadvs, slow); also in the second Aorists érpadoy, @paSov, @paxoy (from
mépsw, to destroy, dapsdvw, to sleep, Sépxoua, to see); here belongs also #uSporoy
instead of #uparov (= fuaproy, according to § 24, 2).

4. Homer doubles a consonant (comp. § 23, Rem.) after a short vowel,
according to the necessities of the verse in the following cases : —

(a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when
there* are three successive short syllables, e. g. ZAAaBov, Zupasov, Evveor,
zooeva. ;

(b) In compounds also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. vedAAouros
(from véos and Aovw) ; &upmopos, prroumeldys; avvepedos, edvyntos ; -Badsvp-
poos ; edoveAuos ;

(c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -o1, and of the Fut. and Aor., e. g. véxvoot,
Sépacor; KdAcooa, oudcoa, ppdoroua, celica;

(d) In the middle of several words, e. g. dcvov, réccov, drlacw, mpdcow,
Mécoos, veueooa, veueconvels, SuTcavdeis.

Homer doubles the mute 7 in Interrogative pronouns which begin with 67, e. g.
brmws, etc.; — k in éAekkov, WeAcKKdw;—T in bTTL, bTTEO, érrev;—8 in dace,
mepiddeloaca, addeés, U5Syy. .

Remark. The doubling of p, which always takes place in the Common
language when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short vowel
precedes, may be omitted in the Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the

verse, e. g."@pe(ov from pélw, xpucdputos. For the same reason, one of the
consonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in the Epic dialect, though

§ 209.] 247

rarely, e. g. ’OSuceds, "AxiAeds, pdpvyo aa tbat 7Obvoaets, "AXtAAEds,
godpvyyos. . bee
ne

5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long
by position, namely, a yv in vévuuvos, ardrauvos, Dpbvdn, duvivdn, dreuvhuute ;
a 7 after in mrdAeuos, mrdAus, TroAledpoy ; a & after x in xSduadros, dxSd,
Tpixdd, TeTpaxdd, and after A or pin uddAdsaxos, eypnyépSaor; or he places ay
before 5 in éplydoumos, éydotrnce, and ao before w and « in opixpds (also Att.
§ 24, 4), oxeddyvuue (comp. Kldynut), cuoyep@s (comp. poyep@s), ouepddAcos.
Here belongs also the Epic prefix of « (= v, according to § 24, 3), before Bpo-
rés in composition, so as to strengthen the long syllable and give fulness to the
word, e. g. &uBporos, reptiuBporos, and in &udacty instead of apactn.

§209. Quantity.

Previminary Remark. Only a few general rules will be given here; the
quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from
rules previously given, or by observation.

1. A syllable which has the vowels ¢ or o, followed by another vowel or a
single consonant, is short by nature, e. g. réxds, Ses, BEh.

2. A syllable which has the vowel y or w, or a diphthong, is long by nature;
so all contracted and circumflexed syllables are long by nature, e. g. “fpws,
ovpayés, &xov (instead of adkwy), érfud (from érlude), mas, otros, WOxos, vov

3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel (a, 1, v), followed by another vowel
or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position, e. g. ’Gef-
Sevres, Saimovin, pin, maixn, pldos, apyupeos.

4. A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two consonants
or a double consonant, is long by position; e. g. ixéodat, éxaTouBn, detaodat,
ExSioros, puAdAoy.

Exceptions to No. 8.

(a) a of nouns of the first Dec., which have the Gen. in -as, is long in all the
Cases in which it occurs, e. g. jyuépa, pirta, -ds, -G, -av, etc. (Comp. § 45.)

(b) ain the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec., is long, e. g. Nom. Sing.
Adawad, Dual Acaiva.

{c) a is long in the Gen. Sing. in -ao and Gen. Pl. in -dwy, e. g. "Arpeidao,
a&-yopawy.

(d) the ending -as of the first Dec. is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing.,
and in the Acc. PL, e. g. Nom. raufas, Gen. oxtas, Acc. Pl. ddtas.

(e) a of masculine and forninine participles in -as is long; so also other words
in -as where vr or vy have been dropped, e. g. dkovods (a&xovcayts), axob-
cao, ioras, Bas; ylyas (yryavrs), wéAads (weAays).

(f) ain the third Pers. Pl. Perf. Ind. Act., e. g. rerdpdot.

(g) vis long in the Sing. of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs in -vps,
also in the masculine and feminine Sing. of the participle; e. g. defxvous,
edelkviv, deixvis, Seaxviea. — Other exceptions may be learned by obser-
vation.

-

248 DIALECTS. [§ 209.

5 In Epic poetry, a mute and a liquid (§ 27, Rem. 2) commonly make a
syllable long by position; the vowel is shortened, for the most part, only when
the form cannot otherwise be suited to the verse, e. g. re:yeoimAjra.

6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position: (a)
when it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with a conso-
nant, e.g. «dd: | ody Tp@ | as; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a
short vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with
two single consonants, which are not a mute and liquid, e. g. aduh | thy, hy |
otrw i | ro (vydy | Hyayer | avhp, Il. x, 293. But a mute and a liquid in this
case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long; on the contrary, the syllable
in the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the
verse; €.g. uh por | dap épa | 7a mpdode | pe xpu | oéns *Adpo | dirns, Il. y, 64;
on the contrary, in the Thesis, adrap ‘3 | mAnotoy | éorh | ret, Il. 5, 329; but
Bvdpa. | Svnrdov é | dvta, wd | Aca we | wpwpevor | aton, Il. xm, 441.

Rem. 2. In the names Sxduavdpos, ZdcvvSos, Zédera, even ox and ¢ do not.
make a syllable long by position in Homer ; so also & | ext& oxé | mapvoy, Od.
€, 237, occurs.

7. A long vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, in Homer, commonly
becomes short before a word beginning with a vowel, when it is in the Thesis,
but it remains long when it is in the Arsis, or when the following word has the
digamma, e. g. query | ev Bev | Seoow, Il. a, 358. vies, 6 | mev Kred | rod, 6®
tp’ | Evpvrot | Axropt | wvos, Il. B, 621. abtap 6 | eyo | How é | vi ppeot | avn
logy te (How = Fiow). But sometimes along vowel in the Thesis is not short-
ened before words which do not have the digamma, especially in the fourth foot
of an Hexameter, e. g. T@ wh | wor ward | pas rod 6 | woly | evSeo | tiv, IL. 4,
410, and before a punctuation-mark, e. g. xeiodai, | GAA’ ead | puvor, Il. €, 685.

8. A long vowel or a diphthong in the middle of a word before another
vowel is but seldom shortened by the poets, and for the most part, in certain
words and forms; thus, e. g.in Homer, éerf (”*-), fumaos (~~~), ofos (“”), BE
Bana (~*~), and often in the Iambuses of the Attic dramatists, e. g. ofos, woios,
Toovtos, Toidsde, ore: (from ovouat), worety; and always before the demonstrative
{ in pronouns, e. g. tovrovt, abratt.

9. In Epic poetry, a short syllable in the arses is ney considered o
if it stands at the beginning of a word, e. g. aomidos | "dxdua | Tov wip, Il. e, 4
or at the end, in which case it is followed either by a liquid (A, mu, v, p), orac
or 5, the sound of which is easily doubled in pronunciation, or by a word with
the digamma, e. g. kal medi | & Aw | Tedvra, Il. w, 283. Svyaré | pa hv (= Far),
Th. A, 226.

Rem, 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same
word, according as it is or is not, in ‘the Arsis, €. g.*Apes “A | pes Bpoto | Aovyé;
— tiydpes * i | cacw and mAclova | *ivaoty.

10. Not unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse,
a short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between
two long syllables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with
1, e.g. oY bro | Seét | n, Il. t, 73. Be! mpo | Sunt | nou, Il. B, 588; this is rarely
the case at the end of a word, e. g. ruxva | pwyaré | nv, Od. p, 198. 7H ® ee |
ev Top | y& BaAoav | paris | ‘snag | vwro, Il. A, 36.

§§ 210, 211.] FIRST DECLENSION. 249

B. DIALECTIC FORMS.
§210. Homeric Suffix de (dur).

1. In the Homeric dialect there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix gu(v),
which properly and originally denotes the indefinite where, like’the local Dat.
(see the Syntax); it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the
Dat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Abl.),
it expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by
the Abl.

2. The Suffix ¢: is found with substantives of all the declensions, and is
always annexed to the unchanged stem of the word : —

I. Declension only in the Singular: (a) Dat. a&yéAn-gi, ayAatnd: (in the
herd), Sbpngr, before or without the door (in several ancient editions nq: is
incorrectly written with an Iota Subs. n¢:); (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) amd
veupnpy idddew (to shoot an arrow from the string), é& ebvigs Sopeiy (to spring
Srom bed), xparepijg: Bling, Il. p, 501 (with greut force), & hot pawouern-
gw, Od. 5, 407 (as soon as the morning dawned).

II. Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to
the accent of the Nom., are paroxytone (-duw): (a) Dat. daxpudpw (with
tears), uhotwp atddravtos Sedpw (an adviser equal to the gods) ; — (b) Geni-
tive (Abl.) amd or ex maccaddpw (to take from the pin), éx Sedpw (through
the gods), &m daredquv ( from the bones).

III. Declension almost exclusively in the Pl. w is here used with not a large
number of neuter substantives in -os (Gen. -eos), also with corvAnddéy and
vais, &. g. pds kotvAndovdg:(v) (with the union-vowel o), to the arms, vai-
gx(v) (at the ships) ; in words in -os, the ending -os must always be restored
to its original form -es, since gi is always annexed to the pure stem; thus,
bxerpu(v), ody Bxerpu(v), Kat Yperpi(v), awd, Sid, ex oTHSerpi(v).

§ 211. First Declension.

1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use 7 instead of the original long a (which
the Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing., e. g. Tima, -Gs, -@, -ay
(Dor:) ; opin, -ns, -n, -nv, Sbpn, -ns, venvins, -n, -nv (Epic and Ion.) ; so Mnve-
Aorelns, Tnvedome’n, from MnvédAorea, pphtpn, Bopéns, Bopén, Bopénv.

Exceptions in Homer are Sed, goddess, -as, -G, -dv, Navoixda, ela, also Aiveids,

Airyelas, “Epuelas, and some other proper names in -as pure. The Voce. of vin
is yiuga instead of vivdn, Il. y, 130, Od. 5, 743.
_ (b) In substantives in -eva and -o.a, derived from adjectives in -ns and -ous, as
also in some other feminines, the short a in Attic is also changed into 7 in
Ionic, e. g. ddAnSeln, avaideln, edtdoln, xvicon instead of GAASad, dvalded,
e¥rdo:d, Kviocd.

(c) The ol. and some other dialects have -& instead of -ns, as the Mase.

_ ending in the Nom. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, accord-

250 DIALECTS [§ 212.

ing to the necessities of the verse, in a great number of words, particularly in
-ré., @. g. inmdra, aixunti, Kvavoxaird, vepeanyepeta, immnddra, untterd, edptowé.
The Voce. retains the ending -& in all these words.

2. The Gen. Sing. of masculines in -ys and -as originally ended in -é0; -éo
was then contracted into -w (Dor. into -4). In Hom. both the uncontracted
and contracted form is found; he also resolves the -w, originating from
-ao, by means of « (comp § 207, 3); it is further to be remarked, that the -
in respect to accent is considered short (§ 29, Rem. 7) and the ¢ is always pro-
nounced with the Synizesis; -ew becomes -w when a vowel or p precedes (still
Aivelew, Il. e, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, ‘Epuefas, Gen. ‘Epuelao and
‘Epueiw; Bopéns, Gen. Bopédo and Bopéw; *Arpeldns, “Arpeldao, and *Arpeldew,
ixérao and ixérew; edupeAtw, "Aclw. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns
in -as or -ys, are -ao, -w, Or -ew (not -ov). The Gen. ending -ew, becomes, in
the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. woAtrew, ’Atpeidew.

8. The Acc. Sing. and Pl. of masculines in -ys is commonly formed in the
Ton. dialect like the third Dec., e. g. rby Seomdrea, Tods Seomdreas from Seamdrys,
-ov, MiAridden from Miatiddns, -ov.

4. The Gen. Pl. of all the endings was originally in -dey; -dwy was after-
wards contracted into -éy (Dor. in -av). Homer uses both the uncontracted and
contracted forms, e. g. Sedwy and SeGv, wapeidwy and mapemv. He can also,
as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -éy originating from
-dwv; the ending thus becomes -éwy, which is commonly pronounced with
Synizesis, e. g. ruAdwy, Supéwy, &yopéwv. The Gen. ending -éwy becomes in the
Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. Movoéwy, Tiuéwy.

5. The Dat. Pl. originally ended in -ao1(v) ; this ending is found in the Dor.
writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers; in the Ion.
writers, -aio: was changed into -poi(y) and -ys; and in the Att. and Common
language, -aio: was shortened in -cs. In Homer, the Dat. Pl. ends in -yo1, -ns,
and -ais, yet the last is found only in Seats and akrais.

6. The Acc. Pl, in AXol., ends in -as (as in the second Dee. in -ors instead
of -ovs), and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ous), e. g.
vais tysais (ol.) instead of ras tiyds (but Dat. Pl. riyaior); wacas Kodoas
(Dor.) instead of rdcds xovpas.

§ 212. Second Declension.

1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Aaos are changed in the Dor. dialect
into -Ads (Gen. a, Dat. g), e. g. MevéAds instead of MevéAaos, NixdAds, ’Apxect-
Aas.

2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -o10 ;
the tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -o1o. Theocritus has
the Dor. ending -w and -oo.

8. Genitive Sing. and Pl. Some genitives are formed according to the
analogy of the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -os

with the ending -ew in the Gen. Sing., e. g. Bdrrew instead of Bdrrov, Kpoloew,
KAcopBpdrew, MeuBaidpew, and some Masc. common nouns with the ending

§ 213.) THIRD DECLENSION. 251

-éwv in the Gen. Pl., ce. g. meooéwy; (b) The ending -dwy instead of the Ion.
-éwy belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyaéy instead of aiydwy from alt, § 213, 5).

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouy instead of -ow,
e. g. Suour instead of dow (§ 207, 9).

5. The Dat. Pl. originally ended in-oror(v). This form, as well as the
abridged form in -ors is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose.

6. The Ace. Pl. ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -ws and in -os
(like -és in the first Dec., § 211, 6), e. g. ras vduws, vduos, so also Tws Aayds, the
hares ; Z£ol. in -o1s, &. g. maoodAois instead of -ous.

7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing. in the Epic dialect ends in -éo, instead
of -w, in MnveAcdo (Il. , 489; though most MSS. have MyreAdoo) from Mnvé-
Aews, and in Meredo from Mérews. — In ydAws, sister-in-law,”ASws and Kés, the
w originating by contraction, is resolved, in the Epic dialect, by means of 0;
hence yaddws, "Addws, Kéws, Gen. -dw. On the words yéAws, iSpds, pws, see
§ 213, 7.

‘8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, voids only
Od. x, 240 (elsewhere védos), xexudppovs, Il. A, 493 (but v, 138. xerudppoos) and
xeluappor, Il. 5, 452, also IdvSous, MdyvSov, Mdvdy~. Homer does not contract
other words; in words in -eos, -eov, he either lengthens the ¢ into e« (§ 207, 1),
or employs Synizesis, as the measure requires.

§ 213. Third Declension.

1. In the Dor. uialect the long a here also takes the place of 7, e. g. uay,
payés instead of phy, unvds, etc., “EAAGy, “EAAGves, momay instead of roimhy, Gen.
-évos, vedras, -aros instead of vedtns, -nTos.

AiShp, Shp, Sijpes, and all names of persons in -rfp, are exceptions to this
Dor. usage.

2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, 7 commonly takes the place
of the long a, as also elsewhere, e. g. Sépnt, oft, Ypnt instead of Sdépat, i€pak.

3. The Dat. Pl. in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of the
measure, in -o1(v),-cor(v),-eor(v), and -eoor(v). The ground-form is -eor(v)
and the strengthened form is -eao.(v). This ending is always annexed, like
the other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e. g. xdv-eoor (from xdwy, Gen. kvy-ds),
vext-eoot (from yvéxus, -v-os). The ending -eor(y) is found in Homer only in
Yeow, otect, xelpeot, and dvdxt-eow (from &vat, tvaxr-os). In Neuters, which
have a radical o in the Nom., the o is omitted when it stands between two
vowels ({ 25, 1), e. g. éwé-eror (instead of éréo-eoor from 7d és), Semd-eoow
(from 7d déras). In stems in -av, -ev, -ov (al, ef, of’), the v (F’) must be
omitted, according to § 25, 2; thus, Bd-eoor instead of BdF-eoo, inmh-eocot
instead of immfF-eco1. The ending -oo: is annexed almost exclusively to
stems which end in a vowel, e. g. véxuv-oo. from véxus -v-ds; but also Ypir-oor
from ipis (-150s) and commonly rogot from mods (10d-és). The Dat. form in
-do never admits the doubling of ¢.— The ground-form -eo: is very common
in the Dor.’poets and prose-writers; also the Ionic prose has this form sf
quently in stems ending in -y, e. g. uhv-eot.

252 : DIALECTS. {§ 213. |

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect, ends in»-otty (as in the
second Dec., § 212, 4), e. g, wodotv, Seuphvour.

5. The Gen. Pl. in the Ion. dialect often ends in -éy, e. g. xnvéwr, dvdpéwv
(§ 207, 10). Theocritus has ray aiyay (instead of tév aiyav) from % ait, a goat,
after the analogy of the first Dec.

6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Acc. Sing. of words in -vs (stem v)
in @ instead of y, e. g. edpéa mévrov, ixdva, véa from vais.

7. The words yéaws, laughter ; i8pdés, sweat ; %pws, love, which properly belong
to the third Dec., in Homer follow the Attic second Dec. in some of the Cases,
e. g. idpa, (5pg instead of iSpaéra and idpari; yéAw and yéAwy, yéAw, instead of
yAora and yéAwrTi, pw instead of Epwrt.

8. Words in -1s,' Gen. -150s. The Hom., Ion., and Dor. dialects often
inflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -tos, e. g. ujvios, Hom.,
@é¢uios, Herod., @érios, Dat. @é77, Hom. Those ending in-1s, -i50s, in the Epic
dialect have the Dat. only in -: instead of -d:. Substantives in -nts, -ntdos,
are sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. mapyts, mapidos
(instead of wapyidos), Nnpnis, Nnpijdes. See § 54 (c).

9. The Neut. ods, ards, ear, is in Dor. és, ards, etc., and in Hom. odas, Gen.
ovatos, Pl. ovata; the Neuters, ordap, fat; otSap, udder, and meipap, end, have
-aros in the Gen., namely, oréaros, o¥Sara, welpata, mefpact. In the words
Tépas, Képas, kpéas, the Epic writers reject 7, e.g. Tépaa, -dwy, -deooi(v); Képa
Dat.; Pl. xépa, repdwy, -deoo(v), and -aot(v) ; Pl. xpéa, xpedwy, xpedv, and xpeav,
Kpéact(v). Among the Ionic writers these words, like Bpéras, etc. (§ 61, Rem.
1), often. change the a into ¢,e. g. xépeos, népea, kepéwv, TX Tépea, Kpéerot(v).
See § 54 (c).

10. In the words rarfp, uftnp, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the e
through all the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. avépos and
Gvdpés, avép: and aydpi, etc., but only aydpayv, avdpdor and -éo01; yaorhp, yao-
Tépos, -épt, and yaotpds, yarrpl, yaorépa, yarrépes; Anuhrnp, -ntépos, and -n7pos,
Anpntépa; Suvydrnp, -répos, and -rpds, etc., Svyarépecot(y), but Svyarpav ; wht np
and marnp, -Tépos, and -rpds, etc. See § 55, 2.

11. In Homer, the word ixép, blood of the gods, has in the Acc. ix@ instead of
ix@pa, and xuxedy, 6, mixed drink, has in the Acc. kuxe@ or xuKeid. See § 56,
Rem. 1. :

12. In -aus,-evs,-ovs. Of ypais, there are found in Homer only the Nom.
‘"ypnis and ypniis, Dat. ypyt and the Voc. ypnd and ypyi. In the Ion. dialect,
also, the long a is changed to 7; thus, Gen. ypnds, Pl. ypijes; this also appears
in vais, navis, see the Anomalies.— The word Sods is regularly declined in
Her., hence Nom. Pl. Bdes, Acc. Bods; in the Acc. Pl. Homer uses both Bédas
and Bots. On the Epic Dat. Béeoor, see No.3. In Doric, the Nom. is Bas,
Ace. Bay, Acc. Pl. Bas. This form of the Acc. Sing., occurs also in the Il. »,
238, in the sense of bull’s hide, a shield made of bull’s hide. See § 57.

? The student may consult the first part of the Grammar, where similar
words are declined ; references to the particular section will be given at the end
of the paragraphs here.

§ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 253

13. In common nouns in -eds, and in the proper name ’Ax:AAeds, 7 is used in
the Epic dialect, instead of ¢, in all the forms which omit v (/’) of the stem,
this is done to compensate by the length of the vowel for the omitted v (F’);
thus, BaciAeds, Voc. -e0; Dat. Pl. -edox (except dpurrheooi(v) from apioreds), but
BaciAjjos, -ii, -7a, -jes, -hwv, -jdés. Yet the long a in the Acc. -ed, -eds of the
Attic dialect, again becomes short. Among the proper names, the following
are to be specially noted: ’Odveceds, Gen. ’Odvecjos or ’OSvejos and ’Odvec¢os,
also ’Oduceds (Od. w, 398), Dat. ’OSve7i and ’Oduee?, Acc. *Odvecija and *Odve-
oéa, also ’OSveq (Od. 7, 136) ; TnAcds, MnAjjos and MyAéos, MnAji and Mad,
IImAjja; the others, as ‘Atpeds, Tvdeds, generally retain the -e and contract -eos
in the Gen. by Synizesis, and sometimes -ea in the Acc., into -y; thus, Tudéos,
-i, -éa, and -7.—In the Ion. of Herodotus, the inflection with 7 in common
nouns is very doubtful; in proper names, the e is regular, e. g. Mepaéos, Awpiées,
Swxéwv, Aiodréas.

14. In-ns and -es, Gen.-eos. In Homer, the Gen. Sing. remains uncon-
tracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uncontracted form -ees, and
the contracted form -e:s is used for the Nom. Pl. The Gen. Pl. remains uncon-
tracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -éwy, e. g. (axpna@v from
(axpnéwy) ; so also the Acc. Pl. ending -eas. ~Apns has in Homer “Apyos and
“Apeos, “Apni or “Apy, “Apei,”Apn and ~Apny, Il. «, 909,”Apes and “Apes (§ 209,
Rem. 3). See § 59.

15. In proper names in -«Ajjs, the Epic dialect contracts ee into 7, 0. g.
‘HpaxAéns, -KAjos (instead of «Aé¢eos), -77, -fja, Voc. ‘HpdxAes; but in adjectives
in -éns it varies between -e and 7, e. g. dyaxAehs, Gen. &yaxAjos, but édxAcias
(Ace. PL) from éixAehs, edppefs, Gen. évppetos. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and
sometimes the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an « in these words, e. g.
TepixAdos, -éi, etc.; so also in Homer, dusxada, Il. B, 115, and bwrepdéa, Il. p, 330.

16. In (a) -ws, Gen.-wos. In Homer, the contracted forms, jp Dat., and
Mivw Acc. occur.—(b) -és and -w, Gen. -éos, Words of this kind even in the
Epic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always have the contracted form,
except xpés and its compounds, e. g. xpods, xpot, xpéa. — The Ion. dialect fre-
quently forms the Acc. Sing. in -ody instead of -w, e. g. 1d, "lodv, Ads, Hodv. —
The Aol. Gen. Sing. ends in -ws, e. g. afdws, Sdrpws instead of aidods, Sampois ;
thus, in Moschus, ras *Axa@s. See § 60.

17. In (a) -as, Gen.-aos. In Homer, the Dat. Sing. is either uncontracted
or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yhpat and ytpa,
dérq, oéAg. But the Nom. and Acc. Pl. is always contracted, e. g. 5éma.— On
those in -as, Gen. -eos, see § 61 (a), and Rem. 1. :

(b) In -os, Gen. -eos. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the
verse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract forms,
except in the Gen. Pl., which is always uncontracted. The Gen. Sing. is also
uncontracted, except in some substantives which contract -eos, as in the Dor.,
into -evs ; thus, "EpéBevs, Sdpcevs, yéveus, SduBevs, Sépevs ; Dat. Sing. Sépet and
Sépet, edAAeE and xdAAet. Nom. and Acc. Plurals in -ea, commonly remain
uncontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesis, i. e. as one syllable,
e, g. velkea, BéAca.— The Ion. dialect is like the Epic. —In oméos, xaos, d€os,

22

Li a
ve

OS ets res, |

a OY See Pa ye

AE AN ORR AR in ey RE Re MTG SERRE UR a SO a ae ae oe Ge, fp Ca eM Nee aa eA, oe eee

FE ee he Ae Sor eae ES NY NC NF

254 _ ‘DIALECTS. [$ 214.

xpéos, the Epic dialect lengthens e, sometimes into et, sometimes into 7; thus,
Gen. omelous, Dat. omji, Acc. oréos and omeios, Gen. Pl. oretwy, Dat. oréooi(v)
and omjecot(v); xpéos and xpeios; KAéa and KAeia.

18. In -fs, Gen. -ios; -is, Gen.-tos. The Epic dialect contracts those in “
-ts, in the Dat. Sing., e. g. di¢ut, wAedvi, véxus; the Acc. Pl. appears with the
contracted or uncontracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse,
though more usually contracted, e. g. ixdds instead of ixSvas, dpids; véxvas is
always uncontracted ; the Nom. Pl. never suffers contraction, but is pronounced
with Synizesis. The Dat. Pl. ends in -dcor and -deoo: (dissyllable), e.g. ixSde-
ow and ixstecow. See § 62.

19. In-is and -i, Gen. -ios, Att. -ews; -ts and -t, Gen. -tos, Att. -ews:—

(a) The words in -?s, Att. Gen. -ews, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain ¢
of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing. always suffer contrac-
tion, and usually in the Acc. Pl. in the Ionic writers, and sometimes also in
Homer (-u = -i, -tas = -is), e. g. wéAus, wéAtos, wéAi, wéAww, WéALEs, TOALwY, WéALCH,
méAuas, and méAis. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -ez and -e is found
in Homer, e. g. réoet and wéce: from méots ; in some words, the ¢ of the stem is
changed into ¢ in other Cases also, e. g. émdAgers instead of érdAguas, érdAteot(v),
especially in réAts, which, moreover, according to the necessities of the verse,
can lengthen ¢ into 7; thus, Gen. méXtos, méAeos, and wéAnos, Dat. wéAet, wéret,
and wéAni, Nom. Pl. réAces and wéaAnes, Gen. roAtwy, Dat. woaAteoo, Acc. wéruas,
méAes, wéAnas; from dis, ovis, Dat. Pl. dtecor(v), ofeor(v), Beor(v). See § 63.

(b) The words in -is, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -ews, in the Ionic
make the Gen. in -eos, e. g. mhxeos, except eyxeAus, Gen. -vos; in the Dat. Sing.,
both the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. edpét,
mhxet, TAare?. In the Nom. Pl., the form can be either contracted or uncon-
tracted ; in the Acc. Pl., the uncontracted form in -eas is regular, which, when
the verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. weAékeas (tri-
syllable). :

§ 214. Anomalous and Defective Words.— Metaplasts.

1. Tévvu (7rd, knee) and Sépu (7d, spear, § 68,1), are declined in Homer as
follows :—

Sing. = yodvaros and ‘youvés Sovparos and Sovpds — Sodpart and Soupt
Pl. Nom. yotvara “ yotva - Sovpara ‘ Sovpa— Dual dotpe
Gen. yotvwy Sovpwy

Dat. yotvacr(v) and yotveoo:(v) Sodpaci(v) and dovpecci(v).
The form yotvao: (Il. 4, 488, p, 451, 569) has critically little authority.

2. The following forms of xdpa (7d, head, § 68, 6) are found in the Homeric
dialect : —
Sing. Nom. xdpn Gen. kdpyros Kapharos Kparés Kpdaros

Dat. xdpynre Kaphars _ Kparl Kpdare
Acc. dpn (tov kpara, Od. &, 92, and ém «dp, IL. w, 392).

§ 215.] ADJECTIVES. BBS
Pl. Nom. «dpa xaphara; secondary form xdpnva

Gen. xpdroy . kaphywy
Dat. xpacl(v)
Acc. xpdara ¥ kdpnva

3. Adas (6, stone, Hom., instead of Ads), Gen. Ados, Dat. Aa, Acc. Aday, Gen.
Pl. Adwv, Dat. Adeoo:(v).

4. Mefs (4, month), Gen. unvds, Ion., instead of why, -ds, but also in Plato.

5. Nads (%, ship) is inflected in the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects as
follows :—

S. Nom. Ep. and Ion. vnis vnis Dor. vais

Gen. ynés (also Tragic) _veds vads (also Trag.)
Dat. ynt vat
Acc. via ve vavy and vav
D. Nom. Acc. Voc. rije vae
Gen. and Dat. veoiv vaotv
P. Nom. vies vées vaes
Gen. ynay (vadg: only Ep.) vedy vagy
Dat. ynvot (vadgu only Ep.) vheoot(v), véerot(v) vavol(v)
Ace. vijas véas vaas.

6. “Opus (6 , bird), Gen. dpvid-os, Doric dprix-os, etc. (§ 203).

7. Xelp (4, hand), Ion. xepds, xepl, xépa, Dual xetpe, xepoiv (poet. also xeipoiv),
Pl. xépes, xepGv, xepol(v) (xelpeoi(v), and -eror(v) in Homer), xépas.

Remark I. Metaplasm ({ 72) occurs in Homer in the following words:

- Arh, %, h, Dat. &daxt (from Nom. ’AAE) ; ’Aléns, -ov, 6, Gen. &id0s, Dat.
Hid: (AIS); “Avtipdgys, -ao, 6, Acc. "Avtiparija CANTI®ATETS) ; iwxh, 7, pur-
suit, Acc. idxa Clozt: boputyn, 7, battle, Dat. topin (bopis) ; —TMdrpordos, Gen,
_ TlarpéxAov and -xAjjos, Acc. -xAov and -xAja, Voc. -xAes (TIATPOKAHS) ; avdpd-
rodov, Td, slave, Dat. Pl. dvdparddecot(v) ; mpdéswrov, 7d, face, Pl. mposdmara,
mposémac:; vios, 6, son, has from ‘YIEYS and ‘YI> the following forms: Gen.
éos and vios, Dat. viet and vit, Acc. viga and via; Dual vie; Nom. Pl. viées and
viets and vies, Dat. vidow, Acc. vidas and vias; — Oidtrovs, Gen. Oidimddao
(OIAITIOAHS).

Rem. 2. The following are defective in Homer: Arrf Dat. and 7a A?ra, linen ;
Ais and Aivy = Adwy and Adovra; wdor and udorw = pdotry: and -a; orixéds,
orixes, otixas, row; booe, TH, Nom. and Acc. Dual, both eyes ; dpedos, advantage,
and dos, pleasure, in the Nom. only ; jpa, something pleasing, and d€uas, form, in
the Acc. only; 7Aeds, infatuated, Voc. HAE and *Acé; finally, 5, xpi, BAdi, as
Nom. and Acc. Sing., from which come the forms déya, e, Kpish, barley,
&Agutov, dried barley.

§ 215. ADJECTIVES.

1. Some adjectives in -vs, -era, -v, have sometimes in the Homeric dialect,
the feminine form -ea or -en; viz. dkéa (instead of dkeia), Bada (instead of
BaS<ia) ; Gen. BaSéns (and BaSelns), Acc. Badény; so also in Herodotus, -ea,
seldom -eia, e. g. Badéa, -én and -eia, Bapéa, edpéa, ids, -éa and -eia, ShAca (from
SHAvs), juloea. ,

RemarRk. In Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and also
some in -ders and -#eis, are of the common gender, i.e. they have but one

>

a enh a ane alate site a el ae

256 DIALECTS. [§ 216.

termination for the Masc. and Fem., e. g.“Hpn SAvs éotoa, Il. 7, 97; so Hdds
diruh, Od. w, 309, and the irregular woAds: woady eq? dyphy, Il. x, 27; so Aua-
Sdes, avSeuders, dpywders, worhers, agreeing with feminine substantives.— The ©
‘Epic éis or jis, Neut. q% (eb and ed only as an adverb), wants the feminine —
form ; in Il. w, 528, is found dépwr ofa diSwor kaxav, Erepos St Edwy (sc. Sdpwr),
therefore édwy as the Gen. Pl. Neut., unless perhaps from dSépwy the cognate —
décewr is to be supplied for édwy to agree with, as in Swrijpes édwy sc. ddcewr ;

the Gen. Sing. is éjjos.

2. Adjectives in -hes, ~heooa, -jev, are often found in Homer in the contracted
form -jjs, -fjcoa, -fv, e.g. Tups (and tiutets), TyuqvTa; those in -des,-deooa,
-dev, contract -oe into -ev, e. g. wedia Awredyra. ,

3. In the Epic dialect, woAvs is regularly inflected in the masculine and
neuter, viz. Nom. woAv’s and movaAds, Neut. road, with the secondary forms
moAAds, ToAAdv, Gen. wodgos, Acc. woAdy and movaAty, woAd and modAAdy; Nom.
Pl. roAdes and roAcis, Gen. roAéwy, Dat. rordéou(v), roAéoor(v), and moAderor(v),
Acc. roAéas and moAcis. — The Ionic dialect inflects woAAds, -f, -dv, regularly
throughout.

4. Compound Adj. in -os (comp. § 78, I.) often have in Hom. a feminine ending,
viz. -n, e. g. aSavdrn, aoBéorn, worvpdpBn, apiChan (but also apl(ndo airyal, Il.
X, 27), &upiBpdrn, ayxiddAn, apyvpowe(a, Gudiptrn ; on the contrary, KAuvtds as a
feminine is found in Il. 8, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple xAurés, -f, -dv. Also
the ending -os of the superlative is sometimes found as feminine, e. g. dAoéraros
d3un, Od. 3, 442. kara mpdricrov drwrhy, H. Cer. 157. Comp. § 78, Rem. 1.

5. Compound adjectives in -rous, -rovy, Gen. rodeos, in the Epic dialect, can
shorten -ous into -7ros, €. g.*Ipis GeAACrOs, Il. 3, 409. rplmos, Il. x, 443.

6. ’Eplnpes from éplnpos, épvodpuares and -as from épvodpuatos, are examples
of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. .

§ 216. Comparison.

1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -érepos and -#raros are used for the sake
of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, e. g.
bifipérepos, diCipmratos, Kaxokewdrepos, Adpdtatos. —Avinpds, troublesome, has
the Comparative avinpéorepov, Od. B, 190, and &xapis, disagreeable, axaplorepos,
Od. v, 392. Comp. § 82, Rem. 6. Adjectives in -vs and -pos, in the Homeric
dialect, form the Comparative and Superlative in -(wy, -1ov, and -i@'ros, -n, -ov,
sometimes also regularly, e. g. éAaxds, litile, EAdxuoros, yAuKis yAuKlwv, Basis,
BdSioros, Kvdpds, KUdoTOS, oixtpds olxTicTos and oixtpéraros, Taxds TaXLOTOS,
mpeaBus mpéaBioTos, wks HKioTos.

2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under § 84, the
following Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed: —

&yadds, Comp. dpelwy, Awlwy, Awtrepos (Ion. kpéccwy, Dor. xdppwv), Sup.

KapTioTos. : ‘
kakds, Kaxérepos, xeipdrepos, xepelwv, xepeidrepos (Dor. xepywv, Ion. Ecowr),
Sup. ficioros (IL. p, 531, with the variation foros, which Spitzner prefers).
éalyos, Comp. drlwy (dAtCoves Foray, populi suberant statura minores, Il. o,
519); wnwy, Bion, 5, 10.

pntd.os, Ion., Comp. prtrepos (Ion. pytwy), Sup. pytraros and phioros, =

Bpadds, slow, Comp. Bpdoowy, Sup. Bdpdiotos (by Metathesis). ;

paxpéds, long, udoowv;— raxds, thick, rdoowv.

§217.]

PRONOUNS.

257

Remark 1. The positive XEPHS (xépm, xépna, xépnes, xépna) found in
Homer, and belonging to x«pefwv, always has the signification of the Compara-

tive, less, baser, weaker.

from the Comp. mAéwv.

Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative,
in many instances, are derived from Substantives; some of these forms have
been transferred to the Common language: 6 BagtAeds Bactredrepos; 7d
képdos, gain, xépdiov, more lucrative, xépdioros ; Td LAOS, pain, adylwy, more
painful, trxywros ; 7 piyos, cold, piyov, colder, more dreadful, plyoros ; Td K7}-
dos, care, xhdiotos, most dear; 5% Kbwv, dog, kivTepos, more shameless, KUYTaToS.

§ 217. PRONOUNS.

e Pl. wages and (Acc.) wAéas are found in Homer

éyé and (before a vow-
el) éyév Epic; ew
and éywy ALolic
euco, cued, wed (ev)
Epic and Ion.

éueto Epic

éuédey Epic

éueds, éuovs Doric
éuol,uol (uor),€uor Aol.
éulv Doric

~| ud, wé (me) Epic

voi

voiv Epic

vai, vo

jets Epic ; juées Ion.

apués Dor.; &uues Epic
jewv Ion. and Epic
huclwv Epic

Gupewy ALolic; auay
Doric

juiv, hu, july Epic
&uue(v) ZZol. and Ep.;
auiv and auly Dor.
dupeot(y) ZEol.

nuéas Ion. and Epic

juas, juds Epic
Gupe Epic; aué Dor.

ov Epic; td Dor. and
Z£ol.; tévn Epic

ted Dor.; oéo (ceo),
ced (ovev), Ep. and Ion.
oeio and teoto Epic
cédev Epic

Teds, Teovs Dor.

col Epic

tiv Dor.; rely Dor. et
Ep. (usually Orthot.)
tot (ro) Ep. and Ion.
oé (ve) Ep.; ré Dor.
tv (rv) Dor.

tly in Theocritus

opwiv (opwiry)
Thai, TPO
THaiv, opev
Thai, THM

Epic

ipets Ep.; duées Ion.
dués Dor. ; tupes Ep.
iuéwv Ion. and Epic
duelwy Epic

dupéewy AXol.

ipiv, Guy, duly Epic
bupu(v) Epic

juéas Epic and Ion.

iuas, duds Epic
dupe Epic; dué Dor.

Remark. The forms susceptible of inclination are those written without
an accent.

€o (é0), eb (ed) Epic
and Jon.

elo Ep.; éeio later Ep.
ever (éSev) Epic

éovs Dor.

w Dor. (usually or-
thotone)

é0t, of (of) Ep (Reflex.)}
éé, € (€) (as Neut. Il.
a, 236.)

vly (viv) Dor. — Att.
poet.) (him, her, it)

ply (wv) Ion. (him, her,
wt; seldom Pl.)

ope Dor. et Att. poet.

ocpwiv, cpwiy
ohwt, Tpwe

Epic
The, Tpw

opewy (opewv) Ion.
and Epic
cpov Epic

odelwy Epic

ogi (ogi) Ion.; oopt-
ot(v), [opior(v) |, opty,
(opr), opt (op) Ep.;
&ogt ol.

aopéeas (ogeas) Ion.
and Epic

ohpas, speias Epic
(age) Epic (Il.7, 265.);
toge ALol.

22*

258 DIALECTS. [§ 218.

2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, éuavTod, veavrod, ete., are
never found in Homer; instead of them, he writes the personal pronouns and
the pronoun airds separate, e. g. fu airdy, éuod aira, eued airis, & adrhy, of
ai’r7j. When the pronoun aids stands first, it signifies himself, herself, itself,
even. But the Ion. writers use the compound forms éuewurod, cewurod, éwvrTod,
etc. Comp. § 207, 1.

3. Possessive pronouns: eds, -4, -év Dor. and Epic, instead of ods; éds, -4,
-dy, and 3s, 4, dv, suus, Epic; duds, -h, -dv Dor. and Epic, &upos, éuuérepos ABol.,
instead of juérepos; vwtrepos, of us both, Epic; suds, -h, -dv Dor. and Epic,
Bupyos JEol., instead of duérepos; opwtrepos, of you both, Il. a, 216; rods, -h, -dv
ZEol. and Epic, instead of opérepos.

4. Demonstrative pronouns: (a) 6 7 7é (Dor. ‘& instead of 4); Gen. 76 Dor.,
roto and ted Epic, ras Dor.; Dat. r@ Dor.; Acc. rév Dor.; Pl. rof and taf Dor.
and Epic; Gen. tdwy Epic, rav Dor.; Dat. roiot, tato1, riot, and tis Epic;
Acc. tés, rds Dor.

(b) 83«: Epic Dat. Pl. rotsdeor and rotsSecor instead of rotsde; Epic Dat.

ro.wlde instead of rotsde is found also in the Tragedians,

(c) obros and airés: ane stands before the long inflection-endings in the
Ion. dialect (§ 207, 10), e. g. rovréov, ravréns, TovTéw, TovTéous, avTén, ad’Téwy.

(d) éxetvos is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry xeivos, Hol. xjvos, Dor.
Tivos.

(e) On the Ion. forms witds, rwird instead of 6 ards, 7d abd, see §§ 206, 1,
and 207, 1.

5. Relative pronouns: 6 Dor. and Hom., instead of és; ofo Ion. and Epic;
gov Epic seldom, éys Il. 7, 208; jor and js instead of afs. Besides Gs, #, the
other forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the forms of
the article, e. g. rd instead of 8, rod instead of of, rs instead of fs, etc. The
Epic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the necessities of the
verse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are frequently used
instead of the relative.

6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns: (a) tT!s, 7): Gen. réo (reo) Epic
and Ion., red (rev) Epic, Ion., and Dor., Dat. réw (tew), 7G (rT@) Epic and Ion.;
Pl. too Neut., drmo? &ooa, Od. 7, 218, Gen. réwy (rewy) Epic and _Ion., Dat.
téoot Epic and Ion. (roto, 8. Trach. 984).

(b) ris, rf: Gen. réo Epic and Ion., red Epic, Ion., and Dor., ré@ Ion.

(c) 8sris: Nom. 8t1s, Neut. 871, i771 Ep.| Neut. Pl. ériva Tliad.

Gen. rev Ep.and Ion.,8re0,|rewv Epic and Ion.
brreo, Strev Epic.
Dat. brew, ir@ Ep. and Ion.|éréoio: Epic and Ion., érépor Her.
Acc. 8rwva Epic, Neut. 871,|37was Epic, Neut. étwa and éooa Epic.
érri Epic.

§ 218. Tue NUMERALS.

The ol. and secondary form of ula is Ya, %ys, ty, tav; also ig, Il. ¢ 422, is
instead of évi» Avo and Svw are indeclinable in Homer; the secondary forms

AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 259

219.]

are de (indecl.), doi0f, So1al, Sod, Dat. dos07s, Sorotor, Acc. 5016 (indecl.), Soi0ds,
-d. — Miovpes, -a Hol. and Epic, instead of réraapes, -a. — Avédexa and dvo-
Epic, also d05exa: —’Eelxoor Epic, instead of efkoo1. —’Oyddéxovra and
a Epic, instead of dySohxovra, évevfqxovra.. “Evvedxiro: and Sexdxidrot
pic, instead of évvanisxfAron and wdpior. The endings -dxovra and -axdo1o in
Epic and Ion. become -jxovra, -nxdo1or. The Epic forms of the ordinals
tplraros, Térparos, EBdduaros, dyddaTos, tvaros, and etvaros.

THE VERB.

§ 219. Augment.— Reduplication.

1. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to the

necessities of the verse, e. g. Adve, orelAavro, Sécav, dparo, €Ae. The Ion.

_ prose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment; it may also
omit it in the Perf., e. g. duuat, tpyaouat, ofenuat, which is done by the Epic
writers only in &ywya and épxara: from elpyw.

2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the p when the augment is
prefixed, e. g. fpetas, and on the doubling the liquids, e. g. Zoceva, see § 208,
4, and Rem.

3. @in the Dor. writers is changed into a by the augment, and a suffers no

_ change, e. g. dyov instead of #yov, alpeoy instead of #peor.

4. Verbs which have the Digamma, in Homer take the syllabic augment,
according to the rule, e. g. avidvw, to please, Impf. édvdavov, Aor. &édov ,— €fdo-

| pou, videor, éexrduny, also in the participle éeusduevos. On account of the verse,
the ¢ seems to be lengthened in ¢lo:xvia, evade (Fade) from avddvw.

5. In Homer, the verbs oivoxoéw and avddvw, take at the same time both the
"syllabic and temporal augment, viz. éwvoxde, Il. 5, 3, yet more frequently gyo-
s xéet; éfvdave and fvdave.
| 6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in pepytwpévos, from pumdw, to
make dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, Zuuopa from peflpouat
nd Erovpa from cedw, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning
ith p, i.e. by Metathesis ; hence Zupopa, etc., instead of uéuopa.— The Epic
and Ion. Perf. of xrdowa: is %ernua, A strengthened reduplication is found in
| 9 he Hom. forms ded¢éxara and deldexro.

_ 7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the
reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple
ment «is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. «4d uvw, to grow weary, Subj. Aor.
| kexduw; KéXomat, to command, éxexadsuny; nAbw, to hear, Aor. Imp. Kéxats,
kAuTe; Aayxdvw, to obtain, AeAaxov; AauBdvw, to receive, AcAaBéoSat ;
avSdyw, lateo, to escape notice, AéAaSov ; welSw, to persuade, wémBSov, wemSd-
ww; TéEpmw, to delight, rerpamduny; Tvyxdve, to obtain, reruKeiv, TeTUKETSaL ;
PENA, to murder, trevor, répvov; pp d¢w, to say, to show, wéppadov, eréppador.

Aorists with the Att. reduplication (comp. § 124, Rem. 2) commonly take the
ugment: “APQ, to fit, Hp-apoy; "AXQ, to grieve, Hx-axov; adékw, to ward off,
A-aAKor, ddcAkeiv ; Spyvut, to excite, Sp-opov; évlarw, to chide, év-évirov. Two

260 " DIALECTS. [§ 220,

A

verbs in the Aor. take the reduplication in the middle of the word: viz. évimr@,
iv-tramev, and éptxw, to restrain, qpt-kaxov, épuxaxéey. Comp. the Presents,
évivnut, aTiTdAAw, dmimredvw. /

8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plup. with the
Att. reduplication ({ 124); thus, e. g. aipéw, to take, Ion. dp-alpnra, dp-alpnuas;
&Adopat, to wander, Epic Perf. with a Pres. signification &A-dAnua; “APQ
(apapioxw), to fit, Poet. ap-dpa, I fit, (Intrans.), Ion. &pnpa; "AXOQ (dxaxl¢w), to
grieve, Epic and Ion. ak-jxeuat, ax-dxnuat; "ENEKQ (oépw), to carry, Ion. év-
hvevypat; épelaw, to demolish, Poet. ép-hpima, Epic ép-épirro; ép! Cw, to contend,
Epic ép-jpiopat.

§ 220. Personal-endings and Mode-vowels.

1. First Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -ux of the first Pers. Sing. is
found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctives, e. g. erelvomt, aydywut, Texel
Trout, €SéAwm, wut. Comp. § 116, 1.

2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the ol. and Ep.
dialect, the lengthened form -o3a is found (§ 116, 2). In the Ind., this
belongs almost exclusively to the conjugation in -w, e. g. tiSyoSa, pjoda,
didoicSa, mapjoda. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj., e. g. éSéAno-
Sa, efrnoSa, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. xAaloiwda, BdAow Sa.

3. Instead of the ending - ers, the Dor. frequently has the old form -es, e. g.
tomes instead of témreis; so in Theocritus cvpicdes = ovplfes.

4, Third Pers. Sing. Act. In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes has the
ending -o: (arising from -t:) appended to the usual ending of the Subj., e. g.
éséAnoi(v), &ynot, dAdAKnot; the Opt. only in wapadSatyor,

5. Instead of the ending -e: in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form -
is used, though seldom, e. g. d:iddonn instead of Siddexe:. In the second and
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Act., Theocritus uses the endings -ys, -n instead of -as,
-€, &. g. memdvans, drHmy instead of wémovSas, drwre.

6. First Pers. Pl. Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending
-mes, &. g. TUMTomes instead of TUmTomey (§ 204).

7. The third Pers. Pl. Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends
throughout in -yt, e. g. réwroyrt (instead of tbrrover), TUpovT!, TUTTwrTE
(instead of témrwot), TeTdpayTi, erawéoyti, ekawarGv7t. In the Alol. and Dor.,
this ending in the Pres. and Fut. is -o1o1 instead of -ovot, e. g. wepimvéoir(v),
vatowr(y).

8. Personal endings of the Plup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the
following forms occur :—

First Pers. Sing. ., -ea the only Epic and Ion. form (-n old Att., § 116, 6), e. g-

eredShmea, wdea, memoisea instead of eredhetv, etc.

Second “ “ -eas, e. g. éredhmeas, Od. w, 90, instead of éeredfrets.

Third “ “ ~ee(v), €. g. @yeydvee, KaTadeAolmee, €BeBpdxeev (not Hom.).

Second“ Pl. -éare, e. g. cuvyddéare, Her. 9, 58.

‘Remark 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in -e, as well as the same —
Pers. of the Impf. in -e:, is found in Homer before a vowel with the v paragogic;

PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 261

§ 220.]

thus, érrfxeiv, Il. Y, 691. BeBatewv, Il. €, 661. %, 270. f, 412. Sederrvjnew, Od.
Ps 359 ; — fone, ll. y, 388.

9. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses are sometimes
exchanged for each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -royv and -cSoy (second
Pers. Dual) stand instead of -rnv and -cny (third Pers. Dual), e. g. didxerov,
Il. x, 364. Aapdoceroy, Il. o, 583. Swpyocecdoy, Il. v, 301. On this inter-
change in Attic, see § 116, Rem.

10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Subj., Impf. Ind. and Opt. Mid. or
Pass., the first Aor. Mid. Ind., after dropping o, remain uncontracted in the
Ton. and often in the Epic dialect, e. g. émvréAAcat; Homer uses either these
| forms, e. g. Aclrea, AtAaleat, aplxna, épboveat, erabpnat, breddoao, éyelvao, or
the contract forms, -y (from -ea), -ev (from -¢o), -w (from -ao), e. g. rAev, Epxeu,
gpdtev, éxpéuw. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently
Omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -ea: and -co, e. g. pirdat instead of piAcen,
$rAéo instead of giAceo; so in Homer, éxaAé’, Il. w, 202, yet with the variation
tc from xAdouar. Comp. § 222, B (3).—The ending -eo in Homer is
lengthened into -eco, e. g. Zpeio, oweio, and the ending -éea is contracted into
~ciat, in verbs in -éw, e. g. uvdetau, vet. Homer sometimes drops o in the
second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. also, viz. wéuynat (and péurp),

_ BeBAna, oovo.

11. The Dual endings -rny, -cSny, and first Pers. Sing. -wnv, in the Doric
are, -Tay, -cSav, -wav (§ 201, 2), e. g. eppacduay. In the later Doric, the
change of 7 into a is found, though seldom, even in the Aor, Pass., e. g. érémay

instead of érvmnv.
. 12. The personal-endings -yeSor, -ueSa, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionic,
and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -peoSov, -ueoSa, €. g. TurTduer-
Boy, turréuecda. ;
| 13. The third Pers. Pl. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic
| dialect, very generally ends in -atat, -aro, instead of -yra:, -yro, e. g. wemel-
Sara, reratarat, éBeBovdedaro, éorddaro; very often also the third Pers. Pl.
Opt. Mid. or Pass. is -ofarv, -aiaro, instead of -owro, -awro, e. g. rurrotaro
tead of tirrowro, apnoalaro (Homeric), instead of aphoavro. Also the
ending -ovro, in the Ion. dialect, has this change, though the o before y becomes
| €,€. g. €BovAéaro instead of éBotAovro. In verbs in -dw and -éw, the 7 in the
| ending of the Perf. and Plup. -nvrat, -nvro, is shortened in the Ionic into ¢, e. g.
| oixéaras instead of Sxnvru from oixéw, érerméaro instead of érerlunyro from
| rmdw. Also instead of -avra, the Ionic dialect has -éara: (instead of -darat),
_ ©. g. werréara: instead of wéwraytat. “Amlkara, in Herofjptus, from the Perf.
biywar (Pres. adixvéoua:) is the only example in which the rule stated § 116,
45, is not observed.

ns

Rem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms are found in Homer with the ending
Sarat, -5aro, from verbs whose characteristic is not 5, viz. éda’vw (é€Adw)
AhAauat €Andddaro, Od. n, 86, and dxaxl(w aehxyeua dxnxedarat, Il. p, 637; the
_ Sseems to be merely euphonic; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not

wholly settled ; the forms éppddara: and épfddaro (from pafyw) must be derived
from the stem ‘PAZQ (comp. sdocare, Od. v, 150).

262 DIALECTS. [§ 220.

i

14. The third Pers. Pl. Aor. Pass. -noay is abridged into -ev, in the Doric,
and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpdpey instead of érpd-
gnoav. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language
(§ 116, 7), &. g. rupSezev instead of rupdelnoar.

15. The third Pers. Pl. Imp. Act. in -rwoay, and Mid. or Pass. in oSwoar, is
abridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect (always in Homer) into -yrwy and -cSev
(§ 116, 12), e. g. rumrévrwy instead of turrérwoav, memoiSdyTwy instead of memor-
Sérwoay, turrécSwy instead of rurrécSwoar.

16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. w and y, are very frequently
shortened in the Epic dialect into o and e, according to the necessities of the
verse, e. g. Youey instead of twuev; Pdiduccda instead of -dueda; orpéperat
instead of -nrat (§ 207, 4).

17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the Aolic dialect ends in -e1a, -e1as, -ere, ete.,
third Pers. Pl. -e:av, instead of -amt, -ats, -at, ete., third Pers. Pl. -asev. See
§ 116, 9.

18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf. Act. is -weva:, and with
the mode-vowel, -éuevat, which is found in the Epic, Doric, and XZolic dialects.
This form is sometimes shortened into -yev (-éuev) by dropping a, sometimes
into -vaz by syneopating we (cue). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -e also
is found, formed from -éuey, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also
the endings -éew and -ety. The Pres., Fut., and second Aor. take the mode-
vowel « and the ending -wev, hence -éuev, e. g. rumtT-é-wev, TUPewev, cimeuev. —
Verbs in -dw and -éw, as they contract the characteristic-vowel a and the
mode-vowel ¢ of the Inf. ending -gueva:, have the form -juevat, e. g. yonmevat
(yodw), pirhuevan (pirew), pophuevas (popéw). — With the ending -juevar corre-
sponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. rumfmeva: instead of rumijvai, aodAu
Shueva; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in
Fev, e. g. TuTjuwev.—In the Pres. of verbs in -u, the ending -wev and -pevar is
appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act., to
the pure stem, e. g. Tidé-per, TIe-pevat, lord-pev, lord-mevat, 51dd-uev, 51dd-nevat,
Seuxvi-uev, deuvd-yevar; Sé-pwev, Sé-pevat, dd-uev, 86-uevar; so also in Perfects
derived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. redvduev, BeBduey. The
following are exceptions, viz. rwShuevat, Il. y, 83 (with which the forms of the
Pres. Part. Mid. r:S4pevos, xixfpevos, correspond), did0dva, Il. w, 425, also the
Inf. second Aor. Act. of verbs in -a and -v, which also retain the long vowel
(§ 191, 2), e. g. orh-pevan, Bh-pevat, Sv-uevat, instead of orijva, Siva.

19. Besides the forms in -éueya: and -éuev, the Doric dialect has one in -ey
abridged from thesege. g. &yev instead of &yew; Fut. apudcey instead of &pud-
gew; second Aor. idéy instead of ideiv, AaBév instead of AaBeiy, etc. In the
Dorie of Theocritus, the Aol. Inf. ending -ny is found, e. g. xalpny, second
Aor. AaBiv, instead of xalpew, AaBeiv.

20. The Inf. ending of the Aor. Pass. -juevat, -jjuer, is abridged into -yy in
the Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. ueddodny instead
of -Sfjva. The Inf. ending of the Perf. Act. varies between -nv and -ety in
the Doric and olic writers, e. g. redXewphxny, yeydvew instead of redewpneevar,
yeyovévat.

|. * ““.

§§ 221, 222.] conTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 263

21. Participle. The J£olic dialect has the diphthong o: instead of ov before
¢ in participles, and a: instead of 4, e. g. rérrav, rérrotca, tiwrov, AaBoioa,
Arroica instead of -otoa; ripats, -aioa, instead of ripds, -doa (§§ 201, 2. and
207,1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into w in the oblique
cases, ¢. £. weuadros, tepuvaras.— The Perf. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect,
sometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. reppixovres instead of reppixdres.

§ 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form.

1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in
imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf. and Aor. form with the
| ending -cxoy, to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called

the Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment.

2. It is generally found only in the Sing. and in the third Pers. Pl. Ind. of
the Impf. and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf.; for in the Impf. and
second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -cxoy, -oxes, oxe(v), -oxduny, -oKou( eo, ev),
-cxero, preceded by the union-vowel e¢, are used instead of -ov, -duny, and in the
first Aor. Act. and Mid. the endings -acxoy, -acxéuny are used instead of -a,
-duny, e. g.

(a) Impf. dwed-eoxov, SéA-eoxes, Ex-eoxe(v), meA-€oxero, Book-écxovto. In
verbs in -dw, -deoxoyr is abridged into -agxoy, which, according to the necessities
of the verse, can be again lengthened into -dacxoy, e. g. vikdoKouey, vareTdao-
xov. Verbs in -éw have -éecxov and -eckor, e. g. kadé-eoke, Bovkodderke ; ofxvec-

‘ov, mwAéoKero, KadéoxeTo; when the verse requires, -éecxoy can be lengthened
into -elecxov, @. g. veuelerxoy; verbs in -dw do not have this Iterative form
- among the older authors; verbs in -ws omit the mode-vowel here also, e. g.
_ -tiSe-cxov, 5180-cKov, delxvv-cxov ; in some verbs the ending -acxoy has taken the
place of -ecxoy, e. g. plrr-acKoy, xptrr-acxoy, from pirtw, kpirrw.

_- (b) Second Aor. éa-eoxe, BéA-eoxe, Pvy-eoxe ; in verbs in -u, without a mode-
vowel, e. g. ord-oxe (= Zorn), wapeBdoxe (= mapéBn), Séone, Bicke; also an
Iterative form of the second Aor. Pass. is found, viz. odveoxe instead of épdyn,
IL. A, 64. Od. pw, 241, 242.

| (c) First Aor. éAdo-ackev, addho-acKev, to-acKe, pyno-doKeto, ayvdo-acKe
| (instead of &yvofcacke from &yvoéw).

§ 222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs.

I. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -dw, -éw, -dw, are subject
to contraction, but by no means so generally as in the Attic. The contraction
made according to the general rules, with a few exceptions, as will be seen in
e following remarks.

A. Verbs in-d@. (1) In these verbs, the uncontracted form occurs only in
rtain words and forms, e. g. répaov, karecklaov, varerdovor; always in bAdw, and
n verbs which have a long a for their characteristic, or whose stem is a mono-

le, e. g. Supdwv, wewdwy, Expae, expdere (from xpiw, to attack).

264 | DIALECTS, [§ 222.

(2) In some words, a is changed into e, viz. wevolveoy from pevowdw, vreov
from dvrdw, dudkAcoy from duoxAdw. Comp. § 201, 1.

(3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable
is resolved, as often as the measure requires it; this is done by inserting a simi-
lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed
by contraction ; in this way, @ is resolved into && or da, and w into ow or ww
(§ 207, 2). The short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the
contracted one is short, e. g. (6p@) dpdw; but if this syllable is long, the long
vowel must be used on account of the verse, e.g. 7Béwoa. The resolution does
not take place with the vowel a before a personal-ending beginning with 7,
e. g. dpa-rat, dpa-ro. Thus :—

(dpdets) épas ép&as (dpa) bpa bpdw
(SpdeoSa:) dpacdSa dsptacdat (épdovea) dpaoa sbpdwoa
(wevowder) pevowG pmevorvag (Bodovet) Bodo. Bodwat
(dns) egs édas (dpdouut) épput = S pd wt
(uvdeoSa:) pvacdsat pvaagdat (Spdéove:) Spaor. Spdwou.

Remark 1. In Od. é, 343, the form épna: (from dpdéea) occurs instead of the
dpa, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, ae is contracted into
N: Mposavdhtny, TVAHTHY, TuvayThrny, porATny instead of -drny; so also in the
two verbs in -éw, duaptnTny, &re:Aftny instead of -elrgy.

4. When vt comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may be inserted
between yr and such a contracted syllable, e. g. 7Béovra instead of 7BavTa,
vyeddortes, uveovto; in the Opt. also, the protracted - wo. instead of -» is found
in Adon (instead of 7#Adomws = HBGus). The following are anomalous forms:
vaerdwon (instead of -dwoa), cdw, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers.
Sing, Impf. Act. from SAQ, to save.

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in -4ueva: of verbs in -dw and -éw, see § 220, 18, and on
the Epic-Ionic contraction of on into w, see § 205, 5.

B. Verbs in-éw. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -éw and
-€ouat, all second Persons in -eo, -eat, and -yat, second Aor. Inf. Act. in -éeiy,
and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -éw and -efw. ;

(1) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which ¢ is followed by the
vowels w, @, 7,7, ol, and ov, e.g. pirewpev, PiArcoiut, etc. ; yet such uncontracted
forms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac-
tion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. pide, epew
Fut., érpuvéovea Fut., Bade second Aor. Act., meoéeoda: Fut. Mid., wryéwor
second Aor. Subj. Pass.; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con-
tracted, it becomes ev (§ 205, 1), e.g. alpeduny, aireuy, yévev; except avepplarrouy
and érdpSovr. :

(2) Sometimes the open ¢ is lengthened into « (§ 207, 1), &. g. éreActero,
erérciov, mrelewv, dxvetw;—dayelw instead of day, pryely instead of pryn
(second Aor. Subj. Pass.).

(3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons
coming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. mudé-eat
== pvdeiat, like puSe?rot, veiat, like veirat, or one e€. is elided, e. g. pudéar;.

~*~

§ 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 265

mwdréa:. This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writers,
in the second Pers. Impf. and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., e. g. poBéo, ado, alréo,
étnyéo. In such cases, the accent is on the penult, whether the word ends with
-eat or -eo (§ 220, 10).
Rem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, see Rem. 1; on the Inf.
in -fuevas, see § 220, 18.
C. Verbs in-éw. These yerbs follow either the common rules of contrac-
tion, ¢. g. youvotuat, youvodcSa, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into
@, and then the forms of verbs in -éw resemble those of verbs in -dw, e. g.
| Bpdovra, Bpéovea, ixvéovras (comp. iAdovra, 4 above) ; or they become wholly
| analogous to verbs in -dw, since they resolve -odo: (third Pers. Pl. Pres.) into
-d@01, -odvyro into -dwyro, and -ofev into -éwev, and consequently suppose a
contraction like that of verbs in -dw: (dapdover) dpoda: &apdwor (comp. dpdwet),
(8nidovro) Sniodvro Snidwvro (comp. dpéwyTo), (Snidorev) Snioty Snidwev (comp.
dpéwev). But this resolution into -éw or -wo is confined to such forms as admit
it in verbs in -dw; hence, e.g. the Pres. dpots, &pot, dpodre, and the Inf. apodv, do
not admit this seppliition.

II. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -d@ and -éq@ suffer
| contraction ; verbs in -é€@ commonly omit it, except the contraction of -eo and
| -eov into -ev, which frequently occurs (§ 205, 1), e. g. iAcduer instead of giréo-

ev = didoduer, eplrevy instead of épircoy = epiarovy, pidcd instead of pidcov

= pido. ;
(2) The uncontracted forms exhibited in the table (§ 135) of the second
1 Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass. in -éy, -dy, -én, -€ov, -dov, -dou, . g.
GA, Tindn, mioddp, pir€ov, Tiudov, proSdov, etc. are found in no dialect, and
} are presented merely to explain the contraction. For even the Ionic writers
-_ use here the contracted forms of verbs in -dw and -dw, e. g. Tid, moor, TYWd,
| uteSod, etc. ; but of verbs in -éw, as also in barytone verbs, they do not use the
endings -y, -ov, but -eas, -e0, e. g. Tdmr-eat, erdmr-co, pidé-eat, epirdd-eo. —On the
_ elision of ¢ in the ending -¢eo, see above, No. 1, B (3).

(3) Verbs in -dw follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon-
tracted form, the a is changed into ¢, e. g. dpéw, dpéouev instead of dpdw, xpéera,
xpéovra instead of xpdera:, etc. Comp. § 201, 1.

(4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into éw (§ 207, 3),
e. g. xpéwvtat, exréwvro, dpéwvtes, weipeduevos instead of (xpdovra) xpavrat,
etc.

(5) The change of the a into ¢, as in dpéw, explains the usage among the Ion.
writers of sometimes contracting ao and aov, and also eo and eov in verbs in
-éw, into -ev (§ 205, 1), e. g. eipdrevy instead of ecipdéraov, yeAcdoa instead of
yeAdovea, &yamedvres instead of dyardovtes. So also in the Doric dialect, e. g.
yeAcdvtt instead of yeAdovor. This contraction into ev instead of ov is often
found even in verbs in -dw, e. g. dicateior instead of (Sixasdover) dixaiodor,
Bicaedy instead of dixawdy, ediucalevy, crepavedyra from orepavdw.

(6) In Ionic prose, the ee resolution is found but seldom in yerbs in -dw,

©. g. Koudwor, Hyopdwyro, Her.

23

266 DIALECTS. __ [§ 223.

If. Doric dialect. (1) Contrary to the common usage of the Doric, ae and
aes are contracted into » and » (§ 205, 3), e. g. rmAre instead of riudere =
TywaTe, porTHs instead of po:rgs, dphv instead of épav. The Inf. is written
without an « subscript, as the uncontracted form originally ended in -aw.
Comp. also II. 5, also § 184, 3.

(2) The Inf. of verbs in -é has a double form, either the abridged form in
-€v instead of -eiv, e. g. ogy instead of moiety, or according to the analogy of
verbs in -dw, a form in -ny (from -ény), e. g. piAjy instead of pircew = girciv,
koopijy instead of kocpeiv, pporvqy instead of ppoveiy.

(3) In the Doric and olic dialects, -ao, -aov, and -aw are contracted into a
(§ 205, 2), e.g. wewaues instead of rewapuev (redone), rewayts instead of
mew(d-ov)@-o1, yeAay instead of yeA(d-wy)Gv, pucayres instead of pva(d-0)d-vTes.

Rem. 4. On the contraction into -ev instead of -ov, see § 205, 1.— A striking
peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The-
ocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -éw,

e. g. érdvaca instead of éréyvnoa from tovew, épiraca instead of éplAnoa from
pirew.

§ 223. Formation of the Tenses.

1. Besides the verbs mentioned ({ 130), the following also in the Homeric
dialect retain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. xoréw, to
have a grudge; veiwxéw, to quarrel ; taviw, to stretch ; épiw, to draw. On the con-
trary, éravéw, to approve, has émfynoa.

2. In the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the
short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs
in -(w, -0cw (-rTw), the o can be doubled in the ending, in Homer and other
non-Attic poets (§ 208, 4), e. g. éyéAacce, notecodpuevos, dudcom, erdvvoce,
Sucdooa, couiorce.

3. The form of the Attic Fut. (§ 117) occurs in the Homeric dialect in verbs
in -i€w, e. g. KTepiodot, &yAateiosa, together with the common Futures éputoco-
bev, Komplacovtes, koviccovor(y). From verbs in -éw, -dw, -bw, Hom. forms
Futures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -éw, he
often uses the ending -éw instead of -éow, e. g. copée, Il. 3, 379. xopéers, Il. v,
831. waxéoyrat, Il. 8, 366;—in verbs in -dw, after dropping o, he places before
the vowel formed by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. dyridw,
€Adwor, Sauda;—in verbs in - dw, épvovor and ravdover are found.

4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in -¢w take ~ instead of o¢ in those tenses
whose characteristic is o, i.e. in the Fut. and Aor., e. g. dicd(w, dicatd, ed{xata,
instead of dixdow, éd{kaca. But the other tenses of verbs with the pure charac-
teristic 5, follow the regular formation, e. g. éicdoSnv, not eéduxndxSynv. This
peculiarity of the Doric appears even in certain verbs in -éw, which, in forming
the tenses, retain the short a, and in this respect are analogous to those in -¢w,
which likewise have a short vowel, e. g. yeAdw, éyéAata instead of éyéAaca, yet
not vindw, vKato, but vuxao@ (Att. vuxhow). In Doric poetry, the regular form
of all these words can be used, according to the necessities of the metre. —

5. The following verbs in -(w have, in Homer and the Ionic dialect, ¢ instead

§ 223.| FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 267

of o, through the whole formation, viz. 4B pord¢w, to wander; dramwd Ca, to

empty, Fut. ddamdtw, etc. (so also Xenoph. An. J. 1, 29); SvomaAl ¢w, to shake;

Sat(w, to divide, to put todeath; éyyvadl Cw, to give; évapiCw, to spoil a dead

enemy; SpvrAal Cw, to break in pieces; pepunpl (a, to reflect; rere ul Cw, to

shake; wore wl Cw, to contend; eruperi Cw, to smite.

| 6. Liquid verbs in -afyvw, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the
ending -ava instead of -nva (§ 149, Rem. 2), have a in the Doric, and 7 in the
Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of
all periods, form the Fut. and first Aor. with the ending -ow and -oa, viz.
K&Aw, to land (xéAcat, comp. cévom from kevréw, to goad); efAw, to crowd
together (vat); xipw, to meet, to fall upon; dpaptoxw (’AP-2), to fit (jpoa, &poat) ;
bp-vumt, to excite (Yprw, Spoa); diapSelpw, to destroy (diapSépoa in Homer) ;
xelpw, to shave (%epoa in Homer, but first Aor. Mid. éxe:pduny); pipw, to mix, to
knead (pipow, %pupoa, repipooua:, Epic and old poetic; second Aor. Pass.
épépnv in Lucian, who also has the poetic Perf. répvpua:, while in prose, the
verb gupdw, epipaca, mepipaua, etc., is used). The Opt. opéAdrciey, Od. B, 334
IL. x, 651, is formed according to the usage of the A£olic.

7. To verbs which form the Fut. without the tense-characteristic o (§ 154, 4)
belong the following forms of the Epic dialect: Béowa: or Beloua:, second Pers.
Bén, I shall live, perhaps from Batvw, to go, to live, also from AAQ, to know, to
learn, and KEIO (xeiuat, to lie down), dhw, Shes, Shower, Shere (I shall view, find),
and xelw or xéw, Keiéuerv, kelwy, Kéwy.

8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic ¢
“(§ 154, 7) belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect: xéw, to
pour out, €xeva (Homer; Att. txea); cetw, to shake, tooeva and éooevduny
(Homer), aAdoua: and GActoua, to avoid, nAedbaro, etc. (§ 230); Kalw, to burn,
&xna, tev Epic, tea Tragic (§ 230).

9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Perf: (§ 154, 6), belongs
also the Epic cexaphow (with cexaphooua), I shall be joyful, from xalpw.

10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first
Aor. (§ 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e. g. Balvyw, to go,
| €Bioero, Imp. Bhoeo; dvopuat, to plunge, €3ba6€7 0, Imp. dvceo, Part. ducduevos ;
| byw, to lead, &E ere, dkeuev ; ixvéouat, to come, TEov; éréyunr, I laid myself down
BY to sleep, Imp. A€éo, Adkeo; Fpvum, excito, Imp. ’paeo, iprev; Pépw, to bear,
“De _olce (olce is also Att.), oteere, oloérw, olodvtwy, oicduev, ologuevan; deldw, to
| sing, Imp. del ceo.

11. Several second Aorists, in Homer, are formed by a Metathesis of the
consonants (§ 156), in order to make a dactyle, e. g. @paxoy instead of %apxoy
(from Sépxoua), &rpaov (from wépSw), pasov (from SapSdvw), HuBporov
(instead of fuaproyv from auaprdyw). For the same reason Homer syncopates
» | the stem (§ 155), e.g. aypduevos from ayepécSar (dyelpw, to collect) ; &ypero,

| &ypeo (Imp.), Zyporro, &ypeoSa (with the accent of the Pres.), eypduevogefrom
eyepécdau (eyelpw, to wake); mrdéuny, exrdunv, wréoSai, wrduevos (wéromat, to
Sly); enéxrero, xékrero, xexAdpevos (xéAopat, to summon, excite) ; wépvov, repro
(SENQ, to kill).

12. In the first Aor. Pass, Homer inserts a y, according to the necessities of

PRD TAIRA

ee

268 DIALECTS. [$ 223.

the verse, not only as other poets (§ 149, Rem. 4) in kpfyw and KAlyw (Siaxpw-
Sire, kpwaels, €xAlvSn), but also in iSpte, to establish, and mvéw, to blow (iSptvanv
and iSpvany, durvivdn).

13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs
as in the tense-formation assume an e ({ 166) or are subject to Metathesis
(§ 156, 2), e. g. xalpw kexdpnea (from XAIPE-2.), BéAAw BEBAnka (from BAA).
Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to
intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs
and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the « in certain persons
and modes, and regularly in the Part.; in this way, these forms become analo-
gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e¢ into
n, &. g. BeBapnes, burdened (from BAPEQ), kexopndés, satisfied (from Kopé-vyumt),
KexoTnds, enraged (from Koréw), TeTinds, troubled (from TIEQ), retAnds, enduring
(from TAAQ), rexapnes, gasping for breath (from KA®EQ), cexunds, wearied (from
kduvw), rertnds (from mrjoow, to shrink through fear), reSvnds, kext HOT, KEXa-
pnés (from xalpw) ;—or they retain, though more seldom, the stem-vowel without
change, e. g. BeBads (from Batyw, BAQ), eeyeyavia (from yiyvoua, TAN), dedads
(from d:ddonw, AAQ), repivia (from ptw), éordds (from tornut, STAD), peutids
(with peuaids and peuadres from MAQ). The accented o of the oblique cases
can, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the verse, be lengthened
into w, hence reSvndros and -Gros, Tedvndta and -Gra, kexunéra and -Gra; but
when the Nom. has a short penult, w is always used (except in éordéros), e. g.
BeBiaros. The ending -és, formed by contraction, is resolved by ¢ in rerre@ra
(from aimrw}, redveGr1, and according to the necessities of the verse, e can be
lengthened into «1, e. g. reSver@ros. The feminine form -@oa is found only in
BeBaoa, Od. v, 14; in some feminine forms, the antepenult, which properly would
be long, is shortened on account of the verse, e. g. &papvia (Fem. of apnpaés from
dpaplioxw), wewixvia (of peunnds, from pnkdoun), TeddAvia (Of reSnAds, from
SdAAw), AcAdKvia (Of AcAnkds, from Adokw), rewédvia (from mdoxw).

Remark 1. The form resolved by e, in the Ionic dialect, has become the
permanent one with some participles, e. g. reds; so TeSveds (never Tedvds)
and reSynxas from réSvnxa, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms,
the w remains through all the cases, e. g.

éoteds, écre@oa, éoreds, Gen. éoredtos, -éons
Tesveds, TESVEGOU, Tedveds, Gen. TedSvEe@Tos, -do7NS.
BéBnxa and rérAnka never have these forms. Comp. § 193, Rem. 3.

14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong ev,
shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into %, in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and
in the first Aor. Pass., e. g.

mevSoua, to ask, rémva mat; cevw, to shake, Mid. and Pass. to hasten, 2a a%-

padMfirst Aor. Pass. €oovSnv; tedxw (poet.), paro, Perf. rérvyuat, Aor.

eruxSnv; pevyw, to flee, Perf. repuymévos.

Rem. 2. Xéw (formed from xéFw, xetw), to pour out, follows the analogy of

these verbs, in the forms réxixa, céxtuai, éx¥sny; these forms have been trans-
ferred to the Common language also (j 154, Rem.1). Contrary to the analogy

~

§ 224. CONJUGATION IN -pt. 269

t stated, the v is long in the Homeric form wémvipa from mvéw (svéFw), to

Rem. 3. In Homer, Od. o, 238, the third Pers. Opt. Plup. AeAdro instead of
AeAtiro is found, according to the analogy of ryyviro, Savio.

Rem. 4. The Homeric Perfects axaxjmevos, dAadjuevos, apnpéuevos, éAnrAdue-
vos, axdxnoda, dAdAnoSa, have the accentuation of the Pres.

§ 224. Conjugation in -pe.

1. On the lengthened form of the second Pers. riSynoda, d{So.0Sa, see § 220,
2; on the Jterative forms in -oxov, see § 221; on the Inf. forms in -yevar, -yev,
see § 220, 18.

2. In the Epic, Ion., and Dor. writers, some verbs in -u: in the second and
| third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf., frequently have the contracted forms of verbs
in -ém and -dw ({ 172, Rem. 8), e. g. TiWels, Tider, Sidots, Sid07, eriSer, ed{dous,
€d{50v, fer; contracted forms of fornu: are very rare, e. g. iorg instead of
ternot, Her. 4, 103. In the second Aor. Opt. Mid. the Ionic writers have the
resolved form Seoluny, as if from OEQ, e. g. rposSéorro, mposSéoiwse.

3. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -du: form an Opt., not only in the Mid., as
sometimes in Attic writers, e. g. Savid70, Il. w, 665. (comp. AeAdTo, § 223, Rem.
3), from Balvuuat, but also in the Act., e. g. éxdduey (instead of éxdulnuer) from
éxdbw, pin (instead of puln) from giw; so pSi0, pSiro Opt. of épSiuny from
Priw.

4. The third Pers. Pl. Impf. and second Aor. in -e-cay, -n-cay, -0-cay, -w-cay
-v-ray, are abridged in the Epic and Dor. dialects into -ev, -dy, -ov, -ty, e. g.
tridey instead of éridecay, @ev, Sév instead of WSecay; tardy, crdy instead of
tornoay, Pay instead of pSynoay, EBay, Bdy instead of ZBnoav; Bidov, didov
instead of édi{d0cay, Zor, Sév instead of Zocay; epi instead of epicar.

5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Hom. the common form
forn, but Il. 1, 202. nasiora; woride in Theoc. instead of wotises or mpdsSes
from TIOEQ.—In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. Imp.,
Homer rejects the o and admits the uncontracted form even when it could be
contracted, e. g. Salvvo, udpvao, pdo, abvSeo, vSeo. — In the Ion. dialect, the first
a of the ending -aca:, second Pers. Mid. or Pass., is changed into e, after the
rejection of the o, e. g. éwlaoreat, Sbveas, instead of érlatara, divaca ; hence
the contracted forms éxlo7pn in the Ion. poets, and also Suv n (§ 172, 2) in the
Tragedians.

6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened before personal-endings
beginning with u and y, according to the demand of the measure, e. g. Tidjpe-
vos; d:do0va ; so also di5wS:, And instead of TAGS:

7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -ct
(§ 220, 4), e. g. Sor and Séncx (instead of 5G), wedtyor.

8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic a and e, is sometimes
resolved by ¢ in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion.

(a) Verbs in -a (fornut) : —

ee es

e*

(ford-) irr Ton. ioré-w, ioré-ns, iord-wper, -é-nTe, -€-wot
(ord-) orG =“ oré-w, oré-ns, oré-wper, etc.

23*

270 DIALECTS. [§ 224.

Remark 1. So also in Herod.: mpoeoréare and éoréaci, écreds, instead of
-daot, -aws, Gen. écre@ros, Neut. éoreds, Fem. éotedoa. So also in the Att
Tesveds (with redvnxds), Tedvedoa, TedSveds, GEN. TESvE@Tos.

(b) Verbs in ¢ (7fSnut):—
Ti9@ Ion. Twde-w, TISE-ns, TIDE-wuev, -E-NTE, -é-wot
TiISGuar “ TIde-wual, TIVE-7, etc.
86 “ Sé-w, Fé-ns, Sé-wuevr, ete.
Saua “ Sé-wuas, etc.

Rem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass. of all verbs are like the
verb ridnm, e. g.
TUT, -js Ion. tuméw, -éns, -ewpev, -ente
dana, “is “ Bauéw, -éns, -ewuer, -énre
edpeda@, -js “ ebpeddw, -éns, etc.
(c) Verbs in o (df5wus); the contracted second Aor. Subj. is resolved in
Homer by means of w, e. g. déwor instead of daa.

9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to
the nature of the verse : —

Contracted, Resolved and lengthened forms, .

Sing. 1l.| o7é oTéw, oTelw, Betouat
2.| oTns orhns
3.| o7n orhn, uBin, pin, phn
Dual. OTHTOV TapaTHerTov
Plur. 1.| ocrapev oréwuev (dissyllable) orelouer, nataBelomer
2.| orire oThere
3.| oraoi(v) oréwor(v), meproTthwor, Il. p, 95.
Sing. 1.| Sa Séw, elw, Sauelw
2.| Sis Séns, Sins, and sels
3. n Sén, Shy, avin, and merely
Dual. Tov Seletov
Plur. 1.| Sauev Séwpuev, Selowev
2.| dre dapelere
3.| @or(v) Séwou(v), Selwor(v)
Sing.1.| 38
2.| d@s
3.| 8g dénoi(v) and dan
Plur. 1.| Sauer Sdomev
2.) darTe
3.| dé01(v) Sadwor(v)

Rem. 3. The resolution by means of ¢ is found in verbs with the stem-
vowels a ore; the e is commonly lengthened, (a) into « before an o sound;
(b) into » before 7 in verbs with the stem-vowel a; (c) sometimes into e:, some-
times into 7 before n, in verbs with the stem-vowel«. Verbs with the stem-
vowel o are resolved by wo.

10. The Impf. éri3nv, or commonly ériSouv, has in the Ion. the form érisea
(like érerdgea Ion. instead of éreripemw, § 220, 8), eri dees, -ee, etc.

11. In Homer, a shortened form of the first Aor. ornoay, is found, namely,
éoraoay, they placed, Il. u, 56. Od. +, 182, 7, 307 ; also €ornre (with the variation
Zornrte), ll. 5, 243, 246, instead of ordre (Eorhxare).

SP PRONE

§§ 225, 226.] consJUGATION IN -pt.— Eipi, To BEET, To Go. 271

12. In the third Pers. Pl. Mid. or Pass. the v before the personal-endings -ras
and -ro is regularly changed, by the Ion. writers, into a (§ 220, 13), e. g.

Tridéarat, dcddaTrau, eSexvdaro Ion., instead of risevrat, etc.

But when an a precedes the v, the a is changed into ¢, and vy into a, e. g. ioréaras
Ion., instead of ferayrat, irréaro Ion., instead of ferayro.

13. The third Pers. Sing. in the Doric is -r1, e. g. ferrari, riSnrt, SiSwrt, deln-
port, and the third Pers. Pl. ends in -vtt, ¢. g. iordyri, TX Evrt, FiBdyT1, Secxviyri.

14. The forms of the first Aor. Mid. éSyxduny and éxdunv and the Part.
Syxduevos are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers; on the contrary, the Att.
writers use here also, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remaining
Modes, as also the Part. dwxduevos, are not found.

15. From dfSe@u:, Homer has a reduplicated Fut. didécouer and dddéce7.

§ 225. Elpé (ES-), to be.

PRESENT.
Indicative. Subjunctive.

‘S$. 1. | duul ZEol., instead of éo-ui 1. &@ Ep. and Ion. perefw Ep.

2. | éoof Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. | 2. &s Ion.
s Ion. 3. &, eae), For(v), ep Epic, &

3. évri Dor. Ep. and Ion.

Pit. cinev apts and Ion. Pl. fwuev, Ene, Zwor Ep. and Ion.
2. | éoré regular T t
3. | €aox(v} Epic and Ton., évti Dor. |S 9. zeao Ko ind Epic

Inf. weve, %ypmevan, Ener, Zupev Epic P. 3. éévt@y Ton.

huey Or Tues, eluey or ewes Dor. Participle.
édv, éodoa, édv Ep. and Ion.
IMPERFECT.
Indicative. Optative.

S. 1. | a (comp. ériSea), jja, ov, Zcxov Epic and Ion.
2. | &nodsa Epic, gas Ion. ots
3. | qv Ep. and Ion. inv, fev, frxe(v), Ep., js Dor.) 201 Epic and Ion.

D.3. | Horny Epic

P. 1. | juev or yes, eluey or eles Dor.
2. | are Ion. eire Epic
3. | fray (@recay) Epic and Ion.; evaro (instead of | elev Epic

jvro) Od. v, 106.
Fut. concn and @ocouau, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse,
2. trecu. 3. Everat, eorcirat.

§ 226. Efys (1-), to go.

Pres. Ind. $. 2. eloSa Epic, fs Ion. Subj. Sing. 2. Pers. %yoSa Epic
Inf. Ywevat, Tuer Epic
Impf. Ind. 8. 1. | Hia (and Few) Epic and Ion., gov Epic
2. | ques (and Fes), Yes Epic
3. | Hie (and Fe) Epic and Ion, #ie(v) Epic, fe(v), te(v) Epic

272 DIALECTS. [§ 227.

P. 1. | fouer
3. | Hiov Epic, Hicay and joay Epic and Ion., feay Epic
D. 3. | trnv Epic
Opt. S. 8. | tor Epic, iefn Il. +, 209. (e%mv and e%n Il. 0, 82. w, 139. Od. &, 496,
come from e¢iuf).
Fut. and Aor. Mid. etcoua, etcaro, third Pers. Dual éesodoSny, Il. 0, 544.

VERBS IN -w, WHICH IN THE Pres., Perr., AND SECOND Aor. ACT. AND
Mip., FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OF VERBS IN -m

§ 227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid.

In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned (§§ 191, 192), the poetic and
especially the Epic dialect has the following :—

A. Tue CHARACTERISTIC IS A VOWEL.

(a) Stem- Vowel a (@8ny, BA-):

BddAAw, to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, Z8Anv) EuuBAdTnr, Od. >, 15,
Inf. tyuBAfwevar (instead of -jvat), Il. ¢, 578; Epic second Aor: Mid. (é6aq-
pny) €BAnto, EvuBAnrro, Il. =, 27, Inf. BAjoSau, Part. BAnuevos, Subj. E¥uBAn-
Tat, BAheTa (instead of BAnntra), Od. p, 472, Opt. Bacto (from BAE-, comp.
miumAnut), Il. vy, 288. Hence the Fut. BaAzjooua.

ynpdw, or ynpdoxw, to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing. éyhpa, Il. p, 197,
kateynpa, Herod. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) ynpavo:, Part. (Epic) ynpds. The @ in
éyhpa, etc. is used instead of 7 on account of the preceding p. See d:dpdonw,
§ 192, 1.

xtelvw, to kill, Epic and poet. second Aor. Act. (KTA-) @rdéy retains the short
vowel; thus, rdimev, &crare, third Pers. Pl. also «ray instead of &kracav,
Subj. x7@ (first Pers. Pl. «réwuev Epic), Opt. xratny, Inf. erdva, (Epic crduev,
xtduevat), Part. «rds; Epic second Aor. Mid. with Pass. sense, dréxraro,
KTdORaL, KATAKTOMEVOS.

ovtdw, to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. odta third Pers. Sing., Inf. odrduevat,
ovrduev (the a remains short as in %ray); Epic second Aor. Mid. odrduevos,
wounded.

aedd(w, to approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. éwahuny, (Att. érAduny), mAjjro,
TARVTO.

wAhso (mlurAnut), to fill, Epic second Aor. Mid. @rAnro and mAjjro, &xAnvso,
also in Aristoph., who uses the following forms also: Imp. Ajo, Part. éuaAq-
pevos, Opt. éumdrjuny with the variation éumAciuny, as xpeln from xph(dw) and
Bacio from éBAjunv (BAA-).

athoow, to shrink with fear, Epic second Aor. Act. (MITA-) (@rrnv) kararrhrny
third Pers. Dual.

pardvw, to come before, Epic second Aor. Mid. pSduevos.

Remark. From %nv (Salyw) are found in Homer the forms Barny (third
Pers, Dual) and ir¢pBaoay (third Pers. Pl.) with the short stem-vowel.

‘
|

§ 227.] VERBS IN -w LIKE VERBS IN -pt. 273

(b) Stem- Vowel e (%8nv, SBE-):

AAO, Epic, stem of d:Sdexw, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) éddnv, I learned,
Subj. aa, Epic daelw, Inf. daijva, Epic dafpevat.

(c) Stem- Vowel «:

@Sl-vw, to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. épdtuny, pdlosa, padi-
pevos, PIlcdw, PIlwpa, Opt. PIiuny, Pdiro.

(ad) Stem-Vowel o (&vwv, INO-):

BiBpécKe, to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. @8pwrv. See § 161, 6.
mAdéw (Epic and Ion. secondary form of rAéw), to sail, Epic second Aor. Act.
frAwy, trAwper, Part. rAds, Gen. tAGyTos.

(e) Stem- Vowel v (€5dy):

kAvw (poet.), to hear, Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. cAd&, eAdre; and KéKAvs,
KéxAvte (§ 219, 7).

Atw, to loose, Epic second Aor. Mid. Avro, Avvo.

mvéw, to breathe, Epic second Aor. Mid. (MINY-, from mvéFw, mvedw) &umvito
instead of dvémrviro, to breathe again.

cevw, to shake, Epic second Aor. Mid. éocvuny, I strove, tccvo, cbro.

xéw, to pour out, Epic second Aor. Mid. (X°-, from xéF'w, xebw) xtvTo, xtmevos.

B. Toe CHARACTERISTIC IS A CONSONANT.

GAouat, to leap, Epic and second Aor. Mid. Gago, GATo, érdAuevos, emidApevos,
Subj. Anta.

dpaploxw ("AP-), to fit, Epic &puevos, fitted.

yev7o, to take, Epic, from FéAro, the Digamma being changed into y and the
radical A before r into v (§ 203, B).

vylyvouat, to become, poet. &yevTo, yévTo.

déxouat, to take, Epic @exro, Inf. déxSa:, Imp. Séfo. The first Pers. Sing.
édéyunv and the Part. 5éyuevos have, like the Perf. dé5eyua:, the meaning to
expect, await.

2rcAl(w, to whirl, Epic éAéAcro.

ixvéowot, to come, Epic Txro, ixuevos and Yxuevos, favorable.

AEXQ, to lie down, Epic éAéyuny, ®Aexto, to lay one’s self down (same sense as
éActduny), Imp. Aéto. — Aéyw, to collect, to choose, to count, Od. 1, 335. €Aéyunv,
I counted myself, Od. 8, 451. A€kro dpSudv, he counted the number.

utalyew, to soil, Epic yudvSny (third Pers. Dual, instead of éuidv-cdnr).

uloryo (ubyvups), to mix, Epic ulero.

dpviw (pvupus), to excite, Epic &pro, Inf. ipa, Imp. bpoo, Spceo, Part. 3puevos.

wdddw, to brandish, Epic rdaro, he sprang.

wépSw, to destroy, perdo. Homer uses répSa: instead of répS-oSas.

THI (wiyyvups), to fiz, Epic rire, xarérnxro.

274 DIALECTS. [$ 228,

§ 228. (2) Perf. and Plup. Act. (Comp. §§ 193, 194).

(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel.

yiryvouct, to become ; TETAA, Stem TA: Perf. (Sing. yéyova, -as, -e) Epic and
poet. yéyuuer, -tire, -daor(v), Inf. Epic yeyduey, Part. poet. yeyds, yeyaou,
yeyés, Gen. yey@tos ; — Plup. Epic éxyeydrnv.

Balyw, to go, Perf. BéBnxa, BEBAA: Epic and poet. Pl. Beier, -ére, -dor(v), and
BeBdaor(v) ; third Pers. Pl. Subj. éufeBaor (Pl. Phaed. 252, e), Inf. BeBiiva,
Part. Epic BeBads (also Attic prose BeBds, Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -via (BeBaca,
Pl. Phaed. 254, b), Gen. BeBawros (Att. BeBaros);— Plup. éBéBipev, -are,
-aoay.

deldw, to fear; besides the forms mentioned ({ 193), the following Epic forms
are to be noted: Seldmer, Seldire; Inf. Sediuey instead of Sed:évar; Imp.
delSidi, Seldite ; — Plup. edeldmev, eSeldicay.

Zpxouat, to come, Perf. Epic eiAjAouda instead of éafaAvda, Pl. eiAhrouduev.

Svhoxe, to die, Perf. réSvnxa, TEONAA: Pl. réSvimev, rédvae, Tedvacr(v), Imp.
réQvadi, Part. redvnkds, TeSvnKvia, TedSvnKds OY TESVEds (TEXVEGoa. Demosth.
40, 24), reSveds (Epic teSvnds, -@Tos, -néros), Inf. reSviivan (Aesch. reSvaven
from reSvaévar, Epic reSvduer, -duevat); Plup. éréSvacav, Opt. reSvatnv.

TAAQ, to endure (second Aor. érAny), Perf. rérAnka, TETAAA: Dual rérAdrov;
Pl. rérAduey, TérAdte, TeTAGoI(v), Imp. TéTAGS1, -%rw, etc., Subj. wanting,
Inf. rerAdva (Epic terAduev), but Part. Epic rerAnés; Plup. Dual érérAdroy,
ererAatyy, Pl. érérAduer, érérrAdre, érérAdoay, Opt. rerAainy.

MAQ, to strive, Perf. uéuova; MEMAA: Epic péutimer, -urov, -dre, -dao1(7), Imp.
peutitw, Part. weudids, Gen. weudia@ros and peuddros, third Pers. Pl. Plup.
Beto.

Here belong the two participles of

BiBpdoxw, to eat (second Aor. @Bpwy), Perf. BéBpwra, poet. BeBpds, Gen. -Gros;

aiaxtw, to fall, rémrwxa, Epic rerteds, Att. poet. renrds.

(b) The Stem ends in a Consonant.

It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of
the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with 7, the 7 is changed
into 3, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g.
meidw, to persuade, réroSa, to trust, Epic Plup. érémidpev, Imp. in Aeschyl.

Eum. 602, rérewa: (instead of wémiod:).

Remark. Thus the Epic form wérooSe, stem MEN with the variable o
(TION®O), instead of werdvSare from rdéoxw; from memdvSate by dropping the
connecting vowel a, comes mérovSre; and hence as a Tau-mute before another
Tau-mute is changed into o (§ 17, 5, comp. %-re = tore), mérovSre becomes

metovode, and as v is dropped before o, méroore; finally, this form, as has been
seen, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form (Se) and so became wérogde.

Perf. Ind. S. | xékpivya, -as, -e(v) (xpd¢w, to bawl), Plup. éxexparyer, -ets, -et
D. 2..| kexparyarov néxpaxsov éxexpdyerrov éxéxpaxsov
3. | Kexparyarov KéxpaxSov éxexparyelrnv exexpdxonv

$ 229.] VERBS IN -@ LIKE VERBS IN -pu. 275

P. 1. | xexpdyauey xéxparyyey exexpdyetmev exéxparyyer
2. | xexpiyare xéxpaxde éxexpadyeire exéxpaxde
3. | Kexparyaor(v) éxexpdyeiway, -eoay

Imp. xéxpaxd:, -dxSw, -axse, etc. Inf. xexpayévau. Part. rexparyds.

So the Epic Perf. &ywya with the sense of the Pres. J command, tywyas, tvwye,
PL. &vwymev; Imp. &ywye and &vwxd1, dvwyérw and dvdx3a, avdyere and
vexde; Subj. dvdyn; Inf. dvwyduey; Plup. jrvdyea, qvdye; Opt. avdyors.

éyelpw, to awaken, Perf. éyphryopa (stem ’ETEP with the variable o), I am awake ;
from this, Homer has the forms: Imp. éypfyopSe instead of éypnydpare, Inf.
eypnyépsat (as if from eyphyopuat) and eypnydpSaci(v) instead of eyprydpa-
oi(v) third Pers. Pl.

eida, J know, the regular forms ofSauer, ofare, ofdaci(v) are found but rarely in
the Ion. and Att. writers (§ 195, 1), second Pers. ofas in Hom. and Ion
(rarely Att. § 195,1). The form %-uev is Epic, Ion., and Doric. Inf. ®ueva
and tev Epic, Subj. iéé@ Epic instead of dé (Ion. eidéw), Part. idvia Epic
and eidvia.

Plup. 1. Pers. Sing. #5ea (hence the Att. #6) Epic instead of #dew
2.42 “ Heldes and helSns Epic instead of 7des
3. “ “ Helder and heldn, jdee(v), Epic instead of 7de;— Heide,
Herod. 4, & $~
8. “ Pl. Yay Epic instead of #decar.
Fut. eidfom Epic and also efcouat.
Zouxa, I am like, Epic, gxrov (Dual), éierny (Plup. Dual); hence in Plup. Mid.
or Pass. tixro.

§ 229. (3) Present and Imperfect.

Finally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic
dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -m:, take the personal-endings with-
out the Mode-vowel. Thus :—

tivbw, to complete, in Theocritus: Impf. &yi-pes (instead of qvdoper), évi-ro (instead
of jvvero).

taviw, to stretch, to span, Il. p, 393. tdvi-rau (instead of tavderas).

épiw, to draw, tputa, elpiro, Epito, pico, pioSat (§ 230).

cetw, to shake, Epic Pres. cedrat and (by variation) covra:, Imp. govoo and
abridged god, cotcSe, cotcSw (to move one’s self, to hasten). The Imp. has
passed into the common colloquial language.

%w, commonly éodSiw, to eat, Epic, Inf. @uevat.

épw, to carry, Epic Imp. pépre instead of pépere.

276

DIALECTS.

[$ 230.

§ 230. Alphabetical List of Verbs in the Dialects
to be spectrally noted.

*Adw (&F dw), to hurt, to deceive ; Hom.
has the following forms: Aor. aaca
and Goa; Pres. Mid. aara, Aor. dacd-
pny, Aor. Pass. adodnv. Verb. Adj.
dards (a-daros).

G&yatouat, Epic and Ion. prose (§ 164)
and a@ydouat (Ep.), to be angry at, and
in the Pres. Epic also to grudge, to
envy, Fut. dydoouc ; Aor. iryacduny.

Gyelpw, to collect, Epic second Aor. Mid.
&yépovto, Part. aypduevos (§ 223, 11);
Plup. aynyéparo; Aor. Pass. ayépdn,
third Pers. Pl. &yepSev; Epic Pres.
iryepedoucn (§ 162).

ayvoéw, to be ignorant, Ep. Aor. qyvolnce
(§ 207, I), ayveoacke (§ 205, 5).

&yvigut, to break, Aor. Epic ga instead
of gata; third Pers. Pl. Aor. Pass.
tyev Epic instead of edynoar.

yw, to lead, Epic second Aor. Imp.
Bere, Inf. ak€uevar, ateuey (§ 223,
10); first Aor. Mid. &acde, &gavro.

deldw (prose ddw), to sing, Epic second
Aor. Imp. aeloeo (§ 223, 10).

Geipw (prose aipw), to raise, Epic first
Aor. Act. teipa, Mid. deipduny, Pass.
&ép8nv; Epic second Aor. Mid. apé-
pnv from aipw; Epic Plup. a&wpro
instead of #pro with the variable
vowel, and transposition of the aug-
ment; Epic Pres. nepedouat (§ 162).

*AHMI, (’AE-,) to blow; in Homer, are:
Part. deis, aévros; third Pers. Sing.
Impf. &y, wet, Sider ("AEQ); in the
other forms, the 7 remains contrary
to the analogy of tidnur (§ 224, 6):
&nrov, ajvat, ahuevar; Mid. and Pass.
%nuat, to blow, dduevos nal a&huevos,
drenched with rain and beaten with the
wind ; Impf. Mid. &yro.

aiSouc: and aidéoua in Homer, to be
ashamed, to respect, Epic aidhooua,
HdéoSnv and 7decduny.

aivuus (Ep.), to take (instead of a%pyuuat,
§ 169, Rem. 1), only Pres. and Impf.

aipéw, to take, Ion. Perf. dpafpnxa, apat-

war (§ 219, 8); Epic second Aor.
Mid. yévro instead of Edero (§ 227,
B).

&ioow, Epic (a, but sréite:, Il. p, 126;
i) instead of doow, to rush, Ep. forms:
Hita, Subj. dito, Part. aitas; Aor.
Pass. #ixSnv (also in Plat.), Inf. aix-

Siva; the Att. Tragedians use the
following forms: gcow and a&ecw,
néa, déa and jéa, dea.

iw (Ep.), to hear, only Pres. and Impf.
éiov. Comp. éraiw.

&xaxiCw (Epic), to trouble, stem °AXQ,
second Aor. #axov; Fut. axaxhow,
first Aor. nedynoa; Mid dxaxtCouat,
&xouct or &xvupat, to be sad, Aor.
jKaxduny (§ 219, 7); Perf. axhxewat
(§ 219, 8, comp. dphpeuat, dpdpeuac)
and é«dxynua, third Pers. Pl. axnxé-
datat (§ 220, Rem. 2) and axnxéaran,
Part. axnxéuevos and axaxjuevos, Inf.
axdxnoda (§ 223, Rem. 4); Plup.
Epic axaxetaro.

adxuevos (Epic), sharpened, pointed,
from *AKQ, acuo, instead of axdypuevos
(§§ 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The x
comes from the Perf. Act.

axndéw, to neglect, Aor. axhdere(v).

GAdouat, to wander about, Ep. Perf. &ad-
Anuat (§ 219, 8), GAaAnmevos, GAdAno-
Sat (§ 223, Rem. 4).

GArdalvw, to make increase, Epic Aor.
Hardave(y).

GArAciw, to keep off, Epic second Aor.
hAadkov (§ 219, 7), (from ’AAKQ),
dAaAkely, GAaAKéy ; Fut. ddadkhow.

&Agouat and a@Aevouct (Epic), to shun,
Aor. jAevduny, Subj. &rénra, Opt.
&Agato, Imp. &déaode, Inf. drcvacSa
and aAéacdat (§ 223, 8).

dASHoKw, GASioxw (Ion. prose), to heal,
Fut. dASéw, ete.

dAitalyw (Epic and poet.), to sin, Fut.
adithow; Aor. HArrov, aAitduny, Grr
tTéoxa; Perf. ddrrhuevos, sinful (§ 223,
Rem. 4).

&AAouat, to spring, Epic second Aor.
Mid. Gago, ete. (§ 227, B).

dAvKTéw, to be in trouble, Epic Perf. aAa-
Adernpat (§ 219, 8).

adrtoxw (Ep.), to escape, ddAviw, HAvéa.

aApatyw (Eip.), to find, Sec. Aor. argeiv.

épaptdve, to miss, Epic Aor. #uBporoy
(§§ 223, 11, and 208, 3).

dumraxioxw (Ep. and poet.), to err, Fut.
dumraachow ; Aor. HumAakor.

avddvw (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to please,
Impf. édvdavoy (Herod.), éfvd. and
vd. (Eip.); Aor. €adov (Herod.), aor
(Ep.); Inf. adeiv; Perf. gaa; Fut.

SS OO. De
- Leta

—

§ 230.]

ander § 219,4,5. In The-

ocritus t5¢; Ep. Aor. evadov (§§ 219,
4, and 207, 3).

dyvhvode, to spring up, Ep. Perf. with
Att. Reduplication and the variable
o (§§ 219, 8, and 140, 4), from
*ANEQQ.

éytdw, to meet, Epic fvreov [§ 222. A
(2)]; cvvayrarny (§ 222, Rem. 1).
iw, to complete, Epic Impf. in Theoc.
&vijues, Gviro (§ 229).

&vwya (Ep. and poet. Perf.), to command,

LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS.

277 °

Mid. Trans., to lead, %Bnoa, éBnod-
pny; second Aor. Mid. éBfcero, Imp.
émBiceo (§ 223,10). Ep. secondary
form: BiBdocdwr, to stalk, strength-
ened secondary form from Baiyw ;
also BiB4, BiBavra, BtBaoa and (from
BIBHMI) #:8ds; finally, Imp. Bdoxe,
and Inf. émBaonéuer.

BdAAw, to throw, Ep. second Aor. @BAny,

éBahuny [§ 227, A (a)], Fut. Bajoo-
pa; Ep. Perf. BeBdrAnuce (used of the
mind); but BéBAnua (of the body).

tivorynev, Imp. bvwxS:, etc. (§ 228); Bapéw (Ep.), to be heavy, BeBapnas (§ 223,

Plup. jvdyea (§ 220, 8). In certain

13).

forms this Perf. is changed into the BeBpdéSos (Ep.), to eat, instead of Bi-

inflection of the Pres., e. g. third

Bpéoroas.

Pers. Sing. avéyer, Impf. Hvaryoy and Béouu and Beloua, I will go, will live,

v; Fut. avdgim; Aor. Hvwta.
array
amnipwy, -as, -a; first Aor. Act. Part.

Ep. Fut. Bén, Bedueoda (§ 223, 7).

(Epic), to take away, Impf. Bidoya (Ep.) instead of BidQoua, to
Sorce, éBinraro, BeBinke.

arovpas; first Aor. Mid. dmrniparo, BiBpéoxw, to eat, Ep. Aor. @Bpwy [§ 227,

Part. droupduevos.
amaploxw (Ep.), to deceive, Fut. araph-

A (d)]; Perf. Part. BeBpaes, -dros
(§ 228).

ow, second Aor. Act. #mapov, Opt. BAdoxw (Ep. and poet.), to go, instead

Mid. aardporro.

dre:Aéw (Ep.), to threaten, &reiAhtnv
(§ 222, Rem. 1).

amdepoe, an Ep. Aor., he hurried off,
Subj. arodpap, Opt. amodpoete.

SS to join to, Ep. Aor. Pass. édpSn,
ell on

&paplones (Ep.), to fit, stem APQ, first

Bodw, to cry

of wAdéexw (§ 18, 3), Aor. Euodror,
MoAeiv, woAdy (also X. An. 7. 1, 33,
udawow) ; Perf. uéuBAwxa (instead of
MenéAwna) ; Fut. wododua.

out, Ep. Aor. €8woa instead
of éBénoa (§ 205, 5).

Bovrouat, to will, Ep. Bérera, Borcode

(§ 207, 4), mpoBéBovaa, I prefer.

Aor. fipoa, &poa (§ 223, 6); first Aor. Bpvxdoua, to roar, Ep. Perf. BéBpixa,

Pass. &pSev instead of #pSnoar; sec-

with the sense of the Pres.

i a ia ae

—— ee

ond Aor. #papoy ({ 219, 7; also In- Tauéw, to marry, Ep. Fut. yauéw ; Ep.
trans. to be adapted, to please), more Fut. yauéooera, Il. 1, 394, will give in
usual than the first Aor.; Perf. &pa- = marriage.

_ pa (Ion. &pnpa) (§ 219, 8), J am fitted, ydvijwer (Ep.), to be glad, ydvuta; Fut.
Intrans., Ep. apdputa (§ 223,13), Perf. -yavtooerat.
Mid. or Pass. dphpeuat, apnpéuevos TAQ, Ep. Perf., yéyauer, to have become,

(§ 223, Rem. 4) ; Aor. &ppevos, adapted
(§ 227, B).

“APAQ, dpdouat, to pray, Epic second
Aor. dphuevat, Od. x, 322.

&pvupat, to gain (§ 188, 1).

*AQ, Ep., (a) to blow, see &nus; (b) to
sleep, Aor. teva, &oapev; (Cc) to satis-
Sy (also Intrans. to be satisfied), Inf.
“Guevar instead of déuevr; Fut. tow;

Aor. toa, toacSa. Verb. Adj. éaros, ye

Gros.

Balyw, to walk, to go, Ep. forms: Perf.

etc. (§ 228).

yéyova Ep. and poet. Perf. with the

sense of the Pres. to cry out ; in Hom.,
third Pers. Sing. yéywve (also with
the sense of the Aor.), Part. yeywvds,
Inf. yeywveuev; Plup. éyeyéver. From
the Perf. a Pres. has been formed of
which there are in Hom.: Inf. yeyo-
veiv, Impf. éyeyéveur.
tvouat (Ep.), to be born, to be produced ,
Aor. Mid. to beget, to bear, Subj. yel-
veat instead of yelynat.

BéBauev, etc. (§ 228); second Aor. ¥Yérro, to seize (§ 227, B).
Dual Bdrny, third Pers. Pl. drépBa- ynpdw, to grow old, second Aor. éyhpa,

cay (§ 227, Rem.), third Pers Pl.

etc. [§ 227, A (a)

tBav, Bdy (§ 224, 4), Inf. Bhuevar, yodw oneth te wat Ee third Pers. Pl.

Subj. besides Ba, etc.: Belw, Bin, Bel-

Aor. dor.

ouey (§ 224, 9); first Aor. Act. and Aalvips (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (in-
24

©278

stead of Safr-vyui, § 169, Rem. 1),
Fut. daiow; Mid. dafvuuou, to feast, to
consume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Ind.
daivv’ (Saivve instead of édalvuco,
§ 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. da:-
voto instead of -d:ro, third Pers. Pl.
Sawiaro; Aor. édaicdunv.

Balw, Ep., (a) to divide (§ 164), Fut.
ddoouc; Aor. (also prose) 2dacduny ;
Perf. Pass. 3é3acpa:, am divided, broken,
Sedalara: ; (b) to burn, to inflame, Perf.
d€dne, he burnt; Mid. to burn, blaze,
Intrans., second Aor. Subj. ddnrat.

Sauvdw and Sdurvnu:, Ep. secondary
form of Saudw, to subdue, from
which come third Pers. Sing. Pres.
dauve; third Pers. Sing. Impf. édéuva
and dduva, Sduvacke; second Pers.
Sing. Pres. Mid. daurg ; —Sdurnor,
dduvapas, ete.

SapSdvw, to sleep, Epic Aor. epatoy
(§ 223, 11).

daréouat, Ep. secondary form, used in
the Pres. and Impf., from dalouat, to
divide.

AAQ (Ep. and poet.), (a) to teach (=
diddoKw), (b) to learn (= diddoxopar) ;
to (a) belong the Ep. second Aor.
dédae (Hom.), e5ae (Theoc. and
Apoll.); to (b) de5ads (Hom.), dedd-
aot (in other authors); Ep. second
Aor. Act. eSdnv, I learned [§ 227, A
(b)], from which Ep. dahcouca, deda%-
xa, Sedanuévos. From the Perf. a
new Ep. Pres. has been formed, d¢dd-
aca, Inf. Here belongs also the
Ep. Fut. 84w (Z shall find, meet with),

. Shes, Shower, Shere (§ 223, 7).

déaro (Ep.), it seemed, Aor. Sodccaro,
third Pers. Sing. Subj. dodcceru
(instead of -nrat).

deldw, to fear, the Pres. occurs only in
the first Pers., Fut. defcouc; Aor.
fea, Ep. ed5e0a (as is probable
originally @F'eioa), Perf. Ep. dfSoina
instead of dé5exna, and Seldia Ep.
instead of 5¢5:a (§ 228).

delxvdpt, to show, Ion. (AEK) dé&w, Zeta,
etc.; Mid. Sefxvvuc in the Ep. dialect
has also the sense, to greet, to welcome,
to drink to; so also in the Perf. def-
deyuat with the sense of the Pres.,
deidéxaTra third Pers. Pl.; Plup. del-
Sexro, to welcome, dedéxaTOo.

5¢pxouc, to see, Ep. second Aor. @paxoy
(§ 223, 11).

déxouat, to receive, Lon. Séxouat; in Hom.
this verb signifies also, to take, excip-

DIALECTS.

[§ 230.

ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild
beast), in the following forms: d5éxa-
Tat instead of Séxovra (§ 220, 13),
Il. w, 147, Perf. S5eyua: with the
sense of the Pres., Fut. dedétouc,
excipiam, second Aor. Mid. %exro,
etc. (§ 227, B); Perf. Mid. dedonnueé-
vos, awaiting, lurking, Il. e, 730.

Sebw (instead of 5¢¥w), Ep. instead of
déw, to want, from which come édevn- \
ae, he wanted, djoev, he was in want
of ; Mid. Sevoua, to be wanting, Fut.
devhoomat.

AIAHMI (AE-), Ep. and older Ionic-
Att. (Xen.), secondary form of dé,
to bind, S:Séaoc. (Xen, An. 5. 8, 24);
Impf. di5y instead of é5f5n, Il. A, 105.

di¢nuat (Ep. and Ion.), to seek; it re-
tains the » (contrary to § 170, 1,
comp.’AHMI): édi(ynTo, edi¢nyro, St-
(nodat, diChuevos (in Herod.) ; dina
(Hom.), di¢ea (Theoc.) ; Fut. du¢4co-
par; Aor. édiCnodunv.

AIHMI (AIE-), of the Act. only évdteray
_ (third Pers. Pl. Impf.), Il. o, 584, they
drove away; Mid., to make one run, to
make free, oftener to scare, to chase
(specially with the Inf.), dfeyra, Il.
W, 475, dSteodau, Il, w, 304, Subj.
dintat, Slwvra, Opt. dlorro (comp.
Tigo.ro).

iw (Ep.), to flee, die, del51e, Stor, I fled.

dovréw (Ep.), to sound, Perf. dedourdTos ;
Aor. éd0vrnoa and éydovrnca (from
rAOTH-, comp. rortw and xruréw).

divaua, to be able, second Pers. Ion.
dbveat; Aor. Ep. éduvdodny and eduyn-
odunv (§ 179, 2).

dtw, to go in, to wrap up, Ep. dduevat in-
stead of diva: from eduy; Ep. second
Aor. Mid. décero, dvceo, Svoduevos
(§ 223, 10). :

’Eyelpw, to awake, Ep. Aor. éypeto, he
awoke, ete. (§ 223, 11); Ep. forms of
Perf. éypiryopa are éeyphyopye, etc.
(§ 228). From the Perf. has been
formed the Pres. éypnyopdwy, watch-
ing, Od. v, 6, as if from éypnyopdw.

Zw and gow (Ep.), to eat i eadiw),
Inf. @wevar (§ 229); Impf. ov and
@eoxov; Perf. édndés; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. éd7dorat.

°E@Q, from which come the Ep. wy,
wont, accustomed, and the Perf. efwSa
(§ 140, Rem. 3).

*EIAQ, “IAQ, Aor. elSov, I saw, Ep. Bor,
Inf. idéev, Subj. wus; Ep. Pres.
Mid. efSera:, seems, cidduevos, ap-

3

§ 230.]

pearing, making like; Fut. etcouat;
first yo eioduny and deoduny, eicd-
pevos and deurduevos (§ 219, 4); sec-
ond Aor. idéuny, I saw.

EIKQ, third Pers. Sing. Impf. elie, it
appeared, Il. o, 520; Perf. foixna, [am
hke, Ep. third Pers. Dual %xroy and
Plup. éterny (§ 228), Part. éouds and
IL. p, 254. eixds, eixvia and Il. o, 418.
elowxviac; Ep. Plup. Mid. #ixro and
tixro, it was like.

eiAdw (Ep.), to cover, envelop, ciddow,
efAduat, third Pers. Pl. eiAvara:; from
éAdw comes Aor. Pass. éAtcSnv.

tim, to press, to drive, from which in
Hom. only «iAduevos; in the same
author, eiAéw, éefAcov; the rest are
from *EA, e. g. ZAcav, Inf. Aca and
ééAacat, Part. Ercas (§ 223, 6); ZeAuat,
éeAuévos; second Aor. Pass. édAny
(from 2AdAw), third Pers. Pl. &aev,
GAjvar and GAjpmevat, Gels.

elul, to be, § 225.

eiut, to go, § 226.

elpyw, to shut out, Ep. Impf. %pyadov
(§ 162). Comp. épyo.

elpouat (Ep. and Ion.), to ask, Impf.
eipdunv ; Fut. eiphoowa ; second Aor.
Apdéunv, Subj. épdueda, Opt. e%porro,
Inf. ZpeoSau in Hom. with the accent
of the Pres.;— Ep. secondary forms
of the Pres. (a) épéoua, épéeoSar;
Impf. épéovro; (b) epéw, Subj. épew-
nev, Opt. épéomer, Part. epéwy.

*EIPYMI, see épvw.

elpw, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a
row, to string, first Aor. éelpas, exse-
rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or
Pass. fepuc, eepuevos (in Herod. ép-
pévos), Plup. Zepto.

res. only Ep., Fut. épa,

. €péw.

efoa, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem
‘EA- (comp. sed-eo), Opt. dvécamu,
Imp. ¢icov, Part. €oas (dvécarres ;
imeloas, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf. épéo-
oa; Aor. Mid. éoduny and ééocaro,
Part. épeooduevos (Her. 1, 66. eiodue-
vo), Imp. épecou ; Fut. épéocerdau.

édatvw, to drive, Pres. éAdw, Ep. éAdw ;
Impf. Ep. &ov; Fut. Ep. éadwor
instead of éAdo:; Ep. Perf. éanad-
pevos (§ 223, Rem. 4), third Pers.
Sing. ag éAnAddaro (§ 220, Rem.
2); Ion. Perf. éAjAacuo: and Aor.
Pass. #AdoSny.

éAcAl(w, to whirl, Ep. second Aor. Mid.
éaéruxto (§ 227, B).

LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS.

évérw or évvérw (Ep.), to say, to tell,
Impf. with the sense of the Aor.
tverov, tvverov, Aor. tvioroy (comp.
éomdunv from €roucn), Imp. tomes,
Subj. évicww, Opt. éviomouu, Inf. éne-
weiv, Fut. évipw and énorhow.

évivoda, Ep. Perf. from *ENO@Q or ’EN-
E@O with the sense of the Pres. and
Impf., éwrevhvosxe, to sit on, Il. B, 219.
to he on, H. Cer. 280. Comp. avfvo-
ae above.

évinrw (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. éy-
éviroy, hy-tramev (§ 219, 7).

évvip, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. efvups;
Ep. Fut. éoow; Aor. €ooa and éva,
écoduny, ééooato, ecacdu; Perf.
eluct, cio (and éooa), eira, etc.,
eiuévos; second Pers. Plup. feo,
third Pers. €oro and €eoro, third Pers.
Dual écSny, third Pers. Pl. efaro;—
on é¢coaro, gearo, comp. § 219, 4.

Zouxg, I am like, § 228. Comp. ’EIKQ.

éralw, to understand, Aor. érhioa (i),
Herod. and Apollon. (§ 130, Rem. 1) ;
the poet. alw is found only in Pres.
and Impf. "

éxavploxoua (Ep. and poet.), to receive

vantage or injury from a thing, Aor.

éxnupduny, eravpéovan (first Aor. érnu-
pdéunv in Aeschyl. and in the later
writers); Fut. éravpicoum. Of the
Act. in the sense to touch, to injure,
Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. éxad-
pn, Inf. éraupeiv, éravpeuer.

érioraya, to know, second Pers. érlorn,
Ion. poet. ,

érw, as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in
the sense tracto aliquid, to take care of
(Il. ¢ 321); generally used as a
compound, e. g. mepiérw, diérw, ete.,
second Aor. Act. éoroy instead of
%o-erov, in Homer éréomor, émirreiy,
emonév ; Fut. &yw, Ep. épévers ; Mid.
also as a simple, goncealy signifyin
to follow ; Impf. Ep. éréuny instea
of ciaduny ; Fut. évoua; second Aor.
Mid. éorduny, oréoda, orod (émo-
mov); Ep. forms: omeio, éorécdw,
Subj. €orwua, Opt. éoroluny, Inf.
éoréoSa: and oméoSa, Part. éomduc-
vos. Herodot. has from zreptérw also
mepiepSiiva and mepieverda instead
of meprepdhoetdat.

épyw, commonly éépyw, Ep., instead of
elpyw, to shut in and shut out, with the
secondary forms éépyvim, épydda,
éepydSw, Aor. &pta; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. epyya:, third Pers. Pl. épxara,

279 *

280

third Pers. Pl. Plup. éeépxaro and
épxato; Aor. Pass. épxSeis.

tpdw and pé(w (Ep.), to do, Fut. pétw,
Aor. &peta and epeta, or eptw, epia;
Perf. gopya, Plup. édpyew (§ 140,
Rem. 3), Perf. Mid. or Pass. éepyué-
vos, Aor. Pass. pexdels, pexd vat.

épeldw, to prop, Ep. Perf. épnpédarat
(§ 219, 8).

épeirw (poet. and prose), to throw down,
Ep. Plup. épépimro (§ 219, 8).

épidaivw (Ep.), to fight, Aor. Mid. épid4-
cagNal.

épifw, to fight, Ep. épigoua, Perf. Mid.
épnpiopat (§ 219, 8).

€ppw, to wander about, Ep. Aor. paca, to
hurry away (§ 223, 6).

épuSalyw (poet.), to redden, Fut. épydiow.

épvxw, to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act.
hpvKakoy, épuxaxéey (§ 219, 7).

éptw and eipdw (Ion. and Ep.), to draw,
Fut. éptow (oc) and Ep. éptover;
Aor. pica (oo) and eipioa; Fut.
Mid. éptcoucn and Ep. épvecdar ; Aor.
épioduny (oo) and eipvoduny; Perf.
Pass. third Pers. Pl. eipvara, II. &,
75, and Plup. efpuyro, Il. o, 69. eipv-
aro, Il. 0, 654 (of ships drawn to
land, 0 long in the Arsis); Plup.
Mid. etpuro (gdo-yavov, had drawn the
sword, + long in the Arsis), Od. x,
90.— Secondly, the Mid. in Hom.
and poet. takes the sense to save, to
shelter (from danger); in this sense
there are the following forms: pico,
elptro and épiro, which are to be
regarded as syncopated forms of the
Impf.— The two following Mid.
secondary forms have also the sense
of to guard: (a) Ep. ’E1°YMI, Inf.
ciptuevat, Hes. Opp. 816, Mid. to
guard, «ipvara: instead of etpyyra,
Inf. gpvoda, elpvodar;—(b) Ep.,
poet. and, though very rare, Attic
prose pioua, Inf. pioSa instead of
pieoSa; Impf. third Pers. Sing.
épiro, was watched, Hesiod. Th. 304,
third Pers. Pl. fdar’ instead of éptor-
ro (they protected); Aor. éppiodunv
and Ep. picduny (but Il. o, 29. piod-

nv).

PB ade to go, Ep. Perf. eiAhaAouSa, first
Pers. Pl. eiAfAovSuev; Epic Aor.
hAvsov.

%xw, to have, Ep. Aor. toxedSov, ox éSov
and Zoxoy (} 162); Ep. Perf. dxwra
(for dxwxa, « and x being trans-
posed, and the word having the

DIALECTS.

[§ 230.

Attic Redup.); Ep. Plup. éréxaro,
they were closed, Il. w, 340.

*Huat, to sit, ara, €aro (Ion.), and efa-
Tat, elato Ep., instead of qvTat, fro.

huvw (Ep.), to sink, Perf. ireuvhuire, to
let the head sink, Il. x, 491. The
above form has the Att. reduplication
éu-quine (§ 219, 8), and is strength-
ened by v (§ 208, 5).

@dpouc: (Ep.), to warm one’s self, Fut.
Séproua (§ 223, 6); Aor. éSépny,
Subj. sepéw, :

Snréw (Ep. and poet.), to sprout, Fut.
SnAhow, etc.; Perf. réSnra (rTeSGAvia
Ep. § 2238, 13); second Aor. @aadov.

@HMQ (Ep.), to stun, Perf. réSn7ra;
Plup. éreSfjmrea; second Aor. (from
TA®Q) Erapor.

avhoKw, to die, Perf. réSvnxa, Pl. réSva-
fev, etc. (§ 228).

Speoxw (Ep., Ion., and poet.), to spring,
Aor. &opov ; Fut. Sopotuat, Ep. Sopé-
ouat; Perf. réSopa. See § 161, 14.

‘Idpdw (Ion.), to sweat, iipao1, iSpayres,
idpaca, iSpynv (§ 137, Rem. 1).

inut, to send (Ep. and Ion.), Aor. nxa:
Fut. ow, but Od. o, 265, avéoe; in
the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there are
several forms from the theme ‘IQ,
e. g. avle instead of dvinor Her.,
tdviov instead of ~vvlecay Hom., éue-
rleto and mewetiuevos Herod., instead
of peSlero, meSemmevos.

ixvéouat, to come, Ep. Pres. few and
Impf. fxov; Ep. Aor. ifoy (§ 223, 10)
and ixro, etc. (§ 227, B).

‘IAHMI (instead of ‘IAA), to be merciful.
Of the Act. only the Ep. Imp. fans,
be merciful (in addresses to the gods)
instead of Ad: (§ 224, 6), as in
Theoe. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. iajenor;
Plup. Opt. Ep. iAjnor; Mid. poet.
fAaua, to appease.

toad (Dor.), to know, tons, toart, toaper,
Part. toas.

Kalyuuar (Ep.) instead of xaldvupa
(§ 169, Rem. 1) from the stem KAA,
to excel, Perf. réxacuot; Plup. éxe-
Kadouny. .

kalw, to burn, Ep. Aor. éxna (Trag.
Zea), Subj. ehowev instead of -wuer,

_ Opt. third Pers. Sing. «ha, third
Pers. Pl. xhaev, Inf. «ja (in the
Odyss. also Ketat, kelouer, xelayres) ;
Aor. Mid. éxndunv, knduevos (in the
Odyss. xeiduevos, kelavro); second
Aor. Act. éxdnv (I burned, Tutrans.),
Inf. xaquevat.

, to weary one’s self, Ep. xexunds,
-@ros, -dros (§ 223, 13), Ep. second
Aor. Subj. rexduw (§ 219, 7).
xetuat, to lie, in Hom. «éovrat, as if from

Kéouor ; Ep. and Ion. xéerai, néeoSar ;
second Pers. Sing. cetoa: and xeta,
third Pers. Pl. eetvra: and Ep. xela-
ta and (Ion.) céatat, Subj. céwuat,
third Pers. Sing. «ijjra:; Impf. céaro
and xelaro Ep. instead of &ewro;
néoxero; Ep. Fut. xelw, xéw, keiwv,
ag weston f of, Bp. ak
kelpw, fo shear off, cut off, Ep. xépow,
Exepoa (§ 223, 6), but exespduny. ‘
| KéAAw, to drive, Ep. xeAoa (§ 223, 6).
kéAouat (Ep. and poet.), to urge, Fut.
KeAjooua, first Aor. éxeAnoduny;
i second Aor. éxexAduny, etc. (§ 223,
11).
| xevréw (Ep.), to prick, stimulo, Aor.
i xévoa (§ 223, 6).
bd
r

Kepdvvigu, to mix, Ep. xepdw (xepdvras)
and xepalw (Imp. xépare), Kipydw (Kip-
vas, Impf. éxipva) and xipynu (Impf.
éxipyn, kipyds); Ep. Mid. «épwrta (as

| if from xépaua) ; Impf. kepdwyro Ep.

instead of éxep@yro from repdw.

_ Kepdaivw, to gain, in Ion. and later wri-

ters: éxépinoa; KepdhoecSau and Kép-

| davéouey in Herod.

| xet3w (Ep.), to conceal, Fut. redow, Aor.
&xevoa; Perf. xéxevda; second Aor.
&xiidov, Kigov, Subj. cexvdw (§ 219,
7); Mid. only Pres. and Impf.

Khdw, to make anxious, in the Act. only
Ep. Fut. cndjow; Perf. «éxnda, J am
anxious ; Ep. Fut. Perf. rexadjoouat,

' IL 8, 353.

_ xldvapot, Ep. secondary form of cxeddy-

vues, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf.

_kivuyat (Ep.) instead of xiwéopas, to stir
one’s self, to be moved, Pass. xwtpevos.

kipydw and xipynut, Ep. secondary form
of Ke dut, to mix, from which comes
the Part. xipyds, Impf. éxipya and

«lpyn.

Kixavw and xixévoua (Ep. and poet.),
to reach, meet with, Aor. éxixov, Fut.
Kixhoouct, other forms not found in
the Att. poets; but Ep. Impf. éxtya-
vov, second Pers. éxfyes (from
KIXE-) ; second Aor. Subj. x: and
xixel@, Opt. xexelny, Inf. Kixivat,
Part. xexels and Mid. x:xfwevos ; Aor.
Mid. éxixfoaro.

kiw (Ep.), to go, only Pres, and Impf.
The Part. xi@y is accented like idy;
Aor. petextadoy (§ 162).

24*

LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS.

281

nAd(w, to sound, Ep. Perf. with the sense
of the Pres. éxAnya, xexAnyds, Pl.
KexAfyyovres (as if from KexAfyyw) 5
Aor, &xAdyor.

KAclw, to shut, Ep. and Ion., cAntw, Aor.
éxAtjioa (i), KAnioa; Perf. Mid. or
Pass. exAhiva (third Pers. Pl. exr€-
arat instead of kexAfata) ; Aor. Pass.
éxAnteSny ; from the Ion. xAniw come
the forms often found in the Att.
writers, viz. KArviw, txAnoa, KéeKAnMOL.

kdéw (Ep.), to celebrate, of which only
kAéouat, Impf. ékAéo instead of éxAéeo
(§ 220, 10).

KAvw (Ep.), to hear, Imp. «ave, «avere ;
second Aor. Imp. «Ava, KAdTe; and
KéxAva, KéxAuTe [§ 227, A (e)]; the
Impf. %aAvoy is used instead of the
Ind. Pres. ;

xérrtw, to strike, second Perf. cékowa in
Hom., instead of kéxopa.

kopévvixt, to satisfy, Ep. Fut. copéw and
kopéow, Perf. xexdpnuat, to which the
Part. cexopnés (§ 223, 13) in respect
to its meaning belongs.

koréw and Kotéoua (Ep.), to be angry,
first Aor. Part. xoréous ; Perf. Part.
kexotnés (§ 223,13); Mid. Fut. roré-
coun (oo); Aor. éxoreoduny ( at

Kpd(w, to bawl, cry out, poet. Perf. xéxpa-
ya, Kéxparyuev, etc. (§ 228); Fut. xe-
kpdéuuou, Aristoph.

kpalyw (Ep. and poet.), to complete, ac-
complish, Ion. commonly kpaalye,
Impf. éxpatawov; Ep. Fut. xpavéw;
Aor. &pnva and Ep. éxpfnva, Imp.
kphvoy and Ep. xphnvov, Inf. kpjvat
and Ep. xpnqva; Ep. Perf. Pas
kexpdayta (Eur. cexpayvtat); Ep. Fut.
Mid. xpavéoua.

xtelyw, to kill, Ep. Fut. xrevéw (Ep.
Part. xravéovra, kataxTavéovor(y) and
kataxtavéeode with the variable a;
Aor. Ep. and poet. &rdévov; Ep.
second Aor. Act. ray, etc. [§ 227,
A (a)]; first Aor. Pass. third Pers.
Pl. &raSev Ep., instead of éxrddn-

vay.

kupéw, rarely xipw (Ep. and poet.), to
Jind, to reach, Aor. Exvpoa (§ 223, 6),
and more seldom éxépnaa, Fut. cipow
and more seldom kuphow; Perf. rexd-

pnka.

Aayxdvw, to partake, Ion. Fut. Adfouat ;
Ep. Aor. Subj. AcAdxw (§ 219, 7),
Trans. to make partaker in the phrase
Savdvra mupds, to give the dead the
honor of fire, i.e. make him partaker

282

of; Perf. Adaoyxa Ep., instead of
etanxa [Od. A, 304. AcAdyxaor].

AAZYMAI (= AdQoum, to take), Epic
éAd(uTo.

AauBdvew, to receive, lon. Aduouat, AeAd-
Bnka, AeAGuMaL, AcAduUPSat, EAdupsny,
Aaumréos; also Dor. AceAdByKa, but
AdAGupat, AcAaPSa:; in Dramatists
AAAnupat; Ep. Aor. AcAaBéoSat (§ 219,
t

Aavsdvw, Ep. oftener AfjSw, to be hidden,
concealed; Ep. second Aor. Act.
Subj. AcAdSw and Mid. Acradduny
(§ 219, 7); Perf. Mid. AéAdoua ; in
Theoc. Aacdjuey (= Anodiva) in-
stead of Aatéoda:; emaAfsw and

éxAhdw, to cause to forget, Ep. Aor.

éméAnoa; exA€AGIOv.

Adoxw (Ep. and poet.), Aor. éAdoy;
Ep. Perf. AdAnka (poet. AéAdKa and
éxAéAaxa even in Demos.) with the
sense of the Pres.; Ep. Part. AeAn-
Kos, AcAdxvia (§ 223,13); Fut. Aanh-
goua; first Aor. poet. éAdxnoa, Ep.
Aor. Mid. AeAdkovro (§ 219, 7).

AEXQ (Ep.), to cause to lie down, &rcka,
érctdunv, I laid myself down, I lay, I
rested, Ep. Aor. éAéypuny, etc. (§ 227, B).

Aotw, to wash, Ep. Aoéw, Aovew, Impf.
éAoveov, éAdeov; Aor. Inf. Accra,
Part. Aoégoas; second Aor. Act.
édoov, third Pers. Sing. Ade Od. x
361, Adov; Mid. Pres. Inf. AoveoSau
and Aotoda; Fut. Mid. aodrcouas;
Aor. Mid. Inf. AoésoacSa:; Part.
Aoeooduevos; Perf. Mid. or Pass.
A€Aoumat.

Atw, to loose, Ep. second Aor. Mid.
Avro, AvyTo [§ 227, A (e)]; Ep. Plup.
Opt. AeAdTo (§ 224, 3).

Matvoua, to rave (éxualyw, to make
raving, also Aor. unva, Arist.; doubt-
ful X. H. 3.4, 8); second Perf. uéun-
va (Soph.), Z am raving (Theoc. 10,
31, weudynuat); the Fut. is pavotdpat
in Herod. (uavhfooun in the later
writers).

patoua (Ep.), to seek, Fut. udooua
(émiudooera) ; Aor. éuacduny.

pavedve, to learn, Fut. in Theoc. wadsed-
pat (like waxoduar).

udpvauct (Ep.), to fight, only Pres. and
Impt, like dtvaua, but Opt. maprol-
env, Od. A, 513.

pdxouat, to contend, Epic paxéovra,
MaxeiTal, maxéorto, maxéowrTo, Part.
paxerduevos and paxeoduevos; Ep.
Fut. paxhooua and paxéooua; Aor.
éuaxerdunv.

DIALECTS.

[§ 230.

MAQ (Ep.), fo strive for, Perf. with the
sense of the Pres., in Sing. wéuova
(comp. yéyova with TETAA), uéuaror,
Meuapev, etc. (§ 228).

Helpouat (poet.), to obtain, Ep. Zupmope
third Pers. Sing. Perf. (and Il. a,
278), third Pers. Sing. second Aor.
Act. (Augment, § 219, 6); Perf. Pass.
eiuaptat, it is determined (§ 123, 4).

séAw, commonly Impers. pede, it con-
cerns, I lay it to heart, Ep. Perf. wéun-
Ae, Part. wewnads ; Ep. Perf. Mid. wéu-
BaAera and Plup. wéuBaero instead of
MEUhAnTat, eueuhAnro, comp. BAde-
kw; yet these forms were more
properly considered as a Pres. and

mpf.

Bevowdw, pevolveov, § 222, I, A (2).

pnrdoua, to bleat, Ep. Perf. uéunra with
the sense of the Pres. pweud«via
(§ 223, 13); Aor. waxdér; from the
Perf. the Impf. éuéunror is formed.

pualyw, to stain, Ep. second Aor. miav-
nv (§ 227, B).
a to mix, Ep. Aor. uleto ({ 227,
)

pukdoua, to roar, Ep. uéuixa, Aor.
Eudoy.

Naiw, Ep. and poet., to dwell, first Aor.
évacoa, I caused to dwell; Mid. with
Pass. Aor., to settle down: vdacoua,
amevacoduny, evdorny.

vexéw (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to quarrel,
Fut. veuéow, Aor. évelxera (§ 223,

1).

site to wash, Pres. and Impf.; the other
tenses are formed from viatw, which
among the later writers came to be
used in the Pres. and Impf. also;
thus, Fut. vi~w, Perf. Mid. or Pass.
vév.upat, poet.; Aor. Pass. évipdSny,
Hippocer.

viccoua (Ep.), to go, Fut. vlcouwa (the
form velooowat is rejected).

"OATSSOMAI (Ep.), Aor. wducduny, to
be angry, d3veduevos ; Perf. odd35veuat
with the sense of the Pres. (§ 219, 8).

oda, to know, § 228.

otoua, to think; Ep. ow, diw, dtouat,
widunv, oforro; Aor. Mid. dicdunv;
Aor. Pass. wtcSnv, diodes.

bvouce (Ep. and Ion.), to blame, dvoca,
third: Pers. Pl. dvovra, Imp. dvogo ;
Impf. avduny, Opt. dvoluny, bvorro ;
Fut. dvécoua; Aor. @vogduny and
avbcanv ; Ep. otverde (comp. odAdu-
evos), Il. w, 241, instead of dverde
and this instead of dvocde from ’ON-;
Ep. Aor. Mid. évaro.

§ 230.]

dpdw, to see, Ion. dpéw, Epic dpdw, Impf.
oe Ep. second Pers. Sing. Pres.
id. dpa, third Pers. Sing. Impf.
dpiiro; lon. Perf. irwra.
*OPEINYMI, from which Ep. dpeyvis,
stretching out ; dpéyw, to stretch ; Mid.
to stretch one’s self, to reach after, Ep.
Perf. Mid. dpdépeyucu, third Pers. Pl.
Opmpéxarat (§ 219, 8), Plup. third
Pers. Pl. dpwpéxaro.
| Upvius (poet,), to excite, Fut. dpow, Aor.
&poa (§ 233, 6); Ep. Perf. Intrans.
bpwpa (§ 219, 8), Subj. dpdépn, Plup.
épdéper and w@pdpea; Ep. Aor. &poper ;
Mid. bpvijuat, to rouse one’s self, to stir,
Ep. Fut. dpetra:, Aor. apdunv; Ep.
Aor. Mid. dpro, ete. (§ 227, B); Ep.
Perf. dpépera:, Subj. opdépnra (§ 219,
8).

| )
| écdpalyouc, to smell, Ion. Aor. Mid.
ty

PpayTo.
| obrdw, to wound, Ep. Aor. odra, ete.
| | [§ 227, A (a)].
| dgeidw, to owe, be under obligation, ought,
| must, Ion., poet. (except in the dra-
matic dialogues of Att. writers), and
in late prose dpedov, -es, -e, Ep.
&pedrdrAov, SpedAdov, in forms which
express a wish.
| 6p4AAw (Ep.), to increase, only Pres.,
| Impf., and Opt. Aor. dpéAAcev, Od.
B, 334.
| TIdAAw, to shake, Ep. second Aor. Act.
Gumemadrdy (§§ 207, 7, and 219, 7) and
second Aor. Mid. wdAro (§ 227, B).
_ wdoxw, to suffer, Ep. Perf. Part. rema-
Suin, as if from wérada; Ep. Perf.
_ mémooxe (§ 228, Rem.).
matéoun (lon.), to taste, to eat, Aor.
émioduny; Perf. réracua.
meidw, to persuade, second Aor. Act.
@mov, Aor. Mid. émiddunyv, only poet.
in the Att. writers (m:300 is a false
reading in Plat. Phaed. p. 117, a);
Ep. second Aor. Act. rémiSov, Subj.
reridw, Opt. remiSouu, Inf. remdeiv,
_. Part. remdSdév, Imp. wémde (§ 219, 7) ;
second Aor. Mid. ém:Sduny, to trust,
Opt. weriSo:ro; from the second Aor.
come mSfhow, to be obedient, remIhow,
to be convinced, mShaoas, obedient ; on
erémSpey and méreicd: (see § 228).
medd(w, to draw near (Trag. meAddw,
mwAdSw), Fut. reAdow, poet. sometimes
mwed@; Ep. Aor. Pass. éredAdodny,
poet. Att. érAaddnv, Mid. Ep. éxahunr,
etc., Att. éwaAdunv |§ 227, A (a)];
Ep. Perf. rexAnuévos, Att. rérAduat.
mépsw (poct.), to destroy, Fut. wépow ;

LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS.

283

first Aor. %repoa (§ 223, 6); second
Aor. trpaidoy (§ 223,11); Ep. second
Aor. Mid. Inf. wépSas (§ 227, B).

mérouat, to fly, second Aor. érrduny, ete.

§ 223, 11).

mevsouc (poet. instead of ruvSdvopa),
Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. reridor-
70; Perf. rérvopat (§ 223, 14).

wépvoy, trepvoy, Ep. second Aor. Act.
of SENQ, to kill ( 219, 7), Part. wép-
vev with irregular accentuation; Ep.
Perf. Pass. répara, wepdoda ; Fut.
Perf. rephoowa (comp. dedqorona
from d€d¢nar).

whyvuuna, to fix, Ep. Aor. rijxro, xaré-
anxto (§ 227, B).

miAvauat, Eq. secondary form of reAd(w,
to draw near, only Pres. and Impf.

miumranut, to fill, Ep. Aor. Mid. majo,
etc. [§ 227, A (a)].

mlaxrw, to fall, Ep. remreds (§ 228).

mrvdw and mirynut, Ep. secondary form
of merdvyiui, to spread out, from
which come Impf. zitva instead of
érirva, and Part. mirvds.

mwAhcow, to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act.
érémAnyov, méemAnyov and memAnydounv
(§ 219, 7).

mAdéw (Ion.), to sail, Ep. second Aor.
Act. érAwy, etc. [§ 227, A (d)].

mvéw, to breathe, in Hom. Perf. rérviuas
(§ 223, Rem. 2), to be animated, intel-
ligent; second Aor. Act. Imp. &uz-
vue, second Aor. Mid. &umviro [§ 227,
A (e)]; Aor. Pass. durvivdy instead
of dumvidn (§ 223, 12).

mthoow, to crouch, shrink from fear, Aor.
éxrnta; second Aor. katarrdxdéy,
Aeschyl. Eum. 247; Perf. érrnxa,
Part. Ep. werrn@s, @ros (§ 223, 13);
eg second Aor. xatarrhrny [§ 227,

a)].

my 2 sprinkle, regular Aor. @pava ;
Perf. Mid. or Pass. &fSaocua. In
Hom. éppddara: (§ 220, Rem. 2).

pew, see pd.

pryéw (Ep. and poet.), to shudder, Fut.
pryjow; Aor. eppiynoa; Perf. Ep.

‘

= agers and odw (Epic), to save
(= oé(w); from cadw Fut. cadow,
Imp. Pres. Act. odw [§ 222, I, A
(4)]; third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act.
odov and odw instead of éodoe; Aor.
eadwoa; Fut. Mid. cadocoua, Aor.
Pass. éoadSnv; from odw Part. od-
ovres and Impf. odecxoy ; from ode
Subj. Pres. oén, odns, cdwot. ;

gevw ({poet.), to put in violent motion,

284

Mid. to haste, Ep. Aor. @oceva and
Teva, eooevduny and aevduny (§ 223,
8); Perf. Zocuya (§ 223, 14); Plup.
écovunv; second Aor. Mid. éootpuny,
ete. L§ 227, A (e)|; Aor. Pass. éoot-
anv Soph., éecvSny Hom. — On the
Ep. cevra, codra, etc., see § 229.

oxldvaua, to scatter, Ep. secondary form
of oxeddvyvnat, only Pres. and Impf.

arepéw, to rob, first Aor. Inf. orepéom
Kp. instead of orepjoa.

atvyéw, to fear, to hate, Ep. second Aor.
éorvyov; first Aor. Zorvéa, Trans., to
make fearful.

TATQ, Epic second Aor. rtetaydy,
seizing.

TAAAQ, to endure, Ep. Aor. érddaga,
Subj. raAdoow; second Aor. @rAny
(§ 194, 4); Perf. rérAnxa, TérAquev
(§ 228), Fut. rAjcoun,

taviw (poet.), to stretch, Ep. rdvirau
(§ 229).

tapdcow, to disturb, Ep. second Perf.
térpnxa, I am disturbed.

TEMQ, to reach, overtake, Ep. Aor. @rer-
poov (§ 219, 7).

Téprw, to delight, Ep. érdppdny, érdprny,
érpdrny, Subj. first Pers. Pl. tpareto-
pev; second Aor. Mid. érpamdéuny and
Terapméuny (§ 219, 7).

Tevxw (poet.), to make ready, to obtain,
Fut. revéw; Aor. érevta, Perf. Ep.
TetTevxe@s, having obtained; Fut. Mid.
Tevtouct; Aor. Mid. reviacda:; Perf.
Téruypat (§ 223, 14), third Pers. Pl.
Ep. rerevdxatat, Inf. rerdxSa:; Plup.
éretvyuny, third Pers. Pl. Ep. érered-
xaro; Aor. Pass. éréxdnv; Fut. Perf.
Tetevéouat;— Ep. second Aor. rertu-
Kei, TETUKOYTO, TeTUKETRaL (§ 219, 7).

TIEN, Ep. Perf. Act. terinds, -d70s,
anxious, and Perf. Mid. Iam anxious,
second Pers. Dual terinaSov, Part.
TETINUEVOS.

tlyvuua, Ep. secondary form of tivoua,
to punish; in Att. poetry with one
v, Tivuua (§ 185).

Tuyo, Ep. secondary form of réuva,
to cut, first Aor. tuhtas; Aor. Pass.
third Pers. Pl. tud-yev.

Tpépw, to nourish, Ep. second Aor.
érpapov, 1 nourished, Perf. rérpopa,
Intrans.; Aor. Pass. érpdpny, third
Pers. Pl. rpapev.

dalvw, to show, Ep. pactvwy, enlightening ;
Ep. Aor. Pass. épadvSqv; Perf. Mid.
or Pass. répacuat, third Pers. Sing.
mépavta; Fut. rephjoouar; second
Aor. pavecney, Il. dr, 64.

DIALECTS.

CI sie dae ale i yi as |, ~—s
i mt ina

[§ 230.

pelSouat, to spare, Ep. second Aor. Mid.
mepidolunv, mepidéoda (§ 219, 7);
from elSoua comes mepidhoouat.

gépw, to carry, pépte Ep. instead of
pepere (§ 229); Ion. and Ep. forms
are: Aor. #veima, évetkat, etc., Aveud-
env; Perf. eévhverywa; Aor. Pass.
qvelxonv;—Ep. second Aor. Imp.
oioe, Inf. oicguey (§ 223, 10); first
Aor. évgou, Herod. 1, 157 (comp.
6, 66. dvdioros instead of avdioros).

pevyw, to flee, Ep. mepuypévos, escaped
(§ 223, 14).

gxdvw, to come before, anticipate, Epic
pdduevos [§ 227, A (a)].

xelpw, to destroy, Ion. Fut. diapapéouan
instead of @Saphooua; Aor. diapdrép-
oa (§ 223, 6).

pxivw, to vanish, and Ep. }Stw, to con-
sume, and sometimes to vanish, perish
(Ep. first Pers. Jong), Fut. $3iow;
Aor. épdioa; Mid. to perish, Fut.
prtooua; Perf. 2pSiua; Plup. épsi-
env; Ep. Aor. épSiuny, etc. [§ 227,
A (c)]; Ep. Aor. Pass. third Pers. Pl. _
amrepaiver,

piréw, to love, Ep. Aor. épiaduny (¢l-
AwyTat, pirat).

gpdvw, to speak, Ep. Aor. méppadoy
(§ 219, 7).

pipw, to knead, in prose, forms its tenses
from dupdw, e. g. pupdow, etc., Aor.
Pass. épupddnv, Plat. Theaet. 147, c.
(but éptpsnv, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet
Perf. répupyo, and in Aristoph. ze-
gvpaua; Fut. Perf. mepiprecdou
Pind., Epic and poet. gipow, ete.
(§ 223, 6).

iw, to produce, Perf. répixa, Ep. third
Pers. Pl. wepiact, Part. mrepvaras,
mepuvia (§ 223, 13); Impf. Ep. éré-
cukov. '

XdCouct (Ep.), to retreat, yield, Aor. Mid.
Kexddovto (§ 219, 7); Aor. Act. Kéxa-
Sov and Fut. xexadhow, Trans., to de-
prive of, rob.

xalpw, to rejoice, Ep. Fut. xexaphow,
Kexaphooua ; first Aor. Mid. xhparo;
second Aor. kexdpovrTo, Kkexapoiaro
(§ 219, 7); Kexapnes (§ 223, 13);
Perf. rexapuévos, Eur.; Verb. Adj.

xapros.

xavidvw (Ep.), to hold, to contain, Aor.
zxadov; Perf. with the sense of the
Pres. céxavda; Fut. xelooua (comp. —
éraSov, weigopuat).

xéw, to pour out, Ep., Fut. xetw; Aor.
éxeva; second Aor. Mid. xdr0, xvue-
vos [§ 227, A (e)].

§ 231.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285

SECTION IIl.

FORMATION OF WORDS.

$231. Primitive words.— Stems.— Derivatives. |

1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord-
ance with certain laws.

2. Those words, from which other words are derived, but which are them-
selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula primitiva). Primitive words
are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or

_ pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g.

Tpép-w, ypdd-w, pép-w, A€éy-w, AlS-os ; Kadr-ds; eu-é.

8. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection-
endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in
the primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e. g. Sd«-v-w, ix-vé-ouar,
avt-dv-w, tu(y)x-dy-w, GA-loK-ouat, mi-mpd-cxnw. Comp. §§ 139, and 157, 1.
Yet these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf.

4. Words which are derived (vocabula derivata) from primitive words, are : —

(a) Either Stems, i. e. such words as are formed from primitives by merely
assuming another inflection-ending, which is without any special signification.
To these indefinite endings belong several of the third Dec., e. g. the gender-
sign s (6 yiv, 7 SY, 7 Ant, H wrv, 7 vad-s, 6 % Bod-s, 6 } wai-s, instead of watd-s;

_ in many words the s is omitted, see § 52, 1); the endings -:s (4% omdy-is, want,
4 eAn-is), and -us (6 ordx-us, 4 iox-bs); also the endings of the first and sec-
_ ond declensions, e. g. -n, -a, -os, -ov (vix-n, Abm-n, fi¢-a, tAodT-os, vdc-os, f48-ov) ;

finally, several adjective-endings, e. g. -os, -n, -ov (p{A-os, -n, -ov), -vs, -eia, -d
(yAv«-vs, -e7a, -v), etc.;
(b) or Derivatives, i.e. such words as are formed either from primitives,

| or from stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special’ sig-
nification, e. g. xpva-d-w, to make golden, to gild ; jh-rwp, orator ; ypap-iuxds, skilled
in painting.

5. The root is often lengthened in derivation (§ 16, 3), e. g. AfS-n (from
AaS-civ), xhv (from xav-eiv); or it takes the variable vowel (§ 16, 6), e. g. rpéo-
w, Tpop-h, Tpop-ds, Tpdp-mos, Tpap-epds. A strengthening consonant (§§ 139,
1, and 157, seq.) may also be added; or the final consonant A be doubled, e. g.
xdddos from kadds; some stems also take a reduplication, e. g. é4-wm-h, €5-wd-h,
&y-wy-ds, Xl-cud-os (from ZE&-Q, comp. cod-ds). Other changes also may be
made in the root, as has been shown in § 16.

6. The change of ¢ into o (seldom into a) and of «& into o: (§ 16, 6) requires

? By comparing the examples under (a) and (b), it will be seen that the

_ terminations of the former are not significant, while those of the latter are.

i

286 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 232.

special attention. It occurs, (a) in Oxytones of the first Dec. in 4 and d of
more than one syllable, e. g. tpop-h, nourishment (from tpép-w) ; wov-h, a remain-
ing (from pév-w); pop-d, a carrying (from ép-w) ; dAoup-h, salve (from dAetp-
w);—(b) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec., which denote what is
done, or the result of an action, e. g. Adyos, word (from Aéy-w); pdv-os, murder
(from @EN-Q, comp. éepvov); vouos, a law (from véu-w);—(c) in dissyllabic
Oxytones of the second Dec. in -zés, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the
second Dec. in -ds, which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have
a substantive meaning, e. g. mAox-uds, plait of hair (from mAék-w) ; orodA-pés,
garment (from oréAA-w); wour-ds, attendant (from méur-w); cod-ds, wise (from
SE®-Q, sapio); tpop-ds, nourishing, nourisher (from tpép-w) ;— (d) in monosyl-
labic substantives of the third Dec., e. g. padt, flame (from Aéy-w) ; ddpt,
antelope (from Sépx-ouat);—(e) in oxytone substantives in -eds and adjectives
in -ds, which, however, have sometimes a substantive sense, e.g. tpop-evs, nour-
isher (from tpép-w); omop-ds, scattered (from omep-eiv); Aoy-ds, chosen (from
Aéy-w); Spou-ds, running (from APEM-Q, comp. dpau-etv);— (f) in all derivatives
of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -ayos, adjectives in -.uos, verbs
in -dw, -éw, -dw, -ew, -ifw, e.g. wAdK-apos; Tpdp-iuos; PSov-ew (from PSdy-os), |
dwu-dw (from ddéu-os, and this from déu-w), ete.

Remark. The change of ¢ into a (comp. § 16, 6) is found only in a few old
poetic derivatives, e. g. rpa-epds.

Rem. 2. Words derived from verbs are called verbals; those derived from
substantives or adjectives, denominatives.

A. DERIVATION.

§ 232. I. Verbs.

1. All derivative verbs end in -dw, -éw, -fw, -dw, -dw, -edw, -dfw, -1 Cw,
-颀w, -0 Cw; -atvw, -tdvw,-alpw,-elpw. All these verbs must be considered
as denominatives; for though the stem-substantive for several verbs of this
kind is not in use, yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that a substan-
tive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of these derivative
verbs, especially many in -éw and -dw, supply the place of obsolete primitives,
e. g. piréw, Tiudw. — On the formation and signification of derivative verbs the
following points are to be noted: —

(a) Verbs in -dw and -4¢w, which are mostly derived from substantives of
the first Dec., and those in -f€@ which are derived from substantives and
adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since
they denote either a condition or the exercise of agency or activity, e. g. roAudw,
to be bold, from téAua, boldness; xordw, to be angry, from xoAh, gall; yodw, to
weep, from dos; dixd(w, to judge, from Sinn; éAmi¢w, to hope, from éamis; dpiw,
to limit, from pos; aitl{w, to beg, from airns, beggar; sometimes those in -dw
denote fulness, abundance, e. g. xoAdw, to be full of bile, have much bile. — Verbs
in-d¢w and -i¢w formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble
single individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment.

$ 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS A

Such verbs are called Jmitative verbs, e. g. dwpid¢w, to rian, i. e. to speak
or think as a Dorian, Awpieds ; EAAnr[ (aw, to personate the custom or language of a
Greek, to be a Greek in custom, etc.; undl¢w, to be a Mede in sentiment.

Remark 1. Verbs in -{(w often signify to make something into that which
the root denotes. See (c).

Rem. 2. Verbs in -d¢w and -d¢w are very rare, e. g. apud(w, to fit ; épwiw, to
ig anata the ending -d¢w also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition
or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb; these are called
Frequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. parrd(@, to throw to and fro, jacto, from
plrre, jacio ; erevd(w, to sigh much and deeply, from oréve, to sigh ; eixd(w, properly,
to liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to infer, conjecture.

(b) Verbs in -é and -edw are derived from substantives and adjectives of |
| all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for
| the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of
| that which is signified by the primitive ; but they are sometimes transitive also.
| When the stem ends in -es, which is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -ys, -es, the
| es is omitted, and when it ends in -ev, the ev is omitted before the ending -eva,
@. g. piréw, to be a friend, to love, from idros, aruxéw, to be unfortunate, from

&ruxhs (stem aruxes), eddanovew, to be prosperous, from evdaiuwy (stem evdauor),

&yopetw, to speak in public, from éyopd, market, noouéw, to adorn, from xécpos,

Bacirctw, to be a king, from Baoireds.

(c) Verbs in -é, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives
of the second Dec., those in -afyw, which are commonly derived from adjec-
tives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -dyw, from adjectives only,

_ generally denote the making or transforming something into that which the primitive

_ word signifies; in like manner several in -((w, see Rem. 1, e. g. xpuodw, to

_ make golden, to gild, from xpvads, 5nddw, to make evident, from diAos, &yvi(w, to

make pure, from ayvds, rroutl{w, to make rich, to enrich, from wAodros, kotralve,

to make hollow, from xotAos, Aevkalyw, to make white, from Acvxds, Bapivw, to
burden, from Bapis.

__ Rem. 3. From the Fut. of several verbs, are formed verbs in -vefw, which
denote a desire for that which the primitive word signifies; these are called
-Desiderative verbs, e. g. yeAacelw, to desire to laugh, from yeAdw, to laugh, mode-
bnoelw, to desire to engage in war, from mwodeul(w, mapadwoelw, to be inclined to sur-
render. There are also other Desideratives in -dw and -law, e. g. Savardw, to
wish to die, uaSntidw, to wish to become u disciple. '

Rem. 4. Some verbs in -oxw have an inceptive sense (beginning to be), and are
_ called Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. ynpdoxw, to begin to be old, to grow old;
yeverdoxw, to begin to have a beard ; iBdoxw, pubesco.

§ 233. IL Substantives.

Substantives are derived :—
1. From verbs and substantives, and express —
a. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns):
(a) With the endings -eds (Gen. -éws) for the Masc., -e:a or -tooa for the
Fem.; -r7s [-érns, -érns, -irns, -érns] (Gen. -ov) (mostly Paroxytones), -r4p
and -rwp (Paroxytones) for the Masc., -rp:d& (Proparoxytonés), -rpis, -Tes,

ee be eee a a eG ee | en Pe

288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 233.

and -is (Gen. -:d0s), -re1pa (Proparoxytone) for the Fem.; -wy for the Mase,
-atva for the Fem.; -ws for the Masc., -wts and -wtyn for the Fem., e. g.
iepeds, priest, Fem. i¢peta, from iepds; avanrhs and ~fp, flute-player, Fem. aban-
Tpia, avdntpls, from airAéw; owrhp, deliverer, odrepa, from cé(w; modtrns,
citizen, woditis, from médus; patwp, orator, from ‘PE-Q; Sepdarwr, servant, Sepd-
mawva, from Spay; oixérns, a slave, from olxos; Snudrns, one of the people, from
Sijuoes; dwAlrys, a hoplite, from 8rAov; otpatiétys, a soldier, from erparid.

(8) With the ending -ds (Gen. -od), seldom, and only from verbs with the
variable vowel [§ 231, 6 (c)], e.g. moumds, attendant, from méurw; 6 4 Tpopds,
nourisher, nurse, from tpépw ; &pwyds, an ally, from apiyyw.

b. They express the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from
the person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns: —

(a) From verbs:

(a) with the endings -o1s (Gen. -cews) and (more seldom) -o fa, substantives
which denote the transitive or active idea of the verb, e. g. mpatis, actio, an acting,
from mpdrrw; wolnois,a making, from moréw; Soxiacta, a proving, from doxindtw;

(8) with the ending -~ és (Gen. -od), such as denote the intransitive idea of
the verb, e. g. d5upuds, weeping, from dddpopc ; ;

(y) with the ending -wa, such as denote the effect or result of the transitive
action of the verb, e. g. mpayua, something done, uvijuwa, monumentum, wolnua,' the .
thing made or done ;

(5) with the endings -u7, -n, -a (all for the most part Oxytones), and (from
verbs in -edw), -efa, such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, and some-
times the effect of that relation, e. g. rou4, a cutting, from Téuvw; dodh, song,
from deliw, dopa, destruction; maideia, education ; “eas

(e) with the endings -os (Gen. -ov), -ros (Gen. -rov) and -os (Gen. -ovs)
such as denote, generally, an intransitive relation, also a transitive, and partly
the effect of the action of the verb, e. g. Adyos, word, from Aéyw; Kwxurds,
lamentation ; 7 Kids, care.

(b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an
attributive sense) : —

(a) with the endings -fa, from adjectives in -os, and some in the third Dec.,
e. g. copla, wisdom (from codds); eddamorla, happiness (from eidaiuwyv, Gen.
-ov-0S) ;

(8) -<& (Proparoxytones) from adjectives in -ns and -ovs, whose stem ends in
e and o, with which the « of the ending coalesces and forms e and o (thus -ed,
-o1%), e. g. GANSea, truth (from &AnShs, Gen. -é-os), evvoi, benevolence (from
eyo-os, etvovs) ;

(y) -cvvn mostly from adjectives in -wy (Gen. -ovos) and -os, e. g. ¢wppo-
aivn, modesty (from caéppwv, Gen. -ov-os); ducaso-cbvn, justice (from dikazos) ;

(5) -7ys, Gen. -rntes (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -os and

1 Nouns derived from the first Pers. Perf. Pass. denote the result of the action
of the verb, e. g. (efpnua), eSpnua, the thing found, the discovery ; those from the
second Pers., the abstract act, e. g. (e¥pyoa), efpeois, the act of finding; those
from the third Pers., the agent or doer, e. g (e%pyra:), edperhs, the discoverer.

a il

§ 233.] DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 289

-us, e.g. lodrns, Gen. -dryTos, equality (from Yoos); maxtrns, thickness (from
maxds) ;

(€) -os, Gen. -eos = -ovs, from adjectives in -vs and -ys, and such as have
the forms of comparison in -fwy and -iros, e. g. Tdxos, 76, Gen. tdxous, swift-
ness (from taxvs), eddos, 7d, Gen. -ous, falsehood (from wevdfs), aloxos, ré,
baseness (from airxpéds, airxlwr) ;

(¢) -ds, -d8os (only in abstract numeral substantives), e. g. 4 povds, unity ;
duds, duality ; rpuds, a triad.

Remark 1. In abstracts in -rfa, which express both a transitive and intran-
sitive relation, from compounds in -ros and -rns (Gen. -ov), the 7 is commonly
ne ie into , €. g. dAoveria and -cla (4SA0Sérns), ASavacla (aSdvaros), dxa-
Sapoia, dtvBAepla, etc. So also with adjectives in -tos, e. g. MiAhows (MiAntos),
éviadoros (émavrés). Comp. §§ 17, 6, and 234, Rem. 2.

Rem. 2. The older Attic poetry sometimes makes the a long in the endings
-eid and -oid, e. g. dvaidela, mpovola.

2. From substantives alone, the following classes denoting the names of
persons and things, are derived : —

(a) Gentile nouns, i. e. the names of persons derived from their country, in
-evs (Fem. -ts, -idos), -Prns (Fem. -tris), -arns (Fem. -atis), -f7ns, -érns, e. g.
Awpietds (a Dorian, one from Doris), Awpls, SvBapirns, -tris, Srapridrns, ’Avywh-
tns, Hreparns. Comp. § 234, 3 (g), ete.

(b) Patronymics, i. e. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with
the endings -{5ns (Fem. -{s, Gen. -iS0s); also -145ns'; but substantives of the
first Dec. in -ns and -as, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem
ends in s, and some others, have -d3ms (Fem. -ds, Gen. -ddos) ; these endings are
appended to the stem, and where the stem ends in e, this e and: of the ending
-t5ns combine and form a diphthong, as in MmAelSns, e. g. Mprau-tdns, Fem. Mpiap-is
from Tplau-os, MnActins from TnAeds, Gen. IMnAé-eos, Kexportdns from Kéxpoy,
Gen. -o7-os, MavSoldns from TdvSoos, -ovs; TeAauwy-iddns from Tedaudy, Aived-
dns from Aivéas, @eoriddns, Fem. @eorti-ds from @€erw0s.

(c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with
the endings -:oy which is the most usual, -%ptov [-do1ov] (seldom) and some
few with the endings -dAAtov, -vAAls, -vdpiov, -dgiov (-dpiov) (which
belong mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy) ;— -{fs
(Gen. -fS0s and -i60s), -fdrov (formed from -fs);—-floxos, -loxn (-toxior,
txvn, -ixviov);— -1deds (but only of the young of animals), e. g. werpdxcov, youth,
from peipat, -ax-os, mauid-loy, a little child, from wats, ma5-bs ; — masd-dpioy ; -dovov
instead of -dpiov only in kopdovoy (from «dpa, young woman) on account of the
preceding p; petpax-vAdoy, axavS-vadAls from &xavSa, thorn, vno-vdpioy, islet ;
(wi-giov, little animal; xpvo-dpiov from xpvods;— mwax-ls, little tablet, from
mivat; épatls, little wagon; vno-tdi0v, islet, from vijoos; xpeddioy (instead of
-gd:ov) from xpéas, oixidioy (instead of oixi-fS:ov) from oixia ;— veavi-cKos, vearl-
oxn from veavias; -ionxioyv seldom, e. g. korvAloxiy from xorvAn; -fxvn,.

1 This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronymic ending is
long, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since one
short syllable would stand between two long syllables ; thus, Tnaqidis, .

25

290 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 234.

-txviov only in moAtxvn, roAixvioy from mérts, evdtxvn, kvrlymov from drug ;
—Aay-idevs, young hare, from Aaydés ; der-15eds, young eagle, from Kerds.

(ad) Designations of place, with the endings -:ov (in connection with the
preceding vowels -aiov, -e:ov, -Gov) and -ezov, which denote the abode of the
person designated by the primitive word, or a place consecrated to a divinity
or hero; -éyv (Gen. -évos), seldom -edyv, and -wvid, which denote the residence
of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. épyaornp-tov, workshop, from épyac-
thp, and so others in -rjpiov from -rhp or -rns; sometimes also this ending is
used with reference to vessels, e. g. morhpiov, drinking vessel; kovpeiov, barber's
shop, from xoupevs, -é-ws (several in -oy [-ecov] have another signification, e. g.
Tpodeiov, wages of a nurse, from Tpopeds) ; Onoeiov from Onceds, -€-ws, "ASnvaiov,
Mouceioy ; — avdpév and yuvaixdy, apartments for men and women; imrev, stable
Sor horses; podév and fedwud, bed of roses; wepiorepedy and mepiotepay, dove-
cote. _

(e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing
some object, with the endings -rpoy and -tpa, e. g. tvorpa, curry-comb ; dldak-
tpov, tuition-money ; AovTpoy, water for washing ; Aovtpdv, bath; also to designate
place, e. g. dépxhotpa, dancing-room, instead of the ending -rfpiov.

§ 234. III. Adjectives.

1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings:— ,

(a) With the ending -os, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These
adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from
which they are derived, e. g. pavds, brilliant, from gatyw; Aowwds, the remainder ;
the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. kaxds.

(b) With the endings -:xés, -4, -dv, and -1mos, -ov, -tmos,-y, -ov or
-o1tmos, -ov, which denote ability, fitness, aptness. Of these, those in -ucés have
a transitive signification, those in -jos both a transitive and passive, e. g.
ypah-ixds, fit or able to paint ; rpdp-mos, nutritive; id-oios, curable.

(c) A few with the ending -vdés, -4, -dv with an intransitive or passive
signification, e. g. de-vds, frightful (AEIQ), ceu-vds, honored, honorable (a¢Bopas),
orvy-vds, hated, hateful (2TYTQ), roSewvds (woséw), desired.

(d) A few with the ending -Aés with a transitive signification, -wAds, -4,
-éy and (from verbs in -dw) -nAds, -4, -év with a transitive and intransitive
signification, e. g. 5e-Ads, timid ; €xmary-Aos (instead of éxmAayAds from éxmAho-
ow), frightful ; peid-wrds, sparing ; ovyndds, silent ; &rarndds, deceitful.

(e) With the ending -apds, -d, -déy (from verbs in -dw and -afyw) with an
intransitive signification, e. g. xaAdpds, slack ; maipds, stained; also in pSovepds,
envious ; voonpéds, diseased ; oixrpés, pitiable.

(f) With the ending -uwy, -nwoyv (Gen. -ovos) with an intransitive significa-
tion, €. g. uvh-nwv, mindful, memor (MNAQ), vojuwyr, intelligent (voéw).

(g) With the ending -7s, -es (Gen. -eos), e. g. Ahpns, plenus.

(h) With the ending -ds (Gen. -d5os) with a transitive, intransitiveyor pas-
sive signification, e. g. bop dss vas (#ép) 5 Spouds, rereeng (APEMQ); Aoyds,
chosen (Aێyw).

§ 234.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 291

(i) With the endings -rés, -r4, -rdév, and -réos, -réa, -7 dow (verbal
adjectives) ; those in -rés denote either a completed action like the Perf. Pass.
Part., e. g. Aex-rés (from Aéyw), dictus; or the idea of possibility = English
termination -b/e, which is their usual signification, e. g. dpa-rés, capable of being
seen, visible. In their formation, most of these follow either an existing or an
assumed Perf. Pass., e. g.

BovAct-w Be-BobAcu-ra BovAev-rds, -réos
Tid-w rTe-Tlun-TaL Tiun-Tds

pwpd-w mwe-pepa-Tat pwpa-réos
pré-w me-plan-Tas pirn-tds

xe-w Ké-xb-rat xu-Tés

TAEK-@ mwé-wAEK-TaL mwrex-7T bs, -Téos
Aéy-w Aé-AeK-T at Aex-Tds
oTéA-A-w é-orad-Tat orad-réos

tely-w (TA-2) Té-Th-TaHL Ta-Téos

3f-3w-us (AO-2) 5é-50-rat do-rds, -Téos.

Remark 1. Very many ‘verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy of
other forms of the verb, not according to any definite rule, but take precisely
such a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus, for example, a considerable
number followed the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. aipé-w, rpé-Sny, aipe-réds ;
mat-w, é-mav-o-Inv, wav-o-Tds, -tTéos; xpd-ouat, é-xph-o-Snv, xpn-o-Tds, -Téos;
orpép-w, é-oTpép-Snv, orpen-rds ; Tpéx-w, &-Tpép-Iyv, Tpew-Téos ; Tpép-w, e-Ipep-
Snv, Spew-réos; Lorn-mi, eord-Inv, ora-rés, -réos; emaivé-w, emnve-Syv, eratve-
+és;—some the form of the second Aor. Act., e. g. @xw, €-oxe-Tov, oXE-TOs 5
aipéw, etde-rov, éde-Tds ; Inut, €-rov (commonly efrov), ap-e-réos, év-e-rds 5 ThS7-
uu, &Se-Tov, Se-rds, -réos;—some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. wévw, mév-
erov, weve-tds, -Téos; elut, Y-Tov, i-réos; so a&m-edxe-ros from "EYXE-TON (evxo-
par); duva-rés (Sivaua); pnul, pa-rdv, pa-rés.

2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives :—

By the ending -:os (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem
-al0S, -€t0S, -0L0S, -wos, -vios) and -ixés (which, when v precedes, becomes -xdés,
and when 1, often -axés). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean-
ings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea,
often also in a very general manner, that which proceeds from an object and is
connected with it or related to it, e. g. odpdy-tos, heavenly, pertaining to heaven ;
kaSdp-tos, cleanly (but xaSapds, clean); érevSépios, frank, liberal, liberalis (but
ercddepos, liber) ; &yopaios, belonging to the market-place (&yopd) ; Sépetos, summer-
like (S€pos, -e-os), aidoios (aides, -d-os), Hpgos and npaos; TprmhxuU0s; SovduKds ;
SmAuxds, waviaxds.

Rem. 2. In some words the ending -aios also -:azos occurs, e. g. xepoaios,
oxoraios and oxotiaios. In several words the ending -ovs (§ 17, 6) is used in-
stead of -r-10s, &. g. pidorhawos (piAdrns, -nTos), Exoboros (Exdyv, -dyTOS).

3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : —

(a) With the ending -e:os (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from
words denoting persons, especially from proper names; but in respect to their
signification they are like adjectives in -uds, e. g. dvdpeios, belonging to a man,
manly, yuvaixeios, avSpdmews, ‘Owhpeios. : .

292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 235.

(b) With the endings -eos = -ods and -ivos, which denote the material
of which anything is made, like the English ending -en, e. g. xypio-cos = xpu-
gods, golden; xdAkeos = xadrxods, brazen; EbA-wos, wooden; cxitwos, made of
leather, leathern.

(c) With the ending -ivés (seldom -ivés), derived from substantives. These
express certain relations of time; sometimes, also, an abundance or fulness,
e. g. Eomep-ivds, vespertinus ; xYeo-wds, hesternus ; dpewds, mountainous (dpos, Gen.
-€-05).

(d) With the endings -e:s, Gen. -evros (always preceded by a vowel, 7,
when the substantive from which the Adj. is formed, is of the first Dec., and o,
when it is the first or second); -pds,-epés, -npds, -aAéos, which denote
fulness or abundance, e. g. bAh-ers, woody; mupd-eis, fiery; aicx-pés, base ; vos-
epdés, and voo-npds, unhealthy ; pwy-adéos, strong. Exceptions to those in -es,
are devdphes from dévdporv, xaples from xdpis.

(e) With the ending -4p:0s, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub-
stantives in -yp and -ns, e. g. cwrhptos, preserving, that preserves.

(f) With the ending -#5ns, Neut. -@des (formed from -o-e:dqs from dos,
form, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, but often
also a fulness or abundance, e. g. pAoyddns, resembling flame, fiery ; mowdns,
abounding in grass, grassy.

(g) With the endings -tos (Fem. -@),-xés, -txds (Fem. -xn, -uch),-nvds
(Fem. -nvf), and when-: or p precedes, -advds (Fem. -av%), -tvos (Fem. -iyn) ;
these are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives,
particularly those in +nvds, -ayds, -ivos, which are formed only from names
of cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. Kopiva-ios, -la, "Adnvaios, -ala, Xtos
(instead of -i:os from Xtfos), "Apyeios (from ”~Ap~yos, -e-os) ; Aaxedauor-ixds ; Kuir-
nvés, -nvh (KiGixos), Sapdi-avds, -avh (Sdpdes, Ion. Gen. -f-wv), “Ayxupavds
("Ayxipa), Tapayt-ivos, -ivn (Tdpas, -ayT-os).

§ 235. IV. Adverbs.

1. Adverbs are formed from verbs :—

With the endings -8yy or, when the primitive has the variable o, -ddny,
which denote mode or manner, e. g. xptBdnr, secretly (xpbrrw) ; ypdB-Snv, by
writing, scribendo (ypdpw) ; omop-d8ny, scatteredly, sparsim.

2. From verbs and substantives : —

With the ending -846y or -addév,-7d5dv (mostly from substantives). These
also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g.
dvapavddv, openly, aperte; diaxpiddv, distinctly ; Borpvddy, grape-like, in clusters
(Bérpus), iAaddv, in troops, catervatim ; aryednddv, in herds, gregatim; xuynddv,
like a dog.

3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the
three relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and where, by the endings -% ey, -de
(-ce), and -S1, e. g. obpavd-Ser, from heaven ; obpavdy-Be, into or to heaven, obpayé-
&, in heaven; &Ado-Ser, from another place, aliunde, tAdo-ce, to another place, alio,
&AAo-8:, at another place, alivi.— Rules in respect to the accent of those in -Ser

ee ©
Oe Se eee

§ 236.] DERIVATION OF ADVERBS, 293

and -%: (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytones or Properispomena, e. g.
mpdader, yixev, ab; (b) polysyllables are Paroxytones, when the penult is
short by nature, e. g. AecBddev from AdoBos, Kumpdédev from Kdmpos, odpavddev,
_odpayéSs: from odpayds; exceptions: ofkodev, olkodi, Wwdodev, Mdod., mdvtodev,
BAAoder, éxdoroder, and some poetic words ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is
long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. &vrogdev, brisdev;
(d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the
primitive was a Barytone, e. g. t&wtev (tw), érépwtev (erepos), "AdhvnSev
(ASijva); but Properispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g.
TludaSev (Tlv9d), @pr#ev (@pid). On the accent of those in -d¢ (-ce), see § 34,
Rem. 8.

Remark 1. Words of the first Dec. retain their a or before -Sev; those
of the second, their o; and those of the third, the o of the Gen. ending, e. g.
*Oduurladey, Sardptn-Sev, olko-Sev, &AdAo-Sev; but the vowels a, y, and o are
often exchanged with each other, e. g. pi(é-Se from pita; MeyapéSey from

Méyapa, Td.
Rem. 2. Adverbs in -w, and also others, append the endings to the un-
changed vowels, ¢. g. &vw-Sev, drw-Sev, tkw-Sev, exei-Sev, t, evdo-Sev,

@vdo-S:. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen o into , e. g.
aupotépw-Sev. In some of the above forms, w can be shortened into o in poetry,
and then rejected entirely, e. g. %o-Sev, rpdo-Sev (instead of ewdev, mpdawSer),
and in imitation of Doric usage, ¢ is often omitted before 8, e. g. dmev, Exro-
Sev (instead of dmiaSev, Exroocdev).

Rem. 3. The ending -de is commonly appended to substantives only, and to
the unchanged form of the Acc., e. g. dade, to or into the sea (GAs), Tlud@de (from
TlvSé), ofxdvde only Epic, elsewhere ofade (from the stem ’OIZ), as piyade (from
Y=) instead of gvyhvde which is not in use, EAevoivdde). In pronouns and
adverbs, -o¢ is appended instead of -de, e. g. éxei-oe, HAAOTE, Erépwore, ovdapydee,
tnadéoe; more seldom in substantives, e. g. ofcooe.— In plural substantives in
-as, ade becomes (ce, e. g. "AShvale, OfBale ; but some substantives in the singu-
lar, also, follow this analogy, e. g. OAvumta¢e ; so the poetic adverbs, Svpace,
to the door, foras, %pa¢e, Jausikes to the ground, humum (from the obsolete sub-
stantives, épa, sitet 5 earth).

Rem. 4. Instead of -de or -ce, the Epic dialect has -8¢s also, e. g. xauddis
instead of xauate, 4AAvdis instead of &AAowe, and ofkadis, domum.

Rem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suffix, have, between the
stem and the suffix, the syllable ax, which is to be accounted for by the ending
-axis coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. roAA-ax-dSev (from moAAdKis
and 8Sev), tayr-ax-do¢; this occurs also in most pronominal adverbs of place
in -n, -ov, -ol, &. g. GAA-ax-00, alibi, TOAA-ax-00, WayT-ax-7, WOAA-aX-7}, TWayvT-ax-08,

§ 2386. B. Comrpounns.

1, Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains the other
more definitely. The explanatory word usually stands first, e. g. vav-uaxla,
sea-fight, as is usual in English in composite words. The word which is explained
by the other, shows to what class of words the compound belongs, i. e. whether
it is a substantive or verb, etc.; thus, e. g. vav-uaxla is a'substantive, vav-uaxeiv
a verb, vav-udxos an adjective.

Remark 1. The explanatory word takes the second place in the compound

but seldom, and mostly in poetic words, ¢. g. dedaluwy, i. e. deloas tods dal-
poovas. _.

25*

294 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237.

2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other (= a substan-
tive qualified by an adjective or by another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. Kax-
etla (= Kah Etts, bad condition); cxivypapia (= oxias ypaph), painting in light and
shade ; imm-oupis (= frou ovpa), horse-tailed; or in an objective relation (= a
yerb, adjective, or substantive with the Case of a substantive in the relation of
an object, or with an adverb in the same relation), e. g. immotpopety (= trmous
Tpépew), immotpdpos; vauyaxeiy (i. €. vavol pdxeodar), vavudxos, vavyaxta;
evtuxelv, edTUXhS; aviotdvat, dvdoTaros, avdoTacis.

3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, e. g. amro-, éx-, avTt-,
mpo-, éu-, dia-, KaTa-, Tapa-, mpoo-Balvew ; comp. § 237, 5; the substantive and
adjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with prepositions, or with
separable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. cwuato-piaat, 7du-Adyos ;
mepl-oragis, did-AeuKos; €d-Tuxhs, av-altios; the adverb, with prepositions only,
€. g. wepi-o addy.

Rem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre-
viously compounded, e. g. ed-ruxety and eb-rvxas from ed-ruxhs.

Rem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are such as are used alone, as well as in
composition, e. g. ed, well; mAh, except ; Eua, at the same time; &yx1, near; &prt,
now, recently ; &yav (aya-), very; maAw, again; wddcu, long since; dis from dvo,
bis, or the same as 8fxa, dis, separately ; wav, wholly ; edtuxeiv, edbruxhs, prosperous ;
mAnumedts (wAhv, wéAos), violating harmony ; wAnupedciv, TAEUMEANTIS 3 GMaTpO-
xdw, to run together, auarpoxia; ayxiBareiv, to go near to; &yxiSdAagoos, mari
propinguus ; apridadrns, now blooming ; &yardevhs, &ydppoos, aydvvidos, very snowy ;
martuBracros, that buds again; madralputos, planted long since ; disxtArot, two thou-
sand ; dipSoyyos, having a double sound ; mdvaogos, all-wise.

(b) Inseparable adverbs are such as are used only in composition. They are

as follows : —

(a) jue-, half, semi, e. g. nulprextos, half-burned, semiustus.

(8) dus- expresses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith-
esis of ed, e. g. Sustuxety and ebruxeiv, Susdaimovia, misfortune ;

(y) a Privative (usually av- before a vowel) has the force of the Latin in, and
expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g.
&coos, unwise; &tiuta, dishonor; wats, childless ; dvairios, innocens.

(5) a Collective and Intensive, like the Latin con in composition, expresses com-
munity, equality, or a collective idea, and hence also intensity, e. g. (commu-
nity, especially in the names of kindred and companionsPadergds, brother,
from d<Agpds, womb; (equality) ardaayros, of the same weight ; keds, even ;
(in a collective sense) &3pdos, collected (Spéw, Spéouan, to cry aloud), &oAAhs,
collected (from GAfhs Or GAns), dyelpw, &yéAn ; (Intensity) arevhs, intent, in-
tentus ; toKtos, very shady ; &Bpouos, making a loud noise.

Rem. 4. The Euphonic a (§ 16,10) must be distinguished from the Collec-
tive a, e.g. ordxus and &oraxus, anear of grain; creporh and aoreporh, lightning.

§ 237. Formation of Compounds.

1. When the first part of the compound is a verb (§ 236, Rem. 1), the pure
(sometimes also the strengthened) stem of the verb remains unchanged, if the
following word: begins with a vowel, e. g. pep-avyijs, weid-dpxeiv; or the final
vowels e, 0, t, also the syllables o:, ec, ect, co, are annexed to the stem of the
verb, if the following word begins with a consonant; ¢ also is annexed when

§ 237.] FORMATION OF COMPOUNDS. 295

the following word begins with a vowel, ¢. g. dax-é-Supuos, Auw-o-rderns and Aeur-
o-rdxrns, Tepm-i-Képauvos, eyep-al-yedws, pep-éa-Bios, Tau-eol-xpws, EArx-eol-wemXos,

pukoBdpBapos (= pry-co-B.), pipaoms (= plr-o-aoms), wAhgimmos (= wAfy-c-

ewros).
2. When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the
declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. (first
Dec.) vixn-pépos, &yopa-vduos ; (second Dec.) Aoyo-ypddos, io-fhuepos (by Elision),
waxovpyos (by Crasis), AaywBddAos (Awydés); (third Dec.) doru-vduos, jdu-Adyos,
Bovu-popBés, vav-maxla; mup-pdpos, uedary-xoAla, waviyyvpis ; in some, the union-
vowel o is annexed to the stem, e. g. cwuar-o-ptAat, puat-o-Adyos, Sgdodxos (by
Crasis, instead of 5q3-d-exes) ; in neuters in -os, Gen. -e-os, the € is elided before
o, &. g. tip-o-pdpos, or the declension-stem in -es [§ 61, (b)] is retained, e. g.
reAes-pdpos ; so also in other neuters, e. g. xepas-BéAos, pws-pédpos.
Remark 1. In the first Dec., however, the union-vowel o is often found
instead of the declension-stem, e. g. d:x-o-ypdoos (Sikn), Aoyx-0-pdpos ; 80 also
the ending -y or -a is annexed even to words of the second and third Dec., e. g.
Savarn-pédpos, aomdn-pdpos; neuters in -os (Gen. -eos, Pl. -y) frequently vary
between the o and 7, e. g. tpoddpos and tipnodpos, cxevopdpos and cxevnpédpos.
Rem. 2. In some words of the third Dec., more seldom of the first and
second, «is annexed to the pure stem, as a union-vowel, e. g. rup{rvous, aiyt-
Bérns ; wuotimddos (uvorhs), wuplarvovs. In several words a euphonic ¢ (ct) is
inserted, e. g. woyo-o-réKes, Seo-c-exSpla, together with the regular SeoexSpla,
vavu-ol-mopos. ;
3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes
take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of
consonants.
4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the
words beginning with &, ¢, 0, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels
(if the last part of the compound is a simple) into 7 and @, e. g. (a) ebfveuos
from &veuos, otparnyés from &yw, evhywp from avhp; (€) dushperuos from éper-
pds, dushAaros from éAatyw; (0) évapedts from bpedros, ravdAeSpos from bAAvuL,
a&vdévupos from dvoua.
5. In relation to the end of the word, the following points should be noted: —
A. In the Greek language, as has been seen (§ 236, 3), a verb can be com-
pounded only with prepositions; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with
another part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a
derivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then
the derivative-ending, commonly - é@, is regularly appended to this compound
word: e. g. from tous tpépeww, to keep horses, the derivative is not frmorpépew,
but by means of the compound substantive fmmorpégos, it is immorpopéw; so
SeoreBew from SeoreBhs, vavuaxeiv from vavudxos, edbruxeiv from ebtuxhs.
B. The compound is an adjective or noun:—
a. The second part is derived from a verb, and has the following endings:
(a) Most frequently -os, -ov, e. g. Snpetpépos, nourishing wild beasts, Snpérpo-
gos, nourished by wild beasts, See § 75, Rem. 4.

(B) -ns (-7s) or -as (Gen. -ov), -np (-tp), -twp, commonly used as
substantives with a transitive signification, e. g. evepyérns, benefactor ;
vouodérns, legislator; pupowdans, dpviSodtipas, wadorA€rwp ;

296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237.

(vy) -ns, -es, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g.
eopirgs, beloved of God; ebpashs, quick to learn, docilis; evmperhs,
becoming ;

(5) -s (-€), &. g. Pevdduaprus from MAPTYQ, vouopbaat.

b. Or the second part is a substantive :—

(a) An attributive relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the
first containing a more definite explanation of the last. Te substantive
remains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, sometimes also
a substantive or adjective, e. g. éuddovAos, a _fellow-slave ; BovAmos, excessive hun-
ger, bulimy ; axpémodus, citadel.

(b) An objective relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the
last denoting the object of the first. ‘This division includes a large number of
adjectives, the first part of which consists either of a verb, or, though more
seldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb, or of a preposi-
tion used as an adverb, e. g. derodaluwy = 6 robs Saluovas Seloas, emixapéxaxos
= 6 Tots kaxots émixaipwy, kaxodaluwy = 6 kaxdv Satpova txwy, Susépws, one who
has an unhappy love, évSeos = 6 thy Sedby ev EauTG Exwv, krouos = 6 amd Tod
otkov ey, &mas = 6 waidas ok Exwy. In all these examples the form of the sub-
stantive remains unchanged,’ where the substantive has a form which is appro-
priate for the Masc. or Fem. of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the
substantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -os (Gen. -ov), -ws
(Gen. -w), -ns (Gen. -ous), -1s (Gen. -150s), -wv and (when it ends in -v) -s,e. g.
abySemvos (deirvoy), a fellow-quest, ev&vdiucos (Slen), &rymos (tTywh), Sexhpepos
(Huépa), piroxphuatos (xpiiua, xphuata), Srrouos (oTdua), evyews (vii), having a
Fertile soil ; Acrrbvews (vais), one who deserts the ship ; évwpedhs (7d dpedos), &vaa-
kis (4AKh), axphuwy, &daxpus, Gen. -vos (7d Sdicpu).

ce. Or the second part is an adjective : —

The adjective retains its form, except that those in -vs commonly take the
ending -ns; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g.
éorvyeirwy, near the city, urdi vicinus ; mdvropos or rdaaopos, -ov, very wise; avd-
potos, -ov, unlike ; mpddnros, -ov, andhs from Hdvs, woddkns from wks.

1 For example, deidaluwy is an adjective of two endings, the ending -wy
being both Masc. and Fem., therefore the substantive dafuwy is not changed in
composition ; but obvdenvos takes a regular adjective termination, as the sub-
stantive de?voy has neither a Masc. nor Fem. ending.

SYNTAX.

SECTION I.
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE,

CHAPTER I.
Parts of a Simple Sentence.

§ 238. Nature of a Sentence.— Subject.— Predicate.

1. Syntrax treats of sentences. A sentence is the ex-
pression of a thought in words, e. g. To podov Sddrev; 6
avSpwros Svytés éottv. The conceptions of the mind are
related both to each other and to the speaker. The con-
ceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential
words (§ 38, 4); their relations to each other, partly by
inflection and partly by Formal words.

Thus, e. g.in the sentence Td xadrbdy fddov SdAA-ec ev TE TOD Tarp-bs Khr-~,
there are five essential words: adds, pddov, SdAAcw, waThp, kjwos; their rela-
tions to each other are expressed partly by their inflection and partly by the
Formal words 74, év, T@, Tod.

2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub-
ject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some-
thing is affirmed; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the
subject, e. g. in the sentences, To podov SdAret — 6 avSpwrros
Suntds éotw, TO podov and 6 dvSpwrros are the subjects, SdA-
Aer and Svntds éeorw, the predicates.

3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the
sentence; the subject is subordinate to it and can be

Po ae a ae ee

298 SYNTAX. [§ 238.

-expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g.
Sbo-pi, (1) give.

4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a
substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an
adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb
which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article; a
preposition with its Case; an infinitive ; finally, every word,
letter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con-

sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com-.

monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The
subject is in the Nom.

Td pddov SdArAa.— Ey & ypdpw, od ypdpes.—T pets HASov.—‘O gopds ed-
daluwy éort.— Oi pSovodvres micotyra.—Oi drat dvdpeia Foay.— Of rep)
Miatiddnv Karas euaxéoavro.— X. Cy. 8. 3, 42. Obra: ottws dU eos Td
Exerv xphuara, as dviapdy Td &GwWOBdAAELY.—Td BLddoKey Kardy eorw.
—X. R. L. 9, 2. wera: tH dpere THCegdat eis thy wAelw xpdvov padrdrov, }
TH Kaxig.— Td ei otvdeouds éori.— Td Fra paxpdy dori.—Td yv@St ceav-
Tov Kaddy éoTw.

Remark 1. In the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, the
subject is in the Acc., as will be seen § 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive
designations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition (eis, wept, ard)
with its Case, e.g. Eis tét Tapas HAO, as many as four came (with round num-
bers eis also signifies about, at most). X. Cy. 8. 3, 9. €oracay mp@rov mey Toy
Sopypdpwy eis TeTpakisxtAlous (about four thousand stood), Eumpoodev dt trav
muA@y eis Tégoapas, disxlAton dé éExaTepwXev Tay muAGyY. X. H. 6. 5, 10.
Zpvyov eis Aaxcdaluova tay wep) Srdowmmov Teyeatavy wept dxtaxoctous.
So ka¥ éxdorous, each one singly, one by one, singuli; Kata vn, singulae gentes.

5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by
any special word : —

(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic,
e. g. Tpdgpw, ypdeis, ypdoer;

(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro-
priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one, the subject
being, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, ofvoxoeverin Hom.
sc. 6 oivoxdos, the cup-bearer pours out the wine; Sbet in Her. sc. 6 Surhp.
X. An. 3. 4, 36. de éylyvworoy aitods of “EAAnves BovAopévous amévar kat
diayyeAAouevous, Exhpvte (sc. 6 xhput) tots “EAAnot mapackevdoarsat. So
onmatver TH odAmiyyt, €odaAmiyter, sc. 6 cadrmurhs (the signal is
[was] given by the trumpet). So we must explain words which denote the
state of the weather or the phenomena of nature; as #1, it rains; vipes,
it snows, BpovTd, &orpdmret, sc. 6 Zevs. Th. 4, 52. Zceroe, there was
an earthquake. X. Cy. 4. 5,5. sutxord es, it is dark;

(c) The subject is easily supplied from the context; thus, in designations of
time, e. g. Hv eyyls nAlov Sucuay (sc. } huépa). "Hy au) ayopay mAHSoveay
and the like ; wapéxe: oi, sc. kaupds, it is time, it is allowed, one can = licet,

aio ee a

§ 238.] SUBJECT. — PREDICATE. — COPULA 299

e. g. Her. 3, 73. juity wapéter dvacécacda: thy apxhv. In this way the
word 6 Seds is very frequently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. rpooq-
pmalves, sc. d Seds; rpoxwpet pot (SC. Ta mpd-yuata), things to mé,

, comp. Th. 1,109. In such expressions as gal, Aéyous, etc.
the subject &vSpwro is regularly omitted, as it is readily apparent ;

(d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some word of the sentence. Her.
9, 8 roy “Iodmdy erelxeor wal age hy mpds rérci, sc. Td Teixos, they
walled the Isthmus, and the [wall] was, ete. X. Cy. 2.4, 24. wopedoouc
eidis mpds Ta Baglrera, Kal Av piv avSlornra, sc. d BactAets. So also
other Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. Pl. L. 864, d.
watdi& xpdpevos, obbév mw TAY ToLodTwYr (sc. Taldwy) Siapepwy ;

(e) With the third Pers. Sing. of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing
a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun 7}s is sometimes
omitted. Pl. Criton. 49, c. otre dyraducety Sez, otte naxas woety ovdéva
dvIpdrwrv, oS dy drioty rdoxn tm’ adtay, not even if any one should
suffer from them; so often with the Inf.; but if a participle stands in
connection with the Inf., e. g. Eur. M. 1018. xovows pépew xph Svntrdy
bv7a cuudopds, the participle must be considered as the subject.

Rem. 2. -Such expressions as de?, xph, Senet, mpéwet, Sear (v), evdéxerat (it is
possible), kar@s, eb Exer, Zxer Adyor (consentaneum est), Aéyera (it is said), ete.,
the Greek language always eonsiders as personal, the following Inf. or substan-
tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs.

6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad-
jective pronoun or numeral, or a substantive with the
Formal word eivac; civas, in this relation, is usually called
the copula, since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc.
with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g.

Td pddov SdAACL.—‘O &vSpwros Svnrds eoriv.— Addvarol eioty of
Seol. —‘H Gperh earh éotiv.—’Ayash mapaipacls éoriv éralpov. — Kipos
hiv BactrAeds.—Todro Td mpayud eore T55e.— 3d Hoda mdvtwy THaTOS,
— Oj tvdpes oav Tpeis.

Rem. 3. The finite verb denotes both the thing affirmed (id quod praedicatur)
and the relation of the affirmation to the subject and speaker; the relation to
the subject, is denoted by the personal-endings of the verb; the relation to the
= by its Modes and Tenses; e. g. the ending of the verb Aéyw shows

at its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense,
indicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But
if the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with eZyai, the
affirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the
speaker by elva:, @. g. evdaluwv ciul = eddamove-w, ebdaluwy ef = eddaimove-cis,
evdaluoves trovra = eddaiyovh-covow, though there is a difference between the
two modes of expression.

Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish between the use of eZva, as a Formal
and as an Essential word; in the former relation, it is merely a copulay con-
necting the subject with the substantive or adjective, etc. (§ 238, 6); in the
latter, it has the idea of being or existence, being in a certain condition, etc., @. g.
tors Sebs = Sedbs gorw by (there is a God, God exists), as in Her. 3, 108. rod
Selov 7 mpovoln Ect gotaa coon.

300 Gn. SYNTAX. [$ 239.

Rem. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea
expressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula efvat, This
mode of expression, however, is more usual in poetry, though it is found also

in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Rem. 3. Eur. C. 381. m@s @ taAal-

mop, Fre mdaxorvTes Tade; Id. H. 117. jy omeddmr. Her. 3,99. drap-

vedmevds éortt. Id. 9,51. % vijods €or Grd Tod “Agwrod déxa oradiovs

&méxovoa Pl. L. 860,e. ci tadta oftws Exovtd éotiv, Dem. Ol. 3.

Si 1.) 11, 7. tadr by eyvandres hoary, they would have been convinced of these
ings. ;

Rem. 6. The copula efva: is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in
the Ind. Pres.; e?va: is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but
properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : —

(a) In general propositions, observations, and proverbs. Eur. 0.330. 6 uéyas
bABos ov pdvimos ev Bpotrois. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. orparig yap H pdorn (656s)
TaxioTn 5

(b) Very often with verbal adjectives in -réos, as also with other expres-
sions denoting necessity and duty, e.g. dvdynn, xpeev, Seuss, eixds,
also with xatpés, Spa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3,129, 70. quiv 7 imép rijs
ereudeplas &ywviotéov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. ariulas— éy Bdovdrcvotocn TH
mode pepe avayrn;

(c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. €rotwos, rpdSd mos, ofdste, Suva-
Tés, pad.ov, xaremdyv, SHAov, &Erorv, etc. Pl. Phaedr. 252, a. (4
Wuxh) Sovrcdew Eroiun. Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. eva mdoxew ériody €7o01-
pos. X.C.1,1, 5. SHAOv odv, bri ovk dv (Swxpdrns) mpoércyer, ei wh
érlotevey GAndevoew. Comp. ib. 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions
Savpacrdy bcov, it is very wonderful (= mirum quantum), dayhxavov bcov, it
is quite impossible, inconceivable (= immane quantum), see § 332, Rem. 10.
On ovdels dstis oF (= nemo non), see § 332, Rem. 12.

Rem. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin. Ctes. § 71, vit
év wéow (sc. jv) Kal wapiuey TH baTepala eis Thy éxxAnolay; the Ind. Pres. also is
not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. émdére, éwef (comp. X. C. 1, 46);
on the contrary, very frequently after 67: and as (that), e.g. X. C. 1. 2, 52.
Aéywr, ws ovdty Bpedos. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela-
tive ds &y, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. Pl. Rp. 370, e. dv dy adrois
xpela (sc. 7). The ellipsis of the Opt. when & belongs to it is more frequent,
e.g. X. Cy. 1.4, 12. rls yap tv, €pacav, cov ye ikavdrepos metoa (Sc. ein); Ib. 2.
8, 2. Av pty jets vixdpuev, SHAov, Ori of Te ToAeusor ay Hucrepa (sc. e*noav). The
ellipsis of the Imp. is very rare, e. g. 8. O. C. 1480. fAaos, é daluwv. X. An. 3.
3, 14. rois oty Seots xdpis (sc. €orw), tt ob Thy TOAAH poun, GAAG oby GAlyos
HASov, The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi
and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. d7Adv ye, bt PadAos (sc. Sy) pavodua, but else-
where also, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 15. &romwa Aéyeis Kad ovdauds mpds cod (sc. dvTa), et
nullo modo tibi convenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. xeqwdvos reAcvT@v-
Tos Kal mpds tap %5n (sc. dvros). The Inf. is often omitted after doKety, jyeio-
Sa, vouifew and the like, e.g. Th. 7, 60. Bovrevréa eddner. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14.
amidvra we éxéAevoas Tots orpatrnyiuois (SC. elvat) vourComévors dvdpdor diadréyeo-

§.239. Comparison.— Attribute and Object.

1. When the predicate belongs to the subject in a higher or
lower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by

the Comparative, e. g. ‘O zaryp peiLov éoriv, } 6 vids. —‘O

$§ 239.] COMPARISON. — ATTRIBUTE AND OBJECT. 301

codds paAAov xaipec TH dperp, }) Tots xprijpaow. And when the
predicate belongs to the subject in the highest or lowest
degree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative
is used, and commonly takes with it a partitive Genitive, e. g.
Swxparns ravrov “EXAjvov codadtaros hv.—‘O copos ravtwv
partora éridupet ris dperys.

Remark 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in
the following ways: (a) by @r4, still, even, etiam, e. g. wel(wy E71, still greater ;
| (b) by paxp@, dAlye@, ToAAG, Eri TWOAAG, bow, TocotTHY; MEeYa,
| bAlyov, wort, ’cor, TogodTo, which show how much more or less of the
| quality expressed by the adjective is intended, e.g. roAAG mwelCwr, multo major,
| far greater, roAAG Er peioves, multo majores etiam ; (c) sometimes by waa-
/Aov. Her. 1,32. paAAov brBidrepds éort ( far).

Rem. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the
| following ways: (a) by rat, vel, even, e. g. eat pddrcota, vel maxime, very greatly
i indeed ; (b) by words denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. roAA@,
| paxp@, ToAv, wapa Troddt, bo, ToToUTY, &.g, TOAAG &piortos, multo
| estantissimus, the best by far; wanp@ &pioros, longe praestantissimus ; (c) even
| by the Superlative: udAtora (rAetoroy and payioroyr poet.), e. g. S.
-O. C. 743. tA eTotov avSpérwv Kdnioros. Th. 7, 42. udAtora dewdratos;
(d) by the relative: &s' (Sérws), 57s and 4, ofos (§ 343, Rem. 2), e.g. as

\ rdxwrra, quam celerrime, $r1 wérwwra, fj tpwrov, e. g. Pl. Apol. 23, a. roAAal
pév Gréxderal mor yeydvact Kat ofar xarermdrara Kal Bapdrara. X. An. 4. 8,
2. xwplov ofov xadewérarov; (c) by efs, unus, e. g. Her. 6, 127. ASE Suw-
duplins SuBaplrns, ds emt mAeto Tov Sh xAdis efs avhp amixero. X. An. 1.
9, 22. Sapa mA cto Ta cfs ye avhp dv éAduBare, he received the most gifts, at least
considering the fact that he was but a single individual (C. Tuse. 2. 26, 64. amplitu-
dinem animi uzam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam); (f ) a peculiar mode of

| strengthening the Superlative, is by joining évy tos with it, in which case the
Superlative must be repeated, e. g. ‘O “Epws év tots tmpeaBitrarés éort
| (i. €. €v Tots mperBurdrots oder), the oldest among those who are very old: Her. 7,

| 187. todré po ev rotor Serdrarov galvera yeveodsa. Pl. Symp. 173, b.
_ Bwxpdrovs épaorhs dy dv tots wdaAtora Tov téte. The construction with the
t Fem. is found only in Thuc., e. g. 3,81. (ordois) €v Tots mpaetn eyévero. Ib.
17. év tots tAetorat vies. In such instances, to7s must be considered
as Neut. In like manner, the expression éu01a (éuota Ion.) ro?s was used
with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. c€Bovra: 5¢ "ApdBior wlotis avdpérwv duota

Toigt wddtora (sc. ceBouévas), like those who respect very much, ut qui maxime.
Th. 1, 25. xpnudrwv duvduer bytes Kar’ éxeivoy Toy xpdvov Suora Tots ‘EAAhvwv
-®Aovgtwrdtois. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive
with it, e. g. ’Ayatay imméwy xpdriatos, the best among the good horsemen = the
_ Rem. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by
_ negative adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by od (Litotes),
instead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e.g. od}x Heiora,
not the least, especially, ob kdkitortos, ovx €AdXtLoTOS, stronger than ud-
| Aorta, BEATicTOS, ueyiocros. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g.
00x eiotra, GAAG wdAtora.:

* ‘Os, Sr: are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some
part of dévaua: understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to
the Superlative. Sometimes dvvaua is expressed, e. g. Revopay avioraras
eat vos ém) wéAcuov &s €Sbvaro KdAAwTa.

26 ‘

302 | SYNTAX. [§ 240. 4

2. A sentence consisting of a subject and predicate may be
extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly.
The word or words which define the subject more fully, is
called an attribute, or atiributive. The subject is more exactly
described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib-
utive! adjective), e. g. 76 xadov fddov; (b) by the Gen. of a
substantive (attributive Gen.), e. g. 6 rod Bacidéws xiros,
regis hortus (= regius hortus) ; (c) by a substantive in the same
Case as the word which is more definitely described, e. g.
Kipos, 6 Bacwie’s. The explanatory word is here said to be in
apposition with the word explained, and may be called an
appositive of that word. ‘The predicate (which is termed the
object), is more exactly described, (a) by a Case of a substan-
tive; (b) by a preposition with a substantive; (c) by the Inf,
(d) by an adverb, e. g. “O cogos rHhv dperny doxet. Iept rijs
watpioos paxdmeda, “Amrévac éxridupo. Karas ypddes.

§ 240. Agreement.

1. The finite verb agrees with the subject in Person and
Number; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in
Gender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate,
agrees with the subject only in Case; in Gender, Number, and
Case, only when it denotes a person, and hence either has a
particular form for the Masc. and Fem., or is of common gender.
The same principle applies to substantives in apposition (§ 266,,
1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with
the subject only in Case, e. g.

"Eva ypdow, ov ypdders, obtos ypdpet. —‘O tvSpaos Svntds eoriw. —“H aper)
KaAh eotw.—Td mpayya aicxpdy éorw.— Oi “EAAnves TodeutKdraror hoav.—
‘O Kadds mats, } soph yuvh, Td puxpoy Téxvov.—’Eyevéecdny TH ayvdpe ToUTw
(Kpirlas nat "AAcBiddns) pice pirotimotdrw mdyrwv “Adnvalwy, X. C. 1. 2, 14,
—Kipos jv Baotheds. — Topipis jv Baclrci. — Kipos, 6 Bacireds, Téuipis, 7 Bact-
Aew. On the contrary, rhy Suyarépa, dervdy tt KdAAOS Ka péye:
Sos, edywv de clrev (his daughter a wonder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7.

1 When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with
which it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the
predicate and is used in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a
predicative adjective, e. g. in the expression 6 a@yaSds avhp (the good man), aya
Sés is attributive, but in 6 dvhp dors &yadds (the man is pie 4 it is predicative.

240.] AGREEMENT. 303

2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the
bject as above stated, when the following and other similar
erbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate
ense, have chiefly the force of the copula: —

(a) The verb trdpxew, to be the cause of, to be, to exist ;

(b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to grow, e. g. yiyvo-
pat, hur, adfavopat ;

(c) The verbs pévw, to remain, and xaréorny, to be established,
appointed, to stand ;

(d) Verbs signifying to seem, appear, show one’s self, e. g.
Eovxa, paivowat, dnrodpa ;

(e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. xadodpar, dvopdlopar,

; Aéyopat, dxovw, to be called (like audire) ;

(f) Verbs signifying to be appointed to something, to be chosen,
to be named, e. g. aipodpar, drodetxvup.a ;

(g) Verbs signifying to be regarded as something, to be recog-
nized as something, to be supposed, e. g. vopi€ouat, xpivo-
pot, trodapBavopa ;

(h) Verbs signifying to be given as something, to be received as
something, to be abandoned, cast off, and the like, e. g.

| Kipos éyévero Bacireds trav Mepodv.—Tobras 5 btrAummos wéyas nvtqsn
| (Dem.). —’ArxiBiddns ipédn orparnyds.—’AvT) Glrwy nai tévov viv ndraxes
wal Scots éxSpol dxotvovarv (audiunt), they hear themselves called flatterers, ete.,
| Dem. Cor. 241. |

_ Remark 1. When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f), (g), (h), have the
active form, they take two accusatives (§ 280, 4).

Rem. 2. Several of the verbs above named, are also joined with adverbs,
but they then express a complete predicate sense ; e.g. Swxpdrns hy (lived) aed
gly tois véos. Kad@s, kaka@s éariy (it is well, etc.). Aervas toav &
gvdaxio: of BaBuAdévio: (diligenter versabantur in custodia), Her. 3, 152.
Mdrny civa, to be in vain. Etvast, as well as the verbs yiyveoSa: and regu-
_Kévat,is very often connected with adverbs of place and degree, of which
the corresponding adjective-forms are not in use, as dixa, xwpls, éxds, wak-
pav, réppw, éyyts, trAnaloyv, duot, GAs, maAAOVY, mdAtora, e. g.
Toiot ASnvalwy orparryyoio: éylvovto dixa ai yvauou (sententiae in diversas
partes discedebant), Her. 6, 109.

i
FE
a
3

3. When a Demonstrative, Relative, or Interrogative pronoun,
either as a subject or predicate, is connected with a substantive
by the copula efva:, or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2,
the Greek commonly, as the Latin regularly, put the pronoun
by means of attraction, in the same gender and number with

On A ee PP eR

304 SYNTAX. [§ O41,

the substantive to which it belongs. So too, when the pronoun
is in the Acc. and depends on a verb of naming, e. g.

Otrés éorw 6 &vnp.—Atbrn eon rHy? Kal apxh wdvTwy Tov Kady. —
Otro: 5) “Adnvaiol ye Si knv adbtHy Kadrovow, GAG ypadhy, Pl. Eutyphr.
prine.—Tlapa trav mpoyeyervnuévey uavddvete aitn yap aplotn d:dacKka-
Ala, X. Cy. 8.7, 24.—Tls éor: rnyh Ths aperis;—TMdvres obToLt vopor
ciciy, oD s Td TARSOS TuveASdy Kad Soxiudoay eypaye, X. C. 1. 2, 42.—’Edy tis
piros mot vyevduevos ed moeiy €9€AN, OF TOs wor Blos éorl (this is my means of
life, hic mihi est victus) 3.11, 4.

Rem. 3. Yet the Greeks not unfrequently put the pronoun in the Neut.
Sing., e. g."Eor: 8¢ rodTo Tvpavvis, Pl. Rp. 344, a, where in Lat. it would
be, Est autem haec tyrannis. Tottdé éorw } Sixatocvyy, ib.432,b. Totro
mnyh Kat &pxh xwhoews, Phacdr. 245,c. The Neut. Pl. is sometimes used
instead of the Neut. Sing. “Eywye onul radra wey pAvaplas elvat, X. An.
1. 3,18. See § 241, Rem.3. The neuter pronoun denotes the nature of an object ;
on the contrary, the pronoun that agrees with a noun. denotes the quality of the
object. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be
interchanged, e. g. Tl éort @Xdvos; quid est invidia? (what is its nature?)
and ris €or: PSdvos; quae est invidia? (what is envy?) The neuter demon-
strative is also always used, when it is more fully explained by a word in appo-
sition, e.g. Ob TOdT Fv evdamorla, ws Foe, Kakod &TaAAaYyN, Pl. Gorg. 478, c.

§241. Exceptions to the general rules of Agreement.

1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not ‘agree
with the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Constructio
kata ovveowv). Hence, after a collective noun in the Singular,
when it is used of persons, as well as after the names of cities
and countries, used for the zzhabitants, and also with abstracts
which stand for concretes, the Plural is used, and such a gender
as belongs to the persons denoted by these words.

Her. 9, 23. ro TARSOs CwmeBoqSnoav. Th. 4, 32. 6 tAdos orpards
&méBaivov. 5, 60. roaotpardmedov &vexmpovy. 2, 21. mavtl tpdmw
aynpésioto 7) wéAts Kat Toy Tlepucdda ev dpyn efxov. With attributive adjec-
tives, this construction is rare and only poetic, e. g. Il. x, 84. pire réxvov (Hec-
tor); but it is very common in prose with a Part. which stands in a remoter
attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. éml thy wéAty émémdeov ev TOAAR TapaxH
Ka odBw dvTas. X. Cy. 7.8, 8. & ayaS} nal miorh Puxh, otxn 5) &mwoAt-
wav has. X. H.1. 4,13. 6 ee rod &oreos SXAOS HSpolodn Mpds Tas vais,
SavudCovres xa idetv BovAdmevor Toy “AAKiBiddny. It is very frequent
with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. gedye és Képkupay as abt @y (sc. Kepxupat-
wy) evepyérns. 4,15. és thy Srdpryy ds hyyéady Td yeyernuéva ep) TbAop,
Botley abtots (sc. rots Srapridras). X. Cy. 3.3, 14. ovykaréoas way 7d oT pa-
TiwTixdy rete mpds adtrovs todde. Also with the relative pronoun; see on
adjective-sentences, § 332, 5.

$241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 305

Remark 1. When the subject is expressed by the Neut. article 76 or rd in
connection with a substantive in the Gen. PI., the predicate is commonly in the
Pl., being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par-
ticiple takes the gender of the attributive genitive. S.Ph.497.71& ray d:and-
vev tov olkad hmetyov ordadoy (Hmrevyov which has the Neut. Pl. rd for its
subject would regularly have been in the Sing. according to No. 4, but is con-
formed to the plurality in d:axdywv). Pl. Rp. 8. 563, c. 7d tav Snplwy
éAcusepadrepd eorw (the Sing. éorly is used on account of the Neut. PL
éArcudepdrepa, according to No. 4, while éAevSepdérepa is conformed to the idea
of Snpla contained in Snplwr).

Rem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following:
When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. Pl.
_ expresses periphrastically a substantive idea, as yx} Teipectao, the Participle
which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case
with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen.,
which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. A, 90. jASe 3 emt
® vxh OnBalov Te:peciao xptccoy oximtpov Exwy, the shade of the Theban
eiresias came, having a golden sceptre (here €xwy agrees in number with wuyxy,
but in gender with Te:peoiao). Il. B, 459, dpviSwy werenvay %Svea MoAAd,
| « &Sa kal Sa worayTa ayarkAduevat wreptyecorv.

_ 2. When the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi-
nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is
_ put in the Neut. Sing. without reference to the gender and
_ number of the subject.

(The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the
pronoun ti, or the substantives xpjma, tpayyua, are connected with the
adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the

| article the). |
| IL B, 204. odk &yaSdy morvKotpavin (a multiplicity of rulers 1s not a gooa

thing): eis kolpavos torw. Eur. 0.760. dervdyv of moAAol, Kaxovpyous Stay

_ &xwotmpoordras. Id. M. 329. wAhy yap réxvwv Fuovye PiATatov wédcs. Id. H.

¥F.1295. af weraBodral Aurnpdy. Her. 3, 82.4 wouvapxtn npdrioroy (a

_ monarchy is the best thing, or most desirable). Pl. Rp. 2. 364, a. kardy uy

| cadpoctvy te nal Bixatoctyn, xarerdy pévro Ka erlrovor. Also
_ in abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 108. 4 Adacva, édv ioxupé-
_Tatov kal Spactvraroy, drat ev r@ Blw tikrea ev. Pl. Rp. 4, 420, c. of
(—bGSarpol, eddrAAtorTov By, ode dorpelw evadrnAmpévr eioly. Her. 3, 53.
_ tupavvls xpijua oparepdv. Pl. Th. 122, b. cupBovdAh iepdy xphua. Dem.
_ Ol. 1. 21, 12. Gras uty Adyos, by ar@ Ta mpdypara, wdrardy Te palvera Ka
Kevdr.

3. When the subject is an Inf. or an entire sentence, the
_ Greeks usually put the predicative adjective in the Neut. Pl
instead of the Sing., where the English uses the pronoun 7%,
e.g. it ts pleasant to see the sun. This occurs most frequently
with verbal adjectives in -rés and -réos; with those in -réos
and many in -rés, the Inf. is implied in the word itself. e. g.
,. 26*

306 SYNTAX, | [§ 241.

Gpovréa éoti tur, some one is to be helped; mora éori tots didots,
Sriends are to be trusted.

Her. 1, 91. rhy wempwpuévny potpay &dbvar d& eer (it is impossible) &mopvyéew
kal Seg. 3, 83. SHAQ, Gri Se? Eva ye Tiva Huéwy Baciréa yevéeoSa. Th. 1, 86.
ois ob mapadoréa tots "Adnvatas éorly, od nal Adyos StakpiTéa, GAAS
Timwpyntéa év taxe. 4,1. Gd0vaTa hy ev TE wapdytt Tors Aoxpods dmd-
veoval.

Rem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the Pl. radra, rdde
(sometimes also éxeiva), to express an idea in its whole extent or in the most
general manner, the plural bringing before the mind all the particulars involved
in the idea. Th. 6, 77. ob« “Iwves Td Se cioly, obd “EAAnsTdvTioL, GAAL Awptis,
it (this) is not Ionians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. odk for: radta apxh (this is
not an office). Id. Leg. p. 50. radr’ gor 6 mpoddrys, this is the traitor. Pl.
Phaedon. 62, d. 6 avénros tivSpwros Tax’ by oindein TadTa|, peveTéoy elvan amd
tov deorérov. In the English these plurals are generally translated by the
singular, as this, that.

4, The subject in the Neut- Pl. is connected with a verb in
the Sing., inasmuch as a plurality of objects in the neuter, was
regarded by the Greeks as one connected whole, the individual-
ity being lost sight of.

Ta (Ga rpéxeu—Ta tpdypard eore wadd. X. Ven. 12,11. ov mH
work c@Cetat kal GmdAAUTAL TH Oiketa Exdorov. Eur. M. 618. xacod yap
dvdpds 5p bvnow odk x et.

Rem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with
a participle in the singular, e.g. Sé6éav tadra, quum haec visa, decreta essent.
X. An. 41,13. 5éfav 8 rata, exhputay oftw moreiv, when these things had
been agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3. 2,19. Ségavra 3 Tad-
Ta Kal TepavarevTa, TA ev oOTpaTeduaTa amiASEy.

Rem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most
of them may be referred to the following cases: —

(a) When the subject in the Neut. Pl. denotes persons or living creatures,
the verb is very often put in the Pl. in accordance with the Constructio
kata gtveoiv. Th. 4, 88. 7a 7 éAn (the magistrates) Trav Aaxedimoviwy
éudcavtTa Bpaciday éférmeu Wav. 7, 57. rorodde peta “Adnvaloy
tun é€orpdrevor. Pl. Lach. 180,¢e. 7a wetpdnia Siareydopevor
emimeuynvTtat Swxparovs Kal opddpa éwmatvovaty.

(b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be represented individe-
ally rather than collectively, or when the idea of plurality composed of
several parts (which may also have relation to different times and places)
is to be made prominent,' e. g. X. An.1.7, 17. radtn Ti tuépa odk euaxeé-
gato Bactrels, GAN’ broxwpovvtwy pavepa hoav kal trmwy Kal dvSporwv
txvn twodrAd (many tracks here and there). Cy. 5.1, 14. 74 woxdnpa
avipadmria Tava, oipat, Tay emidumiay axpath €or, Kkwerra pwra ait t-

1 It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker’s mind, whether
the Sing. or Pl. is to be used.

—— ~~ i,
_)
‘

241.) EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 307

Gvrat, the si éort is used here because mankind is referred to as a
class, but the plural airi@yra:, to denote that each individual blames love, the
charge being made too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5,
26. &€w (praeter) robTwy mpds roy Maytuxdy kal ’Emdatpiov mércuov Kal és

duporépos Gmapthuata éyévovro, mistakes of each of the two, at
various points and times, X. An. 1. 4, 4. Hoav 8 tadra dv0 Telx7n.

(c) The non-Attic poets from Homer down, very often use the Pl. simply on
account of the metre.

Rem. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the poets,
hough rarely, with a verb in the Sing. Pind. Ol. 11. (10.) prince. weArydpves
Puvor borépwy apxal Adywy TéEAAE Tat. This construction is very limited in
prose-writers ; it occurs with 07. and jv, but only at the beginning of a sen-
tence (comp. 7 est cent usages), which then assume the character of impersonal
| expressions. Her. 1, 26. €or: cad werath ris Te maAas wéALos Kal Tod ynod Erra
Biot. Pl. Rp. 5, 462, e. Zor: kad ev tals AAus wéAcow Upxovrés Te Kal Siuos.
m like manner the Greeks regularly say éorw, of, sunt, qu. See § 331, Rem.
The construction mentioned § 242, Rem. 2, is very different from this.

_ 6. A subject in the Dual, as well as two subjects in the Sin-
ar, very often have a predicate in the Pl, e.g. Avw orpara
| d@vexopyoar. Tov airav Séovrar kai} yvvy xalé dvyp. The
| rule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of
_ the two separately, the Dual is used, but when of both together,
“the Plural, e. g. Mivas xai Avkodpyos vépous éSernv (each
| gave laws); i8o0vy co Kxai Adwy & TH TAR BaatrevoeTOov.

Rem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of,
: but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected,
@. g. wdc, xeipe, dre, or such as we conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal
relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc.
_ Rem.8. The Dual very often interchanges with the Pl., especially in par-
iples, e.g. Il. A, 621. ro) F fipO &rmeWdy ovro xitdévey oT dvTe ToT) TvOhy.
Pl. Euthyd. 273, d. éyeAacdr ny iugw BAégpavres eis GAARA.

Rem. 9. A subject in the Pl. sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when two
hjects mutually connected, or two pairs, are spoken of, e. g. Il. 5, 452, sqq. as
bre xeluappor rotapmol, kar bperdi péovTes, és miorydykeay cum BaA-
etov bBpipov bdwp, .. ds Tay mioryomevwy yéveTo iaxh Te PdBos Te (two streams
nning on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). Il. $, 185,
Iq. Edvde re kad ob Mddapye, nal Aidwy Adure te die, viv wor Thy Komdhy am o-
veTov,—Il191l. GAN epopapretroyv kal omedder ov (two pairs).

‘
‘
4
Vag
U

_ Rem. 10. The following points also are to be noted in respect to the

a0 awai:—
i.

_ (a) A substantive in the Pl. is very often connected with the Duals dda,
. do, but seldom with Svoty. Il. ¢, 10. 5éw vides. Ili, 4. &vepor
Svo0. <Aesch. Ag. 1395. Svotvy oiudypmaciv. Pl. Soph. 244, b. apos-
xpouevas Svotv dvduaciv. Pl. Rep. 614,¢. 8d0 xdopuata exome-
vw &AAHAtv;

(b) The Duals 74, roiv, réde, Toivde, rovTw, Tobrow, abtd, abtoiv, &, ofv, in
prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common
gender), €. g. dudw rd worAce — Td yuvaike — Eudw TodTw TH hucpa — toiv
yeveréow — TobTw Te TéEXxva— TobTOW Tov KWH eoW — TH 69d. The Fem.

308 SYNTAX. [§ 241.

form of the article rd, is extremely rare, e.g. Ta ¥ obv xépa, S. Ant.
769; oftener the form ratv, X. H. 6, 4.17. Pl. Tim. 79, d; so é« ratvde
® otcaiv mapdsévow, S. O. C. 445. Tatra occurs Av. Pac. 847, but
TavTacy is more frequent, e.g. TavTaty wdvaty, S.O.C. 859; & Tab-
Taty, 1149; tabraty St ratv diadheuv, Isae. 5,15. Abra, S. Ant.
570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also
in the Dual are used as of common gender; the participle but seldom.
Pl. Phaedr. 237, d. judy év Exdorw do tie éotov idé€a UpxovTe Kal
&yovte, oly éwoucda—* rovTw 6 kK. T. A.

6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the
subject by «va: or any other verb having the character of a
copula (§ 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction,
as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive.

Her. 3, 60. 7d pijkos Tod dptyyaros Ewrad oTddiol eior, 2, 15. af O7Bau
Afyumtos éxadéeto, Th. 3, 112: éordv Bbw Adghw h I5omévn Knrd.
4, 102. 7d xwplov rotro, brep mpdtepoy "Evvéa 680) éxadotvro. Isocr.
Paneg. 51, b. ort Gpxtxdtatra tay eSvay Kad peyioras duvacrelas ZxovTa
SxdIat kal Opgxes al Mépou. So also in the participial construction, e. g. Th.
5,4. karaAauBdvovor Kal Bpicwvrias, dv Epuma ev tH Acovrivn. Pl. L. 735, e.
Tovs péeyiora eEnuaprnkdtas, avidtous dt bvTas, meylatTny 5é ot}cav BAdBnyv
mwéArews, GmadAdtTew elwdey (instead of dvras). So also Her. 3, 108. 4 Adatwa,
édby ioxupétarov ca Spacitaroy, dmat ev TH Blw tikre ev, instead of
éodoa. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences
denoting comparison, e. g. Tay Koway Ti tpa Sievoobunv, Gy ovdey ab paddAov, H
Tis &AAos Ex et, Pl. Theaet. 209. a. (xe: here agreeing with vis instead of ov).
In Latin this is much more frequent.

7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly
takes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive
Gen. .

Il. $, 253. (aierod) dsY Gua ndpriords te nal Skiotos wetenvav. x,
139. kipxos, €Aadpdéraros merenvay. Her. 4, 85. 6 Mévtos medayéwy
imdvtwy wépuke Swvpaociatatos. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) vdcwy xadre-
métatos oSdévos. X.C.4.7,7.6 hAros toy mdvra xpévoy mdytwy Aaumps-
Tratos dy diapever. Pl. Tim. 29, a. 6 edopos KdAAtoros Tay YyeyovdTwr.
Plutarch. Consol. 102. c. 4 Adan xaretwtdrty mada@y. On the contrary,
Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. ovuBovaos ayadds xpnoimetaroy kal Tupavytka-
TaTov amdvtwy KkTnudTwy éort (the Superlative here taking the gender
of the partitive Gen. rrnudrwr).

Rem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the
Mase. form: may be used, referring to words denoting females; (in this and
other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles
than to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. SuveAnAvSaow ws eut KaTadeActp-
pévan GdeApal Te nad GdeAiSal Kad dveyial toca’ra, dst civar ev TH oikla Teooa-
peskaldexa Tovs éXeuvaépous (free men), X. C. 2. 7, 2. “H oreipos oboa wdoxos
ovx dvébera the TovTas %AAOUS, ovK exovo’ aith Téxva, she cannot endure

§ 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 309

that other persons (Masc.) should bring forth young, Eur. Andr. 711. So also the
tragic poets use the Masc., when a woman speaks of herself in the Pl., e. g-
S. El. 391 (Electra says of herself) recotued’, ei xph, watpl Timwpotpmevor.

Rem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. Pl., or the Pers. pronoun first Pers. Pl.
is used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing
his own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very
frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Common language.
72 ’AAKiBiddy, Kal }uets THAuModTa Byres dewol Ta ToLadTa Fyuev (1 also was at
that age sharp in these matters), X. C. 1. 2, 46. “Evvoid wo iptv eyévero (the
thought once occurred to me), Cy. 1.1, 1. Tep ev ody raév mpaxSévtwy ev TG

vTiTavr elxomev eimreiy. in te the poets, particularly the Tragedians,
this use of the Pl. is more frequent, and a transition from the Sing. to the PI.
often occurs, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. “HAwy paptrupéucoda dpao’, & dpav od
BotbAouu, Hipp. 244. aidodueda yap 7a AcAeyueva por.

7
:
,

ee

_Rem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek has several
peculiar idioms: — ;

(a) The Imp. Sing. ei é and some others, which denote an exhortation or
animating call, e. g. &ye, pépe, idé, is frequently connected in the Attic
writers with a Voc. Pl., or with several vocatives, e. g. Pl. Euthyd. 283,
b. elé wot, & Sdéxparés te kal jueis of HAAo1. Dem. Chers. 108, 74. eiré
Mot, Bovreverde.

(b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the Pl. often
refers to a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons addressed; this is
done for the purpose of making the principal person prominent. Od. 8,
310. ’Avtivo’, otrws torw treppiddroit wed bputv dalyvoda. p, 82. vija
iSdvere, paldiw "OSvoced. X. H. 4. 1, 1l. Ir, en, bpets, &
‘Hoimwmida, cal dtddoKere aitdy BovanSijvan darep jpmeis* of pty dh dvac-
taytes edldacxoy. An interchange of the Sing. and Pl. often occurs
among the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or
— of itself, the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole

orus, at another their leader, e. g. S. O. C. 167. Eetvou, ph S57" GdiKn-
86 cor moredvoas. :

(c) The second Pers. Imp. instead of the third, is sometimes connected with
the indefinite pronoun rls or m&s rss, or even with a substantive and
tis; this idiom, which is not common, otcurs mostly in the Attic dia-
logue, e. g. Ar. Av. 1186. xdper eet of xwpeltw) Seipo ras dtanpé-
rns (every servant come hither): rdéeve (instead of rotevérw) was Tis
(every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to
the second, e. g. Eur. Bacch. 327. (345.) ore:xé7w Tis ds Tdxos, CASOV
5t Sdeous rovsd’, ty’ oiwvocKome?, moxAois tpialvou KavdT peor eumarw,
kal—péSes. Comp. Larger Grammar, § 430, 2 (+7).

§ 242. Agreement when there are several subjects.

1. When there are two or more subjects connected together,
_ there is a double relation to be distinguished : —

:
’

(a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and
the predicate is referred to all the subjects equally; then
the predicate is in the Plural, and when there are but two
subjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. ¢ 241,

310 SYNTAX. [§ 242.

5); the gender of the predicative adjective is determined
according to the following rules : —

(a) With words of like gender denoting persons, the
adjective has the same gender; with words of dif-
ferent gender denoting persons, the gender of the
adjective is conformed to the masculine subject,
rather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the
feminine rather than the neuter; in both cases the
adjective and verb are plural.

(8) With words of like gender denoting things, the
adjective is either in the same gender and in the
plural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of
different gender denoting things, the adjective is in
the neuter plural.

(y) When words denoting persons and. things stand in
connection, the adjective is plural and takes the
gender of the words denoting persons, when the
persons are to be considered as the more prominent
idea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but
when both are to be viewed merely as things, the
adjective is in the neuter plural.

Kal AWS 7 8 Ka ASvula Kal SusKorAta Ka pavla woAAdKis woAdAois Sid
Thy Tod gdpaTos Kaxetlay cis Thy Sidvoiwy eumimrovaery, X. C.3. 12, 6. Swxpd-
Ter SmtAnra yevouéevw Kpitlas te kal “AAKiBiddns mAcioTa Kaka Thy
wéaw énmoinodtny, ib. 1. 2,12. HpakaAjs na Onceds pdvor tay Tpoye-
yevnuévav brtp tod Blov Tod Tay avApHTwv GSAnTal KaTéotyGay, Isocr.
Pan. 212. Kal # yuv} nal 6 dvhp &yasol ciow, Pl. Men. 73. Ai 5€ mov
Hpétepal T &AoXot Ka vawia TéKxva clar evi ueydpos TWoTLOéymevat,
Il. 8, 137. ‘Qs ele marépa te kal untépa nal AdeApovs Kal Thy EqvTod
yuvaika aixpardtous yeyervnuévous, edanpvcey, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. ‘H
py) Kah dovvecta cio Kkaxal.— Saéuaros edAAos Kat iaxds SerG kad
kane EvvotkodvtTa wmpémovTa palverat, Pl. Menex. 246,e. Ebyévetat te
kat Suvdpers cat Tipal SHAG eorw ayaa Wyta, Pl. "Hy H &yopa Kal 7d
mputavhior Mapiy Aisw 7oKnnméva, Her. 3, 57. Aldor te nal rALYSot
ka tbAa Kal Képapos ardxrws éppiupéva oddey xphotwd éorw, X. C.
3.1,7. ‘H rdxn cal SiAiwros joa tay épywy Kvpiot, Aesch. ‘H Kada-
Alotn mwod.itela Te Kal 6 KdAALOTOS GyvHp AoiTwa by Huiv ely Deddelv,
tupavyis Te kat tipayvos, Pl. Rp. 562, a.

(b) Each subject is considered separately and by itself; then
the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and

$§ 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311

agrees with it. This construction is also used, when one
of the subjects is to be represented as more prominent
than the others. There are here three positions of the
predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the
subjects; (c) after the first subject.

Pl. Lys. 207, d. pide? ce 6 marhp Kal } whrnp. Her. 5,21. efwerd ogi
kal dxjmata Kal Sepdrovres nal 7) Taga WoAAH wapackev). X. R. Ath. 1, 2.
of wévnres kal 6 Sijuos wAdoy Exe. Pl. Symp. 109, c. af rywad adrois Kal 7a
iepad Ta mapa tev avSpdrwv Apavifero. Th. 8, 63.08 év ti MiAhre nat d
*"Aartoxos...é€Sdponoe. Th. 3, 5. MeAéas Adkwy adixvetrac kab
‘Epucidvdas OnBaios. X. An. 2,2,1.@adrdtvos gxXeETO xal of civ arg,

Remark 1. Sometimes the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees
with the first subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor-
dinate, e.g. X. An. 1.10, 1. BaoirAeds 5& nad of civ aitgG Sidnwv eisain-
ret. So also with the attributive adjective, e.g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. éwra 6Bo-
Aods Kal tuoBddrAuv ’"Arrixots (the adjective here agreeing with dBodrods
rather than juoBdrwv). Th. 8, 63.’Agrdoxos értSeto Thy ZTpouBixlony
kal Tas vals &dwmeAnAvAGTA.

Rem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the
Pl. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as
making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. Pl. S. 188, b. nal mdxvas
kal xdAaCat wal épvolBar ex maAcovetias cat dxooulas wept KAANAG Tay ToL0b-
tov ylyveTtat epwrikar.

Rem. 3. When the subjects are connected by #— 4, aut— aut, rai—ral,
et—et, o} re—otre, neque—neque, the predicate agrees with the subject
standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself,
e. g. ovTos, } exeivos GANS A€vyet, aut hic, aut ille vera dicit; but when the
subjects are not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as
expressing plurality, the predicate is in the Pl, e.g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. &
Anuopay i) Onpirmliins Exover.

Rem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive
nearest to it, e. g-’Audorépos of adbrol 8pKor nal Evumaxla Karéorn, Th.
But where perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with
each substantive, e.g. mdvtes &vipes nal Tacat yuvaiKes; or the con-
structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e.g. ‘HpakAjjs nal O@noeds udvot.
Tatrhp xa uitnp Kal &GdeAHpol aixpara@ror yeyervnpévor, etc. See
examples under No. 1.

2. When several subjects of different persons have a com-
mon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the

_ first person rather than the second or third, and in the second

—_

rather than the third.

"Ey kal ob ypdpouer, ego et tu scribimus. —’Ey® kal éxeivos ypdpouer, ego et ille
scribimus. —Ey® kal od kal éxeivos ypdpouer, ego et tu et ille scribimus. — Xd kai
éxeivos ypddere, tu et ille scribitis.—’Ey& kal éxeivor ypdpouer. — Sd Kad exeivas
ypdpete. — ‘Hucis kal éxetvor ypdpouer. —‘“Tucis kal exeivos ypdpere.

Rem. 5. Sometimes also for the sake of a more forcible contrast, the person
of the verb agrees with the subject nearest to it, ¢. g. X. C. 4.4, 7. wept rod

312 SYNTAX. [§ 243.

Sixatov mdvu oluat viv %xew eiweiv, wpds & ovre ob ovr by ZAXOS OdBels Bb-
vatt dytemewv. Pl. Phaedon. 77, d. duws 5€ wor Sonets od Te Kal Siuplas
Hdéws by Kal Todtov Siampayuatevoacsa (pertractare) roby Advov. X. An. 2.1,
16.0% te yap“EAAny ef at jucts. Comp. Rem. 4.

§ 243. Remarks on certain Peculiarities in the use
of Number.

1. The Sing. has sometimes a collective sense and takes the place of the
Pl.; thus in the poets: Sdxpvov, axtls, crayav, oTdxXUS, harvest, etc.;
in prose: kdma, éodhs (like vestis), AtSos, tAlvydos, &umedos, 7H in-
mos, cavalry, &omls, a body of troops, ete.

2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are sometimes
designated in prose, by the Sing., e. g. 6 Mépons, the Persians, 6 “ApdBios,
6 Avdds, 6 ’"Acavpios, etc. This rarely occurs in respect to nations that
have a free government, e.g. roy “EAAnva ldov mposséodat, Her. 1, 69. Also
the words orpatidrns, woA¢utos and the like, are sometimes used in the Sing.
instead of the Pl.

3. The Pl. properly belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, nor
to the names of materials, nor to abstracts; still, even such nouns in certain rela-
tions take the Pl, namely, when they express the idea of a common noun :—

(1) Proper names: (a) to denote several individuals of the same name, e. g.
500 Karvaozr; (b) to denote persons that possess the nature or the qualities
of the individual named, e. g. Pl. Theaet. 169, b. of ‘HpaxAées te Kal On-
aées, men like Hercules and Theseus. ;

(2) Names of materials occur not seldom in the PI., since either the single
parts, which make up the material, or the different kinds of a given material,
are contemplated, e. g. Aes, salt; Pduador, sand; rupol na Kpidal; ave-
pos Ka $5aTa, olvor moAuTeEAcis, ofvor madratol; EvAa Kal Aldos,
etc.

(3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is
used when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea,
are denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in different

places or times; hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, ©

e.g. Herod. 7, 158. ipiv peydaa &peartat te kal emavpécers yeydvact. 3,
40. euol af cad meydda edruxlar od dpécxover. So &x Sn, inimicitiae; o7a-
aets, seditiones; @tAlat, Tarkarmwplat, aerumnae; Sdvat ot, mortes ; vixn
kal SdAwy, Svpol, animi; pdBot, Ppovhcers, reflections; awéxTerat,
&vipias, brave deeds; byterar nat ebetlat tay cwpdrov, like valetudines,
ete.; lates, testimonia; edvotas Sodvai, to show acts of kindness; xdpites,
presents; in many cases, the Pl. denotes a plurality of parts, e. g. TAodToL,
treasures, divitiae (wAodros, riches, abstract); ydaou, nuptiae; vb«res, the hours
or watches of the night, horae nocturnae; rapat, funera, etc. So, e. g.in Eng-
lish, How long these nights are ? when one night is meant.

Remark. The Greeks commonly use the Pl. of Abstracts as well as Con-
cretes, when they refer to a Pl. Adj., the idea contained in the abstract term

rym

SN ee

§ 244,] THE ARTICLE. 313

being then applicable to several persons, e. g. kaxol Tas Wuxds; Kado ra
Téuata; kpioran tras pioets; nal Tats yvdpats Kal Tots cépact
oparAdueva, X. Cy. 1. 3, 10.

4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns, and numerals are used as substantives,
the Greek, like the Latin, always employs the Pl., when several individual
things, individual relations or circumstances, a whole which is represented as
consisting of single parts, are to be understood by these words; the English often
uses the singular here, as this, that (radra, écetva). Comp. § 241,Rem.3. The
Sing. of adjectives used substantively is put in the Neut., when an abstract idea,
a whole as such, is to be expressed, e. g. 7d kaddv, the beautiful in the abstract,
7» xaxdv, the bad. The Pl. on the contrary, denotes a concrete idea, i. e. the
different parts, classes or conditions which are implied in the abstract, e. g. ra
KaAd, res pulchrae; 7% xaxd, mala, the evil deeds, things, etc.

§ 244. Tum ARTICLE.

1. The subject as well as every substantive, takes the
article, when the speaker wishes to represent an object as
a definite one, and to distinguish it from other objects of the
same kind. The substantive without the article denotes
either an indefinite individual, or it represents an abstract
idea in the most general manner, without any limitation.

“AvSpwmos: (a) a man, as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of men;
(b) man, a man, as a species; 6 ivSpwros: (a) the man, as an individual, the
man whom I have in view and consider as an individual distinguished from
other men ; (b) the man, as a class or species, as I think of him as something
definite and limited in respect to his entire nature or constitution; —ydaAa,
milk, rd ydda, the milk (as a particular substance); copta, wisdom, codta,

_ the wisdom (viewed as a definite property or particular kind of wisdom) ; ¢:rA0c0dla,

philosophy in general, 4 pdocopta, as a particular science or a particular branch of
philosophy. When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has
the article, e. g.rds ypdgerv. But the abstract noun takes the article when
it expresses a concrete idea, e. g. # otdours, the (particular) sedition; 7d
mw paypua, the (particular) deed; hence also the Pl. ai ordoets, Ta tpdy-

ara.

Remark 1. From what has been said, it follows: (a) That the substantive,
as the subject of a sentence, may stand with or without the article, according
as it is intended to be represented, either as a definite or an indefinite object;
(b) on the contrary, that the substantive, as a predicate, must be generally with-
out the article, since the predicate does not denote a definite individual, but only
the abstract idea of a quality in general. Her. 1, 103. vdé 4 quépa eyévero, the
day became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. Adyos &AnShs kat véuimos rad Sixaos Wux7s
ayadsijs kal moris efSwAdv éott. But when the predicate denotes a definite,
a before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No. 6), it of course takes the
article. Her. 1, 68. cuve8dareto Toy “Opéotny tortor elvat, he concluded that
this was the Orestes, namely, the one before-mentioned. 5,77. oi 8 immoBérat
éxadéovto of maxées, the rich bore the name of (before-mentioned) inroBérat. In

a

314 SYNTAX, [§ 244.

passages like X. Cy. 3.3, 4.6 wey radra elmay maphaarey’ 5 5tApuévios cum-
mpodreume kal of AAO: mdvTes tvSpwro1, dvaxadodyTes THY EvepyéeTHY, TOY
&vdpa roy ayaSdv. An. 6. 6, 7. of 5& AAD of wapdvTes TY oTpaTIwTay
emixeipodar Bddrcw ty Adturroy, dvaxadodytes THY Tpoddérny, the article
denotes, that the ideas expressed by benefactor, honest man, traitor, point to a
definite action either before named, or well-known. — When the predicate is a
superlative or a substantive with a superlative, the article is not used in Greek ;
the English, however, uses it here. Oi éacnAtral ciot wovnpdtator avSpdrwv
kal &dix@rar or (the most wicked, etc.), Dem. 25, 2.’Avdp) Kar@ KayadS épya-
ola kpatiorn éort yewpyia, X. Occ. 6,8. Comp. § 241, 7.

2. Hence the article is used to denote the whole compass of
the idea, everything which can be included under the term
used; one object is here considered as a representative of the
whole class.

‘O &vSpwros aIvytéds éort, man (i. e. all men) is mortal. Xph 7d aitd HSéy-
yeosar thy phropa nal rdv vduov, Aesch. Ctes.16. ‘H Gvdpela Kary
éorw, i. e. everything which is understood by the idea of dvdpela. Td ydarAa
dv éorw.

Rem. 2. Where the English uses the indefinite article a or an, denoting
merely a class, as a man, or an individual of a class who is not distinguished
from the others, as some man, it not being determined what man, the Greek
omits the article; hence &vSpw7os in both instances.

Rem. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, according to the
statement in No. 1, it would be inserted. This is the case: (a) In appellations
denoting kindred and the like, where the particular relation is obvious of itself,
or is sufficiently definite from the connection or the context, e. g. rarhp, unrnp,
vids, adeApds, maides, yoveis, avnp, husband, yurh, wife; etc. Comp. the expres-
sions, Father has said it, Mother comes ; (b) When two or more independent sub-
stantives are united, forming one whole, e. g. ratdes kal yuvaikes (like English
wife and child, horse and rider), rédus_ kad oixiae (city and houses), Th. 2, 72; (c)

hen common nouns are, at the same time, used as proper nouns; these being
definite from their nature or from usage, do not need the article, e. g. #Atos, odpay-
vos, torv, used of Athens, réA1s, of a particular city, known from the context,

ii, of a particular country, Bactkevs, of a particular king, commonly the king of

ersia, ete.; other like expressions are tiveuos, SdAagoa, etc. The article is
often omitted also with words denoting time, though this is generally the case
only in connection with prepositions, e. g. a’ juépas, méexpt vuntds, dua SpSpw,
mept nAlov Svouds, peta “IAlov GAwow. The omission of the article is altogether
natural when a common noun has an abstract signification, or expresses an
action, or the manner of an action, most frequently in connection with prepo-
sitions, €. g. fryetaSar Seovs, to believe in gods. "Em Setmvoy éAdseiv, to come to
supper, toa feast, X. C. 1.8, 6. °Eq’ trou iévat, horse-back. °Emt Shpay ekiévat
(i. e. ad venandum), X. Cy. 1.2, 9. Wérepov emorduevoy nroxeiv em Cetiyos
AaBely xpetrroy, 7} wh emiotduevoy (ad vehendum), X.C.1.1,9. °Em) tdwp iéva
(aquatum ire), Her. 3, 14. j

Rem. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, often
omit the article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as well-
known appellatives, they have come to be used as a kind of proper names, e. g.
Tldvra pev ody Zuorye Sone? TH Kara Kal Td Gyada GonnTa elval, ovx HKioTa dé
cwppociyvyn. X.C. 1. 2, 23.’Emel oby Td Te Sleaia kal Ta HAAG Kadd TE Kar
byada wdvta dpeth mpdrrerat, SjAov elvat, tinal Stxkarogdvyn Kath BAAN aca
aperh cota éorl, 3.9,5. "Emiorhmn &pa copla éorly, 4.6,7. Mddora yap

SS

§ 244,] THE ARTICLE. 315

eueunatne abr@ trmixijs, Cy. 8. 3,25. The omission of the article is natural
also, when an abstract is to be represented actively, e.g.’Ev piAocopla (eow,
in philosophizing (in philosophando), P|. Phaed. 68,¢c. But where a particular
art or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used, e. g.
} pnropuch, apSunrixnh. The substantives péyeSos, TARXOS, Bos, €b-
pos, Bddos, yévos and the like, are very often foand in the Acc. or Dat.
without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression,
€. g. worauds Kidvos bvoma, edpos d00 TAESpwr, two plethra wide, X. An. 1.
2, 23.

3. The article is very often used with common nouns to
denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is
due to it.

X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. "Evoul(e ydp, ef Exacros Td wépos atiémawoy morhoee, Td Srov
abt@ Karas Exeww ( partem, cui praeest; centuriam suam). 8. 3, 3. velwas 8& robtwy
(trav oroAGy) Td wépos ExdoTw Tav Hryeudver, éxéAcvoev adrods TobTOLS KooMELV
Tovs aitay idovs (partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. adAAd, palnre tv, ea 7a
évéxupa réte AaBeiv, ds unde ei €BovActo edivaro ky Taira étawaray (the meas-
ures requisite to guard against deception). 5. 6, 34. of orpari@ra: hrelAovy a’tg
ei Afbovta &rodidpdoxovta, S11 Thy Slenv emdhooey (the due, deserved pun-
ishment).

4. Hence the article very often takes the place of the posses-
sive pronoun, when it is connected with such substantives as
naturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen-
tence. Insuchcases, the English uses the possessive pronoun.

Oi yoveis Ta Téxva orépyovow (parents love THEIR children). ‘O otparnyds
tovs orpatiaras emt robs modreulous ye (leads wis soldiers). Kipds te
Katarndhoas amd Tod dpuatos toy Sépaka évedv nab dvaBas em roy
immov Ta WarTa cis TAS XEeipas CAaBe, X. An. 1. 8, 3.

5. As the article may make one object prominent, by indi-
vidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often
used, when an object is to be represented in a distributive rela-
tion to the predicate of the sentence.

Mposarotor 3& uta Sdv 5 Kipos bmoxvetrar ddoew dy7i Sapeod tpla jyidaperd
Tod pnvds TG orpatiéry (singulis mensibus singulis militibus, three half-
Darics a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the pound), X. An. 1. 3, 21.
(comp. 5. 6, 23.) Aapembdy &xaoros olcee TOD unvds duay (each of you shall
have a Daric each month), 7.6,7.‘O 8 cuwvediades Tov Eva Youdy &i tho
apoméumenv, Ste wh mapeln WOAA, BbvaT’ by GAbTws TE Evi xpijoSar (singula panis
Srustra, to dip each morsel into the different sauces), Id. C. 3. 14, 6.

6. The article is properly and originally a demonstrative
pronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense. This

1) “Sore em ie

316 SYNTAX. [§ 244.

is particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uni-
formly has a pronominal relation. _Comp. § 247.

The simplest use of the article as a demonstrative, is as follows: An object
not before described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite
individual, does not take the article; but when it is repeated, it takes the article,
because it has been already referred to and is known, e. g. Eidov tvdpa+ 6 5&

Lake bs
a?

a&vhp wo eretev. Hence the article is also used when the speaker points to an —

object, e. g. bépe por, & wat, Td BrBAtoyw (the book = this or that book). In this
relation, the article may be used with material nouns, e. g. Ads wo Td ydAa (the
milk, which had been pointed out); and even when a part only of the material is
referred to, the article is employed, though material nouns elsewhere are always
without the article, as they contain no idea of individuality, e.g. Mivw rod
otvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or things
known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun tlle, e. g. 6 KaAds mais,
that beautiful boy; this is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. “Ore
Eépins ayelpas thy avaplSuntov orpatiay hasey em thy ‘EAAdSa (that
numberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13.

7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them-
selves denote merely individuals, do not take the article. But
they take it, when they have been already mentioned, and
are afterwards referred to (No.6); or even when they have not
been before named, if it is intended to designate them as well-
known and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations,
and also the names of countries, districts, and festivals, are
both with and without the article.

Swkpdtns py. So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name,
e.g. copds Swkparns, the wise Socrates. “Evixnoay OnBator Aakedatpo-
viovs. "ABpokdpas ov Tovr erolncev, GAN ere rove Kipoy év Kidtkla
byra, dvaotpévas ex Porvinns mapa Baoirda awhravvevy, X. An.1.4,5. Ko-
poy d¢ pmeraméumera (Aapeios) .. avaBalver oby 6 Kipos, X. An. 1.1,2. "Amd
Tov “IAtocow Aéyeru 5 Bopéas thy QpelSuiay aprdou, Pl. Phaedr. 229, b
(as well-known names). :

Rem. 5. When a noun in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows
a personal proper name, the proper name does not take the article, e. g.
Kpotoos, 6 tav Avddy BaotAeds. But yet when the article is used, e. g,
6 Kpotcos, 6 tay Avdév Bactdreds, it has a demonstrative sense, and desig-
nates the proper name as one already mentioned or known. The noun
in apposition is accompanied by the article, when it serves to distin-
guish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kind, or
when the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known, e. g.

Swxpdtns, 6 pirocopos; Swxpdtys, 6 ’AXnvaios, Socrutes, the philosopher, the

Athenian; Xewpicopos, 6 Aaxedaiudvios; on the contrary, the noun in apposi-
tion does not take the article, when it expresses nerely an adjective attribu-
tive, e.g. Her. 1, 1. ‘Hpddoros ‘AAikapvacceds, Herodotus of Halicarnassus. Th.
A, 1, @ovxvdidys "ASnvaios, Thucydides an Athenian, or of Athens. KaAedvwp
’Opxouénos, Cleanor of Orchomenus, X. An.'3. 2,4. The names of rivers‘ are

§ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 317

commonly placed as adjectives between the article and the word rorayés, e. g.
6“AXus worauds (the river Halys), Her. 1,72. 6°AxeAGos worauds, Th. 2, 102.
ém tov Sdpov woraudr, em roy TMvpauov wotapydy, X. An. 1, 4,1. én) rov Edopd-
Thy Totaudv, 11. mpds roy Apdtny woraudv, 19. Examples like the following
are more seldom: éml 1r@ woraue Kaxumdpe, Th. 7, 80. én tov mworaudy roy
"Epwedy, ib. 82. Sometimes the article is wanting: ém Ydpov morauédr (accord-
ing to the best MSS.), X. An. 1. 4, 1; él “Apmagov woraudy (according to the
best MSS.), ib. 4. 7, 18; worauds Bedwvois, 5. 3,8. The names of mountains,
islands, seas, cities, etc., are also placed between the article and the noun, when
they are of the same gender or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to
which they belong, viz. yi, &xpov, dpos, vijcos, etc., e. g. emt Thy Zoardyeay ndbuny,
Th. 4, 43; 7d Sovsov &xpov, 7 Seorpwrtis yh, 7 AjjAos vijgos; Tov SxduBpov dpovs,
Th. 2,96; rod Aluou dpous, Th. 2, 96 (é Aiuos); 7 BéABn Aluvn, Th. 1, 58. 4,
108; 4 Mévdn weds, Th. 4,130. But if the gender (or declension) is not the
same, they must be regarded as in apposition with the nouns to which they
belong, and are placed before or after them, e. g, T@ dpe: TH Tepaveig, Th. 4,70;
Thy &xpay Td Kuvds ofjua, 8.105; ris”l8ns Tod dpovs, 108; 7 AjKkusos 7d ppod-
pov, 4,113; 7d xwplov ai Evvéa d5ol, 1, 100; trHv wéAw tods Tapoots, X. An. 1.
2,26. The article is seldom omitted, e. g. amd “ABSnpav méAews, Th. 2, 97.

8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives,
they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng-
lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as the
good; or a substantive, as the speaker (=the one speaking); or
resolves the participle by he who, they who, that which (= to the
Lat. zs, gut). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the
participles.

‘O cogds, the wise (man), a wise (man), of ayaSol, of kaxol, of dindCovres (those
who judge), the judges ; of Aێyovres, the orators; 7d a&yaddv, Td Kadrdy, TA kadrd, 6
BovAduevos, quivis; 6 tuxdv, whoever happens. ‘O mrciota @PEAGY Td Kowdv
peylotwv Tay akiotra. ‘O mAcioTa WHEAHTAaS THK. MW. T. GkwvTa. ‘O mAc-
oTa MPEAHTOY T.K. M. T. GkiwAhoETAL. — ‘O dperhy Exwv mAoute? pev dyvTwy
ldwy ToAAGY, TAouTE? St Kal %AAwy BovAouévay yevérdat kal eb wey TpdTTwr exer
Tovs cuyngdnoouevous, edy Sé Tt opadH, ov omaviCee TGV Bondnadr-
twv, X. An. 7. 7,42. But when the adjectives and participles are designed to
express only a part of a whole, the article is omitted, e. g. ayaSel, good men;
pirdogopodyres, uaddytes ; Kaxd kal aioxpa erpater.

9. Participles also take the article, when definite individuals
are spoken of, in the sense of those, who; a participle with the
article is very often appended to a preceding substantive, in the
form of apposition, in order to give prominence to the attribu-
tive meaning, somewhat in the sense of ewm, eam, id dico, qui,
quae, quod, or et 1s quidem, qua.

Her. 9, 70. mpdro: ésjASov Teyefrat és Td reTxos, Kal Thy oKnvhy TOD Mapdovlov
ovr toav of Stapmrdcayvres (and these are they that robbed, etc.). X. C. 2. 6, 18,
ob udvoy of ii@ta TodTo wowdow, AAG Kad wéAeis ai TaY Te Kad@y uddLoTE
e€wimeAotmevat, nal Ta aloxpda festa mpostémevat ToAAGKIS TOAEMIKaS

27*

318 SYNTAX. [§ 245.

%xovor mpds aAAHAas. 3. 5, 4. Bowrol pév, of mpdodey ov8 ev tH EavTay TOA-
BO@vtes ’Adnvatos tvev Aacedaimoviwy Te Kal Tay &AAwy TleAoTwovynolwy aytirdr-
Tecdat, voy dretdovow avTo Kad’ éavTods éuBareiy eis Thy "Atrixhy.

10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more
seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixing
the article. In hke manner a preposition with its Case may be
made to express an adjective or substantive meaning.

"H &yw méA1s, the upper city. ‘O wetatd rémos, the intervening place. Oi évddde
tvSpwro or of evddde. ‘O viv Baoiretds. Of mddAat copol avdpes. Oi tére, the
men of that time. ‘H atpiov (sc. jucpa). “H etalpyns metdotacts. “O adel, an im-
mortal. So 7rd and 7& viv, now, i. e. at the present time; 7b mdédAau, formerly, in the
Sormer time ; 7d mplv, 7d adtixa, immediately. Oi mdvu Tay oTpatiwt dr, the best of
the soldiers. Td xdpta wixos. ‘“H &yav duéreia. ‘O duodroyoumévws SoddAos. Th.
6, 80. Thy a&kwddvws Sovdclay. So also 7d méumay and 7d wapdaray, omnino, Td
kdpta, 7) mwapamoAv used adverbially. Even: ‘H ray yepupa@y od diddAvois, the
not destroying of the bridges. ‘O xpbs rods Tlépras méAcuos. Of aep) pidrocodlay,
the philosophers. Oi év tore. ‘H év Xeppovhow tupavris.

11. The neuter article 7é, may be placed before every word
or part of speech, when the word is not considered in relation
to its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when
a preceding word is repeated, without regard to the structure
of the sentence in which it is repeated. The Greek, by prefix-
ing the article, may give even to whole phrases the form and
meaning of an adjective or substantive.

T) timtw, 7d tTimreis. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. ducts, & tvdpes “ASnvaias 7d F

buets Stay elrw, Thy wéAW Aéyw. Pl. Rp. 352, d. od wep) rod émiruxdyros (de re
levi) 6 Adyos (éoriv), AAG wep TOD ByTiva Tpdmwov xph CHv.

§ 245. Position of the Article.

1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by
intervening particles, e. g. pv, 5é, yé, ré, yap, 57; by the indefinite
pronoun ris (in Herodotus very often), and by atrds éavrod.

Toy pev bvdpa, Thy 5& yuvaika. When a preposition stands before the article,
the prose-writers say either: mpbs 5¢ rdv &vdpa, or mpds Toy &vdpa 5, but not mpds
roy 8¢ tvdpa.— Tay Tis Mepoéwy, Her. 1, 85. Tots adrds abrod mhuaor Bapdverat,
Aeschyl. Ag. 845.

2. When several substantives are connected by «ai or r?—
kai, there are two Cases: (1) the article is repeated with each;
then the separate ideas expressed by the substantives are con-

§ 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 319

sidered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast;
or (2) the article is mot repeated; then the separate ideas are
considered as forming one single conception.

Swepdrns mdvta tyyetro Seobs cidévar, rd Te Aeydueva Kal mpartéueva Kad Td
avyp BovAevdueva (the first two members form a whole, but the last is contrasted
with them), X. C.1.1,19. Af Jadioupyla nad éx Tod wrapaxpiya Hdoval, 2. 1, 20.
Al émiméAciat Tv KadGv Te Kayaday Epywr, ib. Td Te cuupepovta Kad Kexapic-
péva, 2. 2,5. Of orparnyol Kal Aoxayol, An. 7. 3, 21. Td meyadomperds te kal
éXeudépioy kal 7d Tamwewdy Te Kal averdcdSepoy (here the first two and also the
last two form one single conception), X. C.3.10,5. Tods &ypobs Tobs éavTod Kat
oixlas, Th. 2,13. Of watdés re kat yuvaixes (so many MSS.), Pl. Rp. 557, c.

3. When a substantive having the article has attributive
expletives joined with it, viz.,an adjective, participle, adjec-
tive pronoun or numeral, a substantive in the Gen., an adverb
or preposition with its Case (§ 244, 10), then the article has a
different position according to the idea to be expressed, as will
be seen from the two following cases : —

(a) The attributive is joined with its substantive to express
a single idea, as the wise man =the sage, and is designed to
contrast the object denoted by its stibstantive with other objects
of the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either
between the article and the substantive, or after the substantive
with the article repeated ; or the substantive stands first without
the article, and the.attributive follows! with the article.

O ayaSds avhp or 6 avhp 6 &yadds or avhp 6 aryasds (in contrast with the bad
man). See Rem.1. Of wAoveio: woAtrat or of woAtrat of tA boro: (in contrast with
poor citizens). ‘O éuds rarhp or 6 rarhp 6 éuds. Oi pets Kvdpes or of &vdpes of Tpets.
‘O rév’ASnvaley dijpos or 6 Siyuos 6 Tay "ASnvalwy (the Athenians in contrast with
another people). Of viv &vSpwror or of KvSpwro oi viv. ‘O mpbs rods Mépoas
méAcuos or 6 rédcuos 6 mpds rods Mépoas (literally the against the Persians war, i. ¢.
the war against the Persians, in contrast with other wars). *Amd Saddoons THs
‘Idveor. Tupavvis % év Xeppovhaw. ‘H év Sadrauin mpds roy Mépony vavyaxia, the in

1 Where the attributive expletive consists of several words, or where the
expletive is itself qualified by another expletive, it is usually placed after its
substantive, otherwise too long a phrase would intervene between the article
and its substantive; such expletives involved the idea of some such phrase as, I
mean, etc., e.g. niAloSnoay ev Tais kouas Tats brtp tov wedlov TOD mapa Toy
Kevtplrny wotaudy (they encamped in the villages [I mean] those above, etc.). Here
Képas is qualitied by jrép wediov, and this by rapa Keytpirny, etc., X. An. 4.3, 1.
Tpiros paotds Aomds Fv, ...d datp ris em TE Tupl Katadnpdelons pvdaxijs THS
vuxtds md Tay SeAdvtwy, here 5 ixép and what follows qualifies the word pas-
tds, X. An. 4. 2, 14.

CoD See oe oe eee. See eee
;

320 SYNTAX. | [§ 246.

Salamis against the Persian sea-fight, i. e. the sea-fight in Salamis against, etc. These
last examples show that a substantive with its Case has an adjective force.

Remark 1. In the first position (6 &yaSds avhp), the emphasis is on the
attributive, e. g. Ac? madelas Kowwyeiy To SHAV yévos july TH TOV appéevarv
(yéver), Pl. L. 805, d. But in the second position (6 avhp 6 ayaddés), the idea
expressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already
mentioned, or is contrasted with that of another substantive ; in the third posi-
tion (avnp 6 ayadds), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in-
definite, but in contrast with another. Ti diapdpe: SvSpwmros axpatns Inplov
Tod &kpateotadTtov, X.C.4.5, 11. ‘H dperh civert wey Seots, cbverr 5é
&vdIpemors tots &yavots, 2.1,32. Thipicrov od rods vépovs early iaxt-
ew, GAN’ &vdpa Toy peta ppovjoews BacgtdrKdy, Pl. P. 294, a. Atomodyta af
pev trupavvides Kal dAtyapxlat Tos Tpdmors Tay EperTHKdTwy, ai dt
mérXexrs (republics) ai Snuokpatobmevar tos vdmots Tots KElmMéevols,
Aeschin. 3,6. Td immixdy 7d éxelvwy (sc, Tay SxvSav) oftw wdxeta, Td
dt 6wAiTiKdy Té ye TOY ‘EAAHVOY, os eyw Aéyw, Pl. Lach. 191, b. *Eyo
bev ovv éxeivous Tovs &vdpas pnyd od udvoyv Tay TwUdTwY TOY HueTepwy
matépas eivat, GAAG Kal Tis €Aevdeplas TIS Te NueTEepas Kal~vuTdvtwy,
Tay év THde TH Hmelpw, Pl. Menex. 240, e. Aretépyovra: tds Te TUMMOpas TAS
ék Tov TOAEMOV TOD Tpds GAAHAOUS july yeyevnuévas Kal Tas wPe-
Aclas Tas ek THs oTpatelas THs em Exetvov écopuévas, Isocr. Paneg.
43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e.g. Tas meyd-
Aas Hdevas kal TA Gyada TA weydAa 7H TeSw Kal H Kaptepia Kal of év
TG xaipg wovor kad Klydvvot wapéxovra (great pleasures and advantages), X. Cy. 3.
8, 8. Tlés wore ) &kpatos Sixatoctyn mpds &dixlavy Thy &KpaTtov
xe; Pl. Rp. 555, a. Then the second position does not differ from the first.

Rem. 2. With a verbal substantive, the attributive expressed by a preposi-
tion and its Case, is often placed after its substantive without the repetition of
the article. So also, when an attributive explanation comes between the article
and the substantive: ‘H ovyxouidh) éx Tay aypa@y és Td dorv, Th. 2,52. “H voy
buetépa dpyh és MitvaAnvalous, 3,44. Tis Tay yuvanady pirAlas mpds Tods tvdpas,
X. Hier. 3,4. Also the more definite expletives of an Inf., Part. or adjective,
frequently are not placed between the article and these words: Thy coglayv
Tovs apyupiov TG BovdAomévw mwAovvtas dopiotas aroxadovow, X. C. 1. 6, 13
(instead of robs thy coplay . . . rwAovvTas, in order to make prominent the idea
in thy codiar).

(b) The attributive is joined with its substantive not to
express a single idea, but is to be regarded as the predicate of
an abridged subordinate clause; then the attributive is not con-
trasted with another object of the same kind, but with itself; it
being designed to show that the object to which the attributive
belongs, is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by
itself, without reference to another. In this case the adjective
without the article is placed either after the article and the
substantive, or before the article and substantive.

‘O avinp Gyasds or &yadbs 6 avhp, a good man (= &yaSds ay, the man who
is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good). Oi tvSpwro picodor thy &vdpa Ka-
xédv or kakdy Tov &vdpa, they hate the bad man, i. e. they hate the man, inasmuch

as, because, if he is bad. (On the contrary, roy kaxby avopa or Thy &vdpa roy
raxdév, the bad man, in distinction from the good; hence, robs pey &yaSovs av-

§ 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. $21

Spdrous dyarauer, rods 58 Kaxobs pmicoduer.) ‘O Bacireds Hdéws xaplCera rots
morlras &yaots, good citizens, i. e. if or because they are good (on the contrary,
Tots &yadois roAlras or Tois woAltaus Trois a&yaSots, good citizens, in distinction
from bad citizens). ‘O Seds rhy Wuxhy.npatlorny TE avdpémy evépucer (a
soul, as it is the most excellent), X. C.1.4,13. Of bmd rot fAlov Karadraumduevor
Ta xpépara meAdyrepa txovow (a blacker skin; the blackness of the skin is
the consequence of the caraAdureadau bd Tod HAiov), 4.7, 7. "Evémpnody re ras
oxnvas épnmods Kal Ta xphuata dihpracay (quia deserta erant), Th. 1,49. "Aa
(postulo) rods Sepdrovras euol wiv EPSova Ta emirhdeia wapackevd lew, adrods 5é
pndevds rovrwy drrecda: (= Sste abra tSova elva), X. C. 2.1, 9.

Rem. 3. If a substantive having the article has a Gen. or a preposition and
its Case connected with it, the position under (a) occurs, only when the sub-
stantive with its Gen., etc. forms a contrast with another object of the same kind,
e. g. 6 trav “ASnvalwy Sjuos or 6 djuos 6 Tay ’ASynvalwy (the Athenians in contrast
with another people); the emphasis here is on the Gen., e. g. Od« GAAOTpLov jyyetTat
elvat b°ASnvalwyv Simos Thy OnBalwy Siuoy, avaumvionera dé Kal Tas
tTav rpoyévwy TH éavTod eis TOUS OnBalouvs Tpoydvous evepyectas,
Dem. (Psephism.) 18, 186. “ESavardé3y imd trav ev TH Swdpty TEAGY, X.
An. 2. 6,4. On the contrary, the Gen. without the article, is placed either before
or after the other substantive, when that substantive denotes only a part of that
expressed in the genitive ; the emphasis is then on the governing substantive,
e. g. 6 dijuos ‘ASnvalwy, or “ASnvaiwy 6 dios, the people and not the nobles.
Hence, with this position, a partitive and not an attributive genitive is used;
the Athenian people is not here considered in contrast with another people, but
a part of the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz.,
the nobles. Compare further, 7 Swxpdrous pirocodla or 7 piAocopla f Zwkpdrovs,
i. e. the philosophy of Socrates, the Socratic philosophy, in contrast with the
philosophy of another, e. g. Plato’s, the Platonic, with 4 piAcecodla Swkpdrovs or
Swxpdrovs ) pirocodia, i. e. the PHILOSOPHY of Socrates and not something
else of his, e. g. his life. “Oswep oixlas ra ndtwSev (domus infimas partes)
ioxupérara elvat dei, ofrw nal Tv mpdiewy Tas apxas kal Tas broséE-
gets GAndeis Kal dixalas elvar mposheer, Dem. 2.10. Totroy eb SpeWe nal eral-
devoev, Gs Sone? ASnvalwy TO TAAAE!, to the multitude, not to the intelligent,
Pl. Menon. 90,b. Td efdos rod waidés (contrasted with rotvoua rod ma-
56s), Pl. Lysid. 204, e.

Rem. 4. When the genitive of the substantive pronouns is used instead of -
the possessives, the reflexives €uavtod, ceavrod, etc. are placed according to (a),
e. g. Toy éuavtod warépa or Toy matépa Toy éuavTod, etc.; but the simple personal
pronouns sod, cod, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the sub-
stantive with the article, e. g. 6 wathp pov or pot 6 marhp, 6 mathp cov or cov 6
mwathp, 6 marhp abtov (aitis) or abtod (abrijs) 6 marhp, my, thy, his (ejus) father,
56 raThp hav, buav, vov, adbTady, or jay, buav, vv, airrav 6 marhp, our, your,
their (eorum) father. But when the substantive has another attributive joined
with it, these pronouns can stand between the substantive and that attributive,
e. g. ‘H mdda jay pots. In the Sing. and Dual, the enclitic forms are always
used; these never stand at the beginning of a sentence; but in connected dis-
course they can stand before the substantive which has the article. The Gen.
of demonstrative and also of reciprocal pronouns, have the position of (a), e. g.
6 tovrou (éxelvov) mattp or 5 marhp 6 Tovrou (exelvov). TH &dAAhAwy edvola. The
demonstratives are sometimes also found without the article after the substan-
tive with the article, e. g. Of dvayxato: éxelvov, Isae. 9.10. Ta iepa exelvou, ib.
36. Tod rarpds tobrwy, 10,3. TH viv tBpe tobrov, Dem. 4, 3.

Rem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest
with the adjectives éxpos, wéaos, €oxaTos. When the position mentioned

322 SYNTAX. [§ 245.

under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with
other objects of the same kind, e.g. 7 wéon wéAus or WéALs } méon, the MIDDLE city,
in contrast with other cities; } érxdtn vijoos, the MOST REMOTE ?sland, in contrast
with other islands. ’Es 7d éoxarov puma THs vhoov (in contrast with other épv-
pact), Th. 4, 35. When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b)
occurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, the attributive then only defin-
ing it more fully. In this last case, we usually translate these adjectives into
English by substantives, and the substantives with which they agree as though
they were in the genitive, e. g. ém) 7@ dpe: ixpw or em’ &xpw TPE Sper, on the top
of the mountain (properly on the mountain where it is the highest); év wéon 77
mére (seldom éy 77 wéAc péon), in the middle of the city; ev éoxdtn TH vow
or ev vhow th éoxdrn, on the border of the island. "Ev péoots tots woAeulos
améSave, X. H. 5, 4, 33. Kar& ueooy roy xbndov, Cy. 2. 2,3. Of Mépoa sept
tixpaus Tats xepot xeupldas dacelas Exovew, 8. 8, 17.

Rem. 6. In like manner, the word xdvos has the position mentioned under
(a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive, e. g.
6 pdvos wats, the ONLY son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b),
when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g.‘O mais udvos or
pdvos 6 mais walfe, the boy plays alone (without company). Mévnv rey avSpaérwv
(yA@rrav) érolncay (of Seot) olay apSpody Thy pwr, i. e. 7 TY aVdp. YA@TTa
udvn eorly, hy éwolnoay olay x. T. A., they made the human tongue only, capable of
articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12.

Rem. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which
limits the other (§ 264, 2), one position may be as an English, e. g. Oi &AAo aya-
Sol &vSpwror, the other good men ; or the limiting attributive with the article either
stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the
limited attributive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol-
lows with the article and substantive. ‘O vavtiubs 6 r@v BapBdpwy oTpa-
tés. AitAAa ai kata 7d coma Hdorval, the other bodily pleasures, Pl. Rp.
565,d. °Ev tois &AAos rots éuots xwplors, Lys. 281. (When 6 &ddos is
joined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repeated,
@. g. TaAAa Ta woAiTiKd, X. Hicr. 9,5. Of BAA of maparuyxdvovres, X. Apol.
ll.) ‘H obx fxiota BAdWaca 7 AotudSys véoos, Th. 1, 23. °Ev tH Tod
Ads tH peylotn EoptH, Th. 1,126. “Es abroy tov éml 7G orduari Tod Apévos
Tov Erepoy tipyor, 8, 90. "Ev TH apxaig TH HhueTtépa pwrvh, Pl. Cratyl.
398, b. Td é& Apxadia rd Tod Ads iepdv, Rp. 565, d. The limiting
attributive can also stand between the substantive and the limited attributive ;
in this case the article is used before each of the three parts,e.g.7rad relxn
Te éavTav THR wakpd ameréAcoay, Th. 1,108. (But the article is omitted with
a limiting demonstrative standing between the substantive and the limited
attributive, e. g. Thy robrov ravrnrt Thy Savpacrhy Kepadnyv, Pl. Symp. 213, e.)
Finally, if the limiting attributive with the article is placed first, the limited
substantive and its attributive follow, both without the article, e. g. Mpds Tas
mdpose cuudopas evdatuovas, Eur. Hel. 476. Tdaras eyo rijs ev paxt
EvpBodrAjs Bapelas, Ar. Acharn. 1210. *Amd trav évy tH Evpdérn wérAc wv
‘EAA nvldwy, X. H.4.38,15. Tas bxd 7H Opdnn olxotdoas wéAets “EAA nYI-
das, 4. 8, 26.

Rem. 8. When an attributive participle has a more definite expletive belong-
ing to it, their relative position is as follows :—

(a) ‘O mpds tov méAcuoy aipedels otpatTnyds.

(b) ‘0 orpatnyds 6 mpds roy wérAcuoy aipedels.

When there are two of these more definite expletives, one stands either
after the substantive or after the participle, e. g. Thy mpbs E¥BovAor yevouévny
miotw tmtv, Aeschin. 3, 25. Tay nad tuas wempaypevwy Kadav TH TWOAEL,
Dem. 18, 95. Tis viv trapxotons abt @ Suvduews, 4,4. Tas map’ dudy drap-
xotoas aiTG Tiysds, 20, 83. '

§ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323
(c)‘O aipeSels mpds toy mérAcuoy orparnyss. Thy irdpxoveay
mode Sivaucv, Dem. 8, 10. 0

(d) ‘O aipedels orparnyds mpds roy médcuoy. Thy mpesotcay adok-
lav t@ mpdyuart, Dem. 6, 8.

(e)‘O mpds roy mércuov orparnyds aipedets (this position is most fre-
quent, when the participle has two more definite expletives). Tas id
tovTov BAaconulas elpnuévas, 18, 126. Ai mpd rod orduaros vies
vavpaxotoat, Th. 7,23. Td xpds AiBinv pépos rerpaupévory, 58,
When there are two or more explanatory words belonging te the partici-
ple, they are either placed between the article and the substantive, e. g.
Thy réte OnBalos pdounv xa Sdtav bwdpxoveay, Dem. 18, 98; or
they are so separated, that one is placed either before the participle or
after it, e. g. Of mapa rovrou Adyo: rétTe pndévres, Dem. 18, 35.
Tabryy Thy amd rod rérov dogpdrciav bwapxovoay TH WéAEL, 19, 84,

Rem. 9. When a participle used ‘substantively has predicative expletives
_ with it, these are placed between the article and the participle. Thus,
or example, mpdtepos, mperos, forepos, totares (he came first, etc.), becomes:
6 mpdétepos (mpartos, tarepos, tataros) &pixduevos (he who came
); Gxwv auaprdvee becomes: 6 &xkwy auaprdvwy; dvdpeios voulCera: 6
vipetos voul(dmevos; adrds dduqei: 6 abtds &dixa@yv (one doing wrong of
his own accord); towtrdés éorw: 6 terottos wv; pévos early: 6 wdvos Gy.
When the predicative expletive consists of an adjective and substantive, the
substantive is usually placed directly after the participle, e.g. xpétos tTeTay-
pévos tatlapxes (he whe had been placed as the first centurion).

$ 246. Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numer-
als, with and without @ Substantive.

1. The article is sometimes used with personal substantive
pronouns in the Acc., either when the personalty is to be made
prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre-
quent, when a person previously mentioned is referred to. On
6 motos, see § 344, Rem. 3.

Toy éaurdy dh Adywr udda ceuvads Kad eyKxmpid(wy (his important person), Pl.
Phaedr. 258, a, Acipo 54, 7 F bs, ed3d Huadyv. Tot, fpnv eyd, Aéyeis, kal mapa
tivas Tovs bas (i.e. nad rlyes eioly cbroi, ods Aéyees Huds), Pl. Lys. 203, b.
: 2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos-
sessive pronoun belonging to it, or the Gen. of a personal or
reflexive pronoun (§ 245, Rem. 4), when the object is considered
as a definite one or as relating exclusively to possession; the
possessive is placed between the article and the substantive
{§ 245, 3 (a)].

‘O duds warhp, 6 ods Adyos, thy word (a definite or particular one), 6 éuds mais,
my son (a definite one of several, or even the only one); also 6 Adyos cov; Toy
ceavTod tarépa or Toy matépa Tov ceavTod ; on the contrary, the article is omitted

when it is to be denoted, that the object named belongs to the possessor in
common with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses-

Ul ”!hChCC hh t—“‘i‘S

oN eS cee
, CoS pee pi

324 SYNTAX. [§ 246.

sive is a predicate or in apposition: euds &deApds or adeAdds pou, a brother of
mine (it not being determined which); éuds wats or mais wov; oStds éori(v)
adeAHds ods OF BeAGSs gov; ObTOS, GdEAPds euds or GdeAdds fov.

3. A substantive to which one of the demonstrative pronouns
otros, O06, é€xetvos, and even airos, wse, is joined, regularly
has the article. As these pronouns are not considered as at-
tributives, but either as substantives (He, the mam), or are taken
in a predicative sense (the man, who is here), they stand either
before the article and the substantive, which is then in apposi-
tion with the pronoun, or after the article and substantive [comp.
§ 245, 3 (b)]; thus: —

odtos 6 avhp or 6 dvhp obTos (not 6 obros ayfhp),

Hde H yvdun or 7 youn 7de (not 7 Hd yrdun),

éxeivos 5 ayhp or 6 avhp exeivos (not 6 éxetvos avnp),

abtds 6 Baoideds or 6 Bactdeds airds (but 6 abtds BastAeds [seldom (6) Baor-

Aevs 6 ards] signifies idem rex, the same king).

RemMarRK 1. The substantive does not take the article: —

(a) When the pronoun is used as the subject, and the substantive as the
predicate ({§ 244, Rem. 1), e. g. airy éorly avdpds aperh (this is the virtue of
aman), Pl. Men.71,e. Airy éorw ixavh &rodoyla, Apol. 24, b. Kiynots
airn peylorn 5) Tots “EAAnow éyévero (this was the greatest agitation), 'Th.
1, 1; hence a distinction must be made between toirw t@ SidacKdrAw
xpavrat (they have this teacher), and rodte didacKdAy xpavrai (they have this
man for a teacher). Texunpl» robr@ xpmuevos (which signifies rodrdé éort
Tekunpioyv, @ éxp7to), X. C.1. 2,49. Tadrny yvduny éxw (which signifies
aitn éotly ) yvaéun, hy exw), An. 2. 2,12. If, however, the predicative
substantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men-
tioned, it takes the article, e. g. ‘Owdre (Swxpdrns) Tt 7G Adyw Sietlor, did
Tav pddwoTa Suoroyounevwr éropevero, voul(wy rattTny THY dopdrciay
elvoat Adyou (hanc esse firmam ¢/am disputandi rationem, viz. such a mode
as had been clearly shown by previous examples), X. C. 4. 6, 15.

(b) When the substantive is a proper name, e. g. obtos, éxeivos, adros Swxpd-
Tns. Evvinuos obtoci, X. C. 4. 2, 3. Nuixnpdrov tovrov, Symp. 2, 3.
Xapuldys obroct, 2,19. Adrdy Mévwva, An. 1. 5,13; or when a common
name is used instead of a proper name, e. g: Avrovd BaoiAéws, An. 1. 7,
ll. “Em yijv thvde HASopey (with the variation ém thy viv t.), Th. 2,
74. The article occurs but seldom, and then with a demonstrative force.
Ti d9r éxetvovy Thy Oadajy Savudouey; Ar. Nub. 181. Tévie rdv
‘Ianinv peremenpdueda, Her. 5,91. Comp. 8, 27.

(c) When the idea of an object is to be expressed absolutely, the substantive
without the article is joined with the pronoun airds, Comp. § 244, 1.
Airy Seomoreia airijs Sovdeias, Pl. Parmen. 133,d. Adtis émorh-
pens ov peréxouerv, 134, b. Ovdx abtov deordrov Shrov, 8 éori Seandrns,
éxelvov SovAds eotiv, 133, d.

(d) When otros a&v%p is used to denote emotion, especially scorn or con-
tempt, instead of the pronoun oJ. Obdroc) avhp od ravoera pAvapav;
Eire wot, & Séxpares, ovx aicxtyy dvéuara Inpevwr ; (= blockhead, why dont
you cease?) Pl. Gorg. 489, b.. Ovr off &rra Aéyeis, & Swxpares, GAN BAAov
Tiva épéra. &. Otros avnp ovx broméver dpedovmevos (== you, oh man,
can you not bear to be benefited? Ib. 505, c.

’
d
°

§246.] | ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 325

(e) In passages like Obdro:, obs dpGre, BdpBapor worcuidrepor tiv toovra, X.
An, 1. 6, 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But
there are few passages like: épe AaBdv xi T@vas uty rovrovol and the
following rovsde xira@vas, X. Cy. 8. 3, 6, where the demonstrative is
used like a deictic (that which points out) adverb (here, there). The poets
very often omit the article where the prose-writers must use it.

Rem. 2. When the pronoun odros or éxeivos belongs to a substantive having
the article and an attributive, then these pronouns are often placed between the
attributive and the substantive, e. g. Ai trav MeAotovyncioy aita: vies, Th. 8.
80. ‘H orev) ait 65ds, X. An. 4. 2,6. ‘O AiBis éxetvos Aédwy, Ad. H. A.
7,48. So 6 airds otros méAeuos, Luc. de hist. conser.c.14. So also with the
ere Hod, cod, abrod, etc. (§ 245, Rem. 4); likewise with mas, dAos, e. g. 6

ryadds pou tathp; ) Tav ASnvalwy waca (bAn) wdrus.

4. A substantive with which rovotros, rotdsde, rocodtros,
TnAtKovTos, are joined, takes the article placed according to
§ 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these,
is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before
mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects
previously named.

*Ap’ ody Sivato Thy ToLodTOY kmeuTTor pidrov voullew; (i. e. talem, qualis antea
descriptus est), X. Cy. 5. 5,32. Mids dy obv 6 Torottos avip diapSelpor rovs
véous (i. e. talis vir, qualem descripsimus Socratem), C.1.2,8. Taév tocotrwy
kal TotovUTwy ayadav Spiv Kal Tots HAAots ’Adnvatos Exovres xdp (in relation
to what precedes), Dem. Cor. 327, 305. ‘Opav robs tnAtKkovTous guAdr-
TovTas udAwTa Tas yuvaikas (relating to the preceding yepag, but at the same
time designating the whole class of the yepaot), X. R. L. 1, 7. So also when
taken substantively: 6 towdros, Ta Towatvra. On the contrary, the article must
be omitted, when the object is indefinite: any one of those who are of such a
nature, or are so great, e. g. Tovovrov tivdpa ovK dy érauvolns.

5. When was, wavres, dAos belong to a substantive, the
following cases must be distinguished :—

(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered
as altogether a general one, the article is not used.

Tlas tvSpwros (seldom &vSpwros was), every man (i e. every one to whom
the predicate man belongs; wdvres tvSpwro, all men. So also 8An wédrus, a
WHOLE city, wéAts 6An, a whole city. Then was in the singular signifies each,
every. Tlas may often be translated by mere, or utter, e. g. ‘O”*Epws év mdon avap-
xla Kad dvoula (av, Pl. Rp. 575, a. TWdvra dyadd kal Kodd awepydovrat, Polit.
284, a.

(8) When the substantive to which zGs, ravres belong, is to
be considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes
the article, which is placed according to § 245,3(a). Here 7as,
mayres are emphatic.

| 28

326 SYNTAX. [§ 246.

‘H waoa yi, the WHOLE earth ; of mdvres woAtrat, all citizens without exception.
This usage is more seldom than that under (a). This construction occurs also
with dA os, but it is still rarer than with was, e. g. 7 An wéAis, wédus H 8An, the
WHOLE city. Here the singular was always has the sense of whole. MTMepaioSa:
(xpi) kowg od(ew Thy macav SineAlav, Th. 4,61. “Edotey aidrois ov rods
mapdvras udvoy amoxteivat, GAAZ Kal Tobs &wayvTas MitvAnvatous, 3,36. Td
BAov avdynn Ta Tdv TA wépy elvan, Pl. Theaet.204,a. "AvSpemorct yap Tots
waa kowdy tovtauaprdveyv, S. Ant. 1023. "Exefyws wor palvetat, dsmep Ta TOD
mposmmov popia exer mpds Td BAov tpdswmoyv, Pl. Prot. 329, e. Hence it
signifies, in all. Wéurover xiXlovs rods mavtas bmAlras, a thousand hop-
lites IN ALL. SuverAnpddyynoay vies ai wmagar déxa wdrora Kad Exardv, Th. 3, 66.

(y) When the words was, ravres, intended merely as a more
definite explanation, without any special emphasis, belong to a
word denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they
are then placed according to § 245,3(b). This is by far the
most frequent use of ras, raves. ‘The word dros also is usually
constructed in the same manner, in connection with a substan-
tive and the article.

Oi orpari@ra eldov 7b oT patémwedov away or may Td oTpat émedon
Ol otpati@tat wavres or tdyres of cTpaTL@rat Kad@s euaxécavTo. -
Aid thy wédtv BAny or 1a BAnv Thy wéAcy (simply through the whole
city, whereas 8:2 Thy 6Anv wéduw, through the WHOLE city). AaBalvovo. mdytes
eis 7) BuCdyrioy of orpaTri@trat, X. An. 7. 1, 7. Ei bmd rijs ‘EAAGBos
adons atts ex’ dpeth Savudleodat, Thy “EAAdSa weiparéoy ed Toseiv, X. C. 2.
1, 28.

6. When éxaocros, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the
article is omitted, as with was in the sense of each, every, when
the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general
one; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be
made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed
according to § 245, 3 (b). |

Kara thy Auépav Exdaorny, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or naY Exdorny Thy
hmépav, every single day, but ob« dAtya éort nad Exdortny huéparv (quotidie,
each day, every day, general) rowtra dpay te Kal axovew, X. C. 4. 2,12. “A
éxdotn naAtkla mpostéraxta moreiv, Sinynodueda, X. Cy. 1. 2,5. Tupavvody-
ta ind déxa avdpav, ods AUcavdpos Katréotnvev ev Exdaotn woAdAect, H. 3. 5, 13;
but’O re by ev TH yi Exdortn Kadrdv } ayaddy F, meuvhoovra, in every single
land, Cy. 8. 6,6. Kat jryeuav piv fv 6 Seomdrns Exdotns THs oixlas, An.
7. 4, 14.

7. When ékdrepos, each of two, aupw and duddrepos, both,
belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here

$§ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327

only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken of.
The article is here placed according to § 245, 3 (b).

"Em tdv wArAevpay éExarépwy, X. An. 3.2, 36, or émt Exarépwv ray
wAevpay. Ta Sta adugpdrepa or dupdtepa Ta Gra. “Auhoitv rotv
Xepoty or rotv xepotvy dudotvy, Kad’ Exdrepov roy éswroody, Th.
4,14. T@ or) éExarépw, X. Ven. 5, 32.

8. In respect to the pronoun ards and the indefinite pronouns
or numerals dAAos, €repos, torts, tAeiwv, tAEeioTOs, the
following points are to be observed : —

(a) ‘O airés signifies the same, idem, e. g. d abrds tvSpwros, idem homo; 7 ab-
76, the same; but 6 &vSpwmos abtds or abtds 6 4vSpwros, homo 1PsE.

(b) “AAAos = alius, another, in contrast with ipse (airés) ; 6 &AAos = reliquus,
the other ; of &%AdAo = reliqui, certeri, the rest, e. g. 4 4AAn “EAAas, reliqua Graecia,
the rest of Greece, in contrast with some part before named; of &AAo &vSpwrot,
the other men or the others, in relation to definite individuals. 7Q ‘Apiate nad of
&AAot bra Fre Kipov plao, Ariaeus and the rest. But ‘O Taods ewepdvy per’
&AAwy, Glus appeared with others, in contrast with himself ;— ¢repos = one
of two (it not being determined which), or it forms a contrast with 6 adrdés and
denotes difference or contrast; —6 Erepos = the other, i. e. the definite one of
two, e. g. } érépa xelp TH Erépa xpiita; of Erepo. in reference to two parties.

(c) The following cases of roAvs, roAAof are to be distinguished: (a)
When odds, roAdot belong to a substantive without the article, as roAds mévos,
TOAAH Trovdh, ToAds Adyos, ToAAO kvSpwro, an object is denoted as an indefi-
nite one, e.g. MoAdy txovom mévov dredcis Tis Tod bvros Séas dmépxovras
(having much toil), Pl. Phaedr. 243,b. TloAAol &vSpwror rod raAobrou dpé-
yovra: (many men, general); (8) but if the object is represented as definite, or
one previously mentioned or known, the article is used with the substantive,
and odds is then placed: (1) as an attributive between the article and the sub-
stantive, ¢. g. ToAAH orovdyh 7d dAndelas ety wediov (magnum illud, de quo
dizi, studium, that great zeal, of which I have spoken), Pl. Phaedr. 248, b. *Qyv wépi
Toy wordy Adyow enociro “Avataydpas (multum illum sermonem, e scriptis ejus
satis cognitum), 270, a. "Ev tats moAAats yevéoea: (among the many genera-
tions mentioned), Phaedon. 88, a; of moAAo) &vSpwror signifies either the
many men named or a multitude of men belonging together, in opposition to the parts
of the whole, hence also of roAAol, the many, the multitude, the populace, plebs,
or even the most, the majority (in contrast with the separate individuals), e. g.
“Oca of dAlyor Tos TOAAODS ph weloavTes, GAAX KpaTodvTes ypdpovar (what the
Jew prescribe to the many [the majority] not by persuasion but by force), X. C. 1.2, 45;
7d modu, the greater part, e. g. Tay mordculwy Td wey TOAD Euevev, wépos F ad-
Tav amhyta Tos KaT& TH &Kpa (most of the enemy remained), X. An. 4.6,24. What
is true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Superlative. "Eay
glrous } méAw wpedrciv 5én, worépw } TAElwY TXOAH Tobrwv emmedciodat,
7G as eyh viv, ) TE Gs od panaplCers Siarrwpévw (the greater leisure, considered
as a definite thing, or as a definite whole), X. C. 1. 6,9. Ei édiSov, em) robrp

228 SYNTAX. , [§ 246.

dy ed{d0v, Srws euol Sods uetov wh drodoin buivy Td mAeTOv, An. 7. 6,16. “Emer
Th aperp odCecdau eis Toy tAElw Xpdvoy maddrov, H TH Kaxig, R. L. 9, 2; of
mAelous or 7d TA €or signifies the majority in opposition to the minority (of éado-
gous), therefore a definite whole; of mA e?o7 o1, the most, rd tAEt oT Ov, the greatest
part, also to be considered as a definite whole.— Or, (2) roAvs is joined with
the substantive having the article, and is placed according to § 245, 3 (b);
mwoAvs is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. Ewe) édpa TOAAG TH
xpéa (when he saw the flesh that it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X. Cy.
1.3,6. Soler TrOAAA Ta KTopa EvsBeBykdra (sc. dpavres), Th.1,52. TModA-
Ahv thy airlay etxov (they had censure in great abundance, i. e. were very
severely censured), 6, 46.

(d) OAt you, few, e. g. dAiyor tvSpwratr; of 6Alyot, the few, i.e. either the
few mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically the
Oligarchy, considered as a whole, in opposition to of roAAol, e. g. MpéoBes
of MfAton mpds pty Td TARSOS ovK Hyaryov, év St rails dpxais nal Tots GAlyots
Aéyew exéAevoy, Th. 5, 84; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the
word oAfyos, the article is omitted, e. g. Mpododijva: thy weAw im’ dAtyor (by
oligarchs, not by the Oligarchs).

9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the
article is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is
indefinite, e. g. tpeis dvdpes 7AJov ; but the substantive takes the
article which is placed: (a) according to § 245, 3 (a), when the
substantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea
of a united whole ; hence also, when the number of objects.is to
be represented as a swm-total, after the prepositions dpi, zepi,
cis, v7ép; but the article is here used most frequently, when a
preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing with it,
and without the article, is referred to.

Oi trav Baciréwy oivoxdan diddaor Tots Tpiol BaxtTdAoLs dSxodvTes Thy
piddny (with the three fingers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. 1. 3, 8. "Hy,
bre ereAcvTa, Gugl Ta wWévtHKovTa Eryn (he had reached about the sum of
Jifty years), X. An. 2. 6, 15. ‘Immeis cis robs tretpanisxtAlous ouvedd-
yovTo avT@, kal Totéra: eis Tovs puptlous, Cy. 3. 2,3. Tots Kepxupatos tov
etxkoot ve@y ov mapovoay (referring to the preceding words of Kepxupaio:
etxogt vavoly avrovs tpeyduevot, Th. 1, 49).

(8) But the article is placed according to § 245, 3 (b), when
the numeral without any emphasis, is jomed with the definite
object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu-

meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. “Euaxéoavro
of pera Llepuxdéovs daAtrar xiAvor or xiAvor of pera IL. brAtrau, the
hoplites with Pericles, a thousand in number, fought.

§ 247.] ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. $29

Rem. 3. The article is frequently omitted with substantives which have an
ordinal number joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place
of the article. Tplrov &ros r@ wordum éredrcdra (he died the third year), Th.
2,103. Comp. 3. 25, 88.

§ 247. The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative
Pronoun.

1. The article 6 4 7é had originally the sense both of a demonstrative and
relative pronoun.

2. In the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6 7 7é has almost wholly the sense
both of a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an
object, and represents it as known or already spoken of, or brings it before the
mind of the hearer, e. g. Il. a, 12. 6 (he) yap HAS Sods em) vijas ’Axadmy. 29.
Thy (her) 8 eye od Avow. Od. x, 74. ob ydp wor Séuts or) Komseuer odd Gromdu-
mew &vdpa tov (that man), bs Ke Seoiow aréxSnta waxdpecow. Hence, in
Homer, the substantive is found in very many passages without the article,
where later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it. Comp. Il. a, 12 seq.
with Pi. Rp. 393, e. Yet there are, in Homer, evident traces of an approxima-
tion or agreement of this apparent article with the real article, which was not
fully developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in
the Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and participles,
e. g. 6 kpioros, 5 vinhoas, 6 yepads; so also, Td mply, Td mpdodev (prius) ; it is
found in connection with a substantive and an attributive adjective or adverb,
the attributive being placed between the article and substantive, e. g. Tov mpo-
Tépwy éréwy, Il. A, 691. Toy dekiby troy Y, 336. Of epde Seol {, 274. Td cdv yépas
a, 185. Td odv wévos a, 207; so it is used in case of apposition. e. g. Od. A, 298.
Kal AfSnv cldov thy Tuvdapéov mapdkotiy. Od. &, 61. &vaxres of véor; further,
“Avtuyes ai tept dippov, Il. A, 535. "Avdpav tay rére 1, 559. Yiets of AoAloo, Od. w,
497; also with the demonstrative, af xves aide r, 372; it also takes the place
of the possessive pronoun, e. g. Il. A, 142. viv wey 5) ToD wmarpds deméa TiceTe
AdBnv (of your father), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. 0, 218.
eykoopmeire Ta Tedxe, Eraipor, vnt pedalyy (the revxea belonging to the ship).

3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all
the post-Homeric writers (§ 244,6); but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun,
it was retained, in certain cases, through every period of the language; thus : —

(a) Td 3é€ (id autem, or on the contrary), very frequently at the beginning of a

sentence ; 6 wéy (is quidem), 6 dé (is autem), of 5€ (1 autem) very fre-
quently at the beginning of a sentence; pd rod (rporod), formerly;
often xa rév, thy, et eum, et eam, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g.
X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. eal tTdv KeActom Sotvar. In connection with «at, the
Greek says in the Nom.: kat ds, cad 4, «ad of (§ 334), but in the Acc. Kal
Tov, kal rv; seldom 7é ye, id quidem, 7 @, ideo, and the like.

(b) In such phrases as, roy kal rév, 7d Kad 74, this man and that man, this

thing and that thing; 7& Kai rd, varia, bona et mala.

(c) It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by 8s, aos or ofas,

which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjective, or
28*

330 SYNTAX. [§ 248.

especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato.
Pl. Phaedon. 75, b. dpéyerar tod 8 eorw toov (= rod toov bvTos), he reaches
after that which is equal. Prot. 320, d. é« yijs kal mupds pitayres kal TOY
boa tupl Kad yi Kepdvyvra. Soph. 241, e. efre uyunudrov, etre payracud-
Tov avTay } Kal wep) Texvav TOV, oat wep Tadrd, cict.

(d) In such phrases as, 6 wév—é 5¢, of pév—oi 5¢, the one—the other,
some, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. eis wey tobs bBpiCovres, Tots 5¢ SovAcvov-
tes, treating some with contempt, and being.slaves to others. Very frequently
T) wéev—Td é, ra wev—Ta SE, partly—parily, TH wév—TF 5¢,
on one side — on the other side.

4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative 6 7 7, is frequently used in
place of the relative. Il. a, 125. @AAa Ta wey moArlwy etempdSoucy, Ta dédacTaH
(quae ex urbibus praedati sumus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was
transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers also; so the Tragedians
take this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. 7& pév Ordyns eiwe, AcAExSw
kapol Tadta> Ta 8 és Td TASS dvwye pépew 7d Kpdtos, yrduns THs aplorns
juaptnxe. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part IT. § 482. 7

§ 248. CLASSES OF VERBS.

In relation to the subject, the predicate can be expressed
in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs,
which are indicated by different forms : —

(1) The subject appears as active, e. g.‘O mais ypadet,
TO av3os SadXXEL.—But the active form has a two-fold
signification : —

(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is
directed, is in the Acc., and therefore appears as pas-
sive or as receiving the action, e. g. Timtw tov traida,
ypahw THv érictoAnv, — Transitive verb.

(8) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the
subject, as To avSos SadXev, or When the verb has an
object in the Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a
preposition, e. g. "EaiSuya@ tis aperis, yalpw TH codia,
Babif{m eis tiv woduv, — Intransitive verb.

(2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined
to, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. Turrouas, I strike my-
SELF; BovAevouat, I advise mysexr, or I deliberate ; rimro-
pas tiv Keparny, I strike my own head; xatactpépopat tip
ynv, I subjugate the land for MyYse.r ; audivouar Tovs Todeui-

——————————————— ee

——

§ 249, ] CLASSES OF VERBS.— ACTIVE FORM. 331

ous, I keep off the enemy from mysetr,— Middle or Reflex-
ive verb.

Remark 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects
on each other, as Térrovrat, they strike each other ; SiaxeAebovrat, they exhort each
other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb, — Reciprocal verb.

(3) Or the subject appears as receiving the action, i. e.
the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. Oc etpati@ras
i7rd TOY TrorkELioy EdiwySnoav, were pursued,— Passive verb.

Rem. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the
Greek has only two tenses: the Fut. and Aor. All the other passive forms

are indicated by the Mid., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive
one.

REMARKS ON THE CLASSES OF VERBS.
§ 249. A. Active Form.

1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion,
besides a transitive signification, have an intransitive or reflex-
ive sense. (So in English, as he leads, the birds move, the car-
riage breaks, the snow melts, which have also a transitive sense ;
so the Lat. vertere, mutare, dechnare, etc.)

’Axépwv morauds esBdAXAEt és Thy Aluynv, Th. 1,46. ‘H BéABn Alwyn étln-
o.v és Sddaccay, 4, 103. “Evyy’s yoy of “EAAnves (comp. to draw near), X.
An. 4, 2,15. So also advdyeuy, to go back, to withdraw ; 5id-yetv, perstare, to
continue, are found in prose. —’EAadveiy or éAatvetyv tmp (X. An. 1. 8, 1),
to ride ; mposeAatvew, adequitare, to ride up to.—Many compounds of BdAdew,
e.g. €uBddrAAerv and eis BdAAety, to fall into, to empty (of a river); éxBda-

' Aety, to spring forth, to put forth (of plants, etc.) ; wet aBdrAecy (like mutare),

SiaBdAAccy, to cross over; posBdAdAety Tiwi, to make an attack upon; cvp-
BdAdAety til, manus conserere, to engage in combat with; émiBdrArery, to fall
upon; bwepBaArAecry, to exceed, to be prominent.—KaAtvery and its com-
pounds, e. g. émixAlvew, to incline to something ; &moxAlvew, declinare.—T pémety,
like vertere ; érirpéwew, se permittere, to entrust one’s self to.—Z%rpépery (like
mutare) and its compounds.—Iralecyv, to strike against, to stumble; mposwrateww,
as peydAws mposémtaay, they suffered a total shipwreck (Her. 6,95). ’Awaa-
Adrtreuy, to get off, escape.— Compounds of 5:3dvaz, as évdiddvat, to discharge
itself (of a stream); émididdvat, proficere, to increase, advance.— Compounds of
iévas, e.g. aviévan, to relax, be remiss; edrévar (sc. éavtdv) ioxupg yéAwtt (indul-
gere), Pl. Rp. 388, e. Compounds of uwloyeryv, wiyvivat, as cupployew,
commisceri ; mposuryvivat, to fight with, also appropinquare, e. g. mposéuitay TE
retxer, Th. 3,22. Atpexy, to get under way, set out (of ships, to weigh anchor),
also compounds, e. g. of BdpBapor aaijpay ex tis AfAou (to set sail), Her. 6, 99;
dvralpew (sc. xeipas) twl, to fight with, to withstand. — Xvvdarerv, manus con-

332 SYNTAX. [§ 249.

serere. —"E x ety, to land; &xew rivéds (desistere), Th. 1,112; Zxew with adverbs,
as €0, KaA@s, kaxds, like bene, male habere; txew aug 1, in aliqua re occupatum
esse ; mposéxev (sc. vodv), attendere, to give one’s attention to, or appellare, to land ;
mpoéxew, praestare; éréxetv, se sustinere, or expectare, in mente habere, e. g. émei-
xXov oTpareversat ; Karéxetv, se retinere, also to land; mapéxew, €. g. TH movorKh,
musicae se dare ; améxewv, to be distant from ; ayvréxew, resistere —T pdt 7 etv with
adverbs, e. g. ed, xaxés, or with the Acc. of adjectives, e. g. add, kaxd, to fare
well or ill. — Arat ptBerv (consumere), versari, to employ one’s self. — Compounds
of pépery, as diapépery, to be different, differre; iweppépew (eminere) trAo’TH. —
"AvarkauBarvery, refici, recreart.—Oixetv, administrari, e. g. réAts oixe? (the
state is managed), Plat. —T eA eur ay, to end, to die.—Katop&o iv, to succeed.—
Nixay, to prevail, e. g. évina 7 xelpwy Tay yvwuéwr (like vincit sententia), Her.
6,109. “EAAeime cy, officio suo deesse ; &mwodelrewy, to remain behind, etc.

2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which
form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the
second Aor. an intransitive sense :—
dvw, to wrap up, first Aor. Zvca, J wrapped up, second Aor. edov, I went in,

Yornm, to place, % éornoa, I placed, & éarnyv, I stood,
iw, to produce, ie épioa, I produced, $¢ épiv, Twas produced,
oKéddAw, to make dry, “ (rxnaa, poet. I make dry), “ éoxany, I withered.

So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which
form both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive, but in the
second an intransitive sense : —

eyelpw, to wake, first Pf. éyhyepxa, I have awakened, “8 Pf. eyptryopa, Iam awake,

5AADL, perdo, “ dAddAeka, perdidi, bAwAa, perit,

meidw, to persuade,“ mérenma, I have persuaded, “ — wéroia, I trust,

dvolyw, to open, “ dvéwxa, I have opened, “ — dvéwya, I stand open
(§ 187, 6),

mpattw,todo, | “ mémrpaxa, I have done, “ mémparya (sc. ed), I
Sare well.

Moreover some second Perfects of-transitive verbs, which do
not form a first Perf., have an intransitive sense :—

&yvim, to break, second Pf. gaya, I am broken,
pnryviun, to tear, = pparya, I am torn,
Thkw, to smelt (iron), “ — rérnna, Iam smelted,
whyviu., to fasten, “ -réxnya, I am fastened,
ohntw, to make rotten, a oéonra, I am rotten,
gaivw, to show, “ xépnva, I appear.

Remark 1. The Pass. aAfoxopat, to be taken, has an active form in the
Perf. and Aor., viz.. €¢A wna, I have been taken, dX wv, I was taken (§ 161, 1).

3. Intransitive active verbs are sometimes used in the place
of the passive. . :

§ 250.] CLASSES OF VERBS.—M 333

This is particularly the case with rdoxecv, tlrreiy, petyecy, ed, Ka-
k@s &dkovervy, Svyfonxerv, more seldom reAeuvrayv. These active verbs
with drd and the Gen. are very commonly used instead of the passive of such
verbs as Gdiceiv, plrrew or BddAcw, didnew, erelvew ; Svfoxey in certain forms
is always so used (§ 161,13). MeydAa weodvra (eversa, were destroyed by)
Tphyuata 3d joodvwy, Her. 7,18. Aewédrepov evduov elvat naxas bmd tay
mwokitav &koverv (audire, they thought it worse to be evil spoken of by the citizens),
4) Kadas drip ris téAEws Grodsvhoxew, Isocr. Paneg. 56,77. So éxalaresy irs
Tivos, expelli ab aliquo; very often pet-yew iad twos, fugari ab aliquo, to be put
to flight by some one, or in a judicial sense, accusatum esse ab aliquo, e. g. aoeBelas
getyetv bd Tivos, to be accused by some one of impiety. Et, naxas trdoxw
iad cov, I am benefited, injured by you. "EreActtnoay iw ’"ASnvalwr
(interfecti sunt), Her. 6, 92.

Rem. 2. It will be seen (§ 279, Rem. 5) that intransitive active verbs are

frequently used in poetry in a transitive sense, e. g. dorpdrrew oédras, Balvew
mdda. é

Rem. 3. The transitive active is not unfrequently used, when the subject
does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another;
yet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or from
the nature of the casg, that the subject does not itself perform the action. . X.
An. 1. 4, 10. Kipos roy wapddeivov fF €xoWe Kalra Bacidew kat éKkavo er, caused
to be cut down. So frequently amoxreivew, Sdrrew, oixodouety and similar exam-
ples ; often also diddceKew, wadevew (comp. Pl. Prot. 320, a. 324, d. Menon. 94, b).

§ 250. B. Middle Form.

1. The Mid. denotes an action, which is performed by the
subject, and is again reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two
cases are here to be distinguished : —

(a) The Mid. denotes, first and most frequently, an action
which the subject performs upon an object within its own
sphere, i. e. upon an object belonging to the subject, connected
with it, or standing in any near relation to it. In English, this
relation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro-
noun, or by the preposition ¢o or for with a personal pronoun.

Térroua, erubduny thy xeparty, I strike, I struck my own head (rémrew k., to
strike the head of another); AotcacSat Tods wédas, to wash one’s own feet (Aotew Tr.
m., to wash the feet of another); amoxptpacSa Ta éavtod, to conceal one’s own
affairs; mepipihtacsa: xirava, suam vestem, to rend one’s own garment (repippijtas,
alius, that of another); maparxéoSa: 71, to give something from one’s own means, to
Surnish of one’s self, as vais, hence also to show, e. g. ebvoray mapéxecSat (on the
contrary mopéxew tw) mpdypata, dor, etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some
one) ; — amodeltacSal T1, c. g. tpyov, yoaunv, divauiy, to show one’s own work, ete. ;
émaryyctdacSal rT, to promise; in a reciprocal relation : vefuacSal 71, aliquid inter
se partiri, to divide something with each other, so peploacSa ; — rorhoacdai 1, to do

Bee Sn eg eee ae eee ee

334 SYNTAX. | [§ 250.

or make something for one’s self, e. g. eiphynv, omovdds (aotcty, to do or accomplish),
moncacxa éAcuor, to carry on war; émipéAeay, to use care; ByeoSat yuvaina, to
take a wife for one’s self, to marry ; EAéoSat Tt, sibi_ sumere, hence to choose, prefer ;
tpacdal 71, to take up for one’s self, to lay on one’s self (axpew 1, to take up something
in order to lay it upon another); airhoacdat 1, to ask for one’s self (airciv, to ask) ;
mpdtacda: xphuata tiva, sibi ab aliquo pecuniam exigere ; picdXadoacSa, conducere, to
hire for one’s self (but woSaoat, locare, to let out); perawéuyacSa, to cause to come
to one’s self, to send for ; xarartpéjacda, katadovAdcacSa yiv, sibi subjicere ter-
ram; avaprhoassal tia, sibi devincire, to make dependent on one’s self; &morddcacSal
twa, to free for one’s self, to ransom; moploacdat 71, sib aliquid comparare (moptCew
tl tim, alii aliquid comparare), kouloacda, e.g. TAataets maidas Kal yuvatkas
éxkekonicpévot hoay és Tas AShvas, Th. 2,78; nrficacda, mapacKevdcac-
Sal ri, sibi comparare; Sé€oda: and ypdpacSa: véuovs are used of one who makes
laws for himself, or of a law-giver, who is himself, also, subject to the laws
which he has made for others; on the contrary, Seiva: and ypdwar vduoy are used
of one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of one
who gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g.”Exors
dy eimeiv, 81: of vSpwro Tods aypdpous vouovs EXevTo; "Ey wey Seods oluat
Tovs vouous TovTous Tols avSIpdmois Seivar, X. C. 4. 4,19; —edutvacSat rods wodre-
lous, propulsare a se hostes, hence to defend one’s self against any one (dpivev,
properly to ward off, then to help); tywwphoacda! 71, to revenge one’s self on some
one, to punish him (ripwpeiv rin, to help one): tpevacSa, to put to flight; amdoac-
Sat kaxd, a se propulsare mala ; dmrordupacSal twa, a se dimittere; &moceloacSal
wt, a se depellere; mapaithoacSa, deprecari; diatéoSa, aroddéc8ai, to sell; daro-
Tpépyacdat, aroBaréosat, &roxpotvcacsa. Several Deponent Middle verbs also
belong here (§ 102, 3).

(b) The Middle denotes, second, but much more seldom, an
action which the subject performs emmediately on itself, so that
the subject is at the same time, also, the object of the action.
The English here uses the active verb with the Acc. of the
reflexive pronoun, e. g. timropat, I strike myself; érvpapny, I
struck myself. Here belong particularly the following verbs: —

"Andyta twd, to strangle some one; amdytarSat, to strangle one’s self;
tivacsat, kéVacxat, to strike one’s self; nbWaoSat, to bend one’s self
down; oixkloacdat, migrare; éwmiBaréodat, to apply or devote one’s self to
something; apackevdoar&at, se parare; rdtagSat, to place one’s self in
order of battle, e. g. ofrw uty Kepxupaia érdéavro, Th.1,48; [but also to fix or
establish for one’s self according to No. (a), e. g. rd&acda pépor, to agree to pay
tribute ;| mposdéasat, se adjungere, to agree with; lo ragdas (oriva, éordvat)
and its compounds, to place one’s self [but also according to No. (a), sibi ponere,
to place for one’s self, e. g. tpdraov|; Spuloardat, kadtopulcacaxat, to land
(comp. Th. 4,15); cvukAdéoacsat, to encircle (comp. Th. 5, 72), but cuxAwdF-
vat, to form a circle or place one’s self ina circle; rpaméoSat [not tpapacda,
see No. (a)], to turn one’s self (Th. 5. 29,73); éyyufoac das, to pledge one’s self;

§ 250. ] CLASSES OF VERBS.— MIDDLE FORM. 335

mnatcagSat, to cease (from mavw, to cause to cease); SelEarSat, to show one’s
self; particularly verbs which express an action performed by the subject upon
his own body, ec. g. Aovoagdar, vivardat, drAclpardar, xploacsa,
(écarSat, yupvdoagsat, Kkarddbpacdxat, Koguhocagsat, dugpiécac-
Sat, evitoarsa, exdicacdat, Kelpardsat, droudptarsas, se abster-
gere; &wrouttarSat, se emungere; droyhioarsat, se abstergere; ore pa-
véoagdat; crelAac&at, to get ready, to fit one’s self out; also some few
verbs which in the Mid. express internal, mental action, e.g. puAdtarSat, to
be on one’s guard, to be cautious (but pvdAdrrew twd, to guard some one); ynol-
gacSat, to determine or decree by vote (but ynpl(ew, to put the vote); Bovret-
cag at, to deliberate, to advise one’s self (but BovAcdew til, to advise some one) ;
yetvoacSat, to taste (-yeverw, to cause to taste, to give a taste of); Tihwphoac-
Sas, to avenge; the reciprocals 3:axatrartoacdat mpds twa, to be reconciled
to any one; cvvd éaS az, to bind one’s self, to agree with any one; oreloagsat,
to make a treaty, peace with; &aroaxéaSat, to restrain one’s self, to ubstain
from; several compounds of tus, e.g. eplerdas, to strive; bplerSat, to
yield, be remiss ; pe SleoSas, to neglect, be remiss; avtiwoincacaal twos, to
strive for something; &vttkaBéoSat twds, to lay hold of something. Here
belong, also, most Deponent Middle verbs (§ 197, Rem. 2).

Remark 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also: (a) by middle
verbs with a Pass. Aor., e. g. diadvew, to separate, diarvdjvat, Siardoecdat, to
separate one’s self, discedere (see § 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e. g.
peraBddAcw, to change one’s self (see § 249. 1); (c) by the active form with the
Acc. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. éraweiv éaurdy, dvapray éaurédy, to attach one’s
self to, to make one’s self depend on any one; a&mwoxpiwrew éavrdy, édiCew Eavtdy,
mapéxew éautdv, dmodrvew éavtdy, to free one’s self, amoopdtrew éautdv, &roKtel-
vew éavtdy; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass.; thus, éwra:vetoSa:,
amoxtelversat, dmoopdttrecSa, laudari, interfici, jugulari ab alo, and has for its
Aor. and Fut. a Pass. form. Sometimes the active form with the reflexive
pronoun is used, even when the verb has a middle form. This mode of expres-
sion is very natural in antithesis or contrast, e. g. "ESjpevey ard imou, dade
yuuvdoat éautdyv te kal Tovs txmous, X. An. 1. 2, 7.

Rem. 2. The Mid. in the same manner as the Act. (§ 249, Rem. 3), can be
used, when the subject does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be
done by another. There is this difference, however, in the two cases, that in
the Mid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject. ‘O marhp robs
maidas éd:ddtaro (emadevoaro), which signifies either, the father educated the chil-
dren for himself, or, if it is clear from the context, he caused them to be educated
(as X. C. 1.6, 2; on the contrary, d:ddonew, radevew are used.without referrin
back to the subject, § 249, Rem. 3) ; xelpagSat, to shave one’s self, or to get skaoed
*Apycion ohéwy eixdvas moinadpmevor (having caused to be made) avéSecav és
AcAgots, Her. 1,31. TMavoavlas tpdre(ay Mepoixhy maperigero (caused to be set
before him), Th. 1, 130. Of Aakedamdvion Khpuka méuayres Tovs vexpods SreKko-
uloayvro (caused to be removed), 4, 38.

Rem. 3. The reflexive relation of the middle to the subject, is often so
slight, that in our mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and sometimes
consists only in a very gentle intimation, that the action will be completed to
the advantage or disadvantage of the subject, e. g. Il. 0, 409. ofre more Tpaes
Aavaay edivavro pddayyas pnidwevor (in suum commodum) kruotyor pryhwevat.
Hence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle, particularl
in antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflexive sense whi
exists in the middle only in a general and indefinite manner, e. g. Zevopay

336 SYNTAX. ‘[§ 251.

Bovrevera EavT@ bvoua xa Sivamw wepimorhcagsar (to gain a name and
Vets Jor himself) X. An. 5. 6,17. "Ewedeitavro tas abtav dperds, Isocr.

aneg. 58, 85. ‘“PdSuuoy abtotis Kkateathoavto toy Blov, 63, 108. Thy
EMavTov younv aropaivdmevos, Id. Permut. 309, 22.

Rem. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig-
nification ; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is
obvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any
accessary idea; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in
relation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when
the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. diomeiv of an outward
arrangement, SioKeioda: of mental; dpi¢ew literally, dpi(ecSa figuratively;
oraduay only in a literal sense, to measure, but oraSwacSa also in a figurative
signification, to weigh or measure in one’s mind, aliquid secum perpendere ; okoreiy,
to look at something, oxowetcSa, to look mentally, to consider; so in derivative
verbs in -edw and -evoua:, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain
state; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is
indicated by the root, to show one’s self as such, to have the tendency or habit, to act
as such, e. g. rovnpedw, to be bad, movnpedouat, to demean one’s self badly ; modt-
tevw, to be a citizen, rodrrevoua, to live and act as a citizen; tamedw, to be a
manager, Tatevouct, to conduct business, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical
sense, €. g. Tobs vduous; otpatetw, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or
a state, orparevoua, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. Derivatives
in -f{Coua correspond in sense to those in -eboua, e. g. doretCouat, to demean my-
self as a citizen; xaptevTiCoua, to act in an agreeable manner. Still, derivatives
in -i¢w, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. dwpt(w, to demean myself or
to speak like a Dorian.

Rem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a causative sense, in the
middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed
with an Acc., e. g. poBioa, to cause to fear, poBhoacSa, to fear; aicxivat, to
make ashamed, airxuveiodai, to be ashamed, to feel shame; mopedaa, to cause to
90, to convey, mopedoacsai, to go; mepaidoa, to cause to pass over, mepardoer&at,
to pass over; Koimijoa, to cause to sleep, lull to sleep, nowhoaoSat, to sleep; madoat,
to cause to cease, matoacsat, to cease; mAdyka, to cause to wander, mAdytecSat,
to wander, etc.

Rem. 6. The middle form, as already stated (§ 248, Rem. 1), is often used
to express reciprocal actions. This is particularly the case with verbs signify-
ing to contend, vie with, converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or com-
pact, e.g. wdxeodat, to fight with; apirArdgGoda, to contend with; aywviterSat, to
strive; diaréyeoSat, to converse with; domdfeoSa, to salute; raira ovyTiSerSai,
mutually to agree on these points ; cnovdas orévderdu or woreioSai, to make a treaty

(crovdas moeiy signifying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not

strictly reciprocal, but where the idea expressed -by the verb necessarily sup-
poses two persons or two parties, as in questions and answers, e. g. muvddvecSat
and épeoda:, to inquire; amoxpiverSar and arayelBecSa, to answer; cupBovadcd-
eodat, to consult with one, ask his advice, and évaxowwodcSar, to consult one (dvaxowody
being especially used of consulting oracles).

§ 251. C. The Passive.

1. From the reflexive signification of the Middle, the Passive
is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another
upon itself,— permits the action to be performed upon itself.
Hence the subject always appears as a passive or suffering
object.

>

_ a ee

§ 251.] CLASSES OF VERBS.—THE PASSIVE. 337

Maoriyotpuat, (nusoduae (rd tivos), I receive blows, punishment, I let myself be
struck, punished = I am struck, punished (by some one); BAdrroua, ddicotuas,
I suffer injury, injustice ; diddonouat, I let myself be instructed, I receive instruction,
T learn, hence ixé rwos, from some one = doceor ab aliquo; welSoua, I persuade
myself, or I permit myself to be persuaded, bxé twos, by some one = I am per-
suaded,

2. Yet, there are but two tenses, the Fut.and the Aor., which
have special forms to express the passive sense of an action ;
the remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. :

3. Hence the following rule: The Fut. and Aor. Mid. have
a reflexive (or intransitive) sense only; but all the other tenses

| of the Mid. serve at the same time for the Passive also.

Remark 1. Still, the Fut. Mid. has sometimes a Pass. sense also. The reason
of this may be found in a great measure in the shorter form of this Fut. compared
with that of the Fut. Pass. .This passive use of the Fut. Mid. is found most
frequently with Pure verbs; much more seldom with Mute verbs, and very sel-
dom with Liquid verbs (probably not at all in Attic prose). Maoriyéoceras,
orpeBAdoetat, dedhoerat, exxavdhoera ToPIakue, TeAcvTay mwdvTa KaKd
matav dvarkwdvrevdhoeta, Pl. Rp. 361, e. TH trav xpnudtwy omdver kwAd-
govrat, Th.1,142. “Hy tis BovAndi ands yevérSat, eokacShoera TH mperoton
(nula* of 38 &yadol TimhoovtTat Tos mposhkovow wAos Tis dperis (but the
brave shall be honored with the befitting rewards of valor), 2,87. Tept rav operé-
pwv dpouplwy, ds émiBovrAcvTomevwy, ToAAdKS Tpdypata elxov, X. C. 6, 1,
10. Eipédémeda (includemur), X. An. 6. 6,16. ‘H yj eb puAdE eT at brd tay
povpotytwy. OdK a&yvoovytes, itt Evedpedaotvro brd Tay Toreuiwy, H. 7. 2,
18. Very commonly &dinjoopat, &pEouar (from &pxw, impero), BAdWo-
fat, Spévouast So always GAdoouat. Some verbs have both forms
of the future, as, e.g. awpeArciv, Cnuody, crepeiv, poBeiv, &yew; then the Mid.
form seems to denote a condition, the Pass. an action received. But in very
many instances, the Pass. sense is only apparent, e. g. ‘H wéAts Bpaxéa hoSeioa
peydaa (nurdoeras, shall suffer great loss therefor, in contrast with Bpaxéa
jos., Th. 3, 40. Zod (avros, Bértiov SpéYovrar kal rardedoorras (they
shall grow up better and educate themselves), Pl. Crito. 54, a.

Rem. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of the Pass. is, in all instances,
only apparent; so Od. 3, 35. kotpw 5 Siw Kal mevthKovta kptvdoSev Kara
djjuov, means, let them select for themselves (on the contrary, 48. codpw dé kpiv-
Sévre dbw x. wevt., the selected). Hes. Sc. 173. «dmpor S00 &rmoupdmevor W-
xds, they had deprived each other of life. Pl. Phaedr. 244, e. 7G dpSas wavévr: kad
katacxopméva, “in fine frenzy” and in ecstasy.

Rem. 3. It has been shown, § 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. § 250, Rem. 1), that
the Aor. Pass. of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a
reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. BolAoua, I will, ێBovandny, I willed ;
evppaivw, I gladden, cheer, edppalvoua, I am glad, ed ¢padvaSnyv, Iwas glad. In
a few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, e. g. #Souar, t rejoice,
joanv, I rejoiced, hoSjooua, I shall rejoice. See §197,Rem.1. ~~

Rem. 4. The author or cause of the passive condition or state is generally
expressed by the Prep. ixé with the Gen., e. g. Of orparia@ta b3d THY TOA-
eulwy eidxSynoav. Instead of bird, rp ds with the Gen. is used, when at the
same time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed asa, —
person, is to be expressed, ¢. g.’ArysdeoSat, Gdiuccioda pds Tivos, Bavav-.

29

<P NO ee Pe ane Cee eee

338 SYNTAX. [§ 251.

oixadl téxvat eindtws ddotodvTa pds Tav mérAewy, X. O. 4, 2; also wapd
with the Gen. is used, when the author is at the same time to be represented as
the person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means
internal or outward, the action has proceeded; hence used specially with réu-
meodat, Sd00da, wperciodar, svAAeyeTIal, A€yegIat, duoroyeiaSa:, onualverSa,
emidelxvucda (demonstrari), e. g.°O dyyedos Cwm eEuGIN Tapa BactrAéws (sent
both by and from near the king). ‘H peyiorn evruxla todTe Te avdp) wapd
Se@v Fédorat. Todds xphuara Kipw wapa Tov plrAwy cuvetrdcymeva
jv. Td dapa méumeta: rapa Tov Bactrevorvtos, Her.7, 106. Tamapa
TGV Se@v onuatvdpeva, X. Cy.1.6,2. Mapa rdvtwyv duoroyeirat,
An. 1. 9, 1. Oiua ydp pe rapa cod coptas rAnpwShoegSat, Pl. Symp.
175, e. °Ex is still stronger than wapd,used especially with verbs of giving ; yet
it is seldom used by the Attic writers, e. g.°Exelvw ain 4 xdépa ex Bagiréws
€569n, X. H.3.1,6; in Her., however, é« is very often used instead of id
simply. The use of 526 with the Dat. is almost wholly poetic, e. g. Saujvat
bmd Ttvt; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e. g. vis 67d TG Tarp
TeSpaumevos, Pl. Rp. 558, d. Tuyxdver 67d wardoTpibyn ayad@ memaidev-
névos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by persons, but
by things, the Dat. is commonly used (= Lat. Ablative), e.g. ‘H wéAis toAAats
Tuudhopats eméero, the city was distressed by great misfortunes. — The above
usage corresponds with that of the Latin, the voluntary agent with a passive
verb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a or ab, the involuntary agent
in the Abl. without a preposition.

Rem. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with
the Perf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass. has in such
instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. indicates the person by
whom the action was performed, or for whom it was performed. While iaé
with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the passive action, the Dat., at the
same time, denotes that this action stands in relation to the author, e. g.“Os
pow mpdrepoy SedhAwrTaL, i. e. as the thing has been before pointed out by me, and for
me now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123.

4: It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act., not merely
of transitive verbs with the Acc., may be changed into the per-
sonal Pass., like the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive
verbs with the Gen. and Dat. 4

SSovotpar txd twos (from Pdoveiv tin, invidere alicut), i. e. I experience
envy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetur mihi ab
aliquo). X. Conv. 4, 29. xpetrrév €ort mic Tevea dat bmd Tis TatTpldos uaAdrov, 4
amiotetodsar (from morevew and amorety trun), I am trusted, Iam distrusted.
Th. 1, 82. quets bm "ASnvalwy éwiBovrAevdmeda (emiPBovdcdey Twi). Pl. Rp.
3.417, b. kad émiBovAcdvoyres, kal €miBovrAevdpervor Sidtovor mdvra toy Biov.
8. 551, a. doxetrar 5) 7d del Tindmevovy, AueAeTTas Fe 7d atiaCduevoy. X.S.
4, 31. obkér: GretA od pat, GAN Hdn GweiAG BAdAos. SO apxAHva., cparn-
Svat, Hyemovevavat, katapporvnajvasr ond twos (from kpyxew, kpa-
TeV, ayemovevey, KaTadppovely Tivos), emixetpnajvar (from emxepeiy Ti).
On xémropat Thy Kepadhy, erirpéropat Thy pvdaxhy, see § 281, 3.

Rem. 6. The Greek may form a Pass. from other intransitives also, yet, for
the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Neut. pronoun,

or a Part. used as a Neut. substantive, e. g. Kal wixpa Guaptndévta (vel parva ,

), X. An. 5. 8, 20. "Aruxndévtwy (rerum infeliciter gestarum), Dem.
* Cor. 298, 212. "Em rodrois eyd GAnsevopevors dul co thy euiy detlav

;

4

|. - oe le,
—
’

- $f 252, 253.] TENSES AND MODES. 339

(ea conditione, ut haec vere dicantur), X. Cy. 4.6,10. "Ev él dvBpt rorrdy dpe-
ras kivduvederdsar (in periculum vocart), Th. 2,35. Ov pqadiov +d bd woAAGY
Kkivduvevdévra be’ évds pndiva, Lys. 5, 112.

§ 252. Remarks on the Deponents.

It has been seen above (§ 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which
occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor., and have a
reflexive or intransitive signification ; and, also, that they are divided into Mid.
or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The
reflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our
mode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. éxoual 1, I take (namely,
to myself) something, épydQoual 71, BidGoual twa, etc. Such Deponents are often
used in a Pass. sense, particularly in the Perf. and in the Pass. Aor. Examples
of the Pres., Impf., and Fut. in a Pass. sense are very rare, and are found only
in such Deponents as have in single examples an active fornt, e. g. BidCeoSat,
@veioSat.

Iidvra dmelpyaota: Te Seg, Pl. L. 710,d. Mepiunuévos (ad imitatio-

~ nem expressus, made like), Her. 2,78. Ed évreSuunpuévorv (well-considered), Pl.

Crat. 404, a. Nijes obk €xphodnoayr (adhibitae sunt), Her. 7, 144.

Remark. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor.; the Pass.
form has then a Pass. sense, e. g. €Se&duny, excepi, €5€x nv, exceptus sum ;
éBiacduny, cotgi, €Bidaodny, coactus sum; éxtTnoduny, mihi comparavi,
éxthsnv, comparatus sum (I was gained); dAXKopvpagsat, to lament, dr0-
pupSivat, to be lamented; &xécaadat, to heal, axnecdivat, to be healed ;
amoxplvacSat, to reply. dmoxpidsjvat, tobe separated. In afew verbs only
are both Aorists used without distinction of meaning (§ 197, Rem. 1).

§ 253. Tenses and Modes of the Verb.

(a) Tenses denote the relation of time expressed by the
predicate, this being designated either as Present, Future, or
Past, e. g. the rose blooms, will bloom, bloomed ;

(b) Modes denote the relation of what is affirmed in the predi-
cate to the subject; this relation being denoted either as an
actual fact, as a conception or representation, or as a direct
expression of the will. The mode which expresses a fact, as

- the rose blooms, is called the Indicative; that which denotes a

conception, as the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive ; that which
denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, as

give.

340 SYNTAX. . [§§ 254, 255.

§ 254. A. More Particular View of the Tenses.

1. The tenses are divided, according to their form and mean-
ing, into two classes: (a) into Principal tenses, which, both in
the Ind. and Subj., always denote something present or future ;
(b) into Historical tenses, which in the Ind. always denote
something past, in the Optative, something present or future.

2. The Principal tenses are : —

(a) The Present: (a) Indicative, e. g. ypdpouer, scribimus; (8) Subjunctive,
e. g. ypadpwper, scribamus ;

(b) The Perfect: (a) Indicative, e. g. yeypdpauer, scripsimus ; (8) Subjunc-
tive, €. g. yeypdpwper, scripserimus ;

{ce} The Future Indicative, e. g. ypdpouer, scribemus, we shall write; Subjunc-
tive wanting ;

(d) The Future Perfect Indicative, e. g. BeBovredooua, I shall have advised
myself, or I shall have been advised ; Subjunctive wanting.

The Subj. Aor. also belongs here, e. g. ypdiw, scripserim or scribam. See

§ 257, 1 (a).

8. The Historical tenses are: —

(a) The Aorist: (a) Indicative, e.g. éypaya, I wrote; (8) Optative, e. g.
ypdvaiut, I might write, or I might have written ;

(b) The Imperfect: (a) Indicative, e. g. &ypapoy, scribebam; (8) Optative,
e. g. ypdouut, scriberem ;

(c) The Pluperfect : (a) Indicative, e. g. éyeypdpew, scripseram ; (8) Optative,
e. g. yeypdporut, scripsissem ;

(d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypdoun, I would write, and of
the Fut. Perf., e. g. BeBovAevooluny, I would have deliberated, or I would have
been advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the
past), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at
a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 tyyeAos eAeyerv, Ott of mordgusor
vixrhoorey, the messenger said, that the enemy WOULD conquer ; éAeyev, Srt
rdyra ied Tod otparnyod «b BeBovdredcorro, he said that everything
WOULD be well planned by the general.

§255. (a) Principal Tenses: Present, Perfect, Future.

1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking
place in time present to the speaker. The Present is often
used, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of amore.
vivid and graphic representation; past time is then viewed as
present. ‘This is called the Historical Present.

§ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 341

Tatrny thy tdppov Bacireds péyas Tore? dy) épduatos, ered) muvSdveras
Kipov mposeAavvovra, X. An. 1. 7, 16. "Hy ris Mpiqyidav vedraros MoAv8wpos,
‘ExdBns mais, dv ex Tpolas euol marhp 8{3wor Mplauos ev dduos tpépew, Eur.
Hee. 1116. The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them-
selves, aside from adverbs like roré, rdAax (poet. mdpos), are considered as
involving past time, e. g. Zovr’ elsaxotoas maida, bv éxaod er moré, Eur. El.
419.

Remark 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which
belongs, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in
its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu-
larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g.dxkotw, tuvSdvouat, aigdd-
vouat, yiyvaokw, pavddvw (like Lat. audio, video, etc., and Eng. to hear,
to see, to perceive, to observe), when the object of these verbs is to be represented
as still continuing in the present; (b) pedyw, J have given myself to flight, and
Tam now a fugitive, hence to live in exile; vix@ and kpara@ (I am a victor,
hence have conquered), 477 uae (I am vanquished, have been vanquished), &8ix@
(Lam in the wrong, have done wrong), ylyvowar (I am deat ete.; (c) in
poetry: govedw (I ama murderer, have murdered, e. g. 8. Ant. 1174), 3vyfocK@
(1 am dead, have died, 8. El. 113), rlx tw, yevva (1 am a father or mother, Eur.
Ton. 356. Her. 209), etc, This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials
of the Pres. as well as to the Impf. @emoroxAda otk &kovets tvdpa ayaddv
yeyouéta; Pl. Gorg..503, c. Mdvyra ruvSavdpmevos 6 Kpoicos treure és Sadp-
Thy ayyéAous, Her. 1,69. Th dé; od éxeivo dxhxoas, Sr: Mucol Kad Tholda ev rH
Bacihéws xadpa Karéxovtes épupva mdvy xwpla Sivavra Civ eAcdSepor ; — Kal rodrd
7, &on, eg I hast thou heard? &xotw, yes, I have known of it, X. C.3. 5, 26.
’"AmaryyéAete “Apialw, Sri tyucis ye vix@mev Baciréa, al, ds dpare, ovdels hyuiv
ért wdxerat, An. 2.1,4. Tav virdvtwy éorti na ra éavtdy od Cew Kal Ta Tov
ort Ont ee? AauBdvew, 3. 2, 39. Aaplov cal Mapuvodridos maides yliyvovtat
dvo, 1. 1, 1.

Rem. 2. OYxopa: and 4x, with Pres. forms, are often translated in Eng.
by Perfects, namely, ofxouat, I have departed,'and ixw, I have come; yet
otxopmat, properly means, J am gone, and #xw, I am here (adsum), e. g. Mh
Aumod, bt: ’Apdomas ofxetat eis Tovs mwoAeulovs, that Araspas is gone, has
departed (= transfugit) to the enemy, X. Cy. 6. 1, 45. “Hkw vexp@v Kevdudva
kal oxétov TUAas Aiméy, Eur. Hec. 1. “Yyuets pdrts ddixveiode, Sor hucis wdAa
hropev, X. Cy. 1.3, 4.

Rem. 3. “But the language often considers an action as present, which is not
yet accomplished, but is either actually begun, or is begun in our mind, cet
pose ; such an action is virtually future, though considered as present: Com-
pare the English: J go to-morrow, i.e. I shall go, I intend to go, and the like. This —
usage also belongs to all the Modes and Participials of the Pres. and the Impf.
It specially holds of the Pres. of ef, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean-
ing of the Fut., J shall go; the Subj. includes a Fut. meaning in itself (§ 257,
Rem. 4); but the Inf. and Part. have both a Pres. and Fut. meaning. “Ere:ra
Ta Te viv bvtTa ev TE wapadelow Inpla Sldwul cot, kal BAAa wayTodama gvA-
Aétw, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 (Sldwps, lo er). “Exaords tis wet Sev Bevoparta
trocriva thy apxhy (persuadere studebat), X. An. 6. 1, 19. Metvanvaio: én)
MijSuuvay as mpodidouéevny eorpdrevoay (putantes parari ibi proditionem),
Th. 3,18. In like manner often the Pres. Part. after verbs of motion, e. g. ‘H
adpados és Tas "AShvas trAcucev, dwmayyéAAovea Ta yeyovdra ( for the Pepe
of announcing), X. H. 2.1, 29. Kal r@ plyes AmwAADMESG, Kal Xidy TAcloTH
hy (we to perish), An. 5. 8, 2.— Ovx edSis AGhaw adrody, oF Greims,
GAN ephogouat adry Kal €ferdow, Pl. Apol. 29, e. "Emel ij Mavddyn wapeo-
xevd(eTo as amiotaa mddAw mpds Tov tvdpa, edeiT0 aris 6 AoTudyns KaTadimeiy
roy Kipov, X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. :

29%

Ne i RE an ei ee

342 SYNTAX. [§ 255.

Rem. 4. But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated
as present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker
the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so firmly
convinced of its occurrence, that it appears already present, e. g.’Ev maid udxn
THvde Thy xdpav TWposKkTaaXe Kal éxeivyv padAAov €ALevdepovTre (you gain,
will gain, and free), Th. 4,95. “Hv davis ov, mais 68 expedyer popov: cov d
ov SeAovons katdaveiv, TovSe xreva, Eur. Andr. 381.

2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time
present to the speaker; the action appears as already accom-
plished at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not
only a past action, but its present effects or results.

Téypagda thy émotodny, J HAVE WRITTEN the letter, the letter 13s NOW WRIT-
TEN, whether written now, or some time ago; the writing is the past act, the
letter is the result still present. ‘“H méAus €xTi¢ Tat, the city WAS BUILT (in past
time), is Now built, and there it now stands built. *Aorudyns tav év Mfdots mdvTw@v
Seomdrnv éautdy wetmoinkev, X. Cy. 1. 3,18. Ovde ori Kepdadrcdrepoy Tod
vikay: 6 yap Kpatay Gua wdvTa cuvhpmwake, kal Tovs &vdpas, kal Tas yuvaikas,
4, 2, 26.

Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into close connection with the
present, the Greeks in many Perfects contemplated less the peculiar act of
completion, than its result as exhibited at the present moment; and hence they
used the Perf., in order to indicate a present condition or state that was occa-
sioned by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perfect does not
belong to the English, we translate many Greek Perfects by our Presunt, where
the present condition is more prominent than the past act; the Plupf. of such
verbs is then translated by our Impf., e. g. réSvnxa (I have died), Jam dead
(Bur. Ale. 557. reSvaorv of Savdvres, those who died, are dead); néxrnuc (I
have acquired), I possess ; teSXatpana (I have been wondering), J am astonished ;
BeBovAcvua (I have taken counsel with myself), J am determined ; wépnva (I
have shown myself ), J appear ; ofda, novi (I have seen), J know ; réSnda (I have
blossomed), J bloom; mémoiwda (I have convinced myself), J trust ; BéB8nxa (I
have taken steps), J am going ; Méuynuat, memini (I have called to-mind), J am
mindful, or remember ; kéxAnuat (I have been named), J am called, ete. The
Pres, and Impf. of many verbs, especially such as express the idea’ of to sound,
to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. and Plup. seem
to take entirely the place of the Pres. and Impf., e. g. xéxpaya, J cry, properly,
Lam a crier ; péuvea, I roar. :

Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state
produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass. than in the active. Comp. 7 Svpa
KéKkAetoT at, the door has been shut, and it 13s Now sHut. So particularly the
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Imp. Pass. is often used. when one would command with
emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed and permanent in its
condition, i.e. not only that the action should be performed, but particularly
that the result should continue, e.g. 7d &yxipioy aveordodw, let the anchor be
drawn up and remain so; AcrclpSw, reliquum esto, let it remain permanently ; mewet-
pdodw, let it be tried ; viv 5¢ rovTo TerToAUhadw eciweiv. So the Inf. in the Oratio
obliqua, X. H. 5.4, 7. e&idvres 5& elroy, Thy Spay Kexdrciodau; that it be shut, and
remain shut.

Rem. 7. The Perf. is used with special emphasis, even of future actions, the.
occurrence of these being affirmed with the same definiteness and confidence,
as if they had already taken place. Il. 0,128. 5:é@So0pas! you are lost, will be

§ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. $43

lost. So ¥Awda, like perii, interii, actum est de me, it’s all over with me, will be,
ete. Pl. Phaed. 80, d. ) Wuxh araddAatrouevyn Tod odparos, ebSds Biawepian-
Tai ka drmdérAwder.

3. The Future (Indicative) denotes an action as future in re-
lation to the present time of the speaker. The Greeks very
often use the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an
Hist. tense, to express that which shall, should, must, or can be,
where the Latin employs the Subj.; the other forms of the
Fut., particularly the Part., are also so used.

Néuous drdptat de? roovrous, bf dy Tots wey dyaSois vtiuos Kal eredSepos 5 Blos
wmapagKkevagashaoertas: (should be obtained), rots 3 kaxots tamwewds Te Kal GA-
vyewds Kal &Blwros balay éwmavanelaoet at (should be imposed upon them), X. Cy.
3. 3,52. Of eis Thy Bacwrinhy téxvny waidevduevar Tl Siapépover Trav e& dvdyns
rakowadovvtwy, et ye twetvhoovg. cal Siphoovar kal piydoover kal ay-
pumvicova: (if they must hunger, etc.), C. 2.1, 17. “Edote tg Shum tpidxovTa
&vdpas EA€oSat, of To’s marplous vduous EvyypdWougt, kad’ obs ToArTEVoouGE
(who should draw up laws, according to which they should live), H. 3. 2, 3.

4. The second person of the Fut. Ind. is often used to express
commands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in con-
nection with the negative ov, prohibitions; here the accomplish-
ment of what is affirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the
Imp., but is left to the choice of the person addressed, and is
only expected. This differs chiefly from the Imp. only in being
a milder form of expression. On the contrary, the Fut. is used
with the negative ov, interrogatively, when, in a strong and
indignant tone, the accomplishment of the action is expected
necessaruy.

“Opa obv cal rpoSupuod xarideiv, édy mws mpdrepos euod Ons, Kal wot ppd-
gets (you will communicate it to me = communicate), Pl. Rp, 432, ¢. “Qs ody
TWoihocete kal relSecdEé por (you will do thus, etc. = do thus), Prot. 338, a.
Ov Spdoers Tovro, thou wilt not do this, as I hope = do it not; but ob Spdcers
Tove; wilt thou not do this? = do itt. Ob rabon Aێywv; non desines dicere ?
instead of desine dicere. Pl. Symp. in. od repmevets ; wilt thou not wait? Dem.
Phil. 2, 72. 0b guvAdtead’, pny, bras ph Seanwdrny efpntre; But when in this
manner, a negative command is to be expressed, the negative wh is to be used
with od; and when two sentences of this kind, one with an affirmative meaning
and the other with a negative, follow each other, od stands in the first sentence,
ph in the last. Ob uh pavaphoes; OF wh Aadhoets, GAN &koAOVIRTELS
éuol, Ar. Nub. 505 (instead of wh pravdper, wh AdAet, GAA’ Gxodotse). Pl. Symp.
175, a. obk« oby KaAe€Ts abroy Kad ph aGhoets.

—s 2 da aye, st anes yo Ly eS)
hs 7"

344 SYNTAX. [§ 256.

5. The Future Perfect (Indicative) represents a future action
as past (completed) in relation to another future action; hence
a future prior to another future. ‘Such an action is future with
reference to the present, past with reference to another future.

Kal toto: meplitetat eoAd kaxotow (the good shall have been mixed with evil),
Hes. Op. 177. ‘H modirela redAédws kexoouhoetat, cay 6 TowvtTos aiThy émo-
Korh piaak 6 TolTwy emithuwy, Pl. Rp. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently
denotes the present condition or result of a completed action, so the Fut. Perf.
frequently denotes the future condition or result of a completed action. Hence
the Fut. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense
of other verbs (see Rem. 5), must be translated by the simple Fut., e. g. weur7-
gout, meminero (I shall have reminded myself), I shall be mindful, shall remember
(but pvqjoopa, L shall remind myself); Kexthoowm (I shall have acquired), I shall
possess (but xrjroua, I shall acquire), ete.

Rem. 8. The Fut. Perf., like the Perf. (Rem. 7), is used instead of the sim-
Fut., to express a thing emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for the

ut., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the
Fut. Perf. often denotes the rapidity and certainty of the action, the process
or progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. dpd(e, nal mempdier ac (and it
shall be [CERTAINLY, IMMEDIATELY] done), Ar. Plut. 1127; ptros quiy ovdels
AcAelWer as (no friend will [CERTAINLY] be left us), X. An. 2.4, 5. So also in
the Inf. Avoty 3} tpiav jucpGv TadTa wempdieo sai, Dem. 19, 74. In the Act.
the periphrasis BeBovAevxas érouc is found. .

Rem. 9. The Fut. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in
subordinate clauses introduced by ér: and és (that), by ei used instead of dru,
and by ésre (so that), all with the Ind. In all other subordinate clauses, the
Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf.) is used instead of it, in connection with a
conjunction compounded of ay, as édv, émdy, éreiddy, bray, mply kv, est” ky, ds
ty, etc., e. g. "Edy TodTo A¢éns (si hoc dixeris), épaprhon.

§256.(b) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect, and
Pluperfect.

1. The Aorist (Ind.) expresses past time, in a wholly indefi-
nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. eypawa, I wrote, Kipos
ToANG eJvyn éeviknoev. It thus stands in contrast with the other
tenses which express past time; still, so far as it indicates past
time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these
tenses.

2. Both the Impf. and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as
past, but always as having relation to another past action. But
the Impf. expresses the action as contemporary with this other
past action; the. Plup. expresses the action as already past
before this other past action.

_—
'

§ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 345

"Ev G ob Ewarles, eyo Eypapoy, while you were playing, I was writing. “Ore
éyyis oa of BdpByo, of “EAAnves Cudxovto. “Ore of BdpBapa érerdnad-
Seaay, of “EAAnves Cudxovro, Tére(oréy ravryn TH wdxn) of “EAAnves
Sapparedrara eudxovro, "Emed) of “EAAnves €weAnAUVSEoar, of wordusos
amemepedyeray. “Ore of ciupaxor rmAnalaloy, of ASnvaio robs Mépoas
evevinhkerav. “Eyeypdperv thy émarodgy, I had written the letter (before
the friend came).

Remark I. It is to be noted that the Greeks freely use the Aor. instead of
the Plup., when the relation of the past time to another past time can be easily
inferred from the context, and no special emphasis lies in this relation, e. g.
"Ere:d) of “EAAnves €r HASov (quum Graeci venissent), of woreusor aremepedye-

gay. The Aor. is often employed even instead of the Perf., when the relation
of the past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically.

3. Hence the Aorist (Ind.) is used in historical narrations, in
order to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. (Ind.) is
used to denote the accompanying circumstances. The Aor.
narrates, the Impf. describes. Hence in the narration of past
events, the Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very
often interchanged with the Impf., which describes and paints ;
often, also, with the Hist. Pres., which, like the Aor., relates the
principal events, and places them vividly in the present; not
seldom, also, with the Plup., sometimes with the Perf. By this
interchange of the tenses, the narration has the greatest liveli-
ness of representation, and the finest shades of expression.

*Huos 3 ‘Ewsddpos elo: pdws épéwy em) yaiav, Tios wupkainh Cuapalvero,
matvaoato de padt (the fire upon the funeral pile began to abate, and the flame
ceased), Il. W, 228. Tods meAtacras €détavro of BdpBapu Kal éudxorvro:
ere F eyyis Hoay of érdira, et pdmrovTo: kal of reATacTal evSds elwovTo
(the barbarians withstood the peltasts and continued to fight with them ; but when the
hoplites drew near, they fled, and immediately the peltasts set out in pursuit), X. An.
5. 4,24. HuvéBn 7@ ddoxhre xa etarlyns duporépwi<y robs ’ASnvalovs SopuBy-
Sivas cal rd pev evdvupov. xépas abtay, drep 5) nal TpokexwphKet, eddis
aroppayey Epuye* Kal 6 Bpacidas, broxwpodvros Hdn abrov, emimapiay TG detlo,
ritpdoKetat’ kal meodvta adtdy of wey ASnvain od aicSdvovrat, of 5
mAnoloy tpayvres Am@hveykav: Kal 6 wiv KAéwy, ds Td mpGrov ob Sievociro
peeve, evdvs pebywy, Kal KaTadnpdels brd Mupkiviov weATaTTOD, ATWoSvHRgKeEL* of
88 abrov tuorpapévtes SwAira: HudvovTo K.T.A., Th. 5, 10. ‘O pey mércuos
amdytwy has Tay eipnudvay dwmeatrépnKe* Kal ydp To weveotépous Temolnke,
kal woAAovs KivSbvous iroudvew AvdyKace, kat mpds To’s “EAAnvas 51a BéBAN-
Ke Kal mdvra tpdrov TetTarkattoepnKkev tas, Isocr. Pac. 163; a. (The
Perfects denote the rei:ult, the Aorist the event.)

Kem. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action nee
n

and absolutely, uncon ected with any other past time, while the Impf. I
represents @ past action as always connected with another past action, being,

346 SYNTAX. [$ 256.

consequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and progress, and
hence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a moment or point of
time, while the Impf., denotes duration or continuance. The Aor. therefore
describes a momentary action or a single action; the action, however, described
by the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the writer in using the
Aor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur-
rence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an ‘action in its continuance
and progress, — not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on
the choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi-
cally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf., can be stated histor-
ically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so, many actions stated in the Aor.
might be more vividly described by the Impf., if the writer wished it.

4. On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the following things
are to be noted: —

(a) The Impf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres., since an
action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which
it occurred, or was known to the speaker. Kdpos é&eAadve:—ém) toy XdAov
wotaudy, dvta Td cdpos TAESpov, TAApH F ixdbwv peydrwy kal mpacwy, ods of Stpor
Seods €vdurCov nat adiceivy ode efwy (which the Syrians CONSIDER as gods,
namely, as I then saw), X. An. 1. 4,9. “Agikovro mpds 7d Mydlas kadovmevov
Teixos *—a&metxe 5¢ BaBvaadvos od wodrd, 2.4,12. TH d& mpérn hucpg adixovro
emi roy wotapudy, bs Spice thy Te Tav Maxpévwy [xdpay] Kal Thy Tay Sxvdwar,
4.8,1. °Arap, & éraipe, ap’ od rd5e iv Td dévdpov, ep’ drep Fyes judas ; Pl. Phaedr.
230,a. Ovdk tp d&yadds Ta wodiTind TepixdAjs Hv ek tovrov Tod Adyov (namely,
when he so appeared to us, consequently = obx &p ayadds éorw, as edalveTo,
he is not therefore distinguished, as he.then seemed to be), Gorg. 516, d.— From the
idea of duration or continuance contained in the Impf. several other relations orig-
inate: (a) The beginning of an action, e. g. érel eyybs eyévovro, étamlvns of wey
avTav étrotevor, some of them began to shoot their arrows ; —(B) habit or custom,
@. g. abtoy ofrep mpdsdev TWposektvovy, kal tTéTE mposextynoay, those who were
before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it then also ;— (vy) wish, endeavor or
attempt, e. g. mpatos KA€apxos Tovs aitovd otpatriétas €BidCeto iva, Clearchus
endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. :

(b) The Aor. is often used in general propositions which express a fact bor-
rowed from experience, and hence what is customary; here a single fact which
has been observed to be true in many instances, but not established as universal,
is stated to be generally true,—the truth frequently observed in regard to a
single event, is considered as holding in the case of other similar events. In
such cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the
verb ts wont, is accustomed, with the Inf. Il. p, 177. aiel re Ards xpeloowy vdos
aiyisxo0, bste al GAKkimoyv avdpa poet, nal &pelrAeto vikny pyidlws (who
inspires the brave man with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. ai wév
yap TAcioTat WéAcis MpostadTTovEL Tois ToALTas Wh KACMTELY, WH apTdte, Kal TAAAG
Ta ToladTa wsavtws: Av 5é Tis TovTwy Tt mapaBalyn, Cnulas abtois éeméderav
(were accustomed to impose a penalty upon them). Dem. Ol. 1(2). 20, 9. 8ray éx
mAcoveéias Kat movnplas tis, dsmep ovTos (PiAurmos), icxvon, % mpoTn mpdpacis
kal uixpoy wratoua Gmavra dvexalrice kal Si€Adcer.

§ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 347

Rem. 3. When the idea of being wont to do, as found in the Aor., is to be
made prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses the
verbs girciv and éS¢Aew, Her. 7. 10, 5. Pires yap 6 Seds 7a bwepéxovra wdvta
Kodove. 157. 7G eb BovdAevSevri mpfymatt TeAEvT @s Td ewimay xpnoTh eS éAEt
emrylvecdai.

(c) Hence in poetry, the Aor. 1s often used in comparisons, instead of the
Pres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded on often
repeated experience. Il. y, 33—36. ds 8 bre rls re Spdeovta iddv wadrlvopaos
a&mwéatn ovpeos ev Bhoons, bwé te Tpduos EAAaBe yia, BY 7 avexdpnoer,
dxpds ré uw eTA€ wapeds* ds adtis ead’ Buscroy uv Tpdwv dyepdxwy (sc. Mdpis).
Il. 3, 482. ipere 8, ds bre tis Spds H piwerv.

(d) The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or
emphatic expression of a decision or determination, which has respect, indeed,
to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been
previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans-
lates such Aorists, in a very imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong
especially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion, e.g. dmémtuaa (Ido
abhor), éyéAaca(I cannot help laughing), érypveca, @pwta, eSatuaca,
amraéuoca, hoarnv. S. Phil. 1434. & P dy AdBys od oxida Tovde TOU oTpaTod,
tétwy eudy uynucia, pds mupay euhy céuice* Kad ool tadr’, "AxtAAews Téxvov, Ta-
etveoa, this I counsel thee, this 1 have counselled thee. Eur. Med. 223. xph 88
tévoy yey xdpta mposxwpety (se accommodare) wérAc odd aordoy veo’, sstis
abdddns yeyws mucpds woAltas early duadias bro (nec laudo, nec unquam laudavi).
Hee. 1276. Polym.: kal ofv y avdykn waida Kaodvdpay Saveiv. Hecuba: arén-
rvoa, this thought I do abhor = a thought which I have abhorred.

(e) With like effect the Aor. is often used by Attic writers, apparently instead
of the Pres. in urgent appeals or commands, expressed in the form of a question
introduced by rf ody od or ti od. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the
desired action already accomplished. X. Cy. 2.1, 4. rf ov, pn 6 Kipos, od kal
why divamw reEds por (quin igitur mihi recenses ? why hast thou not yet told me of
the forces? instead of tell me forthwith!) 5. 4, 37. tl obv, &pn, & Taddra,
obdxt Ta wey Telxn pudanh exupa erolnaas (why therefore have you not made
the walls strong by a guard ? = at once make them, etc.) ; Pl. Phaedon. 86, d. ef obv
wis buay evmopmérepos euod, TE ovK awexplvaro; (is quam celerrime respondeat,
let him answer at once). The Pres. is also so used; yet the expression is then
far weaker, e. g. Tl ody, 4 & bs, odw épwrGs; (stronger than épdéra, but
weaker than Ti ody odk ApStHoas or Hpov;) Pl. Lysid. 211,d. Th ody od
oxotovuerv, X. C. 3.1, 10.

(f) The Aor., like the Perf. (§ 255, Rem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi-
dently considers a future event as already taken place. II. 5, 160—162. efrep
yép te kal abtie Ordumos odk érércocev, % Te Kal dYt Teri, oly TE meydAw
amrétioayv ov odjow Keparjor yuvaitt re Kad rexéeoow (then have they paid a
heavy penalty, then shall they pay). Eur. Med. 78. &rwAdépeoS’ Gp’, ei kaxdy
mposolcouev véoy madaug (then we shall perish, if, etc.).

(g) The Aorist is very often used in all its forms to denote the coming into a
condition ; this the Ind. always represents naturally in the past. BaswWebw, I

348 SYNTAX. , [§ 257.

am a king, ێBacidrevoa (not J was a king, but) J came to be a king, was made a
king, BactXevoas, having been made king, rex factus. Bovdedw, I am a senator
(X. C. 1. 2, 35), Bovretoas, having been made a senator, senator factus (ib. 1.1,
18). Sod orpatnyhoaytos, te duce facto (ib. 3.5,1). “Iloxtw, J am strong,
isxvaas, having become or been made strong, potens factus (Th.1,3). Avyn-
Sets, potentiam nactus. "“AcSevjoat, to have become sick, in morbum incidisse,
Kipos hy don avrdy (KAéapxov), X. An. 1. 1, 9. Cyrus came to admire him, ejus
admiratione captus est.

§ 257. Subordinate Modes.

1, As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde-
pendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac-
tion; while the Imperfect, always representing a past action in
relation to another past, and being used in describing and paint-
ing, presents the action in its dwration and progress, so the
same distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of
the Aorist and Present:! The subordinate modes of the Aor.

(Subj. Opt. and Impr.) together with the Infinitive and Partici-

ple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action
by itself, as completed; the subordinate modes of the Present
together with the Infinitive and Participle, and also the Imper-
fect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform-
ance of the action, wishes to represent it descriptively in its dura-
tion and progress. In this way the following modes stand in
contrast with each other:

(a) The Subjunctive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and the
Optative Imperfect, e. g. dvyauey and gdebywuer, let us flee. With
otywpmerv, the idea of fleeing itself is urged and is had in mind; with
pevywpev, I rather have reference to the performance and progress of
the action; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes
an instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists in all
the following examples. Ti worhowpey and moidyev ; what shall we do?
Aéyw, ba wdSns and a pavSdyns, ut discas; Zreyov, wa pasos
and iva wavSdvors, ut disceres. The Greek Subj. always refers to the
future, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g
Landat puerum, quod diligens sit or fuerit, because he is or has been. In
subordinate clauses with ds ay, gay, bray, etc. [§ 260. (a)], the Subj. Aor.
corresponds with Latin Fut. Perf. (§ 255, Rem. 9). *Edy rovro Aéyns,
apapthon (st hoc dices or quotiescunque hoc dicis, errabis). "Edy Todo

1 The subordinate modes of the Imperf. are supplied by those of the Pres.

\ jul Mes Se

§ 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 349

A€Ens, duapricy (si hoc dixeris, if you shall have said). Comp. the exam-
ples under §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. 339, 2, II. (b). The Impf.and Aor. Opt. has
the sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi-
tion, conjecture, or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly with &,
in hypothetical clauses with ef; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses
denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses,
particularly in deliberative questions. Todro pqdiws by ylyvorro or
y évorro, this might easily be done. See §§ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. Ei
tovro Aéyots or A€k~eras, Guaprdvots or &udprois by, if you
should say this, you would err, See § 339, II, (a). Ete todro ylyvorro
or yévoito, O that this might be! See § 259, 3. (b). “EAeyov, a
BavSdvois or uddocs, ut disceres, See§330,2. Ts roatra broAap-
Bdvor or broAd Bor; who would suppose such things? See § 259, 3, (e).
Ovn elxov, Sra tpewoluny or tpawolunv, I knew not what I should
do. See § 259,2. The following case also belongs here: When the
~ subordinate clauses in §{ 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), are made to
depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without & takes the place of
the Subj. with ds ay, dray, éredav, gay, etc., the Opt. has a future sense.
Obs by T5w Ta Kadrd emirndedovras, Tyxhow (quos videro). ~Egny obs
TSorur Ta Kara emirndedtovras, Twhoew (quos visurus essem). "Ewetdav
ay BobAn diaréyeoSat, col diadrdEouc (si or quotiescunque vis). "Egy,
éwe:dh ob BobrAoro diardyeodat, col diarctecda (si or quotiescunque
velles, of the future). In other kinds of clauses, the Opt. of the Impf. and
Aor. has a past sense, so that it corresponds with the Ind. of each of these
tenses. Ticoapépyns d:éBare toy Kipoy, ds éemiBovrAetvor adt@ (that he
was plotting against him). “Edctay, 811 Kipos &moSdvor (that C. was
dead). ‘Omdre oi “EAAnves tots modeulois ewlorey or ewméAR orev, aré-
gevyov, quotiescunque impetum faciebant). "AvaBiols treyer, & exe?
1501 (what he had there seen, a dependent question). Comp. No. 2, (b).

©) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Present, e. g. @éye and
petye, flee. Ads and Sidov ne 7 BiBAlov, give. Mh SopuBetre, &uvdpes
*ASnvaio, GAN é€upmelvareé pot, ois CehInv tuay, wh SopuBelv e¢’ ofs dy
Aéyw (the principal fact is here éuelyare, the more definite explanation -
SopuBeire) Pl. Apol. 30, c. ‘Ereidav dravta axotonre, kplvyatre, uh mpd
Tepoy TpoAauBdvere. Dem. Ph. 1. 44,14. *AAA’, & Séxpares, ei cad
viv éuol melSov cal cdSnTe Pl. Crito 44, b (= euol reiSduevos cdSnT1,
i.e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting
the rules of life, etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Tods pév
Seots PoBod, robs 5 yovets rThua, Tos Be PldAovs alaxdvou, Tors

5t vduors wel Sov, Isocr. Demon. 16. Comp. § 259, 4.
(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Present, e. g.’ESéAw puyetv
and gmetye:v, I wish to flee. ‘Ikavds eiut wmorfoar and mrocety tt.
(‘H yewpyia) wadety re pdorn eddrer elvar kal Hdlorn epydCerdar, X.
Oec. 6,9. Aiperdrepdy dor: kadds &moSavetv, h Civ aicxpas, Isocr.
Pan.95. Ob Td wh AaBeTv Ta &yaSa obtw ye xadrewdy, Sswep Td AaBdyTa —
30

350

SYNTAX. | [§ 257.

oTEPHNSivat AvTnpdy, X. Cy.7.5,82. Kerebw ce dodvar and Siddvai
Mot 7d BiBAlov. Kadéoas 6 Kipos’Apdowny Mijdov, todroy exércuge Siagu-
Adiaa aitg@ thy re yuvaika Kal thy oxnvhv, X. Cy. 5.1, 2, with which
compare in 3.following: tadrny obv éxéAcvoev 6 Kipos di:apvaAdrrety
Tov *Apdomny, ws dv adtds AdBy (to continue to guard, the subordinate
clause necessarily implying duration in S:apvAdrrew). In the oratio obliqua
after verbs of saying and thinking, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. is frequently
used to denote what is past; then the Inf. Aor., like the Ind. Aor., is used to
denote the principal events, the Inf. Pres., like the Ind. Impf., to denote the
accompanying subordinate circumstances, e. g. ’ASnvaior Aéyovat, Sixalws
éfeAdoar (tods TMedacyods)* karoinuévous yap Tovs MeAacyobs imd rd
‘Yunoog évdedrev dpuewuévous, &dinéery tdde* Porray yap aiel Tas
opetépas Suyatépas te kal robs maidas én’ BSwp* ob yap eivat TodToy Toy
xpdvov apict Kw oixéras* Skws 5 EASoiey abtat, Tods MeAac-yods bard HBpios
Bitiodai opeas K..t. A. (Oratio recta: @EnAdoapmev’ of yap Medacyol
Hotkovy rdde* @polrwy, etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a
past relation only after verbs of suying or thinking, and in the construction
of the Acc. with the Infinitive with the article. “EvraiSa Aéyeras
*"AmddAwy éxdetpat Mapoday nal Td dépua kpeudoat ev TH BwyTpw, X.
An. 1, 2, 8 (cutem detraxisse — suspendisse, to have flayed, and hung up).
Comp. No. 2, (¢). @avuacrdy galveral wor 7d wero dHval Tivas, ds
Swkpdrns tods véovs diépSeiper, X. C. 1.2, 1 (persuasum esse quibusdam,
that certain individuals had been persuaded). Td wedeulav ray rodewv
&A@vat worsopkia, weyiordy éort onucioy TOD Bia rovTovs Tero RévTas
Tos @wkéas taira mavetv, Dem. 19,61. (But when by the Acc.
with the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has
naturally something of a future relation, e. g. "EreueAfSny tod S1da0-
Kardéy pol twa yevéoSat, I took care that I might have some one as a
teacher, X. C. 4. 2,4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of
present time.

(d) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present; comp.

Adde puyéy with AdvSave petywv. TepiéwmAwov Sovyiov, Bovddsuevor pSjvat
&@rixdmevor és Td Kor (wishing to come into the city sooner) Her. 6, 115.
Tovs avSpémous Afoouevy Ewimea dyes (will secretly attack), X. An. 7.3, 43.
Tu all such examples the Aor. does not express the relation of past time,
but merely the action of the verb taken by itself; the time is denoted by
the finite verb with which the Part. is connected; the Aor. Part., there-
fore, denotes only that the subordinate action (expressed by the Part.) is
contemporaneous with the principal action (expressed by the verb). Yet
it is to be observed, that the Aor. Part. is commonly used to designate
past time, e. g. Tadr’ cimay améBn = Tair’ elwe kal &réBn.—It may be
added here as a general principle, that while the Aor. Part. generally
denotes past time, the subordinate modes of the Aor. and Present, of
themselves denote no relation of time, the Aor., however, designating a
momentary, the Pres. a continued action.

§ 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES, _ $él

2. The subordinate modes and participials of the Aorist, form
a contrast also with the subordinate modes and participials of
the Perfect and Pluperfect; the former denote an action abso-
lutely, as past or completed; the latter, on the contrary, in rela-
tion to the subject of the finite verb; by this relation the sub-
ordinate idea of the duration of the result of what is denoted by
the verb, is naturally derived. In this way the following forms
stand in contrast with each other:

(a) The Subjunctive Aorist with the Subjunctive Perfect, e. g. "Edy crovdai
yévwvrar, kkovow (éxeice), WIE Etovor Ta emirHdera (if a treaty shall
have been made), X. A. 2.3, 6. “Ov dy ywdpmoy (kbwy 135), domd era, Khy
pndty méxote bm” abtod &yadiy remdvSn (whomsoever he recognizes, he
greets, even if he shall have received no favor from him), Pl. Rp. 376, a.
*"Améxerde Tay adAoTplwy, ty” dopadréarepoy Tods olkovs Tods buetépous avTay
kextqose, Isoc. Nic. 49. (Comp. § 255, Rem.5.) It has already been
stated No. 1. (a) that the Greek Subj. always refers to the future.

(b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Oi Ivdol fActav,
bri wéuWere spas 6’Ivdav Bactreds (had sent), X. Cy. 2.4, 6. “Edeiar,
wh Abrra tis Ssmwep xvolv judy euwemr dor (that some madness had
fallen upon us, the effects still continuing), X. An. 5. 7, 26. ’Aynotdaos
eehIn Tis wéAcws apeiva aitdy tabrns Tis otpatnylas, Aéywv, br TE warph
avrod woAAa bwnpeThKor } Tav Maytiwéwy TES ev Tois mpds Mecohyny
moAguos, H. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the
present or future, and in what of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a).

(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect ; comp. amoSaveiv with

- weSvnnévat. Tlarpbs Kipos Aéyerar yevéo dat KauBioew, Mepray Baci-
Aéws X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. Adyera: tivdpa twa tav Midwv exmewTARXS as
modv 3h Twa xpdvov ext TG KdAAEL TOD Kipov (stood or continued amazed),
ib. 1. 4,27. Comp. § 255, Rem. 6.

(d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. émoSavéy with
teXvnxés, Plut. Aem. Paul. c. 36. extr. Mepoebs piv exer wal vevikn-
pévos (even tough vanquished, in the condition of one vanquished) robs

- waidas, Aiuldios dt tubs abrod (sc. raidas) vixhoas améBadkey = vevixnras
pév —Exer 5€—, evinnoe wév — awéBare 5é. Perseus even though conquered
still has his children ; Aemilius in his otherwise successful war, lost his.

Remark 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., though
an Historical tense, has besides an Opt. a Subj. also; the Aor. Subj. stands in
contrast, on the one hand, with the Subj. Pres.; on the other, with the Subj.
Perf. The Greek Fut. has no Subj. as in Latin (e. g. Gaudet, quod pater ven-
turus sit), because the Greek Subj. of itself denotes future time. But the Aor.
has an Opt., which stands in dependent sentences after an historical tense, and
soaseaneney in direct discourse, takes the place of the Ind. Future, e. g.
"Hryyeirer, Sri morcuian vixhaoorey (that the enemy WOULD conquer). X. An. 7.
1, 33. frAeyev, Sri Eromos ety HycioSa adrois els Tr) AéAta kadobuevor, tvSa TOAAR

352 | SYNTAX. [§ 258.

kal ayaSa AhWoty ro (where they WOULD receive), X. Cy. 8. 1,43. emmedcitro
bros phre Gorrot, whre &rorol more EcorvTo. (But émmedcirat, irws.... ecor-
tat). X. An. 4.1, 25. pn eivou dxpov, d ei uh TIS MpoKaTaArAhWotto, adbvaroy
treodat maperdeiv, (Oratio recta: ei mpoxatadhWerat, &dbvaroy tora TapeAdety.)

Rem, 2. Verbs of willing, refusing, delaying, entreating, persuading, com-
manding, forbidding, hindering, of being able, and unable, expecting (zpos-
Sond, ewidotds ciut, eixds eorw, it is likely, to be expected), when they relate to a
future object, are sometimes connected with the Fut. Inf., sometimes with the
Pres., sometimes with the Aor. The Fut. Inf. is used, when the idea of futurity is
to be made specially prominent, e. g. a condition continuing in the future; the
Inf. Pres:, to denote a continuing or permanent condition, the idea of futurity,
evident of itself, being left out of sight; this Inf. is also used to denote the
immediate occurrence of the action; the Inf. Aor., when the idea of the action
itself is made prominent. In English all three forms of the Inf., when the subject
of the Inf. is the same as that of the governing verb, are translated by the Pres.
Inf.: MéeAAw ypderv,ypdperv, ypdwar (Lam now about to write, intending
to write). ‘Advvarol eiaiy émmedcis ExceaSaz (unable to become and continue
careful), X. Oec. 12,12. “Addvarol eiouy eis émimérciay Ta Kat’ aypdy epywyv
matdeverdat, ib. 12,15. “Addvaror quiy Ecovrat tarrny Thy émmérciay
didaxSHvai, ib. 12,13. "“AvaBdAAerat Torvhoery Td déovra, Dem.31, 9.
"ASnvaion GveBdAAovTO 7d) wiv wnxavhoagdat, Her. 6, 58. "EAmwiCet
padiws suas €~awarhoery, Dem, 860, 54 (he hopes to deceive you). "EAm{(das
mapéxeTat nas evdaiuovas morjoast, Pl. Symp. 193, d. (he gives hope that he
will make us happy). With verbs of willing or being able, the Fut. Inf. is more
seldom than the Aor. or Pres. After verbs of saying, promising, swearing,
thinking, the above threefold construction (Inf. Fut., Pres., Aor.) is used, but the
Inf. Aor. regularly expresses something past (see No. 1), seldom what is future,
e. g. Oi Matas évéuioav émideueva padiws kpatjaat, Th. 2, 3, (se victores
fore). “Aréxpwat, & “Ayépate* ob yap olwal oe tapvoy yevéoSat, & evaytloy
‘Adnvalwy amdvtwy éroinoas, Lys. Agor. § 32 (credo te negaturum). After verbs
of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with &y, is often used in
nearly the same sense as the Inf. Fut. without &. See § 260, (5), (a).

§258. B. A more particular View of the Modes.

The Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im-

perative Modes [§ 253, (b)], are distinguished as follows:

(a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact.

Td fddov SdAAet ‘O marhp yéypahe thy emororAhy. Of morduior
amépuyov. Of wodtrat Tovs moAeulous vixhoovcty.

(b) The Subjunctive denotes a supposition, conception, or
representation, The Subj. of the Hist. tenses is called the
Optative.

“Toney ! eamus! —Tt motdpev ; quid faciamus? what shall we do? Ovx exw,
bro. Tpdmwwpmat, nescio, quo me vertam. Od elxov, bra Tpamoluny, nescie-
bam, quo me verterem. Aéyw, tv €i87s, dico, ut scias, in order that you may know
it. “EAcka, W” €idelns, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it.

(c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the
will, being used in commands, entreaties, etc.

$269.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353

Tpdpov and ypdde, write. Bpadéws uty pros ylyvou, vyevduevos Bt reipa diapé-
veww, Is. Dem. 7, Tpavdrw and ypapéra, let him write (§ 257,1.b). The com-
mand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com-
mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp.

Remark. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to
the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i.e. they never
show the actual condition of an action; the Ind., in itself, does not denote
something actual; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible; nor the Imp.,
something necessary ; the language represents these ideas by special expres-
sions, ¢. g. dAnSas, dUvacSai, Sez, xp7}, etc. ‘The modes express subjective rela-
tions solely, i.e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he
conceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an
act of supposition or conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses
an actual perception; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents
as a reality, whether an actual, objective fact, or a conception; even the future,
which, in itself is something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker
as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Fut. Ind. The Subj. expresses
a conception; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as &
conception, whether it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental
conception. The Imp. expresses desire; it denotes what the speaker conceives
and represents as something desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity
or not.

§259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im-
perative.

1. The Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as
well as the Sub. Aor., alway relates to future time [§ 257, 1, (a)],
and is used in Principal clauses:

(a) In the first Pers. Sing. and Pl. in exhortations! and warn-
ings, where the Eng. uses /et, /et us, with the infinitive; the
negative is here p7.

(b) In the first Pers. Sing. and PI. in deliberative? questions,
when the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do,
what it is best to do; here also the negative is ju.

“*Iwuer, eamus! let us go, suppose we go! Mh twmev. “Aye (pépe, 2a) twuer.
Hépe (3 w (come now, let me see), Her. 7, 103, bépe 54, 7 F bs, rer pasa mpos
buds drodoyhoacsa, Pl. Phaedon. 63,b. Such an exhortation is very often ex-
pressed in the form of a question preceded by BovAa; yet in this case, the
subjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on BovaAe, e. g. BovAe: ody, dbo
€f6n SG uev wewovs ; (do you then wish that we propose two kinds of persuasions =
let us propose), Pl. Gorg. 454,e. Tl ro:dmev; quid faciamus? what shall we
do? Etmwpev, i) o1yG@muev; Eur, Ion. 771. In Mot tis ppovtidos ZAay; S.

* This use of the Subj. is called Conjunctivus adhortativus.
? Conjunctivus deliberativus.

30*

ed

354 SYNTAX. [§ 259.

O. C. 170, rls is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go? (= mot %ASw
or €ASaper, like wot ppevav ZASw; 310). Mh Epwuat; shall I not ask? X. C.1.
2,36. “Ooa of dAlyor Tobs woAAOds wh weloavTes, GAAG KpaTodYTES ypdpouc., WéT-
cpoy Biay PaGmev, 2) wy POmev eivat; 45. So also in indirect discourse,
and in all persons. Odx exw, dro tpdmwpuev (I know not, whither I shall turn
myself, what I shall do). Ov etovow éxeiva, bra: PUywot, X. An. 2.4,20. Ovx
aid ef 8@ (7d Exrwua), I do not know whether I shall give the cup, Cy. § 8. 4, 16.

Remark 1. In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes the form
of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. x, 77.
EAS@uev F ava kotv, Boy F Skiota yévoito. Yet there are also passages
in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with aye and pépe instead
of the Imp., e. g. bép’, & Téxvov, viv Kal Td THs vhoov wads, S. Ph. 300.

Rem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with wf to express a prohibi-
tion, e. g. wh ypdys, ne scripseris, do not write, see No. 5.

Rem. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by ef3e with the Subj. instead of
the Opt. E%S aidépos &vw mrwxddes dtvrdévov did mveduatos EXwaol pw (0 si
aves me sursum in aetherem per auras stridentes capiant), S. Ph. 1094 (without varia-
tion). Comp. Ete tivés etvad Sixatwy tuevalwy év “Apyet Pavact Téxvoit
Eur. Suppl. 1028. E%3’ — atoxuoy eldos avt) Tod kaAod AdBw (in some MSS.
AaBeiy), Hel. 262.

Rem. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently used in
principal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Fut. Ind., though with a
slight difference of meaning. Both express a present conception of a future
action; but the Fut. Ind. represents what is still in the future as known and
certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represeats what is future as
merely a concession or admission of something expected. Il. ¢ 459. kal
mworé Tis etwnaty (and one MAY say, it may be expected or conceded that one will
say). Il. y, 197. ob ydp ris we Bin ye Exdy aexovra Sintar (one will not force me
away = I will not admit that one will, etc.). a, 262. od yap mw Tolous tov avépas,
od T8wuar (nor do I expect that I shall see such men, nor am I to see; ovd¢
bYouat, would mean, J certainly shall not see). Od. ¢, 201. od« @o¥ obTos avhp
diepds Bpotds, ovde yévntat. m, 437. obk %oY ovTos avhp, ovF Zroera ovde
yévntat (nor is it to be expected that he will be). The frequent use of the Subj.
with ovde wf in the Attic writers, is wholly analogous to the principle just
stated. See under § 318, 6.%, .

2. The Opt. Impf. and Aor. is also used in principal sen-
tences, to denote deliberative questions (i. e. such as express
doubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques-
tions in referring to past time.

Theocr. 27, 24. aoAAol p’ éuvdovro, voov 8 éuby otis €ade*— kal tl, pidros,
pétatur; yduor wAHSovew avias, i. e. quid FACEREM ? sc. tum, quum multi nup-
tias meas ambiebant, sed eorum nullus mihi placebat, what could I then do? 'The
deliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to an
historical tense in the principal clause. "Emjpero 6 Sedans tov waida, ci maloesev
avrév, X. An. 7.4, 10 (whether he should put him to death). Oi’ Emddurio wéu-
Wavtes és AcAgods Thy Yedv emhpovto, ci Tapadotev Kopwaios thy réAw, Th.
1, 25 (whether they should surrender the city).

a

§ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355

Rem. 5. In the principle given in No.2, the act of supposition or conception
belongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the
historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the
act of supposition or conception isa presentone. When a present conception is
expressed by the subjunctive, e. g. twuev, eamus, rl efmaper ; quid dicumus ?
then the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the

resent point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the

pt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it
were, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the
present and the actual accomplishment, and represents the conception as one
separate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed
in this way, very naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. ‘Thence
arises the following use :

3. The Opt. Aor. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses),
is used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the
following cases:

(a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present
or future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption
or admission. The prose-writers here commonly use the modal
adverb ay with the Opt., § 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very
frequently use the Opt. without dy. A negation is here ex-
pressed by od (ovx).

*O 88 abtd aitg avduoioy etn Kal didpopor, eXoAH yé tod Tw HAA Buorov }) plrov
vy évotro (that would scarcely be like or friendly to another, as one would readily
admit), Pl. Lysid. 214,d. ’Awodopuévns 58 rijs Yuxijs tér Hdn Thy piow Tijs
dodevelas 2wmiderkvvol 7) caua Kal tax’ catty d:0ixo1To (animo exstincto
tum vero corpus imbecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or
assume, that the body would give signs of weakness), Phaed. 87, e.

(b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by pj.

Il. x, 304. wh wav Gomovdl ye Kal axrcas &modroluny, may I not perish! S.
Aj. 550. & wat, yévoro matpds ebruxéorepos, Ta 8 BAN’ Buowos! Kal yévor’ ay ob
kaxdés, may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other things like him! then
you would not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. AAA’, & Zed wéywre, AaBeiv por
yévotto abtdy, as éy® BolAoun, may Tbe able to take him. The wish is com-
monly introduced by efSe, ei ydp (in the poets also by ef alone). Od. y, 205.
ei yap euol tocohvde Seol divauw wapaseiev! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. ef yap
yévo.ro! (In poetry ds is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. és
amdAo01T0 TayKkaxas! )

Rem. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be
realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e. g. Efe tovto éylyvero!
elde TovTo eyévero! utinam hoc I ote esset! O that this were done, or had been
done! So SHeres ypdwa! O that you had written! (but I know that you have
not). X. An. 2.1, 4. GA’ Sere ev Kipos Gv! O that Cyrus were still alive!
(but I know that he is not). Also efSe, ei ydp, ds Spedoy, es, e(v) with

eC Ne) he a a ae
[i \A ae Se " aa
5 eis E

ee. SYNTAX, [§ 259.

the Inf., particularly in poetry. On the wish expressed by wés &y with the Opt.,
a § 260, 2, (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, see
em. 3.

(c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the
form of a wish.

Od. &, 408. rdxi0Td wor Evdoy Eraipor ei ev, let my companions come within. IL.
Khpvt tls of Erotto yepalrepos, let some herald follow. Arist. Vesp. 1481.
Epdor.ris hy Exaotos cideln réxvyv. X. An. 3. 2, 387. ef wey ody BAAos tis
BéAtwov bp, BAAwS EX ETW* ci FE wh, Xeipicopos wiv Hyotro.

(d) The Optative is used to express a desire, wish, and
inclination, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza-
tion. A negation is here expressed by py.

Theocr. 8, 20. tavray (thy otpryya) kat Selny (I would be willing or desire
to place)’ 7a 5&7@ marpds od xatadnod. Her. 7,11. wh yap etnv ek Aapefov
yeyovas, wh Tywwpnoduevos “ASnvatous, I should not be descended from Darius,
unless, etc.

(e) In direct questions the Opt.is used, when a mere admis-
sion or supposition is expressed.

(a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis
to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex-
pressed by the question. II. 5, 93, seq. 9 fd vd poi tt wio10, Avedovos vie
daippov; TAalns nev Meveadw émimpocuey raxiv idv, waot 5é Ke Tpderot xdpiv
kat Kddos &poro, will you now listen to me, i. e. if you will, you would dare, etc. (the
same as ef tl wor widoro, TAatns Kev, etc.). Here risoxo, ete. is the in-
terrogative clause containing the condition, and tAal7s, ete. the conditioned
clause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the
first, expressed by the Opt. without &y, contains the condition, the last, ex-
pressed by the Opt. with &y, contains the conditioned clause. Il. ¢, 191. 4 fd
vv pot tial Soro, pirov réxos, SrT1 Kev elrw, hé kev &pvhoaro Korecoauervn Toye
Suug@ ; will you be persuaded by me,—or will you refuse? (8) In the Attic writers,
the Opt. is also used ina question without reference to a conditioned clause.
These questions, however, always imply a negative. Aesch. Choeph. 4A’
iméptoAuoy avdpds ppdvnua tis Aéyou; who could describe? —no one, i. e. who
can you suppose could describe? §. Ant. 604. redv, Zed, Stvacw tls avdpav irrep-
‘Bacla natrdoxor; who could restrain? i.e. who can be supposed to restrain?
Arist. Plut. 438. &vat “AmodAov Kab Seol, wot tis Pbyot, where could one fly ?
Dem. Phorm. 921, 1. nat oa wey efre wera Tis GANSelas, wh xpHoSe Texunplo* &
v ebevocaro 7d borepoy, motérepa tad® brordBorre elva; haec vos veriora
existimaturos quis putet! Pl. Rp. 437, b. ap ojy —mdvta Ta ToadTa Tay evayTioy
&AAHAOS Selns ; can you consider all such things to be opposite to each other? i.e.
can I assume that you, ete.

i We Ok) NE ia. oe a i ae

§ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. ~ 357

Rem. 7. The deliberative Opt. (No. 2) differs from this.

Rem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (b) (c) (d) (e), are to be regarded
as elliptical sentences, which have originated from a conditional sentence like
ef rt Peers, Solns &y [§ 339, IT, (a)], if you had, you would give.

(4) The following points in addition are to be observed
respecting the Imp., [§ 258, 1, (c)]: Though the Imp. always
refers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several
Imp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf., and Aor. These forms, how-
ever, do not express a different relation of time, but only the
different condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif-
ference between the Imp. Aor. ypdov and the Pres. ypdde, has
been explained, § 257, 1, (b). The Imp. Perf. has always the
sense of the Pres., with the accompanying idea of the perma-
nence or continuance of the result, e. g. péuvnoo, memento, be
mindful, remember; 4 Sipa xexXeiaSw, let the door be shut
(and remain shut). See § 255, Rem. 5d.

5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with py (me), the
Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp.;
but instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used.

Mh) ypd¢e or ph ypdwns (but neither uh ypdons, nor wh ypdyov). My
ypadérw or ph ypdvn, ne scribito (but neither uh ypddn, nor uh ypavdrw).
M4 po dyrirevye or mh por avtirAé€ins, do not speak against me (but
neither uh avridyns nor ph avtiretov). Isoc. Dem. 24. Mndéva opidov rood
mp ty éerdons, mas Kéxpnta Tos mpdtepoy pldas. 36,29. undev) cvupopas
dverdions* Kowh yap H TUxN Kal Td péAAOY Gdparov. Th. 3,39. KodAacShrwcay
dé Kal viv atiws ris Gdiclas, kal wh Tors wey dAlyos 4 aitla mposte dH, Tov dé
Sipov &roAvaonre.

Rem. 9. Yet sometimes in the Epic poets, though very seldom in other
poets, uf is found with the second Pers. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. Il. 5, 410. rg

bh por warépas woY duoly EvSeo Suug. The third Pers. is frequently found
even in the Attic prose writers. X. Cy. 8. 7, 26. undels idér a.

6. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used (the second more
seldom), to denote that the speaker admits or grants something,
the correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself.
This is called the concessive Imp.

Obras éxétw, as od Aéyeis (admit that it is as you say), P. Symp. 201, c.
"Eotkétw@ dy (4 Wx) Eyudite@ duvduer dromwrédpov Cedyous te Kal hvidxov (grant
that the soul is like, etc.), Phaedr. 246, a. Aeyérw rep) adrod, as Exacros
yryvéone: (admit that each one speaks of it), Th. 2, 48.

Pe a a oe

358 SYNTAX. oft 260.

Rem. 10. In the interrogative formula of the Attic poets: ofc3 8 dpacov ;
—oicY ws wolnoov ; (do you know what you are to do?), the Imperative is to be
explained as a transition, easy to the Greeks, from the indirect to the direct
form of speech. It is also explained by considering it the same as dpacor,
ola 6; do, —do you know what? The formula is a softer mode of expression
than the Imp. dpacor or roinoov. The use of the third Pers. Imp., not only
in dependent questions, but also in other subordinate sentences, is according to
the same analogy. Her. 1, 89. viv dv molnooy @de, ef Tor apéoker, TA Cyd A€yw°
Katicov tev Sopupdpwy él mdonot THot wIAnoL puddKous of AeydvTav—, os
ohea (SC. xphuata) dvayKxatws exer Sexarevdijvat TG Ait (od Aeydvtwy = kal
ottotr Aeydvtwr, who should say, or and let them say). Th. 4, 92. detta,
bri— katadoswoauyr, they might obtain!

Rem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp.to the second, see § 241,
Rem. 13, (c); on the use of the Fut. instead of the Imp., see § 255, 4, and on
the Opt. with & in the sense of the Imp., § 260, 2, (4) (b).

§ 260. The Modes in connection with the Modal
Adverb dy (xé «év).

1. The Modal adverb av (Epic xé(v), Doric xa, xv), denotes the
relation of a conditioning expression or sentence to a condi-
tioned one; indicating that the predicate of the sentence to
which it belongs, is conditioned by another thought either ex-
pressed or to be supplied. By the particle dv, the realization
of the predicate is made to depend upon the realization of
another predicate. Therefore, where a predicate is accom-
panied by ay, the predicate is represented as conditioned by
another thought; av always refers to a condition.

2. A complete view of the use of dv cannot be presented
except in connection with conditional sentences. Yet, as it
is used in all kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain
its construction here. It is connected:

(1) With the Fut. Ind. The predicate expressed by the
Fut. Ind.» seems to the speaker, at the time then present,
always to depend on conditions and circumstances. "Whenever
this idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, dy
(Epic xé) can be joined with the Fut.; yet this construction is
rare in the Attic dialect.

Od. p, 540. ei & *Oduceds ZASoi—, ald ne oby G maid) Blas &roticeras
avdpav, he would punish. Il. &, 267. GAN 1, eyo 5é Ké Tot Xapirwv plav
brAoTtepdwy Show druieuevat, dabo, scil.si tibi lubuerit. X. Cy. 6.1, 45. 5Bpiorhy obv
voulCwy abtdy, ed o1d br: Bouevos By mpds &vdpa, oios ob cl, ATaAAaYHCET AL

(so the MSS.). 7.5,21.dray 88 nal aloSwrrat judas 2vdov dvras, word by ert uGAdrov,.
f viv, &xpeion Ecovrat bmd Tod exmemaAnxSa (dy is wanting in only two MSS.).

$260. MODAL ADVERB dy. 359

Remark 1. With the Pres. and Perf. Ind., & is not used. For that which
the speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be expressed
as something, the realization of which is dependent on another thought. In
those passages where &y is found with the Pres. or Perf. Ind., either the reading
is questionable, or &y must be referred to another verb of the sentence, e. g¢. Od«
old dy ei weioaim (instead of ef weloame kv), Eur. Med. 937; so often voul(w &y,
olucs &v and the like followed by an Inf., where & belongs to the Inf.; or it is’
to be considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. 8. 4, 37. éya& dé
oft w ToAAa txw, ds wddus adTa Kal eyo By abtds eipioxw, I have so many things
that I with digiculty Jind them, indeed if I should seek for them myself, I should not
Jind them. Nor is &yv used with the Imp. For what the wpaakit expresses as
his immediate will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The
few passages referred to in proof of the use of & with the Imp., are all, criti-
cally considered, questionable and prove nothing.

(2) “Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses: the
Aor., Impf. and Plup. :

(a) To denote that something might take place under a cer-
tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi-
tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed
by «i with the Ind. of the historical tenses. re

Ei rovro tAeyes (fAckas), nudpraves (Huapres) &y, i.e. if you said this,
you were wrong, or if you had said this, you would have been wrong, but now I know
that you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong; Lat. si hoc divisses,
errasses (at non dixisti; ergo non errasti). EY ts efyxouerv, €dldouerv
(f5ouev) uy, if we had anything, we would give it to you, or if we had had any-
thing, we would have given it to you; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus, Also with-
out an antecedent clause, e. g. éxdpns tv, laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc vidisses).

Rem. 2. Here belong also the expressions, g@éuny &v, Eyvw tis hy,
Hoserds tis &v, Serd Tis Hy, and the like, as in Latin, putares, crederes, diceres,
_ cerneres, videres, you (one) would think, or you (one) would have thought. Here ei
mwapiv, «i treyev, ci eldev, ci eddvaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent
clauses, are to be supplied. “EvSa 3) yva@ tis ky tobs duotipwous wemadeupé-
vous, ws det (tum vero videres, then one might see, were he present), X. Cy. 3. 3,
70. *EvSa 5) Eyva@ tis tv, dcou &iioy ein Td pircioda: Upxovta bd TaY apxone-
voy, 7.1, 38. Ebdsis ody rovtos cismndjoaytes eis Tov mnAdy SaTTov, } ds Tis bv
@eto, petewpous eexducay ras audtas (celerius, quam quis crederet), An. 1.5, 8.
"Ereppaocdsn & &y tis xaxeiva idéy (one might be encouraged if he saw those
_ things), Ag. 1, 27.

Rem. 8. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, & is often omitted. Then

_ the speaker has no reference, in his representation, to the condition contained
in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the
_ apodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he emphatically represents
_ the predicate as an actual fact. X. An. 7. 6,21. Etro: 34 Tis &yv* Otxour aicxtvp
obrw uwpas etamatduevos ; Nal ua Ala jo xuvdunv pévror, ci bd modeulou ye Sytos
einrarhsny* obid@ 8 tyr: ckaratay aloxidv wor done? elvan, }) Cawatacda. ae

_ Leoer, p. 154, 23. ef wey obv (av éeriyxavey 6 Autytas, éxeivoy aitoby wapetxe-
pnv* viv 88 duty Kad@ tovs cuveiddéras. The ellipsis of & is most frequent in
_ expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, reasonableness, possibili-
_ ty, liberty, and inclination, e. g. x piv, @5e1, SPeAov; with verbal pe iy
in réos; with rposfxe, waipds fv, eixds Hy, Kaddy hv, alcxpy hy,

360 gynrax. — [§ 260.

&trov hv, KarGs elxe, etijv, bwipxev, fucrrev, €Bovraduny. Lys.
123, 3. xpiiv dé ce, elrep oda xpnotds, Tord wadrAoY unvuThy yevécRar* viv bé
gov Ta Epya pavepda yeyévnta K. T. A., you ought or you ought to have been
(oportebat). X.C.2.7, 10. ei mev tolvuy aicxpdy tt Eucddrov epydoacdat, Sdva-
Tov GT avTovU mpoatpetéoy jy’ viv d & wey Sone? KdAATA Kal TpeT@deaTepa
yuvaitly elvar emioraytat, ds foie Kk. T. A., mors praeferenda erat. So also with
the Inf. X. C. 1.3, 3. otre yap Seots pn karG@s €xerv, ei tails weyddas
Svolas uaddAoy t Tats ouKpais Exatpov, for he said it would not be proper for the
gods, if, etc. Very often without an antecedent sentence, e.g. aio xpdy hy
Taira moteiv, turpe erat, it would be base, would have been; é& jv radta moveiv
licebat, it would be lawful; kaX@s efxe. Comp. with the above the use of the
Ind. in Latin, where the Subj. on te have been expected, in such expressions as
aequum, justum, rectum est, it would be proper, longum est, it would be tedious, and
the participle in dus in the conclusion of a conditional clause, as Si Romae
Cn. Ponpinis privatus ESSET, tamen is ERAT DELIGENDUS.

Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, & can be used; so also in
Latin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 1.
ei yap éx Tod mpoedndvddros xpdvov T& déovra obTor guveBovAevaay, ovdiy hy
judas viv der BovrAeveocsat. So also in Lat. the Subj. is used instead of the
Ind.

Rem. 5. The Pres. tense of xph, Sez, rposhxer, nadds Ze, etc., is used of
things which can yet take place. Comp. possum commemorare, which implies
that I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I
cannot do it.

Rem. 6. ~Ay is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind.
of an historical tense of the verb nivSuvdery, to be in danger, to seem, since
the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected with it,
did not take place; for what is only in danger of occurring, actually does not
occur. Th. 3, 74. 7 wéds exivddvevoe rica diapdapivat, ei Kvewos emeyévero
Th paroyi éxlpopos és abrhy, the whole city was or would have been in danger
of destruction, if. Aeschin. ¢. Ctes. 515, R. ef wh Spdup pris ekepbyouey eis
Acrdots, éxivduvetoauey amoréodau. So if in the apodosis, daAlyoyr,
fixpov, rdxa, nearly, almost, are joined with the Ind. of a historical tense
in the concluding clause; for what only nearly takes place, actually does
not take place, hence the Ind. without &y is appropriate in both these cases.
Plat. Symp. p. 198, C. éywye evSupotmevos, iti ards obx ofds 7’ Evouat odd? eyyds
TovTwy ovdey Kaddy citer, bw aicxivns bAiyou &modpas dx dmny, ef Ty elxov,
I had almost fled for shame, if. Without a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. kai mws
diarndav aitge 6 trwos miwre eis ydvara, ka mikpod Kaeo CEeT pax hat-

aoev. Comp. the Lat. prope (paene) cecidi, I came near falling.

(8) To denote that an action takes plaee (is repeated), in
certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his-
torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the
Impf. The condition under which the action is repeated,
is expressed by a subordinate clause with <i, dre, ete. and
the Opt.; the condition, however, is often omitted.

Elmer dy, he was accustomed to say, he would say as often as this or that happened,
as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6,13. ef 8€ vis abrg@ mepl rov
&yvreréyot, em thy irddeow ewaviyev &v mdvTa Tov Adyor, as often as
one contradicted him, he would (he was accustomed to) carry back the whole argument
to the original proposition. 1.3,4,. ei 5é 71 dE erev abs (Zwxpdrer) onuatvec-

-_— —s

$ 260.] MODAL ADVERB ay. 361

Sa: rapa trav Sedv, irrov dy ewelody mapa ra onuawdueva wojoa, h ris
abrdy Exrewdev bd00 AaBeiv iyyeudva TupAdy — dyTl BAéwortos. An. 2. 3, 11. & TIS
ait@ dSoxoln tay mpds rotro terayudvwy Braxedew, Exarcev kv, he would beat
him. 1.5, 2. of uev bvor, ewel ris Bichnor, mpodpaydyres by Egtacay, as often as
any one pursued them, they would stop (the Plup. having the sense of the Impf.
§ 255, Rem.3). 3. 4, 22, édwére 5 didoxorey al mAevpal rod mwAaclov, 7d pwécoy
ay dbemlumraAacay.

(3! With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception,
which the Greek expresses by the Sub. [§ 257, 1, (a)], as con-
ditional, and depending on circumstances. The following cases
are to be distinguished :

(a) The deliberative Subj. [§ 159, 1, (b)], takes dv, though but
seldom in direct, more frequently in indirect questions, when
a condition is to be referred to.

Timor’ kv ody Aéywpuev; (what shall we therefore say, if the thing is so?)
etc. Pl. L. 655, c. éy® yap todTo, & Mporaydpa, ove Suny Sidanrdv elvat, col 5e
A€yort: obk %xw Brws by awiorG (i.e. ei cd Adyas), [know not how I could
disbelieve it, if you say so, Prot. 319,b. “Avy F ad jets vinGmev, AcAvuévns THs
yepupas obx Etovew exeivot, Srov bv pPbyworv, X. An. 2.4,20. Ei dé co: uh
Bonet, oxeba, edy (i. @. ef bv) Téde cor wadAAoy apéaky, C. 4. 4, 12.

(b) The Subj., which is often used in the Homeric language instead of the
Fut. Ind. (§ 259, Rem. 4), is frequently found with &, which is to be explained
in the same manner as with the Fut. Ind. [No. 2, (1)]. Ei 5€ xe wh déwow, eyo
8é Kev aitds EXwpmae Il. a, 137, then I myself will (without doubt) take it, less
direct than the Fut. Od« dy ta xpatopun xiSapis, Il. y, 54.

(c) In subordinate clauses. In this case, dv usually stands
with the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines
with the conjunction and forms one word.

In this way originate édy (from ei av), éwdy (from érel &v), dray (from Gre Gy),
éréray (from éadére ty), mply ty, WS bv, 831 by, ob tv, Srov ty, of Ey, Sra by, F
ty, San ty, bSev ty, SrdSev ty, etc., ds Ky (quicunque or si quis), olos tv, droios iy,
bcos dy, dxdcos ty, etc. In all these expressions, a possible assumption is de-
noted ; it is assumed that something is possible in the future; the future occur-
rence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. e. the speaker
assumes and expects that it will be, e. g. éav todro,Aéyns, if you say, shall say
this (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), auaprhop, you
will be wrong.

(4) With the Opt., but not with the Opt. Fut.

(a) The Opt. with & must always be considered as the principal clause of a.
conditional sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. «f Tt Exots, dolns ty,
31

0 ee a ee: ee, ey

362 SYNTAX. [§ 260.

if you had anything, you would give it (you may perhaps have something, and
then you may give it to me). The Attic writers in particular, use this mode
of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of
anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation
and modesty. A negation is here expressed by ob(x). Her. 3, 82. avdpds évds,
Tod dpiorov (i.c. «i &pioros ein) ovdev Hucwov &v paveln, nothing would seem
better than. 7,184. &vdpes dy elev ev adroior Téccepes pvpiddes Kad eZxoor, there
may have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5,9. yévorro 8 by way év
TO waxp@ xpdve@, all might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2,11. Snpdvres odk kv apioth-
gatev, while hunting they would not breakfust = they do not breakfast. 13.
émeway Ta wévTe Kal elxoow ern SiateAdowow, eftnoav pev dy obTOL wAciby TE
yeyovétes 7} mevthxovta ern amd yeveds. Pl. Gorg. 502, d. Anunyopia kpa ris
éorw } morntixh, Call. balverar. Socr. Odxodv } pyropixh Snunyopla dv e%n.
By the Opt. with &v, Homer [§ 339, 3, (a) (8)] and Herodotus often denote a
supposition respecting something that is past. Her. 9, 71. tadra uy kal pddve
dv efmorey, they might have said these things from envy. 1,2. etnoav & by
obrot Kpijres, these might have been Cretans.

Rem. 7. If the Opt.is used without &, as § 259, 3, (a), the action is ex-
pressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the speaker has no refer-
ence to the conditioning circumstances, which might prevent the realization of
the thing conceived. Comp. feta deds y éSéAwy kal THAdSEv EVEpa TCadoat,
the propitious deity, 1 THINK, CAN save, Od. y, 231, and cadaat &v, COULD,
MIGHT save, if he wished. Hence the omission of & in the freer language of
poetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to the actual
relation of the things described.

(b) So also the Opt. is used with ay, as a more modest and
mild expression of a command or request, since the thing de-
sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person
addressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega-
tion is expressed by od(«).

Pl. Phaedr. 227, c. A€yots &y instead of Aéye (properly, you may speak, if you
choose). Tim. 19,0. dkoboir &v Hdn Ta peta TadTa wep Tis TodrTelas, you
might hear then, instead of hear then. S. El. 1491. xwpois ty, you might go. Il.
B, 250. with a degree of irony, @epair’? — toxeo —! od yap ey véo pny) xepetd-
tepov Bporby &AdAov Eupevai—* TE odK by Bacirsjas ava ordw Exwy ayoped-
os, kal opw dveldcd re mpopépots, vdoroy Te PvAdaoors! instead of wh
&ydpeve, etc., you should not harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form
of a question, X. Hier. 1,1. Gp’ &y wo. €SeAhoats, & ‘lépwv, Sinyhoasda, &
eixds idévar ot BéATioy euod ; would you be inclined, viz.,if I should ask you. With
ov in the form of a question, Il. «, 456. od « &v 5) rdvd Kvdpa udxns Epdoaro
pereaAdav ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him.
In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, Il. w, 263. obk by 54
po tpatay €bomAlocoaire tTdxioTa, Tadrd Te TWdyT emidetre, a mphoocw-
Bev d8010 ; would you not get ready the chariot, if I commanded it ?

ee a

$§ 260.] MODAL ADVERB ay. 363

(c) The Optative with dy has the same force in interrogative
as in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the
auxiliaries can, could, would.

Il. w, 367. ef rls oe Yorro. ., rls bv Bh ror vdos etn; how would you then feel?
Il. +, 90. GAAG th kev JéEarus; what could Ido? §. Ph. 1393. ri dir’ bv jyueis
Spapuerv; Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, 10. Aéyeral te nawdv; yévoito yap ty Tt Kawwo-
Tepov, }} Maxeddv avhp "ASnvalovs karawodcua@y; can there be any stranger news
than —?

Rem. 8. Comp. wot tis pev-ye: ; whither does one flee? Arist. Plut. 438. wot
Tis piya ; sone may one flee? (more definite than with ay). Eur. Or. 598.

mot Tis by ere whither would one flee? whither could one flee? where in the
world could ‘flee? S. Aj. 403. wo? tis obv piyn ; whither shall one flee or is one

to flee?

(d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the
form of a question, by 7s and the Optative with dy, it being
asked how something might, could, would take place under a
given condition.

Soph. Aj. 338. é Zed, —wGs by roy aiuvadraroy..ddréooas rédos Sdvoipe
xabrés ; how might, could, would I die? instead of, O that I might die! Eur. Ale.
867. ras &v dAolunrv; Pl. Euthyd. 275,c. rés &v Karas co Sinynoal-
nv; howcan I appropriately describe to you? O that I could!

Rem. 9. But the Opt. in itself, as the expression of a wish, does not take
the conditioning adverb &y [§ 259,3,(b)]. Il. ¢ 281. &s Ké of abot yaia xdvou
is not properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (4s =
obrws) the earth should then open for him.

(5) The Inf. and Part. take dv (xé), when the finite verb, which
stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it:

(a) The Inf. with & after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently the Inf.
Pres. and Aor. with ay, instead of the Ind. Pres.and Aor. with &y, or instead of
the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with & in direct discourse; the same principle holds
when the Inf. is used as a substantive. The Jnf. Perf: with & instead of the
Ind. and Opt. Plup. with &, is more seldom. The Jnf. Fut. with &y is rare in
Attic; instead of it the Inf. Aor. or even the Pres. with & is commonly used.

EY 71 elxev, tm, Sodvat &y (Oratio recta: ef rr xov, Zwna kv), he said that
if he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse.
EY ri Exot, pn, dodvan Ky (Or. recta : ef re Exot, Sotny tv), dixit, se, si quid haberet,
daturum, esse. "Eyam Sox@ Sexdxis kv xara Tis ys Kkatadovar Fduov, ) 6¢6375-
vat oUrw ramewds, X. Cy. 5.5, 9 (Or. recta: dexduis kv GroSdvoims Hdwwv, F
ép3elnv), methinks I would rather sink ten times beneath the earth, than to be seen in
this humble condition. ‘“Hyoduat.. ok &v axplrous avtobs &mwAoAEvat, GAAS
Thy mposhkovaay dixny Sed5wxévai, Lys. 27, 8 (Or. recta: on kv AwWOAG@AE-
gav—ededdnecav kv). Ola yap odx by axaplorws wor Efecv, I think you
would not be unthankful to me, if I entreated the king, etc., (Or. recta: obx by &xa-

_

Oey Yea C2 a ne ae nt

364 SYNTAX. | [$ 261.

plorws wor %@xorre or sxolnre, but not eorre, see No.4). “Oow yap pellw
Sdvapw Exe h apxh, TorovTw maaddov by Hyhocato abthy nal KaTamwAhEety tovs
modlras, R.L.8,3. Tas exes mpds Td €DEAELY By ievar &eAntos em) Setrvoy;
(the same as w@s exes rpbs Totro btt EDEeAOLS by leva UKAnTos em) Sezrvov;)
Pl. Symp. 174, b. Ei ody Adyouut, ed of? Sts Snunyopety &v pe oalys, Pl.
R. 350, e. :

Rem. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows:
ypdpew ty = scripturum esse, yeypapévar tv = scripturum fuisse,
ypdwa ay = (a) scripturum fuisse, or (b) as Pres., scripturum esse,
ypavew ty = scripturum fore.

(b) The Participle with & after verba sentiendi, or when the Participle takes
the place of an adverbial subordinate clause. The same principles hold here
as with the Inf. The ut. Part. with & is rare in Attic Greek (the reading is
commonly doubtful when it occurs) ; instead of the Fut. Part., the Aor. or
even the Pres. with &, is generally used.

Her. 7, 15. eipioxw St Ge dv yivdmeva tadra, ci AdBos Thy euhy crevhy
(reperio, sic haec FUTURA ESSE, si sumas vestes meas). X. C. 2.2, 3. af wédAes
ém) rots peyloros Gdiuchuact (nulay Sdvarov wemorjnacw, &s ox dy welCovos Kakov
~6Bw Thy adulav ratboovres (existimantes se non gravioris mali metu injuriam
COERCITUROS FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no
greater evil). Th. 6, 38. otre tyra, otre dv yevdueva Aoyoroodow (i.e. &
obre eotiv, ott av yévoiro, they fabricate what neither is nor will be). Isocr.
Phil. 133. Ed tod: undevy &v we robtrwy emixerphoavrTd ce melSew, ei Svvac-
telay pdvov Kal wAovToy édpwy ef adtay yernoduevoy (= bri we xelpnaoa Ky).
Pl. Phil. 52, c. d:akexpiveda xwpls tds Te Kadapas jdovas Kal Tas oxeddy axaddp-
Tous ép8@s kv AexSeloas (= kal at cxeddy axdSapro: dpSds by AexAeiev).
So, also, with the case absolute: X. An. 5. 2, 8. éoxometro, mérepov etn Kpetrrov
damrdyew Kol Tovs diaBeBndtas, ) Kat rods dwAfras SiaBiBdlew, ds aGAXdvros by
Tov Xwplov (= voul(wy, bri 7 xwplov arAoln uy).

§ 261. Position and Repetition of av. “Av without a
Verb.

1. With the combination mentioned in 260, (3), ¢c., as ds &y, mply ty, small
particles like 5é, ré, uév, yap, sometimes come between, e. g. ds F &y.

2. As ay represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined
with the predicate, e. g. Aéyomu &y, ZAeyov ay; yet it commonly follows that
member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. Pl. Crito. 53, ¢.
Ka ok ote Boxnpmov kv haveioSa 7d ToD Swxpdrouvs mpayua. Hence it is
regularly joined to such words also as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to
negative adverbs and interrogatives, ¢. g. od« &r, od av, ofr’ tiv, oddéror’ ky,
ete. —rls ty, tl by, Th 8 by, rh Bir ay, was bv, Tas yap dy, Gp’ dy, etc.;— also
to adverbs of place, time, manner, and other adverbs, which, in various ways
modify the expression contained in the predicate and define it more exactly,

7
:
:
.
s

—”

§ 262.] ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTRUCTION. 365

e. g. evraida tv, rd7’ by, elxdrws ky, Yows tv, Td’ tiv, udrror’ by, fixer’ Ev, udrus
ty, oX0AH tv, padiws by, pgor’ ty, tdxior’ tv, opddp’ iv, jddws tiv, néy (instead
of xal uy, etiam, vel), etc.

Remark 1. In certain constructions, the & belonging to the Opt. is re-
moved from the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause ; this

is particularly the case in the phrase, ov« of dy ei. Pl. Tim. 26, b. eye ydp,
& wey x8ts Hoven, obk by olda ei Suvaluny drayta év uvhun wddAw AaBeiv.

Rem. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the & belonging to the Opt. is
placed first; thus particularly, &y ris eto, paln. Pl. Phaed. 87, a. ri obv (,) dy
galn 6 Adyos (,) ert amiorets ;

3. “Ay is very often repeated in the same sentence («é very seldom). The
reason of this is two-fold:

(a) It is used once at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in
the outset, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case,
when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or
when several words precede the conditioned verb to which & belongs. és7’
hy, ei odévos AdBoun SnAdoaip by of” adrois ppova, S. El. 333.

(b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. “Ay is joined with the word
which requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to
several words in one sentence, & can be repeated with each. But besides this,
&y can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs.
Pl. Apol. 35,d. capa@s yap &y, ei melSomu Suas, Seods By Fiddoxome wh
iryctoSan dues elvax. Eur. Troad. 1244. dgavets ty bytes otk &v burndeiuev
&y Motvoas.

Rem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker «é with &, in order to make
the conditionality or contingency still more prominent. Il. v, 127, sq. teravro
es.., &s ot &v kev “Apns évécairo meTeAd@r, oTE K Sear.

4.*Avis very frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a
verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context; thus especially
&s tv, dswep ty ci, Tas yap &v, Tas F od Kv, Sswep &v and the
like. oBSoduevos, Sswep &v ei mais (i.e. Sswep by oBoiro, «i mais ef), Pl.
Gorg. 479, a.

CHAPTER II.

§ 262. The Attributive Construction.

Atiributives serve to explain more definitely the idea
contained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g.
TO KANO podov, 6 wéyas wats. The attributive may be:

a. An adjective or participle, e. g. To KaXdv podoy, TO
SarXrov aos; |

31*

366 SYNTAX. [§ 263.

b. A substantive in the genitive, e.g. 06 trot Sévdpov
KapTrot ; |

c. A substantive with a preposition, e. g. 7 wpos THY
TONLV 6005;

d. An adverb, e. g. of viv aSpwrro ;

e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpoicos,6 Bactnevs.

$263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the
Attributive belongs.

When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the attributive,
contains a general idea, or one which can be easily supplied from the context,
or is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu-
lar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantive, as the
less important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the
adjective or participle becomes a substantive. Substantives which are often
omitted with attributive adjectives, are: tvSpwiros, tvSpwroi, avhp, uvdpes, yuh,
yuvaixes, xpijma, Xphuara, mparyya, mpdyuara, Huepa, yh, xdpa, wotpa, ddds, xelp,
yvaun, Vipos, TExvN, WéAEuOS, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are :
maThp, whtnp, vids, mais, Svydryp, adeApds, avhp (husband), yuvh (wife), oixta,
olxos, xapa, yj (land). The substantive is omitted with the following classes
of words:

a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle.

(a) Such as denote persons: of Svnrol, mortales ; of copol, of yervduevor (instead
of -yovets) ; of Exovres, the rich ; of puddrrovTes (piAates) ; of Sucdovres, judges ;
oi A€yorTes, orators, etc.

(8) Such as denote names of things: (a) appellatives: 7a juérepa (xphuara), res
nostrae; Ta eud, res meae, everything which relates to me ; t& Kadd, res pulchrae ; Td
kaxd, mala (§ 243, 4), » borepala, 7 emiovoa, mpdrn, Sevrépa, etc. (jucpa); 7
moreula (x@pa), the enemy’s country ; piAta, a friendly country ; 4 oixovnévn (yi),
the inhabited earth ; 4 &vvdpos (yn), a desert ; 4 edSeta (656s); Thy Taxlorny, quam
celerrime; Thy Yonv (uoipay) d&mrodiddvat; 7 wempwpmevn (motpa); 4) Sekid, apiorepa
(xelp); 4 vixdoa (yvdun); thy évaytlay (Vidov) -riSecda; 4 pnropuch (réxvn).

(b) Abstracts: 7d Kaddy, 7d a&yaddy, or TaryaSdy, the beautiful, the good; rd
evtuxés, good fortune; 7d dvalaSnrov, want of feeling; td Kowdy, the common-
wealth (e. g. Tv Saulwv) ; 7d Sapcoiv, confidence.

(c) Collective nouns denoting persons: 7d évaytiov, the enemy; Tb brhxoor,
the subjects. Adjectives in -ixév especially belong here, e. g. 7d wodrtixdy, the
citizens ; Td dmdutiKdv, the heavy armed ; 7d oixetixdy, the servants; 7 ‘EAAnKdr,
7» BapBapixdy, 7d immudy, ete. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often
used to denote a number, collection, or series of single events, e. g. Ta Tpwikd,
the Trojan war ; Ta “EAAnuixd, the Grecian history; 7&4 vavticd, naval war, but also

naval affairs. ;

“a se

§ 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 367

b. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive,
e. g.’AAdtavdpos, b diAlwrov (vids), Maia } “ArAayros (Suydrnp); then with the
prepositions éy, eis and é« with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. g.
ev Gov (olw) evar; els dou (olkov) eAdeiv; els idackdrwy porav, to go to the
teacher's ; eis TlAdtwyvos porray, wéumew, to go or send to Plato's; ék didacxddrwv
amadAdrresda, Pl. Protag. 326, ¢. to leave school ; eis thy Ktpou (viv) eadeiv;
ra Tis tixns, the events of fortune; Ta Tis méAcws, the affairs of state; Ta Tod
mod¢uou, the whole extent of the war ; Ta*ASnvalwy ppoveiv, ab Atheniensium par-
tibus stare; Td Tijs dpyijs, Ta Tijs euweiplas, To Tay emBumay (that which pertains
to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.) ; 72 tav maldwv, the custom of boys;
Td TaY aALewr.

ce. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. of viv, of rére, of
wdAat, of évddde (vSpwro), Ta otxor (mpdyuara), res domesticae, 4} ékijs, (jjpépa),
the following day, etc.

d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition
by which it is governed, e. g. of ka¥ jyuas, of ég jjuady, our contemporaries ; — oi
aupl or mepi twa, e. g. WAdtwva, signifies (a) a person with his companions,
followers, or scholars; of éuqi Mewtorparoy, Pisistratus and his troops ; of &uoh
@arjjv, Thales and other philosophers of his school ;*Apa Aéyes Thy tav Seav
kpiow, tv oi wept Kéxpowa 30 dperhy expivay, which Cecrops and his tribunal
on account of their excellence, decided, X. C. 8. 5, 10.— (b) more seldom the com-
panions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named. — Further, of
avy tim, of werd twos, the followers, etc. of any one; of bré tim, the subjects of
any one; of awd Twos, asseclae, or descendants of one; of év tater; of wept pidoao-
play ; of wept thy Shpav; of audi roy wéAeuov, etc.; —Td apd twos, intelligence
respecting any one, or commands of any one ; —7d xat’ éué, Td én” eué, as far as in
my power, as far as in me lies.

§ 264. a. Attributive Adjective.

1. The attributive adjective (participle, adjective pronoun
and numeral), expresses a quality which belongs to an object,
as the beautiful and blooming rose. On the agreement of the
adjective with the word which it defines, see § 240.

Remark 1. The participles Aeyéuevos and xadovpevos are used, where the
Latin has gui dicitur, vocatur, quem dicunt, vocant, etc., and the English the
phrase so-called, as it is called, are called, etc., e. g. Aaxedaimdviot Tov iepdy Kadrov-
evov médeuov éotpdtevoay (the Sacred war, as it is called, or the so-called Sacred
war), Th. 1,112. xowdv, drws 6 karkovpevos tmd Tay coputay Kdopuos Ep
(the néomos as tt is called by the sophists), X. C. 1.1, 11.

Rem. 2. It has already been stated (§ 245, Rem, 5), that the adjectives
&xpos, ueoos, trxaros, must in certain cases be translated into English by
substantives.

Rem. 3. Many personal nouns which denote an employment, station or
age, are treated as adjectives, and the word aie is joined with them, if the
man is to be considered in relation to his employment, station or age; but

368 SYNTAX. [§ 264.

the word ayfp is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing
the duties of a particular office or employment. Thus davyp udyris signifies a
man who is by profession a prophet, and udytis without évhp, a man who, for
the time being, acts as a prophet; thus avhp BactAeds, avijp tipavvos, avhp mot-
uny, avnp pare, évhp mpeoBurns, avhp veavlas, ypavs yurh, etc.; also in the
respectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. &vdpes
Sucacrat, dvSpes otpari@ra. So likewise with national names, e. g. avhp “ASn-
vatos, ABdnpirns. This usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger
Grammar, Part II. § 477.

2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub-
stantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is: (a) codrdinate,
when each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the
substantive ; then the adjectives are commonly connected by
kai, T¢—«xai; where there are several adjectives, the con-
nective is used only before the last; (b) subordinate, when a
substantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it were, a
single idea, and is more definitely defined by another adjective.
In this case there is no connective between the two adjec-
tives. The subordinate relation occurs particularly when pro-
nouns, numerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are
joined with other adjectives.

Swxpdtyns &yadds nal copds avhp jv. TloAAo) ayado) avdpes or moAAol
&yaSol Kat copol Uvdpes. TIoAAd Kadrdd Upya. ‘O épds Eraipos aopds.
Otros 6 avnp ayadds. Tpets ayadol dvipes. TO mparov Kardbv mpayya.
Od. ., 322, sq. fords vnds eetxordpoio weAalyns.

Rem. 4. The numeral roAdAoi is used in Greek, like multi in Latin,
generally in the coordinate relation, and in this way the idea of plurality is
made emphatic, while the English commonly uses the subordinate, e. g. roAA&
kal KaAd Epya, multa et praeclara facinora. The Greek and Latin is many and
noble deeds, the English commonly many noble deeds.

Rem. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective very frequently takes the
force of a substantive, and the substantive to which the adjective properly
belongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the following cases are to
be distinguished :

a. The substantive stands with the plural adjective which takes the gender
of the substantive, e. g. of xpnorol Tay avSpémwy ; 1h orovdala Tay MparyuaTwv.

b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut.
Sing., sometimes also in the Neut. Pl. Th. 1.118, of ’ASnvaio ém péya
exdpnoay Suvvdwews (= em peydrAny Sbvauw), had attained a high degree of

7. Thus many phrases with ray, e. g. eis Tav kakod (in omne genus
calamitatis) &picveioSo; év mayt) Kaxod civor; eis MAY mMpocAhrAvse moxSyplas.
Moreover, the Neut. pronoun is very frequently joined with the genitive, espe-
cially in prose. Th. 1, 49. tuvéwecov és todtTo avdynns, to this degree of
necessity, X.An.1.7,5. €v rotott@ Tod Kkivddvov. Dem. Ph. 1, 51. es
TOUS BBpews eaAsarvdev.

c. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing. which
takes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the

§ 264.] ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 369

Neut., e. g. 4) woAA} Tis TleAorovyvjeov instead of 7d mwoAv ris TL. The word
hmeovs is most frequently used in this manner, often also toAds, rAelwy,
wAeioros and other superlatives, e.g.d #ucous rod xpdvov;émi ri juroela
tis yns. X.Cy. 4. 5, 1. méumwere rot olrov Tov uiour, tev kptwy rods
juloers. Th. 7,3. rhv wAelorny ris orpatias wapérate; sO moAAh Tis
xdpas, Toy wAetorov Tod xpdvov. Th. 1, 2. ris yis7 aplorn del ras pera-
Bodas trav olxntépwr elxev.

3. The Greek, like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive
adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only
in reference to the predicate. In this way the designations
of place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and manner
ean be expressed by adjectives, which agree with a substan-
tive in gender, number, and case.

a. Adjectives of place and order. Od. o, 146. i¢e wpuxolraros aie in-
stead of éy puxoirdrw. Also, rp@ros, mpdrepos (of two), brraros, torepos (of
two), uéoos, TeAcuTaios, wAdyios, weTéwpos, Expos, Supaios, Saddoows, etc. S.
Ant. 785. gorras bwepmdvrios instead of drip thy wévrov. Th. 1, 134. ta
hh bralSpios tadarwpoln, that he might not suffer in the open air. Here belong
also was, Exagros, Exdrtepos, iuga, dugdsrepos, etc. § 246, 5, 6 and 7..

b. Adjectives of time, e.g. iYios, IpSpios, Ewdwds, Eowépios, viXtos, wETOVUKTLIOS,
Sepwds, xIiCos, eapiwds, Xeimepids, etc., especially those in -a7os, e. g. Sevrepaios,
TpiTaios, etc., xpdvios (after a long time), ete. Il. a, 497. hepln & aveBn méyav
ovpavdy instead of fps, she went early. X. An. 4.1,5. cxotialous deddeiv
7» wedlov, to pass through the plain in the dark. Tetaptratos, reumtatos adgl-
keto, he came on the fourth, fifth day; xpévios ASev, after a long time.

ec. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. dt¥s, taxvs, aipvldios,
Bpadds, irdomovdos, torovdos, Spxios; Exdy, EIerAobows, Uxwv, Konvos, éYEAovTAS ;
hovxos; cvxvbs, words, &Spdos, muxvds, omdnos, wdvos, e.g. Saéamovdor amfe-
cay = bd orovdais, they wend away under a truce. Th. 1, 63. robs vexpods
brogrdviovs amédooay Tois Moridadras, they gave up the dead under the truce.

Rem. 6. But when the qualifying words cannot at the same time express
a quality of the subject or object, but belong solely to the predicate, the
adverb must be used,e.g. kadA@s ddets, you sing beautifully (not Kadbs Ges,
for the person who sings beautifully, is not necessarily beautiful). When the
Greeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the
predicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode
of conception. For example, éorépios ASE, vespertinus venit, he came (as it
were) enveloped by the evening.

Rem. 7. The distinction between rp@ros (rpdrepos, botepos, bora-
Tos), mpdtny (wporépav, baotépay, botdrny), and tp@royv (rpdre-
pov, barepov, baoratov or taotata), wdvos, udvnv and udvoy thy
emioroAy Lipale, appears when the sentence is analyzed; trp@rTos, wdvos
mean, J am the first, the last, the only one of all who has written this letter, like
PRIMUS scripsi; rpdtnyv, daTrdtnyv, wdvny Thy emororhy eypava, this letter
was the first, the last, the only one I have written; the adverbs mp@tov, mporepov,
etc., on the contrary, are used in stating several actions of the same subject, in
the order in whlch they occurred, e. g.‘O mais mp@rov pty thy emiororAjy

Dv ee eee eeraaes St ae an re

370 SYNTAX. [S$ 265, 266.

Eypayev, Exeita tracey, orata St amje; or rpHtoyv, boratoy, for the
Jirst, last time; so the adverb wévoyv places the predicate in opposition to
another predicate, udvov %ypava thy émoroAny, I have only written the letter,
(not sent it).

§ 265. Attributive Genitive.

The attributive genitive will be considered in treating the
genitive, § 275, Rem. 5.

§ 266. c. Apposition.

1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, when it is put
in the same Case with another substantive or with a substan-
tive personal pronoun, and even with a personal pronoun implied
in a verb, for the sake of defining these words more fully; if
the appositive denotes a person, it is also put in the same gen-
der and number, as the word which it defines, comp. $ 240, 1.
An appositive referrmg to two or more substantives is put in
the plural, when it is a common noun. :

Kipos, 6 Bacitreds. Téuvpis, ) BagtrAera. "Exeivos,é6 BaciAets. X.Cy.
5. 2, 7. thy Svyarépa, Sewdy tr eadAAOS Kal méyedsos, eédywy de cimev. Th.
1, 137. OeutaroKAis ew wapa oé, I, Themistocles, have come. Luc. D. D.
24,2. 6 3& Malas rijs “AtrAavtos diakovotpmat avrois (instead of eyd 6
Matas sc. vids).

2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive
pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns
take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns.

"Eds (= euovd) rod &SAlov Blos, the life of me, wretched, a8Alov being here in
opposition with éuds. Tawa (= Td éud) rod Svorhvov Kaxd, the evils of me, un-
happy one! Xh rijs nadAlorns edpopdla, thy gracefulness, O most beautiful one!
In English, as the examples show, such a Gen. with the possessive may be
often expressed by an exclamation, e. g. EAcalpw tov ov Tod &SAlov Blov, I
pity thy life, O wretched one! or by an accessary clause, e. g.Z pity thy life, thou who
art so miserable. So too the Gen. is put in apposition with adjectives which stand
in the place of the attributive Gen. Pl. Ap. 29,d.’ASnvatos avy réX ews
THs meylorns (instead of ’ASnvav, méAews), éAcws being here in apposi-
tion with *ASnvaios which is equivalent to’ASnvéy. On the expressions 6—
huérepos, buerepos, operepos abt Gv wathp, see the remarks on the pronouns.

Remark 1. On the ellipsis of the words vids, mais, Suydrnp, yur, ete. in

apposition, see § 263 ; on the use of the article in apposition, see § 244, Rem. 6.
In the phrases dvoud éorl yor, dvoua Tionul (riSeuatl) rx and the like, the name

ae

=e

§ 266.] . APPOSITION, 371

itself, as an appositive, is put in the same Case, e.g. “Ovoud earl por Ayddwr,
my name is Agathon. ‘O waits tAeye bvouwa elvat éavtg “AydSeva. Evreoda >
wodis peydrn, buona 8 abt® Kopowrr}, X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4,13 and 25. Tatrp
Aaa: édéuedIa médcy Svoua, Pi. Rp. 369, c. (to this community we gave

name city, called it a city). *Avhp wévns at Snuotixds exthoaro Thy Baciiixwrd-
thy Kal Seordrny mposnyoplay, Tov Alxatov, Plut. Ar. 2. (received the
surname, the Just). (The Gen.also is used in the same phrase: dwxlwy éxrijaro
thy tod Xpnarod posyyoplay, Plut. Ph. 10. he Nom. also occurs:
*Avhp yevéuevos mposelAnpe Thy Tay wovnpay Kowhy erovuulay cvKopdytT ys,
Aesch. f. 1. § 27.) See 269, Rem. 3.

Rem. 2. A substantive in the Nom. or Acc. sometimes stands in apposition
with the whole sentence ; in the Nom., when the appositive expresses a judg-
ment on the whole sentence ; in the Acc., when the appositive denotes a thing
accomplished, a result, a purpose, or object, e. g. Eur. Or. 496. émel yap eérvev-
vey Ayaucuvey Bloy, tAnyels Suvyatpds Tis euijs (caesus a filia mea) dwtp xdpa,
—atoxioroyv épyor! II. w, 735. % tis “Axa (airy) ply xepds Eddy
arb mipyou, Auypdy bAeXpov. Eur. Or. 1105. ‘EAévny xrdveper, Mevércw
Abrynv winpdy (i.e. dste elvar Avwny mupdv). Aesch. Ag. 225. &ran Suthp

eveoda: Suyatpds, ToAduwv apwydv (&ste elva: dpwydv). In like manner, a

art. or adjective is sometimes added as a clause in apposition to a whole sen-
tence, e. g. Melder (AmdéAAwy) ’Opéorny untép’, } op eyelvaro, kreivar, pds
ovx &wavtas exdAciav pépoyw (a deed brings no fame), Eur. Or. 30.
Kal 5) wapetrat (solutum est) capa, cod uty od plrAov Suppl. 1070.

Rem. 3. The Inf. also is sometimes used as a clause in apposition with a
word, especially with demonstrative and relative pronouns, so as to define
more exactly an idea before expressed in a general manner. Ov yap én
rotrt@ Kkddnra & diKxaorhs, emi TG kataxapiCerdat Ta dixaa Pl. Apol.
35, ¢, the judge does not sit for this, viz., for the purpose of compromising justice for
Savor. *A 8h mpostéraxta tH wavrixi, ewmioKomety tovs “Epwras kal iar-
peverv, Symp. 188, c.

3. With a substantive, expressing the idea of plurality, one —
substantive or even several substances denoting the parts of
that plurality or whole, are often put in apposition, instead of
being in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This
may be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong
especially the words éxaoros, éxérepos, was (every one), ot péev—
ot 5é, dAAos aAXov (alius alium, one this, another that, one another,
or mutually), ddos Goer (alius aliunde, one from one place,
another from another, or one on one side, another on another). The
subject, which denotes the plurality or whole, may be implied in
the verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to
be expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen.
the parts are to be made more prominent.

Od. a, 424. 3) tére Kaxxelovres EBay olkdve Exaaros (in suam quisque
domum sese contulerunt, they went each one to his own house). Her. 8, 158. Emevov
ev TH éwirod rd&t Exagros (in suo quisque ordine manserunt). Th.1,89. oixtae
ai wey moral (= raw oimidy woAAal) éwerrdxecay, GAlyat 5& wepijoay. X.

R.L.6,1. ey rais tAAas wéAcot Tay EavTod ExagTtos Kal raldwy Kal oixeray kal

372 SYNTAX. Spa.

xpnudrav &pxove ty (suis quisque liberis imperant), Cy.3.1,3. 5redlSpacKor
Hdn €xactos én Td éavtod, BovdAduevar Ta bvTa exroday woeioda. C. 2.7, 1.
Tas &moplas ye Tay dlswy Tas wiv BV Byvoi eweiparo (Swxpdrns) youn
axeioda, Tas St BP Bde Fddonwy Kata Sdvayw GAAHAos ewapkeiv. Pl.
Charm. 153, 6. «al we ds elSov cisidvta e& amposdoxhrov, eidis wéppwtey howd-
Covto &AAOos HAASE” (they welcomed me one from one place, another from
another). Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the appropri-
ate subject, but with the words éxaoros, was. X. An. 1.8, 9. mdvres otro. Kate
Zvn ev rAmolw wANpe avYpémev Exactov ~sXvos émopeveto. The parti-
tive appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy.3. 1, 25. €veos
PoBovpevor, mh AnpSévres &roddvwow, bd Tod PéBov mpoarosyjokovow, of wey
pimtodyres éavtots, of 5& Grayxdmevor of SF drogpatTdpevon
Her. 3, 82. abrds Exagros BovrAdmevos Kopupaios elvar yvounol te vikav,
és txSea peydrAa GAAAoW: arixvéovtat. Here belong those passages, in
which, after the principal subject, there is another subject in the Nom. with a
Part. connected with it ; the latter subject, however, making a part of the prin-
cipal subject. Th. 4, 73. (of "ASnvator) jotxalov, AoyiCdmevor Kab of
éxelywy otpatnyol wh avrimadov ely opiot toy Klyduvov, the Athenians kept
silence, since even their generals, namely, of the Athenians, supposed that, etc.

Rem. 4. In the same manner in poetry, especially in Epic, but very seldom
in prose, two objects (commonly in the Acc.) are joined to one verb; the first
of these denotes the entire thing, the other, that part of it to which the action
of the verb is particularly directed, both being in the same Case. This figure
may be called cxf ua ka bAov Kal wépos, i.e. a construction by which
the part is put in apposition with the whole, instead of the word denoting the
whole being in the Gen. and governed by the word denoting the part. If the
whole expresses a plurality, a distributive apposition may take place. Moidéy
ce &ros pvyey Epos dd6vTwv, Od. a, 64, what a word escaped thee, thy lips!
where €pxos the part is in apposition with o¢, the whole. Tpdas dt Sade
aivds irhAvde yvia exaaroy, ll. v,44. "Axatotory Se péya adévos EuBar’
éxdot@ Kkapdly BAAnKTOY ToAcuICew HdE paxeodat, Il. E, 152, sq.

CHAPTER III.

§ 267. The Objective Construction.

As the attributive construction (§ 262) serves to define
the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so
the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or
define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here
everything which, as it were, stands over against (objectum
est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com-
‘plement of the predicate and defines it more fully: (a)

ey —— eel

§ 268.] THE CASES. 373

the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini-
tive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb.

Remark. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate
necessarily requires an object, ¢. g.’EmSuua rijs dperijs. BotaAouat -ypdpew.
The object defines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily
required, e. g. Td Addov dvdei ev rg xhrw. The predicate is thus defined by
the specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument.

§ 268. I. The Cases.

1. All the relations, which the Greek denotes by the
Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid-
ered relations of space.

2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive
object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of
motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in
a three-fold aspect: first, as that from which the action
of the verb proceeds; secondly, as that towards which
the action of the verb tends; thirdly, as that by or with
which the action of the verb takes place. In this way

“three Cases originate: the Genitive, denoting the motion

or direction whence, the Accusative, whither, and the Da-
tive, where.

3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man-
ner as those of space. ‘Thus the Gen. (the whence-case)
denotes the time from which an action is conceived as
proceeding ; the Acc. (the whither-case), the time to which,
or over which the action is conceived as moving; and the
Dat. (the where-case) the time im which an action is con-
ceived as existing.

4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as
relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the
author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action
from an object (Genitive); the effect (the result, the con-
sequence), as a motion towards an object (Accusative) ;
the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action
with or in an object (Dative).

32

874 SYNTAX. [$§ 269, 270.

§ 269. Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative.

1. The Nom. and Voc., so far as they do not express objective relations,
cannot be considered as Cases; the Nom. is the form for the subject, and the
Voc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person
orathing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined
to the subject by the copula eva, is expressed, as in other languages, accord-
ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative; and even the objective rela-
tion of an effect or result with the verbs mentioned in § 240, 2, is viewed in the
Greek and Latjn as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominative.

_ Remark 1. With the verbs dvoud¢ew, dvoudCeodou and the like, the Inf. e?va

is often added to the Nom. or Acc., and thus in some degree the relation of
the effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. ras dvoud¢ovor AfAto efvat
‘Trepdxny Te kad Aaodixny. 5, 99. erparnyods &AAovs dawédete (instead of daré-
deike) MiAnolwv elvar.

Rem. 2. On eiva, and ylyveoda with an abstract word, see § 284, 3 (9).

Rem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an object as
independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in § 266, Rem.
1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1,199. MvaAitra de.
Kadéover Thy “Adpodirny "Acovpia, the Assyrians call Aphrodite, Mylitta.

2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in a direct sum-
mons or call; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana-
tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu-
larly the following instances: .

(a) Odros either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name,
is often used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there! heus tu: Pl.
Symp. 172, a. 6 Saanpedvs, &pn, ob ros ‘AroAASSwpos, od mepmerveis;
which means, see! this is that Apollodorus, the Phalerean, who comes there !

(b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi-
tive to a call or direct address.

Pl. Symp. 218, b. of 5& oixérat, Kal ef Tis BAAS Cor BEBnAds Te Kal aypor-
kos, TUAas wav meydAas Tols woly émlSecde (the same as, ducts 5é, oixérat dyTes).
X. Cy. 4. 5,17. 1: wey ody ot, pn, 6 mpeg Bvraros (instead of ov, bs ei mp.).

§ 270. (1) Genitive.

The Gen. is the Whence-case, and hence denotes: (a) in a
local relation, the object or the point from which the action of
the verb proceeds, e. g. «tkew 6800, cedere via, to withdraw from
the way ; (b) ina causal relation, the ground, origin, or author,
in general, the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, .occa-
sions the action of the verb, e. g. érvIupa ris dperis (§ 268) ;
dperqs is here the object which calls forth, etc. the desire ex-
pressed by érudupa.

§ 271.] LOCAL RELATION OF THE GENITIVE. 375

§ 271. A. Local Relation.

1. The use of the Gen. expressing purely local motion is
rare and only poetic, e. g. Ei py rovde weivavres Adyw adyotvro
vyacov (ab insula abducerent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com-
monly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. dx, from,
éx, out of, rapa, from near an object, ete.

2. But the Gen. very often expresses the relation of separa-
tion, namely, with verbs denoting removal, separation, loosing,
abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, depriving, differing from,
missing, deviating from. Genitive of separation.

Prose words of this kind are: wapaxwpeiv, imoxwpeiv, etxew and dreixew,
bravictacsa and étloracda, vorpicew, xwpl(ew, dioplCew; apiévar, aplerda,
améxew, dréxeoSat, ravew, raverdar, kwdrvew, épnriew, eipyew, Avew, eAevSepoir,
GmadAdrrew, orepeiv, amoorepely ordperSat, xnpodv, épnuody, diapépew, auaprd-
vew, THdAACTRat, WevderSat, etc.; diéxew and dréxeuv, to be distant, etc.

Her. 2, 80. of yvedrepor abtéwy rotor mperBurépoiot ouvtvyxdvovtes eLkoves
tijs 6800 (withdraw from the way). X. Cy. 2.4, 24. bwmoxwpetvy Tod me-
Siou (to retire from the plain). Hier. 7,2. rapaxwpetv 6500. Symp. 4, 31.
bravicravrat 5 wo dn Kal Sdewy ca b5Gv eEloravTac of TAcIGIM
(rise up from their seats and turn aside from the road). Vectig. 4,46. améxet
t&v apyvpelwy 7h éyybtata wéAis Méyapa ToAd mAciov Tov TevTakoglwy oTa-
Siwy (is distant from the silver mines). Pl. Menex. 246, e. émorhun xwpio-
hévn Sixatoctyns (knowledge apart from justice). Mlatvowat xdrov (2
cease from anger). Adw, &marAdtrTw twa kanav (I free one from evils).
Her. 3, 81. yyéuns ris aplorns nudprnte (he has mistaken the best view).
5, 62. tupdvvey HAevSepsSnoayv. X. Hier. 7, 3. done? wor roitw Siageé-
petv avip tTav BAAwY Cdwr, TE Tysts dpéyecdau (to differ from other ani-
mals).—Wetdouat, op>drAAouat €Amldos, SdEns, TUXNS (to be cheated,
to be deprived of hope, etc.). “Aginul twa tis aitlas. “Awmoorep@® twa
Tav ayasaGyv. Tis Bactrdelas éorépnuat. Comp. § 280, Rem. 3.

Remark 1. Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the prepo-
sition awd, ce. g. éAevSepoiv, amadAdrrew ard (of persons, as éAcudepovy Thy
‘EAAdda dard Tay Mijdwv), Avew, elpyew, arelpyew, épnriey.

3. In like manner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad-
jectives, adverbs, and substantives which express the same ideaas
the above verbs, e. g. AevSepos, pdvos, kaSapds, Kevds, Epnycs, Yupsvos,
dphavds, Wrds— duadopos, aAAdtpios (with the Dat., disinclined),
ddXoios, Erepos; with many adjectives compounded of a priva-
tive ; with dvev, xwpis, tAyv, ew, éxas, dixa, wépav, etc.

376 : SYNTAX. [§§ 272, 273.

S. El. 387. af St odpres ai eval Ppevav aydduar’ &yopas elo (bodies without
minds). Her. 8,147. draShs xax@v (without suffering evils, i. e. free from).
Th. 1, 28. pirous moeioSae Erépovs tav viv bvTwy (to make friends other
than, different from the present ones), X. C. 4.4, 25. wérepov robs Seods Hyp Th
Sixara vouosereiy, } AAG TGV Biralwy. Cy. 3.3, 55. dwaldevtos pov-
oixis (uneducated in music). So &tipos éwmalywy. Adats, €LKevdepia
kaxay. Her. 6,103. répynv ts 6808 (on the other side of the way). Dem,
Phil. 1. 49, 34. rod mdoxew aitol kaxds Ew yevhoeode. :

4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g.
ipxerJo, apyew, trdpxew, KaTdapxew, eEdpxew.

“ApxecSal Tivos, e.g. Tod moA€pov, means simply to begin something,
without any other relation: Sv tots Seots &pxeoXat xph wavtds Epyou (to
begin every work with the gods); but &pxetv, imdpxerv, katdpxetv havea
relation to others beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso-
lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before others, to begin first,
hence to be the cause or author: Tobs éSéAovras puyjs &pxerv word Kpetrrov
aby Tots woAeulois TaTToMEvous, t) ev TH Huetépa Tdket, Spay (it zs better to see those
disposed to begin the flight [set the example of flight] in the enemies’ ranks than in
ours), X. An. 3.2,17. ‘H tépa rots “EAAnot peydrAwy kakdv &pter (will
begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2,12. ‘Tadpxetv &diKav Epyar,
evepyeolas.

Rem. 2. “Apxeoda: and twos (or Tosev) means, to proceed from a thing
‘bees begin with it, e. g. tpxerSar awd trav orotxefwy, to begin with the first prin-
ct

§ 272. B. Causal Relation.

The Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, an outgoing,
but not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an
inward and active one, since it expresses the object by whose
inward power the action of the subject is called forth and
produced.

§ 273. (a) The active Genitive, or the Genitive as the
general expression of Cause.

1. The active Genitive stands in the first place, as the Gen.
of origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to
originate from, spring from, produce from, be produced from,
e. g. yiyverSar, piew, Pdvat, etvor. Genitive of origin or author.

Her. 3, 81. dplotrwy avipap oixds tpiora Bovdcdiuara ylyversat (it is
reasonable that the best designs should originate with, from the best men, the avdpav

$ 273.] CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377

being active in, or the cause of the result). X. Cy.1.2,1. warpds pev dh
Aéyerar 5 Kipos yevéodat KauBicov, Mepoadv Baoréws (to be the son of
Cambyses) * 5 8t KauBvons obtos rod Mepreidav yévous hy (sprung from the race
of Persidae)* wnrpds 88 dpodroyeiraa MavSdyns yevéodsa:. Pi. Menex.
239, a. mids unrpds mdytes GdeApol pdvtes. Attributive Gen.: ‘0 rod
Baciréws vids, i.e. 5 (ke) Tod Bacirdws yervndels vids. Ta Tav dvSpadrwy
mpdynara,

Remark 1. Commonly the preposition é«, more seldom & 74, is connected
with the genitive.

2. The active Genitive stands, in the second place, as that
object which has gained another, made its own and possesses
it; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. This
Gen. stands: (a) with the verbs «iva, yevérda (to belong to),
moioSa, to make one’s own; (b) with the adjectives ‘dis (also
with Dat.), oixetos (with Dat., inclined), iepds, xipwos. Possessive
Genitive.

Antiph. 5. 140, 92. 7d pey dxovoioy audprnua tTHS TUxNS ort, Td BE
éxobowov TiS yvduns (an involuntary fault belongs to fortune, a voluntary one
to our own will). Lys. Agor. 135, 64. éyévero 6 Eiydpns otros NixoxAéous
(belonged to Nicocles, was his slave). Th. 5,5. éyéveto Mecohvn Aokp@v twa
xpévoy (belonged to the Locrians). Tis abrijs yvéuns eivat (ejusdem sententiae esse).
‘Eavtod elvat (to be one’s own master). Dem. Phil. 142, 7. qv buay abtray
éJeAhonre yevérSat (to be your own masters), non ex aliis pendere. Also eivat
twos, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestly
devoted to something, e. g. elvat biAlwmov ; elvat rod BeAtlorou (studere rebus optimis).
X. Ages. 1, 33. thy “Aclay éavtadv morodvra: (they bring A. under their
power). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. 7 wéAus judy nupla yevouévn TototTwr aya-
Sav ode epSdynce tots %AAas (having become the possessor of such advantages). X.
An. 4. 5, 35. qxovcey abtoy (toy frmov) iepdy elvar tod ‘HAlov (sacred to
the sun). 5.3,13. 6 iepds x@pos THs "Aprepuldes. Dem. Ol. 1. 26, 28. of
klyduvan TOV Evert nKdtwy (ducum) 15101, wicdds F ove ~orw. 2. 32, 16.
TavTns KUptos TIS XMpas yevfoetu. In the attributive relation: ‘O
Tov Bactréws kiwos. ‘H Swxpdrovs adperh. Tatrnp NeomrorA€pov.

Rem. 2. The Gen. is connected with Aéyew, pdvat, voul lew, hryetodat, xplvew,
irodauBdvew, as it is with eva. Dem. Ol. 2.34, 21. dtealov moAtrou xplyw
Thy Tav tpayudtwy owrnplay ayt) Tis ev TE Aéyev xdpiros aipeiodat.

(c) Hence the Gen. with civa: denotes also: (a) the charac-
teristic, peculiarity, habit, etc. of a person 6r thing, the charac-
teristic, peculiarity, etc., being commonly expressed by an Inf. ;
(8) a property or quality, viz., price, measure, number, time, space,
etc., also what is requisite for a thing. Genitive of quality.

32*

378 SYNTAX, [§ 273.

*Aviods eotiv &yadod eb woeiy ros pidovs, In English this Gen. is
translated in various ways, e. g. it is the business, manner, custom, peculiarity, duty,
mark of a brave man; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks a brave man; a brave
man is wont, and the like. Dem. Phil. 1,54. kaxodpyou éort «pier aro-
Savelv, oTpatnyod bE paxducvoy rots moreuios (it is the characteristic of a
criminal to die being sentenced, but of a general to die fighting, ete.). Ol. 1. 18, 2.
ort trav aicxpay (Neut.), uardAdgov 5¢ Tay aicoxlorwy, TédrAEwy, GY Tuer
mote KUptot, palverSat mpoieuevous. Chers. 102, 48. done? tadta Kal Samdyns
meydaAns kal tévwmv TOAAGY Kal Topaymatelas elvas (this seems to be
the mark of great expense, much labor). Aphob. 1. 814, 4. éué €mr étav byta
(of seven years, i.e. seven years old). X. An. 7. 4,16. Siravds Maxéorios, ér av
éxTwKaldexa dv, onuatver TH oddmiyy:. 1. 4, 11. 6 Evppdrns morauds Td
eipds dors TeTTAdpwy aTadiwy (of four stadia in width = four stadia wide).
Attributive Gen.: déxa wva@v xeapioy, Isae. 2, 35 (a place of [costing] ten
minae). The Gen. is but seldom used to denote other qualities, e. g. ris aris
yveépns eivas, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. (’AAKtBiddns) &A-
Aote HAAwy eo Adywv, Pl. Gorg. 482, a (ts of different words at different times,
uses different words, etc).

Rem. 3. Here belong also the expressions jyyeioSat, roeiodat, Seivat TOoA-
Ao0d, TAelarov, dAlyou, éAaxloroy, etc. (to consider of great importance,
etc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property. Usually, however,
the preposition wepi is joined with the Gen.

3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob-
ject which embraces one or more other objects as parts belong-
ing to it; the Gen. represents the whole in relation to its
parts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive Genitive. This
Gen. stands:

(a) With the verbs, eZ?va: and yiyveoJac (to belong to, to be
of the number of, to be numbered among); tidévat, Tider tat,
movetotat nyetadat (to reckon or number among), and with
many others.

Th. 1, 65. «al ards HIeAe TGv wevdvtTwy elvat, to be one of those remain-
ing. X. An. 1. 2,3. fv nol 6 Swxpdrns tev auplMAnroy orpatevopevar
(was among those who carried on war around Miletus, erparevopévwy here denoting
the whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1.2, 15. o? ay ad év rots reAelots
(avBpdor) Siaryévwvra averlAnmrot, outro: TOV yepatTépwy ylyvovTat (are
reckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 8. 122, 43. 4 ZéAed €ori THs Aclas
(belongs to Asia, is a part of ). Plat. Phaed.68,d. tov Sdvarov tryotvra mdytes of
BAA Tay peylotwy Kakay elvar (among the greatest evils). Pl. Rp.376,e.
povoikgs 8, elroy, riSns Adyous; ad musicam refersne sermones? Phileb.
60, d. ppdvnow Ka GAnd7 Sdtay THs abTis idéas TiSewar (Lconsider prudence
and true glory as of the same nature, ad eandem ideam refero). Rp. 8. 567, e. mor-
etoSal twa tev Sopyddpwy. Her. 7, 6. nardrdcye TOV xXpnoper (re

—
” f

|
;
,

IIE.

§ 273.] PARTITIVE GENITIVE, 379

citabat vaticimorum sc. partem). So réuvew yijs (devastare terrae, sc. partem) ;
émBalvew tijs yijs, to set foot upon.

Rem. 4. With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin-
guished: the Gen. denotes the whole either as a plurality in relation to the indi-
vidual parts, as TloAAol ray dvSpdérwy; or as a unity in relation to a certain
aya e. g. Tlévre rdAavra dpyuplov. This last partitive Gen. may be called

e Gen. of quantity. Both these genitives occur very frequently :

(a) With substantives, e. g. Sraydves HSaros (H5aros expressing the whole,
and oraydves the parts); owuaros uépos; if with the name of a place,
the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country
as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually before the name
of the place denoting the part, e. g.‘O orpards adixero Tis “ATTiKijs
és Oilvény (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica), Th. 2,18 (never és rijs
‘Arrucis Oivény).

(b) With substantive adjectives, in the positive, comparative, and superlative,
when it expresses the highest degree; with substantive pronouns and
numerals: of xpnorol Trav avSpérwy, of eb ppovoiyres Tav avSpérwy (the
useful, well disposed part of men) ;—modAol, dAtyot, rwés, wAcloves, WACiOTOL
Tay avapérwy (many, few, some, etc. among or of men). In addition comp.
above, § 264, Rem. 5. On the contrary, of Svnrol ayvSpwmra, since the
property of mortality belongs to the race; moAAo) or dAiyor &vSpwrot ex-
presses a whole consisting of many or few (a great or small number of
men); moAAol or 6Alyot avSpérwy denotes the many or few as a part of
the whole ; so rpeis jects jer, i. e. we were three in all, there were three of
us; Tpeis judy hoary, i. e. there were three of us (three out of our whole num-
ber €;

(c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. rod, rod, 1h, wédev, oF, h, odSapod, mav-
Tax}, wéppw, and mpdow ( further), ete. Her. 2,43. obdauq Aiytmrrou
(nowhere in Egypt). Pl. Rp. 3. 403, e. eidévar, mov ys éors (where

inthe world). "Evratsa tis nAcklas (atthisage) ; évratdsa Tod Adyou

(to this point in the discourse or argument). ‘Opare, of mpocAfAuvdsev &oeAyelas

(what a degree of insolence he has reached, quo intemperantiae progressus sit),

Dem. Mavtaxod rijs yijs, ubivis terrarum. Téppw cogtas édrat-

vey or fjkew (to advance further in .wisdom).—(B) of time, e.g. dpe

TIS NmMépas, TOU xpdvov, THs HAtKlas (late in the day, late in life).

Tpis THs Hhuépas. ToAAdkKis THS Huépas.

Rem. 5. By means of an abbreviation of the expression (comp. § 323, Rem.
6), the partitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs to the predi-
cate. er. 7, 70. of é« Tijs AtBins AiSlores obASTaTOYV Tplxwua Exover Tay -
Twv avapeoTwr Sy pa instead of ovAdraroy tay Tpixwudtwy & mdyTes
kvSpwra Exovow). X. Cy.3.1, 25. rdvtrwv trav dervav 6 PdBos wdAtora
KaTamAHrTe: Tas Wuxds.

(b) With words which signify: (a) to take part in, partict-
pate in, share in, e g. peréxew, pereoti pot, dover, peradddvat,
mposdidovat, Suadvdvat, Kowwveiv, KowodaIa, érapkelvy (to give a share
of), atvepyos, apowpos, ete,; Kowds and ioos, which commonly,
however, govern the Dat. ;—(f) to touch (both physically and
intellectually), to lay hold of, to be in connection with, to border on,
e. g. Ivyydvew, Wate, axrecIa, SpdrrecSar; AapBaverIa, pera,
ovlAdapBdvew, ért-, dvrAapBdvertar; ovvaiperIar; exerIae (to ad-

380 SYNTAX. [§ 273,

here to, be next to, to border on), avr-, mepiéxer Sat, yrixer Far;
erixwptos, adeApds (seldom with Dat.), dudoxos (often also with
Dat.), éjs, epeéjs (more rarely with Dat.), rpdcdev, Eumpooter,
drurtev, perag’, and many other adverbs; — (y) to acquire and
attain, e. g. rvyxdvew (to acquire and hit), \ayxavew, e&-, ébixvet-
oJat, kAnpovomety (with Gen. of the thing, to eherit; with Gen.
of the person, to be the heir of some one; with Acc. of the
thing and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one),
mposyket (wot twos, I have to do with something, have part in) ;
— (8) to strive to acquire something, e. g. édpéycoIa, épiceotar,
avruroio tar, evtpérer tar (to turn one’s self to something, to give
heed to, to respect); oroxdLerSor (to aim at sometiing). Most
of the words included under this rule have a partiiive idea.
Besides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat.

Dem. 24, 49. rots &xovew auaptdvove: wéeregts cuyyvamns (those who err
unwillingly obtain pardon). Pl. Pol. 322,a.6 &vSpwros Yelas wetTéegxe molpas
(participated in divine destiny). X.R.L.1,9. rod wey yévovs kal ris Suvd-
ews Kotvwvodct, Tay Bt xpnudtwv ov. avtimotodyTas (who share
in the same origin and power, but do not lay claim to their property). Cyr. 7.5, 78
sq. SdAmwous py kal Wixouvs Kal clrwy Ka moTray Kal brvov avdyen
Kal Trois 5ovAos meTad:ddvalt, rorAeminns & emiagthmys Kal meAeTNS
ov wetTadoréoyr (to share heat, cold, etc.). C. 1. 2, 60. Swxpdrns waow &pddvws
émhpKes Tv Eavtod (shared his effects with). Cy. 1.3, 7. Trav kpe@y dia-
515dvae Tots Sepamevrais (to distribute the flesh among the servants). Pl. Phaedr.
238, b. ra TroUT wy &deAGA (horum similia). Hel. 4. 4, 6. (&fdy eort) TOY
ye KadAlotov kal peylotrwy dyadav dpeyoudvous &iieTwaivoTda-
THs TeAEUTHS TUXEtY (that they, desiring to obtain the most noble and val-
uable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4.8, 18. jv 6 O€paavdpos
ov pdvoy abarnrhs ayadds, GAAL kal GAKAS GvrTewotet ro (ad fortitudinem eni-
tebatar). Th. 1, 8 égréwevor tov KEepdayv of fjocous Sméuevoy Thy Tay
kpeicodvwv dovdclay (the inferiors desirous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1. 2,3. rovnpod
Tivos } aigoxpod Epyov églecsar. 3.3, 10. emawodor Kal domdCovra of
Towwvrot (ovupaxor) Tovs Suolous, voul(ovres TuvEpyovs avTous eivat TOU Kolt-
vod &yasxod (thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). Pl. Symp.
181, c. 3Bpews &uorpos (without sharing in insolence). Menex. 241, c. &pyov
Kotvoyv Aakedatpovlwy te nal "AXnvalwy (common to the Laced., etc., like
communis alicujus rei). “Amwromat tHs xerpds. Her. 1, 93. Aluyn Exerat
Tod ohuaTtos pmeydan (borders on). 3,72. Epyov éxdmeSa (opus aggredia-
mur). Tleptéxopat tivos (cupide aliquid amplector). Th.1,140. ris yvouns
THs abras @xopuat (I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. &vdpes of EVvapdmevot
Tovde TOU KivOobVOV (who have taken part in this danger). Pl. Rp. 2, 362, a.
&anselas éxdpmevoy (cum veritate conjunctum). Dem. Ol. 1,4 20, €ws éor) kat-

.
:

§ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 381

pés, dyriAdBeaSe trav mpayudrwy (capessere). Isocr. Nicocl. 22, b, c, dred)
Syntod cdmaros tEruxes, &Xavdrov 8 Puxis, weipa ris Yuxijs add-
varov uvhuny Katadcreiy (since you obtained a mortal body, but an immortal soul).
Tvyxdvew, Aayxdvew xpnudtwv, ebruxlas — tuxeiv TeAeurijs, dvduaros, etc. X.
C. 2.1, 20. af 3A Kapreplas émméAciu (studia assidua) T@v kadk@y re kaya-
Sav Epyav eEinveteXar wowvow (make them attain noble and illustrious deeds).
Isocr. Paneg. 80, 187. oie @pixvotmar rod meyéSous tay mpayydrwy
(non assequor). P. Crit. 52, c. ot7’ éxelvous robs Adyous aicxtyy, otre jmar,
Tavvépnwv, evyrpérn (neither do you respect us, the laws). X.C. 4, 5,11.
Boxeis wor Aéyew, ds dvdp) Hrrovm tay Bia TOD odparos Hdovav mdumay obdemias
a&periis mposhkes (that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas-
ures). Dem. in Aristocr. 690, 14. obra: kAnpovopotor Tis bpetépas
Sdins cal rdv buetrépwyv adyadsayv. Pl. Georg. 465, a. rod Hdéos oro-
xd (erat tvev Tov BeAtiorov.

Rem. 6. With verbs expressing participation, sometimes the word denoting
a part stands in the Acc., e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. of répavva: Tay peylotwy ayaday
mAciora meréxover, An. 7.8, 11. va wh petadotev Td wépos xpnud-
tay. According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and
supplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing, by
whom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. AloveoSat, ixeredvew, ixveio-
Sa, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters
his prayer. Od. 8, 68. Alocouct juty Znvds ’OAvurlov H5t O€uioros (I supplicate
Zeus). So Alocecda warpds, roxhwy. Comp. Il. x, 454sq. 6 wey pw merre
rvyevelou xeipt maxeln abduevos Alocecsat.

Rem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which
are those mentioned under (b); so any verb may govern the Gen., when its
action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. Il. n, 56. nwéo-
cov dSovpds éAdy (having seized the middle of the spear). Od. y, 489. Body &
ayétnyv xepdwy (took by the horns). Il. a, 197. Eavdis Fe kouts Ere
TinAclwva. In phrases, like AaBeiy yotvwy, &rrecSal twa vyevelov, etc., the knee
and beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and
lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry :

(a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching
to, and hence of striving after an object, e. g.émipalerSat oxowédov,
ddépwr, vderou (to seek the rock, gifts, a return).

(b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards
an object, and then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual
effort, and longing, e. g. éwelyeoSat, dpuaioda, emiPddrAdAgcoda, éralocey

rushing upon something, etc.) Il. r, 142. éwetrydpuevds wep ~Apnos

Jw (hastening to, desiring the contest). Il. &, 488. opundn P Anduarvros

he rushed upon Acamas). Il. (, 68. whris viv evdpwv éwmiBarAduevos
petémodey uiuveTw.

(c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. rotedew, dxovriCew (in prose with eis,
and with the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Acc.). IIL. p, 304. “Exrwp
SP air Atavtos axdvtice Soupl pacw@ (aimed at Ajax). Il. y, 855.
his tip’ dvdyer tokevery.

Rem. 8. According to the analogy of the above-named verbs of aiming and
striving, so we find kara xSovbs juuara wita (to fusten the eyes upon the ground);
mAciv éxl Sduov, to sail towards Samos, as if setting out for it (on the contrary,
ém Sduov, to Samos). — The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation, e. g.
with 654s, vécros Térov tTiwds (way, return to a place).

we Sr ee? a ee ee

382 ‘SYNTAX. [§ 273.

Rem. 9. There also being here: (a) the adverbs e3d (Ion. i3¥), straight-
JSorward to something, wéxpi, to, up to; —(b) verbs of meeting and approaching,
which, however, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat.;— (c) also
adjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. avrtos, évavrios
(though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarius, opposed to), mapamdhows,
which, however, are oftener joined with the Dat.; avrtiov, évaytioy (before, in
the presence of ); éyyts and wAnotoy with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a
metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. @yoy (dirigebant) tas véas i&d
Tov ‘EAAnsmévtov xa THs Opnixns (directly to the Hellespont). 2, 34.
h Atyurros Tis dpervijs Kidckias pdrwrd xn avtin Kéerat (lies opposite to
Cilicia). Dem. Ph. 3.117, 27. rAnclov @nBayv na “AdSny@y (near Thebes).

4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place
where, and the time when, an action happens. The action or
event belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds in
a measure from them, and is produced by them; hence the time
and place are considered as causing or producing the action, or
at least as the necessary condition of it.

(a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic.

Il. p, 372. vépos F od palvero rdans yalns, ov8 dpéwy (not a cloud appeared
on the plain, nor on the mountains). Il. 1, 219. adrds & dwrlov (ev Oduccjos
Seloro rolxov Tod Eréporo (by the other wall). Hence, especially, in Epic
poetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going
or the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands
in the Gen.,e. g. Il. 8, 801. 2pxovra: wedloro (go through the plain). x, 23.
Séew wedloro. v, 64. wedloro duwKew Bpveor (to pursue over the plain). So
the prose, iéva: rod mpdow (to go over the forward way, to go forward).

Rem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, 05,700, dou,
adrov, ovdauov, &AAaxod, etc.; and on the same principle also it is to be ex-
plained that adverbs of place with the suffix Sey stand apparently instead of

adverbs of place with the suffix ®, e. & evdoSev, evybsev, THAdTEV, ExToTEV,
e. g. Il. p, 582. “Exropa ® éyytsev torduevos érpuvev “ArdAdAwy,

(b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose.
Also the space of time within which something happens, as pro-
ducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by
the Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitely, denoting merely
the period within which or in the course of which the action takes
place, while the Dat. expresses definite time, a point of time.

“Avan SddAet TOD Zapos, the spring is conceived as producing the flowers, and
hence asthe cause of them. Thus Sépous, in the summer time ; xetmavos, in the win-
ter ; iyuépas, in the day time, in the course of the day, by day ; vunrds, by night ; delAns,
érépas; as Eng. of a morniny, he did it of a fine morning ; also pnvds, per month,
monthly ; éviavrod, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. rod airod, Tod mporepod, Exdo-
rou, étous, the same, the former year, etc.; THs adrijs hucpas, on the same day; rijs
emiovens vuxtds; Tod emryryvouévov Sépous; TavTns Tis Hu€pas, in the course of this day

§ 273.| GENITIVE CASE. 383

(but Dat. rabrp rij hudpa, in that day). Hence the adverbial expressions épyjs, at
the beginning, and Tod Aorrod, for the future. Her.4,48.“lorpos toos del aitds éwirg
péer wal Sépous kal xeiudvos (always flows equal to itself in summer and
winter). 6,12. rod Aotwod uh weddueda adbrod. Pl. Phaed. 59, d. e&fAdsouev
Tod decuwrnplov écmépas (at evening). Ob paxpod xpdvov, cuxvov, woddod,
mAclorov, dAlyov xpdvov (in, within a short, long time); wodAA@y jpepaey, érav
(within many days, years), etc. Her. 3, 134. radra 6Alyou xpdvov tora
rercimeva. X. An. 1.7, 18. Baoireds ob paxe?ra Séxa huepaSy. Pl. Symp.
172, c. roAAGY €TGv ’Ayddav evddde obk emdedhuncev.

Rem. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g.
tod Kipov Bacirebovtos modad TE kal Kadd epya bmd Tay Mepoay expdxdn.

Rem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more
exactly, e. &. éx moAAod xpdvou, ad’ éordpas, ext Kipov, Cyri aetate, 514 moAdod
v, évrds or rw moAAod xpdvov. Comp. the remarks on the prepositions.

Rem. 13. The Gen. as well as the Acc. denotes continued or protracted time,

but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part of which
the action may take place ; whereas the Acc. of time implies that the action is

_ in progress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. radrny rhy Hué-
- pav avrod niaAlero, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the

Gen. the meaning would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that
day, he encamped there. Comp. § 279, 6,in regard to the difference between
the Gen. and Acc. of time and place.

5. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which
anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the
source from which something is drawn; the material being

viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen.

:

4

-
-

stands:

(a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like.

Her. 5, 82. xarKod roréovta:t Ta drydApara (are made of bronze). 2, 138.
eorpwuévn ect) d3ds AlSov (is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. Epvua adbrddi Fv

AlSwyv Aoydinv rewornuévoyv. In the attributive relation: &rwua EbAov
(a drinking cup [made] of wood); tpdwe{a &pyuplouv, orépavos baxlysov.

Rem. 14. This relation is very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more
definitely by the prepositions é& and ad, also did with the Gen.

(b) With words of fulness and want, e. g. rAjJew, wAnpodv,
mymravat, yenev, Bpiiev; vaccev, odrrey, eiropeiv, etc. ; dopey,

t miverta, deioJor, Set, oravilew, xpy, etc.; wA€os, Anpys, peords,
| trovous, Sacis, etc. ; mévys, évdens; aris (satis).

X. Symp. 4, 64. cecayuévos trAodTOU Thy Wxhy Foroucs (shall be satisfied
with riches). Pl. Apol. 26, d. 7a ’Avatarydpouv BiBAla yéuwer TOUTwWY TAY Ad-
yowv (are full of these sayings). Ebwopeiv, axopeiv, wéveoSat, onavilew tov
xpnudrwy (to abound in, to be destitute of means). X. Cy. 3.1, 3. S:adedvtwy
kal ¢éAauvdytwy 1d medioy pear dy (full of persons running about). An. 2.4,

384 SYNTAX. - [§ 273.

14. Bacds SévSpwy (thickly set with trees). An. 1. 2, 7. mapddecos péyas,
ayplov Snplwy wAdpns (full of wild animals). 1. 4, 19. évradsa joav
K@uar modAal pegtal citov kal ofvov. In the attributive relation, e. g.
démas olvov (a goblet of [ filled with] wine).

(c) With verbs signifying to eat, to drink, to taste, to cause to
taste, to enjoy, to satisfy one’s self, and in the figurative sense to
have the enjoyment, use, and advantage of something; éodiew,
dayeiv, ebwxeiotoas, mivew, yevew, yever da, Kopécacdat; daroAavew ;
éoriay (to entertain), ete.

"EadSlery kpeay (to eat of flesh); ropécardat popBijs (to satisfy one’s
self with food), mivetv otvov (to drink of wine). X. Cy. 1.3, 4. dvdynn oo
&moyeverXat TOUTwWY TAY TavTOSaTaY Bpwudtwr (to taste the various
kinds of food). 1.3, 10. xa rl 84, & Kipe, TaAAG mwotmevos Toy Sdav, odK Grepp d-
onoas TOD ofvov; (why did younot gulp downthe wine ?). C.4.3, 1l.amoAatery
mdvTwy T@yY wyaday (to enjoyall good things); but droAavery tivds T1, e.g.
&yadd or kad, to receive good or evil from some one. X. C. 4, 3, 10. Ti %AAo (Gov
alyay te kat dtwy Kal Tov KAAwY Cbwy ToTadTAa &yadd &mroraver,
8ca tvSpwrot ; (what other animal receives so many advantages from goats, ete., as
man?). TeveoSat tims (to taste, enjoy honor); yeverv Twa Tipjs (to
cause one to taste or enjoy honor). :

Rem. 15. The Acc. stands with verbs of eating and drinking: (a) when the
substance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or (b)
when the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which every one takes.
Od. 1, 347. Kixawy, TH, whe olvov, ere Pdyes avipduea xpéa (drink wine,
since you eat human flesh). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. obk é@xmlopuat abtds roy olvoy.
1. 3,6: epéaye edwxod (enjoy your meat). 6. 2, 28. Hat: peurypéevny der
thy paCav éodter (always eats maize). Ibid. werd 5 roy otrov édy ofvoy
érimivwpmev, ovdev petor €xovoa h Wuxy avamavceta (spoken of ahabit). So
éoSletry xpéa and xkpedy, miverv olvoy and ofvov. Hence mivew oivor is said
of those whose usual drink is wine, but mfvew otvov, is to take a drink of wine, to
drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of eating and drinking has
a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or drink of something. PI.
Symp. 176, c. toAby mivety oivoy.

(d) With verbs signifying to smell, emit an odor of something,
etc.; mvely, o€ew, mposBadrAcv.
“OCerv twy (to smell violets); pipov mvety (to emit the smell of myrrh) ;

mposBdAActy mUpov, Tvety Tpdyouv, bCetv Kpoudvwy. Ar. Ran. 341.
&s nov mor mMposémvevoe Xotpeiwy Kpeay (so sweet was the smell of swine’s

Jlesh to me).

Rem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the
material, e. g. dmogtirkBeiv aGrclparos, (vexvas) mwupds metAtooepmey,
Aoverdat evppeios worauoto. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Rem.

(e) With expressions of remembering and forgetting : pvio-
Kopat, to remember, piyvnoKw (twa twos), to remind one of some-

e
g
|
4
$

§ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 385

thing, pvijpwvr, dpvipov, érravIdvopa, to forget; hence also with
AdIpa, AaIpiws, and xp’da; also with expressions of being ac-
quainted and unacquainicd with, of experience and imexperience,
of ability, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. €u7retpos, dzetpos,
érioripwv, erirtdpevos, averuotnpwv, tpiBwv, cvyyvepwv, das, dral-
Sevros, ustys; dareipws, févws Exw; With adjectives in -t«ds (derived
from transitive verbs) which denote skz//, aptness, etc.; also with
repoua, to make trial of something.

X. C. 2. I, 33. Of yepalrepo: ji€ws TSv MaraiGyv wmpdtewy wéuynvrTac
(remember the past achievements). Antiph. Il. a, 7. ‘H émSuula ris tiswplas
Guvhiwova Tay Kivdbver Kadlorn adrédy (rendered him forgetful of dangers).
X. O. 16, 8. MWdéSev ody BotrAc Uptwual ce Tis yewpylas brouimvhoKery
(to remind you of husbandry). Cy. 8.3,3. Tod @Sévouv ewer éAnorTo (had
forgotten envy). Attributive: prqun, AM3n TGV KakGv. (Méuynual tt, to
keep something in mind.) “Emmetpos or €miothpmwr ei ris téxvns (I
am acquainted with the art), "Awaldevros aperijs, wovarnas (ignorant of
virtue, music). Her. 2,49. ris Suclas trabrns oie &dahs, GAN Euwespos
(not ignorant of that sacrifice, but acquainted with it), X. Cy. 6.1, 87. cvyyve-
fav T@v GvSpanlyvwv rpayudrtwy (pardoning, not knowing, human errors).
—’Amelpws Exery tabtns ris tTéxvns (to be unacquainted with this art).
"AmomwetpGuat yveuns (I make trial of an opinion). With the poets this
use of the Gen. is still more extensive. Il. O. 411. réxrovos, ds fd re mdéons eb
<idj copins (who is well acquainted with all skill). X.3.1,6. raparkeva-
otixkdy t@v eis Toy TéAcuov Thy orparnydy elvat xph Kal MoptaTiKkdy TaY
éxitndelwy tots otpariétas (skilful in preparing what is necessary for war, and
capable of providing provisions). P\. Euthyphr. 3, ¢. SidacKadctKds tis abrod
coplas (able to teach his own learning). Pl. L. 643, a. tr €A€tos Ths ToD mpdypya-
Tos aperijs (as it were, showing one’s self perfect ina thing). Attributive: éuret-
pla Tijs yewpmerplas, etc.

(f) With the words of sensation and perception: dxovety,
axpoaGotat, aictaverJat, dagpaiver tar :

*"Axotw TOV Adywr, SoptBov (I hear the words, the tumult). X. H. 4. 4,
4. ris kpavyis FoSovro (they perceived the cry). An.1. 1, 8. Baoiwreds
Tis mpds Eavtdby wi BovaAjs ov ioSdvero (did not perceive the plot). C. 2.
1,24. trlvwy dcppivdpmevos jadeins ; (what things would you desire to smell ?).
*"Anxotetv Slens (to heara case at law); aicSdversar Hiovay, donjs,
SoptBov, Bondelas. . :

Rem. 17. The attributive Gen, has a much wider signification, e. g. &yeAAla
ris Xiov, de Chio (tidings of or concerning Chios) ; épérnats twos (a question about
something), like the Latin guaestio alicujus rei instead of de aliqua re.

Rem. 18. "Acotvecy, Sraxotery, karaxovery often take the Gen. also

in the sense of to obey, and according to this analogy re{SeoSa: (seldom in
Attic) and a@me:Setv; so also karhxoos, bwhKoos, take the » more -

ee

OPTS ew wane
: :

ow

Perry

386 SYNTAX. [§ 278.

seldom the Dat. Her. 3, 62. rpoayopeda: uiv Suépdios BactrAjos akov-
exy (commands us to obey king Smerdis). 101. Aapelovu BacitAjos ovdaua
imhnovear (they obeyed king Darius nowhere). 1. 126. viv dy éuéo wetddme-
vot ylveode éAcddepor (now therefore obeying me, be free). So Th. 7, 73.

Rem. 19. The above verbs have the following constructions: (a) Gen. 9
the thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a whole,
of which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the purport of which
one perceives mentally. AicSdvoua xkpauvyis (1 perceive, us it were, the single
tones of the cry); X. H. 4. 8,19. aicdéoda THs Bondetlas (LI observe something
of the help);—(b) Acc. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives
the whole thing with his senses, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. ‘Os
Hoxovte Thy Bonselav (when they observed the help approaching = saw with
their eyes = édpwv). The Acc. of the person seldom stands with aioSdvecSat ;
when. it does, the verb has the sense of eiSéva: (to know). X. Symp. 4, 36.
AicSdvoua: rupdvvovs tivds, of obrw reivaor xpnudtwr (J know some kings).—
(c) Gen. of the person, which represents the person, as it were, as the source, from
which the perception is derived. “Axotw Swkpdtovs (I hear Socrates, i. e. the
words of Socrates). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. Ovx &xpoducvo: Tod GSovTos wmyiete
ddew kpiora (not hearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. ds Ba pparvTo td-
xiworTa TOY KaptjAwy of imma Kal doy aitas dticw avéatpepoy (as soon as the
horses got scent of the camels). So cuvvinws (to understand), with the Gen. of a
person, e. g. Her. 1, 47. cal kapod cuvinu Kal od pavedytos axovw (I under-
stand a mute); but with the Ace. of the. thing, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. 8 Epunvéwy
Tas Tav Seay TvpBovalas cuvinu (LI aadeoiand the counsels of the gods). ‘The
verb aio Sdveoaz is not constructed with the simple Gen. of the person. —
(a) Gen. of the person and Acc. of the thing: “Hxovea Zwkpdtovs TodTOY TdY
Adyor (audin e Socrate hunc sermonem, I heard this conversation from Socrates).
So also ti xadremrdy josnom todmod Blov; (what have you perceived disa-

in my manner of life?) X.C.1. 6,4. Zuvinut cov tov Adyor.—(e)
Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause
which takes the place of the Acc. of the thing. "Axodw Swxpdtovs diadre-
youévov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as &kotw Swxpdrovs didAo-
yov). X. H. 4. 2,19. Aaxedammdvioe obk aoSdvovto mposidvTwy TAY ToAE-
pwlwy (did not perceive the enemy approaching, nearly the same as 7j¢Sdvovro Tay
moAculwy thv mpdsodov). The person is sometimes also contained in the parti-
ciple, e.g. Th. 5, 73. #aSovtro ter xiCdvrwy (they perceived them building the
wall, instead of joSevro abra@y TerxiCdvTwy or tt Terxl Corer). X. An.
1. 10, 4. Baoireds Feovoe Titoapépvous, Sr of “EAAnves vixrg@ev (heard
Srom Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like #rovee Ticoapépvous thy
Tay “EAAhver vinnv). C.4.4,13. od« aicSdvouat cov, dmotov vdumov } wotov
dixaov Ayes (I do not comprehend you, what you call according to law or according
to justice). |

Rem. 20. Likewise the Gen. of the person and Acc. of the thing, or the Gen. of -
the person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in
the place of the Acc. [Comp. (d) and (e) Rem. 19], is used with verbs of seeing,
hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; of judging, examining,and say-
ing; of admiring, praising, blaming: dpav, YeGoSat, cnowety, bwovoety, ev-
voety, ytyveoKery, ewloracdat, etdévat, évduuciodsay, ete.; ruvdd-
veoSat, wavadvetv, kpivery, eberdlerv, Aévyetv, SnAody, etc.; amo-
déxerSa (to receive the opinion of one, to agree in opinion with one); &yavSat,
Saved ery, éwatvety, wéeupetsai, pévyerv. The Gen. denotes the ob-
ject (commonly a person) in respect to which one perceives, sees, observes, —
knows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single Cire

a =

,

say)

raf ’
ee
:
ad

—.

PEORIA ce ETT

$274.) GENITIVE CASE. 387

4 - eumstance, ete. ; or of whom one learns, hears, affirms something ; or in whom
one admires, praises, or censures something.

XC. 1. 1, 12. Mparor piv airay (Sexpdérgs) eoxdres, xétepd xore
es ixavies §8q TaxSperwa eidévai sereecet éxi +d repi TootTwy ppor

* voulearr
tite, i 7a piv GeSpéreia wapévres, ta Saydnia BE cxorotvres, Fyotvra: Ta

wparrew (he first considered in respect to them whether, ete.). An. 3.1,

19. shang pia ed yaa Sone X@pary ay a ar (attentively con-
respect to @ country )- 7. 2,18. Eyre wal

ne drove épov xo:otvres (he perceived in respect to mé, that I was. an
absurd thing, or fyrw é€not, Sr: Eroxa torolgy). Pl. Gorg. 463, d. Gp" oby by

os cP nips a pie (instead of dp’ oby & at odinbes: & axoxplyoua: ;

you understand my answer, i.e. learn from me what I answer ?). 465, e. A ێ-
ec he $s pov now paris oe éudvSaves (you did not understand me when I spoke
efiy). of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. & wou pavSdveis
bre) “The pov parddves, & Adve (if you comprehend me, understand what I
Th. 46.2 éxtSovtro THs MéAov xate:Anupérngs, instead of éxid.

Tis Tédov, 871 xarednuuérg Fy (when they learned that Pylus was captured). 5, 83.
HeSorvro recxiCévre@y, instead of #03. abrar, St rerxi{oer (learned re-
them that were building the walls, i. e. learned that they were

_ Specting
ete.). X.C.3. 6,16. €vSupot tar SAkar; xétepd cor Soxovew éx) tos

rowtros éxalvou pido } oéyou tvyxdvew (observe respecting the others, whether).
(EvSvpetoSac with the Gen. of the thing, for example ris Spas, X. Ven-8, 6.,
téy téxwr, ib. 9, 4, signifies to have a for , and belongs to § 174, 1
(b); €vSupetoSa:x with the Acc. of the thing si to reflect upon, consider
something, aliquid secum reputare.) Pi. Protag. 324, c. drodéxovrat oi col
wokira: wal xaArnéws xal oxutotépov fui Beskedarses Ta woheruxd
(receive the opinion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. &yaoSai rod
"Epacivou ob xpod:devros Tovs rodschTas (to admire Erasinus because he did
not betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. 7d Bpadd wai péddov, 6 wpévgorvra: uddwrTa
per, wh aiexéveade ( for which they eligi WF X. Cy. 3.1, 15.
yaoat Tov xatpés, h oF BeBotAcurat, } ica wil at Se wdvv _
GupBovrete Tovroy pipeiodat (1, admire my father either MEASUTES :
has devised, etc.). Ages. 2, 7. TdE adres &yapat, Sri xapecxevdcaro (1 ad-
mire this in him). 8. 4. eye age TovTo éxaiv@ “Aynctrdov, Td xpos td
Tos “EAAnow irepide Thy Baoiréws Eeviay (I praise Agesilaus for this
jo). PL Men. 95,c. Topylov pdkwra Tatra Gyapas (1 particularly ad-
mire this in Gorgias. or Gorgias for this). Theaet. 161, b. 6 Savud¢w rod
éraipou, ré3e éorivy (what J admire m @ companion is this). Criton 43, b. cod
wdka: Savpd(w, aicsavéuevos, és idéws xadedbes. Rp. 383, a. réAAG
mearey eae dag tb &AAG Touro obx éxawerducda (though we praise
many other things in Homer
Res. 21. In etroeae above verbs he tie 28s. 6 eee
eee tHe OTe, éxawe, Yeyw, péuouat, &yaual twa OF Tt.

§ 274. (b) Causal Genitive.

The second division of the causal genitive includes the geni-
tive, which expresses the cause or occasion,i. e. the object,
which calls forth or occasions the action of the subject. This

-

_ genitive stands:

1. With many verbs senieh, dquinte a state or affection i the

: qnind (verba afectuum), viz.

/

388 SYNTAX. [§ 274.

(a) Desire and longing for: érvIupetv, épav, épwrikds eyew or
Siaxelo Jor; Subqv, wewvijv ; |

(b) Care for, concern for, and the contrary: érysedctoSa,
gpovrilew, KideoJar, mepropaodJa, mpoopav, imepopay (to despise),
mpovoety, pércl, perapéde, dpedreiv, dArywpeiv, peideoda, evdvpetordou
(to have a regard for, § 273, Rem. 20) ;

(c) Pain, grief, pity: ddrodpiperIu, mevduds eyev; éeeiv
and oixreipew (with the Acc. of the person and Gen. of the -
thing) ;

(d) Anger and indignation: épyilerIou (with the Dat. of the
person and the Gen. of the thing), xaAer@s pépew;

(e) Envy: $Iovetv (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen.
of the thing), émrupdovws diaxetoSar ;

(f) Admiration, praise, blame; Jovpafew and éyacIoa (with
the Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes
also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person,
which is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2), {yAobv, eddaipo-
view, érawweiv, peudeoda (all with the Acc. of the person and
the Gen. of the thing).

Pl. Rp. 403, a. 6 dpSds Epws wépuxe kooplouv te Kal KarAO0D cwppdvws Te
kal povoikas épay (to love what is well ordered and beautiful). 438, a. oddels
moToD émidupmet, GAG XpnoTOD ToTod, kal ov glrouv, GAA XpnoToOD
olrov: mdytes yapitpa TGV &yadGy emiSvpodary (no one desires drink,
but wholesome drink, etc.). Symp. 181, b. of datdAa: tay avSpérav TOV Twud-
Twy paAdov, ) TAY WuXaY Epdary (love their bodies more than their souls).
186, b. 7d avduoov dvomolwy érmiSumet xa épG (desires and loves what is
unlike). 216,,d. Swxpdrns ێpwrik@s Sidkerrat Tv Kadray (is very fond
of the beautiful). X. Cy. 3.3, 12. (Kipos) xaxelvous érolnoey Epwrik@s Exetv
70d Hin worety tt (made them desirous of doing something). X. O. 13, 9.
Tetv@or tov éwmalvov ovx Arrov tim tay picewy, } UAAu tTav oltwy Te
kal wor @y (thirst for praise not less than others for food and drink). Attribu-
tive, €. g. Zpws, emiSuula aperijs (amor, cupiditas virtutis, love, desire for virtue).
Th. 6,14. eAdecS3at ris TéAEwS (to be anxious about the city). Her. 3,151.
emoAidpxee (BaBvawviovs) ppovticovtas ovddty THS TMoAtopKins (having
no concern about the siege). 3,159. tod clrov tpdopav (to have a care for,
to provide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. of Wéyou &dpovriorety ediCduevar odk
aicxtvoyta aicxpdy tt moreiy (those accustomed to be indifferent to censure).
X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. Meprav vowor (&pxovra) rod notvod a&yaSod éemwtpe-
Aovmevot (having a regard for the public good), MéarAer pol twos (I
have a care for something, some one). Pl. Crito, 44,¢. rl quiv ris Tay WoAAGY
Sins wérAes; (why do we care for the opinion of the multitude ?). 5. 1, 21.

ey

§ 274,]

| Twhptq weipdooun moeily phwore metapedtoa = (that
Gobryas shall not repent of his journey tome). Yd. C.1. 2,9. bwepopav émole
Z Tv Kaxertétwyv vduwv rods cuvdvras (made his associates despise the ex-
isting laws). Th. 4, 124. Bpaoldas ris Mévins weptopémevos (solicitous
about Mende). X. H. 5. 4, 1. Seo ofte rGv GoeBovvrwy, obre Trav dvdrw
morotwrwy &ueArodar (are regardless neither of the wicked nor the profane).
Cy. 8.7, 15. €avrod ehderar 6 mpovody &8erApo8 (he who takes thought
Jor a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7,1. ’Aynotaaos, &rov. Seto Thy
marpiia Tt apedqoew, ob xpnudtwy epeldero (did not spare his wealth).
Attributive, e. g. gpovtls ray maldwyv (cura liberorum, care for children). So
émmeAts tos (caring for something). X. Cy. 5. 4, 32. 6 Kipos dxotoas tod
bev wadSovs Gxrerpeyv adrdy (pitied him on account of his suffering). 5. 2, 7.
thy Svyarépa, TevSikas Exovcav Tod aderAGHod TeSvnkdrtos, etdyov
dSe elrev (grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. tobrovs oixktelpw ris
kyav xademijs vécov (I pity them on account of the disease). Attributive, e. g.
bAyos éralpwy (de amicis, for,on account of friends); moreover with adjectives
also (though only in poetry), and especially with exclamations with or without
interjections. Eur. Or. 413. ofuor Stwyuay, ols édatvoua tddas! (alas the
verations !). X. Cy. 3,1, 39. pet rot &v5pds (Oh what a man!). Pl. Rp.
509, c. “AwoAAov, Saruovlas bxmepBoarjs! X. Cy. 22,3. ris réxgs, 7d
eut viv KAndévra dedpo tuxeiv! (O ill fortune, that I am called hither at this time !).
Lys. c. Philon. 187, 11. kadéornné ti @os Sixasov wacw avSpéros, Trav abrav
&dixnudtowv uddwota dpylCerdac tos uddAwora Suvauevos, wh GdiKeiv, Trois
88 wévnow } dduvdros TE odpart ovyyveunv exew, 1d 7d HyeioSat Exovras adtods
Guaptdvew (to be angry on account of the same wrongs). (In poetry, the Gen. is much
more frequent with verbs expressing anger. e. g. Il. %, 266. ‘HpaxAjos wepixo@-
Taro, madds éoto (was angry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. a, 69. (Towe:ddwv)
Kixdwmos Ke x dA wT at, dv dpSadruod GAdwoer (is anyry on account of the Cyclops).
S. Antig. 1177. matpl unvicas pévov (having been angry with the father on
account of the murder). Eur. Or. 749. tows co Svyatépos Sumobmevos). At-
tributive, e. g. xdéAos Tiwds (ira alicujus instead of de aliquo, anger on account of
some person or thing) @Sovety tut Tis coplas (to envy one on account of his
wisdom). Th. 1, 75. &égtol oper apxiis ye fis fxouey Tois“EAAnot wh orbws &yav
emi gadvws SiaxetioSar (it is not just that we should be so much envied by the
Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, neyalpa, e. g. Aesch.
Prom. 627. ob peyalpw rovdé oo Swphuaros (I do not envy You because of
this gift). Attributive, e. g. pSdvos rwds (envy on account of something). X. Cy.
2. 3, 21. rodroy oby 6 Kipos dyacSels ris te tpadtnTOs Kal THs Stdac-
Kkadlas Kal THs ewimedetas, enddcoe Kal tabrny Thy Tdkw em Td Setrvoy civ
7S tatidpxw (having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.).
Symp. 4, 45. (7A@ oe rod mAodrov (Lenvy you on account of your wealth).
Pl. Symp. 194, e. Soxode rdvtes tobs dvSpdmous cbdatmoviCery TAY aya-
Sav, dv 5 Seds abrois atrios (to consider men happy on account of the good things,
which, ete.). Ton. 530, b. woraduis ye eChAwoa spas rols paywdods ris
réxvns. Dem. Cor. 296, 204. rls obk ty &ydoatto Tay avdpay exelvav
33*

390 SYNTAX. [§ 274.

THs &peths; (who would not admire the valor of those men?). sys. Simon. 100,
44. Savud¢w pwdrwwra TovTov THs Btavolas (I admire his purpose). Id.
Eratosth. 124,41. €éS atduaca tis TéAmNS TOY Acydvtwy. So with ad-
jectives, e. g. Pl. Phaedon. 58, ec. evdainwv por 6 avip epalvero nal Tod
tTpdémov kal Tv Adywy, as adeds Kal yervalws éredcdTa (the man seemed to
be happy on account of his habits and remarks).

Remark 1. The Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi-
tions, especially wept, e. g. emmeNeioSar, ppovti¢ew wept twos. Some verbs
which denote a state or an affection of the mind, do not govern the Gen.; thus
mo®etv (to long for, to feel the want of), always governs the Acc., and so
Piretvy, ayanwav, otépyery (to love); the last two also in the sense of to be
contented with, take the Dat. (— Lat. Abl.). Several of the above verbs have also
different constructions; then they commonly express different ideas, e. g.
ppovtifery trivds or wept rivos, X.C.1.1, 11. 4.7, 6. to be anxious for
something, but ppovTiCery Tt, scrutari, investigare;—mpovoeiv, mpoopay
+1 (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); bwepopayv rt and rivos,
despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, «éAe« sometimes takes for its subject
anoun denoting a thing, in the Nom.; but in prose, it takes only a Neut.
pronoun in the Nom. ‘The verb is then used personally: MeAqoovoty &
éuol trot, Il. x, 481. Taira uev oy SeG weAHoet, Pl. Phaedr. 238, d.

Rem. 2. The verbs Savud¢ery and &yacSaz have the following: con-
structions: (a) the Acc. of the person or the Acc. of the thing alone, when the
wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole
nature of a person or thing, e. g. Sauud¢w tov orparnydy (I admire the general) ;
Savud(w thy coptay (L admire the wisdom) ;—(b) the Gen. of the person and the
Acc. of the thing, when one admires something in a person (Rem. 20), e. g.
Savudtw Swxpdrovs thy coptay (I admire the wisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of
Socrates) ; —(c) the Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, when one admires
a person on account of some quality, e. g. Savud(w Swxpdrn ris coplas (1 admire
Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f) ;— (d) seldom Gen. of the thing and
the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I wonder at the quality of a per-
son, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. Savud(w Swxpdrovs tis coplas (I
admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f) ;—(e) the Acc. of the person, and in-
stead of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition, commonly émi with the Dat., e. g.
Savud(@ Swxpdrn em rH copia (I admire Socrates for, on account of his wisdom).

2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and
condemn. 'The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the eause
of the requital, revenge, etc. Thus with tiwwpeiota (with the
Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), also with judicial
verbs of accusing and condemning, e. g. airiao Sat, érairiGoSou, Su0-
Kew, eiscyew, brayew, ypaper Jot, mposkadreiodat (all with the Acc. of
the person and the Gen. of the thing), érefévat, éyxadeiv, emokyr-
texto (all three with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the
thing); pevyew (to be accused); duxalew, kpivewv, atpetv, to convict
(all three with the Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing),
and dAdva, to be convicted.

Her. 3, 145. robs émixodpous Timwphoomar THS evddde &mitros (will pun-
ish the allies on account of the invasion of this land). (Seldom ripwpetv tivt

§ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 391

Tivos, as X. Cy. 4.6,8. rinwphoety cox tod wadds bmoxvodua, I avenge
you for {the murder of | your son.) “Ewaitiaasal rwa pédvov (to accuse one of
murder). Her. 6, 104, (MiAriddea) of exdpot edlwtav rupavvldos ris év
Xepoorijow (prosecuted Miltiades for tyranny). "Ewettévar tit pdyvov (to pros
ecute one for murder). TpdpecSal twa rapavédpwy (to indict one for illegal
measures). Sevdyeiv kAomHs, pdvov, daeBelas (to be accused of theft, etc.).
KplvecdarcaceBelas, X. Cy. 1.2, 7. Mépoa Sind Cover nal eéynAhpa-
TOS, 0b veka EvSpwrot pucodor piv GAAAovs wddAroTa, SindCovra Sé fxiora,
&xapiortlas (condemn as a crime, ingratitude). C.1. 2,49. nara véuov (tear)
mwapavolas éAdytit kal toy warépa Sioa (it is lawful for one convicting his
Sather of madness). Dem. Aphob. 846. éwioxjarecSal rm tay pevdo-
faptupi@y (to prosecute one for false witness). 861, 58. pedyerv Yevdo-
Baptupt@y bad twos. ‘AAGvat crow} s (to be convicted of theft).

Rem. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. is to
be considered as the Gen. of price (§ 275, 3), e. g. Savdrov xplvew, xplverdat,
di@teww (to sentence, be sentenced to death). Sometimes the prepositions wept and
évexa are joined with the verb, e. g. dudcew twa wept pdvov; and dyti with
Tiywwpeiovat. ‘Eykadciv besides the above, has the following constructions: (a)
the Dat. of person and Acc. of thing, to charge something upon some one ;—
(b) the Dat. of person followed by a clause with 6r: or by the Inf.;— bi
Dat. of person alone, to accuse [§ 284, 3. (6)];— (d) the Ace. of thing alone,
to bring as a charge. Karnyopeiv, to accuse, is construed: (a) with Gen. of per-
son, sometimes with card and Gen.;— (b) with Gen. of person, and Acc. of
thing, to lay something to one’s charge ; — (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing,
sometimes with wepi and Gen. of thing ; — (d) with Acc. of thing alone.

3. Finally the Gen. of cause is also used in the following
instances :

(a) With rod «4% and the infinitive. See § 308, 2, (b).

(b) With the adverbs €d, kar@s, wet pws, and the like, also with és,
TGs, Stws, 5, StH, otTws, Se, Gsadtws, connected with the verbs
éxerv and jxesv, sometimes also with efva: and other intransitive verbs, the
object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. Kad@s
Exe today (lam well in respect to my feet). Her. 6,116. "ASnvain, ds ro
dav elxov, tdxiorTa eBohdeor és Td kat (as they were able with respect to their
Jeet, i.e. as quickly as their feet would carry them). 5,62. xpnudtwv eb hKov-
Tes (well off for, to havea plenty of, means). So ed, cards, wetplws Exew Biov,
ppevar, yévous, Suvduews (to be well off as to the means of living). Oi “EAAnves
ottws elxov buovolas mpbs adAAhAouvs, X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. of tw tpdtov
Zx ets (you are thus in respect to circumstances, you are in such circumstances). H.
4.5, 15. as tdxous Exacros elxev (as each was able in respect to swiftness, as
quickly as each was able).

ee ey RU SOS DRT Wen aie Saas ale OU ge ie Rt ee ea

392 3 SYNTAX. [$ 275.

§ 275. (c) Genttive denoting certain Mutual
Relations.

The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by
which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation
of the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a
subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the
one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of
the other. Hence the Gen. is used:

1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub-
jection, inferiority : dpxew, kpareiv, Sermdley, tupavvely, Tupavvevew,
oTparyyety, éritporevew, éerioraretv, Bacedvew, jyepovevey, HyetoSat,
etc.; with the adjectives éyxparis, dxparjs;— also with mpo¢yeyw,
dvéxev, Tepleivar, weprylyverJat, tpoorarely, tmrepBadrcw, treppepew,
mpwrevew, mpeoBevew, mpoxpivev, mpoTrysav, wAcoveKTetv, etC.;— HTTG-,
oda, torepely, totepilay, ehartovaIat, petotoda, petovexrely, VOTEpov
eival, HTTOVa elvat, ete.

Her. 7,97. 760 vavrinod éorparhyeor olde (these had the command of
the naval forces). 3,15. éwmitpomwetvery Aiytdmrov (to be the governor of
Egypt). Th. 1, 69. dAdyos rot Epyov éxpares (the report exceeded the
thing itself). X. Cy. 1.1, 2. &pxovres wey ectot nad of Bovxdrnr Tav Boor,
kal of immopopBol Tay Immwy, kal mdvtTes 5é of Kadovpevot vowels, av by ém1g-
TaT@or. Caw cixkdtws ty &pxovTes tovTwY voulfowro (all those called
herdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of those animals of which they
have the rule). 1. 2, 8. (of Mépoa robs maidas) diddoKovow eyxpartets elvat
yaotpds kal totod (teach them to be masters of their belly, etc., temperate in
eating and drinking). 4.1, 14. éuol 5& Sone? THS meylotns Hdovijs ToAdY
pddiota cuupépew eyKkpath elva: (to be master of, able to control the greatest pleas-
ure). 5.1,14. 7d poxSnpa dvSpdéma racy, cua, TOY ews VpLa@Y aKpaTH
éort. (depraved men are subject to, not able to control all their passions). Her. 6,61.
kadAtotetboet 7) maudioy Tagéwy TAY ev Sadptn yvvatka@y (will surpass
all the Spartan women in beauty). Th.1, 81. rots étAos abT@y na TE WAZA
imeppépopey (are superior to them in arms, etc.). XK. Ag. 5,2. *Aynolaaos
iyyetro &pxovtt mposhxev od waraxia, GAAG Kaprepla T@v idtwTGy weptetvar
(that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3.1, 19. rdxer we-
preyévov abvtod (you excelled him in despatch). Pl. Gorg. 475, b. oxebdpeda,
dpa Avwn bwepBdArAct Td Gdiccly TOD GSixetToSas, nal GAyovor paddov of
adicovvTes, 7 of &dixovuevor (the Ace. is more usual with dwepBddAew). L. 75%
e. mpeoBevety TGV TOAAGY Torewr (to take the precedence of many
cities). So also &@véxeodat tivos usually with a participle, to endure, per-
mit, properly to hold one’s self up over one). Pl. Apol. 31, b. dvéxeoSat ray
oixelwy Gmerdoumévwy (to permit domestic affairs to be neglected). Rp. 564, e.

lia yA

—

a

eee CO

§ 275.] GENITIVE CASE. 393

ob dvéxetat ToD HArAa Adyovros. ‘Hrragdar trav émSuusdy (to be sub-
ject to one’s desires). Dem, Cor. 308, 244. oddauod ArrnSels arjaASov tr Gy
mapa diAlrmov mpéa Bewy (being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C,
1. 3, 3. Swxpdrns Svolas Svev pixpas Grd pinpay oddty jryeiro wetotoSat Tay
&rd wodAay Kal weydAwy TOAAG Kal weydAa Sudvtwy (did not think that he was
inferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4,1. weydAov aya-
Sod petovenret (comes short of a great good). ‘Torepetv tijs udxns (to come
after the battle). “‘Torepi{ery r&v natpav (to be behind opportunities, to fail
touse them). ‘ToreptCesv Trav Epywy. X. Hier. 1,18. rabry rH eippoodry rijs
éArldos wetovektovdat tipayvvaa Tav idiwray. 2, 1. werovertrovvTas

kal ofrwy Kal roTa@y Kal bWwy (coming short of food, etc.).

Remark l. ‘Hyeuovedvecy and nyetoda: in the sense of to go before,
to show the way, with 686v expressed or understood, govern the Dat.; «parezy in
the sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Acc., but in the sense of to be
master of, potiri, to rule, have the command of, the Gen., e. g. xpareiy Tobs To-
Aeulous (vincere); xpateiy TIS xHpas, Tis TOAEwS, TAY evayTlwy, TaY
émidsupi@yv, Tod dpovs (all in Xen.).

Rem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the
Dat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. % rum, els tt, kard Tt, emt
Twi. — With frracSa id is often joined with the Gen., e. g. Th. 1, 62. 7d
otparéredov Hacato bxd TAY ASnvalwy.

2. The Comparative and adjectives in the positive with the
force of the Comparative, e. g. numerals in -dows and -Aods;
Sevrepos, wepitrds, etc., take the object by which the comparison
is expressed in the Gen. Genitive of Comparison.

X. An.7.7,41. od88y voul(w avipt KkarAloyv elvat xtrjua oddt Aaumpdtepoy
&periis kat Sixascogvyns Kal yevvarérnros (I donot think that man has
any possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ob Shrou thy
ipxovta Tav &pxonéevwyv movnpdteporv mposhre elvat (it does not become a
commander to be more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. xpvods 8¢ xpelo-
cwy puplwyv Adywy Bporors (is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48.
7d EAAnviKdy otpdrevua palverat moAAaTAHGLoY trecdau TOD HueTéepou
(that the army will be much more numerous than ours). 8.137. BimAhoros eyévero
aids EwdTod (he was twice as great as before). 6,120. bere por amixduevar
Tis cupBorjs tuelpovro Sums SehtacIa tovs Midous (though they came later
than the battle, after the battle). Obdevrds Sebrepos (second to, inferior to no one).
Oidevds Sorepos. Tay apxobytayv mepiTtTa xrhoarsat (to acquire more
than enough).

Rem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like a space-rela-
tion, by xpé and avr{ with the Gen. or by wapd and mpéds with the Acc. See
prepositions.

3. With’ verbs of buying and selling, e. g. dveta Ia, d&yopalew,
mplactat, kracJa, tapadapyPBavew ; mwAciv, drodidoa at, repdidooFat,
Sddvai;— also with verbs of exchanging and bartering, e. g.

-

394 -.) SYNTAX. [$ 275.

éAXdrrew, GAAdTreo Sat, SuapeiBerIor, Ave, etc.; — with verbs of
valuing, €. g. Tydv, TyoFa, moreioIau, d£odv, dévotoIa, and with
the adjective dgios. Genitive of price.

Her. 5, 6. (of Ophixes) ®véovTat Tas yuvaikas mapa Ta yoveay xXpnudTwr
peydaAwy (buy their wives at a great price). X. C.2.1,20.r@v rdvav Twr0d-
civ hiv wdyra Taya of Seot (sell all good things to us for toils). Cy. 3.1, 36.
ov 5€, & Trypdvn, Actov wo, técov dy plato, ste Thy yuvaika amodaBeiv
(what would you pay to regain your wife). "Eya ev, &pn, & Kipe, xby THs Wuxis
mptaluny, &ste whwore Aatpedoa tavrny (I would buy her at the expense of my
life). Il. ¢, 236. redxe’ &werBer, xpucéa Xarreiwy, ExatduBol evveaBolwy (was
exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3.1, 37. kal od Bd, & ’Apucne,
amdyou Thy Te yuvaika Kal adrods maidas pndeyv avta@v xatasels (nulla re pro
tis deposita, having paid nothing for them). Oi &yadtol obdevds dy képdous thy
Tis matpidos édevSeplay &vyTarxAdEatvto (the good would exchange the freedom
of their country for no gain). Il. A, 514. intpds yap avhp moAAGy ayTdiios
&AAwy (is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 Aueédgdpwy oddé av a-
kplatos hilwoe thy pépovta thy ayyeAlny (thought the one who brought the
message not worthy of an examination). 6,112. éudxovro &tlws Adyou (worthy
of praise). “Agsotdv twa Tips (to consider worthy of honor). X. Cy. 2. 2,17.
Eywye ovdtv auiodrepoy voul(w trav ev ayvdpwros civat TOU THY Lowy Td TE
Kaxoy kal ayaddv &Etotc Sat. Tay tii twos and tTwd Tivos, e.g. Féxa Ta-
Advtwyv, Tod Savdrov (to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con-
sider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser: rinaodal
Twi apyuvplov, Savdtou, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com-
monly, however, d{«nv is here supplied.

Rem. 4. . With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usually
considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by éyrt with the Gen.

Rem. 5. ‘The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. § 262, b.) expresses a
much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two
objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual
relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems
united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the
rule: When two substantives are connected with each other, the substantive which
completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in the Gen. As ad-
jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive,
many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are
derived, take the Acc., e. g. xpaticrouv marpos ‘EAAjvey tpapels (sprung from,
like natus alicujus), S. Ph. 3.

Rem. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective,
or Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen-
tence:

(a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it originates from the subject of
the sentence or from a Gen. depending on e?vat and ylyvecSa:. It always de-
notes something active (instead of passive), the cause, author, hence also the
possessor, the whole in relation to its parts, e. g. of Tod 5é€vdpov Kapmwol (arising
from 7d 5évdpov pepe Kaprovs), the fruits of the tree, the fruits which the tree
produces. Td THs copitas Kdddos (arising from 7 copia mapéxer KdAAOS OF
i copla Kadh éeotw or Kdddos €o7l THs cogias), the beauty of wisdom, the

Fone eo et Wns Lee eee

oe
AGr .

§§ 276, 277.) ACCUBATIVE CASE. 395

beauty which wisdom causes. T& 100 ‘Ontpov mohuara. ‘0 rod Bacitréws
vids. “H rod &vdpds adperh.

(b) It is called the Objective or Causative Gen., when it originates from the
object of the sentence, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of an intransi-
tive verb, e.g. 4 Tis coplas émtdumla, the desire for wisdom (émSupa ris
gopias, the copias being the cause of the émSupd); 6 Tis dperiis Epws, vir-
tutts amor, the love of or for virtue (ép& rijs aperijs); etvoid tTiv0s, good-will
towards one (etivous ciul run); émiméAcia TGV Woke minx@yv Epywv, cura rerum
bellicarum (é@mimuedotpar tay wodcuKay tpywv), “H tay TlAataréwy émorpa-
tela instead of mpds rods I1., the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108.
év amoBdor Tis is instead of em rijs yijs, in disembarking on the land.

({c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object
of transitive verbs in the Acc., i.e. when it takes the place of the object of a
transitive verb, and so denotes the thing affected or caused by the transitive
action, e. g.) Tis TOAEwS KTiots (from Krier Thy réAw), the city being that which
is possessed. ‘O rijs émiotoAs ypadeds (from ypdpea emioroaAgv), the émo-
ToAy being the object acted upon. ‘H tav caradv Epywy mpais.

Rem. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif-
ferent relations. Her. 6, 2. ‘loriatos bwéduve TGv “ldévwv Thy iryenoviny Tot
mpos Aapeioy toA€ nov the command of the Ionians in the war against Darius.

§ 276. (2) Accusative.

The Acc. is the Whether-case, and hence denotes: (a) in the
local relation, the goal, limit, or point to which the action of the
verb is directed, e. g. dorv podeiv, to go to the city ; — (b) in the
causal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also
the object put by the action in a passive condition, i. e. the object
on which the action is performed.

§ 277. A. LocaLt RELATION.

The Acc. in its local relation (Acc. of local termination), denotes the local
limit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Acc. is
used with verbs of motion, going, coming, etc.; yet this usage is found only in
the poets, especially in Homer. Od. y, 162. of uév dmoorpépayres tBav véas
dupieAtooas (they went to the ships). Il. a, 317. xvicon 8 ovpavdy fe (arose to
heaven). Od. a, 176. moAAol toay avdpes Huérepoy 5& (came to our house). S.O.T.
35. Boru Kaduetoy morety. Eur. Med. 7. Madera ripyous vyijs érAevo’ *IwAkias.

Remark. In prose, and usually also in poetry, a preposition is joined with
the Acc., which defines still more definitely the relation indicated by the Acc.,
e. g. eis, in, into, ds, to, card, downwards, dvd, es imép, over, éxi, upon, mepl
and , around, round about, werd, into the midst, after, xpds, to, into the presence
of, ® near to, ind, under, e. g. iévas és thy wéAw, mpocdSeiv as Tov Baciréa,
mepl or Gul thy wéAw Balvew — ém toy Spdvov ioubabas — érsely wera Todas
— iévas mapa Bacihéa — iévar mpds “OrAvpwov — iévas bxd yaiav.

396 SYNTAX. | [§ 278.

B. CAUSAL RELATION.

§ 278. (a) Accusative denoting Effect.

1.The Accusative denoting effect is used as in other lan-
guages, e. g. ypddw érictoAnv. The original and simplest form
of the Acc. of effect (of the object produced), is where a verb,
either transitive or intransive, takes the Acc. of an abstract
substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or
has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro-
noun or an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Acc.
This is often called the Cognate Accusative.

Pl. Symp. 181, b. obrds eorw (5 Epws), bv of patra tov dv8pdmwv Epaaiv
(which bad men love). Pl. L. 680, e. Bacirelay nmacav diuaordrny Bact-
Acudmevor (ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c. éwimeAotvrar mdcay éwmipeé-
Aetayv (they care for with all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845, 4.
Séomar tay dixalay Sénorv. X. An. 1. 8, 15. orparnyhoorta eps
Taitay Thy oTpatnylay (to be general of this command, army). 6. 8, 6. edTb-
xnoav TovTo T) edTEX HMA (were fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this
advantage). Id. H. 7. 1, 5. wAciorous wal peylorovs ayavas Hywviocuéevor
kara Sdrarray eddxiora wey aworeruxhkate, wAciota St KarwpSdxare (having
contended in the greatest contests). Andoc. Myst. 5,31. dpagdmevor tas peylo-
tas &pas duiv. So naras mpdters mpdrrew; épydeodau epyov Kaddv; &pxeww dicatay
apxhv ; aisxpay Sovdciay Sovrctew ; méyay TéAEWOY moAEuEIY ; XaAETHY VdcoY vorEiV.
"Exdhuous oT parelas @ipeoay (like &€odov e&évar). Th. 1, 112. Aaredapd-
viot Tov iepdy Kadovmevoyv méAEMOV eoTpadrevoay (like erparetay orparevew).
So dpxous duvivat, doSeveiv vocov, Civ Blov. X. Hier. 6, 7. wotey 8€ twa Frvoy
éxoip@. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can
be used, e. g. ‘O oixeios juiv wéA€ MOS obTws ETWOAE KHAN (our intestine war
was so warred, so managed), P|. Menex. 243,e. Kadral mpdte:s mpdrtoyvran
So also with adjectives, e.g. Kaxol maoay xaxtay, Pl. Rp.490,d. In certain
phrases, such as gvAakds pvAdrreww, excubias agere, pdbpov (pédpous) pépenv, tribu-
tum solvere, mouThy wourev, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without
an adjective, because here the substantive is used in a special and pregnant
sense.

2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the
verb, or of a similar signification with it, an attribute of such
cognate substantive, can also be used; in this case, the verb
frequently has a pregnant sense, since it contains, at the same
time, an additional idea.

Nikav wdxnv = vixny udxns (to conquer a battle, i.e. to win a battle); so
OAD MILA (= ’OAvumlwy vinny) viK Gv (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1,
126. Nikadv vavyaxlas = vinnv vavpaxiar (to gain a naval victory), 7, 66;

a

=" -"—

{ 278.] . ACCUSATIVE CASE. 397

vinay yy auny, sententiam vincere, vinGv Sleny (to carry one’s opinion, one’s
suit, triumphantly); like Siva Stew is: Ta €mivlera (iepd or Siuara), evayyé
Ata, SiaBarhpia, yevedAra, TA Adwata, yduous Sbeiv (to offer a
sacrifice on account of victory, a festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, ete.
by a@ sacrifice); To Tlepaixdy wpxeitro (danced the Persian dance), X. An,
6. 1, 10; radra (cwShwara) cuvSépevor (having made these agreements) ;
radta (= dpxous rovrwy) budcavres (having taken these oaths); rapdrrety
wéAX€MOov = Tdpayua ToArcuou (to stir up war, turbando bellum concitare, as it is
said, bellum miscere), Pl. Rp. 567.a. Passively, réA€ wos mpds robs ’Augioceis
érapdx9n, Dem. Cor. 277, 151.

3. The following constructions, likewise, mostly confined to
poetry, deserve special notice; in these, also, instead of the
substantive from the same stem as the verb or with a kindred
signification, the attributive of such kindred substantive is put
in the Accusative:

(a) Verbs signifying to shine, to burn, to flow, to pour, to shoot_or spring forth,
e. g-doTpdmrety yopywrdy cédas = dotpamhy yop. céAaos (to lighten a
Searfully bright light, i. e. casting a bright and terrific light), Aesch. Pr. 356 ;
SdAA ety Bloy (germinating, producing the means of, life), Pers.617. *Epeu-
vov alw @3euaa (I poured out black blood), S. Aj. 376. ErdCerw Sdepva,
alua, Adumwesv céAas, petvy ydda (all confined to poetry).

(b) Verbs which express sound, laughter, panting, and smelling ; here, instead of
the substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a pronoun is used,
e.g. OS éyyersat aovevés, rarevdy = Pdoyydv acdev7, etc. (to sound
feeble, etc.) ; 78d (= Fdbv yéAwra) yeray (to laugh heartily) ; 750 mveiv (to
breathe sweetly) ; wévea mvelovtes ’Axaol breathing spirit); *Apea mveitv
(Martem spirare); i Cerv 436; Sepwdv re kat Aryupby ban xe (6 Témos)
Te Tav TeTtlywv xdpq@ (resounds summer, etc., with a summer-like and shrill
sound, comp. Lat. aestivum sonat, vor hominem [= sonum hominis] sonat),
Pl. Phaedr. 230, c.’Avexdyxacé te pdda capdénov (burst into a sardonic
laugh), Rp. 337, a. ;

(c) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. 7, 446. cis rip (= Sépyya mupds) dp-
Saduoio: Fe So0pKas (looking fire, flashing fire). So BrAéwetv, dépte-
oat “Apny = BaAgduua *Apeos (to look war, terror); dpav aaxhy (to look
courage or boldness); Sépreo Sat dewdv, cuepdarcoy, taxepd (to look terri-
bly, ete.); pdBov BAémery (to look fury). Il. a, 105. xd«’ dcoduevos
(looking evil, with a threatening look, comp. Eng. looking daggers). B, 269.
&xpeiov iSév, looking foolish. Pl. Ion. 535, e. kAalovrds te kal dewdy
éuBrAérorvrTas.

Remark 1. By this use of the Acc. numerous adverbial expressions can be
explained, the place of the Acc. with its accompanying adjective being sup-
oe either by a pronoun alone (rodro, réd€, TravTa, Tdde, TI, Tl, ovdEv, under,

, 4, etc.), or by a neuter adjective, e.g. Tadra Aumeioda cal TadTa

34

area. eee Oe le ee

398 SYNTAX. [$ 279.

Tois moAAots (to grieve at the same things, and to rejoice at the same), Dem. Cor.
323, 292. Oavuacta exmdjrrovra (are wonderfully astonished), Pl. Symp. |
192,c. Ta ckpadtiota hvdnoav (were most flourishing), Th.1,19. So pakpody
KAaiew; mdvtTa evdatmovely; wpedciv, BAdwrev, Cnuwoty peydrAa, mikpa;
edepyerely TA méeyioTa, NEU yeAav, Méeya OF MEYAAG Hpovely, auapTdvely,
deiodat, Siapépery Ti, etc.

Rem. 2. Here also belong such adverbial expressions as: xdp«w (gratia, for
the sake of), xdpw éuhy, ohv (mea, tua, gratia), dwpeay (gratis), dwtivnv, mpotKa,
parnv (incassum). So also tovro, radra (therefore), ri (why), 6 (therefore). Eur.
Hee. 13. vedtaros & jv Mpiamdav: d nal we ys bretéreupay. Pl. Prot. 310, e.
GAN abTa TadTa viv HKw Tapa cé (on this very account).

4. The Acc. denotes also the effect merely aimed at, the de-
sign of the action; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or
adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as
eis, pds, émi, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic-
ular, belong here:

XphodSal rivi re (originating from xpioSal tin xpelav), to use something
for something; melSery (originating from weideyv twd meiow), ewalperv,
.€motptvety, Tpokarciovat, dvayKkdlery Tivd Tt, etc. Odw Exw, 6 re
xphoonmaradrg Tid) xpnodueda todrw; (for what purpose shall we use
him, what use shall we make of him?). Th xphyy T& wAclorov &Eta Expa@vro
(ad res maximi momenti), Th. 2,15. Tlerodfvat thy &vaxadpnary, to be
persuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction ¢is 7. avaxdp.), ib. 21.
Tatra ce érotptyw (I excite you to this). “Amépxoua, mply brd cod Tt met-
(ov avaynxacdjvar (before I am compelled by you to anything more severe), Pl.
Phaedr. 242,a. Todro otk rerde tovs bwxaéas (did not persuade the Pho-
caeans of this), Her. 1, 163; but érorpévew eis udxnv.

Rem. 3. The Acc.of design or purpose, is transferred to the manner according
to or in which something takes place. Here the fundamental idea is that of
striving for an object. Thus tpdrov, rodrov toy tpdmov (hunc in modum, in this
manner), mdvta tpémov, tTiva tpdmov, dikny (in morem, according to the manner of,
like). 8moia (in like manner), émurndés (consulto), rdxos and xara tdxos (celeriter).
Commonly, however, prepositions are used with such adverbial expressions.

§ 279. (b) Accusative of the suffering Object, ie. the
Object upon which the Action is performed.

Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin,
take some other Case than the <Acc., or are constructed with
prepositions.

1. The verbs dderctv, dvivdvat, dvivacIo, Bddzrew, adicctv, évox-
dety (commonly with Dat.), iPpicew, Avpaivertar, AwBGoIa, oi-
verIat, AowWopetv (to chide); cvoeBeiv, doeBeiv; AoxGv, évedpevew ; Tt
pupeoSar; Separeiew, Sopupopeiv, éxerporevew (to provide with a

$279.) ACOUSATIVE CASE. 399

guardian) ; xodaxeiew, Joredev (Jdrrev Poet.), zposxuveiv; mel-
Sew; dpetBerIa (Poet. respondere), remunerari; pvddrrecIat,
eiAaBeioat; pupetodoar, Lyrodv (to emulate).

X. C. 1. 2, 64. (Swxpdrns) pavepds fv Sepawedwy rods Seods (evidently
worshipped the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. tls bv etm Snuaywyds Towdros, stis T dv
piv Simov Swrevoas dvvairo, rods St Kaipods, év ols hv cHCecda Thy wédrw,
a&mddorro ; (as would be able to flatter the people). Tel erv 7d TAR AOS (to persuade
themultitude). X. Hier. 4, 3.0f roAtra: Sopupopodar meyv GAAHAOS avev modsod
(keep guard over each other). R.L.12,5.ueraocrparomededvovral ye (of Aaxedaiudvio)
phy wuxva cal row olver Sar Tov’s ToAEmlous evena, kal TOU MPEAETY TOS
gtrous ( for the sake of injuring their enemies, and assisting their friends). C. 4.3;
15. éxeivo 8t GSuua, Sri wot done? TAS Tv DeGv ebepyealas ovd by cfs ToTE ay-
Spdérwy atlas xdpow &meiBeoSat. Her.6,138.2adxnoav Tas trav’ AdSnvaloy
yuvatkas. Th. 1,32. WAelorapxoyv, roy Acwridov, tvta Bagiréa kal
véov &rn, éwetpdémevey (6 Mavoavias), X.H. 5.1, 17. rl fdv, 7) undéva
avSpénrav koAakevervy phre “EAAnva, wate BdpBapoy, civexa picdod;—
IIposxuvety Bactdéa. Pl. Rp.334,b. dpedeiv piv robs pirous (Sone?)
h SiKxaocivn, BAdwresy Bt Tro’s €xSpots. “Adixetv robs plaovus,
bBplCerv rots watdas. TModdAdkis nal dovAn TinwpodytTat tos 4di-
kouvs deamdras (take vengeance on their unjust masters). X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. of
gvaaxes €X0tSdpour abréy (but the Deponent AoidopeioSal rin, to reproach).

Remark 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition with
its Case: (a) dpeAety tux but very seldom, and then in the poets; (8)
&dixetv eis, mpds, and mwepl twa; (y) &oeBety eis and wepl twa; edoe-
Bety ets twa, wepl, mpds twa; (5) AvpalverSal ri frequently; (ce) AwBa-
oSal ru sometimes; (¢) bBpi ery eis twa often; (n) émitrpomedery tivds
somewhat frequently (§ 275, 1). “Apéoxesy takes the Acc. only in the sense
of to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please.

Rem. 2. AwpetoSal tut 1 (donare alicui aliquid, to present something to
some one), is the construction in Attic prose, not dwpeiodal twd tun (donare
aliquem aliqua re, to present one with something).

2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or
deed, e. g. evepyereiv, Kaxoupyety, Kaxorroviv; edAoyeiv, KaxoAoyeiv ;
eb, kadas, axis A€yeuv, elzretv, azraryopevewv.

S. Aj. 1154. &Spwre, uh Spa robs TeSvnndtras kak@s (do not injure the
dead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. kaxoupyeitv tods plrovs (to harm one’s friends).
Evepyeretv thy marplda (to do good to one’s country). X. C. 2.3, 8. ras F
by eyed dvemorhucy elny &deAOG xphioSa, emiotduevds ye nal eb A€yery Toy
Aéyovra, kal & worety Thy eb woLodyTa; Thy pévTa Kal Ady Kal Epy~
metpdémevov Cue dniay odx by duvaluny ot’ eb Adyety, ob €b worety (know-
ing how to speak well of one who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well
to me; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In-
stead of the adverbs «8 and xaxas with moieiv, etc., the Greek uses also the cor-

400 . SYNTAX. . [§ 279.

responding adjectives; hence tard, kaka moreiv, Aéyetv Tivd (to do good
or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See § 280.

3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and the
contrary, e. g. pevew (like manere), wepmevev, Iappeiv, xaprepety ;
hevyew, dropevyewv, arodidpdcxew, Sparrereverv. |

M) pe dye roy Klyduvov (do not flee from danger). Oappettre Sdvarov ( fidenti
animo expectate mortem). X. An. 3. 2,20. ras wey wdxas Sappetre (bravely
stand or endure the battles). Cy.5.5, 42. ef rwés oe Tiudow, dytaomd(ou Kal ebdxet
adrovs, va oe kal Sapphaowory (that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te
complectantur).. ‘O dotA0s &wéS pa toy Seamdr ny (ran away from his master).
PJ. Symp. 216, b. Spaweretdw ody airy cal pedbyw (I run away from him,
etc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. of ray mpaypdrwr apo ob wévovgt Thy Hmeré-
pav Bpadutita (do not wait for your slothfulness).

Rem. 3. After the analogy of pevyeryv, other verbs also, which contain
the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to
abhor, are constructed with the Acc., though but seldom, e.g. bmoxwpety toy
bxAoyw (to retire from the crowd); éxatijvat xlvduvoy (to shrink from, shun fear) ;
éxtpémetsat, bwextTpéwetdalt, bwetepxetral, awmoocTpée petal
Oappeitv tim signifies to have confidence in something ( fidere aliqua re).

4, Verbs of concealing and being concealed: davtdvew, Kpvr-
rew (celare), xpirrec tou; —also the verbs $3 dvecv (antevertere),
Aeiwey, érirdeirery (deficere) ; — verbs or particles of swearing,
the person or thing by which one swears being in the Acc.

Pl. Rp. 365, d. Seobs otre AavSdvery, ore Bidoacda Suvardy (to escape
the notice of, be concealed from the gods). Kptarety tivd Te (to conceal any-
thing from any one), see § 280. Her. 6, 115. wepiémAwov Sotyiov PBovdduevor
OXivat trols Adnvalovs amudueva és tb &otv (wishing to anticipate the
Athenians). "Emwirelmet we 6 xpdvos, } tyucpa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5,6. 7d
oTpdrevma boiros éwméAimwe. “Ouvumr wadvtas Seovs (L swear by all the
gods). Hence wd, ob wd, val wd, vy Ala

Rem. 4. Also the two impersonal verbs de7 and xp7, in the sense of to
need, are constructed with the Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person,
of which or whom one is in need; this construction, however, belongs only to
poetry, e. g. Od. a, 124. uvShoem, SrTed ce XphH (you will tell of what you are
wn need). Aesch. Pr. 86. abrdy ydp oe Set Mpoundséws (you yourself need
Prometheus). Aet with the Dat. of the person belongs to prose and poetry, e. g.
Pl. Menon. 79, b. S¢7 oby cor Tis aris epwrhoews (you need the same inquiry).
In the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Acc. of the person is
common with both verbs, e. g. de? (xph) ve TadTa moeiv; the Dat. is much more
rare, and with xp4 seldom even in poetry. X.C. 3.3, 10. ef cot déo1 diddonew.
Cp X. O. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. ZAAw@ yap 7} "Mol xph ye THsd kpxew
xSoves.

5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the mind,
e. g. poPeioSar, deioa, tpeiv; aicyiver Iau (reverert), aideiaIar; dus-
xpaivew ; exadyjrrectot, karardynrres Jas; ddAopioca Jar (miserart).

a. a a ee as
— > . we ee

— os

§ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 401

X. Cy. 8.1, 28. wardov robs aldouuévous aldotvra: trav dvaiday of
EvSpwro (respect the respectful), An. 1. 9, 6. Kipos &pktov more éripepo-
Bwévny odn Erpecer (was not afraid of a bear). Cy. 3. 3,18. (of mordusor)
MGAAoy juas GOBAcovTat, bray dxolawow, Sti odx ds PoBovevar TT hago-
pev adbtrods otko Kadjuevor (will fear us, hearing that we shall not crouch with
fear on account of them). Aigxbvomar tov Sedv (I feel ashamed before the
god). R. L. 2, ll. alde7to Sat rods &pxovras. Cy. 1. 38, 5. xa of, &
andere, pugatrépevov TadTa TA Bpdpara dpe (I see that you are dis-
gusted with, loathe this food). Pl. Symp. 173,¢. rods Eratpouvs éX€@. Dem.
Cor. 290, 185. KkaramwAayjvat toy SlrAiwmmoyv (to be panic-stricken by
Philip). In poetry this use of the Acc. is much more extensive.

Rem. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi-
tive verbs) the Acc. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object ;
this construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. ‘The following
verbs. especially belong here, Balveiv, dtocerv, repav, tAeiv pémery,
omevderv, etc. S. Ant. 1158. rixn catrappémwer roy edtvxodryra
agora sinks the fortunate man). "ExBalveiv, éwatacetvy rdda (to put out

e foot, move the foot quickly); ataaerv xépa (furiously to set or move the
hand to); Bdotv, wéda wepay, all poetic. Th. 6, 39. kaka omeddery (ac-
celerare}. In this way, verbs expressing sound, in the pregnant sense of putting
an object in motion and causing it to sound, are sometimes constructed with the
Acc. Il. A, 160. trma wely dxea KpoTdArCov ava mrorguoio yepupas (rattle
the chariots, hurry off the chariots with a rattling sound). Her. 6, 58. AéBnra
kpotéovas (rattle the kettle, strike it again and again). So also in a pregnant
sense, the poets say, Sedv xopetverv, EAloaev (deum choreis, saltando cele-
brare). Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 552.

6. With verbs of motion, the space or way passed over is put
in the Acc., these being the objects on which the action of the
verb is performed; so also the t2me during which an action
takes place (in answer to the question, How long ?), is put in
the Acc., as being the object measured by the action; so too
measure and weight (in answer to the question, How much?),
are put in the Acc., these also being the objects on which the
action of the verb is performed. °

Baivetv, wepay, Epweiv, tropeverdrat b5dy (to go the way, ete., comp.
itque reditque viam). Eur. Med. 1067. @AN efus yap 8) TAnmovertrdrny
636v (will go the way). X. Cy. 2.4, 27. whte ra FUsBata wopevou, GrAAa
KéAevé got Tors Hyeudvas Thy pdaotny (dd6v) HyetoSat (do not march over
the difficult places, but command your guides to lead over the easiest road). An. 4. 4,
1. €wmopetdSnoayr bid tris "Apuevias wedlov Gray Kat Aelous ynAdHous
(marched over a plain, etc.). R. Equ. 8,10. iv 6 wey pPedbyn em) Tod frre Tarv-
Tota xwpia (per varia loca). Cy. 1.6, 43. &yerv (oTpariav) } orevas Fj
mratetlas d50vs. Dem. IL. Phil. 49, 34. &ywv nal pépwr robs mA €ovtTas Id-
Aatray (sailing through the sea). Xpédvov, dv xpsvoy, for a time, (different
from xpévm, ovv xpévq, in, by time, gradually), vinta, juépav (during the night, day).
Her. 6, 127. 4 StPapis jeuale rottov roy xpdvow pdriora (was flourishing

34*

—*” * ae 7 . an paee acid: Ta

402 SYNTAX. [§ 279.

during this time). X. An. 4.5, 24. naradauBdver thy Svyarépa rod Keopdpxou
evvdtnv jmepav yeyaunuerny (who had been married nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 11.
kal x9és 88 nal tTplrny Huépayv taird TodTO empatroy. Dem. Phil.3.116, 23.
toxvoav Sé tt nad OnBaior Tods TEeXcUTalous TovTOVE) xpdvoUS peta Thy
év Acburpois wdxnv (during these lust times). Her. 1,31. ctadlous wévre Kab
TETTEPaKOVYTA Siaxouloavres a&mlxovro és Td ipdv (huving passed over forty-five
stades). 6, 119. dmréxew Séxa cat dinkoglovs oradious (to be distant two
hundred and ten stades). 6,135. MiAtidins d&méwAce Mdpov modwpehoas te &é
kal etkoot hucpas. “Edecoy dréxe: amd Sdpdewv tpidv hucpav 6ddv. X. C.
3. 6, 1. obdérw eX%kootv Eryn yeyovds (like vigintt annos natus, twenty years old).
Here belongs the Acc. with duvacdas, to be worth. Her. 3, 89. 7d BaBvadrioy
tddavrov Stvatat EvBotdas EBSounhKorvta pvéas (the Babylonian talent
is worth [weighs as much as, amounts to] seventy Euboean minae).

Rem. 6. In poetry, the Acc. of the local object is sometimes used eyen with
verbs denoting rest, e. &. kelodat, orijvat, hodu, Sdocev, cadicew, etc. (instead
of év with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Acc. represents the space as
the object acted upon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. (téaov mposideiy
éséreis) Svtiva Ketrar (quemjacens occupatum tenet). Comp. Larger Gram.
Part IL. § 554, Rem. 3.

Rem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Acc. to define more
fully the extension in space and time, viz., avd, from a lower to a higher place,
e.g. ava mwoTtaudy trciv, ava vixta;—Kard, from a higher to a lower place, e. g-
kata mwotaudy mAciv, Kata Tov Bloy;—aupl and mepl, round about, e. g. Balvew
Gud (or wept) thy médw, dudt roy xXemadva, wept TA Mndixd ; — dd, under, bp’
frwov, bd vinta, sub noctem ; — bwép, over ; — rapa, near by, along, by the side of,
e. g. mapa Toy ToTaudy wopeverdat, map’ bAov Toy Bioy ;— éml, upon, e. g. emi vaTa
Sadrdoons wAeiv, em wodAby xpdvov ;— did, through, e. g. bia Sduata Balvew, Sie
vUKTA;— meTa TadTa, postea ; —mpds éowépay, towards evening.

Rem. 8. From this use of the Acc. to denote space, time, and quantity,
very many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) ryv taxlorny (dddv),
celerrime ; thy mpdrny, primum ; thy evdSeiav, recte, straight forward ; waxpday, far ;
BAAny Kal &AAnv, sometimes here, sometimes there, ete. Il. W, 116. woAAa F &varv-
Ta, KdTavtTa, TdpavTd Te, dX mid T HAdov (they passed over many up hills,
down hills, straight and cross ways ; — (b) ohuepov, to-day ; adipiov, to-morrow ; apxhv,
thy apxhy, properly, at first, omnino ; 7tédos, 7d TeAcvTaioy, finally ; véov, lately ;
mpétepov, Tp@Tov, To MpaTov, T mplv, Td adtixa, Tavdv, TL TdAGL, TO MaAraidv, Td
Aourdy, etc.; — (c) moAAd, saepe; Ta TodrAd, plerumque ; ToAV, wéya, meydAa, pé-
yiota, OAlyov, puxpov, muxpd, ovxvd, waxpd, toov, TooovTo, mdyTa, etc. So also
MijKos, WARLOs.

7. Finally the Acc. is used with intransitive or passive verbs
and intransitive adjectives of every kind, to explain and define
their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Acc. represents the
object as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to-
which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers
or is directed. This Acc. is used most frequently in specifica-
tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace.
of more definite limitation, sometimes the Acc. of synecdoche. _

$280.] . DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE, 403

Her. 2, 111. xduvew tobs dp3aA mods (to be pained in or in respect to the
eyes). 3,33. ras ppévas byialvew (to be sound in mind). X.C.1. 6,6. adryey
tovs wé8as (to have pain in the feet). 4.1, 2. pavepds jv Swxpdrns ob trav Td
odpmarta pds Spay, dAAa Tay Tas WuXaS mMpds dperhy eb mepundrwy ediduevos
(that he was not desirous of those well-constituted in body for beauty, but of those well-
adapted in mind, etc.). Pl. Rp. 453, b. diuapéper yuvh dvdpds thy Pbaiv (woman
differs from man in respect to her nature). 462, d. 6 &vSpwros roy SdxTvAOY
GArye? (is pained as to, has a pain in, his finger). Kadds dort ra Bupara (is
beautiful as to his eyes, has beautiful eyes). Kaxds dors thy Vuxhv. So &yadds,
gods, ppdvimos, xphomos, xpnaTds, Sixaos, etc., with the Acc. ’Ayadds réxvnyv
tivd. Her.3,4. ddyns nal yvduny ixavds, nal ra wore mia BAxmos qv. X.
Cy. 2. 3, 7. dvéarn Pepatadas Td TGpma ok apuhs, ca Thy WuxX hy ob« s&yevve?
Gvipt dows. 8.4,18, devds Tadrny thy Téxvnv. So Savuaords 7d wé-
yesos, Td KddrAAcs (wonderful for his size and beauty, of wonderful size and
beauty). The English commonly uses prepositions to express the force of this
Acce., viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with an adjective, the English
sometimes changes the Acc. of the thing into a personal substantive, and
makes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. &yadds téxvnv, a good
artist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i.e. marksman ; or the prepositions of or with
are placed before the substantive denoting the thing, and the attributive ad-
jective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. veavlas KaAds Thy Wuxhy, of
or with a lovely spirit.

Rem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions eis, mpdés, xard are joined with the Acc.,
in which case the relation is analogous to an Acc. of space, denoting direction,

as diapdpew els Ti, ©. g. eis Gpethy. X. C. 3.5, 1. evdotorépa @ mérus eis Ta
mworcutka Extra. Zopds mpds 71. — On the Dat. see § 285, (3), (b).

Rem. 10. From this use of the Acc., many adverbial expressions have orig-
inated. ‘Thus the expressions of measure: edpos, dios, uéyedos, BdSos, uijKos,
TAHSos, apidudv; also yévos, dvoua, wépos, Td cov uepos, mpdpacw, under pretence,
Td GAndés, yveunv eunv. Her. 6, 83. KAdavdpos yévos eav Sryadeds am’ *Ap-
Kadins (being a Phigalian by birth). 7,109. Atuyn eodoa tvyxdve sel tprhkovTa
oradlay thy wepiodoy (in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. wera tavta adl-
kovto éml toy ZaBarov mwotaudy Td et pos tettdpwy mAESpwv (four plethra in
width). 4. 2, 2. of wey éropebdovro Td TAHSOs ws disxidsot (two thousand in
number). — Moreover tobvaytiov, tavaytia, on the contrary; tTaAda, in respect to
‘other things ; 7d bdov, omnino ; auddtepa, Todro (Taira) wév — TovTo (tadTa) dé;
ovdév, in no respect ; Tl, in some respect ; moAAd, wdvTa, etc. —Td er eu, Torn’
éué, Tovml ce, Td eis éue, quantum ad me (te), as far as it relates to me, ete.

§280. Double Accusative.

In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the
Acc. with one verb: —

1. When, inthe construction given under § 278, 1, the verb
has a transitive sense, as ¢iAiav duirciv, then the idea of activity
consisting of the verb and a cognate substantive (with which

404 SYNTAX. , [§ 280.

an adjective usually agrees), being blended into one, may at
the same time be extended to a personal object, e. g. pra
peyddyy piriav (= PAG) rov raida.

Her. 3,88. yduwous to’s mpdrovs éydmee 6 Aapetos Kipov S00 Svya-
tépas, “Atoocody texal Aprvateyny (contracted very honorable marriages
with the two daughters of Cyrus). 154. €wttdy AwBarat ASBnv avjKec-
tov (maims himself with an incurable maiming, maims himself incurably). 'Th. 8,
75. Spewoav rovs otpatidtas Tovs peylortous bpKous (made the sol-
diers take the most solemn oaths). X. Cy. 8.3, 37. éué 6 mathp thy tav Taldev
matdelav émaldevev (educated me in the education of boys). Pl. Apol. 19, a.
MéAnrés we CypdwWato thy ypaphy tavTny. 36, c ExagtTov evepye-
Teiy Thy peytortny evepyectav. Her. 1, 129. defarvov 7d (=—8) wey
éSolvioe. Th. 1,32. rhvy vavpaxtav amewodueda Kopivdious (like
vixny vixay), we repelled the Corinthians in the naval battle. Pl. Gorg. 522,
a ToAAG Kal HOéa Kal mavtodamwa eddxouv bas. Especially with
verbs of naming, after the analogy of dvoua dvoudgew Trwd: X. O. 7,3. karod-
olf we TovTO Td ’vopma (they called me this name, by this name). Pl. Rp. 471,
d. dvaxadodvTes TattTa Ta bvduata EavTods.

Remark 1. Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Acc.
of a pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. rdA Aq miyodmevos Tov
Sdeay. An.5.7,6. rodro iuas etamarjou. This is especially the case with
verbs of praise and blame, of benefit and injury, after the analogy of éyxdmov
éyrwuidCew tid and the like. Pl. Symp. 22l,¢. roAAG mey obv ay Tis Kal BAAa
Zxot Swepdrnv ewaivéaar (one could praise Socrates for many other things).

Rp. 363, d. radra 3) nal AAG ToradTa eyKwmrdCovaer Sixaoovyny.
MeydaAa, mikpd, twAelw, welCw wpedciv, BAdwTELY, G5iKkety Tiva,

2. Expressions of saying or doing good or evil (which generally
contain an Acc., or its equivalent in an adverb, of the thing said
or done), take the object to which the good or evil is done, in
the Acc., e. g.dyaJd, kahd, kaka Tovetv, TparreLy, epyale-
ota, Aéyerv, eirety, etc. tivd (to do good, etc., to some one).

X. O. 5,12. } yi robs tpiora Sepawetovtas airhy TAcioTA ayada
&vtimoret (returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8,
61. rére 3) 6 Oemoronrdns keivdv te nal ro¥s KopivSlovs moAaAd
Te Kal kaka EXeve (said much evil of him and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15.
ovderdmote eratovro TOAAG Kaka Huas ToLovyTes (never ceased to do much
injury to us).

Rem. 2. Instead of the Acc. of the object acted upon or suffering, the Dat,
is sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan-
tage (Dativus commodi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. ti 701 morjowow
of udprupes; (quid tui tibi prosint testes?) X. Cy. 1.6, 42. mpooxdme, ti oot
mommoovow of apxdvevor (consider what your subjects will do FOR you) ; on the con-
trary with o¢ (what they will do to you). An. 4. 2, 23. mdyta érolnoay tots
&moXavovaty (showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2, 27. Rv ratrd por
morhons & A€yeis (if you perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense
of, to do something with some one, as Pl. Charm. 157, ¢. ob dv Exomev, 8 Te woroi-

§ 280.} DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 405

péy got. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243,
55. diarede? mpdrtwy Kal Aéywy Ta BéEATLCOTAa TH SH mw (continue to do and
say what is best for the people).

3. With verbs: (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir-
ing, asking: aireiv, dmarelv, tpdtrrew (to demand), «ismpdrrew,
mparreaIar; epwrav, epéoda, éLerdlew, ioropeiv, dvicropeiv ; — (b) of
teaching and reminding: dddoxev, radsdev, dvapipvyjcKew, to-
pyvyjoxey (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more
usual) ;—(c) of dividing and cutting into parts: dater ta, diu-
peiv, téuver, Suavepew, Katavéue;—(d) of depriving and taking
away: arepeiv, drootepeiv ; orepioxe, avdav, apaipeta Tar ;—(e) of
concealing or hiding from: xpixrew (xevSew Poet.) ;— (f) of put-
ting on and off, clothing and unclothing, surrounding with: é-
dvew, exdde, dudrevvivar, weptBadrAcoJar.

Her. 3, 1. réudas KauBions és Atyutroy khpixa afree “Apaory Suyarépa
(asked Amasis for his daughter). 58. abrovs éxardyv tdAavta Expniav
(demanded of them a hundred talents). X. C.1. 2, 60. obd€va mémore wioddy
rhs ovvovelas éxpdtato Swxpdrns (never demanded a reward of any one for
his instruction). TH. 4.1, 21. ‘Hpermidas alte? thy "Aynaoldraov braAiras
re és disxiAlous kal weATagTas KHAAOVS TogobTous (asks of Agesilaus
about two thousand hoplites, etc.). Cy. 6. 2, 35. Ta eis tpophy Séovta eferd-
(ere rods ig iuiv (inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for
food). Eur. Hipp. 254. woaard d:ddones ydp wd rodds Bloros (teaches me
much). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 xpévos nal 4 umeipla rd ph Karas ExovTa
éxdiddoKer tTovs &vSpadmovs (teach men what is not proper). Her. 1. 136.
matdevouc: Tovs maidas tTpla podva (they teach boys three things only). 6,
138. yA@oody re THY Attixhy ka tTpdmwovs Tay “Adnvaiwy édidacKor
rovs watdas. X.An.3.2,ll.dvapvqow buasKkalrods civdbvovus(l will
remind you of the dangers). Hier.1,3. bwéuvnods me Td ev 7G idiwring Bly.
Her. 7,121. rpets polpas 6 éptns dagduevos mdvta Thy Teldy oTpa-
+ éyv (having divided all the land army into three divisions). Téuvetyv, dtatpety Tet
nhépn, wolpas (to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5,13. 6 Kipos rd
orpdrevua katéveime SédeKa wépn (divided the army into twelve parts).
Pl. Polit. 283, d. 8:€Awmev abrhy (rhy wetpntixhy) dbo wépy. X. Cy.4.
6,4. roy udvov poKa plraov maida &pelrAeto Thy Pux Hy (deprived my
only child of life). Eur. Hee. 285. rdv rdvta ® SABov juap ev pw agel-
Aero. Dem. Aphob. 839,13. thy tiuhy &toarepe? pe (robs me of honor).
Phil. 54, 50. ra f#pérepa huas &droorepe? (db SiAuwmos). Kptmtw ve 7d
&arbxnua (I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. ob phy plrous
ye, xtirt waddov } PlrAOous, kptmrety Bikaov ods, marep, Susmpatias. X.
Cy. 1.3, 17, mats uéyas punpdy txwv xitava, Erepov maida winpdy, weyar
Zxovra xiTava, exdicas abtéy, ry wey éavrod exectvov Hupleae, roy B
éxelvov adtds év €8u (a larye boy stripped another small boy of his large tunic and put

406 SYNTAX. [§ 280.

his own tunic on him). Her. 1, 163. retxos weptBaréoSat rhv rbary (to
surround the city with a wall).

Rem. 3. Several of the above verbs are sometimes otherwise constructed,
commonly, however, with some difference in the sense expressed; thus, ait e7v
Ti Tapa Tivos; épwrav tiva wept rivos; with verbs of dividing and cut-
ting into parts, not unfrequently the preposition eis, sometimes also xard,
is joined with the Acc., e. g. robs moAtras eis ef wolpas dietAov ; or the word épos,
etc., is governed directly by the verb, and the object to be divided is put in the
Gen., depending on pépos, etc., e. g. 50 polpas Avday mdytwy dietev (he divided all
the Lydians into two parts), Her. 1, 94; passively, d@3exa Mepoay vada) dufpnyvrat
(the Pirsigns are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2,5. Verbs of depriving
and taking away, have the following constructions :

(a) drmoorepety and &4datpetodar with the Acc. of the thing alone, e. g.
Tlds by obros éSéAat TA GAAST pia amooTepev ; (how could he be willing to
take away the things of others ?), X. Ag. 4,1. XdAaCa Td Kad@s eyvwo-
péva (provisa) kal wemwotnwéva apatpotyrasr (take away, destroy
the provisions), O. 5, 18; the Acc. of the person alone is but rarely found ;
thus with dga:petodat (to rob, take from), e.g. Andoc. 4. 32, 27. rots
moAlras ove e& Yoou xpiTat, GAAG Tobs uey &hatpovpmevos, Tors dé
Tintwy ovdevds atiay Thy Snuoxpatiay &mopalver.

(b) crepety, drogrepety, creplakety, apatpetodal Tivd ti very
often.

(c) cot epety, Amoortepetv Tivd Tivos, like spoliare aliquem aliqua re, to
deprive one of something, see § 271,23; but dpatpetodas very seldom
has this construction, and indeed only in the sense of to restrain, to pre-
vent. Ol dWiCoucvor apaupodyvTa Tas wey KUVAaS TOU edpeEty TY Aaya,
abtovs d€ Tis @PeAelas, X. Ven. 6, 4.

(d) &patpetoSai, &roorepety with the Gen. of the person and the Ace.
of the thing; they then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw
something from some one. ‘This is a more rare construction. Oi mAcovéxrat
tTav trAAwv adhatpovmevot Xphmata Eavrovs Soxovor mdAovtiCew
(taking their property from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3.
Sumpaxtas apatpotpevov tis wmérAEews (= Tay TordTav) Dem.
Cor. 232, 22. EY ri: BobAovra émrndedery nadr@v, obdevds AGroatepet
(ra xvynyéown), X. Ven.12,8. “Ostis,uh RAAWY EauTdy ArooTEpay,
aopadelas Seira: (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens ; éavtdv
is here to be considered as the Acc. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. .

Rem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs meidew, érorpivew, eral-
pel, Mpoxarciodat, avaryndCew, see § 278, 4.

4. An Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa-
tive of the predicate (which is often an adjective), is used with
“the verbs mentioned under § 240, 2, when they are changed
from the passive to the active; hence two Accusatives stand
with verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. rout, révan,
reddere; to choose, to appoint, e. g. aipeta a1, creare, etc.; to consider,
represent, and regard as something, to declare, to know, e. g. vopi-
Lew, frycio Ia, etc.; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. déyetv,
évoudlew, Kadev; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. tapadaPeiy d€-
xeoIai, etc.; to produce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate.

§ 281.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407

Kipos rods pldous érolnae mrAovalous (made his friends rich). That-
Sedvery Tivda copdy (to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education). Nopl-
Cer, hyetodal riva &vipa ayaddy (to think, regard, consider one a good man).
Dem. Cor. 5,43. of @erradrol Kal OnBata pirov, ebepyétny, gwtipa toy
Sirimmov jyotvyro. ‘Ovoud ery tiva copier hy (to call one a sophist).

| AipeTtodal riva orparnydy (to choose one a commander). X. Cy. 5, 2, 14.

Tov TwBhptayv ctvieirmvov mapéraBev. Dem. Chers. 106, 66.1dAews Eywye
wAodTOv Hyotmat cvuudxous, tlaeriv, efvoray. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. 4
elphyn Toy Si mov tay ’Adnvalav bYnAdv pe Kal Karéctnoerv igxupdy.

Rem. 5. On the use of the Inf. e?vya: with the Acc., see § 269, Rem. 1.

§ 281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative with the
Passive.

1 As the Greek considers the passive as a reflexive (§ 251, 1), it follows that,
on the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Acc. may remain with every transitive
verb which in the Act. takes an Acc. of a thing as the object acted upon, e. g.
(xéwrovot Ta pétwra),kdmTovTa: T& wéT wa, Which may mean, either that
they strike themselves on the forehead, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead
be struck, they are struck on the forehead ; Her. 7, 69. ’ApdBia Cerpas bweCwo-
mévot cay, Aldlowes 5¢ mapdaréas Te kal Acovréas evaumévor (the Arabians
were girt with the zeira, but the Ethiopians were clothed with leopard and lion-skins).

2. Hence, when the verbs mentioned under § 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act.

govern two accusatives, are changed into the Pass., the Acc. of the person or of
the object acted upon, is changed into the Nom., but the Acc. of the thing, or the

_ effect remains. (a) Odros uévro: 6 éravds éort Kadds, dy ob viv éwatve? tr

dvSpav atlwy mareversa (this is honorable praise by which you are now praised),
Pl. Lach. 181,b. Tpavwatiodels todAdAd (se. rpatuara), (wounded with many
wounds), Th. 4,12. "Ovoya 7d wey mpGrov Zdykan hy bd tay SicedAGv KAN-
Setoa (i SixeAla), 6,4 (was called by its first name). ‘H xplots, hv éxpldy
(to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134,50. Ta wéytorta Tiundivat,
S. O. R. 1203. Aeopudv Susethvucortoy Erneta Sedeis, Eur. Hipp. 1237.
So dpercioSa:, (nusotoSa peydda, BAdwreaSar moAAd. —(b) Movoinkdhy bwd
Adumpov wardeuvSels, bnropikhy 8 im Avtipdyros (having been educated
in music and rhetoric), Pl. Menex. 236, a; so didaxSfvartréxyny bad twos

_ (to be taught an art by some one); épwtndivar thy yvdéunv brs twos (to be

asked an opinion). Yi Kal oikhoes Ta abra wépy Siaveunadjte (be di-—
vided into the same parts), Pl. L. 737,e. “Yrd Baoiiéws wempaypmévos tods
¢épovs (having demanded the tribute), Th.8,5. "AgatpeSivat, dmootepn-
Sijvat thy apxhv bré twos. KpugSjvae te (celari aliquid). MereSjvac
Thy &vaxapnoty(§ 278,4). "AupiévyvveSar xitava occurs only with the mean-
ing to put a garment on one’s self, but not I let myself be clothed by another, the garment
was put on me by another ; but évduSijva: xitava. (to be clothed with a tunic) is in use,

3 As the Greek may form a personal Pass. (§ 251, 4), of every intransitive
verb, which has its object in the Gen. or Dat., e. g. dueAoduat, Huerdtorny, pSom

Re SES ae oe ea ae ne ee ge

408 SYNTAX. [$§ 282, 283.

oduct, epSovAdnv; SO may it also with such transitive verbs as have, together
with the Acc. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being
changed into the Nom., but the Acc. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. of
tav ASnvalwy éwmiteTpauérote THY PvAaknhy (quibus custodia demandata
erat, those of the Athenians who had been entrusted with the guard, from émirpéxw tr
Thy pudrakhy). 5, 37. of KopivSiot tatta émegtrarméevor davexdpovy
(having been commanded these things) ; 1, 140. ei tuyxwpioere, kal HAAO Ti mer-
Cov etads emiraxdshaoease (you will be commanded something greater). X.
An. 2. 6,1. of orparnyol &rmotundsévres Tas KEGaras ereredTyTAV.

§ 282. (3) Dative.

1. The Dat. is the Where-case, and hence denotes: (a) in a
local relation, the place az or «7 which the action of the subject
occurs ;—(b) in a causal relation, the object wpon which the
action of the subject shows itself or becomes visible — the ob-
ject which shares in or is concerned in an action. — This object
is: (a) a person, or a thing considered as a person, e. g. Boydd
tois moAirais Or TH woe; (8) a thing, or an object considered as
a thing, e. g. dyd\Aopar 7H viky. In this way the Dat. may be
treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded
as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the
third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or
instrumental Dat.

§ 288. A. Local Dative.

1. The Dat., as a local object, designates the place 2 (by,
near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al-
most exclusively poetical; in prose, prepositions are commonly
joined with the Dative.

Il. 1, 663. abrap "AxiArcds ebde wux Gd Kdtolns ebmhxtov (slept in the corner of
the tent). m, 595. ‘EAAGS« oixla valwy (dwelling in houses in Hellas). B, 210.
Kia ToAvpAociaBowo Sardoons aiytar@ meydrAw Bpeueta (roars upon the
shore). S. Trach. 171. (&@pn) rhy warady pnydv addijcal more AwSa@re (that the
beech tree once uttered an oracle at Dodona). ere belong the Locative forms very
common in prose, viz., MapaSé@u, *EAevoivi, Tudor, “IoSmot, ofko1, “Adhvyot,
TAaraidot, etc. (at Marathon, etc.): also, tatty, tide, here, #, where. So also,
Od. 0, 227. MuAloror péy Uoxa Séuara vaiwv.

2. Hence the Dat. is used also with the attributive pronoun
at7ros, to express the idea of together with.

—

§ 284. ] DATIVE CASE. 409

Her. 6, 32. ras méduas evenlumpacay adtrotar totar ipotas (they burned
the cities together with the temples — cities, temples and all). X. H. 6. 2, 35. af
amd) Svpakovody vijes Uwaca édawoay abtrots dvipdary (the ships were taken
together with the men).

3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some-
thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances
under which something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the
time (definite) and circumstances of an action.

In prose with jucpa, vucrl, unvl, éret, éviavr@, Spa and the like, in connection
with attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as mpdérepos, iorepos,
émiéy, mapeAdév and the like. The Dat. therefore usually expresses definite
time. THde TH vuntl, ravtTy TH Huéepa, exelvyn TH Huepa, TH adTF
vuntl, toArAAots Ereci, Tpltw unvi, TH ab’tH Spa, TE ewidvrse Eres,
éxelvw TG ret, TE botépw Etet, TOUTHY TE eviauT®@, ete. X. An.
4.8, 1. rH rpdtn hmépa adixovto em) Thy rotaudy (the first day or on the first
day). Also épa xetpavos (in time of winter), vovunvla (at the time of new moon) ;
likewise, MavaSnvaiois, Avovuctos, tparye~doits Kawwois, at the time of the Panathenaea,
ete. The preposition év is joined with the Dat.: (a) when the substantive
stands without an attributive, e. g. év judpa, év vunrl, év Séper; often also when
a demonstrative stands with it, e. g. év rodrw TG evavTg@ ; (b) usually, when a
space of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with
cardinals and the adjectives éAtyos, Bpaxts, mixpds, wodds, ete., e. g. Sehyaryor
évy tpsolv Huépats (in three days, in the space of three days), X. An. 4. 8, 8
Od. =, 253. éwAdouey Bopén dvéuw axpadi radr@ (with a good wind). Il. a,
418. tG ce Kakh alton TéKor ev peydpooww (under an evil destiny). Her. 6, 139.
éreay Bopén &véww abrnuepdy vnis etavton éx Tis duetépyns és Thy huetéepny,
tére mapaddcouey (when a ship shall come with a north wind).

§ 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object.

1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the thing denote an
object, upon or in which the action of the subject shows itself
or becomes visible ; both denote an object which participates
in, or is concerned in, the action of the subject; accordingly,
the language regards the Dat. of the person and of the thing
as the same. The distinction is merely this, that the former is
a personal object, or is considered as such, and consequently
has the power of will; the latter is a mere thing, or is consid-
ered as such, and of course without will. As the idea denoted
by the term where, is intermediate to that denoted by whence
and whither, so the Dat. (the Where-case), when it is a person,

35

410 SYNTAX. [§ 284.

stands in contrast with the Acc. (the Whither-case); when it
is a thing, in contrast with the Gen. (the Whence-case).

2. The Acc. denotes an object effected, accomplished by the
action of the subject, or the object acted upon; the Dat. of the
person, on the contrary, denotes an object merely aimed at by
the action of the subject and sharing in it; the action of the
subject is indeed employed on the object and becomes mani-
fest in it, yet it does not make it a passive object, but the ob-
ject itself appears in distinction from the subject as active ;
between the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes
place. The Gen. denotes the zmmediate cause; the Dat. of the
thing, on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause (the ground,
the means, the instrument); the Gen. denotes an object as
calling forth and producing the action of the subject; the Dat.
of the thing, only such an object as exhibits in or upon itself

the action of the subject.

Remark 1. In poetry a local limit or object is very often considered as a
person, and is indicated by the Dat.; this sometimes occurs, though but seldom,
in prose. IL. 0, 369. raat Seotaiv xetpas avloxovtes (raisiny up the hands to
all the gods). So atpecSa, eralpecda: Sdpv rivi. Il. €, 709. Aluvn KexAme-
vos Knguold: (dwelling at the Cephisian lake). 1, 218. mpoxaréooaro xdpun (he-
challenged to the contest). Th. 1,13. "ApewoxAjs Sapmlors jASeY. 3,5. abrots
MeAéas Adxwy &pixvetra.

Rem. 2. From this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many
verbs of motion compounded with the prepositions eis, mpdés, éml, etc., take
their object in the Dat.; also why most adverbs with the Dat. (or Locative) in-
flection [§ 101, 2. (b)], may express both the relation of rest (local Dat.) and
the direction whither (personal Dat.), e. g. xayal, humi, humum; so, likewise, the
adverbs in -7, e. g. AAn; those in -w, e. g. &vw, Kdtw, etc.; those in -o1, e. g.
medor, humt, a 3 évtavsot, huc and hic (but of, mo, wot, always denote the
direction whither).

3. Most verbs, which take the personal Dat., as the object
sharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa-
tion and union, e. g. dddvan, wapéxew, trurxveioIar, dpralew ti Tit.
The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative: —

(1) Verbs expressing mutual intercourse, associating with, mix-
ing with, participation.— Dative of communion, e. g. dprciy,
pryvivar, plyvvota, Kowodv, KowotoJat, Kowwwvely, du-, KaraAXarrew
(to reconcile), 5.-, xaradAdrrec Far (to reconcile one’s self to), Eevod-
oa, orévderIa or crovdds roeioJar, mparrew (agere cum aliquo) ;
cizeiv, A€yetv, Siar€yerIat, ebyeoIat, KarapacIa, etc.; also adjec-
tives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express

§ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 411

a similar idea, e. g. xowds, ovvrpodos, o'pduvos, ovyyerjs, weralrios ;
many other words of a similar signification, compounded with
ow and perd, also with év, mpés, and apd.

‘Oulrer trots dyaSots avSpaHmrors (associate with good men). Her. 3,
181. 5 Aeuoxhins TloAuxpdrei GulaAnoe. 6,21. wédces ara: uddwra &A-
AhAnat eEervdSnoay (cultivated hospitality with each other).—Et xopat
tots Seorts (J pray to the gods). X.H.2.2,19.¢mrdvderSat’ASnrvalors (to
make a treaty with the Athenians), 3.2, 20. AAAHAots crovias éwoihoar-
To (they made treaties with each other). Isocr. Paneg. 42. 9. af mpdies ai mporye-
yernuévaa Kotval waaiv uty Katedclpdnoay (common to us all). On the
Gen. with coivds, see § 273, 3, (b).

(2) Verbs of contending, litigating, vying with, e. g. épilew,
paxeoIat, rorcuety, dywvilerSar (usually zpds twa), ducalerIot, dp-
dusByreiv, oracle, etc.; also of going against, encountering.
meeting and approaching, and the contrary, as those of yield-
ing, e. g. troorjva: and idicracda; dravrav, travrav, iravrialew,
mAnoralew, weAdLew, éyyilew, etc. ; eixew, treixe, xwpeiv, tapaxwpeiy,
etc.; the adjectives and adverbs zAyoios, évavrios, 7éAas, etc.
(seldom éyyis).

Oi*EAAnves Gvdpelws Tots Mépoais euaxécavro (fought bravely with the
Persians), Mh efxete tots worepulois (do not yield to the enemy). Xph
Tots €xSpots ris nuerépas (xépas) rapaxwpjhoat, Isocr. Archid. 118,13. On
the Gen., see § 271,2. ‘Yroorivat abrots (Mépoats) "Adnrvaia rorAuh-
gaytes, évixnoay abtrovs (having dared to encounter them), X. An.3.2,11. ‘Tolo-
TagSat tvugpopais, Th. 2, 61. “Opowv duolw det reAd Ce: (like always
draws to like), Pl. Symp.195,b. “Iovro &v lot rotor Aakedaimovtorc: (encamped
opposite the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6,77. Tupavvos Gras éxSpds édcvSepia Kad
véuots évavtios. On the Gen., see § 273, Rem. 9.

(3) Verbs of commanding, entreating, counselling, inciting, en-
couraging ; of following, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso-
beying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. mpostarrewv, émitdrrew, Tapat-
velv, tapaxehever Jar, etc. (but keAcvew with Acc. and Inf.) ; érec Far,
dxodovteiv, diadéxerSar (to succeed to, take the place of); weiteo-
Sar; iraxovew, dredeiv, turtevew, terovéva, etc.; the adjectives
and adverbs dxdAovdos, dxoAovIws, Exopevus, Suddoxos, éENs, Epes.

X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. rotrwy dy (instead of &) viv buty rapaxeActouar oddty
Tots dobAats wpostdtTw (J enjoin upon the slaves none of these things which
I now command you). Her. 3, 88. "ApdBior oddapi xathxovoay em Sovrocivy
Tléponoe (never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6, 14. évavudxeov
aynkovothoavres Totgt otpatrnyotcs (they fought in disobedience to their

412 ‘SYNTAX. [$ 284.

commanders). X. Cy.1. 1, 2. ras &yéAas rabras eSoxoduer dpav maddov eSeArovoas
melSerSat Tors vomedaty, 4 rovs avSpémovs Tots &pxovas (more willing
to obey their shepherds, than men their rulers). 8.6,18. TG jMEepivge ayyéaAw@
(pact) roy vuxrepwoy SiadéexXeaSat (that the night messenger succeeds the one for
the day). Pl. Rp. 400, d. etAoyia tpa nat ebapuooria Kal eboxnuooivn Kal edpvd-
pla evn dela akoAovset. Eur. Andr. 803. naxdy kar@ diddoxov. Pl.
Phaed. 100, c. oxdme: 3) 7a EE Hs €xelvots (consider the things next in order
to those). .

(4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness
and wnlkeness, of agreement and disagreement, e. g. éoxévat,
Sporody, Sorove-IJa1, dp010s, dpolws, ivos, tows, Euepys and mposdepys
(similar), rapardjovos, raparAnoins, 6 aitds (idem), dpa; Sudpopos
(discordant, hostile), dudbwvos ; and very many words compounded
With pod, ovv, pera, e. . Gpovoeiy, 6udyAwTTos, Suovupos, cyupwveiv,
ovppwvos, cvvwodds.

Her. 1, 123. ras mdSas Tas Kipou ti ot éwirod duotovmevos (likening, com-
paring the sufferings of Cyrus with his own). 6, 23. 6 ‘Pnylov tépavvos Bid popos
(jv) rotot ZayxaAaiorcsr (was hostile to the Zancleans). X. Cy. 7.1, 2. am-
Aiwnéevar TdvTes Hoay of wept Toy Kipoy tots avrots TG Kupw Sraos (were
Surnished with the same arms as Cyrus). 5.1,4. duotay rats SovAats eixe
Thy eéodnta (TidvSeu). 7.5, 65. 5 oldnpos &vicol ros dodeveis tots ia Xv-
pots év TG mworeuw (makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13.
xarerdv dot Yoovs Tovs Adyous TG peyéSet trav pywy ekevpetv. Th. 1, 49.
H vavpaxia me Couaxlia mpoopépns (ivr).

Rem. 8. On the Comparatio compendiaria with expressions of likeness and
similarity, see § 323, Rem. 6. On the Gen. with éyyvs, rAnotoy, § 273, Rem. 9.
The codrdinate copulative particle kal, is not seldom employed with adjectives
of likeness and similarity instead of the Dative. Her. 1, 94. Avdol vdmorr wey
mapamwAnotoiot xpéwvTa Kal “EAAnves (=“EAAno. or Tots ‘EAAnvwy), the
Lydians and Greeks have similar laws, instead of the Lydians have laws similar to
the Greeks. So év tow, toa, duolws, dsavtds, kata TavTa Kal, ete. Pl. Ion. 500,
d. ox duolws memornxact Kat “Ounpos. Comp. similis ac, atque. There also
occur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, as, ésmep with
Yoos, dards. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. rdbv adrdv rpdmov, Sswep, k. T. A.

(5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting,
to please, and the contrary, e. g. mpézew, dpydorrew, mposyxew (with
an Inf. following), zperdvrws, dmrperas, eixds eorw, eikdTws, dpéoKev
(avddvew Ion.).

Pl. Apol. 36, d. rl ody rp émet &vdp) wévnri; (what then is becoming a poor
man?). Her. 6,129. €wirG apeoras dpxéeto (he danced pleasing himself).
X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. dpéoKery uty weipayrat (they endeavor to please you).

(6) Verbs signifying to agree with, to assent to, to reproach, to
be angry, to envy, e. g. dpodroyely, etc.; péuperda (to reproach ;

+ > * 2
-_—_* any
- .
- * oan

- a wn
v

§ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 413

péudperIai rwa means to blame), doWopeir Ia (to reproach), eur
pay, éyxadeiv (revi re), ercadeivy (ri tT), eremAnrrey, dvedilev, évoyAeiv
(more seldom with the Acc.), etc. ; IvpotoIa, Bpymotodau, yade-
maivew, etc.; pJoveiy (rwi twos, § 274, 1, more seldom rwi zr),
Bacxaivew (to envy ; Bacxaivew twa, to slander). The Acc. of
the thing very often stands with the Dat. of the person.

Her. 3, 142. éy@ ra (= 8) rG wéAas erimAhaoca, abtds nara dbivauw od
rorhow (what I rebuke in my neighbor I will not do myself). 'Th. 4, 61. ob rots
tpxew BovAomévots peu pouat, AAA TOTS braxove ETOtmoTéepots odgtLY
(I do not reproach those wishing to rule, but, etc.). Dem. Ol. 2. 30, 5. AvdxA€t
hmiv & &iAermos (gave trouble to us). X. An, 2.5, 13. Aiyurrious, ofs uddAwora
duas viv ywdokw TeIvuuwuevous, KoAdceade (with whom I know you are angry).
Cy. 1. 4, 9. 6 Setos abr@ €rXoidopetro, thy Spacityra dpav (reproached him),
4. 5, 9. Kuatdpns €Bpimotdro TG Kip nal trois Mfdots TE waradcwdvtas
abroy Epnuor ofxerdat (was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). .

(7) Verbs of helping, averting, and being useful, e. g. apiyew,
dpivew, ddégev, tysmpetv, Bonteiv, éxixoupeiv, dmrodoyetoSa, Avowre-
Neiv, éxapxelvy, xpaurpety and the like (but édvwdvac and addedeiv
with Acc. § 279, 1.); also several verbs compounded with
atv, &. g. cvphépew (conducere), cvprpdrrew, cvvepyeiv, etc., and
many adjectives of the same and similar significations, and
the contrary, e. g. xpyjomos, BArAaBepds (but BAdrrew with Acc.
§ 279, 1.), piros, éxIpds, roAgutos, etc.

X. R.L. 4,5. dphtover TH wdAet wavtl oSéver (they assist the city with all
their strength). Cy.3.3,67. (ai yuvaixes) ixerevovor mdytas uh petyew Katadimdy-
was, &XN &udvat Kal abrats, kal réxvors, Ka ooplov adrots (to de-
fend them, their children and themselves). 4.3,2. rodrots ydp pacw avdyenv
elvat mpodtuws &GXéE ery (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922.
(Opéorns) HSéAnoe Timwpeiv waTtpl, Kakhy yuvaika KaSeov Kataxtaydyv
(wished to help his father). Pl. Ap. 28, c. ei riuwphoers Marpénrw re
étalp@ tov pdvor (if you shall avenge the murder of your friend~ Patroclus, i. e.

if you shall avenge for him).

Rem. 4, The words ¢faos, éxSpés, roAéustos are also used as sub-
stantives, and govern the Gen. X. An. 3. 2,5. robs éxelvov éxSlorovs
(his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad-
jectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for the advantage, favor, honor,
arm, disadvantage of a person, or an object considered us a person (Dativus
commodi et incommodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here
belong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. 6pxetoSat
rois Seois (to dance in honor of the gods) ; orepavoteSa Ses (10 crown one’s self in
honor of the gods). Her. 6, 138. "Aprémsde dprhy &yew (to keep a feast in honor
of Diana). The Dative with kAvew (Poet., especially Epic), is also to be re-
garded in the same way: xAd9{ yor, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also,

35*

414 SYNTAX. [§ 284.

the phrase, mostly poetic, déxecSaf rs twl, to receive something from some one,
since it involves the additional idea that the reception of the thing will be re-
_ garded as a relief, as agreeable, etc. to the person. Od. 2,40. &s &pa pwrhoas of
eddtato xdAKeov eyxos (received from him las a favor to him] the brazen spear).
See Larger Gramm. Part. II. § 597, Rem. 3

(8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting with something in a
person.

‘TrorkauBdvery dei rg torov Te, bri edhdns Tis kvSpwros (scil. éoriy), Pl.
Rp. 598. d. “Erepa 54, &s Zoe, Tots PbAakLy ciphHeapev, 421,e. Oapcovar
pdAwora ToAguol, bray Tots €vavTtlors mpdyuata kal doxoAlas muvSdvwvTat
(when they perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8.

(9) The Dative stands with éori(v) and cici(v), to denote
the person, or thing considered as a person, that has or possesses
something. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the
Nom., but the verb is translated by the English have, etc., and
the Dat. as the Nom. So also with yiyvecda and i aerdpxseu: (to
be, exist), also with idvos and dAAérpws.

Kup@ hv peyddn Baorela (Cyrus had a great kingdom).— Tots trovelots
TOAAG Tapapvaid pacw efvar, Pl. Rp. 329,e. "Hoav Kpolaow dvo aides,
Her. 1,44. When the above verbs are connected with a predicative abstract
substantive, they may be translated to prove, to serve. Xaipipav éuolt (nula
MaAAoy, } OPEAELA Cot, X. C. 2. 3, 6. (Ch. mihi detrimento potius est, quam
emolumento, is an injury, proves an injury rather than a benefit).

Rem. 5. The possessive Dat., or the Dat. of the possessor, is to be distin-
guished from the Gen. of the possessor (§ 273, 2). The Dative is used, when
it is asked, what the possession is (what has one ?), and the possession desig-
nated is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. Kipw fv meydAn BaciAcia,
Cyrus had (among other things also) a great kingdom; the Gen. is used, when it
is asked who the possessor is (whose i is this 4); and the possessor is’ contrasted
with other possessors, e.g. Kipov jv peyddAn BactAcia, to Cyrus (and not to
another) belonged a great kingdom. The ative describes the person as one to
whom the possession has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con-
trol it now is; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, from whom. the
possession has proceeded.

(10) The Dat. is used universally when an action takes place
in reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that
the person in some way shares or aie aa i in it. Here be-
long the following instances : —

(a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judgment,
consideration, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a definite
authority or value; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of

the person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat. therefore shows
when and under what circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. dAndei be

§ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 415

Adyw xpewmerw od KopwSlwv rod Snuoclou eorly 5 Snoaupds (recte aestimanti hic
thesaurus non est Corinthiacus, in the judgment of one estimating the matter correctly,
tt is not the Corinthian treasury). Th. 2,49. 7d twdev aatopévy c&pa odk byay
Sepydv hy (the external part of the body, when one touched it, in the view of one touching
it, was not very hot). Here belong especially the Datives eisBdyri, é&idvri, dvaBdyrt,
iwrepSdyr: and the like, with local specifications. Her. 6, 33. dd Iwyins éwadAaood-
mevos 6 vavtixds orpards Ta én’ aporepd ésmA€ov Tt TOD EAAnsTévTov alpee wdvTa
(the naval force subjugated all parts of the Hellespont, upon the left as one sails into it,
or with respect to one sailing into it). X.Cy.8. 6,20. (Kipos) Aéyera karacrpépacda
wdvra ta t3vn, doa Suplay ei sBdvre oixe? mexpt epudpas Sadrdoons (which dwell as
one enters Syria [from the entrance of S.| to the Red Sea). Also the expression és
ouvveAdyre eineiy, to speak briefly, to say in a word, properly to say it when one
has brought the whole together into a small compass, has comprehended the whole, e. g.
“Avev apxdvtwy ovdiy ky ote Kaddy, otre ayaddy yévoiTo, ds wey cvvEeAdyTs
eimeiv, ovdauov, X. An. 3. 1, 38.

(b) So also the Dat. of the person often stands in connection with ds, in
order to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but
has its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6,4.
5 rk wep rods Seods vdutma eidas dpSds bv Hutv eboeBhs Gpicuevos ely (nos-
tro judicio, in our opinion). S. O. C. 20. paxpay ydp, ds yépovrt, mpobordans
55dy (you went forward a great way, for an old man, as an old man would view it).
Ant. 1161. Kpéwy yap Fv (ndwrés, &s éuol, moré (in my opinion). Pl. Soph.
226, c. raxezav, &s €uol, oxdpw emirdrres. Her. 3, 88. yduous rods mpérous
éyduee Mépanat 5 Aapetos (matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con-
tracted very honorable marriages, in the judgment of the Persians). Altogether
usual in the phrase &fids eiul rivds revs, or even without the Gen., &iids
eiul reve (Lam of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1. 2, 62. euol wey
5) Lwnpdrns roodros dy edéner tus BEros elvac TH wWdAEL mGAAOV, } Savdrov
(rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). Pl. Symp.
185, b. obrds éorw 6 Tis Obpavlas Seod Zpws Kad ovpdvies Kal moAAod Kiws Kar
wéret xa idié7ats.

(c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with Bovaopéve, ndonéve,
dopéve, eArouévy, &xSoueve, mposdexoueve and the like, in connection with
verbs, most frequently with efva: and ylyveoSa:. Such a participle gives
definiteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. Ei tadrd cot BovAopéevy
early (if this is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). Otrés wot 7dopéva
amhytnoev (he met me to my joy). Her. 9,16. 7donévotoiv Hutvy oi Adyor ye-
yévact. Th. 6, 46. rG Nixla wposdexoudva hy Ta wept Tay Evyeoralov
(were as Nicias expected). Pl. Rp. 858, d. GAN’ Spa, ef got BovAopévy (se.
éorly), & Aéyw, whether what I say pleases you).

(d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first and second persons, is often
used, not because they are really necessary for the general sense, but to show
that the statement is made in a familiar, humorous, and pleasant manner. This
is called the Ethical Dat. (Dativus ethicus). X. Cy. 1.3, 2. dpav 5) tov kdopoy
Tod mdwrov, euBrémwy aitG, treyey (5 Kipos): 72 pijrep, &s adds wot 6 wae

416 SYNTAX. [§ 284.

os (O mother, how beautiful grandfather is, IN MY EYES). 15. hv dé pe karadlays
evadde, kat uddw immevew, Tay uev év Mépoas &, olual o 01 éxelvous rods dyaSous
Ta meCikd fadiws uxqrew (TO GRATIFY YoU, I think I shall easily surpass those
skilled in foot exercises).

(11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass. (rarely
with other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the actwe person or
agent. 'The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition,
and the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same
time as the person for whom this condition exists, while by éxé
with the Gen., the author merely is expressed.

Her. 6, 123. &s wot mpdrepov SeSHAwWT aL (as has been before shown by me).
Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. Se? Sinyhoacda ra ToUTw MWeTpayueva mepl judy (it is
necessary to describe what has been done by him). Ol. 1. 26, 27. th wémpanrat

Tots &%AAots; (what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which
is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. radrd wor AéAexTau (I have said this).

(12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in
the Dative with verbal adjectives in -rés and -réos, [§ 234, 1, (i)],
both when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im-
personally in the Neut. Sing.: -rdv, -réov, or Pl. -rd, -réa (§ 241,
3.), or when they are used personally, like the Latin participle
in -dus ; those derived from transitive verbs,-1. e. such as govern
the Acc., admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ;
but those derived from intransitive verbs, admit only the im-
personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat.
of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which
it is derived.

T) otpdrevua evemiSetov hy évravea Tots moreptors (could be easily
attacked by the enemy), X. An. 3. 4,20. "Aocknréov (or -réa) éorl cor Thy
aperhy (you must practise virtue or virtue must be practised by you). "Emisumn-
téov eon Tots dvSpamors Ths dperhs (there must be a desiring by men, men
must desire virtue). "Emixeipntéov earl cor Te epye@ (you must attempt the
work). &nut 3) BonSnréor elvan trois mpdypacw buity (I say that you must
render assistance), Dem. Ol. 1. 14,17. KoAagréoyv éorl cot Toy &vSpwror
(you must punish the man). "Ackntéa éort vor H apeth. “QPernTéa oor 7
réuus eotiv, X. C.3.6,3. So the Deponents (§ 197),e.g. wruntéov eorly
futy tovs &yaSots (from pietoSal twa) or mime éor cioly Huty of ayadsol
(you must imitate the good).

Rem. 6. The verbal adjectives of those verbs whose middle form has a Pass.
as well as a reflexive or intransitive sense, have, likewise, in the impersonal

Neut. form with éoti, a two-fold signification; and when an object is joined
with them, a two-fold construction, e.g. reratéov éorly tiv abrdy (we must

Ws a
-

$ 286.) DATIVE CASE, 417

convince him) from welSw rd; and wero réov early hui rots véuors (we must
obey the laws, obtemperandum est a nobis legibus) from melSopual tin, obtempero
alicui ; &tmakAanréov early hiv abroy Tov Kkaxov (we must rid him of the evil)
from amadAdrrew Twa Tod Kaxod; and &maAdAaktéov eorly ijiv Tov avSpémov
(we must get rid of the man) from &madAdrreadal twos (to get rid of something).

Rem. 7. Not unfrequently, however, the verbal adjectives in -reés, among
the Attic writers, take the active person or agent in the Acc. also, as these ver-
bals have the force of the impersonal verb 5¢7 with the Inf., e. g. Pl. Gorg.
507. d. rdv BovAdmevor evdaiuova elva: cwppocivny Siwktéov xa aonn-
Tt éov (whoever wishes to be happy must seek dnd’ practise sobriety). Often, also,
the construction of verbal adjectives is changed into the Inf.; in this case the
agent must necessarily stand in the Acc. X. C. 1. 5, 5. éuol wev doxe?... €Aev-
Sépew avipl evurdy elvar wh tvxeiv SovAov toovtTov SovAetovrTa de...
ixetevecy Tods Seovs kK. T. A.

§ 285. C. The Dative of the thing (Instrumental
Dative).

1. The Dative of the thing expresses relations which in
Latin are denoted by the Ablative. The relations expressed
by this Dat. are:

(1) The ground, reason, or cause, e. g. 6oBw axndASov, eivoia,
ddixia, PoBw, UBpa woety tr; especially with verbs denoting the
state of the feelings, e. g. xaipeay, yderIa, aydd\AcerJa, éraiper-
Ja, AvrciaIa, dviiodo, adyciv, éx-, katarAyrrecIar; Savpaleu ;
Arifey ; orépyew and ayaray, dpécxerIa, dpxetotar (all four: to
be content, to be pleased with something); dyavaxreiv, dusxepaivey,
xareras, Bapéws pepe, axterIa; aicxiverIa, etc.

X. C.1.3,1. of Seol rats mapa tay edocBeordtwy Timais uddAwTa xalpou-
atv (are especially pleased with the honors from the most devout). Her. 478. S:al-
Tn ovdauas RpécKeTo SkvIikH (was by no means pleased with the Scythian
mode of life). Th. 4, 85. Savud¢w rH awmonArcloes pov tav muddy (I am
surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3,97. éAwiCerv tH TEX
(to hope in fortune). Srépyw trots tapoidaiv (I am content with the present
things). “Ayanw@ tots imdpxovo.v ayadots. XarkewGs Pépw ois
mapodor mpdyuace (I am troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An.1.3, 3.
Aicxtvoua tots rewpaynévors (Lam ashamed on account of what has been done),
C.2.1,31. Pl. Hipp. maj. 285. e. eixdrws cor xalpovory of Aaxedatudviot, Gre
WoOAAG €ibdrTi. "AydAAouat TH viky. TModdo ayavaxtoic: TG Sa-
vadtw. Avsxepalyw rots Adyots. Dem. OL. 3.13, 14. dyarfoas trois
mwempayévots jovxlay oxhoe. Ioxverv rots cdmaci,X.C.2.7,7. So
also with adjectives, e. g. irxupds xepoly, taxbs moaly, etc.

Remark 1. The preposition éx/, on account of, at, is very often joined with
the Dat.; thus common Y; XaAewas pepew el rin, Savud ew eri tur; Susyxe-

palyw usually with the Acc., § 279, 5; we also find ayaw@, orépyw, Bapéws,
XaAETOS HEpw Ti.

418 SYNTAX. [§ 286.

(2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom-
plished. Hence the Dat. also stands with xpjo3ar (uti) and
its compounds, and with vouilew (to be accustomed to).

BdéAAew AlSors (to throw with stones = to throw stones). *Axovti{ew aixmats
(to hurl with spears = to hurl spears). X. Cy. 4.3, 21. 6 pév imroxévtavpos
dvoty bmSaApmoty mpoewparo Kal Svoty Srorv Hovey: eyo B& rérrapos
piv bo>SaApots Tekpapodua, tTétTTapa.r SB wo mpomcdhooua: ToAA
ydp pact Kal trrov avSpdrois tots bPIaApmots mpoopayta Sndovy, woddAa SE
Tots @o) mpoaxotovta onuatvev (the centaur saw with two eyes,and heard with
two ears; but I shall see with four eyes, etc.). 18. mpovociy pév ye ttw mdvra
TH avSpwmlyyn yvdpn, Tats BE xepaly drrodpophow, didtoua 5¢ TG ir-
ww, Tov 8 évayriovy avatpibw TH Tod tmov foun. X. C. 4. 2, 9. af Trav
copav aydpav yraua &petH wAovrifover robs Kexrnuévous (enrich with virtue
those who possess them). Her. 3, 117. otro: dv, olmep umpoodey eédecay
Xpaotar TG bdart, ovn Exovtes adVTE XpagTHat, cvumpoph peyaan bi-
axpéwvras (those who before were accustomed to use the water, not being able to
use it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. kev mpopdcer
ratty katTaxp®. But caraxphodar and S:axpiosar in the sense of
consumere, to kill, as transitive, govern the Acc. Comp. Her. 6, 135; Antiph. 1.
113, 23. With xpioSaz a second Dat. often stands, by means of attraction,
or eis with the Acc. or the Acc. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (§ 278, 4),
to express the design or purpose, e.g. xp@ual cot riaotT@ PlaAw, as in the
Lat. utor te fido amico, I have thee for a true friend). X. An. 1. 4, 15. duty
wigrotTarots xphoetat kal cis ppovpia nal eis Aoxaylas (will employ
you as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4,117. pwvi ot
Savpoudra vowl Cover Sxvding (are accustomed to use the Scythian language).
Th, 2,38. dy@ou nal Svolacs dietyoiots vowllover

Rem. 2. The Dat. is very often used without oty in military expressions,
with reference to a retinue or force, in order to-represent this as the means by
which something takes place; this usage is found particularly with verbs of
going and coming. Such Datives are orpat@, ordaw, TAHSEL, vaval(v); trois,
otpariéras, etc. (In Latin the Abl. without cum, as magno exercitu venire, to
come with a large army). Her. 5, 99. of "ASnvaior amiéatro eXxkogt vnual (came
with twenty ships). ‘Th. 1, 102. "ASnvato: jASov TAA Es ode 6Alye@ (with not
a small number). 4. 39. of TleAowovvhato avexdpnoay TG TTpaT@ ek THs TvAov.
X. Cy. 1.4, 17. abrds rots tmmors mposeAdoas pds TX TG Mhdwy ppodpia Karé-
pewev (having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. Sappartéws huiv épelrovro
oi moAcumiot Kal imm@ixg ka TWEeATATTIKG.

(3) The following relations also may be considered as the
means, and are expressed by the Dat.:.(a) the material of
which (= with which) anything is made;—(b) the rude. or
standard, according to which anything is measured, judged of,
or done; hence the Dat. stands particularly with verbs of
measuring, judging, mferring, e. g. oraI pacta, -yeyvooxew, €ikd-

- ae eel .

—— =
|
4 - bed
u

§ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 419

few, xpivew, rexnaiperIa; also in general, to express a more defi-
nite limitation, to denote in what respect a word is to be taken;
thus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to
excel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary; also with very
many adjectives (instead of the Acc. of more definite limita-
tion, § 279, 7);—(c) the measure, by, according to which an
action is defined or limited, especially with comparatives and
superlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include
the idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of
difference between the objects compared ; — finally, (d) the
way and manner in which anything is done (How ?).

Her. 3, 57. 4 &yoph nal 7d xpuraviiov Taplow AlSw hoxnuéva (hv) (were decora-
ted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2.
rorovTw oTadsunoduerv or rphymuate (ex tali re judicantes, having judged
JSrom or by such a circumstance). 7,16. rH of eoSHTt rexuatpdmevoyw (ex
tua veste judicium faciens). X. Cy. 1. 3,5. rlye 3) od rexpatpouevos, @
wai, Tatra Aéyes; { judging by what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3,19. af pdxat
xplvovTat maddoy Tats Wuxats, } Tals Tay cwudtwy popmars (are decided
more by courage, than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6, obrot mdvtas dvSpémrous
dbrepBeBAhkcact TéAun TE Ka wiapia (have surpassed all men in daring
and brutality). C. 2.7, 7. iexvtvery trots cémace (to be strong in body). Cy.
2. 3, 6. dyad ore wrogly cis Taxds, ob} Te xepoiv ioxupds. Hence rg
bvri, TH GAnSela, TE Adyw, TE Epyy (according to the nature of, etc.) ; also ywépup
oharjvat, Yevadijva (to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184.
Reulpaus yevefjor wévte wmpdtepov éyéveto tis Nitdéxpws (was before
Nitocris by jive generations). So woarg, baAlyw, muxpG, tocoite, bow pelfov
(greater by much, by little, by so much = much greater, a little greater, so much greater,
ete.). Her. 6, 89. borépiocay Hucpn wih THs ovyKemevns (a day later than
was fixed upon, later by a day, etc.). 106. réAt Aoylun H ‘EAAGs yéyove Go -
Seveartépn (has become weaker by [the loss of | a distinguished city). So with
wpé with the Gen., and merd (after) with the Acc., e.g. Aéka Erect wpd tis &
Sedrapine vavyaxtas (before the battle of Salamis by ten years, i.e. ten years before,
ete.). ‘E—fgxoor@ @ree pera “IAlov GAwow (sixtieth year after the sack of
Troy). Here belong, also, (nuroty riva xtAlacs dSpaxpais,savdry (to
Jine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 djuos é (y-
plooe (tov MiAriddea) kate Thy Gduliny revtThKovTa Tadrdytoics ( fined
him fifty talents). Th. 4,73.7¢ Berrloty rod drdirixod BAaPd Hvar (jactu-
ram facere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of | the best portion of the heavy armed force).
IL. y, 2. Tp@es wey eAay yi 7 évorg 7 toav, dpudes bs (advanced with a noise and
acry). X. Cy. 1.2, 2. (of véuor) mpoordrrove: uh Big eis oixlay wapsévas ( forbid
to enter a house by force). So SopiBw, xpavyfi, Boy ovyh torety tt (to do something
with a noise, etc.) ; Sixp, emmerelg, Snuoola (sc. 659), idfq (68¢), rely (63G), xo
(65g), in common, rG rTpdmw Toupde; xomidf, properly with care, hence, entirely,

420 SYNTAX. [§ 286.

quite ; orovdp, with pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly ; tAXn, Tabry, dixH, duplici modo,
eixyn, frustra. Comp. § 101, 2, (b).

$286. II. Substantive Object with Prepositions, or
the Construction of Prepositions.

1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whith-
er, where, and the causal relations, which were originally
considered as local relations, so the prepositions express
another local relation, viz., the extension or position of
things in space, — the juxtaposition of things (by the side
of, over, around, with), or the local opposites above and
below, within and without, before and behind. Prepositions
therefore denote the relative position of the things described
by the substantives which they connect; and the relation
expressed by them may be called the relation of position.

2. The Cases connected with the prepositions, show in
which of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the
preposition is to be understood.

Remark 1. Thus, for example, the preposition tapd denotes merely the
local relation of near, by the side of, by; but in connection with the Gen., e. g.
HRAS€ Tapa Tod BacidrAéws, in addition to the idea of nearness, it denotes,
at the same time, the direction whence (he came FROM NEAR the king, de chez le
roi); in connection with the Acc., e.g. 7¢€: rapa Tov BactrA€a, at the same
time, the direction whither (he went INTO THE VICINITY OF PRESENCE of the

king) ; and in connection with the Dat. e. g., 207 mapa TG BactdAe?, it de-
notes simply the place where (he stood NEAR the king).

3. Prepositions are divided according to their construction :

(a) into prepositions which govern the Gen.: &y rl, before (ante), aad, from
(ab, a), éx, out of (ex), rpd, before (pro) ;

(b) into those which govern the Dat.: éy, in (in with abl.) and ody, with
(cum).

(c) into those which govern the Acc.: avd, up, eis, into (in with acc.), ds,
to;

(d) into those which govern the Gen. and Acc.: 3:¢d, through, eatd, down
from (de), iwép, over (super), wet d, with;

(e) into those which govern the Gen., Dat.,and Acc.: aul, about, érl,
upon, tapd, by, wept, around (circa), rpés, before, and bmé, under
(sub).

4. Prepositions are divided according to the relations of pos?-
tion which they denote:

ee ee

§ 287.] PREPOSITIONS. —'Avri, mpd. 421

(a) into such as indicate a juxtaposition: apd and aut, near, emt, at

and upon, dy and werd, with;

(b) into such as express local opposites: éw/, upon, dvd, up, bwép, over,

and j3d, under, eard, down (under), rpd, mpds and avril, before, in
Jront of; and the improper prepositions JmieSev, after, behind; év and
els, in, within, and én, ¢&, from, out of ; 51d, through, and wept, around,
outside ; &s, to, up to, and aad, from, away from.

5. The relation of position expressed by prepositions is trans-
ferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. Oi mod€pwor
G7d THs woAews awéedvyov. “Awd vuKtos ampAIov (from
night, immediately after the beginning of night). “Amo évp-
paxlas avrdvomol ciow (from, by virtue of the alliance).

6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it
everywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or
three Cases; but it receives various modifications according to
the different Cases with which it is connected, because the
local relation varies with each Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The
fundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when
they express local relations ; itis generally quite evident in those
of time also; but in the causal relations, it is often very obscure.

Rem. 2. Originally all the prepositions were merely adverbs of place. See
§ 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper phi ar
sitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the language, they either
were not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub-
stantive ; accordingly. they have the regular functions of prepositions ; they
differ from the Improper prepositions: of these latter, the following classes
may be named: (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though
asf regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection
with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. dmémpoSev, dvev, dixa, dua ;— (b)

substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. di«ny, instar, xdpw, gratia, evexa,
on account of.

L PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE ONLY.
§ 287. (1) “Avrié and zpo, before.

1. "Avri (Lat. ante, before, in the face of, opposite, etc.), orig-
inal signification: in the face of (before, over against) (1) in
a local sense (in prose seldom); (2) in a causal or figurative
sense: (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word zpés
with the Gen.;—(b) with expressions denoting comparison
(e. g. with the comparative), valuing, weighing, requital; hence
with words of buying, selling, bartering, value, worth, keness or

36

422 SYNTAX. [§ 287.

unlikeness, preference ;-—(c) of the cause or ground, when it
expresses the idea of making compensation, as in dv} ob, av dv,
for what? wherefore? —(d) of substitution, gwing an equiva-
lent, etc. :

(1) (T2 xwplov gor) Saod mirvor Siadrcrrodoas peyddras, &vY By écrnedres
tvdpes ti dy mdoxorey } bmd Tov pepomevwr AlSwy, } bwd Tay KvAWSoupevwr ; (be-
hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7,6. (2) (a)
’‘Avti waldwv radvde...ixerevdouer, sc. c€ (for the sake of,as it were standing
before), 8. O. C.1326. (b) (Avxodpyos nareipydoaro) év TH wéAce aipeTa@TEpor
elvat Toy KaAddby Sdvaroy &vTl aioxpod Blov (is better than, is preferable to a
disgraceful life), X.R.L.9,1. Thy rercuriy dyri rijs Trav Cévrovy gwrnplas
HAAdLavTo (exchanged death for the safety of the living), Pl. Menex. 237, a. Narhp
viy &vtTi mdvtwy Tov bAAwY xXpnudtwyv mpoTimd. So aipetodal te ayrl
rivos, instead of the common tivés. Thy éAcudepiav édoluny by avt) av exw
wdyvtov (in place of all which I have), X. An.1.7,3. (d) Aodaos &rrt dec-
wérov (a slave instead of a despot). "Avril huépas voé éyévero, Her. 7, 37.
‘Avti rod padxerdar welderda édérc, X. Cy. 3.1, 18. *Avri is never used
of time.

2. IIpd, original signification: on the foreside (pro, prae, be-
fore, figuratively, mm behalf of), (1) local; — (2) of time; (3)
causal and figurative: (a) i behalf of (for the good, for the
weal); with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the
Com. degree), valuing, estimation, like ayri, but always with the
accompanying idea of standing before, preference ; hence it is
used to express preference in general; —(b) of an dmward,
mental. cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.): on account of,
prae, e. g. Il. p, 667. mpd pdBowo (prae metu, for fear, on account
of fear).

(1) Murda 4 vijvos Keira mpd Meydpoyv, Th.3,51. (2) pd huépas amfa-
Sov. (3) Mdvres dtidoovel ve mpd adT ay Bovdcveodas (desire you to consult for
them), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. MdxeoSat, arosavely mpd tis wmatpldos, diaxwdv-
vebey pd Bartréws ( for, in behalf of, one’s country), X. Cy. 8. 8,4. Auead-
Tepov puny Kal kéAAvoy elvat mpd TOD pedyety Te kal AwodLdpaoKety bré-
xew TH were Blenv jvrw by ratty (1 thought it more just in preference to fleeing, etc.),
Pl. Phaed. 99, a. pd roAAod rorhoacdal ti (to esteem before or above much,
i.e. very highly). Tlpd worAA@v xpnudtoyv tiwjoaddal Tt (to value before much
wealth), (Todrov) mpd mdvtTwy xpnuadtwv kal tévewv mpraluny by prov
pot clvat, X. C. 2.5, 3. Mpd todrov redvdvat ky uaddoy €doito (for him), Pl.
Symp. 179, a. *Emavety pd Stratoctyns adixlay (to praise injustice before,
rather than, in preference to justice), Rp. 361, e.

Remark. The reason that the prepositions &4y7{ and wpé are not con-
nected with the Dat., like prepositions of the same meaning in other languages,

ae

$ 288.] PREPOSITIONS. — Amd, éx. 423

but with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the

relation denoted by before, in front oh not merely as local, but implying action,

arelation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions irép, rpés,

did, dugl, wept, eri, bao with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the
lace as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of
ependence. See § 273, 4.

§ 288. (2) “Amo, from, and é&, éx, out of.

PRELIMINARY Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a re-
moval, departure, but &aé denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while
éx (=), always implies a going out from within a place or object; and in the
causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more direct.

1. “Azé (ab), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re-
moval from a place or object with verbs of motion, also of free-
ing, and the like, e. g. Avew, CAevIepodv, also of missing (§ 271, 2),
hence, a7 oxo7od; then it is transferred to mental failures, as
in dx’ eAridwv, dd yvouns, aliter ac sperabam, putabam (as if
aberrans ab exspectatione, ab opinione); (b) distance from a
place or object with verbs of rest;—(2) of time, going out
from a point of time: from, after ;— (3) causal or figurative:
(a) of origin, as with eva, yiyverFar; (b) of the whole in rela-
tion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it; (c) of the
author with Pass. verbs instead of id (§ 251, Rem. 4), but al-
ways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the
occasion or cause; (e) of the material; (f) of the means and
instrument ; (g) of conformity.

(1) (a) "Awd ris wérAews arepvyov of worguson. (b) ‘O Adyos odk &xd
ToD cxKorod edoter cipjoda, X.S.2,10. (Ai madaad rérdcs) dd Sardoons
MaAAov GxloSnoay (at a distance from the sea), Th.1,7. (2)°Awd tabrns THs
hmépas, amd vuxrés, ad écwépas; ard trav cltwy (after the meal), X. R.
L.5,8. (3) (a) "Awd’AAkpalwvos kal adtis Meyarad éos eyévorro kal kdpta
Aaumpol (very distinguished men sprung from), Her. 6, 125. (b) Tas rprhpes,
airep joa abtgG ard Tav KkatarerpSeroady (which he had of those that were
left), Th. 4,9. Ta &4d rijs SetpHs (ornaments for the neck, necklaces), Her.
1,51. So of dad BovaAfjs (qui sunt a consiliis, those who belong to the council) ;
of 44d MAdtwvos (the pupils of Plato, the Platonics) ; of &md tis "Axadn-
plas, ete. (c) "Erpdxdn am adray oddty tpyov akidaroyoy (was done by
them, on the part of), Th.1,17. (d)’Awd dixarocdyns (by, on account of),
Her. 7,164. T@ &7d r&v rorenlwy odBw (metu ab hostibus, fear of, from the
enemy), X. Cy. 3.3, 53. "Ag Eavrod (from his own impulse). (e) Tpépew 7d
vauTixly ard wposddwy (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) “Awd Tay Suerépwy
iuiv woreuet (SiAurmos) cvpwdxwy (sociorum vestrorum ope), Dem. Ph. 1.49,

424 SYNTAX. [$ 288.

34; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. ad orduaros, &rd yAdrrns eimeiv (by
heart, by word of mouth) ; arb orovdijs (zealously). (g) Am OvAdurov otpe-
os Kaddovta OvAvuTInvol (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus),
Her. 7,74. “Awd Evupaxtas abrdvomor (by virtue of ), Th. 7, 57.

2. "ES éx (ex), owt of (opposite of év, i), denotes (1) in a
local relation: (a) removal either from within a place or object,
or from immediate participation or connection with a place or
object, with verbs of motion; hence an wnmediate succession
of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest:
without, beyond (Epic), e. g. é« Bedéwv, extra telorum jactum ;—
(2) of time, zmmediate outgoing from a point of time; then
especially the zmmediate development of one thing from anoth-
er, an wmediate succession of two actions;—(3) in a causal
and figurative sense: (a) of oregin; (b) of the whole in relation
to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the
accompanying idea of choice and distinction; (c) of the author
with passive -or intransitive verbs, instead of td, almost ex-
clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic
prose; (d) to denote the occaszon or cause; (e) of the material ;
(f) of the means and instrument ; (g) of conformity: according
to, in consequence of, by virtue of, after.

(1) "Ex ris wéAews GrirSov, ex Tis wdxns epvyov (out from the city,
out from the buttle, while axé would merely signify away from); éx y#s évav-
udxnoav (out from the land). Pl. Polit. 289, e. of 5 réAw éx méA EWS GAAGT-
TovrTes Kata SdAatray Kal weGH (changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. Kardbs &y
pot & Bios etn BAAnY EE BAANS TéAEwS GmerBouévy (comp. ex alio loco in alium
migranti). (2)’EE juépas (ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it was day); éx tov-
tov (sc. xpdvou) immediately after this; éx vuntds or ék vuKTOv; éx Tai-
Swy (from very childhood); é& tarépov (subsequently); é€x rod Aotmwod.
Her. 9,8. €& #uépns és huéepny avaBarrdAdcuevan (ex die in diem, delaying from
day to day, day after day). 1, 87. éx 8 ai&Spins te na vnvepwlns ovvedpa-
pev ekarlyns vépea (immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1,120. é« pév
eiphyns Twodcueiv, exe St roA€mov mdrw EuuPivau (to go to war after peace,
etc.). X. Cy.3.1,17. 6 ods marhp év ride TH mG Huepg CE UPpovos caéppav
yeyévnta. (3) (a) Elva, ylyveoda: x rivos (to be descended from some one,
éx indicating more direct descent, while gwé may be used of one more remote).
(b) "EE ’ASnvatlwy of kpicro (the best of). (c) Her. 3, 62. 7a évreraduéva exe
Tod Md-you (the things commanded by Mayus). Ib. rpodedéc3a éx Mpntdomeos (to
be betrayed by). (d) 6, 67. pevye Anudpnros éx Zrdprns éx Torodde dvet-
Seos (on account of). Soé« tavrds rod vot (with all the heart); éx Blas
and the like. Her. 2,152. €x THs Bros Tov dvelpou (in consequence of). (g)

EE ——<— —

i ee a ea

§ 289.] PREPOSITIONS. —’Ev, ovy. 425

Pl. Criton. 48, b. de r&dv duordoyounévwy totro oxerréoy (in accordance
with what has been admitted). So dvoudfecda: Ex tivos (to be named after or for
some one, like virtus EX v1RO appellata est, is called or takes its name from v1R).
"Ex tod ; why ?

Remark. The adverbs which, in the character of improper prepositions, take
the Gen., have been already considered, in treating of the Gen. esides these
adverbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen. :
a. dlxny (Séuas, Poet.), instar; —b. xd piv, gratia, for the sake of, commonly
placed after the Gen., seldom before it. Instead of the Gen. of the personal
pronouns éxod, gov, etc., the possessive pronoun, as an attributive adjective, is
regularly used with xdpw, e. g. éufv, ohv xdpw, mea, tua gratia ;—c. Evena
(evexev even before consonants, as evexa even before vowels in the Attic writers,
eivexa and eivexey, Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, ofyexa in

try), causa, gratia. The Gen.more frequently stands before than after évexa.

t very frequently signifies, with respect to, concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85.

Sdpcee TovTOVU eivexe, with respect to this, be of good courage. It often denotes

a remote reason, e. g. by virtue of, by reason of. Pl. Rp. 329, b. ei yap jv todr’

alriov, khy ym Ta alta Taita emewdvdn Evend ye yipws, i. e. by reason of old

ge j—d.éxnre (poetic only), by or according to the will of (a god), Aws Exntt,
omer and Hesiod. In other poets it has the signification of évexa.

§ 289. 2. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE ONLY. “Ev
AND ovy (vr).

1. "Ev (évi Poet., «tv and «ivi Epic) denotes that one thing is
in, upon, by or near another. In general, it indicates an actual
union or contact with an object, and hence is the opposite of
éx. It denotes (1) in a local relation: (a) the being in, inclosed
in, encircled, surrounded by ; used with reference to place, cloth-
ing, persons : 7m, among, in the midst of, and with verbs of speak-
ing, before, in the presence of (coram) ; then it is transferred to
the eaternal and internal state or condition in which one is taken,
or is found, by which he is, as it were, surrounded ; — also to the
business in which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands or
power something is placed; it also denotes (b) the being upon
something, and (c) the being near a thing, particularly of cities,
near which (in the territory of which) something took place,
especially a battle ; — (2) of time ({ 283, 3);— (3) in a causal
and figurative relation: (a) of the means and instrument ; (b)
of the manner; (c) to denote conformity: according to, im con-
Sormity with.

(1) (a) "Ev rH wéreL, ev TH viow, év Sadpry Tove eyévero. PLL.
625, b. avdwavaa év tots bWnAats Sévdpecty ciot cxiapal. "Ev bwAots,

év tétois diaywrilecSa; ev €cdHri, €v ctregdvoais (crowned); év trots
36*

426 SYNTAX. [§ 289.

&vSpémors (inter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. TydSeds mor’ éxeivos év bmty edy-
pnydépnoev (in our presence): "Ev worépa, ev Epyy, ev Sati, ev Pde, ev
épyii elva. Pl. Crito. 43, c. wal &AdAor ev Toradrais Evudpopais adic-
kovtan (are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. é&v rorovdtors
voohpaciv exduevor. Gorg. 523,b. év mdon eddatpovia oixeiy (to live in
the enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. of év woihaoes yerduevor (those who
have been in poetry = poets). Th. 3, 38. of év mpdypace (those engaged in
state affairs = the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. of wey 3) év robrots Tots AS-
yous hoay (were engaged in these discourses). Pl. Phaed. 59, a. év Prdocopia
elva. Of dv yewpylais; év téxvy civ. Hence various adverbial ex-
pressions have originated, e.g.év Yo @ elvat (to be equal); év HdovF pol eorw (at
is pleasing to me) ; so also with @xew and woteioSat, e.g. €v Suolw, ev €AKagppg
motetaau (to esteem equally, to esteem lightly). "Ev éwol, vy wor éort rt (penes me,
te, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase év €autg@ eivat (to be in one’s senses,
sui compotem esse); (b) év dpeciy, evimmots, év Spdvois; (c) ‘H évy Mav-
rivela paxn (the battle near).—(2)’Ev rottrwm rg xpdvae; &v ¢§ (while,
during); év wévre juépats (during, in the space of ).— (3) ‘Opav, dpacSa,
év é¢S3aApmorts, Poet. (to see, be seen with the eyes); then in other connections
-among the poets, év mvp) naiew, év Seoug Shou, év xepot AaGeiv, Hom.
(to burn with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, év is used to denote
the means, in the expressions SnAodr, djAov elvat, onualvew & tin, X. Cy. 1.
6, 2. Sri wév, & wai, of Seol oe trAew re Kal ebueveis méumovor, kal ev iepots 5F-
Aov kat év otpavlois onmelors (is evident both by the sacrifices and the signs
from heaven). 8.7, 3. éonuhvaré wor nal ev iepots na év odpaviors
onpmelots kat év oiwvots Kal év ohuats, a 7 expiy mociv cad & obk expiv.
"Ev Slen, ¢v ctwmy. Th. 1, 77. év rots éduolots vomots Tas xpices
moteiy (according to the same laws). So év péper (according to his part, in turn).
"Ev éuol, év cor, év exelvw (Poet.), ex (according to) meo, tuo, illius judicio.

2. Suv (ftv mostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with the
Latin cum, and the English with ; it always expresses the idea of
union, participation and accompaniment: (1) in a local-relation
often of an accompaniment which implies help or assistance ; —
(2) in a causal sense to denote: (a) the means and wstrument ;
(b) the manner; (c) the measure or rule, by which the action
of the verb is measured, as it were, or defined; (d) conformity.

(1) ‘O otparnyds civ Tots orpariarats dvexdpnoev.— Ziv Seg (with
the help of God). Xbv rive eivar or ylyverdat (to be on the side of one, of one’s
party). Bobv tive wdxeoSa, to fight in company with one, to aid one in fighting,
(2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7,13. 4 xrijots adtaéy (sc. mordy pidrwy) éorw oddauas ody
TH Bia, GAG padAAov by TH evepyeaia (not by violence, but rather kindness).
(b) Mpotéva civ kpavyf, abv yéAwre ede (with a shout, etc.). X. Cy.
3.1, 15. wérepa S ayi, & Kipe, &uewov clyva, cbv TG OG &yad@ Tas Tyswpias
moeiova, Poby TH oF Cnmla; (with, for your advantage, or for your injury).

4

—— eee
ae

$290.] PREPOSITIONS. — ‘Ava, els, ds. 427

(c) 1. 3, 17. ody TE vdm@ ody enércver del Troy Bixagrhy Thy Wipov rlSecSas
(to vote with, in accordance with the law). (d)Xbv TG vb uw thy Vigor rideade.
Ziv TG Bivaly.

Remark. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here

Gua (una cum), and several which are constructed also with the Gen., as has
been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat.

§ 290. 3. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACC. ONLY: "Avd, els
AND @s.

1. “Ava (on, wp, upon) signifies from a lower to a higher place,
and is directly opposite to xara with the Acc., which signifies
from a higher to a lower place ; the use of ava is more frequent
in poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation: (a)
to denote @ direction towards a higher object; (b) to denote the
extension from a lower to a higher point, from bottom to top:
throughout, through, both with verbs of motion and rest;— (2)
in a temporal relation, to denote continuance or a period of time:
per (seldom) ;—(3) in a causal sense to denote manner ; then
particularly in a distributive sense with numerals.

(1) (a) Od. x, 132. & plrot, odh By 5H Tis AY Spoostpny dvaBaln (up to
the lofty gate). This use is rare and only poetic; in prose only in the phrases
ava roy wotapudy, ava pdov mrciv, up the stream (the opposite of xara
moraudy, down the stream) ; (b) Il. v, 547. (pAey) ava vera Séovoa diaprepés
(ab infima dorsi parte usque ad cervicem); so ava dapua, ava otpardy, dvd pdxny,
Gya Suirov, ava otv, ava Simo (through the house, through’ the army, etc.),

all in Homer; Her. 6,131. cal oftw AAkpaiwvidae éBdoSnoav &va Thy ‘EA-
Adda (throughout Greece). X. Vect. 5,10. ava wmacav yiv na SdrAaTrav
ciphyn tora. Hier. 7,9. ava ordua exew (to have continually in the mouth).
(2) Her. 8, 123. dva rdv wérXepoy Todroy (throughout). So ava wracav
Thy nuépav, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article;
without the article ava wacay juépay, signifies daily, day by day, ava wav os,
every year, yearly, see No. (3) and § 246, 6), ava vbnra (per noctem, all night
through). 7,10. ava xpévov e€edpa ris ky (in the time). (3) Avda xpdtos (with
all one’s might); ava wépos (by turns); ava wav Eros (quotannis). X.An.4,6,
4. “EAAnves éroptSnoay era oradpods ava wévte mapacdyyas Tis huepas
(five parasangs daily).
Remark 1. In the Epic and Lyric languages, avd is constructed with the

Dat. also ; instead of it éy is elsewhere used, e.g. ava oxhrrpw, Sue, Tapydpy
&kpw in Homer. So efder 3 ava oxdwrw Ads aierds, Pind.

2. Eis (és Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form
of é, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex-

-

428 SYNTAX. [§ 290.

pressed by év, but always in the direction whither; hence it is
used of motion znto the interior of an object, up to, into the im-
mediate presence of ; in general to denote the reaching a definite
limit. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a local Limit; (b) a
limit in quantity: about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense
of before, in the presence of, coram, but with the idea of the di-
rection whither ; — (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till,
towards; (3) ina causal sense: (a) of a mental aim, object or
purpose ; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense
of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a
reference to something : in respect to.

(1) (a) "Teva eis rhv wdArv; so also of persons with the accompanying
idea of their habitation or country. Pl. Apol. 17, ¢. eis buds eiscévat, i.e.
eis Td dixacrhpioy eisieva,. X, An. 4. 7, 1. émoped3noay eis Tadxovus (went
into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile
sense: contra, in. Th. 3,1. éorpdrevoay és Thy “AtTixhy (into, against At-
tica). With the verbs ovAAéyew, cvvayelpew, adlCey and the like, the Greeks
use eis, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. § 300, 3.(b). Th.
2,13, tev TleAorovynolwy EvAAeyopevoy Te €s THY “Ilodpody kal ev 636 dyTwr.
Comp. 4, 91. 8,93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbem.
(b) Th.1,74. vats és ras rerpakoglas. (c)’Ex Saddoons cis SdAaccay.
Pl. Gorg. 526, b. eis kad mdvu eArdymos yéyovey eis Tos RAAOVS “EAAHVasS,
’Apioteldns (among). (d) Adyous moreioda eis roy Si poyw (to speuk before, in
the presence of the people). Pl. Menex. 239, a. of warépes moAAd 5} Kad Kara epya
amephvavto eis wmdvtas avapamous (before all men). (2)’Es RéALov ka-
tadtvra (till sunset), Homer; hence eis €or épayv (towards, till evening, proper-
ly to evening as a boundary) ; so in prose, eis Thy barepatay (till the following
day,on the following day); «is tplrnyv juépar (till,on). (3) (a)’Exphoaro trois
xphuacw eis rhv wéAdry(forthecity). Ets r1; (for what?); eis képdos mm
Spav (to do something for gain). (b) Eis kaddyv hes (opportune); eis rdxos
(quickly) ; €is S¥vapcy, according to one’s ability; eis Exatdyv (about a hundred
or by hundreds, centeni), especially in the arrangement of soldiers, e. g. eis 500
(two deep, two by two). (c) OavudCew, émaveiy Twa ets T1 (to admire, praise one
with respect to, on account of something) ; so Siabépe Tivos cis &peThyv, ppdvipos,
evddniyuos efs Tt, €is mdyTa, in every respect; BAémew, amoBAcmew eis Ta
wTpdyhata, like mpds.

3. ‘Os (ad), to, does not like the other prepositions, denote the
relation of position, but only the direction whither; it is used
only of persons or of the names of cites, when they stand for
the inhabitants.

Th. 4, 79. Bpacldas apixero Gs Tlepdixkav kad eis thy Xadnidichy (came to

$ 291.] PREPOSITIONS. — Aud, 429

Perdiccas). Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. mpéoBeis wéroupey &s Baciréa. Th. 8,
36. ijxovros &s Thy Midnroy (ad Milesios).

Rem. 2. This ds is to be distinguished from that which stands with els, ext,
and mpés with the Acc. (as eis, &s érl, ds mpds twa). This latter és is not a
preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with the par-
ticiple, and dees not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup-
posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. &Spol(er &s em) rodrous 7d
orpdrevua (QUASI his bellum illaturus, he collects as 1¥ against these). Hence this
@s also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases,e.g. Th. 3, 4.
txmAouv érovhoavro Tay vedv &s wl vavuaxta (as if for the purpose of fight-
ing a naval battle). 1,134. of 3& momoduevor xadrxois avdpidvras 500 ws ay7)
pl Sede ov dvéseray (quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau-
sanias),

4. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSA~
TIVE: Oud, xatd, brép, pera.

§ 291. (1) Aca, through.

1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (2) to denote a mo-
tion extending through a space or object and again coming out :
through and out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation
still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition é« or zpé with
dud, e. g. Od. p, 460. dex peydpoio dvaywpeiv) ; (b) to denote ez-
tension through something, but without the accompanying rela-
tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen.,
see § 287, Rem.;—(2) of time, to denote the expiration or
lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through
and out ; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote origin (rare) and the
author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote gualty (possessive Gen.)
in connection with ceive: and yéyverIa; (c) the means, both of
persons and things; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare); (f) com-
parison (rare).

(1) (a) Her. 7, 8. wéAdrw eddy orpardy 1a tis Etpdans em rhy ‘EAAdia.
2, 26. StelFeASdv F1a wdons Evpdéans. 7, 105. ethaavve tov orpardy
51a THs Opntu«ns em rhy ‘EAAdda. 3, 145. diandWas 51a Tis yopytpns
(having crept out through the prison). (b) Od. wu, 335. 82a vicov idv, 51a we-
Sfov (per campum). X. Hier. 2,8.31& roreulas wopeversa (to march through
the enemy's country). Figuratively in the phrases, 314 dixarocdtyns iéva (to
go in the way of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be just); 51a Tod Sixalov
mopeverdat; 51a PdBov &pyecda (to fear), Eur. Or. 747. Ara pidlas lévar
til (to be friendly to one), X. An. 3.2,8. (2) Av’ @rovs (through, for a year) ;
dia roAAOD, maxpod, 4Alyou xpédvov (through, for a long, a short time) ;
also 3” éAlyouv, 5:4 roAAod without xpdvov, or 51a xpdvov Fase (he

430 SYNTAX. | [§ 292.

came after a long time); 51a mavrds tod xpédvov roadra ovk eyévero (during
the whole time); 51% juépas, 51a vunrds (through, throughout the day, etc.).
So also of an action repeated at stated intervals, e.g. 51a tplrov ~rovus
ouvyjecay (every third year, tertio quoque anno, always after three years, through
and out again); 5:4 wéumwrov érous, bia Tévre eray (every fifth year,
etc., quinto quoque anno); 51a tpirns Hhuépas. (3) (a) Ard Baciddwy wepunds
(descending from a continued line of kings, owing one’s birth to kings), X. Cy. 7. 2,
24. TWdvra 80° éavray mpdrrecda (to accomplish everything by themselves) ;
d¢ éavtod xrhoacdal r1. (b) Ard pdBov civa, 5° ExSpas ylyvecdal rim,
5’ Epidos, dpyis, dogparelas elvar or ylyversai (to be in fear, to be hostile,
to be angry with, to be safe). (c) At d¢XaApGy spay (to see with the eyes).
Pl. Theaet. 184, c. Sxdzret, aardxpiois worépa dpSorépa, @ SpGuev, TovTo elvat dpSaa-
Hobs, } 30 of dpGuev, Kal G axdvouer, Sra, 50 of axovouerv. (The Dat. denotes
the means used, did with the Gen. the active means.) “Exew twa 5? dpyis (to
be angry with); 31a xesp@v exew (to work upon, to be engaged in, to handle);
also of persons, e. g. “Empatavy tadra 51 Edpuudxov, Th. 2, 2. (d) Ara
omrovdys, 51a TaXOVS orev Tt (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.). (e) S.O.C.
584. 8¢ obSevds moteiaSa (to consider of no value). (f) Her. 1, 25. Séns &kov
51a wmdvtwy TOV dvadsnudtwy (in comparison with, among).

IL With the Acc. (1) in a local relation to denote extension
through a place or object: through, throughout (only poetic) ; —
(2) of time to denote extension through a period of time,
throughout ; —(3) in a causal sense: (a) to denote the veason,
mediation : on account of, ob, propter, by; (b) of the person by
whose means something is effected.

(1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. 8:& mévriov nipa erédpevoas euday tvaccay
(through the wave of the sea). (2) Ata viwra. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. fore pev
hply 4 apxh h marpya mpds piv peonuBplay wéxpis oF 51a Kadma ov SbvavTa
oixety tvSpwiror (on account of the heat). 4. 5,15. 51a ras Toravras otv
avdyKas bwerclrovtd twes tay otpatiwray. (b) An. 7.7, 7. 50 Huas ov
Seots Exere Thvde Thy xdpay (by your means, mediation). Karol Soxodmer elvar
5: rovroyv (hujus culpa).

§ 292. (2) Kard, from above, down.

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) of motion from
a higher to a lower place (desuper, deorsum); (b) of a direction
towards a place or object situated below: down to, down upon,
down under (on the Gen., see § 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest
in, upon or at a place or object (§ 287, Rem.) ;— (2) in a causal
and figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion.

$2921]

et a ae (damon 2

PREPOSITIONS. — Kard. 431

(1) (a) Tl. a, 44. BA 88 ear’ OdAduroo Kaphywy (down from the heights),
Her. 8, 53. épplrreov éwirods kata rod telxeos ndrw. (b) Her. 7, 6. apa
viterSa Kara riis Sarddoons (to disappear down under the sea). 235. xara
Seducévat kata Tis Sarddoons. X. An. 7. 1, 30. e¥xoua puplas eué ye
Kata& yijs dpyuids yevéoda (to be sunk under the earth). So figuratively of a
direction to a lower object, as rotedew xaTtd Tivos, walew katd Tivos, to
shoot at something, to strike at something (the preposition denoting the direction
towards the mark, viz., down); rimrev cata «dppns, on the head (§ 278,
Rem. 8); (c) Her. 1,9. kara vaérov yevéodat (to come behind, to be behind).
Th. 4, 32. kara vdrov elva (in the rear). 33. kara vdrov KasecrnKéeva,
(2) Aéyew kard rivos (dicere de aliqua re) ; in this connection, the idea of hos-
tility especially is expressed by the preposition, e. g. Aéyew, Adyos kaTd Tivos
(against one). X. Apol. 13. peddeoSa kata Tod Seod (to say anything falsely
of or against the God) ; but also in an opposite relation, Dem. Phil., 2. 68, 9. 8 xa)
péeyioréy tore kad’ buadv eyxdmov (in honor of you). Aeschin. Ctes. 60.
of kata AnpogSévovs Frawo. Xkowev eatTd Tivos (secundum, in respect
to). Plat. Phaed. 70, d. wh car advSpdmrwy oxdra pdvoy rovto, GAG Kal
kata (doy tdvtTwy xa gvtTay. So also in Attic adjurations and oaths,
e. g. eBxeoSar, duvivar katd Tivos, for example,iepav rerelwyv (Th. 5, 47),
to swear by unblemished victims (as it were holding the hands over them); so
also e¥xecSa: cad’ ExarduBns, Kata Bods.

II. In a local and temporal relation, xaré with the Acc. is
directly opposite to dvd, in respect to the point from whence
the motion of the action begins; but it agrees with dvd in de-
noting the direction to an object and the extension over it.
The use of dva is more confined to poetry, but card has no such
limitation. (1) In a local relation: (a) to denote the direction
of the action to a lower object; (b) to denote eatension from
above to below, from a higher to a lower object: throughout,
through, over; (c) in the historians in the sense of e regione,
over against, opposite to; —(2) of time, to denote its extension
or duration ; — (3) in a causal sense: (a) to denote purpose and
design ; (b) conformity, and the respect in which anything is con-
sidered,and hence also a reason: on account of; (c) an indefinite
measure (about); (d) the manner ; hence also with the distribu-
tive specifications of number.

(1) (a) BdAAew kara yaorépa (to strike on the abdomen), and the like in
Homer. Her. 3, 14. wapyeoay ai mapSévon kata Tos matépas (to the fathers

sitTING); then of the course of a stream, xar& pdov, down the stream (see dvd).
Her. 4,44. (Scylax cum suis) &rAcov kata wotaudy mpds i@ Te Kal jAlov dva-

odds és SdAacoav. (b) Her. 3, 109. ai tyudvar KaTa macav Thy yay «ict.

Kata yijv, kata SdAaccay mopedecda (through; over, by). (c) Th. 2,30

432 SYNTAX. - 2af$e298.

keira ) Kepaddnvia katrd "Ankapvavlay (opposite to). (2) Kara roy ad-
tov xpévoyv, kata Thy mpdTtepov méArAcuow (during the same time, etc.);
of katd tTiva (contemporaries of any one). (3) (a) Her. 2,152. kara Antny
exmrdoavras (having set sail for the purpose of plunder). Th. kata Séav few
(spectatum venisse). Kata rt; why? wherefore? (b) Kara vépov, cata
Adyow (ad rationem, pro ratione, in conformity with, according to); kata yva-
pny thy éuhy. Her. 2,3. rata thy tpoohy tay malday tocatta treyorv
(in respect to nourishing the boys). Her.1, 85. kata Thy kpyntipa olrtws loxe.
Katd rt (in some respect, quodammodo); kat ovdév, kata wavTa (in no,
every respect); KkaT& Tovto (hoc respectu, hence propter hoc); Th. 1, 60. kata
pirlayv avrod of wAcioro: éx KoplySov orpari@ta éSeAovtal tvvégmoyto (on ac-
count of his friendship). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. ods kat& robs vépous ed duty
éorw, Stay BovAnade, Kord (ev (to punish according to the laws). Kata piciy

(secundum naturam) ; kaTd& Sdvapmsy (according to one’s ability, to the best of one’s
ability); naT& kpdros (with all one’s might). (c) Kata éthnovta ern

(about sixty years); kat& winpdy (gradually); kat dAtyov, kara rodd,
kata moAAd (by far). (d) Ka hovxlav (quietly); nara trdxos (quickly) ;
guytuxlav (casu, by chance); kara ro ioxvpdv (per vim, violently) ;
kata wépos (in order, in turn). Her. 6, 79. &mrowd éort B00 pve kat’ &vdpa
(viritim, for each man); kaT& kdpmas (vicatim, by villages); katd wijva (sin-
gulis mensibus, every month, monthly); ka juépav, tv na¥ ev (one after the
other, one by one, i. e. singly); ka¥ éwrd, septeni.

ReMarK. Very many verbs compounded with xard, are constructed with the
Gen. to denote the person who caused the action, and towards whom it is directed,
e. g. kaTadixnd(w, Katayryvéonw, karaxplyw, karalnptCouat twos, to give judgment,
bring a charge, pass a vote against any one; katapedSouat twos, to lie against any
one; KatayeA@ Tivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; natappov@ twos, despicio aliquem.
An Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. xarnyopeiv ti Tivos, to accuse
one of something, karayryvéckew tt (as voiay, KAoTHY) Tos, KaTaxplyew TiWds
Sdvatov, xatadindlew Tivos Sdvaroy, catayynpiCecdal twos deiAlay.

§ 293. (3) ‘Yrép, super, over.

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote resting,
abiding over or above a place or object (§ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in
a causal sense: (a) for, for the good of; (b) to denote an znter-
nal, mental cause, instead of the more usual ivé with the Gen.;
(c) with verbs of entreating, imploring: for the sake of some
one; (d) to denote cause ; in connection with rod and the Inf.
to denote purpose, which by the language is considered as the
cause; (e) in general to denote 7m respect to, instead of the
more usual zepi with the Gen.

Il With the Acc.: over, above and beyond, used in relation
to space and time, and also to measure and number.

¥

§ 294.] PREPOSITIONS. — Mera. 433

I. (1) X. C. 3.8, 9. 4 Haws rod Sépovs bwep Huady nal rav oreyav wopev-
suevos cxiav airay mapéxet (passing over us and the houses). Her. 7. 69. "Apaflev
wal Aidiérwv tray irtp Aiytrrou olknuévev Ipxe ’Apoduns (who dwell above
Egypt), “Crétp Sardoons oixeiv (properly to dwell beyand the sea, i. e. on, by
the sea). (2) (a) MdxeoSu bwép rijs watpldos (to fight in defence of some-
thing, as if standing over it); 6 bwép rs ‘EXAdBos Sdvaros (death in behalf
of, for Greece); mwodrrederdat, otparnyeiv bwép tives (in alicujus gratiam) ;
drip Tay wpayudt wy orovddlew, Sedoidva bwép Tivos (timerealicui). (b)
bwip wévSous (for, because of grief). (c) Il. w, 466. xal wy irtp rarpds
kal pntépos Hhixdpoto Aloceo Kal rékeos (entreat him for the sake of his
Jather, etc. (da) Pl. Symp. 208, d. bwéip aperijis &Savdrovu nal roradtns
Séins edKAcovs mdytes mdyta mowodaw (on account of, for the sake of imper-
ishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. irtp rod uh waSetv naxds
imd ScAlrrov ( for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.).— II. Her. 4, 188. purré-
over bwép thy Séuoy (over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as trois
Opait trois bwép ‘EAAAstovtor oixover (the Thracians dwelling beyond the
Hellespont, i. e. on the Hellespont); trtp thy hAtklav (beyond one’s years,
age); bwtp Stbvaucy (beyond one’s power); ibrtp &vSpwroy (beyond man,
i. e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. imtp ra tervepda-
xovtTa rn (beyond, more than, forty years).

§ 294. (4) Merd, with.

I. Mera, allied to pécos (in the middle, between) denotes the
being in the midst of, being among persons or things. With the
Gen., wera denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a
sharing in (comp. peréyev); the Gen. denotes the whole, of
which the subject of the sentence constitutes a part; it conse-
quently differs from ovv with the Dat., which merely denotes
the connection (association) of one object with another, with-
out the one being considered a part of the other (comp. ovvexew).
It is used (1) in a local relation: im the midst, among; then to
denote an active participation in aid of some one: with; — (2)
in a causal and figurative sense: (a) to denote the means or
manner ; (b) conformity.

(1) Eur. Hee. 209. neta vexpa@y Kelrouc (to lie among the dead, and one’s
self to be dead). Pi. Rp. 359, e. nadjoSa peta TOV EAAwY. Merd Tivos
udxecdau (to fight in active participation with one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. wera
tav Hoiknpévwy modeueiy (to participate in carrying on war with those who had
been injured). Elva, ora: wetd Tivos (to be on the side of one). Pl. Rp. 467.
e. cwdhoovrat, weTa tpegBurépwy hyeusvwy éxduevr (they follow the
older leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them; wholly different from éreoSas
werd twa and ovy tux). (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. werd xivddvay Tas peAéras

37

ee we Hee a Na, I ee ee eee ek oe

+ Sa

Vr

434 \ SYNTAX. | [§ 294.

rotovpevor (i. €. surrounded by, in the midst of dangers). X. C. 3. 5,8. wer’
&peris mpwrevew (as it were in an intimate connection with virtue). Dem. Phil.
3. 130, 74. duty of mpdyovo: TodTo Td yépas exThoavTo Kal KaTéAvToy METH TOA-
AG@v kal peydArAy Kcivddvwyv. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. robs vduous, ned
Hv oixooytes evdaimovérrara tav ‘EAAhvwy joav (agreeably to which, ray vouwy
éxduevor, legibus quasi adhaerentes). Pl. Ap. 32,c. wera TOD vdémov Kal TOD
Satkalov ounv paddAdy pe Bely diaxwduvevew, ) wed tua@y yevéodar wh Sloe
BovAcvouevwy (in conformity with law and justice).

Il. With the Acc. (1) in a local relation: (a) (Poet.) to de-
note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv-
ing to be united with a person or thing, in a friendly or hostile
relation, and generally to denote a succession in space; (b) to
denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose
phrase pera xetpas exew tt, to have something in hand ;— (2)
(prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and i order:
after, next to, next in order ; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.),
to denote purpose and conformity.

(1) ‘InéoSa: wera Tp@as Kal "Axatovs (to come into the midst of the Tr.
and Gr.). Il. p, 460. dlocwv dsr aiyumids weta xijvas (among the geese).
Seldom used of things. Il. 8, 376.6sue mer arphktovs Epidas nal velxea
Bdaadet (into the midst of contention). Biva wetd Néoropa (to go to Nestor,
properly into a connection with him) ; BA 5 wer *Idouer ja, (to goto Idomen.
to follow after him, properly to go into the engagement or battle with him), IL.
vy, 297. Il. v, 492. Aaol erovd’, dsel Te weTA KTLAOV EomeTo pda (behind the
ram). (2) Meta tdv Tod wads Sdvarov, X. (after the death). Mera
TavrTa (after); the Acc. often has a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34.
MeTa&® SorAwva oixduevoy (after the departure of Solon). Me¥Y juéepar
(interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12.
Kaxeivos ZiaBe met’ €me Sevrepos (second after me), Cy. 2.2, 4. TdédAw (efxov)
Thy TAovolwrarny ev TH Agia weT& BaBvadva (the richest next to Babylon), 7. 2,
ll. (3) Od. a, 184. mActly werd xadrndy (ad aes petendum). Eur. Alc. 67.
Etpvodséws méupaytos immetoy peta bxnpma (for, after a chariot). Il. 0, 52.
TG xe Tloceddwy ye... alla meraotpepee vdov meta cov kal eudy Kip,
(agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine).

- REMARK. Merd is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly in
the Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, év and
avy are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with the
singular of collective nouns; the words with which it stands may denote per-
sons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things,
e. g. mer &Savdrois, with, among; meta oTpaTe ; meTa xEpol, wool, yevvat, yaupn-
Aats (in the midst of ), between, ueTd ppecty, in the mind, petda vnvol, kiwact; mete
mvotns dvéuowo, Homer.

$ 295.] PREPOSITIONS, — ‘Api, epi. 436

5. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, Dative, AND
ACCUSATIVE: dui, wepi, éri, Tapa, rpds, iwd.

§ 295. (1) “Audi and wepi.

1. The prepositions du¢/é and wepé express nearly the same
relations of position: around, about; audi, on both sides, repi,
on all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of
dui is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than zepi, which ex-
presses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen-
eral application.

2. "Audi denotes in general the surrounding of something
(on both sides), the deimg near and close to something.

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote 7e-
moval from that which surrounds (Poet.); (b) to denote dwell-
ing or rest around something (§ 287, Rem.), though but seldom;
— (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion or cause: about,
for, on account of, though but seldom in prose, wepé with the
Gen. being generally used instead of it.

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet. only), to de-
note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very
seldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose): (a) to denote
the cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference,
however, that with the Dat., the relation of causality is con-
sidered as wholly local ; (b) to denote an internal and mental
reason ( Poet.).

Ill. With the Acc. (1) in a local relation, to denote local]
extension : about, around, on ;— (2) to denote time and number
approximately or indefinitely ;— (3) in a causal and figurative
sense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains,
and being employed about it.

I. (1) (a) Eur. Or. 1460.au9) toppupéwy rémrAwy tignondcarres ( from the
garments which were around the sword). (b) Her. 8,104. dug) radrns oixéovar
+s médros (dwell around this city). (2) MdxecSa dul tivos ( for, on account
of some one, or something). X. Cy. 3.1, 8. eis kapdy Hees, Srws rijs dikns axov-
ons mapav Tis aul rod watpéds (about, relating to your father). I. (1) Te-
Aandy &ug) orhSecow (around the breast), Il. B, 388. "Awol eAddors EeoSas
(to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) Il. wr, 565. &upl véwut
KaTaTedsvn@re udxeoSm (about, on account of a dead body). Ul. y, 157. dur
yuvatkh Gryea mdoxew. Her. 6, 129. of uvnoriipes Epw elxov aupl poverkp.

are Ae

—
Pea

— ee a

a ee Pe eee ee eee ee er ey ae

436 SYNTAX. [§ 295,

62. poBydels aug) tH yuvarnl (respecting), 3. 32. duo) TG Savdra
abrijs ditds Aeyerar Adyos. (b) "Aug? pd Bw (prae metu, for, on account of);
&ugpl Suug@ (prae ira). III. (1) -X. Cy. 6 2,11. (cvaaddyera) 7d orpdrevpa
&ugi roy Maktwrdyv motaudy. 2. 4, 16, Tedhpaxa aug) ra pia
(around, on the borders). Hence also of the persons around any one, as in of
&uoi riva, see § 263, d. (2) Audl rdv xetu@va (about winter) ;.auo?
SelAny (sub vesperam, about twilight); aupt rods uvptous (circiter). (3)
“Exew aul re (to be employed about something), e. g. dui Seirvoy, dud’ trrovs,
dpuara.

3. ILepé signifies all round, round, in a circle.

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling or
rest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and
even here is very rare ; comp. § 287, Rem. —(2) in a causal and
figurative sense: (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect,
in a great variety of connections: about, concerning, for, on ac-
count of, in respect to; —(b) to denote a mental cause : for, from,
on account of, prae, though but seldom; (c) to denote the rela-
tion of a person or thing to that which belongs to them, which,
as it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Gen. of the
possessor); (d) to denote worth and superiority.

(1) Od. ¢, 68. abrod terdyvcro wep) omelovs yAagpupoto ipepls (there
the vine was stretched around the cave). 180. tov wey eydv éodwoa wept Tpdmios
BeBadra. (2) (a) MdxecSa, arodavety wep) ris watpldos (for, on account
of ); with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, axovewv, eidévat, etc.,
with verbs of saying and asking, e. g. A¢yev wept twos, Ad-yos mepi Twos, with verbs
of anxiety, fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. poBeioSar reph
maroldos, emimedciodat, emmerdcia tepl twos (to fear for one’s country). Dem. Phil.
1, 52,43. 4 &pxh tod woAcuov yeyévnta wep) TOD Timwphaoagadast PirAummoy
(with respect to taking vengeance on Philip). (b) Mep) dpy%s (prae ira; on ac-
count of, because of anger), Th. 4,130. (c) Ta rept rivos (the affairs, fortune,
circumstances of any one, etc.); of wept rivos (those belonging to any one, asso-
ciated with him, and as it were surrounding him). Dem. Phil. 1. 50, 36. év rots
mepl rod moAémov Kal TH TovTOV TwapacKkevn UtaxTa Gmavra (sc. early) (in
matters pertaining to the war). (d) In the Common language, wep) woAAod, zep)
mAclovos, wep) tAcloTov, wep) dAlyou, wept €AdTTovos, wep) éAaxlorou, wep) ovderds
moteiodat Or iyeioSat ti (to value high, hiyher, etc.) ; so also wept rodAod eotww
juiv (of great value).

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling
or rest around or near something, with the idea of surrounding
or encircling it (seldom in Attic prose); (2) in a causal sense:
(a) like dui with the Dat., but much more frequently; (b) to
denote an external or ternal reason or cause (Poet.).

—— «FS
Le *.
ou *

§ 296.] PREPOSITIONS. — Ei. 437

(1) Her. 7,61. wep) rifiot kepadraos elxov tidpas. Pl. Rp. 359, d. mweph
TH xetpt xpuoody daxtidrwv pépew. (2) (a) MdxeoSu wepl rive (for some-
thing, some one), (Poet.), in prose especially with verbs of fearing: Th. 1, 60.
dedidres wept TE Xwply@ (fearing for the town). 4, 70. delcas wep) Mero-
movynolos. 6,9. rept Te Cuavrod cHmars dppwdd. Pl. Phaed. 114, d.

-» Sappeiy wept tive (to be of good courage about something). (b) (Poet.) Mep
xdpuart, PdBy, adéve, ddivy (prae, for joy, fear, etc.,as it were surrounded by
them).

III. With the Acc. (1) in a local relation: arownd, (a) to de-
note motion round about something, into the circle or vicinity of
an object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, through some-
thing, with verbs of rest; — (2) of time and number stated in-
definitely or approximately ; — (3) in a causal or figurative sense,
to denote a mental dwelling about an object, taking pains with
it, being employed about it; also 7m respect to.

(1) (a) IL. «, 139. wept ppévas Hav iwh, the clamor came round his mind ;
(b) Her. 3, 61. KauBvon xpovi(ovT: wept Altyumroy érmanoréata tvdpes Md-
you (round in Egypt). 7,131. 6 wey wept Mieplny d:érpiBe tuépas cvxvds.
Th. 6, 2. @xouv bolvixes wept macayv Thy SikeAlayv kxpas Te em) TH Saddoon
&rodaBdvres xal Ta emixelueva vnoldia (in Sicily around on all the coasts).
Hence of rep{ tiva (those around any one, connected or associated with him) ; of
mep) TlAdrwyva (§ 263, d). Comp. augi. (2) Th. 3, 89. rep) trotrovs
Tovs xpévous (about). Mept uuplovs (about). (3) Of rept povoikhy
bytes, ol wept Thy yewuetplav diatplBovres, orovddlew wept rt (those oc-
cupied about, with music, etc.). "Awedads txew wep{ riva. X. An. 3. 2, 20.
etauaptdvew mepl riva (with respect to). 1.6, 8. &ucos mepi triva. C.1.1,
20. swhpovety wep) ros Seods. Ai wep) 7d cHpua Hdoval; Ta wept Thy
&pethy (the essence of virtue, what pertains to it).

§ 296. (2) "Erg upon.

With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote rest upon
a place or object, bordering on a place, the place being regarded
as the point of support, that on which the action leans, hence:
upon, at, near to (§ 287, Rem.) ; (b) a direction to a place (§ 273,
Rem. 8);—(2) in a temporal relation to denote the time i or
during which something takes place (§ 273, Rem. 12) ; —(3) in
a causal and figurative sense: (a) with verbs of saying, swear-
ing and affirming before any one (as it were leaning or resting
on some one); (b) to denote the occasion or author, especially
in the phrase, to be named after some one or some thing; (c)

37*

=n, oe Ae a ee

TP - es

a eee

re re

Pe, 5:

oe a

438 : SYNTAX. [§ 296.

conformity, with verbs signifying to examine, to judge, to con-
sider, to say, and to show; (d) dependence or resting on some:
thing, a steadfast abiding by (on) something; (e) the manner ;
(f) the purpose, which is then considered by the language, as
the cause, with the verb raxJjvo, and the like, to be set over
something, and in certain phrases.

(1) (a) Pl. Menex. 246, d. o¥7? ert yijs, oS brd vis. Her. 7,111. 7d
pavrhiov rodré éot: em) tav obpéwy Tav SWnArAoTtdTwy 6, 129. ém
TiS Tpawé (ns bpxhoaro (danced upon the table). 2, 35. 7rd &ySea of perv
tvdpes ew) trav Keparéwy Hopéover, ai 5& yuvaikes Cm) THV buwyv. X.
An. 4. 3, 28. Hevopav méluyas &yyeAov Kedcber (adtods) abrod peiva er) TOD
moramod (at, near the river). (b) Th. 1,116. wae ér) Sdpov (to sail for
Samos). X. Cy. 7. 2,1. éwt Sdpdewyr pebyev. Dem. Phil. 3. 123, 48. ava-
xwpety em otkov (to return homewards), (2) Her. 6,98. ér) Aapelou éyé-
eTo TAEW Kaxd 7H ‘EAAAS: (in the time of, during the reign of Darius): X. Cy. 1.
6, 31. éwl tr&@v juetépwv tpoydvwr. So ém nod, ed huay, e¢’
bu @v (mea, nostra, vestra memoria, in, within my memory, etc.). The Gen. often
stands in connection with a participle, but always with the present; hence ém
often denotes the duration of time, e.g. ém) Ktpov Baoirteborvtos (during
the reign of Cyrus). (3) (a) Aéyew ém) Sixaoradv, ew) paptipwy (before,
in the presence of, properly, resting or leaning upon). Dem. Cor. érwyudcavto
él Trav otpatnya@y (took an oath in the presence of the generals). Similar to
the preceding is, Her. 9,11. efray ém SpKov (said on oath, quasi substrato vel
supposito jurejurando, leaning or resting on the oath). (b) KaAdcioSu emt rivos
(to be called after one). Her. 7, 40. Nioato: xadréovra: trra ér) rodde (for this
reason). 74. ém} AvSo0d rod ”ATvos @oxov Thy érwryuplny. Thy érwvuplay
moreionar él tivos (to be called, to take a surname from one). "Ed éavrod (of
one’s own accord, sua sponte); ém mpopdoews (simulatione, under pretext). Aéyew
émt tivos (dicere de aliqua re). Pl. Charm. 155, d. éa) rod kadrod Adywv
watdés, (¢) Zmreiy te €m) rivos, kpivew ms Owl Tivos, cKowew T eT! TL-
vos, Aéye tT. emi Tivos, emideital ri émt Tivos, etc. (to judge something accord-
ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). Pl. Rp. 597, b. BovaAes ody, pyr,
er atitay TobTwy Toy pmunthy TodTOY (nThowuer, Tis mor’ early; (visne, ad
haec ipsa imitatorem istum exigamus?) (d)’E dq éavtod, EavTav, uay ad-
T@v, €avTijs (by one’s self, separately, of one’s own accord, properly, resting or
depending on one’s self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. of “7EAAnves
ipopavres tovs BapBdpous abrol eg’ Eautayv exdpovy tryeudvas Exovres (marched
by themselves). Her. 5, 98. oixéovras rijs @puyins xapdv te Kal nbunv ew éav-
t@v (by themselves). 4, 114. oixéwuev er Huéwv abray. Here seems to
belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: *E@ évés,
éml Tpi@y, TETTApwY TeETAXSal, TTHrat, one, two, three men deep or in file,
properly to be placed or stand on one, the row resting or leaning on one,
etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 42,7. dv kad iucts Oot THs Toradtns ederAhonre ‘yev-
éodar yapns ( firmiter adhaerere huic rationi). 9. (@lAummos) obx ofds 7 early,

ee ha
ir
,

=

£

"

$296.) PREPOSITIONS. — Exi, 439

tov & xardorparra, pévew emt rodrwy (cannot remain with, satisfied with

those things which he has conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. nwAdoait’ dv exeivoy mpdr-
Tey Taira, é¢ Gv ears viv (quibus nunc studet). So uévew ew) avolas. (e)
Dem. Cor. 230, 17. ofre dixalws, ott’ ém GAndelas oddeuras cipnudva
(stated neither with justice nor in adherence to the truth, as it were, resting on
truth). (f) Her. 5, 109, éa od érdySnuev (cui ret praefecti sumus). Dem. Cor,
266, 118. él rod Sewpinxod xaracradsels (placed over the theatre-money).
Hence ai ér) trav mpayudrwy (those placed over business, those at the head of

affairs),
Ii. With the Dat., (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the

_tarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, by or near a

place or object ; —(2) of time (mostly only poetic) ;— (3) in a
causal and figurative sense: (a) to denote dependence : penes,
in the power of ; — (b) a condition under which something takes
place; (c) the purpose, design, or determination ; (d) the goal or
limit ; (e) the reason, with verbs expressing an affection of the
mind (§ 285, Rem. 1).

(1) (a) Th. 1, 56. (MloriSarara) oixotow eri rE “lo Su@ ris Madahvns. X. —

An. 7. 4, 4. Of Opdkes ras GAwmenldas ew) Tais Kkepadrats Hopotar kal Tots
@aol, wai Cepas pexpl Trav wodav em) trav trrwy txovoew, wear fox-skin caps on
their heads and ears, and have cloaks reaching to their feet when upon their horses
(ér{ with the Dat. purely local, but é) raév trrwy, inasmuch as the horses are
considered as active). (b) Her. 7, 89, of Golvixes 7d wadaidy olkeoy ex) TH
"EpvSpi Xaddoon (upon, by). So also where one thing is said to be along
with another, or in addition to it, e. g. éodiew eal TG clrw bWor (to eat the
Bpov with bread); éwmi rg cit miveyw (to drink with one’s food); éxl tH Kvb-
Ate Gdery (lo sing over one’s cups). Hence, ér! tovrors (upon, in addition
to this, i. e. besides) ; finally it is also used to denote a succession of things in

time and space. Od. , 120. dyxvn em” ByxVn ynpdoxe (pear on pear). X.

Cy. 2. 3, 7. avéorn em aibt@ Sepataas (after him). dvos ért pdvq@ (murder
upon murder), Eur. (2) *Ew) vu«r? (Il. 8, 529), in, during the night, comp.
§ 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. ég’ butv éore (rovrous) KoAdCew
(penes vos, it is in your power, ete.). (b) "Ext rodr@, én obdervt (hac, nulla
conditione, nullo pacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. x) todr@ bretiora-
po THS apxiis, em pre bm odderds ducwv tptouat. Hence of price, e.g. ért

‘ptad@ (on condition of, for,a reward); éwt peydaAots TéKots davelCeodu
(to borrow on high interest); éwt méaw (at what price). (c) Her.1,68.2m) kang —

avSpérov olSnpos avetpnra (in perniciem hominis). So ém) trotrG (hoc con-
silio, for this purpose, with this design). X. S. 1,5. Tipwraydpe word apyipiov
dédaxas ew) cola (ad discendam sapientiam). Pl. Ap. 20, ¢. pedderal re
kal éw) SiaBorAH TH Cup Aéyet. Hence of éw) rats unxavats (those

placed over the machines); of éw) tots mpdyuace (those intrusted with business); — ;

én) 7G Sewpixg bv (charged with the money for the public shows). Dem. Cor.

— = > Pf a 2 _— - Se a a
‘.

Pere SN RE ge los URE Sa en Mie hae oat aan CR cans Sane a

440 SYNTAX. “ [§ 297.

264,113. (d) Aéyew é@af rivi (to pronounce a eulogy on one); vduovs Séodau
éwt tive (for). And so dvoud(ew or Karey Te ml rive (nomen alicui impo-
nere, *9 call a person or thing something). Pl. Rp. 470, b. él wey ri Tov oixelov
%xSpa ordoi nékaAynra, ér) 5& rH Tov addrorplov méAeuos (to hostility at home,
the name insurrection was given, i.e. hostility at home was called insurrection, that
abroad, war). Also, against, in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. 7d wav unxavhoa-
osu em Aiyiyhtnos (against the Aeginetans). Th. 1, 102. rhv yevouévnv
ém) TG MHS Evuaxlay. (ec) Teddy, uéya ppoveiv, palverdou, dyavaxreiv, etc.
émt rive (to laugh at, be greatly elated at, etc.).

Ill. With the Acc., (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the
local limit, the direction or motion to or upon a place or object ;
(b) extension over an object: over, upon; — (2) of time: (a) to
denote the temporal limit (up to, till), also the Amit of quantity
(about) ; (b) extension over a period of time (during) ;— (3) in
a causal and figurative sense: (a) to denote purpose, design;
(b) conformity, manner ; (c) in respect to.

(1) (a) "AvaBalvey 颒 immov, émrt Spdvov. Pl. Crit. 112, e. (of "ASnvaio)
ém) maicav Evpémny na ’Actlav xard te cwudtwy KddAAn Kal KaTd Thy TOY
Yuxay wavrolay dperhy eAdAbyiwor Hoav (over all Europe, etc.). "Emt defid, ew
&prorepd (upon the right, left, to the right, left). (2) (a)’E@ éomwépay (until
evening); (b) éwt woAAds juépas, ep juépayv. Th. 4, 1. 1d ‘Phyiov érh
moAvy xpévov éoractace ( for along time). 94. of dbwAtra él buTo wav Td
otparémedovy érdtavro (by eights, eight in file). "Em wéya, woAd, mAéov, pet(ov,
pardrorv, paxpdy, er trécov, ed’ Scov (greatly, especially, much rather, etc.). Terdx-
Sa emt woddovs (many in file). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. éat Shpav iévas (venatum
ire). 3,14. @x S5wp iéva (aquatum ire). Hence ém) rf; wherefore? In a
hostile sense, e. g. crpareveodsa: ért Avdods (upon, against the Lydians); édab-
vew €m) Tlépoas; (b) em toa (equally, in the same way). Hey. 8, 71. thy
emixelpnow TavTny mh ofrw cvvTtdxuve GBovAws, LAN Ew) Td Twppovertepov
ab’thy AduBave (more according to reflection, more considerately). (c) Pl. Rp. 370,
b. diapepwy ml mpativ. Td ém éwé (quod ad me attinet).

§ 297. (3) Ilapd, by, near.

Ilapa denotes nearness to something: by the side of, by, near.

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation with verbs of going
and coming, to denote a removal from mear a person (Poet.,
also from near a thing) ;— (2) in a causal sense, to denote the
author.

(1) "EASetvy tapd Tivos, like the French de chez quelqu’un (from near some
one, from some one). (2) (a) yet almost purely local: Her. 8. 140. dyyeAln fret

—-
=
ma i

|

§ 297.] PREPOSITIONS. — Ilapd. A6f- >.

mapa Bactdjjos (comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it was
done by his direction). So mapd is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. ByyeAot,
mpéoBeis wapd Tivos, dyyé\Aew wapd Tivos, TA Tapd Tivos (the commis-
sion, command, etc., from any one); (b) with passive verbs (see § 251, Rem. 4);
(c) with verbs of learning and hearing, e. g. wavdvew mapd twos, dxovew mwapd
twos; (d) Map’ éavrod, éaura@y (sua sponte, of one’s own accord); (e) with
verbs of giving and the like, e. g. rap’ Eautod d:ddvat (from himself, i. e. from
his own resources). ‘

Il With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling
or rest near a person (Poet. also near a thing) ; —(2) ina causal
or figurative sense, to denote the possessor ; then also in relation
to the judgment or opinion of a person.

(1) “Eorn wapar@ Bactdrei. (2) MoArd xphuata rapa THe Bactre?
jv. Her. 3,160. rapa Aapelw xpiti (judice Dario, in the opinion of). 1,
32. map’ éuol (meo judicio, in my opinion). 86. rovs mapa oplor abtrotas
doxéovras 6ABlovs. Dem. Ol. 1.18, 3. rocotre Savuacrétepos Tapa TaGt vo-
plCerat (6 biAurmos). ;

Ill. With the Acc. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a
direction or motion to a person so as to come beside or near
( Poet., also of a thing); (b) a direction or motion near a place
and by or beyond it: along, along by, by, beyond ; (c) extension
near a place or object (along, per), generally to denote indefi-
nite nearness (dy) ;— (2) of time, to denote its extension
(during) ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense: (a) to denote
dependence, the possessor (penes); (b) a comparison and estema-
tion ; hence (c) conformity, with verbs of considering, showing,
and the like; (d) a reason or cause (wholly like propter, by vir-
tue of, on account of).

(1) (a) Her. 1, 36. Sérwv és Atyurroy amixero rapa “Amaorv Kal d) Kat és
Sdpdis mapa Kpoicoyv. (b) Mapa rhvy BaBvAadva mapiéva (along, near,
by Babylon). From this have originated various ethical expressions, e. g. rapa
porpay (near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; mapa détay (praeter opin-
ionem, contrary to expectation) ; map’ édmtda, mapa pia, mapa Td dixasov, mapa Tods
Spxous, mapa Sivauuw. (It is the opposite of xard, e. g. Kard mwoipay, Sivapsw, ac-
cording to.) Hence it has also the signification of besides, praeter, e. g. rapa
ra07 a ( praeter haec); (c) Her. 9, 15. rapa tov “Aacwxédy (along the Asopus).
Dem. Ol. l. 24, 22. 4 réyn wapda xdvr éorl Ta Tav byIpdémov TpdyuaTa
( per omnes res dominatur). Her. 4, 87. obros karedelpSn mapa tov vndv
(near). Srivac wapd tiva (and wapd riv:). (2) Map nuépav, rapa
tov wéXepov (during); mapa thy wéoey (inter potandum, while drinking).
So also of single points of time, during which something takes place, e. g.

442 | SYNTAX.» [§ 298.

rap avtdy roy Kivduvoy (in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment of
danger). (3) (a) Isocr. Archid. 126. duoroye?ro rapa TodToy yevéoSat Thy
owrnplav abtois (constabat, in hoc tis positam esse salutem, that their safety depended
on him). Her, 8, 140. ruvSdveoSe thy viv wap’ ene eodcav diva (is in my
power, with me). (b) Her. 7, 20. dste whre tov Aapelov (arddov) Toy ém) SxtiSas
Tapa TovToyr (sc. Tov ordAov) undey gpalyecSa: (in comparison with this). So
map dAlyov moeiodal te (to make of little account). Map dAlyov, tape
Bixpov, Bpaxt, nearly, almost, rapa moAdd, by far, rap oddéey ridecdu,
(to make no account of ) ; after comparatives and expressions implying compari-
son, as %AAos, Erepos, Sidopos. Th. 1, 23. Alou éxAchpes muxvdtepar Tapa
Ta ex TOU mply xpdévov pynuovevdneva (more frequent in comparison with those men-
tioned in former times). Pl. Phaed. 93, a. od8¢ why moiety Tt, ovdE Tt do XEW UAAO
map & by éxciva } wo i} mdoxy. Hence of alternations: qudcpa rap Auépav
(one day in distinction from another, day by day, every other day, alternis diebus, also
map jucpay alone). Often with the accompanying idea of preference, prae,
praeter, X.C.1.4,14. rapa rd HAAG CHa, Sswep Seol, of &vSpwror Brored-
ovat (in comparison with, beyond, other animals). (c) ‘Ope, cxom@ Tt wap’ &AAO
7+ (to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it,
properly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1. 824,34. rapa rdy Ad-
yor, bv &mopépovow, emideltw (in conformity with, properly, holding an object near
toanother.) (d) Dem. 1.43, 14. od88 Siaurmos mapa Thy adtod paomny Toood- -
tov émevinra, boov Tapa Thy HmeTéepayv &uéerAerayv (on account of his own
strength). So rapa todro, propterea, rap’ 8, quapropter.

§ 298. (4) Ilpds, before.

IIpés (formed from zpé), denotes before, in the presence of.

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction
or motion from the presence of an object, especially from the
situation of a place;—(2) in a causal relation, to denote an
active person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a
person exercising power, or of an object considered asa person.
(a) of derivation ; (b) of a person or thing to whom or which
something belongs (quality, peculiarity) [§ 273, 2, (c) (a)]; (ce)
of the author or cause. :

(1) Her. 3, 101. otxéovo: rpds vdrov avémov (toward the south, properly
Srom the south). Comp. a meridie instead of ad meridiem. 107. pds weonu-
Bpins ApaBin éori (lies towards the south). X. An. 2.2, 4. émecSe TG Fryoupé-
ve, Ta wey broCbyia Exovres Tpds TOD ToTapmod (towards, on). (2) (a) rpds
watpos,mpos untpds (on the father’s or mother’s side). (b) pds yuvatkés
ort’ (it is the manner of women); mpbds Sixns éorly (it is conformable to justice).
X. An, 1. 2,11. od« jv wpds Tod Kipou rpdmov, exovra wh arodiddvau (was
not in accordance with the custom of Oyrus). Antiph. 2.121, 2. 4 wey ddta rev

e. Ns i ~ ie Ph) Ot eel Pe ra
a . :
:

§ 298.] PREPOSITIONS. — II pds. 443

mpaxsévrav mpds trav Adyew Buvauévey dorly, 4 Bi &AIea pds TeV
Slkaia kad Soia mpacaodvtwy. Also, eva pds tivos (to stand or be on the
side of one). Th. 4, 92. xph motedoavtas TG SeG wpds judy toeodu, dudce
xwpiioa trois moAeulos (trusting in God that he will be on our side). Hence Pl.
Hipp. 1,285, b. doneis por tov Adyow wpds Euod Ayew (for my advantage).
(c) to receive, to have something from some one, then with passive verbs (§ 251,
Rem. 4), intransitive (§ 249, 3), and in phrases of a passive sense. Her. 2, 139.
Kandy Tt wpds Se@v h wpds GvSpadmrwy AauBdvey. X. An. 7. 6, 33. tywv
trawoy wodkiw tpds buay amwemopevduny (having much praise from you). Her.
1, 61. drmdfeoSa mpds Merorotpdrov. X. An. 1. 9, 20. pirovs duoroyetrat
Kipos rpds mdvtwy xpdriotos 5) yevéeodat Separevery (is admitted by all). Occ.
4,2. af Bavavoixal karAovpevar d5ototvTa mpds Tav wdérA€ wy (are held inno esteem
by the cities). Her. 1,73. attra mpds Kuatdpew raddytes (from Cyazeres). 7,
5. orparnAdree emt tas "Adjvas, tva Adyos oe Exn Tpds &vSpdrav ayadds
(ut lauderis ab hominibus, as it were, in the presence of men). With forms of swear-
ing and protestation, e. g.rpds Sea@y (per deos, properly, before the gods).

II. With the Dat., to denote dwelling or rest near or by an
object; also of being busily engaged in or with a thing; finally,
in the sense of besides, in addition to (praeter).

Th. 2, 79. és udxny naSloravta of ASnvain rpds abt tH wéAet. Elva,
ylyveodar wmpds mpdyuact pds rotrTe, rpds tovrTots ( praeter ea).

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: (a) of the situation
of a place : towards [where the Gen. also may be used, see No. I,
(1)]; (b) of the direction to persons, or things considered as
persons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in
hostile relation; (c) of extension ; — (2) to denote time wdefi-
nitely ; — (3) causal and figurative: (a) to denote the purpose
or object ; (b) conformity ; hence (c) the reason or cause (prop-
ter); (d) a comparison, for the most part with the accompanying
idea of superiority or preference (prae, praeter); (e) m respect to.

(1) (a) pds peonuBplayv, rpds écwépav (towards). Th. 2, 55. (7 yf)
mpds TleAowdvyncoy bpG. (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. Epxovra rpds judas (to
us, properly, come before us). 7.6, 6. duds mpwt tkouey mpds abrovs. 5.4, 5.
SiacwSfvat BovrAdueda mpds Thy ‘EAAdSa(i.e. mpds Tods “EAAnvas, to go in safety
to Greece). Aéyeww, aryopevev, ekerdCew Te pds tiva (to speak before, to one) ;

orovdds, cuppaxlay mocioSa pds tiva (with one); wdxeoSat, worcuey mods

Ttva (against one). These phrases everywhere imply the meaning to come

into the presence of, before the face of any one; also, AoyiCerSar, oxéparsat, oKo- —

meiv, evOuucioSa wpds éautdy (secum reputare); likewise, (Xwxpdrns jv)
mpos xeimaGva ka Sépos cal wrdytas mévous Kxaptepikétatos (against),

X. C.1.2,1. (c) Swxpdrys ye wal epds Tods GAAoUS Gvapamous Kdopov

: ” rf a 2 : b a oe 7 4 f
ER Oe Py IO eee, eg Sh ee ee ae ea

ee NE ae ee ee eee. ee ee

444 SYNTAX. [§ 299.

TH wore mapetxe (among other men, etc. the preposition here extending the idea),

ibid. 61. (2) [pds juépav (towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dem. Phil. 2. 71,

23. mavrodama eipnucva Tais réAcot pds PudAakhy Kar owrnplay (for a guard,
etc.); (b) Her, 1, 38. pds rhy Syw radtyy Ty yduov TodTOY torevoa (in
accordance with this view). So xplvew ti wpds Ti, A€yew mpds xdpiv, pds
7750, mpds 7d dyadsdy. Also, rpds Blav (violently, against the will),
mpds avayKny, pds ndovhy, rpds api Betray (accurately, in conformity
with accuracy, etc.). (c) pds tadra (properly, in accordance with this, hence
Jor this reason, therefore). (d) X.3.5,4. 4 r@v’ASnvalwy Séta (TeTawelvwrat)
mpds tTovs Botwrods (in comparison with the renown of the Boeotians). So
also to denote an exchange, e. g. Pl. Phaed. 69, a. jdovds mpds Hdovas Kab
Atras pds AvTas Kal oéBor rpds PdBoyv KaradAdtrecSa, cat pellw pds
€AdtrTw, dSstep voulopata (to exchange pleasures for pleasures, etc.). (e) Xxo-
meivy, Bréwew pds Tt (to consider with respect to something); diapépew rpds
&pethy, kadds tpds Spdmov, rpds mdAnY, TACOS TWpds apeTHYy.

§ 299. (5) “Yard, sub, under.

I. With the Gen, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a mo-
tion out from a lower place: forth from under, away from under
(more obvious in the Hom. tréx with Gen.); (b) to denote a
quiet rest under an object (§ 287, Rem.) ;—(2) in a causal and
figurative sense: (a) to denote the author with passive and in-
transitive verbs (§ 254, Rem. 4); (b) an outward or imward
(mental) occasion, influence; (c) a mere mstrumental cause,
means, manner.

(1) (a) Od. 1, 140. abrap em xpards Amévos pee dyrAady Bdwp, kphvn bad
omelous (from under the grotto). », 5. 54d dmhyns Advew trmovs (from under
the chariot). X. An. 6.4, 25. (Zevopav) AaBav Body bd auditns cpoyiacdp-
evos @BofnSe. (b) Il. 8, 13. Eradv pw phlw és Tdprapoy...ixe Bddioroy bard
xSovds dott BepeSpoy (under the earth). ‘Lrd yijs oikeiv. (2) (a) Krelveo-
Sa iad Tivos, amodavev bad Tivos (to be slain by one). (b) X. An. 5.1,
15. Ad&irmos amréSavev bd NixdvbSpov. 7.7, 28. péya wo Sone? ed akovew
iad avSpdrwyv (to hear himself well spoken of by men), 3. 4,11. amércoay
Tiv apxhvy bard Mepoav Myda (lost the government by the Persians = spoliati
sunt imperioa P.). 7. 2, 22. aitlay éxw iad Tivos (= accusor ab aliquo). Her.
3, 104. 53d Tod Kadparos of pbpunnes apavées ylvovtas bmd viv (under the in-
fluence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2,85. 6rd dvéuwy nat ord
&amAolas évdrérpupey ode bAlyov xpdvov (on account of the winds, etc.). “ta
avdynns (from necessity). “Crd pédns palverSa, Pl. ‘Yard plyous. Her.
1, 85. 6rd Séovs Kal Kakod pavhy epinte (spoke from fear and grief). So
imd xapas, pSovod, dpyis, arerplas, cwHPpoctivys, appocrrns, ete.

(c) Her. 7, 21. épvocov b3d parriywr (dug under the lash, that being the -

Stay ae ae

— wa),

$ 300.] PREPOSITIONS. — ‘Y7o. 445

means) ; also of persons: 9, 98. 54d «hpuKos mponydpeve (under the help of the
herald, i.e. praeconis voce) ; particularly of the accompaniment of musical in-
struments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. éorparedero imd cadmiyywv. So im abaod
xopevew, bd hopulyywy, bird ruurdyeay, ete.

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet
rest under an object ;— (2) causal and figurative: (a) to denote
the author (almost exclusively poetic, see § 251, Rem. 4); (b)
to denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet.; (c) to
denote subjection.

(1) ‘rd yG eva; with mountains, at the foot of, e.g. iad TudaAw (at the
Soot of Tmolus). ‘Tad 7@ ‘Tunoog. (2) (a) Aaujva bad tivi, winrew
bad rivi (to be conquered by one, etc.), Hom. (b) ‘Yrd BapBite xopevew,
im avrAg, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre). (c) Moi te bd tive
(to subject something to one), and roieiaSal tt bp’ EauT@ (to subject something to
one’s self, sibi subjicere). Her. 7, 157. rhy ‘EAAdda bm EwtTG worhoacdau. Th.
1,110. Afyurros b3rd Bacire? eyévero (was under the power of the king). X.
Cy. 8. 8,1. Kipos robs bg’ Eaut@ Sswep Eavtod waidas ériua (those subject to
him).

III. With the Acc. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the
aim, direction or motion towards and under ; (b) extension under
an object; — (2) of time: (a) in an indefinite specification of
time (approach to a point of time); (b) extension in time
(during) ; — (3) causal, to denote subjection.

(1) (a) "Iéva 64d yhv (togounder), X. An. 1. 10,14. b7d abrdv (rdy
Aégov) orhoas Td orpdrevya méumer Adniov. (b) Her. 2, 127. treet: oixhuara
id viv (are under the earth). 5.10. rh bwd Thy pKTov dolknta donde
elva: (the parts beneath the north pole). X. An. 7.4, 5. év tais b3d 7d Bpos Ka-
pois. (2) (a) ‘Yrd vinta (sub noctem, towards); brd rhv tparnv éwedr-
Sotcav vinta; so also ind ti (aliquatenus, in some measure). (b) Her. 9, 51.
i3d trhv vinta (during). (3) X. Cy. 1.5, 3. (6 “Aocoupiwy Bactreds) diaméu-
me. mpds Te Tos, 0d EauTdy mdvras, Kal mpds Kpoioov. 6.2, 11. 6 atAdoyos
Ttav imd Baciréa BapBdpor.

§ 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the
Prepositions.

1. The proper prepositions were originally (except &s, to) adverbs of place

(§ 286, Rem. 2), i.e they denote the local relation of an action; in this way

nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre-

quent in Herodotus, but in good Attic prose, only mpds 5¢, xa xpds, praeterea
38

>. ‘< iva th he 7 a. eee
. ‘ < & ta"

446 SYNTAX. ~ : [$ 300. |

Od. ¢ 40. moardy yap &wrd mavvol cio wédnos. 1, 116—118. vijoos —rerd-
vuota vAhero, ev F alyes ameipéoia yeydaow a&ypiu. Also in Her., e. g. 8, 39.
év 585) Kal AcoBiovs cide (amony them, i.e. iniis). Il. o, 562. wéraves 3 ava
Bérpves Hoar (grapes were thereon). Od. 1, 184. rept F aid} dyna dédunTOo a-
Ttwpuxéerot AlSouow. a, 66.bs wep) pev vdov ear) Bporay (he is beyond, i. e. eminent
above). &, 44.7 ydp fa Seds wep) Saxev doudhv (in a special manner, especially).
Il. ¢, 529. xrefvov 3 ém) pndoBoriipas (in addition, besides). Also not rare in
Her., ém} 3€ (thereupon, tum); wera 5é ( postea), Her.; tpds ye, mpds b€
very common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose.

Remark 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand together in poetry, most fre-
quently in Epic, the first of which always has an adverbial meaning, but the sec-
ond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. Ara mpd
(through and out): Il. p, 393. rdvura d¢ re waoa (Boein) 514 mpd. "Aud wept
(round about). Od. A, 608. dui wept orhdecow. Il. , 10. ixSu 7 aug
meph peydr taxov. B, 305. dum) wep) xphynv. Tlapé« (with the Gen. near
to, with the Acc. near by, along by), e. g. Od. 4, 116. maptk Atmévos. pm, 276.
GAAG Tape Thy vijvov éAatvere via wéAuvay. Tldpeé (as a Paroxytone) often
in Her. with the meaning besides, e. g. 3,91. rdpeg Tov Gpyupiov. ‘Tmréxn
(from under, out from under),in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. Aéyera: bmweK Taev
ypuTav aprd ev Apimarmobs (sc. roy xpvodv). “Amompd pepe, Il. 7, 669, 679.
Tlep) mpd. Il. A, 180. wept rpd yap eyxei Sdev (around and before).

Rem. 2. Also the improper prepositions €vexa and xdpiv, though very
seldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of, for
the sake of, &4d Bois Evena (for the cry’s sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. wep) trav
év dAvyapxia aptdvrwy evener.

2. Since prepositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad-
verbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as
adverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often employs
the simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the verb, where
the Attic writers regularly use the compounds. The two following instances
must be distinguished : —

(a) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the verb. II. y, 34.
imé te tpduos ZAAaBe yia. y, 135. rapa F eyxea maxpd wéemnyerv. 4,
63. ém) F EWovrat Seo Bro. 5,161. Zu te wal dpe TeAc?. &, 108. obs
(trmovs) wor’ am Aivelay EAXduny (EAéoSu Tid TL, Il. 7, 56).

Rem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged. mode of expression, where
several sentences follow each other, which consists in using the compound,
which should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others
the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. Il. ¥, 799. kata piv Sorrxdonioy eyxos
SH és ayava pépwv, kata F domida Kal rpvpddcay. Often also in Her.,
e. g. 8,33. kata wey Exavoav Apuudy wéAw, kat & Be Xapddpnv (where, how-
ever, the first may be taken as Tmesis. See Rem. 4).

Rem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic
writers, the prepositions are so closely connected with the verbs, that both
mingle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may
be properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb, by means of one or
more intervening words, from the preposition in connection with which it forms
one whole or one idea. The Tmesis of compound verbs is found somewhat —
often in Her.; also in Pindar, and in other poets, seldom in the Attic poets in
the lyric choral songs, and still more seldom in the dialogue ; but when it does —

occur, only a particle comes between the two parts of a word, so that the unity —

= oe

$300.) PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PREPOSITIONS. 447

of the idea is not destroyed. Her. 7, 15. Béptns avd re €Spapue ex rhs Kol
kal wéumet dyyedov. 8, 89. ard uty ESave 6 otpatnyds. Bur. Iph. ‘Aul. 1365.
Oe tp dAGAauev. The Attic prose remains free from this license, with a few
special exceptions, e. g. Th. 3,13 uh Edy Kaxds worety abrovs uer Adnvalwy,
GAAS EvveAcudepodv (so as to make the contrast emphatic). Pl. Gorg. 520, e.
avr ed woceivand ef ed rovhoas tavrny thy evepyeciav v7 eb wel cera:
Pl. Phaedr. 237, a. Edu por AdBeoe tov uldov (take part).

(b) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the Case of its sub-
stantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhibits its original
adverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb; the verb and the adverbial prepo-
sition together, form one verbal idea, and this, not the preposition alone, gov-
erns the Case. Il. ¢, 292. rod 8 &@d uty yAdooar rdue (Gen. of separation).
4, 382. wAciora Sduors ev «rhuara Keira (lies within the house). o, 266. dug?
Be xatra: Suors aiooovta, on the shoulders about (local Dative). m, 291. év
yap TidrpoxAos pdBov fey &taciv, he cast fear into all (Dat. of limit or aim,
§ 284, Rem. 1). So the Ace. denoting local aim or object (§ 277). Il. &, 115.

(ta 8 eis aupotépw Awuhdeos &puata BHrny (entered the chariot). Acc. of the

object receiving an action (§ 279): Il. B, 156. "ASnvalny “Hon rpds piso
feimev (addressed, spoke to Athene).

Rem. 5. In the second case (b), a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par-
ticles, like uhy, 5¢, ré, pd, ydp, tp’, P &pa, come between the preposition and the
Case of the substantive, —a very frequent usage of the post-Homeric period,
and even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4.

3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language,
that it often connects prepositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex-
press the direction whither ; and, on the other hand, prepositions followed by
the Acc., with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place
or object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the

speaker either conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the
_ moment of the rest which succeeds ; or along with the moment of rest, the moment

of motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction.

(a) The verb of motion involves the idea of the rest which succeeds, when preposi-
tions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Acc. The moment of
rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded
as the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following
prepositions : —

With év, particularly in the Epic language. IL. e, 370. 7 év yotvac:
minxre Atovns 3° “Adpodirn (she fell on her knees, and then lay on her knees). Od.
a, 200. éym pavredocoua, ds ev Suu@ adSdvarar BdrAAove. IL A, 743.
Hpimwe F dv wovinory ( fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, tT: Sévat
év xépoty like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first :
és 5¢ To” Hpaov xarépvyov, and then oid évy r@ ‘Hpalw katamwepevydtes
étyjeray (those who had fled and were then in the Heraeum). Pl. Euthyd. 292, e.
éy tabtn TH &wropla evewemrdnerv. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in littore
ejectas esse. Sall. Jug. 5. in amicitia receptus).— Also with dupi and wept
with the Dat. instead of the Acc. II. A, 17. xvnuidas uév mpdta wept KV MD-
atv %nxev (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them).
Od. 3, 434. dul mwrupl origca:trpixoia. With eri: Ll. a, 55. 7H yap

Con eN TPES pee rere a ne

448 SYNTAX. [§ 300.

ém) ppeot Sire Bed AevedAcvos “Hpy (like ev ppeot Seiva). With rpds:
Od. 1, 284, véa wév mor karéate Moceiddwy evoolxswrv, pds métpynat Barey,
289. aby Bt Sbw udpas, dste cxidaxas, ToT yaln Kémre. §o BdrAAets
mot yaly.— With id, in prose, in the phrases, iad rive ylyveordas (to
come under the power of any one, and continue under his power); wmorety Tt bm
tive (alicui aliquid subjicere); moiodu bp éEauTg@ [sibi subjicere, § 299, II,
(2) (c)].

Rem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without
doubt, expresses the relation of aim or object: xeipas idAAcw em olr@, heat Bédos
emi tit, meupau bveipov emt tim, edadbvew trmous em) vnvoty, Titalverdau Téa emt
rt, GdrcoSa emt rin, udxeoSa eml Tun, wérecda ew tvSeow. See § 284,

em. 1.

(b) The verb expressing rest involves the idea of -the motion which precedes, when
the preposition eis stands with the Acc., instead of the preposition év with the Dat.
The moment of the preceding motion must then be regarded as predominant.

Il. 0, 275. €pdvn Ais eis 65dyv (came into the road and appeared). Her. 4,
14. pavijvar és Mpoxédvynaov. Eur. Iph. T. 620. dar’ eis dvdynny nel-
eda (to come into and to be in). Her. 3, 62. mponydpeve oras és wévov Ta
évretaduéva ( placing himself in the midst and there stunding). Very frequent in
prose is tapetvat eis témov Tivad (to have come to a place, and to be present
there); comp. “ he is in church, in town, or on the land,” in which the idea of
previous motion is necessarily supposed. X. An. 1.2, 2. rapjaayv eis Sdp-
Ses (came to Surdis and were.there). Her. 8, 60. és Thy Sarapiva bwén-
KkeiTat duiv Téxva Te Kal yuvaixes (to carry to Salamis and leave there in safety).
Pl. Rp. 468, a. rdv Cavra cis rods ToAeplous GAdYTa, I. @. eis TOUS
ToAeuious TecdvTa GA@vat.

(c) Verbs signifying to hang, to attach to, to suspend, etc., as xpeuavvivat, dvap-
Tay, €K-, KaTa-, dvadeiv, dvdwrewv, aiwpeioSa, are connected with the prepositions
&aé and éx (as in Lat. with ab and ex), in order to express, together with
the idea of suspending anything to a place, the idea of hanging down from or
depending from a place.

Od. 3, 67. nad 8 ex maccardoi kpémacer Pdpuryya Atyerav (he hung the
lyre on the peg, so that it then hung down from it). X. H. 4.4, 10. Macfuaxos
kaTtadhoas ard dévdpwy rods trmovs wera Tav eXeAovTav Het evaytioy rors
*Apyelois (having fastened the horses to the trees). X. C. 3.10, 13. Sépaxes exe
T@V Buwy kpeudmevor (hanging upon the shoulders and depending from them).
So a@vapray tt &e twos. Her. 4.10. éx trav Cwothpwv popeiv piddas (on the
girdles, so that the bowls hung down).. In poetry, this usage is very widely
extended. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, (c).

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, as well as prepositions, are sometimes used in a
pregnant sense: (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of those denoting the direc-
tion whither. S. Trach. 40. xeivos ¥ &rov (instead of bro, quo) BéBnrey,
ovdels aide (no one knows where [whither] he has gone). X. H. 7.1, 25. &rou~
Bovandeiey €E eX SDe7v.—(b) adverbs expressing the direction whither, instead
of adverbs expressing the relation where. Eur. H F.74. rot wathp &meore
ys; 1157. wot xax@v épnutay etpw; (quo me vertam, ut requiem inveniam ?).
Arist. Av. 9.201 yijs éouey; (whither |where] are we?), Dem. Chers. 102, 50.
Tot avadvdpeda; (quo nos vertamus, ut perniciem vitemus?). Phil. 1. 51, 40.
6 wAnyels Gel THs TAnyis exeTa, Kav éErépwoe TaTdin Tis, Cxeto€ ciow al xeipes.

(4) A second peculiarity in the construction of prepositions is, when the
article (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition and its

—. —_— “<« -«
eal gf e&-
aol ‘a j-”
7 Ln

§300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF

_ Case, has a substantive idea, and when the preposition
relation where only in the most general manner, should be
is changed either into 44d and éx or into eis, attracted, as it were, by the
verb, expressed or understood, which denotes either the direction whence or
whither. This construction may be called the attraction of prepositions : —

(a) "Awé and éx instead of év, or rapd with the Gen. instead of rapd
with the Dat. Of é« ris dyopas &Spwra adxépuyoy (instead of of év
TH &yopG krSpwra amépvyov ex THs ayopas (those IN the agora fled FROM it).
xu 4.6, 4, wdyres of €x TGv &ypaGv ’Axapvaves Epuyov és Ta korn (in-
stead of wdvres of €vy Tots dypots epuyoy éx TGV dypav és ta korn). Th.
1, 18. of éx THs BAANS ‘EAAASOs (Tipavva) bwd Aaxedaipovioy Kat erAt-
Sngav. 3.22. fosovro of ex Tay mipywv PbrAakes (the guards UPON the
towers perceived it FROM the towers). 7, 70. of &md TOY KaTagTOwMaTwY
Tots axovtias éxpavro (those upon the decks used their darts From the decks).
Pl. Apol. 32, b. iuets rods déea orparyyods robs ok &veAomévous Tos ex
Tis vavmaxias eBovrdcode 4Spdous Kplvew (you wished to condemn all at once
the ten commanders 1n the naval battle, who did not carry off the dead From it).
Phaed. 109, e. of éx tis Saddrrns ixdbes dvaxvarovrtes (the fish iN
the sea coming up ovuT of it). Dem. Phil. 3.114, 15. robs éx Zepplovu rel-
Novus otpatioras €&éBarev. X. An. 1.1, 5. dstisP AGixvoiro trav wapa
Baciréws mpds airdy (instead of tay mapa Bacire? dyvrwy mapa Baciréws.

&pixvoiro).

Rem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of

lace, e. g. éxetdev and @vdoSev instead of exe? and & Sov. Dem. Ol. 3. 13, 15.

ate tov éxeidev wédreuoy devpo hiovra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. va hocov Ta ofkade
moxoin. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, Rem. 2.

_ (b) Els instead of éy (far more seldom). Her. 2, 150, &Aeyov of émixdpior,
_ ds és thy Siprw rhy és AtBiny @x5td07 | Aluvy abty brd yy (empties into
_ the Syrtis which is in Iybia). X. H. 1.7, 29. Epacwldns (ééAcvev) emt rods és
M tTvAhY HY. Toreulovs Thy TaxloTny wAciy Gravtas (against the enemies in
___ 5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are
_ to be noted :—
(a) Ina series of codrdinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated
‘before each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep-
ately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between
the ideas is to be denoted, e. g. Pl. Tim. 18, c. katd te méAcuov kal Kata Thy
nv dSiavray; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and
smitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole,
hether they are of the same kind or different, e.g. X. C.1. 4, 17. rep) ray
Sdde kal wep) Tay ev Aiytrry kat év SinredAla dpovriCew (instead of
ral wept tay év SuceAlg). 2. 1, 6. dyuuvdorws tyew rods re Wixn Ka
damn. X. H. 1. 1, 3. ded tre rOv veGv Kal Tis ys. Pl. Phaed. 99,
.) wep) Méyapa } Boiwrods.

(b) When a substantive connected with a’ preposition, is followed by a rela-
tive pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition
mn prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted:
P]. Symp. 213, c. aw éxelvov rod xpdvov, &¢ of rovrou Apdodny. X. Hier. 1,
38*

J ee ees is »

450 “SYNTAX. [§ 300.

11. of id:ron (cives) Epxovra eis méAcis, &s By BolAwyTat, Seaudtwv evera. X.
S. 4, 1. €v 78 xpévw, @ duey d&rodw. (Comp. in Latin Cic. Fin. 4, 20. Zeno negat
Platonem, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in causa, gua tyrannum Dionysium).

(c) The preposition is very often omitted in questions and answers, e. g. Pl.
Soph. 243, d. rep) 3€ tod peylorov Te Kal apxnyod mpdétov viv oKerréop.
Theaet. Tivos 3) Aéyeis; X. 8.5, 5. olcda ody, pn, dpSaruadv Tivos Evena
deduedsa; AjjAov, pn, bts Tod Spay.

(d) The preposition is somnoly omitted with a word in apposition. X.

An. 5. 5, 3. of “EAAnves ddtkovro eis Kotéwpa, réAcv ‘“EAAnvilia. Comp. 4.-

8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2,1. But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap-
position, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding
pronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. (giAlay
AdBos dv) wap exelvwy, olpat, pn, Tapa Tav wndémote worAculwy yeyevnue-
vey (you might acquire friendship from those who have never been enemies). FP.
Prot. 358, b. ai ért rovrov mpdtes &raca, er) rod advmws Civ Kal 7déws,
ap’ ov xadat ; (all the actions pertaining to this, viz., the living without grief, are they
not praiseworthy ?); also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by és,
ésmep, the preposition may be either omitted or repeated. Pl. Rp. 330, ¢.
wep) T& xphmata omovdd(ovo, &s Epyov éautav. Pl. rap juas porrgs,
&s tap& ¢{AXovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre-
cedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti-
cle of comparison is @s; but the preposition is repeated, if it is @swep. Pl.
Rp. 1. 4, 14, e. Se? &s wep) untpds Kad tpopod Tits xdpas dybvew (i. e. wepl

THs xepas). X. Cy. 1. 6, 4. ds rpds plaovs bvtas por Tovs Seovs olrw

Sidicerwar. — Pl. Phaed. 82; e. () Wuxh dvayndera) Sswep 50 eipynod 51d —

TOU uaTos oKoTeioSa TA dyTa.

6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their substantive,

‘
4

or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. rpds Toy &vdpa, mpds

tov gopdy &vipa. But this position is often changed in the following instances :—

(a) When a particle follows the substantive, as yé, wév, ydp, ev ydp, 5¢, ods,

also pty ody, ad, kal, etiam, rolvuy, tows, also ofua: used as an adverb; these
small words often come between the preposition and the enpatentiye, ‘: g. ep

per eiphyn, ev wey yap <iphyn.

(b) The preposition rpés in oaths and exclamations is separated from its
substantive. Soph. O. C. 1333. rpdés viv ce kpnvGy, mpds Sedv duoyrvioy

aiT@ mideodat. Soin Latin, per te deos oro.

(ec) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub-.

ject to anastrophe; in Attic prose, this takes place only with wep{ when con-

nected with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. Pl. Rp. 469, b. mparov wey
aviparodsicuod repr; it is also separated by other words. Her. 6, 101.
TovTov ogi tucrde wept. Pl. Apol. 19, c. dv éyoH ovdtv ode were: ote Culk-
poy wépt ematw. See § 31, IV.

;
,
;

—_—— s' * >

‘ eo hs, , -.. Miia 5X il —— | a ™ a hs ™ 1”? ££."

“9501, 302.) PRONOUNS. 451

See in CHAPTER IV.
§ 301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At-
tribute, and Object.

The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed
by pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not
designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but
when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either
to the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to

another person or thing. |
2. All the rules which have been given on the substan-
tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective
pronouns; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the
use of the pronouns.

§ 302. I. Personal Pronouns.

The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the
Ei. Nom.): éyo, ov, jets, etc., and also the adjective (posses-
_ sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. éuos waryp, are used in

_ Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic ;
_ hence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per-
" spicuity, e. g. Kai ot ratra érpagas. Kalé ods marnp dmédiverv.
_Eyd pev areyu, od de weve. But where this is not the case,
_ they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed
by the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro-
nouns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g. Tpade,
ypades. “H pynryp etré por (my mother). Oi yovels orépyover

7a réxva (their children). |

|
|

Remark 1. The distinction between the accented and the enclitic forms of
the personal pronouns, e. g. ¢uod and you, etc. (§ 87), lies in the greater or less
emphasis with which they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented
forms are always employed, for example, in antitheses, e. g. éuod wey Kareyé-
Aace, ct 8t emjvecev. — The personal pronouns are often used instead of the
reflexive (No. 2). On the use of the Gen. of the substantive instead of the
adjective (possessive) pronouns, see Rem. 4. On an appositive in the Gen.
joined with a possessive pronoun, e. g. juérepos abt av warhp, see § 266, 2.

Rem. 2. The adjective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or
active sense, e.g. éuh Bovdh (my counsel, i.e. one which I originate, not one which

452 | SYNTAX. [§ 302,

relates to me) ; but sometimes they take the place of the objective Gen. and then
have an objective or passive sense. Od. A, 201. ods rdéS0s, a desire FoR thee
(like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. destderio tuo instead of tuz). X. Cy. 3. 1, 28.
evvola Kal pirla TH eu (benevolentia et amore MEI, from good will and love To me).

2. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something already
named, to the Subject or Object, since the person or thing to
which the reflexive refers, stands in contrast with itself as an
object or attribute : — -

(a) In relation to the subject: ‘O copds Eavrod xparei. Sb ceavtg apéo-
kes. ‘O mats E€avtTdy émawel. Of yoveis GyamGor Tos EauT@yv mTaidas.

Tyas ceavtrdév. Odtos 6 avhnp mavta 8 EanuvTod meuddnkev.. ‘O orparnyds
imd Tay EavTod oTpatiwta@y a&mrédavev. :

(b) In relation to an object of the sentence: X. Cy. 1.1, 4. Kipos dufveyxe
TOV &AXwv Baciréwy, Tov apxas 57 EavTa@v Kntnoawévwv. Ar. Nub. 384.
amd cauvTod eye oe diddkw (per te ipsum).

(3) The reflexive pronouns may also be used in Greek, as in
Latin, in the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive
and of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand
in a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses
expressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as
well as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain
the sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject
of the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexive
refers either to the subject or to an object. When the subject
of the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate
clause (or of the Inf.), are different, the reflexive may refer
either to the former or to the latter, its particular reference
being determined only from the context. In the cases men-
tioned under this rule, the English often uses the personal
pronouns him, her, wt, etc. instead of the reflexive.

‘O rbpavvos voulce: rovs moAlras imnpereiy Eavtg. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Tay
ésvav toltwy ptev (Kipos) o¥& éauT@ sbuoyAdrtwy byTwy, ote GANAS.
C. 1. 2, 8. éemioreve (Swepdrns) tay tvvdvrwv EavT@ Tors arodetauevovs,
dep aitos edoxluaer, cis Toy mdvta Bloyv EavT@ Te kal GAAhAaS HlAovs ayadovs
ZrecSu. 52. 6 kartyopos pn Toy SwepadTny avameldovra Tos véous, as avTds
ein copetards te Kal AAovs ikavdtatos Tworjoa gopots, oftw SiaTiWevar Tovs
€avuT@ ovvdytas, ste pndauod map avrots ro’s &AAous elvar mpds EauTdv (in
comparison with him). Th. 2, 92. rd vavdyia, Soa mpds TH EauT av (yh) hv, dvel-
AovTo (= Ta vavdyia Ta mpds TH EauTav yh bvta). Her.8, 24. doo: cov orparod
Tov E€avToD jhoav vexpoi éXave. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3.

Tee ae. ae wee ae er
‘wie Nie Min . = ;
.

$302]
4, On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun airés,
“H, -0: ViZ., adrod, -js, abrG, Hj, adrdv, Hv, -6, abrdy, or even
those of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed,
when an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but
with another object, e. g. 6 zaryp air@ (to him, the son) Swxe
To BiBdiov. répyw airév (him). “Améxopar abrod (from him).
| The pronoun avrod, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the
third person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative
ovros; wherefore, it does not, like otros, usually stand first in a
sentence.

PRONOUNS. 453

Rem. 3. The personal pronoun o6, of, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense
in the Attic writers (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning
of the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex-
ive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It
is in general much more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is
also employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g.
‘O ripavvos voulCer rods woAltas Swnpeteiv oi (but not 6 répavvos xaplCeral oi).
X. An. 7.5, 9. “HpanAelins eisaryayav Tobs %AAous oTparnyous mpds SKetSnv Aéyew
éxédevey abrods, Sri ovdty by frrov opets aydyouv thy otparidy, ) Zevopav
(se ducturos esse). Th. 5,73. 0f "ASnvaior ws eécAwev (6 “Ayis) amd oar
7d oTpdrevua, Kay hovxlay eodSnoay. 6, 32. Evvewedxovto Kal 6 HAXos, Suidos,
| Tv Te wWoAITG@y Kal ef Tis KAAOS ebvous Tapiy ghiot. Even after ydp, e. g. X. H.
1.7, 5. of orparnyot Bpaxéa Exacros dredoyhoato* ob yap TpoiTtédn oplar Adyos
Kata tov véuov, But Thucydides and-some later writers use it, also, in relation
to the nearest subject, e. g. Th. 7, 5. 6 TvAurmos éerelxiCe Tois AlSois xpdpeves,
obs of "ASnvator mporapeBdrdovtro copiciv. The forms of, epic. and opas
have sometimes also the meaning of personal pronouns: of, him, her (e. g. X.
iy . 3. 2,26); opto, to them (e. g. X. H. 6.5,35); opas, them, e.g. Th. 5, 49),
_ when the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to the sense,
_ than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the
/ use of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound
| Teflexive éavtod, -s, etc.is commonly employed; and in place of it with
_ the sense of the Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms of airés
_ are used by the Attic writers. The form of (0%) is used in prose only in Pl.
Symp. 174, d. Rp. 617, b. 617, e.; € (€) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233,
_b.; of occurs far oftener (seldom accented of), and ogeits, cpGv, color,
‘oas, somewhat often.

5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the correspond-
ing forms of airds are very frequently used instead of the
reflexive pronoun ; this is always the case where a member of a
sentence or a suborinate clause is not the expression or senti-
ment of the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the senti-
ment of the speaker (writer).

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. (Of worgutor) eddds dphoover Thy Aclay, ereiddv YOwol Twas ex?
adtovs edatvovtas (contra SE). C. 4.7, 1. Thy éavtod yrdpuny arepalvero Xwx-

odrns mpos rods duidodvras abt @. Apol. 33. (Swxpdrns) eyvw tod es Civ 7d
TeSvdvar abt @ xpetrroy elvat.

De es he a ee ae Te Eg AO Re pee ae ds
+ ye ee ete

454 SYNTAX. | | [§ 302.

6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun airds either
retains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. itis sometimes em-
phatic, and sometimes not.

(a) Isoer. Panath. 16, 242. dixaidy éor: plrovs pey woreioXar tos duolws a3 -
Tots te (Or ohic: Te avTOTS) Kal Tots HAAOS Xpwuévous, PoBeioda: de Kat
Sedievar rovs mpbs opas pev adtovs (or éavtods) oikedrata diaxemevous,
mpos St rovs %AAovs &AAoTplws (se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. éolous
Thav TE AUTaY Ka TdY BAAwy Thy BovAduevoy méeupaytes. 1, 60. méurovewy
€auT@v Te edseAoyTas kal Tay ’AAwy TeAoTwovvyjciov pmicS@ weloaytes. 8, 8.
Eaut@y devoodyto %AAwW oTdAw TAeiv (soli per se). The Nom. airdés is some-
times added to strengthen this exclusive or emphatic force (comp. in Lat. Cato
SE IPSE interemit), e. g. Pl, Phaed. 94, e. ofre yap bv ‘Ouhpw dsuodoyoiuer, ovte
atrtol juty abrots.—(b) Of orparidta mapetxoy Eavtods (or opas
avtovs) a&vdpeordrous (se). Th. 7,82. rapédocay of mdvres ops avrods (or
éavtovs) (se).

Rem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either used alone, e. g. Dem. c. Nicostr.
4, 1250. trav xpnudtwy go Tov éuady Kixpnu. c. Nausim. 11, 993. d:cadrepor
Sjrov TA HucTEpa Huas cor Exew, 2 Tovrovs. c. Boeot. 2, 1010. duets arav-
Tes TOUS DweTepouvs Taldas ayaware. Oi wodtra Ta HET EPA chCew ereipay-
to; or with the addition of the Gen. of ards according to § 266, 2; or in-
stead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is
used ; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing. (mine, thine, his,
thus 6 €uavtod, ceavrTov, éavtod rarip, and not 6 duds adrod, 6 ods abrov
mathp, Which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the
third Pers. Pl., it is more frequent than the possessive; but the possessives are
commonly used when the pronoun is plural (our, your), except in the third
Person. Hence as follows: —

S.rdv éeuavrod (ceavTod, éavrovd) marépa not tov éudv (cdv) adTov 7.

Thy euavTov (ceavTod, EavTov) unrépa not Thy euhv (onv) abrod u.

Tois éuavTov (ceavTov, EavTov) Adyois not Tois euots (cots) abou A.
P.rdv juérepov adtay warépa very rare roby éu@y adtav 7.

Thy dueTépay avT@v unt épa very rare Thy bu@y abTay py.

\ © / 2 Aa c c ~ nat c
TH TmeTepa avTay auapThuata very rare Ta Huey abtar &.
Toy opéeTEpoy alTay maTépa more frequent tov éavta@v marépa, but never

Toy Pav avTay T.

Here also the Pronoun airés either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or
loses it: (a) ‘O mais bBpi(er roy EavtTov marépa (SUUM IPSIUS patrem). ‘“Yyeis
bBpifere Tovs buerépous avtT@y Tarépas (VESTROS IPSORUM patres). Oi
maides SBplCover Tos EautTa@v marépas (suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. roddAods
8t kad bd yuvaindv tay Eaut Gy tupdyvovs diepdapyevous (edphoes) (a SUIS IP-
SORUM conjugibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. (voulw) dstis ev morAguw dy oracidcer mpds
&pxovta, TodTov mpods Thy Eavtod owrnplay oracid¢ey (contra SUAM IPSIUS
salutem). In order to strengthen the exclusive or emphatic force, the Pronoun
ait ds is frequently added: abrds rdy euavrod, etc.; adrds is also sometimes
placed between the article and the reflexive of the third Pers., e. g. Aeschin,
Ctes. 85, 87. catadéAuvne THY adTds abtrod duvacrelav.—(b) Th. 2, 101.
Srparovikny, Thy Eavtod aderAPhy, SiSwor SevSp (SUAM sororem), Aeschin.
fals. leg. 30, 40. xpds thy Bovahy Toy adeApdy Thy EuauTod Kal Tdy aderApidody
kat tov iarpoy @reupa. Th. 6,21. road dd ris hueTépas adT Gy wérAdrouer
mei (a nostra patria). Lysias. tryotvra obkért Trois apeTepors GdTayY Gmap-

Peg ee OR Se eee ee eee ee eee

«

PRONOUNS. 455

pues: rby voy duas wapétew. Her. 5, 87, (A¢youew) elpwray éxdorny abréew
(ray yovaixady), den ely d EwdT Hs dvhp (ubi suUS vir esset). X. H. 4. 4, 17. of

Aanedaimdvior trav EautTay cupydxwv xareppdvovr.
|

_ Rem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pers. Pro-
nouns refers to the nearest subject, e. g. Pl. Lach. 179, ¢. aitidueda rods maré-

as Hu@y, Sri juas pev elwv rpvpay (instead of robs huetépous wardpas or
Tods huetépous abraym.). Antiph. 1, 114. éyd 8 iuas bwtp rod rarpds pov
Tesve@ros airodua (instead of brép tot éuavrod marpds). Th. 4,8. ém ras
tv 7H Kepxipe vais op Gy trepyay (instead of én tas év 7. K operépas
alra@y v., or Tas EavT@y »v.).

Rem. 6. The pronoun airds with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after
both the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its
erclusive power be retained or lost, ¢. g. quay abtay, iuiy abrois, amas abtobs, 5
duérepos ai’ray warhp, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position
wwe extremely few, e. g. X. Cy. 6. 2, 25. viv 7a emirhdera (judas) de? eis Thy
bdby ovoKevderSar abtots re Huty, kal drdcas retpdroct xpoueda. But in
other writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. cvyywdoko-
wev abTotot Hutv ov rorhoac: dpsas. This position is never found with the
third Pers. Pl, consequently never adrods opas instead of opis adrods.
But when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then adrés,
in its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro-
noun: (a) abtod euod (uov), adrg@ euol (uot), abroy eué (ue), abrods judas, ete.,
e.g. Pl. Phaed. 91, a.ad7rq@ éuol bre udrora Sdte obrws Exew. Symp. 220,
@. cuvdiécwoe kal ta SrAa Ka adrdy éuéd. X.C. 2.9, 2. Hddws y ty (sc. Spé-
Tov kvdpa), &pn, ei wh HoBoluny, bxws wh er aitdv we tpdmorro.— (b)
€uod abrod, éuol ai’t@, ct abrdv, iydv adtar, etc., e. g. Dem. Ol. 3, 36. wédev
| BAAoSey icxupds yéyovey } tap juav abtrGv lammos; X. C. 3. 8, 9. Tod
| Sépous 5 fAwos bmtp Hudy adbtay Kal ray oTeyav wopevduevos cKidy Twapéxet.
Cy. 5.5, 20. o& pev adrdy aoijxa. 6.1, 14. 07rdya Huty adtots ciow. PL
Apol. 41, a. @uorye nal abr@ Savpaorh dy ely 7 SiarpiBh adrds.

7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the
‘reciprocal pronoun, in all the persons.

~ Dem. C. Olympiod. 1169. 749° juty adrots diarckdueda. Pl. Rp. 621, c.

aoctyny meTa ppovicews maytl Tpdmw emrndedoouer, va Ka uty adtots
“lA Ger, wal rots Seots. Lys. 114. ereiddav Suiv eye pnviow, pds buds ad-
3 Tods tTpdfeoSe Kéwerra KaY eva exactov buitv abrots amexShoccde. X. C.

3. 5, 16. pSovotcow EauTots pwadrAoyv, } Tois BAAos avSpaHrais.

4
|
|

_ Rem.7. Both the reciprocal and reflexive pronoun is used when the action
refers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive
idea, and are related like the species and genus; since now the genus includes
the species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases
where it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anything together
hat the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to
‘autdov €xaoros, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to &AAous, it is
clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand,where the antithesis
éavtdyv €xacros is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. uadrdov
xalpovow én toils GAAHAwY Kakois, } ToOIs abTaY idles wyasots (i. e, 2) éml
® rots aitrod Exaoros a&yaSois), rather rejoice in each other’s evils, than in their
|) own good, i. e. than each one in his own. PI. Phaedr. 263, a. dudisByroduey aA-_
Afixots te xal Huiv abrots. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex-
| ive should be regularly used, where other persons (&%AAous), either expressly or
| by implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr, Aegin. 387. mepl

456 SYNTAX. [§ 303,

wAdovos HMaS AVTOUS Hyobmeda,} TOUS GSEAPOUS (we think more of ourselves
than of [others] our brothers). de Pac. of uév (@erTadrol) opiaoiy adtots ToAEeuod-
ov (inter se, non contra exteros hostes). With the Nom. adroi added, e.g. X. H.
1. 5, 9. (St) cxorety drws Tov ‘EAAhvev undéves ioxupol dow, GAAa wdyTeEs dode-
veis, adT0l ev Eavtots aracid(ovtes. So duoroyeiodai, audisBnteicSa, Bi-
evexdvat, éevayttoy elva: and mpatrew optoiv avtots or éavtrots. But
when neither the one nor the other antithesis exists, then the reflexive and the
reciprocal are used without distinction, often in the same sentence, merely for
the sake of variety, e. g. X. C. 2. 6, 20. pSovoivres EauToDs picovow GAAH-
Aous. 7,12. dvtl dpopwudvay EavTas ndéws GAAHAGS éEdpwr.

8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pers. often takes the
place of the reflexive of the first and second Person. The re-
flexive then denotes not a definite person, but only confines the
reflexive force to the subject; hence it has often merely the
meaning of iéios; the particular person, to whom it refers, must
be clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. :

X. C.1.4, 9. ob88 yap rhv Eaut 0d [= ceavtod] ob ye wuxhy Spas (his own soul ;
ceavrov is a false reading). 2.1, 31. Tod de mdvrwy Hdiocrov axovocparos éralvou
éaut is [= ocavris], avqxoos ef (self praise). Andoc. de myst. aibtds, uty airody
amédAvoy (instead of euavrdv). Pl. Prot. 312, a. ob d& odk dy aicxtvao eis Tobs -
“EAAnvas abt dv copiocthy mapéxwv ; Isocr. Paneg. diereAdoapey doraciacro: mpds
opis adtots. X. H.1.7,19. eiphoere chs abrovs huaprnkdras Ta we-
yiora és Seovs.

Rem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs also with opios and ds
(suus). Il. x, 398. pigw BovrAetorre peta ploy (instead of ped’ dyiv).
Od. 1, 28. otro: Eywye Hs yalns Sdvamat yAvKEpdrepoy Ado idéodau.

§ 303. IL The remaining Pronouns.

1. Obros, otTws, ToLOvTOS, TOTODTOS, and db¢e, dd«e Tot-
ésd¢, roa7dsde, are commonly used with this distinction, that
the first four refer to what immediately precedes, the others, to
what immediately follows. ;

Her. 6, 53. radra (the foregoing) wiv Aaedaiudvio: A€yovo1r— 7Tdde (the
following) 5 —éy® ypdow. Th. 1, 53. of wiv 5h (Kopivdion) totadra elroy:
—of St ’ASnvaio: To1dde darexplvayTo.

Remark 1. Still, not seldom ofros, rotodros, TowovTos, oftws
refer to what follows; far more seldom 8de¢, rordsde, rogdsde, Ge refer
to what goes before. X. C. 1. 2,61. Alyas dvouarrds em rotT@ yéyove (by
what follows). Th. 2, 34. 8¢€ wey Sdwrrovor (in reference to what precedes).
But often 6d, de, etc., are so used that they represent an object as present, as
it were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3, 35. éya 5¢ tuiv wey mapavay, molovs
Tivas xXph eva ev TG Torgde, aicxvvoluny ty (= in PRAESENTI rerum statu),
Regularly, however, of7os precedes the relative clause, e. g. of rés éeori,

$ 303.] PRONOUNS. 467

dy eldes &vdpa. — When ofros and éxeivos are used in opposition to each other,
the latter refers to what is more remote, the former, to what is nearer, though
the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Latin hic and ille.

2. The adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry,
especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the
adverbs here, there, according to § 264, 3.

Od. a, 76. GAX’ Byed’, jets oTde wepippatducda mdyres (let us HERE deliber-
ate). 185. ynis € wor HF Eornner em’ d&ypod vdog: wéAdnos (stood there in the field).
Od. ¢, 239. ds viv "Ipos éxetvos em abrelnot Sipnow fora (there). Th. 1,53. judas
tovsde mpaérous AaBdvtes xphoacde ws ToAculois (nos, qui HIC sumus). Pl. Rp.
327, b. Apduny, Sov ein. Otros, pn, dmicdevy mposépxerat (HERE he comes be-
hind thee). Hence in the Attic poets dvhp 8d¢ instead of éyd, e.g. 8. O. T.
1464, and ofros in prose instead of ot, e. g. Pl. Gorg. 489, b. ob rocl avhp
od mavoerat prAvapav ; instead of ob od raion;

Rem. 2. In the Epic language, where two sentences, whose subject is not
doubtful, follow each other, the subject is often repeated in the second by é ye
with a certain emphasis, in order to bring out prominently the identity of the
subject for both sentences, e. g. Il. 8, 664. alja 5& vijas ernie, worAtw F Bye
(idemque) Aaby ayelpas BA petywv emi wévrov. II. 0, 586. Avridoxos 3 ov peive,
Sods wep dey woreuiorts, GAN by kp Erpecs. So also in the Epic language and

articularly in Her., far rarer in the Attic writers, when a series of actions fol-
ow each other, 6 8€ is used with reference to the same subject, where we may
translate 6 3¢ by, on the eaeg s then, ete. Her. 6, 3. rhy wey yevowévny avroior
aitiny od udda eépave, 5 Bt Ereyé ou (on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. of 5&
... @vTadsa tuevov, as Karéxovtes Td uxpoy: of 8 Karetxov (tidemque). This
usage very often occurs in Hom. and Her. in disjunctive clauses: #— dye.
Od. 8, 327. % twas ex TidAou ker dudyropas..., 2 Sye Kab SrdprndSev. Her.
2, 173. Addo by H Tot pavels, } Gye amdmrAnkrTos viblaavas.

3. The use of the pronoun airés is as follows :—

(1) Airés properly means ad tds, again he, and then se/f, wse,
e. g. 6 vids airds or airds 6 vids, the son himself. It can also
refer to the person implied in the predicate, e. g. airés aréBy.
So aird rotro or totr aird, hoc ipsum, this itself (not another).
When used with éxacros, aités always precedes. Her. 7,
19. Jéwy airos Exacros 7a rpoxeipeva ddpa AaPeiv.

(2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of
the personal pronouns (§ 302, 4).

(3) In connection with the article (6 atrds), it means the
same, idem (§ 246, 3). On the position of the article with
avros in connection with a substantive, see § 246, 3.

Rem. 3. Hom. and Her. often use aités in the place of the reflexive pro-

nouns of the three persons. Od. 5, 247. HAAw & abrdy (instead of équrdv)
39

FL ic Caney ot ae Me, ee ee
+ va e ON hoe eR te

458 SYNTAX. [§ 303.

gwth KaTaxpUnT oy hiokev. ¢, 27. col 5& yduos oxeddv or, ha xph Kard wey
avthy (instead of cavrhy). évvvoda. Her. 7. 10, 1. 7d 38 adbrotor eons
dewdv, ene cor Sixady eote ppdcew (quid autem in NOBIS timendum insit).

Rem. 4. From the exclusive or emphatic force of this pronoun, the following
specific significations arise: (a) se/f in contrast with another, hence alone, solus
(tpse, non alius) ; udvos, on the contrary, in contrast with several. X. An.4. 7,11.
&AAor ovddéva ( mapaxareoas ) xwpet ad ds (goes alone); (b) even and self, like ipse, e.g.
Aitds 6 Swxparns éddxpuoev (even Socrates, Socrates himself’); so nal abrés,
08 avr ds, vel ipse, ne ipse quidem ; (c) selfin contrast with foreign aid, of himself,
etc., sponte, like ipse ; (d) in Homer especially, a7 és often forms a contrast with
another object, expressed or understood, this object being different from that de-
noted by avrés, as the soul in distinction from the body, or the body in distinction
from the soul, e. g. Il. a, 4. adrods 8& EAGpia TedXE Kbvecow (made them [their
bodies, not their souls| a prey), or a man in distinction from his affairs, or asso-
ciates, etc. Hence airés is sometimes used of a lord, master, e.g. abrds %pn;
so also au7d, id ipsum, often in connection with a following adjective-clause ;

(e) it is used with a proper name and an ordinal from tpitos upwards, to de-

note the number of official associates with the person named, who is generally
the principal one, e.g. Th. 1, 46. KopwSier orparnyds hv Hevoxdrcldns éumros
avrtdés (Xenoclides was the commander of the Corinthians with four associates).

4, The indefinite pronoun ris when joined with adjectives,
indefinite numerals, and adverbs, is used like the Latin guidam,
to bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words, some-
times making them more, sometimes less emphatic, according
to the meaning of the word or the connection of the discourse;
but with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corresponds to the
Latin fere (almost, about, somewhat).

Méyas tis avhp (some great man), uixpds Tis, Was TIS, ExagTds Tis, oddels TiS, OALyoL
tives, wotds Tis, Téc0S TIS, BpaxY TI, eyydbs TL, TXEdbY TL, dv TL, TavTdmacl TL, TOAD
Tt, ovdév TL, TdAGL TI, SiapepdvTws TL. Aetvhy Tiva Aéyes Sivamy Tis aperfs
elvat (incredibilem QUANDAM vim, a kind of incredible power). X. C. 1. 1,1.4
ypaph Kar’ avtod (Swxpdrovs) rordde tis hv (haec fere, was nearly, was for
substance this). 3.6, 5. Aé€tov, méaat Tivés ciot (sc. ai rpdsoda: TH mwdAer), tell
me about how much the revenues are. So of tw Tt, or obtw, Gd€ ws (sic, fere,
nearly thus); tpets twes (about three, some three or so). ;

Rem. 5. The regular position of the pronoun rs, as an enclitic, is after the
word to which it belongs, e. g. dvhp tis, kaAds Tis dvhp. But sometimes, in con-
nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. 07 rolvyy Tis edhdns Adyos. On the rela-
tive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences.

Rem. 6. The indefinite pronoun one, any one, is usually expressed in Greek :
(a) by rls, e.g. Odx ay Tis eBpor &vdpa copdrepov (one would not find, etc.) ;
(b) by the second Pers. Sing. Opt. with &, and the Ind. of a historical tense
with ay, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. palins
tiv (dicas, one may, can say); vowlCors &v (credas, one might suppose), etdes
uv (videres, one might have seen); hyhow &v ( putares, etc.). The English,
however, frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can say.

§§ 304, 305.] PRONOUNS. 459

§ 304. Prospective and Retrospective Use of the
Pronoun.

1, The personal pronoun 06, of, 2, uly, and the demonstrative 4, 4, 74, are fre-
quently used in Homer to direct the attention to a following substantive, and
as it were to prepare for it. Il. v, 321. adrika r@ wey Serra kat’ bpSaduav
xéev axdrdv, TndrAeldy “AxtAqi. Il. , 249. a wiv waboce mévow, Stor
"AX ILAATG

2. In the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare for a
following substantive, or a following Inf. or entire sentence. Pl. Apol. 37, a.
TOUTOV Typo, ey mpuTavely gaitHaews (Lam deemed worthy of this, viz., a
maintenance in the Prytaneum). X. Cy. 8.7, 25. rl rodrov paxapimtepoy, tod
YD utxSivat; (what can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth ?); Pl.
Gorg. 515, ©. GAAa Tdde wo eiwt emt robTw, ef AdyovTar ’ASnvator Bid
TlepixAéa BeArtiovs yeyovéva:. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. oldev...rotro
KaA@s exeivos, Sti TadtTa pév eotiv &wmavTa Ta xwpla GSAa Tod TO-
Aémov xelueva év péow. Comp. § 266, Rem. 3.

3. On the contrary, a demonstrative pronoun, particularly airds, is fre-
quently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun,
partly for the sake of perspicuity, e. g. when between the Case and the verb
which governs it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and partly for
the sake of rhetorical emphasis. Such a pronoun again resumes the preceding
substantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, or fixes the atten-
tion particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. 6 3€ wor Mdyos, roy (= dv) KauBions
exitpowoy trav oixlwy arédete, ofr os TadTa éverelAaro (Magos, whom Cambyses
appointed steward of his domestic affairs, HE gave me these commands). Th. 6, 69.
ai oixlat Tod mpoarrelov émdAtes AauBdvovoa, abtar trijpxov %puua. So
also with the personal pronouns, in which case the pronoun which resumes a
preceding one, is regularly an enclitic form. Eur. Phoen. 507. éu 0} wév, ef kad wh
ka¥ ‘EAAfver xSdva TeSpduped’ (educati sumus), dAN ody tuverd wot Soneis Aéyeuw,

CHAPTER V.

The Infinitive and the Participle as an Object
and Attribute.

§ 305. -A. The Infinitive. :
The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract -
substantive idea, but differs from the substantive in the fol-

lowing respects:
(1) The Inf. without the article can be used only as a Nom.

= a Re eee 5 A, 44. 7h
_ wv Ty x oe * Se ae
es Pi Fie | g-oNa) ah Ieee Ns:
7 ei

460 3 _ SYNTAX. [§ 306.

(either as a subject, or in connection with éori(v) as a predicate),
and as an object in the Accusative ;

Subject :“Emera: 7 dperi od Cea dat cis Toy TAclw Xpdvov madAor, 7) TH Kaxla
(to be preserved for a longer time results rather from bravery than cowardice), X. R.

L. 9, 1. Predicate: Td Stkny d:Sdvar wétepov mdoxety Th dot, worety;
Pl. Gorg. 464, d. Object: BovAoua ypdgerv. See § 306.

(2) Yet it so far retains the nature of the verb, as

(a) It denotes, by different forms, the different circumstances
of the action: duration, completion, achat and has active,
middle, and passive forms.

Tpdpew, scribere, yeypaévas, scripsisse, ypdiyat, scripsisse or scribere (§ 257),
ypdvew, scripturum esse; Bovreterda, to deliberate or be advised, BeBovrAcicSa,

to have deliberated or have been advised, BovrAeboacSa, to have deliberated or to de-
liberate, BovAevSivat, to have been advised or to be advised, ete.

(b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the
same Case as its verb, e. g. Tpadew €ricroAyy, éervdupety THs
GpeTHs, paxerdar tots wodepios;

(c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as
in the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. Kadds
droJaveiv (on the contrary, Kadds Jdvaros).

The Inf. will first be considered without the article, and then
with it.

§ 306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, without the
Article.

1. The Inf. is used, as the complementary! object in the
Acc., to express something aimed at or effected :—

(a) With verbs of walling and the contrary (verba voluntatis),
e. g. BovrAopat, Fedo, pedrAw, erupd, a&B, Sixowd, Cyrd, zpodvuod-
pat, mpodupos clus, errxeipO, wept, Bovrctoua, TapacKevdLopat,
pnxavGpot, TAWA, tropévw, cloda, etc. — d€ouat (to entreat), ixerevw,
Tapawa, eriréeA\Aw, trapokivw, reiIw, cvpPovrdctw, vovteTd, KeAcvw,
mpostdatTw, etc.—é, ovyxwpd, apedO, etc. — dédouxa, PoPotpat,

' The verbs which take an Infinitive after them, are usually such as do not
express a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other con-
struction, to complete the idea. The Inf,, therefore, is the complement of the
Hn on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement.

§ 309.

§ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE, 461

pevyw, dvaBddAopat, dxvd, etc. — drayopetw, karéyw, kwArtw, ete. ;—
Hovxiay, mpdypara, doxoXlav, oxAov wapéxw tui, eLovoiav diddvar, and
the like.

BotvAouat ypdgerv. "Emidued mropetvecdat. TorAuad broudvery
tov kivduvoy. Tlapatv@ co ypdpetv. "AvaBddAAopal co dmwoxplyvecstat
Pl. Gorg. 457, e. poBotmuar SteAeyxetv oe, Phaed. 98, d.auere ras ds
GAnd@s airlas A€yerv. Dem. Ol. 3. 16, 25. ris bv abtoy Eri KwArAda es dedpo
BaSliCerv; X. Ag. 1, 7. ’Aynataaos iréotrn &oxoAlav airgG (1G Bacar?)
mapéte:y otparevew em) rovs “EAAnvas. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. fouxlav
movovorv ekelyw modtretv, & rt BobrAe TAL

Remark 1. On the difference between the Inf. and the Part. with aioxd-
vetda, aideioSai, mepiopay, kpxeodat, mavew, waytoioy ylyverSat, ear art» -
Sar, weipaada, see § 311. Verbs of preventing and hindering, and the like, have
the following constructions: (a) (not very frequent) Efpyw oe amiévar, Ob
kwriw oe Gwiévat. (b) (usually) Efpyw ce ui) &miévas according to § 318,
7; and after a preceding negation: "Agrudyns, Sr: déo:to adtod 6 Kijpos, obdév
edivaro &vréxetv wh od xapl(ecdsa, X. Cy. 1. 4, 2. according to § 318, 9.
(c) Tod Spawerevery (of d€amroTa Tovs oikeTas) Secuots Amel pyougi, X.C.
2.1,16. (d) Mas donds S00 &vdpas Ef et TOD wh watraddvas, X. An. 3. 5, 1.
(e) (seldom) MéAAouev tovrous efpyetv, ste uh SbvacSat BAdwrew has,
ib. 3.3, 16. (f) Toy wAciorov Suidov Tov WiAady ef pyov Td uh Ta eyyds Tis
médAcws Kakoupyeiv, Th. 3,1. according to § 308, Rem.1. (g) very fre-
quently after a preceding negation: Odx« arelyovro ovd amd trav pidwy Td
Bh obx) tAcoventely Tap’ a’Tav weitpaaSat, X. Cy. 1. 6, 32. according to
§ 318, 9.

Rem. 2. The verb wef Seuv, to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub-
stantive-sentence, expressed by the conjunction és and a finite verb; it takes
the Inf. (Acc. with the Inf.) more seldom. X. C. 1.1, 1. roAAdkis éSaduaca,
tlot wort Adyos "ASnvalovs Exeracav of ypabduevot Swxpdtyny, as aks etn
Savdrov TH wdc.

Rem. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which
is to be done, effected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction ésTe
with the Inf. governed by verbs of this class. Her. 7, 6. avémwetoe Héptea,
&ste woréety tavra (to do this). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur-
pose or object more emphatic, §rws, &s with the Subj., Opt. or Fut. Tad is
used. So in Attic prose, the verbs rpoSupeiodat, dSiavociodat, unxavacSat, mapa-
KeAeveoSat, SiaxeAeverSai, wapaoKevaferdai, are connected with 8rws and the
Fut. Ind.

(b) With verbs of thinking, supposing, saying, and the con-
trary (verba cogitandi, putandi, et dicendi), e. g. Aoyiler Ia,
trycto-Sou, vopilew, edie, edxerTat, Soxeiv, xwdvvetew, etc. —A€yew,
dava, etc. — dpveio Ia (to deny), axvrreiv, etc.

Noul(w auapreiy (I think [to have erred] that I have erred). "EAnl{w
edruxhoery (I hope to be happy). Abrn h ddta nada@s Sones ExeEtv. Th. 3,
74. 4 mwércus Cxivddvevoe maga SiapSaphvar Aéyw cidévar tadra (1
say [to know] that I know this).

Rem. 4. On the difference between the Jnf. and Part. after the verbs
39*

462 SYNTAX. ‘[§ 306.

dxove, eidéva, erloracd®a, pavSdvey, yryvdoKey, pyvhokerSat, revSdvecSat,
> 7 2 cal

aiosdveodat; devivat, dropaivew, Sndovv, ayyéAAav, dalverSa, eouévau, see
§ 311.

Rem. 5. It will be seen ({ 329), that, after the verbs above mentioned, the
object may be expressed also by a complete substantive-sentence with és or 8tt.
(c) After expressions denoting ability, cause, power, capacity,
or fitness (verba facultatis), e. g. divapyo1, dvvards, advvaros, olds 7
cit, Exw, (possum) — eorw, tapeotw, eeotw, veorw (licet) — owe,
Siarpdrroua Karepydopa, Kkatackevatw, etc. —dewds (powerful,
capable, fit), ixavos, érirndeios, KaKds, HTTwv, airids eit, etc. ; —after
verbs of choosing, appointing, naming, educating, teaching.
Atbvauat worety tavta, Her. 2, 20. of érnola tveuot clot att 101 TA -
_Sbery toy wotaudy. 7. 129. avwvdmous tobs HAdous efvar worger. 5, 97.
orparnyy &wodé~tavtes aitav elvat MeddvSuv. Ofds 7 cium roretv
raira. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. tls dy ood ye ikavdrepos meioa; 3, 18. deivd-
tepos d:8doKerv. Tor® oe yeAav. Atddokw ce ypapetr.

Rem. 6. On moiety with the Part., see § 310, 4 (b).

Rem. 7. The relation of the result, the thing to be effected, which is expressed
by the Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes stated more definitely by adding the
conjunction &sre. Pl. Prot. 348, c. ad0varov tui, dSste TMpwraydpov
Tovde copwTepdy Twa EX€oRat. So oftenin Plat. ikavds ste. X. Ag. 1,
37. érolnoey (sc. Agesilaus), &s7 dvev pvyis nal Savdrwy tas wWéAEis S1a-
TEeAégat

(d) The Inf. is also used after the verb wefuxevau, after the
impersonal verbs and phrases zposyxe., mpéret, cv Paiva, det, xpn,
dvaykatov, Sixaov, apéAddv éeorw and the like; after verbs of
giving, taking, going, sending,and many others; after adjectives
of various significations, e. g. agios, dikosos (worthy, worth), 7d%vs,
pddios, xaXerds and many others; after abstract substantives, es-
pecially in connection with <iva. and yiyverda, as dvdyxn, éAzis,
cxoAy, Spa éeoriv, to express a purpose or determination, a result
or effect.

Th. 4,61. réguxce 7d dvSpdmewov Sie waytds &pxXetv pev TOU elkovtos, pu-
Adaoegdat be 7d émidy (men are so constituted as always to rule those who yield,
but to guard against those who assail). “Hxopev wavaedveiv (ad discendum).
Th. 2, 27. rots Aiywhras of Aakedaiudvion @30cav Ovpeay oiketv Kal rhy yiv
véwecdat. Pl. Apol. 33, b. duolws cal wAovole nal mévnts TapéexXw euavTdy
épwrav. X. An. 5. 2, 1. 7d Hwov rod orparebuatos kat éAtwe Hevopav
pvaAdtrety 7d otpardmedov. “Atiéds @ott DavudCeosat. Her. 4, 53.
Bopvaséyvns miverXat Hd1a7ds ere (dulcissimus ad bibendum), 6, 112. Téws
_ hy roto." EdAAnot kal Td odvoua T) Mfdwr PdBos &kodoaar (a terror to hear).

Rem. 8. Homer makes the Inf. depend on adjectives also, to express the —
same relation as is denoted by the Acc. of more definite limitation (§ 279, 7). Tl. 1,

-§ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 463

437. Selecy & dvénoirw Smotoe (frma) (equal to the winds in speed). In a
similar manner, the Inf. eva in the phrase éx&y elya:, must probably be
explained (willing so far as it depends on my being or nature, as far as depends on
me, i. e. actually willing). Her. 7,104. xév re elvar ob8 ty povvomaxéouue
(could I have my own choice, or so far as concerns me, I would not fight even in
single combat). Pl. Phaedr, 252, a. iS3«v 5h Exodoa elvar odk a&rorchrera F
Yuxh. This phrase is used but seldom in affirmative sentences.

Rem. 9. As the poets say Sadua idécSa: (a wonder to see), so also in prose,
the complementary Infinitive édpav, eisopav and idety, are sometimes
joined with verbs of appearing and showing one’s self. X. Cy. 5. 4, 11. 0% érava-
Searduevos Ha, droids tis Palyn ldetv 6 Toiabrny Wx Exwr (I came to see
what sort of a looking person you are, you, who have such a soul).

Rem. 10. It isa peculiarity of the Greek, that, instead of the Pass. Inf., it
commonly uses the /nf: Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under (c)
and (d), e. g. duvards, &kios, etc., and with substantives e. g. Sadua, PdBos, and
with verbs of giving, etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates both actively
and passively, e. g. Tadra pddid dort padety (these things are easy to learn or be
learned). Kadrds eorw idety ( pulcher est visu, he is beautiful to see-or to be seen).
Th. 1, 38. &i0s Savudoast. Pl. Phaed. Adyos duvards ratavofjaat (ca
of being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all
examples of this kind, e. g. he is beautiful ror us to see. A Dat, is often ex-
pressed with such an Inf, e. g. Pl. Rp. 599, a. padia woretv phy eiddre Thy
Gdnxeav. So Swkpdrns tia. wapetxey éavtdy epwray (he yielded himself to
all to question, i. e. he permitted all to question him).

Rem. 11. From the use of the Inf. after verbs of willing, wishing, entreating,
and imploring and the like, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. are
to be explained :

a. The Inf. is very frequently used in the Epic writers instead of the second
person Imperative, sometimes also instead of the third person; instead of the
second person, not seldom also in other poets, and even likewise in Herodotus
and in the Attic prose-writers. The Inf. must then be considered as the object
depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. Sede.
Hence when predicative expletives are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as
they refer to the subject a contained in the omitted Imp., are put in the Nom.
The Imp. is also often interchanged with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. voora-
cas dh Ereita pirny és watpida yaiay ojud Té of Xedat, Kal em) KTépen KTE-

etiat...nad dvép untépa S0dvar(and then having returned to your dear father-
land. heap up a mound,ete.). Il. 8, 75. duets F UAAoSev UAAOS Ep nT ety erecrow.
Il. ¢ 89-92. 9 8 .. ofFaoa KAnid: Sipas iepoto Séuoiw, wéwAov.. Pet vat “Ady-
valns ém yobvacw hinduoo. Her. 6, 86. cb 54 wor kal TX xphuata Sékau, nad Tdde
7a oipBora cate AaBdv: bs ¥ by Exwv tadta aratén, TobTw arodovvar (a
redde). Th. 5, 9. ob 88, KAcaplda, aipyidiws tas miaas dvoltas érmexseiv
kal éwelyersac as tdxiora Evpplia.

b. When the Inf. refers to the third Pers., its subject as well as the accom-
panying expletives of the predicate, are commonly in the Acc. This Acc.
with the Inf. is to be considered as the object of a verb of willing, which is to
be supplied, e. g. efxouat, 5és, role, or of a verb denoting what ought to be, must
be, &. @. xph, de?; so with wishes, entreaties, precepts and compacts. Il. n, 179, sq.
&de 5€ tis efweckerv, Sav eis ovpavdby edpiv: Zed wdrep, } AtavTa Aaxeiy, Fj
Tuddos vidv, } abtdy BactaAja modvxptacoo Muxtyns! (grant or cause that
either Ajax may obtain it by lot, etc.). Aesch. Suppl. Seol roAtrat, wh we Sovdclas
tuxety, X. Ven. 6, 11. rdy B euynyérny Exovra efiévar ehappay
ecdfira émt to Kuvnyéowy, Thy Bt dpeuwpdy eTEegTI al.

ce. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers.,
in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. & Baoired, xétrepoy A€yerv mpds

464 P SYNTAX. [§ 307.

ot Td voewy tTvyxdvw, } ciyay ev rg wapedytt xpdvw; (shall I speak or be si-
lent ?). Od. , 431. & Setro: wéo? Yuev; Th Kandy iuelpere todtwy; (whither to
go, i. e. whither are you to yo ?).

d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with a? ydp, efSe, as the ex-
pression of a wish. Od. w, 375, sq. at ydp, Zed te mdrep.., rots édy Tot
xaos ev jperéepoicr Sduoior, TedXE Exwv buowww, epertdmevar kal auvverv
tvipas wynoripas. (instead of épeoralny x. dudvoiut).

§ 307. Nom., Gen., Dat.,and Acc. with the Infinitive.

1. Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this
object, also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the
verb requires, e. g. Agopat cov Adv, SvpBovredto cor
cwdpovev. “Exotptvw ce pdxerdau.

Remark 1. So also reAeverv, which signifies to impel, to urge, hence to
command ( jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Acc. and the
Inf., e. g. eeAedw oe ypdpeww ( jubeo te scribere).

2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub-
stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern-
ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by
attraction in the same case as the personal object, or in the
Accusative without attraction.

(a) Gen. with Inf. Aéopat cov tpoSdpmov efvar (I beg you to be zealous).
Adgoua cov tpdSumov eivar. X. H. 1. 5, 2. Kbpov
edéovTo &s MpoXumoTatov mpds Thy mbrAcCuov yeveodau
(begged C. to be as zealous as possible in the war). Her. 6,
100. "ASnvatwy edehSnoay shila: Bondsods yevérdsu
(requested the Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol-
lowed by the Inf. accompanied by a more definite ex-
pletive, this expletive is always put in the Acc., e. g.
Lys. 118. Séoum iuadv Karabnoicacsa: Ocouviorov, év-
Svpovpéevovs, Soros wou 6 aydv éorw (I pray you to
condemn Th., considering, etc.). Th. 1,120.avipa@v aya-
Sav éotw, &5ixovpévous e ciphyns modreueiv (it is the
characteristic of brave men, when injured, to exchange peace
Jor war).

(b) Dat. with Inf. ZuuBovrebo coum posxtue elvar (I advise you to be zeal- -

ous). vuBovrebw cor tpddvumoy eiva. X. An. 2. 1, 2.
fdoke Tois TOV ‘EAAhvav TTPAaTNYOTS TUTKEVATAM-
€vots & eixovy nal €fowAtcapévors mpoidvar. X.
Hipparch. 7, 1. tavt) mposhve: &pxovTt ppovin®
elvat (it becomes every ruler to be prudent), X. An. 1. 2, 1

Revig ijeew maphyysise AaBdvrTa tovs tydpas (com-

PSS ET eae eC R aE ee eee eee ee
5 - = 7

=~

§307.] NoM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 465

manded Xenias to come, having taken men). 7.\, 21. viv
oot tkeotw dvd ph yevéodat (you can show yourself a man). —
X. Cy. 2. 1, 15. eorw bpiv ei Bovdcode, AaBdvras
brrAa els xlvduvoy éuBalvew.

(c) Ace. with Inf. "Erotpivw ce mpddupor elvat. Keretwoe rpddu-
poy elvat.

Rem. 2. The Acc. in the examples under (a) and (b), may be explained by
considering the object of the governing verb, e. g. Séouat bua@y, as being at the
same time the subject of the Inf, i. e. this object stands in a two-fold relation,
being both the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see
Rem. 3), ¢.g. Adouce Sudv [5 was] Bondods yevéoda (I beg you that you will aid).

Rem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Gen. or
Dat., sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this object in the Acc.,
the olject of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in
one. This construction is used when the whole action of a person and not the
person himself, is made specially prominent. Lys. Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. dé0-
fat obv bmas cuvyyvdunv txew (I beg therefore that you would pardon). 'Th. 4,
97. tpoayopetw avtovs ex Tod iepod AmidvTas aropepecda TA ohéeTEpa
avray (instead of abtots &motow amoo.), I give orders that they, going out of the tem-
ple, should carry their effects with them. So waparyyéAdw, amaryyéAAw, TpostdtT@,
diaxeActoual oe ameéva. X. C. 4.7, 1. Swxpdrns abrdpeers ev tais mposnrov-
ous mpdteoww avTovs (rods dutdodyTas aite) eivar €mepedetro. So also
the verbs eimety, Aévyerv, OpdCerv, pwverty in the sense of jubere, are con-
structed with the Acc. and the Inf., in the Attic poets. S. Ph. 101. Aéyw o° éya
5éA@ Sironrhtrnv AaBetv. Also rposhnet, rpémet, ZiegTt, cuuBalvet,
Edugdopdv éore with Dat. or Acc. with Inf. 57, xph (§ 279, Rem. 4). The
Ace. is necessary, when the statement in the sentence does not refer to a
definite person, but is altogether general in its nature. Pl. Ion. 539, e. od« dv
mpémot ye €wmtAhopova elva papwddy &vipa (it would not be fitting that
a rhapsodist should be forgetful).

3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Acc. with the
Inf. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also.
When a subject with its predicate, as ‘O dyaJos dvip eddamovel,
is made the object of our thought or will, the subject is put in
the Acc. (rov dyativ dvépa) and the predicate in the Inf (ctda:-
povely, e. g. Nopilw tov dyadov advipa evdacpovetv (J belheve
that the good man is happy). If the predicate is an adjective,
participle, or substantive with elva: yiyveoIat, etc. (§ 240, 2), as
‘O dyads dvip cidaipwv éoriv, then these words also are put in
the Acc., e. g. Nopi~a rov dyatov dvipa etdaipova civar.

4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same
time the subject of the Inf. also, the subject of the Inf. is not
expressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Acc. of a personal
pronoun, but is wholly omitted; and-when adjectives or sub-
stantives stand with the Inf. as expletives of the predicate,
they are put, by attraction, in the Nom.

466 SYNTAX. [§ 307.

Ovouct &uapreiv (I believe I have erred, or that I have erred, credo me errasse).
Over Guapreiy (you think that you have erred). Otera cuapreiv. Oidueda auapreiv.
Ofoua evdaluwy iva (I think Iam happy, or that Iam happy, credo me beatum
esse). Ole eddaluwy clvar. Olera eddaluwy eva. Oidueda cddaluoves
elvat. ‘“O otpatnyds épn mp dSvupmos civar émPonveiv. .

Rem. 4. If, however, where the subject of the governing verb and of the Inf.
is the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is particularly
the case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in Latin, e. g. Her.
2, 2. of Aiybrriot évduiCov EwiTOdS Mpdrous yevéoda TdyTwY dvApdTwr (se, NON
alios homines). 1, 34. Kpotcos évdm€e Ewirdy elva mévrwy ddPimtaroy. But
instead of éavrdy, where there is a contrast between persons, adtés (= se
ipsum) is likewise used, by attraction. Her. 7, 136. Bépins ob« &pn dpotos Ereodat
Aaxedatmoviowsrs xelvous piv yap ovyxéa Ta mdvTwy avapdrov vouma, a7 OK-
telvavTas Khpixas, avTds (ipsum instead of se ipsum) b& Tadra od moijoety.
Th. 4, 28. KAdwy obk 2pn abtds, GAN exetvoy (Nixiav) orparnyeiv. So also by
means of attraction the personal pronouns éyé, ob, ters, ducts, opeis, are
joined with the Inf. *Erouviw co... 4 phy ym BotrAYcoRar dy meta God (atro-
Saveiv), I swear to you that I would rather, etc., X. Cy. 6.4, 6. Ei ofecSe Xadnid-
éas Thy “EAAdSa odoew, wets & arodpdccoda: Ta wpdypata, ovK dpSIas olerde.
Dem. Ph. 3, § 74 (if you think that the Chalcidians will save Greece, and that
you will escape the trouble of it, etc.). (Of év Sduw tpacay) réAw oohlow brdpxyew
Sduov ode aodeva..Kkal"Svvarerepoa eclva opets..mopiCecsa Ta emrhdea
tay év Th wéAa, Th. 8, 76.— Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used without
any special emphasis. Pl. Rp. 400, b. ofual we axnkoévar. — When the governing
verb has an object, and this object is at the same time the subject of the Inf. also,
then the Inf. merely (without the Acc.) is used, but the predicative expletives
are put in the same case as this object. Ov8 dy rodTois éwmlorevor ép-
udvots @ceoSat, X. Cy. 3.3, 55 (1 would not even trust these that they will be
steadfust), Ovdevi av3pdrav ipelunv bv ore BéATiov oS Hdiov euod Be-
Biwk évat, X. C. 4. 8, 6 (to no one would I grant that he had lived better, etc.).
When the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf, this also is
used only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. Zwxpdrns, pn 6
Karhyopos, Tovs matépas mpomnAaxifew edidarke, mel Swy wey TOVS cuvdvTas
avT@ copwrépous moLrety Tay TaTépwy, X. C. 1.2, 49 ( persuadens discipulis suis, se
EOS saprentiores reddere patribus).

5. When the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti-

ciple, the predicative expletives which are connected with the
Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle.

Pl. Apol. 21, b. jASov eri twa trav SoxobyvTwv copay Elva (veniebam ad
aliquem eorum, qui SE SAPIENTES ESSE opinabantur). Her. 1,176. tév viv Avilov
gapévwv Havdtlwy elvat of woddol eiot ewhavdes (corum Lyciorum, qui sx
XANTHIOS ESSE dicebant). X. Cy. 6.1, 34. (Kipos aveyéAacev) ém) 7a kpetro-
vt TOU Epwros PadagKkoyTs elva (at the one affirming that he was above the influ-
ence of love.

6. The Acc. with the Inf. like the Inf. alone, is used after the
following classes of verbs and expressions: (a) of willing and
the contrary [§ 306, 1, (a)]; (b) of thinking, believing, saying
[§ 306, 1, (b)]; (©) of causing, choosing, appointing, naming

ae ee —— Cf)

———————e— OT

§{307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 467

f§ 306, 1, (c)]; (d) after impersonal verbs and expressions sig-
nifying must, ought, should, it happens, e. g. S€i, rposnxe, mpérey
eLeorw, erexés, Kadov, kaxdv (etc.) éorw, cvpBaiver.

*"Aotudyns BovAdmevos Toy wWatda ws Hira Setwvetv wpostyayey aitg
wavrodama Bpduara, X. Cy. 1.3,4. Noul(w buds euol elva: cal warplda nad
glrous kal ovpudxous, X. An. 1.3,6. "EAm((w éxelvous érASetv mpds ot
padAov, 7) wpds eué, X. Cy. 2.4,15. Tdv wioddv bricxyveitro avrois dal-
yor iucpav ExmrXewv wmapécerSai, X. An. 7, 5,9. Tdv wey eardy wa-
yaSdv &vSpa evdalnova elval onut Toy Kad rovnpdy ESAL0y, PL
Gorg. 407,e. Kpetrroy (sc. éorl) civ moddois oikotyta dopadas apkoivta
éxerv, } udvoy Siatrépmevoy 1a tay ToATeY emKwdivws mdvTAa KEKTIC-

vai, X. C. 2. 3. 2.

Rem. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the
Acc. with the Inf. is not to be regarded as the grammatical object, but as the
grammatical subject of the sentence ; but /ogically, i.e. in respect to the sense,
the Acc. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im-
personal expressions as transitive verbs, e.g. Aowet wot (= vouifw) Kipov
coperarov yevéodat. ‘Thus it can also be explained why the Grecks and Lat-
ins in quoting a phrase, e. g. evdaluova elva, felicem esse, BaciArێa elvar, regem
esse, use this construction.

Rem. 6. The Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into
the personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal
expression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this
construction, the subject is rendered prominent; while in the construction of
this Acc. with the Inf. the whole idea of the sentence is made the principal
thing. This is the case: (a) with Aédyerai, dyyéAAeTal, Suoroyetrat
and the like; (b) with Soxe?, it seems; (c) with cum Balves, accidit ; where
this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it, while with the
Acc. and the Inf., it follows the verb; (d) in the phrases dikatov, &Etov,
émldotov, Suvarséyv, aunxavoyv, xaremdy éoriy, etc.; (e) in the phrase
tocovTov dé with the Inf. followed by és7¢€ with the Inf. or Ind. (tantum
abest, ut — ut) so far is it from, and moAAod Séw with the Inf.

Aéyerat Thy Bacirtéa dropuyey and A évyetat 6 Bactrevs aropuyeiv.
X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 "Agcotpios eis Thy xdpay euBddrdAXrAcqw ayyéAAeTat. Her.
3, 124. €5dnel of Tov wat épa Aotoda piv bd Tod Aids, xpicodat 5¢ bwd Tod
“HAlfov. X.An.3.1,21.AcAdoSae wot Sone? Kal 4 éxelvwy HB pis kal} HueTepa
browvla. Pl. Phaed. 74, a. ap’ obv ob kata waévta Tadta cumBalver Thy avd-
Bynocy elvat wev ap duolwy cra. 67, ¢. Kddapors elva ov rovTo Evufalver
—Alxaiés eiust TovTo mpdrrew instead of Sixady earl we TovTO mpdtTew. Al-
Kaids eiue elvat éActdepos. Her. 6, 12. €rldokor twitd rovro weloecSal <ict.
X. Cy. 5.4,19. &Etol ye Comer rod yeyernuévov mpdyuatos TovTou arodaical Tt
Gyasdv. Isocr. Paneg. 76, 168. rocotrTov Séovcry eAcciv, Sste kal paddrov
xalpovoww ém rots GAAHAwY Kaxots (so far are they from pitying, that they rather
rejoice even, etc.).

Rem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs doxeiv, éoucévar, AdyeoSas
and the like, extends also to clauses with és, expressing comparison, as is the
ease in Latin with ut videor, ut videris, ete., instead of ut videtur. Pl. Rp. 426, b.
ovx eraivérns ci, Epny yd, ds Zorkas, Tav TowolTwy avdpav (you do not praise, as
it seems [instead of as you seem] such men). X. An. 1.10, 18. joav 3 abras, os
érAéyovto, terpaxdcrat &uatat (these chariots were four hundred, as it was said).
6. 3, 25. of worgusot 5¢, Ss ¥ Hiv eSdxovv, TovTO deloayTes awHAROv.

Te, A SS eae eet gaa eee: a te ean Dee
‘ 7 — »F a 3

468 SYNTAX. [§ 308.

Rem. 8. On the Acc. with the Inf. in exclamations, see § 308, Rem. 2. On
é7re and ws after verba sentiendi and dicendi, see § 329,

§ 308. Il. Infinitive with the Article.

1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a
substantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article,
it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex-
pressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of —
the substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary,
it here also,as in the Inf. without the article [§ 305, (2)], re-
tains the nature of a verb.

(a) TO ypdpew, Td ypdbar, Td yeypapéval, Td ypdwew. (b) Td éricro-
Ahv ypdpev, T TIS apeTHs emuuciv, 7) Tots wmoremlors pdxeodau.
(c) Td KaA@s ypdpew, 7) KaAGS arodavely (honorable death). Yet pronouns
in the Neut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf, e. g. Plat.
avrd 7d a&mosvhoxew. By prefixing the article, whole sentences can be
represented as one extended substantive-idea.

2. When the Inf., whether as a subject or object, has a sub-
ject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and
expletives, as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put
in the Acc., because the Inf., even as a subject, is considered
dependent (§ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the
Inf. is not different from the principal subject of the sentence,
it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by
attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the
sentence, i. e. in the Nom.

(a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5.4, 19. 7d auaprdvecy &vOpdrous
byras ovdéy, oluat, Savuaordy (that men constituted as they are should err, is not
stranye); here 7d Guaprdvew which is the subject of éorf, has avSpérovs for its
own subject, and dvyras as its predicative expletive. 7.5, 82.00 7d wh Aa-
Bety Td GyaSa obtw ye xarerdv, dstep TH AaRbyTa oTEpNS vat Av-
anpdv.

(b) Genitive: (a) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive
of a substantive. X. An. 1. 3, 2. KAdapxos wixpdy eéépuye TOD mh KaTaTeET-
pwxivar (just escaped being stoned to death). Cy. 1.4, 4. ds 58 mpojyey 6
xpdvos avrdy (tov Kipoy) oby TG peyéder cis Spay TOD mpdsnBov yevécSas
(as time advanced him to the period of |becoming a man] manhood); here the Inf
yevéosat, Which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative expletive
mpdésnBov in the Acc. 1. 5,13. 7t oby €orw } Tod GAEEaTH at Sixcudtepor, q

§ 308.] INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 469

Tod Tots plrAots aphyerv Kdddwv; C. 1. 2, 55. Swxpdrns wapexarer emimer-
cioda: Tov &s ppovimudrartov elvat cal @perAtwdrarov. Very fre-
quently rod, Tod wh is used to denote a purpose, object: in order that, in order
that not [§ 274, 3, (a)], since by the language, as is frequently the case, that
which calls forth the action, is substituted for that which is to be done, or for
the result. Th. 1, 4. Mivws 1d Anorixdy Kadjpe ex Tis Sadrdoons Tod Tas
mposédous pGdAdAov lévat aitg (in order that his revenues might come in bet-
ter). X. Cy. 1. 3,9. of rév Bactdéwy oivoxda eis Thy apictepay (olvov) eyxedue-
vo katappopoto:, Tod 5H, ei pdpuaxa eyxéoev, wh AvoTiTEAEtY abrots (in
order that it may not be well for them, if they mingle poison with it). 6,40. rod wh
Siagpedyery Tov Adywr &k Tay diKTIwy cKoTods Kadlorys. (8) With prepo-
sitions, e. g. dvr, instead of, or in the sense of the Latin tantum abest, ut — ut,
éx, from, in consequence of, wet d, in connection with, pd, for, mpl, in order that,
especially €vexa and iwép in connection with mh, in order that not, in order
not; also &vev and xwopls, without, wéxpi(s), until. Th. 1, 69. dvr rob
émeA ety (invadere) adbto dudbverda BobrAcode waddrov émdvras. X. H. 3.
4, 12. 5 *Aynotaaos &yrl rod em) Kaplay iévai, ebdbs tavavria aroorpépas
ém) Spuyias ewopevero. Hier. 4, 3. Sopupopodaw emt rods kakotpyous bwéep TOD
undéva tav moditav Biaiw Savdrw dmosvicKery.

(c) Dative: (a) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. amore,
morevw, toa, Suoios, dvayrios, very often as the instrumental Dat. X. Ap. 14.
amorodo: TE Cut TeTiMAoSat bed Samudvwv (do not believe in my having been
honored, that I have been honored). Pl. Phaed.71,¢.7¢@ (av éort rt evavtiov, dswep
TS eypnyopévar Td Kadeddew ; (is there something opposite to living, as sleeping
is to waking). X. Hier. 7, 3. doxe? robrw diapépew avhp tav tAdrwv (dwy, TE
Timfs dpévyerdat (seems to differ from other animals in this, that). (8) With
prepositions: év, in,ém{, on the condition that, in order that, because, rpés,
besides. Pl. Gorg. 456, e. mapédooav éwl TG Sixalws xpjadat TovTors
(rots SrAois) mpds Tovds wodeulous (they put them [arms] into their hands in order
that they might use them aright). §S. Aj. 554. év TG ppovetv — fdioTos Bios.

(d) Accusative: (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs. Pl. Gorg.
522, ec. abrd 7d &moSvhoKery ovdeis poPetra: (no one fears death itself).
(8) With prepositions: éwf, eis, mpds, in order that, in order to, in relation to,
xkatd, in relation to, apd, in comparison, especially 5:4, 0n account of, because
that. X.C.1. 2,1. Swxpdrns wpds Td wetplwry Setwdat wemadevpévos (jy)
(was trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8.1, 3. wéyiotov ayaddv 7d Teidapxeiv
gaiverat eis TO KaTampdrrery TA Gyadd, With attraction: X. Ven. 12,
21. % aperh mavtaxod mdpeot: 51a Td elvat 4ddvatos (on account of tts
being immortal, because it is immortal); here &dvaros is attracted into the
case of dperf, instead of being in the Acc, Cy. 1. 4, 3.6 Kipos 514 7d pido-
maShs elvar woAdd Tovs mwapdvras dynpdta, Kal boa ards bm’ BAAwy (Sc. avn-
pwraro), 31a rd &yxlvous elvat Taxd amexplvero (because he was fond of
learning).

ReMaRk 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con-
structed with an Inf. merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article 74,

40

470 SYNTAX. [§ 309.

even when they would have their object. if a substantive,in the Gen. The
addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressc:| by the Inf.
X. C. 3. 6, 6. 7d wAovowrépay Thy wéAw wotety &dvaBarovmesa Th. 3,1.
Tov mAcioroy Suidoy Tay WiAav elpyov Td mH Ta eyyds Tis TOACHS KaKOUPp-
yeitv (elpyew twa twos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf., the article
can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan-
tive.

Rem. 2. As the Acc. of a substantive, so also the Jnfi with the Acc. of the
article, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetry,
however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. éxetvos
mavy aviadels cime mpds Eautdv: Ths tixns, Td) éut viv KAndEévTa devpo
tuxetv! (that I have just now been called hither!). Without the article: Aesch.
Eum. 835. éut waSety rade, ped, ut waraloppova nara yay oikeiv, arle-
Tov, ped, pvoos !

Rem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which
the article 7d is placed before the Inf efva: which stands in connection with an
adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial
Accusatives. See § 279, Rem.10. The Inf. ef?ya: denotes a state or condition,
e.g. Td vbv elvat, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression,
with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti temporis
conditione; To Thmwepov etvat, pro hodierni diet conditione. X. An. 1. 6, 9.
7d KatTad TOUTOY A (so far as he is concerned). H. 3. 5,9. 7d pty ew
éxelvors elvat &rodddare (so far as it depends on them).

§309B. The Participle.

1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective
idea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib-
utive use; for it has three genders, and the same declension as
the adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in-
dependently, but must always depend upon a substantive, and
hence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par-
ticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the
adjective, a quality. -

2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective,
in retaining, like the Inf., the following properties of the verb:

(a) The participle has different forms to denote the different
circumstances of the action: duration, conupletion, and futurity,
e. &. ypdduv, writing, yeypadds, ypdwas, one who has written, ypaxy-
wv, one who will write (§ 257, Rem. 3) ;

(b) The participle has Act., Mid., and Pass. forms, e. g. ypap-
as, ypaibdpevos, ypadeis.

(c) The active and middle (deponent) participle governs the
same Case as its verb, e. g. ypddwv értoroAny, ervdupav THs
GpEeTHS, paxopevos Tots todEp lots.

§ 310.] THE PARTICIPLE.

3. The participle is used as follows :—

(a) Either as an immediate attributive qualification of a sub-
stantive, e. g.6 ypddwv mais or 6 rats 6 ypdduwr, the writing
boy ; or in connection with evar, as a predicate (§ 238, Rem. 4),
e. g. To pddov dvJodv éoreyv (the rose is blooming).

(b) As the complement of the verb, e. g.‘Opd rdv aida
TpéxovTa.

(c) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub-
Stantive as is expressed in English by placing the participle
after the substantive, or by the relative who, which, and the
verb, e. g. Turi tis dpvw eiye cad Exdoryv jyepav adov airy tiktov-
wav (a hen laying, or which laid an egg daily).

(d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the
principal action, e. g. Kipos yeAa@v ere (said laughing, or
laughingly).

Remark. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained
in §§ 264, 1. and 238, Rem. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the
usage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered.

§310.L The Participle as the complement of the verb.

1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex-
presses an action as already attached or belonging to an object,
only those verbs can take a participle for their complement
which require, as a complement, an action, in the character of
an attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this
object appears in some action or state. The action or state de-
noted by the participle is, therefore, usually prior to that denoted
by the verb with which it is connected, sometimes coimcident.

2. The construction is here evident. The Participle agrees
in Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb,
this object being in the Case which the principal verb re-
quires. “Axovw Swxpdtovs and jeoved wore Swkparous wept
diruv Svadeyopévov. Xaipw cor and xaipw cor éXJovte.
‘Opd advIpwrov and 6p6 avIpwrov tpéxovTa.

3. But when the subject of the principal verb is_ at the same
time its object also, as Oida (éy) éuavrdv Ivyrov ovra, then the per-
sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and
the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case

. ka ie Be wr. CL oe pee eS Ae Puce na in 8
*y &, : es he: ib) Wider “ Ba nad

LBs = 7 TT Ce ye RN We is

“ a ; ' IDS BOTT

472 SYNTAX. [§ 310.

as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nom. (Comp.
§ 307, 4), e. g. oida Jvyros av. For more examples, see No. 4.

Remark 1. Yet the Acc. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the
object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be
made emphatic. Comp. § 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. ox, & kpelrray nde ay,
Tavira mpovKareito Tods ouydytas, GAN’ Gmrep eb Hdet EauTdy irrova byTa, Tadra
efijpxe. 5, 10. wepietSov aitovs yhpa dduvdrovs yevouéevous (they permitted
themselves to become enfeebled by ald age).

Rem. 2. With ctvoidsa, cvyytyvéonw éeuaur@, the participle can
either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun
which stands with the verb; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in
the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat., e. g. cuvoida (cvyyryvdonw) euavTe eb
moihoas or cbvoida euavT@ ed morhoayt (I am conscious that [ have done well). PI.
Apol. 21, b. éy Edvorda €uautg cogds &y (Lam conscious that I am wise).
22, d. éuaut@ Evvyiderv ovdey emrotauévy.. But when the subject is
not at the same time the object, but is different from the object, then the object
with its participle is either put in the Dat., e. g. cbvoidd cor €d morhoayTi, —
X. S. 4, 62. rf wot odvoicgda TowdToy cipyaruéevw; (quid me tale commisisse
scis ?), or (though more seldom) the substantive is put in the Dat., but the partici-
ple in the Acc., e.g. éyé vo: cbvoida cb rotrhocavtTa X.O0.3,7.éyé oor cd-
vo.da em pey Koupdav Séav Kal mdvv Tpol dvioTrdmevor, Kal mdvu pixpdy dddv
BadiCovTa nal due aGvamwelSovra mpodtiuws cuvseicda. Also Aavdvw
éuwautdy moray Tt (L conceal myself doing something, i. e. I do something secretly).
X. An. 6. 3, 22 (of imme?s) ZAaSov abTrods em Tg Adpw yevdmevor (reached
the height unobserved).— With éotxévas, to appear, to seem, to be like, and
Suorov elvat, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in
the Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with Suo.oy eiva, in the Dat.
almost without an exception. X. H. 6.3, 8. g€olxkare tupayviot waddov 2 mo-
Aitelas HSdmevorw An. 3.5, 13. Suor0r Foay Savuddovtes. Pl. Menon.
97, a. Guorol eouev ovK dpdIds Guoroynkdct. Rp. 414, c. Zornas, &pn,
dxvovdyTi Aéyer. See § 31l, 9.

4. The verbs and expressions, with which the participle is
used as a complement, are the following : —

(a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the
senses or by the mind, e. g. dpay, dxovewv, <idévar (to know), éxic-
tactat (to know), pavdavew (to perceive), yiyvackew (to know), év-
Jupetada. (to consider), muvidvertar (to percewe), aicdIaver Sat,
pywnocKer Jo, emiravtdavertat, etc.

Th. 1, 32. fwets Gddvator dpGpev bytes mepryeveodat (we see that we
are unable, etc.). ‘Opa oe tpéxovta. “Akovety with the Gen. when one
hears with his own senses, or with the Acc. when one learns by hearsay.
X. C. 2. 4, 1. Hrovea SwKpdrovs wep) pliawy Srareyouévov (I heard
Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. #xkovce Tov Opaci-
Bovaov mpostovta (he heard that Thrasybulus was coming). Cy. 1. 4, 25.
KauBtons Hrovoev advdpds Hn epya SiaxerpeCduevoy thy Kipoy,
OTda Svnrds dv (I know that I am mortal). Otda &vSpwrorv Synrdy
bvra. Her.3, 1.6 Bacired, Sia BeBAnuévos brd *Audows ov pavddvers;
(do you not see that you have been deceived ?). 40. 73) ruvSdvecda: &vdpa

$310.) THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 473

4

dlrAov nal fetvov eb rpjocovra X.Cy.1.1, 2. %Spwror em’ obdévas uadAov
gvvictavrat, i) emt rovrous, obs ty alodwurar tpxew abray emixetpoivras
(whom they know are endeavoring to rule them). With the Gen. [§ 273, 5, (e)].
4.4, 11. FoSnoar ody mémoré pou Wevdopaptupotvtos } cvKcopar-
ToUVTOS.

(b) Verba declarandi, i. e. verbs which signify to declare, to
show, to make clear, and the like, e. g. dexvivas (to show, to ex-
hibit), Snrodv, djArov woreiv, paivew (to show), paiverIa (to show
one’s self; apparere), Sjrov and davepov civar, eA€yyewv, fedeyxew,
(to prove, to convict), ddicxerSat (to be convicted), roreiv (to rep-
resent), ebpicxew (to find), etc.

Pl. Phaed. 101, ¢. 4 Wuxh aSdvaros dalvetat otaa (the soul appears to be
immortal). Her. 6, 21. "ASyvaiot SHAov éwolnoay brepaxdecdéevres TH
MiAjjrou addoet (made it evident that they were exceedingly grieved on account of the
capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, dl. rots wointais robs Seods oldv 7 éoth
TWoijoatnal Siarceyouevous nal cvvaywvilouevous, ols dy BovAnSa-
ow (the poets can represent the gods both conversing, etc.). Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20.
padlas €AXeyxShoerar Pevdduevos (will easily be convicted [that he fulsifies|
of falsehood, or if he falsifies).

Rem. 3. Instead of the impersonal phrases d9Adv éort, havepdv éott, palverat,
apparet, the Greek uses the personal construction (comp. § 307, Rem. 6), e. g.
BHAGs civt, Pavepds eiut, Palvouat Thy watplda ed moihaas (Lam ev-

dent having done well, i. e. it is evident that I have done well for my country). X.
An. 2. 6, 23. orépywyv pavepds pev hy ovdéva, btw 5t pain otros elva, rodTrw

_ tvinaos éylyveto ér:Bovrctwr (he was evident loving no one, i. e. it was

evident that he loved, etc.). Pl. Apol. 23, d. katddnarot ylyvovta: mpos-

| Totovmevor wey cideva, ei ddt es de ovder.

A (c) Verba affectuum, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or

state of the mind, e. g. xaipew, HderIou, dyddANco Iu, dyarav (to be

content), axJerIa, dyavaxteiv, aideioSac and aicxyiverar (to be
ashamed), perapedeio tat, perapedet, dpyiler Io, Bapiver Ia, padiws,
xadreras pepe, ete. .

X. II. 6. 4, 23. 5 Seds wodAdnis xalper rods wey puKpods meydAous Tolar,

robs 8& peyddous pixpods (rejoices to make the small great). Hier.8,4. d:areydpu-
_evol te GyadAbmeSa Tois mporeTiunuévois uaAdov, } tots é« Tov tocov juiv
_ ova: (we are proud to converse with those preferred in honor, ete.). Th. 1,77. &8e-
Kotdmevor of &vSpwra padrdrov dpylCovrat, } BraCdmevor (men are more
_ indignant when they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 (of ASnvaior)

MeTeueArAOvTO Tas crovdas ob Se~duevot. 5.35. Tos ex THS vhooU dec-
peras weTEeméXovtTO &mwodedwudres. Eur. Hipp. 8 tiudmevor xal-
povory (of Scot) dvSpaimwy siwd (rejoice to be honored). Xalpw cor éASdvre

(1 rejvice that you have come). Pl. Rp. 475, b. bd opuxporépwy Kal pavdorépwy

a

Tipemevot &yanraour.

40*

474 SYNTAX, : Re 310.

(a) Verbs signifying to be satisfied with, to be pleased with, to
enjoy, to be full of, e. g. réprecdat, gumitdacSa, peorov ecivar, and
the like.

Od. a, 369. viv piv Satvdpevot Tepwmopmeda (let us delight ourselves in
feasting). Il. w, 633. érel td panoay és GAAhAovs bpdwvtes (when they were
satisfied at looking at each other). S. O. C. 768. weords jv Sumovpevos.
Eur. Ion. 924. of ro: oy BAémwy eumlrrAaua mpdswrov. Her. 7, 146.
emedy Tadta Snevmevot wot WANPEES.

(e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to permit, to endure, to per-
severe, to continue, also to be weary, to be exhausted, e. g. wept-
Kad- eis- epopav, tpoieaSau (to neglect, to permit), dvéxer Jou Kapre-
pety, drropevew, Aurapeiy (perseverare), kdpvew, arevreiy, etc.

Her. 7, 168. 0d weptomrén éorl H ‘EAAds GroAAVMEY” (Hellas is not to be
permitted to be destroyed). 101. ei"EAAnves bTowevéoves xXeipas euol &vTaet-
pduevor (will venture to withstand me). 9,45. Atwapéetre wévovtes (con-
tinue to remain). 8, 65 (iptv émoxhrtw) wh wepridety thy hyepoviny
adris és Mfdous wepreASodaay (not to permit the hegemony to return again to
the Medes). Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. dmefrotmev by &kovovTrés te Kal
A¢yovres, el mdoas Tas Tobras mpdtes ekerdComuev (we should be weary
of hearing and speaking). An. 5. 1, 2. dreipnea Hdn cvceKevaldpmevos
ka BadliCwy cad tpéxwv Kal Ta Orda Pépwy Kal ev Tdi iwv Kal pudakds
gvvAdttwy cal paxduevos (Lam weary of pucking up, walking, running, ete.) ,
Th. 1, 86. rods Evumdyxous ob weptoWdpedsa &Sixovpévovs (will not
permit the allies to be injured). 2. 73.’A&%nvaiol pacw, év odderl Huds mpoéa-
Sat &5ixovpévovs. Pl. Gorg. 470, c. wh cadens plroy &vdpa edepyeTtayv
(do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For avéxeoSar with the Gen.,
see § 275, 1.

(f) Verbs signifying to begin and cease, cause to cease, to omit,
to be remiss, e. g. Gpxeoda, trdpxew; Tavew, raversat, Ayyewv,
SvadAdrrew, dradddrrecIor; pedierIor, AelrerIo1, exAcirew, émAci-
me, etc.

Her. 6, 75. KAcouévns maparaBov toy ofdnpov, &pxeTo ek TOY KYnLewr
Ewitdy AwBadpmevos {began to mutilate himself). Tladw oe &dinodrvra (1
cause you to cease doing wrong). Tlatvopal oe &8inG@v (I cease to do wrong to
you). X.O.1, 23. (ai em Suula) aikiCdmevar Ta chpata Tay avdpdtwy Kod
Tas Wuxas Kal Tods olxous oftoTe Ahyoucty, eT by Upxwow abtay (never cease to
torment). Kal BAdAa ye 34 pupla éwtrelmw A€ywr (to omit in speaking). ‘O-
ayadds ook €AAElwEeTAaL Eb TOLGY Tos EvepyeTodyTas EauTdy (does not fail to
do good to his benefactors). Pl. Phileb. 26, b. 186, b. &pEomar ard ris tarpinis
Aéywy. Menex. 249, b. rods tereuricavtas Tim@oa odSéwoTe Exhelwen
(4 wéAus).

$310.) THe paRTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 475

(g) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish one’s self,
i to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, e. g. etrvxeiv, viKav, Kpa-
| rely, HTTacIat, ed wroreiv, duapravew, ddiKeiv, etc.
Her. 5, 24. eb ewolnaoas amixdmevos (you did well in coming, that you
came). Th.1,53.a5teeire wodeuov ipxovtes nal cmovdds AdovTes (you do
_ wrong in beginning war, etc.). 2, 71.0% dlkata woretre es yay Thy MAaraéwy
_otpatetvorvtes. ‘Auaprdyveis taira roray (you are in fault in doing this).
Pl. Phaed. 60, ¢. ed Y érolnoas dvauvhoas pe (you did well in reminding
me). X. Hier. 11, 14, sq. mdvras (robs pidovs) weipO vixav eb moray: day
yep tods pidous kpatis «& wordy, ob wh cor Sivwvra avréxew of moreusor (to
endeavor to excel all in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. obx artTnodpeda ob
motovytes (we will not be inferior in acts of kindness).

_ (hb) The verbs wetpaéaFac (especially in Herodotus), to try
or attempt something, rapackevaleo Fac (usually with és and
_the Fut. Part.),and the Ionic phrases todAds eips Eyxetpay
—ytyvopas, to be urgent about, to lay it to heart, to consider im-
d portant.

Her. 7,9. érerphadny éwmedXatyvwy em rods &vdpas tobTous (I attempted to
~ march against). Pi. Phileb. 21, a.év col tretpduedSa Bacavilorvtres Tatra
(let us try to examine these). Th. 2, 7. of "ASnvaios maperkevdCovTo ws
_mokeutioorvtes (were preparing to wage war). Without ds: 18 (of Medomor-
vig) mposbodas mapetkevd(ovto woinodmevow X.H.4.1, 41. rapec-
wevdCeto wopevoduevos. Her. 7, 158. 5 Té&twv wodtaAdbs evéxerro
Aéywy (spoke urgently). 9,91. roAAdS hv Atoodpevos 6 keivos (entreated
earnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. Aniékns hv wmorAAds bmd mavtds avdpds
‘aivedmevos (was much praised). 7. 10, 3. mavrotor éyévovto «tou
Beduwevor Idvev Adou Tv poy (earnestly entreated the Ionians to break down
the bridge).

(i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use-
Jul, profitable, good, agreeable, shameful, u is to my mind, and
the like.

| Hpéme: por GyaS@ bvre and ayadG elvat (it is proper for me to be good).
‘Th. 1, 118. éxnpdétwv roy Sedv, ei (sc. abrois) roAc motor &uervov ~otat
(whether it will be better for them to engage in war). Pl. Aleib, 1, 113, d. cxomod-
ow, dworépa cvvolce: mpdtaciv. After these expressions, however, the
Tnf. is more frequent, since the action of the dependent verb is not considered
as already attached or belonging to the person, but as first resulting from the
action implied in the above impersonal expressions.

(k) The verb éyecyv, in the sense of to be in a condition or state,
a as an active, middle, or deponert ~°rticinle joined with **

476 SYNTAX. [$ 310.

order to express the continwed condition of the action (similar
to the Latin alquid pertractatum habere).

Her. 3, 65. d6Am Exover adrhy (thy tyeuovlnv) eT nodpmevor (properly, |
they have themselves as those who have acquired the hegemony, i. e. they have acquired
and still possess, comp. principatum PARTUM HABENT). X. An. 1.3, 14. woaad
Xphuara €xouev avynpwakdres (we have plundered much property and still
have it). 4.7,1. xwpla @kovv ioxupda of Tdoxor, év ois kal Ta emithdera mdvra
elxov &vaxekoutopévor (into which having conveyed all their provisions they
had them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into
which they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. xa Sepas mpenv
as pidos eis Oettadlay €Addv Exet KaTarAaBeyv. (On the contrary, éx@
Aéyew, I can say). .

(1) Finally, the participle is used as a complement with the
following verbs: (a) tvuyxdvo, to happen; (8B) AavJdve, to be
concealed; (y) SiatedXG, Stayiyvopar Sidye, to continue;
(5) dJdvew, to come before, to anticipate; (€) olxopat, to go
away, to depart. In English, most of these verbs are often ren-
dered by an adverb, and the participle connected with them,
inasmuch as it contains the principal thought, by a finite verb.

Her. 1, 44.6 Kpotcos govéa rod madds €AdvSave Boakwy (Croesus nour-
ished the murderer of his son UNWITTINGLY, WITHOUT KNOWING IT). Atdyo,
S1aTeA@, Siaylyvopar nada Tor@y (I ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what is
honorable). 1, 157. @xeto petbywy (he fled away). 6.o%xomat pépwrv (I
carry away). Th. 4, 113. @rvxov drdtra év tH dyopd KkadeddorvTes as
mevtjKovTa (about fifty hoplites were THEN, JUST THEN sleeping in the agora, hap-
pened to be, were by chance, sleeping). Tuyxdvw is always used, where an event
has not taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental codpera-
tion of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English
it can sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance; often it
cannot be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3,12. xaremdby jv HAAov HSdoat TodTO
moinhoayra (it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him
in doing it). Her. 4,136. €pSnoav Torr@ of SxvSar Tods Tepcas em) Thy yé-
gipay érixdpevor (anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, came
to the bridge long before the Persians). Also the conjunction amply # (or # alone)
with the Inf. can follow Sdvew, e. g. Her. 6,116. €pSneav amrixdpevot,
mpiy % tovs BapBdpous Hxerv (they arrived before the barbarians came). Od
p&dverv followed by kat, cad evSds, may be translated by scarcely — when, no
sooner — than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 (of Aakedaydviot) ok 2HSnoav rv-
Sdmevor toy wep thy “Artiuchy médcuoy, kal mdvTwy Tay tAdAwy dmeAhoavTes
fikov tiv &vvodvtes (the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, than
they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in
the phrase, od« &v pAdvorts ToLGyY Ti (you should do nothing quicker, i. e.
you cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C. 2.38, 11. gix dy PSdvois

Pt 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 477

Adyar; (you could not be too quick in speaking = speak quickly). 3.11, 1. ob

dy pddvoir’, tn, &kodrodobvres; (will you not follow immediately? =
follow immediately). ode ty PSdvors wepalvwy; (= statim reliqua conclude).

Rem. 4. With Aavddvecry and oSdvecy the relation is sometimes re-
versed, the participles of these verbs being used as the complement of the
verning verb. X. Cy. 3. 3,18. PSdvovtes Hin Snotuev thy exelvov yy
Tes ravage their country, anticipating them = we anticipate them in ravaging thete
country). 6.4, 10.4 88 Aadodca airy cuvepelwero (she followed unknown

to him).

, oe re ee ee

Rem. 5. The Part. of the verb efya:, connected with adjectives or sub-
stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even
when elva: is an essentitl word ; thus after Verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g.
Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. eldas ebrpemets duas (knowing that you are ready). 54, 41.
eay év Xeppovnow wUS nade SidAuwmoy (sc. bvta, if you should learn that Philip
ws in, etc.); very often with gafvopat, not a also with ruyxdvea,
SiatedAd, Siaylyvouat, e.g. X.C, 1.6, 2. dvumdinrds re kal dxlrwy Stat eAeTs.

$311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle
and Infinitive.

Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the
Inf., yet with a different meaning.

1.’Axovecy with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one’s own senses,
and an indirect one, though certain and well-grounded ; with the Inf, it im-
plies only an indirect perception obtained by hearsay,e.g."Axotw adtod
diareyopuévou (i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis percipio). KayBtons
Hkeovge tov Kipoyr avipds Hin eypa diaxerpiCdmevor. See § 310,
4, (a). But X. Cy. 1.3, 1. Sety ereSiuer 6 "Actudyns Tov Kipoy, Ste Hove
(ex aliis audiverat) caddy KaryaSdv aitoy eTvat

2.Eidéva: and éricraaSa:x with the Part., to know; with the Inf. to
know how to do something, to be able. OT8a (é€rlatamar) Seods ceBou-
evos (I know that I honor the gods); but Eur. Hipp. 1009. ériorawat
Seots c€Betv (I know how to honor the gods, I can honor the gods). §$. Aj.
666. eiaduetSa pev Seots eXeerv.— Also vowl ery in the sense of
to be assured, to know («idéva:), has a participle connected with it; still this
occurs very rarely. X. An. 6. 6,24. véurCe &, day eve viv dwonrelyps ..
Svdpa dyaddy amoKxtelywy (be assured that, if you slay me, you slay a good
man).

3. MavSdveiv with the Part., to sshik with the Inf. to learn. Mav&d-
vw cogpds &v (I perceive that I am wise); copds efvar (I learn to be
wise). X.Cy.4.1,18. wadthoovrar évavtiodadsac (rots rodculos).

4.Tiyvéoneiv with the Part. to know, to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn, to
judge, to determine. Tiyvéokw &yasobs byras Tos orpatiéras TOUS
ayavas (I know, I perceive that the prize-fights are useful, but ayaSovs
elvat, I judge that, ete.). X. Apol. 33 (Swxpdrns) Eyvw rod eri Gv rd
Tedvdvat aite kpetoooyr elvac (judged that it was better for him to die
than to live longer). Isocr. Trap. 361, d. éyvwoav Maclwva euod rapadodvas
tov maida (they concluded to give up, ete.).

5. AiaSdveoSar with a Part. to perceive, to observe, to understand, to learn ;
with the Inf. to think, to imagine (opinari). AigSdvopal ce péya maph
Bauciret Suvdwevow (I perceive that you have great influence with the king).

Sa SRE Ne et NS ee eal ae oe eae
aaa Vet Pen pales yy
4

478 ! | SYNTAX. | [§ 311

a

Th. 6, 59. aioSavdéuevos abrovs péya mapa Bacirel Aapelw Sivacdat

:
%

5, 4. odxére em robs &AAOvs Epxerat, aigSdmevos ov dy welSery avtovs —

(OPINANS, Se iis non esse persuasurum).

.HMvvdsdveosar with a Part. to hear, to perceive; with an Inf. it is used

with the same difference of meaning as in the case of dxovey. MuvdSd-
vouwal oe A€yorta (I hear you saying). Lys. Nicom. 184, 17. ruySd-
voual te aitTdy A€vyeELY, ws aoeBO KaTadtwy Tas Svolas (EX ALIIS
audivi), X. H.1. 4,11. avhxSn em) natacnomh tay tTprhpwr, ds ewvvSdve-

To Aakedatpovious avréa mapackevd ery. Th. 5, 55. tuddme-

vo.Tovs Aakedatpovilous ébectparetavat

Meuvijog dar with a Part. to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con-
template doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Méuynum €3 woihoas
rovs mwoAltas (I remember to have done good); eb mothoaar (I strive, wish, to
do yood). X. An. 3. 2, 39. penviodse avyp &yadds elvar (remember,
strive, to bea man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 (of carpdma) 8 71 by ev TH yh Exdorn KaArdy
i Gyaddy fj, hemyhoovrTa: kal dedpo dmoméumery. 8.4, 20. nenvhon
StaxptOqvar wepl rod Kdddous (thou wilt prepare to contend with me).

SalveoSar with a Part. to appear, apparere, to show one’s self; with an Inf.
to seem, videri. "Epatveto nAalwy (it was evident that he wept,.or in

English we often use the adverb, evidently: he evidently wept ; éoatveto —

kAalesv (he seemed to weep). X. 8.1, 15. kad Gua Aéyov radra dreuirrerd
te (6 yeAwrorods) Kal TH pwr capas krAalety epalverto (he seemed to
weep, but did not weep).

’Eotxévar with a Part. in the Nom. to appear; with a Part. in the Dat. to ©

be like (§ 310, Rem. 2) ; with the Inf. to seem; "Eot rare rupavyliot uadrdov,
4) wodtrelas 756 uwevor (you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp.
No. 8). Pl. Rp. 444, ¢. incense dxvovrvTe Aéyew (you are like one in doubt
in speaking = you seem to speak like one in doubt). X. Hier. 7.1. ZorKkev
épn, méya Tt eivat 4 Tinh (honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4,
9. mole, Srws BovrAEr* od yap viv ye Hudy Zorkas BactAeds elvat.

10’AyyéAAecy with a Part. is used of the annunciation of actual events ;

11.

12.

13.

with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed.
Dem. Ol. 2. (3). 29, 4. drnyyéAdn SlAurmos iuiv ev Opden tplrov } ré-
taptov &ros Tovt) ‘Hpatov retxos morAtopKey (a settled fact). X. Cy. 1.
5, 30. 6 *Acovpios cis thy xopay éuBdAdrAety ayyéAAeTar (whether he
had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain).

Aerxvivat and amrogalvety with a Part. to show, to point out; with an
Inf. to teach, “ESe1tad oe &Sixhoavra (I showed that you had done wrong).
X. An. 2. 8, 14. dpixovro eis kéuas, Bev AGwEederEay of Hyeudves RauBa-
vetv Ta emirhdera (where they pointed out to them that they might obtain pro-
visions). Dem. Cor. 271, 135. (7 Bovar Aicxlyny) kal wpoddérny elvat
kal Kakdvouy iu &dréparvey (docuit). But the Inf. is likewise used
with 5e1*n¥yvai, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as
something perceived, but only as something possible, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17.

Kwouvetoes émidetEar, ov wey xpnords Te Kat pidddeAgos ely at, exeivos

dE pavAds Te Kal ov Ukios evepyecias.

Andody with a Part. to make evident, to show; with an Inf. to say, to an- |

nounce, to command. AnaAG@ ce &dixodvra (I make it evident or show that
you do wrong). X. Ag. 1,33. «npbywats €5HAov, Tods pey erevSeplas
deouevous ws pds oippaxoy a’Tdby wapetvasr (edixit, ut adessent).

Tlorety with a Part. to represent [§ 310, 4, (b)]; with an Inf. (a) to cause,
(b) to suppose, to assume. Tlo1@ oe yeA@vra (J represent you laughing).
Tlor@ ae yeday (I cause you to laugh). Pl. Symp. 174, c. &kAnroyp
éxolnaey (‘Ounpos) €ASbvTa Toy MevéArAcwr em Thy Solynv (represents

‘

3 $311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479

14.

Menelaus coming unbidden to the feast), X. An. 5. 7, 9. roid 8 byas
hcl lade ia kal katayonrevsévtas bm euod iKeerv eis acu
(/ will suppose, I will put the case, will assume, that you having been deceived
come to Phasis).

AlaxtveaSac and alde?aSac with a Part. to be ashamed on account of
something which one does ; with an Inf. to be ashamed or afraid to do something,
to abstain from doing something through fear or shame, to be prevented from doing
something by shame. Alaxtvopat kana part wy Tov plrov (I am ashamed
of doing evil, or that Ido evil to a friend); aioxbvopar axa mpdrrery
Tov pirov (I am prevented by shame from doing evil, etc.). X. Cy. 5.1, 21.
Touro pev (sc. dmodiddvar xdpiv wimw pe Sivacda) ode aigxtvopat Aé-
yor: Td 5€é+ Edy uévnre wap’ éuol droddow, TovTo, ed tote, bri aioxuvoluny
by eimetv. S. Aj. 506. aldeoar wey warépa roy obv ev Avyps yhpa Tpo-
Aelrayv. X. S. 8, 33. rovrous yap by epn ofeoSa: udriota aidetodas
GAAHAous &roAelwerv. 35. aidotvyrat tos mapdyvtas &rorel rev.
R. L. 9, 4. was dy tis aioxuvdseln roy Kandy cboxnvoy maparaBety.

15.Mlepropay [§ 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with

an Inf. also, without any marked difference, as cvyxwpeiv, éav, e.g. Th. 4, 48.
ovd eistévar tpacay card Sivauw wepidWeaSar ovdéva (they said they
would not permit any one to enter). "Ewitpémery, to permit, is commonly
connected with an Inf, rarely with a Part. X. An. 1. 2,19. rabrqy rhy
xdpavy ewétpeWe Siapmdoat tos “EAAnow ( I ePacen the Greeks to plun-
der). Isocr. Pac. % wédts adrots obk emitpéeWer wmapaBalvovaer troy
yéuov. The verbs advéxeocSar and brouévery with the meaning of
audere, are constructed with the Inf. Her. 7, 139. xarayelvayvtes &véo-
xovro roy émidvta ém rhy xapnv SétacSat (dared to withstand the enemy
making an incursion into their country).

16.”A pxeoSac with a Part., when it has the meaning to be in the beginning of

17.

an action (in contrast with the middle or end of an action), or also when
the way and manner, in which the beginning of an action takes place, is to be
stated ; with an Inf, to begin to do something, to commence (something intended,
aimed at),*H pEavro Ta telxn olxnoSomotvres and oikodouetv. Th.
1,107. Hp~avro Kal td waxpd Telxn Adnvaian oikodopuetv. X. Cy. 8. 8,
2. &ptouat diddoKwv ee Tay Selwr, C.3.1, 5. réSey Hptard oe bi-
SdoKkery Thy otparnylay. 5, 22. dwdre radralev Hpiw wavSdverv. 6,3.
elroy hiv, &« twos &pin thy weAw evepyeTtetv. 5,15. "ASnvaio amd
tav Tatépwy UpxXovTat KaTappovety Tay yepatépwr.

Tlavery with the meaning to hinder, is constructed with an Inf., e. g. Pl.
Rp. 416, c. ras oixhoes Kal thy &AAny odclay ToabThy abrois TaperKevdodas
(Se2), Aris whre Tods plAakas ds Gplortovs elvat Tadoot adtovs KTA.

18. TetpaoSa:t with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [§ 310, 4,

(h)]; still this construction is rare; with the Inf. to attempt to do something ;
mapagkevdferdae is very often also connected with the Inf. The
Tonic phrase raytotoyv ylyveoSat, is constructed with the Acc. and
Inf. Her. 3, 124. ravroln éeyéveto ph &rodnujoat toy Todvukpd-

tea, (she used every expedient, etc.).

Remark. By comparing § 306 with § 310, it will be seen that the Inf., as a
complement of the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef-
fected, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or
coincident with that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual
existence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies that
_ the action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf. does not.

ae sia ae ear ek tty ln

-

480 é SYNTAX. [$312

§ 312. The Participle used to express Adverbial or
Circumstantial Relations. ;

1. In the second place, the Part. is used to denote such an
attributive qualification of a substantive, as will, at the same
time, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In
this case, the Part. expresses the adverbial relations of time,
cause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner.

The English often uses a Part. in this case, e. g. he said laughing (yer dv) ;
the city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress (wédus id tay ToAEcUlwY TO -
Atopxovuéyvy). Instead of the Part., the English often uses either a subor
dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch
as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kipos Thy
mwéAw Eddy avnadsev (after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or after taking
the city, etc.). ;

2. In English we often translate the participle by a verb,
connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named
conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the
participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it.

Of roAduion Puydvres brd Tay ToArculwy eidxInoav (WHEN the enemy FLED,
THEY were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy FLED AND were pursued). Tots

Tlépoats eis thy yav eisBadrodotv of “EAAnves hvavtisnoay (WHEN the
Persians MADE an irruption into the country, the Greeks went out against them).

3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always
agrees with a substantive or pronoun which is connected with
the principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and
may then be called the dependent participle. But very often the
substantive with which the participle agrees has no connection
with any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called
the Genitive absolute or independent, because it has no gram-
matical connection with any other word in the sentence.

X. 0. 4,2. rdv cwndtwv SndrAvvopewy, kal af puxal word appwordrepas
ylyvovtat (when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits becomé weaker).

RemArkK 1. The Genitive absolute-can never be used when the action refers
to the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with
the subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par-
ticiples in the past tense; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, |
even when the action refers to the subject, e. g. of orpariérat Tv TOAW Kade-
Advres cis Td otpardmedov avexdpnoay (milites, URBE DIRUTA, in castra se re-
ceperunt, after the soldiers had taken the city, they returned to the camp). In this

- ao “oo

i

Sie ee ee de, on a ee BE a el ae

§ 312.) THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 481

example, the actions denoted by the participle and the verb, both refer to
otpari@ra:, and therefore the Gen. Absol. could not be used.

Rem. 2. The reason why the Greeks chose the Gen. absolute, has been
seen in treating of the Gen., § 273, Rem. 11. Subordinate clauses also may be
used instead of the participial construction, either for the sake of greater em-
phasis, or for perspicuity.

4. The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to
denote :—

(a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi-
nate clauses, with the conjunctions when, while, during, after,
since, or a substantive with a preposition.

X. C. 1. 2, 22. woddAol ra xphuara dvardoarvrtes, dv mpdcdey amelxovro
Kepdav, aioxpa voulCovres elvat, ToUTwy ovK améxovrat (after wasting their money,
after, when they had wasted). An.’Akotoact tTavta ois otparnyois Td evSbunua
xaplev éd0xet (when the generals heard this, on hearing this, after hearing this, they
thought the device ingenious). So the frequent circumlocution with roifoas
in the sense of thereupon. Her. 6, 96. évémpnoay wad Ta ipa nal Thy wéAw: TadTa

Bt mothoavres em ras hdAas vigovs avdyovto (THEREUPON they set sail for

the other islands); or with the repetition of the Part. of the preceding word.
Her. 7, 60. rdyras tobrw TG tpdww dinpldunoav: apiSuhoavres dt nate
%vea duéracoov (in this way they numbered all; THEREUPON they arranged the
army by nations). Gen. absolute, X. H. 5.1, 9. vavpaxtas.mpos thy cedAhyny
yevouevns, Tértapas Tpihpes AauBdver: Twpyémras (a naval battle having been
fought by moonlight). 4.58. bropalvovros Tod pos, "AynotAaos kAwore-
ths iv (when the spring appeared). Il. a, 88. otis €ued CGvtos Kad emt xSovl
Sepkouevoto col xolAns mapa vnvot Bapelas xeipas éwoloe: (while I live, as long
as I live and look upon the earth).

Rem. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in
English by adverbs, also belong here: (a) adpxduevos, in the beginning, origi-
y. Th. 4, 64. Grep cal &pxdpmevos eixov. (This is to be distinguished
from &piduwevos ard trivos, which may be translated, especially, before all.
The Part. aptduevos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with
the substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g, Pl. Rp. 600, e. odxoty TidG-
pe ard ‘Outhpou apiauévous rdvras Tovs TotnTiKovs mmnras €idd-
Awv aperijs elva (that all the poets, particularly Homer, etc.). Sometimes, how-
ever, the Part. dpiduevos agrees with the subject of the sentence. Pl. Symp.
173, d. doxe?s wot arexvGs mdyras dvSpdrovs &SAlovs jyeiaSar TAY Swxpdrous,
amd cod apidpevos, you seem to me to think all men unhappy except eS,
rticularly yourself ).—(B) TeXeura@y, properly ending, "hvally, at last. Pi.
p. 362, a. reAeuTay mdvta kata wmadov avarnwdvaevdhoeta. X. An. 6. 3,8.
TeXevTa@vTeEs kal awd Tod Haros elpyov (rods “EAAnvas) of Opaxes (at last the
Thracians kept the Greeks from the water).—(y) AtaAiway xpédvoy, after
some time, after a while, subsequently, or Siar. wordy, dAlyov xp., eT La X WY TordY
xpévov, wixpdv. Pl. Phaed. 59, e. ob wordy ody xpdvoy emia XY Are.

Rem. 4. The Part. in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when
the eh ie can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject
is indefinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words mpdyuara xphuara,
&vSpwrot, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. Tepi-

41

482 | SYNTAX. ~ [§ 312.

KAAS @xeTo kata Taxos em) Kabyov cal Kaplas, ésayyeaAd évrwy, bri boinccas
vijes ew’ avrovs mAgovow (it having been announced that Phoenician ships were sailing
against them), X. Cy. 1.4, 18. onuavdévrwy 8 te “Aorudye, bt TorAemol
ciow ev TH xaepa ekeBonse: Kal adtds mpds 7a Spa (it having been signified to
Astyages). 3.1, 38. Siacknvovytwy 8 (sc. alta@v) peta Td detmvov, éwhpero
6 Kvpos. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. cadds SnAwdEvToOS, Ori ev Tals vavol
Tav ‘EAAhy wy TH Tpdryuara eyévero (it having been made very evident that). Comp.
the Latin cognito, edicto, petito, etc., instead of postguam cognitum est, etc. -

Rem. 5. In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition émf is
frequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part. is in the Pres.
tense, e.g. "Ea! Kipov Bagirevorros (while Cyrus was king). See § 296,
I, (2). The relation of past time is sometimes made more definite by the prep-
osition etd, after, with the Acc. e. g. Her. 6. 132. werd 5& ey Mapadau
Tp@ua yevduevoy Miariddns adgero (after the slaughter made at Marathon).
See § 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed by about, nearly,
is indicated by ja6 with the Acc. e. g. brd Thy Tpadtny ewerASodcav
vUKTG [§ 299, ITI, (2)], the coincidence or contempor iSNESS of one thing with
another, is expressed by ua with the Dat.,e.g. dw juépa SiadpwoKotion
(as soon as daybreak); iva t@ oltr@ &kpd Cove (simulac frumentum adul-
tum est).

Rem. 6, In order to determine more exactly the relation of time, temporal
adverbs are often used with the dependent participle and the Gen. absolute:
aitina, evaus, ebalovns, metakd, dua. Pl. Rp. 328, c. ebdds obv pe
idm@v 6 Képadros homdcerd re Kal elwev (simul ut me conspexit), Lys. 207, a. 6
Mevétevos éx rijs adds weTatd walCwy eisépyera (while he played). Phaed.
77, b. 6rws ph Gua GrosvhockovtTos Tov avaspaTov SiackeddvyyvTa F
Wuxh (as soon as man dies). Her. 9,57. nal Gua kataraBovtes mposexéatd
op: (as soon as they had come up with the enemy, they pursued them closely). Th.
2, 91. email Te Gua wAE€OvYTES (inter navigandum, while sailing).

Rem. 7. In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the succession of
time and a consequence or result, the following adverbs are very often appended
to the predicate of a sentence: évtatda, of Tw(s), of tw 5H, Se. X.C.
3. 10, 2. é« moAAGy cuvdyovTes Ta e& Exdorov KdAALTTA, OF TwWS GAA TA
Thpata KaArAd toeire alvecdat (collecting from many the most beautiful features of
each, IN THIS WAY you make the entire forms appear beautiful).

(b) A cause or reason, where the English often uses subor-
dinate clauses with szmce, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan-
tive with a preposition.

X. C. 1. 2, 22. worrol ra xphuara avardoavres, Gv mpdcdev dmelxovTo Kepdar,
aicxpa voulCovres elvat, TrovTwy odk améxovta (many having squandered their
estates, did not abstain from those gains from which they before abstained, BECAUSE
they accounted them base). Ta émirhderm exorev ex Tis Xapas, WoAATS kal Gyadijs
otoans (they might obtain supplies from the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it was
- extensive and fertile).

(c) A motive, purpose, or object, where the English uses the
Inf. with to, am order to, or a finite verb with that, in order that,
so that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part. is used to denote
this relation; sometimes also the Pres. Act., (§ 255, Rem. 3).

$312.) THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 483

This usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming,
sending.

Her. 3, 6. rodro Epxouat ppdowy (Ihave come to say this). 6, 70. és Aer-
gos xpnoduevos TE xpnortnply wopederar (he goes to Delphi tu consult the
oracle, in order to, that he may consult, etc.). X.C.3.7, 5. o€ ye 5:3dE wr
Spunuar Wéurw ce A€tovra (I send you that you may, to, in order to, say).

(d) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate
clause with ¢f; or a concession, where the English uses a sub-
ordinate clause with although, though.

X. Cy. 8, 7, 28. robs pidous evepyerodvres kal rods éxSpods Suvicecde Ko-
Ad(ew (if you confer benefits on friends, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. ray &SAn-
T@v dis rocab’Tny pounvy AaBdvtTwy, oddty ky wréov yévorro Tois HAAots, Evds
Bt avdpds cd Ppovhacarvros, &rayres ky dmodatoeay of BovAduevot kowwveiv Tis
éxelvou Siavolas. X. Cy. 3. 2,15. ds dAlya Suvdmevor mpoopay tvSpwrar rep)
ToU wéAAOYTOS TWOAAG emixepoduey mpdrrew (although men can foresee little, yet,
etc.).

Rem. 8. When the Part. expresses a concession, the particles cat (neg. ovd¢,
pndé), ealwep, kat radta, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10.
mposexvynoay (Opdvrnv) kalmwep eiddres, bri emt Savdtw wyorro (although th
saw, that). Eur. Ph. 1618. od« dv mpodolny obdérwep todoowyr Kaxas. Pi.
Rp. 404, b. “Ounpos év rats tay jipdéwy éctidoeow obre ixSvow abrobs EoriG, Kal
Tadta em Saddrry év EAAnstévtw bytas (and that too, though they were, etc.). Taira
in such connections, may often be governed by the verb moéw: and he did this,
although they were, ete. The words éuws, eita, nGr as éwetta, KawetTa,
are often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. iorepor 5¢ &ae-
Kdmevor Tis TuuBorjrs iuelpovto Euws Sehoatda Tovs Mijdous (although they
came after the battle, still they desired to see the Medes). Pl. Charmid. 163, a. i o-
Sépevos cwhpoctyynv clvac td Ta EavTod mpdrrew, wet ta ovdey pot kwArdvew
kal rods Ta Tav KAAwY TpdTTovTas gwhpovety. “Ouws is often in poetry
joined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. weiSou yuvaitt xalwep od orépywv buws,
or (what also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the Part.,.e. g. PL
Phaed. 91, ¢. Suulas PoBeirat, uy h Wuxh Suws Kal Seidrepovy nal «dAAwov dy
Tov cduatos mpoatoAAuntat (that the soul, though more god-like and beautiful than
the body, will nevertheless perish).

(ec) The manner and means, where the English sometimes
uses a participial noun with a preposition.

TeA@yv efrev (he spoke laughing). X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. Aniێpevor Gow
(raptu vivunt, they live by plundering). C.3. 5, 16. mpoapodyras uadrdrov odtw
xepdalvew am GAATAwY, } TuvwHEArAODYTES abrots ( prefer to gain some advan-
tuge from each other, rather than by assisting themselves). Isocr. Panath. 241, d
Tovs “EAAnvas éd{Satav, dy tpérov Storkody Tes Tas adtay warpidas al mpds obs
wokepmotyres peydAny thy ‘EAAdSa morhociav. So often ypdpuevos with the
Dat., where the English may use the preposition with, e.g. roAAG TEXYD
Xpdpmevos Tods woreulous evixnoev (conquered the enemy with great tact).

Rem. 9. Here belongs the phrase Anpe?s ~Exwv, or in a question, rl

484 " SYNTAX. —[§ 312.

Anpets xv; i.e. you keep trifling so, or why do you keep trifling so 2, 2xw here
expressing the idea of duration. Pl. Gorg. 490, e. rota brodquata pAvapeis
%x wv; (what shoes are you always prating so much about ?). Here belong also the
Part. pepduevos, and pépwy used intransitively, swmmo studio, maximo impetu,
dedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. dxws d€ twWes Tods *ASnvatous
diapiyouv, pepduevor (cum impetu delati) ésémemrov és tods Aiywhtas (as often
as they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fell into the hands of the
Aeginetae). 8,87. (vats) diwxouevn bmd Tis *Attinis pépovea evéBare vyt pirly
(cum impetu aggressa est amicam navem, being pursued by the Attic ship, made a
violent attack on a friendly ship). Aeschin. Ctes. 82. és rodro pépwy tepiéornce
Ta mpaypara (he gnedly brought things to this state). Comp. ib. 90 and 146.
Rem. 10. In like manner the Greek employs the participles Zxwv, tyr,
gépwyv, AaBoyv, where the English may use the preposition with ; 2xwy is
used both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of
any one, &ywy of animate objects, pépwy of inanimate, AaBéy of both, e. g. X.
Cy. 1. 3, 1. %pxerar ) Mavddvn mpds Toy marépa Kal tov Kipoy Tov viby ~xovea
with her son Cyrus, etc.). So 6 Kipos tipos pépwv mposhracev, trmov &ywrv
ASev, imméas AaBMv Tovds wodrculovs xarediwtev. The Homeric and Poetic
language often connects the participles €xwv, pépwr, AaBdy, and w&ywy with verbs
of giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded
the giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer.
Tl. n, 305. Saxe Elpos apyupdnaov civ KorkeG Te Hépwy Kal eitéor@m TerAauart
(bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver).

5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used,
but for the most part only when the Part. has no definite sub-
ject, consequently where the verb from which the participle
comes, is impersonal, e. g. éfov (from eon, licet), guum liceat,
liceret, while, when, since ut is or was allowed; or with impersonal
phrases, e. g. aioxpov ov (quum turpe sit, esset, while, because,
since ut ts or was shameful.) The idea of extension in time, which
is expressed by the Acc. (§ 279, 6), is,in this construction, trans-
ferred to the state or condition of an object; the conjunctions
while, when, express this corresponding relation.

(a) Accusative absolute. Pl. Menex. 246, d. jut éfdy Civ uh kadas, Karas
aipotueda waddAov TeAevTay (since it is not in our power to live honorably). Protag.
358, d. bray dvayKkacdH Suoily Kakviv Td Erepoy aipetodat, oddels Td peiCov aiphre-
tat, €& dv 7d ZdAarroy (aipeiadar), no one will choose the greater, when it is in his
power to choose the less. Her. 1, 129."Aprayos, wapedy air@ Baciréa yeveodat,
BAAw wepieSynxe To Kpdtos (when it was in his power to become a king). 5, 49.
mapéxov (quum liceat) ris Actns mdons &pxew ciweréws, BAAO TL aiphoeade ;
Th. 5. 14. (of "ASnvato: wereuéAovto, Sri wera TH ev TldAw (vyevdueva), KaAds Ta-
paoxdy, ov kvvéBnoay (when a favorable opportunity presented itself). So bm dp-
xov, quum liceat, liceret ; S€ov, quum opus (necesse) sit, esset; BdEav adrois (quum

_tis visum sit or esset, when it pleased them, when they had decreed) ; 80% otv (quum
videatur, videretur); mposixov (quum deceat, deceret). Passive participles :
Th. 1,125. Sed0ypévov dé adtois, cbdds uty adivara jv emixelpeiy amapac-
xebvots oboww (and though they had determined, it was not possible for them, etv.). Eipy-

§ 312.] THE PARTICIPLE. 485

pévov (quum dictum sit, esset), Adjectives with By, e.g. SH Aor By (quum
appareat, appareret); &inAov by, Suvardyv bv, adbvaroyv by. Also some-
times without dy, e.g. SAO, dvayKaioy.

(b) Aeccusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu-
ally have no subject joined with them in the Acc. Absol., yet a neuter pronoun,
not a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66.
tTadta yivémeva, mévden weydaa rods Alyvmriovs KaradauBdver (when this
is done, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. #8n d&uporépors
bev doco avaxwpeiv, eupwSty St obdey (sed quum nihil decretum esset), exd-
pour ew’ ofkov. X. H. 3.2,19. Sdtavra dt TadTa Ka mepavdSévra, Te wey
orparedpara axjAsev (when these things had been agreed upon and accomplished).

Rem. 11. The Genitives absolute, however, are more frequent than the Ace.,when
a neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H.1. 1,36. 3ééavros
tovTtou @xerTo (hae re decreta, this having been agreed to, when this had been, etc.).
7, 30 and 5. 2,24. 30fdvtwy trotrwy. Cy. 4.5, 53. robrou cuvdoKoir-
Tos (ace. to the best MSS.). 4. 5,53. rotrou oftws x ovros. Also 56€-
av Taira (from ote ratra) occurs. X. An. 4.1,13. S6fav raira, exh-
préav oft moreiv (when this was approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac-
cordingly), With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure
in themselves, the Gen. is used, e. g. Sovros, cadmi{ovros |§ 238, 5. (b)].
Elsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases,
e. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. 45#Aov dvros, ei KrA. ;

6. The particle of comparison ®s, is connected both with the
dependent Part. (§ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Acc.
absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part. is to be in-
dicated as a representation, as a subjective view, opinion, or.
purpose of the actor or speaker. This os has the same signifi-
cation as a Part. of a verb of thinking or saying, followed by
an Inf., or Ace. with an Inf. The+English can express this as
by the expressions thinking, intending, with the intention of,
saying, or by as though, as if, under the pretence that, because. .

(a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1.1, 1. of rupavveivy émxeiphoavres, kav dx0-
covouv xpdévov upxovTes SiaryévwvTa, Savud(ovrar, @s copol re kal ebTuxels ye-
yevnpmévoe (properly, as those are admired, who are wise men = vou Cdmevot
copol re xa) evtuxeis yeyeviicSa, thought or reputed to be wise). Pl. Rp. 329, a.
dyavaxtovow, &s peydAwy twav Gweatrepyuévor (i.e. Hyovmevot pey. T.
dmeorepijacSat (as if they had been deprived, thinking they had been deprived). X.
An. 1. 1, 11. ’ExéAevoe (Mpdtevoy) AaBdvta &vdpas brit wAclorous waparyevéoSut,
@s és Mewldas BovAdwevos otpareverSat ( pretending that, under the pretence —
that, saying that, he wished to march against the Pisidians). ‘Qs is very often
connected with the Fut. Act. Part., when a purpose in the mind of another
is expressed. X. An. 1. 1, 3. *Apratéptys cvAAauBdver Kipoy &s dmoxrev@y
(arrests Cyrus for the purpose of putting him to death). The writer here states the
view or purpose as it existed in the mind of Artaxerxes, and not his own view
of the matter. So also very often with rapacxevd(ecSa, § 310, 4, (h).

41*

~ Pee ee eee ee ee 2 a i a,
“a ee Ne a ad od i tr ge yi

486 | SYNTAX. [§ 312

(b) Genitives absolute. X.H..7.5, 20. maphyyethev abrots mapackevdtersat,
&s wdxns €comerys (i.e. Aéyor paxny foeodat) (he commanded them to pre-
pare themselves, because, as he said, or saying that, there was to be a battle). 5. 4, 9.
exhputroy ekvévon wdvtas @nBalovs, &s TY TUpdvYwV TEDVESTWY (quia tyranni
mortui essent, because, as he said, the tyrants were dead). Th. 1, 2. és "Ilwviav tore-
pov, @s ovx ikavis ot ons THs ATTiKjs, dmonlas eemempar (i. €. voniCovTes
ovx ixavhy elya) (afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large
enough).

(c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5.2, 12.6 8& rots meATaorais maigt maptyy-
verre SinyxvaA@pmevous iévai, &s, dwéray onuhvy, akovtiCew Sef aov (he com-
manded all the peltasts to advance, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary
Sor them to hurl their javelins, etc.). Pl. Rp. 425, a. rots jjerépors maoly év-
vouwrépov evdis maidias wedextéoyv, ds, mapavduov yryvouervns avTijs, évyduous Te
kal orovdalous tvdpas adidverSa &Sdvatrorv by. So ds étdv, as mapov, ete.

(d, Accusatives absolute. X.C. 1. 2, 20. 8d xal robs viets of matépes amd
Tav Tovnpav avipérwv elipyovow, os Thy wey Tay xpnoTav bmiArtay wonnow
otcar Tis apetis, Thy St tay wovnpay Karddvow (assured that, knowing that,
the intercourse with good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. etxeTo Swx-
parns mpds Tods eo’s amwAds TayaSda Sidova, ws To’s Beods KddAdoTa
eidédras (thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con-
struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the
one mentioned in No.5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but
depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by ds.

Rem. 12. <A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with &s, oc-
curs with the verbs eidéva, érmictacSat, voety, @xerv yvouny, S1a-
kelodar Thy yvouny, ppovri ery, also sometimes with Aéyerv, and the
like verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Acc. of the substan-
tive with a Part. or the Acc. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The
consequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by
orw(s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3,6. @s éuod ody idvros, brn by
Kal duets, OU TW THY yvauny exeTe (asif then I shall go, etc., seeing then that
T shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me
iturum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. &s oby éuod ye Kad
&ywviovmevon kal, droios ty Tis &, Kata Thy dklav we Tay GELdoorTos,
ovTws, pn, & Kipe, ylyvwore. Pl. Cratyl. 439, c. StavonSévres os
idvtwy Te GwdvyTwy Gel Kal pedvtwy (reputantes, omnia semper ire et fluere).

Rem. 13. Instead of és, &smep (quasi) is sometimes joined with the Part.
In order to bring out emphatically an objective (actually existing) ground or
reason, the particles Gre (&r¢€ 54), seldom ofa, ofov (in the Ionic writers,
also, sve), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, quippe, are connected with the
participle. Her. 6, 59. &re wuxvod édvtos Tov wAgeos, obK Spwy of evtds
Tous éxtds (because the grove was thick). X. An. 4.8, 27. dre Sewhévwv
T@Y ETaipav, TOAA gtrvvernia eylyvero (because the hetaerae were looking on,
there was much rivalry). 5. 2, 1. of KéAxo, Gre exntemrwndres [ex] tar
oiKi@y, TOAAO Hoay GSpdor kad breperddnyto emt Tay Uxpwy (inasmuch as they had
been driven out of their houses, etc.). Th. 2, 5. cay kal avSpwro cata Tods aypovs,
ofa amposdoxnrov Kakod ev ciphyn yevouévov. Pl. Charm. 153, a. ofov dd
xpdvov adiywevos aouevws ia em ras EvvhSers diatpiBds.

,

$313.) PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 487

§ 313. Special peculiarities in the Participial con-
struction.

1. The Nom. of a Part. often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat.
Ace., or Gen., when the Dat., Acc., or Gen. in the preceding clause denotes the
object in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a /ogical respect, e. g.
in Boxed wor = eye iyyoduat, I think, This is a species of Anacoluthon
(§ 347, 5).

(a) Dative. Th. 3, 36. @0tev adrors (i.e. eynploavto, voted) ob rods ta-
pdvras udvoy dmoxreivat, AAG Kal Toads. &ravtas MitvAnvatous, wikadrotytes
Thy GAAnV axdotacu K. 7. A. (as Sallust. Jug. 102. populo Romano melius visum =
rati). 6, 24. tpws évéwecve maoiy (= eredipouy mdvtes) duolws exmrcdoa-
Tois pev wmpecBuTépots as..Kkatactpeyoucvas ep & Brdcov,..Tois F &
jaicla.. evérAmides BvTES GwShoecSa.— (b) Accusative. Eur. Hec. 970.
aides w exer (= aidodua) dv rede wétuw TUyxXdvovG WW eiut viv. — (c) Geni-
tive. Her. 4,132. Aapelov } yveun env (= eylyvecxer) eixkd (wv. Th. 4,
23. ra weol TldAoy bm &uporépwy Kara kpdtos emoAemetto (= 7a wepl TL.
dupdrepor érorcuovy), "AXnvatot uy.. thy vicov TepimA€ovTes.., MeaA-
omovyhator dt ev TH "Hrelpw otparomedevduevor (comp. § 266, 3).—
Sometimes also the Acc. and Dat. of the Part. is constructed according to the
sense of the preceding phrase or clause, and not according to its grammatical
form, e. g. e El. 479, sq. rear! wot Spdoos adurvdwy KkAvovcay dpriws
éverpdrwy (instead of oe Ae! we exer kAtovoarv). Th. 1, 62. jv yvoun
Tov "Aptotéws (= fd0te TH Apioret) Td wiv ped Eavtod orpardwedoy
xovtTi vy TH losu@ emirnpeiv rovs "ASnvatovs.

Remark 1. On the Nom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, see
§ 266, 3.— The Nom. of the Part. sometimes stands in a sentence alone, with-
out a finite verb, so that the Part. apparently, but only apparently, takes the
place of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from the pre-
ceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. Aaxedauéviot ta évaytla tovTwy
%Sevto vépov: ov yap KouGYTeEsS Tpd TovTOV awd TotTov Koay (sc. vduor
%evto). So also conjunctions stand without a finite verb, e. g. et, édy, éray,
ete. X.C. 2.1, 23. dpa ce amropotyra, woiay dddv emt troy Blov tpdrn- éav ody
eut plany woinodpmevos (scil. rhy em tov Blov b30v tpdry). In very many
passages, however, the Part. may be explained by inserting ¢iut.

2. The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of the participle
is not different from the subject of the predicate or an object of the predicate ; here
it is to be noted, that the subject of the participle is often wanting, since it can
be easily supplied (§ 312; Rem. 4), The reason of this peculiar construction
is commonly found in the effort to express the member of the sentence with
greater emphasis.

Instead of the Nominative. Th. 3, 13. BonSnodvrwv tuayv mpodtuws
médw mposdhWerde (you aiding, you will more readily, etc.). 70. Kal és Adyous
katactdvtwy (Kepxupalwr) anpicavtro Kepxupator (the Corcyraeans having
had a conversation, determined). X. Cy. 1.4, 20. ratira cimdvros abtod oté
tT. (sc. avros) Aéyew TO “Aotudye. Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. of
Sduio, awmikouevwv ASnvalwv aixumartétwy..TovTous Avoduevor Tdy-

Tas amoméurover .. és Tas ASHvas (when the Athenian captives had come, the Sami- :

ans having ransomed them, send all back to Athens}. Instead of the Dative. Th.
1, 114. «al es abrhy SiaBeBynndtos Hdn Meptxréous. .nyyerasyn avT@
(Tepid?) (when Pericles had crossed over into it, it was announced to him).

Rem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where
the Gen. of a Part. follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part. follows
a Gen.; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat.

ee ES pe ig Ne ee ee eee pray SCS
A . c

488 SYNTAX. [§§ 314, 315

Od. 1, 257. juty © adre narexadody plaroy jrop Serodvrwv pddsyyov Te Bapby
abtéy Te méAwpoy (= Huady Hrop). 458, sq. TG Ke of eynépadrds ye did omdos
tAAvdis BAAN Hervoumévou palorro mpds ovder. Il. g, 140. *Arpeldn, viv Bh wou :
"AXLAAT OS ddrody Kip ye evi orhIeror pdvov kal PoCay "Axaiav FepKouéva.

CHAPTER VI.

§ 314. The Adverbial Objective.

The objective construction, finally, is expressed by adverbs.
Adverbs denote the relation of place, time, manner, the quantity
of a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. éeyytdev
pAIev, xtes awéBy, xahds aréJaver, TroArAAKis HAI; adverbs
are to be viewed in a measure as resembling the Cases of sub-
stantives, since by these also, as has been seen, the relations
just mentioned are expressed. Hence it is evident why most
adverbs have a definite Case-inflexion, e. g. ot, where, dvw, Kara,
ol, olxot, 7, dm, etc. (§ 101, 2).

- Remark. In addition to the above adverbs, the language has other adverbs,
which do not, like those mentioned, define the predicate more exactly, but ex-
press the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are called Modal
Adverbs. They denote the certainty or uncertainty, the extension or limita-
tion, the affirmation or negation of the proposition; or they exhibit the propo-
sition interrogatively. Several of them have been changed from adverbs to
mere suffixes, and hence always depend on a particular word, which by them
is made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will be treated under the sub-
ject of interrogative sentences. Of the other adverbs alluded to, the following
eserve a more particular consideration.

§ 315. A. Ax, djra, Inv, SnIev, Syrovtev, dai.

1. Af is the abridged form of #5n, being conformed to it in usage; but it
can never, like #5n, stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic
5) TéTe, tum vero, 3h yap, jam enim), but is used only as a mere suffix (§ 314,
Rem.). It denotes in general that which is certain, sure, settled, a reference to
something known (already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par-
ticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed,
in order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being
taken into the account. Tatra, & viv 5 Ayers (just now, at this very time) ; &
viv 5h ereyes (just now, just then). X. Cy. 4.1, 23. viv 5H ob dnddoeis, ei
&Andh reyes (now certainly). Ovddey 5 Kandy wemdvSauev (nihil jam or nihil
dum, thus far, as yet, up to this time). Odsty 5) kaxdv werduedsa (nihil jam =
further). With an Imp. or hortative Subj., it signifies, now, then, now then, I pray.
X. C. 1. 2,41. d8atov 5% mpds ray SeGv (now then teach, teach then, I pray).

a peer ae ae ee eg Oe a! ek

$3165.) Ay, djra, Syv, SpIev, Shrove, sal. 483

“Iapev 3% (now then let us go, come now). After relatives, it often denotes a ref-
erence to a thing which is known. X. Hier. 11, 8. nal mparov yey eiSbs nareip-
yarucvos by eins 7d pirciodat bwd tay apxoucvwr, oF 3h ob emBuudy Tuyxdves
(quod, uti satis constat, expetis). Hence émerd4 (since now, quoniam, i, e. quum
jam), because now, puisque, in respect to something conceded, known; és 84,
seeing that, quandoquidem, ei 5h, si jam, if now. In a series of sentences con-
nected by «af, 54 is placed after the word which is to be made emphatic. PI.
Men. 87, e. dylem, pauév, cal ioxds eal edAAos kal tAoUTOS 54. So xa rd
5% wéyiorov ; further, &AAos re— kal 5h cal. Her. 1, 80. eis Atyurtov arlxero
mapa “Audow, kal 5h nal és Sdpdis mapa Kpotrov (and even also, and moreover
also to Sardis). — Tt obv 54; (why therefore, I pray?) Mas oby 84; (how now

_ then, how, I pray ?).

2. In general, 54 is very often used in order to render emphatic and define
more exactly, the word after which it stands: precisely, exactly, even (in English
often indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3,13. uéya gpovotcw, ©
Srt wemwal5evvrar 5} Kal mpds Ady Kal mpds Sibay Kal wpds pryos Kaptepeiv ( just
because they have been taught, because they have been taught, forsooth). P\. Prot.
320, a. dedids wep adbrod, uh diapSaph 8} bm’ "AAKBidSou (lest he should be cor-
rupted, forsooth). With adjectives and numerals, it has either a fimiting or en-
larging sense, according to the nature of the adjective or numeral, e. g. udvos
5% (quite alone), év Bpaxet 5H (in a very short time), doSevhs 54 (very weak),
wodAol 5h, wodAAdKis 54, npdricta 54 (the very best, confessedly the best). With
a pronoun, it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person or-
thiug as known, e. g. éxeivos 5%, that (well-known) man, ob 6) tadra éréAunoas ;
(did you especially, you of all others dare this 2?) ; ofrw 84, évratSa 54 ; so with other
interrogative pronouns, X.C.4. 4,10. «al rotos 84 cot, pn, obros 6 Adyos eotw ;
(what kind of reasoning, I ask, I pray ?). Eur. Med. 1012. +f 8} xarngets dupa
wal Saxpuppoeis; So Tl 3% wore; (what then in all the world?). Tis 5h obv;
(who then now, who I pray?). With an indefinite pronoun, it increases the in-
definiteness, e. g. Aor 84 (others, whoever they may be), dcos 54, drdcos 54, Sstis
5% (some one or other, any one whatever, nescio quis), Civ érdoov 8) xpdévorv (I know
not how long). With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies: (a) even,
precisely, e. g. &s 5h, iva &n, indeed, just exactly, just even; (b) truly, assuredly,
when a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. 4} 54, #
péra 8h, wal 5H, 54 wou, certainly indeed, assuredly, 0b 5% mov, yet surely
not at all, certainly not, y&p 8%, for surely.

3. Af#7 a, which is formed from 34, serves like 64, only in a higher degree,
to render prominent, and more exactly define the word, which stands before it.
It may be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether
it be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after interrogatives, e. g. th
BRT, ewecddv rodro yévnrat; (quid tum demum dicetis, quum hoc factum erit?). Tt
is also quite frequently employed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so).
Also, 4 3474, yes, forsooth, ob 8% ra (minime vero, no, by no means), w» BATA
(nay, do not), e. g. wh Bit a Spdoys TadTa; Kal SHTa (und forsooth, and truly).

4. The enclitic S4v is a Dorie particle. but it also eppears in the Epic lan:

490 | SYNTAX. . [$316

guage. In Homer, 4v has always an ironical sense, like the Attic d4mov,
without doubt, certainly. Il. B, 276, ob Shv mw wddw adtis dvioe Suds dyhvwp
veixeiew Bacirjas éveidelois éréecour.

5. AfSev (from 84 and Sfv) almost always expresses scorn, irony (scilicet,
truly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. .
6, 3. dweweudduny (Tov vidv), wéya ppovay, bri SH XEv Tis Bacirkéws Svyarpds
bWoluny Toy eudy vidy yauéerny (because, forsooth, I should see my son the husband of
the king’s daughter).

6. Ajmovdseyv (from d4rov and Ajy), I hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly
(nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. éya &, iy immevew uddw, bray wey em) Tod
trrov yévwuai, Ta TOD immoxevtavpov BhTovsev dSiampdtoua (I shall, as I hope,
act the part of a centaur).

7. Aatis a lengthened form of 34 (as vat of vf). It is used only in the
phrases ti 5af; was dal; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder (what then ?
how so? ain’ tu? itane? itane vero ?).

§316. B. Confirmative Adverbs.

1. Mfv (Dor. and Ep. udv) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as-
severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used adversatively: still, but. But it
cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another
word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles.
Its use with particles is as follows: (a) 7H why, surely, certainly, hence used
particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. 7a
more didwow avtois, 7) why ws pido kal mortots xphrecsat avrois (that he as-
~ suredly would treat them as friends).—(b) Ob why, wh why, truly, assuredly
not.—(c) Kal why, and indeed, yea surely, nay more. Pl. Phaed. 58, e. kat
BY eywye Savudow fraSov wapayevduevos. Kal why is often used, when a
new assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od.A,
582. kal wv Tdyradoy eciseidoy; so, often in the dramatic writers when atten-
tion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person: and see! andlo! Also
kal uv Kat, et vero etiam, and indeed too; kat whv obdé, and indeed not even.
—(d) "AAAG& phy, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a question, Ti
Phy; Tas phy; quid vero? quid quaeso? what indeed ? what I ask ?

Remark. Instead of w4v, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form péy,
which, as well as why and ydy, is found in Hom. also. Even in the Attic dia-
lect, w¢v is sometimes used instead of why, e. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4.
moTepa yvauns epya xplvers; Wpéwe: wey ra em wphercla yryvoueva yrouns epya
civa. This confirmative wév, instead of why, occurs in the following con-
nections: (a) Méyvrox expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses,
like vero, to denote a limitation; thus, kal wévTot, od wévTol, GAA pév-
Tot.—(b) Mevody or piv ody, sane quidem, quite certuinly, yea indeed, is
used, for the most part, only in replies, e.g. mdvu wtv ody; very often when
some correction is made. X. ©. 2.7, 5. oi mapa ool tovrwy ovdev émioravrat
mov; Tdavra wev ovv (but do those with you know nothing of these things ?
yes, everything, immo vero omnia). So od or wi) mevody, immo non.—(c)
Mevd% or wey 8%, quite certainly, yea indeed ; always in the phrases # wevdh,

$317.) EMPHATIC SUFFIXES 7rép, yé, rol. 491

ob} mevdh, AAA pevdh, wal pevdh, ye wév—SfF instead of v
etc. On the concessive prin see § $22, 3. 1 why Bh,
2.°H expresses confirmation ( profécto). In order to strengthen it, pv is
often joined with it. "H mou, surely indeed, often ironically, The Epic # rot
~ like 9, expresses assurance: surely, certainly.
3. N& in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or
scornful manner (like the Attic d#mov), indeed, jorsooth, certainly, nempe.

4, N#, the Lat. nae, expresses an asseveration, but only in uffirmative sen-
tences, e. g. vh Tov Ala, in truth, surely. — From rf is formed the lengthened vat
(as daf from 64), which has the same meaning, and is often used with nd. —
Md likewise denotes an asseveration; in affirmative sentences: val wa rdv
Ala; in negative: od wa rev Ala, But where pa Ala stands without a nega-
tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context
and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un-
derstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3.

§317. C. Emphatic suffixes wép, yé rot.

1. Mép is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb wép:,
through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of zép is through and
through (throughout). Tiép agrees with yé in that, like the latter, it gives empha-
sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from yé, in making the
emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the
idea) ; yé, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de-
noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common
Language, wép is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it
is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. dsmep, throughout, en-
tirely, the very same who, Scostep, altogether as great as, precisely as great, otés wep,
entirely, exactly of such a character as, etc., &rov wep, just where, wherever, dSev
mep, just whence, whence soever, Ews rep, up to the very time, as far as, until, érel wep,
since, éreidh wep, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, efrep, if indeed, if even. In Eng.
the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word
to which they belong. ts

2. ré denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren-
ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others; it may be used either to
augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. éyé ye (I indeed, I for my part,
however it may be with others), ov ye, odtds ye, moAAd ye, OAlya ye, etc. It
depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic.
In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete
the preceding statement. Thus, 6sye, who or which indeed, who certainly, qui
quidem ; &smep ye, just as indeed ; efye, if indeed, if however, siquidem ; after
adversative conjunctions: kairo: ye, AAA ye, etc., and yet indeed (like
quamquam quidem, verum quidem), yé makes an antithesis prominent, since it
defines more exactly, limits or corrects what precedes. X. C. 1. 2,3. kaflro:

492 - SYNTAX. [§ 318.

ye ovderdémore brécxeto SiddoKados elvat To’Tov (CERTAINLY Socrates made his
pupils useful men, ALTHOUGH, etc.). Té is very often used in replies and answers,
in order to indicate that they either confirm, augment, complete, limit, or
correct, the thought contained in the preceding question.

3. Tof (enclitic) means surely, certainly, certe, and serves also to eine an
object marked and prominent. It is often connected with pronouns, e. g. éyé
tot, &yayé Tot, L surely, I most certainly, jucis to, radtd trot. It is particularly
employed in quoting general propositions and proverbs, since by it an assertion
is referred to a general truth and thereby confirmed. Theogn. 74. radpol 701
ToAAGY moto Zxovor vdov. With adversative particles, e. g. kaltot, tamen,
quamquam (properly and surely), wévtot, tamen (§ 316, Rem.), adrdp rot,
&AAd Tot, but certainly. Also, of ror (uno), certainly not, ydp ro1, for
indeed, for certainly, #701 — %, still stronger #701 ye— %, either indeed — or.

§ 318. D. Negative Particles oix and py.

1. Od (like its compounds, e. g. obdé, of re, od8els, etc.) is an objective
negative ; uw subjective, i.e. ov is used when something is denied absolutely,
independently, by itself (objectively); 4% (and its compounds), on the contary,
when something is denied in reference to the conception, view, or will of the
speaker or of some other person (subjectively). Both are commonly placed before
the words to which the negation is to be applied. On the position after the
word to be negatived, see § 15, 4.

2. Hence oi« stands: (a) in all sentences containing a direct assertion, wheth-
er these are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in subor-
dinate clauses with 8r. and das (that); (c) in simple interrogative clauses,
both direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate clauses denoting time, with 87 e,
éme:d%h, etc.; (e) the ground or reason, with 671, d:d71, éwel, etc.; (f) the
consequence, with sre either with the Ind. or Opt.; (g) in adjective clauses,
with 8s, 8sris, etc., which denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation ;
(h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word ina
sentence, €. g. ob ayadds, ob Kax@s; in this case od sometimes changes the
idea of the word to an opposite sense.

(a) Todro ob yiyvera, ob éyévero, ob yevhoetat. Tatra oibK by yiyvorro.
—(b) Of8a, Sri radra obn eyéveto. “Edeyev, S71 TodTO ovx ovTws exer. —
(c) Tis od« aioxdvera (or odk dy aicxtvorTo) Kaki Aéywr Tov GyaSdy wy5pa.;
— Ap’ ob SavudCes roy Swxpdrn ;— Od Spdoeis rovTo; —Ow mepueveis (§ 255,
4).— ys, } of; or ys, 0d grs;—Aétov, ef (whether) ob x Huapres Tadra
Aégas. On the dependent double question, see No. 3.— (d) “Ore otk HASOv
of moreutot, of “EAAnves jobxaCov.—(e) “Or: of BdpBapa obx ArrhS&noav, of
“EAAnves Ta bpn od KaTéAumov. — (f) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. taxd 74 Snpla avnrdxer
(Kipos), ste 6°Aotudyns ob ér eTxev adrG svdddyew Snpla. — (g) *Avip,
dv obk eldes. “Avhp, dv odK dy Savud Cos.

3. M4 on the contrary, stands: (a) with commands, warnings; hence with the

§ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES otk AND 47. A93

Imp. and with the imperative Subj.; (b) with wishes and exhortations; (c) in
deliberative questions [§ 259, 1. (b)]; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with tva
ete. (also with 8rws and the Indic. Fut.) ; (€) in conditional clauses, with ei with
the Indic. or Opt., édv, Stay, émdy, Ews &v with the Subj., dre ye = siqui-
dem ; so also in subordinate clauses which denote a repetition, whether they are
introduced by a temporal conjunction, or by ¢, édv, or by the relative, ete. ;
(f) in clauses denoting consequence or result, with &sre and an Inf.; (g) in
adjective clauses with 8s, 8s7«s, ete., which imply a condition or purpose, in
general when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only asa
conception, supposition ; henee when the idea of a class or species as such is more
precisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive
(= ita comparatus, ut); (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive
question (whether — or not), ob as well as ph is used. Pl. Phaed. 70, d. cxepd-
peda, ctr’ dpa év Gov eioly ai Wuxal TeAcvTNTdyTwY Tay dvSpéTayr, elre Kal od,
Crit. 48, b. oxerréoy, wérepov dixaioy cut evdévde mweipaoda eiévar, wh apiévtwy
*ASnvalwv, } od Sikaov. Pl. Rp. 339, a. ei GAnSés (0 Adyes), } wh, rerpdoouc
padeiv. Phil. 21, b. rodr’ adrd, ci H xalpers, } mh xalpes, avdynn Shwov ce
&yvociv, kevév ye bvta wdons ppovhcews. Isae. 5, 14, ob Set buds ex Tay TOU Ka-
Trydpov Adywy Tods Adyous karapavSdveiy, ei KadGs buiv Kewvra, } wh, GAN éx
Tav véuwy Tods Tod KaTnydpou Adyous, ei SpSas Suds Siddiover Td mpayya, 7} 08.
But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely a distinction between what
is, and what is not, uh is used, when the predicate of the first member ts not repeated,
but must be supplied ; but 0% as well as «4, when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. § 142.
AoyloacSe mpds buds abrods, rl re cvuBhoera Kareyngiocpévors Sui Tod vduov Kat rh
uh. X.C.3.6,10.olcSa, érdca te pvdatad élcupol cio cal dréoa uh, Kat drdoa
Te povpod ixavol eciot Kal drdéoo wh «ict. Aesch. 1, 27.6 vopodérns diapphdnv
amédecter, obs xph Inunyopeiv Kad ods ob Set Aéyew ev TH Shuw. —Mf is also used
in direct and indirect interrogative sentences, which express fear, anxiety on the
part of the inquirer, and hence require a negative answer; (i) in forms of
swearing, and not seldom when one swears that something shall not happen, but
sometimes also, when one swears that something has not happened ; in the latter
case, the feeling by which the denial or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted
by wh.
(a) Ma ypdpe, wh ypdins (§ 259, 5).—(b) EWSe wh ypdpois!—M} rodro
yévorro ! — M 9) Youev! —Mh ypdpwuev!—(c) Pl. Symp. 213, a. GAAd por AE
vere, eisiw, 2) uh; cvumleode, } of; Rp. 337, b. was Ayers; wh Gmroxplywpas ;
(shall I not answer thee?).—(d) Aéyw, tva ph mois. —(e) Ei wh Adyes. —
"Edy wh Aéyns.—“Oray taira wh yévnta. Pl. Prot. 345, ¢. ts av wh Kane
moc} éxdy, TobTwy gnolw émawérns elva (as often as one does not willingly do evil,
ete.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. ef (8re) uh BAA Tt omovdadtepoy mpdrroev, TabTy TH
maida éxpavro (as often as, whenever, they were not engaged in more important busi-
ness). — (f) Pl. Phaed. 66, d.7d cOma juas exmarfrre Sst e wh Sdvacdau br’ abrod
kaSopayv raandés.—(g) Pl. Ap. 21. & wh d1da, 0888 ofouar eidévar (= ef Twa wh
ola). Hence Sr ph, unless, nisi (properly oddty Sr: wh, then generally insfead of
el uh), Scot wh, except those who not. Her.1,32. év TG waxpd xpdvr WodAd wév Core
42

494 SYNTAX. [$ 318.

idéew, Ta (= &) wh Tes ED€AEt (multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see many
things of sucha nature that he would not wish to see). Andoc. 3, 41. dnoloacde
To.adta, €& Gy wndémwore tyiv perapedhoe. — (h) M% réSvncev 6 warhp;
(my father is not dead, is he? = is it not to be feared that my father is dead 2).

SoPodua, wh 6 warhp ré3vynxev; (I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to.
know whether my father is dead). Mh dpdoets todro; (you will not do this, will

you?). M% SeAol éoducda; (we shall not be cowards, shall we? shall we be. cow-

ards?), M% vooeis;*Apa wh voocis; (you are not sick, are you?).—(i) Ar.

Keel. 999. wd thy Agpodirny .. wh yd o aphow (I will not let you go, the thing
shall not be). Aor. 194. wi yfv.. wh ya vénua koubdsrepor Hrovod mw, Beware!
I have not listened. M4 is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, 18. durdw
duly Seobs Erayras kal rdoas unde & euol idia bwécxeTo SeddSns Exew.

Remark 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), od is used
when a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e. g. Od paper;
negemus ? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. AaBdvTes ekaxisxiAlovs Tay ‘EAAGvwr, of ev Tals
aitav odx olol F Foav Civ (nequirent); hence in the combinations odde)s
Sstis ov; ODdEVdS BTOV Od, etc. (§ 332, Rem. 12); so also in odx% @o8’
Saws ov; for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a single word, like
nullus non. Ei ov S@ceu (recusabit). Dem. Cor. 320, 283, &s7 0d pepviic-
Sat (= oblivisci), Moreover «i can stand with od, when the clause takes the
place of a causal sentence. ;

Rem. 2. On obx &y Aéyois radra, instead of wh Adye, see § 260, 2. (4) (b);
on 0? dpdceis Todro (instead of wh Spdons) and od dSpdoes Todt; (= do this
indeed), see 4 255, 4.

4. M7 is regularly used with the Inf’ But after verbs of thinking: ofouat, vo-
ul, drorauBdvw, Sor, as well as after nul and &kotw, ob is commonly used,
since the Infinitive (Acc. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an affirma-
tion ; much more seldom after other verba putandi et dicendi. When, however,
these verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con-
struction which requires uh, then ph follows.

Pl. Theat. 152, b. eixds copdy &vipa wh Anpey. X. C.2.1,3.7d wh dedyew
tovs mévous. 1.1, 20. Savud(w, brws wort émeladSnoav “ASnvaio. Swxpdrny
wept Tovs Seodvs uh owppoverv. An. 7, 6, 18. duviw buiv,sun® & euod idig
bmésxeto SevSns exew. X. C.1.1, 19. (of wordAol) ofovrar rods Seovs 7a udy
eldévat, T2 8 obn €idévat, 2.4. TadTHy Thy Ekw (vivendi rationem) Thy Ths Wuxis
emmérdciay ovK eumodifey py. 1. 15. mictebwy Seois mas ovK ely Seods
évourCev; X.C. 4.8.2. dbuodrovyetra: obbSéva mw Tay uvnuovevouevwr dy-
Spérwv nddAdAov Sdvaroy éveyxeiv. More frequently w%4, as: Isocr. Phil. 109.
@pmoAdyouv undevds mémore TooovTov mpdyuaros Siayapreiv. Id. Dem. 22.
vource mndeéy civ tay dvSpwnlywy BéBaor.

Rem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in-
stead of the Inf., then either odx« or «7 may be used, according to the nature
of the clause into which the substantive or the substantive adjective may be
resolved, e. g. Ar. Eccl. 115. dewdy 8 eoriy i wh eumerpla (=i wh tls éc-
Tw tumetpos). Th. 1, 137. ypdvas rhv rev yepupay ob SidaAvoty (= Sr or
ds |that| al yépupa ob diedAvdnoar).

$318] NEGATIVE PARTICLES odk AND 7). 495

Rem. 4. With some verbs, e. g. pdvat, olerSat, &ftotv, briaxyveita-
Sas, the negative, which properly refers to the Inf., is usually joined with the
finite verb, thus of pms, like nego, I deny, refuse. X. An. 1. 3, 1. of orparia-
ra odKn Epacarv idvat tov mpdow (negaverunt se ituros esse). Th. 2, 89. Euvexda-
eva (iuas), obK GEidy Ta wh Bewa ev dppwdlq Exew (desiring that you should .
not fear what is not to be feared).

5. With the participle or adjective, 44 is used only when these can be re-
solved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which
requires uf; in all other ¢ases, od is used. Ob dSuvduevos, one who cannot, or is
unable, od Bovdduevos, nolens, od« dvarykaiov, unnecessary, ta ob Kadkd Bovded-
para, turpia consilia; 6 ob maretwy (one who does not believe, is qui non credit, or
quum (since) non credit, or quia non credit); 5 ob gdocopay (is qui non philoso-
phatur); 6 wh moredwy (if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4,
15. obros yap éddéxer wat mpdrepoy ToAAa Hdn GANSedoa ToadTa, Ta BvTa TE ds
byra, kal Te wh dvTa ds odK BvTa (if anything was not, he represented it as not
being). So ‘H codla tay dewey Kal wh Sewer avdpela eorw, Pl. Odd ce rabra
ov wohoavta. “Hyyeivkc Thy wéAWw od ToAtopKndcioav. Protag. 360, d. used
in philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary 7a@ od dewd
objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2,7. bv av yraor Suvduevoy piv xdpw
&modiSdvat, 2} amrodiddvra St, koAd(over TodTov iaxupas (= édy Twa KTA.) (whoever
they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it, they, etc.). 3.1, 16.
al yap bv .. xphoar’ ay tis iaxupe 7 avipelw wh cdhppon (= ci wh odppwv elm).

6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. any
one, any how, any where, at any time, ever, etc., these are all expressed negatively.
These negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each other, as they
do not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is to be considered inde-
pendent. The negatives must be of the same kind, i. e. either compounded
of od« or wh. Double negatives in Latin, English, and the modern languages,
destroy each other, but not in Greek.

Pl. Rp. 495, b. opecpd ptois oddtv péya oddéroTreE ovdEva ob Te iiasTHy
ore wédw dp& (a mean nature never does ANYTHING noble either for ANY private _
individual or for the State). Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (7d kaddv) d wndémore aic-
xpy pndapod under) pavetra (which never ANYWHERE seems to ANY ONE
displeasing). Lysid. 214, d. 6 xaxds of’ GyadG, ot Te Kkax@ ovdérorTe eis
&dn99 prAlay %pxerat. In like manner the simple negative (ov, «4), which in
this case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its
- compounds that neither lose their force; hence od« torw oddé€y (there is not
anything, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts are joined with the nega-
tive whole, e. g. Ob divara oF7 €b Adyew oT €b woreiy rods pidous, he can
neither —nor ; in like manner also 043¢, wndé, not even, ne — quidem, are used
in a negative sentence, e.g. 0% divarar ob Se viv eb rarely Tods pldrous (he ts not
able, not even now, to benefit his friends).

Rem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negative, when
it refers to both, is usually placed with the Part., though only when the Part.

precedes the verb. Th. 1, 12. werd 7a Tpwikd 4 ‘EAAGs é71 petaviotaro Kal Kar-
wxl(ero, Sste ph havxdoaca adtndjvas (i.e. dste wh jovxdom wal wh

496 SYNTAX. {§ 318.

abtnSiva). Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong-

ing to the whole sentence, and not to a single word.

7. Od} wh with the Subj. or Fut. Indicative, is elliptical, since with ot« a
verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup-
plied, and u# must be referred to this verb. Hence od wf is used, when the
idea to be expressed is, it is not (od) to be feared that (uh) something will happen,
€. g: od (PoBodua) uh yévntat TovTo (NON vereor, NE hoc fiat, this CERTAINLY
will not happen). Pl. Crit. 46, ¢. ed te81, 71 0d wh cor kvyxwphow (be assured,
that I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. be assured, that I certainly shall
not make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Fut.
Indicative. Ar. Nub. 505. 0d wh Aadrhoes, GAA’ akodrovdhaes euot; I shall not
expect that you will talk = do not talk (§ 255, 4).

8. After verbs and expressions of fear, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, —
denying, hindering, abstaining,— preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf.
with the negative wf commonly follows instead of the Inf. without mf, the
Greek repeating with the Inf. the negative idea implied in these words, for the
purpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This use of uh
is sometimes regarded as pleonastic; but it is entirely in accordance with the
frequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of
increasing the negative force of the sentence; hence, when a negatiye was
contained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with
the Inf. that followed. ;

KwAtw ce uh tadta moeiv (I prevent you from doing this). Her. 3, 128.
Aapeios Amayopetver duiv wh dopupopeew Opolrea (Darius forbids you to act as
a body guard to Oroetes). 66. 6 Wipntdomrns @Eapvos hv wh awonreivas Spépdw
(denied that he killed Smerdis). Th. 3, 6. ris uév Saddoons eTpyor uh xphoda
Tovs MuirvAnvatovs. 5, 25. améaxXovro Bh em thy éxarépwy viv otparedoa
(they abstained from marching into the country of each other). (But aioxdvopat
ph moiety 7 signifies, J am ashamed Nor to do something, X. An. 6. 5, 4.)

Rem. 6. When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed
by uf with the Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), w7 must be considered as an interrogative,
numne, whether not, and may often be translated by that ;' e. g. déd0.Ka, wh azo-
Sdvy (metuo, NE moriatur, I fear whether he will not die =-.that he will die) ; ée-
Boikew, wy amwoddva: (metuebam, NE moreretur) ; déSoixa, wh TédSvnKev (NE mor-
tuus sit, I fear whether he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is
dead). On the contrary, 7} od with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after
the above expressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not
take place, or has not taken place; e. g. Séd0:xa, mh obK amroddvyn (NE NON mo-
riatur, I fear that he will not die); @Sedolxeiv, wh odKn GmoSdvor (NE NON morere-
tur, I feared that he would not die); dé5o.Kna, wh ob Té3vnkev (NE NON mortuus
sit, that he is not dead).

_’ In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear,
that something will take place, and the hope that it will not. This double idea
both the Greek and Latin seem to indicate by using a negative after verbs of
fear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea
of fear only is expressed in English, the negative is rendered that. Hence Aéda-
Ka, 7) Gmrosdyy (metuo, NE moriatur, I fear that he will die, but hope that he will not).

§ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES ovK AND p17. 497

9. Even when, instead of the Inf., the conjunctions 87, és with the finite
verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated
in the dependent subordinate clause by od.

X. R. Ath. 2,17 &pvetoSasr rots tAdos, bri od wapiy (to deny to others that
he was present). Pl. Meno. 89, d. dr: 8 odm forw emorhun, onda, edy cor
Sox@ eixdtws Awiaorety (but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt that
this is knowledge), Dem. Onet. 871,14. ds © ob« éxeivos eyedpye: Thy viv, ot
ddivar’ &pyns vas (he could not deny that he cultivated the land). Isoc. Archid.
§ 48. obdels dy ToAuhoeey dvterwety, ds od Thy eumeiplay wadAAOV Ta LAAwY
Exouev.

Rem. 7. So even after od ~&AAoyv (or when the clause in which paAdov
stands, has a negative sense), ov is sometimes used, which in English is pleo-
nastic. Comp. the French, where after a Comparative que ne is regularly
used, e. g. Il donne ies que vous n’ avez donné, for the purpose of giving em-

hasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained
in the Comparative (the gift of one is different from, not like that of the other).
Her. 4, 118. fee 6 Mépons obSév Tt uGAAOY em juéas, } od Kal em dueas
(does not come against us more than against you). X.H.6.3,15.7¢ obv de¢ (= ob Sez)
éxeivoy Toy xpdvoy avapéve, Ews ky brd TAHSOuS kak avelmwpev, uaAAor, }) aod xX
&s tdxioTa Thy eiphyny roincacsa ; in Th. 3, 36. the negation is contained in uerd-
vod Tis Hv abtots (they repented = they no longer approved). ThAhv od is some-
times used in a similar manner. X. R. L. 15, 6. €dpas wdvres iraviocrayta Bactreis,
wAhv ov Fpopor (all the kings rise from their seat, except the ephori).

10. M% ov with the Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive without nega-
tion, with the expressions mentioned in No. 8. when the negative od or
another word which may be considered a negative, precedes uh od. My od is
here merely equivalent to the simple «4, and hence is not expressed in English
where uf would not be (comp. No. 8, above).

Ovdty Kwdrdvet ce wh obK GmoSaveiv (nothing hinders you to die, from
dying). X.An.3.1,13. ef yernoducda em) Baoirci, rl éumodav (= ovdty eu-
modav) wh odx) (huds) bBpiCouévous &modaveiv (what hinders us from dying after
being treated with insult); Vect. 3,7. 0b Sésermls eipe 7d pH OX) mpodd-
pws by Tovs TwoAlras eis TA ToLradTa eispépew (I am not without hope that the citizens
would contribute for such purposes). Cy, 2. 2, 20. aioxpdyv (= ob Kadrdv) dy
avridéye, wh od XL Ty TAcioTa Kal TovodyTa Kal @pedovyTa Td Kody, TODTOY
Kat peylorwrv af.wtcsa.

Rem. 8. It is seldom in this case that uf is used instead of wh od with the
Inf. With the real negative expressions, 0d divapmai, GSbvaTos, odX ofds
7 ciuljobdeula unxavh eors (=o duvarév eotiyv), od weldw, ovX
boidv éotiyv, ovw eixds éortiy (it is not probable), of pnt, and the like,

‘and also such as &vota, avénrdéy éori, the following Inf. is actually made
negative by the accompanying 4% od (sometimes also by uA alone), since the
above expressions, when separated from the negative connected with them (or
the @ privative), have no negative force. Ov divaua wh ov morety (non pos-
sum non facere, I cannot not do, i.e. I must do). X. Apol. 34. otre wh weuvijodae
Sivauae avTod, ofre weuynuévos wh ovK exawveiv (1 must think of him, and if I
think of him I must praise him). Pl. Rp. 427, e. oddtv Adyeis+ od yap bwéoxou
(nthcew, as odx Baidv co dv wh Od Bondeiv Sucaocrvy cis Sivauw mayth
Tpémw (since it would not be right for you Nor to render assistance). Her.7,5, 00%

42*

5 ew ED eee ee ee ie nS _
o. ~~ 7 _

498 Hy SYNTAX. eee [§ 319.

eixds €or “ASnvalovs epyacauévous TOAAa H5n Kad Tlépoas, wh 0d Sodvat di-
kas, Tay (= vy) éroinoay (it is not right that. the Athenians should Nor atone for
their injustice). Pl. Symp. 218, ¢. rdvu dvdnrov qyotpa elval gor wh od Kar
rodTo xaplCecSa: (non sanum judico tibi hoc NON gratificari). O8 nut Toiro wy
ofrws txew (NEGO id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so).— Also after the
expressions Beivdy elvai, aicxpdv, aioxuyny elvat, aioxvverdar,
which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with 4% 0¥, when it is to be
made negative. X. An. 2. 8, 11. &ste wacow aicxdynyv elvat, wy ovxh
_ cvorovdd ew (so that all were ashamed [= none. were willing] Nor to be busy). —
Sometimes ~} od occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the
sense of if not, except, instead of the usual ph. Pl. Sys. 212, d. ob gor: pidov
Te pidodvtt ovdev wh ovK ayTipidrody (nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover,
except that which returns love). .

SECTION II.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. —

CHAPTER VI.
§ 319. A. Coédrdination.

When two or more sentences stand in a close connection

with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distin-
guished. They are either so related to one another as to
exhibit ‘a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure,
independent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise,
Plato also was very wise; or so, that they are wholly uni-

ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one |

being the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the
spring comes the roses bloom. The first kind of connection
is called Coérdination, the last Subordination, and the sen-
tences Coérdinate and Subordinate. In coérdinate sen-
tences, therefore, the members are independent of each

other, but in subordinate sentences, one member is de-

pendent on the other.
ferbehs § came, I saw, I conquered. —Co6rdinate. — -
When I came, I conquered. — Subordinate.

Sy ladies Seat a ii eb -

PVeY eT Oe eee Ps Dk ee

-§§ 320, 321.) copuLaTive COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499

Remark 1. The codrdinate as well as the subordinate conjunctions are
roperly used only to connect whole sentences ; but when several sentences
1ave single members in common, these commou members are usually expressed
but once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the
subject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed but once; or
there is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own
separate subject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed
only with the subject of one sentence. Of “EAAnves tots woAculos éxédev-
TO Kal Kad@s éuaxéoavTo. Swxpdrns cal MAdrwv cool joa. Oi wiv “EA-
Anves mapa roy motaudy, of 5& Mépaoa ev dpeow eotpatumedetcarTo.

Rem. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coérdinate
sentences are alike ; they are all iesetan grammatically as principal sentences ;
but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different.
For every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought,
can be expressed in a coérdinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear-
liest use of language, e. g. Td fap jade, kal Ta pdda avSe?, instead of Fre 7d
fap HAD, ap. &. (the spring came and the roses bloom, instead of when the spring
has come the roses bloom).

§ 320. Different forms of Coérdination.

Codrdination consists either in expanding, contrasting, or ez-
cluding a thought. The first is called copulative coérdination, _
the second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences also
which stand in a causal relation to each other, may be codrdi-
nate, and are called causal coordinate sentences.

r §321. L Copulative Coérdination.

4 1. A copulative codrdinate sentence is one in which two or more thoughts

which are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex-

pressed in the codrdinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the.
‘preceding sentence. A copulative codrdinate sentence is cither annexive or
enhansive ; in the formef, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre-
ceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more
force to the second member than to the first. An annexive codrdinate sentence

is made: — .

(a) By «af, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic ré, que, and;
«al and ré have, in general, the same difference of meaning as ef and que.

Kai connects members of a sentence equally important, or those in which the
_ one following is stronger than the one preceding; hence it often strengthens or.
enhances the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of it

(ac, atque, et quidem); + é appends some addition which belongs to the preceding
member ; in prose, words are seldom. connected by a simple +é, but sentences

much oftener.— (b) in a more emphatic and definite manner by ckaf—ral,

et — et, both —and, not only — but also, more seldom by 7 é—ré; the difference
between the two in this case is, that with the former (xaf— «al) the single

members appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (ré — 7é) ;

500 SYNTAX. | [§ 321. |

hence the former is used, when the members are of different kinds or are anti-
thetic; — (¢) by ré—x al, both —and, not only — but also, when it is to be indi-
cated that the connected members stand in an ¢ntimate connection with each
other; by the stronger «af, the second member is emphatically joined to the —
first ; they often correspond with the Lat. quwm — tum, when the discourse pro-
ceeds from the general to the particular and more important.

Swxpdrns cad TlAdrwy copol joav. Pl. Apol. 23, a. 7 dvSpamlyn copia dAtyou
twos atla éor) nal oddevds. So woAAd kat wovnpd, TOAAG Kal weydra; hence
kal radra, and that too. X.An. 3. 2,16. &reipor dvres réy woreuloy 74.7 € TARSOS
%uerpov dpavres, Buws eroauhoare iéva cis abrots. Pl. Phaedr. 267, a. Tictay 5€
Topylay 7 € édoouer ebdew ; —“AvdSpwror kat ayadol rat xaxos (but not cat carol
xa mwovnpot). Kal méynres kal maovow. Kal xphuara kal avdpes. Kal viv
kal Gel. Kal mpata kal torara. X. C. 1. 2, 4. (Swxpdrns) tod ocduaros
abtdés Te OdK HuéAcL, TOUS T ducdodvyTas ovK emjve. Kadds Te kal dwyadds. In
antitheses: "AyaSd te kal Kaxd (the good as well as the evil), xpnorol re Kal
movnpol, Td Te Epya duolws Kal of Adyot. TloAAd Te Kal Kadrd Epya amedeltaro,
Her. 6, 114. woAAol te Kal odvouacrol. ~“AAAo Te Kal Bwxpdrys (quum alii,
tum, S.). Her. 6, 136. Miariadéa %oxov ev orduatt of te BAA Kal wdAoTAa
EdvSirmos. Hence &AAws te kal (quum aliter, tum, not only in other respects,
but also), especially (but &%AAws te without kal signifies praetereaque, adde i
quod, i. e. and especially). The connection is expressed still more strongly by
TrTé—xkal 5} nal (quum—tum vero etiam). Pl. Rp. 357, a. 6 Taadeov del re
avSpeidtaros dy ruyxdver mpds G&mavra, kal 5h Kal téte TO} Opacvpdxov Thy
amdppnow (desperationem) od &medétaro. —It is to be observed that, after dua,
Hn, ow, od pSdyw and the like, a codrdinate clause with nal or ré— kal often —
follows, instead of a subordinate clause with re. X. An. 7, 4, 16. #3n Te did
Tod dpdpov epalvero ip, Kal Sravds onualve th oddmyy (the fire already began
to appear through the roof, anp [when] Silanus gives notice with his trumpet). Isoer.
Paneg. 119 dua fects te rhs apxis areotepodueda, Kal Tois “EAAnow apxh Tay
kakay éylyvero.

Remark 1. Kat has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands
at the beginning of a question, where the interrogator takes up, with surprise,
the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul-
lity or absurdity of the other’s statement. X. Cy. 4. 3,11. aAN elmo: tis &y,
br. maides bytes eudvSavoy ;—Kal wérepar waides cio ppoviswrepor, Sste pavetv Te
ppaCdueva kad derxvimeva, 7) dvdpes; = ac multo minus prudentes sunt. So espe-
cially kal r@s; Pl. Ale. 1, 134, ¢. ddvairo &y Tis peradiddvat, 6 wh exer; —Kal
TOs ; = ac minime quidem.

Rem. 2. If more than two numbers succeed each other, they are connected -
in the following manner: (a) with the first member the connective is omitted,
and the other members are annexed by xal repeated; (b) eal—xai—rkal,
ete.; (c) ré—Té—Té, etce.; (d) ré—xnai—x«al, ete. X. Cy. 1.4, 7. apxrol
Te WorAOVs HOn TWANidoavtas diepRerpay Kal A€ovres Kal Kdmpoi Ka) wapddArcis*
ai Se EAapor wal dopxddes ead oi dypia dies Kad of vor oi wypion Gowwels elo; (e)
Té—rTé, ete., eal (Bic Od. y, 413. Exéppwv Te Srparios re TMepoeds 7°
“Apyntés T€ Kal avtiseos @pacvuhdyns. (f) TE—Té kal—xat, etc. (seldom) X.
C. 2.2, 5. yuh brodetauéevn T € pepe: Td Hopriov TovTo, Bapuvouevyn TE Kat KivduvEd-
ovoa..kal..kal xrA. After eal two members, considered, as it were, one

ee

$321.) COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501

whole, can follow with ré eit, Her. 7. 1. (éwérate éxdorow:) ca véas Te

wat oirov «al wdoia, X. An. 4. 4,2. (xdun) weyddan te fv Kal Baclradv re
elxe 76 catpdrn, «al em rails tAcloras olxlais Tipoas érqjoav. — But cal—ré
are never used as corresponding particles, in Attic Greek; where they are
found in this position, the member introduced by ré, is subjoined only as a mere
addition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. KoplvSiot wey xparfoayres .. kal kv
Spas txovres aixuardrous ode éAdocous xiAlwv, vais Te ( praetereaque) Karadv-
cayres wep €BdoutjKovta tatncay Tpowaiov. AS ieeaoeatie, likewise, is kai—
7 é used in the sense of etiamque.

Rem. 3. Asan enclitic, 7 é must always rest upon a preceding word, and indeed
on that word, to which ré specially belongs in the member to be connected. But
where the article, the attributive genitive and prepositions are used, ré commonly
stands between these and the word it connects, e.g. rd re dapa, wept re eiphyns
kal woAguov, Zwxpdtovs te copla Kal dpe. If ré belongs to the whole
sentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 123.
oirwes tpevydv Te Tov mdyvta xpdvov Tos Tupdyvous, éx unxaviis TE THS TOUTMY
etéAuroy of Meootparida: thy tupavvida. It is, also, often joined to the predi-
cate of the sentence, if that precedes, although it would stand after another
word. X. C. 3. 5,3. (qua re) woddol érapduevaa tpotpémwovtal re aperis
erimedciada cal BAxiuor yiyveodat (instead of aperijs te ér.).

Rem. 4. In the Epic writers (and in imitation of these in the Lyric writers
also, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic writers in only a few
fragments), ré is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative pro-
nouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the mutual relation
and intimate connection between the corresponding members (as well —as,
as—so). This ré either stands in both of the members, in which case the first
ré refers to the following member, anticipating it, as it were, and the second
refers back to the preceding; or. more frequently it stands in only one of the
corresponding members; thus often eftep Te—7é, or etwmep—Té; mév TE
—dé re or &AAd Te, as on this side, so on that, or wév—SE Te (GAA Te);
pév tTe—Sé (&AAd); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and

be supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus 5é Te, &AAG Te, also
often without the corresponding péy: 8¢é—7é; ré—3é; ré—adrdp; then

xal te, atque, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in

what precedes (not only — but also). Il. ¢, 509. roy 8 wey Svnoav, kal 7 Exdvov
ebtapevowo. Also 8sre, he, who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in-
_ Herodotus), 8stis re, ofds Te, Boos Te (= Tots, ofos ; Téaos, boos, of such
a nature, so great, as much as), &s tT €, so as, so that, Ssel re, Gre, Hite, Imws
re, bre Te, then, when, 631 Te, tva Te, there, where. In Attic prose, the fol-

lowing combinations still remain, viz., of6s 7 é eis with the Inf., signifyin
Tam in the condition, &st« (so that), dseire and €sre (i.e. és 6 te), quoad.

- Moreover, éwe{re, postquam, as used by Herodotus, should also be mentioned.

Rem. 5. . Kaf is originally an adverb, also, even, etiam. But the idea of

- emphasis which is expressed by kat, also, even, necessarily supposes a reference
- to another clause, e. g. cal 6 Swxpdrns Taira trctev (sc. od pdvov of UAAoi, OF

ésmep xal of HAA). According to the nature of the corresponding member to

be supplied, the emphatic «a{ may have either a strengthening (even, yet, entirely,

ete.) or a weakening force (even only, only even), e. g. Kat nataryeAgs mou (you
~ even laugh at me). Kal ov radra trckas (even you said this); — Kal padAAov ty
?

rather), wai tpls, kal xdpra, (very much), Kat mdvv, Kal words (not m

kal oAlyov, Kal uixpdy (but litle), Kal mas—kat mddat (even long ago), nar
xsés, kal adrixa, kal viv or &n Kal vov—Kkal &s, cal ofrws (vel sic), —
ka) udvos, ka) efs. With questions, e.g. Dem. Phil. 1,53. rf xp «al mpos-
Boxav; (what is only to be expected even?) (=nihil plane expectandum est)
In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this caf often introduces an apodosis,
and may then be translated by immediately. Il. a, 478, juos 3 ahpryevew

502 | SYNTAX. : [§ 321.

pdvn pododdxrvros "Has, xa) ré7 exert’ dvdyovto meta otpatdy eipby *Axaav.
The use of «af in sueh concluding clauses, shows that the two clauses are co-
ordinate, and «af may be said to have its usual connective force, though that
force cannot well be expressed in English.

2. If the annexive codrdinate sentences are negative, they are connected : —

(a) By o08€ (un5é), not — nor, when a negative member precedes ; (b) by
Kal ov (kal uw), and not, when an affirmative member precedes; this is the
regular form in Attic prose; but in the Ionic and poetic writers od5¢ or pydé
can also be used here; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by o#re
—otre (ufre—pnhrte), neque — neque (neve—neve), neither—nor; (d) by
o¥re—ré (seldom nat), neque—et, —on the one hand not —and on the other ;
as not — so also. ‘y :

X. An. 1.4, 8. ob« tywye abtods didtw, oD epe? ovddels, ds Cyd adrods xaxds
woe. C. 3.7, 9. Siarelvou wadAov mpds Td cavTG mposéxew, kal wh auerc cov
tis wéAews. Dem. Cor. 254, 85. patvoum eye xdpitos TetvxnKds TéTE Kad Od
péuyews oVSE tiuwplas. Th. 3, 14. ewautvare ..xal wh mpdénode judas. Pl.
Lysid. 207, e. e@ow tpa ce & BovAE moreity Kal oddéev emimArHTTOVEW, OVE
diaxwAvovot Toety ay dy émiuufs. —Otvre Seol, of re tvSpwro. — X. An. 2.
2, 8. dmoray .. mATE Tpoddcew GAAHAovs ciumaxol Te ~ocoSa. 5,1, 6. ot re
ayopa. éotw ikavh, } Te xXeépa wodreuia. Th. 1, 118. of Aaxedamdvior aicddp-
evot odte exwdAvoy, €i wh em) Bpaxd, novxaldy Te Td TAEOY TOD Xpdvov.

Rem. 6. The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly
to poetry, viz, o¥re—ovd, ob —otre; Te oV—7TE; OU TE—Te ov; in the
two last forms od combines with the verb and forms, as it were, one thought.
Th. 2, 22. °ExxAnolay Te ov erote.., Thy Te TWéAW éptdAacce (he called no
assembly and guarded the city); 1, 126. o§ re éxeivos @rt Katevdénoe, 76 TE
payreioy ovK edhA0v; 0} Te—od5E, neither — and not, which is found often in

prose also.

Rem.7. Ovdé¢ expresses either an antithesis (but not), or it serves to con-
nect a new clause (and not, not even). When 0+8¢€—ov6¢€ follow one another,
they are not to be considered correlative particles and translated neither — nor,
but are to be translated not. even—and not. X. C. 3.12, 5. ed yap tod, ote
ovde ev BAAw ovdev) GyGu, OVSE ev mpdker oVdeutG petoy Ekers “Sid Td BEATLOV
7) caua wapecxevdodsa. Ovde as a connective in negative sentences, corre-
sponds to «al in positive sentences, mentioned in remark 5, and signifies not
even, ne — quidem, e.g. ovd 6 Kxpdrioros eréAuncey altg@ udxecdar—ovdeé eis
(ne unus quidem), ov8 &s (ne sic quidem), ete. My

3. An enhansive or emphatic coordinate sentence, as has been seen (Rem.
5), is expresssed by the simple «af, but more definitely by : — a

(a) od pdvoy or ob pévoy Sri (also odx STi wévoy) or ph Bri—
GAAG «at, not only —but also. (Ox Br originates from od Adyw, S71, as
wy bre from wh Aéye, Sri.) Swxpdryns od udvov codds jv, AAA kad aya-
&ds.. Pl. Symp. 179, b. Sreparosvhonew eSéaovow of épavres, ob wdvov bre
tvdpes, GAA Kal yuvaikes. X. C.2.9,8. 00x Brit wdvos 6 Kpitwy év jovxlg
hv, &AAX Kar of pian airod. Cy. 8.1, 28. uh yap brs pxovra, GAAG Kar
os ob hoBodvyTal, uaAAoy Tods aldovpevous aidodyra: Tay dvqdav of SvIpwmor.

§ 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 503

Rem. 8. Od udvov—a4dAdd without «ai is used, when the second mem-
ber includes the first, whether the second is stronger than the first in extent or
degree. Isocr. Phil. 5,146.0 uwdvow em robrav adtods bye Thy ydunv tabrny
txovras, GAA’ ew) mdvrwy duolws. Panath. 37. 0d wdvov by ebpedetny
éxl rots viv Aeyoudvas Tabrnv Exwv Thy didvoiay, GAN dmolws emi rdvrwy
X. C. 1. 6, 2. iudriov juplera ob pdvov pavdov, AAAR Td aiTd Sédpous re
kad xemudvos. )

(b) Ox Stas—a4AA4a Kal, not only not — but even, or ody iwws Or wh
Smws—GAN ob SE, not only not — but not even. (“Omws = how, I say not or (Imp.
say not how, which involves the jdeerT saynot or say not, that not.) Al
(followed by &AA’ obd€) isused in the sense of not only not, when both clauses
have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Cor.271,1. ob x
Smws xdpw adrois (Tots ASnvalus) Exes GAAG picddoas ceavty Kata TovTwrt
modttein (non modo non — sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. (robs @nBalous tyetro)
ox brws dytimpdiew Kal diaxwdtoewv, &AAAG Kal ovorpatedoew. Isocr.
Plataic. 586. od x Sxws Tijs Kowis eAcvdeplas peréxouev, GAN OSE Sovdrclas
metplas Akw@anuev Tuxeiv (non modo non— sed ne— quidem). X. Cy. 1.3, 10.
Bh Srws dpxeioda ev pudug, GAN OV dpSotada edivacSe (non modo non
saltare poteratis, sed ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10,1. éym wh Gre
trip AAov, GAN OSE Sip euavtod mémore Sixny idlay e{pynxa (as in Latin:
non modo de alio, sed ne de me quidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non
modo non, the Latin using non modo— sed ne — quidem, instead of non modo
non — sed ne — quidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common
predicate of both is in the latter clause).

Rem. 9. When odx 6r1—GAN ovddé has the sense of not only — but not
even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a
negative sense. Th. 2, 97. ratry (rH Xxvdav ioxdi) Gddvara (sc. éorly) ef-
wotcda ovx Ere Ta ev TH Edpérn, GAN ob ev 7H Aolg vos. (Scytharum
potentiae non modo Europae imperia exaequari non possunt, sed ne Asiae quidem

ns). Dem. 702. obx br: téy bvTay &meoctephuny ty, AXAX oD by
fon. (In drectephuny is contained the idea: non haberem.) Also wh brs

_ followed by aaa’ odd¢ is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes ui

ori. =X. C.1.6, 11. thy oixlay 4 HAAO Tt Oy KeKTHOAL, VoulCwy apyupiou kor elvat,
obdevt &y wh Sri mpoika Sotns, GAN OV Lratrrov Tijs atlas AaBay (you
would not only not give your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price,
than it is worth ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not
even for a less price, etc.).

(c) Od(«)—GAAG Kal, not—but even; od(k)—GAN oddé, not —nay
not even. Dem. Mid. 24. od mwovnpds, AXA Kad wavy xpnotds. X. C. 2.3, 8.

Tov Kad Adyw Kal Epyw weipduevoy dud aay od« by duvalunv ob7’ eb Aéyew ot? | + i

ed moeiv, GAN ode weipdooum. An. 1. 3, 2. (Sapemods) AaBav od eis Td

Buoy kareSéunv euol, GAN 0dSE KadnduTddnoa, GAN’ eis duas Cardvwr.

(d) O}5€—ph Sri, not even—not to say, much less (ne-quidem —nedum).
X. Symp. 2, 26. nal ob St dvamveiv, wh Sr Adyew Tt Suvnrdueda (we shall be
able not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much less to speak).

oJ

DO eg ted ORO aap ee tk nk er RRP eRe Rae ker ey Or ke Re eae cae poe ne a or ee

504 SYNTAX. [§ 322.

§ 322. Il. Adversative Codrdinate Sentences.

1. An adversative codrdinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand
in opposition to each other, are united and form one thought.

(a) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the
coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause,
since another thought is substituted for it; this is done: (a) by placing the
€onjunction &AA dé (but) in opposition to a preceding negative ; (b) by placing
fie conjunction 4A Ad together with the negative od in opposition to a pre-
ceding affirmative ; in the last case, 4AAd may be translated and, or be wholly
omitted: (a) odx of mAovoion eddaluovés ciow, GAN of &yadol. (b) ’Exciver,
GAN odk evSevde iprdcdn (he was seized there, and not here, or not here).

(8) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate
clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is
expressed by 8¢, GAAG (but), drdp (avrdp, Epic.), cairo, wév rot, Buas.

2. Aé most generally has an adversative force, and hence can express every
kind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like
the Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (ré, xaf) and the adversa-
tive (4AAd, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and
hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts
it (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English
uses and. The new thought being different from the preceding, is placed in
contrast with it.

3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is
commonly expressed by the concessive u«év, which, as it denotes concession
and admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member
by 3é As dé can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification
of uév is sometimes stronger and sometimes weaker.

4. The original signification of uéy (arising from phy, § 316, Rem.) is truly,
in truth ; yet its signification is not always so strong as this; indeed, in innu-
merable places its foree is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into
English. Td wey @péAmoy kadrdy, Td 5& BrAaBepdy aicxpdv. Th. 3, 68. diépSer-
pay TlAaraéwy wey adtrav ove éAdocovs Siaxoclwy, “Adnvalwy S& mévte Kal

% efkooy.
> Ae. 5. M év—8é are especially used in the following cases: — _
: 70. eSuhy : ale

(a) With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e.g. ’Evraisa
péev—eéxet 5é, %Sa pwév—WwSa dé, ror’ wév—rore Fé, more wey —
motte &€, at one time,—at another, sometimes — sometimes, %AdoTe mév — UA
Aore 5€, Gua pwév—iua 8, sometimes — sometimes, mp@rov mév—éreira
dé, 7) wéev—7d 5, ra wév—ra SE and tovTo uév —Todro 5é, partly, —
partly, on the one side—on the other, both — and, not only — but also, 6 wév—6é
8 é, hic — iile. :

(b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when sey-

SS
“—

$ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 505

eral actions refer to the same object. 8, Ph. 239. éy& yévos wéy clue rijs wep-

ppbrov Sxdpov, wAéw 3 és olkov, adBGuar 5% mals “AxiAdws Neuwrdacuos. So
also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. of éséBarov uty és thy

*Aainy, Kyuueplous éxBadrdvres ee ris Etpwrns, robroo: 5& émomdsucvor pev-youct
obra és thy Mndiuchy xdpnv axlxorto,

c. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two different clauses.
X. C.2. 1, 32. yd cbverur wey Seots, cbverue 3 dvSpdmwois trois ayaSors.
1. 1, 2. Swxpdryns Siwy pavepds worAAdKis wey otk, TOAAdKIS BE em
Tay Koway Tis wéAcews Bondy. Yet this principle is not always observed.
Méy is regularly omitted, when dé xail follow, e. g. 2. 8,5. xaArerdy ofrw
Tt wojou, Sste undty auapreiv, xarewdy St kal dvauapthrws Te wovjoavTa
fe) &yvapore Kpiri wepiruxeiv. |

Remark 1. When xéy stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some-
times repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in the corresponding demonstrative
or coneluding clause. Her. 2, 121. nal roy (i. e.dv) weév nadrdovor Sépos,
TODTOY wey Tposkvydovel Te Kal ed Toodar* Toy BE Xemavan. 7. A. So also,
when, instead of the adjective clause, the Part. with the article is used. Isoer.
Paneg. 52, 60. rG@ wey dwepeveyndvts Thy avSpwrlyny piow (‘Hpakde?), . . robT@
méy (Edpuadeds) emrdrrwyv.. dieréAcoev. So also sometimes two preceding
pév’s correspond with two following 5颒s ; this always implies a strong emphasis.
Pl. Apol. 28, e. éym obv Sewd dy etn cipyacuévos, & tvdpes "ASnvaio, ei, bre
wév me oi ipxovres erarroyv, obs ducts ciAcode Upxew pov, Kat éy Tloridalg nab ev
“Augurdrc: kad em) AnAlw, réTe wey ob exetvor Erarrov Euevov — kal exwdbvevoy
dmroSaveiv, TOD SE Seov rdrrovtos, as eyw @hInv Te Kal bwéAaBov, Pirocopoivrd
me Seiv Civ wal ekerdQovta euavtdy Kal Trods &AAous, ev Tatda FE PoPydsels R
Sdvarov }} BAAO Stiiy mpayya Alwouu Thy tdéw. Yet this parallelism is but
seldom found so regularly carried out.

Rem. 2. On the position of 1éy—®dé, the following points are to be no-
ticed: They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each
other; yet they are often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole clause.
X. C.1.1, 10. nal ZAeye wey (Swxpdrns) ds Td woAV, Tots 5& Bovdomevas ekijv
&koverv. An. 8. 4,2. 2raSe wey. ovdev, ToAAG SE Kand evdusre TOLR TAL
When a substantive or adjective is connected with the article or a preposition,
uév and 5¢ are commonly placed between the article and the preposition and
between the preposition and substantive or adjective, e. g..rpds wey Tovs of-
Aovs —mrpds 8 éxSpots; yet this conformity is by no means observed in cor-
responding members, e. g. X. C..1. 1, 12. ra weév GvSpémeia mapévres, TH
Satudvia St cxorovvres Fyotvra Tad mposhxovta mpdtrev. 2, 24. 31a pey
kédAdos — 51a Sdvapurv Fé, Orinversely, Isocr. Paneg. 64,114. évy tats roaA-
trelars pév—ev 8é rais cwdhKeas.

Rem. 8. It is evident that any other adversative connective instead of 5é,
can follow péy, e. g. dAAd, ardp, etc. But in place of the adversative connec-
tives, sometimes also the copulatives ré, caf, are used, by a kind of anacoluthon,
or the construction is entirely changed, no reference being had to the preceding

Vv.

Rem, 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow
uév, is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversative mem-
ber. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast is such, as of
itself without 3¢, to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, as e.g. with
évratisa pév—exe?, and almost always with mpa@rov wév—Emeira,
Secondly, even the clause expressing the contrast, can be wholly omitted, in
which case, it must be supplied by the mind (uéy solitarium). Her. 3, 3. Aéy-

43 i

506 SYNTAX. “a [§ 322.

erat 85e 6 Adyos, €u0) wey od mSavds (TO ME improbable, perhaps probable to
piers), "Ey wéy ode ofda; as wey A€youow; TadTa mey huiy iyyere
Tis: olmat mev, HyovDMar mév, SoKH mév, ovK olda wey and the like, I
INDEED, CERTAINLY, think.

Rem. 5. On account of its general signification, 5¢, like autem, frequently
connects sentences even, which stand in a causal relation to each other; then
the hearer or reader can gather from the context the particular mode of con-
nection. Thus dé very often expresses the reason, and is used instead of ydp.

Rem. 6. In questions, 5¢ has either an adversative force, when the interro-
gator gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2: kat
6%. Eiwé wo, pn, & Kpltwv, civas 5¢ tpépers, Wva oot To’s AvKovs ad TaY Tpo-
Bdrwy areptxwor; (you are unwilling to support a man who could protect you
from your enemies, AND YET do you keep dogs?). Or, 5€ has a copulative foree
and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the
other, e. g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. oxovy oioda, pn, bri WAHSE mév ovdéy pelovs cicly
*"ASnvaio: Bowréy ;— Olda ydp, %pyn. Sdpara St ayadda nal nara worepov ex
Bowtay ote: wAclw dy exrexSjvat, } eE "ASnv@v. The same principle holds in
answers.

Rem.7. Kai—dé (in the Epic writers xa) 5€ not separated), and, though
more seldom, the negative ov '¢—6é, in which connection 6¢ has an adver-
bial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also; and on the other
hand not. X. H. 5. 2,37. of re HAAOL mpoddiuws TE TeAevtia bwnpérouv, xa) Fh
Tav OnBatwy S& wéats mpodiuws Evvémeume nal dwAttas kad imméas. An. 1. 8, 20.
kal oddev odd€ TovToy Tadeiv Epacay, oVT BAdros 5& THv “EAAhvoy év Tavtn TH
Kaxn eraser ovddels obdér.

Rem. 8. In the apodosis, as in principal clauses, 5¢ has a double force, either
adversative, or merely contrasting (copulative). Sometimes pévy stands in the
first member.

a. The adversative &¢ in the apodosis, denotes the contrast between that and
the protasis. It is used: (a) after hypothetical antecedent clauses, though
&AAd also is often found instead of d¢; (8) after relative antecedent clauses,
and such as denote comparison. (a) X. Cy. 5.5, 21. Gan’ ei unde rod’, ep,
BotrAa amroxplvacda, ob 3 rodvTedSev Aéye (say on the contrary). (8) 8. 5, 12.
dsmep of dmAitat, otrw S¢ Kal of meATacTal Kal of TokdTaUL (so on the other hand).

(b) After a temporal protasis, 5¢ commonly has a contrasting or merely copu-
lative force, though sometimes adversative also (very often in the Homeric lan-
guage, also in Herodotus, but seldom in the Attic writers) ; this 6¢ may often
be loosely translated by then. Od. A, 387. abrap era Wuxds wey ameoxédac’ BA-
Audis BAAN ayvh Meprepdveta yuvatdy Seduvtepdwy, HAe F eal Wuxh *Avyaueuvovos
*Atpeldao. So dppa—rdéppa Sé, drdre—dé, Ews—S5E. KX. An. 4. 1, 2 erred
5t adixovro, evda 6 wey Thypns wotauds maytdmacww topos hv Sit Td BaSos Kad pé-
yeSos, mdpodos (transitus) 5 odk jy. ., Cddxer S& Trois orparibrais Sia trav dpéwy
mopevtéov eivat (then, or on the contrary). As dé is used after the protasis, so also
in like manner after participles, which supply the place of a protasis. Pl,
Symp. 220, b. cal more Bvt os mdyou ofov Sewordrov, Kal mdyTwy..évetrAry-
Bhévev tovs rédas eis rldous Kal apvaxldas, obros 8 év robros effet Exwv iudriov
.. oldvmep Kal mpdrepov cide: dopey. X. C. 3.7, 8. Savud(w cov, ei exelvous fg-
dlws Xetpovmevos, Tovtos 5¢ undeva Tpdroy ote dvvhoecSar mposevex Divas.

6. "AAAd (Neut. Pl. of &ados), but (sed, at), yet, however, generally expresses
difference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the sent2nce.
According to the nature of the preceding member, it either abrogates. what is
affirmed in that member (see No. 1), or it restricts and limits it (yet, however).

aid

=

2

$ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 507

He is indeed poor, but brave — he is not brave, but cowardly ; (here the clause but
brave restricts the one preceding, and but cowardly wholly denics or abrogates
the idea of brave). Todro 7d mpayua &péAmov uév eorw, AX ob Kardy. The
use of &AAd is very frequent in objections (= at), also in questions, when the
question expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form
of a question. Dem. Cor. ri yap Kal BovAduevo: peteréumecs’ by abrots, én
thy <iphyny; AN bwipxe Gracw. "AAN én roy wércuov; GAN airod wep
eiphyns ¢BovaeteoSe. Eur. Med. 325. Adyous dvadois+ ob yap ty meloais more.
“AAD ergs pe, oddity aidéoa: Arrds;” very frequently &AX F—; but
really —? X. An. 7. 6, 4. wad of elrov: "AAN F Snuaywye? 5 avhp rods av5pas ;

Rem. 9. ’*AAAd is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it the gen-
eral signification of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted | by an excep-
tion. Here &dAaAd is the same as wAfy or ef wh, nisi, and can be translated into
English by except, than. In the first member, &AAos (repos) is commonly
laced, e. g. oddels HAAS, GAAd, and this &Aos points forward to the following
Ad, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. év 7@ uéow BAAN wey wdALS OdE-
ula otre pirla, ottre “EAAnvis, GAAG OpSxes wai Biduvol (between there is no other
friendly or Grecian city {there are none} except Thracians and Bithynians).

Rem. 10. In the frequent combination of &AA’ # after a preceding nega-
tive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of
BAAXos, Erepos to the negative, consequently, ob, obdév GAN H; oddev BA-
Ao, AAN H; obdev Erepov, AAN H; Th BAAO, AAA H; AAO 71 (with a pre-
ceding interrogative pronoun), aA A’ #,—aAX seems to be merely &AAo, but
on account of its close connection with 4, it appears to have changed its ac-
cent (@AAd #) and to have lost it (&AA’ %). ry An. 7. 7, 53. dpyiptoy pv odk
exw, GAN Aucpdy tt. O. 2, 13. ofre BAAos wérord wor wapéoxe TA EavToU d101-
Kev, &AX 7H ov vuvi 2dérAers wapéxew. Pl. Phacd. 97, d. ovSev AAO oxoreiv
mposhkew avdpémm, GAA’ 7) Td Gpicrov Kal rd BéATiCToOY.

Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned:
od} why GAAd or ob wévrot GAA, yet, veruntamen, ob yap &AAA, then
certainly, certainly. These must be completed by joining with the negative the
verb of the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as Todt’ éyéve-
to, Tor éarly, X. Cy. 1.4, 8.6 trmos mire cis yévara, kal wiKpod Kakeivor
ekerpaxtrwev: ov wry (scil. erpaxhriwev) GAN emeuetvey 5 Kipos udrrs Tos,
kal 6 twos eéavéorn.

Rem. 12. *AAAd is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an
opposite thouyht ; this is the case in exhortations and exclamations, in general,
when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and something new is quickly in-
troduced, e. g. &AA’ eivruxoins + (well then!) — GAN va ( now) — &AXN’ ela! —
also when one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. GAA BovAouat,
well, I will. é

7. From the adverb ad, on the contrary, again, rursus, and &pa, igitur, have
originated the Epic airdp and the prose 4rdp. They always stand at the
beginning of the sentence, and have the signification of 5¢ or 4AAd, but ; yet, as
it seems, with this difference, that, on account of their composition with apa
(igitur), they are more closely and intimately connected with what precedes.
~-Mévroc has been already treated (§ 316, Rem.). Kafr oz, yet, verum, sed
tamen. atqui (§ 317, 3), is used especially, when the speaker wishes to correct
something he had said; the Latins use quamquam in the same way, e. g.
nalro. rt pnt; (quamquam quid loquor?, and yet why do I speak?). “Opmws

Oe Oe, ORT lage Bg ee
. bile daa

508 SYNTAX. pe [$ 323.

(from duds, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause, as an
unexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Aduaxos utv todra eimay

“a

Suws mposéSero kal abtds TH AAKiBiddov youn. “AAN Guws is still stronger.

§ 323. II]. Disjunctive Coérdination.

1. A disjunctive codrdinate sentence is one in which the clauses composing
the entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other;
hence the one can be considered to exist only when the other does not. This
disjunctive relation is denoted by : —

“H, or, aut, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by #— 4, and when the
first member is to be made emphatic, #ro: — #, aut — aut, vel — vel, either — or ;
eYre—efre (with the Ind.) or édvre—édyvte or &yre—&vre (with the
Subj.), sive — sive, whether — or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he
does not know whether he should decide for the one or the other; on the mode
used in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see § 339.

‘O rarhp, } 6 vids adrod améSavev. —*H 6 warhp, }) 6 vids avrod aréSaveyr. Th.
4, 118. ef 5é rt Suiv efre KdddAwov, etre Sixaidtepoy tovTwy BSoxet elvat, idytes és
Aaredaluova diddoxere. Pl. Rp. 493, d. ef7 év ypapinh, ef? ev wovowg, etre
5h ev woditixp. Apol. 27, ¢. ef7 ody Kawd, efre madrad. 34, e. eft’ ody
GAndés, cfr obv Wevdes. Rp. 453,d. ave tis eis eoAvuBASpay uixpay euméon,
tyre eis Td péyirrov wéAayos uécov, Buws ye vet ovdtv HrTor.

Remark 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: ¢«i—efre
(si — sive); e{re—ei 5€ (sive—si vero), when the second member contains
something opposite to the first; eyre—%; 47—e%7re (seldom and only Poet.);
etre but once (poetic).

Rem. 2. The disjunctive connectives #— 4, in the Epic writers, very seldom
in the Tragedians, are united with péy and dé: 7uéyv—75é. In this case,
they do not have a disjunctive, but like cai —xal, ré— ré, a copulative force.
Instead of 75¢, id¢ is also used according to the necessities of the verse. Il. ¢,
1 bpp’ eb yryvdokns Huey Sedv, HSE nat kvdpa, both — and, not only — but

2. The particlé # is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, but also
in expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite
of the preceding member, but-only expresses separation or difference. As in its
disjunctive relation, one 4 corresponds with another, so here # stands in rela-
tion to a word, which expresses a difference, @. g. %AAos, ovdels KAAOS, GAAOZOS,
evayrlos, %B10s, Siapépw, etc.; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all
words which have the force of a comparative, e. g. dimAdouos, mplv, p&dvw, ete.
Pl. Phaed. 64, a. ob38y &AAO adro emiryndebovow, } amodSvhoxew Te Kar
TESvavat. >

Rem. 3. The comparative # is sometimes used after the omitted uaAdoy or after
a positive. This is the case after expressions of willing, choosing, and the like,
because these contain the idea of preference; thus after BovJAe oS ai, CSAC,
aipetoSat, alpeciv Sodvat, éemidupety, SéxegI at, (nTEetv, AVTLTEA-
«fy (= potius esse). Il.a, 117. BobAop eye Aady choy Eupevat, # amordéodai.

4

§ 323.] DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 609

ss de aff. tyr. 1. (nrodot nepdalvew, h juas weldev. X. Ag. 4, 5. (Ayn-
ciraos) fpetro Kal ov Te yervalw peiovenreiv, ) civ TH Gdinw wadov Trew.
Andoc. Myst. 62. reSvdvat voul(ovea AvorreAciv, }) Civ.

3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by %, in
the same Case as the comparative, and without a verb, when both members have the
same verb in common. When this is not the case, the second member must stand
as a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely
the subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted
copula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of #
the Gen. also can be used (§ 275, 2), most frequently for the Nom. and Acc.,
often also for the Dat. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa-
sion ambiguity; it must be avoided when the time of the two clauses is different.

Eur. Or. 1148. ob« @orw od8ty KpeTacorv, } pidos caphs, od rAodTOS, od TU-
pavvls. ‘O pirdaopos uarAov emSupet rijs coplas } Tav xpnudrwv. XapiCdueda
paAAov Tots Gyadois } Tots Kaxots. tAovuev uaGAAov Tobs &yadobs 2 TOUS KaKods.
Isocr. Pac. extr. rots vewrépots nal uardAdov &dkudCovary, } eye (se. duud-
(w), wapawa, Th. 7,77. #dn twes cal de Servorépwyv h Toravde éodSyoav
(from a more dangerous situation. than the present is). Tl. a, 260. %3n ydp mor’ éya
kat dpelogiv héwep butv dvipdorv Gplanoa (with braver men than you
are). Her. 7, 10. ob pédAdas em” &vipas orpareverSa: word auelvovas, }
ZevSas. Eur. Or. 715. miords ev naxots avhp xpelaoowv yarhvns vav-
tidkoww eisopay (instead of } yadhvn). Th. 6, 16. mposhwe: wor waAAOW Eré-
pwv..&pxew (instead of } érdpois). 7,63. tadra rots drAlras oxy Rocor
T@v vavtTa@y wapaxeAcvouce (instead of 4 rots vatras). Od. t, 27. otror &ywye
hs yalns divaua yAuKepdtepoyv tAdro idéoSa. X. Cy. 2. 4,12. enol Sone?
Kipos, otstwas by bp2 &yatous, pircivy oddity Frrov éavto* (instead of 4 éav-
tév). Her. 2, 134. Muxepivos mupaulda areAlrero wodAdy €> dagw TOD waTpds
(instead of 4 6 warhp, or properly instead of rijs Tod wacpds).

Rem. 4. With raelwv, éadrrwy, rrAéov, €AaTTov, wetov, when they
stand in connection with a numeral, 4 is commonly omitted, without chan
of construction, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the
sentence (comp. decem plus or amplius homines)? Pl. Apol. 17, d. viv éyd mpa-
tov ém) Sixaorhpiov avaBéBnka, rn yeyovas trelw EBdouqkovta (annos plus
septuaginta natus). X. An. 6.4, 24. of fraets dmoxrelvover Tay avdpav ob wetov
mwevtakoclouvs, Th. 6, 95. 7 Acla émpdSn taddvrwy om tAaTTov wévte Kal efko-
ow. X. Cy. 2.1, 5. imméas wey Ser ob weTov Sicuvplwy. With the Nom. and
Acc. mAéov, fAarrov, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g.
“Exw od rAdov (fAatTov) déxa raddvrwy. The Greek can consequently say: (a)
mAclous (éAdrrous, uelous) h d€ka tyuepar'; (b) wAclous déka tuepav; (c) rAdov }
Séxa juépar; (d) wAéov Séxa jucpa. It will be observed from several of the
above examples that mAéov, ueiov, etc. stand as mere adverbs in the Acc., with
substantives of a different gender and number.

Rem. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle 4 is found with the Gen. Such exam-
ples are to be explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its
own appropriate relation, being wholly independent of the comparative, e. g.
Pl. L. 765, a. wh fdarrov 4 tpidxovta yeyovas ér&y [just as the Greek says
ylyversau tpidxovra éra&y § 273, 2,(c)]; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra-
tive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by # may be regarded as an

43*

510: SYNTAX. | [§ 323

appositive or explanatory clause. Od. (, 182. od wey yap rodye npetocov
kal &petov, 2 6X duoppovéoyvte vojuacw olkov Exntoy dvynp HE yuvh (= Tod bre
— éxnTov).

Rem. 6. (Comparatio compendiaria). In comparisons, instead of comparing
the attribute of one object with that of another, the Greeks often compare the
attributive of one object with the other object itself to which the attribute ~
would belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 8. 3, 41. xdpav
éxere ovdev ; TTov Hua@y (instead of ris Huerépas) 2vriwoy. Moreover, in ev-
ery other comparison, this mode of expression is often employed, e. g. Il. p, 51.
aiuari of Sevovro kéuat Xaplreootv duotar (instead of tats Tay scaplnael
Comp. the examples under § 284,4. This mode of comparison, though not
strictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he has an expression like his father,
instead of like his father’s.

4, When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverbs), belonging to
the same object, are compared with each other, then both are put in the compar-
ative, and the last is annexed by #.

@drrwy, ) codétepos, celerior, quam sapientior (more swift than wise, or
not so wise as. swift). Pl. Rp. 409, d. rAcovdurs movnpois, ) xpnorois évtruyxdvev
cogperepos, } duadéaorepos done elva aitG te Kat BArdAois. Her. 3, 65.
exolnoa TaxUTEpa, } Topmtepa (celerius, quam prudentius).

5. The subject is compared with itself, i. e. the subject exhibits at some time
a quality in a higher degree than usual. In this case, the Gen. of the reflexive
pronouns éuavrod, ceavrod, éavrov, is used with the comparative, and the pro-
noun airdés with the pronoun of the third person. The other mode of ex-
pression by # is not admitted here.

BeAtiwyv eit Cuavrod. BeaAtiwy el ceavtTod. Beartiwyv éor ai-
Tos éavtod. Th. 3,11. duvardrepor abtol abra@y eylyvovro, In like man-
ner, the superlative is used in connection with airdés and the Gen. of the re-
flexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time,
exhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree
than at any other time). “Apioros adrds Eavrod. “Apiary adTyH Eav-
THs. X. C. 1.2, 46. We oor, & Meplkras, rére cuveyevdunyv, Bre Seivdtatos
cavrTod Tadra Foda (when you surpassed yourself in these things, when you had the

highest distinction in these things, higher than at any other time).

6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison: When an object in re-
lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but with a whole
thought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive idea, and
this substantive is put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here, also,
the other mode of expression by #, does not occur. .

Her. 2, 148. jioav ai mvpauldes Adyou méCoves (oratione majores, i.e. ma-
jores, quam ut oratione explicari possit). Th. 2, 50. yevéuevov kpetacov Adyou
Td eidos Tis vécou (the nature of the disease being too severe to be described, severe
beyond description). Wpayua éAwldwv xpetrroy (too great to be hoped for,
beyond hope). Instead of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. d€ovros.
Pl. Rp. 410, d. of yuuvaorixh axpdtre xpnoducvar Gypidrepot Tov Séovto0s
aroBalvovety. ;

§ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 511

7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a higher
or lower degree than could be expected, in proportion to another object, then
the comparative is constructed with 4 «ard, or (though seldom) 4 mpés
with the Acc, (= quam pro).

Th. 7, 75. pel€w } watda Sdxpva wérovSa (I have suffered too much for
tears). Pl. Rp. 359, d. vexpdbs welCwv } kat’ ivSpwror (a dead body greater
than in accordance with a human being, greater than could be expected for a human
being, too great for that of a human being). X. H. 3.3, 1. /Ayis) éruxe cepvo-
tépas i} Kata &vSpwrov tapis. Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius,
quam pro numero pugnantium, editur (more bloody than could have been expected
considering the number).

_8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low a
degree, that another cannot coexist with it, then the comparative is used with
} S&sre and the Inf, e. g. Kana wel(w iv, } Sste kAaiery, evils greater
than one could weep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. jrynoduevos elvar } ds emt Meoldas thy
maparkevty (having thought that the armament was too great to be [greater, than to
be] against the Pisidians). 3.3, 7. Bpaxdrepa AedvtiCov } ds ebixveioSar trav oper-
dovnray (threw too short a distance to reach the slingers). See § 341. 3, (a).

Rem. 7. The comparative is frequently used without the second member of the
comparison, and can then be translated by giving a strong emphasis to the
positive, or more frequently by joining the adverbs too, pretty, somewhat, a little,
right, to the positive. (Comp. English, too sweet, pretty, somewhat, a little warm.)
This usage is found when the second member is evident from the connection ;
but very frequently, also, when such thoughts as, than it was before, than was
before, than was usual, proper, right, becoming, were more or less distinctly before
the speaker’s mind. Her. 3, 145. Masavdpiw 3 1G Tupdvvw hy aderdpeds bwop-
apyérepos (hebetioris ingenii, very dull of perception, a little crazy). 6, 108.
qucis Exaot €pw oikéoper (we dwell too far, very far from you). So particu-
larly the neuters uewoy, BéArioy (better than is right), néAdvov, uaAAOV, XEipor,
aloxuov, kdxiov ; also veérepoy, more seldom kaivdrepor, (since xaivds is used synony-
mously with veérepos) and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. od KdéAArov,
ovk Suewor, od Kdxtoy, ob KpetrTov, ov xeEipor, ov pov (not so easy, as it seems), ete.
Her. 3, 71. wowéew airia wor Songer kat wh bwepBaréoSa- ov yap &mervoy ( for
this would not be better, than if we did it immediately). Pl. Phaed. 105, a. maAw
8 dvauimvioeKov: ob yap xetpov wodAdkis axovev. Finally, also, when antith-
eses are compared with each other, e. g. Ta xelpova moddois rAclw éotl TAY
&metvdyvwy (the worse is more in number than the better).

§ 324. IV. Causal Cod? dinate Sentences.

1. Finally, those sentences are codrdinate, the last of which denotes either the
ground, cause, or consequence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from it.

2. The Greeks denote the ground or reason by ydp, which is never the first
word in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word.
I'dp is compounded of yé and &pa, and hence denotes proof, confirmation,
(yé, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an inference, or conclusion (&pa, igitur,
now, therefore). Hence, according as the one or the other meaning prevails,

Ee ane Pe ee UP | AUT ey ee ee ee et
, : ie A er

512 SYNTAX. [$824

yap may express: (a) a ground or reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a confirmation
or assurance; and hence it may be translated: (a) by for, (b) that is, for ex-
ample, (c) indeed, certainly.

Pl. Phaedr. 230, b. vy thy “Hpav, Kadh ye Kataywyh: } Te yap mAdravos
airy war dupirapns te Kal dyndrn (yes, certainly = for). T'dp has its explana-
tory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases rexphpioy dé, waprd-
piov dé, onuciov dé, SjArov Sé scil. earl, delxvums 5é, COhrAwoe dé, oxdvacde 5é, and
the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and
replies. X. C. 3.5, 10. dpa Aéyers Thy Tay Seay plow hy of wep) Kéxpowa 8? dpe-
Thy &xpiwav ; — Aéyw yap, yes, certainly. 10, 2. ée moAAGy ouvdyoyres Te e Exdo-
Tov KdAdoTa, obtws BAa TA Thuata KaAa moleire palveoSat;—Towduev ydp,
%pn, ofrws (certainly, we do so).—In addresses, wishes, commands, and ques-
tions, the meaning of ydp, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly
appears. Arist. Ran. 251. rout) map’ tuav AauBdvw; Acewh yap meodue-

Sa! (am TZ so treated by you? well! then we shall have hard things to bear!) Ka- -

Kas yap e&ddoo! may you perish then! So, ei ydp, cide ydp. X.C.1. 7,
2. Sri F GANIA Breyer, Gde edldacnev: "EvSuudueda ydp, epn, ef tis wh dv eya-
Ss adAnrhs doxeiv Boladoito, tl dy abt@ mwoinréoy e¥n ; (now then let us consider). 1.
4,14. od yap mdvy go. Karddnaroy, rt mapa Ta HAAG (Ga dstep Seo tvSpwrot
Bioredover ; is it not then clear to you? (nonne igitur —?). Il. o, 182.7 Ip: Sed, rhs
yap oe Seav euol &yyeAoy Fixer ; (therefore who then has sent you?). X. C. 2. 3,
17. nal 6 Xaipexpdrns elrev> *Edy ody, €uod Tradra mowdyTos, éxeivos undtv BerTlwv
ybyyntra ; TL yap &Ado, pn 5 Swxpdrns, } Kwduvedoeis, x. 7. A.; (what else
then will happen except that you will run the risk, etc.?) Dem. Ph. 1. 43, 10.
yévoito yap &y tT Katvdrepoy, } Maxedav avhp "Adnvatous kaTramoAcuav; (why,
can there be a greater novelty?). So,Tl ydp; quid ergo? Kal rl ydp; and how
then? Tl@s ydp; and réSev ydp; as an emphatic negative answer = by no
means. Tl@s yap o¥; (instead of it, réSev 5¢ of is used with an antithesis)
as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. odsody 6 wey Ta Sleaa mpdr-

tov dikaos, 6 5 Ta Bima Bios; TGs yap of; (is he, therefore, who does what.

is just, just, but he who does what is unjust, unjust ? to be sure, how not ?).

Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with ydp very often precedes the
sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6,102. nal, jv
yap 6 Mapaday éemrndedrarov xwploy Tis "ATTiKis evimmedoa, és TOOTS ogi KaTN-
yéero ‘Inamins (and, for Marathon was the most suitable place in Attica for the cav-
alry, Hippias led them to this place). So especially with aad ydp, at enim, but
certainly, really, indeed, AN od ydp. Pl. Apol. 20, c. 7Bpuvduny ty, «i hmordunv
TavTa* GAN’ ov yap émlorawas (1 should be proud, if I knew this, but certainly I do
not know). ,

Rem. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with ydp, and
the following one whose meaning is to be confirmed, are often so closely con-
nected with each other, that the subject of the last is transferred to the first,
and its government made to depend on it. Th. 8, 30. rots év 77 Sduw “ASn-
valots mposaprypevar yap hoay Kal otkodey BAAa vijes cal otparnyol, kal Tas
érd Xiov mdoas ‘Kal Tas YAAas tvvaryaydvTes €BovAoYTo, etc., instead of of —
*ASnvaior — éBobAovto, adtois ydp, K. T. A.

Rem. 3. Kal ydp commonly means for also, rarely etenim, but sometimes
the «at corresponds to a following nal, thus nam et—et.

§ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 613

3. The consequence or inference is denoted : —

(a) By &pa (hence, then), which never stands as the first word in a sentence,
though commonly near the beginning, also sometimes emphatically at the end.
Tt expresses a consequence which comes as a matter of course, which is wholly nat-
ural. In many passages, it hardly admits of translation into English, since it
often implies only a very slight consequence, and merely refers to something
mentioned, to something existing in the context, or only in the conception of
the speaker, in conformity with which the thing is in the state in which it is
affirmed to be. Hence it is very often used like the English indeed, as it seems,
in such explanatory causes as more exactly define, or distinguish, something
before said, or pointed out.

Lue. Jup. trag. 51. ei cio Bamol, eiot nal Seol> GAA why cio Bomol: cioly Epa
kal Seol (then there are, consequently there are gods also). X.Cy.7.3,6. Tatra axovoas
6 Kipos éralcaro &pa tov unpdv (when he had heard of the death of his friend,
THEN he smote on his thigh, AS WAS NATURAL). It is often connected with an
Impf., when, in consequence of a better view of the subject at present, one is
undeceived in regard to a former opinion, e. g.1. 4, 11. & aides, ds ipa
pA vapotmer, bre Ta ev TH mapadelow Snpia ednpOuev* Suorov Eyorye Bone?
elvat, ofdvmep ef Tis Sedecuéva CHa Snpyn (now how childish we were then, as I now
indeed see). 1. 3, 8, Sduq 5é, pdvat toy "Acrudyny, TE oivoxdy, by eyw wddAwTa
Tine, oddty Sidws; ‘O dt Sdeas apa Knadrds re dv erbyxave, kal Tywhy Exwv Tposd-
yew Tods deouévous *Aatudyous (now the Sacian happened to be beautiful, the Sacian
was beautiful, as it seems). 9. & Sdea, dwérAwAas* exBar@ oe ex Tis Tiphs* Ta TE
yap BAAa, ddvat, god KdAALoy oivoxohow, Kat ode exalouat adtds Tov oivov: of
ipa tay Baciriéwy oivoxdo:— xatappopodor. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. érdrua Aéyew,
as Kpa eye —Kkexwdvunds elyy thy wédrw (Thy eiphynv) morhoacda (that I indeed,
that I, as it seems). Hence the use of ydp and the strengthened form yap
tipa.—Ei &pa and ef uh &pa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if
perchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of &pa being reduced to a mere
conjecture, and are often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. ras dy ody rowidros
&vhp diapSelpa robs véovs; ci wh Upa | THs dperis emmérAcia SiapIopd eorw
(properly, that if such an excellent man can corrupt the young, then we must draw
the conclusion that, etc.). So also, ei &pa, num forte, whether then, whether per-
chance. X. C. 4. 3,9. oxow®, ei Epa ti dart tots Seots Epyov, } GvSpdérous Se~
parevew (whether perchance, forsooth, the gods have any other employment than, etc.).
“Apa stands very often in interrogative sentences. Aesch. 8. 91. rls &pa
biceta; Ths 8 dp’ ewapxéce Seay; (quis igitur defendet? quis igitur arcebit 7).

Rem. 4. “Apa seems to be derived from the verb ’APQ, i. e. to be adapted,
suitable, and hence to express the inward relation, the immediate connection
of two thoughts, and in such a manner that one seems, as it were, to be en-
tirely fitted to the other,—the one perfectly corresponding to the other
(= precisely, exactly, just). In this sense it is used in Homer, e. g. Il. 9, 182.
ex 8 ESope KAijpos xuvéns dv Up’ HSerov adrol, precisely the one which, just the one
which, rijpos &pa, just then, 87 &pa, just when, ro7’ & pa, precisely then, ei
uh &pa, if not precisely, &s t&pa, exactly so; obn—, &AX Kpa, not— but

just; éwel pa, since just, ydp pa, for just. Homer uses apa, in general, in

514 ! SYNTAX. - | [$ 326..

order to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are de-
veloped from each other.

Rem. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened
form apa instead of &pa. Thus ei dpa, e77 apa, instead of ei dpa, ctr’
&pa. On the interrogutive dpa and on &pa in a question, see § 344.

(b) Ody (Ion. dy), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen-
tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore (ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points
out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- ~
cordingly far stronger than &pa, but is also used in a more general sense.

Rem. 6. Ody is used as a suffix to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case
also, retains its conclusive sense: boris obv, dstep odr, b001 ody, Lev Odv, your, F ody,
GAN ody, et7’ ody, yap ody. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every-
thing else, and a persisting in that which is affirmed ; hence it may express also
confirmation and assurance. So éa71s ofv, ’smep obyv, whoever he may be then,
éc0: obv, how many so ever then, wtv ody, yes indeed (§ 316, Rem.), yor, cer-
tainly, surely, ot xovy, truly, certainly not, ® otv, GAN obv, &Tap ody, but
surely, etre ody, be it this or that, yap ody, for surely, ei 8 ody, if then.

Rem. 7. O#xovyv, as a Paroxytone, means: (a) non ergo, without interro-
gation (consequently ov« in connection with the syllogistic ody, ergo); still in
this sense it is also written od« ody; (b) nullo modo, nequaquam, by no means,
without interrogation (consequently ov« in connection with the emphatic suffix
ody) most frequently in answers, e. g. X. O. 1, 9. of xovv uorye Soxet: — Od-
kouv, as a Perispomenon: (a) in a question: nonne igitur? nonne ergo? X. C.
2. 2,12. obkodv, en 6 &., kal TE yelrou BotrAa: ob apéoneiv; —“Eywye, &7n.
Also in this case it is written o} k ody, as well as ox ovy; the latter has been
adopted in modern times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a
special emphasis in the negative, and so otxovy is equivalent to nonne certe ;
like 8. Aj. 79. oxovr yéAws fdioros eis €xSpods yeAav ; (b) without interrogation,
ergo, igitur. X. C. 3. 6,6. obxody, &pn, Td) ev TAovoWwTepay Thy méAw Toteiv
avaBadovmeda. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and od«odr is
in this case properly nonne igitur ?- The frequent use of this interrogative form
has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense
has become obscure, e.g. is it not true therefore we shall put off? (= conse-
quently we shall put off).

(c) Tofyvy, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived
from the Epic 7 ¢, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive ydv, now,
which is derived from the temporal adverb viv; it is used: (a) to make
a transition; thus especially, cal troivuy, and now, €t: tolvvyv,- moreover
then; (b) to mark a conclusion, therefore now, so then. Tolyap (from the Epic r@,
therefore, and ydp) corresponds to the Latin ergo, therefore, but is poetic; still
stronger is tovydprot, just on this account, precisely so, and totyapovy, on this
account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence.

§ 325. Asyndeton.

1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (dcvr-
dérws). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned :—

(a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. Il. x, 295. (of Hector) or}
3t kataphoas, ovd GAA’ Exe pelAwov eyxos* AnlipuBovy F éxddrer Aevdomda, pak-
pov diicas Freé uw Sépv paxpdv. — (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana-

§ 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 515

tory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by &pa (therefore, then, that is) and
dp. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of what was stated
only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly
when there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e.g. rodro, 7é5e,
ofrws, &de, etc. X. An. 3.2, 19. év) udve mpodxovew Tuas of irrets+ pebyew abrois
dogarécrepdy cori, f juiv.—(c) Related to the above is the asyndeton in the
beginning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a pre-
ceding thought. Pl. Phaed. 91, c. AAA’ iréov, py. Mparév ye trouvhoare
& drdyere, cay wh alywuat uweuvynudévos. —(d) The connecting particle is often
wanting, but is,in a measure, involved in another word. This is the case es-
pecially with demonstratives, e. g. ofrws, téc0s, rotos, etc., as in Latin with sic,
talis, tantus, etc. —(e) Before r& rotatra, cetera, &iX Aa, of &AAoxe in the
enumeration of several objects, caf is very commonly omitted, as et before ce-
teri, alii, reliqui, in Latin, when these words have a collective sense, i. e. when
one would include in these expressions all which is still to be named in addi-
tion to what has been already mentioned. Pl. Gorg. 503, e. ofov ei BowAe: ideiv
Tovs (wypdpous, rods oixodduous, tobs vaurnyols, Tos LAAOUS TdvTas Syusoup-
yous. — (f) In antitheses, which are to be represented as taking place equally,
and without distinction, the conjunctions are omitted. Pl. Prot. 319, d. cup-
Bovrcver wept rodTwy duolws wiv TéxTwv, duolws d€ XadrKed’s oxvToTduos Eumopos
vatkAnpos, wAovaws wévns, yevvaios a&yevvhs. In poetry, particularly in Epic,
two or four adjectives, belonging to one substantive (of which each two
form a whole), or even three, are often placed together, without a connec-
tive, if they are merely ornate epithets which, as it were, paint and vividly
describe the object. Il. aw, 140 and 802. &yxos pid’, uéya, orBapdy, KeKopu-
gpévov. Od. a, 96. Kadd wédiAa, GuBpdoia, xpiceia..

CHAPTER VIII
B. Subordination.
§ 326. Principal and Subordinate Sentences.

1.. When clauses, which together present one united thought,
are so related, as to their import, that the one is a dependent
and merely complementary or limiting member of the other,
then their connection may be expressed either by codrdinate
conjunctions, as kai, dé, ydp, dpa, etc., e. g. Td ap HAIe, 7a de peda
évIe (the spring came, and the roses bloom); or in such a man-
ner, that the clause, which merely completes or limits the
other, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim-
ply completing or limiting member of the other, e. g. dre 7d

516 ~ . SYNTAX.

gap 7A, TA foda avIc. This mode of connection is called
Subordination, and the clauses or sentences Subordinate.

2. The clause to which the other as a complementary or
limiting member belongs, is called the principal clause; the
complementary or limiting clause, the subordinate clause, and
the two together, a compound sentence. Thus, for example, in™
the compound sentence, Ore 76 gap HAI, Ta dda évFeZ, the clause
Gre 76 éap HAY, is the subordinate clause, the other the principal
clause.

3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of a substantive
(substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective,
or of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives,
adjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence; accord- -
ingly, there are three classes of subordinate clauses: sub-
stantive, adjective, and adverbial clauses.

Thus, for example, in the sentence, “ The victory of Cyrus over the enemy
was announced,” the subject may be expanded into a subordinate clause,
viz., “ That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ;” further, in the
sentence, “ Sing to me, O Muse, the far-wandering man,” the attributive far-
wandering, may be expanded into a subordinate clause, “ &vdpa wo evveme,
Motoa, mwodtrporov, ds udAa@ TWORAAa TWAAYXAN” (who has wandered far).
Comp., “ He announced the victory of Cyrus over the enemy,” with “ He an-
nounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enemy ;” ‘In the Spring the roses bloom,”
with, “ when the Spring is come, the roses bloom.”

Remarx 1. The use of subordinate clauses in Greek is not so common
as in English, since the Greek makes a much more frequent use of Participles
than the English. Comp. “when the enemy had come,” with rév moAeulwy
éasévrwy ; “when he had done this, he went away,” with tadra mpdtas dméBn ;
“ Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp,” with Kipos
Tovs moAeulous vikhoas eis TO oTpaTdmedoy av7iAdeEv. |

Rem. 2. To substantive clauses belong also dependent or indirect. inter-
rogative clauses; for these form the object of the governing verb, e. g. “ He
asked me whether my father had returned, i. e. concerning, or in regard to, the return ©
of my father ; “ He showed, who had plotted the conspiracy, i.e. he showed the
author of the conspiracy ;” “ He wrote me, when he should depart, i. e. the time
of his departure,” etc. Still, as the laws relating to dependent and to direct
interrogative clauses, are often blended together, both will be treated in a
special section in the sequel.

Rem. 3. The subordinate relation of the dependent to the principal clause,
is indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the relative pronoun, which in
an adjective clause has the meaning of an adjective. The conjunctions are
correlatives, i. e. relatives which stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstra-
tives in principal clauses, e.g. Oi ds éorw 6 avip, dv cides. Td Sddov, d dvSe7 ev
TO Khww, KdAdotdvy éotw. “EAcke Tod TO, 6716 kvSpwmos aSdvardés éorw.
Totos—otos; 80~—Toacotry. ‘Qs Rca, of tws eyévero. OFTw Ka-

$§ 327.] SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 617

A@s mdvra Urpatev, Ssre emalvov peylorov titws hv. “Ore & Kipos HARE,
tére mdvres peyddws exdpnoay. “Euewe péxpt tTottov, ob 5 Bacirels exfa-
Sev. A substantive may also stand instead of a demonstrative correlative,
e. g. év troltw TH xpdve, Sre (instead of rére, bre), Still, when the reciprocal
relation is not to be brought out emphatically, the demonstrative is commonly
not expressed, e. g. “EAciev, S71 6 vSpwros addvatds otw. Karas wdvra

“8 gh &srextr. “Ore b Kipos Ade, wdvtes weydrws exdpnoav. “Enewe,
xpi 08 5 Bacreds eriAdev, etc. Even both pronouns may, in certain cases,
be omitted, e. g.”"Euewve, uéxpt 6 Bacireds erirAdev.

Rem.4. The form of the demonstrative, in the principal clause, either
actually expressed or understood, determines the nature of the subordinate
clause. The substantive demonstrative denotes a substantive clause; the ad-
jective, an adjective clause; the adverbial, an adverbial clause. But the
subordinate clauses themselves have special characteristics by which they
may be distinguished from each other, viz., the introductory conjunctions and
the constructions connected with these.

§ 3273. Sequence of the Subjunctive Tenses in Sub-
ordinate Sentences.

1. For the use of tenses in subjunctive subordinate clauses, the
following general rule applies in Greek, as in Latin: —

The tenses of the subjunctive subordinate clause correspond
to those of the principal clause ; 1. e. a principal tense (Present,
Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect) in the principal clause, is fol-
lowed by the subjunctive in the subordinate clause, and an his-
torical tense (Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist) in the principal
clause is followed in the subordinate clause, by the Optative,
i. e. the Subjunctive of the historical tenses.

Todro Aéyw, TodTéd por A€AEKTAal, ToUTO AdEw, Wa yiyvdokns (ys),
hoc dico, dixi (Perfectum praesens), dicam, ut cognoscas. Totro @Xeyov, Tovrd
mor €XéAEKTO, TOVTO EXe~a, Wa yiyvdoKorts (yvotns), hoc dicebam, dix-
eram, dixi (Perfect. Histor.), ut cognosceres. Oivx @xw, bra trpémwmat (tTpd-
wat), non habeo, quo me vertam. Oix elxov, ira tperolunv (rparol-
puny), non habebam, quo me verterem. Oi todduiot mdytas, tw by evtixwot,
ktelvovotv. Of moAguot wdvras, brw ev trixorev, Extervoy.

2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less
regularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much
greater freedom. Very often in lively narration, the Greeks
refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the
present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal
clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause
is followed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses which —

At

518 | SYNTAX. [§ 327.

accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis-
course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis-
course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in his ;
lively conceptions, brings the past into present view ; the past
becomes present to him. See § 348, 5.

uo
rr

§ 327%. Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses.

The use of modes in the different. kinds of subordinate
clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by
itself. Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which
are common to several kinds of subordinate clauses.

1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi-
nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another
clause, taking the mode of this clause.

(a) This occurs with the Indic. of the historical tenses in those subordinate
clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical
proposition with «i and a preterite Indic. in the Protasis, and a preterite Indic.
with & in the Apodosis [§ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. (avSpwmos) ore Bods
by exwy cua, avipdérov St ywouny, edbvar ty mpdrrev, & €BovrAero (as in
Lat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3.5,8. ef €BovAdmeda xpnudtwy ay of 4A
elxov ayrimociosat (si vellemus expetere opes, guas alii haberent). Isocr. Paneg.
19.éx phy (Tovs phropas) uh mporépou Tep) Tay ducroyounévwy cuuBovadcvey, T ply
mept Tay GudisBnToupevwy huas €5l8akav (oportebat .. priusquam . . docuissent).
Pl. Gorg. 506, 6. jddws &v KadAukAc? tovT@ ert SterAeyouny, Ews aiTe..
aa édwKxa (usque dum reddidissem). From this may be explained the use of
the Indic. Imperfect or Aorist in final clauses after an Indic. of an historical
tense with or without a. See § 330, 5.

(b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac-
cessory members of optative clauses, i.e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with
adjective, adverbial, or final clauses, as members of a clause expressing a wish,
or as intermediate members of an optative proposition expressed conditionally.
Il. p, 640. e%n F Sstis Eraipos dmayyelAere TaxoTa MnAcldy (O that there
were a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar. Vesp. 1431. €pdo Tis, hv
exaotos eideln téxvnv. Pl. Phaedr. 279, c. 7d xpucod mARS0s €fn wot, Boor
Bre depew, wht wyew Sbivair BAdrdos, } 6 cdppwr. Il. o, 464, sqq. at ydp
sw Savdrow dusnxéos Ge Suvvaluny vdopw amoxptya, Ste uw pdpos aivds
ixdvot.—X. §. 8,17. tls moety Sdvait &y, bp’ ob cidein Kadrds Te Kal w&ya-
Sds vourCouevos. C. 4.6, 7. mas yap &v Tis, & ye uh ewmlorairo, Tadta copds
e%m; Pl. Phaed. 72, ¢. ci GmoSvqcKor py mdyra, boa Tov Cv meraddBor, —
éwe:d) d¢ droSdvo., wévot ev ToUTH Th OXhuaTL TA TEXVEO@TA Kal Wh dA
&vaBidoKotro, Gp ov WoAAH dvdyKn TeAcCUTaGVTA wavTa TeViVaL Kal wndev Chy ;

|

a

§ 327.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 519

X. 0.1, 13. ef ris x pGro rE dpyuply, Ssre xdeiwov rd ciua %xor, was by Ere
7d dpyipiov abtg apérmov ely; S, Ph. 325. Suudy yévoiro yep) ranpaoal
more, 1y ai Muxiivar yvotev.., rt xh Sxdpos avdpav GrAcluwv ufrnp pv. Eur.
Troad. 698. waida rdévde maidds CxSpévais &v, Tpolas uéyiorov apéany’, tv of
more ek god yevduevot maides “IAtov mdAw KaTrotkloetav Kal més yévoir ert.
X. An. 2. 4, 3. ob emordueda, Sti Bacireds Huds Grordoa wept waytds by
mwothoatto, tva Kal tots AAos “EAAnast poBos etn émt Baoirdda uéyav orpared-
ew (according to the best MSS.). Comp. 3,1,18. X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. ef 3) wei-
Tats erawveivy ce ToAAOUs, Sr ws Sdtay Ad Bots, Upre enmarnkads efns dv. Comp.
2. 4,17. But since the Optative in a clause expressing a wish as well as the
Optative in hypothetical propositions, has a present signification (§ 259, 3), ac-
cording to § 330, 2 the Subj. must properly follow after the final conjunctions,
as is frequently the case. Pl. Apol. 28, d. abrika tedvatny, tva ph ev-
Sdde wévw xatayédacros. X. An. 3. 1, 38. ofoucu by Suds péya dviioa 1d arpd-
Tevua, ci EwmimeAndelnre, Srws aytl Tay drodwAdtwv ds TdxLoTA oTpaTHYyol
Qvtixatactadsa@oiuv, Cy. 3.2, 28. xphuara mposyevéoSa eri Rv BovaAol-
env hui, Srws Exw moddy apdSdvws Siddva. Also with uh (whether not =
that). An. 1.3, 17. éym dxvolny pév by cis Ta TAGIa euBalvew, & hiv doln, wh
huas adrais tats tprhpect kaTaddan, poBoluny & dv te iryeudu & Boln Exec-
Sa, uh has aydyn, Iev obx oldv Te Fora ekeADEwv.

Remark. But in substantive-clauses with 67+ or és, that (§ 329), and in
dependent interrogative clauses, after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of
the historical tenses, the Ind. of the principal tenses remains; also after an
ee principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with
the principal clause, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse.
X. An. 5. 1, 10. ei wey Ariotdpeda capas, bre Ee Xeiploodos, oddity by
Hee Gv wéAAw Aéyew. (So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of {£o:.)
Dem. 19, 40. Eypagov &v diappninv, Hatna duds ed roihow, ei eb Hdew Kar
Thy cuupaxlay por yernoouérnyv. — Dem. 16, 4. ob8 &v els &vtrelmro., &s ov
Tuugpéper tH dA, Kal Aaxedamovious aoSeveis elvat kal @nBalovs. X. An. 3.
2, 36. ci viv Gmoderxdetn, tTlya xph Hyctoda: (ducere) tod wrauciov, . . ovK
ty . . BovrAeveosar jas Séor.

2. The Subj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de-
note indefinite frequency or repetition ; the Subj., when the prin-
cipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut.), the Opt.,
when the principal clause contains an historical tense (usually
the Impf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception,
inasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single
actions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of
the subordinate clause is translated by as often as.

Tl. B, 391. dv 8€ w° eydy ardvevSe udxns eSéAovta vohaw umrdley mapa
vnvot Kopwvicw, of of frerra &pxiov ecocira puyéey xivas 43 olwvots (as often as
I shall observe). X. Cy. 3.8, 26. drdérav (of BdpBapo BactrAcis) ot parome-

Sevwrrat, Tdppoy mepiBddrdAovra evmeTas Bid Thy morvxeplay. C. 3.1, 1. 8 te
pev (Xwxpdrys) aitds eideln, mdvrav mpoSuudrata edldacKev, Sto 3 adds

620 SYNTAX. ; [$§ 328, 329.

Greipdrepos e%n, mpds rods émoraucvous Fyev abrods. An. 6.1, 7. dadre of
“EAAnves Tots woAeulois Emlorev, padlws arépevyov. 4. 5, 30. 8 wou Revopav
waplor kduny, erpémeto mpds Tous ev Tals kemats. 1.9,18. €% rls yé 71 Kbpw mpos-
tdtayTt Kada@s danpeThaoerer, odderi mHmoTe axdpioToy clase Thy mpoSuulay.

§ 328. I. Substantive-Clauses.

Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand-
ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive,
and stand as the subject, as well as the attribute or object of
a sentence. Comp. § 326, 3.

§ 329. A. Substantive-Clauses introduced by éri or
as, that.

1. Substantive-clauses introduced by ori and ds, that,
express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e: g. épav,
axovey, voeiv, pavtdvew, yryvackewv, etc.; A€yew, SnAodv, Sexvivat,
ayyeAAav, etc., [§ 306, 1, (b)]; in the second place, subordinate
clauses introduced by or, express the object of verba affectuum,
e. g. Javpalew, axterta, dyavaxreiv, aicyiverdar, peuherIa, ete. ;
ért is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con-
tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word
in it. .

ReMARK 1. ‘Qs, properly, how, differs from 871, in expressing the thought
more indefinitely and undecidedly, than ér:; hence os is used particularly after
verbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi.
— After verbs of believing, thinking, judging, hoping, promising, swearing, denying,
the Inf. or the Acc. with the Inf. usually follows, very seldom 87x or &s; after
verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur with equal
frequency ; after verbs of knowing, showing, and the like, either 67: or os
follows, or a participle, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See

§ 311. Sometimes, also, 6rws and the Poet. ofvexa, also 6S odvexa in the
Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with St, that.

Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass. verb or to an imper-
sonal phrase with éorly, e. g. djAov, Sewdv, aioxpdv éoriv, and the like, it stands
as the grammatical subject.

2. The predicate of this substantive-clause may be ex-
pressed: (a) by the Ind., (b) by the Opt.. (c) by the Opt. with
av, (d) by the Ind: of Hist. tenses with av.

3. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when the statement is
to be represented as a fact, something certain or actual. Par-

§ 329.] SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 521

ticularly is the Ind. used regularly, when the verb of the prin-
cipal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.),

4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when the statement is
to be represented as a conception or supposition, therefore, par-
ticularly, when what is stated as the opinion of another is to be
indicated as such (§ 345, 4). When the Ind. interchanges with
the Opt., then one thought is represented as a fact, the other,
as a mere thought or conception, something uncertain.

X. Cy. 1.4, 7. of 8 Gteyov, Sts Uperot woddAods Hdn TAnoidoayras Bie gpSe-
pav. Th. 1, 114. iyyéaSn, bri Méyapa dgéotyKe, al Medowovvfjoion pw éA-
Aovotv esBddAdAaw es Thy *Artixhy. Her. 3, 140. ruvSdvera: (Hist. Pres.) 6 Sv-
Aocav, &s H Bacirdnin. repreAnAUSor és TovToy Toy kvdpa. X. An. 1. 1, 3.
Ticoapépyns diaBddAdAc (Hist. Pres.) roy Kipoy apbs roy adeApdy, &s eri Bou-
Aetbor arg. Cy. 1.1, 3. bre wey By Tadra éveduuotucda, ofrws eyryvdoKouer
wep abrav, &s avSpérw wepundti: mdvrwy Tay tAdAwv paoy etn (dw, h avdpa-
mov &pxev. An. 2.1, 3. obra Zreyov, Sri Kipos wey TES yNKEV, “Apiatos Se
mepevyws efn kal A€vyot, Sri tabrny Thy jucpay Tepmeivesey by adrods.

Rem. 3. When the Jnd. Jmpf. instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense
in the principal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct
discourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. Zevopay zreyev, ST:
opSas Aria@vro Kal abtd Td Epyov abrois uaptupoln, X. ¥ 3. 3, 11. (oratio recta :
bpSas airi@vrar). See § 345, Rem. 5. But when the Ind. of the principal
tenses follows an historical tense in the principal clause, then the subordinate
clause assumes wholly the coloring of direct discourse (§ 345, 5). Hence it
sometimes happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially
or wholly changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. 1.4, 28. évradSa 5) Tov
Kipoy yeAdoa te ex tay mpdodev Saxptwv ka) cimeiy abt@ amidvta Sappeiv, brs
wmapéatar avtois dAlyou xpdvou- Sste dpay cor éféorar kav BovdAn aoxap-
dauverel. Hence Sr: may be used, when the exact words of another are quoted
in the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or
marks of quotation are used, e. g. X. Cy. 3.1, 8. elre &, Sri- Eis naipdy hres
tpn, he said: “ you have come at the right time.” An. 2. 4, 16. Mpdfevos
elrev, 87+ Abtés eius, dv Cyrets. It is used even before the Imp., e.g. Pl. Criton.
50, c. tows by efrorey (of vduor), STL+ "Q Sedxpares, uh Sadpa le Ta Acydueva.

5. The Opt. with ay is used, when the statement is to be
represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture,
or as an undetermined possibility [§ 260, 2, 4, (a)].

X. An. 1. 6, 2. karadAayels 3 ofros Kipw, elev, ef abrg@ Soin imméas xiAl-
ovs, Sri Tovs mpoxatuxalovras imméas } kataxdvot by évedpetoas, ) CavTas
modAovs alrav €Xo1, Kal kwAvG ete Tov Kdiewy emidytas. Cy. 1. 6, 3. wéuynmat
&xovoas woré gov, rx eikdtws kv Kal wap Seay mpaxtixdrepos etn, Sswep kad
mapa dvSpdmrwv, Sstis wh, dwdte ev amdpois etn, TOTE Koraxevoi, GAN’ Bre Ta Epiora
mpdrro, Tore uddioTa Tav Seay peuvgro (Sstis uh KrA. instead of ef Tis ph
«tA.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. oda, rt mdvres &v dbuordoyhoraite

44*

IR ea ed Wiis Rae eS le BS oN ek 2 ae es oe ae Pe eel hee eG 7
er j $ . eee : peepee an ene

522 : SYNTAX. : [§ 329.

6. The Ind. of the Hist. tenses with dv is used, when the
affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual
existence or possibility is denied [§ 260, 2, (2) (a)].

Dem. Aphob. 830,55. €i wiv b rarhp Aalorer Tovtos, Shdov, Ire ovr a
TaAAa emwétpemer, ovr dy TavS oltw KaTadimav abtois Eppa ter. Lys. ¢.
Agor. 137, 75. ovdémore melvess ovdéva dvSporwy, ds bpbvixov aroxtelvas Apet-
Sns ay, ei wh peydrAa Tov Siov Tov ASnvalwy Kal dvhixeocta Kaxd eipydow. Pl.
Rp. 1. 830. @eworonAjs amexplvaro, bri ods by adtds Seplpws dy dvoyacrds
éy évero, odf éxeivos "ASnvaios (dv).

Rem. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those which
are personal, the subject of the substantive-clause being transferred to the
principal clause and the impersonal expression becoming its predicate.
Comp. §§ 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. nal 5HAn 7H oikodoula
ért kal vov éorw, 6714 KaTd omovdhy eyéveto, X. C. 4. 2, 21. (Sone? 6 To10dT0s)
SfAos vh AP efvat, Sts & Mero cidévam ove oldey. X.O.1, 19. Fre wovnpdr-
atol eigt, ovde ge AavSdvovery.

Rem. 5. In the place of a substantive-clause introduced by 67: or és, the °
Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part. may stand after verba declarandi and _ sen-
tiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with
the Inf. and that with the Part., has been seen in § 311; but the difference be-
tween the construction with a Part. and that with ét: or és, is only in form.
The difference between the construction with 67: and @s with the finite verb
and that of the Inf. (Acc. with Inf.) is, that in the former, the affirmation is
more objective and definite (as a fact); in the latter, on the contrary, subjective
and indefinite (as an assumption). Hence verbs which express a merely sub-
jective meaning, as, ofegSat, Soxetv, édmi¢erv, and also pdvax (i.e.
verbs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclusively
with the Inf. (Acc. with the Inf.), very seldom with ér: or @s. That the distinc-
tion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly
seen from the fact, that examples are found in which the same thought is ex-

ressed by the same writer in different places in each of the three forms, e. g.
er. 6, 63. ekaryyéAAe, &s of mais yévyove. 65. bre of eéhyyetde 6 oixérns
wmatda yeyovevat, 69. bre abtg ob HyyeAdns yevyevnMevos,

Rem. 6. The verbs wévuvnuat, ofda, dkovw and others of similar mean-
ing, are not unfrequently followed by an adverbial clause, introduced by ére,
instead of a substantive-clause introduced by ét: or os. This construction
seems to have arisen from an ellipsis, as tod xpévov, e. g.ueuvnucn (Tod xpdvov),
Ste Tabra éActas, as in Eng. J remember very well WHEN the war broke out. X.
Cy. 1. 6, 8. wéuynpat Kal TovTO, 87 €, Cod AéyovTos, guveddKet Kal euol drepucy-
eSes elvat epyov Td kad@s Ypxew. Dem. Ol. 2(3), 29,4. wéuvnodve, 67 anny-
yeASn Pidurros mepiopkayv. Comp. memini, quum darem; vidi, quum prodiret,
audit eum, quum diceret.

Rem.7. Verbs expressing emotion (No.1), instead of being followed by a sub-
stantive-clause introduced by 67: or és, are often followed by a subordinate clause
introduced by a conditional or interrogative «i, 2/; whether, when the object of
admiration, etc., is not to be represented as actually existing, but as merely pos-
sible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. Savudw, O71 Tatra ylyverat and ei
TavTa ylyvera. Attic politeness, which often blends in its language a coloring
of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs
this form even in settled: and undoubted facts; in this case ef has the force of -
ért. » Aeschin. Ctes. odk dyamw@, €i ph Slenv: wer (he is not satisfied, that),
Pl. Lach. 194, a. dyavaxkrT@ e1 obtwol & vow ph oids 7 eiul eiwety, Rp. 348,

Pa _*
. PE
>

LPR FOR

§ 330.) FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES, 523

e. 763 € éSavuaca, el dv ager kal goplas rans pepe Thy &duclay, rhyv Be Bi-
Kaootyny év trois évavrias. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. obk oxtvdn, ef rowdro
kaxdy érdye: tw (that he brings such a calamity upon one).

Rem. & Instead of Sr: ofr ws, the relative &s, that, is often used, and
instead of 8re totovdros or bre técos, the relatives ofos, dcos. .
Phaed. 58, e. eddaluwy wor 6 dvhp épalvero, &s adeds Kal yevvalws éredcbra (that
he died so fearlessly, etc.). Her. 1, 31. ai aipraten éuaxdpiCov thy unrépa, ofwy
réxvev éxipnoe (that she is possessed of such children).

§ 330. B. Final Substantive-Clauses, denoting pur-
pose and result, introduced by ws, iva, etc!

1. The second class of substantive-clauses are those which
denote a purpose, object, or a result. ‘These clauses are intro-
duced by the conjunctions iva, ds, drws (6¢pa, Poet.), iva
[L, OF LH, OT WS MH.

2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive
or optative, since the purpose or object is something merely
imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause
is a principal tense: Pres., Perf., Fut.,or an Aorist with the sig-
nification of the present [§ 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final
conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc.,
is followed by the Sud7.; but when the verb of the principal
clause is an historical tense: Impf, Plup., Aor., then the final
conjunction is followed by the optatiwve (but never by an Opt.
Fut.).

Taira ypdow, yéypadpa, ypdwo, tv ZrASys (ut venias, that you may
come). Aétov (with the sense of the Pres.), %#/ ei8@ (dic, ut sciam, that I
may know). Tatra @ypagov, éyeypdperv, Eypaya, tv ErASors (ut ve-
nires, that you might come). Il. A, 289, sq. GAA’ iSdbs €AadvEeTE udvuxas trmous
ipStuwy Aavady, tv’ iwéprepoy ebxos Epnoe (ut gloriam vobis paretis); but,
Il. €, 1—3. &S ad Tudel5n Acoufde? Maddds "AShyn SOx € pévos kal Sdpcos, ty
Exdndos wera waow “Apyeloiss yévorto, idt KrAéos oSAbv &porro (ut clarus
Jieret et gloriam sibi pararet). 1, 347. Jupiter said to Minerva, &AN x of véxtap
Te ka) GuBpootny éparewhy o rdtov (with the sense of the Pres.) évt orfSeco’,
iva uh ww Amds TxnTas (ut ne fames eum oceupet); but, 352, 4 F “AxsA7i véK-
tap évl orhdecot Kal &uBpoolny éparewhy ord, tyva wh uw Ads areprhs you-
vay txorro (ut ne occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239, 39. yéypada tiv, iva wh
ém TAciov €voxAose wepl rodrwy, X. Cy. 2.1, 4. ri obv, %pn 5 Kipos, ob
kal Thy diva Zrctds por [—=A€tov por, § 256, 4, (e)], 'rws—BovrAcua-

‘ For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together
here, although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose.

eA ee! ERO Oe I ee ee EPO

524 SYNTAX. [§ 330.

Meda, Srws dy kpiora dywrifolucda; 1. 2, 3. (ex THs Tay TleprGv ercuSépas ayo-
pas Kadoumévns) Td mev via. kad of &yopato. Ame AHAaYTat eis BAAov TémOv, ws
MH meyvintat % TovTwy TUpBn TH Tov wemaidevuevwy edKooulg. 15. Tva Be
capéotepoy SnAwWSH Taca 7H TMepoay wodrreia, mikpdy ewmdverput (paucis repe-
tam). 4, 25, KauBions toy Kipoy &rekdAect, Smws Ta ev Mepoas émixopia
émwitedoly. Pl. Apol. 28, d.abrixa reXvainy (with the sense of the Pres.),
tva uh evddde wévw KarayéAaorTos.

_. Remark 1. The Subj. often follows an’ historical tense: (a) in vivid nar-

ration, where past actions are regarded as present (objective manner of repre-
sentation, § 327, Rem. 2); (b) when the purpose or effect is to be repre-
sented as continuing in the present time of the speaker. (a) Her. 1, 29. SéAwy
&meShunoe trea Séxa, tva dh mh Twa Tay vouwr &vayKaTdh Adou Tov
(= dv) &&ero (Solon was absent ten years, in order that he might not be compelled,
etc.). 7, 8. cvAAoyor Tepoéwy ray dpiotwy émworee To, iva yreouas Te TUD)-
Tat opéwy kad ards ey waot efmn TH SérAc. Th. 4,1. nad éseBeBrAhnertarv
dua es thy ‘Pnyivey of Aaxedamorion, Tva wh (oi ‘Pnyivo) ériBond@ci Trois
Meoonvios. — (b) Od. A, 93. thr’ abr’, & SdaTHvE, Aimdy Hdos HeAloww HAvAEs,
bppa Tin vexvas kal aréprea xGpov. Her. 7, 8. 51d dudas viv eyo guvérAcéa,
va 7d (=) vodw mphoocew bwepSéwpmac duiv. Dem. Phil. 3, 117, 26. ras
mwéAes avTav Tapypnta kal Terpapxlas kaTéaTnoev, ya wh pdvoy Kata 7d-
Aets, GAAG Kal Kara @Zvn SovarAetdwotrv. Pl. Crit. 43, b. éwirndés oe ode Evyer-
pov, iva as Hira Sidyns.

Rem. 2, On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres,
sense, is sometimes followed by an Opt.: (a) when the present of the principal
clause is an historical present, or when, in the use of the Pres., the speaker has
at the same time contemplated a past action; Eur. Hec. 10. roAby 5€ abv éuod
xpvobv €xmweumet Addpa marhp, iv’, etror *IAlov telyn Téa, Tois (@ow etn
mao uh omdvus Biov. X. An. 4. 6,1. tovroy & "Emodever..rapadldwor ov-
Adrrew, Smws, ci KaAGS Hyhoato, éxwv Kal TodToy &mtow Ar. Ran, 24. avros
BadiQw Kal wovG, tovrov & 6xa, tva mh TarawaimwpoiTo, pnd &xxos
pépor(Llet this one ride on an ass = I placed him on an ass, in order that he
might not suffer hardship). (b)° when the speaker adduces the intention or pur-

pose which a person entertains, not as coming from his own, i. e. the speaker’s_

mind, but from that of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as
one that had a previous existence; Pl. Rp. 410, b. dp’ ody, jv 8 éyé, & TAad-
Kev, kal of kakiordvres povoikh Kal yumvacTiKh madevery odx ob Evekd Ties otoy-
Tai Kadota, iva TH wey To capa Sepawevory To, TH St Thy Wuxi;
(the view of the lawgiver, i.e. his purpose). X. An. 2.4, 4. tows 5é- mov (Ba-
aiheds) ) arookdrte Tt} amorerxi(er, &s Xropos en H 65ds (the view of the
king). (c) when in the principal clause, the Opt. stands with or without &y
[§§ 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a)], then an Opt. commonly follows, for the con-
ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are represented as separated
from the present time of the speaker ({ 259, 3); still, a Subj. may follow by
attraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See
§ 327b, 1. (b).. Theogn. 881. eiphyn wal maodros x01 ddr, dppa mer’ BArAw
komad Corus Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. yevotuar, W trAGev rears wévrov mpdp-
Ane a&AlkAvorov —, Tas iepas Bws mposetmoimev “Adhvas.

3. When two or more final clauses follow each other, the
Subj. sometimes interchanges with the Opt. The two clauses
are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, the former
representing the result of the purpose or aim as certain;

$ 330.) FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 525

the latter, without this accessory idea, and consequently as
uncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes.

Il. 0, 597, sq.“Exrope ydp of Suuds eBodrAcro Kddos dpétar Mpiauldyn, Lya vyver
kopwvlar Seomdats wip €uBdAn axduaroy, Odridos F etalowov aphy wacay émi-
kphvece. Her. 9, 51. és rodrov 5) Tov x@pov eBovdetoayro weracriva, tva
kal Bar: Exwor xpaodat apSdvw, Kad of immées ohéas wh ctvolaro. 8, 76.
Tavde Se elvexev dvijvyov (of Mépra) tas vijas, tva dh roiow“EAAno: nde pvyéew
eff GAA’ Grodaupdsévres ev TH Sarauine Sotev rlow tay em ’Apremoly.

4. The modal adverb ay, referring to a conditioning clause
(generally not expressed), is sometimes joined with the final
conjunctions és and érws (more seldom iva).

Od. «, 167, sq. réupw 5€ ro odpoy brioSev, Ss ne wdr donhSns chy warplda
yaiay Tknat, at xe Jeol y¥ €SéAwos 8, 20, sq. kal uw paxpdrepoy Kal wdo-
gova Sijxe idécda, Ss nev Parhnecor pidos mdvtecot yév orto (Sc. ei mpds Tods
balnxas &plxoiro). Her. 3, 44. edeq3n, Sxws bv Kal wap’ éwirdy wéupas és Ed-
pov Séo0rro orparod (ut, si opus esset, exercitum a se peteret). -X. Cy. 5, 2, 2k.
dia THs ons xdpas Utes huas, Srws by cldGuev, Gre Sef Pika wal wordma
voulCew (in order that, when we set our foot on the land, we may know, etc.). HH. 4.
8, 16. fwKe xphuata “Avtadrklig, Swws dv, TANpwSévtos vauTixod bmrd
Aakedatpovlwy, of tre “Adnvaio xa of ciupaxo aitay madAdoy ris ciphyns
wposdéorvro,

5. The final conjunctions 7ya and és (more seldom Gras),
are connected with the Ind. of the historical tenses, when it is
to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished,
or is not to be accomplished. In this case, in the principal
clause, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and
without dy. See § 227%, 1. (a).

Ar. Pac. 135. obxoty éx piv ce Mnydoou Cetta rrepdy, S4rws egalvov Trois
Seois tpayweérepos. Pl. Criton. 44, d. ei yap Sedov olol re elvat of roAAol Ta
péyiorra Kaka ekepydleoSa, Tva ofol re hoav ad Kal ayadda Ta uéyiora, Kai
Kad@s by elxe. Lys. Simon. 98, 21. €BovAduny & ty Sivwva thy airhy
yrduny, uot exw, tv’ auporépwy judy axotcaytes TaANST padlws Eyvwre Ta

Slxara.

=

6. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor-
ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. érpedeioIa, hpovri-
ew, dedvéevae prddrrew, cxoreiv, cxevaorIa, Bovreier Ia, dpav, rarely,
mparrew (curare), pnxavaoIa, mapaxadeiv, mapayyeAAcw, mpoereiy,
aireioSar, agwdv, aye (up then), and the like, are followed by the
conjunctions 67ws (drws «y), sometimes also by as, either

a ROT PEE ee Cale NE one Mie age eee Cee os eee iene G
A a A —_ ie 3 1 rey eee ee
< - ’ es = oy

*

526 heros SYNTAX, | [§ 331.

(according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Fut.
Ind., when the accomplishment of the purpose is to be repre-
sented as something definitely occurring and continuing.

&

X. Cy. 1. 2,8. of Mepoixol véuor @mipérXovrat, Saws Thy apxiv wh To10d-
To. EgovTat of TortTat, olor (= dste) wovnpod 7) aicxpod Epyov eplecIar. 3. 2,
13. &s 6& Kada@s Efer TA duerepa, Ay Hiro yévnode, euol weAhoet Dem. Ol.
1, 21, 12. ckomwetose Tovto, & &vipes "ASnvain, brws uh Adyous épodct
udvov of rap’ tuay mpéoBeis, GAAG Kad Epyor Tt Seuxview EEovotyv. Pl. Ion. 530,
b. &ye 54, Saws Kal Ta Mavadhvaa viehoopev. The Fut. Ind. also stands
very often after an historical tense, according to § 327, Rem. 2; far more rare
in this case is the use of the Fut. Opt. X. Cy. 8.1, 43. éweweaAetro 8 8rws
Bare tovrot, whtre &morol wore ZoowrTo.

Rem. 3. Sometimes 6rws &yv is connected with the Fut. Ind., and is then
to be referred to an implied condition. Her. 3, 104. of *Ivdol tpdrw TootTw
kal Cevter xpeduevor eAavvover em) roy xpuvodv Acdroyiopévws, Bxws kv KavuaTwv
TOY Nec i edvtwv EcovTat ev TH aprayf (i.¢. bray Katuara Sepudrara 7H).

Rem. 4. “Orws or 8rws wh with the Fut. Ind., sometimes refers to a
word to be supplied, viz. Spa, dpare, vide, videte. X. An. 1.7, 3. irws obv
Eceagde tyvdpes Uti THs éAevdeplas, (see) then that ye are men worthy of liberty.
Pl. Menon, 77, a. AN Saws wh odx ofds 7 Ecopmat WoAAd To1adTa Aéyew. A
similar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, 87 o° (sc. cxowetv) aw s in the Attic poets.
Soph. Aj. 556. 8€7 o Smws matpds deikers ev exSpois, ofos ef olov'rpd~ns.

Rem. 5. Verbs expressing care, anxiety, are very often followed by 87ws
(sometimes also by &s) &»v with the Opt., in order to express the idea of anz-
wety, solicitude how something might happen [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. In this case,
Saws and ws are clearly adverbs (how). X. Cy. 2. 1,4. BovrAevodpeda,,
Stas &y porta aywrilColpeda.

§ 331. IL Adjective-Clauses.

Adjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into
a sentence, and, like adjectives, serve to define a substantive
or substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro-
duced by the relative pronouns ds, 7, 6, dsTus, TLS, O TL
otos, ete.

Of roAgutot, 02 arépuyoy (= of dmomuydvres mworguor). TA mpdyyara, &
*AAdEavdpos Expatev (7a brd "AAcEdydpov mpaxdévTa mpdyyata Or Ta TOD Aret-
dvbpov mpdyuara). ‘“H modus, ev § 6 Meolorparos tipavvos jv (= brd Tod

Mewirrpirov Tupavvevadeioan OAs).

Remark 1. Homer often uses the pronoun és in a demonstrative sense.
Tl. @, 198. GAAG Kal bs deidoiuxe Aids weydAow Kepavydy. So also, of— of, these,
those, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well as in Ionic prose. this usage
is confined to the following instances: (a) cat és, cal 7, instead of kal
obras, Kal airy. X. Cy. 5.4, 4. kal ds ekamarndels didker dvd Kpdtos.. 4.5,

Py
a oe

$ 331.] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. ~ 527

52. «al ot yeAdoarres efrov. Antiph, 1. 113, 16. «at } irérxero. In the ob-
lique Cases the article (§ 247, 3), is used instead of it, e. g. «ad ré6v, et ewn. —
(b) 8s «éy—ds 5¢é in Demosthenes, yet very seldom, often in later writers,
and earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates; and it occurs not only
in the Nom., but also in all the Cases of the Sing: and Plural. .Dem. Cor.
248. wéAcis "EAAnvidas &s wey dvaipav, eis &s 5 Tovds puyddas xardywr. — (c)
ds nal bs, this and that, it not being determined who, any one that you please
(very seldom). Her. 4, 68. ras BagiAntas lorias emidpenoe ds kal bs, exclu-
sively in the Nom. (in the Acc. rdv «al rdv, 7d Kal 7d, see § 247, 3), — (d) in the
phrase 4 3 3s, 4 3 %, said he, she.

Rem. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad-
jective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus: a
demonstrative adjective pronoun or the article 6 7 7é standing in a principal
clause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause,
and the latter,on the other hand, refers back to the former, ¢. g. ofros 6
avhp, bv «ides, Td pddov, 4 avde?. So also, rorotros, ofos, Tocodros,
8aos (§ 326, Rem. 3). But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to
be represented as a general one, then the article is omitted, and the relative

refers immediately to the substantive, e. g. avfp, bs nadds éoriv (= dvhp Ka-
Ads). When the relative refers to a personal pronoun, then the relative takes the
place of the demonstrative, e. g. éyé, is —av, 8s, etc. When the personal pro-
nouns have no special emphasis, they are omitted, and the relative refers to
the person indicated by the inflection of the verb, e. g. xaA@s éroinoas, bs Tadra
empatas.

Rem. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers, is often omitted,
and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if the
pronoun has no special emphasis ; hence especially when the omitted demon-
strative denotes some indefinite object, and is equivalent to rls, some one, or
when the relative és, Sstis, may be resolved into si quis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. yduor
® bcos wey ed rinrovew Bpotay, (rovTotrs Sc.) waxdpios aidy* ois 5& uh mirrov-
ow eb, (obro4 sc.) Th T dor eiol Td Te Bvpae Sustuxets. Th. 2, 41. ovdey
mposdeduevor obre ‘Ouhpouv emrawérov, ore (Tivds sc.) Sstis reat pey Td abtixa
Téplet KTA,

Rem. 4. When the relative is used substantively, i. e. when it refers to a sub-
| stantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clause,
like the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub-
stantive, e. g. "HASov of &ptotrot foav = FAsoy of Sporto (sc. uvdpes). —
Here belongs also, the formula éerw, of, dv, ois, ofs, & This formula has be-
come so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any
effect on the verb gor, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis-
course relates to past or future time; thus it has assumed entirely the charac-
ter of a substantive-pronoun (@o:), and also, since éoriy may be connected
with every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g.

Nom. @oriv of (=vior) arépvyov

Gen. @oriv dv (=viwv) dwécxero

Dat. @otiv ofs (= évilots) ody oftws Botey
Ace. gotiv ofs (=évilous) d&mréxrewer.

The Nom. Zo 7 tv of is rare, for example, X. Cy. 2.3, 18; in place of it, commonly
eloty of. Th.2,26.KAcéroumos ris tapasaracclou ~otiv & edijwoe. Soin the
question, 2oriv oftives; X.C.1.4,2. 207 ofstivas dvSpérwy Tedaduakas
ém copig ; in Xenophon jy also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. "Hy 3: rovTwy Tay oTad-
av ots mdvu pwaxpo’s Hravvey (and some of these marches which he made, were
very long, or he made some of these marches very long). HH. 7.5, 17.1@v modeulov
iv obs iwoondvdous awédocay (there was some of the enemy which they restored by

truce, or they restored some of the enemy by truce).

528 ; SYNTAX. [§ 332.

Rem. 5. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with goriyv, are
used wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time.

téoriv dTe = evidre, est quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. Eotiv Bre erckev;
éotiv tva or Sov, est ubdi, i. e. aliquando;

éotiv ov or @vSa, est ubi, somewhere, in many places ;

ovK Eo Brov, nunquam ;

éotiv H or 84, quodammodo, in many places ;

ob €otiv Srws, nullo modo, obk ~ctiv brws od, certainly.

éoriv dmws; in the question, Ls it possible, that ?

$332. Agreement of the Reiative Pronoun.

1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with the sub-
stantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to
which it refers; the Case of the relative, however, depends on
the construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter-
mined either by the predicate, c. by some other word in the
subordinate clause, or it stands as the subjec: im the Nom.

‘O avhp, dv eldes, pldos wob eorw. ‘H aperh, hs mavres of dyado) émSupod-
ow, péya &yaddy eorw. Oi otpari@ra ofs euaxerducda, avdpedraro jjoay.
Oavidfoueyv Swxpdrn, ob H copla meylorn jy. “Emupoduey rijs aperijs, h
mwnyh ¢oTt wdyTwy TOY KAaAGY.

2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter-
mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or
implied) to which the relative refers. When the relative is
connected with the first or second person, then the English uses
the form, J am the one who, I who, Thou who, etc.

"Eyé, bs ypdow, ob, ds ypdpes, 5 avhp or exeivos, ds ypdper. Th. 2, 60.
€uot towitw avdpt dpyl(erde, ds oddevds ofomat Hoowy civa. Isocr. Paneg.
mwas ovx Hdn Sikadv eoTrw Huas ewaweiv, olrives Thy apxhv KaTacxelv
HdvvASnuwev; X. Cy. 5. 2,15. wad oixla ye word pellav |) bmeréepa ris euijs,
ot ye olla xpHoSe yh te kal obpayg. Hence after the Voc., the second per-
son is regularly used, e. g. dvSpwme, ds quas Toidra kana erolnoas.

3. When the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in
the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when
they are of the same Gender; often, however, it is in the neu-
ter, when ,the substantives denote animate objects. Comp.
§ 242, 1, (a), (P). |

Th. 3, 97. pdxn, didteis Te nad Sraywyat, dv ofs &uporépors fjocous hoay ov
"ASnvain. X. Cy. 1.8, 2. (Kipos) épay (roy mdwmoy) kexoounucvoy kal opdadrudy
imoypadi, Kat xpdparos évrpliper cal Kéucus mposdérors, & 3h vduma hy ev MAdas.

§ 382.] AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 529

Isocr. Panath. 278, b. radra elroy, ob mpds thy ebaéBeiay, odd pds thy Bixauoad-
ynv, ovd8 mpds thy ppdynow amoBrAdvas, & ob diHASeEs.

4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rela-
tive, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the
Mase. rather than the Fem., etc. (§ 242, 1); but when things
are spoken of, it is usually in the neuter.

Od. 8, 284. Sdvarov Kal Kijpa uedavay, ds 34 o¢e cxeddv eort. Isocr. de
Pac. 159, a. fixouey exxAnoid(ovtes wepl te modcuou kad ciphyns, & weylorny exer
Sivauw ev To Bly tev avSpérwv. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. éamidwr Kad Chdov Kad
tinav, & mdvra mposiy Tois rére mpartouévois bw’ euod. Pl. Apol. 18, a. ev éxelyp
Th dwry texal TH tTpdrw ev ofstwep eredpduuny. Sometimes, also, the rela-
tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. Av 58 Thy
elphyny Tointeucda, weTa TWOAATS opadrelas Thy wédw oikhoouer, dmadrdayevtes
mwoAduwy kal xwwdivev kal Tapaxis, «is hv viv mpds GAhAous karéornuer.

5. The following exceptions occur to the rule stated under
No. 1, respecting the agreement of the relative : —

(a) Constructio xara civeorv (§ 241, 1), not often in prose
with the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns,
or substantives which are to be considered as such.

Her. 8, 128. wepieSpaye SuTrAos—, of abrika 7d tétevpa AaBdvres — epepov
ém rovs orparnyous. Th. 3,4.7d Trav ’ASnvalwy vauTixdy, of Spuouy ev tH

- Maadg. Pl. Phaedr. 260, a. rAHSe1, ofmep dixdoovar.

Remark 1. The following cases belong here : —

(a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela-
tive in the Pl., when it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but
to the whole class, and in this way takes the signification of ofos. This usage,
however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. u, 97. Kj TOS, & uvpla
Booxet &ydorovos *Auditpirn. Pl. Rp. 554, a. abyunpds yé Tis Ov wal ard wayTds
a arta mowvpmevos, Snoavporoids avhp, ods d) (cujusmodi homines) kai érawet
Td TARVOS. .

(b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a Pl. substantive,
when the relative has a collective signification, e. g. dstis, 's &y with the Subj.,

isquis, roma oa Il. A, 367. viv ad robs GAAousS emelooum (persequar),
by Ke kixelw. So in particular, dyes, Sstis or bs dv (never mdyres ofrives, but
always mdvtes Soo or Sstis), e. g. Th. 7,29. rdvtas eqs, St evrixaer, Kad
maidas Kal ‘yuvaikas xtelvyovres. Pl. Rp. 566, d. domdfera mdvras, 6 dv
mwepituyxXayn.

Rem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender
of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con-
sidered as a particular one, but as general (§ 241, 2), or when the relative is not
so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence. §.
O. T. 542. dp’ obx) papdy dort trodyxelpnud cov, tvev te mAnSous Kal plrAwy Tu-
pavylda Snpav, d xphuacly SY arlonera.

45

530 SYNTAX. [§ 332.

(b) Connection of the Dual with the Plural (§ 241, 5).

To xetpe, &s 6 Jeds eri ro ovdAAapBdvew adAjAaw éroinoe, X.
C. 2. 3, 18.

(c) When a predicative substantive, in the adjective-clause,
is in the Nom. (§ 240, 2) or in the Acc. (§ 280, 4), the relative,
instead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan-
tive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num-
ber of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more
important.

Her. 2, 7. 4 68s mpbs 7 rpéweru, Td (=) Kadrdéerar Mnaodtcrov
otdua. 5, 108. Thy &kpny, of Kadrcdyra KAntBes THs Kbmpov. 7, 54.
Nepoirxdy Elpos, roy (=dv) &kivdeny Kordovor. Pl. Phaedr. 255, c. 4

Tov peduaros éxelvov tH yh, dv Tue pov Zeds Tavuphdous epdy avouace. Phileb.
40, a. Adyou eiow éy Exdoros juay, &s €Awldas dvoudCouer.

Rem. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im-
mediately, but a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at-
traction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with
the former. Pl. L. 937, d. nal Sfn ev dvSpéros mas ob KaAdY,d TavTA hue
pwxe Ta Gvdpaériwva; Gorg. 460, €. obdéror’ by ely 7 PnTopikh &dikoyv mpay-
pea, &7 del weph Sixasocvvys Tos Adyous Moreira.

6. When the relative would be in the Acc., and refers to a
substantive in the Gen. or Dat., then, when the adjective-clause
has almost entirely the force of an attributive adjective, the
relative commonly assumes the form of its substantive, i. e. the
relative takes the same Case as its substantive. This con-
struction is called attraction. Attraction also takes place, when
instead of the substantive, a substantive demonstrative (§ 331,
Rem.),is used. The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when
it contains no special emphasis. By means of attraction, the —
substantive is frequently transposed and stands in the adjective-
clause. See No. 8.

Th. 7, 21. tyov ard trGv wérAcwy Gy ereace (= Toy TedecHy) oTparidy.
X. Cy. 3.1, 33. cy trots Snoavpois ofs 6 mathp xaréArrev (= Tos brd Tod
marpos kaTahepdeiow). 2.4, 17. érdtre ob mpoedAnAvdoins aby h exo Suvd wer
8. 1, 34. eye bricxvotpa, Av 6 Seds cd B5G, vd’ Gv by euol Savelons Ada wAclo-
vos &&ia evepyerioey (instead of dvr) rovrwy,é). Pl. Gorg. 519, a. bray ra dp-
Xaia mposamoAAVwo. mpds of s exrhoayTo (instead of rpds robrois, &). Phaed. 70,
a. (9 Wuxh) darndraynévrn TOUTwWY TAY KakGv wy av viv Sh dHjASes. Isocr.
Paneg. 46, 29. @yv éAaBev Graow peredwxer (instead of ro’rwy &). Evag 198.
To.ovrots €sectv olors Evaydpas wey efxev. Th. 5, 87. ék trav mapdvTwy
kat Gy dpare (instead ef nal ex tobrwy, & dpare). The preposition is frequently

-
§ 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE FRONOUN, 531

repeated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. dg’ Gv dyelpe: nal mposaire? wa SavelCerat,
amd robrwy didye (instead of Grd rodrwy didye oy dyelpn or ag Sy
dryelper — Sid-yer without amd rotrwr).

Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires entirely the nature of
an adjective or grin which combines with its substantive to form a single
idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. xalpw rats émiaoroAais
als &pavas (= xalpw rais imd cot ypapelous emorodais). The blending of
the adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and
beautiful, when the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the
substantive, e. g. xalpw als &ypayas éwmiorodAais.

Rem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract-
ed relative, these also must be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. éué ore xaipds
mposnydyero Gv expwa Sinkalwy cal cuupepdvtwy TH warpld: oddey mpodod-
vat (instead of & %xpiwa Sixaa Kal cuupépovra). Ph.2,70,17. 0fs obciv bmer-
€pors (didurmos), TovT OVS dopadws KéxTNTaL.

Rem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction.
Th. 7, 67. wodAal (vijes) paorar és Td BAdrrecda ap av huiv waperxetacra
(instead of “Grd rovrwy, &). X. Cy. 5 4,39. fyero 8 wal tay équrod tay Te
mioTav, ois HdeTo, kal Gy (for exelywy, ols) Halaores ToAdods (i. e. secum duzxit
multos suorum, et fidorum, quibus delectabatur, et eorum, quibus diffidebat).

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative
adverb taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the
demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the
direction denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. d:exoulCovro evSis (sc. évred-
Sev) Sev (instead of ob, whi) bwetéSevro waidas. S. Ph. 481. €uBadrod wu’ ban
SeAas Gywy, és avytAlayv, és trp@pav, és mpvurvnv box (instead of ob,
ubi) heora ueAAw tovs wapdytas GAyuveiv.

7. The relatives ofos, da0s, éstusody, HALkos, are attracted
not only in the Acc. but also in the Nom., when the verb efvac
and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause,
€. g. olos ad el, olos éxeivos Or 6 Swxparys éori (such as you are, such
as he or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following
manner. The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat., or Acc., to which
the relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case
of the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon-
strative, and the verb «iva: of the adjective-clause is also omit-
ted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case
of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause
has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective; the
connection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still
more complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in
the adjective-clause ; for example, in the full and natural form
of the sentence xapiLopar dvdpi rovovrw, olos ci «?, by omitting the
demonstrative rovov’rw, to which the relative ofos refers, by at-

tracting olos into the Case of the preceding substantive dvdpi,

532 SYNTAX. [$ 332.

and by omitting ¢& of the adjective-clause and attracting the
- subject ov into the Case of the relative, we have thé common
form xapi{opat dvdpi otw coi, or, by transposition, xapiopat oiw cot
dvipt. In English the above relatives may be translated by as
or such as.

Gen. | ép@ ofov god avipds €p& ofov cod

Dat. | xapl(oua ofm ool avdpt xapiCouce of cot
Ace. | émaw@ ofov ct tvipa éraw@ otov vé

Gen. | ép@ ofwy tiuay avipav €p@ olwy buav
Dat. | xaplCoua ofors duty Gvipdour xaplCouct ofors bmiv
Acc. | émawv@ ofovs tuas &vipas émaiv® ofovs bas.

Th. 7, 21. mpds &vdpas toAunpods ofouvs kal ASnvatous (instead of ofu:
’"ASnvaiol eiowv). Lucian. Toxar.c.11. ob paddrov 7d Epyor, dvdpi ofw gol roa-
epioth povouaxjou. Pl. Soph. 237, c. of ye éuol mavrdracw wmopoy
(sc. éort, instead of r@ rowdTe@, oids ye Cyd ciut, &mopdy éorw). Her. 1, 160.
ém) uicd@ Baw 5h (mercede, quantulacunque est). Pl. Rp. 335, b. Zorw &pa dixatov
avdpds BAdwrev Kal dvtivody dvSperwy (instead of auSpdrav Kad dstisody
éorw). X. An. 6.5, 8. gornoay améxovtes Bocov wevtekaldexa ctadlous
(instead of rogodro, cov ciot mr. orddiot). ;

Rem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when ofos or ofds re, is used in-
stead of ésre, and is constructed with the Inf., signifying, J am of such a na-
ture, character, that (is sum qui with the Subj.), hence Z can, am accustomed, am
ready (§ 341, Rem. 2). Dem. Ol. 1. 23, 19. (wept abrdv SidAurmos Exe) ToL10 b-
Tovs &avspemous ofovs pedsvosvéevtas Opxeiasat. Luc. Hermot. c. 76.
ZtwikG TorovtTy@ olw phre AvTEiod at whT dpylCecda:. * The demon-
strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. udynyv thy tev aySpérov
* (yA@tT av) emoinoay (oi Jeol) ofav ApSpodyv te Thy pwvhy, k. T.A.

Rem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the signification of a substantive
(§ 331, Rem. 4), the article is sometimes placed before the attracted ofos,
naAtkos, and in this way, the adjective substantive-clause acquires entirely
the force of an inflected substantive, e. g.

Nom. { 6 oios ob &vnp of otor duets &vdpes
Gen. | Tod ofov cod avdpds Tov Olwy tway avdpav
Dat. | 7¢ oi@ col avdpt Tots olos buiy avdpdow
Ace. | dy oiov ct tvdpa Tous olous tuas avdpas.

X. Cy. 6. 2,2. of ofof wep iwets &vSpes wodrdduis kal Ta Bovdcuducva Kara-
pavSdvovew (men like you). H. 2. 3, 25. yvdvres Tots ofors Hutv TE Kal
buiv xadrerhy wodirelay eivar: Syuoxpariay (such men as we and you). Ar.
Eccl. 465. éxeivo dewdy Totorv HALKotoLt y@y (instead of TyAcKodTas, HAlor
v@ éopev).

Rem. 10. <A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex-
pression as Savuacrtdy bcov mporxdpnoe = Savpacrdy éotw baov mpovxa-
pnoe (mirum quantum processit, instead of mirum est, quantum processerit).
Even in Pl. Rp. 351, d. wera iipatos Savuactod boov (instead of Savuacrdy
éotw pex Soov). Hipp. M. 282, ¢. xphuatra fraBe Savuacra doa (instead
of Savuacrdy éorw, doa). Her. 4, 194. of 5€ (sc. midnKor) opi EPRovort boot
év tois obpeot yivovra, Also in the adverbs Savuact@s ws, Savpactlws
Gs, etc.,e.g.Savpaciws ws &dAwsyéyove (instead of Savudordy eorw, ws GAs
yéyove). Pl. Phaed. 66, a. bweppua@s ws GAndsH Aéyers. Symp. 173, ¢.
brepouas &s xalpw, instead of breppvés eoriv, ds xalpw.

§ 332.) INVERTED ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 533

Rem. 11. Sometimes an attraction takes place in the adjective-clause di-
rectly the opposite of that mentioned under No. 6, the substantive being
attracted into the Case of the relative which refers to it, instead of the
relative into the Case of the substantive. This is called snverted attrac-
tion (Attractio inversa). This attraction occurs most frequently, when the
substantive of the principal clause attracted by the relative, would stand
in the Nom.or Acc. 8S. Tr. 283. rds& (instead of ai3’) &smep cisopis, é€
dASiav &CnAov edpoioa Blov, hove. xpos o€. Lysias pro bon. Arist. 649. 7 hv
ovalay (instead of 7 ovola) hv karéAure 7@ viel, ov wAclovos aéla coriv. X. H,
1. 4, 2. EAeyor, Ste Aakedaudvioe mdytwyv wv Séovra: wemparydres elev mapa Ba-
giAéws, Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun ‘is found in the principal
clause, to supply the Case of the substantive which is attracted into the Case
and into the clause of the relative. Pl. Men. 96, c. duoroyhxauer, tpdyma-
Tos ov uhre diddoKadol, wATe madytal elev, TODTO SidaxTdy uh elvat.

Rem. 12. This inverted attraction is very common with odes 8sris
ov after an omitted éorly. Pl. Prot. 317, c. obdevds Srov od mdvtoy by
Suay KaY HAcclay warhp «ny (there is no one of you all whose father I might not be,
considering my age). Phaed. 117, d. kAaley nal dyavaxtav obdéva bvtiva ob
kaTéxAavoe Tay mwapdévtwy. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. rep) dy obdéva klyduvor
évriv odx bwéueway oi mpdyovot. In this way the phrase obdels SsTis od
Agel as a pronominal substantive (nemo non), which can be declined through

the Cases, e. g.

Nom. | otdels Ssris odK by tadTa Torhoeev

Gen. | oddevds Strov ov KareyéAacey
Dat. | otSevi ire obn amrexplyaro
Ace. | ob3éva bytiva od KnaréxdrAavcer.

Rem. 13. The inverted attraction is also found sometimes with adverbs of
place, the demonstrative adverb taking the form of the relative. S. O. C.
1227. Bivar RetSev SSev wep jee (instead of ceive, b9ev). Pl. Crit. 45, b.
an yap kal GAAogE Eros by adlun, ayawjoovel ce (instead of 4AAaxod

ot).

8. The adjective-clause very frequently stands before the
principal clause ;-then, when the relative refers to a substan-
tive, the substantive is transferred from the principal to the
adjective-clause (though it is not generally placed immediately
after the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective-
clause. This change of the substantive into the adjective-
clause is called transposition. When the attributive relation
expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be made emphatic, a
demonstrative, referring back to the substantive which is joined
with the relative, is supplied in the principal clause; this
demonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also.
The substantive can also be transposed, when the demonstra-
tive stands before the adjective-clause.

“Os Huds WoAAd ayada erolncev, otros aréSavey, or ds Huas TOAAG &yada
erolnoey, arédavev, OF Ob TOS GréSavev, ds Huis KTA., OF awéSavev, ds KTA.—
“Ov cldes vipa, oitds éorw, or obtbs dor, dv cldes Gvdpa. Pi. Lys.
222, d. rdAw tpa, obs Td mparov Adyous dreBadrducda wep) pidrlas, eis Tob-

45*

534 | SYNTAX. [§ 333.

Tous eiswertéxauey. Eur. Or. 63, sq. Hv yap Kat’ otxovs frp’, 87° és Tpolay
@rAct, madpSevov..TavtTy yeynvde.

Rem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are
frequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and intro-
duced into the adjective-clause, when they serve at the same time to explain
more fully the adjective-clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the substantive
together with the attributives is introduced into the adjective-clause. Some-
times also the attributive adjective remains, while the substantive with which
it agrees, is transferred to the adjective-clause ; then the attributive is emphat-
ic. Eur. Or. 842. rérv’ ’HAéktpa, Adyous &kovoov, ofs go Sustuxets ijKw
gépwr (hear the words which I bring to you as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6,
30. rots SmAos Kal bon HAAN TapacKkevh ~vvelwero, mpdtepov elpynto KTA.
(instead of kal ri BAAN Tapackevp, bon). Eur. H. F. 1164. few tiv &AAOts,
of wap’ ’Agdémov pods uévovow ~vorAot vis “Adnvaiwy kédpot Ar. Ran. 889.
érepot ydp ciow, ofary etxoum Seois;

Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative
clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and depends
upon that clause for its government. In this case also, the transposed apposi-
tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. KixAwmos
KexdAwta, dv dpSaruot GAdwoey Gvtidseov TloAdgonpuov (whom Ulysses
blinded, although he was the god-like Polyphemus). Pl. Hipp. Maj. 281, ¢. rf wore
rd alriov, Sr: of madatol éxeivor, @y dvduara peyddAa Adyera em) codig,
Tlitraxod cal Blavros, palvovrat dwexducvor Tay ToAITIKOY MpdtEwr ;

9. When the adjective-clause has another clause subordinate
to itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two
are commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con-
struction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor-
dinate clause, i. e. the relative has the construction which the
omitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have
had; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad-
jective-clause.

Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. avSpdémous aipotueda Tovs wey ardrdas, Tods F avro-
udrous, ofs baérav Tis mAElova pigddv 8156, per’ erelvov ep’ jas
&xorovSshoovory (instead of of, dréray tis abrots 5:5¢, &xodAoushrovorr).
Pl. Rp. 466, a. 871 robs pidaxas od« eddaluovas wowiwev, ofs efdy mdvTa
exervy Ta THY TOALT OY, oddey EXorev; (instead of of, etdy abtois—, oddéev
Zxouev), Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. woAad dy eimeiy Zxorey ‘OAS viv, & TdT ef
mpoeldovro, odk ky &mmdovTo (instead of of, ei TadTa Tére mpoeld., ovr by am.).

$333. Modes in Adjective- Clauses.

1. The Indicative is used, when the attributive relation ex-
pressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual
or real, e. g. % ods, } Krilerau, ) extiadIn, KtreSjoera. The Fut.
Ind. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense,

§ 333. ] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 535

§ 327, Rem. 2), to denote what should be done or the purpose
(§ 255, 3), ©. g. orparnyods aipotvra, of TO Dirlr7rw rortepycov-
ov (they choose generals who should carry on war, or to carry on
war). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Ind., where
the Latin has the Subj., e. g. wap’ guol obdels, dstus pip ixavds
éorw toa roveiv guol (memo, qui non possit).

2. The Ind. is also used, as in Latin, in such adjective-
clauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela-
tives, e. g. dstis, quisquis, doris dy, quicunque, dotis 84 more, doos
5, boos ovv, quantuscungue, drdcos, drocosovr, etc.

Her. 6, 12. SovAntny swoueiva, Fries Eo as, qualiscunque erit. X. An. 6.5,
6. arrov, drécovs éweAduBavey 7 orpatid. Here the idea of indefinite-
ness is denoted by the relative ; but it is otherwise, when this idea is contained
in the predicate, see No. 3, and 4.

Remark 1. The Fut. Ind. with «é (only Epic) is used, when it is to be
denoted, that something will take place in the future under some condition
[§ 260, 2. (1)]. Ils, 155. év 8 &vbpes valovor mwordppnves, worvBodra of Ké €
dwrlvnot Sedbv Ss Timhoovarv (who will honor him, 1F HE SHALL COME TO
THEM).

3. The relative with dv, e. g. ds dv, dy, 6 dy, dstis av, etc., 1S
followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is
@ principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.), if the attributive rela-
tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as
one merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in-
definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote
indefinite frequency (as often as, § 227°, 2). The adjective-
clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e.
as one which expresses the condition under which the action
of the principal clause will take place; and the relative with
dy can be resolved into the conjunction éév with ris or any other

pronoun followed by the Subj.

X. Cy. 3.1, 20. 08s &v (= édv twas) Berrious wes Eavtay Ryne wvrat, rovros
modAduis Kad bvev avd-yens Sérover welSecSatz. 1.1, 2. vSpwwor ex’ ovdévas uaAAOv
cuvieravrat, } emt rovrous, obs hy (= edv Twas) aloS wv at tpxew aba émy-
eipoovras. 7.5,85.0%s &v bp@ 7a karaxal rivyadd émirndevovtas, Tovrous Tiyh-
ow. 8.8, 5.duotol rives yap bv of mpoordra Sou, roid Kal of bm’ abrobs
ds emt td word ylyvovra. Her. 6, 139. 4 MuSin opéas (edever) *"ASnvaloct Sikas
Siddéva ravras, Tas (= Gs) By adrol "ASnvaiot Sixdowot (QUASCUNQUE—
constituerint). Tl. By 391. dv 8é x eydav amdvevde pwdxns eSérdovTa vong@
pide apa vnvol Kopwriow, of of trevra Upkioy éooeirat guyéev Kivas Ao
oiwvols (AS OFTEN As I perceive or shall perceive).

536 SYNTAX. | [§ 333.

Rem. 2. The Subj. is also used, when the adjective-clause forms a member
of a comparison, viz. when the attributive idea expressed by the adjective-clause
is the condition or assumption, under which the object to which the adjective-
clause refers, belongs to the comparison. In this case, the principal clause
may have either a principal or historical tense. Il. v, 179.6 8 att’ érecev,
pearly Gs, Hr dpeos Kopudy . . XaAKG Tapvouevn Tépeva. XIovi PUAAG TWEAdO OD.
p, 110. &ste Als Hiryeveios, Sv fa Kbves Te Kal tydpes amd oTaSporo SlwyTat.

Rem. 3. The modal adverb &y is so closely united with the relative, as to
form with it one word, as in Sray, émdy, etc., § 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence should
be separated from the relative only by smaller words, such as 5¢. This & is
very frequently omitted in the Homeric language, often also in the Tragedians,
and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose-writers. ;

4. The relative (without dv) is connected with the Opt., in
the first place, with the same signification as when followed
by the a and the Subj. (No. 3), but referring to an historical
tense in the principal clause. Hence it is used in general and
indefinite. statements; also in expressing zndefinite frequency
(§ 227°, 2), in which case the verb of the principal clause is
usually in the Jmpf. or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the
adjective-clause may be resolved by «i with the Opt.

Th. 7, 29. rdvras és ST@ (= rin) Cv TUX OEY, Kal Taidas Kal yuvaikas
wrelvoyres. Il. 8,188. 6ytiva (= ef twa) wey Basirtja Kad Zoxoyv tivSpa kix ely
tov & ayavois éréecow epnticacnKe mapacrds. 198, dy 8 ad ShuovT svdpa
Ydo01, Bodwrrd 7 Epevpot, Toy oKhmtTpe éAXdoacKe. Th. 2, 67. rdytas yap
5) Kar apxas Tod woAcuov of Aaxedayidviot, doovs (= el twas) AdBorev ev
TH Sardoon, &s woreulous FtepSerpov. X. Cy. 3. 3, 67. ixetedvovar (Hist.
Pres.), 6t@ évtuyxdvorev, wh pevyew.

§. In the second place, the Opt. (without av) is used without
reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib-
utive relation expressed by the adjective-clause is to be repre-
sented as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption. . Then,
the adjective-clause is to be considered as an uncertain, doubt-
ful condition [§ 259, 3, (a)]. |

X. Cy. 1. 6, 19. Tod pry abtoy Aéyew, & ph capads eideln, peldeoda def (he
must beware of saying anything, which he does not know, or if he does not know it).
For examples of Optatives used by means of an attraction of the mode, see
§ 827>,1. Ar. Vesp.1431. Zpdo1 ris, v Exaoros eidely téxvny (any one can
practise the art with which he is acquainted (= if he is acquainted with it). 3

6. The Opt. with dv is used, when the attributive relation ex-
pressed by the adjective-clause is to be represented as a condt-
tional supposition, conjecture, assumption, or undetermined posst-

bility [§ 260. 2, (4) (a)]..

§ 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 537

X. C.1.2, 6. Swxpdrns rods AauBdvovras Tijs duiAlas pmoddv dvBparodiords éavroy
drrexdAct, 51k 7d dvarynaiov abrois elvar SiadéyerSa, wap’ dv bv AdBorev toy
puaddy (from whom they might or could receive a reward). Pl. Phaed. 89, d. ob
torw 8 re ty Tis wet(ov Tovrou Kaxdy wdXor (there is no evil which any one could
experience greater than this).

7. The Ind. of the historical tenses is used with av, when it
is to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad-
jective-clause could exist only under a certain condition, but
did not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [§ 260. 2,
2), (a)].

Od. ¢, 39, sq. réAr’ bo” Rv oddéwoTe Tpolns eEhpart ’Odvocedls, etwmep amh-
pov FAX, Aaxdv amd Antdos aloay, Eur. Med. 1339. ob« totw Hris todr’
hy ‘EAAnris yurh Er An (quae sustinuisset hoc). Pl. Apol. 38, d. ofs &v (Adyos)

tweioa, ei Ounv deiv Grayra mosey Kal Aéye. On the Ind. of the historical
tenses in intermediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see § 327», 1. (a). —

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 6.

§ 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses. — Interchange of
the Subordinate Clause with the Adjective- Clause. — Relative
instead of the Demonstrative.

1. When two or more adjective-clauses follow each other, which either have
the same verb in common, or different verbs with the same government, the
relative is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are
united in one, e. g. dvhp, ds woAAd wey Gyada Tods pldovs, woAAG OE Kaka Tods
modeulous @mpatev—ayfp, ds map huiv iv Kal (ds) bd mdvrwv epirciro — avhp,
by éSavud(ouev nal (dv) mdvres epidovy. But when the adjective-clauses have
different verbs governing different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the
relative in the second adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela-
tive, a demonstrative pronoun (mostly adrds), or a personal pronoun; in this
way the relative clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the
nature of a principal clause. (a) Od. 1, 110. &umedot, alte pépovow olvoy épic-
tdpvadov Kal (sc. Gs) opw (KuxA@meaot) Aids buBpos aéfe. Isocr. Panath. rdv
Adyov, bv bAlyw pty mpdrepov weY HSovijs SiHASOv, pixp@ F borepov ijuedr€ we
Aurfoew (and wHICH was to grieve me). Lys. Dardan. 166. ofs duets xapiciode
kal (sc. ods) mpoSuuorépous twochoete. Dem. Cor. 252, 82. adrav, obs wey
médus @s exSpovs.. awhrAace, gol Se Foav plro (sc. of). X. An. 3. 2, 5. Apiaios
54, dv qucis WSéAouev Bacirda Kadiordvat Kal (sc. @) éddénauer Kal (sc. rap’ ob)
eAdBouev mord .., judas robs Kipou plaous kax@s woreiv weiparat. — (b) Pl. Rp. 505,
e. 8 Bh didKer uty Graca Wuxh Kal TodTov Evexa mdvta mpdrre:. Dem. Phil. 3.
123, 47. Aaxedarudviot, of Sadrdrrns uty ipxov Kai ys amdons, BaciAéa 5¢ chupa-
xov elxov, iplaotaro 8 oddty atrovs (instead of obs oddty dploraro, quibus nihil non
cessit). X. Cy. 3. 1,38. wot exeivds eorw 6 avhp, bs ocuvedhpa july Kal ob por
udda eddéxers Savudlew avery.

2. The adjective-clause frequently takes ‘the place of other subordinate
clauses, e. g. Oavparrdy woeis, ds juiv wey ovdéiy Sidws (IN THAT OF BECAUSE
"you give us nothing), X. C. 2.7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used

538 SYNTAX. 16 386, 336.

instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (comp. § 333, 3); so also instead of
an adverbial clause introduced by és7e; the last case oecurs :—

(a) after of rws or @5e. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. od yap of rw y ebhdns eorly
iuay ovdels, Os brorauBdver (neither is there any one of you so simple, as to
suppose). X. Cy.6.1, 14. rls obrws ioxupds, ds Aluw kal plyer dbvar’ dy
Baxduevos oTpaTeverdat ;

(b) after rorodtos, TnAtkovTOS, TocovTOS.. In most instances, these
demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives ofos, écos,
which, like the adverbial clause introduced by ésre, usually have an Inf.
depending upon them. X. An. 4. 8, 12. dAAd wor done? TOTOD TOV xwpl-
ov Katacxetv (sc. nuas), Soov Ew tovs éoxdrous Adxous yevéoSat To
mwodeulwy Kepdtwy (it seems to me best that we should occupy so much ground,
as that, etc.). Pl. Apol. éy@ tuyxdvw dy totodTos, ates imd Tod Seod
7TH wToAc SeddoSat.

3. The relative pronoun serves not only to connect subordinate clauses with
the principal one, but it is also used to connect clauses generally, inasmuch as
it takes the place of a demonstrative which would refer to a word of the pre-
ceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences belongs to the Latin as
well as to the Greek, though it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with
the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether common for clauses to begin
with tatra 5¢ eimdytes, Tadra 5¢ Gkovoavres, wera 5 ravra, ék TovTuv dé, ws de
Taita éyévero, etc., where the Latin generally uses the relative quiz.

§ 335. IIL Adverbial Clauses.

Adverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially
(§ 326, 3), expanded into a sentence, and, like adverbs, express
an adverbial object, i. e. an object which does not complete the
idea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. dre 76 éap HAVe,
(ror) Ta dvIn JaGrAAU. “Os Ackas, (oVTws) expagas.

§ 336. A. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF PLACE.

Adverbial clauses denoting place, are introduced by the
relative adverbs of place, ot, 7, dn, drov, evda (Ubi); dtev, Gey
(unde) ; ot, dot, 4, 67n (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express
the three local relations, where, whence, and whither. 'The use
of the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in
adjective-clauses (§ 333).

Her. 3, 89. dkov idicete orpareteoda, mdvta of exdpee edTuxéws (indefi-
nite frequency). Th. 2,11. rece (éxeioe), Srot Ky Tis HyATaL X. An.
4. 2, 24. paxduevor 5 of woAguior kal, 8en etn oTevdy xwplov, mpoxaTtadrauBdvor-
res éxdAvoy Tas mapddovs (Opt.on account of éxdavov). Cy. 3. 8, 5. éShpa
Brovmep éxitvyxdvorev SInplois (wherever). Pl. Apol. 28, d. ob &y ts
éauroy tdin, évraida det pevovra Kwduveterv. “A

§ 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 539

§ 337. B. ApveRBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME.

1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the
conjunctions dre, drdre, ds, yvika (when), ev o, ws (while); eet,
éreidy (postquam), érady taxurta (xpOrov), OF os TaxLcTa (as soon
as), é ob, é& drov, also é& dv, ex quo, and ad’ ob (since) ; mpiv, zpiv
H (priusquamr), Ews, éws ot, eis 6, este, méxpt OF axpt ob, méxpt Grov,
péxpe (till, until).

2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be
observed : —

3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented
as a fact; hence in speaking of actual events or facts.

Her. 7,7. &s aveyvdosn Héptns orpareverdSat em) rhyv ‘EAAdSa, evdatra
atpatniny moetar (when Xerxes was persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. ds quépy tdxsoTa
évyeydvee (quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, 3. éudxovro, wéxpris of
"ASnvaian &vémAevocav. An. 1.3, 11. kal ws wévoperv abrod, cxemréoy mot
done? elvat, Stws dS doghadréorata pmevoduer.

4. The conjunction €ws (él), is followed by the Ind. of the
historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat-
tained or not to be realized. Comp. § 327°, 1, (a).

Pl. Gorg. 506, b. 73€ws &v KadAucAe? robtw ert Stereyduny, Ews abtg
&maéSwKxa (usque dum reddidissem).

5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated
as a conception or representation, and must be referred to the
predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one
of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con-
junctions take the modal adverb @, e. g. dzav, ordray, quik’ ay, -
éxdv (érjy), éredav, ev @ av, mpiv av, ews av, péxpt av, est dv [§ 260,
2, (3), (a). |

6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions
from érav to rplv av, when the statement of time is also to
be represented, at the same time, as the condition under which
the predicate of the principal clause will take place. But.with
the conjunctions which signify wnt, the Subj. expresses a Limit
expected and aimed at. The Subj.is also very frequently used,
to denote indefinite frequency (§ 333, 3).

Pl. Prot. 335, b. érecdav ob BobaAn diardyecdau, ds eyo Sivauar Erecdat
rére gor Biarétouar (whenever you wish to, if at any time you wish to discoures,

540 SYNTAX. [§ 337.

etc.). Th. 1,21. of &Spwro, ev G dv ToAcHoo1t, Thy mapdyTa méAcuoy det

péyorov xplvovow. X. Cy. 3.1, 18. wédAw otrw Edpakas aytTitartopévny —

mpos mwédAw érépay, Hris, €wmerdav yTTHIH, Tapaxpjua tavty dvi rod pd-
xeoda: melSeoda ere. 3. 3, 26. dmdTav (of BdpBapo Bacircis) or paro
medevwyTat, Tappoy meptBdAAoVTat edmeTas id Thy TorvXeplay (as often
as). Dem. Ph. 3. 128, 69. €ws &v oSCnrat Td oKdpos, tére xph Kal tabTHy
kod kuBepvhrny mpoSvpmous elva: (dum servari possit).

Remark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver-
bial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed

(comp. § 333, Rem. 2). Il. t, 16. as 8 bre roppipyn méarayos.. ds 6 yépwv
Gpuave. o, 624. ev 3 reo’, ds bre xipa Son ev vnt Tegner.

Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt., and on
dtayv, éwmdy, ply &y, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, see § 345,
Rem. 4.

Rem. 3. The mode of connection by dre, érére, mplv, etc. without & with
the Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in
Ionic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with wéxp: and piv.

7. The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time, without dy, just
as the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi-
pal clause. When the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre-
quency (§ 327, 2), an Impf. or an Iterative Aor. usually stands
in the principal clause, and the conjunctions Gre, érei, etc. (ex-
cept those which signify before and wntil), are translated by as
often as. :

IL. x, 14. abrap 87° és vijds Te Y504 Kal Aadby "Axaiav, ToAAaS eK KEpars Tpo-
Seaduvous EAkeTO xalras (as often as). Her. 6, 61. Skws (= bre) éveinere
N Tpopds (7d madlov), mpds te Tiyadua Tora Kal €Aloceto Thy Sey amaar-
Adtat Tijs Suswoppins 7d maidtov (as often as). X. An.6.1, 7. 6mdre of EAAnves
tois twodeplois émioiev, padlws éméepevyor (as oftenas the Greeks made an at-
tack, whenever they made an attack). Od. ¢, 385. &pae & éml xparwvdy Bopény, mpd dé
kipar tatev, Ews Bye Harhnetor pirnpétmoios miyein (but dpyvor Bopéeny rab
tyvuet Kiara, ews dy... wryf). Pl. Phaed. 59, d. mepreucvouer éxdorore, Ew's
&votxasetn 7d deopwrhpiov.

Rem. 4. On é&y in the principal clause, see § 260, 2, (2), (8).

8. Moreover, the Opt. without dv is used with conjunctions
of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause,
when the statement of time is to be represented as an wncer-
tain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or
assumption ; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms
a part of a principal clause expressing a wish.

Pl. Amat. 133, a. dmdre 7d pirocopeiy aicxpsy Hynagatuny elva, ovd by

&vSpemoy vopioau euavtoy elyar (when I shall assume, if I shall ever assume). X.
Cy. 3.1, 16. r@s &v rére wArclorou Bio ylyvowr7’ of tvSpwro, da7dbT € GdiKodv-

§ 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME, 541

tes GAloKoivro (when they are, if they are, convicted of acting unjustly) ; — Il.
o, 465. at ydp uw Savdrow dusnxéos Bde duvaluny vdopw amronpipa, bre pw
pépos alvds ixdvot.

9. The conjunction rpiv (xpdérepov 7%), besides the construc-
tions already mentioned, is also followed by the Inf. The dif
ferent constructions of zpiv are to be distinguished as follows:

(a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the Ind.
of an historical tense is used (No.3). The principal clause is negative; yet it
is sometimes also affirmative, when ply signifies until; thus often in the Tra-
gedians and Thucydides (in the latter rply 54 and mpiv ye 54).

(b) When a future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con-
sidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub-
ordinate clause refers to a Pres. Perf. or Fut. in the principal clause; but the
Opt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal
clause (No. 5 and 7); yet only when the principal clause is negative, or contains
a question implying a negative. i.

(c) But when the action is to be represented only as a conception, a conceived
limit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a
casual or incidental designation of time, the Inf. is used (= mpé with the Gen,).
Hence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the-
Subj. or Opt., both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it
does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause.

Isocr. de Big. 348, b. ob mpdrepoy éeratcavro, rply tév Te marépa éx Tod
otpatomédov petewéeuavtTo, Kal tay pidAwy aitov tovs uty dméxrewar,
Tous 8 é« tis wéAews €f€Barov. X. An. 6.1, 27. 08 mpdodevy ératcayto
moAcuouvTes, Wply eéemolnoav macay thy médAw duodoyeiy Aakedaimortous
kal abtay iryeudvas eivar.— Eur. Med. 279. otk &reiur mpds ddéuous wddw,
wmplv &v ce yalas tepudvay tw BdrQw (= édy wh mpdtepdy ce exBdrw).
X. An. 5. 7,12. uh dread nre, tply bv Gkotanre. Il. p, 580. "Ayhvep
obn ESeAev gHevyav, tply weiphoarT "Axirjjos (= ei wh mpdtepoy reiph-
outro). X. An. 7.7, 57. 0f émirhdeioe ev TG orparomddy (adtod) €déov7T0 ph
amredASeciy, tply amaydyot Td orpdrevua Kal OfBpwr rapadoln. — Her. 6,
119. Aapeios, tply pey aixuaddrovs yevéodat Tods "Epetpiéas, evetxé ogt
Sewdv xddAov. 7, 2. trav Aapelw, kal rpdrepov Barircdoat, yeyovdtes
tpeis waides. X. An. 1. 8, 19. rply régeuna ettxvetoSar, exxAlvovow of
BdpBapa wal petyouor. 10,19. rply katradrtoas Td orpdrevua mpds Upirrov,
Bacircés epdvn. 4. 1,7. emt 7d Uxpov dvaBalver Xeiploopos, mply twa aic-
Séotat trav mworeulwy. Cy. 7. 1, 4. tply dpav rovs modreulovs, eis rpls
avéravoe Th oTpdrevua. 2.2,10.miSavol obrws cicl twes, ste rply eldévar rd
mpostaccduevov, mpdtepoy meiSovra. With attraction (§ 307. 4): ib. 5.2, 9.
(woAAol EvSpwrot) arosvioKkover mpétepoy, ply SHA: yevéasat, olor oav.

Rem. 5. The Homeric rdpos, when it is not used as a mere adverb, is al-

ways constructed with the Inf. Ilo, 245. és 8 a&yophy &yépovto, wd pos déproio
wédserdat. +
46

§42 SYNTAX. [$$ 338, 339,

C. CausaL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES.
§ 338. I. Adverbial Clauses denoting Ground, Cause.

1. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in.
the form of temporal adverbial clauses by the temporal
conjunctions 6r¢, dmdre, ws, éret, guoniam, puisque, because,
since, éredn, guoniam, and drov, guandoguidem. In these adver-
bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode; but the Opt. with
av may be used according to § 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Ind.
of the historical tenses with dy, according to § 260, 2, (2) (a).

Il. p, 95. wh me Kei’, ere) odx duoydorpios”Exropds eis (quoniam sum).
X. An. 3. 2,2. xarera 1rd wapdvra, dbadtre avdpav orparnyav TowiTwy a7 e-
pémeda kal Aoxayav Kal orpatiwtay (since we are deprived of such generals, etc.).
Dem. Ol. 1, in. te rolvuy TavY oftws Ex €1, Mposhcer mpoSimas eee axovery.
X. C. 1. 4,19. Sewxpdrns od udvov rods cuvdytas eddxes woreiv, dwére bwd TaV
avdparwv dpGvto aréxerSa: tay avoolwy Te kal Gdlewv, GAAG Kal dadre ev épnula
elev, €wmelrep Hyhoatvto pndev by wore Gy mpdtroev eods diaradeiv. — Pl.
Prot. 335, d. Séoua: oby cod wapayeiva juiv, ds eyh od8 By évds idiuv &kob-
Tate h cod.—lIl. 0, 228. iwdeitery xeipas duds, €we) of Kev andpwrl y érTeA-
éadn (since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been accomplished with-
out effort).

Remark. “Ewe! also introduces interrogative and imperative clauses,
where we must then translate it by for. For the explanation of this use, see
§ 341, Rem. 4.

2. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in
the form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions dr. and
dudte (arising from 6a rodro, dr.) and the Poet. ovvexa (arising
from tovrov évexa, 6) or 6Jovvena (instead of drov Evexa, 6).
The Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement

is not conditional.

Pl. Euthyphr. 9, e. dpa 7d bctov, 81 body Co Tt, pidcira bd Tay Dear, H, FT
Prretrat, body eo; ms

§ 339. II. Conditional Adverbial Clauses.

1. The second kind.of adverbial clauses are the conditional
clauses, which are introduced ‘by the conjunctions ei and édv
(qv, dv, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb
dy). The principal clause expresses what is conditioned by the
subordinate clause, or the consequence and effect of the sub-

§ 339.] CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 543

ordinate clause. As the conditioning clause precedes the con-
ditioned, the cause, the effect, the subordinate clause is called
the introductory clause or Protasis, and the principal clause, the
conclusion or the Apodosis.

2. The Greek has the following modes of expressing condi-
tionality : —

I. In the first place, the condition is expressed as a reality or
fact, as something certain, and hence by the Indicative. Two
eases are here to be distinguished : —

(a) The Protasis has ei with the Ind., and the Apodosis,
likewise the Ind. Then both the condition and conclusion
are considered by the speaker as a reality or fact, and hence
as certain, whether the thing be so objectively or not. The
result is very frequently a necessary one. If the Apodosis
contains a command, the Imp. is used, and when this command
is negative, the Subj. also (§ 259, 5).

Ei rotvro Aéyers, Guaprdvets.—Ei Seds ori, copds éotiv. — X. Cy.
1. 5, 13. ef radta éyw Aéyw ep) duav BAAa yryvéckwy, euavrby éEaTaTa@
(here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speaker wholly denies). —
Et tr: tyes, 36s.—Ei rovro wemolnnas, emaweirda dws ef. Her. 3, 62. & dé0-
mora, ovK tori Tadta GAndéa, Sxws (= Sr1) koTrd vor Suépdis aderApeds 6 ods eravéc-
Tne? ey yap adtds Eabd uw xepo rijot euewdrod + €i wév vur of TedveaTes &ver-
tTéact, tposdéxed Tot nad’ Aotudyea Tov Mijdov eravacticecsa: €i 8 Ear, ds-
mep Tporod, od wh Tl rot ek ye exelvou vedrepoy dvaBAaoThoe (here in the first con-
ditional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is per-
suaded is true).—E? tt eTxe, cal 25f{50v.—Ei rotro éwemoinKers, Cnulas
tis FoSa.—Ei @Bpdvrnce, cat Fotpavev. Ei rodro Aggies, Guap-
thon. X. Cy. 2.1,8. ef te welcovrat Mado, és Mepoas Td dewdy HEet 7.
1, 19. ef PSdoopev rods Toreulovs Kataxravdyres, oddels Huav AToSavet-
Tal.

(b) The Protasis has «i with the Ind. of the historical
tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense
with av; then the reality, both of the condition and con-
clusion is to be denied. This form is used only of the past,
or where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed
that something could take place under a certain condition,
but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The
use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences,
See § 256.

Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of expression

544 SYNTAX. [§ 339.
itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a past
occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con-
sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past aud applied
to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in
the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in -
opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from
the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g.
if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, we should have
been destroyed, BUT NOW THE ENEMY HAS NOT COME; from this contrast it
is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place.
'

Ei rotro Aceves, Hudptraves ty (si hoc dixisses, errares, if you said this
you erred, or if you had said this, you would have erred ; but you have not said it,
consequently you have not erred). Pl. Apol. 20, b, c. ris, Hv F eyd, kal moda-
més; Kal récov Uiddores ; Evnvos, &pn, & Séxpares, Mdpios, wévre uvav. Kal eyw
Tov Etnvoy euaxdpioa, ei &s GANSas Exar TabTny Thy Téexvnv Kad otTws eupedas
diddone: eyw yodv kal adtbs é€xaArAuvvduny te kal HBpuvduny ky, e
Amiotduny tadta: AN ob yap éwicrapuat, & &vdpes ASnvaio (here also
something past is spoken of, as is evident from é@uwardpioa), 31, di ef eyo
méda éwmexelpnoa mpdrrew Ta moriTiKd mpdyuata, mdAa by GTWOADAT Kal
ot?” ky tuas @HEAHKD, ob7 dv euavtdv. Th.1, 9. odn by ody vhowy expdres
(Ayaucuvwy), ef uh Te Kal vavtimdy elxev (he would not have ruled over the
islands unless he had a fleet; but he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule
over the islands). Pl. Gorg. 516, e. ef joav &vdpes &yadol, odk &v wore TadTa
tag xov (if they — Cimon, Themistocles, and Miltiades—had been good men,
they would never have experienced this injustice), X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. raira ove by
éSdvavro (of Mépoa) mwoety, €i wh Kad Salty wetpia expavro. 3.3, 17. ef
bev pelCwv tis Kivduvos EueAAev hiv elves exe? (sc. év TH moAeula), } evddde (sc.
ey TH piAla), tows Td Gopadrdotatoy iy dy aiperéov: viv Bt ton pev éxeivor (oi
klvdvva) écovta, hy Te evSdde troudvwuer, fv re eis Thy éxelvwy (tay wodAculwr)
idvtes bwavTGyev abrois (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as we were
unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly
country, it was necessary for us to remain here; but now, since we are armed,
the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. dAn3H, pn, Adyeiss ei ydp
To Td exew odtws, dstep Td AauPdvelv, HOV jv, woAd &v Biépepoy evdamorig
oi wAovow Tay mevhrwy (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6,
9. qcts uty, & Aaxedamdvior, xa dda dy Fuev wap buiv, ei wh Hevopar dedpo
ieas weloas am@hyayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. ei wiv wept %AAov tivds 7}
Tov odpatos KadAlas jywvifero, €&fpKet dv wo Kal TH Twapd Tay BAdrAwY
cipnuévas viv dé po Sone? aicxpoy elvat uh BonSjou KarAla Td Sika. Purg.
sacril. 109, 15. ei wey aicxpdy jv pdvoy Td mpaypya, tows dy Tis TOY TapioyTwY
HAméeAnNGE* viv Be od wep) aicxdyns, GAAG wep) THs peylorns Cnulas éxiwddvevor.

Remark l. On the omission of & in the Apodosis, see § 260, Rem. 3. On
the Ind. of the Hist. tenses in the intermediate clause of such a proposition,
§ 327b, 1. (a).

§ 339.] CONDITIONAL ADVERBI

BAvSRS. » > es O46

d place, as a

fifexent fonns

II. The condition is expressed, in
conception or representation. The Greek h
to denote this relation: —

(a) The Protasis has «? with the Opt., and the Apodosis, the
Opt. with av. (The Fut. Opt.is here not used.) By this form,
both the condition and the conclusion are represented as a
present or future uncertainty, as an undetermined possibility, a
mere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer-
ence to the thing supposed being real or not real, possible or
impossible.

EY re fxots, Soins &v (si quid habes des, if you had anything, you would
give it; here it is neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is
merely a supposition. Ei todro Aéyors, auaptdvors &y (if you should say
this, then you would err).— Pl. Symp. 175, d. ed &v Exot, ef rowdrov etn F
copia, Sst’ éx Tov wAnpeatépou eis Thy Keverepov feiv huey, eav artdpeda GAAT-
Awv: ei yap oftws Exe: kal 7% gopla, ToAAOD Timauae Thy mapa gol KardKAww.
Lysid. 206, c. ef por €SeAHoats adrdv wojoa eis Adyous éAdEiv, tows BV Bu-
valunv oot embdeita, & xph ait SiardéyeoSa:. Menex. 236, a. nad rl &v
Zxors elweiv, ef Sé01 oe Acyew; Hipp. Maj. 282, d. ci yap eideins bcov
dpytipiov pyacua, Savudoais &y. Ion. 537, e. ef ce époluny, ei (whether)
TH abth Téxvp yeyvdoKouev TH apduntiny Ta avTa eyd Te kal od, 7) BAAN, palns
hv dhrov TH adrH. 5. 6, 9. ead 6 MapSémos &Baros: ep dv EAS ore By, ef Toy
“AAw SiaBalnre. 6.2, 21. ef Karadsmdvres TH cKetn ev TH epuuvp xwple
as eis udxny waperkevacueva Totmev, tows &v Ta iepa uGAAOY TpoxXwpoln
juiv. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [§ 260, (4) (a)] 7,
214. eideln dv nal édv wh Mndteds radrny thy atparby Ovhtns, ef tH xeépn
TOAAG Gutknkas efn, Onetes might have known this way, if he had been very
Jamiliar with the country).

(b) The Protasis has édv (jv, dv) with the Subj., and the
Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu-
ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep-
resented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of
which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as
possible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause,
is represented as certain (necessary).

Rem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, édv with the Subj.
almost wholly corresponds to ei with the Fut. Ind.; the only distinction is,
that by ei with the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action
will actually take place in future; but by édv with the Subj., the form of the
condition implies that the actual occurrence of the action is merely assumed
or expected by the speaker. ‘The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to be
found in the conditioned relation itself, which it is necessary to express, but in

46*

ee EO ee ee ee eee oe ey ee oe >" - ks y
: r ~ ’

546 SYNTAX. [§ 339.

the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected
by the speaker (§ 259, Rem. 4).

"Edy rovro Aéyns, Guapthon, if you say this, shall say it, you will err.
(Whether you will actually say this, 1do not yet know; but I expect, I as-
sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.)
— Edy rovto A€ins, duapthon (si hoc dizeris, errabis). Dem. 2, 14. &ras
Adyos, by Gm Ta mpdyyuara, udrady vt patvera ka cevdy. Pl. Rp. 473, d. dav
Kh?) of pirdcopar Bactretaowory év tais wércow, }} of Bacidts Te viv Acyou-
eva. kal duvdora pirocgogphawat ynolws Te Kai ixavas, Kal TovTO eis TavToV
tvumréon, divauls te mordiTixh Kal pirogodia, obk Zor kak@v TavAa Tals TéAE-
a. Lysid. 210, c. éav piv tpa copds yévn, & mai, mdvres cor plrAnx kal wdvTes
got oixeioan Eoovtat, X. An. 1. 8,12. e&v trotro, en, virGuev ray jyiv
wetvolntat.

Rem. 3. *Edyv with the Subj. and ei with the Opt. are also used to denote
indefinite frequency. Comp. § 327, 2. In the place of édy with the Subj., ef
with the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on an
Hist. tense. Still, see § 345,4. On édy with the Opt. and ¢? with the Inf.
in orat. oblig., see § 345, Rem. 4, and No. 6. 7

3. Besides the common forms of the Apodosis already men-
tioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis
is very often found in a form that does not correspond to the
Protasis. This interchange of forms gives great delicacy of
expression. The following cases occur: —

(a) The Opt. with &» in the Apodosis, very often follows ei with the Ind.
and édy with the Subj., when the conclusion as uncertain, doubtful, an undeter-
mined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain, or which
is expected or assumed as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect,
very often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of civility, even
when speaking of settled convictions [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)].

(a) Ei rodro Aéyets, Guaptdvors &y (if you assert this, you would err).
Pl. 30, b. €7 wey ob Tatra Aéywy StapSel pw tods véous, Tovr’ dy en BAaepd.
Alc. IT. 149, e. cal yap &v Sewdy etn, ci mpds Ta Sapa Kal Tas Svolas AToBAE T-
ovoiy juav of Seol, AAG wh mpds Thy Wuxhy, Uy Tis Sows Kat Sleaos dy tvy-
xdvy. X.C.1. 2, 28. ef Swxpdrns cwppovay SreT érXet, Tas By Sixalws Tijs
ovk evovons aité xaxlas-aitlay 2x01; Th. 6, 92. ei morguids ye dv opddpa
ZBrarrov, nal &v pidros dv ixavds OPEAOL HY.

(8) X. Apol. 6. Av & aicSdvwpat xelpwr yryvdépuevos Kad kKaTapéu-
gwar euavtdy, mas by éyh dv Hddws Brorevorpt; Pl. Menex. 239, c. €av
oby ets CwmLXELPOmev Ta adTa Adyw WAG Koopely, TAX’ Lv SevTepn Parvol-
peda (then we should be inferior). :

(y) Ei with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the
denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with &» is used in speaking of
the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist. tenses with av. This use is not

SS
5 a |
ss.” oe

ie oe
; ra
%

§ 340.] ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. 547

frequent, and is found only in Homer [§ 260, (4), (a)]. Tl. 8, 80. ef wé mis
tov bveipov "Axaidy Aros Eviomwerv, Wevdds Kev patuev kal vor piColue-
Sa paddAov: viv & Bev, bs uéy Upirros Axaiav exera elva (if another had
told the dream, we should pronounce it false, and not believe it). Ll. ¢, 311. nal vb
kev tv amddAorro tvak avdpav Aivelas, ei uh tp ot) vdnoe Avs Suvyarhp
*"Agpodirn (and AZneas would certainly have perished there, if Aphrodite had not
observed it). Comp. § 388. p, 70. [On ef with the Opt. in the Protasis and the
Opt. with & in the Apodosis, in speaking of something past, in Herodotus, see
No. II. (a) at the end.]

(b) On the contrary, the Ind. in the Apodosis sometimes follows ¢i with the
Opt. X.C. 1. 5, 2. €i 8 em redrevt® tod Blov yevduevoe BovrAoluedd To

emirpevat }) maidas ppevas madedoa, } Svyarépas mapSévous Siapvadta, } xph-
para diacdoa, ap atidmictoy eis Tadta Hyngdmeda Toy axparh ;

(c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with &y in the Apodosis follows : —

(a) sometimes e? with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re-
garded as a fact or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid-
ered as not real or actual. X. Hier. 1, 9. ei yap oftw ratr’ Exe1, was &Y wor-
Aol uty 2weSbmovyv tupayveiy .., w&s Bt wdvres EChAOvY kv Tods Tupdvvous ;
(if this is really so, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem tyrants
as happy?) Eur. Or. 565, sq. ei yap yuvaikes és 763 HEovoeiv Spdoovs, ty-
Spas poveve, katapuyas motodmevas és Téxva.., wap’ ovdty abtais Hy by dAAbvat
wécets ;

(8) rarely édv with the Subj. (Pl. Phaedr. 256, c.), but very often e? with
the Opt., when, in the Apodosis, an action is to be represented as repeated in
past time [see § 260, 2. (2), (8)], but seldom when the reality of the conclusion
is to be denied, e. g. X. Cy. 2.1, 9. ef Ex otus, ds rdxuor kv SrAa éro10d-
ny waot Wéprats tots mpostotow. Pl. Alc. I. 111, e. ef BovAndeinuer eidé-
vat un wdvov, moto kvSpwrol eiow, aAr’ droio byiewol, } vorddes, dpa ixavol &y
hoav diSdoKnadror of woAdAol;

(d) The Ind. of a principal tense in the Apodosis, is sometimes contrasted
with the Ind. of an_ historical tense in the Protasis: (a) affirmatively: Dem.
Cor. 293, 195. ei wera tay OnBalwv juiv aywriCoudvois ofrws efuapro (fato
constitutum ERAT) mpatu, tl xph mposdoxav;—(8) negatively: Th. 3, 65. ef
bev yap iucis abtol mpds te Thy médw eASdvres euaxdpueda (pugnavissemus)
kal thy viv éSnotmev (devastassemus) ds morguotr, &dixoduev* ef St dvdpes
iuay of mp@roa . . ewexadécavto (advocaverunt), ri adicoduev.

§340. Remarks.

1. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with &v often stands without the
conditional Protasis ; yet this is contained in an adjective-clause, or in a par-
ticiple, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded into a
conditional Protasis, e. g. in the adverb ofrws, in a preposition, or it is indica-

)

We ee Dh ee

548 SYNTAX. [§ 340.
ted in what precedes or follows. “Os tadtra Aéyot (=e? tis tadra Aéyor),
&maptdvoi &y (whoever should say this, if any one should say this, he would err).
Tatra Aééas (=i od Actas) Guaptdvois &vy. Obtw y (=i obtw ye
Torhoas) &y amaptdvors. Very often, however, the Protasis is actually
wanting ; particularly, general Protases are almost always omitted, since they
can be easily supplied by such phrases as: if one wishes, if it is allowed, if I
can, if circumstances should favor,e. g. BovAotuny &v (scil. ei Suvatuny), velim
‘Hddws &y &xovoatue; often also, the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied,
as the conditioning Protasis, e. g. Her. 9, 71, dAAd tadra wey Kal pSdvm dv
etmoreyv (sc. ef elroy). Comp. § 260, 2, (4), (a). So also, the Ind. of
the historical tenses with & is often used without a conditional Protasis,
e. g. Tadra Aétas Huapres Uy. “Avev geropmod odk by TovTo ovvéBn.
"EBovaAduny by or €BovaAhany kv (sc. ef eduvduny), voluissem, vellem (differ-
ent from BovaAoluny &y, as vellem from velim). *EvSa 3) yvws ty (sc. ci
mwapiova), tum vero videres. See § 260, Rem. 2.

2, Ellipsis of the Apodosis. On the contrary, the Apodosis may be omitted
in certain cases : —

(a) In the expression of a wish, e. g. efSe todro yévoiro (sc. ebruxhs by
env), O that this might be! e{S« tobdro éyévero (sc. ebtuxhs by Fv), O that
this had been! Comp. § 259, 3, (b), and Rem. 6.

(b) Often in excited, impassioned discourse (Aposiopésis). Il. a, 340, sq. evrore
® adre xpeww eucio yévnra Geixéa Aovydy dudvar Trois HAAS —.

(c) When the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context. This oc-
curs in Homer in the phrase ei © €&éAexs with or without an Inf. II. 9,
487. «i © €SéAets worcuoo dahwevar (sc. tye, udxov euol)+ Bhp eb eidijs.
Very often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are placed in
contrast by ei (é€av) wév—ei (€av) 5¢ wh; in the first the Apodosis is
omitted, since it contains a thought which can be easily supplied, and the dis-
course hastens on to the following more important thought. Pl. Prot..325, d.
Kal dy pev Exdy melSnra (sc. adds xet)* €i 5& wh, —edSdvovow aGmeirais Kad
TAnyais.

3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase ei 8 &ye,
ie. ef 3& BotAe, &ye. Ila, 524. ef ® Bye tor Kepadrf Kxaravedbcoum. Also
when ci 3é or ci & &ye is used as_an antithesis, where a verb must be sup-
plied from the context. Il. a, 302; 1, 46. AX GAA pevéovor KapnkoudwrTes
’"Axaiol, eisdxe wep Tpolny Siawéprouev* ef 5% Kal adroi (sc. uh pevéovor), pevydr-
Twy avy vnvot pidny és watplda -yatay.

4. Ei dé instead of ei 5¢ wh and ei & wh instead of ef 54. When two
hypothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, ei d¢ is often used instead
of ci 8 wh, since the opposed or contrasted member of itself abrogates
the first member. Pl. Prot. 348, a. kay wey Botan eri épwrav, Eromds ciul oor
mapéxew (Sc. Gué) daroxpwduevos: €ay BF Bovdy, ob euol mapdoxe (if you wish to
propose further questions, I am ready to reply, but if you do not wish, etc.). On the
contrary, a negative clause is followed by ei 5% wH, instead of ef dé, this form

§341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 549

being very common in abrogating or expressing the opposite of the preceding
clause, X. Cy. 3. 1, 35, mpbs trav Sedv, wh ofrw Adye: €i 5 wh (otherwise), od
Sappodvrd we eters.

5. When ei nu has the meaning of except, another ¢« is sometimes sub-
joined, thus «7 «» ei, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of ei uh being
omitted. Pl. Symp. 205, e. ob yap rd éautdy, ofua, Exarro: dowd (ovra, ei wh
ef tis 7d ey &yaddy olxeiov Kadei.

6.”Ayv in the Protasis with e? and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical
tenses. Sometimes &y is found, also, in the Protasis, so that it contains a con-
dition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com-
monly not expressed, but implied, e. g. ef radra Aéyors vy means: If you should
say this UNDER CIRCUMSTANCES (= in case circumstances require, in case an oppor-
tunity should present, in case one should ask you), ete. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. rods ®
d&maidetrous taytdracw aperiis Savud(ow’ ty, ef te wAdov hy SHeAHoELE Ad-
"yos KaAGs pndels eis dvdpayadiav, } robs amadedTovs povoikijis doua udAa Karas
doSty cis povsixhy. Pl. Prot. 329, b. éy efrep tAAw Tw avSpdrov TeiSol-
anv &y, Kal col wefSoua: (si ulli alii, st id mihi affirmet, fidem habeam).

7. When «al is connected with ¢ (édv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a
concessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning: the Protasis
denotes a concession ; the Apodosis, often in connection with 8uws, tamen,
denies the expected consequence, and places another consequence in opposi-
tion to that expectation. Kal either follows «i, —ei xaf or precedes it,—xal
ei—. In the first case, xaf means also, and refers not merely to «i, but to the
entire concessive clause, and ei xaf means although. In the last case, xa
means even (enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and xa) «i means
even if, e. g. ei kal Synrds eit, although I am mortal (conceding what is actu-
ally the case, cat ei &Sdvaros jv, even if I were immortal (conceding what is
not the case). §S. O. R. 302. réaAw pév, €i wat wh BAéres, ppovets F Suws, otg
véow tivertiy, etsi (quamquam) caecus es, vides tamen, quo in malo versetur civitas.
Aesch. Choeph. 296. rei wh wéroida, rodpyov tor eypacréoy, etiamsi non fido,
perpetrandum facinus est. To the ei (éav) al, the negative ei (€av) undé
corresponds ; to the kai «i (édv), od F (und) ef (edv).

Remark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged form

i. the participle, either alone, or in connection with xal, xalep, etc., § 312, 4,
(d) and Rem. 8.

§ 341. II]. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence
or Effect.

1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or effect, are
adverbs-of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro-
duced by the conjunction ésre (more seldom és), which refers
to the demonstrative adverb ot7(s), either expressed or under-
stood, in the principal clause, e. g. of rw Karis éorw, Sste Jav-

550 SYNTAX. [§ 341.

palerSa (= Javpaciws xadds éorw). Yet these clauses often
have also the meaning of a substantive or Inf. in the Acc. and
denoting an effect, and must then be considered as substantive-
clauses. In this last case, the relative &sre of the subordinate
clause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive-pronoun,
either expressed or to be supplied, e. g. rodro, in the principal
clause, e. g. “Avérewe Répfea todro, dste ovesev radra (Her.).

2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence
or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual.
The negative is in this case (0%, § 318, 2).

Her. 6, 83. “Apyos avdpav exnpodyn ott w, Sstre of SodAa airéwy Erxov
mdyta Ta Tphypara, X. Cy. 1. 4,5. Kipos raxd nal ta ev 7H mapadelow Snpla
dynréne, Sst b’Aotudyns obxér’ elxev aitg@ cvddrAeyew Snpla. 15. ofrws
hodn tH Tére Shpe (6 ’Aotudyns), Sste del, dwdre oidy re ely, ovvetHner TE
Kip, kal &AAous Te TOAAOUS TapEeAduBarve.

3. The Inf., on the contrary, is used, when the consequence
or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed
one, inferred from the inward relation of things, or assumed as
possible. (On attraction with the Inf, see § 307, 4, and on the
negative,{ 318,2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used,
are the following : —

(a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its
ground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. @r1 5& mpds 7d per-
ploy SeioSar wemadevuévos hv Swxparns obtws, ste mdyy ppd KexTnwévos wavy
padiws Exerv apxodvta. Cy. 1.1, 5. euvdody Kipos émiSupulay éuBarciv tooad-
Thy ToD mavTas ai’Tg xapl(ecSa, ste del TH adtovd yvdun GErodv KvBeprydo-
Sa. 2,1. diva: 6 Kipos Aéyerat pirotmdraras, Sste mdvta piv mévov avarT-
Ajjivar, wavra 5é Klydvvoy bropmetvar Tov emaweiada Eevexa. For- the same
reason, ? &sve (quam ut) is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Her. 3,
14. & wat Kupov, 7d ev oixhia hv pew cand, )} Sste avaxAatery (greater than
that any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. poBodua
del, wt te petCov ) Ssre pépew Sivacsar Kan TH méAce cuuBi. Hence
&sae with an Inf. may also be used to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Th. 4,
23. MeAorovyjoio: ev TH jrelpw otparomedevoducvor, Kal mposBodds Toiovmevor THE
relxet, ckoTodyTES KaLpoy, ef Tis Tapamécol, SsTeE Tovs kydpas THaat (watch-
ing for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be
saved). X. C.1. 3, 6.8 rots wAcioros épywdéorardv éorw, Sste pvadtacdat 7d
imtp roy Kaipdy eumlrragSa, TodTO fgdlws mdvv Swepdrns epvadrrero.

(b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X.
An. 2. 2,17. kpavyhy modAhy érolovy Kadodytes GAAHAOUS, ste Kal Tovs wodeul-
ovs &xovery (ut etiam hostes audire POSSENT), dste of uty eyybtara Tay ToAcul-

§341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 661

wy kab tpuyov (a fact). 1.4, 8. obre d&worepedyacw: txw yap tprhpas, bste
éAetv Td exelvwy tAoiov.

.(c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea of
purpose or aim. Th. 2, 75, mpoxaAdupata elxe Séppers Kal dipSdpas, bs te rods
epyatoucvous Kal 7a tiAa phre wuppdpaus diotois BdAAC TS ai, ev doparelg re
elvase (so that those at work and the wood might not be hit, etc.). Dem. Cor. § 81.
WoAAa ev by xphuata Wwe Hiriocrldns, Sst’ Exetv ’Npedy (ut obtineret
Oreum).

(d) When the consequence is to be indicated at the same time as a condition of
the statement in the principal clause (under the condition, that, or it is presupposed,
that). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. éfdy abrots tay Aorway Upxew ‘EAAhvwv, &s7’ abtobs
imaxotverv Baowre? (quum possent ceteris Graecis 1TA imperitare, UT ipsi dicto
audientes ESSENT regi, since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they
themselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2,16. xal totro érlotw, tpn, & Kipe, dre
éyé, ste &meAdoat Xaddalovs amd tobTwy Tay kxpwr, woAAaTAdota by CowKa
Xphuara, av ov viv exes wap’ euod.

(e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with és7e is used for the sake
of emphasis. Th.1, 119. (€3e#Sncav) Exdorwr idig, Sste Vnploagsat
Tov méAcuoy. 2,101. avamelSerat bwd SedSov.., sr ev rdxea &wmeASety.
6, 88. xal of KoplySion eddds EYngloavto adtol mpara, dste mdon mpoduulg
&mbvery rAd. X.H. 6. 1, 9. wad "ASnvaion 3t wdvta woihoarev by, ste
cippaxa huiv yevérsas

(f ) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation
of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause
and the effect. In this way, a consequence actually existing may be expressed
by &sre with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. #Aauvey em trols Mévwvos (orpatiéras),
&st’ exelvous €xmeTARXA at Kal adroy Mévwva nal rpéxerv emt Ta SrdAa.

(g) In oblique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. (tov Kipov) eboxnudves ™ws ™mpose-
veyKel Kal évdodva Thy pidAny TG warty, Sst tH untpl kal TE Aorudyet wordy
yAAota Tapacxety.

Rem. 1. When the Inf. connected with &sre depends on a condition, the
modal adverb &y is subjoined to the Inf. [§ 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. ra évrds
obrws éxaleto, Sste hduwra by és F5wp Wuxpdy opis airods flatrerv. X. An.
6. 1, 31. Kal wot of Seol oftrws ev Tots icpots eohunvay, ste Kar ididrnv by yva-
vat, &rt tabrns Tis wovapxlas dméxeosal pe Sel (i. €. al ef Tis idiTNs etn).

Rem. 2. Instead of ésre with the Inf. or Acc. with Inf., a relative, particu-
larly ofos, 8cos, is very often used in connection with the Acc. with Inf,
this relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particularly ro.odros, tocobros,
either standing in the principal clause or to be supplied. PL Crit. 46, b. éya—
Tro.ovTtos (sc. eiul), ofos tay éuay undert BAAwW WelSeaSat, h TGAdyy. X.
Cy. 1. 2, 3. of TMepotxo) vduor eryérovtat, imws thy apxhy uh TorodToL Ecovra
oi woAtrat, of at wovnpod Twos }) aicxpod tpyou eplerdat X.H.6.5,7.7To10d-
tos 6 Sraoirmos hy, ofos uh BobAecSat ToAAOVS GmroKTwviva Tav TWoALTGY.
Th. 3, 49. 4 wey %pSace TroTodroyv, cov Mdxynra aveyvwkévar Td Union
1, 2. veuduevor ra abtay-Exaora, Bcov aro Cay (so far that they could live on
them). On the attraction in this mode of expression, see § 332, Rem. 8.

Rem, 3, Special mention must he made here of apparently independent

=
ead ijn A hE ILY

§52 SYNTAX.» [$ 341.

parenthetic clauses, which often occur, and which are jatrofaced by as (seldom
&ste) with the Inf. In this way the Inf,, particularly of verbs of saying, thirk-
‘ng, judging, hearing, is used with és for the purpose of expressing restriction or
limitation. That, of which such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence
or effect, must be supplied, e. g. rowdt@ tpdrw. Th. 4, 36. ds Mixpoyv weydrA@
eixdaas (to compare small with great). So és ros eimety (especially with
was and ovdels), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, &s cvveddvTt eimery, ut
paucis absolvam, &s yé wo. SoKxety, ut mihi quidem videtur, properly tali modo
ut mihi videatur, &s éue eb weuviocSac (as far as I well remember). bs ve
obtwol Akodaa: (so far as we hear). Such clauses are very often expressed in
an abridged form without &s,e.g.057Two) dkoticat, Soxety enol, od ToA-
AG Adyw cimety, especially 6Alyou, uikpod Sety, ita ut paulum absit, and
in the still shorter form, dAfyou, prope, paene. — According to the same analogy,
bcov, 8oa, 8 rs connected with an Inf., are used instead of & s. (Rem. 2), e.g.
Scov yéw eidévat, as far as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto,
quantum scire possim), 6 ri w eidévar. In like manner, és with the Inf. is
used in Herod. in sentences which express a limitation. 2,8. 7d dv 3) amd
“"dAvovmdAios ovKEeT.wohALY Xwplov, ds elvar Aiybmrou (ut in Aegypto, for
Lgypt, i. e. considering its whole extent).

4. The Opt. with dv is used when the consequence or effect
is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or presumption
i$ 260, 2, (4), (a)]; finally the Ind. of the historical tenses is
used with dv, when it is to be stated, that the consequence
would take place wader a certain condition [§ 260, 2, (2), (a)]-

Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. eis tocadrny duitiay éAnrtSacw, &s 7’ of uty Kexrnué-
vo. Tas ovolas Hdiov &y eis thy SdAarray TA ohérep abtay éuBdAAoLEY, ¥ Tors
Seouevois EwmapKécerav. Pl. Menex. 236, d. col ye de? xapl(ecda, Sse
kay dArlyouv, & pe Keredas amodivta dpxhoatdu, xapioalunv tyv.— Symp.
197, a. paytixhy AmddAAwy avedpev, "Emiuulas cad*Epwros jyeuovevoartos, & ste
kal ovros “Epwros hy efn padnths. —Dem. Cor. 236, 30. od« by dpxiouer
Sidirmoyv, &ste THs eiphyyns &v SinuaptHKer Kad ovn &v duddrepa el xe, kar
Thy ciphyny, xal 72 xwpla. X. Ag. 1, 26. mdvres mworcuiKd Orda KarecKedvacor,
Sstre thy wédw bvtws by Hyhow worcuov epyacrhpioy eivas.

Rem. 4. The Opt. without &v is used only in the case mentioned in § 227»,
1, (b). When é&sre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. [§ 269,
1, (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis,
into the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3.129, 70. ypdow dé, Sst, dv BovdrAnode,
xetpotovhaate (Lask that you would decree, if you wish, properly : decree, if
you wish). So, likewise, ésre can be connected with a question. Dem. Aphob.
858, 47. ei 6 marhp jriore: tobrois, SjAov Ort ov’ by TaAAG erérperer, odT’ dr
éxei’’ obtw Katadimay abtois eppatev, ste wéSev Loaciy; (ergo unde scie-
runt?) Comp. § 344, Rem. 6.

Rem. 5. Instead of ésve with the meaning ita or ea conditione, ut, the post-
Homeric language also uses 逢’ Gre (more seldom 颒 6), which refers to
the demonstrative ér) to¥7 @ in the principal clause, either expressed or im-
plied; either the Fut. Ind., or the Inf. are here used, e. g. Her. 3, 83. ém)
TovTw 5& bretioraua Tis apxis, ew OTe tw ovderds tucov &ptopnar X..
H. 2. 2, 20. éwowivto ciphynv, ép 6 td Te paxpd Telxn Kal Toy Tleipaa KadeAdv-
tas AaxeSatuovios €meg Sat. 4,38. of 5& SihAdrAatav, gd Gre eiphynv Exetv.

eS eS ae ae
7 » ’ +

§$342.] COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF MANNER. 6653

D. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING MANNER AND
* QUANTITY.

§ 342. L Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting
Manner.

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quahty and man-
ner, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to
quality and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver-
bial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, ds,
ste, Os7ep, drs, which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g.
ovrws, in the principal clause, either expressed or understood.

2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corre-
sponds with that in adjective clauses (§ 333), e.g. A¢yas otras,
as dpovets (you speak as you think). Zeds diiwow, drws EF€-
Lew or Srws dv EFEX (§ 333, 3), Exdorw (gives to each, as he
wishes). Very often os dv or és7ep av is used with the Opt.
(§ 333, 6). Pl. Phaed. 87, b. uot yap Sox? Spotiws eye Ia
ravra, OsTep av tls rept dvIpdrov iddvrov mpeaBirov daoIavévros
A€y ot Tovrov Tov Adyov.

Remark I. In comparisons, either the Present tense is used, since the com-
pared object is placed in present view, or the Aor. [§ 256, 4, (c)]. In respect
to the Modes, it is to be noted, that in Homer, the adverbs of comparison ds,
& ste, hire, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. Ind., when the com-
parison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj.,or commonly with
the Aor. Subj. (§ 333, Rem. 2.; the Aor. Subj. often retains the appearance of
the Fut. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). Il. «, 183. &s 5& xdves wep
Kida Suswphoovrat ev aan—, ds tay vhduuos Hrvos ard Brehdpoiiv dAGAEL.
p, 434. Sste orhrn péver eumedov, hr’ em riuBe dvépos Eorhne. Kk. 485, sq.
ds 38 Adwy whdoiww aonudvrocw éredAdov atyeow h diecot Kaxk ppovéwy evo -
po ri &s uty Ophixas tvdpas érgxero Tuvdéos vids (as it may happen that a lion,
etc.).

Rem. 2. Oftws (&s)—dés are used in wishes or asseverations, the clause of
comparison, introduced by és, expressing the asseveration or protestation.
Thus in Latin, 1ra4 me dii ament, uT ego nunc laetor, may the gods love me, as
I rejoice, = may the gods not love me, if I do not rejoice, or as sure as I wish the
gods to love me, so sure I now rejoice. Il. v, 825. ef yap éyav ofr w ye Ads mais
aiyidxoo elnv.., as viv juepn hde Kandy péper Apyeloot maar uddrAa (would that
I were the son of Zeus as truly as this day brings evil to all the Greeks).

Rem, 3. In clauses introduced by és, Ssmrep, Sste, an attraction of the
Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Acc. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136,
ovdauod totw "Aydparoy ’ASnvaiov elvac &smep O@paatBovadov (should be
such as bulus is), But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must be
supplied from the context. Dem. Mid. 363. éxpiv aitdS 7a tvta dvadloxovta
Ssmwep &y@, obtw utv dmaipetodau thy vinny.

Rem. 4. An appositive is often used with as denoting comparison, as in
A7

pee oe

“a

at

rs
a ee
pea i La

y
a
AP
- Tae

oa

pa Pa fi
7

ee oe

OK oA

oe

ely aa”

554 SYNTAX. [§ 343.

Latin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal
clause. This @s, ut, expresses cither comparison or limitation, and in the first
ease is to be translated by as, in the latter by Sor ; ; the former occurs, when it
is presupposed that the object connected with és possesses in a high degree
the thing affirmed in the predicate of the sentence; the latter, when it is pre-
supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by
the predicate of the sentence, S. O. R. 1118. Aatov yap jv, efrep tis tAAOs, mo-
Tés, @s voweds aynp (ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be-
ing _presupp posed). But Th. 4, 84. jy d¢ ovdt adivaros, Os Aakedaipdvios,
elrety (ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; ; it being presupposed of Lacede-
monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators).

§ 343. IL Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting
Quantity.

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare
the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to quantity or
degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con-
trasted either as egual or unequal to each other.

2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow-
ing manner : —

(a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative do@
(Scr), which refers to the demonstrative rocoir Cebeede
tov), in the principal clause.

X. Cy. 8.1, 4. rocodroy d:apépew huts det rdv GolAwy, Sooyv of pev SovAot
Bxoyres Tots Seomdrais Swnperodorw (it becomes us to excel slaves as mueh as slaves
unwillingly serve their masters).

(b) The adverbial clause is likewise introduced by do@
(6c ov), which refers to the demonstrative rocovrTe (70089803);
in the principal clause; the predicate of both clauses, however,
stands either in the comparative or superlative.

X: An. 1. 5, 9. (Kipos) voultov, So@ pw bw SatTOV BRdsu TocoiTe@
imapackevactotépw Bacirel pdxecSar (quo [quanto] celerius— eo [tanto]
imparatior, thinking that tHE quicker he came, THE more unprepared he would find
the king to fiyht). O. 7,42. 8¢@ ty Kat eyo Kowwvds, nal maoly otkov pbdat
&pmelvor yluy, TocobT Kad Timiwrépa ey TH otke &on (quo [quanto] melior
—o [tanto] honoratior, the —so much the). Hier. 1,19. 80@ dy wAEl@ ts Ta
pasira: Ta wepitTa Tay ixavav, TocTovUTH Xaaooy Képos eumlrre: THs edwdijs.
Th. 8, 84. B0@ pdaArora Kad eAcbSepn Hoa vadta, ToTovTY Ka Spacv-
Tata mpostrecdvres tov yucky amjrovy. The Superlative may also stand in
the first member, the Comp., in the last. Dem. Ol. 1. 21,12. 30m yap érot-
pétat aire (7G Ady) DoKoduey xpijcsu, ToTo dug MGAAOV Gmorovet
TavTES GUTS,

pie. lt il eas | all SS

§ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 555

Remark 1. Sometimes rocotrw is omitted, especially when the relative
member of the comparison follows. Pl. Gorg. 458, a. wetCov yap aird aya-
Qdv ryodua, Sowmep wetCoy dyaddy dotw airoy awadAayijva KaKxod TOD me-
ylorou }} &AAov GradAdia. Also after the omission of a@—rocotrw, both
clauses may be blended into one, e. g. X. C. 4.1, 3. af Upsorat Soxodcm elvat
pices udrwoTa maidelas Séovrat.

Rem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by as, 8rws, } (as), 8c ov, and
expressing a possibility, often serves to stren a superlative. X. C. 2. 2, 6.
émimeAodv7 at of yovets mayta mowobvtes, brws of waides abtois yévwyTa ws Suva-
tov BéAtioro: (as good as possible, quam { optimi). Cy.7.1,9.%
hy Sivmpar Tdxiora (as quick as Poni ). For the like purpose, also,
ofos, rt are used in connection with ¢«lva. X. C. 4.8, 11. eddmet rorodtos
elvat, ofos &y etn Epiotrés ye avip ebdatmovéortatos. The following
elliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: és &piora
ofovy xarerararoyv, Tt pddrAtoTa, etc. (§ 239, Rem. 2). In the same
manner, the expressions ws aAndés, in fact, really, ds arexvas, utterly, ds mdvu, as
ém 7d mod, mque, are to be explained; also as Exaoro, i. e. Exaotot, ds
Exacta: hoay.

3. The inequality of the predicates compared, is expressed
by appending to the Comparative a coordinate clause with the
comparative particle 7. See § 323.

Rem. 3. The relation of quantity is expressed by comparing the predicate
of the principal clause, in respect to its magnitude or degree, with the conse-
quence or effect of that clause, the consequence being expressed by a subordi-
nate clause with ésre and the Inf. If the degree of the predicate in the prin-
cipal clause stands in an equal relation with its effect, then the predicate of the
principal clause is in the positive, e. g. obrws &vdpetés eorw, Sste Sav-
padCeoSa:. But if the relation is unequal, i. e. if the predicate of the princi-
pal clause is represented as one which exists in a higher degree than another
standing with it, then the Comparative is used with } sre and the Inf, e. g.

Ta kana mel Cw early, } dste dvaxdAalery (greater than that one, i. e. too great
to be bewailed). See § 341, 3, (a).

CHAPTER IX.
§ 344. L INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.

1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence
or dependent upon it, e. g. Has the friend come? and I do not
know whether the friend has come. The first is called a direct
question, the last, indirect. “Both may consist either of one
member, or of two or more members, e. g. Has the friend come,
or Has he not yet come? Do you not know whether he ts come or
whether he is not coming? According as the question refers to
an object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions are
divided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. who

i eee i
= oe Ui Pee

556 SYNTAX. [§ 344.

has done this? (nominal question), and hast thou written the
letter ? (predicative question). ;

2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which the
inquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single word in the
sentence (subject, attributive, or object), are introduced by the
substantive, adjective, or adverbial interrogative pronouns, és,
TAOS, TOTS, TOTEPOS, THs, 7H, Tod, TOS, wodev, Tooe, etc. If the
nominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the
interrogative pronouns (§ 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a
relative : dstis, dmotos, drdcos, dadrepos, Srws, day, Sov, d7rdJev,
ovrdce, ete.

Ths jASev;— Th motets; —Tlotéy oe eros ptyev Epxos dddvrwv ;— Tas Aé-
yeis; —Td ove pebyere; — Oix olda, stss eoriv.— Od oi8a, Sews TodTO Td
Tpayua empater.

Remark 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of
the direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the
indirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other,
the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct.
Oix olda, tls Tatra @mpatev. X. C. 4. 6, 2. elré wor—mwoitdy ti voulCes edoé-
Beay civos; yet there follows immediately, @xe:s ody eiweiv, dwotds tis 6 edoe-
Bhs éorw; Comp. Rem. 2. Pl. Crit. 48, a. ok tpa jquiv ottw dpovtiaréoy, rt
€povow of ToAAo) juas, GAN 8 Te 6 eralwy wep) Tay Sixaiwy Kal Gdinwv. X. C. 4.
4, 13. ob yap aicSdvoual cov, bwotoy voumov, motov dSikaov Aéyers. —In
indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect
interrogative, e. g. 8s instead of Ssris, ofos instead of dzoios, etc.

Rem. 2. The adverb ror é, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended
to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer
for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. C. 1.1, 2.
wolw wor éexphoavto texunplw; (what proof, I pray, did they bring?) ~ 1. moa-
Aduts ESaduarg, Thor ToTe Adyous "ASnvatous Freioay of ypaduevor Swxpdrny,
os atios ely Savdrov rH moda. R.L. 1,1. abtuaoca, dr @ wore tpdmyw Todr’
eyéeveTo. ,

Rem. 3. The article is prefixed to the interrogative, when one of the speak-
ers has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while
the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis-
course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks
“what that means.” Pl. Phaedr. 277, a. Swxp. Nov 5) éxetva dn, & Paidpe,
duvduesa xplvev, toitway cmodoynuévev. &. Ta mota; (in reference to the
preceding é€xetva). 279, a. Swxp. Néos &r1, & baidpe, “looxpdrns: b wevTo mav-
Tevouat Kat’ ato, Aéyew eSéAw. &. TS wotoy 6H; So T&A rota raira
Aéyets; From this mode of expression, that is to be distinguished, in which a
substantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with-
out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an
object already existing. Il. 7, 440. rofov rdv pdSov ermes; which the
Eng. translates by means of two sentences, “ What is that word, that thou
hast spoken?” ‘The word is already spoken, and the other now asks what it
means. Her. 7, 48. damudve avipOv, kota (= moia) radTa Aéyes Elva S00 pos
moAcua@tata; (what are these two things which you say are most hostile to me?)
Pl. Gorg. 521, a. él morépay oby we mapakadrels Thy Sepdwey tis wéAews ;
(= morépa éotly 7 Sepdmeia, ep’ fy we mapaxareis ;) ;

it i i
;

§ 344,] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 557

Rem. 4. In order to make the subject matter of the question emphatic, when
there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words which denote this
subject matter are often taken from their own sentence and placed first with 7f
5 ¢, and then the predicate of the proper interrogative clause is commonly placed
with a second interrogative. Pl. Rp. 341, d. rf 82 xuBepyhrns; 5 dpSas kv-
Bepvfrns vavrayv ipxwyr eoriv, ) vabrns ; Gorg. 502, a. rf 5& 5 rarhp abrov MéAns ;
i mpds 7d BéATioTrov BAerwr eddxer vor Kidapwdeiy ;

Rem. 5. The expressions, rf paddy, tl maddy, cur? why? always ex-
ress disapprobation or censure of that respecting which the question is asked.
The former implies that the thing censured was done designedly ; the latter that
it was done accidentally, e.g. Th waSav rodro érolnoas; (what has come into
your mind to do this, with what object in view did youdo this?) Tl radayv rotro
érolnoas ; (quid expertus hoc fecisti ? what happened to you that you did this?) PA.
Apol. 36, b. ri dis eipe wadeiv, }} dworioa, 6Tt padav ev TE Blow odx jhovxiav
iyyov ; (what punishment do I deserve, that I pURPOSELY have had no rest in my life?).

Rem. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence,
consists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjune-
tion, into a direct interrogative clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con-
struction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate
clause into the ‘principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4,
14. ob 38 duporépwy tay wAclorou atiwv tetTuxnkas ob olet Tov Seods emmedcio-
Sat, GAN Bray Tl roihewot, vomeis abtods cod ppovtiCey; (but what must the
gods do, to make you believe that they care for thee?). Dem. Phil. 1. 43, 10. rére
& xph mpdtere; Cwesdav tl yévnract; (but what must take place i you are to
do your duty?). Hence the elliptical expressions, iva tl; @s Tl; (se. yévn-
ta) to what purpose, for what object? bri rf; (sc. ylyvera), on what ground ?
So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. Pl. Phaed. 105, b. ei yap %poid we, 6 bv TH
év 7G ocduart eyyéevnrat, Sepudv ~ora, ob rhy dopary cor epe ardxpiow y
you would ask in what condition of body he must be, so that it might be warm?) So
also 7 o®@ is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction
(nihil non). Dem. Cor. 241, 47. tBpiQoudvwy wal ri Kaxdy ob x) racxdvTwv
Taca 7 oixoumevn perth yeyove mpodoTar.

Rem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without
«al, under one common predicate, e. g. Mas rl tp bv ayo (olueda; (how and
what ?). [Comp. Eng. “ what and what manner of time,” tiva i motov Kapdy, 1
Pet. 1:11.] Pl. Rp. 400, a. rota & ébrolov Blov pihuata, ode Exw Adyew
(what imitations and of what life?). Dem. Cor. rls tivos alrids éott; So
also with the relative. Isocr. Archid. 124, 42. rls ob« oldev, €& ofwv tvupopay
eis Sony evdamoviay Karéctnoay. .

Rem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con-
nected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected; the
Eng. in this case changes the Part. together with the interrogative or relative
bens a, Bey it, into a principal clause, and the finite verb into a subordinate
clause. X. C. 3. 7, 3. thy 58 éuhy dbivauuw, pn 5 Xapuldns, ev rolw Epyw xa-
TaLadwy TalTd pov KatayryvécKes ; (by what work hast thou learned my ability,
so that thou couldst pass such a sentence about me?). The Greek may also insert
an interrogative clause between the article and the participle belonging to it,
and in this way blend the two questions into one. X. C. 2. 2, 1. carapeuddyxas
oby Tods Th mowdvtas Td bvoua tovTO &roKadover; instead of caraneudSnKas,
tlvas 7) Svowa TodTO amroKadovow, Kal Tl mowovcw ovToL, os Td Svoua TOUTO GmoK-
aAovow ;

3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer de- —

sires only an affirmation or denial to his inquiry, are expressed
in English merely by placing the finite verb first and by the
47*

eat aN Spe
it gh Cs
a)

ae
a,

a = Le
Yop ey ER

558 SYNTAX. _ [§ 344.

accentuation, e. g. A7¢ thou sick? Hast thou seen thy friend ?
In Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first
place, merely by the tone of the question and the position of
the words, the word on which the stress of the question lies,
being placed first in the sentence; still this mode of expression
is not very common ; it is used most frequently, when the ques-
tion involves a certain degree of emotion.

Od. €, 204. ow 3h olkdvde plan és warplda yatay abtixa vov eSéres teva;
This is found very often with negatives, e. g. ObK« éSéreis iévat;

4. In the second place, the predicative question is introduced
by certain interrogatives; this is the more common usage. In
indirect questions, these interrogatives are translated by whether.
When the predicative question consists of more than one mem-
ber, and of such a nature that one member is excluded by the
other (disjunction, § 323), then one of the interrogatives stands
in the first member, while 7, or (an), stands in the second and

following members.
5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the

following : —

(a)*H implies an asseveration (§ 316, 2), and hence is used when it is sup-
posed that that which forms the subject of the question actually exists. X. Cy.
1. 4,19. # obro., & wdwme, woreuiol eioww, ot epertheace Tois Hpéua; TloAgusor pev-
ro, pn. Pl. Rp. 341, e. 4 dpSas vor doK@, pny, bv elweiy obtw Adywr, i} od ;
*OpSas, @pn. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. why
(§ 316, 1), 34, 84 mov (§ 315, 1, 2), d97a (§ 315, 3), &pa, ydp [§ 324, 2, 3, (a)],
kal, mov (§ 316, 2), mod &pa. X. O. 4, 23. rh Aéyes, & Kope; F yap od
rats oais xepai TovTwy Ti épirevoas ; (Now did you acTUALLY plant any of these
with your own hands ?). *H ydp; (is it not true?). Pl. Hipp. Min. 363, c, 4 yap,
& ‘Inia, édy ti epwrd oe Swepdrns, aroxpive? ;"H mov; (surely? surely indeed ?).
Pl. Lysid. 207,d. 4 rou, jv 8 eyd, & Avo, cpddpa pire? oe 5 warhp Kal Hh whrnp;
Tidvy ye, 4 ® Ss. Still, # wov is also used when the inquirer would express
doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned.
Eur. Med. 695.4% wov reréAunn’ Epyov alexiroy 1é8¢ 5 ven Jason INDEED,
ACTUALLY dared this thing ?).

(b) 7Apa (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential &pa, igitur
[§ 324, 3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequence, effect ; by frequent.
use, however, the appropriate meaning (gitur), becomes weakened and ob-
secured ; hence the inferential particles apa, ov are sometimes added to a
question introduced by dpa. *Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer
expects an affirmative or negative answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely
indicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then in

— ea eee a ee a ee - ts 5) ee ee BW

§ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 559

the first case, dp od (nonne), is used; in the last case, dpa uh (num, whether ?
is it not?) ; uw always expresses solicitude, fear. X.C.3.6,4. ap’ pn 6 Swpdrns,
Ssmep, pido olkov ei adfijoa: Bobroww, mAovatwTepoy abrdy emixerpoins dy marhoas ;
Iidvu uty ody, tpn. 10,1. dpa, &pn, & Mappdore, ypapich eorw 4 elxacla
Tav dpwudvwy ;—"AAHSA A€yets, My. 2. 6,16. dp’ ody olodd twas, of dyw-
percis bytes peAluous Sivayra plrous moeioda; Ma AP od 397 py. 3.13,
3. Gp’ ody, tpn, nad oixérar cov &xSovra mlyoyrés Te adtd kal Aovduevos adt@ ;
Ma roy Al’, pn (profecto non aegre ferunt). 4.2, 22. Gp’ ody dia rhy Tod xaa-
xevew Guadlay tod dvéuaros tovrov tuyxdvovow; Od B7Ta. 1.5, 4. dpd ye
ov xph wdvta bvdpa, aynoduevoy thy eyxpareay dperis <lvar Kpnwida, rabrny
mpatov ev TH WuxH KatacKevdoasda; (nonne certe). 2. 6,34. dpa wh diaBda-
AcoSat SdEeis bm’ Euod ; 4. 2, 10. rh Bt 5h Bovaduevos ayadds yevécdsai, Epn, & Ed-
Svdnuc, ovddAdyers TA ypduuata; —"Apa mh larpds; %pn>—Kal 6 EdSvdnuos> ©
Ma Af, tpn, otk Bywye. O. 4,4. dpa wh aicxuvSauevy roy Meprav Baoréa
piphoacSa; Double question: Pl. Euthyphr. 9, e. dpa 7d 8ct0v, bri Soidv éort,
irctra id Tay Seay, H, Sri pircira, Saidv ears; (is then that which is holy loved
by the gods because it is holy, or is it holy because it is loved ?)

(c) M av (probably originating from uf and the confirmative ody, § 316,
Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not? is it so? whether? and
hence always leads one to expect a negative answer. For the sake of perspi-
cuity, the particles ody and uh are often added, e.g. udv ofv, way wh. But
if the negative od is added to way, then the question is affirmative (nonne). PL
Lysid. 208, c. dar’ Spxet tls cod ; “Ode madaywyds, pn. Mav Sovdos Gv; (but
not a slave, is he?) Eur. Hec. 754. rl xpiua wacrevovoa; w@v erAetSepoy aidva
Séoda ; pddiwv ydp éorl cor. Hecuba answered: Od Sijra- robs Kaxovs Bt Tiuw-
pouvmévn aidva tov tdumwavra SovAedoa: SéAw. Eur. Andr. 82. wav oby doxeis
cor ppovrica tl’ a&yyeA@y ; Pl. Phaed. 84, c. tl, pn, duiv Ta AeXSvTa; wav
BH Sone? évdeds AéyeoSat ; —*Ev ois ri xpiv worety ue; wOv ob x amep emoloww;
(nonne, quod faciebam ?) a

(d) There is the same difference between od-and «# when used without
dpa, as when used with it, see (b): i. e. od is used in affirmative questions, uf in
negative. Obk eSédrets lévat; (non or nonne vis ire ? do you not wish togo?) Pl.
Prot. 309, a. ob ob evra ‘Ouhpov emawérns ef; (are you not in fact an eulogist ? Es
on pévro, see § 316, Rem.). On odxody (nonne igitur) and o¥«ouy (nonne
certe) in a question, see § 324, Rem.7. X.C. 4.2, 10. dAAd wh apxirextov
Botra: yevérdsar; Odn ody tywy, pn. “AAAG mh yewuérpns emiSupeis, en,
yevérsa ayadds; OSE yewuérpns, %pn KTA. 2,12. wh odv, Xp 6 EVSvdquos,
ob Bivwpa eye Td Tis Sixasootvns %pya enyhoacSa; (shall I not be unable, etc. ?
the negative ov belongs to the single word dvvwua:). This interrogative uf is
used very often in an indirect question, after expressions of considering, ask- re
ing, inquiring, of solicitude and fear. It appropriately means, whether not, but in
Eng. can be often translated by that. X. C. 4. 2,39. ppovrl(w, wh xpdricroy
mo ovyay (I am anxious whether it is not best). For more examples of ph and
also for the construction, see § 318, Rem. 6.

(e) Efva and €re:ra, and more emphatically «dra, e’mecta, introduce

bate
wie

*
og Tee

a a Te

560 SYNTAX. [§ 344. —

questions of astonishment, indignation, and irony. They express antithesis or
contrast, and yet, since they show that an unexpected conclusion has been
drawn from a previous thought ({ 312, Rem. 8). X. C. 1.4, 11, 8 tom, eon,
bri, i vouiComus Seods avSparwy Ti ppovTiCew, odk dv ducdrolny a’rav. %.*Ewert’
obx ofer ppovti¢ew ; of mparov wey pdvoy Tay Céwy kvSpwrov dp&dy avértnoay KTA.
(and yet do you not think that they do care for men?). Cy. 2.2, 31. k&meita

To.ovToy byTa ov pidrets adrdy ;

(f) Mérepov (wérepa)—% (Homer #—7%) is used like the Latin utrum —
an, in direct and indirect double questions. Tdérepoy is sometimes omitted in
the first member. X. C. 2. 3, 6. nal 6 Swxpdrnys pn: Tdtepa 5€, & Xaipéxpa-
Tes, ovdevl apéoo Sivatat Xapepay, } ~orw ois Kal wavy dpéoxer; Cy. 3.1, 12.
wl dé, Av xphuata worAAa exn, Cds TAovteiv, } wéevynta worets; C. 1.4, 6. tadra
oT w MpovonTiKGs wempayueva, amopeis, WOT EPA TUXNS, 2 yvouns epya éorly;

(g) “AAAo re % (arising from &AAo ti éor or ylyvera, H or yévoir’ ty, #) and
&AAo r1,has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4.7,5:%AA0 Te 4 ovdty
KwAdvet maprévar ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anything hinder ?)
Pl. Hipparch. 236, e. AAO Tx ody of ye didoKepdeis pidodar Td Képdos ;

(h) “H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the
question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, but is contained
in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. “H can then be translated
by perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. wdvr’ tpa ob ye TA ev GySpdrois HPiatpa emuordue-
vos wdAat &mexptirrov: }) dxveis, En, Apia, mh aicxpds pavijs, éay mpdtepos Toy
adeApodv eb mops ; (= 4 Xpa— amrexpdrrov, 7 dxveis —;)

(i) Ei and édy [with the Subj., comp. § 339, 2, II, (b)], whether, is used only
in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de-
notes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities; but often only one
member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker.
Hence «i and édy are especially used after verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquir-
ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must deterniine whether
the interrogative sentence has an affirmative sense (whether — not), or a nega-
tive one (whether). X. An. 7. 8, 37. oxéWar, ei 6 “EAAhvwy vouos KdAduoy Exel,
(whether—not). C. 1.1, 8. ore rG orparnyuKg dhAov, ei (whether) cuupéper
otparnyeiv: otte TH wWodritin@ Shdrov, ei (whether) ouppéper Tis mérAcws
mpootateivs otTe TE KaAny yhuavti, ty’ ebppalynrat, SHdov, et (whether —
not) dia rabrny avidoeta, otte TE Suvatods ev TH WéAEL KNdeoTas AaBdyTi SHAov,
ei (whether — not) 51% tobrous orephoeta THs médews. C. 4.4, 12. oxepa, dav
Tdd€ gol uairdAov &péoky. Pl. Apol. 18, a. déoueu suey tobr@ ty vodv mposé-
xe, ef Slxaia A€yw, 2} wh. — On ei after verba affectuum, see § 329, Rem. 7.

Rem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, verbs which express some
action, are constructed with this deliberative édy with the Subj. and ¢e with
the Opt. (Epic e@ xe, af xe), in which case a verb like cxomeiv, meipaoda,
is to be supplied by the mind. Th. 1, 58. Moridadara: reupay wey Kal map’
’ASnvatlous mpécBeis, ef mws Tel oerav (huving sent envoys to the Athenians |to see,

to ascertain| whether they could persuade them). Il. v, 172. yAauaidwy 8 idds pépe-
ToL pevel, jy Twa Tepyy avdpar.

(k) Ef{re—etre are used in indirect questions like ei —%, except that

$ 344. | INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 661

by «fre—etre the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two possi-
bilities, are made more prominent. §. Ant. 38. «al deltas rdxa, ef7’ ebyevhs
nrépuxas, ef’ éo3ddy xaxh. The poets also say efre — %, or el —eire, or they
omit the first efre altogether.

6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the fol-
lowing points are to be noted: The Ind. is used in direct and
indirect questions ; it is also used after 7% in indirect questions,
when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that
that which is the object of his anxiety or fear actually exists.
The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [§ 259, 1,
(b), and 2]; but the Opt. also (after an Hist. tense), when the
question is to be represented as the sentiment of another (§ 345,
4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing
a wish (§333, 5). The Opt. with dv and the Ind. of the histor-
ical tenses with dv, are used as in principal clauses, § 260, 2,
(2) and (4).

Ti Aéyvers; (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the
Greeks use the Ind., e. g. r@s of3a; (how could I know?)—Einé, bri rAé-
yes; Th. 3, 53. poBotpeda, ur dupotépwy jHuaptheamer. X. Cy. 3.1, 27.
dpa, wh exelvovs ad Sehaet ce cwhppovicew Ett uaGAdorv, } huas viv eénoev. TI
etmwpuev; (what can we say, what are wé to say?) — Ov oida, 6 Tt et mwpuev
(I know not what we can, shall say). Od, €, 473. del5a, wh Shpecow eArwp kar
Kipua yévwpas (that I shall become). X. C. 4. 2,39. ppovtifw, wh xpdricrov
H wo ovyay (whether it is not best). Ov elxov, Swot rparoluny. Pl. Rp.614,
b. avaBaobs treyev, & éxet 1504 (what he had seen there). "Apd wo €SeAhoais
&v eiweiv (sc. ef oe épwrdnv); X. An. 6. 1, 28. éxetvo evv0d, wh Alay &v raxd
gwhppovicdxetnv. C. 4. 2, 30. mpds ot awoBAdra, ef wor ESeAHRGaLs by
einyhoarsa (sc. ¢i BovrAoio).—"Apd oe Ereroa &y (sc. ef gor TadTa erega) ;
(persuasissemne tibi?) X. Apol. 28. ob 3€,& plarare "AmoAAdSwpe, waAddov by
€BovaAou ue dpav Sixalws, } Gdlkws awoSvhoKxovta; (vellesne?) Od« oid &f oe
éreioa dy.

Rem. 10. On u4 (whether—not) with the Opt. after a principal tense, see

§ 345, Rem. 2. On the Ind. of the principal tenses, and also on the Subj. af-
ter an historical tense, see § 345, 5. hen the Subj. is followed by an Opt., then

the latter, as in final clauses (§ 330, 3), expresses the more remote thought. Il. |
mr, 650. sq. ppdero Suug. . wepunpl(wy, } Hdn Kal eivov. “Extwp xadK@ UJ oon

and 7 mov TedXE EAnT at, } ert Kal TAnovéecow SPEAAELEY Tévoy ai

7. The answer made to predicative questions by yes, is com-

monly expressed by repeating the word which contains the sub-
stance of the question. The answer made by o, is usually
expressed by prefixing od to the word which contains the sub-
stance of the question. Yes is also expressed by vat, vq Tov

SS ee CR ee, a ee se eee Pe, fae

562 SYNTAX. [§ 345.

Ata; ravv, kapra, ed and the like, dnt dap éyd, éydé with-
out dni; and no, by ov, od dypuié, od« eyo. Commonly also
strengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer
a question: yé (§ 317, 2), e. g. éywye, odk éywye; ydp (§ 324, 2),
tot (§ 317, 3), wévror (§ 316, Rem.), ody [§ 324, 3, (b)], pev-
odv (§ 316, Rem.). The answer to nominal questions is made
by naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made.

Eur. Hipp. 1395, sq. dpGs pe, d€orow’, ds Exw, rv USAvov;—‘Opa. Tb. 90,
sq. oloS obdv, Bpototow ds Kadéarnnev vduos;—OdxK ofda. X. C. 4. 6, 14.
Gps od duclvw worlrny elvat, dv od emaweis, } dv eyo ;—OyM) yap odr.

§ 345. I. OBLIQUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

1. When the words or thoughts of a person, whether the
second or third person or the speaker himself, are again re-
peated, wnaltered, in precisely the same form as they were
stated by us or another person, then the discourse or thought
quoted, being independent of any view or representation
of the narrator, is called direct discourse (oratio recta), e. g. I
thought: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED. The messenger an-
nounced: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED, — or without a preced-
ing verb: peace has been concluded.

2. When the words are not repeated in the precise form in
which they were first spoken, but are referred to the rep-
resentation of the narrator,and thus are made to depend
upon a verb of perception or communication (verbum sen-
tiendt or declarandi), standing in the principal clause, the
discourse is called indirect (oratio obliqua), e. g. We beheved,
THAT PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. The messenger announced, THAT
PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. |

3. The principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also

belong clauses introduced by codrdinate conjunctions, e. g.

Kai, d¢, ydp, ovv, Kairot, etc., are expressed in oblique discourse,
when they contain a simple afirmation or an opinion, and de-
note something which happens, has happened, or will happen:
(a) either by the Acc. with the Inf. (§ 307, 6), or by é7u and
és with the finite verb (§ 329), or even by the participle [$ 310,

4, (a)], e. g. “Emjyyeire rods todeplovs adrogpuyciv—Ore ob

$ 345.] OBLIQUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 563

Tor{un dmopiyorev—rodvs tokeplovs dropvyévras; when
they express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and
in continued oratio obliqua by 8«itv, xpyvac with the Inf., more
seldom by the Inf. alone., (§ 306), e. g. “Edeée rots orparuirais
eritéotar trois todepios (oratio recta, ériderJe).

Remark 1. Jntermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua. and particularly such
as are connected with the preceding by ydp, although they are grammatically
principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any
- conjunction to introduce them; commonly a sentence expressed by 67: or és
with the Opt. or by the Acc. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7.3, 13. fAeyov woAAo}
Kara Tastd, Sri mavTds Ett A€yur SevSys* Xeuov yap en, xa) obre ofxade dmomwAciw
T@ Bovrouévw Suvativ efn, x. T. A. H. 3. 2, 23. dwoxpwapyévwv 5é tay HAclwr,
oe ov Tohoeiay Ta’ta> émAnidas yap Exorev Tas wéArELS* ppodpay epnvay of

Popot.

4. The subordinate clauses of direct discourse, undergo no
change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical
tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of
the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre-
sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub-
ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of
the person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. “Av, which
is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still
remains in indirect discourse.

X. An. 7. 1, 33. (Koiparddns) Zreyev, Srt Eromos etn Hycioda abrois.., Wa
TOAAG Kal &yada AhWowro (oratio recta: Eromds eiut.., Wa AfverSe). Ag. 1,
10. Ticcapépyns Guooev "Aynoidde, el oweloatro, ws EASorev, obs wép-
Were mpds Bactréa ayyéAous, diampdtcoSar altgG apedijvar adrovduous tas ev TH
*Aola médrcis “EAAnridas (oratio recta: édy omelon, Ews by EASwow, ods TéEmbw ..

Siampdtouat).

Rem. 2. When, however, the subordinate clauses of direct discourse would
be expressed by the Ind. of an historical tense, the Ind. remains even in indi-
rect discourse, because the Opt. would leave it undetermined, whether in direct
discourse the Ind. of a principal tense, or the Ind. of an historical tense had
been used. X. An. 7. 7, 55. of orpari@ta: trcyov, as Zevopay ofxorto mpds Sev-
nv olxhowy nal & bwéaXeETO aire adrodnvduevos (oratio recta: Z. ofxeto mpds
x. & bwéoxero arodnlouevos). X. C. 2. 6,13. Heovoa, Ste MepixAjjs mwodAas
(€rwdas) erioraro, &s erqgdwv tH wdc Emotes airhy pirciv airdy (oratio recta:
Tl. éwiorara, ds ..émoter). But subordinate clauses with 6r« (quod, quia) fol-
low the principal rule (No.4). X. H. 7. 1, 34. elye (MeXomidas) Aéyew, as Aake-
Sarudvior Sid TodTO ToAeuhoeiay avTois (Trois OnBalos), Sri ox EXeEAHTatEev
per’ "AynotAdou éASeiv ex’ abrdév (roy BaciAéa), orutio recta: A. ia TodTO éxo-
Adunoay, bti odk HSéAnoay. The reason why the Greek avoids the Subj. in
indirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only
with reference to the Future [§ 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. after a

rincipal tense is inappropriate, because this, as being the Subj. of the histor-
ical tenses, always accompanies the historical tenses. There are, however, @
few single examples, in which the Opt. follows a principal tense. But then a

564 . SYNTAX. [§ 348.
thought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who, at the moment of quota-
tion, is to be represented as one no longer present. Her. 7,108. dpa, uh mérny
xdumos 6 Adyos 6 eipnuévos €%n (whether the statement made was not idle boasting).
X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. dy ris éxcioe €Eayyetan dh, ds yh Bovroluny peyddany Sh-
pay morjoa (if any one announces there, that 1 INTENDED). C. 1, 2. 34. ef wey
yap (thy Tav Adywr Téxvnv) ody Tots SpSws (Aeyouévors eivar voulCovres améxer Sat
keAevere), dj Aov dTt Gperréov efy Tod opdws A€yew (if you mean that philosophy
is not to be used in reasoning right, it is evident that it WAS YOUR viEW, that we
must abstain from reasoning right). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense,
wishes to represent a statement as the sentiment of another person, it must use
the Acc. with the Inf. instead of 67: with the Subj. Thus. e. g. the English
phrase, He says that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Aéyet,
ort Huis Gddvator Suev, or Sti H. GS. elmer, but by Adyar Fuads &Savd-
tovs efvyat.—In hypothetical Protases with ef and the Ind., the Ind. remains.

Rem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate
clauses of directsdiscourse, when the speaker wishes to bring forward an ex-
pression or thought, not in his own person, but as the sentiment of another. Her.
7, 2. éoraclaoy (of waides), 5 wey “ApraBadyns, katétt mpecBitards Te en may-
Tos Tov ydvou, Kal Bri vousCdueva eX n mpds mdvTwv avApdrwy, Toy mpecBUTaToY
Thy apxhy txew: Hépins 5€, as "Ardcons te mais efn, kad br. Kipos e%n 6 nrqodp-
evos Toit Téponot Thy eAevdnplyv.

Rem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique discourse is used instead of the Subj. of
direct discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with &. Th. 8, 54. rat
e’nglcavto mActoavta Toy Telcavdpoy kal Séxa krdpas per’ adrod mpdocew, bry
ky abrots Soxoln tpiora cew. X. H. 2.4, 18. 5 udytis waphyyerer adrois, wh
mpérepov émitixecSat, ply &v Tay opeTépwy } WEgoL TIS, TpwdeEin. 5.4,
47. éxédeve mpoxatadaPely te &xpoy Kal puddrrev, Ews dv abtds EATO1,

5. Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse takes
the form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in
the principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is
expressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj.,
as in direct discourse. _The actions and representations be-
longing to the past, are thus transferred to the present time of
the speaker, and assume a more direct and definite character
than if they were stated in the form of indirect discourse
(§ 327, Rem. 2). !

X. Cy. 2. 2,1. del wey ody rep érXeTo 6 Kipos, drdre cvoxnvoier, bw s ebxapic-
rérato Adyor euBAnShoovrat, Comp.§327,Rem.2. H. 2.3, 2. 250g 7G
Shuw Tpidkovra éréaSa, 02 Tovs matplovs vouous Evyypapouct, kay obs mo-
Arretdoovor Her. 1,163. éxéAeve tis éavtov xmpns oixeiv, Bkov BovbAor-
rat. Th. 2, 4. of Maarajs €Bovactovro, elre kataxatvaoovoly, Ssmep
Zx over, eumphoavtes 7d olknua, {te Tr BAAOXpHToOVTaL 1,107,€50te F
abrots cxébacSa, btw tTpdaw aoparéorata Siawopedoovrat Her. 1, 29.
dpkloior weydrAoot kat elxXovTo ASnvain, déxa erea xphoeodat vénoiwt, TOUS hy
oot Sdrwy SHtat X.Cy.4.5, 36. robs inméas ExéAXevoe puvddrrew Tors bya-
ydvras, Ews ty Tis oOnudyyn. H. 2.1, 25. Adoavipos 5& tas taxlotas Tov veay
éxéAeuoey ereoSa Tos “ASnvalos: éwmerdav 5& €xBG@o1, KatiddvrTas 8 rs
wotovatyv, amordew. On br1, ds (that), see § 329, 4 and Rem. 3.

$ 346.) ELLIPSIS, — BRACHYLOGY. 665

Rem. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plupf.) Indicative, referring to the his-
torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres.
(Perf.), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate
clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kipos rods puyddas éxéAcuoe oiv adt@ orpa-
TeverXat, dworxduevos adtois, el Karas RS ép & dorparetbeto, uh
mpdodev ravicarSat, xplv adrods Karaydyot otcade, (Oratio recta: day xarampdtw,
ep’ & orparedouat, od mp. mavcoua, mpiv ky buas Kataydyw). But the Ind. is also
used in the subordinate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro-
duces his own remarks and explanations into the statement or thought of
another, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to
the statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as
general truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the
same time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj.
are often interchanged with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct
and indirect discourse in order to form a contrast between the certainty, reality,
fact, and directness expressed by the two former, and the uncertainty, possibility,
mere conception, and indirectness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3,6. ZAeyor
bri eixdra SoKxotev Adyew Bacirei, Kal heorev hyeudvas Exovres, of adrovs,
éav ai orovdal yévwrvtat, &Eovciv, We Etover ta emirhdea. 3. 5, 13.
a hoav Savudovres, Sra: wort tpéWovrat of “EAAnvés, wal th ev v@

Xovev.

6. The Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of
the finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses.

Her. 6, 117. &vSpa of Soxéey drAlrny ayrioriiva uéyav, Tod (instead of of)
Td yévetov Thy domlida wacay oxidfewv. 6, 84. Sxddas (sc. pact) rods vouddas,
émwel re apt Aapeioy ésBaretv és rhy xépny, wea TadTa peuoveva mu Tloac-
Sa: (postguam invasisset). Th. 4, 98. of "ASnvaia tpacay, ei wey émemddoy Suy7-
Siivat ris exelvwv Kparijoat, Todt’ dy Exew (S81 ampliorem illorum agri partem in
suam potestatem redigere POSSENT se eam retenturos). See Larger Grammar,
Part Il, § 849.

Rem. 6. The spirited mode of representation among the Greeks, and the
desire to make past events appear as present, often changes the indirect dis-
course into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of-
ten an interchange of person, comp. § 329, Rem. 3. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. évratSa
3) Tov Kipoy yeAdou te ex Tay mpdcdey daxptwy Kal cireiv arg amidvra Sappeiv,
Sri wapéotat abrois bAlyov xpdvov: Sste dpav oor ekéota, kav BobAn, doxap-
dauuxref, On the contrary, An. 7. 1, 39. eASdv 5t KAéavdpos: MdAa modus, pn,
diamputduevos heo- A€vyerv yap AvatliBioy, Sri ode emerhdeor ely, k. T. A.

Ill. SPECIAL PECULIARITIES IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF
WORDS AND SENTENCES.

§ 346. Ellipsis. Brachylogy (Zeugma). Contraction.
Pleonasm.

1. Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen-
tence which is logically subordinate, and hence of less impor-
tance, but viewed grammatically, must necessarily be supplied
in order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit-

48

ee ae
%, te Do

re » s ,
<A 7S Myst ~
i

566 SYNTAX. [§ 346.

ted word can only be of a very general and indefinite nature,
and is frequently contained in the idea of the qualifying word,
Aas, €. g. of Ivyroi (Sc. advIpwrror), 4 avprov (Sc. juépa), or is evident
from the context or frequent usage, as e. g. in eis SidacKddov
iévax. In like manner, the omitted sentence must express a
general idea, and hence one which may be readily supplied, or
one which is indicated by the context. The single instances
of Ellipsis have been noticed in the course of the Grammar.
See Index under Ellipsis.

2, Ellipsis is to be distinguished from, brevity of expression
or Brachylogy. In Ellipsis, there is an actual omission of an
element, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought;
but in Brachylogy, there is not a real, but only apparent omis-
sion of such an element, that element being in some way in-
volved in the sentence or in a member of it. The simplest
instances of brevity of expression have already been presented
(§ 319, Rem. 1). The following additional instances may here
be mentioned : —

(a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2, 11.
(Gober) thy tay wéAas (yiv) Snody } Thy éavtar dpa (sc. Spoupevnr).

(b) In antitheses, one member must often be supplied from the other. Dem.
Ol. 3. 30, 17. émpdtauey jets (sc. wpds exelvous) kal éxeivor mpbs juas eiphyny.

(c) From a negative word, an affirmative one must often be borrowed ; this
takes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by an ad-
versative conjunction. Her. 7, 104. 6 véuos dveyet TwiTd del, odK CGY Hebyev
ovdey TAS0s GvIpdrwy ex ives GAAS (Sc. dveywv) wévovtas ev TH Taker emixpa-
téew, } amdd\AvoSau. Pl. Apol. 36, b. dueAhoas, Gy of woddol (sc. émmuedoodr-
ra). So from oddels the idea of efs or éxacros is to be borrowed, as in the fol-
lowing sentence,from ovd° ¢fs, the subject of the first clause, eis or Exacros is to
be borrowed as the subject of the second clause. Pl. Symp. 192, e. radra dxod-
gas 098 by efs ekapynSeln, GAN Grexvas oto’ by axnnoévat k. T. A.

(a) From a following verb with a specific meaning, a verb with a general
meaning must be borrowed, e. g. Motiv, épydfeo Sa, ylyvecSat, elvan, cvpBalvery ;
This is the case in the expressions, rf AAO H,—ovdey BAA H—UAAO
ri %, instead of tf &AAo more? or Zorw or the like, #71. Th. 3, 39. Ti HAAO
obtot, 4 eweBobrAcvoay; 4, 14. of Aaxedaydvioe BAAO OVSEv } ex ys evavpd-
Xovv.

(e) When two verbs connected together have a common object, even if they
govern different Cases, the Greek usually expresses the object but once, and
makes this depend on the nearest verb. Indeed, the object of a clause is not
unfrequently transferred and made the subject of the ‘ollowing clause, without

eo eee

———e ee eS

-

§ 346.) ELLIPSIS. — BRACHYLOGY. — ZEUGMA. 567

its place being supplied by a pronoun. X. 0.4, 8. rodrors uty xdpay thy BA-
Aq mpostidna: kal dSdépas kore? (sc. abrods). Pl. Gorg. 460,¢. ob det
rots watdorpiBats éyxadetv ov8 éxBdddety (sc. abrovs) de tay wéAewy.
Rp. 465, a. rpecBurépy vewrépwy mdvtwy &pxerv te Kal rorAd ery (se.
abrots) mposterdtera:. Th. 5, 54. (’Apyeia) és€Badrov és thy ’Em:dauplayv
kal €dxovur (sc. a’riv). This case occurs most frequently where a partici-
ple is connected with a finite verb. Th. 1, 20, r@ ‘Imadpxw rhy Mavadn-
vaichy wouwhy StaxogmotyTe awénrervay (sc. abrév) (while Hipparchus
was arranging the Panathenaic procession, they killed him). Ib. 144. rodrois
&mokpivduevot droméuWwuer (sc. adtovs). But sometimes the Case is
made to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. dcov xpovoy
mpotarn (IlepixAjs) Tis woAews.., dopadras diepddatey abthy, kal eyévero
(sc. avth) ex’ éxelvov peylorn. X. “Sie 2. 5, 24. taidra (Tareapsprns) cimioy eok€
Te KAedpx@ Ganda Aéyew, al elwev (sc. 6 KAéapxos).

3. An important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e. a con-
struction in which a verb, that in sense belongs only to one
subject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects.
The verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex-
press an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited
sense.

IL. y, 326. fixe Exdorw temo depolrodes Kal woulra tebxe Exerto (to lie, as
well as generally to be in a place, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. éoSijta d& pop é-
ove. mH SKvduKH Suolny, yASooay dt id{ny (they WEAR garments like the Scytha-
ans, but HAVE or SPEAK a@ language of their own). A compound verb is often
used in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the compound,
the signification of the simple is at the same time to be included. Th. 1, 44.
of "ASnvatan wet éyvwoav Kepxupatos tuppaxlay wh morhoacSa (instead of pe-
Téyvecay Kot &yywoay) CHANGED THEIR MINDS and DETERMINED not to form an
alliance with the Corcyraeans.

4. Contraction in coordinate clauses has already been spoken
of (§ 319, Rem. 1); this is more seldom in subordinate clauses,
_ though frequent with those introduced by dszep, dszep.

Eur. Med.1153. pious voul Cove’ obsmep by méats cédev (sc. voulG). Pl. L.
710, d. wdvta oxeddy drelpyactat TE Seg Awep (sc. dwepyd(era) Stay Bov-
AndF diahepdvtws eb mpatal twa wéAw. So also ef or efwep tis or BAAos Tis OF
elrep tov, elrep word, etc. Her. 9, 27. quiv ort wodAd Te Kad eb Exovra, ei réor-
ot Kal &AAow: “EAAHvov.

5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical
point of view, is superfluous, the idea conveyed by it having
been already expressed in what precedes, either by the same

568 SYNTAX. (347.

‘des

or by another word. The desire of perspicuity or emphasis is
commonly the cause of Pleonasm. .

X. Cy. 1. 4,19. of, Av ém exelvous jets eAatywmev, dwroreuodvTm Has exe?-

vot. 3, 15. weipdooua TOG TAT Ty ayadav inméwy Kpdtiotos dy immeds compar —

xe avTg.

Remark. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rhetorical,
which consists in the use of two or even more words of a similar signification
to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (a) A verb with an abstract
substantive, as udxny udxecSat, téAcuov moAcuer ;— (8) A verb with a partici-
ple, as pevywv epuye, elroy Aéywv ; — (ry) An adjective with an abstract substan-

oe

tive in the instrumental Dat., as peyéde: uéyas, TAHYE ToAAL ; — (5) An adjec-
tive or adverb with an adverb (mostly poetic) as oidSev olos (wholly alone);— —

{e) Synonymous adverbs, as evSds mapaxphua, TdAw aiidis, del cvvexas ; — (¢)
The part is very often joined with the whole by «ai or ré, for the purpose of
making the part prominent, as “Exrop: wév kal Tpwol (Hom.); Zed kal Seol;

’"AdSnvaio Kal “Idixpdtns ; (n) For the sake of emphasis, the same thought is ~

often expressed twice, once positively and then negatively, or the reverse, as
Aékw bres duds kal od amoxpipouct (Dem.); IL. a. 416. érel ro aloa ulvuvdd rep,

obrt udra Shy (since your life is short, and not very long). See Larger Grammar, —

Part IT. § 858.

§ 347. Contraction and Blending of Sentences.
Anacoluthon.

1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes —
the verb which is common to the principal and subordinate —

clauses, is placed in the subordinate clause and made to
agree with the subject of that clause; in this way the two
clauses are much more closely united, than in the common
mode of contraction (§ 319, Rem. 1). |

X. Cy. 4.1, 3. adrds of8a, ofos jv+ 7a uty yap %AAa (scil. eoler) Soamep, oluat,
Kal wdvres dueis CTWOLETTE. .

2. When a participle stands in a sentence with the finite

verb, the parts of the sentence are frequently blended with

each other, by making the substantive which would be gov-

erned by the participle, depend upon the finite verb, as the
more important part of the sentence. Comp. Larger Grammar,
Part II. § 856, b. p. 609—611.

Soph. El. 47. &yyeArAe & 8px mposrivels, instead of &yyeAAe mposTidels Sprov.
X. Cy. 1. 6, 33. dws civ TrorobT@ ESer eSiosévTes mpadrepor woAtra yévoww-
To; der is here governed by ody and connected with yévow7o, instead of being
in the Dat. depending on édi0Sévres, which would have been the natural con-
struction. X. Cy. 7.1, 40. obro: 5 éweid) jropodyTo, KUKAWw TdyTOSEY TOLN-

_-

——

oe

a

$ 347.] CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569

odpuevot, Ssre dpaoSa ta 8rda, bd tals dorlow exdSnyto (instead of KbKAov
momoduevot exddnvro). 2.3, 17. rots 8 érépos elev, S71 BdrAAew Sehon avas-
pouvuévous tais BédAots.

3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the
subordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which
belongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in
transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal
clause, and making it the object of the principal clause.
(Comp. nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit, instead of quam
tardus sit Marcellus).

Her. 3, 68. obros rp@ros im@éatevee THY Mayor, ds ovx en 5 Kipov Syép-
dis (he first suspected the Magian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus-
pected that the Magian was not, etc.). 80. ef3ere Thy KauBicew bBpiv, ex
bcov ewetHASE (see the insolence of Cambyses what a pitch it reached = see what
a@ pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. dremweipatro Tav ‘EAAhvay, 6 Tt ev vg
tyouev. Th. 1,72. rhy opetépay wéadiv éBotaovto onualvew, ban tn diva-
py. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. of &pxovtes aitGy ewmipedclaodwy, brws cvoKevacpevoar
éot wdvra. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob-
ject of a substantive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate
clause is frequently transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen.,
as the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. #ASe 5 Kal Tots "ASnvalots cddds
h ayyeala trav mérXewy, bri aperrior (the report immediately reached the
Athenians respecting the cities, that they had revolted = the report reached the Athe-
nians, that the cities had revolted). 97. &ua 58 nal Tis apxis amdsdertiv Ee
Tis TGV "ASnvalwy, év ole tpémw Katéorn. So also a substantive on which an
Inf. depends is often attracted by the verb or substantive which governs the Inf.
Th. 3, 6. ris Sardoons elpyov wh xpioSa Tovs MervAnvatous. 5, 25.
éwiduula tav avdpav tay ek tis vhoov Kouloacda. PI. Crit. 52, b. ob®
éxiduula ce &AANS TWéAEwS, ODT KAAWwY vVéuwv ZAaBey — cidévai.

4. The principal clause is frequently blended with the sub-
ordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive-
clause introduced by dre or ds, or still more frequently, as a
substantive-clause expressed by the Acc. with the Inf., depen-
dent on the subordinate clause.

X. An. 6. 4,18. &s yap éya Hrovad twos, rt KAéavdpos ex Bufayriov ap-
poorhs wéAAEt HEetv (instead of ds Hrovga, KA. wéAAe Héew), for as I heard
from some one, that Cleandros is about to come, etc. = for Cleandros is about to
come, as I heard from some one. Her.1, 65. &s & abrol Aakedamdvioe Adyours
Avkotpyov éwitpowetcavra ex Kphrns ayayéodat tadra. 3. 14. ds
Bt Adyetat bm Alyrriwy, Saxpterv uty Kpoicoyv. 4.5. &s dt SebSas
Aéyougl, vedtatoyv andytwy éSvéwy elvai Td oéeTeEpoy.

48*

570 oY SYNTAX. [§ 348.

5. Anacoluthon (from a privative and dxdAovJos, -ov, following)
is a figure used to denote a change.in the construction. It
takes place when the construction with which the sentence
begins, is not continued through it, but changed into another,
which grammatically does not correspond with the former, but
logically, i.e. in relation to the signification and meaning, is
like or similar to it. The cause of Anacoluthon may be attrib-
uted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to
their desire of perspicuity, brevity, strength, or concinnity (pro-
priety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Ana-
coluthon: (a) grammatical, (b) rhetorical. 'There are also in-
stances where it evidently originates from carelessness and in-

attention. The grammatical Anacoluthon, which is, for the

most part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several
places in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of
the rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned : —

(a) A very natural and frequent instance of Anacoluthon is, where the word
which gave rise to the whole thought of the sentence, is placed as the logical
subject in the Nom. at the beginning of the sentence, but after the interruption
of the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of
the verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. Sswep of ASAnNTAa) odx, Bray iSiwrdv
yévovtat Kpelrtoves, TovTO adTovs edppalver, GAN Bray Tav dvTaywyioTaY iTTOUS,
Tour avrovs amd (instead of totTw ebppalvovra: — avavrat), as the athletes, when
they are superior to common men, this does not elate them, but when they are inferior to
their competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated when, ete.

(b) In order to make the contrasted ideas in a sentence prominent or em-
phatic, they are often placed in the same form at the beginning of their respec-
tive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necessarily be
different. Pl. Phaedr. 233, b. roatra 6 gpws emidelxvuTas SusTUXoUYTAS
uty, &uh Adiny trois Ado wapéxet, aviapa wore? voulCew, edTuXoDYTAS be
kal T& wh Hdovis &kia wap éxelywy enalvov dvaynde tvyxdvew (instead of rap
ebtuxoivrwy dt Kal Ta ph Hdov7s kia ewalvou dvaryKder TvyxXdvelv, OY evTUXoOvYTas
dé Kal Ta wt) 5. BE. erouvely dvaryKndcer).

CHAPTER X.
§ 348. Position of Words and Sentences.

1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence
and between one sentence and another, and the connection of

:
:

| ied ae ie
~ 4 0 od wee ,
pe.) Ae:

'

b |

—

§ 348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 571

these so as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has
been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words (§ 38, 4)
which supply the place of inflection, partly by the accent and
position of the members of a sentence and of the sentences
themselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in
living discourse, and commonly agrees. with the position, only
the position needs to be treated.

Remark. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns,
prepositions, etc., has already been stated, in the sections where these are
treated. See the Index under Position.

2. There are two kinds of position: the usual or grammati-
cal, and the rhetorical or inverted. The first denotes the
logical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence,
and of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union
of these in expressing a single thought or idea; the second
makes one member of a sentence, which is specially important,
more prominent than the other members, by giving to it a posi-
tion different from the usual or grammatical order of the words.

3. The usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek
is the following : —

The subject stands first in the sentence, the predicate Jast ;
the copula eivé stands after the predicative adjective or sub-

- Stantive ; but the attributive follows its substantive; the object
is placed before the predicate ; the objectives, i. e. the qualify-
ing statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most
important one is placed immediately before the predicate, and

_the other objectives precede this, following each other in such
order as they would naturally be joined to the first objective,
the one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before
one already existing; or in other words, the broader limitation
usually precedes the narrower, the less necessary, the more
NECESSATY.

Kipos, 6 Bacthebs, KadGs améSavey. Komp wdvv rpodiuws abtge cvverrpdrev-
gay. Tats uéyas — avhp &yadtéds— 6 mais 6 wéyas — 6 dvhp 6 ayadds — 6 rais 6
Tov Kipov — 6 méAcuos 5 mpds tovs Mépoas. But the Inf. or the Acc. with the
Inf. and the Part. follow the governing word. See the examples under §§ 306,
307, 310. Of “EAAnves tovs Mépoas éevixnoay. Of “EAAnves ev Mapadau robs
Mépoas évinnoay. Oi°EAAnves tabry 7H iucpa év Mapadau rods Mépoas évixnoar.
In this way, the adverb of place and time commonly precedes the causal ob-

572 _ SYNTAX. | [§ 348.

ject (rére or rabrn TH jmépa rods TI. éviknoay), the personal object precedes
that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Acc. (tov maida Thy ypaymarichy diddoKw
—T@ wad) Td BiBAloy di5wu:), the adverb of time the adverb of place (réTe or
TavTn TH uépa ev Mapadau tods I. évicnoay). The adverb of manner, even
when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be-
fore the predicate, e. g. of “EAAnves ta’tn TH huépa év Mapadav robs Tlépoas
Kad@s éviknoay.

4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the
position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose
place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, for
example, occupies the place which the adjective would take;
and so of the others.

Pl. Phaed. 50, e. 6 Supwpds, Sswep eidXet Swakovery, clwe wepmevew.
X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. 6 5& Kipos, ev 6 cuverévyorvTo, edveto: érel 5t Kara Fv
Ta fepa adT@, cuverddrcce To’s Te THY Tlepo@y jyeudvas Kal Tols Tay Mfdwr.
"Emel 5¢ dbmod houav, cke toidde. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when
they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1.
4,7. 08 8 EXevyoy, Sri &purot TOAAOVS HSE TAHGidoavtTas diépsHer-
pay.

5. In the rhetorical or inverted! position of words, the predi- .
cate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub-
stantive to be defined, but the objective, particularly the adverb,
is placed after the predicate.

"Ayasds bavip. ‘O Bagrtred’s Kipos. ‘O rpds Tots Tlépoas méAcuos.

*"Euaxéoayto KaA@s. Th. 2, 64. pépew re xph TA Te ia avaykalws, Td
Te amd Tay ToAcuioy avipelws.

6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is
placed at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the
same sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one
is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen-
tence, e. g. Tlacdy apetav jyeudv éorw 7 cicéBera. Gener-
ally, both the first and the last place in a sentence is considered
emphatic, when words stand there, which, according to the
usual arrangement, would have a different position.

7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses
than in the case of the words whose place they take, perspi-
cuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Substan-

* This inverted position is a species of _Hyperbaton, a construction by which
the natural order of words and sentences is inverted.

§ 348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 573

tive-clauses with é71, és (that), and final substantive-clauses,
are placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they
express are to be brought out prominently.

“Ort méyas éx puxpod b SlrAurmos nvtnrat, maparelyw. —“Ive. capécrepoy SnrwSi)
waioa % Mepray modirela, pixpdy éxdvequ. The inversion of adjective-clauses
(dv eldes vdpa, obrds srw) has been already treated, § 332, 8. Inversion is
not used in adverbial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to
the common position, usually precede the principal sentence.

8. When a word in a subordinate clause is to be made more
prominent than the others, itis sometimes placed before the
connective word (relative, ete.) which introduces the clause,
e. g. taadr éorl Kai TaAAa, wept énod & of rodAXol A€yovow.

9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi-
tion, is the separation (Hyperbaton) of two words which would
be naturally connected together, as forming one thought, by
introducing one or more less important words between them.
By this separation, only one of the two words is commonly
made emphatic, though often both even, especially when both
stand in an emphatic part of the sentence.

Dem. Phil. 3, 110. roAA Gv; & tivpes "ASnvaio, Adywv yryvouévov. X. §.1,
4. olua ody ToAd by Thy KatTacKevhy mot Aaumporépay payivat (instead of word
Aaumporépay.) This separation (Hyperbaton) very often takes place even in sen-
tences as well as in case of words. This consists in placing the principal
clause, as the one less important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a
logical point of view, making it secondary to the subordinate clause. PI. Prot.

831, d. 7d yap Aeuxdy TG weAavi eorw Sry mposéoxe (instead of ~orw yap Say
Td Aev«dy, ete.). X. C. 3.11, 10. pircivy ye why ed off Sri ewicracat (instead of
ed ol Sri pidreiv, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. dsre wept uty ris év Tots “EAAnat duva-
otelas ovk old Srws ty Tis capéorepoy emideita: SvvnSeln. Dem. Phil. obra: piv
yap &pxovres od Todds xpdvos e ob . . HASOV.

10. Ideas that are alike or similar, or especially such as are
antithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by
being placed near each other.

Thus abrds abtod, etc. e. g. 7 mers abrh map adbrijs Sleny Afvera.
X. Hier. 6, 2. guvijy wey jAundras HSduevos HSouévors euol. Pl. L. 934,d.
ualvovra: moXAol toArAAods tpdwovs. Hence, &AAos &AAO, alius aliud,
&AAos HAAOS!, alius alibi, KAXos KAAOGE, alius alio, KAAOS BAAOS EY,
alius aliunde, iXXos &AAD, alius alid (sc. vid), etc., of which the English
makes two sentences, the one did this, the other that, etc.

APPENDIX A.

VERSIFICATION.

§ 349. Rhythm, Metre, Arsis and Thesis.

1. Rhythm (fv9uds) is the harmony produced by the alternation of
long and short syllables, accompanied by the recurrence of an emphasis
at intervals; when the emphasis occurs at fixed intervals, the rhythm be-
comes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure.

2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro-
nounced, is called the Arsis, and the corresponding weaker tone with
which the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former implies
an elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress (§ 29. 1.), the latter,
a depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also trans-
ferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and
hence the syllable on which the emphasis falls is called the Arsis. The
Arsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the ictus.

8. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllable of a foot; consequently
in the spondee (——) and the tribrach (v~~), the place of the Arsis can
be determined only by the kind of verse in which they are found. In
every verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the
other feet which are substituted for it. Hence, as the second syllable of
an iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable,
the spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsis on the second syllable,
thus ——; so also in anapaestic verse. But as the first syllable of the
foot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dac-
tylic verse takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus-—. Again, as a
short syllable is assumed as the wnit in measuring time, and as in a long
syllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily falls on the first of the two
units composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribrach

ee ee ee oe tn

ee

— a=
—"

’ 350.} VERSIFICATION. 575

~ would take the Arsis on the second syllable, thus ves and in trochaic

verse on the first. So where the dactyl takes the place of the spondee
with the Arsis on the last syllable, the arsis of the dactyl is on the first

short, thus —~ -; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (— -), its
Arsis is on the first short, thus “+ —.

§ 350. Metrical Feet.

1. The portions into which every verse is divided, are called feet.

The feet are composed of a certain number of syllables, either all
long, all short, or long and short together.

A short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, every short
syllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae.

The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of

syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four
syllables.

The dissyllabic feet are four :
~~ Pyrrhich! (rumv)
—— Spondee (rirrw)
~ —Iamb (rurwr)
— - Trochee (rire) .

1 DERIVATION OF NAMES OF FEET.— Pyrrhich. This was so called from
the celebrated war-dance (zuffixn), in which it was used, as being rapid and
energetic. — Jamb. From idrrw, to abuse; because Archilochus the inventor
used it in violent invectives. — Trochee. From tpéxw, to run; because of its
running, saltatory style. — Tribrach. Tpls Bpaxvs, because consisting of three
short syllables. — Spondee. So called, because it was used év tais oroydais, in
sacred rites, from its slow, solemn sound. — Dactyl. "Ad rod daxrdAov; because
it is, like the finger, composed of one long joint and two short ones. — Ana-
paest. From évamalw, to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of
the Dactyl. — Amphibrach. ’Aud Bpaxds; because the short syllables are on
each side of the long one, (auf) — Cretic. Because much used by the Cretuns.
— Bacchius. Used in the Dithyrambic Games in honor of Bacchus. — Antibac-
chius. The converse (ayr{) of the former.— Proceleusmatic. From xéAevoua, the

- boatswain’s call or command; because rapidly uttered.— Pdeons. Because

used in the Paeonic Hymns. — Choriamb. Trochee or Choree + Iamb. — An-
tispastus. "Avriardw, to draw to the opposite side; because, being converse of
the former, it ap to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. —
Tonicus a majore, Lonicus a minore. Feet much in use with the Ionians ; a majore,
when beginning with the long syllables; a minore, when beginning with the
short ones. — Epitrite. Most probably from émi and rp?ros ; because, in addition

- to (éi) the 3d syllable, it has a short one over.— The Diiamb is an Iambie

syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the first place. — The Ditrochee is a Trochaic
syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the second place.

ee eee

ee he ee ee) ee

576 VERSIFICATION. {§ 350.

The trisyllabic are eight :
» » » Tribrach (éruzov)
—— —Molossus (rirrwpa)
» — Anapaest (rervdiis)
—~~» Dactyl (rirrere)
» —» Amphibrach (érvrrov)
~—*— Cretic (rirropon)
—— Bacchius (tumjrw)
— — » Palimbacchius ee
The tetrasyllabic are sixteen :
v » ~ ~Proceleusmatie (ériero)
—--—— Dispondee (rvdJeujrnv)
~ —» — Diiamb (érurrdpuyv) ‘
—~— ~ Ditrochee (rurrérwoar)
» —— » Antispast (érv¢Inrov)
—~ » —Choriamb (rurropévov)
» ~——TIonicus a minori (érerdppny)
——~ ~Jonicus a majori (rupaineda)
—» » first Paeon (rurrdpevos)
~ —~ ~second Paeon (érvmrere)
» vy —~ third Paeon (éréruyo)
» v »— fourth Paeon (érumdunv)
» —~—— first Epitrite (érupdc Inv)
—» —~second Epitrite (® rurotca)
——~-—third Epitrite (rupIycopar)
---~ fourth Epitrite (rupIefqoav)
2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet; com-
pound, by combining the simple feet with each other.

/

:
Simple feet consist of but one Arsis, and one Thesis, e. g. vv, vv, —

4 , ,
aut ted -%, Pike 4 sh ete.

Compound feet consist of two Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis —
_ and Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e. g,

/ \
, , \ , A , ‘
WSF RN oe ot a OF ie See,

- Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Arsis

and a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. —», —vy,»—, |

. Py 4
~~. Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are consid-
ered as the fundamental feet of all rhythm. ‘The other feet may be q

a ee

§ 351.] VERSIFICATION. 577

combined with these by resolving a long into two short syllables, or by
contracting two short into one long syllable.

4. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by single
feet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to make
an independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Jambic
dimeter, and six an Jambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary,
is measured by the single feet; six dactyls, therefore, form an hexameter,
and five a pentameter.

§ 351. Caesura.

Caesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the ending of a word, of syl-
lables metrically connected, — or the cutting of a metre by the ending
of a word, before the metre is completed.

Remark 1. The design of the Caesura is to give variety and harmony to
the verse; for if each metre or foot terminated with the end of a word, there
would be only a constantly recurring monotony. But the Caesura, by pre-
venting a uniform coincidence between the ending of the metre or foot, and the
ending of a word, promotes the variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It
is not inconsistent, however, with the rhythm of the verse that the ending of
the foot and the word should sometimes coincide; this coincidence is called
metrical Diaeresis. The principal Diaereses are after the first, second, third,
and fourth foot.

Homnov: | abrap 6 | rotow agelrero | vdorimor | Fuap.

There are three kinds of Caesura ;

1. Caesura of the foot.

2. Caesura of the rhythm.

3. Caesura of the verse.

(1) Caesura of the foot is where the word ends before a foot is com-
pleted.

Nexy | cas eé | Axe orvye | piv éué | oixad’ | dyer Dus.

In this line there is a Caesura of the foot after each of the syllables cas,
det, pny, and xad. Only two cases of this Caesura can occur in a dac-
tyl; for the word either ends after the Arsis, —|-~, and forms the mas-
culine Caesura, or in the Thesis, —~ | v, and forms the feminine or trochaic
Caesura. Thus the Caesuras after oas, Aer and pyv are masculine, that
after oixad’ is feminine or trochaic.

(2) The Caesura of the rhythm is where the Arsis falls on the last
syllable of a word, and thus separates the Arsis from the Thesis. In the
line above quoted, the Caesura of the rhythm occurs after the syllables

cas, Ae. and pyyv, the Arsis falling on each of these and being separated _

49

578 VERSIFICATION. [$ 352.

from the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take place
only in such feet as have the Arsis on the first syllable.

(3) The Caesura of the verse is a pause introduced to render the re-
citation more easy. This is also called the Caesural pause, and divides
the verse into two parts. :

In several kinds of verse this Caesura has a fixed place; this is the
case in the Trochaic, Jambic, and Anapaestic tetrameter, which have their
natural Caesura at the end of the fourth foot. See under these verses
below. Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, the
place of which is not fixed. In Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura

of the verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, —

Kd\Aav re Ladény, || Tevédoud re the avaoceis,
or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus,
Kal rére 6 Jdponee, || kal yvda pavris dyvpwv.
Rem. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together; for example,

after the syllable mv of (aSény, there is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm,
and of the verse.

§ 352. Different kinds of Verse.

1. A verse is often named from its predominant foot. ‘Thus Dactylic
verse is so called, because the dactyl is the predominant foot, and Jambic
verse, because the iamb is the predominant foot; so Trochaic, Anapaestic,
etc. Verses are also named from their inventors, as the Sapphic, from
Sappho, Alcaic, from Alcaeus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi-
tion in which they are used, as the Heroic, used in describing the
achievements of heroes, also from the number of measures, as monometer,
dimeter, trimeter, hexameter, etc.

2. A verse is called permis when it has its full number of feet or
syllables, as trimeter iambics,» -—~—|~—-~-|v—~—. A verse is called
catalectic, when one or two als are wanting to complete the verse,
as the trimeter,~—~—|~—»—|v—+. In dactylic verse, if the last foot
wants one syllable, the verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g.
—--v-~~-~; if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g.
—vv—-+-+—. Verses in which the last dipody (a pair of feet) wants an
entire foot, are called brachycatalectic, e. g.v-~—|~-~—|v—. Verses
which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercata-
lectic, e. g.v-v—|v-v—|-~—~+—

Remark. When the regular rhythm of a verse is preceded by an unem-

rf
A
——

$$ 353—355.] VERSIFICATION, 579

pale introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upward or
beat ; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot,
they are called a Base. The anacrusis and base belong to lyric verse.

§ 353. View of the different kinds of Verse.

The most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti-
tion of the same foot. Of these the most frequent are the Dactylic, Iam-
bic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic.

§ 354. Dactylic Verse.

The fundamental foot in this verse is the dactyl, the place of which
may be supplied by a spondee.

§ 355. Hexameter.

The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and
is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. :

The Hexameter consists of six feet; the fundamental foot is the dac-
tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactyl with a dis-
syllabic catalectus. The sixth foot is usually called a spondee; but when
the last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee.

, , , , , a
ae YM ee YY ev eve,

In each of the first four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac-
tyl. The fifth foot is regularly a dactyl; but sometimes it is a spondee,
and the line is then called a spondaic line, as

Od yap éy Tpdwy ever’ HAvIov aixpnrdwv.
-~+|-=|-~+<|- ++ [--l--

The principal Caesura in Hexameter verse occurs after the Arsis or in
the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a
Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the
Hephthemim. This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by
one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim. The Caesura oc-
curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from
its use in pastoral poetry

"AAN 6 pev Aidioras || werexiade rye edvras

“Avépa pot vere, Movoa, || xodvrporov bs pada Tod,
*H Alas || 7) “Tdopeveds || 7) Stos "Odvaceds

“Hyepovey, || dares of apnv || érapourw dydivar
Mupvalew rapa vyvol xopwricw, || ov of érera,,

580 VERSIFICATION. [§§ 356, 357.

The beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted by varying the feet by
an interchange of dactyls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif-
ferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that
the Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines.

§ 356. Pentameter.

This verse is divided into two parts, each of which consists of two
dactyls and a catalectic syllable, thus,

Myde Ivpage Kédev' || odk eSedovr’ i€var.

Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the first half, but not in
the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more
freely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees.
The long syllable at the end of the second half can be short. The
Caesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be
a division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When
the word, however, has more than two syllables, Elision may take place.

This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex-
ameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately.
A poem composed of these two measures is called Llegiac, being at first
devoted to plaintive melodies. 7

“Aptt pe yevdpevov Cwas Bpedos % pTare Aaipwv Hexam.

Ovx ot8 €ir &@ asdiov || airios, cire KaKOV, Pentam.
‘Ar)ijpor’ “Au a, Ti pe vipov nptacas apyvw; Hexam.
Té oredvdets; 08 cou || ravres dpedopeta ; Pentam.

§ 357. Dactylic Tetrameter.

The dactylic tetrameter catelectic on one syllable consists of three feet

and a syllable.
| TloAAa Beery OvopreBopreva.

a. we | — v|— —_ vv | -,
The dactylic tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists of three feet
and two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee.
Berens xe KQLKOV oikad ayer Sau.
“| vef tee] = =.
The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet; instead of a
dactyl, in the last a cretic is admissible.

§ 358—361.] VERSIFICATION. 681
"Ya dduvas dans, tarve & enews

awe ve — _

Méo’, dye Kad\orra Se arep Aus.

au v|—ve |—+v|—+~.

§ 358. Dactylic Trimeter.

‘the dactylic trimeter catalectic on one syllable consists of two feet

and a syllable.
"Evdev defopevov.
a wey |- -_— “Yv | “,
The dactylic trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet
and two syllables, which may form either a spondee or trochee.

Evpéi Kiara TovTy.

af uw, vv |= -.

§ 359. Dactylic Dimeter.

The dactylic dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl
and a spondee or trochee.

Pdcpara orpovdav
Totod' popwvov.

, ,
-_- vv -_- %

“The dactylic acatalectic dimeter consists of two dactyls, and usually
stands in connection with tetrameters.
: Ous ir retyect.

-vv|—-- “.

§ 360. Trochaic, lambic and Anapaestic Verse.

It has been already observed (§ 350, 4.) that Trochaic, Iambic, and
Anapaestic verse is measured by dipodies, i. e. by pairs of feet. Hence
verses of two feet, are called monometer, of four, dimeter, of six, trime-
ter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these according to the
number of feet, and not by dipodies. Thus a verse of four feet was
called quaternius, of six, senarius, of eight, octonarius.

§ 361. Trochaic Verse.

The Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllable
of each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may
49*

582 VERSIFICATION. [$$ 362, 363.

be a spondee. Therefore, a spondee is admissible in every even place
(2,4, 6,8). The Arsis or long syllable of every foot can be resolved
into two short ones, and hence, a ¢ribrach can stand in every place; a
dactyl and anapaest can stand in the even places, instead of the spondee.
A dactyl is not admitted, however, except in a proper name, and then
may stand in all the places but the fourth and seventh.

A trochaic’ tetrameter acatalectic would then present the following
scheme :

, He ve 7. , 7 4
Ry © | Pere w -_ —_ ¥ —_ _ —_ ks ae
, 7 7 ,
-_ — _ — — — —
‘ ‘ / 4 / / ‘
vuyv vvy vvv vuvyw vvw wvyv vvwv vwe
, ? “4 ,
vv —_— “ —_— Vv —_ Vv
/ ‘ / /
vv vv oe 4 VY oe vm,

Remark. Trochaic verse has a rapid saltatory metre, and is used especially
in the choral parts of Comic Poetry, when the Poet wishes to infuse more than
ordinary wit and spirit into the colloquy, to arrest the spectator’s attention and
vary the grave monotony of the Iambic.'

§ 362. Tvrochaic Monometer.

The trochaic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. It is gener-
ally found in systems of trochaic trimeters.

SvPapicew,
nay age

$363. Trochaic Dimeter.

The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet.
Kodxidos TE yas evolkol.

,
wav ate Uitee Ve cat

The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable.
It is usually found among acatalectic dimeters.
Kai xvJns dpiros, ot yas (acatalectic).
"Eoxarov torov audit Ma- (catalectic).

Q@Tiv éyovot Aiuvav
, x e ¥

— v —_— — = ~6

7

Pr
ects:
,

vw

1 See Manual of Greek Prosody, by L. P. Mercier.

4§ 364, 365.] VERSIFICATION. 583

§ 364. Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic.

The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable
(two dimeters, the second catalectic). Its Caesura is at the end of the

second dipody, and is often omitted by comedians, but rarely ever by
tragedians.
- Td was Exov, diwxe || kal rov dvdpa ruvIdvov
“Ac tues Typodpev das || Hy yap i THs, ie

ov |
. |
—_v-ii— ~

Remark. The Trochaic tetrameter acatalectic, which consists of two tro-
chaic dimeters acatalectic, and the trochaic pentameter, which consists of nine
feet and a syllable, are very rarely used by the Greek poets.

Et tis dvdpav edruxhoas } civ ebddtois &ESACS,
Ziv Seg ydp Tau putevsels SABos avSphrois: wappoverepos.

-_ —_ ss

,

-_-

,

,
_-

§365..Iambic Verse.

The fundamental foot in this verse is the iamb. Instead of the first
iamb, every dipody may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admis-
sible in the odd places (1, 3, 5, 7).

Again, as the long syllable of every iamb may be resolved into two
short syllables, a tribrath may stand in every place, except the last; and
as the last syllable is common, a pyrrhic is admissible. In the odd places
a dactyl or anapaest may stand instead of a spondee.

Hence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the following
scheme :

° , , , , ,
—— "_— _— " - — _—

»
»
»
» 7 a»

I
|
I
I
!
l
+

‘ /
_vv _—~ vv
¢ 7 ,
ve oe SF ae vw

vier &

!
cs
c
ea Crea tie van rade ; oth ae c Pkg ‘en me M

Remark 1. The dactyl, however, is most froasey in the first place ; it occurs

in the third place only when the first syllable of the foot is followed by the ra
penthemimeral Caesura, or when the word is a monosyllable. The dactyloc-
curs in the fifth place only in Comedy, where it is admitted in all the uneven
places. : “S

Rem. 2. The anapaest is admitted only in the first foot,except in Comedy =

and in proper names ; in these cases it is admissible in all the feet except the
last. The anapaest in the first foot must be included in one word, except in
case of the article or preposition and its Case. The anapaest in propernames
must not be divided between two words.

Boyt Tae ee eet
rs ee

ta)
_— c

7
=

af 4 Pas

584 VERSIFICATION. [§§ 366—368.

Rem. 8. The Iambic is the opposite of the Trochaic, being a steady, grave,
but easy metre, and was applied to the stage as best adapted to the language
of ordinary life.

§ 366. ITambic Monometer.

Iambie monometer consists of two feet. Its use is very rare, and it
occurs mostly in systems of dimeters,
Kai Tots KoAots

on em | Ve,

§ 367. Lambie Dimeter.

Tambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet.
“Oder Sopour Tois €uors

va-[ve iljv- |v.
Iambic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable.

@dAw AEyew “Arpeibas,
Xaiporre pea es mpv

baad a v a
,
=

*

This verse is commonly found in systems of acatalectic dimeters.

,

- Oe ee

§368. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic, commonly called
Senartus.

This is the most noted of the Iambic verses. It consists of six feet.

*Q réxva, Kadpuov rod radar véa tpopy,
Anrnpiows KAddourw eeorreppevor 3
“AMuv dxovew, abros 8 ehypdvda

ve

?

7,
OS am v

l4

,
v —

’
aN Bet fie

The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot; they ad-
mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot
except the last.

Mevérws “EXévnv 6 be KAvraipnotpas Aéxos,
Ilor apav TE wyyat, TOVTiwV TE Kyparov

Oix on dANws GAN € aisle ted Dpvyav

vow

ae es 23 ||

1 See Mercier.

?

7
- —

,
’v —_
7
’ —

,

7
-—
/
vv

ei
—— vv
, bd
Te bai aoe
, ,
Miten th aoe

vist

$$ 369, 370.] VERSIFICATION. 585

The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim).
This Caesura, however, is often neglected, others being used, or some-

times, none.
"ExIpav adwpa || dpa Kot« évjoima.
The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe-
mim).
"Exel xarijp otros ods, || bv Ipnvets dei.
The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent.

§ 369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic.

The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con-
sists of seven feet anda syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of
the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the
same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot
only in case of a Peper name.

,
| as Vv | _— ‘_— -_— -_— v

vevilevse/ uve vvuvivweve
j

; 1
ve j—vy —_vYV

, , | ae | ri , , ,
Ee a,

OM am, 0 Vm [VM ae | VM oe
if

|

Ov pyc xpivae tobs véous || doxeiv~ eyo 8¢ hpi,

eat cook jv |-+|~ 4 |) —-|-4 Pe s]~.

The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poets.

§ 370. Anapaestic Verse.

1. The anapaest is the predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting
the two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for
the anapaest. Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be
resolved into two short syllables, and hence a dactyl take the place of a
spondee. ;

2. In Anapaestic verse the most usual system is the dimeter, consist-
ing of a greater or less number of perfect dipodies, followed by a
pair of dipodies, the second of which is catalectic. This catalectic dime-
ter, consisting of three feet and a syllable, is called paroemiac (apo
piac) from its use in proyerbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al-
ways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable; i. e.
if the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position

586 VERSIFICATION. [$$ 371—373.

with respect to the next line, the scanning being continuous, and an an-
apaestic series being constructed as if there were but one verse. The
following is the scheme for an anapaestic tetrameter catalectic.

, ? , ? , Sa ,
vw one vv WM ae |e YY, cee Wa eee WS ed] MN ee oa
7 , , , , | ’

_—— —_— _—_—— _ -_-— apie ——< —e

‘ ‘ v7 ‘ / |
ine BOE A aay ofa eee ee ey Te -—vYV | ar

Remark. An anapaest does not follow a dactyl in the same dipody; gen-
erally a dactyl does not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipody.
The third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest ; but a spondee is some-
times found. ‘The dactyl does not occur in the sixth and seventh feet. The
Anapaestic metre was the favorite one for martial music.

§ 371. Anapaestic Monometer Acatalectic.

The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet.
Ovydrnp, os xpi,

v VY oo —_—_ —_—

§372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic.

The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The legiti-
mate Caesura occurs after the second Arsis, at the end of the second foot.
But the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the
Arsis.

*AmoXels p', drroXeis. || ob KarapvSers
IIpooéBy pavia. || ris 6 rndnoas,
IIrepi-ywv éperpoior || éperrouévy.

,
w is ot ee -_— vv — =
7 , ,
vv vv vv re
_ _
7 , , ,
wv wv WD ieee EE eet
_

§373. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic.

The anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) consists of three feet

and a syllable, and has no Caesura, the Caesura not being used in the
paroemaic.
EiAero xwpas ehopeverv
Aw tov odv rpwxrov dpAjoet.
= 30 ,

4 ,

ww Y ae anal -_

7
VS am

,
VM me os

§ 374.] ABBREVIATI NIV ERSIT'4 587

§ 374. Anapaestic Tetrame

J > ———~S

The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla-
ble, being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalectic ( paroemiuc)
to the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also called Aris-
tophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by him.
The spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system,
is not admissible in the tetrameter.

The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely,
after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also
an incisure at the end of the second foot.

Tlpocpet tis det trav dpvidwy || pavtevopevy Tept Tod 70d;
las & dyteay Sécove" abrois. || oderav rapa totor Jeoiow ;
Tay dpyupiwv _ oUToL yap ica. || A€yover d€ tou Tad wavTes.

,

, , ,

, , ,

,

Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by
the Greek poets.

-~_v~

, , , ,
vy Vv ae | VM oe VV as | oo

APPENDIX B.

ABBREVIATIONS.

1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read some of the
earlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, containing old
forms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words
or parts of words, is subjoined.

2. No. L. contains certain single letters or elements, which are of con-
stant occurrence in the compound characters, and are found nowhere else.
‘No. II. contains characters, the elements of which would not at once be
obvious, and for this reason alone they are not placed alphabetically in
columns IJI—VI. Indeed, the characters in Nos. I. and II. might all
have been arranged alphabetically in columns HI—VI. The characters
in columns III—VI. are arranged alphabetically; the initial letter of
these characters, by the aid of those in No. I, will be readily known.

1 See Robinson’s Buttmann, p. 466.

588 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.

I.
wore Oo Bep eye pee
BPO ee ee Pe :

II.
Fee Cj waks ses

ov yao yap a et ed nv ov to ¥ dé xal tu

ITT. IV. Vv. Vi.
An ate iu Maeh ey PR meter Coe raven
aA ow éy MP HO ~ ™Hy .
Oy ald OP needy = I HOY ™s
eo ™» cu .
“a = AO énev - aie ™mSs
Be OE os leg Beas ares ie
aG' auto > ar) CAR OUTOS as |

-)
s
S
t
Ad ry i énl @eanaga
55 yao a en or ba: gay

9p 72 op 20 wr mel Coy TOUS
&
(2)

% yer & aa % no 70
yu vev x ve C9 eo TQO
op vee eet Ca wa
pe xES xepadacov oe
ys yiveta Piz ssi ae ; TOV
pod yo Pz) ue ed of t oe a TOV
et Ve t he pev G shat Yy ve
Me ve o M bev Cr On wu uv
dak ph sv or 60 ar in
Neg duce 5 [evos ¥ Tat n2 0
Cs Ove pe asic e tas ae

J. INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

N. B. The figures refer to sections. R. is used for remark.

Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588.

Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1.

Absolute, Case Absolute, see Cases.

Abrogation of clauses by ahha 322, 6.

Abstracts 39, in Pl. 243, 3, (3).

Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10,
4, 5.

Acatalectic verse 352, 2.

Accentuation 29; change and re-
moval of the accent by Inflec.,
Compos. and Contract. 30; in
connected discourse (Grave in-
stead of the Acute), in Crasis,
Elision, Anastrophe 31. Accent.
of first Dec. 45 ; second Dee. 49 ;
third Dec. 65; adjectives and
participles 75 ; ‘words ending in
Us, sia, U 76, Il; wo, wy 78. R.
7, and 29, R. 5; wy, ov 78, R. 9,
and 65, 53 a, e¢ 78, R. 11; verb
118.

Accusative 276 sq.; local relation,
limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro-
duced with a verb of the same
stem or one of a cognate signifi-
cation (uayny udyeo Fos; ; Cnv Biov)
278, 1 and 2; with verbs denot-
ing to shine, pk flow, ete. 278, 3;
object, design 278, 4; manner
278, R. 3 ; of the object on which
the action is performed or the

50

suffering object 279; with verbs
signifying to profit, to hurt, ete.
279, 1; of doing good or evil to

any one, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, ©

to wait for, ete. 279, 3; to turn
back, flee from, ete. 279, R. 3; to
conceal, to be concealed, to swear,
and with puvey, Asinew 279, 4 ;
with d:i, yon 279, R. 4; Baivey,
misiv, etc., which denote motion,
etc., with verbs of sacrificing or
dancing in honor of any one 279,
R. 5; denoting an affection of
the mind 279, 5; of space, time,
quantity 279, R. 8; (xahos to
Cumata, ahyst thy cuphtaie) 279,
7; double accusative : pan
gidiay oz, etc. 280, 1; xade,
noxe Tod, héyo oe 280, 2; with
verbs of beseeching, asking, teach-
ing, reminding, dividing, depriv-
ing, concealing, clothing and un-
clothing, surrounding, etc. 280,
3; with verbs of appointing,
choosing, educating, naming, ete.
280, 4; in the oyjua zat ‘lor
%. ubpoe 266, R. 4; Acc. in
adverbial expressions, e. g. ua
xQOY xhaisiv, eye gaige 278,
R. 1; yaou, Swgsay, TouTO,
ikerafore, 278, R. 2; rovroy tov

Minjt

>

* + r "
es aed) Seeing , ™
ee ee ae re ee ee ee

590 INDEX OF
toednov, Sixny, ouow 278, R. 3;
thy taylotyy ; aoziy, etc; Toda,
saepe, ddiyor, ete. 279, R. 8;
EVyos, wos, TaAAa, etc. 279, R.
10; with Pass. verbs 281; with
verbal Adjectives in téog 284,
R. 7.

Accusative with Inf. 8307; instead of
Nom. with Inf. 307, R. 4 ; instead
of Gen. or Dat. with Inf. 307, R.
2; as a subject after Asyetau, do-
xet, etc. 807, R. 5; with the Art.
see Inf.; with exclamations 308,
R. 2; in the subordinate clauses
of the oratio obliqua 345, 6.

Accusative with the Part. 310, 2;
absolute 312, 5; with w¢ 312, 6;
Ace. of Part. instead of another
Case 313, 1.

Active verbs 102, 248, 249. Comp.
Transitive ; with the meaning fo
cause to do 249, R. 3.

Acute accent 29, 4 (a).

Addition of consonants 24.

Adjective (and Part.) 74 sq.; Dial.
215; Accent. 75; of three end-
ings 76, 77; of two endings 78,
79; of one ending 80; Com-
parison of 81; used as a Subs.
263,a; Attributive 264 ; as Subs.
with the Gen. (7 xoddy tis yijs
instead of to modu th¢ vis) 264,
R. 5; instead of the Adv. 264, 3.

_ Adjectives Verbal, see Verbal Ad-
jectives.

Adjectives Numeral 96, 2.

Adjective Substantive Clause 331,
R. 4.

Adjective pronoun used as a Subs.
263, a.

Adjective clauses 331 ; several con-
nected together 334, 1; inter-
changed with other subordinate
clauses 334, 2.

Adverb 100; formation 101; com-
parison 85; expressed by an ad-
jective 264, 3; as expressing an

SUBJECTS.

objective relation 314 sq.; used
as adjectives 262, d; as substan-
tives (of »ty) 263, c; in a preg-
nant sense (0701 yij¢ éouer, etc.)
300, R. 7; (0 éxeiPev nddeuos
defgo iS instead of o éxst 1.)
300 R. 8; adverbs of place at-
tracted 332, R. 7; inverse at-
traction of Adv. of place 332
R. 13.

Adverbial correlatives 94, 3.

Adverbial clauses 335 sq.; of place
336; time 337; cause 338; con-
dition 339; concession 840, 7;
consequence or effect 341; way -
and manner 342; quantity with
00, ogor 3438.

Adversative codrdinate clauses ex-
pressed by dé, addu, etc. 322;
negative adversative codrdinate
clauses 821, 2.

Agreement 240 sq.; of the Attrib.
Adj. 264, 1; of the Kel. Pron.
in Gend. and Numb. 382; in
Case 332, 6.

Alphabet, history of, 2.

Anacoluthon 347, 5; in the Part.
construction 313, 1, (a).

Anacrusis 352. R.

Anapaestic dimeter acatalectic 372.

Anapaestic dimeter catalectic 373.

Anapaestic monometer acatalectic
371. $

Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic
374.

Anapaestic verse 370.

Anastrophe 31, IV.

Anomalous substantives third Dec.
67 sq.; Dial. 214; verbs 157 sq.

Answer YES or NO 344, 7.

Aorist 108; Aor. Pass. with o 131;
first Aor. Act. without o 154, 7;
second Aor. with o 154, 8; sec-
ond Aor. Act. and Mid. accord-
ing to analogy of verbs in ws 191
sq-; Aor. of some verbs with
both a Mid. and Pass. from 197,

INDEX OF

R. 1; Aor. of some Mid. verbs,
whose Fut. has a Pass. from 197,
Rh. 3; second Aor. Act. with In-
trans. meaning and first Aor. Act.
with Trans. meaning 141, 4.—
Syntax 256; iterative meaning
256, 4, (b) ; in comparisons 256,
4, (c); instead of the Pres. 256,
4, (d); Aor. with ti ovy ov
256, 4, (e); ; instead of the Fut.

256, 4, (f); to denote-the com- .

ing into a condition 256, 4 (g) ;
signification of the Aor. Subj.,
Opt., Imp., Inf. and Part. 257.

Aorist, first and second Mid. always
reflexive (or Intrans.) 251, 3;
Aor. Subj. in subordinate clauses
instead of the Fut. Perf. as used
in Lat. 255, R. 9.

Aphaeresis 14, 5.

Apodosis 339, 1.

Apocope 207, 7.

Aposiopésis 340, 2, (b).

Apostrophe 13, R. 1.

Apposition 266 ; in Gen. with Poss.

Pron. (éuog tod adFiiov Bios) 266,
2; Distrib. or Partitive apposi-
tion 266, 3.

Arsis and "Thesis 349, a place of
349, 3.

Article 91; 244 sq.; Sevacciet and rel-
ative O47 ; ; as proper article 244 ;
with adenine nouns 244, peeps
with abstracts, nouns of material,
proper names 244, 6 and 7 ; with
the Adjective and Part. used as
substantives 244, 8,9; with ad-
verbs of time and place, used as
adjectives 244, 10; with pro-
nouns and numerals 246; (toe
Tig MOAEws, ob TEL TLV, of yoy
&vFowmnor) 244, 10. 263; with
every word or part of speech
244,11; position 245 ; with mao,
Ohog 246, 5; with catdindl num-
bers 246, 9.

Article omitted with common nouns

SUBJECTS. 591
244, R. 3; with abstracts 244, R.4;
with proper names 244,7; with Adj.
and participles 244, R.8; with
demonstrative pronouns 246, R.1.

Article with the subject and predi-
cate 244, R. 1.

Article in apposition 244, R. 6.

Article repeated 245, 2.

Article in place of the Poss. pro-
noun (0 natrg instead , of éuos
m.) 244, 4.

Asper, see Spiritus.

Aspirate before another aspirate
changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3.

Aspirates 5, (a).

Asyndeton 325.

Altonics 32.

Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup.
see Redup.

Attraction of Gend. 240, 3; Numb.
241, 6; with Prep. and Adv. 300,
4, comp. 300, 3; with the Inf. 307,
4. 808, 2; with were, 341, 3; with
the Part. 310, 2; of Modes 327”;
of the relative 332, 6; of oioc,
daos, HAixoc, 832, 7; inverted
attraction 332, R. 12; with otdsis
octig ov; with adverbs of place
332, R. 13; attraction of the
relative in position 332, 8; at-
traction of the relative in a
clause subordinate to the adjec-
tive clause 332, 9; attraction of
the Case in comparative sen-
tences introduced by os, acmeg,
wcte 342, R. 3., comp. 344, R. 7.

-and 324, R. 2.

Attribute 239, 2.

Aittributive relation of sentences
262, sq.

Augment, 108, 3; 119 sq. and 219;
in compounds 125 and 215, sq.

Blending of two or more interroga-
tive sentences into one (1i¢ tivog
aitvoc éyéveto) 344, R. 7.

Brachylogy 346, 2.

Nw

592

Barytones 29, R. 7, (f).
Bucolic Caesura 355. ~

Caesura 351.

Cardinals 96, sq.

Cases 41; Synt.. 268, sq.; Case
Absolute: Gen. Abs. 312, 3;
Acc. Abs. 312, 5.

Catalectic verse 352, 2.

Characteristic of the verb 108, 5;
of the tenses 110; pure and im-
pure 142, 2; of verbs in ww 170.

Circumflex accent 29, 4.

Classes of verbs 102. 248.

Clauses, principal and subordinate
326 ; substantive clauses 328 sq.;
adjective clauses 331; adverbial
clause 335.

Comparatio compendiaria 323, R. 6.

Comparison of adjectives 81 sq.;
Dialects 216; of substantives 84,
R. 4. 216, R. 2; of adverbs 85.

Comparative degree 239; strength-
ened and more definitely stated
239; use of 4 and of the Gen.
with the comparative 323, 2 sq.

Comparative without a second mem-
ber of the comparison 323, R. 7.;
apparently used instead of the
positive 323, R. 7.

Comparative 3 and the compar.
Gen. 323 sq. ; compendious com-
parison 323, R. 6.

Comparative subordinate
342, 343.

Composition of words 236.

Compound words 236 sq.

Concessive clauses 340, 7.

Concretes 39.

Conditional sentences, see si in the
Greek Index.

Conjugation 107 sq.; in w 115 sq. ;
in ws 168 sq., in the Dialects:
in w 219, im po 224.

Conjunctions 199, 319.

Consequence, clauses denoting, with
Hou, ov, Toivur, etc. 323, 3.

clauses

INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

Consonants 3,2; division 5; movas
ble at the end of a word 15; chan-
ges 17 sq.; metathesis 22 ; doub-
ling 23 ; strengthening of and ad-
dition 24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ; omis-
sion 25; final consonant of a
pure Greek word 25, 5; inter-
change of consonants in the dia-
lects 202—204; changes of in
the dialects, 208.

Coérdinate attributive adjectives
264, 2.

Coérdinate sentences 319 sq.; cop-
ulat. codrdinate sentences (1é—
wot) 821, 1, a; negative (ovts,
008) 321, 2; (ov ucvov—adla xal,
etc.) 321, 3. adversative codrdi-
nate, sentences, (uéy—dé) 322, 1
—5; (adda) 322, 6; disjunctive
(j—#j, etc.) 8235 reason, cause
(yao) 824, 2; consequence or
inference (tu, tolyuy) 324, 3.

Copula sivar 238, R. 6.

Copulative coordinate sentences 321.

Corénis 10, R. 1.

Correlative pronouns and adverbs 94.
Crasis 10 sq.; in the Dialects 206 ;
in relation to the accent 31, I.

Customary, wont, 256, 4 (b).

Dative 282 sq.

Dative local (where ?) . 283,13; («#)
aUTOLS TOIg inmoig 288, 2. (8)
oTeaT@, ot0l@, mhjte, vuvol,
etc. 285, R. 2; of time (when ?)
toity %ueo¢; of “the condition
under which anything happens,
283, 3. :

Dative as a personal object 284 ; in
a local relation (whither) with
verbs of motion (avéyey yeious
oveare) 284, R. 1; Dat. of com-
munion 284,3; with verbs ex-
pressing mutual intercourse, as-
sociating with, participation 284,

8, (1); with verbs of contend-

ing, approaching, yielding ; with

Se

)
|

i. ae

INDEX OF

the adjectives and adverbs, 2A7-
aiog, évurtios, méhug (éyyvs) ete.
284, 3, (2); with verbs of com-
manding, entreating, counselling,
inciting, following, serving, obey-
ing, accompanying, trusting, with
the adjectives and adverbs, ax0-
hovdos, diadoyog, éfijg, ete. 284,
3, (3) ; with expressions of like-
ness and unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ;
with expressions denoting to be
becoming, suitable, pleasing 284,
3, (5); of agreeing with, blam-
ing, reproaching, being angry
with, envying 284, 3, (6); of
helping, averting and being use-
ful 284, 3, (7); with all verbs
and adjectives when the action
takes place for the honor, advan-
tage or disadvantage, etc. of a
person (Dativus commodi et in-
commodi) 284, 3, R. 4; with
verbs of observing, finding, meet-
ing with something in a person
284, 3, (8); Dat. of possession
with sivas and yiyveoPou 284, 3,
(9); instead of Lat. Dat. (ali-
quid mihi est honori) 284, 3, (9);
when an action takes place in
reference to a person 284, 3,
(10) ; ethical Dat. 284, 3, (10),
(d); with Pass. verbs 284, 3,
(11); with verbal adjectives in
Tog and téo¢ instead of t206 with
the Gen. 284, 3, (12).

Dative of the thing, or’ instrumental
Dat. 285; of the ground or rea-
son with verbs denoting the state
of the feelings 285, 1, (1); of
the means and instrument with
zojotor and vouiZw 285, 1,
(2); manner, material, standard,
rule and measure 285, 1, (3).

Dative with the Inf. 307, 2, (b).

Dative with the Part. 310, 2.

Dative of participle instead of anoth-
er Case 313, 1, (a).

SUBJECTS. 593

Declension of the substantive 41, 3;
first Dec. 42—44 ; quantity and
accent 45; Dialects 211; second
Dec. 46—48 ; accent 49; gen-
der 50; Dialects 212; third Dee.
51—69 ; quantity 64; accent 65;
gender 66 ; Dialects 213 ; anoma-
lous nouns 67 sq. 214; defective
nouns 69. 214, R. 2.

Declension of adjectives and partici-
ples 74—79, see adjectives.

Declension of pronouns 87 sq.

Declension of numerals 99, 5.

Defectives of the third Dec. 69, 73,
2, 214, R. 2.

Demonstrative pronouns, see Pro-
nouns.

Denominative verbs 232, 1.

Deponents 102, 3; Passive Depo-
nents 197, Syn. 252.

Derivation of words 232 sq., of ten-
ses 128.

Derivatives 231, 2, 4, (b).

Desiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3.

Diaeresis 4, R. 6; in the Dialects
205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R.

Dialects page 13; 202 sq.

Diastole 37, 2.

Digamma 5, 2, (a); 25, 2; 200.

Dimeter 360.

Diminutives 233, 2, (c).

Dipody 350, 4.

Diphthongs 4, 3.

Disjunctive codrdinate sentences
323.

Distributive apposition 266, 3.

Division of syllables 36.

Double consonants 5, 4.

Doubling of consonants 208, 4.

Dual number 41; 106; with a PL.
verb 241, 5; interchanged with
the Pl. 241, R. 8; Dual verb
with a Pl. Subj. 241, R. 9; Dual
of the Fem. with the Mase. (rov-
To ta Téyva) 241, R. 10, (b).

Elision 18 sq.; in the Dialects 206,
0*

594 INDEX OF
5; elision in respect to the ac-
cent 31, III.

Ellipsis 346, 1; of the subject and
especially of the Subs. 238, 5;
of the copula sive. 238, R. 6
and 7; of the Subs. to which
the attribute belongs 263 ; of &»
260, R. 3. 6, 7; of the Protasis
and Apodosis 340.

Emphasis in sentences 321, 3.

Enclitics 33 sq.; accented 35.

Enhansive sentences expressed by
nol, OU povor, alu xaé 321, 8.

Epicenes 40, R. 5.

Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4.

Etymology 13.

Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10.

Expulsion of consonants 25.

a. soak ae

Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c).

Feminine Pl. with Sing. verb 241,
R. 6; with the neuter (of uero-
Bokui Aumnodr) 241, 2; with a
Neut. (to yvraixior éote xahy)
241, 2, sq.; Fem. Dual with the
Mase. (zovtw ta tézva) 241, R.10.

Final clauses 330.

Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2.

Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3.

Formation of words 231 sq.

Future tense 103 ; Attic 117; Doric

— in gotwo 154, 3; without o 154,
4 ; in otpou with mute verbs 154,
5; Mid. instead of Act. (axova,
axovooo. instead of axovow)
154, 1, and 198; Synt. 255, 3,
4; Fut. Inf. after verbs of think-
ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2.

Future Perf. 103; in Act. form
154, 6; Synt. 255, 5; instead
of the simple Fut. 255, R. 8;
the Lat. Fut. Perf., how ex-
pressed in Greek 255, R. 9.

Gender of the substantive 40 ; first
Dec. 42; second Dec. 50; third
Dec. 66; of Adj. and Part. 74.

SUBJECTS.

Gender of the adjective, etc. in the
const. xata% ovveoty 241; in gen-
eral statements 241, 2; with sev-
eral subjects 242; of the Superl.
with Part. Gen. 241, 7; of the
relative pronoun 332.

Genitive, attributive 265; used el-
liptically 263, (b).

Genitive in the objective relation
270.

Genitive, separative, with verbs of
removal, separation, loosing, de-
sisting, freeing, missing, depriv-

ing, differing from 271, 2, 3;

with verbs of beginning 271, 4.
Genitive of origin and author, with

verbs of originating, heme peg

duced from 273, 1.

enitive, possessive, (o) with Daas, |

ylyveoFa, (8) Wtog oixtios, etc.
3,
Genitive of quality 273, 2,-(c).
Genitive, partitive, with sivas and
yiyvecdur; twitésvor, motodas,

nytwIor 273, 8, (a) 3 in attribu-

tive relation with substantives,

substantive adjectives, substan- —
tive pronouns, numerals and ad- —

verbs 273, R. 4; + with words

signifying to touch, be in connec-
tion with; of acquiring and at-
taining; of physical and intellec-
tual contact, of laying hold of;
of hasty motion, striving after an
object 273, 3, (b), and R. 7; with
verbs of entreating and suppli-
cating 278, R. 6; with the ad-
verbs sud, tOv, péyor; with
verbs of meeting and approach-
ing 273, 3, R. 93; Part. Gen. in
poetry 273, R. 7.

Genitive of place 273, 4, (a).

Genitive of time 273, 4, (b).

Genitive of material 273, 5; with

verbs of making, forming 273, 5,

which express the. idea of parti-
cipation, sharing in; with verbs ©

ik ane Pr ee ee ee ee eee kya oD 7

— eo

INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

(a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of
eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy-
ing, having the enjoyment of
something intellectually, ete. (c)
of smelling (d); of remember-
ing and forgetting ; with expres-
sions of being acquainted and
unacquainted with, of experience
and inexperience, ability, dex-
terity, of making trial of, with
verbal adjectives in -.x0¢, ete. ex-
pressing the idea of dexterity
(e); with words of sensation and
perception (axovey, axgoacdut,
aivdaverFur, oopgaiverdas (f)
and R. 19.; with verbs of hear-
ing 273, R. 18; with verbs of
seeing, hearing, experiencing,
learning, considering, knowing,
judging, examining, saying, ad-
miring, praising, blaming 273, R.
20.

Genitive of cause 274; with verbs
denoting a desire, longing for
(a); care, concern for (b); pain,
grief, pity, with adjectives having
a similar meaning, particularly in
exclamations, with interjections
(c); with verbs expressing an-
ger, indignation, envy, admira-
tion, praise and blame (d), (e),
(f); with verbs expressing re-
quital, revenge, accusing and
condemning 274, 2; tov with
the Inf. 274, 3, (a); with the
adverbs sv, xuhoic, ustgiwc, ws,
NAS, OWS, OUTWE, etc. connected
with gsi, ijxsuv, sivar 274, 3,

Genitive with verbs of ruling, supe-
riority, and inferiority, subjuga-
tion, with the adjectives ¢yxourys,
axoutng 275, 1.

Genitive after the comparative 275,
2; use of the Gen. and 7 with
the comparative 323, 2 sq.

Genitive of price 275, 3.

595

Genitive with substantives and ad-
jectives 275, R. 5.

Genitive, double, governed ty one
substantive 275, R. 7.

Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a).

Genitive with the Part, 310, 2.

Genitive absolute 312, 3; when the
subject is the same as that of the
predicate 313, 2; with wg after
sidévar, voeiv, ete. 312, R. 12.

Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a).

Grave accent 29; instead of the
acute 31.

Heteroclites 59, R. 2; 67, (b); 71.
Heterogeneous substantives 70, B.
Hexameter verse 355.
Hepthemim 355.

Hiatus 8; 206, 7.

Historical tenses 103, 2; 254, 3.
Hypercatalectic verse 352, 2.
Hypodiastole 37.

Hypothetical sentences, see et.

Jambic dimeter 367.

Jambic monometer 366.

lambic trimeter acatalectic 368.

Jambic tetrameter catalectic 369.

Lambie verse 365.

Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a).

Imperative 104, IIL; Synt. 258, 1,
(c); use of the Imp. 259, 4;
‘third Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or
Pass. 255, R. 6.

Imperfect tense 103; analogous to
verbs in we 196 ; Synt. 256, 2—4.

Impersonal construction, see per-
sonal construction.

Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2.

Inclination, see Enclitic.

Indeclinable nouns 73, 1.

Indicative 104, 1; Synt. 258, (a);
Fut. with av 260, 2, (1);
Impf., Plup. and Aor. with ay
260, 2, (2); difference between
the Impf., Aor. and Plup. 256;
Fut. instead of the Imp. 255, 4;

596 INDEX OF

with ov, e.g. ov maton Aéyow ib.;
Ind. of the Hist. tenses with words
expressing a wish 259, R.6; Ind.
in subordinate sentences, see the
separate conjunctions; Ind. in
orat. oblig. 344, 6.

Indirect form of discourse, see ob-
lique form.

Infinitive 105, (a); Synt, the
Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c);
Aor. Pres. and Fut. after verbs
of thinking, etc. 257, R. 23; with
&y 260, 2, (5).

Infinitive 305 ; without the Art. 306;
with verbs of willing and the
contrary, ete. 306, 1. (a); with
verbs of thinking, supposing,
saying 306, 1, (b); after expres-
sions denoting ability, cause,
power, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with
adjectives and substantives, with
sivat, nepuxévan and yiyverDau
with a substantive, after cuuBui-
vei, Oct, yon and the like, after
substantives, adjectives, demon-
strative pronouns, after verbs of
giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d).

Infinitive, or Acc. with Inf. differ-
ent from Part. 311; Inf, or Acc.
with Inf., different from ot, we,
that 329, R. 5; in forms express-
ing command or wish 306, R. 11;
in forms expressing indignation
306, R. 11, ¢; with at vag,
side 306, R. 11, (d).

Infinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat.
and Acc. 307.

Infinitive with the Art. instead of
the Inf. without the Art. 308, R.1.;
in Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace.
308, 2; in exclamations and
questions implying indignation
308, R. 2; as an adverbial ex-
pression (10 vty eivor and the
like) 308, R. 3.

- Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass.

306, R. 10.

SUBJECTS.

Inflection 38.

Inflection-endings of the verb 109
sq.; Remarks on 116; of verbs .
in we 171, 172.

Intensive verbs 232, R. 2.

Interchange of vowels 201; conso-
nants 202—204.

Interpunction-marks 37.

Interrogative pronouns, see Pro-
nouns.

Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes
in 344, 6; connection with a
relative sentence 344, R. 3;
change of a subordinate sentence
into a direct interrogative sen-
tence (otay ti moijowor) 344,
R. 6; blending of two or more
interrogative sentences into one
(tig tivog uitios got) 844, R. 7.

Intransitive verbs 248, (1) (8); as
Trans. with the Acc. 249, R. 2;
instead of the Pass. 249, 3; in
the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6.

Interrogative sentence with the Art.
344, R. 8.

Inversion 348, 5.

Jota subscript 4, R. 4.

Iterative form in oxov 221.

Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207.
Lenis Spiritus 6.

Letters, sounds of 2°.

Limitation of sentences 322,°1—5.
Titotes 239, R. 3.

Local substantives 233, 2, (d).

Masculine Pl. with Sing. verb 241,
R. 6; connected with the Neut.
(ob sehlot Osivov) 241, 2; Mase.
with a Neut. BRATS &OTL XO
doc) 241, 1; Mase. Pl. with Fem.
241, R. 11.

Metaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1.

Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208,
3; of the aspirates 21, 3; verb
156.

Middle form 102; Synt. 248, (2);

INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

with reflex. sense 250; with the
meaning to cause to do 250, R.
2; when an action is performed
to the advantage or disadvantage
of the subject 250, R. 3; with a
reflex Pron. 250, R. 3; with a
subjective meaning, figuratively
250, R. 4; with a pass. sense 251.

Modes 104; Synt. 258 sq. ; in subor-
dinate clauses 327°,1; attraction
of 327°; comp. the separate con-
junctions, in Greek Index.

Mode vowels 111; summary of 112;
of verbs in ws 171; in the Dial.
220.

Movable final consonants 15.

Multiplicatives 96, 1, (d).

Negatives, ov, wy 318; accumula-
tion of negatives 318, 6; appa-
rent Pleonasm of 318, 6—9.

Neuter of names of persons con-
nected with Mase. or Fem. 241, 2,
R.3; Pl. instead of the Sing. with
verb. adjectives 241, 3; Pl. of
pronouns 243, 4; Pl. with Sing.
verb 241, 4.

Nominal question 344, 2.

Nominative with the change of the
Act. construction of the verb
with the Gen. or Dat. into the
Pass., @. g. muotsvouce 251, 4.

Nominative Case 269; with dvouc
éoti por, Ovoua tym, with verbs
of naming 269, R. 3; Nom. of
an abstract instead of a Lat. Dat.
(mihi est honori) 269, R. 2; Nom.
instead of the Voc. 269, 2; in
oziua xoF choy xat péoog 266,
3, R. 4.

Nominative with the Inf. 307; in-
stead of the Acc. with the Inf.
307, 4.

Nominative with a Part. 310, 8; in-
stead of another Case 313 ; with-
out a finite verb 313, R. 1.

Numerals 96 sq. 218.

597

Number 41. 106 ; Synt. 248; in the
const. xata ovvso.y 241; with
verb. adjectives in tog téog 241,
3; the number of adjectives
when they are connected with
several subjects 242, 1; number
of verb with several subjects 242,
2; with several subjects disjunc-
tively connected 242, R. 3; num-
ber of the Rel. Pron. 332. -

Object in a sentence 239, 2.

Objective construction of sentences
267 sq.

Oblique discourse 345 sq.

Omission of consonants 25.

Optative mode 104, II. see the Subj.
Synt.; nature of the Opt. 258, 1,
(b). 259; with ey 260, 2, (4);
without &v 260, R. 7; in exhor-
tations 259, R. 1; Opt. Delib.
259, 2; to express frequent rep-
etition (as often as) 327°, 2; to
express a supposition, uncertain-
ty, possibility, presumption, ad-
mission 259, 3, (a); wish 259, 3,
(b); instead of the Imp. 259, 3,
(c) ;.desire, wish, inclination 259,
3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3,
(e) ; Opt. without av instead of
with gy 260, R. 7; Opt. in sub-
ordinate clauses, see the separate
conjunctions; in oratio obliqua
345, 4.

Oratio obliqua 345.

Ordinals 96 sq.

Organs of speech 3.

Participle 74 sq. 105, (b); Synt.
309 sq.

Participle as the complement of the
verb 310; Nom., Gen., Dat., Acc.
of the Part. 310, 2; after verba
sentiendi 310, 4, (a); verba de-
clarandi 310, 4, (b); verbs de-
noting an affection of the mind
(verba affectuum) 310, 4, (¢) ; to

598 INDEX OF
be satisfied with, to enjoy, be full
310, 4, (d); overlooking, permit-
ting, enduring, persevering, 310,
4, (e); beginning and ceasing
810, 4, (f); to be fortunate, to
excel, to be inferior, to do well
or ill 310, 4, (g); after megauut,
mavacnevatouos, etc. 310, 4, (h);
after the phrases i is fit, useful,
etc. 310, 4, (i) ; after gyevy, to be
in a condition, or state, e. g. tyw
xtjouusvos 310, 4, (k); with
tuyzave, hovdava, Siatsha, Svc-
ya, ptave, otyouc 310, 4, (1).

Participle different from Inf. after
several classes of verbs 311, and
R.

Participle as the expression of ad-
verbial subordinate relations 312.

Participle with wg 312, 6; with
GISTs, WSTEQ, UTE, LM, OLoy 312, 6,
R. 13.

Participle with sivas, instead of a
simple verb 238, R. 5.

Participle with ay 260, 2, (5).

Participials 105 ; see Inf. and Part.

Participial construction 309; ana-
coluthon 313, 1.

Particles 38, R.

Particles expressing purpose, design
330.

Paris of Speech 38.

Passive verb 102; Synt. 248, (3).
251.

Patronymics 233, 2, (b).

Pentameter verse 356.

Perfect tense 103 ; with o 131; mé-
mvoual, etc. 223,14; Subj. and
Opt. Perf. or Plup. Mid. or Pass.
formed without the aid of an aux-
iliary verb 154, 9; Perf. and
Plupf. of verbs in wu with short-

‘ened form 193; Perf. and Plup.

analogous to verbs in ss 193—
195; second Perf. with Intrans.
meaning 141, 4. 249, 2; Synt.
255, 2; in the third Pers. Sing.

SUBJECTS.

Imp. Mid. or Pass. 255, R. 6;
with the signif: of the Pres. 255,
R. 5; instead of the Fut. 255,
R. 7.

Person of the verb 1063 with sev-
eral subjects 242; in adjective-
clauses 332, 2.

Persons, interchange of in the orat.
obliq. 345, R. 6.

Personal construction, instead of
the Impers. with Inf. 307, R. 6
and 7; with Part. 310, R. 3;
with or, wo 329, R. 7.

Personal endings 111 ; view of 113;
difference between endings in
the principal and subordinate
tenses 114; of verbs in ws 172;
Dialects 220.

Personal pronouns 87—90.

Plural number 41; with the sub-
stantive in the Gen. 241, R. 2;
Pl. subst. with Dual verb 241, R.
9; Pl. of subst. in proper names,
names of materials, and abstracts
243, 3; change to the Sing. 241,
R. 12; in an address to one per-
son 241, R. 13; the first Pers.
Pl. instead of the Sing. 241, R.
12; Neut. Pl. in verbal adjec-
tives instead of the Sing. 241, 3;
Pl. of verbs with collective nouns
in the Sing. 241, 1; with sub-
stantives in the Dual 241, 5;
tata, toads, éxsiva used of one
idea 241, R. 3; Pl. interchanged
with the Dual 241, R. 8.

Pluralia tantum 73, 2.

Pluperfect 103. Comp. Perf. Synt.
256, 2.

Position of words 348.

Position of &y 261; article 6, 7, 16
245; prepositions 300, 6; pro-
nouns, see the separate pronouns.
Adverbs and particles, see the
separate adverbs and particles ;
of té 821, R. 3; ev and dé 322,
R. 2.

INDEX OF

Positive degree, see Comparative.

Possessive pronouns 90.

Predicate 2388, 2.

Predicative relation of sentences 238.

Pregnant construction 300, 3.

Prepositions 199 ; Synt. 286 sq.; as
adverbs of place 300; Tmesis
300, R.4; in const. Praeg. ain-
tay éy yovracr) 300, 4; with
the Art., attracted (oi é tij¢ ayo-
eas avIoumoe Epuyor) 300, 4;
repeated and omitted 300, 5; po-
sition 300, 6.

Present tense 103; Pres. and Impf.
analogous to verbs in ws 196;
Synt. 255, 1; Hist. Pres. 255, 1;
instead of the Perf. 255, R. 1;
instead of the Fut. 255, R. 3.

Primitives 231, 2.

Principal clauses 326.

Principal tenses 103, 2. 254, 2.

_ Proclitics 32.

_ Pronouns 86; Dialects 217; De-
clension 87 sq.; Synt. 301—304.

Pronoun, correlative 94; demon-
strative, Decl. 91; Dialects 217,
4. 303, 1 and 2; avtog 303, 3;

prospective and _ retrospective
304; omitted before a relative
331, R. 3.

Pronoun indefinite ti¢ ti Decl. 93.
303, 4; position 303, R. 5.

Pronoun interrogative, ti¢ Decl. 93 ;
see Interrog. sentences ; with Art.
prefixed 344, R. 3.

Pronoun personal Decl. 87. 302;
third Pers. prospective 304; re-
trospective 304, 3.

Pronoun possessive 90; Dialects
217, 3.

Pronoun reciprocal Decl. 89.

Pronoun reflexive Decl. 88. 302, 2;
| third Pers. instead of the first

and second 302, 8; instead of

the reciprocal 302, R. 7.
Pronunciation 29, 36 ; of letters 8.

Purpose, particles denoting 330, 1.

SUBJECTS. 599
Proportionals 96,1, (e).

Protasis 339.

Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8.
Punctuation-marks 37.

Quantity 27 sq.; in Dialects 209;
first Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64.

Redundant nouns 70.

Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219; in
sec. Aor. 219, 7; Att. in Perf.
and Plup. 124 ; second Aor. 124;
R. 2; in compound words 125
sq.; as strengthening of the stem
163.

Reflexive verbs 102; Synt. 248, (2).

Reflexive pronouns 88.

Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2.

Relative construction changed to the
Demonstrative 334, 1.

Relative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt.
331 sq.; instead of the demons.
331, R. 1; agreement of gender
and number 332; Case (attrac-
tion) 332, 6; attraction with
oi0g, Oa0g, HAdxog 332, 7; inverse
attraction 332, R. 11; with ovdsis
ogtig ov 332, R. 12; with ad-
verbs of place 332, R. 13; at-
traction in position 332, 8; rela-
tive pronoun of an intermediate
clause attracted 332, 9; construc-
tion of the relative pronoun 333;
rel. pron. changed to a demons.
or pers. 334, 1; rel. pron. in-
stead of a demonstrative 334, 3.

Relative clause, see adjective clause.

Reciprocal pronouns 89.

Reciprocal verbs 248, R. 1.

Resolution of contract verbs 222.

Restriction of sentences 322, 1—5.

Rhythm 349.

Roots 231, 2.

Scheme, see ozijua in Greek Index.
Sentences 238, 1.
Sentences denoting effect or re-

0v0 INDEX OF
sult with é&ga, ovv, tofvur, ete.
324, 3.

Sequence of tenses 3278.

Shortening of the vowels 16, 4.
207, 4.

Singular verb with Mase. or Fem.
Pl. 241, R.6; with Neut. Pl. 241,
4; with several common nouns
in Pl. 242, R. 2.

Singular of substantives 243, 1;
changed to the Pl. 241, R. 12;
Sing. Imp. e. g. simé in an ad-
dress to several 241, R. 13.

Spiritus Len. and Asp. 6.

Stem of the verb 108, 1; pure and
impure 138; strengthening the
consonant and prolonging the
stem-vowel 139.

Stems 231, 4, (a).

Strengthening of the vowels 16, 1;
consonants 24; stem of impure
verbs 139.

Subject 238, 2; change of the ac-
tive construct. into the Pass., e. g.
meotsvouar from muotevw tii
251, 4; ellipses of 238, 5.

Subjunctive Mode 104, II. — Perf.
and Plp. Mid. or Pass. without
an auxiliary verb 154, 9; Subj.
and Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs
in vas without auxiliary verb
176, 5. Synt. 258, 1, (b). 259;
Subj. Aor. instead of Fut. Perf.
of Latin 255, R. 9.

Subjunctive with ay 260, 2, (3);
(with and without av) instead of
the Fut. Ind. 259, R. 4; Subj.
hortative 259, 1 (a); delibera-
tive 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, 3, (b);
Svbj. to den. indefinite frequen-
cy (as often as) 327, 2, 333, 3; in
comparisons 333, R. 2; with ey
instead of the fap. 259, 5; in
subordinate clauses, see the sep-
arate conjunctions; in Or. oblig.
345, 5.

Subordinate sentences 326 sq.; dam

SUBJECTS.

es 326, 3; characteristics 326, R.
4 ; subordinate sentences changed
into direct interrogative senten-
ces 344, R. 6.

Substantive 39 sq.; Gen. 40 ; Numb.,
Case and Dee. 41;
sq.; Dec. Il. 46 sq sii UI.
51 sq.

Substantive 89 sq. ; number 242.

Substantive instead of adjective 264,
R. 3.

Substantive clauses expressing design,
aim, with wc, Owe, iva, ete.
330.

Ties I. 49 |

Substantive clauses with 611,.0s, that —

329.

Superlative 81 sq. Synt. 239 ; ;strength- ;
ening and more exact definition |

of, 239, R. 2; Gend. with the
Part. Gen 241, 7.
Syllables, division of 36.
Synizesis 12. Dialects 206, 4.
Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6; in substan-
tives 55, 2; in verbs 155.
Syntax 238 sq.

Tenses of the verb 103 ; of the sub-
ordinate modes 257; derivation
128; formation of the secondary
tenses, use of the same in con-

nection with the primary 141; —

Tenses primary and Hes. 103, R.
141.

Tenses, Syntax 254; sequence of
in subordinate clauses 3272.

Tense-formation of verbs in » 127;
pure verbs 129}; mute 142 sq.;
liquid 149 ; verbs in ws 173; in
Dialects 223.

Tense-characteristic, see character-~
istic.

Tense-endings 110.

Tense-stem 110, 2.

Theme of the verb 138, 3.

Thesis and Arsis 349.

Time, difference between Gen. and
Dat. of time, 278, R. 13.

~—— oe se ae, ee ee

*

INDEX OF SUBJECTS. . 601

Tmesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4.

Transitive verbs 248, (a) («) ; with
Intrans. or Reflex. signif. (teénw
instead of tegmouar) 249, 1, 2;
with the sense to cause to do 249,
R. 3.

Transition from direct discourse to
indirect and vice versa 345, R. 6.

iti of the attributive

adjective and Subs. (0% yonatot
tay ayFeanwy instead of ob zoy-
atol «vFewmor) 264, R. 5.

Triemim 355.

Trochaic verse 361.

Trochaic monometer 362.

Trochaic dimeter 363.

Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364.

Variable vowels 16, 6; in the stem

- of impure verbs 140; change of
s into ot 140, 4; of e into o
231, 6.

Verb 102 sq. 219 sq.; division of
verbs in w according to the char-
acteristic 127; barytones 127,
R.; pure verbs (and contract)
129—137; Perispomena 127, R;
impure 127. 138—141; mute
127. 142—148; liquid 127. 149
—153; special peculiarities of

61

verbs (pure and impure) 154;
anomalous in » 157 sq. ; in we 168
8q-; in w which in certain tenses
are analogous to verbs in mut : sec-
ond Aor. Act.and Mid. 191 sq.; in
Dialects 227; Perf. and Plup.
123—195; in Dialects 228;

Pres. and Impf. 196; verbs De-*

nom., Frequent., Imitat., Intens.,
Fact, Desid. 232.

Verbs active, with Mid. Fut. 198;
those which have both an active
and middle form for the Fut.
198, R.

Verb Act. Trans., Reflex., Recip.,
Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248—251.
Verb finitum and infinitum 105, R.
Verbal adjectives in tég and téog
234. 1, (i); Pl. instead of Sing.
241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12).

Verb characteristic 108, 5.

Versijication 349.

Vowels 4; change 8—16 ; weaken-
ing or attenuation of 16, 2; in-
terchange in the Dialects 201;
change in the Dialects 205—207.

Weakening of vowels 16, 2.

Zeugma 346, 3.

ee er a .. ee lle li all Ls wlihet sg tT tn Ng

II. GREEK INDEX.

AppreviaTions. Ady. adverb; adj. adjective ; Comp. compare; comp. com-
red ; c. a. with the accusative; c. d. with the dative; ¢. g. with the genitive ; c.

inf. with the infinitive ; c. part. with the partici;

; coll. collective ; con. construction ;

Dec. declension; dec. declined; euph. euphonic; ins. instead of; int. intensive ;
intr. intransitive ; pers. personal ; prep. preposition ; priv. privative ; R. remark ;

trans. transitive.

A pure 43, 1, (a); a priv.,
coll., int. 236, R. 3, (b) ;
a euph. 16, 10.

&yadés comp. 84, 1.

Gydd\Acoom c. dat. 285,
1, (1); ¢. part. 310, 4,
(c).

Gyavaxteiv c. d. 285, 1,
(1); ¢. part. 310, 4, (c).
G&yaray c. a. and d. 274,
R. 1; ¢. d. 285, 1, (1);
¢€. part, 310, 4, (c).

Sa: c. gen. and acc.
273, R. 20; tTwd tivos
274, 1, and R. 2.

GyyédAcw c. Inf. and part.
311, 10.
GryyéAAerau pers. ins. ¢. a.
and inf. 307, R. 6.
&ye referring to several
persons 241, R. 13.
&yvoeiy c. part. 310, 4, (a).
Gryopa(ew c. g. 275, 3.
ayuevs dec. 57, R. 2,
&yxt c. g. 273, R. 9.
&ywv, with, 312, R. 10.
dywvi Cerda c.d. 284, 3 (2).
adahs c. g. 273, 5, (e).
adeApds Cc. g. 273, 3, (b).
Gdiuceiy C. a. 279, 1; c. two
acc. 280, 2; c. part.310,

4, (g ).
andév dec. 55, R. 2.
"ASdws dec. 212, 7.
ai see ei; ai ydp c. inf.
306, R. 11, (d).
aidcioSa: c. a. 279, 5; ©.
part. and inf. 311, 14.
aidotos comp. 82, I, (d).
aidés dec. 60, (b).

atpew Twa péyay ete.,
280, 4. ;
aipety c. g. 274, 2.
aipetoda c. two a. 280, 4.
aicSdvoua ins. the perf.
255, R. 1. Lee
aigddversa c. g. and a.
273, 5, R. 19; ¢. part.
310, 4, (a).
alooew c. a. 279, R. 5.
aicxpds comp. 83, II.
aicxtverdat c, a. 279, 5;
c.d. 285, 1, (1); ¢. part.
and inf. 311, 14.
aireiy c. two a. 280, 3.
airiaosa ¢. g. 274, 2.

atrids eius c. inf. 306,1,(c).

a&xdAoudos, -€tv, -ws, -NTI-
kos c. d. 284, 3, (3).
&xovtiCey c. g. 273, R. 7.
&xovew, audivisse, 255,
R. 1.
akovew c. g. and a. 273, 5,
(f) and R. 19; to obey,
c. g. and d. 273, R. 18;
c. inf. and part. 311, 1.
axparhs c. g. 275, 1.
&xparos 82, I, (e).
dKpoagSa c. g. 273, 5, (f)
and R. 19.
aayedy c. d. 285, 1, (1).
&Ayevds comp. 84, 4.
éAcéew c. d. 284, 3, (7).
GAtevs dec. 57, R. 2.
Gus c, g. 273, 5, (b).
arlonerdai c.p. 310, 4,(b).
GAAd 322, 6; in a ques-
tion ib.; GAAd ydp 324,
1

R. 1.
&AAa, &AAot, of AA, With-

out «af in a series 325,
(e); GAN’ H (odK, oddty
GAA’ 5; obdeY BAAO, GAN’
H; TLRAAO, GAN’ H; GAA
Tt, GAA’ H) 822, R. 10.

GAdtTew, -eoda Cc. g.
275, 3.

GAAHAwy dec. 89; use of
302, R. 7.

&AAo or BAAo Ti H ellipti-
cal 346, 2, (d).

dAAotos C. g. 271, 3.

&AAos UAAov (&AAOS HAAO-
Sev) with another Nom.
266, 3.

&AAo T1 H# and BAAo Trin
a question: nonne 344,
5, (g).

Orpios ¢C. g. 271.3.
GAs dec. 54, (a) and R. 1.
G&A@vat C. g. 274, 2.

GAwy dec. 56, R.1. -

GAws dec. 48, R. 1. 70, A,
(a). 72, (b).

&ua c. d. 289, R.; with
part. 312, R. 6; ¢. d.
and part. 312, R. 5.

Gpaprdvew ¢. g. 271, 2; ¢.
part. 310, 4, (g).

dmelBew, -eoda Cc. g. 275,
8; ca. 279, 1.

Guetvwy 84, 1.

Gmerdciy c. g. 274, 1; ©.
inf. 306, 1, (a).

auhxavds eime c. inf. ins.
duhxavey eoTt Cc, a. et
inf. 307, R.6.

. g. 273, 3. (b).

dive c. d. 284, 3, (7).

d. in a pregnant signif.
IMs. ¢c. a. 300, 3, (a).
Gupi mep{ 300, R. 1.
vevvivak «6C. «two a
280, 3.

duisBnreiv c.d. 284,3, (2).

&udw dec. 99, R.

ay- priv. 236, R. 3, (b).

ty 260; c. ind. fut. 260,
2, (1); ind. impf., plup.
and aor. 260, (2) and
333, 7 ; c. subj. 260,(3);
¢c. opt. 260, (4); c. inf.
and part. 260, (5); po-
sition and repetition of
fy 261. [2, (3), (d).

&y with conjunctions 260,

&y xe 261, R. 3.

&y with the relative 333, 3.

ay in Protasis 340, 6.

&y omitted with the Opt.
260, R. 7; with Pret.
Ind. omitted 260, R. 3
and 6.

&y ins. édy, which see.

&va voc. 53, R. 4.

&va inst. of dvdornd: 31,
R. 3.

avd prep. 290, 1.

er Bie c, inf. 306,
1, (a).

dvaryndCew twd Tt 278, 4.

évaxayydtew ¢. a, 278, 3.

évauiuvhoKcey c. two a.
280, 3.

&vat dec. 54, (c).

avddvew c. d. 284, 3, (5).

dvemioriuey Cc. g. 273, 5,

e).
dvev c. g. 271, 3.
avéxeoSat c. g. 275, 1.
avéxeosa: c. inf. 311, 15;

c. part. 310, 4, (e).
Svew(s) 25, 4, (c).
avhp dec. 55, 2; to denote
employment (dyhp, udv-
wis) 264, R. 3.
aviaosa c. d. 285, 1.
avioropetv Cc. two a. 280, 3.
avréxersat Cc. g. 273, 3,
(b).
avi prep. 287, 1.
éyridew c. d. 284, 3, (2).
avTiAauBdveordat c.g. 273,
b

3, (b).
&yrios and ayrloy c. g. 273,
R. 9.
avturoeiodauc.g.273,3,(b).

GREEK INDEX.

dvéyewy dec. 48.

&éids eiuc c. inf. 307, R. 6.

kéids, dtlws, akwiv, -ovc-
Sat c. g. 275,35 akids
Twés eiul tun 284, 3,
(10) (b).

&todv c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

amaryopetew (ed, kak@s) C.
a. 279, 2; e. inf. 306, 1,
(a).

amaldeutos ¢. g. 273, 5, (e).

dmatreiy c. two a. 280, 3.

GmahAdtrew c. g. 271, 2;
far c. part. 310, 4,

ase a c. g. 273, R.9;
c. d. 284, 3, (1).
ameeiv c. g. 273, R. 19;
c. d. 284, 3, (3).
arevreiy c. part. 310, 4, (e).
&areipos c. g. 273, 5, (€).
amelpws Exew Cc. g. 273, 5,

e).

améxew, amréxecdat Cc. g-
271, 2.

ameoreiv c. inf. 306, 1, (b).

amAovs, -H, -ovv dec. 77.

amAovs comp. 82, I, (b).

amd prep. 288, 1; with
pregnant sense ins. év
c. d. 300, 3, (c); (ard
with the art. ins. éy
(of awd Tis &yopas
tivSpwrot amrépuyor)300,
4, (a).

amd — evexa 300, R. 2.

amodéxersat c. g. 273,
R. 20.

amodtdocda c. g. 275, 3.

amrodiipackew ¢. a. 379, 3.

GmroAavew c. g. 273, 5, (c).

a&modoyeiaaa: Cc. d. 284, 3,

7

(7).
*AréAA@y dec. 53, 4, 1,
(a); 56, R. 1.
dmomeipaciat c. g. 273,
5, (9).
dmrompé 300, R. 1. .
amopeiv c. g. 273, 5, (b).
amoorepeiy c. g. 271, 2;
tTwd TL, Twos TL, TWds
Tiva 280, 3, and R. 3.
amrooriABew c.g. 273,R.16.
a2 a Agee c..g. 279,
3

&mopatyew c. part. and inf.
311, 11.

dmopebyey c. a. 279, 3,

603

amperas c. d, 284, 3, ( »).
drrecda: ¢. g. 273, 3, (b)
tipa 324, 3.

dpa ins. 4pa 324, R. 5.
dpa interrogative 344, 5,

Gpéokew Tid 279, 1; ap-
éoxecda c. d. 284. 3,
(5); c. dat. of the in-
strument 285, 1, (1).
aptyew c. d. 284, 3, (7).
Apns dec. 59, R. 2,
tipioros 84, 1. :
’"Apioropdyns dec. 59, R. 2.
apreiodat c. d. 285, 1, (1).
apudtreyw c. d. 284, 3, (5).
apveiosa c. inf. 306, 1,(b).
apvds 55, R. 3.
apiduevos ard Tivos, par-
ticularly 312, R. 3.
&pxeww, to begin, c. g. 271,
4; to rule, c. g. 275, 1.
tipxeosai c. g. 271, 4; ©.
part. 310, 4, (f); c. part.
and inf. 311, 16. |
apxduevos, in the begin-
ning, originally, 312,
3

aoeBeiv c. a. 279, 1.
ackov, agxduny 221.
&opuevos comp. 82, R. 6.
kooa, doo 93.

aothp dec. 55, R. 3.
aorpdrrew C. & 278, 3.
&oru dec. 63.

ara ins. yras 144, R. 1.
ardp 322, 7.

Gre c. part. 312, R. 13.

. Grepos 10, R. 2.

“ArAa Voc. 53, R. 2.

aro ins. yto 144, R. }.

arpéua(s) 25, 4, (c).

&arra and arra 93.

ad, a’rdp 322, 7.

ab’rixa with part. 312., R.6,

avtés dec. 91; Dial. 207,
4, (c).

ards use 302, 4; 3803,
3; with the art. 246,
3, 8.

a’rés in avrots trots, to-
gether with the horses ete.
283, 2, (a); 6 adrds c.
d. 284, 3, (4).

atrov dec. 88; use 302, 2.

apatpeioda: c. two a. and
tivd Tivos, TWds TE 280,
3, and R. 3,

; as
ae ee Oe

eo ==

604 GREEK INDEX.

of the Pres. 255, R. 1;
c. g. orig. 273, 1; ¢. g.
posses. 273, 2; ¢. g.
partit. 273, 3, (a); ¢.d.
284, 3, (9).

ylyvetat pol 71 BovrAomeve,

&pSovos comp. 82, R. 6.

apievat, -leadai c.g. 271, 2.

tpvw(s) 25,4, (c).

&xSeoSa c. d.285, 1, (1);
c. part. 310, 4, (c).

B euph. 24, 2. éAtromévw 284, 3,10, (Cc) ;
Balvew wé5a and the like = yfyveras and an abstract
279, R. 5. substantive with an inf.

Bapéws épew c. d. 285,
(1); éwi ru and c. a.
285, R. 1. [(c).

BapbvecSa c. part. 310, 4.

Baoirevew c. g. 275, 1.

BactAevs dec. 57, 2.

Backaivey c. d. and a.

306, 1, (d).
yryveone c. g. 273, R. 20;
wi Tw 285, 1, (3); ©.
part. 310, 4, (a) ; c. inf.
and part. 311, 4.
yyvéokw c. as and gen.
abs. 812, R. 12.

284, 3, (b). od it ins. éyvwka 255,
Bérrew 212, 3. .
Bav 97, 2. yAnhxeyv dec. 56, R. 1.

yAlxeoSau c. g. 273.3, (bd).
yévu dec. 54, (c) ; 68, 1.
*ypavs dec. 57, 2.
ypderdau c. g. 274, 2.
yuurvés c. g. 271, 8.

yuvh dec. 68, 2.

BéAraros 84, 1. .
BéATepos 84, 1.
BéArioros, BeAtioy 84, 1.
BAdrrew c. a. 279, 1.
BAdrrew peydaAa, ete. Cc. a.
280, R. 1. |
BaAérew c. a. 278, 3.
Bonsety c. d. 284, 3, (7).
Boppas Dec. 44, R. 2.
BovaAe c. subj. 259, 1, (b).
BovAcoSa: c. inf. 306,1, (a).
BovacteoSa: e. inf. 306, 1,
(a); c. Srws and ind.
fut. 330, 6.
Bows dec. 57, 2.
Bpéras dec. 61, R. 1.
Bptsew c. g. 273, 5, (b).
Bpimodasau c. d. 284, 3, (6).

TdAa dec. 54, (c). 2

ydaws dec. 212, 7.

ydp 324, 2; in an answer
344, 7.

A eee 24, 2.
daep Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a).
dal 315, 7. Oe)
daleoSau c. two acc. 280, 3.
ddxpu and Sdxpvoy 70 B.
daovs c. g. 273, 5, (b).
dé 322, in a question R. 6.
d¢ suffix 235, 3 and R.3;
after a demons. 95, (c).
SeSoixevan c. inf. 306, 1,(a).
de? c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; ¢. ace.
and dat. 279, R. 4; c¢.
inf. 306, 1, (d); ¢. d.
and acc. c. inf. 307,
R. 3.
de? o° Srws 330, R. 4.
yaoThp dec. 55, 2. derkviva c. part. 310, 4,
vyé 317, 2; in an answer (b); ¢. part. and inf.
344, 7. 311, 11.
yeday c. a. 278, 3. deiva dec. 93, R. 2.
yéAws dec. 71, B, (c). deivds c. inf. 306, 1 (c).
yeuew Cc. g. 273, 5, (b). Seto C. a. 279, 5.
yevvay, parentem esse 255, deioda c.g. 273, 5, (bd);
R.1 c. inf. 306, 1, (a).
S€uas c. g. 208, R.
dévdpos dec. 72, (a).
5émras dec. 61, (a).
dépxerSai c. a. 278, 3.
deomd(ew c. g. 275, (1).
deomdrns dec. 45,6.
deve c. a. 278. 2.
debrepos c. g. 275, 2.

yévos dec. 61 (b).

yepaids comp. 82, I, (c).
vyépas dec. 54, R. 4.
ryevew, yeveoSau Cc. g. 273,

c).

yiipas dec. 54, R. 4.

ylyveoSa: —_ syncopated,
155, 2; with the sense

5éxerdau c. two ace. 280,
4; twi 7: 284, R. 40

84 95, (b); 315, 1.2.

d7jxev 315, 5. ;

djAov elvat, morety wit
part. 310, 4, (b) ; d9Ads
ciut Tomy Tt 310, R. 3.

d7Ads eius STs 829, R. 4.

dnAovy c. g. and a. 278,
R. 20; ¢. part. 310, 4,
(b); c. inf. and part.
311, 12.

Anpnhtnp dec. 55, 2.

Anuoasérns dec. 59, R. 2.

dqmore 95, (b).

dhmovsev 315, 6.

d77a 315, 3.

did Prep. 291.

51a mpd 300, R, 1.

did-yew c. part. 310, 4,(1).

divrylyversat c. part. 310,
eset

diadéexeodat, Siddoxos, di-
adoxh c. d. 284, 3, (3).

diadiSdvau c. g. 273, 3, (b).

diddoxos c.g. and d. 278,
3, (b); 284, 3, (3).

diapety c. two acc. 280, 3.

diakeiodar thy yvdunv
with @s and gen. abs.
312, R. 12.

Siaréyeodar c. d. 284, 3,
1

(1). i
diadimav xpdvoy 312, R. 3.
diaAAdtTew Cc. part. 310,

4
diadAAdTTew, -dtTTeTsat C.

d. 284, 3, (1).
SiapelBecdar c. g. 275, 3.
diavewerv c. two acc. 280, 3.
diavociosat Cc. Smws c. ind,

fut. 830,.6; c. @s and

g. abs. 312, R. 12.
diampdrrecdat c. inf. 306,

1, (c).
wh c. part. 310, 4,
diaépew Cc. g. 271, 2.
didopos c. g. 271, 3; c.d,

284, 3, (4).
didpwvos c. d. 284, 3, (4).
diaxpjosa c. d. and ace.

285, 1, (2).
diddoKetv c. two acc. 280,

8; c. inf. 306, 1, (c).
diddva c. g. partit. 273,

3, (b); ¢. g. price, 275,

ss ¢. g. 271, 2.

BindCew c. g. 274, 2; Be
raCerda c. d, 284,3, (2).

Sixaids elu c. inf.,personal
ins. dixady dati c. a.
and inf. 307, R. 6.

Sicasody c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

dixny c. g. 288,

SwopiCew c. g. 271, 2.

Bubrt see Sri.

Sixa c.g. 271, 3.

diva and Sivos 70, B.

duljv c. g. 274, 1.

didnew c. g. 274, 2.

doxeiv c. inf. 306, 1, (b);
videri, pers. 307, R. 7.

ddpv dec. 54, (c) and 68, 3,

Sopupopeiv c. a. 279, 1.

dparerevery Cc. 2. 279, 3.

itp c. g. 273, 3,

SivacSa: c. a. 279, 6; ¢.
inf. 306, 1, (c).

duvards eis c. inf. 306, 1,
(c) ; personal ins. duva-
rév éore c. ace. and inf.
307, R. 6.

dvo0 dec. 99, 5; with the
Subst. in the Pl. 241,
R. 10.

dus in. composition, 236,
R. 3, (b), (8).

dusxepalvew c. a. 279, 5;
¢. d. 285, 1, (1). |

dwpéay, gratis 278, R. 2.

Swpeiodal rwl te and tid
Tit 279, R. 2.

Awpieds dec. 57, R. 2.

*Eay c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

édy cons. 339, 2, II, (b);
whether, an 344, 4; éav
dé ins. dav 3& uh 340.4;
édy wal ib. 7.

édy re — édy Te 323, 1.

Zap dec. 56, R. 2.

éarot, éaro ins. nvTat, nv-
To, ovto 220, 13.

éavrov dec. 88; use 302,2.

édwy 215, R.

éyyitew c. g. 273, R. 9;
c. d. 284, 3, (2).

éyyis c.g. 273, R.9; ¢.
d. 284, 3, (2).

éykadciv c. g. 274, 2; ¢.d.
conk ne ore
Kparhs c. g. 275, 1.

Pisa dec. 63, R. 5.

GREEK INDEX.

éyé dec. 87 ; use, 302, 1.
Fywye 95, (a).
éjos from eds 215, R.
édéAew c. inf. 306, 1, (a).
e: ins. 7 aug, 122, 3.
e ins. redup. 123, 3.
ec LI. Pers. ins. » 116, 11.
ei cons, 339.
ei concessive 340,7; in
wishes 259, 3, (b).
ei an, whether 344, 5, (i).
ei yap 259, 3, (b).
ei 8 &ye 340, 3.
ei 5é ellipt., 340, 3; ei dé
ins. ef 3¢ wh and ej 5
hh ins. ef dé 340, 4.
ei xal 340, 7.
el xe see édv,
ei wh iron. 324, 3, (a);
uh except 340,53; €f wh
ei, nisi, si, ib.
€la, €las, ere, ecay Opt. ins.
ait and ete. 116, 9.
eidéva: c. g. 273, R. 20; ¢.
artic. 310, 4, (a); dif-
erence between inf.
and part. 311, 2; ¢c. ds
and g. abs. 312, R. 12.
cide in wishes 259, 3, (b)
and R. 3, 6. ; c. inf.306,
R. 11.
eixd ew rh Tit 285, 1, (3).
elxey Cc. g. 271, 2; ¢. d.
284, 3, 2.
eixdés, eixérws c. dat. 284,
3, (5).
eixéy dec. 55, R. 2.
ejuev, €iTe, elev ins. €%n-
per, etc. 116, 7.
elva: as copula 238, 6; as
an essential word (to be,
to exist, etc.) 238,.R. 4;
with adv. 340, R. 4;
diva: with a part. ins.
of a simple verb 238,
R.5; omitted 238, R.6,7.
elva: apparently unneces-
sary with dvoudcey,
-erda 269, R. 1.
elva c. g. orig. 273, 1; ¢.
g. possess, 273, 2; c.g.
partit, 273, 3, (a); ¢.d.
284, 3, (9); elva: anda
subs. ec. inf. 306, 1, (d).
eiwé referring to several
persons 241, R. 13, (a).
eimeiy €b, kaxa@s Twa 279,
25 Kad, kadd c.a.280, 2.
51*

605

eleiv c. d. 284, 3, 5 c
d. and a. ¢. inf.307, R. 3.

elpyewv, -oar c. g. 271, 2.

eis (és) Prep. 290, 2; in
pregnant sense ins. év
c. d. 300, 3, (b); with
the art. ins. év (4 Aluyn
exdidot és thy Siprw
és A:Biny) 300, 4, (b).

els, ula, év dec. 99, 5.

eis with Superl. 239, R. 2.

eisdyew Cc. g. 274, 2,

eway ins. ecay in plup.
116, 6.

eisopay, to permit ec. part.
310, 4, (e). (3.

eismpdrrew c. two.acc.280,

elra with Part.312, R.8;
elra in a quest. 344, 5,

(e).

efre—etre 323, R. 1; ei—
eire, élre—ei dé ete. 323,
R. 1; in an indirect
question 344, 5, (k).

elwdévar c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

éx, €€ 15,3; Prep. 288, 2;
in Preg. sense ins év
c. d. 300, 3, (c); &
with the Art. ins. é
(oi &« Tis a&yopas
tvSpwro = a epvyov)
300, 4, (a).

éxds ¢. g. 271, 3.

€xaotos with the Art. 246,
6

éxdvew c. two acc. 280, 3.

éxeivev With the Art. ins.
éxet (6 €xeidev wore
Hos Sevpo Héex) 300,R. 8.

éxeivos dec. 91 ; Dial. 217,
4, (d); use 303, 2; with
the Art. 246, 3.

éxetvooi(v) 15, 1. (e).

éxeitoe in Preg. sense ins.
éxet 300, R. 7.

éxnrt c. g. 288, R.

bere at c. part. 310, 4,

)

exmAntrersyat c. a. 279,5;
c. d. 285, 1.
exorjvat c. a. 279, R. 8.
extpémetoa C. a. 279,R.3.
éxwy elva: 306, R. 8.
ras 5 without # 323,
4,

‘

ararrododa c. g. 275, 1.
éAdrtwy 84, 6.
éAdxioros 84, 6.

’
©

ul

i! Se oe

*.

a“

spe ea

ar at

a

606

éAeyxew ¢. part.310,4,(b).
eAéyxtoros 84, R. 4.
éAcev Cc. g. 274, 1, (c);
c. a. 279, 5.
€AcUSepos, eAcvSepody Cc.
g@. 271, 2, 3.
EAlooew Sedy 279, R. 5.
éAuws dec. 54, (c).
eamicew c.d. 285, 1 (1);
c. inf. 306, 1, (b).
euavtod dec. 88;
302, 2.
éuds ins. wov, 302, R. 2.
Euma(s) 25, 4, (c).
eumeipos c. g. 273, 5, (e).
éumeAd(eosat ¢. g. 273, R.
9; c. d. 284, 3, (2).
éuritrAagsat c. part. 310,
4, (d).
eumpooser c.g. 273, 3,(b).
eugephs c. d. 284, 3, (4).
ev ins. noav 220, 14.
év Prep. 289, 1; in Preg.
sense ins. eis 300, 3,
(a); ¢. g. 263, (b).
éy Tots, évy tais c. Superl.
(e.g. mp@ro) 239, R. 2.
évaytioy, -ios c.g. and d.
273, R.9 and 284, 3,(2).
évdehs c. g. 273, 5, (b).
évdoSev with the Art. ins.
evdov (thy @vdodev tpa-
meCay pepe) 300, R. 8.
évdvew c. two acc. 280, 3.
évedpevew Cc, a. 279, 1.
évexa, €vexev, eivena, ef-
vexev,ovvexa Cc. g. 288, R.
@veorw ¢. inf. 306, 1, (c).
évSupeiosat c.g.273,R. 20;
¢. part. 310, 4 (a).
@ ins. @veors 31, R. 3.
évvoeiv c. g. 273, R. 20.
évoxAewv ¢. a. 279, 13; ¢.d.
284, 3, (6).
évradsa with Part. 312,
R. 7.
évrpémeada 273, 3, (b).
et Prep. 288, 2; see éx.
etatpyns with Part. 312,
R. 6.

use

eidpxew c. g. 271, 4.
eieAcyxew c. part. 310, 4,
b

Zeorw c. inf. 306, 1, (¢);
c. d. and a. c. inf. 307,
R. 3.

éerd ew c. g, 373, R. 20;
c. two acc. 280, 3.

GREEK INDEX.

éfis c. g. 273, 3, (b); ¢.
d, 284, 3, (3).
éioracsa c. g. 271, 2.
éfopKovr Cc. a. 279, 4.
ew c. g. 271, 3.
éoixévar c. d. 284, 3, (4);
ec. inf. 307, R. 7.; ¢.
part. 310, R. 2; ¢. inf.
and part. 311, (9).
éés ins. éuds, ods 302, R. 8.
érawveiy c.g. and a. 273;
R. 20; rived twos 274, 1.
éralpew tivd Ti 278, 4.
éralperSa c. d. 285,1, (1).
ératocew ¢. g. 273, R. 7.
ematiaosa Cc. g. 274, 2.
émdAéers dec. 213, 19.
érdy see ray under Gre."
érapxeiv ¢. g. 273, 3, (b) 5
c. d. 284, 3, (7).
émei see Sre; in interrog.
and imp. clauses 341,
R. 4. b).
éretyerSa ¢. g. 273, R.7,
émeiddy see Oray under
dre.
éreidh see bre.
%re:ra in a question 344,
5; ¢e):
%revra with part. 312, R. 8.
emetiévan C. g. 274, 2.
érecSau c. d. 284, 3, (3).
érhy see émdy.
ém ins. @reor: 31, R. 3.
émt Prep. 296; c. dat. in
Preg. sense ins. ¢. a
300, 3, (a); c.g. and
part. 312, R. 5.
eriBddAAcoSau C. g.273,R.7.
érldotés eius c. inf. 307,
R

. 6.
émiSupew c. g. 274, (1);
c. inf. 306, 1, (a).
émiadel c. d. 284, 3, (6).
emuxoupety ¢. d. 284, 3, (7).
émiAauBdversar -C. gen.
273, 3, (b).
emiAavSdversa ¢. g. 273,
5, (e); ¢ part. 310,4,(c).
émirclrew Cc. a. 279, 4; C.-
part. 310, 4, (f).
érpmaterSa c. g. 273, R.7.
emmércoval, -Elova C. g.
274,13; c. Orws c. ind.
fut. 330, 6.
érlaedos comp. 82, R. 6.
émimAhooeyw c.d. and acc,
284, 3, (6).

emiokhmreo Sat Cc. ¢.274, 2.

| €miaotduevos C. 2.273,5,(e).

erioraoSat c. g. 273,R.20;
c. partic. 310, 4, (a); ¢.
part. and inf. 311; 2; ¢.
@s and gen. abs. 312,
R. 12.

émorareiv Cc. g. 275, 1.

emiothuwy Cc. g.273, 5, (@).

émoxav xpdvoy 312, R. 3.

émrdrrew c.d. 284, 3, (3).

emir €AAew c.inf.306,1,(a).

émirhdeos c. inf. 306, 1, (c).

émitimay Cc. d, 284, 3, (6).

émitpémew ¢. inf, and part.
311, 15. . |

emitpomevew Cc. g. 275, 1;
c. a. 279,:1.

emiprdvws diaxcioda ¢. g.
274, 1, (e).

émxeipery c.inf. 306, 1,(a).

émix@pios ¢. g. 278, 3, (b).

érouévws ¢. d. 284, 3, (3).

érotpuvew Tid TL 278, 4,

épay, pacda ¢.g.274, 1.

epydferSa: Kadd, Kand ¢.
a. 280, 2.

épéodai c. two acc. 280, 3.

épecivery c.two acc, 280, 3.

épnuos, épnuovy c. gen.

1, 2, 3.

épntveay c. g. 271, 2:

épl(ew c. d. 284, 3, (2).

éppwpévos comp. 82, I, (e).

épwray c. two acc. 280, 3.

epwrikas éxew c.g. 274, 1.

éodiew c. g. and a, 273, 5,
(c) and R. 15.

eokov, eoxduny 221.

est” By see Ews.

ste see ews.

Zor pol Tt BovAopervw 284,
3, (10) (c).

ott (licet) c. inf. 306,1,(¢).

éort with the Pl. 241, R. 6.

Zor ol, dv ete. 341, R. 4.

zoriv bre, brov, brn, drws,
08, a, @v8a, 7 331,R. 5.

Zrxatos with the Art.
245, R. 5

érepos in Crasis 10, R. 2;
¢: g. 271, 8.

ért with the Comp. 239,
R

R.1. )
27. ToAAG With the Comp.
939, R. 1.
ev and edin the Aug. 121,
RB. 5.198) Bs

ed Adyew, roeiv, etc. c. a.
279, 2.

ed roeiv c. part.310,4,(g).

EvBveds dec. 57, R. 2.

evdaimovilew, eddaluwv Cc.
g. 274, 1, (f).

ebd:0s comp. 82, I, (a).

edepyereiv Cc. a. 279, 2.

eb Cupos comp. 82, R. 6.

eda c. g. 273, R. 9.

evSds with Part. 312, R. 6.

evAaBeioda c. a. 279, 1.

evAoyeiv c. a. 279, 2.

evropeiy c. g. 273, 5, (b).

eiploxew, -eoda: c. part.
310, 4, (b).

edoeBeiv c. a. 279, 1.

evruxeiv c. part.310,4,(g).

edxerSai c. d. 284, 3, (1);
c. inf. 306, 1, (b).

edwXeioda Cc. g.273, 5, (Cc).

épetis c. g. and d. 273, 3,
(b) ; 284, 3, (3).

eplecSai c. g. 273, 3, (b).

epuxveioda c. g. 273, 3,
(b).

epopay c. part. 310, 4, (e).

ey’ &, ep gre c. ind. fut.
or inf. fut. 341, R. 5.

Zxew c. inf. 306, 1, (c) ; ¢.
part. rojoas exw 310,
4, (k).

éxew et, Karas, etc. C. g.
274, (3).

exew youn c. os and g.
abs. 312, R. 12.

txeoSau c. g. 273, 3, (b).

éxSpés comp. 83, IT.

exw, possum, c. inf, 306, 1,
(c).

Exwy Anpeis, PAvapeis 312,
R. 9; exwv, with, 312,
R. 10.

éws dec. 48. R. 1.

éws construction 337.

Zaxpnav 213, 14.

¢e suffix 235, R. 3.

Zevs dec. 68, 4.

(ndodv c. g. 274, 1; ¢. a.
279, 1.

(nreiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

(vyds and (uydv 70, A,(b).

“H, (a) # alternativum, or,
$23, 2; in a question
344, 5, (h);—(b) %
comparativum 323, 2;

ne eee ee

GREEK INDEX.

after the omission of
paAAcy 323, R. 3; omit-
ted with wAédov, mAclw,
fAarrov in connection
with the numeral 323,
R. 4; with the Gen.
after a comparative
323, R. 5.

7 ins, ew in Plup. 116, 6.

mn union vowel 237, R. 1.

h ward or } mpds c. a.
323, 7.

} &sre c. inf. 341, 3, (a).

H 316, 2.

H phy 316, 2.

} mov 316, 2.
with Sup. 343, R. 2.
interrogative 344, 5.

} & 6s 331, R. 1,

iyyetoda c. g. 273, 3, (a);
c. g. and d. 275, 1, and
R. 1; ¢. two a. 280, 4;
e. inf. 306, 1, (b).

iryenoveve c. g. and d.
275, 1, and R. 1.

Hdé, and, 323, R. 2.

Sera c. d. 285, 1, (1);
c. part. 310, 4, (¢).

Hdupos comp. 82, R. 6.

nds comp. 83, L.

fice eb, Kad@s etc: c.g.
274, 3, (b).

hioros 216, 2.

fkw, vent, 255, R. 2.

nAl«os attracted 332, 7.

huey — 93€ 323, R. 2.

Tae bs compos. 236, R. 3,

Huw, Tuy 87, R. 4.

fyuovs dec. 76, R. 2; F
nuloea THs yis and the
like 264, R. 5, c.

fuwy 87, R. 4

iv see édy.

jvixa, when, see bre.

hpéua comp 84, R. 3.

fypws dec. 60, (a).

fodSa c. a. 279, R. 6.

hoowy, Attic hrrwy 84.

ths eiul c. inf. 306, 1,
(c).

fjovxos comp. 82, I, (d).

ro. 316, 2; Hroi—h dye
303, R. 2.

QrTacsa: c. g. and id
twos 275, 1, R. 2.

qrTacsa: with the sense
of the Perf. 255, R. 1.

607

qrTaosat c. part. 310, 4,
g).

x@ dec. 60, (b).

has dec. 60, (b).

@adjjs dec. 71, A. (a).

dAAew c. a, 278, 3, (a).

Sappeiy c. a.and d. 279, 3,
and R. 3.

Sdocew c. a. 279, R. 6.

Sdocwyr 83, I.

S&repa, etc. 10, R. 2.

Savudcew c.g. and a, 273,
R. 20; twd twos 274,
1,(f) and R. 2; ¢4.
eg’ (1); éwt ri 285,

Savuarroy boov 332, R.
10.

Seaosa c. g- 273, R. 20.
Srey c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

Séus 73, 1, (ec).

Sev suffix 235, 3, and R.
1 and 2.

Separevew Cc. a. 279, 1.

Sepdrwy dec. 68, 5.

Shy 315, 4.

& suffix 235, 3.

Suyydvew ¢. g. 273, 3, (b).

Sviowev ins. Perf. 255,
R. 1; iré tivos 249, 3.

Spdoow 17, R. 4.

Splé dec. 54, (c).

Suydrnp dec. 55, 2.

Svew = emirikia, yevédrua,

yduous 278, 2.
Supotosa c. g. 274, 1;
c. d. 284, 3, (6).
Swrevev, Qonrey Cc. a
279, 1.
és dec. 60, (a).

I union-vowel 237, 1, and
R. 2

idé, referring to several
persons, 241, R. 13, (a).

Yios comp. 82, I, (d).

Bios c. g. 273, 2.

idiérns c. g. 273, 5, (e).

Spas dec. 213, 7.

iéva:, eluc with the mean-
ing of the Fut. 255.
R. 3.

iepds c. g. 273, 2.

i$v(s) c. g. 273, R. 9.

ixavéds c. inf. 306, 1, (c).

ixeredew c.g. 273, R. 6
c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

ay opie

ee ae

608

ixvetoda c. g. 273, R. 6.
iva, that, in order that 330.
iva ri 344, R. 6. >
Yoos comp. 82, I, (d).
Yoos c. g. and d. 273, 3,
(b), and 284, 3, (4).
icropety c. two a, 280, 3.
ixavs dec. 62.
ix@ ins. ix@pa 213, 11.

K-movable 15, 4.

kadapés c. g. 271, 3.

KadiCew c. a. 279, R. 6.

kasiordvat c. two a,
280, 4.

kadopay, to permit, c. part.
310, 4, (e).

cat 321, 1; with Sup.239,
R. 2; with part. 312,
R. 8; «al ins. re 321, 1.

kal ydp 324, R. 1 and 3,

kal édv, xa) «i 340, 7.

kal pddwtra with Sup.
239, R. 2.

kal és ins. xad ovros 331,
hs Act

kal ov, Kal wh 321, 2.

kal tadrTa with part. 312,
R. 8.

kalrep with part. 312,R.8.

kairo: 322,7; with part.
312, R. 8.

Kdxioros, kaxlwy, 84, 2.

KakoAoyelv, KakoTroey C.
a. 279, 2.

kaxés comp. 84, 2.

kaxds eius c. inf. 306, 1,(c).

kakoupyeiv C. a, 279, 2.

kaK@s Aéyewv, Toveiv, Spay
etc. c. a. 279, 2.

KaAely c. two a. 280, 4.

KadduoTevew Cc. g. 275, 1.

KdAduoTos, KaAAlwy 84, 3.

kaAds comp. 84, 3.

fea wincros, so called 264,

-A.

KdAws dec. 48 ; 70, A, (a).

Kduvew Cc. part. 310, 4,(e).

kamera With part. 312,
R. 8.

kdpa dec. 68, 6.

Kaprepeiv c.part.310, 4,(e).

katd Prep. 292; nard in
composition, construc-
tion with 292, R.

K@7a, with part. 312, R. 8.

kataxovew, to obey, c. g.
273, R. 18 and 19.

GREEK INDEX.

KaTadAdTTrew, -drTecSat,
c. d. 284, 3, (1).
KaTavéuew c. two a. 280,3.
KaTamAnTTecxat C. a. 279,
5; ¢. d.285, (1).
KaTapacsa c. d. 284, 3,(1).
kardpxew Cc. g. 271, 4.

KaTtaxpjosa c.d. and a.

285, 1, (2).
katevaytioy ¢. g. 273, R.9.
ap neta c. inf. 306,

1, (c).
karéxew Cc. inf. 306, 1, (a).
kaThxoos c. g. and d. 273,

R. 18.

Ké, Kév, see dy.

Keivos See éxeivos.
Ketoda C. a. 279, R. 6.
keAevew c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ;

c. a. et inf. 307, R. 1.
xevds ¢. g. 271, 3.
kepaueous 76, 1.
xépas dec. 54, R. 4.
kepdl@y 216, R. 2.

Kevse Cc, two a. 280, 3.
Khdeosa Cc. g. 274, 1.
Kijvos See éxeivos.
kwduvevew c. inf. 306, 1,

(b).
xls dec. 62,
kAels dec. 68, 7.
kAéos dec. 61, (b).
kAértns comp. 82, IT.

BS Siskel c.g. 278, 3,

KAvew c. d. 284, R. 4.
kvégas dec. 61, R. 1.
Kowds, Kowodosa Cc. g.
273, 3, (b). :
kowds, Kolvour, -ovodaL C.
d. 284, 3, (1).
Kowwvely C. g. 273, 3, (b) ;
c. d. 284, 3, (1).
kowwvds dec. 72, (a).
KoAakevely C. a. 279, 1.
Kopevyvvanat C. g. 273, 5,

(c).

Kows dec. 212, 7.

Kparetv c. g. and a. 275, 1,
and R. 1.

Kpareiy ¢. part. 310, 4, (g).

Kpadrioros 84, 1.

xpeas dec. 54, R. 4.

Kpeloowy, kpeltrwy 84, 1.

kplvey ¢c. g. 2738, R. 2 and
20; xplvecdou c. g. 274,
2; xplvew th Tit 285, 1,

kplvoy dec, 72, (a).
Kpoloew 212, 3.
KporadlCew c. a. 279, R. 5.
Kpoteiy c. a, 279, R. 5.
kpvmrew -egdat C. a. 279,
4; ¢. two a. 280, 3.
Kpoa c. g. 273, 5, (e).
KTagoa Cc. g. 275, 3.
xvdpdés comp. 83, IT.
kuke@® 56, R. 1. 213, 11.
kbyrepos 216, R. 2.
kbpwos Cc. g. 2738, 2.
Ktwy dec. 68, 8.
k@as dec. 61, R. 1.
kwavew C. g. 271, 2; c
inf. 306, 1, (a).

Aas dec. 72, (a).

AaBéy, with, 312, R. 10.

Aayxdvew c. g. 273, 3, (b).

Adyws dec. 48, R. 1; 70,
A, (a).

AdSpa, AaSpalws c. g. 278,
5, (e).

Aaday, secretly 310, R. 4,

AdAos comp. 82, I, (f).

sy Halacha c. g. 278, 8,

Adumeww c. a. 278, 3.
Aavddvew Cc. a. 279, 4.
Aavddversa c. g. 273, 5,

(e).
AavSdvew c. part. 310, 4,
,

Pe and Aeds 70, A, (a).

Aéyev c. g. 273, R. 20.

Aéyew c. two a. 280, 4; ¢.
d. 284, 3, (1); ¢. inf,
306, 1, (b); ¢. d. and a.
and inf. 307, R. 3.

Aéyew c. as and. g. abs.
312,R.12.

Aéyew €0, Kax@s C. a. 279,
2; KaAd, Kakd, etc.c. a.
280, 2

Aéyerat c. a. et inf. 307,
R. 6.

Aeyduevos 264, R. 1.

Aelrew c. a, 279, 4.

AclregSa: c. part. 310, 4,

f).
Afrye c. part. 310, 4. (f).
Anpeis xwv 323, R. 9.
Al édaiw 68, 9.
Aurapely c. part. 310, 4,
e€

),
sé dec. 214, R. 2.
AloverSu c. g. 273, R 6,

AoylCerSar c. inf.306 1 (b).

AowWopeiy c. a. 279, 1
iodal runt "284, 3,

ess c. g. 273, R. 16.

Aoxay Cc. a, 279, 1.

Aumeiasat c. d. 285, (1).
AvorreAciy c. d. 284, 3, (7).
AwBaoda c. a. 279, 1;

d. 279, R. 1,
A@orTos 84, 1.

Agwy 84, 1.

Md 316, 4; wd Ala 279, 4.
paxpds comp. 84, 5
waxp@ with Com. and
Sup. 239, R. 1 and 2.
er a with Sup. 239,
2
64 with Com. 239,

prove 4 ob 318, R. 7.
pdy 316, 1
w with sense of
the Perf. 255, R. 1.
pavadvew c. g. and a.273,
R. 20; c. part. 310, 4,
(9); ¢. part. and inf,
311, 3.
udprus dec. 68, 10.
pdoowy 84, 5.
parny, incassum 278, R. 2.
paxeoda c. d. 284, 3, (2).
péya with Com. and ‘Sup.
239, R. 1 and 2.
peyalpew c. g. 274, 1.
péyas dec. 77 ; comp. 84, 8.
a. with Sup. 239,
2

pedleoSa c. part. 310,
4, (f).

pelCwy 84, 8.

pearlocersar Cc. g. 273,
R. 16.

petov without # 323, R. 4.

uels 214, 4.

mecoventei Cc. g. 275, 1.

petovoda Cc. g. 275, 1

pelwy 84.

péAe pol twos and 71 274,
1, and R. 1.

pérrew e. inf. 306, 1, (a).

péuynuat Ste ins. ors 329,
R. 6.

GREEK INDEX.

peuperda c. g.and a. 273,
R. 20; rwd twos 274,
1, (f)s c. d. and a. 284,
3,

per i L, whe 316, R.
pév — dé 322, 5.
evn 316, R.
mevewy Cc. a, 279, 3.

; Mevody 316, R.

perro 316, R. 322, 7.

peonyo(s) 25, 4, (c).

Méocos comp. 82, Il, (d) and
R.5; with the Art. 245,
R. 5.

ers elva c. part. 310,
4

BeoTos C. g. 273, 5, (b).

perd Prep. 294; pera i ins.
péreor: 31, R. 3.

perenne c. g. 273, 3,

petauéAe mol twos and Ti
274, 1, (b) and R. 1.
pene c. part. 310, 4,

MeTaueAciodat c. part. 310,
4,

¢).
peveds ¢. g. 3 273, 3, (b).
aerate with part. 312,

piece pol twos 273, 3,
b

petéxew ¢. g. 273, 3, (b).

wexpl(s) 25, 4, (b).

BEXpe(s) c, g. 273, R. 9;
uexi(s), wexpls) Srov,
mexpi(s) & v, SC Ews.

ph c.imp.and subj. 259, 5.

wh 318; wh pleonastic,
after expressions signi-
fying to fear, to doubt,
ete. 318, 8.

uh interrog. 344, 5, (d).

Bh S11, wh brws— GAA
kat (aAAd) 321, 3.

ph ob 318, 10,

undé 321, 2, (a).

pndels dec. 99, R.

enkioros 84,

phy 316, 1.

pnvlew c. g. 274, 1.

pijvis dec. 63, R, 5.

pare — phre 321, 2, (c).

whrnp dec. 55, 2,

BATpes dec. 71, B, (c).

paegna ees c. inf. 306,
1, (a) ; c. dmws and ind.
fut. 330, 6.

609

peyvivat, ass ce. d.
284, 3, (1)

puxpds comp. 84, 6.

Mimeioaa C. a. 279, is

BiuvhoKew -<odar ¢, g-
273, 5, (e).

utrhoner Sas c. part. 310.
4, (a); c. part. and inf.
311, 2.

Mivws dec. 71, C.
pol, ethical Dat. 284, 3,
(10) (d).

pdévos with the Art. 245,
R. 6; different from
pdvor ' 264, R. 7.

pdvos ©. g. 271, i

povopd-yos comp. 82, I, (f ).

pov, pol, ué use 87, "RL.

pb«ns dec. 71, A, (a).

puodrrecda C. a. 279, 5.

Hay 344, 5, (c).

N égeAnvorixdy 15, 1 and
R.; in the Dialects
206, 6.

val 316, 4; val wd Ala
279, 4.

vas and veds 70, A. (a).

vdrn and ydaros 70, B.

vdacew ¢. g. 273, 5, (b).

vais dec. 68, 11. 214, 5.

véatos 82, BR. 5.

veds and vads 70, A, (a).

vh 316, 4; vh Ala 279, 4.

vhtn from véos 82, R. 5.

viway °OAdumia, ‘veuny
278, 2.

viukav with sense of the
Perf. 255, R. 1.

vixay ¢. part. 310, 4, (g).

viv (vw) ins. airots. of
a’tds 87, R. 3.

voeiy c. part. 312, R. 12.

voulfew c. two a. 280, 4;
c. d. (uti) 285, (2); ¢.
inf, 306, 1, (b) ; c. part.
311, 2.

voooicew ¢. g. 271, 2.

vousereiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

vb 316, 3.

vévros and varoy 70, A,
(b)..

Eevotoda c. d. 284, 3, (1).

ire éxew c. g. 273, 5,
(e).

tdupopdy eo: c. d. and a
c. inf. 307, R. 3.

610

tiv Prep. 289, 2.

O union-vowel 237, 2.

6— in drotes, émdcos, etc.
93, R. 1.

6, 7, 76 dec. 91; relat.,
demons., as a prop. Art.
see under Article. —

6 7Alkos attract. 332, R. 9.

6 ofos attract. 332, R. 9.

&ye use 303, R. 2.

Bde, Hde, rode dec. 91;
Dialects 217, 4, (b);
use 303, 1; with the
Art. 246, 3.

68f 95, (e).

b(ew c. g. 273, 5, (d); ¢.
a. 278, 3, (b).

éSobveka ins. 671 329, R.
1; because 338, 2.

oi duel (rept) riwva 263,(d).

ofa c. part. 312, R. 13.

Oidirous dec. 71, B, (b).

oixeios c. g. 273, 2,

oixrelpew c. g. 274, 1, (c).

Sarpls comp. 83, II.

dior c. part. 312, R. 13.

ofos with Sup. 239, R. 2;
ios, ofds 7° eiul c. inf.
306, 1, (c).

olos ins. 8tt TowodTos 329,
R. 8.

ofos attracted 332, 7;.¢.
inf. 332, R. 8.

olos ins. éste 341, R. 2.

oloY 6 dpacov, oioS as
moinooy 259, R. 10.

otxoucu, abii, 255, R. 2.

otxoua c. part. 310, 4, (1).

éxveiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a.)

éAiyos comp. 84, 7.

daly, ddtyov with Com-
par. 239, R. 1.

dAvywpeiv c. g. 274, 1, (b).

bdropipersai c. g. 274, 1,
(c); c. a. 279, 5.

duirci c. d. 284, 3, (1).

duvivar c. a, 279, 4.

duo Tors c. Sup. 239,
R. 2

Sicowwy lvas ©: partic. 310,
R. 2

Suotos c. g. 273, 3, (b);
duowos, duoody, -odosat,
5uolws c. d. 284, 3, 4.

duoroyew c. d. 284, 3, (6).

duoroyeira c. a. and inf.
307,R.6.

GREEK INDEX.

bums 322, 7; with a part.
312, R. 8.

dveidiCew c. d. 284, 8, (6).

dveipos dec. 72, (a).

ovivdvat, -acdat C. a. 279,1.

bvoud éort mor and the
like 266, R. 1.

évoud (ew Cc. two a. 280, 4.

ovTwy ins. érwoav 116, 12.

bmiodev Cc. g. 273, 8, (b).

dro: in pregnant sense
ins. 87rov 300, R. 7.

éréray see Sray under re.

érdre see Sre.

drov in pregnant sense
ins. gra 300, R. 7;

brov, quandoquidem see
br

é.
8rws with Sup. 239, R. 2.
Srws ins. Sr: 329, R. 1.
émws, that, in order that,
330; drws and brws uh
ce. ind. fut. ellip. 330,
R. 4.
émws, when, see Ste.
brws, as 342. Ms ;
dpay c. g. 273, R.20; dpay
poe 278, 3, (c); with
verbs of appearing,
showing 306, R. 9; ¢.
part. 310, 4, (a).
dpyifersa: c. g. 274,15 ©.
part. 310, 4, (c).
dpéyeoda c. g. 273, 3, (b).
bpSpios comp. 82, I, (d).
seer ela c. g. 273, R. 7,

dpuisoShpas dec. 44, R. 2.

tpvis dec.54,(c) and 68,12.

dppavés c. g. 271, 3.

8s, 7, 6 dec. 92; use 331,
sq.; agreement in gen.
and num. 332, sq.; Case
(attraction) 332, 6;
Attractio inversa 332,
R. 11; attraction in
position 332, 8; 4s,
%, 6 before intermedi-
ate clauses, attracted
832, 9; modes 333; 8s
changed into a demons.
834, 1; ds ins. the de-
mons. 334, 3; 8s ins.
ér1, since, because, ins.
va, ut (after otrws,
de, TowvTos, THALKOv-
Tos, TogovTos) &sre, ins.
édy or ei 334, 2.

bs, , 83 ds wév—ts 5é;.
ds kal Ss demons. 331,
R. 1. “

8cov (’rw)—roaodTov (To-
govT@) 343.

Scov, bo with Comp.
and Sup. 239, R.1 and
2; bc0r, boa c. inf, e.
g. boov y ew cidévan
341, R. 3.

bcos ins. 8rt téc0s 329,
R. 8.

boos attracted 332, 7.

boos ins. ésre 341, R. 2.

dcréoy = dcroby dec.47,1.

robbs dec. 93.
ppalversaa c.g. 273, 5,
is and R. 19.

8c@—rocobtw 343, 2, (b).'

bray see dre.

8re and Stay const. 337.

ére fundamental mean-
ing 338, 1. :

87: with Sup. 239, R. 2.

71, that, const. 329; dif-
ference between 671,-a.
c. inf. and part. 339, R.
5; in citing the words
of another 829, R. 3.

871, since, because, const.
338, 2.

87. ri 344, R. 6. Th

ov(x) 15, 4. 17, R. 2; of
at the end of a sen-
tence 15, 4. =

ov 318; ov pleonastic, af-
ter expressions denot-
ing doubt, denial, after
Comp. and Sup. ex-
ee 318, 8, and

> E

od yap GAAd 322, R. 11.

ov interrog. 344, 5, (d).

ov with Sup. negative
adjectives 239, R. 3.

ov méevTot GAAG 322, R.11.

ov ph 318, 7.

ov wh c. second pers. ind.
fut. interrog. (od mh
gavaphoes; ins. my
paAvdper) 255, 4.

ov phy adAd 822, R. 11.

ov pdvov—aAAe Kal 321,3.

ov pron. dec. 87; use
302, R. 3.

ovdas dec. 61, R. 1.

ovdé 321, 2.

ovdels dec. 99, R.

oddels Sstis od attracted
$32, R. 12.

ode terrw brov, Srws 331,
R. 5

abrody and otxovy 324,

*
ody suffix 95, (b); con-
clusive 324, 3, (b); in
an answer 344, 7.
otvexa c. g. 288, R.; of-
veka ins. Sr: 329, R. 1;
since, because 338, 2.
ods dec. 54, R. 4.

otre—otre; otre—ré
321, 2.
ovros dec. 91; Dialects

217,4,(c); use 303, 1;
with the Art. 246, 3.
ovros, heus! 269, 2, (a).
obroat 95, (e).
ofrw(s) 15, 2.
ottws, as in wishes 342,

° Be
orws with part.312, R.7.
obx Smws (brt), ovx Sr,
—GAAa Kal; obx oioy
—aaad 321, 3.
bppa, that, so that, 330.
bppa, until, see Ews.
dYios comp. 82, I, (d).
éyopdyos comp. 82, I, (f).

Tlat Voc. 53, 4, (1), (c).
madevew c. two a. 280, 3.
mwadads comp. 82, I, (c).
mwavtoiov elvat, ylyverdat
c. Part. 310, 4, (h); ¢.
a. c. inf. 311, 18,
wapd Prep. 297; mapd c.
g. ins. c. d. 300, 4, (a).
mdpa ins. mdpecr: 31, RK. 3.
mapaveiy c.d. 284, 3, (3);
c. inf. 306, 1, (a).
mapakeAeveroa Cc. d. 284,
3, (3).
mwapoAauBdvew c. g. 275,
3; c. two a. 280, 4.
mapamrAhows c.g. 273, R.
9; c. d. 284, 3, (4).
Tapackevdtersa: 306, 1,
(a) ; c. dmws ec. ind. fut.
330, 6; c. part. and c.
@s and part. 310, 4, (h).
wapaxwpeiv Cc. g. 271, 2;
c. d. 284, 3, (2).
mapéx, mapét, mapet, 300,

l.
mdpeotiy c. inf. 306, 1, (c).

GREEK INDEX.

mapotbvew c. inf. 306, 1, (a)
mwas with the Art. 246, 5.
mwas tis with the second
pave. imp. 241, R. 13, (c).
wacowv 216, 2.
mdaoxew bd Twos 249, 3.
marhp dec. 55, 2.
mdrpws dec. 71, B. (c).
mavew, -eoda c. g.271,2;
c. part. 310, 4, (f); ¢.
part. and inf. 311, 17.
maxvs comp. 216, 2.
mweidew tid Te 278; 43 Cc.
a. 279, 1; ¢. inf. 306, 1,
(a); c. ds 306, R. 2.
melsecda c. g. 273, R.18;
c. d. 284, 3, (3).
mewn Cc. g. 274, 1.
Te:pareds dec. 57, R. 2,
meipacda c. g. 273, 5, (€);
c. inf. 306, 1, (a); ¢.
part. and inf. 311, 18.
mweAd(ew, wéAas ¢. g. 273,
R. 93 c. d. 284, 3, (2).
méverdat, wévns C. g. 273,
5, (b).
mevou@s txew Cc. g. 274,
1, (c). ;
mwérept dec. 63, R. 1.
memodévat Cc. d. 284, 3, (3).
mwérwy comp. 84, 11.
mwép 95,4; Synt. 317, 1.
mepaios comp. 82, I, (c).
Tépay c. g. 271, 3.
mepay ¢. a. 279, R. 5.
wept Prep. 295, 1 and 3.
mepi — evexa 300, R. 2.
mept c. d. in pregnant
sense ins. of the acc.
300, 3, (a).
mépt ins. repleort 31, R. 3.
mepiBddAAet ¢.two a. 280,3.
meprylyveodat © g. 275, 1.
mwepidldocda c. g. 275, 3.
mepreiva C. g. 275, 1.
mepiexersai Cc. g. 273, 3,
b).

mepudeiy See mepiopar,
TlepixAjjs dec. 59, 2.
mepimevey C. a. 279, 3.
meptopay c. part. 310, 4,
(e); ¢c. part. and inf.
311, 15.
mepiopagsat C. g. 274, 1.
wept mpd 300, K 1.
mepittés Cc. g. 275, 2.
mepucévas c. inf. 306, 1, (d).
whxus dec. 63.

611

micipa 78, R. 8. .

mlumrnu c. g. 273, 5, (b).

mivey c.g. and a. 273, 5,
(c) and R. 15.

mirrew ind tos 249, 3.

morevew cc. d. 284, 3, (8).

mlwy comp. 84, 12.

mwreiv c. a. 279, R. 5.

mAcicroy with Sup. 239,
R. 2

wAciov without # 323, R. 4.
tAelwy, wAcioros 84, 9.
tAéoy ins. tAéwy 78, R. 5.
mAéov without # 323, R.4.
WAeoventeiv Cc. g. 275, 1.
tAeds C. g. 273, 5, (b).
TAéws dec, 78, R. 5.
TAH Sw c.g. 273, 5, (b).
mwAhy c. g. 271, 3.
mNipnss TwAnpdw c. g. 278,
5, (b).

TAnoid(ew, wAnotoy c. g.
273,R.9; ¢. d. 284, 3, (2).

TAnociov comp. 84.

mwAdos == mAous dec. 47.

mAovows ¢. g. 273, 5, (b).

mveiv ¢. g. 273, 5, (d); ©.
a. 278, 3, (b).

axvot dec. 68, 13.

mosey ¢. a. 274, R. 1.

mot in Preg. sense ins. mod
(ubi) 300, R. 7.

moi c. g. of material
273, 5; (a); ¢. two a.
280, 4.

mov 0, Kak@s Cc. part.
310, 4, (g); ¢. a.279, 2;
Gyadd, Kaxd etc. Cc. &
280, 2; ¢. inf. 306, 1, (c).

moet c. part. 310, 4, (b) ;
c. part. and inf, 311,
13.

Toeioda c. g. 273, 2 and

3, (a); c. g. of price

275,3

motos with the Art. 344,
R

. 3.
moAcuer c. d. 284, 3, (2).
modus dec. 63.
moAAdbvy elvat, eyKeiodat,
yiyverdsa c. part. 310,
4, (h).
moAAov déw ¢. inf. 307,
R. 6

moAA@ with comp. and
superl. 239, R.1 and 2.
moAd with Comp. and
Superl. 289, R.1 and 2.

612

modus dec. 77.

Tlovedav dec. 53, 4, (1)
(d); 56, R. 1.

moté, tls more ete. 344,

wérepa, wérepoy —% in a
direct and _ indirect
question 344, 5 ff )-

mpaos dec. 76, XIV.

mpdttew «0, KaK@s C. a.
279, 2; signification of
the first and second
Perf. 249, 2; dyadd,
kaxd etc. c. a. 280, 2;
mpdrrew, -ervat, to de-
mand, c. two ace. 280,
3; c. d. 284, 3, (1).

mpérew, mperdvtws c. a.
284, 3, (5); ¢. inf. 306,
1, (d); cd. and ac.
inf. 307, R. 3.

mpéret c. part. 310, 4, (i).

mpéoBeis, mpeaBurhs, mpe-
ous 70, B.

mpeoBevew c. g. 275, 1.

mpéaBioros 83, R. 2.

placa c. g. 275, 3.

amply, mply ty, mply % const.
337. ;

mpé Prep. 287, 2.

mpoexew Cc. g. 275, 1.

mposuudy elvat, mpodupmeio-
Sa: c. inf. 306, 1, (a);
c. dws c. ind. fut. 330, 6.

mpoika 278, R. 2.

mpokareioval tid Tt 278,
4

mpoxptveyw c. g. 275, 1.

™povoeiy c. g. 274, 1.

mpootuov 17, R. 4.

mpoopay c. g. 274, 1.

mpés Prep. 298; c,d. in
Preg. sense ims. ¢. a.
300, 3, (a).

yo aia c. g. 273, 5,

(d).
mposdiddvai C. g.273, 3, (b).
mposhkew Cc. d, 284, 3, (5);
c. inf. 306, 1, (d); ¢.d.
and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3.
mposhker por Cc. g. 273, 3,
b

mpossev Cc. g. 273, 3, (b).
TposKareiona C. g. 274, 2.
mposkuvelv C. a. 279, 1.
mpootatew Cc. g. 275, 1.
mpostarrev c. d. 284, 3,
(3); ¢. inf. 306, 1, (a).

GREEK INDEX.

mporpephs c.d. 284, 3, (4).
TpoTmav c. g. 275, 1.
mpoupyiaitepos 84, R. 3.
mpopépew c. g. 275, 1.
mpoxous dec. 71, B, (b).
mpéios comp. 82, I, (d).
mpwreve Cc. g. 275, 1.
ais 3 and mp@roy 264,
ihe

mrhocew C. a. 279, 5.

arwxds comp. 82, I, (f).

mwuvsdvegoat With the sig-
nif. of Perf. 255, R. 1.

muvddversat Cc. g. 273, R.
20; c. part. 310, 4, (a);
c. part. and inf. 311, 6.

TwArciv C. g. 275, 3.

Lag Ph c. opt. 260, 2, (4)

Ban ieee e. part. 310,
c).

fdav, paoros 84, 10.

pet c. a. 278, 3, (a).
pérew c. a. 279, R. 5.
pows dec. 47.

= omitted 25, 1; mova-
ble at the end of a
word 15; in the for-
mation of tenses of
pure verbs 131, and
133; euphonic or con-
necting letter 237, 1
and R. 2.

odrrew c. g. 273, 5, (b).

gavtov or geavTov dec.
88; use 302, 2.

oe Suffix 235,3 and R. 3.

aéAas dec. 61, (a).

ons dec. 68, 14.

o®% in inflex. changed to
ao 25, 3.

ova inflex. 116, 2.

oxy ins. c8woay 116,12.

ox union syllable 237, 1.

olvam dec. 63.

olverdau Cc. a. 279, 1.

oKoy, oxdunv 221.

oKorey c.g. and a. 278,
R. 20 and 21.

oxép dec. 68, 15.

col ethical Dat. 284, 3,(10)
(d).

ods 8 cod 302, R. 2.

omavicew c. g. 273, 5, (b

onegvieosa ¢. d- 284,

(1).

).
3,

omevdew c. a. 279, R. 5.
orovdd(ew c. inf. 306, 1, a.
orovdaios comp. 82, R. 6.
ordCew c. a. 278, 3, (a).
Bd at Tt Ti 285, 1,

oréap dec. 68, 16.
orevd(ew c. d. 285, 1, (1).
orépyew c. a. and d. 274,
R. 1; ¢. d. 285, (1).
orepely Cc. g. 271, 2; «c.
two acc., Tivd Tivos 280,
3 and R. 3.
orivat c..a. 279, R. 6.
17 see Bad 97, 1.
rere c. g. 273, 8.

orTpatnyeiy Cc, g. 275, 1.
ov dec. 87; use 302,.1.
ovyytyyvéoKnw euavt@ Cc.
part. 310, R. 2. |
ovyyvépuwr c.g, 2738, 5, (e).
ovyxwperv Cc. inf. 306,1,(a).
ovaAay c. two ace. 280, 3.
oupBalvew.c. inf. 306, 1,
(d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf.
307, R. 3; personal 307,
6

ii re patie ce. inf. 306,
1, (a).
cupmpdarety c. d. 284, 3,

(7).
ouupéepew c. d, 284, 3, (7).
Tuupéepe: C. part. 310, 4,
i

atudopdy éori c. a. and
acc. c. inf. 307, R. 3.

avy, tiv Prep. 289, 2.

sha utc c. g. 278, 3,

).
ouveAdvtt 284, 3,10, (a).
ovvéres Sai Cc. g. 273, 3, (bd).
obivepyos Cc. g. 273, 3, b.
ouvreva c. g. and c. g. and

a. 273, 5, (f) and R.19.
civoida euavT@ Cc. part.

310,R.2. |
ovyreudyts 284, 3,10, (a).
avs dec. 62.

-opddAcodat Cc. g. 271, 2,

odtow ins. buiy 302, R. 8.
oxeddv c. g. 273, R. 9.
oxiiua Kad’ brov Kal wépos
with the Nom. 266, 3;
with the Acc. 266, R.4.
oxoAaios comp. 82, I, (c).
Sewxpdrns dec. 59, 2 and
R. 2.

was dec. 78, R. 6.
oarep Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a).

Ta rowira without kal
following 325, 1, (e).
Tapdtrew méAcuov 278, 2.
Travra referring to one

. thought 241, R, 3.

Taxus comp. 83, I.

Taas dec, 72, (b).

ré 321, 1; 7ré—xal, 2d.

réyyew c. a. 278, 3.

pc eh Tt tit 285,
1, (3).

bs parentem esse 255,

1

rércws Cc. g. 273, 5, (e).
TeAevrav, finally, lastly
R. 3.

Téuve C. two acc. 280, 3.

Tépas dec, 54, R. 4.

Ey eater c. part. 310, 4,
(d).

Térrapes dec. 99, 5.

THAikouros dec. 91.

al dé 344, R. 4.
wi fone tt waddy 344,
5

rl ov, ri ody ov 256, 4, (e).

Tidévat, -eodau Cc. g. 273,
3, (a) ;.c. two acc. 280,4.

tixrew, parentem esse 255,
R. 1.

Tiymay, Timaoda C. g. 275, 3.

Tinwpely c. d. 284, 3, (7);
TimwpeioSal tTwd Tivos
274, 2; c. a..279, 7.

tis and ris dec. 93.

ais or was Tis with the IT.
pers. Imp. 241, R. 13.

ms use 3803, 4; Ts
omitted 238, 5, (e).

ris ins. Sstis in indirect
question 344, R. 1.

76, Tov, TE C. inf. or C. a.
c. inf. 308 ; +é c. inf. or
c. a. c. inf. in exclam.
and question 308, R. 2.

7) Kal 76, Tov Kal Tdv

3.

7) viv elvat, Td Thuepov
elvai, TO KaTa& TovTOY
elvas 308, R. 3.

rol 317, 3; im answers
344, 7.

tolyap, Tovyapovy 324, 3,
c

rondioaal 324, 3, (c).

GREEK INDEX.

tolvuy 324, 3 (c).

Trowvros dec. 915 ToLwv-
vés elus ¢. inf. 341, R. 2.

Toisdeo. 217, 4.

Toduay c. inf. 306, 1, (a).

rogevew c. g. 273, R. 7.

TogovTov—daov ; ToToUT@
—bow 343, 2, (b).

Tocovro -ovTw with Com.
and Sup. 229, R. 1
and 2.

Togovros dec. 91.
Trogovrouv déw c. inf. and
&ste c. inf. 307, R. 6.
ba Ar Tov ph c.inf. 274.3,

(

tpapels tivos 275, R. 5.

Tpeiv Cc. a. 279, 5.

tpeis dec. 99, 5.

tpiBwy c. g. 273, 5, (e).

tpinpns dec. 59, 2.

tTvyxdvew Cc. g. 273, 3, (b);
c. part. 310, 4, (1).

Tupavveiv, -vevew ©. g-
275, 1.

tupwes dec. 72, (b). [(e)-

twurd ins. Td ard 217, 4,

“Tt BplCew c. a. 279, 1.

bBpiordrepos 82, IL.

bdwp dec. 68, 15.

vids dec. 72, (a).

Suwv, Suv, duw 87, R. 4.

imdyew c. g. 274, 2.

braxovew c. g. 273, R.18;
c. d. 284, 3, (3).

bravioracda c. g. 271, 2.

bravtav, imayridfew C. g.
273, R. 9; c. d. 284,

3, (2).

bwdpxew c. g. 271, 4; ¢.d.
284, 3, (9); ¢. part.
310, 4, (f.)

breixew c. g. 271, 2; ¢.d.
284, 3, (2).

tré« 300, R. 1.

imwextpémetaa: Cc. a. 279,
R. 3. R. 3.

bwetépxerSac Cc. a. 279,

imép 293.

iwepBdAAew c. g. and a.
275, 1.

trepéxew c. g. 275, 1.

brepopay c. g. 274, 1.

breppépe c. g. 275, 1.

imhxoos c. g. and d. 273,

R. 18.
ianxeiv c. a. 278, 3, (b).
42

613

iré Prep. 299; ¢, d. in
Preg. sense ins. ¢. a
300, 3, (a); c. a. and
part. 312, K. 5,

bro ins. treat: 31, R. 3.

bropuévew c, inf. 306, 1, (a);
311, 15; ¢. part. 310,
A, (e).

dromtvhncKey c. two ace.
280, 3.

brovoeiv c. g. 273, R. 20.

broorivat c. d. 284, 3, (2).

broxwpeiv Cc. g. 271, 2.;
c. a. 279, R. 3.

borepeiv, torepoy elvat,
boreplCew c. g. 275, 1.

bplotacsa: c. d. 284, 3,
(2).
thioros 216, R. 2.

dayeiy c. g. and a. 273, 5,
(c) and R. 15.

galvew, palverdat Cc. part.
310, 4, (b); dalvouc
mov Tt ib. R. 3.

galveosa c. inf. and part.
31l, 8.

odva c. inf. 306, 1, (b.)

pores elut roy tt 310,

. 3.

peldeodat c. g. 274, 1, (b).
gépe, referring to several)
persons 241, R. 13, (a).
pepduevos, pépwv, maximo
studio 312, 9 ; péepwr,
with ib. R. 10.
pépratos 84, 1.
péptepos, pépicros 84, 1.
gevyew wi ignif. o
Perf. 255, R. 1; gev-
yew ¢C. g.@. g. KAOTIs
274, 2; drd Twos 249, 3.
gevyew Cc. a. 279, 3; c. inf.
306, 1, (a). 3
PSduevos, pdds, quickly
310, 4, (e).
ew c. a 279, 4; «c.
part. followed by 4%,
mp % 31u, 4, (1)
oréyyerdai C. a. 278, 3.
ag and 3oyyh 70,

Sdis dec. 68, 17.

Soveiv c. g. 274, 1, (e) ;
c. d. 284, 8, (6).

pfaos comp. 82, R. 4.

olaos ¢. g. 273, 3, (b).

gl(v) s 210.°

614

poBetosa ¢c. a. 279, 5; ¢.
inf. 306, 1, (a).
gowixods 76, R. 3.
govedw with § signif. of
Perf, 255,R.1.
opdceyv c. d. and a. c. inf.
307, R. 3.
gpéap dec. 68, 16.
polutov 17, R. 4.
ppovtifew c.g. and a. 274,
1 and R.1; ¢.és and
g. abs. 312, R. 12; ¢.
drws c. ind. fut. 330, 6.
ppoddos 17, R. 4.
pve; Piva c. g. 273, 1.
guddrrecvat Cc. a. 279, 1.

Xaipew c. d. 285, (1); ¢
part. 310, 4, (¢).
Xareraivey c. g. 274, 1;
c. d. 284, 3, (6).
xarends eis ce. inf. ins.
xarerdv éors with acc.
c. inf. 307, R. 6.
Xarer@s péepew c. g. 274,
1, d; c,d; 283, {1);-c.
ért tux and ¢c. a. 285, R.
1; ¢. part. 310, 4 (c).
Xdpns dec. 71, A, (a).
xdpw 278, R. 2; c. g. 288,
-3 xdpw éuhy, chy ib.
xelp dec. 55, Ro 1.
xetpioros, xelpwy 84, 2.
xeAbor dec. 55, R. 2.
xXnpody c. g. 271, 2.
xvovs dec. 47.
xoevs dec. 57 and 68, 18.

GREEK INDEX.

XorAovosa c. g. 274, 1; c.
d. 284, 3, (6).

xopevety Sedy 279, R. 5.

xovs dec. 68, 18.

Xpaicweiv c. d. 284, 3, (7).

Xpeey 73, 1, (c).

xpews dec. 69.

xph ¢. g. 273, 5, (b); ce. a.”

and d. 279, R. 4, c. inf.
306, 1, (d); xph_c. d.
and a. c. inf. 307, 6;
and R. 3.
Xpiosal rwi 7. 278, 4; c.
d. 285, (2). ,
xpes dec. 68, 19.
xwpey c. d. 284, 3, (2).
xwplew c. g. 271, 2.
xwpls c. g. 271, 3.
xpos and x@pa 70, B.

Watew c. g. 273, 3, (b).

Weyew c. g. and a. 273,
R. 20.

WevderSai c. g. 271, 2.

Wevdhs comp. 82, IT.

WAds c. g. 271, 3.

*Nde with Part. 312, R. 7.
évat, ava 53, R. 4.
aveioda Cc. g. 275, 3.

as Prep. 290, 3 and R. 2.
@s that, see 8rt.

@s ut, in wishes (utinam) |

259, 3, (b):

@s, aS, so as, const. 342;
otrws (&és)—dés in wish-
es and asseverations

242, R. 2; és with a
Subs. (as might be ex-
pected, as Aakedaipmd-
vios, ut Laced. for a La-
ceduemonian) 342, R. 4.

-@s with Superl. 239, R. 2.

@s Cc. d., as: as yepdyti,
as éuolt, meo judicio, ds
éun 56k 284,3, (10) (b).

ws ¢c. part. and case abs.
312, 6; c. part. fut. 312,
6, (a).

@s ins. dr of rws 329, R. 8.

&s, that, so that 330; &s xe,
Cc. opt. utinam 260, R. 9.

as, when, see Ste. -

@s ins. Sse, so that, see
dsre.

ds eimety and as ros ei-
ev 341, R. 3.

@s eis, éml, mpds C. a, ds
ént c. d. 290, R. 2.

és Tl 344,R.6.

@s dpedorv, -es, -€ c. inf.
259, R. 6.
Ssmep, as, const. 342; with

Part. 312, R. 13.

éste c. inf. ins. of a sim-
ple inf. 306, R. 3.

dsre c. part. 312, R. 13.

&ste, so that, const. 341.

&ste, as, so as, const. 342.

witds ins. 6 ards 217, 4,

(e).
w@pedrcivy c. a. 279, 13 ©.

two a. 280, R.1; cd.
279, R. 1.

III. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF THE VERBS.

ABBREVIATIONS. A. Aorist ; A. I. Jirst Aor.; A. II. second Aor. ; Aug. Aug-
ment ;| Char. Characteristic ;. Comp. Compare; Dial. Dialect ; F. Future ;
Passive ; Pf. Perfect; Pf. M. Perfect Middle; Plup. Pluperfect; R. Remark ;

Red. Reduplication.

*Adw 230.

&yatopat 230.

&yayot 179, .

Gydouot, ayaloua 230.

&yelpw Pf. with Att. Red.
124, 2, (b). Dial. 230.

ayvoew 230.

&yvums 187. 1. Dial. 230.

byw, AI. jéa, dar in Thu.
and Xen.; A. II. 124,
R.2; Pf. I. Act. 124,2;
Pf. M. Fryuou. Dial. 230.

dw (Poet. deldw), F. doo-
po (delcoua), Att.
(aelow, dow non-Att.);
Aug. 122, 1, Dial. 230.

delpw 230.

andiCouas Aug. 122, 1.

oe ae

INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF

*AHMI 230.

aid(w Char. 143, 6.

aidéouct, aldoua: 166, 1.
Dial. 230,

aivéw, formation of ten-
ses 130, (d), 2.

alvuua 230.

aipéw 167, 1. Dial. 230.

alpw see deipw 230.

aigSdvouct 160, 1.

Gloom Aug. 122, 1. Dial.
230.

at Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230.

daxiCw 230.

&kaxucvos 230.

&xéouat, formation of
tenses 130, (d), 1

&xndéw 230.

&xotw, Pf. with Att. Red.
124, 2; F. dxotooucn.
Pass. with o 131, 2.

ag Re - -doopat 129,

mata. Char. 143, 6.

G&Adouat 230.

diaxd(e 223, 5.

BASdalyw 230.

aAcipw, Pf.with Att. Red.
124, 2.

&ardtw 166, 2. Dial. 230.

GAgouat Or GAevoua 230.

éAéw, formation of tenses
130, (d), 1

GASHoKw, -Sioxw 230.

aAloxoua 161, 1.

éAttalyw 230.

dAndSew, see GAétw 162.

ow, Char. y. 143, 1.

—A. IL. and IL P. 141,
4,(b). |

GAAouat, & in format. 149,
R. 2. Dial. 230.

&aodw, F. -dow. 129, R.1.

éAuKtéw 230.

éAvoKw 230.

drhalvw, -dvw 230.

auaprdyw 160, 2, Dial.
230.

&uBAlonw 161, 2.

duméexw 159, 4.

éutrAantioxw 230.

Gutyw, audvarsoy 162.

aupryvoéw, Aug. 126, 1
and 3.

&uprévvvpst 184, 1.

a&udisBnréw, Aug. 126, 2.

avaBidoxoua 161, 3.

avarlonw 161, 4.

avidvw 230.

"ANE@Q 230.

dvéxouce Aug. 126, 1.
avhvosa ( Ep.) 230.
dvolyvumt, avolyw 187, 6.
évopséw, Aug. 126, 1.
aytdw 230.

avitw, aviw formation of
tenses 130, (b), 1. Dial.
230.

tvwya 230.

dmravpdw 230.

arapicxw 230.

dreiA€w 230.

amexSdvouc 160, 3.

amdepoe 230.

&méxpn 177, 3, contrac-
tion 137, 3.

aroxpauat 230.

*APAN 230.

apéoxw 161, 5.

&pxéw, formation of ten-
ses 130, (d), 1.

apudtrw, 27m Char. 143, 3.

&pyvuuat 188, 1. Comp. 230.

dipdw, formation of tenses
130, (e).

iprd(e, Char. 143, 7.

dpitw, apa, formation
of tenses 130, (b), 1.

"APO, dpapickw 230,

doow, dlcow 230.

avaivw, Aug. 122, 1.

"ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143,
6.

"AYPAQ, see dmravpdw.
Comp. 230.

avidvw, avtw, 160, 4.

"ATPISKOMAI, amaup. 230.

&pixveouae 159, 2.

apiocw, Char: 143, 4.

"ASQ, amaploxe 230.

&xSoum 166, 4.

"AXOQ, araxl(w 230.

’AQ, (Ep.) 230.

kapro (delpw) 230.

Bd(w, Char. 143, 6.

Batyw 158, 1. Dial. 230.

BddAAw 156, 2. Comp. 230.

Bdwrw, Char. d. 143, 1.

Bapéw 230.

Baord(w, Char. 143, 7.

BAQ, see Balyw.

Belouat, Béowat 230.

Bidouct 230.

BiBdtw 163, 1. Comp.
Baivw 230.

* yeddw, formation of

616

sa tas 161, 6. Dial,

Pi i08 10.

Bidorxopns 161, 3.

BAdwrw, Char. B, 143, 1.
Red. 1283, 2.

Braordvw 160, 5.

BAaconuéw, Red. 123, 2.

BAérw, A. II. P.140 R. 1.

BAlrtw Char. 143, 3.

BAdonw 230.

Bodw 230.

Béokw 166, 5.

BovAouat 166, 6. Dial. 230.

Bpdoow, Char. 143, 3.

Bpéxw A. IL. P. 140, 2.

BpiGw, Char. 143, 6.

Bpuxdouat 230.

Buvéw, Bivowat, Bbw 159, 1.

VERBS,

Tauéw 165, 1. Comp. 230.

ydvupat 230.
TAQ, see ylyvoua. Comp.
230.

yeyovlonw 161, 7. Comp
yeyove 230.
yeivouc 230.

ses 130 (c).
yevTo 230.
ENO, see ybyvopat.
yevo, A. P. with ¢ 131, 3.
ynséw 165, 2.
ynpdoKw, yipdi 161, 8.
Dial. 230
ylyvoua, stvouan 163, 2.
yyvécke, yivéonw 161,9
yodw 230.
yenyopew, See eyelpw.

Aat(w 143, 6. 228, 5.

Salvuue 230.

Salw 230.

ddevw 158, 9.

Saudw, daud¢(w 156, 2.

Sauvdw 230.

SapSdvw 160, 6. Dial. 230.

daréouat 230.

AAQ 230.

déaro 230.

det 166, 7.

Pf. dda 193.

delxvups 175, 187, 2. Dial.
230.

deiv, see Ser.

AEKQ, see delkvyms and

Béxopat.

thee

616

déuw, formation of
ses 156, 2.

Séoua: contract. 187, 2.

dépxouct, Pf. déd0pxa with
the meaning of the
Pres. 140, 4. Dial. 230.

dépw, A. II. P. and Pf. A.
140, 2 and 4,

déxoum 230.

dedw 230. j

dé, formation of tenses
130, (d), 2, contraction
137, 2.

déw, see del.

diatdw, Aug. 126, 2.

diaxovew, Aug. 126, 2.

diaréyoum, Aug. 123, R.2.

diSdonw 161, R.

AIAHMI 230.

didpdonw 161, 10.

SiSwpi 175.

dignuat 180, R. 8, Dial.

230. ae
AIHMI 180, R38. Dial
230. S

Siord Co, Char. 143, 7.
dupdw, contracted 137, 3,
Peapth OEE

ten-

cw. eOisxadov 16%

““Sodooato 230.

doxéw 165, 3:

douTéw 230.

dpdw, formation of tenses
131, 3.

APEMO see tpéxy.

ddivopou 179, 2. Accent
176, 1. Dial. 230.

divw, Sbw 158, 2. Dial.
230.

‘EdoSy see &arrw 230.
édw, Aug. 122, 3. For-
mation of tenses 129,

a, i.

évelpw Pf. with Att. Red.
124, 2, (b); Pf. IL with
variable vowel 140, 4.
Aor. II. M. 155,.1.
Dial. 230.

"EIKO, see pépw.

éyxeipéw, Aug. 126, 5.

Zw see éoSiw.

ECoum, see cadiCw.

éséAw 166, 8

ésifw, Aug. 122, 3.

"F@0 Aug.122,3,Dial,230.

*EIAQ, see dpdw.

cixafw, Aug. 121, R.

INDEX -FOR»THE FORMS OF

°EIKQ, Pf. Zona, Plup.
édxev 140, R. 3; Aug.
122, 5. Inflection of
Zoixa, 195, 2. Dial. 230.

elo, elxadov 162,

ciAéw, eiAéw, eYAAw and
elAAw, see etAw.

eXAvw 230.

€tAw 166, 9.

eiul 181 and 225.

elu: 181 and 226.

eivupt, See dupievyume.

"EIMIQ, see gyul.

elpyvupt 187, 3.

elpyw 187, 3. Comp. 230.

*EIPOMAI 166,11. Comp.
230.

*EIPYMI, see éptw 230.

ciptw, see éptw.

elpw 230.

eioa, Aug. 122, 8, Dial.
230.

elwSa, see édilw.

éaatyw 158, 3. Dial. 230.

eAdw, see édatve.

éréyxw, Pf.with Att.Red.

2.
@realto, Char. 143, 6.
~~ @ Dial. 230.
~*EAEYOOQ, see €pxouat.~

éAloow, Aug. 122, 3.—Pf.
with Att. Red. 124, 2.

‘EAKTO, see €AKw.

€Axw 166, 10.

Zamw, Pf. Zoramra, Plup.
édAmew 140, R. 3. Aug.
122, 5.

‘EAQ, see alpéw.

éuéw, formation of tenses
130, (d), 1.

éupl 225.

euvhure, see Hut.

éumimAnu 177, 5.

évapt(w, Char. 143, 6.

évaiw, Pass. with o 131, 2.

"ENE@Q, see évivosda.

"ENEKO, see pépo.

évérw, see pyui. Comp.
230. {

éevivosa 230.

évirrw. 230.

évvérw, see pnul. Comp.
230.

évvumt, see
Comp. 230.

évoxrAéw, Aug. 126, 1.

Zoixa, see "EIKO. Comp.
230.

> 14
OMplevyULLL.

VERBS.

éopya, see "EPT'A.

éoptd(w, Aug, 122, 5.

‘émalw 230.

éravpioxw 230. -

emel-youcu 197, R. 2.

emiduuéw, Aug. 126, 5.

érloraya 179, 3. Dial.
230. :

érw, Aug. 122, 3. Comp.
230.

Epapat 179, 4.

épdw see pauat.

eprydCowat, Aug. 122, 3.

pyw ee! Py

"EPTO, plup. edpyew 122
5.—Perf. with variable
vowel 140, R. 3.

épdw see "EPI. Comp.
230.

épetdw, perf. with Att.
Red. 124, 2. Dial. 230.

épelrw 230.

épécow 143, 3.

épidalvw 230.

épl(w 230.

*EPOMAI see ’EIP.

Epri(w, eprw, Aug. 122, 3,

éppw 166, 12. Dial. 230.

épuyydvw 160, 13.

épudatyw 230.

épixw 230.

Zpupar see éptw 230. q

éptw, formation of tenses
223, 1. Comp. 230.

Zpxouat 167, 2. Comp.
230.

éodlw, Z¢3w 167, 3.

éoridw, Aug. 122, 3.

e¥ade see avddyw. Comp.
230.

etdw see Kadvetiwi

edploxw 161, 11.

edxoum Aug. 121, R.

exSdvouat see direxd.

zx 166, 14. Comp. 230.

ew 166, 15.

Zdw, contract. 137, 38.
Comp. Bide.

Cévvupi 184, 2. Comp. (éw.

Cevryvupt 187, 4.

(éw, formation of tenses
130, (1), d.

Cépvups 186, 1.

fBacKw, jBdw, 161, 12.
fryepeSoua see ayelpw.
Comp. 230.

INDEX FOR THE FOR

ee see alpw. Comp.

ir 190, Dial 230.
HuBporoy see auaprdve.
jul 178, R. 3.

iubw 230.

Odrrw, Char. @ 143, 1.

SéAw see 23éAw.

Séponar 230.

Séw 154, 2; contract. 137,
1. Comp. TpEX@.

SnA€w 230.

@OHTIN 230.

Svyydve 160, 14.

SAdw, formation of tenses
130, (c).

Svhox 161,13.Comp.230.

te from Tapatrw 156,

sata Pass. with o 131, 3.

Spural(o, Char. 223, 5.

Spirrw, Char. 143, 1.

Spéoxw 161, 14. 156, 2.
Dial. 230.

Stvw and Siw 158, 4.

Siw, formation of tenses
130, (b) 2.

‘Idpéw, contract. 137, R.
1. Dial. 230.

i€dvw see xadica.

i(w see xadiCe.

tue 180. Dial. 230.

ixvéoua, tew 159, 2. See
apixveouat. Comp. 230.

iAdoxopat 161, 154

‘IAHMI 230.

TAAw see etAw.

iudoow, Char. 143, 3.

Yoda 230.

fornus 175.
icxvatyw, & in format.149,
R

. 2.
ioxvéouas and Yoxroua
see imurxvéouce.
“IQ see efus.

KAA-, KAIA-, see xal-

vupat.
kaséCouat, Aug. 126, 3.
kasedovuau 154, 5.
kaSevdw 166, 13.
Kaddnuat, Aug. 126, 3.
mapeaee Oe see adic.
kalvy
kalo ng 154, 2. Dial.
230.

xadéw, formation ¢
ses 130, (d) 2;

Plup. M. or. P. 154, Saco

metath. in Pf. 156, 2.
Kkduyw 149, 5, and 158, 10.
Dial. 230.

kdumrw Pf. M. or P. 144,

R. 2.
karnyopéw, Aug. 126, 5.
see kalo.
xequa 189. Dial. 230.
kelpw 230.
KEIO see xetuat.
keAedw, Pass.
131, 2.
KéAAw 230.
KéAouat 230.
KkevTéw 230.
kepdyvums 183, 1.
230.
meres & in format.149,
R. 2. Pf. I. Act. 149, 6.
Comp. 230.
KetSw 230,
Khdw 166, 17.
KlSvance 230,
klyupos 230.
kipydw 230.
Kixdvw, -omat 230.
kixpnut 177, 1.
klw 230.
kAayydvw 160, 8.
kAd(w, Char. yy 143, 8.
Dial. 230.

with ga,

Dial.

Dial. 230.

kAalw 154, 2 and 166, 18.

xAdw formation of tenses
130; (¢).

kAelw Pass. with o 131, 3.
Dial. 230.

KAértw, Char. mw 143, 1.

F. M,, A. IL. P. 140, 2.

Pf. I. and Pf. M. or P.
140, 5.

KAéw 230.

KAniw, KArw see KArclwo

0.

KAlvw, Pf, A. and M. or
P. and A. I, P. 149, 7.
and R, 4.

KAtw 230.

xvalw Pass. with o 131, 2.

xvdw Pass. with o 131, 2.
contract. 137, 3.

xvéoow, Char. 143, 3.

xoi(w, Char. 143, 6.

oes & in form. 149,

2.

xorobw,Pass.with ¢ 131,3.

Kpala, Char. y 143, 6;
Perf. 194, ‘ Comp.
230.

Kpalyw 230.

Kpeuauat 179, 5.

Kpeudvvume 183, 2.

kplyw Pf. A, and M. or
P. and A. IL. P. 149, 7,
and R. 4.

Kpovw, Pass.with o 131, 3.

Kpt3rw 143, 1.

Kpow, Char. 143, 6.

xrdouat, Red. 123, R.1;
Subj. Pf. and Opt.
Plup. 154, 8.

xrelyuue 188, 2.

xrelvo, F. wren: A. L. &&-
tewa, (A. IL. &ravov
doubtful in prose) ; Pf.
A. &«erova 141, 4; Pf.
P. derapot and ‘Aor.
P. éerddnv (eerdvanv
in later writers) 149,
R. 3. Poet. and Dial.
230.

Ktlvyums see Krelyupt.

KTuwéw 165, 4.

KvAlw, Pass. with « 181, 2.

kuvéw 159, 3.

kupéw, kbpeo 230.

Aayxdvw 160, 15, Dial.
230.

AAZYMAI 230.

Aaubdve 160, 16. Dial.
230.

AavSdvw 160, 17. Dial.
230.

Adonw 230.
Aéyw, (a) to oe without
f Ae ET. AéAey-

A. P. éréxSnv.—
(b) to collect, and in
compounds Pf. eltA0xa,
M. or P. efaeyuar 140,
5 Aug. 123, 3; A. IL.

P. éréynv and A. L P.
140,R. 1. Comp. AEXQ,
Xelwes, A. 2Atroy, Pf. II.
AéAoura 140, 4, A. IL
A. and P. 14], 3. cor-
responding form 160,

18.
Aémw, A. II. P. 140, R.1

618 INDEX

Aevxalyw,a in for.149, R. 2.

Aevoow, Char. 148, 3.

Ae’w, Pass: with o 131, 2.

AEX 230.

Aiumdvw see Aclrw.

Amortw, Char. 7 143, 3.

Aioooua, Char. 1438, 3.

Aovw, contract. 137, 5.
Dial. 230.

Avuaivoua: Pf. M. or P.
149, 8.

Ave, formation of tenses
130, (b) 2. Dial. 230.

Matvouc 230.

paloua 230.

pavddve 160,19. Dial.230.

pdpvauat 230.

paptupéw 165, 5.

pdoow, Char. y 143, 1.

paoti(w, Char. 143, 6.

pdxoua 166, 19. Dial.
230.

MAQ 230.

pedvoxw 161, 16.

Melpouat 230.

méAce 166, 21. Dial. 230.

péddrw 166, 20.

MéAw see pméAci
230.

pevowdw 230.

pévw 149, 5; 166, R. 2.

Comp.

Comp. MAQ.
peTauérAct, peTapeAouat,
166, 21.

Mepunpi(w, Char. 223, 5.

pnkvouat 230.

puatvw, wrivar, pidvar 149,
R. 2. Pf. Act. weulayra
149, 6. Pf. M. or P
peulaouo 149, 8. Dial.
230.

plyvums 187, 5. Dial. 230.

Bywhorw Subj. Pf. and
Opt. Plpf. M. 154, 8;
161, 17.

plo-yw see piyvum.

poAovum see BAdoKw.

podrvyw Pf. M. or P.149,1.

pice, to suck, 166, 22.

pow, to groan, 143, 7.

BuKdowo 230.

pie, formation of tenses
130, (b) 1.

Nalw 230.
vdoow 143, 4,
veikéw 230.

FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS.

velocouc see viccoua.

véuw 166, R. 2.

véw 154, 2.

véw -(vjdw). Pass. with
7 131, 3.

véw, Pf. M. or P. with
and without ¢ 131, 3.

viccoua, Char. 148, 3.
Dial. 230.

voéw contract. 205, 5.

vuota@w 143, 7.

Eéw, formation of tenses
130, (d) 1.

Enpatyw Pf. M. or P. 149, 8.

Edpew 165, 6.

ttw, Pass. with o, 131, 2.

’Od5d(w, Char. 143, 6.

ddicacSa see “OATS-
2OMAI 230.

3lw 166, 23.

oiaxifw Aug. 122, 1.

otyvumt, ofyw see avoly.

oida see dpdw. Comp.
230.
oidalyw, olddvw, olddw.
160, 9.

oixoupéw 122, 2.

oluat see ofouat.

oiudw 122, 2.

oie (w 143, 6.

oiviw 122, 2.

oivoxoێw 219, 5.

oivéw, Aug. 122, 2.

otouat 166,24. Comp. 230.

oidw, oidSny 122, 1.

oiorpéw 122, 2.

ofxoua 166, 25.

olw see ofoua: and pépw.

dAtoddvw 160, 10.

bAAvmL 182, B.

oAoAvGw, Char. 143, 6.

duaptéw, Epic duaprarny
299 R. 1,

duvupe 182, B.

buoxAdw, Epic dudKacov
‘992, I. A, (2).

dudpyvupt 187, 7.

"OMON see uvumt.

éveipérrw 143, 3.

dvivnu 177, 4.

byeuct 230.

"OTTO see bpdw.

Spdw 167, 4, 230.

épyatvw, & in form. 149.
R. 2

* °OPEFNYMI 230.

dpéyw 230.
dpyume 230.
éptoow, Char.

| 143, 1.

‘ Pf. with Att. Red.124,2,

ooppalvouat 160,11. Dial.
230.

doppicsa see dodpotyo-
Mal.

ovpéw, Aug. 122, 4.

ovTrdw 230.

dpeiAw 166, 26. Dial.
230.

bpérAAw 230.

dprrondyw 160, 12.

Tlal¢w, Char. 143, 7.

Tatw 166, 27.

madalw Pass.with o 131, 2,

médAAw 230.

mapavouew, Aug. 126, 5.

mapowéw, Aug. 126, 1.

mwapotiyw Pf. M. or P.
149, 8.

mdoow, Char. 143, 3.

méoxw 161, 18, Dial. 230.

matéouat 230.

mavw, A. P. with o 131,4.

maxvvw Pf. M.or P.149, 8.

mwelSw, Pf. IL. wérowda
140, 4. Dial. 230.

mewdw, contract. 137, 2.

TeKT €w, TEKTW,TEelKw 143,2,

merdtw 230. '

meAeul(w, Char, 223, 5.

mwéumw, Pf. I. and Pf. M.
or P. 140, 5.

TIENO@Q, see maoxw.

mervratyw, & in the format.
149, R. 2.

mepatyw, & in form.149, R.
2; Pf. M. or P. 140, 8.

mepdw, formation of ten-
ses 130, (c).

mépdw 166, 28.

mépsyw 230.

merdvvum 183, 3.

méroua syncopated Aor.
érréuny 155; 166, 29.
Dial. 230.

MIETQ see irr.

mevXouct, See wuvSdvouat.

mépvov, érepvov 230.

whyvupt 187, 8. Dial. 230.

mirAvapa. 230.

aiurdnut 177, 5. Dial.230.

miumpnut 177, 6.

aivw 158, 5.

mimtoxw 161, 19.

INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF

mmpdokw 161, 20.

mixrw 163, 3. Dial. 230.

mrvdew 230.

mwAd(w, Char. yy 1438, 8.

WAGIw, see weAd(w.

mAdoow, Char. 143, 3.

mAéxw A II. P. 140, R. 1.

wAéw, formation of ten-
ses 154, 2; contract.
137, 1.

wAhoow, Char. y 143, 1;
A. II. P. 140, R. 2.

mAtvw, Pf. A. and M. or
A. I. P. 149,7 and R. 4.

TAdw 230.

mvéw, formation of ten-
ses 154, 2; contract.
137, 1.

moséw, format. of tenses
130, (d), 2.

modcul(w, Char. 223, 5.

mwovéw, format. of tenses
130, (d), 2. 143, 1.

mpacow, mpdttw, Char. vy

wplacda: 179, 6.

mplw, Pass. with o 131, 2.

Tposumoupat, Aug. 126, 5.

mralw, Pass. with o 131, 2.

Trhoow 230.

mrigow 143, 3.

xrbw 130, (b), 1.

_ wuvedvoua: 160, 20.

‘Palyw Pf. M. or P.149,8;
Dial. 230.

pdrrw, Char. ¢ 143, 1.

pé(w, Char. 143, 6.

péQw, see épdw 230.

péw, formation of tenses
154, 2 and 192, 7.

‘PEQ, see pnul.

piryvups 187, 9.

pryéw 230.

pryéw, contract. 137, 3.

pirrw, Char. p 143, 1.

puréw, Red. 219, 6.

puord(w, Char. 143, 6.

povvuue 186, 2.

Sadmi(w, Char. yy 143, 8.

cadw 230.

oBévyumu 184, 4.

oeiw, Pass. with o 131, 2.

cetw 230.

shrew 140, R. 2.

onualyw, n and 4@ in for-
mat. 149, R. 2; Pf. M.
149, 8.

a?
~

oxdrrw, Char. 143, 1.

oxeddvvuust 182, and 183, 4.

oKéd\Aw, TKEAEw 166, 30.

oxldvaya 230.

oudw, contract. 137, 3.

govra, govao (gov), see
gevw.

omdw, format. of tenses
130, (c).

omelpw, Pf. Zrropa 140, 4.

onévdw 144, R. 1.

ord(w, Char. 143,6.

oraddw, Char. 143, 6.

oréAdw, A. IL. P. 140, 2.

otevdtw, Char. 143, 6.

otépyw, Pf. IL eoropya
140, 4.

orepicxw, orepew 161, 21.
Dial. 230.

orepi(w, Char. 143, 6.

oriGw, Char. 143, 6.

oropévyvuu, oT dpvuust 184,5.

otpépw A. II. P. 140, 2.
PE M. or P. 140, 6.

orpévvuue 182 and 186, 3.

orvyéw 230.

om Ep. ovaqrny 222,

1

aupite. (ovpirtw), Char.
143, 6

, 6.

oodlw, opdrrw, Char. y
143, 1 and 6.

optyyw, Char. 144, R. 2.

ootw, Char. 143, 6.

oxdw, format. of tenses
130, (c).

oxiw, Char. 143, 5.

cow, see cadw 230.

TAQ 230.

TAAAQ 230.

Traviw, format. of tenses
223, 1. Comp. 230,

tapdoow, Spartw 156, R.
Dial. 230.

tdcow, tattw, Char. vy
143, 1.

Telyw 149, R. 3.

Tedéw, format. of tenses
130, (d), 1.

Téuvw 158, 11.

TEMQ 230.

Téprw 230.

Tétuov, see TEMQ,

Tetpalyw 163, 4,

TEevxXw 230.

rhxw 140, R. 2.

TIEQ 230.

VERBS. 619

Tidy 175.

tlerw 143, 2.

tlyvuus 185; Comp. 230.

tivw 158, 6.

Titpdw 163, 4.

TiTtpéoKw 161, 22.

rho 158, 6.

TAAQ, 194, 4.

TARvat 177, 7.

Tphyw 230.

tpaxvvw Pf.M. or P.149,8.

tpémw, variable vowel in

If. Act. M. P. 140,

2; A.I. Act. M. P.141,
3; Pf. I. Act. and Pf.
M. or .P. 140, 5, 6.
Verb. Adj. rperrds and
with middle sense
Tpamwnréos.

tpépw, Ef. rérpopa 140,
4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6.
A. L. P. é3pépSny, ra-
rer than A. IL. P. érpd-
ony 140, 2. Dial. 230.
verb Adj. Sperrés.

_Tpéxw 167, 5.

tpéw, format. of tenses
130, (d), 1.

tpli(w, Char. y 143, 6.

Tuyxdve 160, 21.

TintTw 166, 31.

‘TreuvhuvKe see Ruvw 230.

bmoxvéoua 159, 4.

imvéttw, Char. 143, 3.

iw, formation of tenses
with o 131, 2.

SAFO see éodio.

galyw Pf. M. or P. 149, 8.
Pf. IL. wépnva 149, 9.
151. Dial. 236.

odoxw 161, 23.

peldouce 230. t

SENOQ see répvor 230,

épw 167, 6. comp. 230.

pevyw see puyydyw. comp.
230.

nut 167, 7, 178.
psdve 158, 7. Dial. 230.
pselpw, A. II. P. 140, 2.
Pf.1L. 140, 4. comp. 230.
dive 158, 8. Dial, 230,
oiréw 135. Dial. 230.
gpardyw, A. IT. P. 140, R. 1,
Aum Char, 143, 6.
oor Ep. porrqrny 222,

ee. eee

te.

"3 “ae io af b or = ere: oe eee tl) 5 aie
I a “5 ®
4 ~
620 ’ INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS.
ppd-yvups 187, 10. xdorw 161, 24. xph 177, 2.

paw 148. Dial. 230.
gpdoow, Char. y 143, 1.

gpéw, formation of ten-

ses, 131, 2.
gptoow, Char. x. 143, 1.

ourrdve (pete) 160, 22. x

pvpw 230. .
dw 192, 11. comp. 230.

XdCouci 230.

xalpw 166, 32. comp. 230.

xardw, formation of ten-
ses 130, (c).

xavddvw 160, 23. comp.
230.

xe(w, Char. § 143, 5; Pf.

IL. néxoda 140, 4. Fut.
xevodua 154, 3. A. IT.
Act. according to the
analogy of A. I. 154, 8.

éw, formation of tenses

154, R. 1. 230.

xée, Pass, with ¢ 131, 2.

wot, formation of
tenses 129, R. 2.; A. P.
with o 131, 4; con-
tract. 137, 3.

xpdw, formation of ten-

ses 129, R. 2; contract.
b] °

-

xplw, formation of tenses
130, (a).
xpavvu 186, 4.

Watw, Pass. with o 181,2,

Wdw, Pass. with o 191, 3;
contract. 187, 3.

péyw, A. IT. P. 140, R. 1.

Wixw, A. IL P. 141, RB.

a&éw 165, 7.

a@véouu, Aug. 122, 4,
comp. molaoSas.

952502

y
j
i ‘
2,
j*

gi
th
ra

-

vw ~ &

oe

a
' =
F
j
- ’ |
*
. ;
= *
‘.
.
#
’
.
J
a ib
rm
4
4
J J
i i
{

a ,

j

d

BY as

U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES

€023117134
This vo:
With func “rved
Nationa} mM the

iit
he Numet liss, Te90e”

) tes ~4 4 ¢ a ion »
i's vo ] 4 5 . ivirbeiede
3 NOUN at oat ee Steep en sat peat ET
f : 3 i f V3 ; + . ?
vs! PRY +e ‘i HAM i
J
tee ss
Te ekebatetet clot i

od

7
ne

stir
tite
.

;

st
a
om
Aa 5 ind
Sian eew

ebsneity
ata Heats
prt a mit at +4 +
Stet pet

biblbe eee,
atts 4 +t ¥
einitrnst
beat

oh

aut oe
a
=
as
; Tae a

S ti
ree ° i" N¢ Fristoe
ra? eth oe Pere
aye

ant) wietery yi

#325
eters

rEnge,

prers

Pars

Dae
Mis Vasant
Peteterpeatet
a petees ne

pers entero es
&

pret eass
ae eee
na

ptr tiotet aL
eee
yee
seoeere
bos
pert re,
:
ing aoe ae
ani

.
ie
at Xs

aoa
See
— :

*
rss

Aeron)
shyt
reat

=

eoreeee

© r
ati

ATE
J
Si

Tasaeasnant
sees
ort
ores

oe.

.

a oon 8

ao
<2

Berns
mee
taeot

ii aie
1)

Minin atte ;
Oc yihageh
, * mane

+
‘

v,

12%)
ee
asa

Cx
we

: ae

ate
Sissons

rs,

Lax

= Cee
qe
-
eine
LAA 34
ron,
Cee ade tate ae ae 25
Fh aps tga!
Maitelo gay eng ate
as 6
C.-
on
Seog aoa cass
Ce rererr ao

Ir
S
an

‘ (400)
ee?
mec if ei
; Hae * Das
i et fat

i! 7 ys » ,
i" .
( ates j
+ pe preerety
‘

5) i ‘ ftest é
Pete + > >ere ir reek baht
+ se 4 site Y
“4 areata ee a aa
* otit Deoeiesesetides et " i i oy
¢.

+

bese;

oe

*

eeSreren barehath
SERS
year rte tehy tat
Ry betters
shed bist eu?
sfeeeiee touetastimititei th
aa
:

ae atest,

PPL ble cee
sletetatptater ats!
Ua LAs ey

yates
Thine
4

tieeks

ary? tee
tehete

tees?

PLE
pheatECs 4)
ree el bpel ES
aU)

7 ete i) “ vy

oe

Stet

ia

poss

Sate tat sent el

oir it bree , My
Lhetet pte oat SHeetb ate!
sri, aaah ahah vty eta ta te fas
f! asi gedae ; togeytee is A stabety
- y
steele ete Hey

ae eee
ones
os
everett
eee,

ae
ane
325,

> Hau ne

sees he nee

ee.
sisi

Sat
[Padua

ee bow. &
ologecets
eM,

pote
3 teens
Aree ee
~~ byw
werk
Yar
—
ees:

verte
Bot

oes

eM i430)

fecepeeoterpritetaratitatitat ht beeici

i! Streah

bee i satan na rr
} 7

<
a,

ere

oo
=
fee

oe

>
rd ea, ayy
NORGE Se Prater ey

aie

i

Ser

tre ¢ i
mi sf) : ‘ peegtekral+
20 behets MAC}
Seti re

eH

* F Ae aa 2 bape
marry reeneene eee eateteteetas tet tesc tice

! Byres

"
sisi,

+
whe! bibl eee

Peadies
rerscaret srry
PN eae
aianit)

bib bey
athe)

ele =
Te -

‘ eerie i ANG ut ; i
Letter rELACPLBIOTRR (Pat iT ber agiti pb bide Tip ieee eee
yee

Ny hee
e
tyler ere an
IR

a

Coen ee
Tete

ses“:

re
ey

wemerticerere errr ics
e ebchiehs ou slate
pelelpmeletateleteletst
SeLCharieleeghaty

aa

Ce ie

Ss

Terese

Ma

es

¥
iG 7, Pye ptbteret
Sey

»
¢ Site ae : of
aes ye te eethe ,
ie Neer pietsl
tt athe

.
‘
Ys ye
AD ae
Se
os
*
——

woe Hs
2 2e
bas
7
roi
Say as
Se ere
ee

ri

:

os.
eta
eee se be
eta

2
ae ofa
rae

some

ma fing Se
Sot ee
*

8:
Seis

—
Si

air 6 ded o
aboRanoscr al
esvetedersnecei tart

be iteneestbereraetaett

>=
*
pis) payee ws

om
on

.

puters a
ih Csue saat

Srictatitetet erst tit

\g
Seat
La

ert S

EDS LO ek
Sa aset oe
ae

}
Torker
pages

A ae

ty
*
Tr Pee ee:
riptae ;
+ reeey tet

rer
. =
Tee:

Feta ane er

aaa,
3
Sree

Pes
4.7

,
ti

haha
aie
They

tyr,

=

pe
eee

eS
na'ad

Mo bey Aaa i
Te tate i
a3 4
7 .
ae ft
ag)
i
y : |
4 +i 454) 4 j ;
) gee iste if
et} itt i
+ ep. » ae, ‘
4 Hit
aa ¢

Tey.
—
a)
e+
Sys